GGEENNEERRAALL WWOORRKKSS

AM7 2009-009438 978-1-84545-610-8CChhaannggeess iinn mmuusseeuumm pprraaccttiiccee;; nneeww mmeeddiiaa,, rreeffuuggeeeess aannddppaarrttiicciippaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Hanne-Lovise Skartveit and KatherineGoodnow. (Museums and diversity; v.5)Berghahn Books, ©2010 151 p. $49.95 (pa)Co-published with the Museum of London and the UN Educational,Scientific and Cultural Organization, this volume offers eight chaptersdescribing actual museum presentations that engaged with localpopulations of refugees and asylum seekers in projects using variousmedia, including participatory video, role-playing, photography, andtheatre. Two concluding chapters analyze the projects and discuss largerissues regarding the museum’s role in the community. Examples aregiven from museums in Australia, France, the UK, Malta, and Sweden,among others. Goodnow is with the U. of Bergen, Norway.

AM7 2009-029019 978-1-59874-382-1CCoonnnneeccttiinngg kkiiddss ttoo hhiissttoorryy wwiitthh mmuusseeuumm eexxhhiibbiittiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by D. Lynn McRainey and John Russick.Left Coast Press, ©2010 33 p. $89.00This volume assembles 13 chapters that offer tools for history museumprofessionals to use when creating programs for children. Noting theincreasing focus on children as a core audience for history museums andtheir different experiences compared to adults, a group of professionalsworking in museum design and planning, exhibits, education, researchand development, and public history in the US discuss how to understandchildren, what they can do, and how to collaborate with them; tools toinclude story, imagination, play, the senses, and place in history; andrethinking elements of design, interactives, collections, labels, and mediain exhibitions. They focus on kids and unfacilitated exhibitions, not fam-ilies or school groups. McRainey (education, Chicago History Museum)and Russick, a curator at Chicago History Museum, created an exhibitionfor children at the Chicago History Museum in 2003, which inspired thebook.

AM7 2009-026979 978-0-415-40262-0MMuusseeuummss iinn aa ddiiggiittaall aaggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Ross Parry. (Leicester readers in museumstudies)Routledge, ©2010 478 p. $52.95 (pa)The physical nature of museums has undergone a radical change in thepast few years. Rather than simply looking at static exhibits, visitors areencouraged to interact with them. Virtual museums are on line and DVDscan be purchased that show the exhibits in ways that can’t be displayedin the real world. Parry (museum studies, University of Leicester) is verymuch aware of this. The articles he presents here touch on a myriad ofmethods for using computer technology in museums, including thevirtual museum and interactive exhibits, particularly to educate. Authorsalso discuss new challenges that come with computerization. Theseinclude access by handicapped patrons, questions of authenticity of theart and the logistical problems of setting up exhibits that are digital inthemselves. The essays cover both practical experience and the psycho-logical shifts being made by museum curators and staff as they redefinethe purpose of a museum. This will be of great interest to anyoneinvolved in museum work.

AM7 2009-028480 978-0-415-49473-1RRee--pprreesseennttiinngg ddiissaabbiilliittyy;; aaccttiivviissmm aanndd aaggeennccyy iinn tthheemmuusseeuumm..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Sandell et al.Routledge, ©2010 283 p. $42.95 (pa)Recent decades have witnessed an expansion of how disability and dis-abled people are represented, and 19 essays here explore the ratherbelated entry of museums into the trend. Curators, historians, scholars ofmuseology, and others discuss classical portraiture as reconstructive nar-rative, ghosts in the war museum, reflections on representing experiencesof mental illness in museums, the red wheelchair in the white snowdrift,disability perspectives and the museum, and the Norwegian Museum ofDeaf History and Culture.

AM12 978-0-89997-487-3BBeesstt ooff OOrreeggoonn aanndd WWaasshhiinnggttoonn’’ss mmaannssiioonnss,, mmuusseeuummssaanndd mmoorree..McKowen, Ken and Dahlynn McKowen.Wilderness Press, ©2009 358 p. $21.95 (pa)The authors of the California version of this guide travel north fromPortland and the Columbia Gorge to Puget Sound and EasternWashington, describing 137 offbeat (a nutcracker collection inLeavenworth, WA) as well as better-known historic and cultural attrac-tions in the Pacific Northwest. The guide includes maps, useful practicalinformation, don’t miss tips, self- guided tours tailored for specificgroups, travel resources, and fun trivia questions.

AM101 978-0-7141-5068-0MMaasstteerrppiieecceess ooff tthhee BBrriittiisshh MMuusseeuumm..Title main entry.The British Museum Press, ©2009 288 p. $35.00 (pa)Organized by theme, this volume showcases the wealth and variety of artfound in the British Museum. Egyptian mummies are juxtaposed withHellenistic funerary sculpture, a Cycladic figurine with a Japanese dancemask, and so on throughout the book, the cultures and centuries mixedto show basic similarities in the making of art and entice the generalreader to visit. Distributed in North America by The David Brown BookCo.

PPHHIILLOOSSOOPPHHYY

B52 2009-015581 978-1-60709-335-0BBiigg iiddeeaass ffoorr lliittttllee kkiiddss;; tteeaacchhiinngg pphhiilloossoopphhyy tthhrroouugghhcchhiillddrreenn’’ss lliitteerraattuurree..Wartenberg, Thomas E.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 150 p. $24.95 (pa)Drawing from his own experiences teaching philosophical issues tochildren, Wartenberg (philosophy, Mount Holyoke College) explains howteachers, parents, and college students can teach introductory philosophyconcepts to elementary students using picture books. He outlines thereasons for teaching philosophy to young children, and provides an ele-mentary-school version of a college-level introduction to philosophy classthat includes eight children’s books (like Shel Silverstein’s The Giving Treeand Arnold Lobel’s Frog and Toad Together) to discuss issues like ethics,aesthetics, metaphysics, environmental philosophy, and theory ofknowledge, as well as learner-centered teaching, teaching methods, andlesson plans. No background in philosophy is needed. There is no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–1–

MAY 2010 VOLUME 25, NUMBER 2 ISSN 0887-3763

B72 2009-042559 978-1-57859-226-5TThhee hhaannddyy pphhiilloossoopphhyy aannsswweerr bbooookk..Zack, Naomi.Visible Ink Press, ©2010 492 p. $21.95 (pa)Zack (philosophy, U. of Oregon) answers about 1,000 questions about phi-losophy that explain that fundamentals of the field, different schools ofthought, the lives of philosophers and their ideas, and other questions.Questions are organized by chronological periods, schools of thought,then philosophers, from ancient philosophy to the present day. Theyrange from explaining what philosophy is and what is known aboutPlato and Aristotle, to Hegel and his system, to African American, fem-inist, and the new philosophy. Distributed by Independent PublishersGroup.

B72 2009-007106 978-1-4051-4585-5PPhhiilloossoopphhyy;; tthhee ccllaassssiicc rreeaaddiinnggss..Title main entry. Ed. by David E. Cooper and Peter S. Fosl.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 1364 p. $119.95Philosopher/editors Cooper (emeritus, Durham U.) and Fosl(Transylvania U.) offer a substantial introduction explaining theirselection of 133 texts, which they’ve drawn from all periods of the historyof philosophy up through modern times, and from various geographicalregions and cultural traditions. The editors emphasize increasingacknowledgment in their discipline of the value of a historical under-standing of western philosophical tradition as well as increasing under-standing of the importance of encompassing non-western traditions. Theselections are arranged in sections on ethics, epistemology, metaphysics,religion, and political philosophy. Each selection begins with an intro-duction that describes context. Further enhancing the usefulness of thisreference are a philosophical chronology and suggested additionalreading in the history of philosophy.

B74 2009-040401 978-0-8133-4448-5PPhhiilloossoopphhyy;; aann iinnnnoovvaattiivvee iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn;; ffiiccttiivvee nnaarrrraattiivvee,,pprriimmaarryy tteexxttss,, aanndd rreessppoonnssiivvee wwrriittiinngg..Boylan, Michael and Charles Johnson.Westview Press, ©2010 344 p. $50.00 (pa)Though their introduction to philosophy is unconventional, say Boylan(Marymount U.) and Johnson (U. of Washington), like others it is linkedby common themes and a historical presentation, and students are led toreconstruct direct-deductive arguments and then evaluate them. Alongwith the familiar faces, they look at the thought of Buddha, HannahArendt, Iris Murdoch, and Martin Luther King Jr to provide a more mul-ticultural and inclusive view of philosophy. Each section begins with ashort story by one or the other of them, among which are Aristotle theOutsider, The Murder of Thomas Aquinas, A Game of Chess in Paris(Marx), Eichmann and Heidegger in Jerusalem, and Dr. King’sRefrigerator. Each section ends with reading and discussion questions,and class exercises.

B105 2009-040120 978-0-8262-1873-5AAmmeerriiccaa aanndd tthhee ppoolliittiiccaall pphhiilloossoopphhyy ooff ccoommmmoonn sseennssee..Segrest, Scott Philip.U. of Missouri Press, ©2010 283 p. $49.95Although one might expect a book about common sense and the foun-dations of American politics to be about Thomas Paine, the author of therevolutionary pamphlet “Common Sense” only makes the briefest ofappearances in this work by Segrest (American politics, US MilitaryAcademy at West Point), which focuses on John Witherspoon (1723-1794),James McCosh (1811-1894), and William James (1842-1910) as paradig-matic American thinkers presenting “common sense philosophy,” amode of philosophy that begins with and continually returns to theimmediate knowledge of reality as disclosed in primary experience andalso has common sense—encompassing dimensions “from the faculty bywhich we perceive realities to the sense of things that human beings andparticular human communities have in common”—as its primary object.He elaborates on the common sense philosophies of Witherspoon,McCosh, and James, focusing in particular on their development of theconcepts of natural right and natural law and the implications of thoseconceptualizations for the moral and political order.

B105 2009-027593 978-3-11-020236-6BBooddyy aanndd ssoouull iinn aanncciieenntt pphhiilloossoopphhyy;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..Gesellschaft für antike Philosophie Kongress (2d: 2007: Hamburg,Germany) Ed. by Dorothea Frede and Burkhard Reis.De Gruyter, ©2009 562 p. $90.00The 22 selected papers, 10 of them in German, explore how ancient Greekand Roman thinkers dealt with the relationship between material andimmaterial aspects of human beings. Among the topics are thePythagorean conception of the soul from Himself to Philolaus, Heraclituson measure and the explicit emergence of rationality, three kinds ofPlatonic immortality, the priority of soul in Aristotle’s De anima, tracesof a dispute on mind-body relations in the Old Academy, Stoic souls inStoic corpses, philosophical norms and political attachments in Ciceroand Seneca, and Anima Christiana. Names, places, and things areindexed separately.

B105 2009-021940 978-0-8047-4505-5TThhee ccuullttuurree ooff ddiiaaggrraamm..Bender, John and Michael Marrinan.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 265 p. $21.95 (pa)The diagram, write Bender (interdisciplinary studies, Stanford U.) andMarrinan (art history, Stanford U.), “is a proliferation of manifestlyselective packets of dissimilar data correlated in an explicitly process-ori-ented array that has some of the attributes of a representation but is sit-uated in the world like an object.” They present here an “archaeology ofthe diagram” that centers on this understanding of diagram as process.Their discussion ranges across 250 years, from the diagrams of Diderot’sEncylopédie to diagrammatic forms of representation in quantummechanics, and across multiple fields of human endeavor, includingmathematics, art, and medicine.

B105 2009-049681 978-3-11-018403-7DDeebbaattiinngg ddiissppoossiittiioonnss;; iissssuueess iinn mmeettaapphhyyssiiccss,,eeppiisstteemmoollooggyy,, aanndd pphhiilloossoopphhyy ooff mmiinndd..Title main entry. Ed. by Gregor Damschen et al.De Gruyter, ©2009 344 p. $105.00Damschen (philosophy, U. of Lucerne, Switzerland, and U. of Halle,Germany) et al. gather together 17 essays that analyze disposition inobjects and persons in semantic, epistemic, and ontological terms, theconcept of disposition in the history of philosophy from Plato andAristotle to contemporary times, and within contexts of epistemology, thephilosophy of mind, the nature of our folk psychological vocabulary, andwhether the human mind and knowledge has a propositional or non-propositional structure. Philosophers and historians from Europe, the US,and Canada, most who participated in a conference on dispositions inWittenberg, Germany, in the summer of 2006, present revised papers thatalso discuss dispositional properties in sciences like physics and history,and the ideas of Descartes, Leibniz, Spinoza, and Ryle. No index isprovided.

B105 2009-035076 978-0-7546-7510-5TThhee pprriissmm ooff jjuusstt wwaarr;; AAssiiaann aanndd WWeesstteerrnn ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonntthhee lleeggiittiimmaattee uussee ooff mmiilliittaarryy ffoorrccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Howard M. Hensel. (Justice, international law,and global security)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 283 p. $99.95The just war tradition usually refers to the body of ideas concerning thejustification for going to war and the justness of kinds of warfare thathas been developed in the Christian West, but of course other religiousand philosophical traditions have addressed the same and related issuesabout the morality of war. In this work, Hensel (politico-military affairs,US Air Force Air War College) presents nine papers that collectivelyprovide a comparative portrait of different traditions of just war theory.They address the Greco-Roman roots of the Western just war tradition,Christian understandings of just war, early modern perspectives in theWest, Sunni and Shi’i Islamic perspectives on war, Hindu perspectives,the Chinese concept of righteous war, Japanese perspectives, and Koreanperspectives.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –2–

Watch for four stars: ★★★★ The stars you see at the beginning of someannotations indicate that a previous edition has been cited in Resources forCollege Libraries, Books for College Libraries, 3rd ed., Guide to ReferenceBooks, or other standard references.

B128 2009-036770 978-0-385-51069-1LLiivveess ooff CCoonnffuucciiuuss;; cciivviilliizzaattiioonn’’ss ggrreeaatteesstt ssaaggee tthhrroouugghh tthheeaaggeess..Nylan, Michael and Thomas Wilson.Broadway Books, ©2010 293 p. $25.00In a biography that fills in gaps in the life of Confucius/Kongzi (551-479BC), Nylan (early Chinese history, U. of California at Berkeley) andWilson (history, Hamilton College, Clinton, New York) trace the life andevolution of thought of the Middle Way philosopher from his inauspi-cious beginnings to veneration as a sage whose ideas on personal andgovernment morality are still influential. They also discuss his critics andfollowers, and include a summary chart of American perceptions of theChinese from the 19th century to the present.

B288 2009-034561 978-1-57003-878-5RReeaassoonn’’ss ddaarrkk cchhaammppiioonnss;; ccoonnssttrruuccttiivvee ssttrraatteeggiieess ooffSSoopphhiissttiicc aarrgguummeenntt..Tindale, Christopher W. (Studies in rhetoric/communication)U. of South Carolina Press, ©2010 178 p. $49.95Tindale (philosophy, U. of Windsor, Canada) contributes to the ratherrecent rehabilitation of Sophists, who had a bad reputation since Plato,by examining the methods of sophistic argument as Sophists have usedit in their own writings, as it has influenced other schools of philosophy,and as depicted by its critics. He begins with the early tradition, lookingat contrasting views of sophistic argument, making the weak argumentthe stronger, Plato, and Aristotle’s charge of fallacious argument. Then heanalyzes the argument itself, in such terms as the argument from like-lihood, roots and varieties of the peritrope, the contrasting argumentsantilogoi and antithesis, witness testimony and the appeal to character,and justice and the value of sophistic argument.

B318 2009-034996 978-0-268-02774-2BBiitttteerr kknnoowwlleeddggee;; lleeaarrnniinngg SSooccrraattiicc lleessssoonnss ooff ddiissiilllluussiioonnaanndd rreenneewwaall..Eisele, Thomas D.U. of Notre Dame Press, ©2009 346 p. $55.00Eisele (law, University of Cincinnati)revisits the Socratic method throughan examination of the philosopher as seen in three of Plato’s dialogues,the Protagoras, Meno and Theaetetus. He finds that while Socrates’ per-sistent questioning leads to disillusionment on the part of the subject inmany cases this leads to a sense of renewal and greater understanding.Eisele puts it as first realizing that one doesn’t know what one thinksone does followed by a realization that there are other things one knowsbut has been previously unaware of. Eisele demonstrates this throughmany examples from the dialogues and modern scholars. He concludeswith an explanation of how he uses this method in his own teachingalong with traditional lectures and discussions. Teachers in many disci-plines will find his observations intriguing.

B430 2009-002648 978-1-58988-050-4IInn ppuurrssuuiitt ooff tthhee ggoooodd;; iinntteelllleecctt aanndd aaccttiioonn iinn AArriissttoottllee’’sseetthhiiccss..Salem, Eric.Paul Dry Books, Inc., ©2010 194 p. $22.95 (pa)Salem (St. John’s College, Annapolis, Maryland) sets out to clarify thesometimes contradictory answers that the Greek philosopher offers forquestions about how people should conduct their lives. Among his topicsare complete virtue and a complete life, activity, magnanimity, justice, theobjects of thought, Sophia and Phronesis, happiness, friendship, and thekinship between theoria and praxis/. He has not indexed his treatise.

B491 2009-036203 978-3-11-021462-8AArriissttoottllee aanndd PPlloottiinnuuss oonn mmeemmoorryy..King, R. A. H. (Quellen und Studien zur Philosophie; v.94)De Gruyter, ©2009 266 p. $155.00A revised version of King’s postdoctoral Habilitationsschrift (philosophy,Ludwig Maximilians U. Munich, Germany), this is a comparativedescription of the two ancient theories of memory proposed in Aristotle’sOn memory and recollection and Plotinus’s On perception and memory. Sixissues serve as the framework for the discussion: how memory is derivedfrom other cognitive faculties, the relationship of the present to the past,the possibility that memory as representation may serve as a linkbetween past and present, the distinctions between past perceptionswithout searching (memory) and past perceptions requiring a search(recollection), the relation between the self and memory, and whethercapacities such as counting that can be realized without reference to per-ceptions also constitute memory.

B577 2009-029913 978-1-58983-418-7HHiieerroocclleess tthhee SSttooiicc;; EElleemmeennttss ooff eetthhiiccss,, ffrraaggmmeennttss aannddeexxcceerrppttss..Ramelli, Ilaria. Trans. by David Konstan. (Society of Biblical Literaturewritings from the Greco-Roman world; v.28)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 179 p. $32.95 (pa)Author Ramelli (ancient philosophy, Catholic U. of the Sacred Heart,Italy) and translator Konstan (comparative literature, Brown U.) offer thefirst English translation of the surviving works of Hierocles, a Neo-Stoicphilosopher of the first half of the second century A.D. The originalwritings, preserved on papyrus, dealt with a range of subjects, includinga key work entitled the Elements of Ethics. Other topics include gods,marriage, parents, country, siblings, relatives, and household man-agement. The book is formatted with the original Greek and a facingEnglish translation. The Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paper-bound edition; Brill publishes the hardbound.

B669 2009-028007 978-1-58983-161-2IIaammbblliicchhuuss ooff CChhaallcciiss;; tthhee lleetttteerrss..Iamblichus. Ed. and trans. by John M. Dillon and WolfgangPolleichtner. (Writings from the Greco-Roman world; no.19)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 119 p. $24.95 (pa)Dillon (emeritus, Greek, Trinity College, Ireland) and Polleichtner (LatinPhilology Institute of Ruhr-Universität Bochum, Germany) offer a trans-lation of letters and commentary from Platonist philosopher Iamblichus.Iamblichus’ letters, the only ones to have survived from the era, pertainto a variety of topics: ruling and justice, music, fate, raising children,virtue, truth, marriage, and courage, among others. The Society ofBiblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill publishes thehardbound. The Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paperboundedition; Brill publishes the hardbound.

B738 2009-022844 978-90-04-17061-2RReetthhiinnkkiinngg tthhee hhiissttoorryy ooff sskkeeppttiicciissmm;; tthhee mmiissssiinnggmmeeddiieevvaall bbaacckkggrroouunndd..Title main entry. Ed. by Henrik Lagerlund. (Studien und texte zur geis-tesgeschichte des mittelalters; v.103)BRILL, ©2010 234 p. $138.00The 9 articles of this collection provide a thorough introduction to thehistory of skepticism in the Middle Ages, with in-depth discussion of thethought of Al-Ghazali, Henry of Ghent, John Duns Scotus, WilliamOckham, Nicholas of Autrecourt, Albert of Saxony, and the stancesagainst their skepticism taken by John Buridan and Thomas Aquinas.Dominik Perler (theoretical philosophy, Humbolt U., Berlin, Germany)submits a chapter that gathers together various skeptical hypotheses inlate medieval epistemology, and Elizabeth Karger (philosophy, CNRS,Paris, France) analyzes the early 16th-century critique of Buridan byAntonio Coronel of the U. of Paris. Each chapter concludes with a list ofprimary and secondary sources of the works discussed. Lagerlund (phi-losophy, U. of Western Ontario, Canada) has included a very thoroughoverview of the history of medieval skepticism in his introduction,making this an excellent stand-alone work for scholars of medieval phi-losophy. Name index only.

B755 2009-047846 978-1-934843-42-0JJeewwiisshh tthhoouugghhtt iinn ddiiaalloogguuee;; eessssaayyss oonn tthhiinnkkeerrss,, tthheeoollooggiieess,,aanndd mmoorraall tthheeoorriieess..Shatz, David. (Judaism and Jewish life)Academic Studies Press, ©2009 442 p. $65.00Shatz (philosophy, Yeshiva University) has collected and edited several ofhis essays, published between 1990 and 2004. His underlying theme isthe connection of Jewish philosophy and ethics to events and ideas of thegentile world. He commences with the earliest source, the book of Genesisreflecting on the moral dilemmas posed in the beginning. He then dis-cusses the most influential of the medieval thinkers, Maimonides, beforemoving to twentieth century philosophers and Halakhic scholars, R.Abraham Isaac Kook and R. Joseph B. Soloveichik. The views of thesetwo men recur in later essays on religion and science as well as ethicsand law. The concept of ethics is uppermost in Shatz’s struggle to com-prehend a melding of metaphysics and secular studies. His essay on 9/11shows the personal effort of the philosopher to find meaning in the inex-plicable. An index of biblical and rabbinic sources as well as one bysubject will be useful to scholars pondering many of the same questions.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–3–

B804 2009-041901 978-1-55753-553-5DDooiinngg pphhiilloossoopphhyy wwiitthh ootthheerrss;; ccoonnvveerrssaattiioonnss,,rreemmiinniisscceenncceess,, aanndd rreefflleeccttiioonnss..Schrag, Calvin O. (Philosophy/communication)Purdue University Press, ©2010 99 p. $16.95 (pa)Schrag describes an explicitly conversational and dialogic approach tophilosophical issues, illustrating a logic of questioning and rhetorical per-formance against the backdrop of conversational interaction. (Yes, heknows that Plato thought of that a long time ago, thank you). He inter-weaves memoirs of conversational transactions and epistolary exchanges,historical observations, autobiographical musings, meditations, testimo-nials, and thought experiments. Among the chapters are Paul Tillich andHerbert Marcuse on Heidegger, Dieter Henrich and Werner Marx on thehistory of philosophy, Elizabeth Anscombe and the later Wittgenstein, thenarratival space of discourse, and communication and the constitution ofself with other.

B809 2009-011827 978-0-8018-9385-8TThhee ccyynniicc eennlliigghhtteennmmeenntt;; DDiiooggeenneess iinn tthhee ssaalloonn..Shea, Louisa. (Parallax; re-visions of culture and society)Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 262 p. $70.00In ancient Athens, cynics considered themselves watchdogs, sniffing outerror and hypocrisy in philosophy, says Shea (French and comparativestudies, Ohio State U.), and though the school has been ridiculed and dis-missed from then until now, she finds that cynicism has had a muchlarger role in Western philosophy than is generally recognized. Shefocuses on the role it came to play in debates within and about theEnlightenment, both in the 18th century and in recent reflections on theviability of Enlightenment critique. Her topics include the polite eductionof Monsieur Diogène, Sade’s cynic republic, cynicism and the dialectic ofEnlightenment, and cynicism as critical vanguard in Foucault’s lastlecture course.

B821 2009-037657 978-0-8166-6615-7WWhhaatt iiss ppoosstthhuummaanniissmm??..Wolfe, Cary. (Posthumanities series; v.8)U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 357 p. $24.95 (pa)In this book, Wolfe (English, Rice University) outlines a theoretical andphilosophical approach to a world in which “human” is merely one formof life along a technological and biological continuum. The author dis-tinguishes posthumanism from transhumanism, and reveals thathumanism is what gets left behind in posthumanist thought. Wolfe’sposthumanist readings of works including Temple Grandin’s writings,the poetry of Wallace Stevens, and the architecture of Diller and Scofidioshow how a posthumanist sensibility can transform art and culture.

B837 2009-039253 978-1-59102-778-2EExxuubbeerraanntt sskkeeppttiicciissmm..Kurtz, Paul. Ed. by John R. Shook.Prometheus Books, ©2010 230 p. $19.00 (pa)Shook is vice president for education and research at the Center forInquiry/Transnational, which Kurtz (emeritus philosophy, State U. ofNew York-Buffalo) founded. Here he gathers 17 essays by Kurtz focusingon skepticism to illuminate his commitment to secular humanism andethical and exuberant life. They are arranged in sections on reasons tobe skeptical, skepticism and the non-natural, skepticism in the humanworld, and the once and future skeptical movement. Among specifictopics are scientific method and rational skepticism, skepticism andreligion, skepticism and ethical inquiry, and summing up 30 years of theSkeptical Inquirer. There is no index.

B837 978-1-4411-5436-1SScceeppttiicciissmm aanndd tthhee ppoossssiibbiilliittyy ooff kknnoowwlleeddggee.. ((rreepprriinntt,,22000088))Grayling, A.C.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 208 p. $19.95 (pa)An adequate account of scepticism about the possibility of knowledge isnecessary in order to respond to it appropriately, says Grayling (phi-losophy, U. of London). He shows how the anti-sceptical arguments of theCartesian tradition, represented by Berkeley and Russell, and the natu-ralistic tradition, represented by Quine and Wittgenstein, each addressonly part of the whole anatomy of scepticism. This is a paperback reprintof a book first published in 2008.

B844 2009-281243 978-0-230-53770-5VViioolleennccee;; aa pphhiilloossoopphhiiccaall aanntthhoollooggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Vittorio Bufacchi.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 380 p. $115.00Philosophy’s contributions to explorations of the nature of violence, in theview of Bufacchi (U. College Cork, Ireland), “is unique, essential andpotentially transformative.” He collects 18 articles published over the past100 years in the Anglo-American analytic tradition on the nature of vio-lence. The two key questions dealt with by the articles concern the natureof violence and whether violence can be justified. The focus of thearticles is on the general concept of violence and not on specific formsor the philosophy of non-violence. Short commentaries drawing connec-tions between common themes are included for each article.

B944 2009-027629 978-0-415-47302-6MMaauurriiccee MMaannddeellbbaauumm aanndd AAmmeerriiccaann ccrriittiiccaall rreeaalliissmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Ian F. Verstegen. (Critical realism; interven-tions)Routledge, ©2010 173 p. $130.00This collection on the thought of Maurice Mandelbaum is in commemo-ration of the centennial of his birth. Verstegen, an independent scholar,has selected essays detailing Mandelbaum’s contributions to CriticalRealism, particularly in comparison to that of Roy Bhaskar. The firstessay is from Mandelbaum’s colleague Michael Ermarth illustrating boththe man and his philosophy. Other articles address Mandelbaum’s beliefthat all knowledge is mediated and his thoughts on the importance ofphenomenology. A background understanding of the views discussed,particularly on the two forms of Critical Realism and the work ofBhaskar is useful for a full appreciation of this work.

B944 2009-035622 978-0-8047-7046-0PPrraaggmmaattiissmm’’ss aaddvvaannttaaggee;; AAmmeerriiccaann aanndd EEuurrooppeeaannpphhiilloossoopphhyy aatt tthhee eenndd ooff tthhee ttwweennttiieetthh cceennttuurryy..Margolis, Joseph.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 172 p. $24.95 (pa)Margolis (philosophy, Temple U.) argues that three seminal works of phi-losophy superficially commending different directions for Eurocentricphilosophy, in hindsight have combined to re-energize pragmatism byoffering it new choices. The texts are W. V. Quine’s 1960 Word and Object,T. S. Kuhn’s 1962 and 1970 The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, andRichard Rorty’s 1979 Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature. The prag-matism he sees emerging is not the traditional American version, but amultiplicity born through confrontation between Anglo-American andcontinental thought. In addition to the title chapter, he looks atreclaiming naturalism and vicissitudes of transcendental reason.

B945 2009-043342 978-1-57003-876-1DDeemmooccrraaccyy aanndd rrhheettoorriicc;; JJoohhnn DDeewweeyy oonn tthhee aarrttss ooffbbeeccoommiinngg..Crick, Nathan. (Studies in rhetoric/communication)U. of South Carolina Press, ©2010 224 p. $49.95Crick (communication studies, Louisiana State U.) argues that USphilosopher Dewey’s (1859-1952) mature philosophy finds the consti-tution of civilization to be intrinsically an accomplishment of art. He con-siders rhetoric and the ethics of democracy, the rhetoric of inquiry, andrhetoric and aesthesis from such perspectives as continuity and trans-action, propaganda and the mass society, public opinion and the publicsquare, naturalism in logic, recouping science and common sense, thestages of inquiry, the fine and the useful, the experience of eloquence,and remaking the self.

B945 2009-013234 978-1-59102-630-3JJoohhnn DDeewweeyy’’ss qquueesstt ffoorr uunniittyy;; tthhee jjoouurrnneeyy ooff aaPPrroommeetthheeaann mmyyssttiicc..Gale, Richard M. (Prometheus lecture series)Prometheus Books, ©2010 215 p. $32.98In this exposition and appreciation of the metaphysics of Americanphilosopher John Dewey (1859-1952), Gale (emeritus, philosophy, U. ofPittsburgh) argues that a leitmotiv that ran through Dewey’s works wasthe quest to synthesize experiential and intellectual mysticism with aPrometheanism that understands humanity as its own creator ofmeaning and value through the active control of nature by inquiry.Dewey achieved this by requiring that the mystical experience of unifi-cation be brought about by the free endeavors of Promethean agents bythe use of inquiry and, thus, because the experience of unification withwhich a successful inquiry ends incorporates itself into the Prometheanmeans that produced it, synthesis is achieved. This is most clearlydemonstrated in Dewey’s treatment of art and aesthetics and in hisaccount of the true and the good.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –4–

B948 2009-024863 978-0-7391-3650-8EEvviill,, ppoolliittiiccaall vviioolleennccee,, aanndd ffoorrggiivveenneessss;; eessssaayyss iinn hhoonnoorr ooffCCllaauuddiiaa CCaarrdd..Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea Veltman and Kathryn J. Norlock.Lexington Books, ©2009 232 p. $65.00Feminist philosophy Claudia Card has developed a non-theodicic theoryof evil, “the atrocity paradigm,” in which intolerable harm is differen-tiated from minor or moderate wrongdoing and culpable wrongdoing sit-uates evil as an ethical concept presupposing moral agency,responsibility, and an ability to do otherwise. Veltman (philosophy, JamesMadison U.) and Norlock (philosophy, St. Mary’s College of Maryland)present 11 essays in which other writers critically engage Card’s theory,often comparing it to other philosophical theories of evil. Card herselfprovides the afterword.

B1001 2009-015236 978-1-4051-7979-9AA ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaann pphhiilloossoopphhyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Susana Nuccetelli et al. (Blackwell companionsto philosophy; 45)Blackwell Publishing, ©2010 555 p. $199.95Most of the volumes in the highly praised series address territories inWestern philosophy that have been not only well trodden over the cen-turies, but thoroughly mapped as well, and the articles offer a guidethrough the voluminous material. The assumption here is that readersare encountering Latin American philosophy perhaps for the first time,though in many cases attracted to the field as a whole by learning of anindividual philosopher or a particular controversy. Authors from Northand South America and Iberia, but oddly none from Central America,review the field’s history, sample current issues, describe disciplinarydevelopments, and provide biographical sketches. Among specific topicsare the rights of the American Indians, phenomenology, language andcolonization, mestizaje and Hispanic identity, philosophy of science,deontic logic and legal philosophy, some great figures, and from phi-losophy to physics and back.

B2430 2009-281311 978-0-567-03240-9DDeerrrriiddaa aanndd tthheeoollooggyy..Shakespeare, Steven. (Philosophy and theology)T&T Clark, ©2009 233 p. $21.95 (pa)Though French deconstructionist Jacques Derrida (1930-2004) is generallyrelegated to the nay-sayers of Western culture and so to the Christian tra-ditions that bind it, Shakespeare (philosophy, Liverpool Hope U. England)argues that this is a bad reading of his texts. He explores such aspects asa savage genesis complicating the origin, negative theology, messianismand the other to come, touching as the impossible give, and theologicalresponses to him. T&T Clark is an imprint of Continuum.

B2430 2009-001318 978-0-87013-862-1FFoorr RReennéé GGiirraarrdd;; eessssaayyss iinn ffrriieennddsshhiipp aanndd iinn ttrruutthh..Title main entry. Ed. by Sandor Goodhart et al. (Studies in violence,mimesis, and culture)Michigan State U. Press, ©2009 289 p. $24.95 (pa)This collection of 25 essays is conceived as a way to “bear witness” to thework of René Girard, the French historian, literary critic, andphilosopher of social science who has written about mimetic desire; thescapegoat mechanism; and the role of Jewish and Christian scripture inexplaining mimetic desire and the scapegoat mechanism, as well as sac-rifice, violence, and the crises that have shaped the world. In otherwords, the authors seek to explain how Girard’s work has influencedtheir own, all of them having “no doubt that he will be remembered asone of the geniuses of the post-World War II period, as an individual whoconfronted the deepest issues of our time and proposed a way of under-standing them, a way that is at once comprehensive and compelling.”

B2430 2009-028435 978-0-8214-1895-6PPrroopphheettiicc ppoolliittiiccss;; EEmmmmaannuueell LLeevviinnaass aanndd tthheessaannccttiiffiiccaattiioonn ooff ssuuffffeerriinngg..Harold, Philip J. (Series in continental thought; no.37)Ohio University Press, ©2009 284 p. $60.00Harold (political science, Robert Morris U., Pennsylvania) argues thatLithuanian-born French philosopher and Talmudic scholar Levinas (1906-95) challenges the fundamental pretension of political philosophy toevaluate politics. His work cannot be approached in a traditional manner,he says, because it is not trying to present theses or offer descriptions ofa reality that would brook no alternative. His topics include play andresponsibility, the philosophical ethics of Totality and Infinity, traditionand finite freedom, the political reversal of substitution, and justice andincommunicable suffering.

B2430 978-90-8790-799-0UUnnrreeppeennttaanntt rraaddiiccaall eedduuccaattoorr;; tthhee wwrriittiinnggss ooff JJoohhnnGGeerraassssii,, eeddiitteedd aanndd wwiitthh iinntteerrvviieewwss bbyy TToonnyy MMoonncchhiinnsskkii..Gerassi, John. Ed. by Tony Monchinski. (Transgressions; culturalstudies and education)Sense Publishers, ©2009 191 p. $29.00 (pa)Now a high school teacher in New York City, Monchinski, assemblespapers by his former teacher Gerassi (political science, City U. of NewYork-Queens College), and intersperses them with interviews introducingeach of the three sections on the political animal, unrepentant criticalpedagogy, and the politics of the word and the world. The topics includewhen the war is over, leftists you never talk to, where is Che, the idealsyllabus, the US empire and the death of democracy, revolution bylifestyle, murder incorporated, an open letter to Europeans, and the endof our constitution.

B2872 2009-050719 978-0-88214-593-8PPhhiilloossoopphhyy aanndd rreelliiggiioonn ((11880044))..Schelling, F.W.J. Ed. and trans. by Klaus Ottmann.Spring Publications, Inc., ©2010 72 p. $20.00 (pa)This is an English translation of the original 1804 edition of FriedrichWilhelm Joseph Schelling’s Philosophie und Religion. The small volumewas written in response to his friend Carl Eschenmayer’s critique thatSchelling’s philosophy failed to properly account for the question of howthe Absolute can come out of itself and become difference. Schellingresponded by proposing a new theory that: “There is no continuous tran-sition from the Absolute to the actual; the origin of the phenomenalworld is conceivable only as a complete falling-away from absolutenessby means of a leap.” Thus Creation itself becomes the original sin, i.e.,the fall of the finite world from the Absolute, and God can only berevealed in history as a whole, “and then only a progressively evolvingrevelation.” Distributed in the US by Continuum.

B2948 2009-000582 978-1-4384-2871-0SSppiirriitt,, tthhee ffaammiillyy,, aanndd tthhee uunnccoonnsscciioouuss iinn HHeeggeell’’sspphhiilloossoopphhyy..Ciavatta, David V.State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 264 p. $80.00According to Ciavatta (philosophy, Ryerson U.), German philosopherGeorg Hegel (1770-1831) argues that enduring channels of mutual recog-nition between people are necessary for them to relate to themselves asindependent centers of experience and action. He defends the thesis, con-tending that the concrete world of everyday life is permeated by enduringpractices of intersubjective recognition, even those experiences such asfeelings and ethical compulsions that people think most personal andprivate. His themes are recognition, spirit, and ethicality; the ethicalautonomy of the family; the affective basis of familial ethnicality; andfamily property as the materiality of recognition.

B3181 2009-674629 978-1-4438-1011-1TThhee ccrroossss aanndd tthhee ssttaarr;; tthhee ppoosstt--NNiieettzzsscchheeaann CChhrriissttiiaann aannddJJeewwiisshh tthhoouugghhtt ooff EEuuggeenn RRoosseennssttoocckk--HHuueessssyy aanndd FFrraannzzRRoosseennzzwweeiigg..Title main entry. Ed. by Wayne Cristaudo and Frances Huessy.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 418 p. $70.00Eugen Rosenstock-Huessy was a convert to Christianity and a socialphilosopher. Franz Rosenzweig was a Jew and a philological sociologist.This volume focuses on their philosophical conversations, which tookplace in the early twentieth century. Editors Cristaudo (European studies,University of Hong Kong) and Rosenstock-Huessy scholar Huessy, includetranslations of three of Rosenstock-Huessy’s articles on Nietzsche alongwith the articles on the men, both as individuals and in tandem. The phi-losophy of religion is an overriding theme in many of the articles. Whilethese two men have been largely forgotten until recently, there has beena resurgence of interest in their work and its applications to currentissues.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–5–

Prices are U.S. "list." They may vary outside the U.S. Bookstores, jobbers,or the presses will fill orders. Do not order books from Book News Inc.

B3258 2009-024222 978-0-8047-6902-0HHaabbeerrmmaass;; aa ccrriittiiccaall iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn,, 22dd eedd..Outhwaite, William.Stanford U. Press, ©2009 218 p. $21.95 (pa)German sociologist and philosopher Jürgen Habermas “is the mostimportant social theorist of the second half of the twentieth century andthe early twenty-first,” in the judgment of Outhwaite (sociology,Newcastle U., UK), who seeks to justify that judgment through his criticalintroduction to the major writings of Habermas, The Theory ofCommunicative Action in particular. Outhwaite touches upon all of thekey areas of Habermas’s work, including his ideas about the publicsphere, law and the state, science, religion, and contemporary Europe,seeking to demonstrate the continuities in the development of histhinking, while still acknowledging shifts of orientation and emphasisand exploring the reasons for them. He also attends to important cri-tiques of Habermas, especially where they resulted in Habermas modi-fying his ideas.

B3279 2009-029815 978-0-8047-5604-4SScciieennccee aanndd tthhee lliiffee--wwoorrlldd;; eessssaayyss oonn HHuusssseerrll’’ss CCrriissiiss ooffEEuurrooppeeaann sscciieenncceess..Title main entry. Ed. by David Hyder and Hans-Jorg Rheinberger.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 247 p. $60.00Hyder (philosophy, U. of Ottawa, Canada) and Rheinberger (Max PlanckInstitute for the History of Science, Berlin, Germany) collect 12 essays onHusserl’s last and neglected work, The Crisis of European Sciences andTranscendental Phenomenology, by philosophers of science and scholars ofHusserl, who are based in the US, Germany, and Canada. They providecontext for understanding his book, in terms of his theories of scienceand the life-world, its theory of history, and the dissemination and appli-cation of his views. They consider Husserl’s description of the crisis thatexists between the “life-world” of everyday human experience and theworld of mathematical science, which he argues have become discon-nected, and address topics like his late philosophy, the origins of thebook, the relation between scientific and everyday objects and worlds,his ideas in relation to the views of Hermann Weyl and David Hilbert,the history of Greek and Galilean science, the philosophy of history,applications in chemistry, and Husserl’s influence on Foucault.

B3654 2009-504396 978-0-567-03233-1VVaattttiimmoo aanndd tthheeoollooggyy..Guarino, Thomas G. (Philosophy and theology)T&T Clark, ©2009 183 p. $29.95 (pa)Gianni Vattimo is well known in Italy and across Europe for takingstrong positions on political matters as well as philosophical questions,but is little known in the anglophone world, where public intellectualsgo ragged. Guarino (systematic theology, Seton Hall U., New Jersey) bothintroduces the main elements of his thought and engages him in a the-ological dialogue. He covers an overture to his thought; interpretation,being, and truth; some historical considerations on whether aNietzschean can speak to theology; postmodernism and theology; andtruth and interpretation. T&T Clark is an imprint of Continuum.

B4745 978-90-420-2825-8VVaassiillyy SSeesseemmaannnn;; sseelleecctteedd ppaappeerrss..Title main entry. Ed. by Mykolas Drunga and Leonidas Donskis. (Onthe boundary of two worlds; identity, freedom, and moral imaginationin the Baltics; 21)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 88 p. $34.00 (pa)Eight essays continue the project of making the work of Balticphilosopher Sesemann (1884-1963) accessible to that part of the worldthat does not read Lithuanian. Many of them originally appended to the1970 Lithuanian edition of his Aesthetics, they discuss the relationbetween art history and aesthetics, aesthetics, aesthetic culture and aes-thetic education, physical education and aesthetic culture, protecting theculture and beauty of the past, the issue of national culture, new direc-tions in contemporary epistemology, and a review of Nikolaj Worobiow’s1938 M. K. Ciurlionis, der litausche Maler und Musiker. An index of namesis provided.

B5134 2009-030420 978-0-415-45492-6PPllaattoo eettcc..;; pprroobblleemmss ooff pphhiilloossoopphhyy aanndd tthheeiirr rreessoolluuttiioonn..((rreepprriinntt,, 11999944))Bhaskar, Roy. (Classical tests in critical realism)Routledge, ©2010 267 p. $47.95 (pa)Written by the founder of critical realism and its later extension intodialectical critical realism, this text by Bhaskar (world scholar, U. ofLondon Institute of Education) is a reprint of his 1994 work with a newintroduction. By no means modest, it claims to resolve a fair number ofthe standard problems of philosophy. With such a broad goal one mightexpect to find it written as an overview, but it is instead a very denseabstract work with some of the most complex sentences found in anyphilosophical work. Includes a comprehensive glossary.

B5320 2009-052184 978-1-4331-0750-4TTrreennddss aanndd iissssuueess iinn AAffrriiccaann pphhiilloossoopphhyy..Ochieng’-Odhiambo, F.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 237 p. $76.95In this introductory text aimed at undergraduate and graduate students,Ochieng’-Odhiambo (African philosophy, U. of West Indies, Cave Hill,Barbados) introduces the major trends and issues in the study of Africanphilosophy and the views of African philosophers like Kwasi Wiredu,Paulin Hountondji, H. Odera Oruka, Peter Bodunrin, and D.A. Masolo.He adopts Okura’s classification of African philosophy into ethnophi-losophy, professional philosophy, philosophic sagacity, and nationalist-ideological philosophy, giving each one chapter, along with historicalbackground on the emergence of African philosophy discourse and thehermeneutical approach represented by Theophile Okere, Okonda Okolo,and Tsenay Serequeberhan.

BC57 2009-035890 978-3-11-020312-7LLooggiicc,, llaanngguuaaggee,, aanndd mmeetthhoodd——oonn ppoollaarriittiieess iinn hhuummaanneexxppeerriieennccee;; pphhiilloossoopphhiiccaall ppaappeerrss..Lorenz, Kuno.De Gruyter, ©2010 230 p. $98.00This volume collects 18 papers representative of the work of Germanphilosopher Kuno Lorenz. Half of the papers concern themselves withphilosophical logic and the philosophy of language, discussing suchtopics as pragmatic and semiotic prerequisites for predication, intention-ality and its language-dependency, features of Indian logic, and medi-ation between intuitionistic and two-valued logic. The other half exploreissues of methods in philosophy, art, and science, including “con-struction” versus “description” in the philosophy of science, method-ological dualism, and procedural principles of the Erlangen constructivistschool of epistemology.

BC71 2009-040869 978-1-4027-6896-5LLooggiicc;; aa bbrriieeff iinnssiigghhtt,, rreevv.. eedd..Priest, Graham.Sterling Publishing Co., ©2010 182 p. $14.95Priest (philosophy, U. of Melbourne, Australia) explores the roots of logicin the larger field of philosophy. His topics include truth functions,descriptions and existence, necessity and possibility, the future and thepast, identity and change, probability and inverse probability, anddecision theory. The 2000 edition has been updated with new color illus-trations and additional text.

BC199 2009-020889 978-1-4051-8256-0MMoorree kkiinnddss ooff bbeeiinngg;; aa ffuurrtthheerr ssttuuddyy ooff iinnddiivviidduuaattiioonn,,iiddeennttiittyy,, aanndd tthhee llooggiicc ooff ssoorrttaall tteerrmmss,, rreevv..eedd..Lowe, E. J.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2009 227 p. $99.95The first edition was published in 1989 by Blackwell in the AristotleSociety monograph series, and for the second Lowe (philosophy, U. ofDurham) incorporates changes in his views over the past score. Perhapsmost important, he says, is his conversion to a four-category ontology—two more than originally recognized. Among his topics are sortal termsand criteria of identity, the absoluteness of identity, parts and wholes,persons and their bodies, plural quantification and sortal reference, andwhat sorts of things there are.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –6–

BD21 978-0-465-01934-2IIddeeaass tthhaatt mmaatttteerr;; tthhee ccoonncceeppttss tthhaatt sshhaappee tthhee 2211ssttcceennttuurryy..Grayling, A. C.Basic Books, ©2010 436 p. $29.95For non-specialists, Grayling (philosophy, Birkbeck College, U. of London),presents a unique and accessible “personal” dictionary that introducesthe ideas that have shaped the twenty-first century, from game theory tobioethics to love, and bringing together aspects of science and culture. Inalphabetical order, entries cover ideas in politics and society like capi-talism, freedom of speech, class, war crimes, and privacy; society andsocietal questions like history, human rights, anti-Semitism, postmod-ernism, the internet, racism, vegetarianism, and terrorism; ideas in phi-losophy, such as realism, truth, and euthanasia; religion issues, such ascreationism, fundamentalism, and atheism; and science ideas, such asblack holes, relativity, neuroscience, and string theory. References foreach entry are not included.

BD111 2009-038123 978-0-268-02902-9AAddvveennttuurreess iinn uunnffaasshhiioonnaabbllee pphhiilloossoopphhyy..Felt, James W.U. of Notre Dame Press, ©2010 274 p. $35.00 (pa)Felt (emeritus philosophy, Santa Clara U.) gathers 17 essays that he wroteduring four decades of teaching undergraduate philosophy and havebeen published previously. They are concerned with infusing somemodern thinking into Thomas Aquinas’ work, critiquing Alfred NorthWhitehead’s philosophy, the impact of metaphysical method on meta-physical conclusions, the relation of possibility to actuality and of timeto experience, and epistemological realism.

BD161 2009-020185 978-1-4051-3900-7AA ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo eeppiisstteemmoollooggyy,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Jonathan Dancy et al. (Blackwell companionsto philosophy)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 799 p. $199.95For undergraduate and graduate students and philosophers, Dancy (phi-losophy, U. of Reading, UK, and U. of Texas at Austin) et al. offer a com-prehensive overview of epistemology. The first section of new reviewessays addresses ten recent developments: a priori knowledge, commonsense, Bayesian epistemology, closure, epistemic virtue, contextualism,internalism vs. externalism, foundationalism vs. coherentism, perception,skepticism, and social epistemology. The subsequent sections consist of20 self-profiles of leading epistemologists, like Fred Dretske, AlvinGoldman, Gilbert Harman, Alvin Plantinga, John Pollock, TimothyWilliamson, and Linda Zagzebski, and their work in the field, followedby an alphabetical dictionary of entries on topics, figures, concepts, the-ories, and ideas in the field. This edition has been revised and extendedand includes new and rewritten entries, including a priori, belief,William Alston, defeasibility, empiricism, luck, ethics, deontology, con-versational implicature, evolutionary argument, feminist epistemology,intuition, memory, and relativism.

BD161 2009-027672 978-1-932792-17-1TThhee ffuullllnneessss ooff kknnoowwiinngg;; mmooddeerrnniittyy aanndd ppoossttmmooddeerrnniittyyffrroomm DDeeffooee ttoo GGaaddaammeerr..Ritchie, Daniel E.Baylor University Press, ©2010 281 p. $49.95As he studied the 18th century, Ritchie (English, Bethal U., Minnesota)increasingly recognized many postmodern critiques of Enlightenment inthe opinions expressed by some of the best minds of the period understudy. He juxtaposes postmodern and Enlightenment views on sevenissues that were then and are again salient. Among them are learning toread and learning to listen in Robinson Crusoe, Jonathan Swift’s infor-mation machine and the critique of technology, festival and discipline inrevolutionary France and postmodern times, and reconciling the heartwith the head in the poetry of William Cowper and the thought ofMichael Polyanyi.

BD318 2009-032455 978-0-87462-759-6BBeeccoommiinngg wwiitthhiinn bbeeiinngg..Noica, Constantin. (Marquette studies in philosophy; no.61)Marquette University Press, ©2009 400 p. $37.00 (pa)Romanian philosopher Noica combines in a single volume two essaysthat explore the idea of becoming within being as it has emerged fromthe history of philosophy, and as an attempt to reconstruct ontology, thescience of being. They can be read separately, he says. The Essay onTraditional Philosophy, written about 1950, is concerned with circles: inphilosophical consciousness, in the philosophy of the spirit, and in thephilosophy of being. The Treatise on Ontology, written in 1980, discussesbeing in things that are, being in the element as the second instance, andbeing in itself. Devenirea întru finta was published in 1981 by EdituraStiintifica si Enciclopedica, and in 1998 by Humanitas, Bucharest. TheEnglish translation is by Alistair Ian Blyth.

BD418 978-87-630-0231-8MMeennttaalliittyy aanndd tthhoouugghhtt;; nnoorrtthh,, ssoouutthh,, eeaasstt aanndd wweesstt..Title main entry. Ed. by Per Durst-Andersen and Elsebeth Lange.Copenhagen Business School Pr., ©2010 247 p. $61.00 (pa)Arising out of a conference on mentality held at Copenhagen BusinessSchool in Denmark in December 2007, this collection of 13 papers is pre-sented by the editors (both affiliated with Copenhagen Business School)in pursuit of two goals: “first, to show how the concept of mentality hasbeen understood and treated in a historical context and how it may betreated in a present and globalized context; secondly, how mentality andthought parameters manifest themselves in various regions and countriesof the world, and how and why language may play a crucial role in theformation of these parameters.” The papers are organized in sectionsthat address historical conceptualizations of mentality; Vedic Indian andIndo-European understandings of mentality; concepts of regional men-tality in the Anglophone world, the Arab world, Latin America, and theFrancophone world; and national mentalities in Denmark, Germany,Spain, the United States, China, and Germany. The approaches to thetopic of mentality are diverse, with papers discussing topics rangingfrom the cultural fingerprints of national weather forecasts to the men-tality of utopian discourses. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

BD444 2009-504392 978-1-55111-902-1PPhhiilloossoopphhyy aanndd ddeeaatthh;; iinnttrroodduuccttoorryy rreeaaddiinnggss..Title main entry. Ed. by Samantha Brennan and Robert J. Stainton.Broadview Press, ©2010 398 p. $39.95 (pa)Brennan and Stainton (both philosophy, U. of Western Ontario) haveassembled core readings into an anthology to walk undergraduate stu-dents through the philosophical literature on death. They cover in turnepistemological and metaphysical questions, whether death is a badthing for the person who undergoes it, and ethical questions such aswhether killing of various sorts is permissible and if so under what con-ditions. Three of the 14 readings are from classical times, and the resthave been written since the middle of the 20th century. There is no index.

BD444 2009-03975 978-1-58983-446-0PPhhiillooddeemmuuss oonn ddeeaatthh..Philodemus. Ed. and trans. by W. Benjamin Henry. (Writings from theGreco-Roman world; no.29)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 160 p. $34.95 (pa)Henry (classics, U. of Texas-Austin) explains that Philodemus (ca 110-40BC) studied with the Epicurean Zeno in Athens, then went to Romeprobably about 88-86 where he hobnobbed with the political and literaryelite and did most of his writing, little of which was known in theoriginal until discovered in the middle of the 18th century carbonized bythe eruption of Vesuvius. Overcoming anxieties about death was a majorconcern of the Epicurean school, and Philodemus addressed them in atreatise of which perhaps a third has survived. Henry offers it here inGreek with facing pages of English translation. The scholarly apparatusincludes textual and historical footnotes, an extensive introduction, anindex of Greek words, and photographs of the tattered manuscript.Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paperback edition; Brill pub-lishes the hardback.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–7–

BD450 2009-674616 978-1-4438-0977-1SSoo wwhhaatt?? nnooww wwhhaatt??;; tthhee aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy ooff ccoonnsscciioouussnneessssrreessppoonnddss ttoo aa wwoorrlldd iinn ccrriissiiss..Title main entry. Ed. by Matthew C. Bronson and Tina R. Fields.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 397 p. $67.99The anthropology of consciousness is a transdisciplinary exploration ofsuch matters as altered states of consciousness, healing, spirituality andreligious practice, death and dying, and shamanism. In March 2006, agroup of practitioners met near Monterey, California to explore how thefield was responding and could respond to various crises in the world.Some presentations followed fairly strict scientific forms, while othersemphasized the lived experience. A selection of 12 papers cover buildingand connecting communities, healing and medicine, language andlearning, and re-animating the world. Among their topics are incorpo-rating an anthropological consciousness as a model for developmentpractices, constructing knowledge one grant at a time, the ancient andfuture survival of shamanism, manifesting worldviews in language, andawakening to the spiritual dimensions of ecosystems.

PPSSYYCCHHOOLLOOGGYY

BF31 2009-031719 978-0-470-17025-0TThhee CCoorrssiinnii eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ppssyycchhoollooggyy,, 44tthh eedd;; vv..11..Title main entry. Ed. by Irving B. Weiner and W. Edward Craighead.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 457 p. $150.00Now in its 4th edition (the earlier editions were titled The Corsini ency-clopedia of psychology and behavioral science), this outstanding referencepresents extended descriptions, definitions, and current research on thedisorders, treatments, processes, influences, and behaviors of importanceto the practice of psychology. In addition, the biographies of 63 notablefigures are included within the alphabetical entries, and short biogra-phies of 543 more are found in V.4. Each volume is sold individually aswell as part of the 4v. set, however, individual volumes are not indexed(an author and a subject index are found in V.4). Volume One presentsentries for A-C. Each entry is signed, and includes an introduction to thetopic, a summary of current research, an overview of treatment options,and a list of references and, in the case of biographical entries, a list ofsuggested reading. Each entry also includes a list of cross-references. Thelist of references for all entries kept from the earlier edition have beenupdated. Designed for graduate students and professionals, while alsoaccessible to the interested general reader, the entries are written with aneye to consistency of format, clarity of style, and practical application.

BF39 2009-929038 978-1-84787-478-8AAnn iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo ppssyycchhoollooggiiccaall aasssseessssmmeenntt aannddppssyycchhoommeettrriiccss..Coaley, Keith.Sage Publications, ©2010 291 p. $115.00British occupational and clinical psychologist Coaley presents an intro-ductory text on psychological assessment and testing aimed at a broadaudience that includes undergraduate and postgraduate students, as wellas human resources and allied professionals seeking the BritishPsychological Society’s level A and B certificates of competence in testing.He focuses on providing a conceptual understanding of issues, includingmodern developments, and links them to an individual differencesapproach. He also deals with statistical foundations and the parametersof sound assessment, such as reliability and validity, in order to supportthe evaluation of techniques.

BF76 978-1-60876-050-3AAddvvaanncceess iinn ppssyycchhoollooggyy rreesseeaarrcchh;; vv..6633..Title main entry. Ed. by Alexandra M. Columbus. (Advances in psy-chology reserach series)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 205 p. $129.00Nine studies review the literature on various aspects of psychology,including some topics that are of uncertain relation to the field, in par-ticular using native plants for the phytoextraction of mercury from con-taminated salt marshes. Other topics include coping with decisions aboutparticipation in a national screening mammography program; theinformal sector as a boot camp for coping with joblessness, livelihoods,and variated outcomes in African cities; whether intelligence is a vulner-ability factor for functional somatic symptoms; and subjective sleepquality and the state of anxiety in high-school students prior to a finalsport exam.

BF76 2009-043697 978-0-470-68365-1EEtthhiiccaall pprraaccttiiccee iinn ppssyycchhoollooggyy;; rreefflleeccttiioonnss ffrroomm tthheeccrreeaattoorrss ooff tthhee AAPPSS CCooddee ooff EEtthhiiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by Alfred Allan and Anthony Love.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 207 p. $64.95 (pa)The Australian Psychological Society established a Working Group toreview its 1997 Code of Ethics, and the 13 chapters here were written bymembers of that group as they pondered what should change and howin the new Code, which was adopted in 2007 and is appended here. Theyconsider the process of developing the 2007 Code, the functionality of thetwo Codes, whether a psychologist is always a psychologist from anethical perspective, consent, privacy and confidentiality, professionalethics education, psychologists’ social responsibility, boundaries and mul-tiple relationships, and the regulation of sexual activity with clients andformer clients.

BF76 2009-041473 978-0-470-45803-7RReesseeaarrcchh mmeetthhooddss ffoorr tthhee bbeehhaavviioorraall aanndd ssoocciiaall sscciieenncceess..Weathington, Bart L. et al.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 647 p. $93.50Weathington, Cunningham (both psychology, U. of Tennessee,Chattanooga), and Pittenger’s (Marshall U.) textbook introduces studentsto the research methods and best practices for designing, conducting,interpreting, and reporting findings. Each chapter uses multiple methodsto present the material, including clearly written text, familiar and inter-esting contemporary examples, and visual illustrations to help studentsgrasp the concepts. The text assumes students will have completed atleast a general introductory statistics course.

BF76 2009-003726 978-0-8058-6277-5SSiinnggllee ssuubbjjeecctt rreesseeaarrcchh mmeetthhooddoollooggyy iinn bbeehhaavviioorraallsscciieenncceess..Gast, David L.Routledge, ©2010 470 p. $89.95 (pa)Single subject research methodology, first described by Sidman in Tacticsof Scientific Research: Evaluating Experimental Data in Psychology (1960),is “a quantitative experimental research approach in which study partic-ipants serve as their own control” and is a “low-inference model” that isbased on inductive reasoning. In this volume, Gast (special education, U.of Georgia) and other contributors explain the methodology and its appli-cations within the educational and behavioral sciences. Fourteen chaptersdiscuss applied research in educational and behavioral sciences; scien-tific research in educational and clinical settings; ethical principles andpractices; literature reviews, research proposals, and final reports;general factors in measurement and evaluation; replication; dependentmeasures and measurement procedures; visual representation of data;visual analysis of graphic data; withdrawal and reversal designs; mul-tiple baseline and multiple probe designs; comparative interventiondesigns; variations of multiple baseline designs and combination designs;and statistics and single subject research methodology.

BF80 2009-029707 978-1-4338-0563-9CCoonnssttrruuccttiinngg uunnddeerrggrraadduuaattee ppssyycchhoollooggyy ccuurrrriiccuullaa;;pprroommoottiinngg aauutthheennttiicc lleeaarrnniinngg aanndd aasssseessssmmeenntt iinn tthheetteeaacchhiinngg ooff ppssyycchhoollooggyy..Mayo, Joseph A.American Psychological Assn., ©2010 227 p. $69.95Mayo (psychology, Gordon College, Georgia) has published his classroomresearch on constructivist pedagogical applications in professionaljournals, and continues that work here by addressing three concerns ofpsychology teachers. They are to align course contents with studentlearning outcomes endorsed by the American Psychological Association,to integrate class-tested instructional strategies with authentic or real-world learning and assessment tools designed to foster higher-orderthinking, and to assess student understandings of course content along adevelopmental continuum that gauges progress from the introductorypsychology course through the baccalaureate degree. Among his topicsare psychology curriculum initiatives, the epistemological roots of con-structivism, case-based instruction, graphic organizers as learning andassessment tools, and the future of undergraduate psychology education.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –8–

BF173 2009-003223 978-1-4384-2867-3TThhee MMeedduussaa eeffffeecctt;; rreepprreesseennttaattiioonnss ooff hhoorrrroorr iinnppssyycchhooaannaallyyssiiss aanndd VViiccttoorriiaann aaeesstthheettiiccss..Albrecht, Thomas. (SUNY series in psychoanalysis and culture)State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 166 p. $75.00Albrecht (English, Tulane University) uses the symbol of the Medusa inhis examination of horror in late nineteenth century writing. Beginningwith Freud’s Medusenhaupt. He then moves to Nietzsche’s Birth ofTragedy before looking at the ways in which Walter Pater and Swinburneused the Medusa myth. He ends with Eliot’s The Lifted Veil. For each ofthese writers, Albrecht posits a tripartite understanding of the horror.The first is fear, the second a sense of protection, as the head of theMedusa is seen safely in a reflection. The third, however, is the lingeringsense of the danger that has been internalized, a shadow of the fear thatalways remains. He begins his study with the example of Dante Rosetti’sunfinished Medusa painting and the poem Rosetti wrote to go with it.The commission was canceled because the subject was too awful, but theshadow would not disperse.

BF173 2009-041204 978-1-4128-1167-5OOnn tthhee eeaarrllyy ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ooff mmiinndd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11995566))Glover, Edward.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 483 p. $39.95 (pa)Psychoanalyst Glover (1888-1972) was widely recognized for his clinicalstudies in the field. This reprint of a 1956 book originally published byImago Publishing Co., Ltd is a collection of Glover’s annotations andpapers on a variety of topics. Those topics include: a psychoanalyticalapproach to the classification of mental disorders, the significance of themouth in psychoanalysis, neuroses, the concept of dissociation, the eti-ology of alcoholism, and research methods.

BF173 2009-023470 978-1-59051-340-8PPssyycchhooaannaallyyssiiss aatt tthhee mmaarrggiinnss..Stepansky, Paul E.Other Press LLC, ©2009 357 p. $39.00An American historian of ideas, Stepansky is particularly interested inpsychiatry and most especially its interface with medicine in the US.Here he documents and explores the demise of the American psy-choanalitic profession as it has fractured into sub-specialties that can nolonger claim any unifying set of theories or practices that would hold ittogether. He was managing director of The Analytic Press from 1984 to2000, and so chronicles the decomposition largely through the pro-fession’s publishing curve. His topics include the rise and fall of psycho-analytic book publishing in America, psychoanalytic journals and theroad to fractionation, theoretical pluralism and its discontents, and con-ventional and other varieties of healing.

BF175 2009-051214 978-0-313-37664-1SSuurrvviivvoorrss;; wwhhaatt wwee ccaann lleeaarrnn ffrroomm hhooww tthheeyy ccooppee wwiitthhhhoorrrriiffiicc ttrraaggeeddyy..Moffatt, Gregory K.Praeger, ©2010 221 p. $44.95Moffatt (psychology, Atlanta Christian College, Georgia) has writtenmostly about crime and aggression, and this book began a decade agoas a study of trauma, but ended up being about how people survive andgrow from it. After an introductory chapter on trauma and resiliency, hecites examples from the Holocaust, spinal injury, abuse, violent crime,and genocide in Rwanda. Then he discusses protective factors and sevenlies that prevent recovery, clinical intervention and recovery, and themeaning of life.

BF176 2009-022368 978-1-4338-0691-9MMeeaassuurriinngg ppssyycchhoollooggiiccaall ccoonnssttrruuccttss;; aaddvvaanncceess iinn mmooddeell--bbaasseedd aapppprrooaacchheess..Title main entry. Ed. by Susan E. Embretson.American Psychological Assn., ©2010 285 p. $79.95This work is based on presentations given at a February 2006 conferenceheld at the Georgia Institute of Technology. In order to achieve morecohesive integration of measurement and psychological theory andovercome limitations of the psychometric model, contributors from theUS, Europe, and Canada offer alternatives to traditional item-responsetheory’s fixed-content/multiple-choice models. Part I presents model-based approaches to measuring qualitative differences between indi-viduals, and Part II describes approaches to isolating entangledconstructs. Part III details model-based approaches for measuring per-sonality, psychopathology, and attitudes from self-reports, and Part Vpresents cognitive psychometric models for interactive item generation.The book will be of use to students, researchers, and practitioners in anysubfield of psychology. Embretson teaches psychology at the GeorgiaInstitute of Technology.

BF204 2009-017973 978-1-4338-0462-5EExxiisstteennttiiaall--hhuummaanniissttiicc tthheerraappyy..Schneider, Kirk J. and Orah T. Krug. (Theories of psychotherapy)American Psychological Assn., ©2010 164 p. $24.95 (pa)Psychotherapists Schneider (editor, Journal of Humanistic Psychology) andKrug (in private practice, Oakland, CA) discuss how the existential inte-grative (EI) model drawing on existential and humanistic theoreticalapproaches to therapy helps people reclaim their lives. With an exampleof the existential encounter from a classic case of Rollo May’s, theydiscuss its emphasis on freedom within limitations in the presentmoment, work with specific problems and client populations, andresearch support. The book includes case studies, phases in typical long-term existential therapy, a glossary, and suggested readings and Webresources.

BF209 2009-026323 978-0-06-165593-7TThhee HHaarrvvaarrdd PPssyycchheeddeelliicc CClluubb;; hhooww TTiimmootthhyy LLeeaarryy,, RRaammDDaassss,, HHuussttoonn SSmmiitthh,, aanndd AAnnddrreeww WWeeiill kkiilllleedd tthhee ffiiffttiieessaanndd uusshheerreedd iinn aa nneeww aaggee ffoorr AAmmeerriiccaa..Lattin, Don.HarperCollins, ©2010 256 p. $24.99Veteran journalist Lattin covers alternative and mainstream religiousmovements and figures in the US. Here he describes one of the enginesthat drove the revolution of the 1960s. His style is narrative nonfiction,using spoken and written interviews to construct dialogue as it mighthave occurred, in most cases reviewed for accuracy by at least one of theactual participants in a conversation. He begins with how the four menhappened to cross paths at Harvard in the fall of 1960. Subsequentchapters describe their first encounter with psychedelic drugs, theresearch they began, infighting and exposure, expulsion, San Francisco,pilgrimage and exile, the impact on the lives of the four, and their impacton the world.

BF295 2009-046885 978-0-07-352380-4MMoottoorr lleeaarrnniinngg aanndd ccoonnttrrooll;; ccoonncceeppttss aanndd aapppplliiccaattiioonnss,, 99tthheedd..Magill, Richard A.McGraw-Hill, ©2011 466 p. $112.50Magill (New York U.) explains the concepts and applications of motorcontrol and learning for physical therapists, occupational therapists, ath-letic trainers, and students. This edition has updated research exampleson topics such as the neural components of automaticity, the neuralstructure of memory, the neural basis for observational learning, and thecontextual interference effect; a broader and more comprehensive intro-duction to the neural bases for motor learning and control concepts;more discussion of Gentile’s motor skills taxonomy, the functional rolesof rods and cones in motor control, how vision and movement interactin speed-accuracy skills, end-state comfort control, fMRI research,auditory cues for gait therapy, and other topics; a new section on balance;expanded and enhanced application examples for physical rehabilitationprofessionals; and updated boxes on topics like stroke coordination inswimming, proprioception in gymnastics, and brain activity whileplaying music.

BF295 2009-036255 978-0-7360-7475-9VViissiioonn aanndd ggooaall--ddiirreecctteedd mmoovveemmeenntt;; nneeuurroobbeehhaavviioorraallppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Digby Elliott and Michael A. Khan.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 439 p. $69.00Over the past decade and a half, there has been an upsurge of interestamong neuroscientists and psychologists in the complex relationshipbetween visual perception, attention, and memory, on the one hand, andmovement preparation and execution on the other. Elliot (School of Sportand Exercise Sciences, Liverpool John Moores U., UK) and Khan (Schoolof Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences, Bangor U., UK) bring togethersome of the most active researcher in the field in order to review recentdevelopments. Eighteen chapters are presented in three sections devotedto a behavioral approach to vision and goal-directed movement; sensoryand neural systems for vision and action; and learning, development,and application (e.g., in work space design).

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–9–

BF311 2009-010777 978-1-4129-4081-8EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ppeerrcceeppttiioonn;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by E. Bruce Goldstein.Sage Publications, ©2010 1180 p. $375.00This two-volume reference is intended for a general audience thatincludes students who need to find a starting place for research. Thescope is quite broad, encompassing the many disciplines concerned withexplaining how the senses work. Entries range in length from 1,000 to4,000 words (the lengthier articles are “overview” entries)—a total of 367entries presented in alphabetical arrangement. Eighteen major themesare identified, including, among others, attention, audition, cognition,consciousness, disorders of perception, philosophical approaches, physi-ologic processes, sense interactions, and visual perception. Entries rel-evant to each theme are listed in a front matter “Reader’s Guide.” Comingfrom the discipline of psychology himself, editor Goldstein (emeritus, U.of Pittsburgh; currently, U. of Arizona) cast a wide net to bring in con-tributors representing such fields as anatomy, behavioral science,biology, biophysics, cognitive science, computer science, neuroscience,ophthalmology, optometry, philosophy, physiology, statistics, and zoology.Both volumes carry the identical front matter, including a section of 39color illustrations; the second volume contains the index.

BF323 978-90-420-2810-4RReelliiaabbllee kknnoowwlleeddggee aanndd ssoocciiaall eeppiisstteemmoollooggyy;; eessssaayyss oonn tthheepphhiilloossoopphhyy ooff AAllvviinn GGoollddmmaann aanndd rreepplliieess bbyy GGoollddmmaann..Title main entry. Ed. by Gerhard Schurz and Markus Werning. (Grazerphilosophische studien; v.79, 2009)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 288 p. $84.00 (pa)The originating workshop was held in May 2008 at the University ofDüsseldort, and these proceedings contain written versions of the 12papers that were delivered, along with a transcript of the response byGoldman, who was also there. They cover veritism, externalism, strongversus weak knowledge; problems of reliabilism; the value of knowledge;the problem of social knowledge; and understanding other minds.Specific topics include truth and weak knowledge in Goldman’s veritisticsocial epistemology, reliabilism and the problem of defeaters, why theconditional probability solution to the swamping problem fails, thevoter’s epistemic trust in democracy, and a criticism of his simulationtheory and an outline of the person model theory. There is no index.

BF353 2009-041991 978-0-385-52888-7IInn ppuurrssuuiitt ooff ssiilleennccee;; lliisstteenniinngg ffoorr mmeeaanniinngg iinn aa wwoorrlldd ooffnnooiissee..Prochnik, George.Doubleday, ©2010 342 p. $26.00Yes, the world is getting noisier, and yes, silence is increasingly hard tofind, argues George Prochnik. In this inquiry into noise and silence, theauthor examines how present-day life has gotten so loud and what we alllose when we’re unable to find quiet. Among the people that reader willmeet in this book are an architect who is collaborating with the deafcommunity at Gallaudet University to create a new kind of silent archi-tecture; a soldier in Afghanistan who places silence at the heart of sur-vival in war; a sound designer for shopping malls who ensures thatstores never stop their auditory assault on our senses, and a group ofcommuters who kept background music out of Grand Central Station.Prochnik’s well thought out case for silence will appeal to anyone inter-ested the health and environmental effects of an ever more noisy world,or just in cutting down on the stresses in their own life.

BF408 2009-674626 978-1-4438-0122-5TThhee iimmaaggiinnaattiioonn iinn eedduuccaattiioonn;; eexxtteennddiinngg tthhee bboouunnddaarriieessooff tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Sean Blenkinsop.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 227 p. $62.00Blenkinsop (education and Centre for Imaginative Education ResearchGroup, Simon Fraser U., Canada) compiles 13 essays from an interna-tional group of education, creativity, math, curriculum studies, andscience scholars on the theory and practice of imagination in education,drawn from papers presented in research symposiums held annually inVancouver, Canada, under the auspices of the Imaginative EducationResearch Group at Simon Fraser U. The topics range from imaginationas a virtue to case studies of its use as a means to improve aboriginaleducation in Northern Canada and a museum in Brazil in which imag-ination is central. They also discuss how to make the child’s imaginingsimportant to the educational process, children’s play worlds, and imagi-nation and dance, art, culture, science and math, and student interest.There is no index.

BF431 2009-013584 978-1-60741-613-5TThhee oorriiggiinn ooff iinntteelllliiggeennccee;; tthhee rroollee ooff iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn iinniinnddiivviidduuaall lliivveess..Kerr, Thomas Dexter.Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 142 p. $29.00Kerr sets out to distinguish thoughts and actions that are intelligent fora human to pursue from those that even the cleverest of any other species(his house cat, in this case), by considering intelligence as an phe-nomenon of information. He argues that information is real in its ownright, else the information found in human would never have come intoexistence. Among his topics are the pattern of intelligence, love and hateand the imitation of life, the interdependence of freedom and equality,the attraction of virtue, the natural basis of human rights, and thepoverty of nationalism.

BF441 2009-028714 978-0-7494-5506-4HHooww ttoo bbee aa bbrriilllliiaanntt tthhiinnkkeerr;; eexxeerrcciissee yyoouurr mmiinndd aannddffiinndd ccrreeaattiivvee ssoolluuttiioonnss..Sloane, Paul.Kogan Page, ©2010 182 p. $17.95 (pa)In this guide for general readers, Sloane, a speaker on innovation andleadership who has written other books on lateral thinking, draws oncurrent research to provide practical tips, exercises, puzzles and othermethods to use right away to develop lateral, analytical, and parallelthinking. Some areas explored include problem solving, improvingmemory, emotional intelligence, verbal and mathematical thinking, pos-itive thinking, humor, and confronting assumptions. The book includesa checklist of key ideas and a list of further reading.

BF449 2009-031779 978-1-4129-7773-9CCrreeaattiivvee aapppprrooaacchheess ttoo pprroobblleemm ssoollvviinngg;; aa ffrraammeewwoorrkk ffoorriinnnnoovvaattiioonn aanndd cchhaannggee,, 33dd eedd..Isaksen, Scott G. et al.Sage Publications, ©2011 292 p. $49.95 (pa)The authors offer a systematic framework and tools for identifying andunderstanding challenges, developing ideas, and turning them intoreality. This third edition includes an expanded discussion on creativeproblem solving (CPS), specific chapter objectives, and new improvedgraphics, updated tables, figures, and images to support the text. Eachchapter includes a case study narrative to illustrate the significant pointscovered. It would be useful for practitioners and researchers in any fieldthat requires problem solving skills in a variety of environments. Authorsare Isaksen (Creative Problem Solving Group, Inc., Norwegian School ofManagement), Dorval (Think First Serve, Inc.), and Treffinger (Center forCreative Learning, Inc.).

BF449 2009-011622 978-0-8047-5996-0DDiirrttyy rrootttteenn ssttrraatteeggiieess;; hhooww wwee ttrriicckk oouurrsseellvveess aanndd ootthheerrssiinnttoo ssoollvviinngg tthhee wwrroonngg pprroobblleemmss pprreecciisseellyy..Mitroff, Ian I. and Abraham Silvers.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 210 p. $24.95This volume examines how the media, health care, national security, aca-demia, science, and organized religion lure people into solving the wrongproblems with intricate but inaccurate solutions, and how to detect andavoid these “dirty rotten strategies.” The authors investigate their failureto define key problems and their motivation to lead people to the wrongproblems; discuss types of errors in problem-solving and how to tacklethem; and demonstrate that problems like the war in Iraq, Enron, thedrug industry, the philosophical underpinnings of science, andHurricane Katrina are pervasive, showing that general patterns existamong them. Portions of some of the chapters have been previously pub-lished. Mitroff teaches at Marshall Goldsmith School of Management andthe U. of California, Berkeley, and Silvers, a consultant in environmentalstatistics and the design, database management, and analysis of healthstudies and clinical trials, has taught statistics at Baylor College ofMedicine.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –10–

BF575 2009-032406 978-1-84905-020-3BBeerreeaavveemmeenntt,, lloossss aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg ddiissaabbiilliittiieess;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorrpprrooffeessssiioonnaallss aanndd ccaarreerrss..Grey, Robin.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 176 p. $29.95 (pa)Grey, a counselor and psychotherapist, looks at how loss andbereavement are experienced by people with learning disabilities(defined here as low IQ, retardation, and autism), especially those in res-idential care who experience loss of friends due to chronic illness andconditions. The book outlines stages of loss, and describes methods,including talk therapy techniques, for assessing and resolving distressand lowering risk of self-harm and disruptive behaviors. It also covershow to work with family members, and looks at the counselor’s rolewhen the loved one lost is a parent or other primary care giver. The bookincludes a list of organizations and web sites.

BF575 2009-036364 978-963-9776-60-9FFrriieennddsshhiipp aanndd lloovvee,, eetthhiiccss aanndd ppoolliittiiccss;; ssttuuddiieess iinnmmeeddiiaaeevvaall aanndd eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn hhiissttoorryy..Österberg, Eva. (The Natalie Zemon Davis annual lecture series atCentral European University, Budapest)Central European U. Press, ©2010 229 p. $22.95 (pa)Österberg (history, Lund University, Sweden) gives in the annual NatalieZemon Davis lecture an analysis of the concepts of friendship and lovein medieval and Early Modern Europe. She begins with the tradition,inherited from Aristotle, Augustine and other philosophers of friendshipas a bound between equals that enriches both parties. Throughout theMiddle Ages, the concept of friendship as something not only emotionallysatisfying but also spiritually rewarding continues. However, the beliefthat both parties should be of equal status was diminished. Österbergalso looks at the early lack of distinction between public and private livesand how friendship entailed social and political responsibilities. Loveand friendship were linguistically the same in most languages and theline between friendship and sexual love not always easy to discern bymodern readers of medieval texts. She notes how this demarcationbecame more pronounced only over time. The mention of friendshipbetween women is brief. As neither Aristotle nor Augustine believed menand women could be friends with each other, little was written on thesubject or on networks of women. The many examples from Swedishhistory are fascinating since little has appeared in English from thatregion. This is a fine addition to the Davis lectures.

BF575 2009-021644 978-0-470-29115-3HHaappppiinneessss,, hheeaalliinngg,, eennhhaanncceemmeenntt;; yyoouurr ccaasseebbooookkccoolllleeccttiioonn ffoorr aappppllyyiinngg ppoossiittiivvee ppssyycchhoollooggyy iinn tthheerraappyy..Title main entry. Ed. by George W. Burns.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 339 p. $45.00 (pa)For therapists, Burns (Milton H. Erickson Institute of Western Australiaand Edith Cowan U.), a clinical psychologist, author, and therapisttrainer, compiles 27 case examples from practitioners of positive psy-chology, researchers, and teachers from around the world, who sharehow they have translated positive psychology research into clinicalpractice. Sections address the core processes and outcomes of positivepsychology in psychotherapy, counseling, and coaching practice in theareas of happiness, healing, and enhancement. They include strategiesand interventions for abuse, anger, childhood and adolescent issues,anxiety, Asperger’s syndrome, depression, couples problems, divorce,family relationships, goal setting, health issues, menopause, pain, panic,parenting, phobias, posttraumatic disorder, relationships, and trauma.

BF611 2009-025678 978-0-8047-6887-0TToowwaarrdd aann aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy ooff tthhee wwiillll..Title main entry. Ed. by Keith M. Murphy and C. Jason Throop.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 227 p. $55.00Many of them specializing in medicine or mental health, anthropologistsponder the role of individual will in culture and in the anthropologicalunderstanding of culture. Their topics include locating volition inanthropological theory, in the midst of action, moral willing as narrativere-envisioning, dialects of self-experience among the Tzotzil Maya ofhighland Chiapas, transforming will and transforming culture, and howwill can be expressed and the role imagination plays.

BF636 2009-029843 978-1-55620-293-3AACCAA aaddvvooccaaccyy ccoommppeetteenncciieess;; aa ssoocciiaall jjuussttiiccee ffrraammeewwoorrkkffoorr ccoouunnsseelloorrss..Ratts, Manivong J. et al.American Counseling Assn., ©2010 263 p. $64.95 (pa)Ratts (counseling and school psychology, Seattle U.) et al. compile 22chapters that discuss how counselors, counselor educators, and studentscan use the American Counseling Association Advocacy Competencieswith diverse client populations, including minorities, those living inpoverty, people with disabilities, women, LGBTQ individuals, and olderpeople, in different settings, from K-12 to private practice and in multiplespecialty areas. They explain how the competencies can help themcounsel clients, who bring complex problems with them that cannot beresolved through interventions in the traditional office environment.Counselors and counselor educators from the US address the place ofadvocacy and social justice in the field, and applications of the compe-tencies in group work, substance abuse, rehabilitation, and career,family, and employment counseling.

BF637 2009-013194 978-1-4027-6001-3BBee tthhee cchhaannggee;; hhooww mmeeddiittaattiioonn ccaann ttrraannssffoorrmm yyoouu aannddtthhee wwoorrlldd..Shapiro, Ed and Deb Shapiro.Sterling Publishing Co., ©2009 342 p. $19.95The Dalai Lama introduces meditation as an important instrument fortransforming the mind. The Shapiros, who have written many books onmeditation, personal development, and social action, collect the reflec-tions of Buddhists, well-known and ordinary practitioners on differentforms of meditation as a tool for personal and social change: e.g., Dr.Dean Ornish, Jon Kabat-Zinn, Joan Borysenko, Jane Fonda, and RabbiTirzah Firestone.

BF637 2009-029817 978-0-8248-3430-2BBrriigghhtt ttrriiuummpphhss ffrroomm ddaarrkk hhoouurrss;; ttuurrnniinngg aaddvveerrssiittyy iinnttoossuucccceessss..Heenan, David.U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2010 233 p. $25.00Heenan tells the stories of four crusaders who took on a seeminglyimpossible situation and achieved remarkable success; three combatantswho overcame perilous conditions; and three comeback kids whobounced back from personal disgrace to restore their reputations. Thelast chapter identifies six lessons for overcoming bad times at the indi-vidual level.

BF637 2008-939123 978-1-60679-029-8TThhee ccaammpp ccoouunnsseelloorr’’ss gguuiiddee ttoo iinntteerrppeerrssoonnaallccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn..Schnell, James.Healthy Learning, ©2009 118 p. $19.95 (pa)Schnell (interpersonal communication, Ohio University) describes the sixprimary elements of interpersonal communication and the verbal andnonverbal components that structure interpersonal communication. Theend of each chapter suggests applications for understanding and guidingcampers and other camp staff. Black and white photos of campers areprovided, but no index.

BF637 2009-043765 978-1-55620-309-1CCrreeaattiinngg yyoouurr pprrooffeessssiioonnaall ppaatthh;; lleessssoonnss ffrroomm mmyy jjoouurrnneeyy..Corey, Gerald.American Counseling Assn., ©2010 210 p. $24.95 (pa)Corey (human services and counseling, California State U., Fullerton)offers a guide for graduate students and new counselors to creating acareer path. He uses his personal and professional experiences as a coun-selor, teacher, counselor educator, psychologist, supervisor, and writer toshare recommendations and lessons learned, as well as the stories of 18graduate students and new professionals on challenges they faced, whatwas helpful to them, and how to get the most out of educational experi-ences. He also discusses mentoring, his approach to counseling, groupwork, ethical counseling, self-care, and writing papers, proposals,articles, and other items. There is no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–11–

BF637 2009-044671 978-0-313-36625-3AA hhaannddbbooookk ffoorr wwoommeenn mmeennttoorrss;; ttrraannsscceennddiinngg bbaarrrriieerrss ooffsstteerreeoottyyppee,, rraaccee,, aanndd eetthhnniicciittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Carole A. Rayburn et al. (Women’s psychology)Praeger, ©2010 297 p. $44.95With the increasing number of women pursuing higher education,engaging in the workplace, entering new careers, and taking on nontra-ditional roles, there is a growing need for mentoring that recognizes theparticular situations and needs of women. In this text, 32 American psy-chology and counseling academics, researchers, and practitioners con-tribute 17 chapters providing new understandings of the mentoringprocess specific to women. Sharing their personal experiences in men-toring relationships, the authors offer both mentors and mentees insightsto aid in planning programs for their progress, analyzing themselves andtheir needs, projecting ahead for their most important goals and achieve-ments, and living as successful, self-actualized, fulfilled, and contentedlives as possible. With special attention to minority women, the textincludes strategies for women mentoring women, demonstrating the ben-efits of mentoring relationships to individuals, women as a group, andthe nation as a whole.

BF637 2009-924450 978-1-84787-078-0HHaannddbbooookk ooff ccoouunnsseelllliinngg ppssyycchhoollooggyy,, 33dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Ray Woolfe et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 696 p. $130.00This update of the 1996 and 2003 editions provides an up-to-date reviewof a field that has matured beyond defending its legitimacy. Woolfe, apsychologist in private practice in the UK, introduces the origins of, devel-opments, and challenges in counseling psychology. In 34 chapters, UKpractitioners and academicians treat aspects of the field includingdebates over characterizing mental disorders; cognitive behavioral,humanistic, narrative, integrative, cross-cultural, feminist, and lifespanapproaches; organizational, economic, political, ethical and legal contextsrelated to practice within the National Health Service; and professionaltraining, development, and identity issues. The handbook includes casestudies, diagramed models, tips about professional ethics, and chapterreferences. Perhaps the next edition will offer some global perspectives.

BF637 2009-033088 978-1-60709-604-7IInnssppiirree,, eemmppoowweerr,, ccoonnnneecctt;; rreeaacchhiinngg aaccrroossss ccuullttuurraallddiiffffeerreenncceess ttoo mmaakkee aa rreeaall ddiiffffeerreennccee..Chan, Anne.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 151 p. $70.00 (pa)This guide for mentors shows how to translate caring, compassion, andsensitivity into action in mentoring relationships with ethnic minoritiesand people from diverse backgrounds. It stresses the importance ofmentors and their charges directly talking about their different racial andethnic backgrounds and how they have shaped their experiences. Part Igives advice on establishing the mentoring relationship and buildingtrust, and Part II focuses on developing the mentee’s skill, with ideas fordiscussing dreams and goals, building confidence, giving feedback andpractical support, and overcoming self-limiting beliefs. Part III looks atways to facilitate the mentee’s socialization, and Part IV shows how insti-tutions can provide support for mentoring to improve recruitment andretention rates of ethnic minorities. The book includes case examples andstrategies targeted to specific groups, such as school children, teachers intraining, and workforce mentees. Chan is a mentor and consultant whoholds a PhD in counseling psychology.

BF637 2009-928240 978-1-84860-443-8IInntteeggrraattiioonn iinn ccoouunnsseelllliinngg aanndd ppssyycchhootthheerraappyy;; 22dd eedd..Lapworth, Phil and Charlotte Sills.Sage Publications, ©2010 180 p. $99.95The first edition was published in 2001, and has been reprinted almostevery year since, but Lapworth and Sills, who are not further identified,say that enough has now changed to warrant an update. In particular,the border between the two professions are being examined much morethoroughly, usually not to fortify it, but to breach it. Increasingly the kindof integrative approaches they recommend for practitioners in both fieldsare being constructed and put in play. They explore such aspects asgeneric elements of counseling and psychotherapy, how to integrate,developing a theory of human being, an integrative framework inpractice, multi-modal therapy, and the seven-level model.

BF637 2009-031139 978-1-60623-294-1TThhee mmiinnddffuullnneessss ssoolluuttiioonn;; eevveerryyddaayy pprraaccttiicceess ffoorr eevveerryyddaayypprroobblleemmss..Siegel, Ronald D.Guilford Pr., ©2010 356 p. $14.95 (pa)From personal and professional experience, Siegel (psychology, HarvardMedical School; Institute for Meditation and Psychotherapy) explains howmindfulness practice is an antidote to suffering made worse by attemptsto avoid it. He discusses the different types of practices, and how to getstarted living a mindful life that treats bad habits and health problems.The guide includes self-assessment inventories, practice plans, tips onfinding a therapist, and resources.

BF637 2009-035458 978-0-7494-5452-4NNLLPP ccooaacchhiinngg;; aann eevviiddeennccee--bbaasseedd aapppprrooaacchh ffoorr ccooaacchheess,,lleeaaddeerrss aanndd iinnddiivviidduuaallss..Linder-Pelz, Susie.Kogan Page, ©2010 237 p. $39.95Linder-Pelz, an NLP coach, reflects on whether neurolinguistic pro-gramming (NLP) as a distinctive methodology deserves to be taken seri-ously by coaching professionals. The book defines NLP coaching andevaluates its effectiveness in comparison with other cognitive behavioraland solution-focused coaching models and methods. It explains how andwhen NLP coaching is used, looks at distinctions between NLP coachingand NLP practice, evaluates the empirical evidence on NLP, and questionsaspects of NLP where empirical evidence is lacking. Case studies andreal-life examples show how NLP fits into the wider field of psychology.

BF637 2009-033268 978-1-60623-293-4TThhee pprrooccrraassttiinnaattoorr’’ss gguuiiddee ttoo ggeettttiinngg tthhiinnggss ddoonnee..Basco, Monica Ramirez.Guilford Pr., ©2010 178 p. $14.95 (pa)As a psychologist who notes that she procrastinated in starting this book,Basco (U. of Texas at Arlington) offers insights into understanding andchanging self-defeating thoughts and behaviors from a cognitive-behav-ioral perspective. The guide includes a self- assessment quiz, motivatingstatements, and suggestions for getting help. She is also the author ofNever Good Enough.

BF637 2009-925987 978-1-4129-0239-7SSttaannddaarrddss aanndd eetthhiiccss ffoorr ccoouunnsseelllliinngg iinn aaccttiioonn,, 33dd eedd..Bond, Tim. (Sage counselling in action)Sage Publications, ©2010 270 p. $39.95 (pa)Bond (ethical and legal issues for psychological therapies, U. of Bristol,UK) offers a third edition of his book on ethics in counseling. Thoroughlyrevised and updated, this edition also includes a new chapter on theimplications of ethics in counseling practice. The author also examinesrecent changes in law (including the Human Rights Act and child pro-tection legislation), ethical problem resolution of current issues, coun-seling supervision, and changing expectations as a result of anticipatedregulation. The book would be useful for both training and as a referencefor counseling service providers.

BF637 2009-927112 978-1-84920-473-6TThheerraappyy oonnlliinnee;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee..Anthony, Kate and DeeAnna Merz Nagel.Sage Publications, ©2010 163 p. $32.95 (pa)Co-founders of the Online Therapy Institute/former presidents of theInternational Society for Mental Health Online explain how the Internetis being used to treat clients. They discuss online therapy from human-istic, psychodynamic, and cognitive-behavioral therapy perspectives; thecommunication challenges of presence- free therapy; ethical considera-tions; the business side of an online practice; and using mobile phonesand other electronic technology as communication tools. The guideincludes a detailed case study with an intake form, consent form, andtranscripts of patient- therapist exchanges. Anthony is a psychotherapistin Britain; Nagel practices in the US.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –12–

BF639 978-1-84742-179-1MMaannaaggiinngg ttrraannssiittiioonnss;; ssuuppppoorrtt ffoorr iinnddiivviidduuaallss aatt kkeeyyppooiinnttss ooff cchhaannggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Alison Petch.Policy Press, ©2009 170 p. $29.95 (pa)This volume explores the challenges young people have in making tran-sitions within British social service organizational contexts, whethermoving across organizational boundaries from children’s to adults’services or making transitions as a result of their own life decisions,focusing on four groups of young people: those leaving care, those withlearning disabilities, those with metal health problems, and thoseseeking asylum. Petch (the director of Research in Practice for Adults, aUK-based research utilization organization that promotes evidence-informed policy and practice in adult social care) presents nine chaptersthat describe the organizational context, examine transition issues foreach group, and (turning to the adult world) describe case studies oftransition to supported living and the transition of hospital discharge.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

BF698 2009-030165 978-1-4051-7712-2HHaannddbbooookk ooff ppeerrssoonnaalliittyy aanndd sseellff--rreegguullaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Rick H. Hoyle.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 528 p. $199.95The 21 chapters of this excellent handbook offer current thinking andmethods regarding those aspects of personality that are linked to traitsand behaviors of self-regulation, with attention to ongoing research.Temperament and early personality are the subject of the first 4 chapters,which discuss developmental issues and their appearance in educationalsettings, the last 50 years of research on delayed gratification, the relationof self regulation to maladjustment, social competence, and emotion. Thefollowing 6 chapters look at different approaches to the study of person-ality processes. The remaining 10 chapters, on individual differences,expand on the contributors’ researches, with topics that include self-efficacy, a cybernetic process model of self-control, working memorycapacity and self-regulation, and hypo-egoic self-regulation. Hoyle andseveral of the contributors are in the department of psychology and neu-roscience at Duke U. in Durham, North Carolina; the remaining contrib-utors are psychologists based in the US and Europe. Part of the chaptersappeared in shorter versions in a special issue, edited by Hoyle, of theJournal of Personality (v.74, issue 6, 2006).

BF698 2009-037847 978-0-07-337068-2PPeerrssoonnaalliittyy ppssyycchhoollooggyy;; ddoommaaiinnss ooff kknnoowwlleeddggee aabboouutthhuummaann nnaattuurree,, 44tthh eedd..Larsen, Randy J. and David M. Buss.McGraw-Hill, ©2010 724 p. $144.38Larsen (personality psychology, Washington U., St. Louis) and Buss (psy-chology, U. of Texas at Austin) explain the study of personality throughsix key domains of knowledge about personality functioning—disposi-tional, biological, intrapsychic, cognitive-experiential, social and cultural,and adjustment domains—rather than by traditional grand theories ofpersonality. In addition, they integrate culture, gender, and biology.Streamlined, this edition has updated research; an updated discussion oncorrelates of personality dimensions, including neuroticism, extraversion,agreeableness, conscientiousness, and combinations of personality traits;added features that look closely at specific topics; expanded coverage oflongitudinal studies; a new theory of stable individual differences;expanded explanation of balancing selection; new material on the evo-lution of group living and social motivation, the locus of control and real-world outcomes, anger proneness, self-recognition in animals, andintelligence; and new examples and graphics.

BF698 2009-037078 978-0-393-06848-1SSuuppeerrnnoorrmmaall ssttiimmuullii;; hhooww pprriimmaall uurrggeess oovveerrrraann tthheeiirreevvoolluuttiioonnaarryy ppuurrppoossee..Barrett, Deirdre.W.W. Norton, ©2010 216 p. $35.00The eggs of the cuckoo bird are often larger and brighter then the othereggs in the nest where the mother cuckoo has parasitically laid an eggto be cared for by some other bird. Researchers have found that thiscauses the host mother to generally favor the cuckoo egg, as well even-tually the larger cuckoo chick, over her own progeny. This is an exampleof a supernormal stimulus, the essence of which, Barrett (an evolutionarypsychologist at Harvard Medical School’s Behavioral Medicine Program)explains, “is that the exaggerated imitation can exert a stronger pull thanthe real thing.” Noting that humans are quite adept at creating their ownsupernormal stimuli (as in candy that is sweeter than fruit), she appliesthe concept of the supernormal stimulus and related ideas from animalethology and evolutionary psychology to explain a broad range of humanbehavior (mostly folly) in the realms of sex, health, international rela-tions, and media.

BF698 2009-031199 978-1-58826-727-6WWhhaatt iiss ccoonnssttrruuccttiioonniissmm??;; nnaavviiggaattiinngg iittss uussee iinn ssoocciioollooggyy..Harris, Scott R. (Social problems, social constructions)Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2010 169 p. $49.95Harris (sociology, Saint Louis U.) has no single answer to the questionposed in the title, but his central thesis is that a distinction can be drawnbetween objective and interpretive forms of constructionist analysis insociology. Objective constructionism focuses on the construction of actualbehaviors, conditions, or entities while interpretive constructionismfocuses on the meanings of those behaviors, conditions, or entities. Heseeks to demonstrate this distinction in greater detail by exploring bothforms of constructionism as they have addressed the subjects of mind,emotions, family diversity, marital equality, and social inequality.

BF711 2009-035421 978-0-202-36327-1TThhee ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ooff mmiinndd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11997733))Title main entry. Ed. by A. J. P. Kenny et al.AldineTransaction, ©2010 152 p. $24.95 (pa)For the 1971/72 and 1972/73 school years, Edinburgh University invitedfour scholars to deliver the Gifford Lectures; those of the first year werecollected in 1972 as The Nature of Mind, and those delivered the secondyear are presented here. They ponder the frontiers of psychology, expla-nations of the mind, the development of mind, the origin of the soul, theevolution of mind, origin of language, the possible minds, and thegenesis of mind. A discussion between lectures and a question-and-answer session are also transcribed. Only names are indexed.

BF713 2009-036321 978-0-07-337093-4AA ttooppiiccaall aapppprrooaacchh ttoo lliiffee--ssppaann ddeevveellooppmmeenntt,, 55tthh eedd..Santrock, John W.McGraw-Hill, ©2010 788 p. $149.38This accessible, visually appealing undergraduate text offers color photosin a color layout. While most textbooks on life-span development areorganized chronologically, this one is organized topically, with sectionson the life-span perspective, biological processes and physical devel-opment, cognitive processes, socioemotional development, social contextsof development, and death, dying, and grieving. The three main themesare research, applications, and contexts, with sections on each withineach chapter. Each chapter begins with a map of main ideas andlearning goals, and includes profiles of real professionals, boxes onresearch and diversity, review and reflection questions, and key termsand people. A companion web site contains research material for caseexercises, plus video clips, self-inventories, and other exercises. For thisfifth edition, much material has been rewritten and edited for clarity,and there is new and expanded material on numerous areas, such as crit-icisms of evolutionary psychology, the heredity/environment interaction,and neuroscience insights on intelligence. Santrock is affiliated with theUniversity of Texas-Dallas.

BF722 2009-924600 978-1-84860-224-3EEaarrllyy cchhiillddhhoooodd;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorr ssttuuddeennttss,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Tina Bruce.Sage Publications, ©2010 430 p. $39.95 (pa)Written in a conversational tone, this text for professionals, teaching assis-tants, and students in early years foundation degrees and early childhoodcourses encourages students to link their professional and life experienceswith theory. Theory is illustrated with examples of good practice, casestudies, and reflection exercises. The first three chapters cover self-man-agement as an adult learner, e-learning for professional development, anddoing practitioner research. The rest of the book is presented in sectionson working with children, understanding child development, the EarlyYears Foundation Stage, Key Stage 1, professional development, andleading and managing. A companion web site offers further case studiesand questions. The book’s color layout includes color photos. This secondedition is updated in light of the new Early Years Foundation Stage, andaddresses the needs of students working towards Early Years ProfessionalStatus (EYPS). Bruce is affiliated with Roehampton University.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–13–

BF723 2009-035445 978-1-84905-001-2AArrttss aaccttiivviittiieess ffoorr cchhiillddrreenn aanndd yyoouunngg ppeeooppllee iinn nneeeedd;;hheellppiinngg cchhiillddrreenn ttoo ddeevveelloopp mmiinnddffuullnneessss,, ssppiirriittuuaallaawwaarreenneessss aanndd sseellff--eesstteeeemm..Coholic, Diana.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 192 p. $32.95 (pa)Coholic (social work, Laurentian U., Canada) presents interventions andexercises drawn from practice and research for helping, health, and edu-cation practitioners to use in holistic arts-based groups or one-on-one ses-sions with children in need, to help them cope with stress, trauma, andloss, explore their feelings, and build resilience, self-awareness, and self-esteem. The methods discussed are broader than art therapy and can beused by a variety of practitioners, and include games, physical activities,meditations, and guided imageries, along with drawing, writing, claymodeling, and other arts. The book also addresses the rationale for usingarts-based and holistic interventions, specific issues that arise in workwith children who have experienced difficulties, spirituality, mind-fulness-based practice, dreams, and working in groups.

BF723 98-45621 978-1-85343-200-2TThhee lloonnee ttwwiinn;; uunnddeerrssttaannddiinngg ttwwiinn bbeerreeaavveemmeenntt aanndd lloossss,,rreevv.. eedd..Woodward, Joan.Free Association Books, ©2010 187 p. $34.95 (pa)A psychotherapist in Birmingham, England, Woodward founded theLone Twin Network to enable lone twins like herself to contact each otherand share their experiences. Since the first edition, in 1998, the Networkhas allowed her to interact with many more lone twins, providing herwith insights that she incorporates here. Among her topics are twin lossat birth, in childhood, and as adults; attachment theory and therapeuticinterventions; when memory begins; and lone twins’ experience oftherapy. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

BF723 2009-032682 978-1-4338-0714-5MMeetthhooddoollooggiieess ffoorr ccoonndduuccttiinngg rreesseeaarrcchh oonn ggiifftteeddnneessss..Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce Thompson and Rena F. Subotnik.American Psychological Assn., ©2010 266 p. $69.95This work offers researchers an overview of different types of method-ological challenges to research in giftedness, such as ceiling effects andthe lack of standardized definitions for giftedness, and the looks at waysto overcome these challenges. In Parts I and II, on advanced techniquesand complex analyses, contributors in measurement and statisticsdescribe the use of research and modeling methods, such as factoranalysis, reliability generalization methods, hierarchical linear modeling,in the context of gifted research. The final section of the book offers per-spectives on the future of the field by leaders in gifted education.Thompson is professor of education psychology at Texas A&M University.Subotnik is director of the Center for Gifted Education Policy at theAmerican Psychological Association.

BF723 2009-033969 978-1-84905-081-4AA pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttoo ccaarriinngg ffoorr cchhiillddrreenn aanndd tteeeennaaggeerrsswwiitthh aattttaacchhmmeenntt ddiiffffiiccuullttiieess..Taylor, Chris.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 221 p. $32.95 (pa)Taylor, a practitioner and manager working with vulnerable and trau-matized children, draws from a series of training courses he conductedwith residential workers, foster carers, social workers, therapists, andmanagers to present a guide for these caregivers and parents to helpingvulnerable and traumatized children and young people who suffer fromattachment difficulties and how attachment influences various aspects oftheir development. He explains attachment theory and what attachmentis, what different patterns of attachment look like, how this under-standing can inform the development of therapeutic ways of caring, andhow to promote recovery and tackle challenging and problem behavior,conflict, anger, and the effects of trauma. He focuses on therapeutic skillsof caregivers in daily experiences instead of individual or group therapysessions. He does not cover self-harming behavior, sexualized behavior,or other mental health problems.

BF724 2009-023658 978-1-884995-59-0TTeeeenn 22..00;; ssaavviinngg oouurr cchhiillddrreenn ffrroomm tthhee ttoorrmmeenntt ooffaaddoolleesscceennccee..Epstein, Robert.Quill Driver Books, ©2010 535 p. $18.95 (pa)Former Psychology Today editor-in-chief Epstein presents an updated andretitled version of his revolutionary 2007 book, The Case AgainstAdolescence: Rediscovering the Adult in Every Teen, designed to stimulate adiscussion about changing the way that teenagers are raised in the U.S.Epstein argues that current parenting, educational, and social practicesover-restrict young people; teens would benefit more if they could havefull adult rights and responsibilities as they demonstrate appropriatecompetence in various areas. The revised edition incorporates new dataand recent events as further support for Epstein’s position, uses a newtitle to emphasize the urgency and utility of the book, and includes new,practical parenting tips. Epstein’s text has received praise fromprominent individuals from widely different backgrounds and politicalleanings, among them Joyce Brothers, Deepak Chopra, Newt Gingrich,George Will, Drew Pinsky, and Alvin Toffler.

BF789 2009-031607 978-0-313-37540-8MMaassss ttrraauummaa aanndd eemmoottiioonnaall hheeaalliinngg aarroouunndd tthhee wwoorrlldd;;rriittuuaallss aanndd pprraaccttiicceess ffoorr rreessiilliieennccee aanndd mmeeaanniinngg--mmaakkiinngg;;22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Ani Kalayjian and Dominique Eugene.Praeger, ©2010 476 p. $104.95Kalayjian (psychology, Fordham U.) and Eugene, a marriage and familytherapist, play therapist, and nutritional therapy practitioner, compile 23essays that document reactions around the world to mass trauma fromviolence and natural and human-made disasters, and therapeutic inter-ventions to prevent and minimize their impact. An international groupof contributors who work in psychology, social work, trauma outreach,counseling, and other fields focus on the use of cultural practices, reli-gious and spiritual rituals, and indigenous practices in coping, resilience,and meaning-making after earthquakes, hurricanes, tsunamis, andfloods in countries such as Armenia, the US, Japan, Pakistan, Haiti, SriLanka, Indonesia, Canada, and South Africa. Other chapters discuss theimpact of colonization on Native Americans, slavery, genocide, terrorism,Nazi persecution, HIV/AIDS, and refugees. An index is provided in thesecond volume only. Praeger is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

BF1286 2009-028973 978-0-8014-4801-0TThhee ssyymmppaatthheettiicc mmeeddiiuumm;; ffeemmiinniinnee cchhaannnneelliinngg,, tthheeooccccuulltt,, aanndd ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn tteecchhnnoollooggiieess,, 11885599--11991199..Galvan, Jill.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 216 p. $45.00Galvan (English, The Ohio State University) uses the Victorian and turn-of-the-century fascination with technological advances and in the occultas a lens with which to examine the role of 19th-century women as“mediums” for communication. The author argues that authors such asHenry James, George Eliot, Arthur Conan Doyle, and Bram Stoker chosewomen as communicators (whether as spiritual mediums or, say, tele-graph operators) because of the intimacy they lent to communications ata distance. Galvan finds that the increasing feminization of mediatedcommunication in the 19th and early 20th centuries reveals the chal-lenges that the new networked culture presented to prevailing ideas ofgender, dialogue, and privacy.

BF1321 2009-034922 978-1-84788-261-5TThhee ssiixxtthh sseennssee rreeaaddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by David Howes. (Sensory formations series)Berg Publishers, ©2009 375 p. $44.95 (pa)The series has previously devoted one volume to each of the conventionalsenses tied to physical organs, and here moves into less charted waters.The readings offer anthropological and historical perspectives on sensa-tions that are common but not explained well or at all by science. Essaysand excerpts of longer texts from the 19th and 20th centuries examinesuch topics as the sense of direction, the anatomy of mysticism, theMesmerism investigation and the crisis of sensationist science, the eroticsof telepathy in the British Society for Psychical Research’s experiments inintimacy, some thoughts on the afterlife from spirit photography tophantom films, the sense of being stared at, tactility and distraction,peyote and the mystic vision, and the embodiment of symbols and theacculturation of the anthropologist. Distributed in the US by PalgraveMacmillan.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –14–

BF1543 2007-036372 978-1-84553-310-6TThhee lluurree ooff tthhee ddaarrkk ssiiddee;; ssaattaann aanndd wweesstteerrnn ddeemmoonnoollooggyyiinn ppooppuullaarr ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Partridge and Eric Christianson.Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 215 p. $28.95 (pa)In this collection of papers from a 2006 conference held at the Universityof Chester, Wales, international contributors in Biblical studies, religiousstudies, and Christian theology explore depictions of demons and similarentities (vampires, ghosts) in popular music, film, and literature. Anintroduction reviews the history of Satan and Western demonology.Chapters examine topics such as Satanism and popular music, demonsof the new polytheism, scriptural dimensions of evil, and a contemporarytheology of spiritual perversion in the Harry Potter stories. Partridge andChristianson are co-directors of the Center for the Study of Religion andPopular Culture at the University of Chester. The book is distributed inNorth America by The David Brown Book Co.

BF1556 2010-001965 978-0-8126-9683-7ZZoommbbiieess,, vvaammppiirreess,, aanndd pphhiilloossoopphhyy;; nneeww lliiffee ffoorr tthheeuunnddeeaadd,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Greene and K. Silem Mohammad.(Popular culture and philosophy; v.49)Open Court Publishing, ©2010 303 p. $19.95 (pa)Scholars of philosophy explore philosophical underpinnings and impli-cations of popular literature and media focusing on people that are bio-logically dead but retain some measure of consciousness, agency, andactivity. Their topics include evil and the ontology of the undead, Spinozaand the speed of undeath, the bloody connection between vampires andvegetarians, the political economy of non-coercive vampire lifestyles, andthe twilight of infinite desire. The 2006 The Undead and Philosophy is hereexpanded to 21 chapters.

BF1591 2009-028612 978-0-9700591-9-2IInn ppuurrssuuiitt ooff iinnvviissiibbiilliittyy;; rriittuuaall tteexxttss ffrroomm llaattee RRoommaannEEggyypptt..Phillips, Richard L. (American studies in papyrology; v.47)Amer. Society of Papyrologists, ©2009 206 p. $49.95The topic of invisibility is intriguing to a broad spectrum of readers (four-year-old children, magicians, spiritual seekers, scientists of various types);but this is a scholarly monograph, a doctoral dissertation presented atVirginia Tech, and as such its primary audience is other scholars,although more general readers could garner some notion of the subject’sdeep roots. At the core of Phillips’ study are a handful of enigmatic texts,from Late Roman Egypt, devoted to rituals for acquiring invisibility. Thebibliography, of course, is thorough. Interestingly, he has included anumber of indices, including Greek and Coptic words in the texts, PDMinventory numbers, ritual texts, other papyri and inscriptions, and liter-ature (Greek, Biblical, Egyptian and Coptic). The book is distributed inNorth America by The David Brown Book Co.

BF1591 2009-041611 978-90-04-17904-2MMaaggiiccaall pprraaccttiiccee iinn tthhee LLaattiinn WWeesstt;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..Int’l Conference on Magical Practice in the Latin West (2005: Zaragoza:Spain) Ed. by Richard L. Gordon and Francisco Marco Simón.(Religions in the Graeco-Roman world; v.168)BRILL, ©2010 676 p. $278.00The study of magic in an historical context has recently become inte-grated into other areas of cultural history. In this collection of papersfrom a conference held at the University of Zaragoza in 2005, editorsGordon (history of ancient religions, Universität Erfurt) and Simón(ancient history, Universidad de Zaragoza) first address the literary con-ception of magic in the Roman and Late Antique West. These articlesexamine what authors thought of magical practices. The other three sec-tions use mainly inscriptions and artifacts from the Roman world (andIreland) some only recently unearthed, to illustrate the uses of magic andits widespread acceptance. Articles include the content of both curses andprayers for protection. Many of the former use foreign “magical” wordsor reverse writing to emphasize the power of the curse. The political usesof magic and trials of those accused of subverting the state throughsorcery are also discussed. Many of the Egyptian and Greco-Roman cultsare examined as conduits of magical power. Several chapters look at thecontinuity of magical practices within early Christianity. The parapher-nalia of magic, such as amulets, herbs and figural representations ofenemies are also discussed. The wide geographic range of the studiesallows the reader to compare practices and note the consistent similar-ities among them. This is a fine addition to our understanding of theRoman and Late Antique mentality.

BF1593 2009943156 978-1-885923-68-4DDiivviinnaattiioonn aanndd iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn ooff ssiiggnnss iinn tthhee aanncciieennttwwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Amar Annus. (Chicago Institute seminars;no.6)Oriental Institute (U. of Chicago), ©2010 351 p. $27.95 (pa)The fifth annual University of Chicago Oriental Institute Seminar, held inMarch 2009, was titled Science and Superstition: Interpretation of Signs inthe Ancient World. Revised from presentations there, 16 papers here covertheories of divination and signs, hermeneutics of sign interpretation, andthe history of sign interpretation. Among specific topics are cognitivetheory and the first-millennium extispicy ritual, the divine presence andits interpretation in early Mesopotamian divination, traces of the omenseries Summa izbu in Cicero’s De divinatione, and prophecy and omendivination as two sides of the same coin. The proceedings are notindexed. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

BF1621 2009-035074 978-1-84520-671-0TThhee aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy ooff mmaaggiicc..Greenwood, Susan.Berg Publishers, ©2009 163 p. $29.95 (pa)Magic is at the heart of anthropology, says Greenwood (U. of Sussex), interms of the issues it raises in relation to human experience, people’slived reality, and the meaning of science. Many anthropological theoriesof magic, however, implicitly devalue it as irrational and inferior toscience, and she believes that a new understanding is now both possibleand necessary. Like her two previous books on magic, this account drawson her personal training and participation in Western magic traditions.She covers explaining magic, the experience of magic, practical magic,and working with magic. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.

AAEESSTTHHEETTIICCSS,, EETTHHIICCSS

BH201 2009-674526 978-1-4438-1135-4RReetthhiinnkkiinngg tthhee vvaanngguuaarrdd;; aaeesstthheettiicc aanndd ppoolliittiiccaall ppoossiittiioonnssiinn tthhee mmooddeerrnniisstt ddeebbaattee,, 11991177--11996622..Maerhofer, John W.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 215 p. $62.00Maerhofa (English and comparative literature, Queens College, New YorkCity) reinterprets avant-garde art and politics during the short 20thcentury, a period that witnessed two world wars, the rise of radicalmovements on the political left, Fascism in Italy and Germany, the anti-colonial struggles, and the failure of monopoly capitalism and its hege-monic re-establishment. He covers the theoretical margins of thehistorical avant-garde; art, propaganda, and the manifest 1924-38; van-guardism in left and right movements 1930-48; Third World revolutionsand the crisis of European aesthetic and political vanguardism 1950-62;and late capitalism and the historical context of the neo-avant-guarde.The price is converted from 39.99 British pounds.

BJ1134 2009-003933 978-1-4384-2851-2EEtthhiiccss ooff wwrriittiinngg..Sini, Carlo. Trans. by Silvia Benso. (SUNY series in contemporaryItalian philosophy)State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 174 p. $70.00This volume reproduces the texts of two lecture courses given by Italianphilosopher Sini (Milan State U., Italy). The first, “Logic and Writing: TheContent of the Form,” addresses the question of the possibility of correctrepresentation and the relation between logical form in language andphilosophical and scientific thinking. In the second, “The End ofPhilosophy and the Task of Thinking,” Sini criticizes Heidegger’s notionof aletheia as Lichtung and considers the implications for thinking giventhe relative and contingent nature of logical truths and the philosophicalpractices supported by them. Originally published in Italian as Etica dellascrittura.

BJ1401 2009-047806 978-1-61614-177-6GGoodd aanndd hhiiss ddeemmoonnss..Parenti, Michael.Prometheus Books, ©2010 281 p. $25.00In this, his latest book, noted cultural critic and activist Parenti warnsagainst the dangers of religion’s dark side, whether the evils committedin the name of God or the hypocrisies of religious figures. Instead ofcondemning all believers, however, the author focuses on the exploitationof religious faithful by the powerful; on sectarian intolerance andviolence; and on the reactionary collusion between leaders of church andstate. Suggesting that religious fundamentalists and theocrats are adanger to democratic freedoms, Parenti documents the increasing effortsof secularists and progressive religionists to fight back against religiousintolerance.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–15–

BJ1402 978-90-420-2939-2PPrroommoottiinngg aanndd pprroodduucciinngg eevviill..Title main entry. Ed. by Nancy Billias. (At the interface/Probing theboundaries; v.63)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 308 p. $92.40 (pa)This work contains papers by contributors from Europe and the US,from a March 2007 conference, Global Perspectives on Evil and HumanWickedness, held in Salzburg, along with selected papers from a relatedconference, Cultures of Violence, held in Oxford in 2004. One of thethemes of all of the papers is the ethical role of the observer or witnessto evil. Chapters on linguistic frameworks for evil discuss topics such as9/11 and the recasting of evil through metaphor. A section on literaryframeworks analyzes selected works by Franz Kafka, Paul Auster, andAngela Carter. Chapters on evil in a cinematic framework look at filmsincluding The Sound of Music, Cabaret and V for Vendetta. There is alsoa chapter on the signification of evil in digital games. A final section con-siders evil in historical and political frameworks, with a chapter onmonotheism as the root of all evil. There is no subject index. Billias ischair of the philosophy department at Saint Joseph College.

BJ1421 2009-046112 978-0-313-38351-9PPllaayyiinngg tthhee llyyiinngg ggaammee;; ddeetteeccttiinngg aanndd ddeeaalliinngg wwiitthh lliieessaanndd lliiaarrss,, ffrroomm ooccccaassiioonnaall ffiibbbbeerrss ttoo ffrreeqquueenntt ffaabbrriiccaattoorrss..Scott, Gini Graham.Praeger, ©2010 211 p. $44.95Scott, a college instructor, consultant on business and work relationshipsand professional and personal development, and frequently-interviewedauthor, examines lying in all aspects of life; how, when, and why peoplelie; and its history and cultural connections. She identifies six types oflies and liars, how to detect each type, the difference between fibbers andcompulsive liars, and lying in everyday life, public life, work, andbusiness, to friends and relatives, in dating and relationships, withparents and children, and to oneself, as well as whether to confront thelie.

BJ1461 2009-037563 978-1-60384-129-0FFrreeee wwiillll,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Derk Pereboom.Hackett Publishing Co., ©2009 393 p. $19.95 (pa)Pereboom (philosophy, Cornell U.) presents an anthology of writings onfree will and determinism from Aristotle to the present day. Some selec-tions are sections of works or abridgements, so the collection willprobably be most useful for an undergraduate class on the topic. Thethree main points of view on free will—libertarianism, determinism, andcompatabilism are all represented, along with a variety of positionswithin each broader category. Contains extensive footnotes but no index.

BJ1498 2009-437822 978-1-4438-0245-1PPrrooffeessssiioonnaall mmoorraalliittyy aanndd gguuiillttyy bbyyssttaannddiinngg;; MMeerrttoonn’’ssCCoonnjjeeccttuurreess aanndd tthhee vvaalluuee ooff wwoorrkk..Padgett, Barry L.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 142 p. $52.99Padgett (philosophy, Bellarmine U., Kentucky) explores implications forprofessional ethics and morality of values that American Trappist monkThomas Merton (1915-68) expressed in his Conjectures of a GuiltyBystander. After a general introduction to professional ethics and toMerton, he covers moral theory and professional life, contemporary chal-lenges in professional ethics, professional ethics and moral imagination,and more imagination and leadership.

BJ1531 2009-675325 978-1-4438-0981-8OOnn tthhee eetthhiiccaall lliiffee..Title main entry. Ed. by Raymond Aaron Younis.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 190 p. $52.99The title essay by animal rights advocate Peter Singer is followed byresponses from fellow Australian philosophy scholars, looking at hisideas and those of Western philosophy generally in light of globalwarming and other environmental problems. Among the topics areethical obligations to cetaceans as a case study for Singer’s animal ethics,the unjustified-suffering argument for vegetarianism, the nature ofKant’s ethics, charity and justice in global poverty relief, and Singer onfinding meaning through doing good. There is no index.

RREELLIIGGIIOONN

BL31 2009-924993 978-0-8478-3304-7LLiivveess ooff ddeevvoottiioonn;; tthhee mmaannyy ffaacceess ooff ffaaiitthh..Moleres, Fernando.Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2009 255 p. $80.00This is an evocative, beautiful book, originally published in Italian in2009 as Uomini di Dio (Rizzoli Libri Illustrati); it will appeal to peopleinterested in spirituality, from many points of view. Built around thephotos of Spanish photographer Fernando Moleres, whose work has gar-nered a long list of awards and exhibitions, the format is oversize(9.5x13″), and the photos are presented full page or in spreads. For thisendeavor Moleres travelled the world to make portraits and photographscenes of monastic lives in Greece, Spain, France, Japan, India, Nepal,Tibet, Syria, Armenia, Kosovo, and Russia. The photos tell many storieson their own, but they are significantly enhanced by the thoughtfulaccompanying text, written by Pierre-Francois de Béthune, who is aBenedictine monk, and by Covadonga Valdaliso, a Spanish historian andscholar of monastic life. Neither references nor an index are included, butthis lack of scholarly apparatus does not substantially diminish the valueof this unique, heartfelt collaborative effort for a broad audience.

BL31 978-90-04-14691-4RReelliiggiioonn ppaasstt && pprreesseenntt;; eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff tthheeoollooggyy aannddrreelliiggiioonn;; vv..77:: JJoohh--MMaahh..Religion in Geschichte und Gegenwart. Ed. by Hans Dieter Betz et al.BRILL, ©2010 729 p. $299.00The massive volumes of this resource offer the English translation of the4th edition of Religion in Geschichte und Gegenwart of 1998-2005. Someediting was done for the English translation, including the removal ofshort articles mainly of interest to a German audience, the addition ofarticles on figures who have died since the German edition was pub-lished, and the addition of some English-language bibliography.Exhaustive lists of resources are provided, on topics that include the NagHammadi and rabbinic literature, as well as all lexicons, primarysources, series, and works on religion and its study. A sampling of thearticles in this volume includes a history and discussion of religiousjournals; the history of the concept of the Kingdom of God; and an articleon language that includes sub-topics on linguistics and religious studies,philosophy, ethics, missiology, and liturgics, among others. This volumealso includes a 26-page entry on Martin Luther, which provides a biog-raphy, discussion of his writings, theology, and impact. The majority ofthe text is devoted to Protestant-related theology, but many articles areincluded on other religious traditions. Each entry is signed and includesfull bibliography. The individual volumes are not indexed. This is a won-derfully rich resource, valuable to academics, theologians, students, andthe general reader.

BL48 2008-943862 978-1-59257-854-2AAnn aatthheeiisstt ddeeffeennddss rreelliiggiioonn..Sheiman, Bruce.Alpha Books, ©2009 239 p. $14.95 (pa)Written for the general reader, this book goes beyond the endlesslydebated issue of whether God exists or not to explore the question ofwhether religious belief actually benefits society. Despite the examples ofreligiously motivated misdeeds that most people can readily cite,Sheiman asserts that these arise from the politicization of religion andpale in comparison to the everyday work of billions of believers. Theauthor goes on to give examples of how religion provides psychological,moral, communal, and even physical health benefits. Contains a bibli-ography but no index.

BL51 2009-000586 978-1-4384-2825-3RReeaalliissmm iinn rreelliiggiioonn;; aa pprraaggmmaattiisstt’’ss ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Neville, Robert Cummings.State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 265 p. $75.00Neville (philosophy, religion, and theology; Boston U.) has rewritten 14essays originally created for various occasions or publications that sharethe theme of realism in religion. Their topics include realism andcontextualization, how to read scriptures for religious truth, thecontributions of Charles S. Peirce to the philosophy of religion, thephilosophy of nature in American theology, some contemporary theoriesof divine creation, and Descartes and Leibniz on the priority of natureversus will in God.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –16–

BL53 2009-047153 978-1-61614-164-6GGoodd’’ss bbrraaiinn..Tiger, Lionel and Michael McGuire.Prometheus Books, ©2010 256 p. $25.00Tiger (anthropology, Rutgers U.) and scholar of psychiatry and biobe-havioralism McGuire explore the disparity between what the braincreated about religion and the vast and long-lasting social systems thatwere the result. Among their perceptions are adventures of the soul,religion as law and the denial of biology, faith in sex, whether religionis monkey business, the elephant in the chapel is in your skull, puzzlesto which the answers are more puzzles, and what your brainsoothe scoreis.

BL65 2010-002262 978-90-04-18304-9HHuummaann rriigghhttss oorr rreelliiggiioouuss rruulleess??..Ven, Johannes A. van der. (Empirical research in religion and humanrights; v.1)BRILL, ©2010 473 p. $192.00Ven (comparative empirical science of religion, Radbound U. Nijmegen,the Netherlands) has focused his research on human rights and religionsince 1993. He gathers here nine lectures and papers reflecting his sys-tematic research into religion, partly historical and partly systematicresearch into religion and human rights, and empirical research intoreligion and a human rights culture. His topics include varieties of reli-gious weakness and strength, reflective comparison in religious research,whether human rights are natural or political, religious rights forminorities, religious freedom, and the impact of religion on attitudestoward religious freedom and the separation of church and state.

BL65 2009-025501 978-0-9728875-9-5TThhee qquueesstt ffoorr ppoowweerr;; rreelliiggiioonn aanndd ppoolliittiiccss..Slipp, Samuel.Pitchstone Publishing, ©2010 199 p. $24.95 (pa)Slipp (emeritus psychiatry, New York U.) draws from his background inboth psychoanalysis and neurological sciences to explore the interplaybetween religious and political power throughout the history ofChristianity. Among his topics are the impact of social context on belief,Jesus seeking freedom by the power of religion, Emperor Constantineusing Christianity for power, maintaining the illusion of divine power,individual power or compliance to power, and biological adaptation andcultural survival.

BL74 2010-000893 978-0-313-34278-3RReelliiggiioonn aanndd eevveerryyddaayy lliiffee aanndd ccuullttuurree;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard D. Hecht and Vincent F. Biondo.Praeger, ©2010 1132 p. $184.95Scholars in religion, the humanities, and the social sciences consider howreligious belief and practice influences and is in turn influenced by tra-dition and culture. The first volume traces accounts of the relationshipduring past times in such places as Taiwan, Pacific Islands, West Africa,Medieval Euorpe, North America since 1492, and Montréal. The secondand third volumes look in turn at public and private life in moderntimes. Topics there include conflict and peace building, sexuality of reli-gious nationalism, economics and Western religions, contemporary visualart, Muslim family formation in British life, tourism, humor, and deathand dying. The three volumes are paged and indexed together.

BL80 978-0-89236-968-3BBeerrnnaarrdd PPiiccaarrtt aanndd tthhee ffiirrsstt gglloobbaall vviissiioonn ooff rreelliiggiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Lynn Hunt et al.Getty Publications, ©2010 364 p. $65.00 (pa)The introduction begins modestly, “This is a book about a book”.However, Hunt (history, University of California, Los Angeles) and hercolleagues only use this book as a springboard for a discussion of eigh-teenth century attitudes about religion and art. The book is the multi-volume Ceremonies et coutumes religieuses de tous les peuples du mondeby engraver Bernard Picart and publisher Jean Frederic Bernard. Articleslook at the conditions in publishing in Amsterdam at the time, give abackground on Picart’s life and look at his later work, a collection ofengravings based on great works of European masters. The underlyingkey to the theme of Picart’s and Bernard’s endeavor is suggested in anessay on the Colligiants, a small sect of free thinkers. Specialists examinePicart’s sources for religions in China, India and Meso-America, well asrepresentations of Islam. The study concludes with articles on influenceson Picart and Bernard and the climate at the time regarding a com-parison of religions. The scholars note that there are many inaccuraciesin the Ceremonies et coutumes but that the underlying belief that all reli-gions are, at base, similar was radical enough for it to be banned by bothCatholics and Protestants. Picart’s engravings and sketches are beauti-fully reproduced throughout.

BL80 2008-041769 978-1-84553-218-5RReelliiggiioonnss iinn ffooccuuss;; nneeww aapppprrooaacchheess ttoo ttrraaddiittiioonn aannddccoonntteemmppoorraarryy pprraaccttiicceess..Title main entry. Ed. by Graham Harvey.Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 366 p. $29.95 (pa)The focus here is what people do when they engage in somethingscholars of religion call religion, emphasizing daily activities of ordinarypeople in different traditions around the world rather than the formalpractices of religious leaders. The contributors are presumably scholarsof religion, perhaps specializing in specific religions, though only theirnames and academic affiliation are identified. Among the topics areSikhs, shamans and animists, practitioners of indigenous religions inAfrica and the African diaspora, pagans, new religious concerns ofKoreans, Indigenous religionists in North America, Christians, andBaha’is. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

BL325 2009-042453 978-0-313-35536-3SSuuppeerrhheerrooeess aanndd ssuuppeerreeggooss;; aannaallyyzziinngg tthhee mmiinnddss bbeehhiinnddtthhee mmaasskkss..Packer, Sharon.Praeger, ©2010 275 p. $54.95Packer (psychiatry and behavioral science, Albert Einstein College ofMedicine, Yeshiva U.) examines the psychology of the superhero,beginning with the creation of Superman in 1938 and up to the present.She focuses on the external factors that add to the psychological pressuresthat prompt superhero stories; how these stories borrow from literatureand pulps in circulation at the time, including Christian and Jewish tra-ditions; and the superheroes’ most distinguishing psychological feature:the superego and their need to perform hyper-moral acts to savemankind. She also discusses topics such as sexual subtexts, female super-heroes, how superheroes change from wounded warriors to super-powered figures, the effects of family dynamics, stories of origin,negative attributes, interactions with allies and adversaries, and their riseto film popularity. Praeger is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

BL501 2009-282281 978-0-7456-4509-4AAppooccaallyyppssee;; ffrroomm aannttiiqquuiittyy ttoo tthhee eemmppiirree ooff mmooddeerrnniittyy..Hall, John R.Polity Press, ©2009 285 p. $27.95 (pa)Hall (sociology, University of California, Davis) examines the idea of theApocalypse through the lens of social ramifications. In his study, heemphasizes concepts of time through different societies as they pertainto apocalyptic thinking. He discusses the development of the idea fromthe ancient Middle East through the Judeo-Christian-Islamic interpreta-tions, concluding with the secularization of the end of the world. Whilehe mentions movements outside of the West, his main interest is inmodern manifestations of apocalyptic thinking and how they affect theactions of individuals and governments. He devotes a chapter to thesources of radical Islamic beliefs and the apocalyptic nature of the jihad.Hall’s insights into the social underpinnings of apocalyptic thought offersuggestions for understanding and dealing with what may seem to manya modern world running amok.

BL503 2009-050669 978-0-425-23253-8TThhee rreeaall hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee eenndd ooff tthhee wwoorrlldd..Newman, Sharan.Berkley Publishing Group, ©2010 313 p. $15.00 (pa)Trained in medieval history and possessed of an innate sense of curiosity,Newman is also gifted with an easy humor and a personal writing stylethat engage the reader and belie the wealth of information she’s pro-viding, in this case, into the fascinating, strongly held, and often contra-dictory theories and beliefs about the end of the world. Impressive in itsbreadth—with beliefs included from the Ancient Near East to present-daynotions of the Rapture, of scientists from the Age of Reason, and fromreligions world wide—the volume lucidly describes the beliefs involved,ties them to universal themes, and in its sensible tone and love of punssuggests that even if things are this serious, they’ve been this serioussince the beginning of time. The text is annotated and includes aglossary.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–17–

BL604 2010-000532 978-1-60509-256-0TThhee cciirrccllee wwaayy;; aa lleeaaddeerr iinn eevveerryy cchhaaiirr..Baldwin, Christina and Ann Linnea.Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2010 218 p. $18.95 (pa)The authors are cofounders of PeerSpirit Inc., an educational companythat teaches circle practice, an ancient form of group process based onequal participation and collaboration. Here, they reintroduce the circle asa method for supporting decision making in all types of organizations.They offer a step-by-step description of a circle meeting, integrating con-cepts from Jungian psychology, spiritual traditions such as Buddhismand Native America spirituality, and concepts from verbal and nonverbalcommunication. Details on preparation include ways of setting intention,the importance of visual representations of shared purpose, and rotatingpositions of leadership. Discussion encompasses the circle as a containerfor communicating stories representing core values and mission, anddealing with shadow processes. Examples of the circle in action are pro-vided from local government, health care and education. Specific casesof the circle as support for collective healing include healing issues ofrace and gender in a Southern city, and healing lives amid violence inZimbabwe. The book includes a few b&w photos and illustrations and aglossary. There is no subject index.

BL624 2009-030413 978-0-313-36645-1TThhee hheeaalliinngg ppoowweerr ooff ssppiirriittuuaalliittyy;; hhooww ffaaiitthh hheellppsshhuummaannss tthhrriivvee;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by J. Harold Ellens. (Psychology, religion, andspirituality)Greenwood Press, ©2010 989 p. $184.95Contributors mostly from psychology, but also religion, literary criticism,anthropology, healing, and other areas focus in turn on how personalspirituality, religion, and psychodynamics are connected to humanhealth. Among their perspectives are one pastor’s journey toward a con-structive and healing ministry, Jesus as martyr, meditation as empow-erment for healing, the healing potential of religious community, healingpower and shalom, the healing challenge in recovery groups today, spir-ituality in the praxis of gestalt therapy, religious influences on psy-chotherapy in Brazil, the interface of neuropsychology and theology, andthe spiritual effects and therapeutic potential of ceremonial ayahuascause. The three volumes are paged and indexed separately.

BL783 978-87-7934-253-8AAssppeeccttss ooff aanncciieenntt GGrreeeekk ccuulltt;; ccoonntteexxtt,, rriittuuaall aannddiiccoonnooggrraapphhyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Jesper Tae Jensen et al. (Aarhus studies inMediterranean antiquity; 8)Aarhus University Press, ©2009 243 p. $48.00Ancient Greek cultic practices are explored in this volume, which origi-nated at a 2004 conference at the University of Aarhus, Denmark. Jensen,of the University of Aarhus, and his colleagues present a variety of waysto approach the subject. The first essay explains the use of the term “cult”and why scholars of religion rarely use it, whereas the term is appro-priate for archaeologists. The following essays are based largely onphysical evidence, including epigraphy at archaeological sites. Three ofthe essays deal with the cult of Asklepios, particularly in Athens. Thereason for the introduction of this god of healing into Greek worship isreconsidered. Two papers treat the evidence for the location of the altarand the sanctuary. The ways in which divinity and kingship combine areshown in the Philippeion at Olympia. Two ethnomusicologists presentwork based on both texts and art. And, in Greek votive art, we find thatsometimes a basket is only a basket; or is it? There are many color pho-tographs of the artifacts. Each essay is complete with citations and a bib-liography. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

BL785 2009-041612 978-90-04-17930-1DDiivviinnee iimmaaggeess aanndd hhuummaann iimmaaggiinnaattiioonnss iinn aanncciieenntt GGrreeeecceeaanndd RRoommee..Title main entry. Ed. by Joannis Mylonopoulos. (Religions in theGraeco-Roman world; v.170)BRILL, ©2010 437 p. $200.00A June 2007 conference was held at the University of Efurt to exploreiconographic, iconologic, contextual, and methodological questions asso-ciated with divine images in Greek and Roman antiquity. Archaeologists,art historians, and classicists responded, and 13 of their studies aregathered into a volume that displays the high quality readers have cometo expect from Brill. Among the topics are goddesses and gods in Minoanand Mycenaean iconography, an approach to archaistic images in thefifth century BCE, the use of attributes in ancient Greek imagery,Arcadian cult images between religion and politics, images of Romanemperors in Greek temples, the dedication of cult statues at the altar asa Roman pictorial formula for introducing new cults, and Greek imagesof gods in the public spaces of Constantinople.

BL785 2009-011505 978-0-674-03586-7NNeeww hheerrooeess iinn aannttiiqquuiittyy;; ffrroomm AAcchhiilllleess ttoo AAnnttiinnooooss..Jones, Christopher. (Revealing antiquity; 18)Harvard University Press, ©2010 123 p. $29.95Jones (classics and history, Harvard University) traces the term “hero”through Greek and Roman antiquity to the early Christian era. While theword remained the same, the meaning altered considerably. In Homer, ahero was one who fought and died for his cause, both among the Greeksand the Trojans. This was followed by local celebrations of warriors whohad died in battle, although they might not be widely known. The termspread to include warriors who survived with honor and patriots whohad never taken up arms. Eventually it included athletes, artists andpublic benefactors. Tomb inscriptions indicate that people began com-memorating family members as heroes, so much so that some scholarshave suggested that, in this case, it just means dead. Jones argues that itstill had the meaning of a virtuous person. The deification of Hadrian’sspecial friend, Antinoos, who died in Egypt, is a late example of a failedattempt to create a new hero. The Christian use of the word “hero” todescribe martyrs has made some think that the cult of saints is just acontinuation of the cult of heroes. Jones believes that is not the case butthat Christian scholars continued to admire the heroes of Greek mythand enjoy the stories about them. This series of lectures provides newinsight into a term taken for granted by most historians.

BL820 978-87-635-0788-2FFrroomm AArrtteemmiiss ttoo DDiiaannaa;; tthhee ggooddddeessss ooff mmaann aanndd bbeeaasstt..Title main entry. Ed. by Tobias Fischer-Hansen and Birte Poulsen.(Danish Studies in classical archaeology. Acta hyperborea, 12)Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2009 585 p. $82.00 (pa)The 2009 issue of Acta Hyperborea is devoted to the many aspects of thegoddess Artemis/Diana. Articles discuss her possible origins in ancientIran and other near eastern goddesses that might have become part ofher cult. Artemis was seen as a goddess of the hunt and as a protectorof children and women in childbirth. She was also associated with themoon and healing. In the studies of Greek literary representations ofArtemis and of archeological sites associated with her in Greek andRoman territories, many of the authors strike a balance between Artemisas an imported “colonial” cult and her syncretism with local deities. Oneessay, on the relationship of Artemis with the goddess Spartan Orthia inthe seventh century BCE, is in German, with the others in English. Theissue also contains a forum on recent scholarship and book reviews.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

BL1202 978-1-903765-36-4UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg HHiinndduuiissmm..Whaling, Frank. (Understanding faith)Dunedin Academic Press, ©2010 177 p. $19.95 (pa)The Hindu tradition is very elaborate and bewildering in its complexity,says Whaling (emeritus religion, U. of Edinburgh), and though describingit is not too difficult, understanding it is. Even so, it is understandingthat he hopes to impart to readers. Among the features he discusses arethe history of the tradition, transcendence and the gods, social andpolitical life, dharma and ethics, scripture and sacred texts, aesthetics,spirituality, and Hindu philosophy and the modern world. A chronologyand glossary are among the scholarly paraphernalia. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

BL1215 2009-032026 978-81-7829-902-0PPoosstt--HHiinndduu IInnddiiaa;; aa ddiissccoouurrssee oonn DDaalliitt--BBaahhuujjaann,, ssoocciioo--ssppiirriittuuaall,, aanndd sscciieennttiiffiicc rreevvoolluuttiioonn..Ilaiah, Kancha.Sage Publications, ©2009 302 p. $34.95 (pa)Hinduism, asserts Ilaiah (political science, Osmania U., India), has setitself on the course of suicide by its adoption and maintenance of thecaste system and by its anti-production and anti-scientific ethic. Heexplores the knowledge systems of Brahmanic Hinduism and comparesthem unfavorably with those of Dalit-Bahujan (i.e. “lower caste”) com-munities, arguing that the tensions between the two (as well as over tem-poral political and economic power) could easily lead to a civil war and,even if it does not, it spells Hinduism’s doom because the spiritual andpolitical aspirations of the latter are leading to the expansion of “spiri-tually democratic” religions like Christianity, Buddhism, and Islam. Inessence, his call for a “post-Hindu” India is a call for an end to the casteculture and system, “a self-constructed disease with a self-determinedcourse.”

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –18–

BL1803 2009-033043 978-0-674-03304-7SSppeeccttaaccllee aanndd ssaaccrriiffiiccee;; tthhee rriittuuaall ffoouunnddaattiioonnss ooff vviillllaaggeelliiffee iinn NNoorrtthh CChhiinnaa..Johnson, David. (Harvard East Asian monographs; 315)Harvard University Asia Center, ©2009 390 p. $49.95Johnson (Chinese history, U. of California, Berkeley) offers a group of fas-cinating accounts detailing several different types of festivals held in theancient villages of China’s Shanxi Province. Based on historic accountsand, in some cases, continued performance, Johnson describes thetiming, symbolism, and hoped-for outcomes of the festivals, including theroles and activities of specific village families. Divided into three sections,the volume describes four New Year’s festivals, ritual opera performed invillage temples, and major temple festivals performed in SoutheasternShanxi. The latter group features processions and liturgy, each describedin detail. The result is a rich image of the beliefs of village people, theshared creative endeavor involved in organizing and performing the cel-ebrations, and the community shared among the villages that resulted.Distributed by Harvard U. Press.

BL1920 978-3-8050-0557-9TThhee ppeeooppllee aanndd tthhee DDaaoo;; nneeww ssttuuddiieess iinn CChhiinneessee rreelliiggiioonnssiinn hhoonnoouurr ooff DDaanniieell LL.. OOvveerrmmyyeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Philip Clart and Paul Crowe. (Monumentaserica monograph series; 60)Institut Monumenta Serica, ©2009 542 p. $86.11The 16 research papers emerged from a September 2002 conference atthe University of British Columbia, where Overmyer had retired from theAsian studies department 12 months earlier, when the planned con-ference had been postponed because skies above the continent wereclosed. Most of the contributors are from North America, particularly thewest coast, but Europe and China are also represented. Reflecting hisinterest in the religious life of common people, they cover popular sectsand religious movements; historical and ethnographic studies of Chinesepopular religion; and the religious life of clerics, literati, and emperors.Among specific topics are a rational choice interpretation of the trans-formation of popular religious movements of the Ming and Qingdynasties, the White Dragon Hermitage and the spread of the EightGenerals Procession Troupe in Taiwan, and Chen Shiyuan and theChinese dream theory. The price is 60 euros, converted as necessary. Thebook can be ordered via local US booksellers or via the website of thepublisher: http://www.monumenta-serica.de.

BL2400 2008-029616 978-1-84553-393-9AAnnootthheerr wwoorrlldd iiss ppoossssiibbllee;; ssppiirriittuuaalliittiieess aanndd rreelliiggiioonnss ooffgglloobbaall ddaarrkkeerr ppeeoopplleess..Title main entry. Ed. by Dwight N. Hopkins and Marjorie Lewis. (Crosscultural theologies)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 379 p. $27.95 (pa)Religious beliefs, practices, and traditions mostly of people in Africa, butalso of people in India, Japan, Australia, Hawaii, and England, areexplored by scholars of religion and leaders of religious institutions, typ-ically from or working in the country they describe. Among their topicsare key problems and issues regarding Dalits in India and the role ofreligion, recovering Jesus for outcasts in Japan, another kind of Black,trying to make sense of senseless femicide, economic shortage as a theo-logico-political problem in Zimbabwe, and some sights on poverty asmadness from traditional African spirituality and mental health.Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

BL2525 2009-047220 978-0-8133-4436-2RReelliiggiioonn aanndd ppoolliittiiccss iinn AAmmeerriiccaa;; ffaaiitthh,, ccuullttuurree,, aannddssttrraatteeggiicc cchhooiicceess,, 44tthh eedd..Fowler, Robert Booth et al.Westview Press, ©2010 363 p. $39.00 (pa)Fowler (political science, emeritus, University of Wisconsin-Madison)examines the role of religion in American politics from the early days ofthe country up to the 2008 elections. Theoretical approaches to the studyof religion and politics are explained in a style accessible to students,scholars, and general readers. After a chapter on historical roots, thebook is organized by theme rather than chronology, showing howreligion and politics come together in the voting booth, in the courts, inCongress, in interest groups, in ethnic minority communities, and in thelarger culture of the US. An appendix lists Internet resources. This fourthedition contains a new chapter on the role that religion plays in fosteringvalues and norms in American democracy.

BL2747 2009-038161 978-1-58243-564-0SSppiirriittuuaall aatthheeiissmm..Antinoff, Steve.Counterpoint, ©2009 151 p. $14.95 (pa)This slim volume by Antinoff (Philosophy and Religion, University of theArts in Philadelphia) grapples with the modern loss of faith in tradi-tional religion and spiritual practice, and in any belief that the individualhas a place in a universal order. As an answer, the author suggests a“spiritual atheism” based on the assumptions that our experience of our-selves and our world leaves us ultimately dissatisfied; that this dissatis-faction is intolerable; and that there is no God. Believers will findAntinoff’s arguments inadequate; many others may find them somewhatdifficult to follow.

BM176 978-1-58983-443-9TThhee SSttuuddiiaa pphhiilloonniiccaa aannnnuuaall;; ssttuuddiieess iinn HHeelllleenniissttiiccJJuuddaaiissmm,, vv..2211,, 22000099..Title main entry. Ed. by David T. Runia and Gregory E. Sterling. (series:title)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 161 p. $27.95This annual publication contains articles, a bibliography, and bookreviews in the field of Hellenistic Judaism studies, with emphasis onPhilo of Alexandria and his Umwelt. Runia (Queen’s College, U. ofMelbourne, Australia) and Sterling (U. of Notre Dame) compile threearticles on the theme of flight and exile in the allegorical thought ofPhilo, the concept of seeing God in his works, and the technique of per-spectival exegesis in his work, as well as seven book reviews. There is noindex.

BM487 2009-048973 978-0-8028-6435-2TThhee DDeeaadd SSeeaa ssccrroollllss ttooddaayy,, 22dd eedd..VanderKam, James C.W.B. Eerdmans, ©2010 260 p. $21.00 (pa)It was a different Today in 1994 when the first edition appeared, andVanderkam (Hebrew scriptures, U. of Notre Dame) has updated his ref-erence to account for the complete publication of the documents andfragments, subsequent discoveries and thinking about them, recent his-torical work on the period and people that produced them, and changingideas about deciphering the manuscripts and translating the texts. Hisbasic goal and format remain, providing a broad handbook on the dis-coveries at Qumran, a survey of the manuscripts, the identification of theQumran group, the Qumran Essenes, how the scrolls relate to the Oldand New Testaments, and controversies about editing and publishing.

BM487 2009-043851 978-1-58983-413-2TThhee ““mmyysstteerriieess”” ooff QQuummrraann;; mmyysstteerryy,, sseeccrreeccyy,, aannddeessootteerriicciissmm iinn tthhee DDeeaadd SSeeaa ssccrroollllss..Thomas, Samuel I. (Early Judaism and its literature; no.25)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 311 p. $39.95 (pa)The discovery of the Dead Sea Scrolls brought to light the writings of anunknown community of sectarian Jews. Thomas (Religion, CaliforniaLutheran University) makes a careful linguistic study of the more esotericof the texts, particularly following the use of the word raz, usually trans-lated as “mystery”. He is interested in the ways in which the authors,whom he believes to have been priestly scribes, the Yahad, used the“mystery” language to establish their own authority in terms of mystical,priestly language and the creation of a secret knowledge that set themapart. This informed their apocalyptic writings as well as their mysticaldesire to understand God. Much of the book is a detailed lexicology ofthe texts that traces the sources of the Yahad’s beliefs as much as pos-sible. This is a fine addition to serious Qumran studies. The Society ofBiblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill publishes thehardbound.

BM525 2003-014884 978-0-8047-6219-9TThhee ZZoohhaarr;; PPrriittzzkkeerr eedd..;; vv..55..Title main entry. Trans. by Daniel C. Matt.Stanford U. Press, ©2009 633 p. $49.95The Zohar a mystical commentary on the Torah that is the basis forKabbalah, is a difficult book to translate. Matt, who has taught Jewishmysticism at Stanford University and Hebrew, is meticulously workinghis way through the book, giving a comprehensive annotation that offersbackground and explanations of the text, both his own and those of otherscholars. This fifth book of translation opens in the middle of the bookof Exodus and ends with the Book of Concealment, an interpolation thatexplores the heart of Kabalistic teaching. Matt’s translation is lyrical andhis commentary, often many times the length of the text, is compre-hensive. Even those who are able to read the Hebrew and Aramaicoriginal will benefit from Matt’s insight into this complex work.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–19–

BM535 2009-050332 978-90-04-18255-4EEssttaabblliisshhiinngg bboouunnddaarriieess;; CChhrriissttiiaann--JJeewwiisshh rreellaattiioonnss iinneeaarrllyy ccoouunncciill tteexxttss aanndd tthhee wwrriittiinnggss ooff CChhuurrcchh FFaatthheerrss..Boddens Hosang, F.J.E. (Jewish and Christian perspectives series; v.19)BRILL, ©2010 201 p. $136.00A scholar of ancient history and theology, Boddens Hosang presents arevised version of his 2008 Ph.D. dissertation at Tilburg University, theNetherlands. In it, he explores how the legalization and gradual growthof Christianity within the Roman Empire during the fourth century afterthe conversion of Constantine impacted relations between Christians andJews both at the official level of state and church and at the level of indi-vidual believers. Among his perspectives are Jews and Christians in thescholarly debate, council texts as a different kind of source material,archaeological and literary evidence for Jews and Christians in Spainbefore and during the fourth century, the Council of Laodicea, Jewish evi-dence in Anatolia, the apostolic canons, the text of the Statuta EcclesiaeAntiqua, and latter Gallic councils from 465-541. He finds that Christiansand Jews continued to be close, and that formal changes in the structureof the church were due not to anti-Jewish sentiment, but a desire to dis-tinguish clearly between the diverging faiths. As usual with Brill, thequality of the book manufacture is excellent.

BM535 2009-030132 978-90-04-17938-7JJuuddaaiissmm aanndd CChhrriissttiiaanniittyy;; nneeww ddiirreeccttiioonnss ffoorr ddiiaalloogguuee aanndduunnddeerrssttaannddiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Alan J. Avery-Peck and Jacob Neusner. (Brillreference library of Judaism; v.28)BRILL, ©2009 300 p. $154.00The notion underlying the anthology is that Jews and Christians mustapproach each other with a clear perception of their own faith’s beliefsand world views, and be prepared to engage the other in serious debatesover the elements of faith and theology that distinguish each community.The 11 essays, reprinted from Review of Rabbinic Judaism, consider inturn the first centuries, the Middle Ages, and the modern period. Amongtheir topics are the zodiacs of the ancient synagogues; planting Christiantrees in Jewish soil; Muslim, Christian, and Jewish cultural interaction inSephardic Talmudic interpretation; Don Quixote as Talmudist and muchmás; a Judaic response to H. Richard Niebuhr’s Christ and Culture after50 years; and the agenda of Dabru Emet.

BM750 2009-050231 978-1-934843-71-0TThhee ssaaiinnttss’’ iimmpprreessaarriiooss;; ddrreeaammeerrss,, hheeaalleerrss,, aanndd hhoollyy mmeenniinn IIssrraaeell’’ss uurrbbaann ppeerriipphheerryy..Bilu, Yoram. Trans. by Haim Watzman. (Israel; society, culture, andhistory)Academic Studies Press, ©2010 354 p. $57.00In this translation of Shoshvine ha-kedoshim, which began as a lectureseries at the University of Rochester, Bilu (anthropology and psychology,Hebrew U., Jerusalem) examines the mystical cult of saints practiced byMoroccan (Mizhari) Jews who migrated to Israel in the 1970s and 1980s.To put modest pilgrimage sites for four tsaddiqim (holy men) in historicalcontext, the author interviewed the sites’ impresarios—some of them alsohealers —in fieldwork conducted in the 1980s and early 2000s. In psycho-cultural terms, he frames their attachment to a patron saint as a way tocope with challenges at different life stages. A glossary and photographswould have been appreciated.

BP163 2009-284149 978-0-230-00255-5UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg MMuusslliimm iiddeennttiittyy;; rreetthhiinnkkiinnggffuunnddaammeennttaalliissmm..Marranci, Gabriele.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 174 p. $80.00Marranci (anthropology of Islam, U. of Western Sydney, Australia) rejects“ism” terms such as Islamic fundamentalism or Islamism in favor of“emotional Islam,” by which he means that in the process of Islamiccommunity formation, it is the dynamics of environment, autobio-graphical self, emotions, and identity that really matter. He proceeds toargue that this emotional Islam imbues ideas of justice with new valuesand can become an ideology of justice that is linked with an emotionalideology of tawhid (affirmation of the oneness of God) and that it iswithin this shift that the individual formation of emotional Islambecomes part of the group or movement. Finally, he argues that this emo-tional Islam is engaged in a competition for a hegemonic definitionwithin “a clash of ethos and values in the form of an epistemologicalrelationship: the ‘civilised’ and the ‘civilisable’.”

BP172 978-0-8028-6380-5AA ccoommmmoonn wwoorrdd;; MMuusslliimmss aanndd CChhrriissttiiaannss oonn lloovviinngg GGooddaanndd nneeiigghhbboorr..Title main entry. Ed. by Miroslav Volf et al.W.B. Eerdmans, ©2010 242 p. $14.00 (pa)In October 2007, Muslim religious leaders released the letter “A CommonWord Between US and You” proposing the two commandments asexpressing the most basic attitudes, values, and practices shared by thesister religions; shortly after, leaders from a wide spectrum of Christiantraditions responded with the letter “Loving God and Neighbor Together”welcoming the initiative. For all the good will, the exchange did leavequestions, particularly whether Christians and Muslims mean the samething when they profess love of God and neighbor. Here religiousscholars and political leaders from Muslim and Christian countriesdiscuss invitation and response, Muslim perspectives, Christian perspec-tives, frequently asked questions, and the political significance. There isno index.

BP173 2009-031610 978-0-313-37223-0PPoolliittiiccaall IIssllaamm ffrroomm MMuuhhaammmmaadd ttoo AAhhmmaaddiinneejjaadd;;ddeeffeennddeerrss,, ddeeffrraaccttoorrss,, aanndd ddeeffiinniittiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph Morrison Skelly.Praeger Security International, ©2010 281 p. $49.95Skelly (history, College of Mount Saint Vincent) brings together contribu-tions from the fields of anthropology, philosophy, theology, history, eco-nomics, political science, and international relations on aspects ofpolitical Islam or Islamism in history and contemporary times. Itexamines Islamist movements in Somalia, Egypt, Ghana, Iran, Iraq,Palestine, and Pakistan; important theorists from early writers such asIbn Khaldun (1332-1406 AD) to contemporary figures such as al-Qaeda’sAyman al-Zawahiri; and Islamist doctrines such as istishhad (deliberatemartyrdom) and takfir (apostasy). All of the contributors are membersof the Association for the Study of the Middle East and Africa and thepapers were taken from that organization’s April 2008 inaugural con-ference in Washington.

BQ4570 2009-031690 978-0-393-70579-9ZZeenn aanndd ppssyycchhootthheerraappyy;; ppaarrttnneerrss iinn lliibbeerraattiioonn..Bobrow, Joseph.W.W. Norton, ©2010 246 p. $27.50Bobrow views the interplay of emotional/personal and spiritual/ uni-versal development from his complementary paths as a psychologist-psy-choanalyst and Zen master (founder, Deep Streams Institute, SanFrancisco). In treating trauma, attachment, boundary and related patientissues, he compares and contrasts models of the mind, focusing onattention (dhyana), awakening consciousness (kenso), and transformativeexperience from the perspectives of Zen Buddhism and psychotherapy.

BR65 2009-051703 978-90-04-17627-0CClleemmeenntt ooff AAlleexxaannddrriiaa oonn ttrriiaall;; tthhee eevviiddeennccee ooff ““hheerreessyy””ffrroomm PPhhoottiiuuss’’ BBiibblliiootthheeccaa..Ashwin-Siejkowski, Piotr. (Supplements to Vigiliae Christianae; v.101)BRILL, ©2010 185 p. $132.00A specialist in early Christianity and neplatonism, Ashwin-Seijkowski (U.of Chichester, England) has expanded the final chapter of his 2008Clement of Alexandria into a separate independent study. In order to illu-minate otherwise unknown aspects of the second century theologian, heexplores concepts from his lost work Hypotyposeis as summarized in the109th codex of Photios’ (c.820-893 CE) Bibliotheca. In particular, he looksfor evidence in Clement’s extant work of the eight controversial hereticalopinions that Photo outlined briefly without extensive quotation.Arranged in sections on metaphysics, logos-theology, and anthropology,they are the existence of eternal matter and the eternity of ideas, beliefin many worlds before Adam was created, two logoi of the father, theassumption that the Son of God is a creature, the docetic view of Christ,the transmigration of souls, the creation of Eve from Adam in a blas-phemous and shameful way, and sexual encounters of angels withhuman women and the children conceived

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –20–

BR115 2009-027022 978-0-9823720-1-2AAnnnniiee DDiillllaarrdd aanndd tthhee WWoorrdd mmaaddee fflleesshh;; aann iinnccaarrnnaattiioonnaalltthheeoorryy ooff llaanngguuaaggee..Warren, Colleen.Lehigh University Press, ©2010 162 p. $39.50Warren (writing and American literature, Taylor U.) explores howAmerican writer Dillard’s approach to writing is influenced by the GreekChristian notion of Christ as logos, or word. She considers the worldmade flesh, the stones cry out, the word made flesh, teach us to pray,the meaning of the word, sacramental meaning, the author as sacrifice,and moth and candle. Distributed in the US by Associated UniversityPresses.

BR115 2008-039136 978-1-84553-290-1TThhee cciittyy iinn bbiibblliiccaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Rogerson, J. W and John Vincent. (Biblical challenges in the contem-porary world)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 122 p. $26.95 (pa)Galilee was lost to the Northern Kingdom, Israel, in the ninth centuryBCE, and recovered by Judah only about a century before Jesus, explainRogerson (emeritus biblical studies, U. of Sheffield and canon emeritusof Sheffield Cathedral) and Vincent, founder and emeritus directors ofthe Urban Theology Unit in Sheffield, and that is a major reason that thecity plays almost no part of the Old Testament but plays a major part inthe New. They argue that as a result, the notion and fact of urban set-tings were integral to the birth and development of Christianity butalways peripheral to Judaism. Rogerson covers the history and archae-ology and biblical perspectives on the Israelite city. Then Vincentexamines the city in the New Testament through the lenses of thepolitical situation, the world of Jesus, the first Christians, and perspec-tives for modern cities. Distributed in North America by The DavidBrown Book Co.

BR115 2008-051750 978-1-58901-489-3JJuussttiiccee aanndd rriigghhttss;; CChhrriissttiiaann aanndd MMuusslliimm ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess;;pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..Building bridges Seminar (5th: 2006: Washington, D.C.) Ed. by MichaelIpgrave.Georgetown U. Press, ©2009 181 p. $24.95 (pa)Scholars of religion, law, and culture ponder the concepts and practicesof justice, not overtly comparing the sister faiths, but noting those fea-tures that are and are not shared. In sections on scriptural foundations,evolving traditions, and the modern world, they first offer topical essays,then analyze a battery of text from the period being considered. Theycover the ruler and ruled in Islam, Biblical perspectives on divine justiceand political authority, religious orthodoxy and religious rights inMedieval Islam, political authority and religious freedom in the Westfrom Constantine to Jefferson, and human rights and the freedom ofreligion now.

BR162 2009-010005 978-0-7546-6725-4TThhee ppoowweerr ooff rreelliiggiioonn iinn llaattee aannttiiqquuiittyy;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..Biennial Conference on Shifting Frontiers in Late Antiquity (7th: 2007:Boulder, CO) Ed. by Andrew Cain and Noel Lenski.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 464 p. $124.95The 28 papers of this collection were first presented at the 7th BiennialShifting Frontiers in Late Antiquity Conference, held at the U. of ColoradoBoulder in March, 2007, then substantially revised for publication.Representing current trends of research by contributors from the US,Canada, Europe, New Zealand, and Australia, the papers are divided bytheme and geography. Three of the papers address aspects ofConstantine’s vision of the cross. A sampling of other topics includes theChurch’s attitude towards infant exposure, oath making under Justinian,the limits of religious power, papal power in Rome, and examples ofChristian religious practice in Merovingian Gaul. Written by leadingscholars, heavily annotated, and including a wealth of material fromprimary sources and archaeology, the papers of this volume mark a sig-nificant addition to the study of Late Antique power and religion.

BR516 978-3-8329-4823-8RReelliiggiioonn aanndd ssttaattee——ffrroomm sseeppaarraattiioonn ttoo ccooooppeerraattiioonn??;; lleeggaall--pphhiilloossoopphhiiccaall rreefflleeccttiioonnss ffoorr aa ddee--sseeccuullaarriizzeedd wwoorrlldd;;pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..IVR Cracow Special Workshop (23rd: Cracow, Poland) Ed. by Bart C.Labuschagne and Ari M. Solon. (ARSP Beiheft; no.18)Nomos, ©2009 109 p. $43.00 (pa)Six essays present perspectives from legal philosophy on the relationshipbetween religion and the state and whether it could or should be dif-ferent than it is now. They discuss models of the relationship of churchand state and the freedom of religion; church and state relations inKant’s political philosophy; state, religion, and toleration; an existentialanthropological inquiry into the fulfillment of the individual as the fun-damental link between religion and secular law; the crisis of legal posi-tivism from the pragmatic perspective of the ancient covenant code inExodus 20-23; and the Bible and the capital jury as hermeneutical com-munities in conflict. No index is provided. Co-published by Franz SteinerVerlag. Distributed in North America by ISBS.

BR517 2009-045623 978-1-4331-0809-9EEmmppiirriiccaall ttrraaddiittiioonn iinn AAmmeerriiccaann lliibbeerraall rreelliiggiioouuss tthhoouugghhtt,,11886600--11996600..Peden, W. Creighton. (American liberal religious thought; v.10)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 298 p. $80.95Exploring the tradition by sampling the thought of significant contrib-utors to it, Peden (emeritus philosophy, Augusta State U.) begins bylooking at four figures from the last half of the 19th century who par-ticipated in the Free Religious Association, which supported free religion,the scientific method, and evolution. They are Francis Ellingwood Abbot,William James Potter, David Atwood Wasson, and Minot Judson Savage.Then he turns to eight people associated with the Chicago School, rangingin date from Shailer Mathews (1863-1941) through Edward ScibnerAmers (1870-1958) and Shirley Jackson Case (1872-1947) to BernardEugene Meland (1899-1993). In each case, he is only concerned with theirthinking about the interplay between science, philosophy, and religion.

BR526 2009-022317 978-0-87413-083-6SSeeaarrcchhiinngg ffoorr GGoodd iinn tthhee ssiixxttiieess..Williams, David R.Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2010 285 p. $29.50A popular saying of the Sixties was that one could “find god at thebottom of a Dixie cup”. This referred to revelations that occurred duringan LSD trip. Williams, a scholar and Sixties survivor, traces the spiritualjourney of those who came of age in the late 1960s. It is, he admits, apersonal view. He divides the book by the main issues that concerned thehippie generation: the war in Viet Nam, the Civil Rights movement, therejection of sexual moral standards, and last but not least, the search forself-understanding. That eternal quest for meaning amidst chaos is theunderlying theme of Williams’ recapitulation of the era. Along the wayhe remembers the icons of the time: the Kennedys, Martin Luther King,Malcolm X, Ken Kesey, Joan Didion, the Beatles, Eldridge Cleaver, BobDylan and many more. He puts them against the background of the reli-gious inquiry of Martin Luther and the Puritans. The story ends with thedemise of the dream and the atrocities of the Manson Family, along withthe suggestion that George W. Bush may have been the last hippie pres-ident. For the many still trying to understand the sixties, what happenedand how it all went wrong, this will be a compelling read.

BR796 978-0-7165-3052-7TThhee cchhuurrcchh ooff IIrreellaanndd aanndd tthhee tthhiirrdd hhoommee rruullee bbiillll..Scholes, Andrew. (New directions in Irish history)Irish Academic Press, ©2010 180 p. $64.95Loosing upon the world his 2008 Ph.D. dissertation at Queen’s Universityin Belfast, Scholes explores the role of the Church of Ireland in the eventssurrounding the third Home Rule Bill from the general elections of 1910to the December 1918 general election. His treatment is generally chrono-logical, but pivots on themes within each period. The topics include IrishUnionism 1910-11, the episcopate and Ulster Day, the clergy and theUlster Covenant, the Ulster Volunteer Force 1913-14, the outbreak of theGreat War, the Easter Rising and partition, and the Irish Convention 1917-18. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–21–

BR1642 2009-028077 978-0-8248-3375-6BBoorrnn aaggaaiinn;; eevvaannggeelliiccaalliissmm iinn KKoorreeaa..Lee, Timothy S.U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2010 228 p. $40.00Lee (history of Christianity and Asian church studies, Texas Christian U.)traces the rise of evangelical Christianity in Korea. The stages of his nar-rative are breakthrough for a new moral order 1885-1919; conflict, intro-version, and a tradition of Korean revivalists 1920-53; evangelicalismtakes off in South Korea 1953-88; and the intensely practical and devo-tional character of Korean evangelicalism. An epilogue describes thebeleaguered success of Korean evangelicalism in the 1990s. The studybegan as his doctoral dissertation at the University of Chicago at anundisclosed date.

BR1642 2009-032352 978-1-4094-0083-7MMaappppiinngg tthhee eenndd ttiimmeess;; AAmmeerriiccaann eevvaannggeelliiccaall ggeeooppoolliittiiccssaanndd aappooccaallyyppttiicc vviissiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by by Jason Dittmer and Tristan Sturm. (Criticalgeopolitics)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 261 p. $49.95 (pa)Dittmer (human geography, University College, London) and Sturm (geog-raphy, UCLA) introduce and contribute to a collection of essays on theinternational spread of American evangelical religious belief, particularlythat associated with apocalyptic prophecy. The authors discuss the back-ground of the movement and its current diversity. Common points are abelief in the Rapture, the Antichrist and the final battle between goodand evil focusing on Israel, which must remain a Jewish state. Thebelievers differ on whether they should play a role in government orleave everything to God. Intense missionary activity is important in mostgroups, which often leads to increased concern for the welfare of others.The pervasiveness of the belief that these are the End Times is exploredin articles on evangelical novels and non-fiction. The ramifications ofgovernments operating on evangelical millennial principles are men-tioned in several places with a consideration of how it influenced theG.W. Bush decision to invade Iraq. This is a timely study that should givereaders much food for thought.

BR1720 978-1-4331-0284-4TThhee lliiffee ooff AAuugguussttiinnee,, pptt.. 11:: CChhiillddhhoooodd ttoo EEppiissccooppaallccoonnsseeccrraattiioonn ((335544--339955))..Sébastien, Louis. (Mémoire eccléiastique; v.13)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 367 p. $90.95Louis Sébastien, Le Nain de Tillemont (1637-98) compiled all the primaryand secondary material he could find on Augustine of Hippo (354-430)for the 13th volume of his series of biographies; it was published posthu-mously in 1700. Such documentary biography was a popular genre inFrance at the time. Frederick Van Fleteren (philosophy, LaSalle U.,Philadelphia) has translated the French text of a 1732 Venice edition, withthe goal of making it easily read, rather than to preserve the idiosyn-cracies of the 17th-century style. He also provides modern notes and ref-erences to the works Louis excerpted.

BS186 2009-027098 978-1-58983-356-2TTrraannssllaattiioonn tthhaatt ooppeenneetthh tthhee wwiinnddooww;; rreefflleeccttiioonnss oonn tthheehhiissttoorryy aanndd lleeggaaccyy ooff tthhee KKiinngg JJaammeess BBiibbllee..Title main entry. Ed. by David G. Burke. (Society of biblical literaturebiblical scholarship in North America; no.23)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 274 p. $34.95 (pa)Contributors bring perspectives of religion and the Bible, classical andearly modern literature and history, and the history of the book tostudies on the official English translation of the Bible, first published in1611. They cover the world of Bible translation before the King JamesVersion, its making, and the world of translation after it. Specific topicsinclude its legacy, the textual sources, rediscovering the preface and notesto the original, the character and revision history of the different editions,the King James and Jewish Bible translations, its influence on AfricanAmericans and their churches, and its place in English literature.Appendices present the text of the original preface and list words thathave changed meaning over the past four centuries. The Society ofBiblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill publishes thehardbound.

BS410RReevviieeww ooff bbiibblliiccaall lliitteerraattuurree;; vv..1111 ((22000099))..Title main entry. Ed. by Jan G. van der Watt. (Series: title)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 574 p. $50.00 (pa)The 164 reviews appearing in this year’s edition cover a wide range ofthemes and issues current in biblical studies today, from individualbooks of the Bible, to the Bible and culture, archaeology and history,Judaism, and hermeneutics and methods. The reviews are groupedalphabetically by theme, allowing specialists to browse relatively currentworks in their field (the books were published between 2005-2007). Thereviews are critical and detailed, written by a specialist in the field, manyof them outside the US, and all of them offering insights into the state ofresearch as well as the topic under consideration. Indexes are byauthor/editor, reviewer, and publisher. There is no ISBN for this annualperiodical. Its ISSN is 1099-0046.

BS476 2009-037237 978-1-58983-444-6MMeetthhoodd mmaatttteerrss;; eessssaayyss oonn tthhee iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn ooff tthheeHHeebbrreeww BBiibbllee iinn hhoonnoorr ooff DDaavviidd LL.. PPeetteerrsseenn..Title main entry. Ed. by Joel M. LeMon and Kent Harold Richards.(Society of Biblical Literature resources for biblical study; no.56)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 624 p. $49.95 (pa)In a volume dedicated to an Emory University scholar committed toclarity in teaching interpretative approaches and methodologies in bib-lical studies, LeMon (Old Testament, Candler School of Theology, EmoryU.) and Richards (Society of Biblical Literature) introduce 30 essays of themethodological and reflection types that treat broader issues of interpre-tative approaches to the Hebrew Bible. In this resource for introductorybiblical studies, international contributors address questions onapproaches regarding their distinguishing characteristics, relation toother methods, and historical background. Examples illustrate the appli-cation of traditional and emerging approaches (e.g., source criticism,textual criticism, comparative, anthropological, psychological). TheSociety of Biblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill pub-lishes the hardbound.

BS476 2009-504071 978-0-567-03424-3SSccrriippttuurree;; aa vveerryy tthheeoollooggiiccaall pprrooppoossaall..Paddison, Angus.T&T Clark, ©2009 170 p. $39.95 (pa)The theology he proposes, explains Paddison (theology, U. of Winchester,England), rises from a series of convictions in relation to Scripture’sstatus, location, and life in the church. In particular, he argues thatcalling the Old and New Testament Scripture removes them from therealms of history and literature, and commissions them to a role in thesaving purposes of God. He covers locating Scripture; Scripture thechurch, ethics: why we need no “and;” Scripture and doctrine, or There’sno such thing as sola scriptura and it is a good thing too; preaching andScripture; and Scripture, participation, and universities. T&T Clark is animprint of Continuum.

BS480 978-87-635-3027-9CCaannoonn aanndd ccaannoonniicciittyy;; tthhee ffoorrmmaattiioonn aanndd uussee ooff ssccrriippttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Einar Thomassen.Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2010 232 p. $48.00Eleven academics in religious studies based in Norway, Greece, and theU.S. have contributed essays to this fine collection, offering new view-points and approaches to the formation of the biblical canon and theprocess of interpretation that followed. Among the paper topics are an in-depth analysis of Codex II from Nag Hammadi; the formation of the NewTestament; two papers, by George Aichele (emeritus, Adrian College,Michigan) and Hugo Lundhaug (theology, U. of Oslo, Norway), offeringapproaches to the canon using semiotics; and discussion of the theologyof Norwegian Ole Hallesby. The volume, which is not indexed, is dis-tributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –22–

BS500 2009-045014 978-1-58983-202-2HHiissttoorryy ooff bbiibblliiccaall iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn;; vv..11:: FFrroomm tthhee OOllddTTeessttaammeenntt ttoo OOrriiggeenn..Reventlow, Henning Graf. Trans. by Leo G. Perdue. (Society of BiblicalLiterature resources for biblical study; no.50)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 243 p. $29.95 (pa)Reventlow (emeritus Old Testament exegesis and theology and Protestanttheology, U. of the Ruhr, Germany) begins here a four-volume seriestracing more than two millennia of biblical interpretation. This firstvolume covers biblical interpretation within the Bible, between the testa-ments, the Old Testament in the New, and the early centuries of theCommon Era. Among specific topics are the Torah as a norm forredaction and interpretation, allegorical interpretation of scripture asexemplified by Philo of Alexandria, the sermons in the Books of Actsshowing how the Old Testament is prophecy about Christ, Christ sur-passes the Old Testament institutions in the Epistle to the Hebrews, earlyrabbinic interpretation of the Bible, the apostolic fathers, and Origen’sway of the soul toward perfection. Epochen der Bibelauslegung Band I: VonAlten Testament bis Origenes was published in 1990 by Verlag C. H. BeckoHG, Munich. Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paperbackedition; Brill publishes the hardback.

BS500 2009-045014 978-1-58983-455-2HHiissttoorryy ooff bbiibblliiccaall iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn;; vv..22:: FFrroomm LLaattee AAnnttiiqquuiittyyttoo tthhee eenndd ooff tthhee MMiiddddllee AAggeess..Reventlow, Henning. Trans. by James O. Duke. (Society of BiblicalLiterature resources for biblical study; no.61)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 313 p. $36.95 (pa)Reventlow’s (emeritus Old Testament exegesis and theology, U. of theRuhr, Germany) four-volume series Epochen der Bibelauslegung was pub-lished during the 1990s by Verlag C. H. Beck, Munich. Theodore ofMospuestia, as representative of famous biblical interpreters of lateantiquity, begins this second volume, and is quickly joined by Jerome,Ambrose, and Augustine along with others. Other sections cover medi-ators between antiquity and the Middle Ages moving from Gregory theGreat and Isidore of Seville in the south to Bede, Alcuin, and John Scotusin the north. Bible and theology and Jewish interpreters of the MiddleAges include Abelard, Thomas Aquinas, Bonaventure, Rashi, andAbraham ibn Ezra under Arabic influence. The late-medieval end comeswith Nicholas of Lyra learning from the Jews, and John Wyclif’s Bible.Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paperback edition; Brill pub-lishes the hardback.

BS579 2009-035122 978-1-58983-441-5MMootthheerr GGoooossee,, MMootthheerr JJoonneess,, MMoommmmiiee DDeeaarreesstt;; bbiibblliiccaallmmootthheerrss aanndd tthheeiirr cchhiillddrreenn..Title main entry. Ed. by Cheryl A. Kirk-Duggan and Tina Pippin.(Society of Biblical Literature Semeia studies; no.61)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 232 p. $30.95 (pa)Editors Kirk-Duggan (Theology and Women’s Studies, Shaw UniversityDivinity School) and Pippin (Religious Studies, Agnes Scott College) haveassembled essays that deconstruct motherhood in the Bible, comparingbiblical mothers to mothers in popular media, history, culture, and thearts. The diversity of methods they employ prompts a rich discussion onthe deconstruction of motherhood, offering new ways of envisioning bothbiblical and contemporary motherhood. This book will appeal to stu-dents and scholars in religious studies and women’s studies. The Societyof Biblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill publishesthe hardbound.

BS657 2009-455851 978-1-86239-269-4GGeeoollooggyy aanndd rreelliiggiioonn;; aa hhiissttoorryy ooff hhaarrmmoonnyy aanndd hhoossttiilliittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Martina Kölbl-Ebert. (Geological Society specialpublication; no.310)Geological Society Pubg. House, ©2009 357 p. $190.00Contributors mostly from the geological sciences but also from religionexplore the relationship between geology and mostly Christianity fromthe perspectives of the shift from mythology to the EuropeanEnlightenment, The Flood and the age of the Earth, geology within reli-gious organizations, geological clerics and Christian geologists, evolution,the history of creationism, and theology and creationism. Among thetopics are explanations of the Earth’s features and origins in pre-MeijiJapan, an amicable dissociation of geology and Genesis regarding theBiblical Flood and the geological deluge, studies by Jesuits of earthquakesand seismological stations, some Australian geological clerics of the 19thand 20th centuries, the scientific career of English Darwinian JamesBuckman (1841-84) thwarted by religious prejudice, faith and geology atevangelical Wheaton College, and a Catholic perspective on the history ofthe doctrine of creation. Distributed in the US by The Geological Society.

BS1091 2009-025587 978-1-58243-514-5AA lliitteerraarryy BBiibbllee..Title main entry. Trans. by David Rosenberg.Counterpoint, ©2009 680 p. $35.00American poet and Old Testament scholar Rosenberg offers a version,part verse and part prose, of The Torah, The Prophets, and what he callsThe Scrolls. Introducing each book, he discusses its historical, religious,and literary features. In final essays, he explores how the Bible cameabout and how this book came about.

BS1198 2008-041355 978-1-84553-500-1TThhee pprroodduuccttiioonn ooff pprroopphheeccyy;; ccoonnssttrruuccttiinngg pprroopphheeccyy aannddpprroopphheettss iinn YYeehhuudd..Title main entry. Ed. by Diana V. Edelman and Ehud Ben Zvi.(BibleWorld)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 235 p. $32.95 (pa)Underlying the anthology is the notion that the production and receptionof authoritative books stands at the center recent debates about the socialand intellectual history of Persian Yehud and pre-Maccabean HellenisticJudea and about the books themselves. Biblical scholars from Europeand the US ponder such aspects of the issue as the fixing of the divineword from prophets to prophetic books, what is known about Amos,Persian-Empire spirituality and the genesis of prophetic books, thetriumph of Torah over prophecy, and the formation of the Book ofJeremiah as a supplement to the so-called deuteronomistic history. The 11essays are revised from presentations at 2006 and 2007 sessions of theEuropean Association of Biblical Studies. Distributed in North Americaby The David Brown Book Co.

BS1199 2009-048245 978-1-4331-0704-7RReessoollvviieennddoo;; nnaarrrraattiivveess ooff ssuurrvviivvaall iinn tthhee HHeebbrreeww BBiibblleeaanndd iinn CCuubbaa ttooddaayy..García-Alfonso, Cristina. (Studies in biblical literature; v.132)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 119 p. $63.95Ordained in the Baptist church of her native Cuba, García-Alfonso thentravelled to the US for graduate study. Here she compares issues of lifeand survival in current Cuban reality with three stories in the HebrewBible. She begins by describing the economic hardship and shortage ofgoods that afflicted the island after the fall of the Socialist bloc, and howCubans had to find creative ways to survive, a process she callsresolviendo, or making do. They she looks at the story of Rahab in Joshua2:1-23, the story of Jael in Judges 4:1-23, and the story of Jephthah andhis daughter in Judges 10:6-12:7.

BS1199 2009-004613 978-1-58983-409-5SSiiggnn ooff tthhee ccoovveennaanntt;; cciirrccuummcciissiioonn iinn tthhee pprriieessttllyyttrraaddiittiioonn..Bernat, David A. (Ancient Israel and its literature; no.3)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 163 p. $24.95 (pa)Bernat (Biblical studies, Hebrew College, Newton Center, MA) considersthe biblical passages dealing with the covenant of circumcision, askingwhat it actually means. He notes that in the time of Abraham, most menfrom Egypt and the Middle East were circumcised. Therefore, he searchesthe relevant texts to determine what made this a sign of a covenantbetween God and Israel. He mentions the role circumcision has in estab-lishing status and that even when the Torah speaks of the “circumcisionof the heart” rather than the body, women are not considered. The linksbetween Passover and circumcision are discussed from both a religiousand anthropological standpoint. He also looks at the threatened punish-ments if the covenant is broken. Bernat closes with the encounterbetween the Jews and the Greco-Roman world, where circumcision setJewish men apart from the dominant society. One striking fact is that theactual ritual is not described anywhere in the Bible. The act of circum-cision is apparently sufficient without priestly oversight. The Society ofBiblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill publishes thehardbound.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–23–

BS1235 2009-032947 978-1-930675-69-8NNaahhmmaanniiddeess oonn GGeenneessiiss;; tthhee aarrtt ooff bbiibblliiccaall ppoorrttrraaiittuurree..Levine, Michelle J. (Brown Judaic studies; no.350)Brown Judaic Studies, ©2009 482 p. $69.95Levine (Jewish Studies, Yeshiva University)analyzes Nahmanides’ (c. 1194-1270)exegesis of the book of Genesis through the dual lenses of medievalJewish philosophies and modern literary theory. She concentrates onNahmanides’ understanding of the characters as both historical per-sonages and conduits of divine communication. Nahmanides lived inSpanish Christian Gerona but his education included the work ofNorthern French Tosafists and Provencal Kabbalists along with theSpanish school of peshat in which the literal meaning of the text is con-sidered first. Levine’s examination of the ways in which Nahmanidesinterprets the Biblical characters shows the subtlety of his thought as wellas his desire to understand the messages within the stories. Her workwill be of interest to Biblical scholars and historians of medieval phi-losophy. Distributed by Society of Biblical Literature.

BS1235 2009-048179 978-3-11-022433-7AA nneeww gglliimmppssee ooff ddaayy oonnee;; iinntteerrtteexxttuuaalliittyy,, hhiissttoorryy ooffiinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn,, aanndd GGeenneessiiss 11::11--55..Giere, S.D. (Beihefte zur Zeitschrift für die neutestamentlicheWissenschaft und die Kunde der alteren Kirche; Bd.172)De Gruyter, ©2009 359 p. $155.00Revising his 2006 doctoral dissertation for the University of St. Andrews,Giere explores the living nature of texts by examining the intertextualityof an individual text, Genesis 1:1-5 in Hebrew and Greek texts up to about200 CE. His emphasis in on implications of an individual text’s intertex-tuality for the history of interpretation. He discusses intertextuality andmethod, the Hebrew Bible, Greek equivalents of texts in the HebrewBible, intertextual afterlives in Hebrew and Greek, and the tapestries ofthe passage.

BS1485 2009-040646 978-1-58983-422-4SSoolloommoonn’’ss vviinneeyyaarrdd;; lliitteerraarryy aanndd lliinngguuiissttiicc ssttuuddiieess iinn tthheeSSoonngg ooff SSoonnggss..Noegel, Scott B. and Gary A. Rendsburg. (Society of Biblical Literatureancient Israel and its literature; no.1)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 267 p. $34.95 (pa)Noegel (Biblical and ancient Near Eastern Studies, University ofWashington) and Rendsburg (Jewish history, Rutgers University) put forththe proposal that the Bible book, “The Song of Songs” was written about900 BCE, in the northern dialect of ancient Hebrew. They further believethat it was written by one person and may have been in response to whatwas seen as excesses by King Solomon. To support their argument, theyexamine the Song word by word, noting linguistic anomalies. Theydissect it in terms of alliterative style, literary conventions and similar-ities to Arabic poetic forms. The work is meticulous and carefully foot-noted as is the translation that is appended to the text. The Society ofBiblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill publishes thehardbound.

BS1515 2009-011552 978-1-58983-425-5TThhee ddeesseerrtt wwiillll bblloooomm;; ppooeettiicc vviissiioonnss iinn IIssaaiiaahh..Title main entry. Ed. by A. Joseph Everson and Hyun Chul Paul Kim.(Ancient Israel and its literature; no.4)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 299 p. $37.95 (pa)In this third collection of exegesis on the biblical book of Isaiah, Everson(religion, California Lutheran College, CA) and Kim (biblical studies,Methodist Theological School, Ohio) and their contributors examine thepoetry and mysticism of the book. The poetic imagery and symbolismare looked at in terms of what the reader/listener would understand atthe time of composition and how the perception of meaning has beenadapted over the centuries. The book begins with an indictment of thesins of the Hebrew people but ends with a prophecy of hope and therenewal of Zion. Papers discuss the composition of Isaiah and its manysymbolic references to food, marriage and the keeping of the covenant.The scholars, all well versed in biblical Hebrew, provide thoughtfulinsights into the enigmatic book that many Christians feel prefigures thecoming of Jesus. The Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paper-bound edition; Brill publishes the hardbound.

BS1515 2009-042240 978-1-58983-453-8SSttrraannggeellyy ffaammiilliiaarr;; pprroottooffeemmiinniisstt iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonnss ooffppaattrriiaarrcchhaall bbiibblliiccaall tteexxttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Nancy Calvert-Koyzis and Heather E. Weir.Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 291 p. $35.95 (pa)Most of the 20 essays are from the Recovering Female Interpretation ofthe Bible Consultation at the November 2008 meeting of the Society inBoston. Covering interpretations on texts of terror and on Paulinehierarchical texts, they examine such topics as the articles by RobertKnetsch and Amand Benckhuysen on trusting in the God of their fathers,Judges 11 in the thought of Arcangela Tarabotti (1604-52), 19th-centuryfeminist responses to the laws in the Pentateuch, Antoinette BrownBlackwell as a pioneering exegete and Congregational minister, LucyMeyer’s biblical interpretation and the deaconess movement, and MaryBaker Eddy as a liberating interpreter of the Pauline corpus. The Societyof Biblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill publishesthe hardbound.

BS2585 2009-035702 978-90-04-17962-2MMaarrkk’’ss mmeemmoorryy rreessoouurrcceess aanndd tthhee ccoonnttrroovveerrssyy ssttoorriieess((MMaarrkk 22::11--33::66));; aann aapppplliiccaattiioonn ooff tthhee ffrraammee tthheeoorryy ooffccooggnniittiivvee sscciieennccee ttoo tthhee MMaarrkkaann oorraall--aauurraall nnaarrrraattiivvee..Park, Yoon-Man. (Linguistic biblical studies; v.2)BRILL, ©2010 342 p. $169.00The theory, explains Park (New Testament, Taeshin Christian U., Daegu,South Korea), posits that the meaning of a linguistic or thematic unit canonly be properly understood against the background of a particular bodyof knowledge and assumptions. He applies it to the Gospel of Mark toelucidate how the text may have communicated to its original first-century audiences. It is important to realize that the Gospel, though awritten document, was read out and heard, he says, and so was recalledfrom memory rather than read off the page by most people. He beginsby explaining frames, how he uses them, and how they relate to oral-aural communication. They he combines them all to discuss such topicsas frames and the organization of the controversy stories, how framesbind episodic units in terms of their prototypical event sequence, framesorganized by sentences, and the five episodes of the controversy stories.The study is revised from his 2008 doctoral dissertation at the Universityof Toronto.

BS2615 2007-035191 978-1-58983-392-0JJoohhnn,, JJeessuuss,, aanndd hhiissttoorryy;; vv..22:: AAssppeeccttss ooff hhiissttoorriicciittyy iinn tthheeFFoouurrtthh GGoossppeell..Title main entry. Ed. by Paul N. Anderson et al. (Early Christianity andits literature; no.2)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 455 p. $49.95 (pa)Scholars of the New Testament present a second phase of a projectcarried out by a study group of the Society dedicated to investigating thenexus between Jesus, the Gospel of John, and secular history. Taking thebook section by section, they consider such topics as the symbology ofthe serpent in the Gospel, the royal official and the historical Jesus,feeding the five thousand and the eucharist, whether the Bethany familyin John 11-12 is history or fiction, John’s Last Supper and the resur-rection dialogues, and Peter’s rehabilitation in John 21:15-19 and theadoption of sinners. The 2007 first volume is subtitled Critical Appraisalsof Critical Views. The Society of Biblical Literature publishes the paper-bound edition; Brill publishes the hardbound.

BS2651 2006-283337 978-0-567-56398-9BBeeiinngg ccoonnffoorrmmeedd ttoo CChhrriisstt iinn ccoommmmuunniittyy;; aa ssttuuddyy ooffmmaattuurriittyy,, mmaattuurraattiioonn,, aanndd tthhee llooccaall cchhuurrcchh iinn tthheeuunnddiissppuutteedd PPaauulliinnee EEppiissttlleess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000066))Samra, James G. (Library of New Testament studies; 320)T&T Clark, ©2008 259 p. $49.95 (pa)Now a senior minister at Calvary Church in Grand Rapids, Michigan,Samra presents his 2004 doctoral dissertation in theology at theUniversity of Oxford. He argues that Paul worked diligently to start andmaintain churches because he felt they were the place and means thoughwhich believers would come to the maturity they would need on the dayof Christ. He covers the maturational aspect of Paul’s apostolic com-mission, general considerations regarding maturity and maturation, con-formity to the image of Christ as the central motif of maturity,components of the maturation process, and the role of the local com-munity in the maturation process.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –24–

BS2655 2009-504885 978-0-567-07439-3PPaauull aanndd EEppiicctteettuuss oonn llaaww;; aa ccoommppaarriissoonn..Huttunen, Niko. (Library of New Testament studies; 405. EarlyChristianity in context. T & T Clark library of biblical studies)T&T Clark, ©2009 187 p. $120.00Acknowledging the importance of Paul’s Jewish background andlearning, Huttunen (New Testament studies, U. of Helsinki, Finland)argues that the Graeco-Roman context of his life and teaching should bekept in mind. In order to tease out non-Jewish classical influences, shecompares Paul’s views of law with those of gentile philosopher Epictetus(55-135 AD). The topics are a Stoic perspective on Paul and the law, lawand the core of Epictetus’ philosophy, the fundamentals of law, the strongand the weak, difficulties with law, the anthropology and psychology oftransgression, and fulfilling the law. T&T Clark is an imprint ofContinuum.

BS2675 978-0-567-02704-7PPaauull aanndd rrhheettoorriicc..Title main entry. Ed. by J. Paul Sampley and Peter Lampe.T&T Clark, ©2010 260 p. $130.00The role of rhetoric in the letters of St. Paul has been studied by theolo-gians almost since they were written. Samply (New Testament andChristian origins, Boston University, emeritus) and Lampe (NewTestament studies, University of Heidelberg) present essays from a seriesof seminars that employ the New Rhetoric to review the Epistles. Aftergiving a background of earlier work, essays look at how studying Paul’srhetorical style and methods gives a new dimension to exegesis. Rhetoricin the context of oratory and theology broaden the base for an under-standing of Paul’s intentions. The final two essays focus on specific textsin Corinthians. The preface reminds the reader that these letters wereintended to be read aloud and therefore also acted as performance, uti-lizing more than one type of rhetorical trope.

BT40 2009-504690 978-0-567-03262-1BBaaddiioouu aanndd tthheeoollooggyy..Depoortere, Frederiek. (Philosophy and theology)T&T Clark, ©2009 158 p. $24.95 (pa)Introducing contemporary French philosopher Alain Badiou to theologi-cally minded readers, Depoortere (theology, Catholic U., Belgium) beginsby sketching the current situation of Christianity and how his ideasmight both contribute to and challenge theology. Then he looks at faithand the existence of God, Badiou on being, and first steps towards afuture theological evaluation of his ontology. Among more detailed topicsare terminological clarifications of religion and faith, the mathematicalturn, the actual infinite, Aquinas on God’s infinity and unity, and Cantoron the absolute. T&T Clark is an imprint of Continuum.

BT40 2009-013192 978-0-8047-3984-9FFrroomm ccuulltt ttoo ccuullttuurree;; ffrraaggmmeennttss ttoowwaarrddss aa ccrriittiiqquuee ooffhhiissttoorriiccaall rreeaassoonn..Taubes, Jacob. Ed. by Charlotte Elisheva Fonrobert and Amir Engel.(Cultural memory in the present)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 397 p. $24.95 (pa)This collection of 22 essays from 1953-1983, translated from the GermanVom Kult zur Kultur published in 1996, introduces Taubes (1923-1987) notonly as West Berlin’s first postwar Jewish studies professor as also as aleading interdisciplinary intellectual who had also taught at Americanuniversities. Fonrobert (religious studies, Stanford University) and Engel(German studies, Stanford) note that many of these provocative essays,on topics ranging from theology to surrealism, are responses todiscussions. The title essay (1954) treats the nature of myth as viewed inOskar Goldberg’s Gnostic-like philosophy as vs. Freudian psychoanalyticinterpretations.

BT83 2009-022438 978-1-58983-241-1TThhee BBiibbllee aanndd tthhee hheerrmmeenneeuuttiiccss ooff lliibbeerraattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Alejandro F. Botta and Pablo R. Andiñach.(Society of Biblical Literature semeia studies; no.59)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 259 p. $31.95 (pa)Bible scholars and theologians from the West and beyond explore howJudaic and Christian scripture has been and can be interpreted tosupport liberation movements. They begin with overviews of SouthAfrica, Latin America, and Germany and the rest of Old Europe. Thenthey take up specific texts and contexts, among them releasing the storyof Esau from the words of Obadiah, true fasting and unwilling hungerin Isaiah 58, and a mujerista hermeneutics of justice and human flour-ishing. Broader responses are provided on India’s Dalits, until everyonehas a place under the sun, and a pastoral journey. There is no index. TheSociety of Biblical Literature publishes the paperbound edition; Brill pub-lishes the hardbound.

BT83 2009-674608 978-1-4438-1008-1RReetthhiinnkkiinngg sseeccuullaarriizzaattiioonn;; pphhiilloossoopphhyy aanndd tthhee pprroopphheeccyy ooffaa sseeccuullaarr aaggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Herbert De Vriese and Gary Gabor.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 363 p. $77.00Now that one of the key assumptions of classical secularization theory—the thesis of the inevitable gradual weakening of religion in modernizingsocieties—has widely been recognized as untenable, there have beenincreasing calls for rethinking secularization. De Vriese (a doctoralcandidate in philosophy at the U. of Antwerp, Belgium) and Gabor (adoctoral candidate in philosophy at Fordham U., US) present 13 papersillustrating some of the ways that philosophy has responded to that call.Topics addressed by the papers include the Christian sense of “secular”as expressed in the writing of Thomas Aquinas, the limited scope of MaxWeber’s secularization thesis in The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit ofCapitalism, the phenomenological account of secularity in CharlesTaylor’s A Secular Age, secularization and the experience of futility, themotivational attractions behind secularism’s rise in modernity, a defenseof religiously-neutral debate in the public sphere, the alleged value-neutrality of secularism as a myth, and the extent to which the supposedend of secularization is reflected in popular culture and the academiccommunity.

BT96 978-0-567-03341-3TThhee pprroovviiddeennccee ooff GGoodd;; DDeeuuss hhaabbeett ccoonnssiilliiuumm..Title main entry. Ed. by Francesca Aran Murphy and Philip G. Ziegler.T&T Clark, ©2009 338 p. $39.95 (pa)Scholars of theology mostly from Britain and the US survey the broadinterest in providence by theologians today. They cover the history of thedoctrine of providence, its treatment by systematic theology, science, andpolitics and ethics. Among specific topics are providence and commongrace, time and persons in the economy of God, a systematic proposalconcerning providence and the evolutionary phenomenon of cooperation,and political discernment. T&T Clark is an imprint of Continuum.

BT103 2009-027613 978-1-935244-03-5TThhoouugghhtt aanndd ffaaiitthh;; ccoommppaarraattiivvee pphhiilloossoopphhiiccaall aannddrreelliiggiioouuss ccoonncceeppttss iinn aanncciieenntt GGrreeeeccee,, IInnddiiaa,, aannddCChhrriissttiiaanniittyy;; 22vv..Vitsaxis, Vassilis. Trans. by Deborah Brown Kazazis and VassilisVitasaxis.Somerset Hall Press, ©2009 713 p. $120.00 (pa)Vitsaxis provides nuance by explaining that he compares concepts fromancient Greece and India with later and current Christian thought. AGreek diplomat as well as polyglot scholar, he examines revelation,redemption and salvation, time, and the tripartite nature of the Godheador First Principle in the first volume. The other volume is devoted entirelyto the concept of divinity. Though not intending to make value judg-ments—especially comparing Asian and Western ways of thinking—hedoes admit to working within an inherited milieu of Christianity andeast/west dichotomy. Among his topics are the self-achieved redemption,human bonds, the roads to salvation, the cyclical and linear views oftime in giving meaning to history, enotheism or opportunisticmonotheism, the theology of the three great philosophers of classicalGreece, atomist-materialist cosmology and its consequences for themeaning of the divine, and atheism or disbelief. The two volumes arepaged separately; neither is indexed.

BT304 2009-036723 978-1-4331-0861-7PPoosstt--mmeettaapphhyyssiiccss aanndd tthhee ppaarraaddooxxiiccaall tteeaacchhiinnggss ooff JJeessuuss;;tthhee ssttrruuccttuurree ooff tthhee rreeaall..Freeman, Cameron. (American university studies. VII; Theology andreligion, v.301)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 327 p. $83.95An Australian doctor of philosophical theology, Freeman argues that oneof the only options generally permitted the Christian tradition afterrational critique of religion in the Enlightenment is a return to theradical core of truth that had to be repressed in order for logo-centricand patriarchal Christianity to establish itself. He goes back to the form-ative events that gave rise to the early Church and reconstructs the elusiveteachings of Jesus that reside at the very heart of the Christian tradition,but without relying on the traditional metaphysical baggage that anchorstheir meaning by holding to prepackages of timeless truth. He has notindexed his work.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–25–

BT695 2009-034471 978-0-8006-6362-9CClliimmaattee jjuussttiiccee;; eetthhiiccss,, eenneerrggyy,, aanndd ppuubblliicc ppoolliiccyy..Martin-Schramm, James B.Fortress Press, ©2010 232 p. $20.00The fundamental problem, says Martin-Schramm (religion, LutherCollege, Iowa) is that the people who will suffer most from climatechange are not the people responsible for it. He argues that climate policyshould work to mitigate the injustice developing across economic, racial,and generational lines. His topics include religious understandings ofenergy, the ethic of ecological justice, conventional non-renewable energyin the US, an initial ethical assessment of alternative and renewableenergy options, current international climate policy negotiations, envi-sioning a just climate policy for the US, and greenhouse gas reductionstrategies at his home institution.

BT695 978-1-84706-015-0RReelliiggiioonn aanndd sscciieennccee;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn..Sweetman, Brendan.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2010 232 p. $24.95 (pa)Sweetman (philosophy, Rockhurst U., Kansas City) explores conflictbetween philosophical or belief systems that posit a transcendent realityand a set of methods or techniques for studying physical reality. He looksat religion and science from Aristotle to Darwin and Freud, science andnaturalism in the 20th century, God and evolution, science and thehuman person design in the universe, God and the universe, and ethics.

BT1319 2008-005496 978-1-933346-12-0TThhee ggrreeaatt mmeeddiieevvaall hheerreettiiccss;; ffiivvee cceennttuurriieess ooff rreelliiggiioouussddiisssseenntt..Frassetto, Michael.BlueBridge, ©2008 241 p. $15.95 (pa)Frassetto (history, University of Delaware) is a well-known medievalistwho has written several books on fringe groups of the Middle Ages. Inthis study of heretics from Bogomil to Jan Hus, he explains the nature ofvarious heretical beliefs through the lives of those who led the move-ments. The stores are told in a clear prose narrative. In the process,Frassetto corrects myths about the Catholic Church and heretics that havebeen taught for years. Even though this book, now in paperback, isintended for a general readership, it is puzzling that there are so fewfootnotes, even to substantiate comments that are controversial and thatthe notes that he gives are to secondary sources, albeit mostly soundones, or primary sources in translation. Despite this, it is a good startingplace for the classroom and the bibliography will lead readers on tomore detailed studies.

BV10 2010-290799 978-0-567-33144-1PPaassttoorraall ccaarree iinn wwoorrsshhiipp;; lliittuurrggyy aanndd ppssyycchhoollooggyy iinnddiiaalloogguuee..Pembroke, Neil.T&T Clark, ©2010 201 p. $29.95 (pa)The emphasis over the past half century on the role of personal ministryto individuals and families has been very beneficial, says Pembroke (pas-toral studies, U. of Queensland-Brisbane), but he wonders if perhaps ithas resulted in a lack of attention to ministry within the faith com-munity, the gathered congregation, the liturgy and sacraments.Recognizing that healing is not the point of worship, he examines theintersection of liturgy and psychology from the perspectives ofaddressing self-diminishment, the therapeutics of complaint, light in thedarkness, and life together in Christ. T&T Clark is an imprint ofContinuum.

BV85 2009-038364 978-1-4331-0739-9AAnn eeccooffeemmiinniisstt ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee oonn AAsshh WWeeddnneessddaayy aanndd LLeenntt..Sweeney, Sylvia A. (American university studies; VII Theology andreligion; v.297)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 301 p. $79.95Sweeney (Bloy House, The Episcopal Theological School at Claremont,California) examines one unique day in the church’s liturgical calendar,and how it came to find expression through the ages—the morning afterMardi Gras. Ash Wednesday has functioned in the history of theChristian Church as what David Tracy calls a religious classic, she con-tends, and the gesture of imposing ashes is itself a central and paradig-matic element of it. She begins by tracing the rite from its antecedentsand origin through the Middle Ages and the Cranmerian influences inthe Anglican tradition, to the Book of Common Prayer in 1979. Then shesets out ecofeminist hermeneutics of mortality and death. The finalsection presents a conversation between ecofeminism and AshWednesday.

BV178 2008-055837 978-1-84553-415-8RRiittuuaall mmaakkiinngg wwoommeenn;; sshhaappiinngg rriitteess ffoorr cchhaannggiinngg lliivveess..Berry, Jan. (Gender, theology, and spirituality)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 257 p. $29.95 (pa)A minister of the United Reform Church, Berry (practical theology,Luther King House, Manchester, England) draws from her own expe-rience and that of other women to reflect on the reasons and methodsfor creating women’s ritual within a religious context, and shares someexamples of actual rituals and their consequences. Among her topics areletting go and moving on, negotiating change in women’s ritual making,shapes and patterns, shells and fish, the name that is yet to be, this ismy body, and where next for women’s ritual making. Distributed inNorth America by The David Brown Book Co.

BV639 2009-030412 978-0-275-99155-5WWoommeenn aanndd CChhrriissttiiaanniittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Cheryl A. Kirk-Duggan and Karen Jo Torjesen.(Women and religion in the world)Praeger, ©2010 358 p. $44.95Scholars mostly of religion, but also women’s studies, education, and lit-erature look at women in Christianity from the perspectives of women,family, and environment; socioeconomics, politics, and authority; body,mind, and spirit; sex, power, and vulnerability; and women, worldview,and religious practice. Among specific topics are black women’s activismin the environmental justice movement, Catholic women seeking empow-erment in a post-Vatican II church, poverty and HIV, sexual violence asa sin against women, and living past the colonial legacy in theCaribbean.

BV660 978-1-84682-168-4TThhee cclleerrggyy ooff tthhee DDiioocceessee ooff DDeerrrryy;; aann iinnddeexx,, 22dd eedd..Daly, Edward and Kieran Devlin.Four Courts Press, ©2009 244 p. $70.00Daly retired as a bishop in 1993, and Devlin retired as a parish priest in2008, and both have served in the Derry Diocesan Archive. They drawfrom that to list priests alphabetically in the diocese in two chapters cov-ering 1535-1744 and 1744-2008. The entries include birth time, education,ordination date and place, appointments, death, burial location, and mis-cellaneous notes. In addition to this main listing they are listed alongvarious dimensions, among them saints associated with the diocese,bishops, Dominicans, priests on loan to the diocese 1880-2008, priestsengaged in full-time education, workhouse chaplains 1866-1906, prisonchaplains 1866-2008, ordinations 1620-2008, and priests and St. Columb’sCollege 1879-2008. Distributed in North America by ISBS.

BV2895 2009-017507 978-1-84519-308-9MMiissssiioonnaarriieess,, iinnddiiggeennoouuss ppeeoopplleess aanndd ccuullttuurraall eexxcchhaannggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia Grimshaw and Andrew May. (FirstNations and the colonial encounter)Sussex Academic Press, ©2010 207 p. $79.95The central aim of this collection of 12 studies “is the deconstruction ofmissions, mission activities and outcomes in the British Empire in thenineteenth century and the first decades of the twentieth.” Key themesthat emerge are the explanatory power of intimate relations and gender;day-to-day interactions between missionaries, indigenous groups, andother groups of people; the role of indigenous Christians in the spread offaith and the creation of religious communities; and the socio-politicaland geographic contexts of missions in the British Empire. Examples ofspecific topics include missionaries and interracial intimacy in early NewZealand; missionaries and imperial manhood in Canada from 1880 to1920; missionaries, islanders, and the reduction of language in thePacific; missionary anthropologists and their informants; and mission-aries, Africans, and the state in the development of education in colonialNatal, 1836-1910. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

BV4465 2009-504087 978-1-4411-9255-4AA ssppiirriittuuaalliittyy ooff ssuurrvviivvaall;; eennaabblliinngg aa rreessppoonnssee ttoo ttrraauummaaaanndd aabbuussee..Glasson, Barbara.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 164 p. $24.95 (pa)For professional practitioners and general readers, Glasson, a Methodistminister in the UK who directs a project supporting survivors of sexualabuse within faith communities, considers what it means to be a survivorof trauma and abuse, within the context of Christianity. Drawing frompassages and stories in the Bible, she discusses her experiences talkingwith survivors around the world, what helps stories surface and enablesthem to reclaim their lives, the creation of a safe space, the sense of beinglost, transcending boundaries, power, forgiveness, blame, relationshipsand identity, and the role of the church. No index is provided.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –26–

BV4831 978-2-503-52071-1AAnnnnee BBuullkkeelleeyy aanndd hheerr bbooookk;; ffaasshhiioonniinngg ffeemmaallee ppiieettyy iinnEEaarrllyy TTuuddoorr EEnnggllaanndd.. AA ssttuuddyy ooff LLoonnddoonn,, BBrriittiisshh LLiibbrraarryy,,MMSS HHaarrlleeyy 449944..Barratt, Alexandra. (Texts and transcriptions; studies in the history ofmanuscripts and printed books; v.2)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 275 p. $102.00Barratt (humanities, University of Waikato, NZ) has taken one manu-script of the British Museum, MS Harley 494, and created a history of itstime, owners and content. Until quite recently, devotional books forwomen were largely ignored by historians. They were considered nothingbut compilations of known prayers and saints’ lives. Recently they havecome to be recognized as individual pictures of a particular person andplace. Barratt, through masterful detective work, found records on theowner of the book, Anne Bulkeley, a Birgittine nun in early TudorEngland. Anne and, presumably, her book were sent packing with thedissolution of the monasteries. Barratt managed to find where she went,who her family was and what may have happened to her. The history ofthe dissolution is told, as well. Barratt discusses the genre of devotionalbooks and the importance of understanding what women chose to read.Along with the canonical Birgittine prayers there are also excerpts fromthe work of late medieval female mystics. The remainder of the book isdevoted to a full transcription and translation of the manuscript with thesource of each entry traced and a commentary. This masterful workwould be a fine introduction to an undergraduate class. It will also beof great interest to serious scholars of Tudor history. Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co,

BX841 2009-031096 978-1-4144-7526-4NNeeww CCaatthhoolliicc eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ssuupppplleemmeenntt 22000099;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert L. Fastiggi.Gale, ©2010 948 p. $273.00Catholic University of America Press first published the New CatholicEncyclopedia in 15 volumes in 1967; over the years, sporadically, supple-mental volumes and a new edition appeared. A decision was made in2006 to keep the work current by publishing volumes annually, witharticles on themes selected for their new relevance or substantial newscholarship. The two-volume 2009 offering is the first to also be madeavailable electronically. The set contains approximately 200 alphabeticallyarranged entries on a variety of topics, beginning with Africa, CatholicChurch in and ending with Wyoming, Catholic Church in. In between theseentries are articles on such topics as intelligent design, brain death, arti-ficial insemination, astronomy, assisted nutrition and hydration,condoms and HIV protection, homosexuality (reparative therapy), homo-sexuals (admittance to seminaries), jihad, and the internet, as well as cov-erage of new ecclesial documents, personalities, and other issues ofemerging interest.

BX1566 2009-019643 978-0-8214-1855-0RRoommee’’ss mmoosstt ffaaiitthhffuull ddaauugghhtteerr;; tthhee CCaatthhoolliicc CChhuurrcchh aannddiinnddeeppeennddeenntt PPoollaanndd,, 11991144--11993399..Pease, Neal. (Ohio University Press Polish and Polish-American studiesseries)Ohio University Press, ©2009 288 p. $49.95Conventionally, the Catholic Church in Poland is seen as a champion ofPolish culture and national identity against foreign oppressors, recountsPease (history, U. of Wisconsin-Milwaukee), so during the quarter centurywhen Poland was an independent country, church-state relations werenormalized and nothing very interesting happened. He was not con-vinced, and just then beginning to focus his study on that very period inthe country’s history, he decided to delve deeper. He does not aspire to acomprehensive history of the Catholic Church in Poland between thewars. Rather he describes and explains the significant of Catholicism inPolish politics, and of Poland in the politics of the wider Catholic world.

BX1747 2009-021690 978-0-8264-2982-7TThhee SSaallaammaannccaa sscchhooooll..Alves, André Azevedo and José Manuel Moreira. (Major conservativeand libertarian thinkers; v.9)Continuum Publishing Group, ©2010 153 p. $130.00The School of Salamanca is a body of theological, philosophical, and eco-nomic thought founded by 16th-century Dominican theologian Franciscode Vitoria, who is also celebrated as one of the founders of internationallaw. It also refers, however, to the group of Iberian scholastics of the 16thand early 17th century, loosely associated with the University ofSalamanca, who espoused and developed the body of thought. Alves(London School of Economics and Political Science) and Moreira (U. doAveiro) offer a historical context and intellectual biographies of the mainplayers, critically analyze the ideas, survey the reception and influenceof the work, and ponder its significance today.

BX1795 2009-030988 978-0-415-43025-8RReeaassoonnaabbllee ffaaiitthh..Haldane, John.Routledge, ©2010 200 p. $39.95 (pa)In a companion to his 2004 Faithful Reason: Essays Catholic andPhilosophical, Haldane (philosophy, U. of St. Andrews, Scotland) shifts hisemphasis from Catholic thought connected to philosophical methods andthemes, to how philosophical ideas make contact with ideas in Catholicbelief. Among his topics are a thomist metaphysics, philosophy and themeaning of theism, the very idea of spiritual values, rational and otheranimals, and the examined death. Like his previous volume, the essaysare collected from a variety of times and contexts, but he has made moreeffort to weave them into a continuous narrative.

BX1795 978-1-921576-08-9SSoocciiaall ccaappiittaall aanndd ssoocciiaall jjuussttiiccee;; ccrriittiiccaall AAuussttrraalliiaannppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Geoff Woolcock and Lenore Manderson.Charles Darwin U. Press, ©2009 301 p. $38.22 (pa)From a July 2006 Australian Academy of Social Science workshop heldin Brisbane, 13 edited papers offer perspectives peculiar to the Australianexperience on measuring and applying social capital in public policy, andthe application of social capital discourse and policy. Their topics includethe specification and measurement of a concept, the nexus between com-munity and the state, state intellectuals as spin-doctors, a meta-analysisof social capital, the role of social capital in collaborative natural resourcemanagement, higher education and policy performance, and communitybuilding in Aboriginal Australia. The price is converted from Australiandollars.

BX2159 2009-015504 978-0-8263-4709-1CCrroossssiinngg bboorrddeerrss wwiitthh tthhee SSaannttoo NNiiññoo ddee AAttoocchhaa..Pescador, Juan Javier.U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 256 p. $34.95Historian and photographer Pescador (Chicano history and Mexican cul-tures in the US, Michigan State U.-East Lansing) combines his personalexperience as a child, with published and archival sources to explore theveneration of the Holy Child of Atocha from his origins in the latecolonial period through the different transformations in his devotion overthe centuries and across lands and borders. Indeed, he begins with theboy and his mother in a Dominican monastery outside Madrid in 1523,and follows them to Zacatecas in Mexico, north to New Mexico, his estab-lishment as a saint for the Borderlands, and the contemporary manifes-tation of devotion among Mexican and Chicano communities in the US.

BX2330 978-2-503-52958-5GGeennddeerr,, mmiirraacclleess,, aanndd ddaaiillyy lliiffee;; tthhee eevviiddeennccee ooffffoouurrtteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy ccaannoonniizzaattiioonn pprroocceesssseess..Katajala-Peltomaa, Sari. (History of daily life)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 312 p. $102.00Kataljala-Peltomaa has used the depositions of lay people in the canon-ization process of two fourteenth century saints, the English Thomas ofCantilupe and Italian Nicholas of Tolentino, to construct concepts ofgender as seen through the process. Since over five hundred people wereinterviewed in total, she has a good base from which to form conclusionsabout gender in miracles and petitions to saints. She starts with theclerical structure: how witnesses are chosen, the make up of the inves-tigative process, the roles of notaries and proctors. Then she delves intothe content of the reports, noting differences between the roles of menand women in the way they form their plea to the saints and in howthey respond when the miracle has been granted. She found that, eventhrough the translation into formal Latin of the vernacular reports,gender roles in the petitioning of saints were not that different. Thepublic/private gender divide did mean that men requested more pro-tection from storms, bandits and imprisonment while women asked forthe health of family and the curing of reproductive problems. However,many behaviors, especially involving their children were gender uni-valent. The many examples cited show how gender functioned in laysociety and how the saints were part of daily life for both men andwomen. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–27–

BX4632 978-1-84682-181-3PPrrooccttoorrss’’ aaccccoouunnttss ffoorr tthhee ppaarriisshh cchhuurrcchh ooff SStt WWeerrbbuurrgghh,,DDuubblliinn,, 11448811--11662277..Title main entry. Ed. by Adrian Empey.Four Courts Press, ©2009 160 p. $65.00Empey, secretary of the Church of Ireland Historical Society has done his-torians a great service in transcribing the proctor’s account books from1481-1627 from St. Werburgh’s church in Dublin. The proctors, or church-wardens, were lay representatives of the parisheners, responsible formanaging funds, recording donations and paying for repairs and wages.The long term of these records also enables historians to chart changesin prices, lay participation and church property. Empey gives a compre-hensive introduction that explains the role of the proctors in Ireland aswell and England and on the continent. Having a printed text of thevaluable document will allow scholars to compare daily activity withother parishes in Europe. Social historians will also benefit from therecords of day-to-day activities in the parish. Distributed in the US byISBS.

BX4700 978-2-503-52819-9TThhee ddeevvoouutt bbeelliieeff ooff tthhee iimmaaggiinnaattiioonn;; tthhee PPaarriissMMeeddiittaattiioonneess VViittaaee CChhrriissttii aanndd ffeemmaallee FFrraanncciissccaannssppiirriittuuaalliittyy iinn ttrreecceennttoo IIttaallyy..Flora, Holly. (Disciplina monastica; 6)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 305 p. $138.00 (pa)The Franciscan Order was intended to be made up of men who traveled,preached and taught. When women joined the Franciscans as PoorClares, it was made clear that these options would not be open to them.They could not wander about emulating Christ. One way that they mightapproach this ideal was presented to them in the Meditationes VitaeChristi, Flora (art history, Tulane University) concentrates on one manu-script of the meditations, Bibliothéque Nationale MS, ital. 115. This lav-ishly illustrated Italian book was, Flora believes, created for a Clarrisanconvent near Pisa in the second quarter of the fourteenth century. Sheanalyzes both text and pictures, emphasizing the ways in which thewomen were encouraged to identify with the Virgin Mary and emulatethe life of Christ internally, through meditation. The ways in which themanuscript uses visual symbols to reinforce interiority for the women areparticularly revealing, as the many illustrations show. Distributed inNorth America by the David Brown Book Co.

BX4705 2008-030887 978-0-86698-404-1TThhee lleetttteerrss ooff PPiieerrrree ddee CCrrooss,, cchhaammbbeerrllaaiinn ttoo PPooppeeGGrreeggoorryy XXII,, 11337711--11337788.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Pierre, de Cros. Ed. by Daniel Williman. (Medieval and renaissancetexts and studies; v.356)ACMRS, ©2009 118 p. $59.00Williman (Latin and history, Binghamton University, emeritus) is clearlya member of the electronic age. His commentary of the life and times ofPierre de Gros, a late fourteenth century papal cleric, is presented in aslim volume. He explains who Pierre was and why his letters areimportant to historians. The workings of the Avignon papacy are alsotreated, especially finances and the advancement of the relatives of thepope, an important part of Pierre’s job. However, rather than printing aweighty and expensive edition of the letters, they are all contained in aCD-ROM at the back of the book, making it easier for students to searchthe material. An excellent example of a melding of scholarship andtechnology.

BX4705 2009-010653 978-1-57075-839-3OOssccaarr RRoommeerroo aanndd tthhee ccoommmmuunniioonn ooff tthhee ssaaiinnttss;; aabbiiooggrraapphhyy..Wright, Scott.Orbis Books, ©2009 162 p. $20.00 (pa)On 24 March, 1980, Archbishop of El Salvador Romero (1917-80) becamethe first archbishop murdered at his alter since Thomas a’Becket in 1170.Wright, coordinator of the Ecumenical Program on Central America andthe Caribbean, sketches his life, career, martyrdom, impact, and legacyrelying heavily on quotations from his sermons and photographs. Mostof the photographs were taken by Salvadoran Franciscan Octavio Duran,who served as his personal photographer, but others from his family’scollection and other sources. There is no index.

BX4827 978-87-635-3028-6SSøørreenn KKiieerrkkeeggaaaarrdd lliitteerraattuurree 11995566--22000066;; aa bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy..Jørgensen, Aage.Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2009 651 p. $95.00With this bibliography covering literature on Danish religiousphilosopher Kierkegaard (1813-55) from 1956 to 2006, Jørgensen com-bines, completes, and replaces a series of bibliographies published in thejournal Kierkegaaardiana since 1966. He also continues JensHimmelstrup’s 1962 bibliography that stops at 1955; the gap between thetwo volumes bridged by a 1968 article in that same journal. Except forunpublished dissertations and entries marked with an asterisk, he hasverified the works cited. The listing is alphabetical by author or editorand chronological within a single author’s works; critiques, reviews, andthe like are generally listed along with works they treat; cross-referencesare used for reprints and other appropriate works. An appendix cites edi-tions of Kierkegaard’s work. All names are indexed, including any men-tioned in titles. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

BX5207 2009-029764 978-0-8108-6058-2TThhee pprreevveenniieenntt ppiieettyy ooff SSaammuueell WWeesslleeyy,, SSrr....Torpy, Arthur Alan. (Revitalization: explorations in world Christianmovements. Pietist and Wesleyan studies; no.30)Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 173 p. $45.00 (pa)A United Methodist minister and historian of Christianity based in Texas,Torpy explores the religious sensibilities of Samuel Wesley (1662-1735),whose two sons have recently shared the limelight with their mother—but not their father—in studies of the origin and early development of theMethodist movement. The patriarch has been portrayed both positivelyand negatively, he says, and his personality was indeed strong andcomplex enough to encompass both views. His topics include redefiningand defying traditions, his use of scripture and his doctrine, his experi-ential piety in the context of late-17th-century English piety, and religiousand intellectual ties that bind the family. Five representative sermons areappended.

BX6799 978-2-503-52057-5SSaappiieennttiiaa eett eellooqquueennttiiaa;; mmeeaanniinngg aanndd ffuunnccttiioonn iinnlliittuurrggiiccaall ppooeettrryy,, mmuussiicc,, ddrraammaa,, aanndd bbiibblliiccaall ccoommmmeennttaarryyiinn tthhee MMiiddddllee AAggeess..Title main entry. Ed. by Gunilla Iversen and Nicolas Bell. (Disputatio;v.11)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 555 p. $145.00This lovely volume presents a group of 11 articles and case studiesdescribing the multiple meanings and uses of liturgical texts from theCarolingian period into the twelfth century. Notable is the focus on howkey texts were adapted to the developments in liturgical practice. Certainauthors appear in several articles in different contexts, including PeterAbelard, Paschasius Radbertus, and Gilbert the Universal. Many of thearticles are case studies of specific liturgic manuscripts, written withattention to music and poetry. Marcia Sá Cavalcante Schuback providestwo commentaries, and the volume concludes with a lengthy chapter byErika Kihlman offering a step-by-step commentary on a treatise in theBodleian (Auct.F.6.8). An anthology of texts and music, a full bibliog-raphy, and several indexes fill out this impressive work. Distributed inNorth America by The David Brown Book Co.

BX8571 2009-013038 978-0-9801496-5-4SSeellff,, ccoommmmuunniittyy,, wwoorrlldd;; MMoorraavviiaann eedduuccaattiioonn iinn aattrraannssaattllaannttiicc wwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Heikki Lempa and Paul Peucker.Lehigh University Press, ©2010 300 p. $55.00This collection of essays considers the relationship of the Enlightenmentand Moravian systems of education on both sides of the Atlantic. Lempa(modern European history, Moravian College, Bethlehem, PA) andPeuker, archivist at Moravian College, have selected essays that firstly, setthe Moravian system of education within the context of theEnlightenment. The religious and literary influences are also discussed.All of the contributors mention Count Nikolaus Ludwig von Zinzendorf,the leader of the church in the late eighteenth century and the movingforce behind many of the educational methods of the Moravians.Missionary activity was important to the church along with the educationof native peoples in North and South America. The diaries of the mis-sionaries are still being mined for ethnographical information. TheMoravian insistence on a high degree of literacy for all members led toa practical understanding of the role of the teacher. The section onMoravian music is particularly interesting, as many had the knowledgeand skill to improvise songs in services. Essays treat the religious impetusfor education as well as comparing it to Enlightenment theories.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –28–

BX9765 2008-009185 978-0-8108-6893-9TThhee AA ttoo ZZ ooff tthhee SShhaakkeerrss.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Paterwic, Stephen J. (A to Z guide series; no.106)Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 326 p. $40.00 (pa)Despite its small number of adherents, almost everyone in the U.S. hasheard of the religious group known as the Shakers (even if only becauseof their distinctive style of furniture). Shaker expert Paterwic hasassembled a dictionary of Shaker life, including more than 200 entriesabout Shaker communities, industries, families, and important people.Also included in the book are a Shaker timeline, a short history of thegroup, and an extensive bibliography. The contents of the book have beenapproved by the last existing Shaker community.

HHIISSTTOORRYY OOFF CCIIVVIILLIIZZAATTIIOONN,, AARRCCHHAAEEOOLLOOGGYY,,BBIIOOGGRRAAPPHHYY

CB151 2009-048240 978-1-4331-0762-7NNooeettiiccss;; tthhee sscciieennccee ooff tthhiinnkkiinngg aanndd kknnoowwiinngg..Krader, Lawrence. Ed. by Cyril Levitt.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 640 p. $129.95Krader, the creator of Noetics, did not live to see his final book throughthe printing process. Levitt, director of the Lawrence Krader ResearchProject at McMaster University, has taken over the task and provided anintroduction to the work. Krader begins by defining Noetics, the study ofthe human element in all sciences and philosophies. He then applies thisto science and how things are quantified in an attempt to explain thenatural world. Noetics in philosophy, from Aristotle to Marx and beyondis explained. The importance of language, both overt and subliminal, isdiscussed in this section. Finally, Kader puts Noetics into the context ofthe daily activity of people. Throughout, the reader is challenged torethink the ways in which we know information and how we form newideas and communicate them to others.

CB353 2009-029440 978-90-04-17925-7TThhee mmaakkiinngg ooff mmeemmoorryy iinn tthhee MMiiddddllee AAggeess..Title main entry. Ed. by Lucie Dolezalová. (Later medieval Europe; v.4)BRILL, ©2009 499 p. $225.00This substantial collection of essays offers a welcome overview to the richfield of memory studies, serving to expand scholarship into countries lesswell studied, including Scandinavia and Central Europe. Stemming froma workshop held in Prague in September 2007 called Medieval Memories;Case Studies, Definitions, Contexts, the papers have all been written inEnglish by contributors based throughout Europe, including several atthe Charles U. in Prague and the Academy of Sciences of the CzechRepublic which co-sponsored the workshop. The 25 papers are dividedinto topics that include memory in practice, mnemonic aids, literarystrategies, forgetting, and constructing the past, with studies on such sub-jects as Skaldic poetry, crusader accounts from 12th-century Iberia, land-scape as a form of memory construction in Petrarch’s Latin works, andmemory as proof in trials by the Inquisition in 14th-century France. Thecontributors teach a variety of subjects, including art history, medievaltheology, Jewish studies, Slavonic studies, and Old Norse.

CB430 978-1-58367-207-5EEuurroocceennttrriissmm;; mmooddeerrnniittyy,, rreelliiggiioonn,, aanndd ddeemmooccrraaccyy,, aaccrriittiiqquuee ooff eeuurroocceennttrriissmm aanndd ccuullttuurraalliissmm,, 22dd eedd..Amin, Samir. Trans. by Russell Moore and James Membrez.Monthly Review Press, ©2009 288 p. $17.95 (pa)Amin (director of the United Nations research institute, UNITAR, locatedin Senegal) critiques capitalist modernity as being characterized byEurocentrism, a culturalist claim that internalizes the inequality andasymmetry inherent in the global spread of capitalism. Eurocentric cul-turalism argues that changes in cultural characteristics are what give riseto modernity (see Max Weber’s The Protestant Ethic for example), whereasAmin argues precisely the opposite: that cultural change is “more theproduct of the necessities of the social transformation than their cause.”He contends that modernity must be seen as an incomplete project thatrequires a reinvention of universal values, which in turn implies the eco-nomic, social, and political reconstruction of all of the world’s societies.For this second edition, he has added a new preface and introductionand removed a chapter dealing with issues that were more pertinenttwenty years ago.

CC135 2009-028841 978-1-59874-161-2AAvvooiiddiinngg aarrcchhaaeeoollooggiiccaall ddiissaasstteerrss;; aa rriisskk mmaannaaggeemmeennttaapppprrooaacchh..Stapp, Darby C. (Techniques and issues in cultural resources man-agement)Left Coast Press, ©2009 175 p. $24.95 (pa)Written primarily for construction project managers, this volume coversthe management of archaeological risks through project planning, his-torical research, and the use of a risk matrix. Written by Stapp andLongenecker (both professional archaeologists) and including contribu-tions by both cultural resource managers and professionals in the con-struction industry, it advocates general cooperation with archeologists toensure the most timely resolution of issues. It includes several casestudies and a chapter on the special set of challenges presented byhuman burial grounds. Includes four substantial appendices and aglossary of archaeological terms.

CC135 2009-028837 978-1-59874-445-3HHeerriittaaggee vvaalluueess iinn ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy ssoocciieettyy..Title main entry. Ed. by George S. Smith et al.Left Coast Press, ©2010 304 p. $99.00Any discussion of the preservation, modification, or destruction ofarchaeological sites and historic structures necessarily entails differentvalues regarding their worth and importance to local, regional, andnational identities. This collection of 19 papers is presented with theintention of stimulating thinking about the role of heritage valuesimportant to discussions of cultural heritage by examining perspectiveson heritage values from different geographic regions and frames of ref-erence. The papers are organized into sections that address heritagevalues and meaning in social context; management, policy formation,and heritage values; teaching and learning heritage values; stakeholdersand heritage values; and heritage values and world heritage.

CD935 978-1-85604-639-8CCoommmmuunniittyy aarrcchhiivveess;; tthhee sshhaappiinngg ooff mmeemmoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Jeanette A. Bastian and Ben Alexander.(Principles and practice in records management and archives)Facet Publishing, ©2009 286 p. $89.95This volume is less a how-to book than a collection of well written essayson the existence and creation of archives that preserve cultural heritageand their intersection with social issues. Drawing on examples from notonly the United States, United Kingdom, Australia and Canada, it alsoexplores the existence of records in Fiji, Chile, St. Kitts and even anarchive dedicated to the issue of leprosy on the island of Culion in thePhilippines. Edited by Bastian (archives, Simmons College) andAlexander (library and information science, City U. of New York), thiswork covers non-traditional record keeping, records loss, destruction, andrecovery, and the existence of online communities as well as new tech-nologies that enable the creation of sound archives and blogs.

CD973 2009-045942 978-1-55570-679-1WWeebb 22..00 ttoooollss aanndd ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr aarrcchhiivveess aanndd llooccaall hhiissttoorryyccoolllleeccttiioonnss..Theimer, Kate.Neal-Schuman, ©2010 245 p. $79.95 (pa)This guide aimed at those working in archives, special collections depart-ments, historical societies, public libraries, and museums explains howthese organizations can use social media to share their activities andarchival and manuscript collections on the internet. Using nontechnicallanguage, Theimer first introduces the key concepts of Web 2.0, how totransition from Web 1.0 to 2.0, and technical and administrative planningissues, then discusses the major Web 2.0 services, including blogs, pod-casts, Flickr and other image-sharing sites, YouTube and other video-sharing sites, micro-blogging and Twitter, wikis, and social networkingsites like Facebook, with discussion of the functionalities, implementationrequirements, and current uses by archives and historical organizations.She also covers lesser-used mashups, widgets, online chat, and SecondLife; measuring outcomes; and management and policy issues; as well asthe experiences of archivists from institutions in the US, UK, andAustralia. Theimer, the author of an archives blog and a speaker onissues related to Web 2.0 technologies by archives and historical organi-zations, has held positions at the National Archives and RecordsAdministration and the Smithsonian Institution.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–29–

CJ85 978-3-7001-6056-4SSyyllllooggee nnuummmmoorruumm ssaassaanniiddaarruumm IIssrraaeell;; tthhee SSaassaanniiaann aannddSSaassaanniiaann--ttyyppee ccooiinnss iinn tthhee ccoolllleeccttiioonnss ooff tthhee HHeebbrreewwUUnniivveerrssiittyy ((JJeerruussaalleemm))......Schindel, Nikolaus. (Veröffentlichungen der numismatischenKommission; v.46)Austrian Academy of Sciences Press, ©2009 175 p. $95.00In this addition to catalogues on major European collections of Sasanianand Arab-Sasanian coins which influenced early Islamic coinage,Schindel (U. of Vienna) presents the holdings and histories of the majorpublic collections in Israel (at the Hebrew U., Israel Antiquity Authority,and Israel Museum, Jerusalem). This detailed analysis of 282 Sasnasiancoins presented in like sylloge form covers a period of several centuriesof Persian/Iranian monetary history, and is notable also for being fromthe collections of a major scholar of Islamic numismatics and a famousarcheologist. A supplementary hoard of Late Sasanian copper coins fromthe Eretz Israel Museum, Tel Aviv, is featured. Indexing is by collections,personal names, and mint signatures. Distributed in North America byThe David Brown Book Co.

CJ4909 2009-038647 978-0-7864-4481-6AAllaasskkaa aanndd YYuukkoonn ttookkeennss;; pprriivvaattee ccooiinnss ooff tthhee tteerrrriittoorriieess,,33dd eedd..Benice, Ronald J.McFarland & Co., ©2010 364 p. $49.95 (pa)Having survived a career in mathematics and telecommunications,Benice updates his numismatic catalog of the two northern territories,which was first published 30 years ago, and revised in 1994. The firsttwo editions described and illustrated tokens that were privately issuedsubstitutes for coins in the US Territory of Alaska from the gold rushduring the 1890s through statehood in 1959. Here he bends the border abit and incorporates Canada’s Yukon Territory starting about the sametime but extending to about 1990. He also adds the many coins andissuers that have been discovered in the interval, and Alaska prisontokens. Interspersed with descriptions of the coins and photographswhen possible, are occasional advertisements by the establishment thatissued the token. Collectors are his main readers, of course, but histo-rians of the regions or of economics under extreme conditions might alsofind interest.

CN510 65009418 978-1-84217-368-8TThhee RRoommaann iinnssccrriippttiioonnss ooff BBrriittaaiinn;; vv..33:: IInnssccrriippttiioonnss oonnssttoonnee ffoouunndd oorr nnoottiiffiieedd bbeettwweeeenn 11 JJaannuuaarryy 11995555 aanndd 3311DDeecceemmbbeerr 22000066..Tomlin, R.S.O. et al.Oxbow Books, ©2009 505 p. $140.00Following tight on the heels of the 1965 first volume (well, relativelyspeaking), which culminated with material that made the closing date ofDecember 31, 1954, this third volume brings the cataloging up throughthe end of 2006. All but six of the 550 inscriptions included here werefirst published in either JRS or Britannica. The work of R.S.O. Tomlin(Oxford U.), R.P. Wright (an original author, now deceased), and M.W.C.Hassall, the inscriptions was scanned in 1993; efforts continued withexamination of originals and drawings and new readings and interpre-tations—all of which became the basis for this volume. The subtitle“Inscriptions on Stone” is only partially correct, some 52 of those pre-sented being inscribed on other materials including gold, silver, bronze,and lead. Order of presentation is determined by geographical location.A glossary of Latin technical terms is included as is an index of sites(although a complete index is planned for future publication).Distribution in the North America is by The David Brown Book Co.

CR191 2009-036963 978-0-313-34496-1TThhee ccoommpplleettee gguuiiddee ttoo nnaattiioonnaall ssyymmbboollss aanndd eemmbblleemmss;; 22vv..Minahan, James.Greenwood Press, ©2010 977 p. $180.00This two-volume set for general readers and students contains entries on200 countries, including all UN member states, prominent statelessnations, and dependent states and territories. Volume I covers Asia andOceania, Central and South America, and Europe. Volume II covers theMiddle East and North Africa, North America and the Caribbean, andSub-Saharan Africa. Each entry includes information on official andunofficial symbols of the country, including flags, national seals andmottoes, national colors, flowers, and animals, and national anthems(with complete lyrics), as well as national heroes, sports teams, foods, fes-tivals, holidays, cultural symbols, and significant events in the formationof each nation’s identity. Entries also give basic facts on each country’spopulation, spoken languages, religions, capital city, government, cur-rency, patron saints, and well-known landmarks, in addition to Internetidentifier, vehicle identification plates and stickers, and national airlines.Each volume contains a color insert illustrating flags and coats of arms.

CR1602 2009-279957 978-1-84383-482-3TThhee hheerraalldd iinn llaattee mmeeddiieevvaall EEuurrooppee..Title main entry. Ed. by Katie Stevenson.The Boydell Press, ©2010 206 p. $95.00The role of the herald or officer of arms in late medieval Europe has notbeen much studied. Most think of him as someone who spent his timewith (often spurious) genealogies, making up coats of arms for the newnobility. Stevenson (late medieval history, University of St. Andrews) hascompiled reports from all over Europe that demonstrate the inaccuracyof this image. Contributors discuss the role of the heralds in governmentand in relation to the orders of chivalry so popular at the time. Thevariety of duties of the herald is shown for England, Brittany, theBurgundian Low Countries, the German Empire, Poland and theFlorentine city-state. The decline of the office of arms in the sixteenthcentury is noted along with the sociological reasons for it. The state ofmind that required a society to need an officer of arms is important inunderstanding Europe in the fourteenth through sixteenth centuries. Thiscollection sheds light on an undeservedly neglected subject.

CR4765 2009-502212 978-1-84383-477-9TThhee TTeeuuttoonniicc kknniigghhttss iinn tthhee HHoollyy LLaanndd,, 11119900--11229911..Morton, Nicholas Edward.The Boydell Press, ©2009 228 p. $105.00The military order of the Teutonic Knights was founded in 1198, devel-oping from a group established to provide German-speaking caregiversfor sick and wounded Imperial soldiers of the third Crusade. They werenever as powerful in the Holy Land as the Hospitallers or the Templars.However, their success in establishing an eastern frontier against paganincursion in the Baltic far surpassed the efficacy of the other orders.Perhaps because of this, previous work on the Teutonic Knights has con-centrated on the northern crusades. Morton (medieval history, SwanseaUniversity) rectifies this lapse with this excellent study of the knights inthe Holy Land from 1190 - 1291. He covers their foundation, militaryactions, relations with the other orders (not always amicable) and theways in which they dealt with the treacherous Levantine political dis-putes. Unlike the other orders, the knights were under the protection ofboth the papacy and the Holy Roman Emperor, a difficult task for themwhen the emperor had been excommunicated. Morton uses the scarceprimary sources with great skill, providing a much needed analysis ofthe role of the Teutonic Knights in the last century of European rule ofthe Holy Land.

CS21 2009-921403 978-0-8063-1795-3SSoocciiaall nneettwwoorrkkiinngg ffoorr ggeenneeaallooggiissttss..Smith, Drew.Genealogical Publishing, ©2009 129 p. $18.95 (pa)Smith, an academic librarian at the U. of South Florida and a specialistin digital genealogy, outlines different social networking services andhow genealogists can use them to share information, photos, and videoswith family, friends, and other researchers. He discusses blogs, wikis,Facebook, virtual worlds, message boards and mailing lists, collaborativeediting, genealogy-specific networks, podcasts, RSS feeds, sharingpersonal libraries, social bookmarking, and tags. There is no index orbibliography.

CT21 2009-510035 978-1-4438-0526-1LLiiffee wwrriittiinngg;; tthhee ssppiirriitt ooff tthhee aaggee aanndd tthhee ssttaattee ooff tthhee aarrtt..Title main entry. Ed. by Meg Jensen and Jane Jordan.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 238 p. $59.99The notion underlying the anthology is that however focused on a par-ticular individual, biographies and autobiographies necessarily reflectthe time and place in which they are written. Creative writers, painters,and scholars in those fields analyze examples in sections on life writingthat defines an age, marginal lives and historical revision, writing sciencelives, writing the self, writing lives in the arts, and writing literary liveswith the author as subject. Among the examples are biography as socialcriticism in Thomas Carlyle’s The Life of John Sterling, writing the absurdin Palestinian life narratives, Elizabeth Fox and the ties of community,autobiography in the paintings of James Clarke Hooke, and the case ofOuida and her biographers. No index is provided.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –30–

Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note ifthe book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.

CT25 2009-510037 978-1-4438-0500-1NNeeww eessssaayyss oonn lliiffee wwrriittiinngg aanndd tthhee bbooddyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Stuart and Stephanie Todd.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 270 p. $59.99Scholars of English literature explore the role of the body in autobiog-raphy that focuses in turn on the literary life, women, adoption and thefamily, and disability and disfigurement. Among specific topics are EdithWharton and the body aesthetic, Gertrude Stein’s body in occupiedFrance, the fit and athletic body in new women autobiographies, FrankHamilton Cushing’s disappearing body, images of the family body in theadoptee search narrative, refiguring the masculine body in the autobi-ographies of disabled American men, the broken mirror of identity inLucy Grealy’s Autobiography of a Face, and filial narratives of paternaldementia.

CT25 2009-035987 978-0-470-50836-7TThhee ppoowweerr ooff mmeemmooiirr;; hhooww ttoo wwrriittee yyoouurr hheeaalliinngg ssttoorryy..Myers, Linda Joy.Jossey-Bass, ©2010 251 p. $16.95 (pa)Myers, a psychotherapist and memoirist, outlines a step-by-step processto writing memoir as a therapeutic process. The process includes under-standing emotional motives for writing, doing research, planning, organ-izing the narrative, understanding the psychology of the family, dealingwith dark subject matter, and deciding whether to publish. She also dis-cusses research on how writing heals; using spiritualist, meditation, andinner listening; and how therapists can use memoir in their work.Exercises, prompts, and student examples from her workshops areincluded. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.

CT25 2009-504888 978-1-84706-252-9WWrriittiinngg yyoouurr sseellff;; ttrraannssffoorrmmiinngg ppeerrssoonnaall mmaatteerriiaall..Schneider, Myra and John Killick.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2010 259 p. $21.95 (pa)Schneider, a poet and writing tutor in the UK, and Killick, a poet, literaryjournalist, and former teacher, present a guide to bringing people, events,thoughts, and feelings from one’s personal life to writing. Using examplesthroughout, they discuss how different writers have explored a range ofexperiences with childhood, identity, adult relationships, loss, death, spir-ituality, displacement and disability, abuse, physical and mental illness,and caring and coping, and techniques for tackling this subject matter,such as image exploration, accessing memories, fictionalizing, keeping ajournal, and writing a memoir. They also cover the difference betweenraw and finished work.

CT34 2009-043301 978-0-924304-58-3TToo ddiiee aanndd nnoott ddeeccaayy;; aauuttoobbiiooggrraapphhyy aanndd tthhee ppuurrssuuiitt ooffiimmmmoorrttaalliittyy iinn eeaarrllyy CChhiinnaa..Wells, Matthew V. (Asia past & present; no.5)Assoc. for Asian Studies, ©2009 190 p. $25.00 (pa)Revising his doctoral dissertation in Chinese Literature and Language atthe University of Oregon (2006), Wells examines the autobiographicalwriting of Ge Hong (ca. 283-343) and compares it to other early texts ofthe genre. A minor official during the early Eastern Jin dynasty, 317-420,Ge Hong is best known for his interest in Daoism, alchemy, and tech-niques of longevity, he says. But he focuses here on the two authorialpostfaces appended to his most celebrated work, Baopuzi, translated asThe Master Embracing Simplicity. Among his topics are the proscriptivepower of genre, reading self-narrative and the self in early China, andtranscending history through autobiography. Two other early texts con-cerning early autobiography are translated and appended in alternatingparagraphs of Chinese and English.

CT105 2009-018754 978-1-59233-401-8GGrreeaatt bbaassttaarrddss ooff hhiissttoorryy;; tthhee ttrruuee aanndd rriivveettiinngg aaccccoouunnttssooff tthhee mmoosstt ffaammoouuss iilllleeggiittiimmaattee cchhiillddrreenn wwhhoo wweenntt oonn ttooaacchhiieevvee ggrreeaattnneessss..Fiorillo, Juré.Fair Winds Press, ©2010 272 p. $19.99 (pa)Fiorillo starts with an interesting notion: that there is at least sometimesa connection between illegitimate birth and great achievement. To makeher case, she presents short biographies of 15 individuals, ranging fromLeonardo da Vinci to Evita Peron, and Billie Holliday to AlexandreDumas. The large font used in the book means that the individual biog-raphies are rather short, which offers the author little space in which toconvince readers of any real connection between illegitimacy andachievement. On the plus side, Fiorillo’s book is beautifully and gener-ously illustrated. Fair Winds is an imprint of Quayside Publishing.

CT220 2009-047150 978-1-61614-162-2TThhee llaasstt lleeaaff;; vvooiicceess ooff hhiissttoorryy’’ss llaasstt--kknnoowwnn ssuurrvviivvoorrss..Lutz, Stuart.Prometheus Books, ©2010 370 p. $26.00Drawing from interviews with these individuals, Lutz, who owns acompany that buys, sells, and appraises historic documents, chroniclesthe stories of the last people to witness famous events in history, techno-logical innovations, and events relating to athletes and entertainers,including the final pitcher to surrender a home run to Babe Ruth, thelast suffragette, the last survivor of World War I, the last Civil Warwidows, the last person to fly with Amelia Earhart, the last survivor ofthe 1915 Lusitania sinking, the final Iwo Jima flag raiser, the last ZiegfeldFolly performer, the last survivor of the Sobibor Nazi death camp, the lastmusician to perform with Jimmie Rodgers, and the last survivingemployees of Thomas Edison, F. Scott Fitzgerald, and Harry Houdini.There is no index or bibliography.

CT275 2009-033725 978-0-87417-807-4RRaaww eeddggeess;; aa mmeemmooiirr..Barber, Phyllis.U. of Nevada Press, ©2009 268 p. $26.95In this memoir, Barber, an author who teaches at the Vermont College ofFine Arts, details her life after her marriage ended, as well as the devel-opment of her identity as she searched for the meaning of love and spir-ituality. Picking up where her previous memoir (How I Got Cultured: ANevada Memoir) left off, she describes the period of her life between 1995and 2002, which included a cross-country bicycle trip, a relationship witha drug addict, a second failed marriage, and periods of depression, inter-woven with her memories of her first marriage, which failed after thirty-three years with the rigidity of Mormon life.

CT275 2009-028243 978-0-8108-6777-2TTookkyyoo RRoossee//AAnn AAmmeerriiccaann ppaattrriioott;; aa dduuaall bbiiooggrraapphhyy..Close, Frederick P. (Scarecrow professional intelligence education series;no.7)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 522 p. $45.00PBS documentary producer Close uses a dual approach to tell the storyof Tokyo Rose, the almost mythical figure of World War II, and IvaToguri, an unfortunate Japanese-American trapped in Tokyo during thewar. While they were, of course, the same person, the legend Tokyo Rosewas vilified as a Japanese propagandist in the news media, and Toguriwas tried for treason as a result. While some of the information sur-rounding Tokyo Rose is contradictory, it is generally acknowledged thatToguri actually did little or nothing to advance the Japanese was effort.Instead, as the author notes, she quietly tried to help Allied POWs.Essentially, Close tells the story of Tokyo Rose/Toguri against thebackdrop of Cold War politics, racial views of the time, and ImperialJapan.

CT788 2009-018457 978-0-393-07258-7TThhee mmuussiicc rroooomm..Fiennes, William.W.W. Norton, ©2009 215 p. $24.95British writer Fiennes recalls his childhood in a castle, pivoting, like thefamily’s life, on his epileptic much older brother and the wonders of amind that worked a little differently than anyone else’s.

CT3650 978-1-905785-64-3CCaappiittaall wwoommeenn ooff iinnfflluueennccee;; pprrooffiilleess ooff 1133 iinnssppiirraattiioonnaallIIrriisshh wwoommeenn..Gunning, Ellen.Liffey Press, ©2009 223 p. $27.95 (pa)Gunning, a journalist, broadcaster, and public relations consultant inDublin, profiles 13 powerful and influential Dublin women, who rangein age and occupation. The women discuss their families and influences,career choices, partners and children, successes, and challenges. Theyinclude Betty Ashe, a community activist; artist Pauline Bewick; EvelynByrne, former Lord Mayor of Dublin; Anne Harris, editor of the SundayIndependent; executive Danuta Gray; opera singer and teacher VeronicaDunne; law professor Ivana Bacik; and Mary O’Rourke, former ministerand leader of the Seanad. The book is based on a radio show of the samename. There is no index or bibliography. Distributed by Dufour.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–31–

HHIISSTTOORRYY ((GGEENNEERRAALL))

D13 978-90-420-2831-9IIddeeaalliizzaattiioonn XXIIIIII;; mmooddeelliinngg iinn hhiissttoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Krzysztof Brzechczyn. (Poznan studies in thephilosophy of the sciences and the humanities; v.97)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 384 p. $108.00This volume collects 20 papers exploring methodological and analyticalissues of modeling in the historical sciences. They explore ontologicalunderstandings of the historical process and its implications for mod-eling, describe different theoretical approaches to modeling as a method-ology, demonstrate the use of modeling in research practice (particularlyin relation to economic modeling in Polish history), and discuss Polishcontributions to the analytical philosophy of history.

D16 2009-007384 978-1-4384-2909-0HHeeggeell aanndd hhiissttoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Will Dudley.State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 256 p. $75.00The historicism of German philosopher G. W. H. Hegel (1770-1831),asserting as it did that history has an end, freedom, towards which itnecessarily progresses and that, in fact, the “end of history” had arrivedin the 19th century, remains among his most controversial contributionsto philosophy. Dudley (philosophy, Williams College) presents 12 essaysengaging with this idea and other controversial aspects of Hegel’sphilosophy of history. They are presented in thematic sections thataddress interpretations and implications of the idea of the “end ofhistory;” accusations of Eurocentrism and racism in Hegel’s philosophyof history; the historicity of selfhood, moral imputation, ethical life, andpolitical organization; and the relationship between religion and Hegel’shistory of philosophy.

D16 2009-027949 978-0-415-99956-4TTeeaacchhiinngg hhiissttoorryy wwiitthh ffiillmm;; ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr sseeccoonnddaarryy ssoocciiaallssttuuddiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Alan S. Marcus et al.Routledge, ©2010 198 p. $38.95 (pa)Despite the common showing of historical movies in middle and highschool social studies classroom, there are few models for their effectiveuse in the classroom. Marcus (U. of Connecticut) and other educatorsthus introduce ten chapters that address issues in using film as primaryor secondary sources to visualize the past, treat controversial issues, anddevelop specific skills including empathic perspectives and analyticalskills. Chapters include reflections on case studies of teachers’ strategiesfor choosing and using films specific to educational goals, e.g., unit dailylesson outlines, film-related writing prompts.

D16 2009-015283 978-0-7656-1714-9TTeeaacchhiinngg wwoorrlldd hhiissttoorryy iinn tthhee ttwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt cceennttuurryy;; aarreessoouurrccee bbooookk..Title main entry. Ed. by Heidi Roupp. (Sources and studies in worldhistory)M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 193 p. $69.95This volume assembles 32 chapters written by high school teachers andothers from the US and Australia who help new world history teachers,as well as professors teaching future social studies educators, in devel-oping a successful world history class. They covers such aspects asengaging students, course organization, technology, using themes, differ-ences from European history, teaching strategies, teaching students tothink historically, time management, integrating leadership learning,teaching world art and religions, analyzing student progress, and gender.An annotated bibliography is included. Roupp, a founding member ofthe World History Association who organized a nationwide program con-sisting of world history institutes for educators, is associated with WorldHistory Connected Inc., an electronic journal for teachers.

D21 978-0-9797758-6-4MMiilleessttoonnee ddooccuummeennttss iinn wwoorrlldd hhiissttoorryy;; eexxpplloorriinngg tthheepprriimmaarryy ssoouurrcceess tthhaatt sshhaappeedd tthhee wwoorrlldd;; 44vv.. ((oonnlliinnee aacccceessssiinncclluuddeedd))Title main entry. Ed. by Brian Bonhomme.Schlager Group, ©2010 2100 p. $395.00Using the model of the publisher’s previous Milestone Documents refer-ences pertaining to United States history, this four-volume set presents125 documents pertaining to world history—a selection more difficult tomake because of the broad scope. Useful for teachers seeking hard-to-findmaterial for community college or undergraduate survey courses, this ref-erence presents each document along with in-depth analysis. Theanalyses are written in a standardized format discussing authorship,audience, contents, and impact; in addition, for each document, studyquestions, a bibliography, a glossary, and a boxed selection of quotes areincluded as are timelines and b&w photos. Arrangement is chronologicalbeginning in Volume 1 with the period from 2350 BCE to 1058 CE; sub-sequent volumes progress through eras divided as follows: 1082-1833,1839-1941, and 1942-2000. Indexing in the fourth volume offers access todocuments by category and by region, as well as a comprehensive subjectindex. The front matter of Volume 1 contains an activity guide forteachers and supplementary material keyed to the National HistoryStandards for World History. Purchase of the printed set entitles a schoolor library to free access to the online version until the end of 2011. Likeprevious titles in the Milestone Documents series, this set is distributedby Salem Press.

D25 2009-032434 978-1-85109-667-1AA gglloobbaall cchhrroonnoollooggyy ooff ccoonnfflliicctt;; ffrroomm tthhee aanncciieenntt wwoorrlldd ttootthhee mmooddeerrnn MMiiddddllee EEaasstt;; 66vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Spencer C. Tucker.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 2780 p. $395.00This six-volume reference (1.5 million words) constitutes a seeminglymonumental enterprise for one person, that one person being a metic-ulous expert who didn’t confine himself to a simple chronology butinstead expanded the project to encompass plenty of contextual and sup-plementary material. Tucker is a former army captain and intelligenceanalyst who served in the Pentagon during the Vietnam War and subse-quently taught military history for decades at Texas Christian Universityand at Virginia Military Institute before retiring in 2003. Undaunted bythe task at hand, he presents a year-by-year, event-by-event chronology,having made a set of criteria and guidelines for selection and presen-tation (these are explained in his preface). The volumes include, also, atotal of 376 biographical profiles and 301 key innovations and tech-nologies—weapons that changed history, as well as some 250 detaileddescriptions of key battles throughout history, and a couple hundredmaps. Each volume includes the comprehensive index.

D34 2009-026473 978-0-8139-2847-0OOlldd wwoorrlldd,, nneeww wwoorrlldd;; AAmmeerriiccaa aanndd EEuurrooppee iinn tthhee aaggee ooffJJeeffffeerrssoonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Leonard J. Sadosky et al. (JeffersonianAmerica)U. of Virginia Press, ©2010 287 p. $59.50Sadosky (history, Iowa State University) and his colleagues present papersfrom the 2005 Salzburg Seminar held in Austria. The subtitle for theseminar was “the age of Jefferson” and his experiences in Europe as wellas his conflicted attitudes toward the Old World form the basis of someof the essays. Others, however, treat his compatriot, John Adams and hissojourn in England and France as well as the American visit of Britishenvoy, William Eden. The attitude of Londoners to American Colonial vis-itors is given a not very flattering revision. The difference between theself-definition of male and female exiles is examined as well as the lifeof Elizabeth Patterson Bonaparte, America’s first celebrity in the tabloidsense. The initial essay on Jefferson and the creation of an Americanenvironment demonstrates the breadth of the topics.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –32–

D116 978-2-503-53144-1RReewwrriittiinngg tthhee mmiiddddllee aaggeess iinn tthhee ttwweennttiieetthh cceennttuurryy;; vv..22::NNaattiioonnaall ttrraaddiittiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Jaume Aurell and Julia Pavón.Brepols Publishers, ©2009 520 p. $94.00 (pa)The first volume, published in 2005, profiled 20th-century medievalistswho contributed to history beyond the Middle Ages, and to the interna-tional intellectual milieu more broadly. That anthology having beenreceived kindly, the editors here provide the same service to 18medievalists who are less known worldwide but who contributed signif-icantly to the establishment of medieval or national identities in theirown country or literary tradition. English readers would likely be mostfamiliar with C. S. Lewis and J. R. R. Tolkien, and perhaps with JohanHuizinga, who is Dutch but widely read in English translation. An intro-duction to modern medievalism and national traditions is provided byJaume Aurell (medieval and modern historiography, U. of Navarra,Spain). There is no index. Distributed in North America by The DavidBrown Book Co.

D117 2009-032089 978-0-8108-6995-0MMeeddiieevvaall ffaannttaassyy aass ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee;; tthhee SSoocciieettyy ffoorr CCrreeaattiivveeAAnnaacchhrroonniissmm aanndd tthhee ccuurrrreenntt MMiiddddllee AAggeess..Cramer, Michael A.Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 200 p. $39.95 (pa)To test the notion that a wave of medievalism is overtaking Americanculture, Cramer (communication, City U. of New York) examines the role-playing Society to discover how members adapt and employ ideas aboutthe Middle Ages in performance, ritual reenactment, living history, andre-creation. He argues that rather than recreating the Middle Ages,members use performance to construct a post-modern counter-cultureframed as medieval and centered around a reconstruction of themedieval king game. He should know; he has been a member for 30years. After a brief history of the Society since its birth in 1966, he looksat creative medievalism, interpersonal performance, on the field of thesummer king, and in the hall of the winter king. Appended are a list ofthe kingdoms and of the major wars, and the history of the Societyaccording to Olsgaard—Duke Henrik of Havn, the first crowned king.

D118 2009-036249 978-0-313-35967-5TTeerrmm ppaappeerr rreessoouurrccee gguuiiddee ttoo mmeeddiieevvaall hhiissttoorryy..Hamm, Jean Shepherd.Greenwood Press, ©2010 371 p. $65.00Hamm (English, Radford U.) provides an all-in-one resource for highschool and college students required to write term papers or other assign-ments on medieval history. Entries include 100 summaries of variousevents from the medieval era, standard and alternative ideas for papers,alternative formats in electronic media, and sources for additionalresearch. Also included are relevant Web sites and multimedia sources.

D233 978-1-84682-185-1TThhee UUllsstteerr eeaarrllss aanndd bbaarrooqquuee EEuurrooppee;; rreeffaasshhiioonniinngg IIrriisshhiiddeennttiittiieess,, 11660000--11880000..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas O’Connor and Mary Ann Lyons. (Irishin Europe monograph series)Four Courts Press, ©2010 404 p. $70.00In commemoration of the four hundredth anniversary of the 1607 “flightof the earls” from Ulster, this compilation treats the impact of the Irishemigrants on the continent. Hugh O’Neill, Catholic earl of Tyrone and thebane of Elizabeth I, is the focal point of many of the essays as he andhis men traveled across Europe to Rome. However, the Irish presencealready there is the subject of others, particularly the Irish-founded col-leges for the training of Franciscan, Dominican and Jesuit priests. Theseexisted in France, Spain and even Prague. Irish mercenaries were alsopervasive in the armies involved in the political and religious restruc-turing of Europe. The impact of the Irish in literature and art isaddressed in one section, while another looks at the way the continentalIrish were busy redefining themselves and what it meant to be Irish inthe religious and political framework of confessional Europe. The neg-lected subject of the Irish in Scandinavia is also explored. This volumedoes much to remind scholars that although Ireland is an island, it wasnot insular and that mutual influences between it and Baroque Europeshould be taken account of in any study of the period. Distributed in theUS by ISBS

D431 2009-031485 978-0-8131-2558-9CCoonnssuummeedd bbyy wwaarr;; EEuurrooppeeaann ccoonnfflliicctt iinn tthhee 2200tthh cceennttuurryy..Hall, Richard C.University Press of Kentucky, ©2010 286 p. $30.00Rather than examining international conflicts of the last century as dis-crete events, Hall (history, Georgia Southwestern State U.) is in the campof historians who regard them as representing patterns in a continuousLong War. He divides these diplomatic/military conflicts into overlappingphases: the first beginning with the Balkan Wars in 1912 and culmi-nating in War World I, the Second World War, the Cold War, and comingfull circle, the Balkan Wars fought from 1991-1999. The volume includesseveral maps.

D521 978-1-84884-082-9PPrriivvaattee BBeeaattssoonn’’ss wwaarr;; lliiffee,, ddeeaatthh aanndd hhooppee oonn tthheeWWeesstteerrnn FFrroonntt:: AA ddiiaarryy ooff tthhee GGrreeaatt WWaarr..Beatson, James. Ed. by Shaun Springer & Stuart Humphreys.Pen and Sword, ©2009 154 p. $39.99James Beatson of Scotland enlisted in the Royal Scots in the earliest daysof WWI. His diary of trench warfare spans the period from Februarythrough December 1915. Eloquent and often humorous, his descriptionsof daily life on the Western Front are complete with biblical and literaryreferences. The diary brings readers into the mind of an extraordinaryordinary soldier, self-educated, patriotic, and religious, who ponders hisparadoxical identification with the enemy during battle. In an intro-duction, the editors argue that Beatson’s writing can be favorably com-pared with more well-known writers of the Great War. An epiloguedescribes the last six months of Beatson’s life before he died in July 1916in the Battle of Somme, and gives details on what is known about hisfriends and comrades. A wealth of b&w historical photos from thearchive of the Imperial War Museum, London, illustrate trench life andplaces from the diary. Springer, a public speaker on history, now ownsthe diary. Humphreys is a Great War researcher. The book is distributedin the US by Casemate.

D543 2009-005687 978-1-4000-6671-1TThhee MMaarrnnee,, 11991144;; tthhee ooppeenniinngg ooff WWoorrlldd WWaarr II aanndd tthheebbaattttllee tthhaatt cchhaannggeedd tthhee wwoorrlldd..Herwig, Holger H.Random House, ©2009 391 p. $28.00Herwig (the Center for Military and Strategic Studies, University ofCalgary, Canada) looks at the Battle of Marne, the first clash of WWI,from the perspective of the seven German armies that invaded Franceand Belgium, drawing on the archives of the various federal German con-tingents. The book offers historical background on the political situationin Germany prior to the battle, details of the battle itself, and an analysisof German battle plans, plus detailed profiles of the battle’s importantGerman, French, and British leaders. Of special interest are newlyrevealed details, based on diary accounts, about the order of retreat byGermany’s Lt. Col. Richard Hentsch. The book includes b&w historicalphotos, and a brief chapter of notes on sources and archives.

D546 2010-290938 978-1-4411-5530-6AA ppaarrtt ooff hhiissttoorryy;; aassppeeccttss ooff tthhee BBrriittiisshh eexxppeerriieennccee ooff tthheeFFiirrsstt WWoorrlldd WWaarr.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Howard.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 229 p. $21.95 (pa)In this volume, a reprint from 2008, Howard, who served with the BritishArmy in Italy during World War II and taught military and naval historyat Yale U., assembles a collection of 22 essays about different aspects ofthe British experience of the First World War. Contributors working inwar studies, conflict studies, history, English, poetry, music, and arche-ology in the UK and US discuss a variety of topics: military revisionism;the press, propaganda, and public perceptions of the war; the Gallipolicampaign; changes in British writing about the Battle of Jutland; theBattle of the Somme; the contributions of India; the role of religion;wartime film propaganda; women’s writing about the Armistice; theImperial War Museum; war poetry, memoirs, and fiction; oral history;memo rials; Britten’s War Requiem; popular culture; and archeologicalexpeditions.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–33–

D569 2008-934425 978-0-465-01329-6TThhee wwhhiittee wwaarr;; lliiffee aanndd ddeeaatthh oonn tthhee IIttaalliiaann ffrroonntt,, 11991155--11991199..Thompson, Mark.Basic Books, ©2009 454 p. $30.00Oxford-based social scientist and military historian Thompson describeswhat he calls the most savage fighting of the Great War, along the frontwhere Italy attacked the Austro-Hungarian Empire and a million mendied in battle, of wounds or diseases, or as prisoners. It was called whitebecause of the mountains: bare rock either blaring in the summer sunor covered with winter snow. His topics include a mania for expansion,Cadorna’s clenched fist, from position to attrition, year zero, the returnblow, starlight from violence, whiteness, the gospel of energy, the traitorof Carzano, and from victory to disaster.

D574 978-1-84884-077-5CCaarrmmaarrtthheenn PPaallss;; aa hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee 1155tthh ((sseerrvviiccee)) bbaattttaalliioonntthhee WWeellsshh rreeggiimmeenntt,, 11991144--11991199..John, Steven.Pen and Sword, ©2009 272 p. $39.95John was born and raised in Laugharne, Carmarthenshire, Wales; he isa qualified engineer and the author of a previous book on the men ofLaugharne who fought during the two World Wars. The latest in thepopular Pals series, John’s second book chronicles the experiences of the15th Welsh, one of the early units raised in 1914 as a result of LordKitchener’s massive expansion of the regular army for the Great War.Illustrated with b&w maps, diagrams, and photographs, the text honorsmembers of the battalion who fought and died during the Great War,among them the author’s great uncle. No subject index. Distributed byCasemate.

D639 2009-017348 978-0-674-03592-8FFrreeeeddoomm ssttrruugggglleess;; AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaannss aanndd WWoorrlldd WWaarr II..Lentz-Smith, Adriane.Harvard University Press, ©2009 318 p. $35.00By the early 1920s, white southerners had perfected a system of segre-gation and oppression, and were seeking to export it to other regions andnations, argues Lentz-Smith (history, Duke U.), and when World War Iarrived, African Americans saw it as an opportunity to forestall theascent of white supremacy and achieve racial justice. She documents howfamilies and church groups, newspaper editors, and organizations likethe National Association for the Advancement of Colored People lookedto black soldiers as emblems and agents in this struggle. Her topicsinclude world on fire, men in the making, at war in the terrestrialheaven, saving Sergeant Caldwell, and the fruit of conquest.

D726 2009-020309 978-0-8018-9427-5TThhee cciivviicc ffoouunnddaattiioonnss ooff ffaasscciissmm iinn EEuurrooppee;; IIttaallyy,, SSppaaiinn,,aanndd RRoommaanniiaa,, 11887700--11994455..Riley, Dylan J.Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 258 p. $55.00According to many theorists, the growth of vibrant civil society organi-zations correlates to the health of liberal democracy. Yet, following in thewake of explosive growth in mutual aid societies, rural credit organiza-tions, cooperatives, and other associations in Europe in the early 20thcentury was the rise of fascism in roughly half the continent. This is par-ticularly puzzling in the cases of Italy, Spain, and Romania, the empiricalfocus of this book, because of their well-established liberal institutionsand parliamentary regimes. Riley (sociology, U. of California at Berkeley)explains how this came to be by arguing that civil society facilitated theemergence of fascism in these countries because it preceded the estab-lishment of strong political organizations among both dominant classesand nonelites. Because of this lack of hegemonic politics, the democraticdemands of voluntary associations “assumed a paradoxically antiliberaland authoritarian form: a technocratic rejection of politics as such,”which created a general crisis of politics that provided space for thegrowth of fascist movements.

D743 2009-052812 978-0-7864-4740-4WWoorrlldd WWaarr IIII oonn tthhee bbiigg ssccrreeeenn;; 445500++ ffiillmmss,, 11993388--22000088..Milberg, Doris.McFarland & Co., ©2010 216 p. $35.00 (pa)Milberg, a former teacher and author of books and articles on the historyof cinema, offers a book that is—fortunately— more than listing of WorldWar II films. It is to a more significant extent a portrait of a critical,complex, and devastating era in American history. The story of the cre-ation of the films, who created them, and why is told within the per-spective of the times leading up to the country’s involvement in the warand the war itself. For that reason, the book will interest both film andhistory enthusiasts.

D756 978-1-84884-098-0AAssssaauulltt oonn GGeerrmmaannyy;; tthhee bbaattttllee ffoorr GGeeiilleennkkiirrcchheenn..((rreepprriinntt,, 11998899))Ford, Ken.Pen and Sword, ©2009 176 p. $29.95A prolific historian of World War II, Ford narrates the November 1944Anglo-American attack on the German town near the Dutch border,drawing heavily on testimony from British, American, and German sol-diers who took part in the battle. His topics include the Wessexmen andthe Railsplitters, preparations for battle, the British attack, the first night,the attack down the Worm Valley, the tragedy of Hoven, and retreat. Thecopyright page cites the 1989 publication as a first edition, but it is notmentioned in the text. Distributed in the US by Casemate.

D757 978-1-84415-906-2TTaarrggeett LLeeiippzziigg;; tthhee RRAAFF’’ss ddiissaassttrroouuss rraaiidd ooff 1199//2200FFeebbrruuaarryy 11994444..Cooper, Alan.Pen and Sword, ©2009 222 p. $39.99During the Royal Air Force’s February 1944 air attack on the German cityof Leipzig, 420 airmen were killed, 131 became prisoners of war, and 79bomber planes were lost. This work draws on newly available archivesand interviews with participants to analyze what went wrong in attack,which resulted in heavier losses than the combined losses of two pre-vious strikes on the city. The book shows that espionage played a part inthe debacle, as well as technical problems and poor briefings, and alsodetails the two previous successful raids on the city in the fall of 1943.B&w historical aerial, ground, and personnel photos and route maps areincluded, along with appendices listing all RAF aircraft and crew in theraid. Cooper is an aviation historian with other historical works to hiscredit. The book is distributed in the US by Casemate.

D767 2009-041530 978-0-451-23023-2TThhee PPaacciiffiicc..Ambrose, Hugh.New American Library, ©2010 489 p. $26.95The HBO miniseries The Pacific chronicled the experiences of three USMarines who served in the Pacific during WWII. This companion bookto the series offers additional information on these three men, plus twoothers who fought in the Pacific, drawing on military records, letters,journals, memoirs, and interviews collected for the series. Going beyondthe miniseries, the book recounts personal lives and family dramas ofsmall-town America of the period, along with epic battles of the war andsurvival in prisoner-of-war camps, allowing readers to glimpse the Pacificwar as a whole through the eyes of five men of vastly different back-grounds. The book includes two sections of b&w historical photos. Thereis no subject index. Ambrose, historical consultant to the HBO miniseries,is former vice president of the National WWII Museum.

D769 2005-541182 978-0-7603-3823-0AAllll AAmmeerriiccaann,, aallll tthhee wwaayy;; ffrroomm MMaarrkkeett GGaarrddeenn ttoo BBeerrlliinn::TThhee ccoommbbaatt hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee 8822nndd AAiirrbboorrnnee DDiivviissiioonn iinnWWoorrlldd WWaarr IIII.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000055))Nordyke, Phil.Zenith Press, ©2010 420 p. $22.99 (pa)Combining after action reports with unit histories and veteran interviews,this work offers a detailed history of the 82nd Airborne Division duringWWII from the reactivation of the division in early 1942 through thedevelopment and training of the unit as America’s first division-size air-borne unit, through all combat operations in Europe to the end of thewar. Numerous b&w historical photos and maps are included. Nordykehas written other books on WWII history. Zenith Press is an imprint ofQuayside Publishing.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –34–

D769 2009-030268 978-0-7603-3779-0IIssllaannddss ooff hheellll;; tthhee UU..SS.. MMaarriinneess iinn tthhee WWeesstteerrnn PPaacciiffiicc11994444--11994455..Hammel, Eric.Zenith Press, ©2010 274 p. $50.00Hammel is a military historian whose accomplishments include prepa-ration of some 40 narrative and pictorial books. In a prefatory note hediscusses the changing scope and intensity of the photographic recordapparent in this book as the photographers began to share day-to-dayexperiences with the Marines, acquired their own horrific battle experi-ences, and learned to face horrors directly. Published to coincide with anHBO TV miniseries “The Pacific,” this lavishly produced oversize book(11x12.5″) offers a complementary presentation that will appeal to thosewho enjoy the material experience afforded by ink & paper. The nar-rative and 567 captioned b&w photos are supported with seven colormaps, a bibliography, and an index. This book is engaging on manylevels—as history, as tribute, as documentation of what war entails, andas a multifaceted display of what cameras can bring home and preserve.

D773 978-1-935149-21-7DD--DDaayyss iinn tthhee PPaacciiffiicc wwiitthh tthhee UU.. SS.. CCooaasstt GGuuaarrdd iinn WWoorrllddWWaarr IIII;; tthhee ssttoorryy ooff LLuucckkyy 1133.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Wiley, Ken.Casemate Publishing, ©2010 334 p. $19.95 (pa)Author Wiley was a US Coast Guard LCVP coxswain serving in thePacific during WWII. In this narrative, novel-like account, he details theCoast Guard’s role in WWII through the eyes of a teenager in commandof his own boat, just one the millions of young men who couldn’t legallydrink or vote but who were charged with saving the free world fromtyranny. He interweaves technical and tactical details as well as thehuman side of the war, looking at cultural forces, friendships at war, andrelationships with girls back home. In addition to b&w personal photosfrom the period of Wiley and his brothers, who all served overseas, thebook includes b&w drawings by the author of life onboard the ship. Thebook’s readership includes historians and general readers. An appendixoffers a ship roster. The book was originally published in 2007 as Lucky13: D-Days in the Pacific with the U. S. Coast Guard.

D786 978-1-84415-900-0AAiirrffiieellddss ooff tthhee DD--DDaayy iinnvvaassiioonn ffoorrccee;; 22nndd ttaaccttiiccaall AAiirrFFoorrccee iinn SSoouutthh--EEaasstt EEnnggllaanndd iinn WWoorrlldd WWaarr TTwwoo..Jacobs, Peter.Pen and Sword, ©2009 216 p. $25.99 (pa)This history of the WWII airfields used by the 2nd Tactical Air Force inthe UK areas of Kent, Surrey, East Sussex, Essex, and Greater Londonfocuses on the events of late 1943 and the first half of 1944, but also givesbackground on previous history of the airfields. It describes the peopleand events associated with each air base, looks at what remains on thesites today, and explores favorite pubs and restaurants of airmen andground crews in the surrounding towns. In addition to airfields, thebook describes other places of historical interest from WWII, includingcountry homes, memorials, and museums, and includes directions onhow to get to each place. The book is illustrated with b&w historicalphotos and contemporary photos of historical locations. It is distributedin the US by Casemate. Jacobs is a service RAF officer who has writtenother historical works.

D786 2009-504543 978-1-84884-086-7DDiiaarryy ooff aa bboommbb aaiimmeerr;; ttrraaiinniinngg iinn AAmmeerriiccaa aanndd ffllyyiinnggwwiitthh 1122 SSqquuaaddrroonn iinn WWWWIIII..Muirhead, Campbell.Pen and Sword, ©2009 200 p. $39.99Muirhead, a member of Britain’s Royal Air Force, was only 20 years oldwhen he underwent training as a pilot in Canada and the US. Hisdetailed wartime diary reflects the fears and other emotions of fightersof the period. In the first part of the diary, during training, he meetsmovie stars and hobnobs with socialites. In the second part, he describeslife on the air base and the grueling schedule of 30 bombing raids onGermany in 11 weeks. Bombers had a 30% chance of surviving the war,and Muirhead’s entries shed light on coping methods such as alcoholand tobacco use, pranks and black humor, and the personal rituals per-formed before each bombing mission. The book includes b&w personaland historical photos. Muirhead joined the Civil Service after leaving theRAF.

D786 978-1-84884-106-2EEssccaappee,, eevvaassiioonn aanndd rreevveennggee;; tthhee ttrruuee ssttoorryy ooff aa GGeerrmmaann--JJeewwiisshh RRAAFF ppiilloott wwhhoo bboommbbeedd BBeerrlliinn aanndd bbeeccaammee aa PPOOWW..Stevens, Marc H.Pen and Sword, ©2009 223 p. $39.95A business executive in Toronto, Stevens tells the story of his father Peter,which he researched years after he died in 1979. He traces his family andearly life in Hanover then London, his time in the Royal Air Forcebeginning in 1939, the September 1941 bombing raid in which he wasshot down, and his experience as a prisoner of war until the war endedin 1945. Final chapters sketch the rest of his life and the processes ofMarc discovering the story. Distributed in the US by Casemate.

D786 978-1-84884-087-4SSwwiifftt ttoo bbaattttllee;; nnoo.. 7722 ssqquuaaddrroonn RRAAFF iinn aaccttiioonn;; vv..22:: 11994422--11994477..Docherty, Tom.Pen and Sword, ©2009 246 p. $39.99The second of three volumes recounts the aircraft and missions flown byRoyal Air Force’s No. 72 Squadron over northern Africa and southernEurope during World War II, and its brief occupation of Zeltweg, Austria.Black and white photographs and maps are provided. The author joinedNo. 72 Squadron in 1993 and is a member of the squadron’s veteranassociation. Distributed in the U.S. by Casemate.

D802 2009-008507 978-0-8135-4682-7TThhee ccrruucciibbllee;; aann aauuttoobbiiooggrraapphhyy bbyy CCoolloonneell YYaayy,, FFiilliippiinnaaAAmmeerriiccaann gguueerrrriillllaa.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11995500))Panlilio, Yay. Ed. by Denise Cruz.Rutgers U. Press, ©2010 320 p. $27.95 (pa)In this rousing and colorful memoir, Panlilo recounts her experiences asa leader of the Philippine resistance against the Japanese occupationduring the Second World War. Despite the author’s literary skills andpublic acknowledgement of her wartime accomplishments, this book waslost in the flood of war memoirs when it originally came out in 1950 andhad been out of print for a half century. Although Panlilo’s portrayals ofJapanese and of the indigenous people of the Philippines are problematicby today’s standards, this new edition provides a unique perspective onthe war in the Philippines—as well as an exciting tale—that will be wel-comed by many readers.

D802 2009-281312 978-0-7453-2695-5TThhee IIttaalliiaann rreessiissttaannccee;; ffaasscciissttss,, gguueerrrriillllaass aanndd tthhee AAlllliieess..Behan, Tom.Pluto Press, ©2009 255 p. $90.00This book narrates the history of the Italian Resistance movement of1943-1945 in broadly chronological fashion, crediting the Partisanfighters and other Resistance actors with having played a crucial role instopping the march of fascism and with having laid the foundations formodern Italian democracy. The chronological narrative addresses socialand political roots of the resistance; the various activities of theresistance, from strikes to insurrection; and the fate of fascism in Italyfollowing the triumph of the Resistance. Four thematic chapters followthe chronological narrative, examining the role of women, the politicallife created within some of the areas liberated by the Resistance in themountains, the organization and impact of urban insurrection in Romeand Milan, and the overall impact of the Resistance on the military andpolitical outcomes of World War II.

D804 978-1-84884-072-0AAuusscchhwwiittzz ddeeaatthh ccaammpp..Baxter, Ian. (Images of war)Pen and Sword, ©2009 127 p. $29.95 (pa)A military historian who specializes in 20th-century Germany, Baxter hasassembled photographs documenting the operation of the most infamouscamp where men, women, and children prisoners were worked to deathor executed in gas chambers during World War II. Some are from theconstruction and operation period, others taken just after the camp wasliberated by allies, and still others taken today. Distributed in the US byCasemate.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–35–

D804 978-1-906033-39-2CCrruucciibbllee ooff ccoommbbaatt;; GGeerrmmaannyy’’ss ddeeffeennssiivvee bbaattttlleess iinn tthheeUUkkrraaiinnee,, 11994433--4444..Hinze, Rolf. Ed. and trans. by Frederick P. Steinhardt.Helion & Company, ©2009 502 p. $59.95Hinze provides the only full and detailed account of the holding actionof German forces in the Ukraine, the evacuation of the CrimeanPeninsula, retreat from and loss of the Dnjepr salient, and battles on theRomanian frontier. Narrative and maps provide unit histories anddescribe individual battles along the southern portion of the Easternfrom late 1943 after the Battle of Kursk through the successful Sovietoffensives in the summers of 1943 and 1944. Photographs and a list ofbattles are appended. No index is provided. Rückzugskämpfe in derUkraine 1943/1944 was published by Hinze in 1991. Distributed in the USby Casemate.

D804 2009-024652 978-0-8047-5951-9HHiissttoorriiaannss ooff tthhee JJeewwss aanndd tthhee HHoollooccaauusstt..Engel, David. (Stanford studies in Jewish history and culture)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 314 p. $65.00The author’s own academic appointments exemplify the compartmental-ization between Holocaust studies and the rest of modern Jewish history.Arguing against the relegation of Holocaust studies to European studies,Engel (Holocaust studies, Hebrew and Judaic studies, and history, NewYork U.) discusses Gershom Scholem’s commentary on the Holocaust’simplications for Jewish historigraphy not being viewed as a whole, thecentrality of Holocaust consciousness to Jewish identity since the 1970s,and relation of the Holocaust to modern and postmodern representationsof historical truth. Originally published in Hebrew under the title Mulhar haGa’ash.

D804 978-0-85303-727-9RRaaoouull WWaalllleennbbeerrgg iinn BBuuddaappeesstt;; mmyytthh,, hhiissttoorryy aannddHHoollooccaauusstt..Levine, Paul A.Vallentine Mitchell, ©2010 392 p. $74.95Today Raoul Wallenberg is a symbol of the ultimate Righteous Gentile, across between the Scarlet Pimpernel and Elijah, who was martyred forhis actions. In the minds of those he saved, he was a genuine messiah.Stories abound concerning his bravery and determination to save theJews of Budapest. Levine (holocaust and genocide studies, UppsalaUniversity) knows that he is on thin ice in this biography that correctsthe myths and restores Wallenberg to human status. Much of the bookemphasizes his justification for showing the “saint” as a young, aristo-cratic, already balding, Swedish businessman who was thrust into aninsane situation and rose to the challenge along with other members ofthe Swedish legation. Using Swedish archival documents along withletters and diaries by Wallenberg, Levine paints a human portrait ofWallenberg. The true story is much more nail-bitingly tense than themyth. Wallenberg the man becomes much more of a role model thanWallenberg the saint. This is a fine example of how real history is done,with passion and a commitment to the evidence. Distributed in the USby ISBS.

D805 2009-021162 978-0-415-42651-0CCoonncceennttrraattiioonn ccaammppss iinn NNaazzii GGeerrmmaannyy;; tthhee nneeww hhiissttoorriieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Jane Caplan and Nikolaus Wachsmann.Routledge, ©2010 243 p. $35.95 (pa)Historians specializing in World War II, Nazi Germany, or the campsthemselves critically review recent historical studies about the topics inthe English language. Topics being investigated now include the devel-opment of the concentration camps 1933-45, camp personnel, theinmates’ struggle for survival, gender, the public face of the camps, workand extermination, the Holocaust, the death marches and final phase ofNazi genocide, and the afterlife of the camps.

D805 2009-034202 978-0-393-07019-4RReemmeemmbbeerriinngg ssuurrvviivvaall;; iinnssiiddee aa NNaazzii ssllaavvee--llaabboorr ccaammpp..Browning, Christopher R.W.W. Norton, ©2010 375 p. $27.95In 1972, a war crimes trial in Germany ended in acquittal for the ex-police chief accused of liquidating the Wierzbnik ghetto, sending its res-idents off to Treblinka and to the Nazi slave labor camp at Starachowice.Browning (History, University of North Carolina) was appalled by thatverdict, and it eventually led him to research and write this book, whichuses eyewitness accounts from 292 survivors of the camp to determinewhat actually happened there. The author’s research reveals a prisonsociety in which the interests of prisoners and guards sometimes inter-sected, and where many Jews made the devil’s bargain of making them-selves valuable to the Nazi war effort in order to secure a better chanceof survival. While this book is probably too scholarly and detailed formost readers, it is an essential work for anyone studying the Holocaustor Nazi Germany.

D811 978-1-84832-548-7SSnniippeerr aaccee;; ffrroomm tthhee EEaasstteerrnn FFrroonntt ttoo SSiibbeerriiaa..Sutkus, Bruno. Trans. by Geoffrey Brooks.Frontline Publishers, ©2009 179 p. $32.95Drafted into the Nazi Wehrmacht’s 68th Infantry Division at age 19,Bruno Sutkus quickly became known as one of Germany’s best snipers.German snipers were required to carry log books to record every kill,and Sutkus’ log was one of the few such books to survive the war. In thisautobiography, he draws on entries from the log and newspaperaccounts to describe the experience of infantry warfare as seen thoughthe eyes of a sniper. He then recounts how he was forced to join theSoviet Army after the war, and how he deserted to join Lithuanianresistance fighters. He was captured by the KGB and deported to Siberia,held on forced labor camps for decades, and was finally able to returnto Germany in 1997. The story closes as he is given a hero’s welcome inLithuania and coaches the Lithuanian army on sniping skills. Many b&whistorical photos, some of documents and letters, are included. The bookwas first published in German by Munin Verlag in 2003. It has beentranslated by Geoffrey Brooks. This English language edition includes anew introduction by historical novelist David L. Robbins.

D860 978-1-60426-736-5PPoolliittiiccaall hhaannddbbooookk ooff tthhee wwoorrlldd 22001100..Title main entry. Ed. by Arthur S. Banks et al.CQ Press, ©2010 1942 p. $315.00★★★★ Previous editions were endorsed by Guide to reference books, Publiclibrary catalog, and Resources for college libraries. A necessary resourcefor any post-elementary library, this reference offers students and theinterested reader an excellent one-stop source of history and currentinformation on over 200 countries of the world. Arranged alphabetically,the entries provide a short geographic and political description—including a map—before delving into detailed descriptions of thecountry’s current affairs, political background, constitution and gov-ernment, foreign relations, current issues, political parties and groups,legislature, and communications, with election information includedthrough 2009. The members of the ruling cabinet are listed, as are thecountry’s intergovernmental representatives. Following the countryentries are entries for 120 of the world’s major intergovernmental organ-izations and UN agencies, and appendices of major international eventsfrom 1945-2009, UN membership, a serials list, and a chronology ofmajor international UN conferences from 1946-2009. A lengthy prefacesummarizes world affairs for the last decade.

D900 2009-004321 978-0-7614-7883-6WWoorrlldd aanndd iittss ppeeoopplleess;; EEuurrooppee;; 1133vv..Title main entry.Marshall Cavendish, ©2010 1872 p. $499.95Intended as a reference for school and public libraries, this fourth 13-volume set in the World and its peoples series is devoted to Europe. Eachslim volume of about 140 pages offers treatment of a country or coun-tries in terms of geography and climate, history and movement ofpeoples, government, modern history, cultural expression, daily life, andeconomy. The standardized presentation and numerous maps and photosmake accessible an impressive amount of information. Each volume isindividually indexed. The final volume contains a comprehensive indexas well as thematic indexes (e.g. place names, ethnicity & religion, land-scape & climate, historical & biographical, cultural & artistic, and eco-nomic); a set of comparative tables regarding geography, population,family life, trade, and other themes; a glossary; and a bibliography.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –36–

D923 978-1-84840-026-9DDoonn’’tt mmeennttiioonn tthhee wwaarrss;; aa jjoouurrnneeyy tthhrroouugghh EEuurrooppeeaannsstteerreeoottyyppeess..Connelly, Tony.New Island, ©2009 385 p. $27.00 (pa)The European correspondent for Ireland’s RTÉ network, Connellydescribes his travels to ten countries in an attempt to determine whetherthere’s any truth to the stereotypes about each country’s national char-acter. Unlike some other authors who’ve tackled this subject, the authoractually asks residents of each country whether they think the stereotypeshold water. (Surprisingly often, they do.) Full of sharp observations andmuch more fun than books by foreign correspondents tend to be,Connelly’s effort is well worth reading (if only to find out what Italianleft-wingers said about the bandana that Prime Minister Berlusconi’swore after his hair transplant). Distributed in North America by DufourEditions.

D1056 2009-037162 978-0-8047-6947-1EEtthhnniicc EEuurrooppee;; mmoobbiilliittyy,, iiddeennttiittyy,, aanndd ccoonnfflliicctt iinn aagglloobbaalliizzeedd wwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Roland Hsu.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 253 p. $24.95 (pa)Over the past several decades, Europe has become a destination forimmigrants from all over the world. This volume examines the issues ofethnicity and immigration that face the European Union today, exam-ining the struggle of EU nations to balance minority rights with socialcohesion. Contributors look at issues including labor migration, strainson social welfare systems, separatist movements, the durability of localtraditions, and the role of Islamic diasporas.

D1056 978-90-420-2734-3MMiinnoorriittyy iinntteeggrraattiioonn iinn CCeennttrraall EEaasstteerrnn EEuurrooppee;; bbeettwweeeenneetthhnniicc ddiivveerrssiittyy aanndd eeqquuaalliittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Timofey Agarin and Malte Brosig. (On theboundary of two worlds; identity, freedom, and moral imagination inthe Baltics; 18)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 355 p. $101.00These 13 papers, presented by Agarin (U. of Aberdeen, UK) and Brosig(U. of Witwatersrand, South Africa), explore current challenges in inte-grating ethnic minority groups in the countries of Central and EasternEurope. The analysis seeks to avoid privileging either international,national, or societal dimensions and is interdisciplinary, bringing ininsights from fields as different as anthropology, political science, soci-ology, and law. The papers explore such topics as the European Union asa promoter of minority rights, the work of the Advisory Committee ofthe Framework Convention for the Protection of National Minorities andEquality Promotion and the Organization for Security and Cooperationin Europe’s High Commissioner on National Minorities, comparativeEuropean institutional and Hungarian approaches to Roma minorities,the legal framework for social inclusion of Roma and Egyptianminorities in Albania, minority politics in Slovakia, minority integrationthrough constitutionalized hegemony and fictive pluralism in Estonia,the role of Romani non-governmental organizations in integration ofMacedonian society, and Romani teaching assistants in the Czech edu-cation system.

D1058 2009-032462 978-0-7391-3571-6EEuurrooppee aanndd iittss bboouunnddaarriieess;; wwoorrddss aanndd wwoorrllddss,, wwiitthhiinn aannddbbeeyyoonndd..Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Davison and Himadeep Muppidi.Lexington Books, ©2009 284 p. $75.00The 11 studies are from a series of seminars held at Vassar Collegebetween 2003 and 2006 exploring the enduring legacy of colonialismtoday. Scholars of literature political science, a small majority of themteaching at Vassar, consider Hegel as a colonial, anticolonial, and post-colonial thinker; Jacques Derrida as the last European; interpretingEurope through the Parthenon Marbles; re-imagining the boundariesbetween East and West in Orhan Pamuk’s Snow; zoological relations;colonial governance in the New World Order; and other topics.

D2025 978-90-420-2741-1TThhee EEuurrooppeeaann UUnniioonn aanndd CChhiinnaa;; iinntteerreessttss aanndd ddiilleemmmmaass..Title main entry. Ed. by Georg Wiessala et al. (European studies; aninterdisciplinary series in European culture, history and politics; 27)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 295 p. $83.00It has been said that the People’s Republic of China is a ‘plural noun.’The relationship between the European Union (EU) and China is acomplex one encompassing “dragon views” of this country of contradic-tions as well as commonalities. Wiessala (international relations, U. ofCentral Lancashire, UK), a professor of management at the U. ofLiverpool, and a lecturer on Chinese politics, political economy and inter-national relations at the U. of Melbourne, Australia, introduce 16 analysesof the historical, economic, institutional, ideational, and thorny humanrights’ aspects of this complex interdependence. The volume lacks anindex. Price is converted from Euros.

GGRREEAATT BBRRIITTAAIINN,, EEUURROOPPEE,, FFOORRMMEERR UUSSSSRR

DA3 2009-275802 978-1-84383-443-4WWiilllliiaamm DDuuggddaallee,, hhiissttoorriiaann,, 11660055--11668866;; hhiiss lliiffee,, hhiisswwrriittiinnggss aanndd hhiiss ccoouunnttyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Dyer and Catherine Richardson.The Boydell Press, ©2009 248 p. $95.00This collection of essays on seventeenth century historian WilliamDugdale began at a conference held in 2006. Dyer (local history,University of Leicester) and Richardson (early modern history, Universityof Kent) selected articles on Dugdale and his pursuit of information onthe history of Warwickshire as well as discussions of his historicalwritings. Along with these, there are articles on other aspects of thehistory of the region, particularly those touching on the lives of ordinaryresidents of the county and giving an overview of the world of theEnglish gentry from a more objective angle than Dugdale could havemanaged. However, his historical research in local archives was mas-terful and led the way for serious scholarship in regional history.

DA16 2009-018794 978-1-84519-349-2DDiissttaanntt ddrruummss;; tthhee rroollee ooff ccoolloonniieess iinn BBrriittiisshh iimmppeerriiaallwwaarrffaarree..Jackson, Ashley.Sussex Academic Press, ©2010 339 p. $74.95Jackson (King’s College London, UK) examines the role of imperialcolonies in the history of British imperial warfare, arguing that there hasbeen undue focus on the military deliberations and capabilities ofBritain, the Dominions, and India to the neglect of the rest of thecolonies. He first discusses the major contours of imperial warfare andthe place of the colonies within it and then focuses on the history ofCeylon (now Sri Lanka) as military base, strategic asset, and contributorof resources to Britain’s wars. He then examines World War I in terms ofthe significance of the Indian Ocean, the “east of Suez” region (thoseareas of the world to which the British military had sea lanes of com-munication through the Suez Canal), and the Bechuanaland Protectorate(now Botswana). The focus then shifts to World War II and the mobi-lization of colonial manpower in Southern Africa and their tasks in thewar, levels of imperial authority and the management of colonial per-sonnel assets, the importance of the Indian Ocean, the role of the IndianOcean colonies of Ceylon and Mauritius, and networks of imperialauthority and the role of colonial governors in the War. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

DA47 2009-031070 978-0-7546-7299-9BBllaaiirr’’ss ssuucccceessssffuull wwaarr;; BBrriittiisshh mmiilliittaarryy iinntteerrvveennttiioonn iinnSSiieerrrraa LLeeoonnee..Dorman, Andrew M. (Military strategy and operational art)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©159 159 p. $99.95British Prime Minister Tony Blair may be most remembered for hisentanglement with George Bush and the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.However, Dornan, of King’s College UK, points out that many of the mis-takes made in the Middle East might have occurred due to over-confi-dence resulting from a military action taken by the British under Blairin Sierra Leone in May of 2000. At this time, British forces rescued per-sonnel from the capitol of Freetown along with Irish soldiers who hadbeen captured by rebels. They defeated the rebels and restored order.Dorman argues that this only happened because, by good luck, theofficer in charge on the ground knew the area, the people involved andwas competent. The government, on the other hand, was hampered byinfighting, lack of communication and slow decision making. He goesthrough the steps of the operation and concludes that nothing waslearned from it. Consequently similar mistakes were made in the MiddleEast with disastrous results. He encourages future leaders to learn fromthe past.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–37–

DA87 2009-281929 978-1-84383-499-1HHaawwkkee,, NNeellssoonn aanndd BBrriittiisshh nnaavvaall lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp,, 11774477--11880055..Mackay, Ruddock and Michael Duffy.The Boydell Press, ©2009 240 p. $95.00Consisting of many detailed acounts of battles between the French andBritish, this volume traces the naval careers of the remarkable admiralEdward Hawke and the better-known Lord Nelson, as well as shorteraccounts of others, including Lord Anson, Peter Warren, George Pocock,and Edward Boscawen. MacKay (U. of St Andrews) and Duffy (U. ofExeter) describe the leadership qualities of Hawke and Nelson in exactterms, listing 12 specific qualities and showing how Hawke and Nelson,as well as other admirals of the period demonstrated leadership. Thevolume is filled with quotes from primary sources. This is a rich history,and will be welcome reading for all enthusiasts of a great era of theBritish navy.

DA155 978-1-905905-13-3FFoorrmm aanndd oorrddeerr iinn tthhee AAnngglloo--SSaaxxoonn wwoorrlldd,, AADD 660000--11110000..Title main entry. Ed. by Sally Crawford and Helena Hamerow. (Anglo-Saxon studies in archaeology and history; v.16)Oxford U.School of Archaeology, ©2009 118 p. $70.00 (pa)The nine papers of this volume are a selection of those given at the inter-disciplinary colloquium Shaping Understanding; Form and Order in theAnglo-Saxon World, which was held in March 2001 at the BritishMuseum. Published in an oversized format (8.25x11.75″) and heavilyillustrated with b&w plates of excellent quality, the volume is devoted tothe history of Anglo-Saxon manuscripts, sculpture, metal arts, and poetry.Two of the papers present overviews of the field: Richard N. Bailey’s onthe meanings of the forms and orderings in Anglo-Saxon art and SusanYoungs’ on the origin of manuscript decorative motifs in Celtic met-alwork. Other subjects include the distribution of verse types in OldEnglish poetry, by Geoffrey Russom (English, Brown U., Rhode Island)and the importance of the chi-rho in insular and Anglo-Saxon manuscriptdecoration. The volume, which is not indexed, is distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

DA247 2009-277606 978-1-84383-429-8TThhee wwoorrlldd ooff tthhee SSttoonnoorrss;; aa ggeennttrryy ssoocciieettyy..Noble, Elizabeth.The Boydell Press, ©2009 224 p. $95.00Noble (U. of New England, New South Wales, Australia) fills a significantgap in the scholarship with this superb study on the letters and papersfrom 1290-1483 that have been preserved of the Stonor family ofOxfordshire. An important member of the gentry, the Stonors carefullymaintained their land and position over the centuries through social ties,including marriages. Noble mines the papers to develop the world inwhich they lived, both social and domestic, with a wealth of detail aboutthe members of the household, the people of the surrounding coun-tryside, the interaction of the Stonors with officials and others in posi-tions of power, the complex establishment and function of fiefs, and theimpact over time on their lands and powers of the rulers of England. Thefamily’s finances and spending habits are well documented and offerspecific examples of domestic life. Rare for its exacting research andabsorbingly written, this is a fine resource for historians of late medievalEngland.

DA250 2009-029004 978-1-4058-2360-9TThhee rreedd rroossee aanndd tthhee wwhhiittee;; tthhee WWaarrss ooff tthhee RRoosseess,, 11445533--11448877..Sadler, John.Longman, ©2010 307 p. $39.95Sadler (military historian, Centre for Lifelong Learning, Sunderland U.)writes for fellow military historians or general readers very interested inthe subject as he thoroughly covers the wars between the houses of Yorkand Lancaster over the period of thirty-five years. The book begins byexploring the nature of war in the fifteenth century and events leadingup to the conflicts. Twelve of the sixteen chapters go on to cover specificbattles. Includes a useful timeline, outline of “dramatis personae,” andmaps of some of the battles.

DA261 978-1-905125-38-8SSppaarrttaa;; ccoommppaarraattiivvee aapppprrooaacchheess..Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Hodkinson.Classical Press of Wales, ©2009 502 p. $110.00The 13 essays here comprise the first of two volumes collecting selectedpapers from a September 2007 conference at the University ofNottingham. Classicists continue the long tradition of characterizing theancient Greek city by distinguishing it from or comparing it to othercities or cultures. They cover political and hegemonic structures; socialinstitutions; religious institutions and practice; the historiography andrepresentations of helots, Spartans, and barbarians; and Spartan excep-tionalism. Among specific topics are hegemonic structures in late archaicand early classical Elis and Sparta, education and pederasty in Spartanand Cretan society, Spartan and Greek religion, and visualizing Spartansand barbarians in Xenophon’s Lakedaimonion Politeia, and whetherSparta was an normal or an exceptional polis. Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

DA315 2009-023611 978-1-57591-118-2TTuuddoorr ccoouurrtt ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Betteridge and Anna Riehl.Susquehanna Univ. Press, ©2010 211 p. $53.50Appropriately, this collection of essays on the Tudor court came out of aconference held at Hampton Court in 2004. Betteridge (literature anddrama, Oxford Brookes University) and Riehl (English, AuburnUniversity) both edit and contribute to the work. The essays concentrateon the courts of Henry VIII and his daughter, Elizabeth I. The first essaysinvestigate the influence of Humanist philosophers on the tone of thecourt and their mixed success at educating royal children. The ideal ofcourtly life and its reality are contrasted in literature designed to be reador staged at court seen against the actual behavior of courtiers. Theinfluence of the court throughout the land is the subject of essays on theperegrinations of Elizabeth and the ways in which aristocratic womenmodeled their courts on hers. Authors look at the changes in the courtover time and how its power waned somewhat by the end of the six-teenth century. The case of Walter Raleigh and his quest for financialpatronage closes this study.

DA350 2009-053677 978-0-313-35740-4VVooiicceess ooff SShhaakkeessppeeaarree’’ss EEnnggllaanndd;; ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy aaccccoouunnttssooff EElliizzaabbeetthhaann ddaaiillyy lliiffee..Title main entry. Ed. by John A. Wagner.Greenwood Press, ©2010 260 p. $95.00Editor Wagner, author and former British and U.S. history educator(Phoenix College and Arizona State U.) brings together excerpts from 51documents written during the time of playwright William Shakespeare.Learning about the past from primary documents (the writings of thepeople who lived at the time) is always engaging, and this collection isno exception. It includes letters, literature, speeches and polemics, officialreports, and narratives. The content is grouped in general categories,including: society and economy, church and state, literature and history,and Queen Elizabeth I. The author also addresses evaluating and inter-preting primary documents and offers instruction on how to read them.A detailed chronology also is included.

DA360 2009-675051 978-0-7171-4616-1TThhee ddoowwnnffaallll ooff tthhee SSppaanniisshh AArrmmaaddaa iinn IIrreellaanndd..Douglas, Ken.Gill & Macmillan, ©2009 244 p. $33.80While the British were celebrating the 1588 defeat of the SpanishArmada, the Spanish ships that remained faced the challenge of how toreturn home. Douglas has spent many years in the archives researchingwhat happened to the unfortunate sailors. His account is told in a con-versational manner but replete with maps and quotations from primarysources from both England and Spain. He tells of how the ships chose togo north, over the top of Scotland and down the Western coast of Ireland,when many of them foundered on sand banks or were driven ashore bystorms. Douglas relates the happenings chronologically so that one cansee what was happening at the same time to each of the isolated groups.Many were killed by English authorities, some were rescued by nativeIrish (and robbed). Douglas also pays tribute to the underwater archae-ologists who have found artifacts from the wrecked ships that help tosubstantiate or disprove written records. Several appendices list the shipsand what happened to then, give a background on Irish history andreproduce the diary of Marcus de Aramburu of his experiences.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –38–

DA445 2009-025469 978-0-374-28137-3AA ggaammbblliinngg mmaann;; CChhaarrlleess IIII’’ss RReessttoorraattiioonn ggaammee..Uglow, Jennifer.Farrar, Straus & Giroux, ©2009 580 p. $35.00In this biography of King Charles II (1630-1685), the author of otherbooks on English history chronicles his restoration to the British throneafter Oliver Cromwell’s rule. Uglow portrays the Restoration as an inno-vative yet insecure period spent battling the Dutch, plagues, and theGreat Fire of London. The “game” of the title involves sexual as well aspolitical affairs, e.g., a secret deal with his cousin Louis XIV of Franceoffering conversion to Catholicism for his support. The book includesmaps and period illustrations. Originally published in 2009 in GreatBritain by Faber & Faber Ltd., as A Gambling Man: Charles II and theRestoration, 1660-1670.

DA447 2009-039472 978-0-86698-411-9TThhee ooccccaassiioonnaall mmeeddiittaattiioonnss ooff MMaarryy RRiicchh,, CCoouunntteessss ooffWWaarrwwiicckk..Warwick, Mary Rich. Ed. by Raymond A. Anselment. (Medieval andRenaissance texts and studies; v.363)ACMRS, ©2009 128 p. $48.00Brief commentary of a pious nature were an acceptable and frequentgenre for women writers in early modern England, but Warwick (1625-78) diverged from others by anchoring hers not to scriptural passages orreligious topics, but to otherwise mundane events in her life. Amongthem are being in a great deal of company, walking and feeling a fewdrops of rain, being very much offended with one of her servants forbeing drunk, forgetting to wind her watch, the sun setting in a cloud, aphysician curing a most desperate disease, and a journey from Lees toLondon. Anselment (English, U. of Connecticut) clarifies obscure spelling,identifies Biblical and other references, and explains allusions to peopleand events in footnotes; textual notes and an index to scriptural passagesare included in the back matter. The manuscript is in the BritishMuseum, and a few additional meditations are from a biography of herpublished shortly after her death. Published by the Arizona Center forMedieval and Renaissance Studies.

DA600 978-1-84802-035-1AAnn aarrcchhaaeeoollooggyy ooff ttoowwnn ccoommmmoonnss iinn EEnnggllaanndd;; ‘‘AA vveerryyffaaiirr ffiieelldd iinnddeeeedd..’’Bowden, Mark et al.English Heritage, ©2009 101 p. $36.00 (pa)Originally reserved as grazing for people’s animals, English towncommons were also sites of entertainment, recreation, military, religious,and political activities. Bowden, Graham Brown, and Nicky Smith explainthe interest archaeologists have recently begun to take in town commons.They discuss the land before the commons, farming on town commons,from the land, defense of the realm, a social dimension, high days andholidays, and the present and future. Drawings, paintings, and historicand recent photographs help tell the story. Distributed in North Americaby The David Brown Book Co.

DA670 978-0-9549627-9-1TThhee aarrcchhaaeeoollooggyy ooff tthhee ggrraavveell tteerrrraacceess ooff tthhee uuppppeerr aannddmmiiddddllee TThhaammeess;; tthhee TThhaammeess VVaalllleeyy iinn llaattee pprreehhiissttoorryy,,11550000 BBCC--AADD 5500..Lambrick, George and Mark Robinson. (The Thames through time)Oxford U.School of Archaeology, ©2009 428 p. $70.00The series examines changes in human society in the valley from a the-matic perspective, this volume focusing on the millennium and a halfbefore the Roman conquest. After a bare sketch of the chronology andgeography, chapters synthesize archaeological findings and interpretationabout dividing up the countryside; settlements and settlement patterns;buildings and domestic culture; production and exchange; farming,water, storage, and waste; attitudes to life and death; sacred places,defense, and politics; and the impact of change and legacies of late pre-historic society. Color illustrations appear throughout. Distributed inNorth America by The David Brown Book Co.

DA670 2008-301101 978-1-84383-417-5TThhee ccoouunnttrryyssiiddee ooff EEaasstt AAnngglliiaa;; cchhaannggiinngg llaannddssccaappeess,,11887700--11995500..Wade Martins, Susanna and Tom Williamson.Boydell & Brewer, ©2008 252 p. $47.95While the English landscape has a very long history, many of its“timeless” features were actually created in the recent past. In this sur-prisingly interesting book, Martins (History, University of East Anglia)and Williamson (English Landscape History, University of East Anglia)look at the landscape of East Anglia over the 80 years beginning in 1870,examining changes in fields, farms, villages, and country estates, as wellas looking at the development of hedges, woods, wetlands, and heaths.The authors also examine the emergence of new landscapes types, suchas tree plantations and holiday resorts. Illustrated with many photo-graphs and maps, this book will appeal to readers interested in theEnglish countryside, landscape history, and historical ecology.

DA676 2009-020442 978-0-8387-5653-9SSccoottss iinn LLoonnddoonn iinn tthhee eeiigghhtteeeenntthh cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Stana Nenadic. (Studies in eighteenth-centuryScotland)Bucknell University Pr., ©2010 317 p. $67.50Nenadic (social history, University of Edinburgh) and her contributorsexamine the lives of seventeenth century Scots who immigrated, eitherpermanently or part time, to London. The first half of the book discussesindividuals, from those who kept their Scottish identity while adoptingsome English customs to men like James Boswell, who was intenselyembarrassed by his Scottish accent and tried to hide his origins. Thesecond section looks at areas in which Scots did well in London, such asmedicine and the military. The introduction of Scottish music is treatedalong with the careers of well-known artists and architects. The desire ofupper-class Scots to blend in with British society considered in an essayson upper-class Scottish children sent south for their education. In allcases it seems to have been tacitly understood that seeming English, orat least Anglo-Scottish, was a desideratum. Distributed by AssociatedUniversity Presses.

DA677 978-1-906540-18-0EEaarrllyy mmeeddiieevvaall ((llaattee 55tthh--eeaarrllyy 88tthh cceennttuurriieess AADD))cceemmeetteerriieess aatt BBoossss HHaallll aanndd BBuutttteerrmmaarrkkeett,, IIppsswwiicchh,,SSuuffffoollkk..Scull, Christopher. (The Society for Medieval Archaeology monograph;27)Maney Publishing, ©2009 363 p. $86.00Published in an oversized format (8.5x12″), and heavily illustrated withdrawings and plates of the burials, skeletons, and burial goods, thisvolume offers a full report on two Anglo-Saxon burial sites in Ipswichwhich were in use from the 5th-8th centuries AD. Following the full cat-aloging of the sites and finds, the text offers a detailed radiocarbonanalysis of the soil chemistry, ferrous blades, glass beads, leather, disc-brooch, pins, amber beads, coins, vessels, nails, and other finds fromthese rich burials. The volume includes a lengthy bibliography but noindex. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

DA690 978-1-874350-19-4AArrcchhaaeeoollooggiiccaall eexxccaavvaattiioonnss oonn tthhee rroouuttee ooff tthhee AA2277WWeesstthhaammppnneetttt BByyppaassss,, WWeesstt SSuusssseexx,, 11999922;; vv..11:: LLaattee uuppppeerr--PPaallaaeeoolliitthhiicc--AAnngglloo--SSaaxxoonn..Fitzpatrick, A.P. et al. (Wessex archaeology report; no.21)Wessex Archaeology, ©2008 284 p. $40.00Being a relatively small country with a very long history, the remains ofpast cultures frequently turn up whenever something new is constructedin the U.K. This book contains the findings of archaological excavations(including five major digs) carried out in West Sussex in 1992, just aheadof the construction of part of the A27 motorway. Eight reports describethe artifacts and other evidence of settlement at sites ranging in age fromLate Upper Paleolithic to Middle Bronze Age, including numerousdrawings and black-and-white photographs. Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–39–

DA804 2009-378115 978-1-84868-515-4GGlleennccooee;; tthhee iinnffaammoouuss mmaassssaaccrree,, 11669922..Sadler, John.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 287 p. $19.95 (pa)On an early February morning in 1692, thirty-eight men, women, andchildren of the MacDonald clan were massacred at Glencoe in theScottish Highlands. Their crime was not swearing allegiance to WilliamIII, king of England and Scotland. Using primary sources and contem-porary accounts, Sadler (History, Newcastle University) disputes the gen-erally accepted accounts of the massacre, which lay responsibility at thefeet of high Scottish officials who favored the union of England andScotland, as well as (possibly) King William himself. Instead, the authorargues that overzealousness and incompetence on the part of a fewEnglish army officers was to blame for the atrocity. Illustrated with 16pages of color photographs, this well-written account will appeal toreaders interested in Scottish history and the Jacobite Rebellions.

DA850 2009-033596 978-1-84541-118-3TToouurriissttss aanndd ttrraavveelllleerrss;; wwoommeenn’’ss nnoonn--ffiiccttiioonnaall wwrriittiinnggaabboouutt SSccoottllaanndd,, 11777700--11883300..Hagglund, Betty. (Tourism and cultural change; 18)Channel View Publications Ltd., ©2010 181 p. $99.95Hagglund (Research Fellow, Nottingham Trent University) looks at traveland travel writing in the late 18th and early 19th centuries, a period inwhich Scotland emerged as a full-fledged tourist destination. Looking atthe writings of five women (Sarah Murray, Anne Grant, DorothyWordsworth, Sarah Hazlitt and the anonymous author of A Journey to theHighlands of Scotland), the author examines the ways in which changesin travel and in Scotland affected the ways in which women travelerswrote about their experiences. Hagglund also looks at the relationship ofgender to travel writing. (Distributed in the U.S. by UTP Distribution.)

DA910 2009-037869 978-0-7656-2511-3TThhee IIrriisshh eexxppeerriieennccee ssiinnccee 11880000;; aa ccoonncciissee hhiissttoorryy,, 33dd eedd..Hachey, Thomas E. and Lawrence J. McCaffrey.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 287 p. $34.95 (pa)In the third edition of their history of modern Ireland Hachey (history,Boston College) and McCaffrey (history, Loyola University, Chicago) bringthe story up to the end of 2009 and the declawing of the Celtic Tiger.They begin with a background of the British occupation of Ireland beforeleaping to 1800 and the Catholic emancipation. The potato famine, therise of the Fenians, Parnell, Home Rule and the Troubles follow. Theauthors put the myths of Ireland told by immigrant ancestors to theirAmerican children into a context that explains the nuances behind theestablishment of an Irish state. The development of Ireland after WorldWar II and especially doing the IT boom of the 1990’s is chronicled alongwith the political peccadilloes of government officials. The authorslament that the publisher decided not to let them cite sources but theyhave provided a bibliography for those who want to know more aboutany aspect of Ireland in the past two hundred years.

DA925 978-1-84682-146-2AAttllaannttiicc ggaatteewwaayy;; tthhee ppoorrtt aanndd cciittyy ooff LLoonnddoonnddeerrrryy ssiinnccee11770000..Gavin, Robert et al. (Ulster and Scotland)Four Courts Press, ©2009 382 p. $75.00The authors (all affiliated with the U. of Ulster, UK) present a detailedeconomic history of the North West of Ireland that places the port ofLondonderry (often just known as Derry) at the center of its focus. Theirnarrative highlights how the region, and Derry in particular, has shiftedits various economic strategies in response to changing internal andexternal factors from 1700 to the present, including the rise of steam-powered industry and light-railway transport, the partition of Ireland,the imposition of a wartime command economy, and corporate global-ization. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DA925 978-1-84682-076-2SSccoottllaanndd aanndd tthhee UUllsstteerr ppllaannttaattiioonnss;; eexxpplloorraattiioonnss iinn tthheeBBrriittiisshh sseettttlleemmeennttss ooff SSttuuaarrtt IIrreellaanndd..Title main entry. Ed. by William P. Kelly and John R. Young. (Ulsterand Scotland)Four Courts Press, ©2009 165 p. $65.00As the 400th anniversary of the official Plantation of Ulster approaches,the University of Ulster and the Institute of Ulster Scots Studies isplanning a series of volumes, of which this is one. Seven studies revisedfrom conferences in Strachclyde and Belfast in 2006 examine politics andreligion among the Scots of Ulster in the 1640s; East Ulster, theMacDonalds, and the provincial strategies of Hugh O’Neill, earl of Tyrone1585-1603; the late medieval context; a Presbyterian perspective 1603-1700;confederate Catholics and covenanters 1644-46; the duke of Ormond andProtestant dissent in Ulster; and rebellion, transplantation, and compo-sition of the Ulster-Scots landed elite. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DA941 978-1-84682-186-8PPllaannttaattiioonn IIrreellaanndd..Title main entry. Ed. by James Lyttleton and Colin Rynne.Four Courts Press, ©2009 323 p. $65.00At the same time that England was sending colonists to the New Worldit was also expanding immigration to its oldest colony, Ireland. Thisstudy of the plantations established from 1550-1700 grew out of a 2006conference at Cork that drew from the disciplines of history, literatureand archaeology. Lyttleton (archaeology, Memorial University,Newfoundland) and Rynme (archaeology, University College, Cork)encourage the authors to examine the evidence in a fresh light. Therefore,many of the earlier conclusions about the nature of the plantations andtheir effect upon the local culture are modified. Essays deal with thearchitecture of the plantation buildings, the proliferation of pubs, and theScottish influence in mortuary monuments. The early (pre-Orange)Catholic-Protestant relations are investigated as is the impact of Catholicmartyrs on the Irish. Color plates show early maps of Plantation Ulster.A startling side of Edmund Spenser as a forward-thinking farmer andindustrialist is uncovered, which could affect future exegesis of hispoetry. The work is tied together by examples of how a myriad of factors,plantations among them, were responsible for social, political and eco-nomic changes in Ireland as it moved from a clan-centered society to acapitalist one governed by a central authority. Distributed in the US byISBS.

DA950 2009-675206 978-1-904558-66-8SSoocciiaall tthhoouugghhtt oonn IIrreellaanndd iinn tthhee nniinneetteeeenntthh cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Séamas Ó Síocháin.U. College Dublin Press, ©2009 178 p. $52.95 (pa)Nine essays from a March 2005 anthropology conference in Kells surveythinking about Ireland by selected observers from off the island duringa period when it was claimed as a possession by Britain. They considerIreland’s 19th century, Gustave de Beaumont as Ireland’s Alex deTocqueville, John Stuart Mill, Harriet Martineau, Sir Henry Maine and thesurvival of the fittest, The Irish Question in Karl Marx’s and FriedrichEngel’s writings on capitalism and empire, the metaphysical unionism ofJames Anthony Froude, race theory and the Irish, and Macpherson andMatthew Arnold on Celticism and Ireland. Distributed by Dufour

DA958 2009-396600 978-1-84840-011-5TThhee ccaappttaaiinn aanndd tthhee kkiinngg;; WWiilllliiaamm OO’’SShheeaa,, CChhaarrlleessSStteewwaarrtt PPaarrnneellll aanndd llaattee VViiccttoorriiaann IIrreellaanndd..Dungan, Myles.New Island, ©2009 439 p. $45.00Dungan has written the first biography of the controversial—some wouldsay infamous—Irish politician William Henry O’Shea, known mainly forhis relationship with Irish nationalist leader (and his wife’s lover)Charles Stewart Parnell. While the author makes no attempt to rehabil-itate O’Shea, he does suggest that O’Shea was a more complex individualthan the caricature usually drawn in histories of late Victorian Ireland.Dungan sheds new light on the question of how aware O’Shea was of theaffair between his wife and Parnell, and on his involvement with analleged Tory plot to discredit Parnell. (Distributed in North America byDufour Editions.)

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –40–

DA964 2009-510265 978-1-84840-042-9CChhiinnaa aanndd tthhee IIrriisshh..Title main entry. Ed. by Jerusha McCormack. (Thomas Davis lectureseries; 2008)New Island, ©2009 165 p. $45.00Based on a lecture series aired by Irish broadcaster RTÉ, the elevenessays in this volume commemorate 30 years of diplomatic relationsbetween Ireland and China. Topics range from Oscar Wilde’s review ofa work by a Chinese sage from the fourth century BC to diplomatichistory, and from Chinese immigration to present-day Ireland to the 19thcentury racism that affected both Chinese and Irish. Beautifully producedand generously illustrated, this volume will interest many readers.

DA965 2009-675041 978-1-904890-57-7JJuuddggiinngg LLeemmaassss;; tthhee mmeeaassuurree ooff tthhee mmaann..Garvin, Tom.Royal Irish Academy, ©2009 300 p. $45.00Garvin (Politics [emeritus], University College Dublin) presents a newbiography of Seán Lemass, who many regard as the greatest politicalleader of an independent Ireland. The author shows Lemass as acomplex figure, and pays special attention to his cultural and familybackground. The book is enlivened by the extensive collection of photo-graphs, letters, and contemporary documents that accompany the text,helping to give readers a personal glimpse of a man who was known forbeing taciturn, if not outright stand-offish. This beautifully designed andengaging biography belongs in any serious collection of books on Irishhistory. (Distributed in the U.S. by ISBS)

DA990 978-1-84840-008-5PPeeiigg SSaayyeerrss;; II wwiillll ssppeeaakk ttoo yyoouu aallll.. ((22 CCDDss iinncclluuddeedd))Le Cách, Labharfad.New Island, ©2009 312 p. $45.00Legendary Irish storyteller Sayers (1873-1958) recorded stories for Irishand British radio in 1947 and 1953, and here Bo Almqvist (emeritus Irishfolklore, U. College Dublin) and Pádraig Ó Héalaí (recently retiredModern Irish, National U. of Ireland-Galway) have edited a selection onthe accompanying audio disks, and presented the texts first in Irish, thenin English. The introduction, notes, and other paraphernalia are also inboth languages. The recordings themselves would be in Irish. Distributedin the US by Dufour Editions.

DA3330 2009-281433 978-1-84383-480-9AArrtthhuurr TTuuddoorr,, PPrriinnccee ooff WWaalleess;; lliiffee,, ddeeaatthh aannddccoommmmeemmoorraattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Steven Gunn and Linda Monckton.The Boydell Press, ©2009 193 p. $95.00Overshadowed in history by his famous younger brother, Henry VIII,Prince Arthur had been married to Katherine of Aragon for a year beforehis sudden death in 1502, at age 16. The hope of the wartorn country,Prince Arthur was celebrated during his life by songs and poemslikening him to the mythical King Arthur, a motif also found in textilesand paintings associated with him. Like the marriage celebration toKatherine, the funeral was elaborately staged and his funerary chapelwas lavishly decorated with sculpture. The essays of this volume describein detail these works of art, architecture, literature, poetry, and painting,with many b&w and some color plates for illustration. The training ofthe Prince for kingship and the diplomacy connected to his engagementto Katherine are discussed in separate essays. Of special interest is theaccount of the 2002 reenactment of the funerary procession, which washeld at Worcester Cathedral. This is a terrific addition to the scholarshipof 16th-century English art, architecture, and the elaborate staged cere-monies and celebrations of the time.

DB99 2009-025364 978-1-84545-639-9TThhee ppaarraaddooxxiiccaall rreeppuubblliicc;; AAuussttrriiaa,, 11994455--22000055..Rathkolb, Oliver. Trans. by Otmar Binder et al.Berghahn Books, ©2010 301 p. $110.00Rathkolb (contemporary history, U. of Vienna, Austria) explores thehistory of the Austrian Second Republic from 1945 to 2005 in ten the-matic chapters that focus on specific features of that history that hebelieves have helped to define the Austrian collective identity. Chaptersdiscuss the peculiarities of the Austrian democratic political system,Austrian economic policy, the individual Austrian chancellors, Austrianmedia as a political test lab, the State Treaty and Neutrality Act and rela-tions with Europe, the politics of art and culture, the Austrian model ofthe welfare state and intergenerational and intergender contracts, theshadow of the Nazi past, and trends for Austria’s political future.

DC423 2009-025221 978-1-84545-427-2MMiitttteerrrraanndd,, tthhee eenndd ooff tthhee CCoolldd WWaarr,, aanndd GGeerrmmaannuunniiffiiccaattiioonn..Bozo, Frédéric. (Berghahn monographs in French studies; v.9)Berghahn Books, ©2009 417 p. $110.00This is a diplomatic history of France’s role under the leadership ofFrancois Mitterand in the events at the end of the Cold War. Bozo (con-temporary history and international relations, U. of Paris III, France)focuses on those areas that remain a subject of much controversy andnegative assessment of France’s diplomacy: the emancipation of EasternEurope, German unification, the disintegration of the USSR, the post-Coldwar redefinition of the European order, and the relative marginality ofthe French in post-Cold War transformations. He argues that the commonview of French diplomacy as essentially conservative and complacent inits Cold War niche and therefore as opposed to the major transformationsof the time is largely wrong and that Mitterand’s diplomacy was insteaddirected towards setting the post-Cold War processes, particularlyGerman unification, within a strong European and internationalframework.

DC650 2009-047794 978-1-84545-724-2AAllssaaccee ttoo tthhee AAllssaattiiaannss??;; vviissiioonnss aanndd ddiivviissiioonnss ooff AAllssaattiiaannrreeggiioonnaalliissmm,, 11887700--11993399..Fischer, Christopher J. (Contemporary European history; v.5)Berghahn Books, ©2010 235 p. $90.00The region of Alsace, located between France and Germany, was a trophyof war four times between 1870 and 1945, causing Alsatians to invokeregionalism to defend their interests against the nationalist claims of thetwo countries. Focusing on the years between 1870 and 1939, Fischer(Indiana State U.) examines the phenomenon of Alsatian regionalism byconsidering what Alsatians mean when they say “Alsace to theAlsatians”; how they present and represent their own history, culture,and traditions; how political developments in Alsace and Europe affectedthis regionalism; and how the regionalism of the pre-1914 period influ-enced that of the interwar years. Looking at key moments and develop-ments rather than the period chronologically, he analyzes regionalismfrom political, social, and cultural positions, and how Alsatians expressedtheir ideas of regional belonging, how they fought among themselves torepresent Alsace, and how these activities influenced their relationshipwith Germany and France.

DC727 2009-931630 978-0-7546-6846-6RRiittuuaall,, cceerreemmoonnyy aanndd tthhee cchhaannggiinngg mmoonnaarrcchh iinn FFrraannccee,,11335500--11778899..Bryant, Lawrence M. (Variorum collected studies series; 937)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 340 p. $139.95This volume brings together previously published essays by Bryant(history, California State University, Chico) on the topic of rituals, espe-cially the adventus. Through them he demonstrates the movement of theFrench monarchy from a medieval institution responsible to its subjectsto a quasi-divine entity in which power was absolute, as exemplified bythe reign of Louis XIV. The articles are arranged chronologically, startingwith the coronation of King John II in 1350 and ending with the disin-tegration of the monarchy in 1789. The fluid nature of the early rituals,in which guilds, foreign merchants and religious representatives createdtheir own parts, contrasts sharply with the later, printed rules for cere-monies that became absurdly pervasive under Louis XIV, touching everyaspect of the king’s daily life. Bryant shows how the form of public cer-emony can signal changes in attitudes toward the nature of monarchy.This unified vision from scattered publications is most welcome.

DD247 978-1-84832-550-0II wwaass HHiittlleerr’’ss cchhaauuffffeeuurr;; tthhee mmeemmooiirrss ooff EErriicchh KKeemmppkkaa..Kempka, Erich.Frontline Publishers, ©2010 180 p. $32.95In 1932, Kempka, son of a German miner, became Hitler’s personalchauffeur; he served Hitler up until the moment of the Fuhrer’s suicidein 1945. In this memoir first published in 1951, Kempka portrays theprivate Hitler as a fatherly figure who listened to the troubles of hishousehold staff and often brought along a snack for his driver on longdrives. The core of the book centers on the period in the bunker duringthe final few months of the war, and include chilling details on Hitlerand his wife’s suicides and cremations. The book concludes with anaccount of Kempka’s narrow escape from Berlin and notes on his par-ticipation as a witness in the Nuremburg trials. The book was first pub-lished in 1951 by Kyrburg (Munich) as Ich Habe Adolf Hitler Verbrannt (ICremated Adolf Hitler). It was reissued and reprinted under new titles, bydifferent publishers, in 1975, 1991, and 2004. This new English edition(translated by Geoffrey Brooks) includes an expanded section of b&w his-torical photos and a new introduction by Roger Moorhouse, an expert onthe Third Reich.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–41–

DD256 2009-415100 978-90-420-2540-0EExxiilleess ttrraavveelliinngg;; eexxpplloorriinngg ddiissppllaacceemmeenntt,, ccrroossssiinnggbboouunnddaarriieess iinn GGeerrmmaann eexxiillee aarrttss aanndd wwrriittiinnggss 11993333--11994455..Title main entry. Ed. by Johannes F. Evelein. (Amsterdamer Beiträgezur neueren Germanistik; 68)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 391 p. $109.20In his introduction, Evelein (German, Trinity College, Hartford, CT)makes the distinction between an exile and an expatriate; expatriates cango back. In these essays on German exiles during the Nazi regime, thetheme of an unwilling break with home is a common thread. Most ofthem focus on well-known artists, composers and writers, some Jewish,some not. One article, by contrast, looks at a Nazi poet, Hans FriedrichBlunck, who traveled in Europe in an attempt to discredit the reports ofthe exiles. Exiles went to various countries in North and South Americaor just kept moving. The work they produced reflects this disjuncture.One of the most unusual and little known events is the experience ofJewish exiles in Japan from 1933-1941. The poetry of one exile isexpressed in the form of haiku. These essays discuss the personal trialsof the exiles as expressed through their work. They also address the expe-riences of all those forced to leave everything they have known for astrange land.

DD256 2009-025781 978-1-84519-282-2OOppppoossiinngg HHiittlleerr;; AAddaamm vvoonn TTrrootttt dduu SSoollzz,, 11990099--11994444;; ““TToossttrriivvee aanndd nnoott ttoo yyiieelldd””..Sears, Kenneth A.E.Sussex Academic Press, ©2009 103 p. $55.00As a schoolboy, Sears entered into his diary the attempted assassinationof Adolph Hitler in July 1944. Retired now from a career in history andgovernment at Oxford University, he offers a biograph of one of theleaders of the plot, and of the resistance to Hitler generally withinGermany. Among the stages of Trott’s life are university life in Munichand Göttingen, Rhodes scholar, the Far East, the plea for recognition,fanning the flames of resistance, the year 1944, the day itself, theaftermath, and the military situation. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DD290 2009-014221 978-0-8018-9409-1GGeerrmmaannyy ssaayyss ““NNoo””;; tthhee IIrraaqq WWaarr aanndd tthhee ffuuttuurree ooffGGeerrmmaann ffoorreeiiggnn aanndd sseeccuurriittyy ppoolliiccyy..Dettke, Dieter.Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2009 293 p. $60.00This is a study of German foreign policy that centers on issues raised byGermany’s decision to reject the American invasion and occupation ofIraq. These issues include the role of the military in German foreignpolicy, the greater confidence Germany has in pursuing its nationalinterests, processes of Europeanization, and the possibilities of a struc-tural rift between Europe and the United States. Dettke (security studies,Georgetown U.) offers chapters on the development of German foreignpolicy and national identity following World War II, the impact ofGerman unification on Europe and international politics, issues ofcivilian power and the use of force in the breakup of Yugoslavia and the1990-1991 Gulf War, the reaction of Germany to the September 11thattacks in the United States and the subsequent “War on Terror,” Germanopposition to the Iraq invasion, and German balancing of great powerbilateralism and European multilateralism.

DDS135 201000597 978-1-934843-98-7TThhee wwaarrttiimmee ddiiaarryy ooff EEddmmuunndd KKeesssslleerr;; LLwwooww,, PPoollaanndd,,11994422--11994444..Kessler, Edmund (Jews of Poland)Academic Studies Press, ©2010 165 p. $30.00The preface to this joint memoir asks rhetorically if the world needs yetanother Holocaust memoir. The answer is emphatically yes. Each one isa unique witness to the experiences of millions who did not survive totell their stories. Edmund Kessler was an attorney in Lwow, Polandwhose family suffered under both the Nazis and the Soviets. His diary ofthe years from 1942-1944 was written during that time and later editedby his daughter. His bewilderment, disgust, and rage against theoppressors are contrasted to his profound admiration for the Poles whorisked their live to save him and others. The diary is accompanied bypoems he wrote during the war as well as testimony from another sur-vivor and from the son of the family who sheltered twenty-two Jews fornearly two years. Kessler’s daughter, Renata, gives a brief history of thefamily and what happened to them after the war. The blending of thevoices telling this story creates a powerful hymn to human determinationand decency.

DE60 2009-040534 978-1-84217-379-4KKooiinnee;; MMeeddiitteerrrraanneeaann ssttuuddiieess iinn hhoonnoorr ooff RR.. RRoossssHHoolllloowwaayy..Title main entry. Ed. by Derek B. Counts and Anthony S. Tuck.(Joukowsky Institute publication; 1)Oxbow Books, ©2009 223 p. $80.00Editors Counts (Classical Arts and Archaeology, University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee) and Tuck (Classical Archaeology, University ofMassachusetts-Amherst) have assembled 24 papers to honor the contri-butions of Brown University scholar R. Ross Holloway to Mediterraneanstudies. Papers are arranged under four broad themes: Classical art andiconography; cultural contacts and exchanges across the Mediterranean;art and the ancient coinage of Sicily; and interpretation of Mediterraneanarchaeological finds. Including many illustrations, this scholarly volumewill interest students and specialists in the history of the Mediterraneanregion during antiquity. (Distributed in North America by The DavidBrown Book Co.)

DF214 2009-030559 978-0-415-54977-6AAssppeeccttss ooff GGrreeeekk hhiissttoorryy 775500--332233 BBCC;; aa ssoouurrccee--bbaasseeddaapppprrooaacchh,, 22dd eedd..Buckley, Terry. (Aspects of classical civilisation)Routledge, ©2010 526 p. $39.95 (pa)Buckley, a retired teacher of Classics in the UK, introduces Greek historyfrom 750 to 323 B.C., for students of Classics from high school to theundergraduate level. In chronological chapters, he surveys historicalperiods from the age of colonization to Alexander the Great withemphasis on the interpretation of available sources, which are examinedin the introductory chapter. This edition incorporates new scholarshipand more on the Delian League and the Athenian Empire, more sources,and extended discussion of the growth of Athenian imperialism towardsSamos, Mytilene, and Melos. It contains a new chapter on Sparta, thePeloponnese, and the outbreak of the Decelean War. The text includespolitical and military topics, instructs students in writing, and teachesthem to be aware of the limitation of sources.

DF221 2009-022819 978-0-87661-542-3AArrcchhaaeeoollooggiieess ooff ccuulltt;; eessssaayyss oonn rriittuuaall aanndd ccuulltt iinn CCrreettee iinnhhoonnoorr ooff GGeerraallddiinnee CC.. GGeesseellll..Title main entry. Ed. by Anna Lucia D’Agata and Aleydis Van deMoortel. (Hesperia supplement; 37)Am.School of Classical Studies at Athens, ©2009 321 p. $75.00 (pa)This collection of essays on research done on ritual and cult in Crete atBronze and Iron Age sites is in honor of archaeologist Geraldine C.Gesell. D’Agata and Van de Moortel inform the reader that the workreflects Gesell’s belief in synthesizing various aspects of archeology toform an image of what was done and how it changed, rather than fan-tasizing, as earlier scholars did, about the nature of belief systems.Therefore, the articles concentrate on the identification of religious orritual artifacts, the sites of cultic activity and, a relatively new field, thestudy of the landscape in which the cult was practiced. The authors pointout similarities and differences and posit changes in religions behaviorover time and between social groups. The book is well illustrated withdiagrams, tables and photographs. Oversize 8.5 x 11″ Books from theAmerican School of Classical Studies at Athens are distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

DF221 2009-046257 978-1-931534-56-7PPsseeiirraa XX;; tthhee eexxccaavvaattiioonn ooff BBlloocckk AAFF..Betancourt, Philip P. (Prehistory monographs; 28)Inst. /Aegean Prehistory Press, ©2009 240 p. $80.00The block first came to the attention of archaeologists during the exca-vations of Pseira in 1906-07, and has provided the fullest sequence ofbuilding phases of any one area of the town in eastern Crete. Among thecomplex architectural details are a pillar crypt, elaborate upstairs floors,a well preserved U-shaped staircase, and a well designed kitchen. Thoughextensively rebuilt and remodeled during its long history, it has not beenlooted, as other cities have over the centuries. After a history of the exca-vation, this report describes the architecture and material culture. Amongthese are pottery, ground and chipped stone tools, stone weights, plaster,plant remains, faunal remains, and fish remains. Interpretations andconclusions are also provided for the architectural history and roomfunctions and activities in the buildings. Distributed in North America byThe David Brown Book Co.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –42–

DF521 2009-030565 978-0-415-44010-3TThhee BByyzzaannttiinnee wwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Stephenson. (Routledge worlds)Routledge, ©2010 606 p. $250.00Written for the general reader, perfect for the undergraduate classroom,and sure to interest specialists, this volume is anything but staid in itspresentation of a subject often seen as unapproachable. The people, art,architecture, religion, politics, and study of Byzantium are described in35 chapters by noted authorities, but rather than a survey or overview,the chapters engage with specific ideas and issues, giving the reader aninsight into the Byzantine world. The portrayal of royal women byByzantine historians, the theatrical style of Byzantine correspondence,the fashioning of sacred space within Venice’s San Marco are examplesof the topics. The use and context of churches and the origin andmeanings of church architecture are frequent and well-developed themes.The volume, which is illustrated in b&w and includes a lengthy bibliog-raphy, includes section introductions as well as a general introduction byStephenson (medieval history, U. of Durham, the UK).

DF552 2009-044713 978-0-202-36332-5RReellaattiioonnss bbeettwweeeenn EEaasstt aanndd WWeesstt iinn tthhee MMiiddddllee AAggeess..((rreepprriinntt,, 11997733))Title main entry. Ed. by Derek Baker.AldineTransaction, ©2010 156 p. $29.95 (pa)Medievalists will welcome the reprinting of this excellent collection. Sixof the seven essays were presented to the March 1969 second colloquiumin medieval history held at the University of Edinburgh, and many of theauthors have become venerable names over the two intervening genera-tions—for example W. H. C. Frend (old and new Rome in the age ofJustinian), R. H. C. Davis (William of Tyre), and R. W. Southern (Danteand Islam). Other topics are the 10th century in Byzantine-Western rela-tionships, cultural relations between East and West in the 12th century,Innocent III and the Greeks, and government in Latin Syria and thecommercial privileges of foreign merchants. The 1973 edition was pub-lished by Edinburgh University Press.

DG77 978-1-84868-100-2AAnncciieenntt RRoommee;; tthhee rriissee aanndd ffaallll ooff aann eemmppiirree,, 775533 BBCC--AADD447766..Southern, Patricia.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 381 p. $34.95Ancient Romans are remembered either as murderous imperialists ormaster administrators and engineers. The author of ten books on Romanhistory, who is from that part of the Roman Empire now known as theUK, traces the history of the Empire over 13 tumultuous centuries fromits first kings to its split in the fourth century into separate western andwestern entities. Southern concludes that Rome and the western Empirenever actually fell, but rather evolved into the kingdoms of medievalEurope. The book includes color illustrations of Roman sculpture andarchitecture; a couple of maps; a glossary; and an annotated, categorizedbibliography for further reading.

DG215 978-0-85303-981-5RRoommee’’ss wwaarr iinn PPaarrtthhiiaa;; bblloooodd iinn tthhee ssaanndd..Sheldon, Rose Mary.Vallentine Mitchell, ©2010 303 p. $79.95A specialist in ancient intelligence, Sheldon (history, Virginia MilitaryInstitute) here describes the empire’s military adventures in what is nowIran. In brief, the 300-year war ended in a draw. She analyzes the con-flict beginning with the first contact and proceeding through such stagesas the failure of Crassus, the campaign of Antony, the diplomatic solutionadopted by Augustus and Tiberius, the campaigns of Corbulo and theNeronian settlement, from Hadrian to Caracella, what the Romans knewand when they knew it, and the cost of war and empire then and now.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DG223 978-0-86159-173-2EEttrruussccaann bbyy ddeeffiinniittiioonn;; tthhee ccuullttuurraall,, rreeggiioonnaall aanndd ppeerrssoonnaalliiddeennttiittyy ooff tthhee EEttrruussccaannss:: PPaappeerrss iinn hhoonnoouurr ooff SSyybbiilllleeHHaayynneess..Title main entry. Ed. by Judith Swaddling and Philip Perkins. (BritishMuseum research publication; no.173)The British Museum Press, ©2009 111 p. $60.00 (pa)The 12 essays of this Festschrift describe objects and styles as well as sitesand the Etruscan language. Written by an impressive group of scholarsbased in the UK, Italy, France, Germany, and Greece, the essays are well-illustrated with excellent color and b&w plates and include lengthy anno-tation and bibliography. Individual topics include the meaning of sphinxroof ornament, Etruscan rock-cut tombs, and the Ridgway Ram vase inthe British Museum. A life and bibliography of Haynes, who was anactive member of the British Museum’s Etruscan department are pro-vided in the introduction. Not indexed, the volume is distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

DG262 978-1-935149-06-4WWaarrlloorrddss ooff RReeppuubblliiccaann RRoommee;; CCaaeessaarr vveerrssuuss PPoommppeeyy..Fields, Nic.Casemate Publishing, ©2010 238 p. $32.95A specialist in Greek and Roman warfare, historian Fields describes thecareers of the two Roman generals and the war between them thatshaped the history of the republic. He covers republican legions, the fore-runner, the rise and military exploit in turn of Pompey and Caesar, thewar between them, and Caesar’s triumph and legacy.

DG279 978-1-905125-25-8TThhee lloosstt mmeemmooiirrss ooff AAuugguussttuuss;; aanndd tthhee nneeww ddeevveellooppmmeennttooff RRoommaann aauuttoobbiiooggrraapphhyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Anton Powell and Christopher E. Smith.Classical Press of Wales, ©2009 227 p. $100.00It was originally 13 books long, but only fragments of it survive today.Scholars here explore what is in the fragments, what might have been inthe lost work, how historians might view the emperor and his time dif-ferently, and how the work responded and contributed to the genre ofautobiography. The topics include Cato the Elder and the origins ofRoman autobiography, Sulla’s Memoirs, Augustus’ Spanish war and theending of his memoirs, and alternative memoirs from the other side ofthe civil war. The 10 essays are from a July 2005 conference at BaskervilleHall, near Hay-on-Wye in Wales. Distributed in North America by TheDavid Brown Book Co.

DG279 2009-032178 978-1-4051-7655-2TThhee RRoommaannss iinn tthhee aaggee ooff AAuugguussttuuss..Lintott, Andrew. (The peoples of Europe)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 198 p. $29.95 (pa)Retired from Oxford University, Lintott (still emeritus Roman history,Worcester College) begins by reviewing briefly the growth of the Romanempire and the crisis of the late republic that led to its overthrow andthe rise of emperors. Then he focuses on life during the long reign ofAugustus from 30 BC to 14 AD from the angles of the emperor and hispeople; town and country; customs, culture, and ideas; and armedservices and the frontiers.

DG315 2009-034613 978-1-889758-93-0TThhee lliiffee ooff tthhee bblleesssseedd EEmmppeerroorr CCoonnssttaannttiinnee;; ffrroomm AADD 330066ttoo AADD 333377.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11884455))Pamphilus, Eusebius. (Christian Roman Empire series; v.8)Evolution Publishing, ©2009 219 p. $19.95 (pa)Here for modern readers is a biased, fulsome, and incomplete biographyof the controversial Roman Emperor by someone who knew him well.For all its faults, says editor Anthony P. Schiavo, it is the most detailedand intimate account surviving from antiquity, and the sole source forConstantine’s famous vision of a cross in the sky captioned “Conquer bythis.” Eusebius was Bishop of Caesarea about 260-340. The anonymousEnglish translation was first published in 1845 by Samuel Bagster andSons, London. A more scholarly translation was published in 1999 byOxford University Press.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–43–

DG417 978-88-596-0634-5FFiieessoollee;; tthhee gguuiiddee..Listri, Pier Francesco.Edizioni Polistampa, ©2009 80 p. $24.00 (pa)Fiesole is introduced as a 2,000-year-old town near Florence, in this firstnew guide to the area in some time. For visitors wishing to experiencethe Tuscany region, the tour begins with San Domenico’s medievalchurches and concludes with Fiesole’s contemporary art scene. The guideby a prolific writer on Italy includes a welcome by Fiesole’s mayor anddeputy mayor, maps, color photos, visitor information, and famous vis-itors’ remarks on the town. Distributed in North America by The DavidBrown Book Co.

DG445 2008-053118 978-0-8047-6216-8IInn yyoouurr ffaaccee;; pprrooffeessssiioonnaall iimmpprroopprriieettiieess aanndd tthhee aarrtt ooffbbeeiinngg ccoonnssppiiccuuoouuss iinn ssiixxtteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy IIttaallyy..Biow, Douglas.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 246 p. $24.95 (pa)Biow (Italian and comparative literature, University of Texas, Austin)takes a look at the “bad boys” of the Italian Renaissance in this study ofself-fashioning by artists and writers. He first examines the standard forproper behavior as set out in Castiglione’s The Courtier. The men whointerest him are those who glory in being outside the norm. For some itmeant excesses in food, drink, violence and sex. Others manifestedimmoderate behavior by attacking others in vitriolic printed articles.Biow treats artists Pietro Arento, Michelangelo, Cellini and AntonFrancesco Doni as examples of different aspects of the creation of animage of genius that could thrive outside defined social limits.

DG734 2009-012955 978-0-8139-2873-9FFlloorreennccee;; aa mmaapp ooff ppeerrcceeppttiioonnss..Ponsi, Andrea.U. of Virginia Press, ©2010 81 p. $22.95In this very personal view of Florence, architect Ponsi asks readers toaccompany him on a walk through the city. In lyrical language, he sharesa city that he still finds mysterious after living there for years, pointingout the recurring geometry of Florence, and the continually shifting lightand perspective. Not a guidebook, although it could be used as one, thisbeautifully produced volume invites exploration and contemplation.Ponsi’s elegant watercolors and pen-and-ink sketches are a perfect com-plement to his well-crafted text.

DG866 978-2-503-52757-4GGoovveerrnnmmeennttss ooff tthhee UUnniivveerrssiittaatteess;; uurrbbaann ccoommmmuunniittiieess ooffSSiicciillyy iinn tthhee ffoouurrtteeeenntthh aanndd ffiifftteeeenntthh cceennttuurriieess..Titone, Fabrizio. (Studies in European urban history (1100-1800); 21)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 320 p. $97.00 (pa)As part of his study of the urban history of the Aragonese crown, Titone(Pontifical Institute of Medieval Studies, Toronto) examines the transfor-mation of civic institutions in Sicilian cities during the 1300s and 1400s,and analyzes the seats of power, the people who wielded power, and thechannels and mechanisms through which it was mediated. He covers theestablishment of Aragonese rule, the polycentric system of cities from thetime of Martin I to Alphonso V, urban magistracies in the Alphonsianperiod, financial and fiscal policy during the reign of Alphonso V, andsocio-professional groups and electoral competition from the time ofMartin I to Alphonso V. Distributed in North America by The DavidBrown Book Co.

DG989 978-1-902937-49-6MMoorrttuuaarryy ccuussttoommss iinn pprreehhiissttoorriicc MMaallttaa;; eexxccaavvaattiioonnss aatt tthheeBBrroocchhttoorrffff CCiirrccllee aatt XXaagghhrraa,, GGoozzoo ((11998877--9944))..Title main entry. Ed. by Caroline Malone et al.McDonald Inst./Archaeol. Res., ©2009 521 p. $170.00This report represents several years of excavation (1987-1994) andanalysis of the prehistoric Brocjtorff Circle and Xaghra on the island ofMalta. The site consists of a number of circular structures, dubbed“temples” along with burials. The layers are from the Neolithic to theBronze Age. There were also finds of household materials, animal bonesand artwork, including unusual sculptures of solidly built people.Malone (geology, archaeology and paleoecology, Queen’s University,Belfast) and her colleagues provide a meticulous report of all finds, withdiagrams and photos, as well as the geology and environment of thearea. Several megalithic circles have been discovered that apparently datefrom the Neolithic period. Burials within them consist of articulatedbones arranged in patterns. While the concluding chapter speculates onthe purpose of these, the authors stress that there is no certain interpre-tation and that much more work is necessary on this important site.Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

DJK50 2009-042289 978-963-9776-55-5SSttaalliinniissmm rreevviissiitteedd;; tthhee eessttaabblliisshhmmeenntt ooff ccoommmmuunniissttrreeggiimmeess iinn EEaasstt--CCeennttrraall EEuurrooppee..Title main entry. Ed. by Vladimir Tismaneanu.Central European U. Press, ©2009 444 p. $45.00This volume contains 16 papers from an eponymous November 2007 con-ference concerned with the nature, dynamics, and consequences ofStalinism in Eastern and Central Europe. Looking over the broadly com-parative works, editor Tismaneanu (politics, U. of Maryland) identifiesfour axes of analysis that characterize the volume: the heterogeneousnature of communization; the role of the “Moscow Center” in theinterplay between sovietization and satellitization; the ambivalent sym-biosis between continuity and change in the Soviet satellite states; and thelogics of Stalinism’s apparatus of control and its consequences andlegacies in the region. Another quite evident theme is the evolution of thehistoriography of Stalinism. Distributed in the US by Books International.

DK100 2009-042614 978-0-89357-368-3TThhee nneeww MMuussccoovviittee ccuullttuurraall hhiissttoorryy;; aa ccoolllleeccttiioonn iinn hhoonnoorrooff DDaanniieell BB.. RRoowwllaanndd..Title main entry. Ed. by Valerie Kivelson et al.Slavica Publishers, ©2009 337 p. $34.95 (pa)A 2008 symposium at the University of Kentucky in honor of Daniel B.Rowland was the impetus for this festschrift on Muscovy in the sixteenthand seventeenth centuries. Kivelson (history, University of Michigan) andher colleagues took second looks at established historical beliefs aboutthe time period. One of their debates was about how pervasive theOrthodox religion was in Muscovy. The articles, although focusing on dif-ferent aspects of the culture, indicate that religion was a dominant factorin the lives of Muscovites. The first two sections deal with power and inthese the religious element is profound. From the biblical method ofchoosing a bride for the Tsar to apocalyptic imagery in art to theresistance of the Old Believers to change in ritual, the secular and reli-gious mix and clash forcefully. The emphasis on religion is hardly sur-prising, given that Moscow had been declared by the Muscovites to bethe “Third Rome”, the first two having abandoned the true faith. All ofthe articles are excellent with meticulous citations. The only lack is anindex, which would be useful.

DK113 978-0-8264-3081-6TThhee RRoommaannoovvss;; rruulliinngg RRuussssiiaa,, 11661133--11991177.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Hughes, Lindsey.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 308 p. $21.95 (pa)In this reprint from 2008, the late Hughes, who was professor of historyat the U. of London, UK, relates the history of the Romanovs in Russiafrom 1613 to the fall of the dynasty in 1917. She describes each of therulers from Michael to Nicholas II, including Alexis, Catherine I, Anna,Elizabeth, and Alexander III, focusing on the rulers and dynastic issuesand not the wider Romanov clan, and discussing both their successesand their failures and the strategies that allowed them to rule Russia forover 300 years. She includes discussion of the political and cultural roleof Romanov women, the relationship between the ruling house and theruling class, the rulers’ attitudes toward the Russian people, the rela-tionship between Russia and the major Western powers, and the balancebetween national identity and assimilation from abroad.

DK189 2009-040239 978-0-89357-367-6TThhee mmaakkiinngg ooff RRuussssiiaann hhiissttoorryy;; ssoocciieettyy,, ccuullttuurree,, aanndd tthheeppoolliittiiccss ooff mmooddeerrnn RRuussssiiaa;; eessssaayyss iinn hhoonnoorr ooff AAllllaann KK..WWiillddmmaann..Title main entry. Ed. by John W. Steinberg & Rex A. Wade. (The AllanK. Wildman Group historical series; 4)Slavica Publishers, ©2009 209 p. $24.95 (pa)The Allan K. Wildman Group for the Study of Russian Workers andSociety, to call it by its full name, was forged during the middle 1990s asan informal discussion forum for scholars interested in labor and socialhistory, with a special emphasis on the Russian revolutions of 1905 and1917. Eight papers in this fourth volume emerging from the discussionsexplore such matters as D. A. Miliutin’s impact on the education ofRussian military officers, Russian peasant migratory networks of ViatkaProvince during peace and revolution 1850-1921, and establishment intel-lectuals and literary politics in Lviv on the Soviet western borderlandduring the collapse of the Soviet Union. An additional essay looks atWildman’s life in scholarship. There is no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –44–

DK236 2009-027390 978-0-393-07079-8LLeenniinn’’ss bbrrootthheerr;; tthhee oorriiggiinnss ooff tthhee OOccttoobbeerr RReevvoolluuttiioonn..Pomper, Philip.W.W. Norton, ©2010 276 p. $24.95While the world knows the name Vladimir Lenin, very few people haveheard of the Russian leader’s older brother, a terrorist who was hangedfor plotting the assassination of Czar Alexander III. Using material fromthe Ulyanov family archives, Pomper (History, Wesleyan University)reveals the life of Alexander (Sasha) Ulyanov, showing the relationshipbetween Sasha and Vladimir and the process that took the older Ulyanovsibling from student to revolutionary and, ultimately, to a death thatwould have a crucial influence on the political evolution of his youngerbrother. This well-written and scholarly book is essential reading forscholars of 19th century Russian history and of the development ofsocialism or communism. It will also interest many general readers.Includes 16 pages of illustrations.

DK254 68-7089 978-0-87348-868-6TThhee ccaassee ooff LLeeoonn TTrroottsskkyy,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry.Pathfinder Press, ©2008 837 p. $30.00 (pa)In 1937, the Commission of Inquiry into the Charges Made against LeonTrotsky in the Moscow Trials, chaired by American philosopher JohnDewey and including other prominent members of the left, conducted amonths-long inquiry into the charges leveled against Trotsky at theMoscow show trials orchestrated by Stalin and his allies. Making itsfindings public in September of that same year, the Commission not onlycleared Trotsky, a leader of the Russian Revolution, of all charges, butalso concluded that the general “conduct of the Moscow trials was suchas to convince any unprejudiced person that no effort was made toascertain the truth” and found “the Moscow trials to be frame-ups”—years before the 1956 revelations of Nikita Khrushchev to the 20th PartyCongress of the Soviet Union began to prompt a much wider recognitionof the fraudulent nature of the Moscow proceedings. As part of theinquiry, a five-person sub-commission was dispatched to Trotsky’s homein Coyoacan, Mexico, and took Trotsky’s testimony regarding the charges-and the underlying political issues behind them - at 13 hearings con-ducted between April 10 and April 17. This volume, a paperbound editionof a work first published in 1937, reproduces the entirety of this tes-timony including Trotsky’s summation speech, where he addressesmajor political questions on the eve of the Second World War,, along witha few related documents in appendices. A companion volume fromPathfinder Press, Not Guilty, reproduces the full findings of the DeweyCommission.

DK254 2009-039494 978-0-465-01395-1CCoonnssppiirraattoorr;; LLeenniinn iinn eexxiillee..Rappaport, Helen.Basic Books, ©2010 384 p. $27.95This is a narrative biography of Vladimir Lenin (b. Ulyanov), focusing onhis years in exile, from his 1897 banishment to Siberia, through hisunderground travels in Europe, and concluding with his triumphantreturn to Petrograd to lead the Bolshevik revolution in Russia. The authorgoes into great personal detail as to how Lenin spent his days, both interms of the personalities behind the politics and in terms of things likepersonal relationships, personal finances, personal mannerisms, per-sonal health issues, personal (and sometimes amusing) quirks, and per-sonal rivalries (this last of which, naturally enough, often leads back topolitics). The volume is clearly aimed at a general audience, but thoseparticularly interested in psychological history, and perhaps even socio-logical history, may find the detail useful as well.

DK254 72-87928 978-0-87348-847-1NNoott gguuiillttyy;; ffiinnddiinnggss ooff tthhee 11993377 ccoommmmiissssiioonn cchhaaiirreedd bbyyJJoohhnn DDeewweeyy iinnvveessttiiggaattiinngg tthhee cchhaarrggeess aaggaaiinnsstt LLeeoonnTTrroottsskkyy iinn tthhee MMoossccooww TTrriiaallss.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11993388))Dewey, John et al.Pathfinder Press, ©2008 536 p. $28.00 (pa)In 1937, the Commission of Inquiry into the Charges Made against LeonTrotsky in the Moscow Trials, chaired by American philosopher JohnDewey and including other prominent members of the progressive andradical left, conducted a months-long inquiry into the charges leveledagainst Trotsky at the Moscow show trials orchestrated by Stalin and hisallies. Making its findings public in September of that same year, theCommission not only cleared Trotsky, a leader of the Russian Revolution,of all charges, but also concluded that the general “conduct of theMoscow trials was such as to convince any unprejudiced person that noeffort was made to ascertain the truth” and found “the Moscow trials tobe frame-ups”—years before the 1956 revelations of Nikita Khrushchev tothe 20th Party Congress of the Soviet Union began to prompt a muchwider recognition of the fraudulent nature of the Moscow proceedings.This volume reproduces the full findings of the commission. Appendicesinclude a biographical index of the accused and other information. Thisis a paperbound edition of a work first published in 1938. A companionvolume from Pathfinder Press, The Case of Leon Trotsky, reproduces theextensive testimony of Trotsky for the commission.

DK254 2009-025417 978-0-674-03615-4TTrroottsskkyy;; aa bbiiooggrraapphhyy..Service, Robert.Belknap Press, ©2009 600 p. $35.00Having previously written biographies of Vladimir Lenin and JosephStalin, Service (Russian history, Oxford U., UK) completes the trilogy withthis biography of Leon Trotsky. The biography focuses, naturally enough,on Trotsky’s career as a revolutionary, and only briefly recounts hisyouth. It is based, in significant part, on new materials, includingrecords of the Politburo and Central Committee for the 1920s, the internalrecords of the nascent Fourth International, and the first draft ofTrotsky’s autobiography. While no central thesis is immediately evident,Service is clearly interested in undermining much of the heroic imagesof Trotsky presented by biographers such as Isaac Deutscher, even as herecognizes Trotsky’s obvious brilliance. Belknap Press is an imprint ofHarvard U. Press.

DK505 978-90-420-2760-2LLiitthhuuaanniiaa iinn tthhee 11992200ss;; aa ddiipplloommaatt’’ss ddiiaarryy..Heingartner, Robert W. Ed. by Alfred Erich Senn. (On the boundary oftwo worlds; identity, freedom, and moral imagination in the Baltics; 19)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 279 p. $81.00 (pa)In this contribution to Baltic studies, Senn (emeritus, history, U. ofWisconsin-Madison) introduces the diary that Heingartner kept duringhis service in 1926-28 as American consul in Kaunas, the provincialcapital of Lithuania, and addenda made while serving in Frankfurt until1939. Senn, whose father was a professor of Lithuanian language inKaunas during Heingartner’s tenure there, situates his service in the con-texts of Western-Lithuanian relations and tensions over Polish-occupiedVilnius. He chronicles conditions in the newly independent state; foreigndiplomats’ lives; details about the family of President Antanas Smetona,ruler of Lithuania from 1926-1940; and his changing attitudes toward thecountry. Illustrations include Heingartner’s diplomatic visa and photos.

DK511 978-90-420-2762-611993399;; tthhee yyeeaarr tthhaatt cchhaannggeedd eevveerryytthhiinngg iinn LLiitthhuuaanniiaa’’sshhiissttoorryy..Liekis, Sarunas. (On the boundary of two worlds; identity, freedom,and moral imagination in the Baltics; 20)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 386 p. $112.00The Lithuanian capital’s shifting boundaries are reflected in its historicalnames: Vilna under the czars, Wilno between the world wars under thePolish Republic, and Vilnius after transfer by the Soviets to theLithuanian Republic in 1939. Liekis (politics/Vilnius Yiddish Institute,Mykolas Romeris U.), treats Vilnuis as an under- studied case in WorldWar II history of a city with large Polish and Jewish populations that didnot fall to the Nazis. In this contribution to historigraphy of the Balticcountries’ occupation and their annexation by the Soviet Union, she dis-cusses the Lithuanian regime’s fall, and questions the conventional viewthat Jews were well-accepted in the country prior to 1939. Images includeperiod political cartoons and photographs of troops and politicians. Priceis converted from Euros.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–45–

The two Book News periodicals alert you to more than 19,000 new, high-levelbooks each year. Our mission is to get reliable news to you quickly.

DK511 2008-047517 978-0-7656-2028-6DDaaggeessttaann;; RRuussssiiaann hheeggeemmoonnyy aanndd IIssllaammiicc rreessiissttaannccee iinn tthheeNNoorrtthh CCaauuccaassuuss..Ware, Robert Bruce and Enver Kisriev.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 251 p. $89.95Ware (philosophy, Southern Illinois U.-Edwardsville), who conductedfield research in the North Caucasus, and Dagestani sociologist Kisriev(Caucasian studies, Russian Academy of Sciences) analyze the tensionbetween influences from the north and the south in a majority Muslimregion that remained in the Russian Federation after the dissolution ofthe Soviet Union, a tension that overlies a far older tension between cen-tralization and decentralization that many attribute to the mountainousterrain. Their topics include Islamic ideology as an antidote to Russiancolonialism, the betrayal of Islam and construction of a Soviet ethnicity,ethnic accommodation in democratic Dagestan’s constitutional djamaat,Islamic revival and radicalism, why Dagestanis fought to remain inRussia, Russian recentralization and Islamic resistance, and a gatheringdarkness.

DK651 2010-000020 978-1-890357-26-9SSmmaallll ttoowwnn RRuussssiiaa;; cchhiillddhhoooodd mmeemmoorriieess ooff tthhee ffiinnaallSSoovviieett ddeeccaaddee..Weiss-Wendt, Anton. (New voices series; v.12)Florida Academic Press Inc., ©2010 179 p. $27.95 (pa)Weiss-Wendt’s memoir differs from others, he says, because he was tooyoung to be involved politically or otherwise with the Soviet government,he grew up in a small provincial town away from major urban centers,and he always thought of himself as Estonian and so developed nopatriotic affection for Russia. The bulk of his narrative covers 1980 to1988, though he sometimes sojourns forward or backward in time. Henow works at the Center for the Study of the Holocaust and ReligiousMinorities in Oslo, Norway.

DK676 2009-037705 0-230-61773-5AA lliittttllee wwaarr tthhaatt cchhaannggeedd tthhee wwoorrlldd;; GGeeoorrggiiaa,, RRuussssiiaa,, aannddtthhee ffuuttuurree ooff tthhee WWeesstt..Asmus, Ronald D.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2010 264 p. $27.00While the 2008 war between Russia and the Caucasus nation of Georgiahas largely dropped out of the public eye, its significance is still beingmulled over in academe and in the corridors of power. Asmus’ bookstakes out a neoconservative stance on the war, arguing that it wascaused by a combination of the West’s lukewarm support of Georgia’sindependence (especially of its entry into NATO) and Russia’s desire toassert a sphere of influence in the former Soviet republics along itsborder. While the book includes many interesting details about the war(such as the cyber-attacks on Georgia’s government and important insti-tutions), some readers will question the author’s failure to seriously con-sider whether there was a relationship between the Putin government’sstrong actions against Georgia and the dismissive attitude toward Russiatypical of U.S. foreign policy in the post-Soviet era. (And, given that thebook is about a war, its lack of maps is very puzzling.)

DK857 2009-010238 978-1-60692-880-6RRuussssiiaa iinn CCeennttrraall AAssiiaa;; ppoolliiccyy,, sseeccuurriittyy,, aanndd eeccoonnoommiiccss..Paramonov, Vladimir et al.Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 118 p. $79.00Russia’s foreign policy was forged before the dust had settled from thefall of the Soviet Union, observe Paramonov, Aleksey Strokov, and OlegStolpovski, and the current Russian government is becoming aware thatthe policy has run its course and must be replaced. Individually and col-lectively, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, andUzbekistan serve them as a case study. Specialists in the region’s eco-nomic and politics based in Tashkent, Uzbekistan, they begin with areview of simple provisions of the policy in three stages: 1992-95, 1996-99, and 2000 to the present. Then they explore multilateral and bilateralcooperation in security relations between Russia and Central Asian states.The final section considers economic relations from perspectives of thepresent state of economic relations, main problems, and recommenda-tions and prospects in both theory and practice. An annex delineatesbilateral trade between each of the five countries and Russia.

DL334 2009-053299 978-0-7864-4727-5IIcceellaannddeerrss iinn tthhee VViikkiinngg aaggee;; tthhee ppeeooppllee ooff tthhee ssaaggaass..Short, William R.McFarland & Co., ©2010 275 p. $35.00 (pa)Short, an independent scholar specializing in Iceland and the Norse set-tlements, has written a comprehensive but accessible history of theIceland of the Eddas. These sagas, written in the Middle Ages in the ver-nacular, are some of the best sources for the culture and beliefs of theearly Scandinavians. He divides the book by subject, starting with thenature of Iceland and how the Norse arrived there. All aspects of societyare covered including laws, conflict, domestic work, agriculture, genderroles, trade and production. In his report of the last, he points out thatnot all Norse were pillaging Vikings. The religion of the Icelanders isoften a major part of the sagas and there is much information on belief,but little on actual rites. Blending, literature, legal codes, chronicles andarchaeology and embellishing them with pictures, many of which hetook himself, Short’s book is a perfect companion to the study of theIcelandic sagas as well as a corrective for those who only know Icelandfrom film and Hagar the Horrible.

DL809 2009-529959 978-1-4438-0976-4PPoolliittiiccaall oouuttssiiddeerrss iinn SSwweeddiisshh hhiissttoorryy,, 11884488--11993322..Title main entry. Ed. by Lars Edgren and Magnus Olofsson.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 188 p. $54.00The purpose of assessing the role of political outsiders in Swedishhistory, Edgren (history, U. of Lund, Sweden) and Olofsson (Archive forLabor Movement in Landskrona, Sweden) suggest in their introduction,is both to expose the ways that those perhaps thought marginal stillmanaged to have significant impact on the history of Sweden and tofurther a critical understanding of dominant understandings of Swedishhistory that work to keep certain figures as outsiders of standard his-torical narratives. They present seven essays examining such outsiders,including those who established the radical newspaper Fäderneslandet in1852, the 19th century radical democrat and army officer Julius Mankel,tenant farmers and rural poor making claims of landownership on largeestates in the southern part of Sweden in the 1860s, the syndicalists ofthe 1910s and 1920s, and outsider political parties of the right and leftof the 1930s.

DP94 978-0-7156-3862-0HHiissppaanniiaa aanndd tthhee RRoommaann MMeeddiitteerrrraanneeaann AADD 110000--770000;;cceerraammiiccss aanndd ttrraaddee..Reynolds, Paul.Duckworth, ©2010 372 p. $80.00Primarily addressing archaeologists and historians interested in theeconomy of the Roman Mediterranean and its outlying provinces,Reynolds (U. of Barcelona, Spain) synthesizes and interprets the Spanisharchaeological literature on the ceramics of Roman Spain. Covering thefirst to seventh centuries CE, the volume’s chapters examine the evidenceconcerning the early oil, fish, and wine trade; fine wares and their pro-duction and distribution patterns; possible shipping routes linking portsand regions; and related matters. Distributed in the US by InternationalPublishers Marketing.

DP269 2009-396983 978-1-4438-0485-1TThhee iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ccoonntteexxtt ooff tthhee SSppaanniisshh CCiivviill WWaarr..Title main entry. Ed. by Gaynor Johnson.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 194 p. $59.99Editor Johnson (international history, U. of Salford, UK) and eight co-con-tributors attempt to fill in at least some of the blanks regarding theSpanish Civil War (1936-1939). In addition to describing the complex war,characterized by its regional variations and brutality, the authors alsoprovide an analysis of the attitudes of democracies in Europe and NorthAmerica toward the war, putting it into an international context. Thebook addresses several facets of the war, including issues of appeasementby other powers, British involvement in the war, the German militarycontribution to the war, and the involvement on many levels of othercountries. Well-researched and thoughtful, the book offers perspectivesthat lead to a better understanding of this not quite forgotten conflict.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –46–

DP680 978-1-929631-90-2SSaallaazzaarr;; aa ppoolliittiiccaall bbiiooggrraapphhyy..Meneses, Filipe Ribeiro de.Enigma Books, ©2009 644 p. $28.00 (pa)This is a political biography of António de Oliveira Salazar, the autocraticruler of Portugal from 1928 to 1968. De Meneses (modern history,National U. of Ireland at Maynooth, Ireland) has constructed the biog-raphy based primarily on his examination of the material housed in theArquivo Oliveira Salazar, Salazar’s private and political papers in thePortuguese National Archives. He focuses in particular on the nature ofthe right-wing Estado Novo (“New State”) in the 1930s and foreign andcolonial affairs, “because these are the areas in which Salazar is mostoften inserted in international discussions,” but also addresses otherpolicies and seeks to show certain constant preoccupations, such as man-aging the army so as to remain in power and Salazar’s views on thenature of world order.

DR434 2009-027544 978-0-295-98948-8AA mmoovveeaabbllee eemmppiirree;; OOttttoommaann nnoommaaddss,, mmiiggrraannttss,, aannddrreeffuuggeeeess..Kasaba, Resat.U. of Washington Press, ©2009 194 p. $30.00 (pa)Kasaba (International Studies, University of Washington) examines thehistory of the Ottoman Empire by focusing on the migrant groups thatlived within its bounds and on the changing relationship of these groupsto the central authorities. The author argues that the need to accom-modate nomadic groups helped shape Ottoman institutions, and thatthese flexible relationships became a liability as the empire attempted tomodernize in the 18th and 19th centuries. (Some readers may notice par-allels between the methods used by the Ottoman state to settle and breakup nomadic groups and those used by the U.S. government to assimilateNative American tribes.) Scholarly and accessible, Kasaba’s book is animportant addition to contemporary scholarship on the Ottoman Empire.

DR1507 2009-035323 978-0-8108-6750-5HHiissttoorriiccaall ddiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff CCrrooaattiiaa,, 33dd eedd..Stallaerts, Robert. (Historical dictionaries of Europe; no.74)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 453 p. $130.00A specialist on Croatia based in Belgium, Stallaerts (1947-2009) offersbackground on the Croat people over the centuries to help readers under-stand events during the messy breakup of Yugoslavia during the 1990sand politics in the Balkan Peninsula since then. Many such historical dic-tionaries are heavily weighted to one or other kind of entry—typicallyindividuals—but he encompasses a wide range of interests and dimen-sions. Examples are Bogomilism, the 1917 Declaration of Corfu, theCroatian intelligence system, writer Vladimir Nazor (1876-1949),sculpture, and Yugoslavia (1918-92). The chronology extends from thedeath of Roman Emperor Theodosius in 395 to the entry of Croatia inthe North Atlantic Treaty Organization in May 2009. No dates are citedfor previous editions.

DR1524 2009-030826 978-1-84545-726-6CCoonntteesstteedd nnaattiioonnaalliissmm;; SSeerrbb eelliittee rriivvaallrryy iinn CCrrooaattiiaa aannddBBoossnniiaa iinn tthhee 11999900ss..Caspersen, Nina. (Ethnopolitics)Berghahn Books, ©2010 207 p. $75.00A specialist in the Balkans and the Caucasus, Caspersen (peace and con-flict studies, Lancaster U., England) analyzes the breakdown in the tra-ditional unity observed by Serbs during the breakdown of all Yugoslavia.Within in a new conceptual framework, she presents fresh primaryresearch not so much on why elites chose a certain position, of but howthe political positions adopted by Serb leaders were affected by internalrivalry. She also investigates how more moderate forces were margin-alized and why hardliners proved victorious. The rivalry, she argues, wasan important but often overlooked element in Yugoslav disintegration.The study began as her Ph.D. dissertation for the London School ofEconomics at an undisclosed date.

TTHHEE MMIIDDDDLLEE EEAASSTT,, AASSIIAA

DS19 2009-031087 978-1-59233-398-1TThhee rriissee aanndd ffaallll ooff tthhee sseeccoonndd llaarrggeesstt eemmppiirree iinn tthheewwoorrlldd;; hhooww GGeenngghhiiss KKhhaann’’ss MMoonnggoollss aallmmoosstt ccoonnqquueerreeddtthhee wwoorrlldd..Craughwell, Thomas J.Fair Winds Press, ©2010 272 p. $19.99 (pa)Prolific author Craughwell tells a richly detailed and illustrated story ofthe Mongol Empire and its, at least for a time, successful unification ofa region that extended from Eastern Europe to the shores of east Asia inthe 13th century. The author also details the empire’s equally dramaticdecline. While consistently violent and bloody, the empire’s rise to powerwas monumental by any measure, which the author makes abundantlyclear. An imprint of Quayside Publishing.

DS33 2009-022979 978-81-7829-948-8PPoowweerr rreeaalliiggnnmmeennttss iinn AAssiiaa;; CChhiinnaa,, IInnddiiaa,, aanndd tthhee UUnniitteeddSSttaatteess..Title main entry. Ed. by Alyssa Ayres and C. Raja Mohan.Sage Publications, ©2009 344 p. $39.95This book, a compilation of fourteen papers presented at a conference inNew Delhi in December 2006, examines the influence that China’sgrowing economic, military, and political power is having on Asian pol-itics, particularly the relationship between the US and India. Specialattention is paid to the international impact of China’s quest for energyindependence, as well as the country’s effect on the global environment.The conference was an inaugural cooperative forum sponsored by India’sObserver Research Foundation and the University of Pennsylvania’sCenter for the Advanced Study of India.

DS36 2009-941795 978-1-885923-70-7PPiioonneeeerrss ttoo tthhee ppaasstt;; AAmmeerriiccaann aarrcchhaaeeoollooggiissttss iinn tthheeMMiiddddllee EEaasstt,, 11991199--11992200..Title main entry. Ed. by Geoff Emberling. (Oriental Institute MuseumPublications, no.30)Oriental Institute (U. of Chicago), ©2010 160 p. $34.95 (pa)Emberling’s (Oriental Institute Museum, U. of Chicago) illustrated textsupplements an exhibition held at the Oriental Institute, January toAugust 2010, and highlights the interconnected stories of the founder ofthe Oriental Institute, James Henry Breasted (1865-1935), the beginningsof American scientific archaeology in the Near East, and the birth of themodern Middle East. Coverage includes an overview of Breasted’s 1919-1920 inaugural expedition for the Institute through Egypt and what arenow Iraq, Syria, Lebanon, and Israel; knowledge about ancient MiddleEastern societies at the time of the expedition; the Middle East duringand immediately after WWI; a description of the 1919-1920 trip; theevolving legal landscape for Middle Eastern archeology from 1800-1930;how the educated Middle Eastern elite viewed the activities of foreignarchaeologists; and the aftermath of the expedition. Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co. Oversize: 9x11.5″.

DS38 978-1-906768-10-2TThhee LLaakkhhmmiiddss ooff HHiirraa;; ssoonnss ooff tthhee WWaatteerr ooff HHeeaavveenn..Zahran, Yasmine.Stacey International, ©2009 190 p. $37.95Although they were a major force on the Arabian penninsula in the fifthand sixth centuries, the Lakhmid people are relatively little known.Ruling much of what is now Iraq, Syria, and Kuwait, the influence ofLakhmid culture was widespread—even to the degree that the Lakhmidcapital, Hira, was where the Arabic alphabet was first standardized.Author of several books on pre-Islamic Arabia, Zahran presents a livelyand well-documented history of the Lakhmids, a good part of it toldusing the voices of the three most illustrious Lakhmid kings. This bookwill appeal to Arabists and historians of the Middle East, and to generalreaders who enjoy a good history book. Distributed in North America byThe David Brown Book Co.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–47–

DS54 978-0-86159-180-0AAnncciieenntt CCyypprruuss iinn tthhee BBrriittiisshh MMuusseeuumm;; eessssaayyss iinn hhoonnoouurrooff VVeerroonniiccaa TTaattttoonn--BBrroowwnn..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Kiely. (British Museum research publi-cation; no.180)The British Museum Press, ©2009 100 p. $50.00 (pa)Kiely (curator of Cypriot antiquities at the British Museum) presents eightessays in honor of his predecessor, Veronica Tatton-Brown, a specialist inthe archaeology of ancient Cyprus who had a long career at the BritishMuseum. The essays include an appreciation of Tatton-Brown’s career, anassessment of the state of Cypriot archaeology, reconstruction of aPersian siege at the Cypriot city of Paphos, a report of an excavation oftomb at the Bronze Age site of Enkomi, parents and children in Cypriotsculpture, and an analysis of the Kourion notebook (an archaeologicalreport of an early excavation that is held at the British Museum).Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

DS54 2009-493330 978-9963-560-86-8CCyypprruuss aanndd tthhee EEaasstt AAeeggeeaann;; iinntteerrccuullttuurraall ccoonnttaaccttss ffrroomm33000000 ttoo 550000 BBCC;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..Int’l Archaeological Symposium on Cyprus and the East Aegean (2008:Pythagoreion, Samos) Ed. by Vassos Karageorghis and Ourania Kouka.A.G. Leventis Foundation, ©2009 262 p. $63.00 (pa)Several symposia have considered cultural links between the easternMediterranean island north and west during prehistoric times, but hereEuropean archaeologists look at links east to the Syro-Palestinian coastand Asia Minor, and south to Egypt. They report on such matters as theorigin of the name Ionian, old and new evidence of contacts and inter-actions between Rhodes and Cyprus, East Greek and Cypriote ceramicsof the Archaic period, comparing the standing draped female figure inthe Archaic art of Cyprus and the Eastern Aegean, Cypriote terracottasfrom Miletus, limestone figurines recently found at the Archaic sanctuaryof Apollo in the territory of Knidos, and Ionian styles in Cypriotesculpture of the sixth century BC. There is no index. Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

DS54 2009-032658 978-1-84217-339-8EEggyypptt aanndd CCyypprruuss iinn aannttiiqquuiittyy;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..International Conference “Egypt and Cyprus in Antiquity” (2003:Nicosia, Cyprus). Ed. by D. Michaelides et al.Oxbow Books, ©2009 260 p. $90.00Knowing that the conference was the first to address relations betweenCyprus and Egypt during ancient times, organizers made a point ofmaintaining a balance between all periods, and the 24 papers arearranged in sections on the Bronze Age, the Iron Age, and classical andlater periods. Among the topics are Alas(h)i(y)a (Irs) and Asiya (Isy) inancient Egyptian sources, the perception of Cypriot pottery in Egypt, therelations of Egyptian iconography and symbolism with the royal ideologyof Cypriote city kingdoms, the assimilation of Zeus Ammon in theCypriote pantheon, Isiac cults in Ptolemaic and Roman Cyprus, Egyptianpresence on late Hellenistic Yeronisos, Alexandrian elements in Cypriotburial customs of the Hellenistic and Roman periods. Eight of the papersare in French. There is no index. Distributed in North America by TheDavid Brown Book Co.

DS56 2009-939965 978-1-885923-67-7PPiioonneeeerr ttoo tthhee ppaasstt;; tthhee ssttoorryy ooff JJaammeess HHeennrryy BBrreeaasstteedd,,aarrcchhaaeeoollooggiisstt.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11994433))Breasted, Charles.Oriental Institute (U. of Chicago), ©2009 436 p. $24.95Reprint of a 1943 biography of American historian and orientalist, JamesHenry Breasted (1865-1935), the first American to receive a PhD inEgyptology, the first to teach the subject at the U. of Chicago, and founderin 1919 of the U. of Chicago’s Oriental Institute, an interdisciplinaryresearch center uniting archaeology, textual studies, and art history asthree complementary methodologies to provide a holistic understandingof ancient Near Eastern civilizations. Written by Breasted’s son, Charles(1897-1980), the text traces the life of the senior Breasted, intertwinedwith the story of the Oriental Institute. Featuring a selection of b&w pho-tographs not included in the original publication, the reprint is one ofseveral printed documents, online resources, and exhibitions celebratingthe Oriental Institute’s 90th anniversary.

DS63 2009-018328 978-0-7391-3601-0TThhee ccaalliipphhaattee qquueessttiioonn;; tthhee BBrriittiisshh ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt aannddIIssllaammiicc ggoovveerrnnaannccee..Oliver-Dee, Sean.Lexington Books, ©2009 235 p. $70.00Oliver-Dee (London School of Theology, UK) combines the fields of the-ology, history, and political science in this examination of how Britishforeign policymakers approached issues of the political/religious importof the Ottoman Caliphate and Islamic governance between 1919 and1949. In particular, he examines how the British government viewed therole of the Ottoman Caliph and the sources of information they werereceiving about the Caliphate; the impact of the views Professor ThomasArnold on perspectives within the Foreign Office, the Cabinet Office, theColonial Office, and the India Office; and Prime Minister Lloyd-George’sinteractions with the Khilafat movement of British India. In conclusion,he suggests that the attempted manipulation of Islamic sentiment forBritish political benefit carried inherent dangers, especially when cul-turally ill-informed; that British policymakers sought to satisfy Musliminterests in the British Empire above those of other ethnic and religiousgroups; and that the failure to take into account the different connota-tions of language based on the cultural backgrounds of different actorswas endemic to negotiations between the British government and theMuslims in the British Empire. He also strongly suggests that Britainreview its current foreign policy orientations in light of his findings.

DS63 2009-018484 978-0-230-62140-4CCiivviilliiaann jjiihhaadd;; nnoonnvviioolleenntt ssttrruuggggllee,, ddeemmooccrraattiizzaattiioonn,, aannddggoovveerrnnaannccee iinn tthhee MMiiddddllee EEaasstt..Title main entry. Ed. by Maria J. Stephan.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 344 p. $90.00“Civilian jihad,” a term borrowed by Stephan (Office of the Coordinatorfor Reconstruction and Stabilization, US Department of State), from Iraqiauthor Khalid Kishtainy, refers to strategies of nonviolent resistance byordinary civilians against tyranny and oppression in the Middle East. Shepresents 19 papers exploring the history of “civilian jihad” across theregion. Opening papers address overarching conceptual and theoreticalissues, including the theory and dynamics of nonviolent action, the roleof humor in nonviolent resistance, parallels between modern Arab andIslamic activism and the US civil rights movement, and the interactionbetween external actors and nonviolent struggles in the Middle East. Theremaining papers consist of case studies of movements challengingforeign occupation, challenging domestic tyrannies, and/or agitating forsocial and political rights in India, the Israeli-occupied Golan Heights,Israeli-occupied Palestine, Moroccan-occupied Western Sahara, Lebanon,Iran, Egypt, Kuwait, Turkey, Egypt, and Israel.

DS63 2009-042607 978-0-8133-4440-9IInntteerrpprreettiinngg tthhee MMiiddddllee EEaasstt;; eesssseennttiiaall tthheemmeess..Sorenson, David S.Westview Press, ©2010 444 p. $49.00 (pa)Sorenson (international security, US Air Force’s Air War College) soughtout political scientists, security specialists, and other scholars who couldclarify a particular aspect of the region for students or general readers.They cover demography and historical memory, politics, politicaleconomy, social contexts, and international dimensions. The regionincludes the Maghreb and the western Sahara.

DS80 978-1-906011-27-7LLeebbaannoonn tthhrroouugghh wwrriitteerrss’’ eeyyeess..Title main entry. Ed. by T.J. Gorton and A. Féghali Gorton. (Throughwriters’ eyes)Eland Publishing, ©2009 295 p. $31.95 (pa)Squeezed between Mount Lebanon and the eastern shore of theMediterranean Sea, the territory has been visited and described sinceancient times. Here is an anthology of reflections for general readers andscholars, but most especially for people thinking of visiting the country.Among the excerpts are the Journey of Wenamon to Phoenicia about 1100BC, Josephus: Antiquities of the Jews about 65 AD, Ibn al-Qalanisi: TheDamascus Chronicle of the Crusades about 1150 AD, Ibn Battuta: Travelsabout 1235, Sir Jon Mandeville: Voyage about 1360, Mark Twain:Innocents Abroad 1869, and James Frazer: The Golden Bought 1909.Modern times are covered in sections on religious, political, and literaryidentity; and wars from the 19th century through the Six-Day War andthe 1975-90 Civil War to the recent 2006 attack by Israel. There is noindex. Distributed in the US by Dufour.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –48–

DS99 978-1-84217-371-8TThhee eexxccaavvaattiioonnss aatt DDuurraa--EEuurrooppooss ccoonndduucctteedd bbyy YYaalleeUUnniivveerrssiittyy aanndd tthhee FFrreenncchh AAccaaddeemmyy ooff iinnssccrriippttiioonnss aannddlleetttteerrss 11992288 ttoo 11993377;; ffiinnaall rreeppoorrtt 77:: TThhee aarrmmss aanndd aarrmmoouurraanndd ootthheerr mmiilliittaarryy eeqquuiippmmeenntt..James, Simon.Oxbow Books, ©2010 304 p. $80.00 (pa)James (archaeology, U. of Leicester, UK), whose PhD dissertation was onthis material, has written a thorough account of the Roman and otherarms and armor that were discovered at Dura Europos, a Roman siteabandoned in the 3d century AD following a siege by the SasanianPersians. The book, which is well illustrated with b&w and some colorplates, is divided into three parts. In the first, the discovery of the arti-facts, the historical context, and the physical context of the finds aredescribed. The second section is devoted to the artifacts themselves, withdescription of each type—including military dress, armor, horse armor,helmets, edged weapons, shields, shafted weapons, bows and arrows,and torsion artillery—and a catalog with drawings and descriptive entrieson each piece. The third section contains a concluding discussion of theuse, manufacture, and repair of the equipment; evidence for the use ofthe equipment in combat; and other themes. An extensive bibliography,concordance, and indexes are included. This is a paper reprint of the2004 original. Distributed in the US by the David Brown Book Company.

DS99 2009-030143 978-90-04-16907-4FFoorrggiinngg uurrbbaann ssoolliiddaarriittiieess;; OOttttoommaann AAlleeppppoo,, 11664400--11770000..Wilkins, Charles L. (The Ottoman Empire and its heritage; v.41)BRILL, ©2010 323 p. $186.00Wilkins (Wake Forest U.), through extensive research of the law archivesfor Aleppo, Syria, has quantified the specific ways life changed in the cityfrom 1640-1700 as Ottoman soldiers became an increasingly persistentpart of society. He accomplishes this through examining the records ofthe guilds, residential quarters, and the military garrison, demonstratinghow the soldiers transformed over time into a corrupt and corrosiveentity no longer controlled by Istanbul and how, simultaneously, thecivilian population changed to accommodate their presence. Issues of tax-ation and developing notions of leadership are central to the study.Defining in concrete terms the impact of Ottoman imperial warfare atthe local level, this study will be of interest to students and scholars ofOttoman history.

DS109 2009-005824 978-1-84519-348-5JJeerruussaalleemm ssyynnddrroommee;; tthhee PPaalleessttiinniiaann--IIssrraaeellii bbaattttllee ffoorr tthheeHHoollyy CCiittyy..Amirav, Mosheh.Sussex Academic Press, ©2009 230 p. $32.50 (pa)Amirav draws from research studies, official documents from theJerusalem municipality and the Israeli government, and interviews withpolicy makers at the municipal and national level to describe why thegoals set by Israel’s policy makers after the Six-Day War have not beenachieved, and how the pathological phenomenon tat affects visitors whocome to Jerusalem with religious and historic delusions has affectedpolicy making in the city. He explains how Jerusalem became Israel’scapital, the struggle over East Jerusalem, why Israel is losing the Jewishmajority in its capital, and why it is the most polarized city in the world,as well as the many failed attempts for peace and the struggle over theHoly Places. In the 1980s, Amirav (government, Beit Berl College, andpolitical science, Hebrew U., Jerusalem) was the first to initiate negotia-tions with Faisal Husseini, the leader of the Palestinians in Jerusalem,and was involved in talks between Israel and the Palestinians in 2000and 2001. Distributed in North America by ISBS.

DS110 2009-032963 978-1-84519-344-7TThhee GGaazzaa SSttrriipp;; iittss hhiissttoorryy aanndd ppoolliittiiccss;; ffrroomm tthheepphhaarraaoohhss ttoo tthhee IIssrraaeellii iinnvvaassiioonn ooff 22000099..Shachar, Nathan.Sussex Academic Press, ©2010 206 p. $59.50This is a balanced account of the history and politics of the Gaza Strip,which is now considered to be little more than a besieged prison campby Palestinians living under Israeli occupation, but has long been a“highway of armies.” The focus is largely on the politics of the Israeli-Palestinian dispute, with the main sources for post-1975 events being theauthor’s own reportorial notes, memories, and contacts dating fromwhen he was a correspondent in the area, but the narrative also coversevents from the times of ancient Egypt through the British mandate. Thenarrative is current through to “Operation Cast Lead,” the 2008-9 Israelimilitary assault on Gaza, which the author correctly sees as having delib-erately blurred the distinction between civilians and combatants and uti-lized an “overkill volume of fire.” Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DS113 978-3-8329-4817-7IIssrraaeell’’ss EEuurrooppeeaann ppoolliiccyy aafftteerr tthhee CCoolldd WWaarr..Ahlswede, Stefan. (Düsseldorf series on international law and policy; 6)Nomos, ©2009 331 p. $68.00 (pa)Ahlswede of HafenCity University, Hamburg, examines Israel’s policytoward the European Union since the end of the Cold War in 1986. Hebegins with an historical overview of the turbulent relationship betweenIsrael and Europe. As he points out, most studies have looked at Israelin terms of the United States or other Near Eastern countries. Since thereis no written policy statement regarding Europe, Ahlswede makes a caseby case analysis, using both documents and interviews. Concentrating onevents that were essentially Eurocentric such as economic agreements,scientific cooperation and some European agreements with other MiddleEastern countries, he concludes that there is ambivalence in the Israeligovernment. Many wish Israel to be seen as a European type country,even a member of the EU. This is counter to the long shadows of pastoppression. Ahlswede recognizes the historical baggage Israel carries andconcludes that it must stop seeing itself as a “rebellious victim” beforemeaningful exchanges can take place. Distributed in the US by ISBS

DS119 2009-013831 978-1-84519-281-5IIssrraaeell’’ss ffoorreeiiggnn ppoolliiccyy ttoowwaarrdd tthhee PPLLOO,, 11996677--22000055;; tthheeiimmppaacctt ooff gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn..Aran, Amnon.Sussex Academic Press, ©2009 176 p. $74.95Aran (City U., London, UK) examines Israeli foreign policy towards thePalestinian Liberation Organization (PLO) between the 1967 war and2005, with a focus on the impact of globalization. He uses globalizationtheory and foreign policy analysis to connect globalization to the gov-ernment, the state, the economy, social stratification, and the media,showing the impact and varied outcomes of four phases: the discon-nection between globalization and foreign policy between 1967 and 1973;the development of relationships between the political and military glob-alization from 1973 and 1984; the expansion of foreign policy as itbecame related to the economic, social, and cultural aspects of global-ization from 1985-1999; and the hybrid phase from 1999 to the present,in which political, military, economic, social, and cultural impacts ofglobalization all influenced foreign policy. He does not provide a com-prehensive account of Israel’s policy toward the PLO, but focuses on glob-alization and foreign policy, and therefore does not examine in detailsuch topics as the Jewish settler movement and the fragmented Israelipolitical system, or environmental globalization. Distributed in the US byISBS.

DS119 2009-034228 978-1-56656-789-3IItt’’ss eeaassiieerr ttoo rreeaacchh hheeaavveenn tthhaann tthhee eenndd ooff tthhee ssttrreeeett;; aaJJeerruussaalleemm mmeemmooiirr..Williams, Emma.Interlink Publishing Group, ©2010 412 p. $16.00 (pa)Physician/writer Williams recounts her life in Jerusalem between 2000and 2003, one of the most violent periods in Israel/Palestine relations.Her roles as a doctor working in the occupied territories and as themother of four children growing up in a conflict area gives her a dis-tinctive perspective on events, and her extensive use of conversations withPalestinians and Israelis to move her account along makes her book par-ticularly credible. (The chapter “Only God” shows the intractability of theconflict particularly well.) Williams’ even-handedness in her criticism ofIsraelis and Palestinians will undoubtedly anger partisans of both sides.

DS119 2009-038315 978-1-60497-654-0RReessoollvviinngg tthhee IIssrraaeellii--PPaalleessttiinniiaann ccoonnfflliicctt;; ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonntthhee ppeeaaccee pprroocceessss..Title main entry. Ed. by Moises F. Salinas and Hazza Abu Rabia.Cambria Press, ©2009 335 p. $119.99This volume, edited by Salineas (psychology, Central Connecticut State U.)and Abu Rabi (Islamic studies and Arabic, Connecticut College and U. ofHartford), arises out of a March 2008 academic conference called“Pathways to Peace,” which brought together scholars from politicalscience, economics, psychology, philosophy, and literature from theUnited States, Israel, and Palestine in order to explore issues they believepertinent to resolving the Israel-Palestine conflict. Topics include thepolitical and diplomatic ramifications of the conflict, the need for thecontending parties to hammer out a “declaration of principles” regardingthe final outcome of negotiations, the role of peace education programsin preventing conflict, the historical and archaeological evidenceregarding the ties of Jews and Arabs to the land of historical Palestine,Islamic movements among Arabs living within Israel, and the role of reli-gious leaders in resolving the conflict.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–49–

DS125 978-1-906011-38-3PPaalleessttiinnee ppaappeerrss,, 11991177--11992222;; sseeeeddss ooff ccoonnfflliicctt.. ((rreepprriinntt,,11997722))Ingrams, Doreen.Eland Publishing, ©2009 200 p. $31.95 (pa)British policy towards the land of Palestine indubitably played a majorrole in shaping the contours of the conflict arising out of Zionist effortsto establish what was to become the state of Israel. This work providesa chronological documentary history of the formation of British policy,from the Balfour declaration of 1917—which added the contradictorypromise of sympathy for the Zionist cause to that of the British promiseof independence to the Arabs in appreciation of their struggles againstthe Ottoman Empire and the promise to the French for separate spheresof interest as embodied in the Sykes-Picot agreement—to the estab-lishment of the British Mandate in 1922. The focus is on the formationof British policy, but relevant documents from other actors are alsoincluded. Distributed in the US by Dufour.

DS126 978-0-86372-342-1RReeffuussiinngg ttoo bbee eenneemmiieess;; PPaalleessttiinniiaann aanndd IIssrraaeellii nnoonnvviioolleennttrreessiissttaannccee ttoo tthhee IIssrraaeellii ooccccuuppaattiioonn..Kaufman-Lacusta, Maxine.Ithaca Press, ©2010 502 p. $69.95Kaufman-Lacusta is a Quaker-Jewish activist who lived in Jerusalemfrom 1988 to 1995, and how lives in Vancouver, British Columbia. Sheoffers personal, political, and strategic perspectives on the movement shetakes part in. Her topics include why she chose nonviolence and thestruggle against the occupation of Palestine, nonviolence strategies ofPalestinian and Israeli organizations, details of three nonviolent cam-paigns, towards a more effective nonviolent movement, and thinkingabout the future. In a final section, other activists contribute: GhassanAndoni on the history of Palestinian nonviolence, Jeff Jalper on strategicnonviolence, Jonathan Kuttab on a pacifist Palestinian perspective, andStarhawk on the unique challenges of Palestinian nonviolence.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DS134 2009-001202 978-0-89357-349-2EEmmppiirree JJeewwss;; JJeewwiisshh nnaattiioonnaalliissmm aanndd aaccccuullttuurraattiioonn iinn1199tthh-- aanndd eeaarrllyy 2200tthh--cceennttuurryy RRuussssiiaa..Horowitz, Brian. (New approaches to Russian and East Europeanculture; 2)Slavica Publishers, ©2009 305 p. $29.95 (pa)Horowitz (Jewish studies, Tulane U.) considers that the tensions inherentin modern Russian-Jewish identity nurtured the blossoming of Jewishcultural life at the turn of the 20th century. This anthology of 14 articleswritten over a decade adds two new ones to translations from Russian.Essays examine the between- worlds dilemma of such writers as LevLevanda and Shimon Ans- key; “liberal nationalists” who followed thelead of Simon Dubnov (pictured), who promoted equal rights for Jews inRussia; Jews in the Russian elite, e.g., Mikhail Gersenzon, and their riftwith Christian Russian philosophers; and Aron Shteinberg, a disciple ofantisemitic Doestoevsky. The concluding essay treats American Jews’responses to pogroms in Tzarist Russia.

DS134 2009-031750 978-1-84519-380-5TThhee iinnccrreeddiibbllee aaddvveennttuurreess ooff BBuuffffaalloo BBiillll ffrroomm BBoocchhnniiaa((6688771155));; tthhee ssttoorryy ooff aa GGaalliicciiaann JJeeww,, ppeerrsseeccuuttiioonn,,lliibbeerraattiioonn,, ttrraannssffoorrmmaattiioonn..Baumel-Schwartz, Judith Tydor.Sussex Academic Press, ©2009 235 p. $34.95 (pa)Baumel-Schwartz (Jewish history, Bar-Ilan U., Israel) grew up listening toher Holocaust survivor father’s tales of a fictional adventurer named“Buffalo Bill from Biochina.” In this biography, she combines interviewswith the late Haskel Tydor (inmate # 68715 who was in Buchenwald withElie Wiesel) with her study of Kibbutz Buchenwald, the first post-warkibbutz in liberated Germany which he helped found in 1945. She tracesher father’s life from Poland to Palestine/Israel and the US. The bookincludes a foreword noting the lack of data on the number of concen-tration camps survivors, photographs, further reading, and a bibliog-raphy. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DS134 2008-054390 978-1-874774-64-8TThhee JJeewwss iinn PPoollaanndd aanndd RRuussssiiaa,, vv..11:: 11335500 ttoo 11888811..Polonsky, Antony.Littman Libr./Jewish Civiliz., ©2010 534 p. $59.50Until World War II, eastern Europe was the Jewish population and cul-tural core. In this first of a three-volume set, Polonsky (Holocaust studies,Brandeis U., United States Holocaust Memorial Museum) begins thismajor survey with an overview of Jewish religious, socio-political, andeconomic life and their autonomous institutions and relations withChristians in Poland and Lithuania from the mid-14th to the 18thcentury. The second part focuses on attempts to “reform”/assimilate theJews in pre- and post-Kingdom of Poland and Tsarist Russia, andopposing Jewish responses: e.g., followers of the Haskalah, the JewishEnlightenment, vs. the Hasidim. The volume includes period maps,demographic tables, a glossary of multilingual terms, and extensive bib-liography. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DS135 2009-005935 978-1-930675-61-2BBeettwweeeenn tthhee ddeevviill aanndd tthhee ddeeeepp bblluuee sseeaa??;; FFrreenncchh JJeewwrryyaanndd tthhee pprroobblleemm ooff cchhuurrcchh aanndd ssttaattee..Kaplan, Zvi Jonathan. (Brown Judaic studies; no.352)Brown Judaic Studies, ©2009 140 p. $19.95Filling a gap in the history of French Jewry, Kaplan (history, TouroCollege, New York), analyzes the development of Jewish positions on therelationship between church and state from the 1789 French Revolutionuntil the 1905 law of separation. The communal debates on the matter,he says, reveal the perceptions of French Jews of their role in French civilsociety, and how they came to terms with their social and religiousstatus. He examines journals, books, pamphlets, rabbinic sermons, con-sistorial documents, and correspondence. Distributed by Society ofBiblical Literature.

DS135 2009-002312 978-1-874774-85-3FFaammiilliieess,, rraabbbbiiss aanndd eedduuccaattiioonn;; ttrraaddiittiioonnaall JJeewwiisshh ssoocciieettyyiinn nniinneetteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy EEaasstteerrnn EEuurrooppee..Stampfer, Shaul.Littman Libr./Jewish Civiliz., ©2010 414 p. $64.50In introducing this collection of 16 of his journal articles and bookchapters from 1981-2003 on aspects of East European Jewish life in themodern period, Stampfer (Jewish history, Soviet and East EuropeanJewry, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem) points out that his focus on the broadersocial implications of this transition period has not been the usualapproach to this area of study. Among the topics he treats are the devel-opment of the pushke (charity box), the education of youth and women,crisis of the rabbinate, and Hasidim vs. Mitnagedim. He also questionsthe stereotype of the patriarchal nature of the Jewish family in thisperiod. The volume includes a gazetteer of place names. Distributed inthe US by ISBS.

DS135 2009-025148 978-1-84545-608-5TThhee ““ffiinnaall ssoolluuttiioonn”” iinn RRiiggaa;; eexxppllooiittaattiioonn aanndd aannnniihhiillaattiioonn,,11994411--11994444..Angrick, Andrej and Peter Klein. Trans. by Ray Brandon. (Studies onwar and genocide; 14)Berghahn Books, ©2009 517 p. $75.00Initiated by the Society of Survivors of the Riga Ghetto, this contributionto genocide/Holocaust studies is a regional study of the mass murder ofthe Jews of Eastern Europe by the Third Reich rather than in the con-centration camps. Drawing on previously unavailable Soviet archives andother sources, Angrick and Klein (both affiliated with the HamburgFoundation for the Promotion of Science and Culture) trace all aspects ofthe German occupation of Riga, Latvia, including pogroms, the estab-lishment of the ghetto, and collaboration of local officials. Translatedfrom the German (Die “Endlösung” in Riga, Ausbeutung und Vernichtung1991-1944 (2006), the volume includes maps, an English/ Germanglossary, a SS/police/civil administration organizational chart for Riga,and biographical index of personalities.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –50–

DS135 978-0-85303-861-0TThhee FFrraannkkffuurrtt JJuuddeennggaassssee;; JJeewwiisshh lliiffee iinn aann eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnnGGeerrmmaann cciittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Fritz Backhaus et al.Vallentine Mitchell, ©2010 170 p. $69.95The “Jewish street” of Frankfurt was first instituted in 1460. Previously,Jews of Frankfurt had lived anywhere they liked, although most congre-gated in a community near the Bishop’s palace. This new area waswalled with gates that were locked at night. Over the next four centurieslife within and outside of the Jewish quarter changed considerably.Backhaus, director of the Museum Judengasse and his colleagues presenta collage of impressions of aspects of the Frankfurt Jews, their lives andtheir relations with the gentile majority. The first article gives a historyof Jewish communities in medieval and Early Modern Europe, explainingthe first use of the term “ghetto” in Venice. Other articles chart the sur-vival and growth of the Frankfurt community, despite the expulsion ofJews from other German cities. Jews are seen through their own recordsand histories and in the eyes of their neighbors. Two chapters concernthe seventeenth century ethnographer Johan Jacob Schudt, who perpet-uated bizarre myths concerning Jewish behavior. Liturgy, music and theexternal repercussions of the 1603 internal conference among rabbis arealso treated with the final essay giving newly found documents on therise of the most famous residents of the Judengasse, the Rothschilds. Thiswork was originally published in German. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DS135 2009-027046 978-1-906764-00-5IInnssiiddeerrss aanndd oouuttssiiddeerrss;; ddiilleemmmmaass ooff EEaasstt EEuurrooppeeaann JJeewwrryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard I. Cohen et al.Littman Libr./Jewish Civiliz., ©2010 248 p. $29.95 (pa)The essays in this collection look mainly at East European Jews living inEastern Europe between the World Wars. Cohen (French Jewry studies,University of Jerusalem), Frankel (modern Jewish studies, University ofJerusalem ,emeritus) and Hoffman, a specialist in Russian Jewish history,are not so concerned here with governmental and social ostracism but inthe ways that Jews defined themselves as insiders or outsiders, particu-larly in times or places of greater possibility for assimilation. Articleslook at individuals who chose to identify themselves as Jewish and pre-ferred not to assimilate and the “non-Jewish Jews” who identified them-selves with a cause or a country, often separating themselves entirelyfrom the faith. Other scholars examine the different towns and regions,asking if it was possible to be Jewish and Polish or Jewish and Bolshevist.The conflict some felt between the desire to come home to Israel and theknowledge that, in doing so, they were uprooting others is discussedthrough the eyes of one displaced writer. The essays as a whole demon-strate the sliding scale of what it meant to be Jewish in Eastern Europe.One was not inside or outside, but often stuck in the doorway.Distributed in the US by ISBS

DS135 2009-043204 978-963-9776-51-7LLiitthhuuaanniiaann JJeewwiisshh ccuullttuurree.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000044))Katz, Dovid.Central European U. Press, ©2010 398 p. $80.00This is a reprint, with minor updates, of a book first published in 2004.Although born in New York City (1956), Katz has lived since 1999, inVilnius, Lithuania, chairing the Yiddish language, literature, and cultureprogram at Vilnius University. He has lovingly prepared a history andcultural study that is far-reaching and scholarly, yet accessible to generalreaders. Coverage begins with the ancient heritage and encompasses his-torical events and cultural themes through to modern times. Finalchapters are devoted to prominent Jewish poets, authors, and artists fromLithuania. (Katz himself is the son of one such poet, Menke Katz, 1906-1991.) The book is oversize (9.5x11″), elegantly designed, and producedon coated stock, with color maps (including a large unbound map ofLithuanian’s cultural communities and Yiddish dialects) and numerousphotos.

DS135 2009-033776 978-0-8018-9408-4PPuurriiffyyiinngg tthhee nnaattiioonn;; ppooppuullaattiioonn eexxcchhaannggee aanndd eetthhnniicccclleeaannssiinngg iinn NNaazzii--aalllliieedd RRoommaanniiaa..Solonari, Vladimir.Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 451 p. $65.00This is a study of the governmental policy of ethnic cleansing of nationalminorities in Nazi-allied Romania between July 1940 and August 1944,with ethnic cleansing being understood as physical removal as opposedto “soft” ethnic cleansing policies of cultural or linguistic assimilation.Solonari (history, U. of Central Florida) situates the oft-discussed brutaltreatment of the Jews and the Gypsies within the context of a largerproject of total ethnic purification of the country, focusing on the for-mulation and implementation of policy at the governmental level,beginning with the intellectual roots of the policy in the Romanianextreme right in the 1930s.

DS135 978-1-904113-62-1SSoocciiaall aanndd ccuullttuurraall bboouunnddaarriieess iinn pprree--mmooddeerrnn PPoollaanndd..Title main entry. Ed. by Adam Teller et al. (Polin studies in PolishJewry; v.22)Littman Libr./Jewish Civiliz., ©2010 492 p. $59.50The special theme of the volume is addressed in 11 essays, among themHugo Grotius and the 1636 blood libel trials in Lublin, the authority ofthe Council of Four Lands outside Poland-Lithuania, the Jewish economicelite in Red Ruthenia during the 14th and 15th centuries, and social lifeand the bounds of Jewish and Canon law in early modern Poland.Another 10 studies consider a variety of topics in later periods. Theyinclude the history of ritual murder accusation in 19th-century Poland,Mikhail Morgulis and the ideology of Jewish integration in Russia, thewomen of the Mizrahi Movement in Poland 1916-39, views in the Polishunderground press 1942-45 of the Nazi murder of the Jews, and a criticalassessment of the initial Polish discussion of Jan Gross’ Fear. Distributedin the US by ISBS.

DS135 2009-027043 978-1-904113-65-2SSyyrriiaann JJeewwrryy iinn ttrraannssiittiioonn,, 11884400--11888800..Harel, Yaron.Littman Libr./Jewish Civiliz., ©2010 301 p. $59.50Harel (Jewish history, Bar-Ilan U.) examines the evolution of SyrianJewish communities during this 40-year period of modernization in theOttoman Empire. He chronicles how, ironically, these reforms which gaveSyrian Jews access to European Jewry undermined their traditional occu-pations and status in this Arab land, and the forces driving their emi-gration initially to Egypt, then to the West, following the suspension ofthe Ottoman constitution in 1878. Because Jews are an integral part ofSyrian history, the author hopes that this study may help open the doorto Israeli scholars to visit Syria. The volume includes a glossary. Firstpublished in Hebrew in 2003 by the Zaman Shazar Centre for JewishHistory. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DS156 978-87-7934-419-8MMeeeettiinnggss ooff ccuullttuurreess iinn tthhee BBllaacckk SSeeaa rreeggiioonn;; bbeettwweeeennccoonnfflliicctt aanndd ccooeexxiisstteennccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Pia Guldager Bilde and Jane Hjarl Petersen.(Black Sea studies, 8)Aarhus University Press, ©2008 422 p. $60.00The Black Sea region was a demarcation area between Greek and “bar-barian” societies. But this borderland saw tentative settlements of Greeksas well as trade between the cultures. Bilde and Petersen, both of theCentre for Black Sea Studies at the University of Aarhus, Denmark, haveassembled articles by scholars from both Eastern and Western Europethat explore the evidence of meetings between the classical Greeks andthe native inhabitants of the region. Both archaeological and literarysources are discussed and occasionally, blended. The psychologicalimpact on the Greek settlers is considered in two essays, along with spec-ulations on religious changes that resulted. The physical meetings of thegroups are shown in art, land use, and pottery. The authors provide afresh view of this area, long neglected in studies of the classical world.Distributed in North America by the David Brown Book Co.

DS247 978-1-85788-527-9DDuubbaaii ddrreeaammss;; iinnssiiddee tthhee kkiinnggddoomm ooff bblliinngg..Barrett, Raymond.Nicholas Brealey Publishing, ©2010 232 p. $19.95 (pa)The once booming United Arab Emirate of Dubai recently had itseconomy propped up by Saudi Arabia. A journalist who has lived in theMiddle East and writes on the region for the Sunday Business Post tracesthe country’s dramatic rise and burst bubble. Barrett presents stories offortunate and less fortunate local and foreign residents of this now tar-nished showpiece of Arab enterprise and western capitalism. The bookincludes maps, a list of its rulers, and bibliography, but lacks an index.

DS247 2009-027643 978-0-8108-5528-1HHiissttoorriiccaall ddiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff YYeemmeenn,, 22dd eedd..Burrowes, Robert D. (Historical dictionaries of Asia, Oceania, and theMiddle East; no.72)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 533 p. $120.00Burrowes, a former professor of political science at the U. of Washington,provides a historical dictionary of Yemen that includes about 800 entrieson the Islamic country, along with a chronology and an introductoryessay on its land and people, history, economic and social development,and problems and prospects. Entries relate to key people, terms, tribesand families, places, events, groups, regions, its military and wars,policies and politics, economics and commerce, education, relationshipswith other countries, and ties to the al-Qaida. This edition has beenupdated and expanded to incorporate more on foreign affairs, economicinstitutions and policies, social issues, religion, and politics.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–51–

DS325 2009-043942 978-1-84217-394-7SSiirraaff;; hhiissttoorryy,, ttooppooggrraapphhyy,, aanndd eennvviirroonnmmeenntt.. ((iinncclluuddeess CCDD--RROOMM))Whitehouse, David. (British Institute of Persian studies, archaeologicalmonographs series; 1)Oxbow Books, ©2009 118 p. $76.00Siraf, located in modern day Iran, was a significant port on the PersianGulf from Sasanian times to the 11th century. Excavated in 7 seasonsfrom 1966-1973 by the British Institute of Persian Studes, the excavationwas abandoned following the Islamic Revolution. This slightly oversizedvolume (8.5x11.25), which is heavily illustrated with b&w photos of thesite from the time of its excavation as well as maps, floor plans, anddrawings, presents an overview of research following the excavations andan analysis of the written evidence. The CD-ROM contains the surveymaps of the site made at the time of the excavations. The volume, whichincludes a bibliography but no index, is distributed in North America byThe David Brown Book Co.

DS327 2009-014531 978-0-7391-3606-5HHeeaarrttllaannddss ooff EEuurraassiiaa;; tthhee ggeeooppoolliittiiccss ooff ppoolliittiiccaall ssppaaccee..Sengupta, Anita.Lexington Books, ©2009 185 p. $65.00English geographer Halford Mackinder (1861-1947) famously proposedthe Eurasian region as a “heartland” that would play a central role inthe geopolitics of the world due to its resources and geographicalposition. Sengupta (Maulana Abul Kalam Azad Institute of Asian Studies,India) explores how Mackinder’s geopolitical and geostrategic ideas aboutEurasia have echoed and been reformulated down through the years tothe present time. Among the topics she explores are understandings ofRussia and its relationship with Central Asia in debates about Russianforeign policy, different perceptions of the geographical and socioculturalboundaries of Central Asia and their relationship with geopolitical andgeostrategic thinking, the discourse of Central Asia found in the writingsof Uzbek political scientist Fozilovich Tolipov, and the construction ofgeostrategic discourses in the post-Soviet Uzbek state.

DS341 2008-030037 978-0-7546-7301-9TThhee ggeeooppoolliittiiccss ooff SSoouutthh AAssiiaa;; ffrroomm eeaarrllyy eemmppiirreess ttoo tthheennuucclleeaarr aaggee,, 33dd eedd..Chapman, Graham.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 362 p. $49.95 (pa)Capman (emeritus, geography, Lancaster U., UK) presents the latestedition of his introductory text on the geopolitics of the IndianSubcontinent (now comprised of India, Pakistan, and Bangladesh).Differing primarily through the addition of a new chapter on the India’sNortheast Frontiers, the new edition retains the broadly chronologicalapproach to the topic, discussing the early physical and natural featuresof South Asia, the rise of Hindu and then Islamic civilizations, geopol-itics under the British Raj, and the geopolitics of the successor states.

DS412 2009-031818 978-1-59017-336-7OOrriiggiinnaall lleetttteerrss ffrroomm IInnddiiaa..Fay, Eliza. (New York Review Books classics)New York Review Books, ©2010 288 p. $16.95 (pa)Fay (1756-1816) contributed to what had already become the distinctgenre of British letters home from the far corners of empire, by writingand preparing for publication 23 letters she wrote her family fromCalcutta between April 1779 and February 1783, and perhaps fictiveletters written at home in Blackheath that comprise an autobiography.They were published posthumously in an incomplete edition in Calcuttain 1817, and have been completed and reprinted often since then, often,as here, with annotations.

DS425 2009-046212 978-0-924304-59-0GGlloobbaall IInnddiiaa cciirrccaa 110000 CCEE;; SSoouutthh AAssiiaa iinn eeaarrllyy wwoorrllddhhiissttoorryy..Davis, Richard H. (Key issues in Asian studies; no.5)Assoc. for Asian Studies, ©2009 75 p. $10.00 (pa)Davis (religion and Asian studies, Bard College) surveys some of the waysIndia was engaged with other parts of the world during the first two cen-turies of the common era, depicting a complex civilization involved inmany types of exchanges. The five chapters describe the activities oftraders, missionaries, warriors, adventurers, and local authors. Maps andblack and white photographs of relics are provided.

DS450 978-81-7708-216-6SSiixx ddeeccaaddeess ooff IInnddoo--UUSS--PPaakk rreellaattiioonnss..Nagaich, B.B. et al.New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2009 509 p. $88.50This broadly interdisciplinary work, combining the knowledge and expe-riences of an administrator, a military officer, a financial planner andlawyer, and a social worker, explores the tripartite relations between theUnited States, India, and Pakistan from 1948 to the present. Chaptersdiscuss the socio-politico-economic diversities of all three countries, Indo-US economic cooperation, Indo-US agricultural cooperation, India’sforeign relations, the US perspective of India, the Indian perspective ofthe US, the Kashmir factor in Indo-US-Pakistani relations, nuclear issuesand regional security, and future prospects, among other topics.Appendices reproduce a quartet of significant documents and a glossaryis included. Distributed in North America by ISBS.

DS475 978-1-906011-37-6BBiirrddss ooff ppaassssaaggee;; HHeennrriieettttaa CClliivvee’’ss ttrraavveellss iinn SSoouutthh IInnddiiaa,,11779988--11880011..Title main entry. Ed. by Nancy K. Shields.Eland Publishing, ©2010 328 p. $39.95With a background in English literature and years of studying in variouscultures, especially in Asia, Shields partly quotes and partly summarizesthe journal that Clive (1758-1830) kept as she lived and traveled in SouthIndia with her husband Lord Robert Clive, son of Clive of India. Amongthe stages of her journey are aboard the Dover Castle, miserable inMadras, traveling the Great Horn, traveling through the Guzelhutty Passinto Coimbatoor Country August 14th to September eighth of 1800,Coromandel Coast to Madras, aboard the Castle Eden, the Cape of GoodHope, the British colony at St. Helena, and home again to England. Aglossary of terms she uses, a map, biographical sketches for everyone, anintroduction, and a brief bibliography, and an index are included.Distributed in the US by Dufour Editions.

DS481 2009-025878 978-1-4027-6887-3GGaannddhhii.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999977))Parekh, Bhikhu. (Brief insights)Sterling Publishing Co., ©2009 181 p. $14.95Parekh (emeritus, political theory, U. of Hull, UK) offers a biography ofMahatma Gandhi, India’s best known spiritual and political leaderduring the country’s struggle for independence and champion of nonvi-olence and civil disobedience. The author discusses Gandhi’s life andwork and his thoughts on religion, human nature, nonviolent resistance,and society. Numerous photographs also are included.

DS485 2010-000856 978-81-321-0302-8TThhee SSiikkhh sseeppaarraattiisstt iinnssuurrggeennccyy iinn IInnddiiaa;; ppoolliittiiccaalllleeaaddeerrsshhiipp aanndd eetthhnnoonnaattiioonnaalliisstt mmoovveemmeennttss..Chima, Jugdep S.Sage Publications, ©2010 314 p. $39.95Frustrated at the lack of a systematic political history of the entire tra-jectory of the ethnonatinoalist Sikh separatist movement in the Punjabregion of South Asia amid the literature on the “Punjab crisis,” Chima(Associate Editor for South Asia, Asian Survey, a journal of the Instituteof East Asian Studies at the U. of California at Berkeley) here traces theemergence, development, and eventual demise of the movement from theearly-1980s to the 1990s, focusing on the organizations and individualsinvolved in the conflict, their changing motivations and interests overtime, and the political interrelationships with one another.Simultaneously, he develops a theory concerning the impact of “patternsof political leadership” on the Sikh movement and ethnonationalistmovements generally and tests the theory’s general applicability on thecases of Chechnya, Northern Ireland, Kashmir, and Assam.

DS485 2009-026611 978-1-4331-0820-4AA ssttoorryy ooff aammbbiivvaalleenntt mmooddeerrnniizzaattiioonn iinn BBaannggllaaddeesshh aannddWWeesstt BBeennggaall;; tthhee rriissee aanndd ffaallll ooff BBeennggaallii eelliittiissmm iinn SSoouutthhAAssiiaa..Chatterjee, Pranab. (Asian thought and culture, v.65)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 294 p. $80.95Chatterjee (emeritus, Case Western Reserve U.) argues that the culturalhistory of Bengal (comprised of West Bengal in India and Bangladesh)has left it in a state of ambivalent modernization, or pursuit of modern-ization accompanied by resistance to modernization. Narrating the cul-tural history of Bengal from 1204 to the present, he sets this ambivalentmodernization within the context of conflicts between ways of being andsystems of knowledge brought by changing groups of elites, namingthem as Sanskritization, Islamicization, Anglicization, and Marxism.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –52–

DS486 2010-000858 978-81-321-0303-5BBeennggaalluurruu,, BBaannggaalloorree,, BBeennggaalluurruu;; iimmaaggiinnaattiioonnss aanndd tthheeiirrttiimmeess..Title main entry. Ed. by Narendar Pani et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 290 p. $55.00The Indian city of Bangalore, renamed from Bengaluru by the British,has little contact with its past, according to the editors (all of the NationalInstitute of Advanced Studies, Bangalore, India), who present this readerin an effort to set the past in dialogue with the present and to show howmajor changes, whether specific events such as the fall of Bengaluru tothe British in 1791 or longer processes such as the emergence of modernindustry at the end of the 19th century, were “imagined” by contempo-raries. They present 30 writings, arranged in sections concerned with thefall of Bengaluru, Bangalore under the British, the growth in the impor-tance of education, the birth of modernity, the consolidation of India asa “guardian state,” and the present time.

DS489 2009-029791 978-81-321-0222-9PPaatthhwwaayyss ooff ddiisssseenntt;; TTaammiill nnaattiioonnaalliissmm iinn SSrrii LLaannkkaa..Title main entry. Ed. by R. Cheran.Sage Publications, ©2009 283 p. $49.95Cheran (sociology and anthropology, U. of Windsor, Canada) presents adiverse group of nine papers examining aspects of Tamil nationalism inSri Lanka from an array of disciplinary perspectives. Topics includenationalism, historiography, and archaeology in Sri Lanka; configuringspaces and constructing nations in Sri Lankan Tamil literature; feministcritiques of Tamil nationalism; Tamil nationalism and the politics of theSri Lankan census; the economics of Tamil nationalism; and changingparameters of self-determination and statehood in the era ofneoliberalism.

DS518 2009-016367 978-0-8166-6506-8MMiilliittaarriizzeedd ccuurrrreennttss;; ttoowwaarrdd aa ddeeccoolloonniizzeedd ffuuttuurree iinn AAssiiaaaanndd tthhee PPaacciiffiicc..Title main entry. Ed. by Setsu Shigematsu and Keith L. Camacho.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 355 p. $27.50 (pa)Political and other social scientists from around the Pacific Rim (andHawaii, which is more like the Pacific Hub) explore gender, race, andcolonialism in Asia and the Pacific Islands in terms of militarized bodiesof memory, militarized movements, and hetero-/homo-sexualized mili-taries. Among their topics are memorializing Pu’uloa and rememberingPearl Harbor, US-Philippine circuits of sacrifice and gratitude inCorregidor and Bataan, the 1970 Koza uprising in US-occupied Okinawa,South Korean movements against militarized sexual labor, transpacificimperialism and US-Japan complicity, and the state’s no feminist reasonswhy the Japanese self-defense forces have included women.

DS526 2009-031467 978-0-8047-6943-3CCoonnnneeccttiinngg hhiissttoorriieess;; ddeeccoolloonniizzaattiioonn aanndd tthhee CCoolldd WWaarr iinnSSoouutthheeaasstt AAssiiaa,, 11994455--11996622..Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher E. Goscha and ChristianOstermann. (Cold War International History Project series)Stanford U. Press, ©2009 450 p. $60.00Goscha (history, U. du Québec à Montréal, Canada) and Ostermann(history and public policy, Woodrow Wilson International Center forScholars, US) present 15 articles exploring the complex interconnectionsbetween the Cold War and decolonization in Southeast Asia. Penned bycontributors from Canada, France, Malaysia, Russia, the Philippines,Singapore, the US, and the UK, papers discuss such topics as the Frenchattempts to establish a noncommunist government in Vietnam under BaoDai and its connections to the Cold War, the Cold War and US policytoward Indonesia (1950-1952), Dutch fears about loss of empire inSoutheast Asia, British strategic analysis of conflict in Vietnam andIndonesia (1945-1950), Soviet Cold War strategy and prospects of revo-lution in South and Southeast Asia, the discourse of nonalignment inChina’s early Cold War experience, Vietnamese communists and thecoming of the Cold War, Indonesia’s turn towards nonalignment (1945-1955), Malaysia during the Cold War (1946-1963), Southeast Asian per-ceptions of the domino theory, Burma during the Cold War, andIndonesian Islam and communism during the Cold War.

DS557 2009-280723 978-0-89672-658-1TThhee bbaattttllee aatt NNggookk TTaavvaakk;; aalllliieedd vvaalloorr aanndd ddeeffeeaatt iinnVViieettnnaamm..Davies, Bruce. (Modern Southeast Asia series)Texas Tech U. Press, ©2009 242 p. $24.95 (pa)In May of 1968, as part of a successful North Vietnamese offensive totake the US Army Special Forces base at Kham Duc, located in QuangTin province in South Vietnam, North Vietnamese forces attacked thenearby outpost of Ngok Tavak, which was under the control of an eclecticmix of forces consisting of Chinese Nung mercenaries and AmericanMarines under the command of Australian Captain John White. TheNorth Vietnamese routed these forces as a prelude to taking Kham Duc.Davies (another Australian who served in Vietnam) reconstructs thebattle from the recollections of White and a large number of theAmericans involved in the fighting. He also addresses the aftermath ofthe battle, both in terms of its larger implications for the war as a wholeand in terms of soldiers’ families and veterans’ efforts to investigate thecauses for the debacle.

DS557 2009-021213 978-0-7603-3801-8RRooaadd ooff 1100,,000000 ppaaiinnss;; tthhee ddeessttrruuccttiioonn ooff tthhee 22nndd NNVVAADDiivviissiioonn bbyy tthhee UU..SS.. MMaarriinneess,, 11996677..Lehrack, Otto J.Zenith Press, ©2010 306 p. $30.00Interviews with 90 Marines narrate the Que Son Valley campaign foughtin Vietnam over seven months in 1967, describing in detail their manyengagements with the 2nd North Vietnamese Army (NVA) Division. Theauthor is a retired Marine and Vietnam Veteran, and uses the afterwardto vent lingering frustration about the perception of Vietnam Veterans.Black and white photographs and maps are provided.

DS559 2009-002589 978-0-8061-4045-2AAfftteerr MMyy LLaaii;; mmyy yyeeaarr ccoommmmaannddiinngg ffiirrsstt ppllaattoooonn,, CChhaarrlliieeccoommppaannyy..Bray, Gary W.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 166 p. $16.95 (pa)During the Vietnam War, author Bray was a second lieutenant in the USArmy assigned to lead the platoon whose former members had com-mitted the My Lai massacre of Vietnamese civilians. In this brutallyhonest and well-written memoir, he doesn’t try to excuse the massacre,but seeks to show how war forces ordinary soldiers to develop thecapacity to commit such atrocities. In addition to examining the feelingsand frustrations of soldiers who cross the line of legal and ethicalbehavior, he offers detailed descriptions of platoon-level tactical opera-tions and depictions of the horror of battle. The stories of friendships andfallen comrades culminate in an account of two soldiers who were killedby a mine while sharing their food with village children. B&w photosfrom the author’s collection offer a perspective on daily life in the war.Bray, now a retired business owner, was awarded the Purple Heart andBronze Star for his service in Vietnam.

DS559 2009-046956 978-0-8253-0632-7AAnn AAmmeerriiccaann aammnneessiiaa;; hhooww tthhee UU..SS.. CCoonnggrreessss ffoorrcceedd tthheessuurrrreennddeerrss ooff SSoouutthh VViieettnnaamm aanndd CCaammbbooddiiaa..Herschensohn, Bruce.Beaufort Books, ©2010 180 p. $22.00Arguing that Americans have amnesia about what happened during thewar, Herschensohn (public policy, Pepperdine U.), who served underPresident Nixon and on the Reagan Transition Team, claims that theactions taken by the 94th Congress and American citizens who opposedthe Vietnam War influenced South Vietnam’s surrender in 1975. Hedraws on notes, speeches, and writings from his experiences in SoutheastAsia in the 1960s and 70s to describe parts of the war that have been for-gotten. He does not provide a full history of the war, but focuses on thetwo years between the Paris Peace Accords and the surrender and whathappened in North and South Vietnam, also discussing presidents whosupported defending South Vietnam; the plight of Southeast Asianrefugees; the negative effects of demonstrators and protestors, includingcelebrities like Jane Fonda; journalists who he claims stayed in theirhotels rather than covering the action; and how the surrender may haveindirectly influenced 9/11. No bibliography is present, but some sourceinformation is provided within the text.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–53–

DS644 978-1-876924-65-2TThhee rreettuurrnn ttoo ccoonnssttiittuuttiioonnaall ddeemmooccrraaccyy iinn IInnddoonneessiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Reuter. (Annual Indonesia lectureseries; no.30)Monash University Press, ©2010 113 p. $24.95 (pa)Specialists in Indonesia’s politics and culture, most of them at Australianuniversities, trace some of the main steps in the transformation of thecountry’s government to democracy since the fall of Suharto in 1998.They cover Indonesia’s political and cultural transformation, explainingHabibie’s interregnum, the Wahid presidency and Indonesia’s democratictransition, Magewati and the legacy of Sukarno, the bearable lightness ofdemocracy, national propaganda and the missing ideological legacy ofSuharto in Pancasila, religion and politics in post-Suharto Indonesia, andpolitical parties. No index is provided. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DS649 2009-010313 978-0-691-13536-6““IIff yyoouu lleeaavvee uuss hheerree,, wwee wwiillll ddiiee””;; hhooww ggeennoocciiddee wwaassssttooppppeedd iinn EEaasstt TTiimmoorr..Robinson, Geoffrey. (Human rights and crimes against humanity)Princeton U. Press, ©2010 319 p. $35.00Although this book by Robinson (history, U. of California at Los Angeles)began its life as a personal memoir of the systemic violence that followedthe 1999 UN-supervised vote for independence in East Timor, where hehad been working as a Political Affairs Officer with the United NationsMission in East Timor, he has since incorporated academic work andhuman rights reporting he conducted for the UN Office of the HighCommissioner for Human Rights and East Timor’s Commission forReception, Truth, an Reconciliation (among others), resulting in a hybridwork that describes the history of violence in East Timor since the eraof Portuguese colonial rule, analyzes the causes of violence and itsabatement in 1999, and recounts some of his own experiences of that vio-lence. His analysis highlights the roles of states in spurring genocidal vio-lence and defends, at least in principle, international interventions to stopviolence, noting that the violence of 1999 was halted before it could riseto the genocidal levels of the early 1970s, following the invasion of EastTimor by Indonesia.

DS650 2009-027950 978-0-8108-5980-7HHiissttoorriiccaall ddiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff BBrruunneeii DDaarruussssaallaamm,, 22dd eedd..Sidhu, Jatswan S. (Historical dictionaries of Asia, Oceania, and theMiddle East; no.69)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 302 p. $90.00A leading authority on Brunei’s history and its socio-economic devel-opment, Sidhu (international studies, U. of Malaya) has authored and co-authored numerous books, book chapters, and journal articles on thisintriguing and somewhat secretive former British protectorate. Hissecond-edition reference text for students and general readers has beenupdated and expanded throughout to reflect developments since publi-cation of the 1997 first edition. It contains a list of acronyms and abbre-viations; a chronology of key events from prehistory to spring 2009; anintroductory essay describing the land and people and major historicalperiods in the country’s evolution; hundreds of cross-referenced dic-tionary entries covering key individuals, places, events, institutions andthe politics, economy, society, and culture of Brunei; lists of sultans, sig-nificant British residents and rulers; statistical tables; and an extensive,thematically-organized bibliography.

DS686 2009-028150 978-1-4398-1550-2PPhhiilliippppiinnee sseeccuurriittyy iinn tthhee aaggee ooff tteerrrroorr;; nnaattiioonnaall,, rreeggiioonnaall,,aanndd gglloobbaall cchhaalllleennggeess iinn tthhee ppoosstt--99//1111 wwoorrlldd..Banlaoi, Rommel C.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 357 p. $89.95Political scientist Banlaoi, now head of the Philippine Institute for Peace,Violence, and Terrorism Research, collects his published articles andessays to provide an account of security in the country now that manymatters previously considered social or or public issues have becomesecurity issues; now that security, once the sole concern of the military,can now reach out and engulf anyone. The 16 papers cover national;bilateral; and global, regional, and multilateral security issues. Specifictopics include state predicaments in managing society in the midst ofdiversity after 9/11, problems and prospects of defense and militarycooperation between the Philippines and China since 9/11, and nontra-ditional security issues in the southeast Asian maritime domain andimplications for the Indian Ocean.

DS731 2009-015733 978-0-8047-6199-4QQuueesstt ffoorr hhaarrmmoonnyy;; tthhee MMoossoo ttrraaddiittiioonnss ooff sseexxuuaall uunniioonnaanndd ffaammiillyy lliiffee..Shih, Chuan-kang.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 329 p. $65.00Shih (Anthropology and Asian Studies, University of Florida) presents thefirst English-language ethnography of the Moso, a matrilineal group thatlives in southwest China’s Yunnan and Sichuan provinces. Drawing onfield work conducted over two decades, the author gives give a compre-hensive account of tisese, a visiting system that most Moso adults practicein place of marriage. He also details the Mosos’ traditional social and cul-tural conditions, including their unusual gender system and the highvalue they place on household harmony. Meticulously researched andvery well written, this book will interest scholars of sexuality and genderrelations, and appeal to some general readers interested in Chineseculture and ethnography.

DS734 2009-021938 978-0-8047-6128-4OOnn eetthhiiccss aanndd hhiissttoorryy;; eessssaayyss aanndd lleetttteerrss ooff ZZhhaannggXXuueecchheenngg..Zhang, Xuecheng. Trans by Philip J. Ivanhoe.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 195 p. $50.00Ivanhoe (philosophy, City U. of Hong Kong) offers the first English trans-lation of the essays and letters of Zhang Xuecheng (1738-1801). Zhang ismost often considered a historical philosopher, but Ivanhoe presents himas an ethical philosopher, one well aware of the goals and methods ofConfucian self-cultivation. The book also includes three important workswritten by Tang dynasty Confucian Han Yu and Xuecheng’s responses toHan’s earlier writings. It will interest eaders with a background in ethicalphilosophy, religion, and Chinese thought and culture.

DS754 2008-048382 978-0-321-08444-6EEmmppeerroorr QQiiaannlloonngg;; ssoonn ooff hheeaavveenn,, mmaann ooff tthhee wwoorrlldd..Elliott, Mark C. (The library of world biography)Longman, ©2009 192 p. $21.40 (pa)In China as in Europe, says Elliott (Chinese and Inner Asian history,Harvard U.) the 18th century was pivotal, there witnessing the doublingof population, a booming economy and inter-regional trade, improvedstandards of living, stimulated cultural production, diverse popular reli-gions, the expansion of the empire to its greatest extend, and the firstmodern diplomatic ties with European states. This was overseen by theChing dynasty of minority Manchu origin, and in particular Qianlong(1711-99), whose life and reign he describes. He covers an emperor in themaking; Qianlong takes charge; family, ritual, and dynastic rule; thedilemma of Manchu success; the peripatetic sovereign; building theempire; renaissance man; Qing China and the world; and order anddecline in the late Qianlong era.

DS755 2009-003279 978-0-684-31566-9EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff mmooddeerrnn CChhiinnaa;; 44vv..Title main entry. Ed. by David Pong.Charles Scribner’s Sons, ©2009 2330 p. $495.00Editor Pong (East Asian studies, U. of Delaware) and ten associate andconsulting editors and the publisher’s staff have brought together thiscarefully prepared four-volume reference for public and academiclibraries. The set contains approximately 870 entries and some 70sidebars pertaining to all aspects of life in China including variousaspects of government, geography, family life, ethnicity, the arts,economics, historical structures and archaeology, communications andtransportation, and economics, among other themes. In selecting entriesthe editors made numerous decisions (for example the emphasis ontopical and thematic studies rather than biographical entries); they alsomade the discovery that much remains to be done as far as scholarshipin new fields such as popular culture, race, identity, and gender, and so,many of the entries present original work and new points of view.Typical entries are generally about a page in length and includereferences and cross references; more extensive entries such as“agricultural production” comprise a collection of essays. Supplementarymaterials include maps, color photos, a thematic outline, a listing ofmajor chronological periods, a chronology, conversion tables (ChineseRomanization), a glossary of Chinese characters, tables displaying dataregarding international relations and treaties, generous selections fromsome 40 primary sources (among them: the Treaty of Nanking, CairoDeclaration, “On the Correct Handling of Contradictions,” Mao Zedong),and an extensive bibliography.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –54–

DS755 2009-041257 978-1-4051-6080-3TThhee wwoobbbblliinngg ppiivvoott,, CChhiinnaa ssiinnccee 11880000;; aann iinntteerrpprreettiivveehhiissttoorryy..Crossley, Pamela Kyle.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 307 p. $34.95 (pa)Crossley (Darmouth College, New Hampshire) has produced a fascinatinghistory of China that gives the reader real insights into the Chineseapproach to group behavior, relations, goals, and conflict, demonstratinghow traditional mores both give Chinese society its unique character andhave influenced the course of its history. Chapters of thematic historicalsubjects, such as trade, leadership, and the cultural revolution, are inter-spersed with essays on broad topics, such as strategic borders, rebelheroines, water, minerals, and Manchus as minorities. Thought-pro-voking, the book is ideal as an undergraduate text while also of value tothe specialist or general reader.

DS774 2009-047453 978-0-674-03542-3WWrreettcchheedd rreebbeellss;; rruurraall ddiissttuurrbbaanncceess oonn tthhee eevvee ooff tthheeCChhiinneessee RReevvoolluuttiioonn..Bianco, Lucien. (Harvard East Asian monographs; 323)Harvard University Press, ©2009 271 p. $39.95In this examination of rural unrest in China over the half-century pre-ceding the 1949 revolution, Bianco (former Director of the China Center,École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales) stays away from “big”events and focuses on unrest that was unrelated to the activities of revo-lutionary intellectuals. Rural protest was generally directed against agentsof the state (often tax collectors) rather than landowners, the authorshows, and there was little of the class struggle in these protests. In theirtendency to react to abuses by local power-holders rather than becauseof any perception of class oppression, suggests Bianco, 20th-centuryChinese peasants were much more like French peasants of the 17th and18th centuries than has been supposed. Well-researched and concise, thisdeceptively modest volume is an important contribution to scholarshipon Chinese history and social protest. This book is a revised andshortened translation of the author’s prize-winning Jacqueries et révo-lution dans la Chine du XXe siécle.

DS777 2009-018894 978-0-321-33306-3SSuunn YYaattsseenn;; sseeeekkiinngg aa nneewweerr CChhiinnaa..Gordon, David B. (The library of world biography)Prentice Hall, ©2010 148 p. $21.40 (pa)This book is a historical biography of Sun Yatsen (1866-1925), thedynamic leader of a movement to overthrow China’s last dynasty andreplace it with a modern republic. While he only briefly served as thecountry’s president, he continued to influence Chinese affairs for decadesto follow with the political party he founded, controversial foreign assis-tance he willingly accepted, and a vast collection of writings. No back-ground information is given for author Gordon.

DS793 2009-003936 978-1-4384-2897-0PPaattrroonnaaggee aanndd ccoommmmuunniittyy iinn mmeeddiieevvaall CChhiinnaa;; tthheeXXiiaannggyyaanngg ggaarrrriissoonn,, 440000--660000 CCEE..Chittick, Andrew. (SUNY series in Chinese philosophy and culture)State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 191 p. $75.00Chittick (East Asian humanities, Eckerd College) guides the readerthrough the history of the Xiangyang region of China in 400-600 CE. Thisarea was considered a backwater by the imperial government, at thattime still in Nanjing. Using primary sources, which are listed in bothChinese characters and the Roman alphabet, Chittick portrays a societybased on personal patronage and violence in which rank was much morefluid than at the court. Family dynasties rarely stayed in power for morethan a few generations. It was also a place with many immigrants fromthe north and other provinces. His depiction of this frontier society andits relationship with the imperial court brings out a view of Chinesehistory rarely studied in the West.

DS793 2009-019405 978-0-295-98952-5TThhee SSiicchhuuaann ffrroonnttiieerr aanndd TTiibbeett;; iimmppeerriiaall ssttrraatteeggyy iinn tthheeeeaarrllyy QQiinngg..Dai, Yingcong. (A China program book)U. of Washington Press, ©2009 352 p. $30.00 (pa)Dai (history, William Paterson U. of New Jersey) describes how late in the17th century, the Manchu Qing dynasty observed that its remoteneighbor Tibet was in danger of subjugation by the Zunghar Mongols,who might then be able to exert even more pressure on China’s northernand northwestern border than before. The imperial response was tostrengthen Sichuan, which bordered Tibet, to serve as a launching padfor military operations in Tibet. His study is about the transformation ofSichuan in that process, which had nothing to do with the people thereor in Tibet. Among his topics are the strategic turn from the Steppe toTibet 1696-1701, realignment in the Yongzheng period 1723035, the mil-itary presence in the society and economy, and the benefit and cost ofimperial strategy.

DS796 2009-011310 978-0-8047-4905-3SShhaanngghhaaii;; CChhiinnaa’’ss ggaatteewwaayy ttoo mmooddeerrnniittyy..Bergére, Marie-Claire.Stanford U. Press, ©2009 497 p. $29.95 (pa)French historian of modern and contemporary China, Bergére describestransformations of the city over the course of the 20th century. She beginswith the treaty port 1842-1911, the metropolis 1912-37, the end of a world1937-52, and Shanghai under communism. Among more specific topicsare the birth of Shanghai capitalism 1860-1911, order and crime 1927-37,the war and the occupation, disgrace under the Maoist regime, andrebirth. Histoire de Shanghai was published by Librairie Arthème Fayardin 2002, and is translated here by Janet Lloyd.

DS860 2008-941597 978-0-933070-57-8TThhee eeaarrllyy MMoonnggoollss;; llaanngguuaaggee,, ccuullttuurree aanndd hhiissttoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Volker Rybatzki et al. (Indiana UniversityUralic and Altaic series; v.173)Indiana U./Inner Asian Studies, ©2009 217 p. $54.00Contributors identified only by name examine aspects of the CentralAsian pastoral people mostly before they aspired to conquest and empire.Among the topics are Mongol imperial ideology, dialectical traces in Beiluyiyu, a Mongol warlord in Manchuria during the Yuan/Ming transition,a comparative analysis of original texts on one verse composition in TheSecret History of the Mongols, paradigms of the images of the Mongols inMedieval Russia, cauterization, new Buddhist Mongolica fromDunhuang, Wang Guowei’s collation of the Secret History, and exchangemarriage in the royal families of nomadic states. There is no index.

DS897 978-0-7748-1756-1RReeccoonnssttrruuccttiinngg KKoobbee;; tthhee ggeeooggrraapphhyy ooff ccrriissiiss aannddooppppoorrttuunniittyy..Edgington, David W.U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 301 p. $95.00A January 1995 earthquake devastated the city of Kobe, Japan. This workdescribes the first ten years of reconstruction efforts and offers a detaileddescription of the geography of the crisis and reconstruction. It examineswhich districts were most vulnerable to the quake and why, and looks atwhether planners were successful in revitalizing and quake-proofing thecity. The new reconstruction plans, intended to address problem neigh-borhoods that had long been ignored, were initially challenged by thearea’s citizens, and so part of the case involves a look at the local con-sultation process between city planners and the neighborhood commu-nities. The book includes a timeline, a glossary of Japanese terms, andb&w photos and maps. It will be of interest to planners and policymakers, and to students and scholars of Japanese urban and planninghistory. Edgington is former director of the Center for Japanese Researchand associate professor of geography at the University British Columbia

DS918 978-1-84884-131-4AA ccoonnssccrriipptt iinn KKoorreeaa..Williams, Neville.Pen and Sword, ©2009 196 p. $39.95Williams was 21 when he called up for National Service in the WelchRegiment in 1951, and spent 12 months fighting with British forces inthe Korean War. He recalls basic training, battle training in earnerst,final embarkation for active service, Pusan and beyond, creature com-forts, Christmas at the front, the prisoners and a prelude to spring,porters and poetry, Hill 355 and a true thunderbox, rest and recuperationleave in Tokyo, and other matters. An artist among other talents, heincludes some of his drawing as well as photographs. Distributed in theUS by Casemate.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–55–

AAFFRRIICCAA,, OOCCEEAANNIIAA

DT15 2009-048877 978-1-60497-669-4MMiinnoorriittiieess aanndd tthhee ssttaattee iinn AAffrriiccaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Michael U. Mbanaso and Chima J. Korieh.Cambria Press, ©2010 352 p. $119.00Presented by Mbanaso (director, E. Franklin Frazier Center for SocialWork Research, Howard U.) and Korieh (history, Marquette U.), 11chapters explore different facets of the relationship between minoritiesand the state in Africa, focusing on ethnic, linguistic, and religiousgroups in relation to formal instruments of governance, resource allo-cation, and control in modern nation-states and emphasizing thoseminorities historically regarded as the “Other” and victims of statescreated out of Africa’s colonial experience. Papers discuss the overall sit-uation regarding minority groups and human rights in Africa, the waythe Indian minority has negotiated its position in South African history,the Kabyli Citizen’s Movement and the failure of transformative minoritypolitics in Algeria, the 19th century origins of discrimination againstIjebu settlers in Nigeria, historical memories and contemporary chal-lenges of the Tonga people of Zimbabwe, and migrant labor and indus-trial ethnicity in colonial Zimbabwe, among other topics.

DT16 2009-029474 978-0-87220-993-0AAffrroo--LLaattiinnoo vvooiicceess;; nnaarrrraattiivveess ffrroomm tthhee eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnnIIbbeerroo--AAttllaannttiicc wwoorrlldd,, 11555500--11881122..Title main entry. Ed. by Kathryn Joy McKnight and Leo J. Garofalo.Hackett Publishing Co., ©2009 377 p. $19.95 (pa)Scholars have been making efforts to find and publish Afro-Latino voicesfor the past 15 years, but this is the first book-length anthology of nar-ratives by people of African descent in the early modern Ibero-Atlanticworld. The 18 documents include judicial inquiries, letters, last wills andtestaments, petitions, trial proceedings, written dialogue, and as-told-tobiography. They are arranged in the topical sections politics and wars,families and communities, religious beliefs and practices, and claimingand defending rights. Examples include maroon voices from the Plenquedel Limón 1634, Ana de la Calle’s 1719 will and goods on the northernPeruvian coast, African sailors and Puritan slavers in a SpanishCaribbean captivity narrative of 1635, and black women litigants inLima’s late colonial tribunals of the 1780s. A battery of maps help placethe narratives geographically. This anthology includes the works in boththeir original Spanish or Portuguese along with facing page Englishtranslations.

DT16 2009-036319 978-0-8214-1896-3BBaarraacckk OObbaammaa aanndd AAffrriiccaann ddiiaassppoorraass;; ddiiaalloogguueess aannddddiisssseennssiioonnss..Zeleza, Paul Tiyambe.Ohio University Press, ©2009 246 p. $28.00 (pa)Zimbabwe-born and Malawi-raised, Zeleza (African American studiesand history, Loyola Marymount U., Los Angeles, California) places therise of the first African American president of the US into the larger issueof relations between Africa and Europe between and within individualsand cultures. The 27 essays were fledged on his blog The Zeleza Post.Besides the title essay, the topics include an African’s observation on the2004 US elections, the political wrath of Hurricane Katrina, the changinggender dynamics of African politics, South Africa and the Zuma saga, indefense of the new diasporas and brain mobility, Africa’s courtship withChina, remembering Martin Luther King beyond the sanitization of adreamer, the racialized complexes of xenophobia, the curse of oil returnsand the search for new energy futures, in memory of the ancestors at thedawn of the Obama era, and waiting for the Obama dividend in Africa-US relations.

DT30 2009-015710 978-0-7546-7528-0AAnnaattoommyy ooff vviioolleennccee;; uunnddeerrssttaannddiinngg tthhee ssyysstteemmss ooffccoonnfflliicctt aanndd vviioolleennccee iinn AAffrriiccaa..Gebrewold , Belachew.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 263 p. $99.95Gebrewold (Helmut Schmidt U./U. of the Federal Armed Forces,Germany) analyzes the causes and consequences of conflict within theDemocratic Republic of Congo, Somalia, and Sudan and discusses thecorrelation between the conflicts and violence of one state with that ofthe others. He posits three reasons that the three countries remain in pro-tracted war, but not one reason each. They are too weak to regulate theinternal systemic interactions of various actors and factors, he says, theyare too weak to resist pressure from regional and global systemicimpacts, and their internal weakness facilitates regional and globalinvolvements and interferences. In addition to profiling the three coun-tries, then, he also discusses the system of the state, Africa in the inter-national security system, state and security as systems of conflict andviolence, and regional and global conflict systems in the Horn of Africa.

DT38 2009-044160 978-1-55849-734-4SSeeccuullaarr mmiissssiioonnaarriieess;; AAmmeerriiccaannss aanndd AAffrriiccaann ddeevveellooppmmeennttiinn tthhee 11996600ss..Grubbs, Larry.U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2009 243 p. $34.95Grubbs (history, Georgia State U.) examines American representations ofdevelopment and underdevelopment in Africa during the depth of theCold War, not in order to propose yet another authoritative and compet-itive explanation for the continent’s woes, but to clear a trail that mightopen new intellectual territory for further exploration. His topics includethe most innocent of continents, the gospel of modernization, the moralequivalent of anti-colonialism, a decade of disillusionment, and fetishnation.

DT45 978-977-416-313-5TTrraavveelliinngg tthhrroouugghh tthhee ddeesseerrttss ooff EEggyypptt;; ffrroomm 445500 BB..CC.. ttootthhee ttwweennttiieetthh cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Sahar Abdel-Hakim and Deborah Manley.American U. in Cairo Press, ©2009 232 p. $24.95This work collects short excerpts of writings of (primarily European) trav-elers’ experiences of the deserts of Egypt. Most of the writings date fromthe 18th and 19th centuries, but a few date back to centuries earlier.Although the excerpts are quite brief, usually no more than a paragraphor two, this allows for an inclusion of a greater multitude of voices,which provides perhaps a broader view of desert experiences. Thewritings are presented in sections titled: the Deserts of the Imaginationand Reality, the Western ‘Libyan’ Desert, the Eastern Desert and SinaiPeninsula, Preparations for the Journey, Starting Out, the Desert Day, theDesert Night, Nature in the Desert, Experiences of the Desert, the Threatsof the Desert, the People of the Desert, and the Return to the World.Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing (IPM).

DT56 978-977-416-211-4DDeesseerrtt ssoonnggss;; aa wwoommaann eexxpplloorreerr iinn EEggyypptt aanndd SSuuddaann..Baaijens, Arita.American U. in Cairo Press, ©2008 144 p. $34.95 (pa)For almost 20 years, author and photographer Baaijens and her camelshave been crisscrossing the deserts of Egypt and Sudan on a continuingjourney of discovery. In this beautifully produced book, she shares herpassion for the desert (and for camels) as well as a huge selection of herown color photographs. She also provides short profiles of seven scien-tists and explorers in whose footsteps she is following. In part a bookabout travel, Desert Songs is also about one woman’s discovery of herselfand her capabilities. This book should have wide appeal. Distributed inthe U.S. by International Publishers Marketing (IPM).

DT60 978-80-7308-245-1CChhrroonnoollooggyy aanndd aarrcchhaaeeoollooggyy iinn aanncciieenntt EEggyypptt;; ((tthhee tthhiirrddmmiilllleennnniiuumm BB..CC..))Title main entry. Ed. by Miroslav Barta and Hana Vymazalova.Czech Institute of Egyptology, ©2008 265 p. $100.00In 2007, a conference was held at the Czech Institute of Egyptology inPrague to discuss the problems of establishing chronology in ancientEgypt. The papers presented here cover methods of dating, starting withreports on the Oxford carbon-14 project as well as including more tradi-tional methods, such as pottery identification and establishing anunbroken dated line of the reigns of kings. Other papers use new evi-dence to recalculate earlier suppositions on dating, especially thatinvolving the royal families and non-royal elite that give evidence onevents. More peripheral aspects of chronology are also addressed, suchas the use of intercalary months to maintain the accuracy of the calendarof festivals and the evidence of beetles found in tombs for climate changeover time. Inscriptions provide information on the changing meanings ofwords through the centuries as well as terms of address and titles. Timeis also considered in the ways in which the pictorial representations attemples and tombs transmitted Egyptian values and history to futuregenerations. This collection will interest both scholars of Ancient Egyptand the many who are fascinated by the lives and culture of the peoplewho lived then. Distributed in North America by the David Brown BookCo.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –56–

DT60 978-977-437-842-3RReeaallmm ooff tthhee PPhhaarraaoohhss;; eessssaayyss iinn hhoonnoouurr ooff TToohhffaaHHaannddoouussaa,, vv..11..Title main entry.Supreme Council of Antiquities Press, ©2009 426 p. $49.50 (pa)This festschrift in honor of Egyptian archaeologist, Tohfa Handoussa wasassembled by her colleagues and friends among them Hawass, Secretary-General of the Egyptian Council of Antiquities and television star. Thearticles are ordered by the last name of the author. Many of them focuson one particular artifact; others look at a term such as “chief of seers”,where it was used and what it means, or the nuances of the particle bsj.There are also short pieces on the myths surrounding the pyramids andthe symbolic importance of the Nile River. The thirty-one essays, five inGerman, five in French, with the remainder in English, demonstrate theserious work of Egyptologists. Only one discusses a “treasure” found.There are many photos of stelae, ostraca and other artifacts and lines ofhieroglyphs are reproduced. There is no index but, as this is Volume I,perhaps it will be found in the next, along with information on the con-tributors. Distributed in the U.S. by International Publishers Marketing(IPM).

DT60 9789774794360TThhee ttwwiinn ttoommbb cchhaappeell ooff NNeebbnneeffeerr aanndd hhiiss ssoonn MMaahhuu aattSSaakkkkaarraa..Gohary, Said.Supreme Council of Antiquities Press, ©2009 99 p. $29.95 (pa)The tomb is one of 36 New Kingdom tombs of the Ramesside period dis-covered at Sakkara between 1984 and 1988 by archaeologists from CairoUniversity. It lies in an elite section of the necropolis where high courtofficials were buried. Nebnefer and Mahu were closely involved in theadministration of the Estate of Ptah in Memphis, holding such titles asSteward of Ptah and Overseer of the Granary of the Lord of Truth. Thisreport describes the architecture of their tomb and its various compo-nents, among them the first and second courts, the pyramid, and thestatue of Mahu and his wife Tiyi. Then they are illustrated in 54 pagesof black-and-white photographs and drawings. There is no index.Distributed in the U.S. by International Publishers Marketing (IPM).

DT61 978-977-416-304-3AAmmaarrnnaa ssuunnsseett;; NNeeffeerrttiittii,, TTuuttaannkkhhaammuunn,, AAyy,, HHoorreemmhheebb,,aanndd tthhee EEggyyppttiiaann CCoouunntteerr--RReeffoorrmmaattiioonn..Dodson, Aidan.American U. in Cairo Press, ©2009 207 p. $24.95Even those who know or care little about Egyptian history have heard ofthe heretic king, Akhenaten, his wife, Nefertiti and his successor,Tutankhamun. However, most of what the average person has learned isthe result of speculation and sensationalist, romantic press. Dodson(archaeology and anthropology, University of Bristol UK) is a well-respected Egyptologist. In this study he reviews what is actually knownabout the Amarna period and how new discoveries have changed hismind about events and relationships among the royal family. He placesthe Amarna rulers within the local and international context of Egyptand her neighbors at that time, putting the religious innovations withinthe larger picture of the governance of Egypt. The book ends with thedeath of Horemheb, Tutankhamun’s successor, and the beginning of theNineteenth Dynasty. Dodson gives a careful explanation of the evidencefor his conclusions and the areas in which there is still debate or uncer-tainty. Lay readers will be intrigued by the most recent possible expla-nation of the fate of the beautiful Queen Nefertiti. The research ismeticulous and clearly cited. There are many photographs of the sitesand stelae, most taken by the author. Dodson combines erudition withexpertise to create an exciting account of a much mythologized period.Distributed in the U.S. by International Publishers Marketing (IPM).

DT61 978-977-437668-9AAnnnnaalleess dduu sseerrvviiccee ddeess aannttiiqquuiittééss ddee ll’’EEggyyppttee,, vv..8811..Title main entry.Supreme Council of Antiquities Press, ©2007 403 p. $34.50 (pa)The 17 chapters of this volume of the Annales offer reports on excava-tions, analysis of a sculpture of Isis from Canopus, the astronomical sit-uation of temples in lower Egypt and the Siwa Oasis, and the computedtomographic evaluation of the mummified King Tut. Among the archae-ological sites reported on are the Giza plateau mapping project, the earlydynastic cemetery at Helwan/Ezbet el-Walda, Alexandria, Greco-Romanglass workshops at Beni Salama (Wadi Natrun), Saqqara, the Valley ofthe Kings, and the precinct of the goddess Mut at South Karnak. Someof the articles are in French. The volume, which is oversized(8.25x11.75″), is heavily illustrated with b&w and color photos of the sitesand works discussed. Distributed in the U.S. by International PublishersMarketing (IPM).

DT61 978-977-416-312-8LLuuxxoorr iilllluussttrraatteedd;; wwiitthh AAsswwaann,, AAbbuu SSiimmbbeell,, aanndd tthhee NNiillee..Haag, Michael.American U. in Cairo Press, ©2009 96 p. $22.95 (pa)London-based photographer Haag continues his depiction of Egyptiansites with a volume on the ancient city and temple complex in UpperEgypt. Among the places and structures shown are the Avenue ofSphinxes, the tomb of Tuthmosis III, the Valley of the Queens, the Nilesouth of Luxor, Nubia Museum, and the monastery of St. Simeon. Heshows the ancient ruins and artwork, of course, but also the peopleliving there today. There is no index. Distributed in the U.S. byInternational Publishers Marketing (IPM).

DT62 978-87-635-2605-0BBrreeaatthhiinngg fflleesshh;; ccoonncceeppttiioonnss ooff tthhee bbooddyy iinn tthhee aanncciieennttEEggyyppttiiaann ccooffffiinn tteexxttss..Nyord, Rune. (CNI publications; 37)Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2009 645 p. $138.00 (pa)Drawing theoretical background and methods from cognitive linguisticsand anthropology (including the work of G. Lakoff and M. Johnson) aswell as the ideas of M. Merleau-Ponty, this study, prepared for theauthor’s doctorate at the U. of Copenhagen, represents his long interestin applying modern phenomenological theory to ancient Egyptian textswritten on the walls of tombs. Extensive, systematic, and detailed, thisscholarly treatment of metaphor and meaning involves close examinationof writings and references to each organ and limb in the context ofEgyptian beliefs and writings. Distributed in North America by ISBS.

DT68 2009-030896 978-90-04-17933-2DDiiee PPrroovviinnzztteemmppeell ÄÄggyypptteennss vvoonn ddeerr 00.. bbiiss zzuurr 1111..DDyynnaassttiiee;; AArrcchhääoollooggiiee uunndd GGeesscchhiicchhttee eeiinneerrggeesseellllsscchhaaffttlliicchheenn IInnssttiittuuttiioonn zzwwiisscchheenn RReessiiddeennzz uunnddPPrroovviinnzz;; 22vv..Bußmann, Richard. (Probleme der Ägyptologie; v.30)BRILL, ©2009 946 p. $444.00Bußmann (Freien U. Berlin, Germany) presents a comprehensive study ofthe provincial temples at Abydos, Tell el-Farkha, Tell Ibrahim Awad,Elkab, Elephantine, and Hierakonpolis that compiles the research that’sbeen carried out on the sites and offering a synthesis of their history anduse. The first volume contains the text, with discussion of each of thesites and systematic discussion of their research and finds. Volume Oneconcludes with a substantial bibliography, catalogs of Abydos andHierakonpolis, and indexes by names of kings and queens, gods andgoddesses, personal name, title, place name, general subject, andinventory number. Volume Two contains the plates, which are in b&wand include ground plans, stratigraphy, and photos and drawings offinds, including votive offerings. The entire text is in German.

DT73 978-0-85668-828-7TThhee TTeettii CCeemmeetteerryy aatt SSaaqqqqaarraa;; vv..99:: TThhee ttoommbb ooff RReemmnnii..Kanawati, Naguib. (The Australian Centre for Egyptology; report 28)Aris & Phillips, ©2009 52+ p. $130.00 (pa)The tomb was discovered in 2002 by Australian Egypologists excavatingthe northwestern corner of the cemetery, and conservation efforts beganimmediately to protect the painted scenes and inscriptions in the chapeland burial chamber, many of them retaining their original color. Fieldwork has proceeded over several seasons since then, and enough learnedto produce a first report. It covers the tomb owner, his family, anddependents; the date and identity of Remni; architectural features; burialapartment; scenes and inscriptions; color conventions; and finds. Colorphotographs of the paintings are accompanied by line drawing to clarifythe shapes. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

DT89 2005-016971 978-1-58983-174-2TThhee LLiibbyyaann aannaarrcchhyy;; iinnssccrriippttiioonnss ffrroomm EEggyypptt’’ss TThhiirrddIInntteerrmmeeddiiaattee PPeerriioodd..Ritner, Robert Kriech. (Writings from the ancient world; no.21)Society of Biblical Literature, ©2009 622 p. $59.95 (pa)Part of a series that provides English translations of writings recoveredfrom the ancient Near East, this volume covers Egypt’s ThirdIntermediate Period, an age of political fragmentation lasting approxi-mately from 1100 to 650 BCE that has been known as the “LibyanAnarchy” in reference to the ethnicity of the rulers, who were descendedfrom Libyan mercenaries. Ritner (Egyptology, Oriental Institute, U. ofChicago) presents English translations of primary documents of theperiod, seeking to be representative of every significant genre andmaterial and to include all relevant texts included in J. H. Breasted’sAncient Records of Egypt (1906-7) so as to supersede that work. In a breakwith earlier Egyptological contributions to the series, the volume alsoincludes transliterations. The Society of Biblical Literature publishes thepaperbound edition; Brill publishes the hardbound.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–57–

DT107 2009-022701 978-0-8047-6344-8CCoonnffrroonnttiinngg ffaasscciissmm iinn EEggyypptt;; ddiiccttaattoorrsshhiipp vveerrssuussddeemmooccrraaccyy iinn tthhee 11993300ss..Gershoni, Israel and James Jankowski.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 343 p. $24.95 (pa)Countering the widely held view that many Egyptians were enamored offascism during the years leading up to World War II, historians Gershoni(U. of Tel Aviv) and Jankowski (U. of Colorado-Boulder) draw fromEgyptian periodicals of the period to argue that liberal ideas about bothpolitics and society continued to be expressed by intellectuals and publi-cists. Any infatuation with authoritarian or fascist concepts, they argue,was the exception rather than the norm in the country’s public discourse.

DT142 978-977-416-288-6CCaaiirroo ccoonntteesstteedd;; ggoovveerrnnaannccee,, uurrbbaann ssppaaccee,, aanndd gglloobbaallmmooddeerrnniittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Diane Singerman.American U. in Cairo Press, ©2009 488 p. $34.95In this companion volume to Cairo Cosmopolitan: Politics, Culture, andUrban Space in the New Globalized Midde East, which was co-edited bySingerman (government, School of Public Affairs, American U. inWashington, DC), 17 papers highlight the impacts of neoliberalism onCairo, Egypt, and the resistances that arise in response to its productionof stratification, inequalities, and hierarchies among Cairenes. Thepapers, which approach the topic from a range of disciplinary perspec-tives, examine urban boundaries of state control and popular appropri-ation in Sayyida Zaynab Model Park, the policing of religious festivals,emerging urban metaphors in the literary production of contemporaryCairo, urban citizenship and Cairo’s city government, the displacementof urban Cairenes to the desert periphery in the wake of the 1992 earth-quake, the military occupation of the neigborhood of Imbaba (a centerof Islamic activism) and the criminalization of politics, land disputes andenvironmental discourse in Cairo, economic liberalization and unionstruggles in Cairo, competing economic narratives of urban merchantsand development experts, political consumerism and the boycott ofAmerican goods, Islamism and the consolidation of mainstream Muslimpiety, and African refugees and diasporic struggles in Cairo. Distributedin the US by International Publishers Marketing (IPM).

DT165 2009-042027 978-1-58243-434-6BBeettwweeeenn tteerrrroorr aanndd ttoouurriissmm;; aann oovveerrllaanndd jjoouurrnneeyy aaccrroossssNNoorrtthh AAffrriiccaa..Mewshaw, Michael.Counterpoint, ©2010 397 p. $16.95 (pa)To mark his sixty-fifth birthday, novelist and travel writer Mewshawdecided to take a 4,000 mile trip across North Africa. The resulting bookis filled with the thrills and chills of the traditional traveler’s tale,including food riots, beheadings, a derelict Star Wars set, and a cast ofmemorable characters. As the author describes his journey, he alsodishes out a sizeable portion of history and politics, giving readers agood picture of life in contemporary Egypt, Libya, Tunisia, Algeria, andMorocco. One of the most memorable of recent travelogues, Mewshaw’sbook will appeal to anyone thinking of traveling to North Africa, as wellas to readers who like a ripping good story.

DT352 2009-044632 978-1-931930-91-8IInnttoo AAffrriiccaa;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo SSuubb--SSaahhaarraann ccuullttuurree aanndd ddiivveerrssiittyy,,22dd eedd..Richmond, Yale and Phyllis Gestrin.Intercultural Press, ©2009 261 p. $24.95 (pa)Intercultural communications specialist Richmond, a veteran of the USForeign Service; and African affairs specialist Gestrin, a veteran ofUNICEF and USAID, offer a guide for people who will be going to sub-Saharan Africa to advise, consult, do business, work, study, or merelytravel. It explains the customs and cultures of the African they willencounter, and why they behave as they do. The main themes are theAfrican community, face-to-face with Africans, coping with customs,doing business, working the workshops, and regional differences, tips fortravelers. The 1988 edition was published as Into Africa: InterculturalInsights; the second edition has been revised to reflect changes on thecontinent.

DT363 2009-014204 978-1-933202-46-4EEaasstt AAffrriiccaa;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttoorryy hhiissttoorryy,, 33dd eedd..Maxon, Robert M.West Virginia University Press, ©2009 328 p. $29.95 (pa)For students and general readers, Maxon (history, West Virginia U.)surveys East Africa’s political, economic, and social history from pre-colonial to modern times. Examining the history country by country, headdresses the physical movement and societal development of andbetween ethnic groups before the 1890s; the capitalistic impact ofEuropean colonialism in the early nineteenth century, with a focus on thedevelopment of centralized states ruled by monarchs rather than politicalformations ruled by chiefs or counsels of elders; and the achievementand aftermath of independence during the later part of the twentiethcentury in Tanzania, Uganda, and Kenya, as well as the offshore islandsof Zanzibar and Pemba. This edition has revised sections and a newpreface.

DT407 2009-053922 978-0-275-99362-7SSttrraatteeggiicc sshhoorrttffaallll;; tthhee SSoommaalliiaa SSyynnddrroommee aanndd tthhee mmaarrcchhttoo 99//1111..Patman, Robert G.Praeger, ©2010 185 p. $49.95The events of 9/11 didn’t come out of the metaphorical clear blue sky,argues Patman (politics and international studies, U. of Otago, NewZealand), but out of a post-Cold War permissive security environmentintimately connected to the events of the US-UN “humanitarian” inter-vention in Somalia in 1992-1994. From that experience, he contends, theClinton administration adopted the views that failed or failing states werenot geostrategically significant to the national interest and that multi-lateral institutions such as the United Nations could not be allowed toconstrain the United States on issues related to national security. This“Somalia Syndrome,” in which the United States became reluctant tointervene in civil conflicts, which the al-Qaeda leadership believed it wasresponsible for because of its involvement in the October 1993 Battle ofMogadishu (the “Black Hawk Down” incident) in which 18 US soldiers(and many more Somalis) lost their lives, emboldened Bin Laden and hiscompatriots to gradually escalate its campaign against the United States.If Clinton belatedly recognized the threat, he further argues, the Bushadministration stubbornly refused to take it seriously until those airlinersactually did arrive out of the clear blue sky on that September morning.

DT503 2008-047359 978-0-7391-2743-8TThhee AAffrriiccaann--BBrriittiisshh lloonngg eeiigghhtteeeenntthh cceennttuurryy;; aann aannaallyyssiiss ooffAAffrriiccaann--BBrriittiisshh ttrreeaattiieess,, ccoolloonniiaall eeccoonnoommiiccss,, aannddaanntthhrrooppoollooggiiccaall ddiissccoouurrssee..Caulker, Tcho Mbaimba.Lexington Books, ©2009 p. $.00Taking his native country and its colonial master as a case study, Caulker(English and African literature, U. of New Haven, Connecticut) exploresthe literary interweaving of Europe and Africa from the late 17th centurythrough the early 19th. He discusses long 18th-century fictive literatureand filling the vacuum of Africa; British-African treaty making and theconstruction of a British colonial state in Sierra Leone; the Sierra LeoneCompany and its ties to emergent colonial, economic, and moral phi-losophy of the long 18th century; natural science, exploration and thecolonial project in West Africa; and Syl Cheney-Coker’s 1991 novel TheLast Harmatton of Alusine Dunbar and bringing the long 18th-centuryarchival past into the postcolonial present.

DT515 2009-023500 978-0-8214-1890-1CCoolloonniiaall mmeellttddoowwnn;; nnoorrtthheerrnn NNiiggeerriiaa iinn tthhee GGrreeaattDDeepprreessssiioonn..Ochonu, Moses E. (New African histories series)Ohio University Press, ©2009 217 p. $24.95 (pa)The impotence and near collapse of British rule in the African colonyduring the 1930s belies the standard archetype of ruthless masters, saysOchonu (African history, Vanderbilt U.), but more importantly, raises thequestion of what a colonial power does with its possessions when the sit-uation prevents it from exploiting them. His perspectives include fromempire to colony, the Depression and the colonial encounter in northernNigeria, social transformations and the unintended consequences in adepressed economy, the periphery strikes back, and economic recoveryand grassroots revenue offensives.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –58–

DT665 2009-021935 978-0-8214-1874-1TThhee llaanndd bbeeyyoonndd tthhee mmiissttss;; eessssaayyss oonn iiddeennttiittyy aannddaauutthhoorriittyy iinn pprreeccoolloonniiaall CCoonnggoo aanndd RRwwaannddaa..Newbury, David S.Ohio University Press, ©2009 444 p. $69.95Newbury (African studies, Smith College) presents a collection of hisessays, written for various journals, on pre-colonial Rwanda, Burundiand eastern Congo. It is symbolic that the first map of many in the bookhas no borderlines, for Newbury erases the colonial boundaries andcolonial preconceptions that have plagued Africa for so many centuries.His first two chapters cover the western historiography that attempted tosee African history and culture as often faulty forms of European insti-tutions. He then reviews the work of more recent, postcolonial scholarsThe remainder of the book is a restructuring of the old concepts of stateand status to explain the ways in which territory, kingship, religion andfamily combined to form societies that were different from but ascomplex as those in Europe. For scholars of African history and thoseinterested in the background to the region today, this collection will be atreasure.

DT1593 2009-000769 978-0-8135-4618-6DDeeddiiccaatteedd ttoo tthhee ppeeooppllee ooff DDaarrffuurr;; wwrriittiinnggss oonn ffeeaarr,, rriisskk,,aanndd hhooppee..Title main entry. Ed. by Luke Reynolds and Jennifer Reynolds.Rutgers U. Press, ©2009 238 p. $23.95 (pa)The editors have collected almost fifty essays on the subject of takingrisks and making change, whether in one’s self or in the broader world.The multinational and multicultural roster of authors includes FrankMcCourt, Nadine Gordimer, Uzodinma Iweala, Linda Hogan, andHoward Zinn. All proceeds from the book will go to the Save DarfurCoalition.

DT1805 91-66760 978-0-87348-729-0HHooww ffaarr wwee ssllaavveess hhaavvee ccoommee!!;; SSoouutthh AAffrriiccaa aanndd CCuubbaa iinnttooddaayy’’ss wwoorrlldd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999911))Mandela, Nelson and Fidel Castro.Pathfinder Press, ©2009 91 p. $10.00 (pa)Containing the speeches made by Castro and Mandela at a 1991 rally inMatanzas, Cuba, this volume catches both men at interesting points intheir political careers. Castro would shortly be coping with Cuba’s lossof crucial economic support after the collapse of the Soviet Union laterin the year. Not long out of prison, Mandela was in the midst of negoti-ating an end to South Africa’s apartheid government, and only a fewyears from becoming the country’s first black president. In terms of sub-stance, the speeches are both tributes to the Cuban people for their inter-nationalist aid to the anti-apartheid struggle and to the vanguard role ofthe African National Congress and, at the distance of almost two decades,Mandela’s speech has shown great staying power.

DT1805 978-1-86914-179-0RRee--iimmaaggiinniinngg tthhee ssoocciiaall iinn SSoouutthh AAffrriiccaa;; ccrriittiiqquuee,, tthheeoorryy,,aanndd ppoosstt--aappaarrtthheeiidd ssoocciieettyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Heather Jacklin and Peter Vale.U. of KwaZulu-Natal Press, ©2009 308 p. $49.00 (pa)With the end of apartheid and the imposition of a narrow interpretationof constitutionalism within the framework of neoliberal globalization,critical social thinking came to an end in South Africa, including in theacademy, according to Jacklin (education, U. of Cape Town, South Africa)and Vale (politics, Rhodes U., South Africa), who present nine essaystaking stock of this situation and considering how critical thinking canbe brought back into the center of the country’s intellectual life. Amongthe topics discussed by the papers are the relationship between citi-zenship, knowledge, and the nationalist state; the political theory ofSylvain Lazarus; Frantz Fanon’s The Wretched of the Earth as the foun-dational text for emancipatory intellectual praxis in the post-colony; citi-zenship and critique in Karl Marx and Edward Said; and subalternstudies for South African history. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

DT1959 978-0-7957-0232-7SSoowweettoo;; 1166 JJuunnee 11997766,, ppeerrssoonnaall aaccccoouunnttss ooff tthhee uupprriissiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Elsabé Brink et al.Kwela Books, ©2010 208 p. $18.95 (pa)On June 16, 2001, thousands of black students in South Africa’s Sowetotownship demonstrated against a government requirement that many oftheir classes be conducted in the Afrikaans language. Police overreactionand demonstrators’ panic led to escalating violence in which hundredsof people—almost all black—died. This book contains the first-handaccounts of thirty schoolchildren who were in Soweto that day, some ofwhom were activists involved in the demonstration and others who werejust caught up in the violence. Illustrated by many personal photographsfrom the witnesses, this book is an important document of a day thatwas a turning point in the struggle against South Africa’s apartheidregime. (Distributed in the U.S. by ISBS.)

DT1974 2009-049553 978-1-56656-800-5LLeett ffrreeeeddoomm rreeiiggnn;; tthhee wwoorrddss ooff NNeellssoonn MMaannddeellaa..Mandela, Nelson.Interlink Publishing Group, ©2010 136 p. $14.95This work collects the words of Nelson Mandela, the first democraticallyelected president of South Africa. Excerpts from his greatest speeches,from his early days as a leading member of the African NationalCongress through his release from prison and his role as an internationalstatesman, touch on democracy, AIDS, discrimination, human rights, andwomen’s rights. Chapter and speech introductions give background onpolitical and social events of the period. A brief introduction to the bookgives an overview of Mandela’s life, career, and impact. The collectionmarks the 20th anniversary of Mandela’s release from prison. The bookincludes b&w photos. Its small size (5x7.5″) makes for tiny type and dif-ficult reading. Editor Henry Russell is author or editor of 18 books.

DT2496 978-1-84701-312-5DDiiaammoonnddss,, ddiissppoosssseessssiioonn aanndd ddeemmooccrraaccyy iinn BBoottsswwaannaa..Good, Kenneth. (Africa issues)James Currey Publishers, ©2008 182 p. $27.95 (pa)The Southern African country of Botswana has often been held up as adiamond of democratic development in the region, according to Good (aformer professor of political studies at the U. of Botswana), but thediamond has many flaws. He discusses a number of the key problemswith democracy in Botswana in chapters that focus on diamonddependent economic wealth, the social consequences of diamonddependency, political presidentialism, ruling party predominance, andthe dispossession and subordination of the San people (also known asthe Bushmen). Distributed in the US by Ohio U. Press.

DT2520 2008-043929 978-0-87013-858-4TTssooddiilloo hhiillllss;; ccooppppeerr bbrraacceelleett ooff tthhee KKaallaahhaarrii..Title main entry. Ed. by Alec Campbell et al.Michigan State U. Press, ©2010 179 p. $39.95 (pa)People have inhabited the Tsodilo Hills in the Kalahri Desert of Botswanafor 100,000 years, making it one of the world’s oldest historical sites. Thisstunning and profusely illustrated account of the site summarizes threedecades of efforts by archaeologists, paleontologists, historians, andanthropologists to understand the records left behind by the Tsodilo’sinhabitants over the millennia. Besides providing a comprehensive lookat the site’s past, the book also introduces readers to the present-dayinhabitants of the Tsodilo area and to the beauties of the Kalahari. If allbooks on archaeology and anthropology were this beautiful and wellwritten, everyone would be reading them.

DU98 2009-052317 978-0-8166-6997-4TThhee rrooaadd ttoo BBoottaannyy BBaayy;; aann eexxpplloorraattiioonn ooff llaannddssccaappee aannddhhiissttoorryy.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11998877))Carter, Paul.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 384 p. $22.50 (pa)In this volume, Carter looks for the origins of Australia in the papers andnarratives of its early explorers and settlers. Paying special attention tothe mapping of the continent and the selection of place names, theauthor examines the ways in which naming imposed order, and themyths that arose from that imposition. A classic in the field of culturaland historical geography, this volume should be in any serious collectionof books about Australia.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–59–

DU113 2009-275333 978-0-86193-295-5AAnngglloo--AAuussttrraalliiaann rreellaattiioonnss aanndd tthhee ‘‘ttuurrnn ttoo EEuurrooppee’’,, 11996611--11997722..Benvenuti, Andrea. (Royal Historical Society studies in history newseries)The Boydell Press, ©2008 215 p. $95.00As late as the 1950s, there existed an assumption that “the interests ofAustralia and the British world ought ultimately to coincide,” yet by 1969,the Australian Prime Minister was telling his British counterpart thatAustralia should regard Britain in the same way as any other foreigncountry. Bienvenuti (U. of New South Wales, Australia) explores thecauses and consequences of this rapid and radical erosion of Anglo-Australian relations, contending that it was largely a result of Britain’sattempt to redefine its post-imperial role through a reorientation towardsEurope. In particular, she argues, Britain’s applications for entry into theEuropean Economic Community caused deep Australian worries aboutits agricultural exports to Britain, among other economic worries, andthe turn towards Europe also raised concerns about Britain’s com-mitment to Australian defense interests. These latter fears were con-firmed, she argues, by Britain’s decision to withdraw from the Far East.She describes how Australian policy-makers responded to British movestowards Europe and their political, strategic, and economic consequencesin four phases of reaction and response: Britain’s first application to theEEC (1961-3); the British withdrawal (1967-8); Britain’s second application(1967); and Britain’s reinstated application (1971-2). By doing so, shereveals the deterioration of Anglo-Australia relations as determined by aseries of perceived crises, rather than a single cause, and demonstratesthe combined politico-strategic and politico-economic concerns thatshaped Australian perceptions towards the bilateral relationship

DU413 978-1-877372-76-6PPrroommiisseedd NNeeww ZZeeaallaanndd;; fflleeeeiinngg NNaazzii ppeerrsseeccuuttiioonn.. ((rreepprriinntt,,22000099))Klier, Freya. Trans. by Jenny Rawlings.Otago University Press, ©2009 255 p. $45.00 (pa)From interviews with refugees who fled Nazi or postwar Europe from1930 to 1948, German filmmaker/political activist Klier brings to light thelittle-known emigration of German and Austrian Jews to New Zealand.While they ironically encountered prejudice as alien enemies and someeventually left, others became successful in their new homeland. Thebook includes a map of 1930s Europe, photographs of family andwartime politicians, updates on the interviewees, and further reading.First published as Gelobtes Neuseeland, the book is being distributed byISBS for the first time outside of Germany.

NNOORRTTHH AAMMEERRIICCAANN IINNDDIIAANNSS,, UU..SS.. HHIISSTTOORRYY

E18 2009-048318 978-1-59884-201-2PPiirraatteess ooff tthhee AAmmeerriiccaass;; 22vv..Marley, David F.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 788 p. $180.00Full of blood-thirsty fights, attacks on fortifications, the razing of castles,and chases at sea, this two-volume reference will please anyone wishingto revel in the lawless circumstances that prevailed at sea through thelate 17th and early 18th century. With many b&w illustrations and maps,the text includes accounts of freebooters, privateers, blockade runners,buccaneers, rovers, flibustiers, English conveys attacking the Spanish andDutch, as well as entries on terms, places, and events, each volume isdevoted to a separate era, from 1650-1685 in Vol. 1, with Vol. 2 continuingup to 1825. The entries are richly supplemented with quotes fromprimary sources and conclude with a list of references. Both volumesinclude a lengthy glossary, chronology, primary source texts, bibliog-raphy and index. Marley is a naval historian based in Canada.

E45 978-1-906540-89-0TThhee rreecceenntt aarrcchhaaeeoollooggyy ooff tthhee eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn ppeerriioodd iinnQQuuéébbeecc CCiittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by William Moss. (Post-medieval archaeology; v.43,part 1, 2009)Maney Publishing, ©2010 257 p. $48.00 (pa)This volume is produced jointly by the Society for Post-MedievalArchaeology and the Association des archéologues du Québec; the 15papers are in English here and in French in the 2009 edition ofArchéologiques. A first section looking before New France considers thenatural environment and Amerindian nations in the area. Other themesare Cartier and Robeval’s Charlesbourg Royal as an aborted attempt atsettling New France in the 16th century, governing New France from theChâteau Saint-Louis, administering New France from the intendant’spalace, and inhabiting New France. There is no index. Distributed inNorth America by The David Brown Book Co.

E58 2009-036899 978-0-202-36336-3PPrreehhiissttoorriicc AAmmeerriiccaa;; aann eeccoollooggiiccaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee,, 33dd eedd..((rreepprriinntt,, 11997722))Meggers, Betty J.AldineTransaction, ©2010 201 p. $29.95 (pa)A research associate at the Smithsonian Institute for over a half centurynow, Meggers investigates whether there is an intrinsic relationshipbetween environmental conditions and cultural potential that wouldmanifest itself in the independent emergence of similar adaptive config-urations. To do so, she compares prehistoric cultural developmentbetween several pairs of similar environments in the northern andsouthern hemispheres, and were almost certainly prevented from com-municating with each other by being geographical separated and bothsurrounded by environments with different climates and naturalresources that were not amenable to their cultural structures. The 1972first edition was itself revised and expanded from a 100-page article shewrote for UNESCO in 1967. Prefaces from all three editions are included.

E76 2009-024819 978-0-8165-2656-7IInnhheerriittiinngg tthhee ppaasstt;; tthhee mmaakkiinngg ooff AArrtthhuurr CC.. PPaarrkkeerr aannddiinnddiiggeennoouuss aarrcchhaaeeoollooggyy..Colwell-Chanthaphonh, Chip.U. of Arizona Press, ©2009 268 p. $24.95 (pa)Archaeologists and Native American communities have had a troubledrelationship, characterized by conflicts over control of Native Americanartifacts and heritage, as well as by issues related to race and privilege.As the first U.S. archaeologist of Native American descent, Arthur Parkerfaced these conflicts on a daily basis. Colwell-Chanthaphonh (Curator ofAnthropology, Denver Museum of Nature & Science) looks at Parker’slife, showing how he dealt with the conflict between Native Americanrights and scientific research, and how the ways in which Parker dealtwith issues of privilege, ownership, and public participation helpedshape present-day archaeological practice and ethics

E77 2009-034364 978-1-59143-107-7AAddvvaanncceedd cciivviilliizzaattiioonnss ooff pprreehhiissttoorriicc AAmmeerriiccaa;; tthhee lloossttkkiinnggddoommss ooff tthhee AAddeennaa,, HHooppeewweellll,, MMiissssiissssiippppiiaannss,, aannddAAnnaassaazzii..Joseph, Frank.Bear & Company, ©2010 310 p. $18.00 (pa)With imaginative narratives of four ancient peoples of North America,Joseph (editor-in-chief, Ancient American magazine; Minnesota-basedauthor, Survivors of Atlantis) presents his views on how these great civi-lizations rose and fell over the past 3,000 years. He claims that Peruvianswho trekked to the US Southwest became the Hohokam and Anasazi,and that there are links between the European Kelts and the NorthAmerican mound builders. The book includes illustrations; a time line;and comparisons of Keltic and Plains Indian terms, and Zuni Indian andJapanese words.

E78 978-0-9812405-2-7AAmmeerriiccaa’’ss ggiifftt;; wwhhaatt tthhee wwoorrlldd oowweess ttoo tthhee AAmmeerriiccaass aannddtthheeiirr ffiirrsstt iinnhhaabbiittaannttss..Roth, Käthe and Denis Vaugeois. Trans. by Käthe Roth.Baraka Books, ©2009 273 p. $22.95 (pa)What do vanilla, the word O.K., and cornflakes all have in common?They all originated in the New World. In this illustrated glossary, theauthors present entries for hundreds of plants, animals, foods, words,and other things that the Americas have given to the rest of the world.They also include short sidebars on topics such as slavery, ideas, epi-demics, nutrition, and property. Interesting and often surprising, thisbook will appeal to any reader who loves words, word origins, or history.

E78 2009-028080 978-0-89672-666-6““II ddoo nnoott aappoollooggiizzee ffoorr tthhee lleennggtthh ooff tthhiiss lleetttteerr””;; tthhee MMaarriiSSaannddoozz lleetttteerrss oonn NNaattiivvee AAmmeerriiccaann rriigghhttss,, 11994400--11996655..Sandoz, Mari. (Plains histories)Texas Tech U. Press, ©2009 197 p. $45.00Mari Sandoz (1896-1966) was a Nebraska-born writer perhaps bestknown for her 1942 biography Crazy Horse: the Strange Man of theOglalas. She was a prolific letter writer and this volume collects some ofher later life correspondence, focusing on the letters that “illustrate andaddress her interest in and advocacy for historical accuracy in AmericanIndian matters, political and social justice for Native peoples, and heractive campaign to dismantle negative Native American stereotypes.”

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –60–

E78 978-0-88755-703-3WWhheenn tthhee ootthheerr iiss mmee;; nnaattiivvee rreessiissttaannccee ddiissccoouurrssee,, 11885500--11999900..LaRocque, Emma.Univ. of Manitoba Pr., ©2010 218 p. $27.95 (pa)LaRocque (Native studies, U. of Manitoba) critically surveys the Canadianhistorical and literary record from 1850 to 1990, focusing on how colonialwriting by whites (and some indigenous) has consistently served to dehu-manize the indigenous of Canada, the social effects of that dehuman-ization in history and currently, and how Native writers have produceddecolonizing counter-narratives that resist dehumanization and recon-struct more humanizing paradigms. Distributed in the US by MichiganState U. Press.

E83 2009-051215 978-0-313-35440-3TThhee ffrroonnttiieerr nneewwssppaappeerrss aanndd tthhee ccoovveerraaggee ooff tthhee PPllaaiinnssIInnddiiaann WWaarrss..Reilly, Hugh J. (Native America: yesterday and today)Praeger, ©2010 162 p. $44.95Reilly (communication and Native American studies, U. of Nebraska-Omaha) fleshes out the broad strokes of interaction between natives andsettlers in the middle of North America from the 1860s to the 1890s bydrawing on the articles and opinions in the local newspapers where thewars were being fought. Among the episodes he documents are the GreatSioux uprising in August- December 1862, the Sand Creek MassacreNovember 1864, the Little Big Horn campaign January-July 1876, theflight of the Nez Perce March-October 1877, and the Ghost Dance andWounded Knee 1890-91.

E97 2009-041302 978-0-8061-4114-5PPiippeessttoonnee;; mmyy lliiffee iinn aann IInnddiiaann bbooaarrddiinngg sscchhooooll..Fortunate Eagle, Adam.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 193 p. $19.95 (pa)Fortunate Eagle, a one-time leader of the 1969-1971 occupation ofAlcatraz by Native American activists, presents an episodic and non-chronological memoir of his time attending the Pipestone IndianBoarding School from 1935 to 1945. Because of the reputation of theIndian boarding schools as being institutions dedicated to the eradicationof Native American culture, readers may be surprised to find FortunateEagle’s recollections as relatively positive, particularly concerningCommissioner of Indian Affairs John Collier’s 1934 reforms supportingIndian language and culture, which Fortunate Eagle judges to have beena success, based on his personal memories of Pipestone.

E98 2009-034326 978-0-8165-2871-4AAccrroossss aa ggrreeaatt ddiivviiddee;; ccoonnttiinnuuiittyy aanndd cchhaannggee iinn nnaattiivveeNNoorrtthh AAmmeerriiccaann ssoocciieettiieess,, 11440000--11990000..Title main entry. Ed. by Laura L. Scheiber and Mark D. Mitchell.(Amerind studies in archaeology; v.4)U. of Arizona Press, ©2010 345 p. $59.95In 13 essays revised from presentations at an October 2007 symposiumof the Amerind Foundation, anthropologists from across the US seek toidentify and transcend the colonial discourse that has colored accountsof change in Native American societies during the centuries before andafter European contact. Their topics include agency and practice inApalachee Province, Creek factionalism and the colonial southeasternfrontier, the archaeology of nativism among the 19th-century Algonquinpeoples of Illinois, French impact on Wichita technology and society,Navajo ethnogenesis in the northern southwest 1500-1750, and identitycollectives and religious colonialism in coastal western Alaska.

E98 2009-019968 978-0-674-03610-9SSeerrvviinngg tthheeiirr ccoouunnttrryy;; AAmmeerriiccaann IInnddiiaann ppoolliittiiccss aannddppaattrriioottiissmm iinn tthhee ttwweennttiieetthh cceennttuurryy..Rosier, Paul C.Harvard University Press, ©2009 360 p. $39.95Unlike other Americans, American Indians have a twin identity as U.S.citizens and as members of conquered nations. Rosier (History, VillanovaUniversity) looks at the development of a complex, hybrid patriotism thatNative Americans use mediate this dichotomy. Beginning with imple-mentation of the reservation system in the 19th century and continuingthrough two world wars and the Cold War to the modern day, the authorexamines the ways in which Indians have defined democracy, citi-zenship, and patriotism. Rather than standing outside the mainstream ofU.S. history, argues Rosier, the struggles of American Indians to asserttheir right to be both American and Indian is an integral part of thehistory of the U.S. as an imperial power. This book is essential readingfor anyone interested in the relationship between the U.S. governmentand American Indians.

E98 2009-013964 978-1-55595-316-4SSttoorryytteelllliinngg ttiimmee;; NNaattiivvee NNoorrtthh AAmmeerriiccaann aarrtt ffrroommccoolllleeccttiioonnss aatt tthhee UUnniivveerrssiittyy ooff NNoorrtthh DDaakkoottaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Arthur Frederick Jones and Lucy Annis Ganje.Hudson Hills Press, ©2010 242 p. $60.00A number of departments at the University of North Dakota have chargeof collections of Native American art assembled over the years under avariety of circumstances since the University’s founding in 1883. Theeffort now is to thoughtfully and respectfully display these objects and tosupport their power to preserve and communicate a cultural heritage.Several essays examine the evolution of a new philosophy regarding howNative art is understood and appreciated within the campus community.The book is beautifully designed, and its oversize format offers a gen-erous, elegant display of objects—a selection of both historical and con-temporary works. Affiliated with the University, Jones is an art historianand Ganje a graphic designer. Other contributors include, Nelda Schrupp,a member of the Pheasant Rump Nakota First Nation and a nationallyknow artist, as well as personnel from the university departments thathouse the collections.

E99 2009-033128 978-1-933316-76-5LLiivviinngg iinn ttwwoo wwoorrllddss;; tthhee AAmmeerriiccaann IInnddiiaann eexxppeerriieenncceeiilllluussttrraatteedd..Eastman, Charles (Ohiyesa). Ed. by Michael Oren Fitzgerald. (Libraryof perennial philosophy. American Indian traditions series)World Wisdom, ©2010 207 p. $24.95 (pa)Born into the Santee Sioux tribe in 1858, but spending his youth andadult life in white society, Charles Eastman truly lived in two worlds.Contianing portions of Eastman’s five most important books, this volumedescribes Indian life in general as well as Eastman’s own life, in whichhe tried to balance traditional Indian values and the demands of anindustrialized society. Editor Fitzgerald provides an introduction toEastman’s writings, and has selected more than 275 period photographsand paintings to supplement the text. The book also includes commen-taries by nine contemporary Native Americans.

E99 2009-024936 978-1-60239-734-7MMyy lliiffee aass aann IInnddiiaann;; tthhee ssttoorryy ooff aa RReedd wwoommaann aanndd aaWWhhiittee mmaann iinn tthhee llooddggeess ooff tthhee BBllaacckkffeeeett..Schultz, James Willard.Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2010 426 p. $14.95 (pa)For several centuries, stories of whites who lived with Indian tribes (oftenas captives) were popular with European and American readers. One ofthe last books in this genre was this volume by Schultz, which firstappeared in 1907. A lively account of the author’s time working as atrapper and living with the Blackfeet people in Montana, the book’sdepiction of Indian life is somewhat romanticized (which is not sur-prising, given that much of the book first saw print as a magazineserial). Shultz’s book will appeal to readers interested in NativeAmericans and frontier life.

E99 978-87-7602-106-1OOnn tthhee ttrraacckk ooff tthhee TThhuullee ccuullttuurree ffrroomm BBeerriinngg SSttrraaiitt ttooEEaasstt GGrreeeennllaanndd;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..SILA Conference on The Thule Culture: New Perspectives in InuitPrehistory (2006: Copenhagen, Denmark) Ed. by Bjarne Gronnow.(Publications from the National Museum studies in archaeology andhistory; v.15)National Museum of Denmark, ©2009 263 p. $60.00This volume contains 20 papers presented at a 2006 conference on theThule Culture—the immediate predecessor of the modern Inuit culture ofGreenland and the arctic regions of North America. Looking at develop-ments over the almost three decades since the last major conference onthe Thule people, archaeologists and ethnohistorians address topicsincluding the origins of the Thule culture; Thule settlement patterns andpopulations; the archaeology of specific Thule sites and the end of Thuleculture and the transition into the modern period. (Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.)

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–61–

E99 978-0-88864-505-0PPeeooppllee ooff tthhee llaakkeess;; ssttoorriieess ooff oouurr VVaann TTaatt GGwwiicchh’’iinnEEllddeerrss//GGooooggwwaannddaakk NNaakkhhwwaacchh’’áánnjjóóoo VVaann TTaatt GGwwiicchh’’iinn..Vuntut Gwitchin First Nation Staff and Shirleen Smith.The U. of Alberta Press, ©2009 391 p. $34.95 (pa)Straddling the border between Canada and Alaska, and extending fromthe Arctic Circle north to the Beaufort Sea is the traditional territory ofthe Van Tat, fed by the rivers Europeans call Crow, Black, Porcupine, andPeel. Near its center is Old Crow, the community of some 300 souls wherethe project was initiated to gather stories transcribed in earlier days fromtheir scattered archives, and to interview the elders throughout the ter-ritory for this collection of narratives. Interspersed are drawings and pho-tographs dating back to the 19th century, and stupendous new colorphotographs of the land and the people. The sections are chronological:the long-ago stories, the first generation in the 19th century, the secondgeneration early in the 20th, and the oral history of today. A glossarytranslates Gwich’in to English and English to Gwich’in. Distributed in theUS by Michigan State University Press.

E99 99-33978 978-0-8061-4124-4PPeeooppllee ooff tthhee WWiinndd RRiivveerr:: tthhee EEaasstteerrnn SShhoosshhoonneess,, 11882255--11990000.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999999))Stamm, Henry E.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 320 p. $19.95 (pa)In this reprint from 1999, Stamm (American Indian history, Idaho StateU. in Pocatello) recounts the story of the Eastern Shoshones of Wyomingfrom 1825, when they reached mutual accommodations with the firstAnglo-American settlers in Wind River country, to 1900, the death ofChief Washakie. Drawing from primary documents and interviews withdescendants of early Shoshone leaders, Stamm traces the development ofthe tribe and its migration from the Great Basin to the High Plains ofWyoming; the arrival of Arapahoes and white explorers and trappers inthe region; the creation of the Shoshone and Bannock Indian Agency; thePeace Policy system; attempts to “civilize” them; the impact and interac-tions with Mormons, merchants, farmers, ranchers, and government offi-cials; their economy and daily living; how they maintained their identity;and their economic and spiritual transformations after the extinction ofthe buffalo.

E99 2009-035834 978-0-8165-2863-9PPrreehhiissttoorryy,, ppeerrssoonnaalliittyy,, aanndd ppllaaccee;; EEmmiill WW.. HHaauurryy aanndd tthheeMMooggoolllloonn ccoonnttrroovveerrssyy..Reid, Jefferson and Stephanie Whittlesey.U. of Arizona Press, ©2010 182 p. $19.95 (pa)Archaeologists themselves, authors Reid and Whittlesey examine the“Mogollon controversy”, one of the major disputes in the history ofsouthwestern archaeology. This debate over whether the Mogollon was aculture in itself or just a variant of another regional culture emerged inthe 1930s with the work of Emil Haury, and continued for decades asother archaeologists expanded the knowledge about these prehistoricpeople. Based in part on extensive interviews with Haury, the explorefacets of that debate and show how ultimately the New Archaeologyshifted attention away from the questions of cultural affiliation andantiquity that had been at the heart of the controversy.

E99 978-87-635-2589-3TTrraaddiittiioonnaall IInnuuiitt ssoonnggss ffrroomm tthhee TThhuullee aarreeaa;; 22vv.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Hauser, Michael. (Monographs on Greenland; v.346)Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2010 1556 p. $173.00This massive two-volume edition is the result of over one hundred yearsof research into the music of the Inuit of Greenland, Canada and, to alesser extent, Alaska. Ethnomusicologist Hauser draws on his forty yearsof field experience as well as the 1937 sound recordings made by ErikHoltved. The first volume gives information on the observers of Inuitmusic from the mid-nineteenth century to the present, then deals withthe singers and musicians themselves. Photographs of the participantsare given, with a genealogy if possible along with a list of the songs theyprovided. Hauser is concerned with the migration of traditional music.The topoi of the melodies are traced with deviations noted. He alsoexplains the notational symbols invented to transcribe the music. Hauserdifferentiates the many types of song, from religious to lullabies, to enter-tainment. Dance and drum accompaniment are also given careful exam-ination, with several pictures of the stages of the dance. The various typesof drum are categorized, also with pictures. The number of photos, manyin color, makes it easier to understand the relation of music to the people.The second volume is a complete transcription of Holtved’s recordingswith dates, informant, notation, lyrics and translation. A CD accompaniesthe book, made from these early records. This superb work is theproduct of several lifetimes of research, distilled for future students andfor the descendants of the Inuit singers. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

E134 2009-028503 978-963-9776-52-4OObbjjeeccttss ooff rreemmeemmbbrraannccee;; aa mmeemmooiirr ooff AAmmeerriiccaannooppppoorrttuunniittiieess aanndd VViieennnneessee ddrreeaammss..Price, Monroe E.Central European U. Press, ©2009 199 p. $29.95In his memoir as “...one of the last Jewish infants conceived in Viennaas it once had been,” Price (global communications studies, U. ofPennsylvania; media and communications studies, Central European U.)traces his family’s flight to the US as refugees from Nazi Austria. He dis-cusses resettlement agencies, the role of objects of remembrance inreimaging the past, reinventing his life, and Austria’s belated acknowl-edgment of responsibility for its Nazi past. Family photos enhance hisstory. Distributed by Books International.

E156 2009-358875 978-0-06-053923-8TThhee AAmmeerriiccaann ffuuttuurree;; aa hhiissttoorryy..Schama, Simon.HarperCollins, ©2009 400 p. $29.99Historian Schama adds another item to that large pile of books thatattempt to present a broad view of American history and the Americanexperience to a popular audience. While the writing is beautiful and thehistorical accounts and anecdotes are extensive, the author spends mostof his time outlining dichotomies in U.S. history (war vs. peace, estab-lished religion vs. freedom of conscience, native-born vs. immigrants,profligacy vs. conservation) without extracting much meaning from theseconflicts. With a confidence that has yet to be verified by history, Schamaframes his entire effort—not to mention the course of American history—with the election of Barack Obama, an event that he believes brought U.S.democracy “back from the dead.” While an entertaining read, there maybe more form than substance here.

E161 2009-017145 978-0-8130-3398-3OOnnrraammppss aanndd oovveerrppaasssseess;; aa ccuullttuurraall hhiissttoorryy ooff iinntteerrssttaatteettrraavveell..Perrier, Dianne.U. Press of Florida, ©2009 418 p. $29.95Full of colorful anecdotes like the actual four mile move of the town ofYakima, Washington to surround a new expressway, this book exploresthe cultural history of the nation’s interstate highways. Freelance writerDianne Perrier provides substantial citations and includes maps, illus-trations from magazines, photographs, and images of prints andpaintings. Although route numbers have replaced names like the OregonTrail and the Sante Fe Trail, readers can consult this volume to get asense of the development over time of the highways that in many casesreplaced the trails once used by Native Americans and early settlers.

E169 2008-016540 978-1-59102-748-5DDiissttrraacctteedd;; tthhee eerroossiioonn ooff aatttteennttiioonn aanndd tthhee ccoommiinngg DDaarrkkAAggee.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Jackson, Maggie.Prometheus Books, ©2009 327 p. $18.00 (pa)The author of What’s Happening to Home: Balancing Life, Work, andRefuge in the Information Age fears that we are developing an ‘attention-deficit’ culture. In historical, scientific, and philosophical contexts,Jackson calls for a renaissance of attention to counter being driven tofragmented ‘mcthinking’ by electronic technologies. Bill McKibben (TheEnd of Nature), among those who share her concerns, introduces thispaperback edition of the 2008 book.

E169 2009-029425 978-1-57003-853-2TThhee ffrruuiittss ooff eexxiillee;; CCeennttrraall EEuurrooppeeaann iinntteelllleeccttuuaalliimmmmiiggrraattiioonn ttoo AAmmeerriiccaa iinn tthhee aaggee ooff ffaasscciissmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Bodek and Simon Lewis. (TheCarolina lowcountry and the Atlantic world)U. of South Carolina Press, ©2010 230 p. $49.95In the period between the World Wars, for every Einstein who emigratedto Britain or America, there were hundreds of scientists, writers, aca-demics and artists who found their work disregarded and who facedemotional crises as a result of their displacement. Bodek (history, Collegeof Charleston, NC) and Lewis (world literature, College of Charleston, NC)present essays on men who had established international reputations intheir fields before being forced to flee Europe, such as social scientistsMax Horkheimer and Karl Manmheim and legal theorist Hans Kelsen,who were not well understood when they applied their theories to othersocieties; novelist Hermann Broch who was largely ignored; and MaxReinhardt who was considered passé. Some of the essays discuss theemotional trauma of separation compounded by experiences of violentanti-Semitism. That the exiles often met with more subtle forms of it inthe countries that took them in only made the transition worse. Thisbook is a good corrective to the myth of a warm welcome in Britain andAmerica of Jewish intellectuals fleeing fascism.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –62–

E169 2009-030649 978-0-313-35812-8SSttaarr ssttrruucckk;; aann eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff cceelleebbrriittyy ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Sam G. Riley.Greenwood Press, ©2010 358 p. $85.00Riley (communication, Virginia Tech U.) presents an encyclopedia ofaspects of American celebrity culture from 1950 to 2008. The 86 entriesexamine different types of celebrities, like artists, athletes, children, musi-cians, magicians, culinary celebrities, fashion designers, physicians, andtalk show hosts; aspects like arrests, divorces, disputes, endorsements,early deaths, fads, fan clubs, humanitarian efforts, lawsuits, power,plastic surgery, product lines, sex and scandal, and suicides; those whoare famous for being famous; paparazzi; stalkers; and the roles of theinternet, reality TV, movies, TV, newspapers, and tabloids. Entries onindividual celebrities are excluded.

E176 2009-048474 978-1-55849-733-7TThhee ddaannccee ooff tthhee ccoommeeddiiaannss;; tthhee ppeeooppllee,, tthhee pprreessiiddeenntt,,aanndd tthhee ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee ooff ppoolliittiiccaall ssttaanndduupp ccoommeeddyy iinnAAmmeerriiccaa..Robinson, Peter M.U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2010 257 p. $34.95Robinson (history, College of Mount St. Joseph) explores the evolution ofthe tripartite relationship between comedic performance, the Americanpublic, and the American presidency from the faux lectures of ArtemusWard during Lincoln’s tenure to the present, although special emphasisis placed on the middle half of the 20th century, which the author iden-tifies as the period that witnessed the development of modern under-standings of the place of laughter in relation to the politics of theAmerican presidency.

E176 2009-033310 978-0-8109-8487-5VVaanniittyy FFaaiirr’’ss pprreessiiddeennttiiaall pprrooffiilleess..Title main entry. Ed. by Graydon Carter.Harry N. Abrams, ©2010 104 p. $18.95Carter, editor of Vanity Fair, presents profiles of all of the US presidents,written by Vanity Fair magazine contributors. The brief essays outline keybiographical aspects, the careers, and the characters of the presidents, inchronological order up to Barack Obama, along with quotes from themabout their predecessors. Pencil sketches of the presidents in right-sideprofile are provided by illustrator Mark Summers.

E178 2009-015865 978-0-7656-8171-3AAmmeerriiccaa iinn wwoorrlldd hhiissttoorryy;; 44vv..Title main entry. Ed. by S.M. Crean.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 512 p. $299.00Apparently aimed at a general audience (with at least a high-schoolreading level), this four-volume reference places core themes and eventsof US history within the broader context of global interactions and worldaffairs. Covering the period from European first contact to the present,the 107 included articles address most of the country’s wars, of course,as well as such topics as the international slave trade, women in colonialsociety, the East India Company and the Boston Tea Party, BenjaminFranklin and the American Enlightenment, the French Revolution andAmerican politics, the Louisiana Purchase, the Monroe Doctrine andLatin American revolutions, Oregon and US-British relations, the Perrymission to Japan, American and Australian frontier culture, the PanamaCanal, tariffs and the international economy, the US recognition of Israel,the Civil Rights Movement and anti-colonialism, the Cuban Missile crisis,the normalization of relations with China, Reaganomics andThatcherism, the North American Free Trade Agreement, climate changeand the Kyoto Protocol, the “War on Terror,” and nuclear proliferationand North Korea. Articles are illustrated with many maps, photographs,and other figures. They also include guides to further readings, briefexcerpts of primary documents, and various other sidebars (for example,the article on the Watergate scandal has a short capsule history of thePentagon Papers).

E181 2009-009785 978-1-4051-6149-7AA ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo AAmmeerriiccaann mmiilliittaarryy hhiissttoorryy;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by James C. Bradford. (Blackwell companions toAmerican history)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 1080 p. $350.00This two-volume encyclopedic work, edited by Bradford (history, TexasA&M U.), surveys the published scholarship on American militaryhistory. The 67 included essays present basic information on their chosentopics, assess the evolution of the historiography of the field, and identifymajor areas of interpretive discussion. The first volume contains articleson the major wars of American history and on the country’s militaryorganizations, including the Continental Army and Confederate armedforces during the Civil War. The second volume begins with a section onforeign military operations short of declared war that includes articleson post World-War II occupations, military interventions around theworld, and alliances and coalitions in US history. A section on“Homeland Security” addresses responses to insurrections and civil dis-orders, coastal and air defenses, and the military’s involvement in post-Civil War Reconstruction. Military specialties is the theme of the nextsection, which includes chapters on intelligence, military chaplains, com-munications, order and discipline, covert warfare and special operations,war planning, military justice, photography, and music. The final sectiondeals with the relationship of the military to American society andculture and includes chapters on civil-military relations, women andminorities in the military, the military-industrial complex, militaryethics, the military and sports, American veterans’ movements, and carefor the military dead. Each essay includes significant bibliographicmaterial.

E181 2010-004680 978-1-59884-344-6TThhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess AArrmmyy;; aa cchhrroonnoollooggyy,, 11777755 ttoo tthheepprreesseenntt..Fredriksen, John C.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 375 p. $85.00This reference for general readers and students offers a month-to-monthand sometimes day-to-day chronology of the US Army in war and peace,from Concord, Massachusetts in 1775 to Iraq in 2008. Coverage encom-passes the regular army as well as the National Guard, Reserves, ArmyAviation, and Special Forces. Concise entries summarizing developmentsare presented in a reader-friendly, two-column format, along with boxeson key figures, groups, and battles, and b&w historical photos. Inaddition to major and minor conflicts, the book also covers political andsocial changes affecting the Army, the foundation of noted schools,details on weapons systems, and developments related to military admin-istration. The Vietnam era receives a bit less coverage than other con-flicts. Frederiksen is a historian.

E183 2010-002253 978-0-87289-320-7EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff UU..SS.. ppoolliittiiccaall hhiissttoorryy;; 77vv..Title main entry.CQ Press, ©2010 2997 p. $995.00An ambitious undertaking, this seven-volume encyclopedia emphasizesthoughtfully written textual content addressing a broad range of themes.The typeface and bold headings are student or general-reader oriented,but there are no razzle-dazzle color photos, maps, charts, sidebars—theaccoutrements used in many student texts and references to draw inreluctant readers. The packaging is rather plain-Jane, with a two-columnpage design and a dozen or so b&w maps and illustrations in eachvolume. Organization is in chronological volumes, each with its owneditor, who provides an introduction to the time period under consider-ation. Each volume has its own A-to-Z arrangement of about 100 signed,cross-referenced entries, and each devotes about one-quarter of approxi-mately 500 pages to the “Reader’s Guide” front matter and the cumu-lative index. Coverage includes the evolution and development of thebranches of government, political and social movements, and policy inkey areas; the influence of wars in the development of political institu-tions; economic trends and events; key events and political actors—andtheir long-term impact; and the history of women and ethnic and racialgroups. The editors and contributors are academics affiliated with uni-versities throughout the United States.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–63–

E183 2009-040214 978-0-313-38230-7IIssrraaeell iinn tthhee sseeccoonndd IIrraaqq WWaarr;; tthhee iinnfflluueennccee ooff LLiikkuudd..Pelletière, Stephen C.Praeger, ©2010 134 p. $34.95Pelletière, the CIA’s lead analyst during the Iran-Iraq War, contends thatDonald Rumsfeld’s roadmap for achieving a quick victory in the SecondIraq War was based in large part on Israel’s 1996 invasion of southernLebanon and borrowed heavily from Israel’s right-wing Likud’s strategyfor war. The author explores the relationship between the U.S. and Israelsince the fall of the Shah of Iran and through the laundry list of majorpolicy errors such as the 1982 Lebanon invasion, the Iran-Contra arms-for-hostages fiasco, and the Second Iraq War. The author also follows thegrowth of resistance groups such as Hezbollah and Hamas. PraegerSecurity International is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

E183 2009-025675 978-0-8047-6369-1OOnnee aalllliiaannccee,, ttwwoo lleennsseess;; UU..SS..--KKoorreeaa rreellaattiioonnss iinn aa nneewweerraa..Shin, Gi-Wook. (Studies of the Walter H. Shorenstein Asia-PacificResearch Center)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 276 p. $22.95 (pa)Beginning in the 1990s, the alliance relationship between the UnitedStates and the Republic of Korea (South Korea) began to evidence greatersigns of strain. In this volume, Shin (sociology, Stanford U.) seeks toexplain the reasons for the changing US-ROK relationship in terms ofchanges in the two countries’ respective environments, in particular theend of the Cold War, the South Korean transition from authoritarianismto democracy, and the strategic reorientation spurred by the September11th attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon. He alsostresses the role of mutual perceptions in US-ROK relations and in under-standings of North Korea as recorded in the print news media from 1992to 2003, finding that for the client state of South Korea, the alliance isoften related to the larger question of identity, while for the patron state,the US, it is largely a matter of specific policies.

E183 2009-042024 978-1-935308-21-8SShhiiffttiinngg ssuuppeerrppoowweerrss;; tthhee nneeww aanndd eemmeerrggiinngg rreellaattiioonnsshhiippbbeettwweeeenn tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess,, CChhiinnaa,, aanndd IInnddiiaa..Sieff, Martin.Cato Institute, ©2010 218 p. $26.00Declaring the US hegemonic moment in Asia to be over, Sieff (formerlychief news analyst for United Press International) argues that the timehas come for US policy-makers to deal with the rising powers of Chinaand India as equals (while also de-mythologizing common and oversim-plified understandings of India as ally and China as threat). In order todo this, he notes, it is necessary to understand both countries in theirindividual historical contexts and in relationship to each other. Heexamines this history and provides recommendations as to the futuredirections of US policy.

E184 2008-043609 978-0-8135-4538-7AAnn AAmmeerriiccaann iinn tthhee mmaakkiinngg;; tthhee lliiffee ssttoorryy ooff aanniimmmmiiggrraanntt.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11991177))Ravage, M. E. Ed. by Steven G. Kellman. (Multi-ethnic literatures of theAmericas)Rutgers U. Press, ©2009 212 p. $24.95 (pa)A chronology outlines the life of Marcus Eli Revici (1884-1965), whochanged his surname to Ravage when he arrived at Ellis Island in 1900from Romania. Kellman (comparative literature, U. of Texas at SanAntonio) situates this immigrant memoir that was first published in 1917by Harper & Bros. in the contexts of the genre and still-relevant identityissues. Ravage’s story relates disillusionment with life in New York tene-ments and assimilation in the Midwest as an “undercover Jew.”

E184 2009-000771 978-0-8135-4575-2AAssiiaann AAmmeerriiccaann ssttuuddiieess nnooww;; aa ccrriittiiccaall rreeaaddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Jean Yu-wen Shen Wu and Thomas C. Chen.Rutgers U. Press, ©2010 654 p. $37.50 (pa)This massive volume introduces readers to the field of Asian AmericanStudies via an interdisciplinary selection of essays, fiction, and historicaldocuments. In four parts, the book situates Asian Americans in the racialand social background of the U.S.; analyzes major events and corethemes in Asian American history; examines the struggles over meaningand power that shape the Asian American community; and discusses thepurpose, pedagogies, and future directions of Asian American Studies.Both illuminating and challenging, this collection is the definitive intro-ductory text for students in the field.

E184 2008-047367 978-1-933227-27-6CCoommmmuunniittyy,, ccuullttuurree aanndd tthhee mmaakkiinnggss ooff iiddeennttiittyy;;PPoorrttuugguueessee--AAmmeerriiccaannss aalloonngg tthhee eeaasstteerrnn sseeaabbooaarrdd..Title main entry. Ed. by Kimberly DaCosta Holton & Andrea Klimt.(Portuguese in the Americas series; 12)Ctr. for Portuguese Studies, ©2009 650 p. $25.00 (pa)Presented by Holton (Rutgers U.) and Klimt (U. of MassachusettsDartmouth), 20 chapters explore the Portuguese-American experiencethrough anthropological and sociological lenses, limiting the focus todiasporic experiences in East Coast communities (“in order to extend theethnographic depth of the collection”). Examples of topics discussedinclude the construction of class, ethnicity, and nationalism amongPortuguese immigrants; folklore performance and transmigration inPortuguese Newark; images of the Virgin in Portuguese art at the NewarkMuseum; the politics of Diário de Notícias, the Portuguese-languagenewspaper of New Bedford; Portuguese-Americans and social mobility;the political culture of Portuguese-Americans in southeasternMassachusetts; the role of the school in the maintenance and change ofethnic group affiliation; Portuguese labor activism in southeasternMassachusetts; working class kin networks and family strategies in NewEngland; the interplay of gender, ethnicity, and class in the unionizationof an electronics factory; narratives of race and ethnicity in the CapeVerdean diaspora; memories of Africa among Portuguese Retornados inNewark; and issues of race, nationality, and identity in the Cape Verdeancommunity. Published by the Center for Portuguese Studies & Culture, U.of Massachusetts Dartmouth.

E184 2009-038443 978-0-8214-1821-5CCoonnttoouurrss ooff wwhhiittee eetthhnniicciittyy;; ppooppuullaarr eetthhnnooggrraapphhyy aanndd tthheemmaakkiinngg ooff uussaabbllee ppaassttss iinn GGrreeeekk AAmmeerriiccaa..Anagnostou, Yiorgos.Ohio University Press, ©2009 284 p. $24.95 (pa)In the early twentieth century when there was an influx of immigrantsto America from places such as Greece, Italy, Eastern Europe, Jewishshtetels and Armenia, the new arrivals were not considered “white” bythe Americans of Northern European descent. Even Irish Catholics wereseen as a separate race. Now the majority of their descendents considerthemselves part of white America. Their ties to the land of their ancestorsare mostly cultural: food, festivals, music etc. Anagnostou (modern Greekand ethnic studies, the Ohio State University) investigates why theseethnic groups became white and what it means for inter-racial relations.Using Greek-Americans as an example, he finds that ethnic groups con-struct their own histories without recourse to historical facts, creating animage of a glorious past. By doing this they ignore the repression,poverty and discrimination that most of their families were fleeing. Hisconclusion is that “white” ethnic groups need to become aware of theirtrue history in order to open themselves to an empathy with the plightof others. For this to occur, much more work need to be done, both inthe academic and popular traditions.

E184 2009-035995 978-1-59332-343-1CCuullttuurraall cciittiizzeennsshhiipp aanndd iimmmmiiggrraanntt ccoommmmuunniittyy iiddeennttiittyy;;ccoonnssttrruuccttiinngg aa mmuullttii--eetthhnniicc AAssiiaann AAmmeerriiccaann ccoommmmuunniittyy..Kang, Hye-Kyung. (The new Americans: recent immigration andAmerican society)LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2010 190 p. $62.00Kang (social work, Smith College) draws on poststructural theories of dis-course to investigate the role of cultural citizenship in the construction ofimmigrant communities. Taking as a case study Seattle, where she livedon arriving from Korea and has practiced as a social worker, sheexamines the particular social, political, and historical contexts withinwhich the discourse of a particular multi-ethnic Asian American com-munity arose. Her topics are immigrant community and identity and cul-tural citizenship, poststructural and postcolonial theories, criticaldiscourse analysis, the defining moment, and what is in a name.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –64–

E184 2009-046475 978-0-313-34749-8EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff AAssiiaann AAmmeerriiccaann iissssuueess ttooddaayy;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Edith Wen-Chu Chen and Grace J. Yoo.Greenwood Press, ©2010 1005 p. $180.00This two-volume encyclopedia is a general reference work accessible tostudents at the high school level and above and to general readers. It willbe useful as a starting point for research as well as an overview of issuesfor professionals who work in education or social and public services.The introductory essay addresses the diversity of Asian Americans andsome entrenched myths about the “model minority,” as well as risingconcerns and the increased need for dialogue. Following are 151 essays,which, happily, are organized by theme rather than alphabetically (acumbersome scheme inexplicably used in many references). The thematicarrangement simply offers a much more cohesive presentation. Groupingof the entries is in sections pertaining to diversity and demographics;economy and work; education; health; identity; immigration, refugees,and citizenship; law; media; politics; war; and youth, family, and theaged. Each section begins with an overview and concludes with aresource guide. Enhancing the contents are biographical sidebars, quota-tions, statistics, some b&w photos, and examination of the 2007 USCensus Bureau’s American Community Survey. General editors Wen-ChuChen (Asian American studies, California State U., Northridge) and GraceJ. Yoo (Asian American studies, San Francisco State U.) have overseen theefforts of a long list of section editors and contributors.

E184 2009-018001 978-0-451-22805-5GGrroowwiinngg AAmmeerriiccaann rroooottss;; wwhhyy oouurr nnaattiioonn wwiillll tthhrriivvee aassoouurr llaarrggeesstt mmiinnoorriittyy fflloouurriisshheess..Menendez, Bob.Celebra, ©2009 242 p. $24.95At 46 million, Hispanics are the largest minority in the US, about 15% ofthe US population. Author Senator Menendez is the first person ofHispanic ethnicity to represent New Jersey in the US Senate, and only thesixth Hispanic in history to serve in the Senate. Here, he calls for majorchanges in immigration laws and healthcare for immigrants. He offers aportrait of the Hispanic population in the US, using statistics to demon-strate that millions of Latinos are going to college and serving in publicoffices, and makes recommendations for improving education,healthcare, and elder care. An appendix of statistics is included. There isno subject index.

E184 2009-034290 978-1-58834-271-3IInnddiiVViissiibbllee;; AAffrriiccaann--NNaattiivvee AAmmeerriiccaann lliivveess iinn tthheeAAmmeerriiccaass..Title main entry. Ed. by Gabrielle Tayac.Nat’l Mus. of the Amer. Indian, ©2009 256 p. $19.95 (pa)A historian with the National Museum of the American Indian (NMAI),Tayac has curated a collection of 27 articles that examine the intersec-tions of African and Native American lives and identities. Contributorsexplore topics including how Native Americans and African Americanswere affected by Jim Crow; the difficult questions of race and citizenshipbeing dealt with by the Cherokee Nation; Native Americans in jazz, blues,and popular music; DNA and Native American identity; and the culturalidentity of Afro-Bolivians. Another beautifully designed volume fromNMAI, this book will have wide appeal, especially to African Americanand Native American readers.

E184 2009-051136 978-0-13-714503-4PPeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn hhuummaann ddiiffffeerreenncceess;; sseelleecctteedd rreeaaddiinnggss oonnddiivveerrssiittyy iinn AAmmeerriiccaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Kent L. Koppelman.Prentice Hall, ©2011 360 p. $49.33 (pa)Koppelman (education, U. of Wisconsin-La Crosse) compiles a set of 65essays, book excerpts, and short stories that bring up issues of diversityfrom different perspectives, for students in teacher education courses.Written by teachers, scientists, national and international fiction writers,feminists, journalists, historians, sociologists, teacher educators, psychol-ogists, linguists, and community organizers like Gloria Steinem, bellhooks, Studs Terkel, Leo Tolstoy, Jonathan Kozol, and Barack Obama, thereadings tackle such issues as race, poverty and class, disability, immi-gration and multiculturalism, sexuality, gender, and religion, with eachsection including readings directly related to schools.

E184 2009-034237 978-1-60709-257-5WWiittnneessssiinngg wwhhiitteenneessss;; tthhee nneeeedd ttoo ttaallkk aabboouutt rraaccee aannddhhooww ttoo ddoo iitt,, 22dd eedd..Tochluk, Shelly.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 277 p. $27.95 (pa)Tochluk (education, Mount St. Mary’s College and educator diversitytraining) wrote this book with the intent that it begin a dialogue onissues of racism and white privilege and contribute to a more equitableand just society. The author notes that while the book’s issues areaddressed to white people, people of color also may benefit from readingit to help resolve those issues from both perspectives.

E185 2009-049683 978-1-59884-123-7AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaannss iinn tthhee nniinneetteeeenntthh cceennttuurryy;; ppeeooppllee aannddppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Dixie Ray Haggard and Peter C. Mancall.(Perspectives in American social history)ABC-CLIO, ©2010 258 p. $85.00Scholars of history and literature examine African American society andhow it intersected with that of other groups during the century dividedby the abolition of legal slavery. Among their topics are African andAfrican Americans to the 1820s, an intricate look at black female slaves,uncovering the true relationship between masters and slaves, AfricanAmericans make the Civil War a struggle for freedom, African Americanresponses to early Jim Crow, agriculture, The West, Black Indians asAmerica’s forgotten people, and African American leaders.

E185 2009-051217 978-0-275-98524-0TThhee BBllaacckk eexxppeerriieennccee iinn tthhee CCiivviill WWaarr SSoouutthh..Ash, Stephen V. (Reflections on the Civil War era)Praeger, ©2010 127 p. $44.95Drawing from memoirs, autobiographies, and other sources, Ash(history, U. of Tennessee in Knoxville) provides a comprehensive study ofthe Southern black experience of the Civil War, for scholars, students, andCivil War buffs. Organized by theme, chapters examine the lives ofblacks in the Confederate states and the non-seceding Southern states; onfarms and plantations and in towns and cities; in industry and the mil-itary; and black men, women, and children. This includes blacks whoresided in Union “contraband camps” and on free-labor plantations,those in the Union army, those who escaped from slavery, and the smallminority of Southern blacks who were free when the war started. Hedoes not discuss the Confederacy movement to reform slavery or the late-war movement to recruit slaves as Confederate soldiers.

E185 2009-000770 978-0-8135-4602-5BBllaacckk sseexxuuaalliittiieess;; pprroobbiinngg ppoowweerrss,, ppaassssiioonnss,, pprraaccttiicceess,, aannddppoolliicciieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Juan Battle and Sandra L. Barnes.Rutgers U. Press, ©2010 462 p. $32.95 (pa)Editors Battle (sociology, City U. of New York), Barnes (human and orga-nizational development sociology, divinity, Vanderbilt U.), and 28 co-con-tributors focus on black sexuality of all kinds—gay, lesbian, straight. Theindividual authors bring a wide range of perspectives to this study, butit is arranged into five general themes: identity theories and new frame-works; descriptions, depictions, and responses; citizenship, activism, andlegal dynamics, negotiating systematic and personal stresses; and the lifecourse.

E185 2009-042839 978-0-313-36009-1TThhee ccuullttuurraall rriigghhttss mmoovveemmeenntt;; ffuullffiilllliinngg tthhee pprroommiissee ooffcciivviill rriigghhttss ffoorr AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaannss..Bailey, Eric J.Praeger, ©2010 189 p. $44.95Fearing that the election of Barack Obama as president, although hailedfar and wide as a historic moment in American race relations and inti-mated by others, including Obama himself, as the culmination the CivilRights Movement, portends little in terms of the actual economic andpolitical practices impacting African American communities in theUnited States, Bailey (anthropology and public health, East Carolina U.)takes stock of current conditions and initiatives in the realms of edu-cation, medical care, policing, reparations issues, and black and whiterace relations and compares responses to these issues by the Civil RightsMovement to those of Obama (with Bailey frequently working in his ownpersonal experiences of the civil rights era). In the end, he proposes theneed for a reinvigorated “cultural rights” movement, which he defines as“as system of shared beliefs, values, and traditions associated with agroup of people of common background that is passed down from gen-eration to generation through a process of learning to assert one’s rightsas a human being.”

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–65–

E185 2009-022179 978-0-674-03570-6DDaarrkkeerr tthhaann bblluuee;; oonn tthhee mmoorraall eeccoonnoommiieess ooff BBllaacckkAAttllaannttiicc ccuullttuurree..Gilroy, Paul. (W.E.B. Du Bois lectures)Belknap Press, ©2010 207 p. $22.95With a particular focus on music (the title is a reference to a classicCurtis Mayfield song), Gilroy (social theory, London School of Economics,UK) assesses the moral economy of African American culture and itsplace in relation to wider concerns raised by a range of critical theorists,including Michel Foucault, Hannah Arendt, Primo Levi, and FrantzFanon. The material originated as a series of lectures delivered ten yearsago as part of a reassessment of the intellectual and political legacy ofW. E. B. Du Bois. Belknap Press is an imprint of Harvard U. Press.

E185 2009-051262 978-1-85109-769-2EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaann hhiissttoorryy;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Leslie M. Alexander and Walter C. Rucker.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 1231 p. $295.00Prepared as a resource for students, high-school level and above, and forgeneral readers, this thoughtfully conceived three-volume reference isstructured around four thematic sections, each of which begins with anextended essay of 5,000 words. The themes are as follows: AtlanticAfrican, American, and European backgrounds to contact, commerce,and enslavement; political activity and resistance to oppression—from theAmerican Revolution to the Civil War; culture, identity, and community—from slavery to the present; and political activity, migration, and urban-ization—Reconstruction, civil rights, and modern African America.Within these sections are 650 alphabetically-arranged essays ranging inlength from 300 to 4,000 words. The entries include cross references andbibliographies and have been written with clarity and accuracy and withexplanations (not editorializing) suitable for intelligent non-specialists.Editor Alexander identifies his political and intellectual “home” as theAfricana Studies and Research Center at Cornell U., but both he and co-editor Rucker are affiliated with The Ohio State U., Columbus (theirfields are, respectively, history, and African American and Africanstudies). They have shaped the contributions of more than 100 scholarsto present a multi-faceted history that extends to the present day—although they acknowledge somewhat lighter treatment of current times(for example, Obama’s election is included, but not Hurricane Katrina orMichael Jackson’s death). The encyclopedia includes numerous b&willustrations and is thoroughly indexed.

E185 978-1-60488-021-2MMaallccoollmm XX,, BBllaacckk lliibbeerraattiioonn,, aanndd tthhee rrooaadd ttoo wwoorrkkeerrssppoowweerr..Barns, Jack.Pathfinder Press, ©2009 413 p. $20.00 (pa)This book examines the life and work of Malcolm X, placing his effortsto achieve black liberation into the context of a larger revolutionarystruggle for socialism and analyzing current events in terms of theirpotential for black liberation. Author Barnes is a leader of the SocialistWorkers Party, and the political perspective of his essays (which make upmost of the book) is one not usually included in U.S. political discourse.For example, Barnes argues that Malcolm X “was a revolutionary leaderof the working class in the United States.” A degree of patience with thehigh level of political jargon will reward readers looking for little knownaspects of Malcolm’s political views and the leadership place African-Americans have taken at the forefront of working-class and popularstruggles from the Civil War to the present day. The inclusion of Barnes’1965 interview with Malcolm adds interest to the book, as does a col-lection of 130 pages of photos and drawings that illustrate the deter-mined and combative face of the Black struggle.

E185 2009-019223 978-1-933202-44-0OOlldd SSoouutthh,, nneeww SSoouutthh,, oorr ddoowwnn SSoouutthh??;; FFlloorriiddaa aanndd tthheemmooddeerrnn cciivviill rriigghhttss eerraa..Title main entry. Ed. by Irvin D.S. Winsboro.West Virginia University Press, ©2009 260 p. $24.95 (pa)Florida has a reputation among many of having experienced andemerged from the Civil Rights era as a “moderate” state in comparisonto its southern neighbors. The nine essays presented here by Winsboro(history, Florida Gulf Coast U.) problematize that reputation, examiningsuch topics the 1960 and 1964 race riots in Jacksonville, white supremacyand black agency in 20th century Miami, local-state cooperation instonewalling desegregation following the Civil Rights Act of 1964,struggles to desegregate Daytona Beach, the legal battle over desegre-gating the U. of Florida’s law school, civil rights struggles in the agricul-tural sector, the work of the social and agricultural organizations ofland-owning black farmers from 1945 to 1960, the desegregation ofpublic schools in Palm Beach County, and the role of racism and whitesupremacy in the gubernatorial election of 1964.

E185 2009-031042 978-0-8139-2887-6PPaarraalllleell wwoorrllddss;; tthhee rreemmaarrkkaabbllee GGiibbbbss--HHuunnttss aanndd tthheeeenndduurriinngg ((iinn))ssiiggnniiffiiccaannccee ooff mmeellaanniinn..Alexander, Adele Logan.U. of Virginia Press, ©2010 375 p. $29.95In this dual biography, Alexander (history, George Washington U.) tellsthe story of William Henry Hunt (d. 1951) and Ida Alexander Gibbs(1862-1957), who married in 1904. As they both had mixed-race back-grounds, they were classified as Negroes and treated as inferior inAmerica during this time, yet they thrived internationally, as Hunt wasin the foreign service in Paris, Madagascar, and other posts, and Gibbsran in circles with influential African Americans like Frederick Douglassand Booker T. Washington, advocated against race and gender inequities,and participated in W.E.B. Du Bois’s Pan-African Congresses. Alexanderaddresses the impact of race in their lives, and class, gender, place, andtheir family backgrounds.

E185 2009-044476 978-0-415-99207-7RRaacciisstt AAmmeerriiccaa;; rroooottss,, ccuurrrreenntt rreeaalliittiieess,, aanndd ffuuttuurreerreeppaarraattiioonnss,, 22dd eedd..Feagin, Joe R.Routledge, ©2010 360 p. $29.95 (pa)Despite assertions that the election of Barack Obama proves that we nowlive in a “post-racial” society, Feagin (Texas A&M U.) insists that we stilllive in a society plagued by systemic racism, which “includes the complexarray of antiblack practices, the unjustly gained political-economic powerof whites, the continuing economic and other resource inequalities alongracial lines, and the emotion-laden racist framing created by whites tomaintain and rationalize their privilege and power.” In this book, hedescribes and theorizes the historical development and social repro-duction of systemic racism in the United States, in addition to discussingits characteristics in everyday practice.

E185 2009-018944 978-1-4263-0595-5TThhee ssppiieess ooff MMiissssiissssiippppii;; tthhee ttrruuee ssttoorryy ooff tthhee ssppyy nneettwwoorrkktthhaatt ttrriieedd ttoo ddeessttrrooyy tthhee cciivviill rriigghhttss mmoovveemmeenntt..Bowers, Rick.National Geographic Society, ©120 120 p. $16.95In 1956, at the height of the civil rights era, the Mississippi StateSovereignty Commission was created to counter the movement for racialintegration. Bowers, a career journalist, chronicles 10 years of the com-mission’s propaganda campaigns, bribery, and its collection of files on87,000 citizens and organizations including freedom riders and protestmarchers. In addition to the commission’s archives (opened in 1998), theauthor draws on interviews with protesters, the personal papers of state’selected leaders, and articles from the period. The book’s accessible lan-guage, short chapters, and eye-friendly layout will appeal to all ages ofgeneral readers and students in high school and up. B&w historicalphotos show material from files and propaganda billboards. Anappendix of document facsimiles is also included.

E185 2009-035237 978-0-674-03626-0WWee aaiinn’’tt wwhhaatt wwee oouugghhtt ttoo bbee;; tthhee BBllaacckk ffrreeeeddoomm ssttrruugggglleeffrroomm eemmaanncciippaattiioonn ttoo OObbaammaa..Tuck, Stephen.Belknap Press, ©2010 494 p. $29.95This is a narrative history of the long struggle for meaningful freedomfor African Americans in the United States, from the Civil War to thepresent. Tuck (American history, Oxford U., UK) thematically grounds hisdiscussion on the competing societal forces involved in the struggle andalso seeks to overturn many of the misconceptions about the history ofstruggle that obtain from standard narratives. He notes, for example, thatthe struggle involved: local efforts, not just national leadership; violenceas well as non-violence; secular and not just religious figures; global andnot just national connections; demands for economic rights in additionto civil rights; and calls for separate black social institutions, as well asintegration. Belknap Press is an imprint of Harvard U. Press.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –66–

E207 2009-025054 978-0-8130-3433-1CCoommmmooddoorree AAbbrraahhaamm WWhhiippppllee ooff tthhee CCoonnttiinneennttaall NNaavvyy;;pprriivvaatteeeerr,, ppaattrriioott,, ppiioonneeeerr..Cohen, Sheldon S. (New perspectives on maritime history and nauticalarchaeology)U. Press of Florida, ©2010 232 p. $69.95Cohen (history, Loyola U., Chicago) offers a much-needed biography ofContinental Navy officer Abraham Whipple (1733-1819), who com-manded insurgents who destroyed the British Schooner Gaspee in theNarragansett Bay and helped direct the successful invasion of theBahamas during the American Revolution. The biography details his lifeand family history, his reliance on personal finances and family connec-tions to outfit his ships and pay his crew, his attempt to receive wartimecompensation from the government, his testimony at a hearing before aVice-Admiralty court in New York after his capture as a rebel, his servicein the Rhode Island legislature, his experiences as master of a tradingvessel, and how he and his family founded the town of Marietta in theOhio Territory. In doing so, Cohen distinguishes between his actualachievements and the incorrect assertions made by his descendants.

E209 2009-024995 978-1-59102-763-8TThhee AAmmeerriiccaann RReevvoolluuttiioonn;; aa ggrraanndd mmiissttaakkee..Stauber, Leland G.Prometheus Books, ©2010 292 p. $27.00Stauber, a retired professor of political science at Southern Illinois U.-Carbondale, examines the American Revolution from the perspective thatAmerica’s independence from Britain was premature and that the expe-rience of Canada is a better example. He points out the negative conse-quences of early independence: slavery, which was outlawed in Britainin 1833; an inadequate and rigid constitution; problems with theAmerican system of government; and the American suspicion of a strongcentral government. He discusses the British tradition of governmentbefore the revolution; Canadian, Australian, and other governments ofBritish colonies; the background and course of the revolution; and itsconsequences in America and abroad.

E210 2009-039635 978-1-57233-671-1CCoommmmoonn bboonnddaaggee;; ssllaavveerryy aass mmeettaapphhoorr iinn rreevvoolluuttiioonnaarryyAAmmeerriiccaa..Dorsey, Peter A.U. of Tennessee Press, ©2009 276 p. $43.95Dorsey (English, Mt. Saint Mary’s U.) explores the persistence of theslavery metaphor within the discourse of the American Revolution (manyof the key figures of which were, of course, slaveholders). Rather thanseeking a single, overarching interpretation of the metaphor, he examineswhat the slavery metaphor reveals about how the American revolution-aries thought about the institution of slavery and, in particular, how theuse of the metaphor itself helped transform thinking among some revo-lutionaries about the institution or at least caused a number of AmericanWhigs to incorporate anti-slavery statements into their public and privatedocuments, even if their antislavery positions proved to be opportunisticand quick to ebb once the Revolution was over.

E249 2009-024319 978-0-8139-2864-7RReevvoolluuttiioonnaarryy nneeggoottiiaattiioonnss;; IInnddiiaannss,, eemmppiirreess,, aannddddiipplloommaattss iinn tthhee ffoouunnddiinngg ooff AAmmeerriiccaa..Sadosky, Leonard J. (Jeffersonian America)U. of Virginia Press, ©2009 275 p. $40.00Sadosky (history, Iowa State U.) places the founding of the US in thecontext of international politics, pointing out that the republic was con-sidered marginal at best and unviable by many for its first half-century.He considers North American diplomacy within the British Empire, theAmerican decision to leave the British Empire, imagining and realizingan independent America, the diplomatic imperative for the federal con-stitution, the ambiguous triumph of federalist statecraft, and the triumphof the diplomacy of conquest. The study began as his Ph.D. dissertationat the University of Virginia.

E359 2010-002293 978-0-7864-4792-3TThhee WWaarr ooff 11881122 iinn ppeerrssoonn;; ffiifftteeeenn aaccccoouunnttss bbyy UUnniitteeddSSttaatteess AArrmmyy rreegguullaarrss,, vvoolluunntteeeerrss,, aanndd mmiilliittiiaammeenn..Title main entry. Ed. by John C. Fredriksen.McFarland & Co., ©2010 324 p. $45.00 (pa)The diaries, memoirs, and letters have all been published before, butnever together to provide a kaleidoscopic view of the first foreign warconducted by the newborn republic. The regular soldiers include officersand enlisted men from the infantry, artillery, and dragoons. The four vol-unteers served in the Kentucky Mounted Riflemen, the New HampshireVolunteers, Fenton’s Pennsylvania Volunteers, and the Pittsburgh Blues.The accounts tend to reinforce the popular and academic views that thewar against Britain was not well planned or pursued.

E449 2009-038719 978-0-313-31988-4TThhee FFrreeddeerriicckk DDoouuggllaassss eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Julius E. Thompson et al.Greenwood Press, ©2010 246 p. $85.00The achievements, contributions, and body of work by towering AfricanAmerican activist and abolitionist Douglass (1818-95) are described forstudents, scholars, and the general public. Over 100 contributors discusssuch topics as African American presses, Black existentialism,Christianity, the Compromise of 1850, Jefferson Davis (1808-89), theEmancipation Proclamation, the Fugitive Slave Act, Harpers Ferry,lynchings 1882-95, Narrative of the Life of Frederick Douglass, North Star,the Seneca Falls Convention, Harriet Tubman (1820-1913), “What to theSlave is Your Fourth of July? (The Meaning of July Fourth for the Negro),”and women’s suffrage. Each article is bylined and thoroughly referenced;the cross-referencing is extensive.

E449 2009-032955 978-0-87286-527-3NNaarrrraattiivvee ooff tthhee lliiffee ooff FFrreeddeerriicckk DDoouuggllaassss,, aann AAmmeerriiccaannssllaavvee,, wwrriitttteenn bbyy hhiimmsseellff;; aa nneeww ccrriittiiccaall eeddiittiioonn bbyy AAnnggeellaaYY.. DDaavviiss ffeeaattuurriinngg hheerr ‘‘LLeeccttuurreess oonn lliibbeerraattiioonn””.. ((rreepprriinntt,,11996699))Douglass, Frederick. Ed. by Angela Y. Davis. (Open media series)City Lights Books, ©2010 254 p. $12.95 (pa)Frederick Douglass’ 1845 account of how, as a young slave, he taughthimself to read and, as a result, began resisting his white slavemastersto ultimately escape and achieve freedom is a classic of African Americanliterature and an important document in U.S. history. This new editionof the Narrative includes a critical introduction by Angela Davis (Historyof Consciousness [emerita], University of California, Santa Cruz) and hertwo 1969 “Lectures on Liberation,” in which she focused on Douglass’intellectual and spiritual awakening, and on the importance of self-knowledge in achieving freedom from oppression. Not indexed.

E450 2009-020146 978-0-252-07688-6FFrreeeeiinngg CChhaarrlleess;; tthhee ssttrruuggggllee ttoo ffrreeee aa ssllaavvee oonn tthhee eevvee oofftthhee CCiivviill WWaarr..Christianson, Scott. (The new Black studies series)U. of Illinois Press, ©2010 214 p. $24.95 (pa)Author Christianson tells the engaging story of captured Virginia fugitiveslave Charles Nalle and those who helped him on his way to freedom.Nalle had been aided in his initial escape from slavery by theUnderground Railroad, captured, and then forcibly freed by HarrietTubman and others in New York in 1860. It’s a well-written, well-researched story that says as much about the tormented race relations inslavery-era America as it does about the men and women who helpedhim.

E450 2009-054188 978-0-7864-3791-7TThhee uunnddeerrggrroouunndd rraaiillrrooaadd oonn tthhee wweesstteerrnn ffrroonnttiieerr;;eessccaappeess ffrroomm MMiissssoouurrii,, AArrkkaannssaass,, IIoowwaa aanndd tthhee tteerrrriittoorriieessooff KKaannssaass,, NNeebbrraasskkaa aanndd tthhee IInnddiiaann nnaattiioonnss,, 11884400--11886655..Morgans, James Patrick.McFarland & Co., ©2010 221 p. $55.00A library consultant in Council Bluffs, Iowa as well as author, Morgansnotes that most traffic through the region and period he defines wasgoing west to settle new territories such as Utah, Washington, Oregon,and of course California. But there was another current, heading northto freedom across the Canadian border, and that is the one he teases outfrom obscure sources such as runaway slave advertisements in news-papers, articles from Canadian newspapers about people who made it,letters, reminiscences, books, and narratives by and about escapees. Aparticular rich vein, he says, are interviews with over 2,000 former slavesconducted as part of the Works Project Administration Federal Writers’Project during the 1930s. He tells as much of each story as he can find.His chapters include hemp and Little Dixie empires in Missouri, libertyvia steamboat in Arkansas, fleeing from farms and plantations, andOklahoma.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–67–

We're always delighted to hear from our readers. Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.

E457 2009-038498 978-1-59158-902-0AAbbrraahhaamm LLiinnccoollnn aanndd hhiiss eerraa;; uussiinngg tthhee AAmmeerriiccaannmmeemmoorryy pprroojjeecctt ttoo tteeaacchh wwiitthh pprriimmaarryy ssoouurrcceess..Ireland, Bobbi.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 125 p. $30.00 (pa)School librarians and teachers of grades 4-8 will find about 20 lessonplans based on written documents and other primary sources related toAbraham Lincoln and his time. The primary sources used can all befound in the Library of Congress’ American Memory Collection, and thebook’s introduction offers some basic tips on navigating and using theLibrary of Congress web site and the collection. Each lesson is centeredon a document or other resource found in the collection, and includesobjectives, notes on time required, instructions for preparation, directionsfor activities and extensions, reproducibles, and a rubric for evaluation.Ireland holds teaching certificates in Early Childhood, Elementary, andSpecial Education. Libraries Unlimited is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

E459 2009-046113 978-0-275-99095-4PPoolliittiiccss aanndd AAmmeerriiccaa iinn ccrriissiiss;; tthhee ccoommiinngg ooff tthhee CCiivviillWWaarr..Green, Michael S. (Reflections on the Civil War era)Praeger, ©2010 190 p. $44.95Green (history, College of Southern Nevada) has written widely on 19th-century America and the Western history. Here he synthesizes the pol-itics of the decade and a half before the Civil War. He writes specificallyfor undergraduates and general readers, but suggests that the coverage isthorough enough to be useful to graduates and advanced scholars aswell. In the 1840s, he says, the country was humming along—theeconomy was good, there was peace with Europe, Louisiana was boughtand paid for, those pesky Indians had been chased off, and LatinAmerica was developing as an exploitable hinterland for US industry.There was one little problem, slavery, which grew steadily until it domi-nated politics, casting all else into shadow. He traces the history from thecracking of old coalitions; the compromise of 1850 and its aftermath;bleeding parties, bleeding Kansas, and bleeding Sumner; a new pres-ident, a new party and a new constitutional clash; great and greaterdebates; and purging the land with blood.

E467 2007-011375 978-0-8061-4121-3GGeeoorrggee TThhoommaass,, VViirrggiinniiaann ffoorr tthhee UUnniioonn.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Einolf, Christopher J. (Campaigns and commanders; v.13)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 415 p. $19.95 (pa)It would not have been remarkable if Thomas had resigned his com-mission with the US Army at the opening the Civil War and joined theConfederacy, but he was remarkable for remaining with the Union andfighting valiantly at Chickamauga and Nashville. Even more remarkablewas his transition from slave holder to strong supporter of civil rights.Einolf (U. of Richmond) has written an accessible and objective biog-raphy that allows Thomas to speak through his own documents. Einolfalso provides plenty of context and allows readers to come to their ownconclusions about why Thomas rebelled against his Southern heritageand fight his relations and friends. He traces Thomas’s career fromVirginia across the US several times to West Point to the decision thatmade him a Yankee. He also traces the ramifications of Thomas’s deci-sions and the remarkably short shrift he has received from other histo-rians. Includes very good photos and illustrations.

E468 2009-022898 978-1-55728-913-1PPoorrttrraaiittss ooff ccoonnfflliicctt;; aa pphhoottooggrraapphhiicc hhiissttoorryy ooff MMiissssoouurrii iinntthhee CCiivviill WWaarr..Piston, William Garrett and Thomas P. Sweeney. (Portraits of conflictseries)U. of Arkansas Pr., ©2009 347 p. $65.00Although more Civil War fighting occurred in Missouri than anywhereoutside Virginia and Tennessee, the war’s events in this border state isnowhere near as well known. For this book, a retired physician andamateur historian (Sweeney) and a history professor at Missouri StateUniversity (Piston) have assembled hundreds of Civil War-era photo-graphs (many published here for the first time), revealing much aboutmilitary activities in Missouri (both the “official” battles and the viciousguerilla war) and providing a literal glimpse into the eyes of many com-batants. Sweeney’s medical expertise gives added depth to the chapter onCivil War medicine.

E470 2009-017622 978-0-8061-4087-2CCiivviill WWaarr AArrkkaannssaass,, 11886633;; tthhee bbaattttllee ffoorr aa ssttaattee..Christ, Mark K. (Campaigns & commanders; 23)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 321 p. $34.95A director with the state’s Historic Preservation Program and member ofits Civil War Sesquicentennial Commission, Christ examines the strugglefor the Arkansas River Valley in 1863, which at great cost led to thereturn of Unionist state government and US control of everything northof the river. He draws from letters and diaries of men who campaignedin Arkansas and of civilians and politicians who were affected, to narratesuch aspects as the Battle of Arkansas Post, Holmes moves to theoffensive, the campaign to capture Little Rock, the Western ArkansasRiver Valley, and the Battle of Pine Bluff. A few photographs and mapsare included.

E487 2009-037034 978-0-275-99409-9TThhee CCoonnffeeddeerraaccyy;; tthhee ssllaavveehhoollddeerrss’’ ffaaiilleedd vveennttuurree..Escott, Paul D. (Reflections on the civil war era)Praeger, ©2010 175 p. $34.95Escott (history, Wake Forest U.) examines the Civil War from the per-spective of the Southern elite class, who wanted to preserve its slave-based economy yet were dependent on ordinary Southerners, slaves, andwomen to sustain the fight for them. While discussing the militarybattles, political dilemmas, and the leadership decisions of JeffersonDavis, he explores the racial, class, gender, and political conflicts thatdestabilized the Confederacy from within, and how the South’s politicaland economic elite made many damaging errors.

E497 2009-042732 978-0-89863-326-9TThhee CCiivviill WWaarr;; nnoorrtthheerrnn CCaalliiffoorrnniiaa’’ss uunnrreeccooggnniizzeedd vvaalloorr..Edmonds, John G.Star Publishing Company, ©2010 197 p. $32.95 (pa)Although few people realize it, more than 15,000 Californians fought forthe Union in the Civil War. California units were responsible for securingthe mail route from the eastern states from Salt Lake to San Francisco,and a California regiment blocked a potential advance by theConfederacy into the West. This easy to read book details NorthernCalifornia’s involvement in the Civil War, and introduces readers to thewar heroes who came from the region.

E541 2009-022556 978-1-57233-682-7CCrriimmssoonn CCoonnffeeddeerraatteess;; HHaarrvvaarrdd mmeenn wwhhoo ffoouugghhtt ffoorr tthheeSSoouutthh..Trimpi, Helen P.U. of Tennessee Press, ©2010 380 p. $59.00Harvard College, Law School, Medical School, and Lawrence ScientificSchool produced 357 alumni who fought for the South in the Civil War.This work presents biographies of all of these “Crimson Confederates”.Entries focus on their military careers; each entry contains detailed noteson sources. An introduction surveys Union and Confederate research atHarvard from 1865 to 2003. The book includes a few b&w historicalphotos. Trimpi has written other historical works.

E664 2009-029113 978-1-4384-3182-6KKiinngg ooff tthhee BBoowweerryy;; BBiigg TTiimm SSuulllliivvaann,, TTaammmmaannyy HHaallll,,aanndd NNeeww YYoorrkk CCiittyy ffrroomm tthhee GGiillddeedd AAggee ttoo tthheePPrrooggrreessssiivvee EErraa.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Welch, Richard F.Excelsior Editions, ©2010 222 p. $16.95 (pa)Although he’s barely remembered now, the presence of “Big Tim”Sullivan loomed large over New York City and the urban politics of theyears between 1890 and 1914. Welch (American History and Irish History,Long Island University) presents the first book-length biography ofSullivan, showing his rise from the squalid Five Points to control of theLower East Side and, ultimately, all of New York City. This account showsSullivan as a complicated man: a vice lord whose generosity and largessetowards his supporter was legendary; and a corrupt Tammany Hallpolitician who nonetheless was a strong supporter of the progressivereforms of the early 20th century. Welch’s accessible writing style makesthis well-researched book a pleasant read. It will appeal to readers inter-ested in the history of New York or in urban politics. (Excelsior Editionsis an imprint of Sate University of New York Press)

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –68–

E742 91-50299 978-0-8061-4125-1FFDDRR’’ss ffiirreessiiddee cchhaattss..Roosevelt, Franklin D. Ed. by Russell D. Buhite and David W. Levy.(reprint, 1992)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 326 p. $19.95 (pa)Thirty-one times during his long presidency, Franklin Roosevelt spokedirectly to the American people over the radio. Known as FDR’s “firesidechats,” these talks helped reassure Americans during the greatest eco-nomic collapse in U.S. history, and mobilized listeners to help re-start theeconomy and, later, to fight the Axis powers during the Second WorldWar. This book assembles the full texts of all of the fireside chats for thefirst time, and provides introductions that place each chat into itspolitical and historical context. This volume is a must-have for anyserious collection on U.S. history.

E742 93-84144 978-0-87348-770-2NNootteebbooookk ooff aann aaggiittaattoorr,, 33dd eedd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999933))Cannon, James P.Pathfinder Press, ©2009 490 p. $26.00 (pa)James P. Cannon (1890-1974) was an American socialist involved withvarious communist parties over the course of his life, in addition tohaving been an organizer with the radical union, the Industrial Workersof the World (the Wobblies). Having been expelled from the CommunistParty for supporting Leon Trotsky, he later became a founding memberand national chairman of the Socialist Workers Party of the United States.This volume collects a selection of Cannon’s journalistic writings fromover the course of three decades, chronologically ranging from a 1926Daily Worker article in support of the campaign to save anarchists Saccoand Vanzetti from execution on frame-up charges of robbery and murderto a 1956 tribute to a departed comrade. The writings address a broadrange of topics, prominent among them being unions, strikes, Stalinism,the Korean War, crime and punishment, the Catholic Church, andMcCarthyism.

E743 2009-037865 978-0-8014-7568-9IInn tthhee sshhaaddooww ooff FFDDRR;; ffrroomm HHaarrrryy TTrruummaann ttoo BBaarraacckkOObbaammaa,, 44tthh eedd..Leuchtenburg, William E.Cornell U. Press, ©2009 434 p. $24.95 (pa)Leuchtenburg (history, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) explores howthe legacies of Franklin Delano Roosevelt influenced the presidencies ofhis successors. He focuses on the Democratic presidents: Harry Truman,John F. Kennedy, Lyndon B. Johnson, Jimmy Carter, Bill Clinton, andBarack Obama (for the first 100 days). He does include some discussionof Dwight Eisenhower, Richard Nixon, and Gerald Ford, as well as amore substantial treatment of Ronald Reagan’s presidency. The focus isgenerally on the ways that the various presidents interpreted, echoed,and/or distanced themselves from the New Deal domestic policies of theRoosevelt administration.

E744 2009-012569 978-0-674-03553-9AAmmeerriiccaa’’ss CCoolldd WWaarr;; tthhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff iinnsseeccuurriittyy..Craig, Campbell and Fredrik Logevall.Belknap Press, ©2009 439 p. $26.95Craig (international politics, Aberystwyth U., UK) and Logevall (history,Cornell U., US) present a history of US foreign policy from the PearlHarbor attacks of 1941 to the demise of the Soviet Union in 1991. Whileof course not dismissing the role of international events in shaping USforeign policy, they elevate the role of domestic politics in their analysis,sometimes seeing it as the driving force and always understanding it asplaying at least a background role. They particularly focus on the role ofthe military-industrial complex identified by President Eisenhower in hisfinal address, as well as its congressional backers (Eisenhower in factoriginally dubbed it the military-industrial-congressional complex in anearlier draft of the speech), in expanding the Cold War beyond what theysee as the fairly limited containment strategy articulated by GeorgeKennan in 1946-1947, in promoting an addiction to military spending,and in narrowing the range of acceptable political debate. Belknap Pressis an imprint of Harvard U. Press.

E748 2009026496 978-0-87020-443-2GGaayylloorrdd NNeellssoonn;; cchhaammppiioonn ffoorr oouurr EEaarrtthh..Cohen, Sheila Terman. (Badger biographies series)Wisconsin Historical Society Press, ©2010 109 p. $12.95 (pa)As state senator, governor of Wisconsin, and US senator Nelson (1916-2005) was among the first and strongest proponents of environmentalregulation and protection, and started what is now the annual Earth Dayin 1970. Cohen narratives his life and career in the series for youngreaders. New terms are defined, and the pronunciation indicated, andboxes summarize historical events that are mentioned in the text. Otherfeatures include photographs, a glossary, discussion questions, achronology, and ideas for Earth Day activities.

E748 2009-050401 978-1-4128-0991-7TThhee ppoolliittiiccaall pprriinncciipplleess ooff RRoobbeerrtt AA.. TTaafftt..Kirk, Russell and James McClellan.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 213 p. $29.95 (pa)Conservative thinkers Kirk (1918-94) and McClellan (1937-2005) wrote thisaccount of Ohio senator Taft (1889-1953) to help invigorate the hard rightduring the 1968 presidential campaign, ushering in an era of that ledfrom Richard Nixon to George W. Bush. Among the principles they extolare foundations of democracy, liberty under law, the restraint of power,organized labor and the public interest, an economy humane and free,and a foreign policy for Americans. The 1967 edition was published byFleet Press Corporation in New York.

E843 2009-936122 978-0-7407-9372-1TThhee KKeennnneeddyyss;; AAmmeerriiccaa’’ss ffrroonntt--ppaaggee ffaammiillyy;; aa ccoolllleeccttiioonn ooffhhiissttoorriicc nneewwssppaappeerr ppaaggeess sseelleecctteedd bbyy TThhee PPooyynntteerrIInnssttiittuuttee..Title main entry.Andrews McMeel, ©2009 124 p. $16.99 (pa)Appealing to students and general readers, this 9x12″ book collects 144front-page newspaper pages (most in English, with a few foreign news-papers) with stories and photo spreads about the Kennedys over thedecades. Each front page facsimile is complete with its own color or b&wphotos. Because the type size is too small to read in the reproductions,each page also includes margin notes summarizing the event, quotesfrom Kennedy family members, and notes on other significant politicaland cultural events of the period. The articles are organized in chaptersby decade, from the 1960s to the 2000s, covering historical events,speeches, marriages, and other milestones from the political ascendanceof John F. Kennedy to the death of Senator Edward Kennedy. The bookconcludes with the complete text of four eulogies delivered by EdwardKennedy at services for family members, plus the eulogy delivered byPresident Obama at Senator Edward Kennedy’s funeral service.

E902 2009-024654 978-0-8047-6089-8JJuuddggiinngg BBuusshh..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Maranto et al. (Studies in the modernpresidency)Stanford U. Press, ©2009 332 p. $24.95 (pa)This collection represents an attempt to assess the legacy of the GeorgeW. Bush presidency, with editors Maranto (education reform, U. ofArkansas), Landford (political science, U. of Southern Mississippi), andJohnson (a doctoral candidate in political science at Brown U.) proposingthat presidencies should be judged according to strategic competence (thelong-term influence on the policy regime), political competence (theability to reshape the political regime), tactical competence (decision-making and the ability to carry out the basic duties of government), andmoral competence (ability to avoid scandal and engender trust). Theypresent 15 essays discussing the influence of Bush’s psyche on hisdecision making; the influence of Vice President Cheney; the Bushadministration’s use of executive powers; the influence of Bush on thepolitical institutions of the Republican Party, the Congress, the federalbureaucracy, and the judiciary; the Bush legacy in the policy realms ofeducation, economics, and “homeland security;” the Bush doctrine andforeign policy; and Bush in comparison to Ronald Reagan and BillClinton.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–69–

E903 2008-054832 978-0-7391-2571-7AA DDuubbyyaa iinn tthhee hheeaaddlliigghhttss;; PPrreessiiddeenntt GGeeoorrggee WW.. BBuusshh aannddtthhee mmeeddiiaa..Hayden, Joe.Lexington Books, ©2009 277 p. $75.00Hayden (journalism, U. of Memphis) examines the relationship of GeorgeW. Bush with the media, generally arguing that while Bush, like all politi-cians, sought to manipulate the media to his own ends, he and hisadministration were generally bumbling and incompetent at the task. Heutilizes both quantitative statistical analysis of LexisNexis data and qual-itative analyses of specific phrasing and imagery that were used toportray the Bush administration in the new media. Chapters proceed inroughly chronological order from the 2000 presidential campaignthrough to initial assessments of the Bush legacy. The war in Iraq andthe impact of Hurricane Katrina receive particular attention.

E908 2009-920554 978-0-9821698-2-7TThhee ddrreeaamm bbeeggiinnss;; hhooww HHaawwaaiiii sshhaappeedd BBaarraacckk OObbaammaa,,nneeww eedd.. wwiitthh pphhoottooss..Glauberman, Stu and Jerry Burris.Watermark Publishing, ©2009 152 p. $17.95 (pa)Both based in Hawai’i, journalist Glauberman and political analystBurris describe how the latest US president was shaped in his youth bythe isolated, ecologically fragile, and deeply multi-cultural islands.Among the aspects they consider are starting school in Honolulu,Indonesia’s unity in diversity, choosing between black and white, tur-bulent times in high school, Hawai’i’s multicultural milieu, the campaignseen from Hawai’i, and the return of the native son. No date is noted forthe first edition.

UU..SS.. LLOOCCAALL HHIISSTTOORRYY,, LLAATTIINN AAMMEERRIICCAA,, CCAANNAADDAA

F74 2009-005817 978-1-58479-747-0HHaarrvvaarrdd SSqquuaarree;; aann iilllluussttrraatteedd hhiissttoorryy ssiinnccee 11995500..Lotman, Mo.Stewart, Tabori & Chang, ©2009 237 p. $50.00In an oversize horizontal format (12.5x10″ showcasing packed-in pagedesign (the effect is lively, if a bit jumpy), each page features several cap-tioned photos or a big full-page photo—of people (in their changingmodes of dress over the years) and locations and businesses, with let-tered references to maps. Intertwined are chunks of text—some describingthe ambience, some setting the cultural context, and others (like the con-tributions from John Updike, Bill McKibben, Tom Rush, and severalothers) offering personal memories. Each decade through 2000 has itsown chapter, and the final pages offer “bonus” material about theSquare’s present and future. The author is an enthusiastic denizen of theSquare.

F127 2009-040892 978-1-883789-66-4BBllooooddyy mmoohhaawwkk;; tthhee FFrreenncchh wwaarrss aanndd rreevvoolluuttiioonn oonn NNeewwYYoorrkk’’ss ffrroonnttiieerr..Berleth, Richard.Black Dome Press, ©2009 370 p. $19.95 (pa)Berleth (communication arts, St. Francis College, Brooklyn Heights, NewYork) presents a narrative history of the Mohawk Valley and region overeight decades of the 18th century—years encompassing the French andIndian Wars and battles of the American Revolution that were critical tothe foundation of New York State and the creation of a new nation.Written for the general reader, the text documents this story through pro-files of participants and events set against the defining influences of theland. Extensive footnotes augment the text, and recommended works areincluded in a bibliography for readers interested in further reading aboutspecific events and individuals.

F128 2009-035711 978-0-8014-4851-5EEnnlliigghhtteenniinngg tthhee wwoorrlldd;; tthhee ccrreeaattiioonn ooff tthhee SSttaattuuee ooffLLiibbeerrttyy..Khan, Yasmin Sabina.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 231 p. $24.95The State of Liberty has been a symbol of US democratic ideals since1886. Based on extensive research including travels to France whereLiberty Enlightening the World was created, an independent scholar chron-icles the story behind its conception, construction, and gifting to the USin the wake of the Civil War. Khan showcases sculptor Auguste Bertholdi,engineer Gustave Eiffel, poet Emma Lazarus, and fundraiser/publisherJoseph Pulitzer, among the many individuals involved. The book featuresnew details about Liberty’s design and b&w images.

F128 2009-038605 978-0-7627-5421-2IItt hhaappppeenneedd iinn NNeeww YYoorrkk CCiittyy;; rreemmaarrkkaabbllee eevveennttss tthhaattsshhaappeedd hhiissttoorryy..Capo, Fran.Globe Pequot Press, ©2010 142 p. $14.95 (pa)Did you know that a stretch of pneumatic subway was built under thestreets of New York City in 1870 without the knowledge or approval ofthe city government? Capo, co-host of a television show, presents 23 shortchapters, written in a humorous tone, on little-known newsworthy eventsthat have taken place in New York City, such as a 1920 terrorist attackon Wall Street, the 1989 “secret deposit” of a 3.5-ton bronze bull in frontof the New York Stock Exchange, and an escaped circus tiger’s strollthrough a Queens neighborhood in 2004. The book concludes with a listof New York City trivia and a list of the city’s world records and firsts.A b&w map showing locations of the stories is the only illustration. Capoholds five world records and has written 10 other books.

F128 2009-027614 978-0-06-143134-0OOvveerr hheerree!!;; NNeeww YYoorrkk cciittyy dduurriinngg WWoorrlldd WWaarr IIII..Diehl, Lorraine B.HarperCollins, ©2010 274 p. $26.99A resident and prolific writer about The Big Apple, Diehl explores howthe war impacted people’s lives, arranging text, photographs, posters, andother material chronologically in section on the eve of the war, the warcomes to New York City, and people rolling up their sleeves. Among morespecific perspectives are Nazi among us, the lull before the storm, U-boats at the shore, saboteurs land in the Hamptons, rationing for victory,riveting Rosies, entertaining the troops, and the end of the war.

F129 2008-936854 978-0-7385-6369-5EEsssseexx oonn LLaakkee CChhaammppllaaiinn..Hislop, David C. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Located near the Adirondack Mountains on the western shore of LakeChamplain, the New York town of Essex was an important commercialand transportation center in the days of the Erie Canal. This lovelyselection of historical photographs shows the town’s historic houses (bothmansions and workers’ houses), as well as commercial buildings,churches, and public buildings. Each photograph is accompanied by adetailed caption, helping to give readers a good sense of what Essex waslike in days gone by. This book will appeal to readers interested in thehistory of New York State, particularly those who are familiar with theEssex area.

F135 2008-920517 978-0-7385-5678-9TThhee BBllaacckk HHoorrssee PPiikkee..Maser, Jill. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2008 127 p. $21.99 (pa)This pictorial history of the Black Horse Pike in southern New Jersey pro-files the growth and decline of the road and the towns along its route.The numerous b&w historical photos are taken from historical societiesand personal collections, and come with detailed captions. The bookincludes an introduction overviewing the history of the area, plus briefchapter introductions. Maser resides in one of the oldest towns along theBlack Horse Pike.

F189 2009-038807 978-1-56663-843-2NNoott iinn mmyy nneeiigghhbboorrhhoooodd;; hhooww bbiiggoottrryy sshhaappeedd aa ggrreeaattAAmmeerriiccaann cciittyy..Pietila, Antero.Ivan R. Dee, Inc., ©2010 320 p. $28.95Pietila arrived in the US in 1964 from his native Finland, and spent mostof his 35 years with the Baltimore Sun covering the Maryland city’sneighborhoods, politics, and government. He takes Baltimore as a casestudy to show how real estate discrimination toward African Americansand Jews shaped the cities of the US, from the early suburbanization inthe 1880s through the consequences of white flight after World War II tothe first decade of the 21st century.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –70–

F229 2010-000563 978-0-465-00485-0AA kkiinnggddoomm ssttrraannggee;; tthhee bbrriieeff aanndd ttrraaggiicc hhiissttoorryy ooff tthheelloosstt ccoolloonnyy ooff RRooaannookkee..Horn, James P. P.Basic Books, ©2010 296 p. $26.00Author of several books on early Virginia, Horn takes a new look at thefate of the lost English colony at Roanoke Island, and comes away witha far more substantial explanation of the mystery than have previouswriters. Intended for a site on Chesapeake Bay rather than at Roanoke,the colony had problems from the beginning, both inadequate suppliesand from violence at the hands of local Native American tribes. When arescue mission finally responded to the colony’s plea for help, thecolonists were nowhere to be found. Through an extensive perusal of con-temporary accounts and records, Horn provides an ending for theRoanoke story that ties up most of the loose ends, and suggests that thecolonists’ fate was not as tragic as historians have believed.

F232 2009-019407 978-0-8139-2845-6AAccccoommmmooddaattiinngg rreevvoolluuttiioonnss;; VViirrggiinniiaa’’ss NNoorrtthheerrnn NNeecckk iinnaann eerraa ooff ttrraannssffoorrmmaattiioonnss,, 11776600--11881100..Tillson, Albert H. Jr.U. of Virginia Press, ©2010 423 p. $45.00Tillson (history, U. of Tampa) seeks to avoid shortcomings of other his-tories of his native state during the US Revolution by narrowing his geo-graphical scope to a small territory and broadening his chronologicalscope to a half century. He discusses a troubled gentry, beyond the plan-tation, the worlds that Northern Neck slavery made, the Scottish mer-chants, controlling the revolution, the evangelical challenge, and thepreservation of hegemony.

F232 2009-012448 978-0-8139-2853-1““AAnnsswweerr aatt oonnccee””;; lleetttteerrss ooff mmoouunnttaaiinn ffaammiilliieess iinnSShheennaannddooaahh NNaattiioonnaall PPaarrkk,, 11993344--11993388..Title main entry. Ed. by Katrina M. Powell.U. of Virginia Press, ©2010 174 p. $35.00Unlike most U.S. national parks, which were carved out of public lands,Shenandoah National Park was in part created through the condem-nation of private lands held by more than 500 families, many of whichhad been on their land for generations. As condemnations and evictionsrolled on and the park grew around them, many of these people wrotegovernment officials—usually in pencil, on ruled paper from schooltablets—to negotiate, ask for services, or for other reasons. Frequentlypoignant, sometimes funny, and with a spirit that belies depictions of theevictees as ignorant, lawless hillbillies, the selection from these letterscontained in this volume show a little known aspect of the creation ofwhat is now viewed as a national treasure.

F234 2009-035985 978-1-4331-0759-7TThhee PPrrootteessttaanntt iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall aanndd tthhee HHuugguueennoott mmiiggrraattiioonnttoo VViirrggiinniiaa..Lambert, David E. (Studies in church history; v.12)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 222 p. $74.95Revising his Ph.D. dissertation Claremont Graduate University (no datenoted), Lambert (US history, Azusa Pacific U., California) places the 1700settlement of Huguenot refugees from Catholic France at Manakin Townin the British royal colony of Virginia in the context of the refugee reset-tlement attempts of a wide-ranging Protestant International. Among hisperspectives are persecution, refugees, and the Protestant Internationalresponse 1688-1690; post-war pressures for a refugee retreat elsewhere1697-1700; King William’s patronage of Huguenot refugee resettlement inVirginia 1699-1700; Benjamin De Joux and Vaudois influence at ManakinTown; and Huguenots in the storm at Manakin Town.

F271 2009-029585 978-1-57003-868-6TThhee ddaayy tthhee jjoohhnnbbooaatt wweenntt uupp tthhee mmoouunnttaaiinn;; ssttoorriieess ffrroommmmyy ttwweennttyy yyeeaarrss iinn SSoouutthh CCaarroolliinnaa mmaarriittiimmee aarrcchhaaeeoollooggyy..Naylor, Carl.U. of South Carolina Press, ©2010 259 p. $34.95Naylor not only dives, but teaches others to do it and captains the boats.His goal here is not teaching, really, but just telling some of his stories,and maybe letting folks know how interesting the field can be. Besidesthe title story are mud sucks, dredging for the first Americans, the wreckof the SS William Lawrence, Joe and the alligator, Brown’s Ferry vesselarrives in Georgetown, the mysterious French cargo site, mowing thelawn, sexy wrecks, and others.

F279 2009-034347 978-1-57003-872-3CCiittyy ooff tthhee ssiilleenntt;; tthhee CChhaarrlleessttoonniiaannss ooff MMaaggnnoolliiaaCCeemmeetteerryy..Phillips, Ted Jr.U. of South Carolina Press, ©2010 217 p. $39.95If you’ve ever walked through a cemetery, you’ve certainly stood in frontof a tombstone, wondering about the life of the person buried there. Inthis book, historian Philips answers that question for 200 people whosefinal resting place is Charleston, South Carolina’s Magnolia Cemetery.Ranging from secessionists to carpetbaggers, politicians to ornithologists,and suffragists to bookstore owners, the author presents a cast of thecity’s most colorful characters since the mid-19th century. Maps make itpossible for readers to use the book as a guide to the cemetery, and theauthor suggests several thematic tours.

F319 2009-023128 978-0-8130-3419-5TThhuunnddeerr oonn tthhee rriivveerr;; tthhee CCiivviill WWaarr iinn nnoorrtthheeaasstt FFlloorriiddaa..Schafer, Daniel L.U. Press of Florida, ©2010 348 p. $29.95Though he hopes it is engaging enough for general readers, Schafe(emeritus history, U. of North Florida) emphasizes that this is a scholarlyaccount, a local history placed in a national context, and information byCivil War scholarship during recent decades. He gives special attention toblack residents of northeast Florida who emancipated themselves onceprotected by Union forces, and many of whom enlisted in the infantryand later captured and occupied Jacksonville. He also presents evidencethat slavery was the fundamental motivation for war by white citizen ofFlorida.

F349 2009-924693 978-0-7385-6614-6OOxxffoorrdd aanndd OOllee MMiissss..Mayfield, Jack Lamar. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99Oxford, Mississippi and the University of Mississippi are illustrated byphotographs mostly collected over the years by lifelong resident PatriciaBrown Young, whose family was among the first settlers. The earliestones are from the Civil War during the 1860s, and the latest show currentrestoration and preservation efforts. They are arranged in chapters on theLafayette Country courthouse, historic downtown Oxford, Ole Miss, Cityof Oxford historic scenes, around the town and country, the town’s mostfamous resident William Faulkner, and preserving the heritage.Apparently there was no civil rights movement there.

F379 2009-013913 978-1-58980-696-2BBiigg CChhiieeff HHaarrrriissoonn aanndd tthhee MMaarrddii GGrraass IInnddiiaannss..Kennedy, Al.Pelican Publishing Co., ©2010 416 p. $35.00Drawing from interviews with his relatives and colleagues in NewOrleans, Kennedy (American history, U. of New Orleans) offers a biog-raphy of Big Chief Donald Harrison, Sr., (1937-1998) of the Mardi GrasIndians, which developed in the African and African American commu-nities of New Orleans and honors the American Indians of the area andtheir role in helping Africans and African Americans during slavery.Focusing on how Harrison defined the Mardi Gras Indian tradition andlived his life in accordance with his beliefs, he traces Harrison’s life andinvolvement with the group despite his family’s disapproval, and how heinterpreted his role as Big Chief of the Guardians of the Flame. Harrisonlived through the Depression and the Civil Rights Movement, served inthe US Army, was a supporter of education and literacy, and with hiswife, founded the Guardians Institute, a cultural arts center for NewOrleans youth.

F391 2009-024361 978-0-8263-4748-0TTeexxaass RRaannggeerr bbiiooggrraapphhiieess;; tthhoossee wwhhoo sseerrvveedd 11991100--11992211..Harris, Charles H. et al.U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 434 p. $50.00The 20th century began with calls for abolishing the Texas Rangers, orig-inally organized to fight Indians, Mexicans, and outlaws, but the Rangersfound a new mission at the start of the Mexican Revolution. This bookpresents biographies of all 1,782 Texas Rangers, not just those whoachieved notoriety, who served along the Texas-Mexico border during theperiod 1910-1921. Each entry contains information on the man’s name,date and place of birth, physical description, residence and occupation atthe time he enlisted, and his career as a Ranger. To illustrate familial con-nections, entries contain available information on each Ranger’s imme-diate family and any law enforcement relatives. B&w historical photosand several genealogical charts are included. The book draws on therecords of the Texas State Library and Archives, the Texas RangerResearch Center, the Federal Records Center in Forth Worth, and othercollections in the US and Mexico. Harris is emeritus professor at NewMexico State University, Las Cruces.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–71–

F392 2008-001816 978-0-8061-4132-9TTeexxaass ddeevviillss;; RRaannggeerrss aanndd rreegguullaarrss oonn tthhee lloowweerr RRiiooGGrraannddee,, 11884466--11886611.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Collins, Michael L.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 316 p. $19.95 (pa)For many today, The Lone Ranger was their introduction to the myth ofthe Texas Rangers, “good guys in white hats” bringing justice to thefrontier. Collins (history, Midwestern State University, Wichita Falls,Texas) revises the myth, promulgated by Texas historians as well aswriters of fiction. Using primary material, he paints a darker picture ofthe Rangers, from their inception in 1846 to their official (though notactual) disbanding in 1861. While relating incidents of terrorism, torture,lynching and other abuses, Collins also puts the Rangers into the contextof the time in which brutalities were perpetuated by Mexican banditsand Native Americans on the Anglo-American settlers. In no way con-doning the atrocities, he explained the real and perceived threats, as welland nationalism and racism that helped to create the myth of the valiantRangers. Rather than negating the myth, he brings it in line with acomplex reality. Collins gives a vivid portrait of the larger-than-life par-ticipants in the story, including the young army officer sent to evaluatethe Rangers, Colonel Robert E. Lee. It was Lee who recommended theformal dissolution of the Rangers, many of whom became theConfederate Second Texas Mounted Rifles. Collins presents an image ofTexas history less glorious but every bit as fascinating as the legend. Thisis paperback reprint of a book published in 2008.

F411 2009-018510 978-1-55728-905-6AArrkkaannssaass//AArrkkaannssaaww;; hhooww bbeeaarr hhuunntteerrss,, hhiillllbbiilllliieess,, aannddggoooodd ooll’’ bbooyyss ddeeffiinneedd aa ssttaattee..Blevins, Brooks.U. of Arkansas Pr., ©2009 242 p. $29.95Perhaps the most maligned state in the Union, Arkansas has often beenportrayed as a bastion of hillbillies, moonshiners, rednecks, and whitetrash. Blevins (Ozark Studies, Missouri State University) looks at thesestereotypes, explaining how they originated and why they’ve persisted forso long in the popular mind. He also looks at the other, more positiveimages of Arkanasas, which show it as a progressive state that has giventhe country people like Scott Joplin, Johnny Cash, and Maya Angelou.While a scholarly book, Blevins’ accessible writing style and numerousillustrations will make it appeal to many readers interested in popularculture in general and the Great State of Arkansas in particular.

F444 2009-050447 978-1-59629-875-0HHiiddddeenn hhiissttoorryy ooff MMeemmpphhiiss..Dowdy, G. Wayne.History Press, ©2010 127 p. $19.99 (pa)Dowdy, an archivist for the Memphis Public Library, shares what he hasfound in manuscript collections, archival newspapers, and historic mapsand photos about the lesser-known history and culture of Memphis. Heexamines the city’s history in its most important decades, and well-known figures like Elvis Presley, Sam Philips, Clarence Saunders, andW.C. Handy, along with lesser-known institutions and individuals likePopeye Pumphrey, a gangster who inspired William Faulkner’sSanctuary; the Boy Scout who captured German spies during World WarI; Tony Vaccaro, the journalist who secured the first interview with thenewly inaugurated President Truman; and the radio station thatpioneered the use of remote broadcasts. He then discusses some of theprimary and secondary sources available at the library, including papersof E.H. Crump, Roane Waring, Mayor Walter Chandler, Mayor FrankTobey, and the 1940 and 1944 presidential elections. No index isprovided.

F497 2009-018181 978-0-8018-9399-5AAnn AAmmiisshh ppaarraaddooxx;; ddiivveerrssiittyy aanndd cchhaannggee iinn tthhee wwoorrlldd’’ssllaarrggeesstt AAmmiisshh ccoommmmuunniittyy..Hurst, Charles E. and David L. McConnel. (Young Center books inAnabaptists and Pietist studies)Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 356 p. $30.00 (pa)Hurst (sociology, College of Wooster) and McConnell (anthropology,College of Wooster) argue that the Amish community in Holmes County,Ohio, the largest and most diverse in the world, is experiencing unprece-dented change as their interaction with the non-Amish causes them torethink their religious ideals, family practices, educational choices,economy and occupations, and health care. They detail the diversity anddivisions within these categories in the different Amish affiliations andthe border work between Amish and non-Amish societies, demonstratingthat the community includes individuals ranging from millionaires andfemale entrepreneurs to teenagers who use cell phones to farmers andstay-at-home wives. They draw from fieldwork, interviews, and surveydata.

F591 2009-034232 978-0-7627-5431-1CCoowwbbooyyss,, mmoouunnttaaiinn mmeenn,, aanndd ggrriizzzzllyy bbeeaarrss;; ffiiffttyy ooff tthheeggrriittttiieesstt mmoommeennttss iinn tthhee hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee wwiilldd WWeesstt..Mayo, Matthew P.TwoDot, ©2009 246 p. $16.95 (pa)Editor and author Mayo has assembled a collection of 50 of the wildest,strangest, and bloodiest tales the Wild West had to offer. Complete withshootings, bear maulings, hangings, disasters, and extraordinarytoughness, the stories depict the good and very bad men and women ofthe Wild West. The stories are in three categories: mountain men andIndians, man versus nature, and cowboys and gunfighters. Also, they arearranged chronologically to give readers an appreciation for the changesthat occurred as the 19th century unfolded.

F591 2009-938643 978-1-56735-255-9EExxttrraaoorrddiinnaarryy wwoommeenn ooff tthhee RRoocckkyy MMoouunnttaaiinn wweesstt..Title main entry. Ed. by Tim Blevins et al.Pikes Peak Library District, ©2010 362 p. $24.95 (pa)This book introduces readers to the real, historic women of the RockyMountain West, all of whom led more complex and compelling lives thanthose of the women portrayed in popular depictions of the Old West.Rather than being mere helpmates to the men who did the “real” work,these women exposed the maltreatment of Native Americans by the U.S.government, built successful ranches, wrote books, practiced medicine,and fought for suffrage and civil rights. The well-written portraits in thisgenerously illustrated volume will appeal to readers interested in the OldWest and women’s history.

F592 2009-021263 978-0-8263-3843-3TThhee AAmmeerriiccaann mmiilliittaarryy ffrroonnttiieerrss;; tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess AArrmmyyiinn tthhee WWeesstt,, 11778833--11990000..Wooster, Robert.U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 361 p. $39.95Wooster (history, Texas A&M University-Corpus Christi) describes theimpact of the US military on social, economic, and political life in theWestern frontier in the late 18th through 19th century. While the bookfocuses on the Army, there is much information on Indians who foughtfor and against the Army, and information on men and women of manybackgrounds and ethnic groups, including Chinese workers. The bookdraws on primary and secondary materials, and is written in a styleaccessible to scholars and general readers. It is illustrated with 64 b&whistorical photos, and seven maps showing various wars, battle areas,and regions.

F595 2009-028669 978-0-8061-4112-1AA rroouugghh rriiddee ttoo rreeddeemmppttiioonn;; tthhee BBeenn DDaanniieellss ssttoorryy..DeArment, Robert K. and Jack DeMattos.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 246 p. $29.95Gunman Benjamin Franklin Daniels (1852-1923) rose from outlaw to USmarshal for the Arizona territory following his military service with theRough Riders in the Spanish-American War. This biography of one ofTeddy Roosevelt’s ‘White House Gunfighters’ traces his career from thejailhouse to the White House. The book is illustrated with about 20 b&whistorical photos, and contains a complete bibliography of governmentdocuments, court and prison records, letters and unpublished docu-ments, and period and modern books and articles. Both authors havewritten numerous other books on Wild West gunfighters.

F596 2009-019588 978-0-8061-4076-6DDeeaaddllyy ddoozzeenn;; ffoorrggootttteenn gguunnffiigghhtteerrss ooff tthhee oolldd WWeesstt,,vvoolluummee 33..DeArment, Robert K.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 396 p. $29.95Historian DeArment profiles 12 almost-forgotten Old West gunfighterswho were notorious during the period between the 1850s and the 1920s,including the only known Jewish gunfighter. An afterword offers briefprofiles of a selection of the few known black, Indian, Hispanic, andfemale gunfighters in the Wild West, and points to some published workson them. The meticulously researched book includes 50 pages of chapternotes, and a complete bibliography of government documents, court andprison records, letters, archived interviews, and period and modernbooks and articles. DeArment has written other books on law and orderin the historical American West.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –72–

F597 2009-028667 978-0-8061-4103-9SSoo rruuggggeedd aanndd mmoouunnttaaiinnoouuss;; bbllaazziinngg tthhee ttrraaiillss ttoo OOrreeggoonnaanndd CCaalliiffoorrnniiaa,, 11881122--11884488..Bagley, Will. (Overland west; the story of the Oregon and Californiatrails; v.1)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 458 p. $45.00In this first volume in a projected four-volume history, Bagley, an editorof many books on the American West, tells the story of America’swestward migration over the Oregon and California trails from 1812 to1848. Drawing from research he conducted for the National ParkService’s Long Distance Trails Office to support the planning, devel-opment, and protection of the Oregon and California National HistoricTrails, as well as personal letters and journals, government documents,newspaper reports, and folk accounts, he recounts the story of the men,women, and children who first traveled the trails from the Missouri tothe Pacific. He aims to present the story in a new and more completeway, within the context of the native peoples of the area; devote moreattention to forgotten figures like Richard Grant, James Sinclair, SamuelJ. Hensley, Levi Scott, and Narcissa Vasquez; and trace the developmentof overland wagon roads and their evolution and character. Discussionencompasses national expansion and Manifest Destiny, the developmentand destruction of natural resources, and peaceful and violent encounterswith other peoples and cultures.

F694 978-0-9725657-7-6TThhoommaass GGiillccrreeaassee..Title main entry.Gilcrease Museum, ©2010 192 p. $24.95 (pa)One of Oklahoma’s cultural gems is the Gilcrease Museum in Tulsa,which houses over a half-million works of art, documents, and artifacts.This book tells the story of the museum’s founder, oil mogul ThomasGilcrease, and of how he turned his personal enthusiasm for collectingtoward the creation of a cultural legacy enjoyed by all Oklahomans. Tenessays describe Gilcrease’s life, his collections, and the foundation that heset up to administer the museum and associated library, as well as tofund a home for underprivileged children. Contributions include RandyRamer, Carole Klein, Kimberly Roblin, Gary Moore, Anne Morand, AprilMiller and Eric Singleton. This beautifully designed book is generouslyillustrated with historical photographs and reproductions of works in theGilcrease collection. Distributed by the University of Oklahoma Press.

F761 2009-015253 978-0-87062-394-3HHoorraaccee PPlluunnkkeetttt iinn AAmmeerriiccaa;; aann IIrriisshh aarriissttooccrraatt oonn tthheeWWyyoommiinngg rraannggee..Woods, Lawrence M. (Western frontiersmen; 34)The Arthur H. Clark Co., ©2010 289 p. $36.95Best known for his career as a politician and in developing the cooper-ative movement in Ireland, Horace Plunkett also spent a decade inAmerica. This book looks at Plunkett’s American years, focusing on histime as a cattle rancher in Wyoming and showing how he was able tofind fortune in the West even as other British immigrants failed. Drawingon Plunkett’s diaries and on newly unearthed sources, the author hasdelivered an authoritative account of a little known part of Plunkett’s life.

F782 2008-941498 978-0-7385-6946-8MMeessaa VVeerrddee NNaattiioonnaall PPaarrkk..Smith, Duane A. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Two hundred plus black and white photographs depict the southwesternColorado area as it was first photographed in 1874, early excavation andlooting of the ancient site, visitors to the Mesa Verde National Park afterit was established in 1906, and projects carried out by the CivilianConservation Corps. Captions also narrate changes to the park afterWorld War II and sites currently available to tourists.

F782 2009-923551 978-1-932738-80-3TThhee rrooaadd tthhaatt ssiillvveerr bbuuiilltt;; tthhee mmiilllliioonn ddoollllaarr hhiigghhwwaayy..Smith, P. David.Western Reflections, Inc., ©2009 336 p. $18.95 (pa)The Million Dollar Highway runs between Ouray and Durango inColorado, through the rugged and scenic San Juan Mountains. Author often books on Colorado history, Smith tells the story of how mineralwealth provided both a reason to build a road and the large sums ofmoney needed to build it, and he details the construction of the toll roadsand narrow-gauge railroads that preceded today’s two-lane blacktoproad. The author also gives the histories of Durango, Silverton, andOuray, and passes along tales about lost gold mines and treasure cavesthat might (or might not) lay along the route. The book is generouslyillustrated with old photographs and route maps.

F784 2009-928333 978-0-7385-7156-0DDeennvveerr’’ss CCaappiittooll HHiillll nneeiigghhbboorrhhoooodd..Zimmer, Amy B. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Zimmer, an author, historian, and Capitol Hill resident, takes a historiclook at the people and places of Denver’s Capitol Hill neighborhoodthrough b&w photos and illustrations from local archives, promotionalmagazines, and private collections. The photos illustrate its origins as thesetting for the state capitol building, its large mansions, churches andhospitals, the Colfax Avenue area, parks, its growth in transportation,changes in zoning that increased commercial buildings, changes indemographics and crime, new luxury high-rises that are being built, andrestoration of homes in the present day.

F787 2009-047442 978-0-313-35820-3BBoorrddeerr ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Ilan Stavans. (The Ilan Stavans library ofLatino civilization)Greenwood Press, ©2010 220 p. $55.00Part of a series edited by Stavans (Latin American and Latino Culture,Amherst College) and dedicated to “exploring all the facets of Hispaniccivilization in the United States, with its ramifications in the Americas,the Caribbean Basin, and the Iberian Peninsula,” this volume contains 14pieces offering, first, theoretic perspectives and, secondly, impressionistictestimonies, concerning the Mexican-US border region. The theoreticwritings provide economic, ideological, psychological, folkloric, and lin-guistic perspectives on the border region and its history. Also included isa selected bibliography of further resources on the topic.

F802 2009-029167 978-0-8263-4736-7LLaanndd ooff ddiisseenncchhaannttmmeenntt;; LLaattiinnaa//oo iiddeennttiittiieess aannddttrraannssffoorrmmaattiioonnss iinn nnoorrtthheerrnn NNeeww MMeexxiiccoo..Trujillo, Michael L.U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 265 p. $29.95 (pa)Trujillo (American and Chicano Hispano Mexicano studies, U. of NewMexico-Albuquerque), explores Latino identity and ethnographic repre-sentation in the Greater Española Valley. He began with the idea of com-paring emerging ethnic identity with remnants of traditional identity, buthis study outgrew those straits to encompass further aspects as well.Among his topics are remembering and dismembering, a time for bit-terness, appearances teach, and the secret of why God laughs.

F804 2009-046711 978-0-86534-737-3FFoorrtt SSeellddeenn,, NNeeww MMeexxiiccoo,, 11886655--11889911;; tthhee bbiirrtthh,, lliiffee,, aannddddeeaatthh ooff aa ffrroonnttiieerr ffoorrtt iinn NNeeww MMeexxiiccoo..Holmes, Allan J. (A New Mexico centennial history series book)Sunstone Press, ©2010 155 p. $19.95 (pa)Holmes’ three decades in the US army piqued his interest in militaryhistory, which he then taught at a high school back home in New Mexico.Here he tells of an earlier period in the Army’s history, pivoting on thenearby fort, now bare ruins, that it occupied for nearly three decadeswhile battling the general lawlessness and the hostile Native Americansin the southern part of the Territory. He explores the birth of a fort, lifethere, the conduct of military operations, logistics, relationships with thelocal communities, and the death of a fort. Commanders and units forthe entire period are appended. He has not indexed his work.

F804 2008-938757 978-0-7385-7069-3RRuuiiddoossoo aanndd RRuuiiddoossoo DDoowwnnss..Kidder, Lyn and Herb Brunell. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Local writer Kidder and local photographer Brunelli team up to presenta history in photographs of the New Mexico town since 1855 when FortStanton was established to protect settlers from Apache raids. Stages ofthe past include early days, a little town grows bigger, happy time in TheGreat Depression, World War II, playground of the southwest, winter fun,horse races, daily life, disasters, and a final plug for the tourist business.No index is provided.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–73–

F819 2008-941569 978-0-7385-7138-6SShhooww LLooww..Huso, Jani and Catherine H. Ellis. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Some stories tell how Show Low’s name originated—from the final drawduring a seven-up card game between two early residents of the ranchthat would later become the town. In keeping with that theme the mainstreet is currently called “Deuce of Clubs.” Full of black and white pho-tographs, along with comprehensive descriptions, this books presentsinteresting facets of the history of this town in Arizona. The images comefrom the collection of the Show Low Historical Society and descendantsof early pioneers. Although accessible through Highway 60 from Phoenixsince the 1930s, it is still a small town and this book is likely to mostlyappeal to current residents and local history buffs. Contains no index.

F849 2009-039099 978-0-87417-817-3MMoorree ppeeoopplleess ooff LLaass VVeeggaass;; oonnee cciittyy,, mmaannyy ffaacceess..Title main entry. Ed. by Jerry L. Simich and Thomas C. Wright.(Wilbur S. Shepperson series in Nevada history)U. of Nevada Press, ©2010 258 p. $29.95 (pa)In this compilation, Simich and Wright (political science and history, U.of Nevada, Las Vegas) extend their survey of the residents of Las Vegasin The Peoples of Las Vegas (2005) with 13 additional essays on recentlyarrived immigrants to the city, like Ethiopians and Guatemalans, as wellas well-established groups like the Irish and Germans. They includeessays on the Japanese, Cubans, Scandinavians, Muslims, Armenians,Argentines, Koreans, Thais, and Colombians. Written by contributorsworking in journalism, law, anthropology, social work, history, politicalscience, and ethnic studies, mostly from Nevada, essays detail the historyof each group in the city, the roles they play in its life and economy, andthe roles of local institutions like clubs, religious organizations, shops,restaurants, and newspapers and other media in helping them maintaintheir ethnic and religious identities and disseminate their cultures, aswell as the influence of modern telecommunications and accessible airtravel in creating transnational identities and maintaining ties withfamily back home.

F849 2008-938273 978-0-7385-6970-3VViirrggiinniiaa CCiittyy aanndd tthhee bbiigg bboonnaannzzaa..James, Ronald M. and Susan A. James. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)In this pictorial history, historians Ronald James, Nevada’s State historicpreservation officer, and Susan James (Virginia City Fourth Ward SchoolMuseum) draw together images of Virginia City and the ComstockMining District from the archives of the Historic Fourth Ward SchoolMuseum and the Walter M. Mulcahy Collection of the Comstock HistoricDistrict Commission. The b&w photos and illustrations document thegold and silver strikes of the region in the 1800s; its communities,including its largest, Virginia City; the mines and mills; the 1873 dis-covery of the “Big Bonanza,” a mass of gold and silver unequaled in itssize and wealth; the silver barons, miners, immigrants, notable people,and others of the communities; its buildings and places; and the townand its legacy after the boom.

F869 2008-931762 978-0-7385-5985-8IIddyyllllwwiilldd aanndd tthhee hhiigghh SSaann JJaacciinnttooss..Smith, Robert B. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)The village of Idyllwind is near the suburbs of Los Angeles, but evencloser to San Jacinto Mountain State Park, which opened in 1937, not longbefore Smith began vacationing in the area. Retired now, he has livedthere permanently for nearly a decade, and is active in the IdyllwindArea Historical Society. Photographs and texts trace the history from the19th century through the stages of the mountains exploited, preserved,and rediscovered; the village emerged; beyond the village; and the villageevolves. There is no index.

F869 2007-939188 978-0-7385-5812-7LLooss AAnnggeelleess’’ss AAnnggeellss FFlliigghhtt..Dawson, Jim. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2008 127 p. $19.99 (pa)Dawson, an author and liner notes writer who has lived in Hollywoodfor 30 years, provides a pictorial portrait of Los Angeles’s Angels Flight,America’s most famous incline railway, which traveled Bunker Hill from1901 to 1969 and is featured on postcards and in pulp fiction and filmnoir. The b&w photos and descriptions show the history of the railway,its neighborhood, postcards, similar railways in other parts of the world,movies that featured it, its restoration and move in the 1990s, and closingafter a fatal accident.

F869 2008-908330 978-0-7385-6962-8LLooss GGaattooss..Mathews, Stephanie Ross et al. (Postcard history series)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Prepared by Mathews as part of the Los Gatos Library and MuseumHistory Project, this book features 114 pages of b&w photographs withinteresting historical descriptions underneath each one. The exact datesthey were mailed is not noted, but they appear to come from the 20thcentury, including many from the “golden age” of postcards before WorldWar I. Since this town in California was originally christened asRinconada de Los Gatos (Spanish for corridor of the cats), it is fitting thatthe first chapter consists of postcards featuring live cats and cat statues.Most of the other postcards feature buildings, roads, bridges and scenicrailroad images. Contains brief bibliography but no index.

F869 2009-016769 978-1-60710-003-4SSaann FFrraanncciissccoo tthheenn aanndd nnooww,, 22dd eedd..Kos, Eric J. and Dennis Evanosky.Thunder Bay Press, ©2009 144 p. $18.95This volume places historic b&w photos alongside color contemporaryphotos and brief descriptions of places in San Francisco like the GoldenGate Bridge, Alcatraz, Fisherman’s Wharf, Lombard Street, TelegraphHill, Chinatown, the Bay Bridge, Union Square, City Hall,Haight/Ashbury, and Ocean Beach. Evanovsky, an editor at the AlamedaSun and author of other books about Bay Area history, and Kos, whopublishes a weekly newspaper, co-wrote East Bay Then and Now and SanFrancisco in Photographs.

F869 978-0-7385-5937-7SSaann LLeeaannddrroo..Simons, Cynthia Vrilakas. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2008 127 p. $19.99 (pa)Simons gained her experience as San Leandro’s local history librarian;this is a spin-off of her work creating the San Leandro Museum and isenhanced by The Bancroft Library’s newspaper collections. S.L. is locatedon the east shore of the San Francisco Bay, south of Oakland. Coveragebegins in the early 18th century and ends ca.1975. Includes some 350photos with a few hundred words of text.

F870 2009-025677 978-0-8047-5822-2RReemmaakkiinngg cciittiizzeennsshhiipp;; LLaattiinnaa iimmmmiiggrraannttss aanndd nneewwAAmmeerriiccaann ppoolliittiiccss..Coll, Kathleen M.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 233 p. $22.95 (pa)Coll (feminist studies and anthropology, Stanford U.) presents an ethno-graphic study of Latina immigrant women in San Francisco during the1990s, focusing on the construction of cultural citizenship, the process bywhich the immigrant women come to think of themselves as legitimate,rights-bearing members of US society. She examines the activities andexperiences of the women of the Mujeres Unidas y Activas organization,exploring how their interactions with public institutions affected theirsense of place in the society, their senses of autoestima (self-esteem) andits relation to their claims of rights as immigrants, and the ways that theMujeres Unidas y Activas engaged in collaborative projects with otherorganizations and the impact of these activities on the women’s views ofcultural citizenship.

F884 2009-920383 978-0-7385-7102-7AAsshhllaanndd..Peterson, Joe. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)The town in southern Oregon now known mostly for the annualShakespeare festival is portrayed through captioned black-and-white pho-tographs from the first European settlement during the 1850s to thepresent. They are arranged in sections on a town called Ashland Mills,driving golden spike in Ashland, a cultural Mecca, lithia water and apart, Shakespeare in the woods, and the reinvention of the town. Thereis no index.

F897 2008-936541 978-0-7385-7066-2LLaakkee CChheellaann VVaalllleeyy..Gregg, Kristen J. and the Lake Chelan Historical Society. (Images ofAmerica)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Local writer Gregg provides text to accompany photographs from theSociety to document the settlement of the valley in northern Washingtonduring the 1880s and its development over the next quarter century. Theycover the earliest residents, early logging and mining, Chelan Falls, LakePark, Chelan, Manson, dams and hydropower, the uplake communities,and Stehekin.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –74–

F904 2009-044434 978-0-7627-5326-0OOuuttllaaww ttaalleess ooff AAllaasskkaa;; ttrruuee ssttoorriieess ooff tthhee llaasstt ffrroonnttiieerr’’ssmmoosstt iinnffaammoouuss ccrrooookkss,, ccuullpprriittss,, aanndd ccuutttthhrrooaattss..Heaton, John W.Globe Pequot Press, ©2010 197 p. $14.95 (pa)Taking a break from his academic work, history professor Heaton relatesthe tales of a dozen crooks and desperate characters from Alaska’s earlydays. Readers will meet “Soapy” Smith, the underworld boss of Skagway;the murderous Klutuk of southwestern Alaska; the legendary (and some-times generous) Blue Parka bandit; and Fred Hardy, the first murdererto be hung in the Territory of Alaska. Heaton’s book offers readers thebest of two worlds: It’s fact-checked to academic standards, but writtenfor a general audience. Any reader interested in Alaska history or truecrime will find this book a delight.

F1028 2009-482503 978-0-88762-406-3TThhee iissllaanndd ooff CCaannaaddaa;; hhooww tthhrreeee oocceeaannss sshhaappeedd oouurrnnaattiioonn..Suthren, Victor.Thomas Allen Publishers, ©2009 362 p. $26.95 (pa)Writer/historian Suthren bases his book on the conceit that, because it’sbordered by three oceans and the Great Lakes, Canada is effectively anisland nation. Although most Canadians have turned their backs on thesea, the author argues that the country has nonetheless been shaped byits maritime history, even to the extent that seemingly contradictorynational virtues of self-reliance and interdependence are similar to thosethat are valued aboard ships. Suthren’s unique take on Canada’s historywill appeal to readers interested Canadian history, particularly in its mar-itime history.

F1034 978-3-447-06134-6GGlloobbaall rreeaalliiggnnmmeennttss aanndd tthhee CCaannaaddiiaann nnaattiioonn iinn tthhee tthhiirrddmmiilllleennnniiuumm..Title main entry. Ed. by Karin Ikas. (Studies in cultural and social sci-ences; v.5)Harrassowitz, ©2010 242 p. $87.00The changing concept of nationhood is seen by the scholars in thisvolume through the experience of Canada. Ikas (sociology, Frankfurt (M)University, Germany) arranges the articles somewhat chronologically,beginning with those on the formation of Canadian identity. Many of theauthors discuss the idea of nation as developed by Canadian writers inEnglish and French. The recent acceptance by Anglo-Canadians of theessential role of Quebecois and First Nations people as part of theCanadian character is examined from literary, historical and sociologicalvantage points. As the new century begins, the idea of nation isbecoming more fluid, as seen in literature. The global influence on thecountry is also stressed, particularly in ecological terms and worldwidesocial upheavals. The contributors are Canadian and European. Theediting of German construction and word choice would have made thereading smoother but the essays are all interesting. Distributed in NorthAmerican by The David Brown Book Co.

F1035 978-1-84742-668-0UUpprrooootteedd;; tthhee sshhiippmmeenntt ooff ppoooorr cchhiillddrreenn ttoo CCaannaaddaa,, 11886677--11991177.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Parker, Roy.Policy Press, ©2010 354 p. $34.95Children today continue to be uprooted from their homes. In thispaperback edition of his 2008 book, Parker (emeritus, social policy, U. ofBristol, UK) examines the motives behind and reactions to organized emi-gration of poor British children to Canada from Canadian confederationin 1867 to World War I. He studies period concepts of child welfare andhow these 80,000 children were treated in comparison to the experiencesof more recent survivors of child migration. The book includes periodphotographs and surviving letters. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

F1054 2009-529703 978-0-9812405-1-0JJoosseepphh--EEllzzééaarr BBeerrnniieerr;; cchhaammppiioonn ooff CCaannaaddiiaann aarrccttiiccssoovveerreeiiggnnttyy,, 11885522--11993344..Saint-Pierre, Marjolaine. Trans. by William Barr.Baraka Books, ©2009 371 p. $37.95 (pa)Arguably Canada’s greatest navigator, Joseph-Elzéar Bernier left hiscountry a legacy of immeasurable worth—a solid territorial claim to theArctic Archipelago. Leader of several expeditions to the region between1904 and 1925, he planted Canada’s flag firmly on a region that globalwarming has made even more critical to the country’s future. In this gen-erously illustrated book, historian Saint-Pierre chronicles the great man’slife and explorations, from his early years as a captain on transatlanticroutes to his craving for recognition (deserved, in the opinion of many)during his sunset years. Essential for any collection on maritime historyor exploration, this book will interest historians of Canada and the arcticregions, as well as many general readers.

F1089 2009-035367 978-0-8165-2787-8LLaannddssccaappeess aanndd ssoocciiaall ttrraannssffoorrmmaattiioonnss oonn tthhee NNoorrtthhwweessttccooaasstt;; ccoolloonniiaall eennccoouunntteerrss iinn tthhee FFrraasseerr VVaalllleeyy..Oliver, Jeff. (Archaeology of colonialism in native North America)U. of Arizona Press, ©2010 249 p. $55.00Oliver (archaeology, University of Aberdeen, Scotland) grew up in BritishColumbia and learned the history of the region from the point of viewof the European colonists. In this study, he revisits and revises the sim-plistic lessons of his childhood. He looks at the Fraser Valley from 1792-1918 in terms of the landscape, how it formed and was changed byhuman intervention. This is a micro-study, so rather than makingsweeping generalizations, Oliver follows individuals and small groups asthey interact with each other and the environment. He employs the rela-tively new field of social geography to add the land itself into theequation. This allows for a less monolithic interpretation of the past. Ashe says, history can be “messy”; not all occurrences fit into neat models.But this method makes for a more accurate and more interesting view ofthe past.

F1089 978-0-89997-490-3WWaallkkiinngg VVaannccoouuvveerr;; 3366 wwaallkkiinngg ttoouurrss eexxpplloorriinnggssppeeccttaaccuullaarr wwaatteerrffrroonntt,, ddyynnaammiicc nneeiigghhbboorrhhooooddss,, hhiipphhaannggoouuttss,, aanndd ttaassttyy ddiivveerrssiioonnss..Lee, John.Wilderness Press, ©2009 246 p. $18.95 (pa)A travel writer who has adopted Vancouver, British Columbia, providesmaps, directions, level of difficulty ratings, and transit and parkingoptions to three dozen walks from the downtown to South False Creek,site of the 2010 Olympic Village. The guide lists the walks by theme (e.g.,arts, architecture, and culture; dining and shopping; parks and nature),and points of interest.

F1219 2009-034487 978-0-8047-6379-0HHeerree iinn tthhiiss yyeeaarr;; sseevveenntteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy NNaahhuuaattll aannnnaallss oofftthhee TTllaaxxccaallaa--PPuueebbllaa VVaalllleeyy..Title main entry. Ed. and trans. by Camilla Townsend.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 212 p. $55.00Townsend (history, Rutgers University) has edited and translated twoNahuatl chronicles from the seventeenth century. These were written inNahuatl, using Latin script, by natives who were Christianized. At leastone was a priest. However, the native worldview was only lightly overlaidby Spanish culture and these are precious remnants of life during thefirst years after the conquest. The chronicles are reproduced in facingpage text. Townsend precedes the text with an introduction explaining thehistory of the Tlaxcala-Puebla valley. She notes the particular experienceof the Nahuas in that they allied with the Spanish to defeat their longtime enemies, the Mexica. This gave them certain privileges. She also dis-cusses the nature of the society in the valley along with the relation ofthese to other annuals (chronicles) that have survived. James Lockhartadds an essay on the language of the texts, describing the stages of assim-ilation by the Nahuas of Spanish terms and grammar. This book will beof great interest to Mesoamerican scholars. The clear writing style alsomakes it accessible to the many non-specialists interested in the diversesocieties of pre-conquest Mexico.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–75–

F1219 2009-022700 978-0-8047-5764-5IInnddiiggeennoouuss cciittiizzeennss;; llooccaall lliibbeerraalliissmm iinn eeaarrllyy nnaattiioonnaallOOaaxxaaccaa aanndd YYuuccaattáánn..Caplan, Karen D.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 289 p. $60.00Caplan (history, Rutgers U.) argues the prevailing assumption that thefailure of state building in early 19th century Mexico was caused by anoverarching liberalism. Based on extensive archival research, the authorexplores the events and experiences of the states of Oaxaca and Yucatánto illustrate how the concepts and institutions of liberalism became amajor force in those states—but only on regional terms. That is under-scored by the different results the two states achieved in their regionally-based initiatives. Oaxaca was relatively peaceful while Yucatánexperienced an indigenous rebellion that began in 1847. In short, liber-alism was not uniformly applied nationwide, but adapted to suit localinterests.

F1407 2009-049834 978-0-7864-4284-3LLiibbeerraattoorrss,, ppaattrriioottss,, aanndd lleeaaddeerrss ooff LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa;; 3322bbiiooggrraapphhiieess,, 22dd eedd..Adams, Jerome R.McFarland & Co., ©2010 395 p. $45.00 (pa)This update of an essential reference on Latin American politics andhistory adds biographies of nine contemporary figures (mostly presi-dents) to those of the 23 individuals profiled in the first edition.Biographies carried over from the first edition include those for Chileanliberator Bernardo O’Higgins, the two Brazilian emperors, José Martí ofCuba, and Mexico’s Pancho Villa. New additions include U.S. labor leaderCésar Chávez, Nicaraguan rebel leader and president Daniel Ortega,Venezuela’s Hugo Chávez, and the ill-fated Chilean president SalvadorAllende. Providing a nice intermediate step between reading dictionaryentries and book-length biographies, this book is an excellent addition toany collection of Latin American histories.

F1410 2009-054047 978-0-8133-4462-1CCoommppaarraattiivvee LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaann ppoolliittiiccss..Schneider, Ronald M.Westview Press, ©2010 363 p. $42.00 (pa)Home to more than 590 million people, Latin America is one of theplanet’s most diverse and dynamic regions. For this book, Schneider(Political Science [emeritus], City University of New York) presents aconcise overview of the political, economic, and cultural histories of LatinAmerica’s seven largest countries, with special emphasis on develop-ments in Mexico, Brazil, and Argentina. The first section of the booklooks at the period between independence and 1930, a time of nationalconsolidation. The second section looks at the modern period since 1930,showing the more recent roots of contemporary political structures anddevelopments. Comprehensive, well written, and authoritative, this bookis an excellent introduction to the region for general readers and asuitable text for use in college-level courses on Latin America.

F1414 2009-046181 978-0-313-35249-2LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa aanndd tthhee oorriiggiinnss ooff iittss ttwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt cceennttuurryy..Monteón, Michael.Praeger, ©2010 425 p. $54.95Monteón (history, U. of California, San Diego) traces the history of LatinAmerica since the colonization of the nineteenth century, focusing onpower and the people who have developed and endured its uses. He con-siders how the region has emerged from the twentieth century, andfocuses on its political forms, cultural values, racial disparities, anduneven distribution of wealth and income. Each chapter begins with adescription of a city—including Buenos Aires, Sáo Paulo, and Santiago—that represents its nation’s power, how the city operated and looked andhow its people lived, as well as the impact of technology, ideology, theinteractions of urban and rural populations, racism, class, and the roleof Catholicism.

F1419 2009-035875 978-0-8213-7835-9DDiissccrriimmiinnaattiioonn iinn LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa;; aann eeccoonnoommiiccppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Title main entry. Ed. by Hugo Ñopo et al. (Latin American developmentforum series)The World Bank, ©2010 308 p. $40.00 (pa)The field of economics has developed a number of methodologies forsources, behaviors, and effects of discrimination, including regressionanalysis, market tests, laboratory and field experiments, and structuralmethods that try to model the decision process that generates discrimi-natory outcomes. In this volume, the editors (two research economistsfrom the Inter-American Development Bank and a professor of eco-nomics and Vanderbilt U.) present eight chapters use a variety of thesemethodological tools in order to investigate the prevalence of discrimi-nation against women and demographic minorities in Latin America.Specific topics include experiments studying the extent and nature of dis-crimination in urban Peru; a field experimental study on discriminationin the provision of social services to the poor in Bogota, Colombia; dis-crimination and social networks among high school students inArgentina; labor market discrimination in Chile; and gender differentialsin judicial proceedings in housing-related cases in Uruguay.

F1419 2009-021944 978-0-8047-6934-1EEtthhnniicc eennttrreepprreenneeuurrss;; iiddeennttiittyy aanndd ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ppoolliittiiccss iinnLLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa..DeHart, Monica C.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 192 p. $21.95 (pa)In order to understand the emergence and effects of ethnic entrepre-neurs, DeHart (anthropology, U. of Puget Sound) traces the changing con-tours of development practice in Latin America, emphasizing how it hasput ethnic cultural difference to work for development. She asks why andin what circumstances ethnic subjects have been identified as agents ofeconomic development; and how the mobilization of ethnic culturalidentity and practice for development solidifies, challenges, or transformshow ethnic agents perceive their own identity, community, and devel-opment goals.

F1435 978-0-8061-4071-1TThhee nneeww ccaattaalloogg ooff MMaayyaa hhiieerrooggllyypphhss;; vv..22:: TThhee ccooddiiaalltteexxttss..Macri, Martha J. and Gabrielle Vail. Grapheme drawings by Martha J.Macri. (The civilization of the American Indian series; v.264)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2009 308 p. $65.00The Maya hieroglyphs were a mystery to scholars until less than fiftyyears ago when tentative meanings and sounds began to be deciphered.This second volume of the catalogue of the hieroglyphs covers the threecodices found in Europe that were apparently sent there soon after theSpanish conquest. Macri (California Indian studies, University ofCalifornia, Davis) and Vail (social sciences, New College of Florida) havereproduced each individual glyph along with suppositions about itsmeaning and pronunciation along with references to earlier discussionsof the glyph. They are arranged by form: birds, animals, body parts,gods, geometric shapes etc. An introduction gives the history of thecodices, as much as is known, along with the steps to decipherment.Oversize 8.5 x 11.5 ″

F1439 2009-035866 978-0-8133-4421-8UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg CCeennttrraall AAmmeerriiccaa:: gglloobbaall ffoorrcceess,, rreebbeelllliioonnaanndd cchhaannggee,, 55tthh eedd..Booth, John A. et al.Westview Press, ©2010 338 p. $35.00 (pa)This revised fifth edition updates its description of how both domesticand global political and economic factors have influenced rebellion andregime change in Costa Rica, Nicaragua, El Salvador, Guatemala, andHonduras. While every country is treated differently in terms of subjectsaddressed, the authors generally cover historical background, politics andgovernment, conflict and insurrection, weathering global forces, and spe-cific problems (such as poverty). Authors are Booth (political science, U.of North Texas), Christine Wade (political science and internationalstudies, Washington College), and Thomas Walker (emeritus, politicalscience, Ohio U.).

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –76–

F1799 2009-019228 978-0-8130-3396-9HHaavvaannaa ffoorreevveerr;; aa ppiiccttoorriiaall aanndd ccuullttuurraall hhiissttoorryy ooff aannuunnffoorrggeettttaabbllee cciittyy..Treister, Kenneth et al.U. Press of Florida, ©2009 301 p. $50.00Like a thoughtfully prepared travelogue, this attractive book celebratingHavana entices and informs with color photos and engaging text,focusing on the city’s architectural and urban design features as well asCuban culture and the spirit of the place. The narrative investigates thecity’s urban and architectural history and current status, neighborhoods,influences and landmarks, and the city’s particular zest. The epiloguelooks eagerly to the future and anticipates enormous US interest (andhuge numbers of tourists) once the doors of exchange are open again.Treister is an architect, photographer, and sculptor; Préstamo (deceased)was affiliated with the architecture department at the U. of Miami; andGarcia teaches architecture at Broward College, Florida.

F1938 2009-039428 978-1-55876-519-1TThhee DDoommiinniiccaann RReeppuubblliicc;; aa nnaattiioonnaall hhiissttoorryy,, 22dd eedd..Moya Pons, Frank.Markus Wiener Pub., ©2010 582 p. $36.95 (pa)Prolific historian of the Caribbean nation, Moya Pons updates his historyof the Dominican Republic, previously published in 1995 and 1998, andapparently in Spanish before that. The first edition extended only to 1991,and in order to bring the account to 2004 in a single volume, he hasfocused on political and economic aspects, to the detriment of the socialand cultural perspectives that infuse the earlier chapters. He refersreaders to other recent publications for the rest of the story. At the otherend of the chronology, he begins with the geography of Hispaniola and3,000 years of migration to it before Europeans appeared. A series ofmaps shows the historical development of the island under its variouscolonial masters.

F1971 2009-035279 978-0-313-35418-2TThhee hhiissttoorryy ooff PPuueerrttoo RRiiccoo..Pierce Flores, Lisa. (Greenwood histories of the modern nations)Greenwood Press, ©2010 155 p. $49.95Puerto Rican-American Pierce Flores grew up in the US and has workedas a journalist in the US and Latin America for some 20 years; her recentprojects include Greenwood/ABC-CLIO’s The American Mosaic, a set ofWeb sites and blogs exploring the American multiethnic experience. Sheoffers students and general researchers and readers an introductoryoverview of the history of Puerto Ricans living on the island. The PuertoRican diaspora in the US (and elsewhere) is not incorporated, but aselection of resources is included in a bibliographic essay at the end ofthe text. Following a description of Puerto Rico and its people, sevenchapters trace the history of the island from prehistoric times to thepresent day. Also included are a timeline of historical events, list ofnotable individuals, and glossary of selected terms.

F2191 2009-026421 978-0-674-03591-1AAttllaannttiicc CCrreeoolleess iinn tthhee aaggee ooff rreevvoolluuttiioonnss..Landers, Jane G.Harvard University Press, ©2010 340 p. $29.95The history of slavery in the America’s has been chronicled in historiesand in fiction. The stories of those who fought back and formed theirown free societies have been less often recognized. Landers (history,Vanderbilt University) looks at groups of Creoles particularly in Florida,Cuba and other Gulf areas. Spanish records contain letters and petitionsfrom free Creole men and these are a new source the Landers has minedto find treasure. She details how specific individuals learned how to useinternational politics to acquire rights for themselves and their families.They fought with Native Americans, the British, French and Spanish, notonly for freedom but for equality under the law. This dramatic tale ofstrong, intelligent people who took control over their fate is both rivetingand inspiring. It is an essential part of North American and Caribbeanhistory that has been overlooked for too long.

F2519 2009-014537 978-0-8165-2874-5TThhee ooccccuulltt lliiffee ooff tthhiinnggss;; nnaattiivvee AAmmaazzoonniiaann tthheeoorriieess ooffmmaatteerriiaalliittyy aanndd ppeerrssoonnhhoooodd..Title main entry. Ed. by Fernando Santos-Granero.U. of Arizona Press, ©2009 277 p. $55.00The ways in which people, objects and animals are classified is not static.In this collection of essays, edited by Santos-Granero (SmithsonianTropical Institute, Panama) the subjectivity of things is explored forseveral cultures in the Amazon basin. Here ethnographers and anthro-pologists have learned that objects can have sentience or be an essentialpart of a person whereas some people and animals are essentiallyobjects. The articles explain the complexity of the classifications whichcan vary by situation. They also make clear that there are large varia-tions among the different social and language groups. The clarity of thearticles would make this book a good candidate for classroom use as wellas being of interest to the general reader.

F2849 2009-028800 978-1-56656-759-6CChhee GGuueevvaarraa;; aa lliiffee..Caistor, Nick.Interlink Publishing Group, ©2010 148 p. $15.00 (pa)Journalist/broadcaster Caistor delivers a well-written and pleasantly even-handed biography of the well-known revolutionary leader of the 1950sand 1960s. Portraying Guevara neither as a saint nor as a demon, theauthor fills in the details of the young Ernesto’s upbringing in Argentinaand his work as a physician in a number of Latin American countries.While giving ample coverage of Guevara’s role in Cuba’s revolution,Caistor also examines his activities from the end of that revolution to theabortive guerilla campaign in Bolivia that led to Guevara’s death in 1967.Although this is far from a definitive Guevara biography, it is a welcomealternative to the hagiographies and hatchet jobs that have thus far char-acterized accounts of the life of this important 20th century figure.

F2849 2009-036403 978-0-8108-5839-8HHiissttoorriiccaall ddiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff tthhee ““ddiirrttyy wwaarrss””,, 22dd eedd..Kohut, David R. and Olga Vilella. (Historical dictionaries of war, revo-lution, and civil unrest; no.40)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 405 p. $105.00Both members of Amnesty International, Kohut (library) and Vilella(Latino/Latin American studies, both Saint Xavier U., Chicago) offer a ref-erence to the wars that South American authoritarian regimes waged onreal and imagined subversion from 1954 to 1990. Among the entries arethe countries themselves: Argentina, Paraguay, Brazil, Bolivia, Uruguay,and Chile. Other categories include guerrilla and political movements,leading military and political figures on both sides, human rights organ-izations from local to international, artists who represented or resistedrepression, other players, and concepts. No date is cited for the firstedition.

F3031 978-1-84868-098-2HHeennrryy VVIIIIII..Rex, Richard.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 139 p. $18.95 (pa)The author of The Tudors presents a concise, accessible audiencechronicle of the bloody reign of Tudor monarch Henry VIII (1509-1547),which proved to be a turning point in English history. Rex (Reformationhistory, U. of Cambridge) treats the political, religious, and social aspectsof this tumultuous period —including Henry’s break with the CatholicChurch. Illustrations include facsimiles of Holbein-inspired portraits ofHenry and several of his six wives, members of the court, and royal realestate.

FC113 978-0-7748-1729-5OOnnee ooff tthhee ffaammiillyy;; MMeettiiss ccuullttuurree iinn nniinneetteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryyNNoorrtthhwweesstteerrnn SSaasskkaattcchheewwaann..MacDougal, Brenda.U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 335 p. $85.00Macdougall (Métis Studies, University of Ottawa) explores the formationof a Métis community at Île á la Crosse in northern Saskatchewan.Drawing on diverse written and oral sources, and using the Cree conceptof wahkootowin (a worldview that privileges family and values relat-edness between all beings), the author follows four generations of Métisfamilies, looking at how family members understood their relationshipswith the fur companies and Christian churches. Macdougall explainshow the Métis negotiated with local economic and religious institutionswhile creating and nurturing a society that emphasized family obligationand responsibility.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–77–

FC251 978-1-4426-1007-1PPeerrcceeppttiioonnss ooff CCuubbaa;; CCaannaaddiiaann aanndd AAmmeerriiccaann ppoolliicciieess iinnccoommppaarraattiivvee ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Wylie, Lana.U. of Toronto Press, ©2010 178 p. $22.95 (pa)Wylie (political science, McMaster U.) began her research with thecommon question of why the US continued to isolate Cuba while Canadahas followed a policy of engagement. Interviewing 35 Cuban, US, andCanadian policy makers, she was struck by how differently theydescribed the same phenomenon, and concluded that foreign policy isbased on perception, which is based in turn on identity. She looks at theexceptionalist and the Cuban other, the independent international citizenand the other Cuba, and exploring Cuba policy in tandem.

FC301 978-0-7748-1741-7TThhee hheerroo aanndd tthhee hhiissttoorriiaannss;; hhiissttoorriiooggrraapphhyy aanndd tthhee uusseessooff JJaaccqquueess CCaarrttiieerr..Gordon, Alan.U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 235 p. $85.00A French sea captain who tried and failed to found the first Frenchcolony in North America, Cartier (1491-1557) is lauded as hero in FrenchCanada these three and a half centuries later. Gordon (history, U. ofGuelph, Canada) explores how his reputation can be used by historiog-raphers to trace changes in what and how people think about the past.He considers the 16th-century world and Cartier, forgetting and remem-bering, the invention of a hero, Cartiermania, common sense, the manymeanings of Jacques Cartier, decline and dispersal, and failure and for-getting. Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.

FC2947 978-0-9812405-5-8TThhee rriioott tthhaatt nneevveerr wwaass;; tthhee mmiilliittaarryy sshhoooottiinngg ooff tthhrreeeeMMoonnttrreeaalleerrss iinn 11883322 aanndd tthhee ooffffiiccaall ccoovveerr--uupp..Jackson, James.Baraka Books, ©2009 358 p. $28.18 (pa)In May of 1932, events related to a by-election pitting a Irish-born can-didate over the English party candidate in Montreal, Canada, that led tothe deaths of three French Canadian men at the hands of British regularshas long been termed a riot by generations of historians. This book’sreconstruction of events, based on the proceedings of an investigationconducted by the House Assembly of the Province of Lower-Canada, con-temporary news accounts, and the voting pollbook, overturns thatassessment and concludes that the deaths of François Languedoc, PierreBillet, and Casimir Chauvin were completely unjustified and that, in fact,there never was a riot that day in Montreal.

GGEEOOGGRRAAPPHHYY,, HHYYDDRROOLLOOGGYY,, EENNVVIIRROONNMMEENNTT

G70 2009-042594 978-0-470-28857-3GGeeooggrraapphhiicc iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn aannaallyyssiiss,, 22dd eedd..O’Sullivan, David and David J. Unwin.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 405 p. $110.00O’Sullivan (geography, U. of Auckland, New Zealand) and Unwin (retired,geography, U. of London, UK) present the second edition of their mathe-matically rigorous introduction to geographical information analysis. Theemphasis is on the practical analysis of geographic data and the intel-lectual heritage of the text is rooted in the quantitative geography of the1960s. Chapters discuss geographic information analysis and spatial data,the pitfalls and potential of spatial data, mapping, maps as outcomes ofprocesses, point pattern analysis, area objects and spatial autocorrelation,local statistics, describing and analyzing fields, the statistics of fields,map overlay, and new approaches to spatial analysis. For the newedition, a number of changes have been made, including a greateremphasis on Monte Carlo/randomization approaches for handling spatialdata and new chapters on geovisualization and local statistics.

G70 2009-035961 978-1-4398-0870-2GGIISS,, eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall mmooddeelliinngg aanndd eennggiinneeeerriinngg,, 22dd eedd..Brimicombe, Allan.CRC Press, ©2010 361 p. $99.95Brimicombe (geo-information studies, U. of East London) offers a secondedition of his reference on geo-information systems (GIS), environmentalmodeling and engineering. The book describes GIS, how data is struc-tured, functionality, and modeling. New and revised information in thesecond edition includes: data capture and compilation, multi-agent mod-eling, evaluation model to illustrate issues of verification and validity,case studies that focus on online tools and applications, the role of agentsin interoperability, and updated references on the current researchagenda. The author both introduces readers to the subject, but also pointsout issues that come up when GIS and environmental models are usedin conjunction with each other.

G70 2009-028917 978-1-60623-336-8RReeggiioonnaall aanndd uurrbbaann GGIISS;; aa ddeecciissiioonn ssuuppppoorrtt aapppprrooaacchh..Nyerges, Timothy L. and Piotr Jankowski.Guilford Pr., ©2010 298 p. $60.00Geography professors Nyerges (Water Center, U. of Washington) andJankowski (Center for Earth Systems Analysis Research, San Diego StateU.) approach geographic information systems (GIS) from a decisionsupport perspective within an urban-regional context. Rather than just amethodological treatment of software techniques, they cover frameworks,perspectives, and methods of applying GIS in complex decision-makingsituations and data processing strategies encompassing planning, capitalimprovement programming, and implementation (the PPI model) foraddressing land, transportation, and water resource concerns. Chaptersinclude case examples, illustrations (some in color), and reviewquestions.

G71 2009-020183 978-1-4051-9146-3GGeeooggrraapphhyy aanndd eetthhnnooggrraapphhyy;; ppeerrcceeppttiioonnss ooff tthhee wwoorrlldd iinnpprree--mmooddeerrnn ssoocciieettiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Kurt A. Raaflaub and Richard J.A. Talbert.(The ancient world; comparative histories)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 357 p. $134.95The articles in this book investigate the ways in which pre-Modern soci-eties saw their world. The first thing the editors ask of the reader is tocast out all preconceptions about maps, linear time and distance. Oncethis is at least attempted, the journey through these essays becomes anexciting voyage of discovery. Starting in India and moving to China, theAmericas, Egypt, the Greco-Roman world, Mesopotamia and Europe. thefocus is on how the geography of the culture reflected what was mostimportant to it. Rather than forming a solid image of coastlines or moun-tains, maps were intended to show levels of society, cosmologies or todelineate “us” from “them”. The articles, which grew out of a 2006workshop held at Brown University, are scholarly in their research butall are written in accessible prose. This study is for anyone ready andwilling to have their mind expanded by different worldviews.

G149 978-1-84682-131-8TTrraavveelllleerrss’’ aaccccoouunnttss aass ssoouurrccee--mmaatteerriiaall ffoorr IIrriisshhhhiissttoorriiaannss..Woods, C.J. (Maynooth research guides for Irish local history)Four Courts Press, ©2009 248 p. $65.00Woods (Royal Irish Academy, emeritus) spent many years collectingmainly printed accounts of Ireland made by travelers. In this encyclo-pedia of his findings, he lists 209 of these accounts in chronological orderfrom 1635-1948. Each entry gives the source, some only parts of longertravelogues. Woods then gives a short biography of the author, thepurpose of the trip (“to overcome disappointment of a rejected novel” isone of the more unusual) the dates, itinerary and mode of travel. He thensummarizes the content as well as listing people the traveler met, somewell known, most not. The index is listed by entry number, not page andis useful for cross-referencing different impressions of specific places.Woods intends this to be a reference for historians but it will also be fas-cinating to those searching for their Irish heritage who want to discoverfirsthand accounts of the places where their ancestors lived. Distributedin the US by ISBS.

G155 2008-054148 978-1-4384-2665-5DDeessttiinnaattiioonn ddiiccttaattoorrsshhiipp;; tthhee ssppeeccttaaccllee ooff SSppaaiinn’’ss ttoouurriissttbboooomm aanndd tthhee rreeiinnvveennttiioonn ooff ddiiffffeerreennccee..Crumbaugh, Justin. (SUNY series in Latin American and Iberianthought and culture)State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 165 p. $70.00Examining the tourist boom in Francoist Spain in the 1960s, Crumbaugh(Spanish, Mount Holyoke College) argues that tourism became implicatedin Spanish governance through representations of the industry withinSpain, narratives of “cultural revolution” associated with the tourismboom, and representations of the Franco dictatorship’s management ofthe tourism industry. He examines the way tourism, rather than resultingin “defascistization” as some have argued, instead strengthenedFrancoism by providing it with a new symbolic structure of rule thatenabled Francoism to recast itself as benevolent and ideologically neutraland served to diffuse dissent and depoliticize public discourse. Tourism,both materially and symbolically, was not a driver of “defascistization”but instead of a form “microfascistization” in which “the task of statepolitics [were] largely delegated to disembodied, commonsensical ratio-nales, to commercial entertainment, and to consumer products.”

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –78–

G155 2009-023193 978-0-415-45939-6EEccoonnoommiiccss ooff ttoouurriissmm,, 22dd eedd..Stabler, Mike et al.Routledge, ©2010 506 p. $49.95 (pa)Authored by Stabler (U. of Reading, UK), Papatheodorou (U. of theAegean, Greece), and the late Sinclair (formerly of the U. of NottinghamBusiness School, UK), this text introduces readers to the economics oftourism. It discusses basic concepts, principles, and analytical method-ologies and techniques; provides guidance to the wider literature; andexamines trends in the tourism sector while assessing their significance.Eleven chapters discuss the microeconomic foundations of tourismdemand, empirical studies of tourism demand, microeconomic founda-tions of tourism supply, the economic profile and characteristics of thetourism sectors, tourism in a national and regional context, tourism in aninternational context, global environmental issues and tourism, theanalysis of tourism environmental issues at the local level, the valuationof resources and environmental policy instruments, and future directionsin the economics of tourism. This new edition has been revised andexpanded to reflect developments in the field over the past 12 years.

G155 2009-025277 978-0-415-95684-0TToouurriissmm iinn tthhee UUSSAA;; aa ssppaattiiaall aanndd ssoocciiaall ssyynntthheessiiss..Ioannides, Dimitri and Dallen J. Timothy.Routledge, ©2010 222 p. $43.95 (pa)Ioannides (human geography, Mid-Sweden U. and tourism planning anddevelopment, Missouri State U.) and Timothy (tourism development andmanagement, Arizona State U. and heritage tourism, U. of Sunderland,England) consider tourism as a geographic phenomenon, using the US asa case study. Their topics include American tourism through time; theinstitutional setting; demand for tourism in the US; tourist attractions,tourism types, accommodations, and intermediaries; the transportationsystem; tourism’s economic significance; urban and rural tourism; andtrends and futures.

G161 978-82-519-2460-3GGrreeeettiinnggss ffrroomm SSppiittssbbeerrggeenn;; ttoouurriissttss aatt tthhee eetteerrnnaall iiccee11882277--11991144..Reilly, John T.Tapir Academic Press, ©2009 227 p. $108.00The northernmost part of Europe, the arctic island of Spitsbergen is theclosest point to the North Pole that’s relatively easy to get to. Beginningin the 1890s and lasting up to the outbreak of world war in 1914, cruiseships took tourists to see Spitsbergen’s snowbound mountains, starklybeautiful fjords, and exotic arctic wildlife. This handsome book looks atthat “golden age” of arctic tourism, and introduces readers to the firstarctic tourists and the ships that carried them north. Extensively illus-trated with period art, photographs, and postcards, the book will havegreat appeal to armchair explorers, as well as to serious students oftourism and the arctic. (Distributed in the U.S. by ISBS)

G490 2009-021401 978-1-59017-322-0TThhee wwaayy ooff tthhee wwoorrlldd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999922))Bouvier, Nicolas. Trans. by Robyn Marsack. (New York Review booksclassics)New York Review Books, ©2009 318 p. $16.95 (pa)This travel classic recounts the 18-month journey from Yugoslavia toPakistan, taken by two young Frenchmen just over a half-century ago.Travelling in an unreliable little Fiat, Bouvier and Thierry Vernet madetheir way across the Balkans, Turkey, Iran, Pakistan, and Afghanistan,ending their journey at the Khyber Pass. The author’s account avoids theclichés of travel writing, giving readers an insightful and fascinating lookinto a part of the world where Western travelers were not yet common.The text is enlivened by Vernet’s pen-and-ink drawings.

G550 2009-050857 978-0-313-38234-5CCrruuiissiinngg ffoorr ttrroouubbllee;; ccrruuiissee sshhiippss aass ssoofftt ttaarrggeettss ffoorrppiirraatteess,, tteerrrroorriissttss,, aanndd ccoommmmoonn ccrriimmiinnaallss..Gaouette, Mark.Praeger, ©2010 285 p. $54.95Gaouette is a maritime security consultant to the US government andlarge cruise lines, and invented the sonic cannon now being used to driveoff attackers. He discusses predators, vulnerabilities, and victims ofmodern cruise ships; pirates and terrorists; crime statistics and storiesthat the cruise lines do not want customers to know; protecting pas-sengers and crews from pirates, terrorists, and cruise ship accidents; thelimitations of US and international maritime regulatory regimes andmaritime agencies; and clear and present dangers for cruise ships andfuture remedies.

G606 2009-035094 978-1-58648-636-5TThhee ffuuttuurree hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee AArrccttiicc..Emmerson, Charles.PublicAffairs, ©2010 405 p. $28.95A treasure trove of natural resources and a main driver of global climate,the Earth’s Arctic regions are increasingly important to the future ofhumanity. In this book, geopolitical specialist Emmerson examines thelandscape, history, and politics of the arctic, looking at the actors whohave shaped the region’s past and identifying the forces that will shapethe Arctic’s future. That future is very much up for grabs, suggests theauthor, and depends greatly on whether the natural resources of theArctic are preserved or developed. Emmerson’s love of the Arctic infuseshis prose, effectively keeping this book from being a dry accounting offacts and figures suitable only for policy wonks.

G2329 2009-582761 978-1-58948-232-6AArrcchhaaeeoollooggyy aanndd llaannddssccaappee iinn tthhee MMoonnggoolliiaann AAllttaaii;; aannaattllaass..Jacobson-Tepfer, Esther and James E. Meacham. Photography by GaryTepfer.ESRI Press, ©2010 209 p. $79.95An extraordinary collaboration over 15 years, the project represented bythis book is associated with an initiative by UNESCO’s World HeritageCentre to identify and preserve (and address threats to preservation) thenatural and cultural wealth of the Altai Mountains region alongMongolia’s borders with Russia and China. Affiliated with the U. ofOregon, Esther Jacobson-Tepfer (emeritus, art history) and James E.Meacham (geography), along with photographer Gary Tepfer, havetogether created a narrative describing the 12,000-year old history, visualdocumentation in photos of sites and artifacts, and the best mapsdescribing human and physical geography that current technology cancreate. Their work is presented in an oversize volume (11x11″), with anaccompanying website.

GA221 978-99932-7-272-4MMiinniiaattuurree mmaappss ooff MMaallttaa..Ganado, Albert.Midsea Books Ltd, ©2009 127 p. $26.50 (pa)A practicing lawyer, Ganado also writes extensively about the history ofhis native Malta, with a special interest in its cartography. Here he pro-vides text for the catalogue of an exhibition of miniature maps of theMediterranean island organized by Heritage Malta and the Ministry forGozo, and held in Gozo from September to October 2009. The 90 mapsare part of a larger collection at the National Museum of Fine Arts,Valletta. Some depict the whole island, others detail parts of it, and stillothers indicate its location in the larger region. There is no index.Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

GB656 2009-015354 978-1-4398-0939-6FFuuzzzzyy llooggiicc aanndd hhyyddrroollooggiiccaall mmooddeelliinngg..Sen, Zekai.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 340 p. $129.95Sen (civil engineering, Technical U. of Istanbul, Turkey) describes the useof fuzzy logic to deal with gray or uncertain information and problemsin hydrology, an area which depends on topography, vegetation, soilmoisture, rainfall, air, and other factors that change in a vague manner.He addresses how to apply linguistic and word computations on thebasis of philosophical, rational, and logical approaches without mathe-matical formulations. He outlines fuzzy logic principles, processes, anddesign, and the use of fuzzy logic principles in larger hydrological scaleswithin the hydrological cycle, with examples from different aspects ofwater management, including hydrology, hydrogeology, groundwater,water quality, and water resources operations and management.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–79–

GB665 978-0-7748-1701-1WWhhaatt iiss wwaatteerr??;; tthhee hhiissttoorryy ooff aa mmooddeerrnn aabbssttrraaccttiioonn..Linton, Jamie. (The nature, history, society series)U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 333 p. $85.00Linton (geography, Queens University) looks at the global water crisisfrom a combination of viewpoints: philosophy, ecology, sociology,hydrology, economics and engineering. He sees water as something thatis defined by the ways in which people utilize it. He begins with ahistory of human conception of water as metaphor in religion and dailylife, along with the hydrologic cycle as seen through time. He then looksat the way individuals and the state have attempted to control the flowof water, as with dams. Global access to water for agricultural andhuman consumption is discussed as well. Linton encourages govern-ments to realize that water is a global concern that must be addressedby all the world’s citizens. His arguments are buttressed by solid tech-nical and scientific data. By realizing that this is a multi-faceted problem,involving politics and religion as well as technology, Linton provides abase from which the current water crisis can be approached and, pos-sibly, overcome. Distributed by UTP Distribution.

GB1203 2009-041322 978-0-8156-3211-5RRiivveerrssccaappeess aanndd nnaattiioonnaall iiddeennttiittiieess..Cusack, Tricia. (Space, place, and society)Syracuse U. Press, ©2010 237 p. $29.95Cusack (Visual and Cultural Studies) examines the ways that riverscapeshave played an important role in transforming the abstract idea of thenation into a potent visual image. Focusing on five rivers in Europe andthe U.S.—the Hudson, the Volga, the Seine, the Thames, and theShannon—the author shows how painted riverscapes helped formnational identities in the 19th and early 20th centuries. Cusack showsthese modern riverscapes have incorporated dominant conceptions of thenation, and represented the mythic stream of national history flowingout of the past and into the future.

GE10 2009-037029 978-0-313-35261-4EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ssuussttaaiinnaabbiilliittyy;; 33vv..Collin, Robin Morris and Robert William Collin.Greenwood Press, ©2010 281 p. $265.00The three volumes of this reference are devoted to the three elements nec-essary to formulate a viable sustainability policy; environment, eco-nomics, and equity. Each volume is organized in the same way, with fivechapters providing an overview to the issues, definitions of terminologyand contexts, government and UN involvement, controversies, and futuretrends. All three volumes contain appendices with primary documentsand reference information as well as a bibliography and comprehensiveindex. The material is well-written and accessible to the advanced highschool and undergraduate student, with lists of references provided atthe conclusion of each sub-section within the chapters. The organizationof the work is commendable, providing the student and interested readerwith clear definitions and discussion of the big picture before movinginto specific issues and solutions. The sections on government includesexamples from state and local governments as well as the policy trendsof larger bodies. Engaging and pertinent, this reference addresses themany issues that sustainability raises. The authors are at Willamette U.in Salem, Oregon.

GE20 2009-010240 978-1-60741-367-7DDiirreeccttoorryy ooff ccoonnsseerrvvaattiioonn ffuunnddiinngg ssoouurrcceess ffoorr ddeevveellooppiinnggccoouunnttrriieess;; ccoonnsseerrvvaattiioonn bbiioollooggyy,, eedduuccaattiioonn aanndd ttrraaiinniinngg,,ffeelllloowwsshhiippss aanndd sscchhoollaarrsshhiippss..Owino, Alfred O. and Joseph O. Oyugi. (Environmental science, engi-neering and technology)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 189 p. $79.00This directory summarizes the mission of 150 programs offering grantsto conservation and socio-economic projects in developing countries; 75related education, training, fellowship, and scholarship opportunities;and 250 organizations performing ecological, environmental, and con-servation research around the world. Each entry lists a street address,phone number, email address, and website for contacting the organi-zation. The introduction offer advice on preparing a proposal budget andtracking grant applications. Owino works for the Kenya Wildlife Service,and Oyugi teaches biology at Wilbur Wright College in Chicago.

GE60 2009941922 978-0-470-52960-7GGrreeeenn ccaarreeeerrss ffoorr dduummmmiieess..McClelland, Carol. (...for dummies)John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 340 p. $19.99 (pa)McClelland, who runs an online career center, also has hands-onknowledge of the world of sustainability. In this useful volume, she offerspractical tips on what jobs are out there, what skills they require, andhow to go about landing one. Laid out in the ‘dummies’ style, with lotsof bulleted lists and pointers, the guide teaches the reader what the greeneconomy is, defining terms and naming key events and resources. Shecontinues to develop these topics and also offers advice on how thereader can continue to learn more and why they should. Typical of theseries, this volume is filled with accurate, accessible information and, inthis case, very sensible, detailed, and basic job-seeking advice.

GE70 978-90-8790-961-1EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall eedduuccaattiioonn iinn ccoonntteexxtt;; aann iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaallppeerrssppeeccttiivvee oonn tthhee ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ooff eennvviirroonnmmeennttaalleedduuccaattiioonn..Taylor, Neil et al.Sense Publishers, ©2009 326 p. $39.00 (pa)In the 30 chapters compiled here, Taylor (U. of New England, Australia)et al. present an international perspective on the development and imple-mentation of environmental education in formal and non-formal sectorsand factors that impact its effectiveness in non-Western and non-English-speaking countries. They take a sociocultural approach to environmentaleducation and draw on the experiences and research of local expertsaround the world, addressing aspects of environmental education in spe-cific educational contexts, including content and integration into the cur-riculum; the impact of formal and non-formal programs; the influenceof political, cultural, societal, and religious mores on education; govern-mental or ministerial curriculum reform; the tension between economicdevelopment and educating for sustainable development; and theinfluence of external assessment regimes. Countries include Papa NewGuinea, the Sultanate of Oman, India, Sri Lanka, Malta, Greece, Poland,Turkey, Botswana, Namibia, Tanzania, South Africa, Malaysia, Singapore,Thailand, and Korea. There is no index.

GE160 2009-038312 978-1-60497-646-5AAffrriiccaann eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall aanndd hhuummaann sseeccuurriittyy iinn tthhee 2211ssttcceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Helen E. Purkitt.Cambria Press, ©2009 371 p. $119.99Members of US military educational, research, policy, or operational divi-sions explore how US organizations can provide effective non-traditionalsecurity aid to Africa, the next big source of petroleum. Their topicsinclude insecurities in Niger and Chad, resource allocation and xeno-phobic violence in South Africa, environmental security and neglectedtropical diseases in Africa, global climate change, natural resources andconflict, and environmental security in peacekeeping operations. The 11papers are from a panel at the March 2008 annual convention of theInternational Studies Association.

GE170 2009-047221 978-0-8133-4442-3GGlloobbaall eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall ppoolliittiiccss,, 55tthh eedd..Chasek, Pamela S. et al.Westview Press, ©2010 473 p. $43.00 (pa)Chasek (political science and international studies, Manhattan College),David L. Downie (environmental studies and political science, FairfieldU.), and Janet Welsh Brown, who has managed several environmentalorganizations, update their textbook and handbook on the interplaybetween politics and environmental concerns around the world. Amongthe topics are international regimes in environmental politics, intergov-ernmental organizations, transboundary air pollution, ozone depletion,desertification, opportunities to improve compliance, North-Southinequalities and the environment, and global environmental governance.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –80–

GE170 2009-930864 978-1-84720-397-7GGoovveerrnniinngg tthhee eennvviirroonnmmeenntt;; ssaalliieenntt iinnssttiittuuttiioonnaall iissssuueess..Title main entry. Ed. by Albert Breton. (New horizons in environmentaleconomics)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 307 p. $140.00The editors and authors contend that the traditional view of environ-mental policy is limited to the control of pollution and over-exploitationis inadequate to deal with the interconnections between economic activ-ities and the environment’s natural systems. Their goal here is to fill inat least some of the blanks between conventional environmental feder-alism literature and the growth in environmental and ecological eco-nomics of the past 20 years. They also look at alternative solutions forhow to determine which agencies are most appropriate and able toassume responsibilities for the various aspects of the environment. Topicsinclude: risk management, compliance, environmental accounting, dis-counting, and interjurisdictional contracting. The book will interest stu-dents and researchers as well as policy makers. Editors Breton (emeritus,economics, U. of Toronto), Brosio (public economics, U. of Turin),Dalmazzone (economic policy, U. of Turin), Garrone (research fellow, U.of Turin, Italy), and 10 co-contributors.

GE170 978-90-420-2937-8MMaannaaggiinngg eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall jjuussttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis Pavlich. (At the interface/Probing theboundaries; v.62)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 274 p. $81.20 (pa)Scholars in a range of humanities and social sciences from around theWestern world gathered in Oxford, England in July 2007 to discuss envi-ronmental justice. Of the presentations there, 14 were selected to providea tapestry of inter-cultural approaches to global problems using a varietyof methodologies. They cover values and signification foundations forenvironmental justice; heuristic strategies of political, economic, andsocial issues; environmental justice and law; precarious technologies; andembedding environmental justice in local social frameworks. Among spe-cific topics are university autonomy and sustainability in BritishColumbia, a virtue-ethical approach to the moral problems caused bygenetic engineering, customary law and community-based conservationof marine areas in Fiji, building democratic citizenship on environmentallocal problems in Mexico, and knowledge and valuation in environ-mental justice struggles.

GE196 2009-675170 978-0-86571-657-5WWeeaarriinngg ssmmaalllleerr sshhooeess;; lliivviinngg lliigghhtt oonn tthhee bbiigg bblluueemmaarrbbllee..Haynes, Chip.New Society Publishers Ltd., ©2009 182 p. $16.95 (pa)The title alludes to the popular concept of how big a footprint peopleleave on the earth, that is, how much impact they make on the envi-ronment. Graphic artist and writer Haynes suggest some ways to reducethat footprint that even suburbanites like him can manage. He begins byexplaining why a smaller footprint would be a good idea. Subsequenttopics include saving electricity like bits of string, saving water one dropat a time, the joys of solid waste, and surviving with smaller trans-portation. Distributed in the US by Consortium Books Sales andDistribution.

GE199 2009-036386 978-0-8014-7641-9RReedd ttoo ggrreeeenn;; eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall aaccttiivviissmm iinn ppoosstt--SSoovviieettRRuussssiiaa..Henry, Laura A.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 282 p. $24.95 (pa)Focusing in particular on environmental politics, Henry (government andlegal studies, Bowdoin College) analyzes the factors that promote andinhibit different types of citizen mobilization in Russia and explores theimplications of emerging patterns of mobilization for the development ofcivil society and for the course of Russia’s politics. Positing that all socialorganizations pursue sometimes reinforcing and sometimes clashinggoals of locating resources needed for sustaining the organization, insti-tuting more favorable state policies on particular issues, and creating apolitical and social arena more conducive to future change, she exploreshow these organizations navigate Russia’s scarce resources and relativelyclosed political opportunity structure and balance the preferences of localconstituents, Russian authorities, transnational environmental organiza-tions, and foreign donors. She examines how different strategic choiceswithin this environment lead to different organizational forms and howthese forms, in turn, help shape outcomes related to the goals mentionedabove.

GF41 2009-050184 978-0-313-38130-0TThhee ppuurrssuuiitt ooff eeccoottooppiiaa;; lleessssoonnss ffrroomm iinnddiiggeennoouuss aannddttrraaddiittiioonnaall ssoocciieettiieess ffoorr tthhee hhuummaann eeccoollooggyy ooff oouurr mmooddeerrnnwwoorrlldd..Anderson, Eugene N.Praeger, ©2010 251 p. $44.95Although drawing heavily on his research experience, this work byAnderson (emeritus, anthropology, U. of California at Riverside) is a per-sonal and ethical reflection on moral issues related to environmentalism.He explores the lessons that traditional and indigenous societies canteach us about how we should and should not interact with nature andwith other humans. While the discussion is broad ranging, covering cul-tures and societies around the world and political ideas from across thespectrum, the overall message is simple, Anderson insists. It is this: “Ourenvironmental crisis is not the result of simple overconsumption or irre-sponsibility. It is the lack of solidarity.”

GF47 2009-529785 978-0-86571-639-1TThhee eeccootteecchhnniicc ffuuttuurree;; eennvviissiioonniinngg aa ppoosstt--ppeeaakk wwoorrlldd..Greer, John Michael.New Society Publishers Ltd., ©2009 271 p. $18.95 (pa)Having discussed why the industrial age is ending and the immediatesteps people can take to cushion the fall in The Long Descent, Greer heresketches the arc of history and human evolution in which that crisisnestles, and suggests actions people can take to make a better world notonly for themselves, but for their grandchildren’s grandchildren. Hebegins with orientations to limits and beyond them, succession, thefuture, and the ecotechnic age. Then he surveys resources, among thempreparations, food, home, work, energy, community, culture, and science.Distributed in the US by Consortium Books Sales and Distribution.

GF125 2008-922616 978-1-4129-3041-3KKeeyy ccoonncceeppttss iinn uurrbbaann ggeeooggrraapphhyy..Latham, Alan et al. (Key concepts in human geography)Sage Publications, ©2009 232 p. $108.00This volume describes various central concepts in the field of urban geog-raphy under the headings of five overarching areas of concern: locationand movement, constructions, envisioning and experience, social andpolitical organization, and sites and practices. Specific entries cover suchconcepts as centrality, mobility, global cities, transnational urbanism,nature, materiality, infrastructure, photography, the body, virtuality, seg-regation, urban politics, community, consumption, media, public space,and commemoration. Each entry concludes with a summary of keypoints and a guide to further reading.

AANNTTHHRROOPPOOLLOOGGYY

GN17 2009-025362 978-1-84545-626-9CCoonncceeppttuuaalliizziinngg IIrraanniiaann aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy;; ppaasstt aanndd pprreesseennttppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Shahnaz R. Najdmabadi.Berghahn Books, ©2009 278 p. $90.00Nadjmabadi (anthropology, Goethe U., Germany) presents 13 papersexamining the history, current status, and future directions of the anthro-pological tradition as it relates to the study of Iran and its peoples. Topicsinclude the contribution of foreign anthropologists to Iranology; folk nar-rative research in contemporary Iran; influences of modernization, socialtransformation, and globalization on Iranian anthropology; theindigenous academic tradition of anthropology in Iran; women asIranian anthropologists; constraints and possibilities for applied anthro-pology and anthropological research in Iran; taboo themes and newobjects in Iranian anthropology; and Islamophobia in anthropology.

GN25 2008-034463 978-0-8139-2707-7IInn aanndd oouutt ooff tthhee wweesstt;; rreeccoonnssttrruuccttiinngg aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy..Godelier, Maurice. Trans. by Nora Scott. (Page-Barbour lectures for2002)U. of Virginia Press, ©2009 254 p. $45.00Drawing from the 2002 Page-Barbour Lectures he delivered at the U. ofVirginia and adding four additional lectures and articles, Godelier, ananthropologist at the École des hautes études en sciences sociales in Paris,deconstructs “truths” in social anthropology about family, kinship, sexu-ality, and the construction of self. He places social anthropology in its his-torical perspective, including its origins in the West and colonialism, anddescribes how it is in the process of being reconstructed, transcending itsorigins to achieve scientific objectivity beyond the colonial efforts and nolonger situated in the West. He also discusses his experience as the firsthead of the science department of the Quai Branly anthropologicalmuseum in Paris and issues relating to the presentation of non-Westerncultural artifacts to a Western public. Translated by Nora Scott.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–81–

GN33 2009-027142 978-1-59451-780-8PPaarraaddiiggmmss ffoorr aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy;; aann eetthhnnooggrraapphhiicc rreeaaddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by E. Paul Durrenberger and Suzan Erem.Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 337 p. $93.00The 20 readings provide classic and contemporary examples of anthro-pology illustrating how fieldwork is conducted, the importance of historyand power, relationships between the global and the local, and otherelements of the profession. The anthology is designed to accompany the2010 second edition of Durenberger and Erem’s Anthropology Unbound oran other introductory textbook, or to be used without a textbook. Amongthe papers are studies of residence rules about where Pacific Islanderslive, the myth of the sacred cow in India, the social organization ofMecca and the origins of Islam, corporate capitalism and the transfor-mation of US culture, field stories of the informal economy amongMexican immigrants in Silicon Valley, and using computer simulation toharness social complexity.

GN36 2009-033901 978-0-295-98966-2TThhee mmuusseeuumm ooff aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy aatt tthhee uunniivveerrssiittyy ooff BBrriittiisshhCCoolluummbbiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Carol E. Mayer and Anthony Shelton.U. of Washington Press, ©2009 237 p. $40.00 (pa)This sumptuous volume of images from the Museum of Anthropology atthe University of British Columbia commemorates the 2010 reopening ofthe museum after renovations. Mayer, head curator and Shelton, directorof the museum, explain in the introductions how the museum began asa collection of local First Nations objects. Through donations and otheracquisitions the collection has grown to cover all continents. The artincludes clothing, pottery, totems, masks and other items people use intheir daily lives. One of the most intriguing is the circumpolar collectionwhich ties cultures from both the arctic and near Antarctic areas. Thephotos are in stunning color, beautifully photographed. Those who havebeen to the museum will treasure the evocation of memories they bring.Those who haven’t may find themselves planning a visit.

GN50 2009-024997 978-1-59102-761-4TThhee LLeeaakkeeyyss;; aa bbiiooggrraapphhyy..Bowman-Kruhm, Mary.Prometheus Books, ©2010 181 p. $17.00 (pa)A prodigious writer of books for children and young adults, Bowman-Kruhm (education, Johns Hopkins U.) here profiles three generations ofthe first family of first humans—the premier archaeologists findings andinterpreting fossils remains from the Olduvai Gorge in East Africa. Hertopics include Louis 1925-33; positive choices and negative voices: Mary1913-36 and Louis 1933-36; war and children 1937-46; peace and personaland political turmoil 1947-58; human history carved in bone 1959-71;skull drudgery and skulduggery 1972-77; contention and a critical con-dition 1978-88; burning his tusks behind him 1989-2003; and still morebeyond 2004. A few black-and-white photographs, a glossary without pro-nunciation guides, and an extensive bibliography are provided.

GN269 2009-032860 978-1-59102-767-6RRaaccee aanndd rreeaalliittyy;; wwhhaatt eevveerryyoonnee sshhoouulldd kknnooww aabboouutt oouurrbbiioollooggiiccaall ddiivveerrssiittyy..Harrison, Guy P.Prometheus Books, ©2010 336 p. $20.00 (pa)Harrison, author and journalist, armed with decades of research bysocial and biological scientists, makes the case that there really is no suchthing as race, that manner of categorizing human beings based on super-ficial characteristics. Biological diversity does of course exist, but theauthor argues that contemporary science has determined that diversitydoes not mean there are different races. And, since the concept of raceis an artificial if commonly accepted construct, it may be easier thanmost people think to eliminate racism. As the author says, “Nature didnot rip us apart. We did, in our minds.”

GN316 209928780 978-1-84860-644-9NNeettnnooggrraapphhyy;; ddooiinngg eetthhnnooggrraapphhiicc rreesseeaarrcchh oonnlliinnee..Kozinets, Robert V.Sage Publications, ©2010 221 p. $115.00A marketing researcher, Kozinets sets out methodological guidelines forconducting research into the Internet’s influence on contemporary socialworlds. He covers culture and communities online, understandingculture online, methods for researching online, the method of netnog-raphy, planning and entreè, data collection and analysis, conductingethical netnography, representation and evaluation, and the changinglandscape.

GN345 2009-025505 978-1-59451-772-3AAnntthhrrooppoollooggyy uunnbboouunndd;; aa ffiieelldd gguuiiddee ttoo tthhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy,,22dd eedd..Durrenberger, E. Paul and Suzan Erem.Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 326 p. $94.00Erem and Durrenberger believe that studying anthropology doesn’t meanone shouldn’t have opinions on the subject. This second edition of theirtextbook/manifesto demonstrates that. Not that they want the reader toadopt their opinions. They encourage everyone to dissect, criticize andeven roll around in the diversity of human experience. This book is theirway to give students the tools to do so. Although they state accurately thatanthropology is more complex than rocket science, they also believe thatit doesn’t have to be tedious learning the skills of the subject. Theyintroduce concepts and terminology with concrete examples. In thisupdated new edition, they take on 9/11, Islamic fundamentalism and theeconomic downturn. They don’t tell the reader what happened, theyshow how it did and they encourage others to dig under the surface tofind out the reasons for themselves. There is a companion reader for stu-dents to practice on. The only thing this book lacks is a paperbackedition with a snazzy cover.

GN345 2008-053333 978-0-8047-6020-1CClliioo//aanntthhrrooppooss;; eexxpplloorriinngg tthhee bboouunnddaarriieess bbeettwweeeenn hhiissttoorryyaanndd aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Eric Tagliacozzo and Andrew Willford.Stanford U. Press, ©2009 306 p. $65.00Contributors from both disciplines use the boundaries between them toilluminate the contingencies of knowledge production—both the creationof evidentiary-based truth claims and the servicing of such truths in thename of political and cultural projects. The topics include in search ofthe colonial subject, historical and ethnographic perspectives on exportceramics in Philippine societies, foretelling ethnicity in Trinidad, Japanand China in Manchuria, and the figure of the Tamil in modernMalaysia. Seven of the nine essays originated at a small workshop atCornell University, apparently some years ago.

GN345 2009-010501 978-1-60692-377-1CCoonntteemmppoorraarryy ssttuuddiieess iinn eetthhnnooggrraapphhyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Alfonso Ivarra and Penelope Aguero.Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 210 p. $89.00Ethnography is a research-based method of observing people in theirnatural environment rather than a formal research setting. In this work,contributors from the US and the UK describe conceptual and method-ological challenges related to qualitative research in general, and ethnog-raphy in particular, and provide suggestions for applying ethnographyand other forms of social science research. A chapter on using ethnog-raphy to study the social world includes a case example of research oncall centers. Other topics include ethnographic studies of abused childrenin contemporary African settings, exploring gentrification with ethno-graphic methods, and ethnographic and documentary field methods forexamining mobile technology. A few b&w photos are included.Information on the editors is not given.

GN345 2009-045265 978-1-84545-616-0EEtthhnnooggrraapphhiicc pprraaccttiiccee iinn tthhee pprreesseenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Marit Melhuus et al. (EASA series)Berghahn Books, ©2010 196 p. $75.00Melhuus (social anthropology, U. of Oslo, Norway) et al. assemble 11chapters drawn from two workshops, “Ethnographic Practice in thePresent” and “Ethnography: The Costs of Success?” held at the eighthbiennial conference of the European Association of SocialAnthropologists in Vienna, Austria, in 2004. The workshops aimed toassess the position of ethnography within the discipline of socioculturalanthropology and the methodological implications of practice infieldwork, as well as the use of ethnography in other disciplines in thesocial and human sciences. Anthropologists from Europe and the USconsider ethnography in interdisciplinary contexts such as history, lin-guistics, psychoanalysis, ethnology, corporate social responsibility, femalecircumcision, AIDS responses, and international airports. They alsodiscuss the ethnics of the “new” ethnography, the role of memory, recon-structing the past, and the challenges of mobility. The introduction andone of the chapters have been previously published in different versionselsewhere.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –82–

GN345 2009-037330 978-1-84788-295-0RRiittuuaall ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Günter Senft and Ellen B. Basso. (Wenner-Greninternational symposium series)Berg Publishers, ©2009 385 p. $34.95 (pa)Every culture has its rituals. Most people know that rituals of greetingand social interaction vary according to the situation. But many alsoassume that these ritual greetings are basically the same everywhere. Inthis collection, Senft (Max-Planck-Institute for Psycholinguistics,Nijmegen) and Basso (anthropology, University of Arizona, emerita)present articles that explore the variety of everyday ritual communicationin societies in Africa, Australia, South America and Southeast Asia. Thevarious rituals are interesting, but the focus is on how they function todefine the culture and how they can alter to incorporate new ideas andsituations. The use of these rituals both to maintain historic unity and toadapt to contemporary situations shows the ways in which cultures canretain identity in the face of invasion by other groups. Distributed in theUS by Palgrave Macmillan.

GN345 2009-025365 978-1-84545-620-7WWhheenn wwoommeenn hheelldd tthhee ddrraaggoonn’’ss ttoonngguuee;; aanndd ootthheerr eessssaayyssiinn hhiissttoorriiccaall aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy..Rebel, Hermann. (Dislocations)Berghahn Books, ©2010 309 p. $95.00German-born North American anthropologist Rebel explores critical atti-tudes toward different historical anthropologies and the narratives theycan release or repress. Understanding historical anthropology within theframework of philosophical anthropology, he says, requires scholars toconsider criteria governing not only its logical, grammatical, andrhetorical aspects, but also the ethical choices in the narratives it putsforth. His seven essays look at such topics as two kinds of narrative aboutthe long-duration provenances of the Holocaust, a reassessment of thequestion about the Grimms’ contributors from a social-historical per-spective, an Austrian infanticide in 1832, and reactionary modernismand the postmodern challenge to narrative ethics.

GN357 2009-028843 978-1-59874-067-7TThhee oorriiggiinn ooff ccuullttuurreess;; hhooww iinnddiivviidduuaall cchhooiicceess mmaakkeeccuullttuurreess cchhaannggee..Handwerker, W. Penn. (Key questions in anthropology)Left Coast Press, ©2009 155 p. $79.00Handwerker (anthropology, U. of Connecticut) offers his wide-rangingmusings on the nature of culture, with the core argument suggesting thatculture is a product of interaction between innovations and evolvedmeans for choosing one option over another. These evolved means“reflect constraints or the absence of constraints from neighbor toneighbor and from generation to generation.” He also argues that thereis no meaningful difference between individual learning and sociallearning. He frequently places his theory of culture in relation to eco-nomic and social structures, but also opens himself to charges of over-essentializing culture, particularly by framing his question, in bothopening and closing pages, as explanatory of the actions of the youngfemale Palestinian suicide bomber Ayat al-Akhras, which he suggests wasdue to her Islamic beliefs—as opposed to growing up in Deheishe RefugeeCamp as the daughter of parents pushed out of Arab villages near TelAviv in the 1948 war, having other family members killed by the Israelimilitary during the Second Intifada, and watching a close friend shot todeath by Israeli soldiers in the days immediately before she sought tobecome a suicide bomber with the secular Al-Aqsa Martyrs’ Brigades(she apparently had been rejected by the more religious Hamas)—and, onthe basis of no discernible evidence whatsoever, “living in fear that yourfather, uncles, or brothers may kill you, as Ayat probably did.”

GN380 2009-025363 978-1-84545-420-3TThhee nneeww mmeeddiiaa nnaattiioonn;; iinnddiiggeennoouuss ppeeoopplleess aanndd gglloobbaallccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn..Alia, Valerie. (Anthropology of the media, v.2)Berghahn Books, ©2010 270 p. $70.00Alia (social sciences, Royal Roads U., Canada) profiles the emergence ofthe “New Media Nation,” which consists of networks of indigenousorganizations around the world that are harnessing old and new mediatechniques and technologies for the maintenance and restoration of lan-guages and cultures and the promotion of common interests. With a par-ticular focus on Canada, she describes a wide array of projects andinstitutions in order to give a sense of the current landscape of the “NewMedia Nation” and considers how they interact with government policyand other forms of media. She also explores how the indigenous rep-resent themselves in these media.

GN406 2009-033057 978-1-84788-494-7AAnntthhrrooppoollooggyy aanndd tthhee iinnddiivviidduuaall;; aa mmaatteerriiaall ccuullttuurreeppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Miller. (Materializing culture series)Berg Publishers, ©2009 182 p. $29.95 (pa)Anthropologists from Europe and the Americas appropriate perspectivesthat were first developed in their discipline to study society, and demon-strate how they can be adopted to study individuals. They seek a pathbetween two overcrowded approaches, one an opposition between theindividual and society, and the other the individual as the minimal exem-plication of society. Their vehicle is an aesthetic of order that is derivedfrom someone’s relationships top objects, places, parents or community,or struggles or values. Among their perspectives are trading in fakebrands, the Greek house in Albania as a material process, how Madridcreates individuals, Belgrade mothers and their migrant children, fash-ioning individuality and social connectivity among Yoruba women inLondon, and creating order through struggle in revolutionary Cuba.Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.

GN480 2009-015190 978-0-8265-1682-4TThhee sseeccrreett:: lloovvee,, mmaarrrriiaaggee,, aanndd HHIIVV..Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer S. Hirsch et al.Vanderbilt University Press, ©2009 301 p. $29.95 (pa)Arguing that for many women around the world, their greatest risk ofgetting HIV is from their husbands, Hirsch (sociomedical sciences,Columbia U.) et al. explore the risk of contracting HIV from a maritalpartner within the contexts of marital and extramarital sexuality inMexico, Nigeria, Uganda, Vietnam, and Papua New Guinea. Providing acomparative perspective, they describe how extramarital sex is officiallysecret in these societies, but also widespread, and how it is an aspect ofgendered social organization. They discuss martial customs, relation-ships, and experiences in these societies, how marriage has beenchanging and how this affects ideas about intimacy and genderinequality, and how all of these aspects are implicated in the global HIVepidemic. Topics discussed include extramarital opportunity structures,sexual geographies, social risk, the role of the state, and historicalchanges. The material presented in the book is a result of a five-year col-laborative research project, “Love, Marriage, and HIV: A Multisite Studyof Gender and HIV Risk.”

GN491 2009-674631 978-1-4438-1104-0MMeettaammoorrpphhoossiiss aanndd ppllaaccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Joshua Parker et al.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 269 p. $62.00How places change, how places change people, and how people changeplaces are among the relationships between change and place exploredby scholars of language and literature, culture, various social sciences,mental health, and other disciplines. Among their topics are metamor-phosis in James Branch Cabell’s Jurgen, the Prague experience of city per-ception in transit, Constantinople and the Slavs, Sephardic places inSephardic songs, Hemingway’s Hispanic vision in For Whom the BellTolls, transformations of place and identity in the post-apartheid fictionof Nadine Gordimer and Zakes Mda, post-colonial perspectives onLithuanian deportation, and post-colonial computer games as spatialstories. No index is provided. The price is 39.99 British pounds, convertedat the time of purchase.

GN495 2009-045263 978-1-84545-624-5RReemmeemmbbeerriinngg vviioolleennccee;; aanntthhrrooppoollooggiiccaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonniinntteerrggeenneerraattiioonnaall ttrraannssmmiissssiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Nicolas Argenti and Katharina Schramm.Berghahn Books, ©2010 270 p. $90.00Having honed their studies through a number of meetings, presentations,and conversations since 2006, anthropologists mostly from northernEurope explore the mechanisms, the contexts, the motivations, and theconsequences of passing the memory of slavery, war, oppression, or otherforms of violence to children. Among the topics are rape and remem-brance in Guadeloupe, performing testimony at Auschwitz-Birkenau,place and the memory of war destruction in the Argonne region ofFrance, and a case study of the transmission of traumatic loss in Taiwan.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–83–

GN549 978-0-85303-922-8TThhee AArraabb ccooccoooonn;; pprrooggrreessss aanndd mmooddeerrnniittyy iinn AArraabbssoocciieettiieess..Heggy, Tarek.Vallentine Mitchell, ©2010 152 p. $59.95Heggy, a writer and international petroleum strategist, continues hisfocus on the need for reforms in Egypt and the Middle East so they canrejoin the progress toward modern civilization. He points out the needfor educational, political and economic changes, but places much of hisemphasis on ethnopsychological aspects of Arab culture often associatedwith modern Islamic movements. These include widespread anti-modernity and unhealthy hatred of the western world. While notignoring foreign policy faux pas of the United States, his main concen-tration is on the need for an increased movement toward democracy,general freedom, human rights, and respect for “otherness” in that areaof the world.

GN564 2009-021509 978-0-8263-4729-9SSiinnggiinngg ttoo tthhee ppllaannttss;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo mmeessttiizzoo sshhaammaanniissmm iinntthhee uuppppeerr AAmmaazzoonn..Beyer, Stephan V.U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 530 p. $45.00Having studied the plant medicine of shamanism practiced by mestizoshamans of the Upper Amazon, the author here introduces a generalaudience to the spirituality and ritual practices of his teachers, donRoberto Acho Jurama and doña María Luisa Tuesta Flores. His purposeis “to try to understand who they are and what they do, by placing themin a series of overlapping contexts—as healers, as shamans, as dwellersin the spiritual world of the Upper Amazon, and traditional practitionersin a modern world, as innovators, as cultural syncretists, and as indi-viduals.” While the text provides a broad view of their syncreticshamanism, a particular focus of the work is on the use, preparation,and meaning of Ayahuasca, a hallucinogenic drink prepared from plantsthat is used for both spiritual and medicinal purposes.

GN635 2009-006025 978-0-8135-4635-3EEmmbbooddyyiinngg ccuullttuurree;; pprreeggnnaannccyy iinn JJaappaann aanndd IIssrraaeell..Ivry, Tsipy. (Studies in medical anthropology)Rutgers U. Press, ©2010 298 p. $28.95 (pa)Pregnancy is an experience both universal and unique. Ivry (anthro-pology, University of Haifa, Israel) discovered that it is also viewed byboth pregnant women and medical professionals differently in the cul-tures of Israel and Japan. Her study began with her own experience ofpregnancy in each country. Years later, she began a systematic evaluationof the attitudes toward the woman, the child, medical practices and,lastly, the father. Since these are both industrialized countries with equalmedical facilities and education, the comparisons focus on social differ-ences. Through interviews, popular press articles and medical records,Ivry found that in Japan women are expected to take their own bloodpressure and weight, even in the doctor’s office, whereas Israeli womenexpect tests to be done on them. The fetus is treated in Japan as a childalready communicating with the mother. In Israel, the concern, even inlow-risk pregnancies, is to be alert for abnormalities and the fetus islooked at more clinically. Israeli women generally work through theirpregnancies; Japanese women go into seclusion. Men are generallyexcluded in Japan from birthing classes and even births; in Israel theyare encouraged to attend both. Ivry makes no value judgments on herfindings, but she does suggest that more work needs to be done on theculture of “normal” pregnancy rather than “reproduction.”

GN635 2009-036043 978-0-674-05012-9TThhrreeee aanncciieenntt ccoolloonniieess:: CCaarriibbbbeeaann tthheemmeess aanndd vvaarriiaattiioonnss..Mintz, Sidney W. (W.E.B. Du Bois lecture series)Harvard University Press, ©2010 257 p. $27.95For his W.E.B. Dubois Lecture, Mintz (anthropology, Johns HopkinsUniversity, emeritus) draws on decades of fieldwork in Jamaica, Haitiand Puerto Rico, all colonies founded in the 1500s, to explain the culturesof all three and how the people of each colony, particularly capturedAfricans, created their own culture. He places this study in the context ofthe early histories of the islands before giving examples form his ownfieldwork. The result gives the reader an understanding of what thingsare like today with the benefit of realizing how they became so. Mintzconcentrates on the largest segments of the population: Black and Creolepeople. In a page written after the Haiti earthquake and put in the reviewcopy, he makes a strong point that is echoed in the book. Haiti, he says,has suffered from years of corrupt leaders, poverty and political strife,as many pointed out in the aftermath of the disaster. He reminds theworld that Haiti has never been forgiven by the First World for its 1804revolution “because the slaves freed themselves.” (Italics his) The role ofself-determination is essential to this work. For those who wish to under-stand the many facets of the African diaspora, this is required reading.

GN641 2009-041491 978-1-4443-3295-7IIssllaamm,, ppoolliittiiccss,, aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Filippo Osella and Benjamin Soares.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 243 p. $39.95 (pa)Thirteen papers, presented by Osella (anthropology, U. of Sussex, UK) andSoares (Africa-Studiecentrum, the Netherlands), examine the relationshipbetween Islam and politics through the disciplinary lens of anthropology.Topics addressed include Ramadan, ambivalence, and the moral self inthe lives of young Egyptians; the reconfiguration of the intellectual fieldin post-Nasserist Cairo; mobility in Northern Pakistan; Muslim politics inpostcolonial Kenya; gender, Islam, and the public sphere in Mali; veilsand modernity in Kyrgyzstan; the political thought of Pakistani the-ologian Syed Abul A’ala Maududi (1903-1979); reformist movementsinvolving Islamist women in Bangladesh; and Muslim entrepreneurs inpublic life between India and the Gulf.

GN667 978-1-921401-35-0TTrriippppiinngg oovveerr ffeeaatthheerrss;; sscceenneess nn tthhee lliiffee ooff JJooyy JJaannaakkaaWWiirraaddjjuurrii WWiilllliiaammss:: AA nnaarrrraattiivvee ooff tthhee ssttoolleenn ggeenneerraattiioonnss..Read, Paul.UWA, ©2009 149 p. $32.95 (pa)Set in Australia, this volume explores the case of a woman taken fromher aboriginal mother at birth. Eileen Williams (who later took the nameJoy Janaka Wiradjuri Williams in honor of her background) was raisedin boarding houses and went on to have a life filled with anger, violence,and mental illness. But she also developed into an accomplished poet anda parent. Read, a professional historian (U. of Sydney), presents a fic-tionalized account based on his hours of interviews with Williams andothers close to her, and on historical documents. Many chapters beginwith an autobiographical poem by Williams. Includes a list of suggestedreadings on the Stolen Generations, a list of cited legal cases, and biblio-graphic references to her poetry. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

GN774 2009-030023 978-1-84217-347-3AA ttaallee ooff tthhee uunnkknnoowwnn uunnkknnoowwnnss;; aa MMeessoolliitthhiicc ppiittaalliiggnnmmeenntt aanndd aa NNeeoolliitthhiicc ttiimmbbeerr hhaallll aatt WWaarrrreenn FFiieelldd,,CCrraatthheess,, AAbbeerrddeeeennsshhiirree..Murray, Hilary K. et al.Oxbow Books, ©2009 132 p. $40.00Excavated in 2000-2006, this remarkable site contains a mesolithic pitalignment and a large neolithic timber hall. This volume presents anoverview of the excavation finds and subsequent analysis, with copiousmaps, drawings, and photos for illustration. Published in an oversizedformat (8.5x11.25″) the volume includes discussion of neolithic featuresin the neighboring area, extensive discussion of the timber hall and itspossible uses, the results of radiocarbon dating of both the pit alignmentand the timber hall, and description, with drawings, of the finds. Thevolume concludes with three appendices containing tables of the featuresin the hall, thin section descriptions, and pollen data, and an extensivebibliography. Lacks an index. It is distributed in North America by TheDavid Brown Book Co.

GN774 2009-035393 978-1-84217-335-0TThhiinnkkiinngg MMeessoolliitthhiicc..Kozowski, Stefan Karol.Oxbow Books, ©2009 545 p. $120.00Spanning a 50-year career during which the author was an active part ofthe establishment of the field, the material that makes up this volumehas been revised and added to new chapters to produce a uniformhistory of the field (the only impediment to the uniformity is that aportion of the material is in French or Italian, being derived from co-pub-lished articles). Heavily illustrated and published in an oversized format(8.5x12″), the volume contains three sequences of chapters divided bymaterial, geography, and region. Individual sections describe in detail theregions, their styles, cultures, and finds, with extensive discussion oflithics. Offering a thorough overview to the field, the book concludeswith a full bibliography, but is not indexed.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –84–

All books cited here are new, and all are in print and available. We prepare entries from bound books only, never galleys.

GN799 2009-046264 978-1-60497-674-8SSaaccrreedd ddiissppllaayy;; ddiivviinnee aanndd mmaaggiiccaall ffeemmaallee ffiigguurreess ooffEEuurraassiiaa..Dexter, Miriam Robbins and Victor H. Mair.Cambria Press, ©2010 188 p. $104.99Drawing inspiration from controversial Lithuanian-American archaeol-ogist Marija Gimbutas (1921-94), Dexter (U. of California-Los Angeles) andMair (Chinese languages and literature, U. of Pennsylvania) surveyancient depictions of women in poses of power from across Asia andEurope. They discuss female figures in Eurasian neolithic iconography;goddesses of the ancient Near East; the power of the vulva; fertile frogs,fertile women, and the bringing of rain; erotic and ferocious femalefigures of South and East Asia; goddesses and monsters of ancient Greeceand Rome; Irish and British Sheela na gigs and other Irish femalefigures; a Scandinavian giantess and the goddess of lust; and a Scythiangreat goddess and fairies of Eastern Europe.

GR111 2009-025355 978-1-57441-277-2CCeelleebbrraattiinngg 110000 yyeeaarrss ooff tthhee TTeexxaass FFoollkklloorree SSoocciieettyy,, 11990099--22000099..Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth L. Untiedt. (Publications of the TexasFolklore Society; 66)Univ. of North Texas Press, ©2009 420 p. $39.95Untiedt (secretary-editor, Texas Folklore Society and English Stephen E.Austin State U.) and 30 co-contributors offer an introduction to the mem-bership of the Texas Folklore Society and their contributions to the studyof folklore throughout the last century. Some articles describe pastresearch and others illustrate research that continues today. The bookincludes a Mexican-American folklore bibliography, reminiscences, and acollection of books, papers, and presentations from society members.

GR113 978-1-897009-30-7DDiissccoovveerriinngg CCaappee BBrreettoonn ffoollkklloorree..MacKinnon, Richard.Cape Breton University Press, ©2009 195 p. $24.95 (pa)The Cape Breton region of Nova Scotia has a distinctive history and cul-tural background that makes it a treasure trove of unique folklore andfolk traditions. For this book, MacKinnon (Folklore, Cape BretonUniversity) has assembled some of his best articles on the region’sfolklore, covering its traditional music and song, vernacular architecture,cockfighting, humorous nicknames, and traditions of cooperation. Solidlygrounded in fieldwork, yet accessibly written, this book will appeal toany reader interested in Cape Breton or Canadian folklore, or (especially)in the traditional music of Cape Breton.

GR302 2009-038074 978-1-60497-652-6AAffgghhaann ffoollkkttaalleess ffrroomm HHeerraatt;; PPeerrssiiaann tteexxttss iinn ttrraannssccrriippttiioonnaanndd ttrraannssllaattiioonn..Ioannesyan, Youli.Cambria Press, ©2009 319 p. $114.99Ioannesyan (Middle Eastern studies, Russian Academy of Sciences-St.Petersburg) has published widely on the language and literature ofAfghan-Persian, or Dari as well as the Iranian-Persian Farsi. He intro-duces the 11 folktales with a brief introduction to the Herati dialects. Thetexts are in transliterated Dari with facing pages of English translation.The English is precise and technical rather than flowing literature.Among the tales are The King’s Son and the Beardless Man, The FairyWife Lost and Found, The Old Cow Shepherd and His Son, The King’sDaughter and the Manure Collector, The Fairy Virgin in a Pumpkin, andA Pilgrimage to the House of God. A bibliography is provided, but noindex.

GR305 2009-019105 978-1-59874-398-2MMuuddppaacckkss aanndd PPrroozzaacc;; eexxppeerriieenncciinngg AAyyuurrvveeddiicc,,bbiioommeeddiiccaall,, aanndd rreelliiggiioouuss hheeaalliinngg..Halliburton, Murphy.Left Coast Press, ©2009 231 p. $90.00From a comparative phenomenological approach to the embodied expe-rience of illness and healing, medical anthropologist Halliburton (QueensCollege and Graduate Center, City U. of New York) interviewed patientsin Kerala, India, about their choice of traditional Ayurvedic, religious, orWestern allopathic treatments for mental illness. He discusses issues ofthe comparability of Indian and Western diagnoses, holistic/dualistic con-ceptions of self, and the goal of healing—enhanced health rather thanmere absence of disease. Patients preferred the pleasant aesthetic aspectsof traditional healing over sterile, aggressive modes of biomedical psy-chiatry. The book includes a map, case examples, a few photos, and thesemi-structured interview questions.

GR830 2009-044631 978-1-4262-0607-8VVaammppiirree ffoorreennssiiccss;; uunnccoovveerriinngg tthhee oorriiggiinnss ooff aann eenndduurriinngglleeggeenndd..Jenkins, Mark Collins.National Geographic Society, ©2010 303 p. $25.00Stories of immortal, night-crawling creatures who feed on victims’ bloodhave frightened and entertained people worldwide since ancient times.In this book, historian Jenkins examines millennia of vampire legends tosee what elements of truth (if any) lay behind them. While the author’srecounting of folklore and history outweigh the scientific and forensicexplanations that he provides for the persistence of vampire legends, thisis nonetheless a very entertaining account of vampirism from ancientPersia through to the present day. The discussion of how the BlackPlague and other diseases might be at the root of vampirism is aloneworth the price of the book, and the excellent bibliography is especiallywelcome. Given the increased fascination with vampires since the 1990s,this book should have wide appeal.

GT497 2009-027988 978-3-11-021252-5BBooddiieess aanndd bboouunnddaarriieess iinn GGrraaeeccoo--RRoommaann aannttiiqquuiittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Thorsten Fögen and Mireille M. Lee.De Gruyter, ©2009 317 p. $155.00The image of the body has become a popular theme in academic studies.In the case of Greco-Roman studies, it is particularly apt. Representationsof and by bodies were signals that placed a being within a heirarchystretching from beasts to the gods. For this volume, which originated ata 2006 conference at the Harvard Center for Hellenic Studies, Fögen andLee invited papers that examined bodies on the boundaries or intersec-tions. Essays on the performative body include the trained used of ges-tures in public speech, bodily metaphors in classical literature and thecreation of physical ceremonies to place the body in a subordinate socialposition. The section on the “erotic body” deals mainly with genderboundaries that, in art and poetry, could be crossed or even transformed.The modification of the body also considers gender in the ways in whichpeople enhanced their appearance. The blurring of the line betweenfreeman and freedman as a cause of unease among the elite is anothertopic. Early Christianity was rife with debates about the body in whichthe boundaries between body and soul, human and divine, and men andwomen were in constant flux. Two of the essays discuss this phe-nomenon. Lastly, the divide between human and animal in Classic artand religion is considered. The question of what makes us human alongwith the fear of losing one’s humanity is a fitting way to end the volumeand open discussion on the nature of the body in antiquity and today.

GT497 2009-045417 978-1-84545-550-7TThhee bbooddyy iinn AAssiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Bryan S.Turner and Zheng Yangwen. (AsiaPacific studies; past and present; v.3)Berghahn Books, ©2009 230 p. $90.00The March 2007 conference The Body in Asia: Cosmos and Canvas inSingapore was attended by historians and social scientists from Asia, theUS, and Britain. These 10 studies from that gathering look at the Asianbody in relation to religion, culture, and the state. Among the topics arethe global body cannot ignore Asia, creating religious bodies with fastingrituals in West Java, the desirable female body in contemporary Japanesewomen’s magazines, and women’s revolution embodied in Mao Zedongera ballet.

GT607 2009-029451 978-0-313-33533-4CCllootthhiinngg tthhrroouugghh AAmmeerriiccaann hhiissttoorryy;; tthhee ffeeddeerraall eerraatthhrroouugghh AAnntteebbeelllluumm,, 11778866--11886600..Wass, Ann Buermann and Michelle Webb Fandrich.Greenwood Press, ©2010 407 p. $85.00Wass, the historian at Riversdale, a Federal era house museum, describesthe evolution of clothing in the US from the elaborate roccoco fashionsof 18th-century Europe and colonial America to the more simple classi-cally inspired styles of the early 19th century. Then fellow fashion andtextile historian Fandrich picks up the story to show how Americansfrom rich to poor dressed during a period of industrialization, expansion,immigration, and increasing political tension. They begin by reviewingthe US during their period, then cover society, culture, and dress;women’s fashions; men’s fashions; and children’s fashions. Their sourcesinclude not only contemporary drawings and paintings, but also diaries,newspaper articles, and other text.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–85–

GT733 2009-043584 978-1-84520-433-4VViissiibbllyy MMuusslliimm;; ffaasshhiioonn,, ppoolliittiiccss,, ffaaiitthh..Tarlo, Emma.Berg Publishers, ©2010 241 p. $34.95 (pa)For many non-Muslims, it’s hard to see any connection between the con-cepts of “Muslim” and “fashion.” In this book, Tarlo (Anthropology,Goldsmiths, University of London) not only shows that this connectionexists, but provides readers with a sophisticated examination of the dresschoices made by Muslims in Britain and how those choices reflect theidentities and faith of these women and men. Cutting through stereotypesof what Muslims look like, the author examines the wider social andpolitical effects of clothing choices on the development of transnationalcultural formations and multicultural urban spaces. Generously illus-trated in color and black and white, this book will appeal to students andscholars of religion, sociology, cultural studies, and fashion. (Distributedin the U.S. by Palgrave Macmillan.)

GT1555 2009-020254 978-1-84520-779-3CChhiinneessee ffaasshhiioonn;; ffrroomm MMaaoo ttoo nnooww..Wu, Juanjuan.Berg Publishers, ©2009 216 p. $34.95 (pa)Wu (design, housing, and apparel; U. of Minnesota), who grew up inChina wearing many of the fashions discussed herein, examines the rela-tionship between social and cultural change and the evolution of Chinesefashion from 1978 to 2008. She takes a largely thematic approach to thetopic, highlighting major fashion changes of the period and the influ-ences on modern Chinese fashion of: the legacy of the CulturalRevolution, popular culture, fashion icons, gender issues, Chineseidentity, the development of the fashion industry and fashion printmedia, the evolution of the fashion education system, and importedbrand names. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.

GT2345 978-1-85669-631-9AArrtt bbyy ttaattttooooiissttss;; bbeeyyoonndd ffllaasshh..Waterhouse, Jo.Laurence King Publishing, ©2009 128 p. $19.95 (pa)Art writer Waterhouse profiles personal artwork by 26 working tattooartists that are not examples of their tattoo work nor the images theydisplay for customers to choose from. Many of the images and themesare the same, she says, both between the art and the tattoo, and acrossartists. Among the first are hearts, skulls, panthers, eagles, the femaleform, and daggers as well as classic designs. Among the themes aredeath and the impermanence of life but also the vitality of human life,nature, and religion. Most of the reproductions are in color, as is most ofthe art. There is no index.

GT2361 2009-037015 978-1-58046-312-6DDeeaatthh,, mmooddeerrnniittyy,, aanndd tthhee bbooddyy;; SSwweeddeenn 11887700--11994400..Ahrén, Eva. (Rochester studies in medical history)U. of Rochester Press, ©2009 215 p. $75.00In this fascinating contribution to the history of medicine and Westerntreatment of death, Ahén (history of science and ideas, Uppsala U.,Sweden; research associate, Smithsonian Institution, Washington, DC) sit-uates medical attitudes and practices relating to death in cultural context.She traces the modernization of death with the dead acquiring scientificand entertainment value (e.g., in wax museums). Illustrations includeearly dissection rooms, anatomical specimen displays, deathbed andfunerary images, and cremation apparatus. This is the English trans-lation adapted for an international audience of Doden, kroppen ochmoderniteten, published in Swedish in 2002, based on the author’s doc-toral dissertation.

GT2490 2009-047440 978-0-313-35824-1QQuuiinncceeaaññeerraa..Title main entry. Ed. by Ilan Stavans. (The Ilan Stavans library ofLatino civilization)Greenwood Press, ©2010 134 p. $55.00For students, specialists, and lay readers, Stavans (Latin American andLatino culture, Amherst College) brings together nine essays that examinethe quinceañera celebration’s social importance in the Latino community,especially in the US. Writers, educators, a seamstress (who discusses herexperiences in the community), and scholars of Chicana/o studies, soci-ology, art history, anthropology, and English address the roles of religion,gender, family status, class, race, and performance of the ritual, as wellas the context of American debutantes’ coming of age, within the Chicanocommunity, in Guadalajara, Mexico, and women’s experiences of theritual.

GT2853 2008-055296 978-1-59629-595-7FFoooodd,, ddrriinnkk aanndd cceelleebbrraattiioonnss ooff tthhee HHuuddssoonn VVaalllleeyy DDuuttcchh..Rose, Peter G.History Press, ©2009 157 p. $19.99 (pa)Dutch-born American food writer Rose collects material she has pub-lished and delivered over the past quarter century on the Dutch in NewYork, and adds new research findings. Among her topics are theinfluence of the Dutch on the American kitchen, food ways of the Dutchand Iroquois, the Saint Nicholas celebration, the Pinkster celebration, andthe New York Dutch in world food trade.

GT2853 2009-035723 978-0-89680-272-8SSttiirrrriinngg tthhee ppoott;; aa hhiissttoorryy ooff AAffrriiccaann ccuuiissiinnee..McCann, James C. (Africa in world history)Ohio University Press, ©2009 213 p. $26.95 (pa)Writing for nonspecialists, advanced secondary school students, under-graduates, and general readers, McCann (history and African studies,Boston U.) examines the meaning of food and cooking in African agri-cultural, cultural, and economic history, particularly as culturalexpression and a marker of cultural identity. He describes the ingre-dients, practices, and tastes of African cuisine and how these comprisespecialized knowledge for women in households, and traces Africancuisine from the sixteenth century to the present day, including the basiclocal components in African cooking. He continues with discussion ofstaple foods borrowed from other areas, like maize, bananas, cassava,and Asian rice, and the effect of the arrival of the New World capsicumpeppers; the adaptation of African cooking as the continent was colo-nized and people became citizens of modern nations; and specificcooking in Ethiopia, West Africa and the central and southern Africanmaize belt and maritime coasts, and diffusion to the African diaspora inLatin America, North America, and the Caribbean. Recipes are included.

GT3190 2009-048251 978-1-4331-1010-8RRiittuuaalliizziinngg tthhee ddiissppoossaall ooff tthhee ddeecceeaasseedd;; ffrroomm ccoorrppssee ttooccoonncceepptt..McCorkle, William W. (Toronto studies in religion; v.30)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 182 p. $74.95 (pa)Evolutionary and cognitive anthropologist McCorkle has revised his 2007Ph.D. dissertation at Queen’s University, Belfast, removing much the sta-tistical data to make room to elaborate his arguments, and leaving outhis field observations to focus on his experimental findings. He considerswhat kind of widespread behaviors humans exhibit when disposing ofdead bodies, what kinds of past and extant explanation have been prof-fered for this behavior. Then he explains why these explanations fallshort, and sets out a model of his own that may provide at least a startto a new and viable explanation of the religious ritualized disposal ofcorpses. Most of his field work, and so his examples, involve Buddhists.Among his topics are manufacturing Buddhism; stupa, relic, and hungryghosts; evolutionary disgust; and corpse, concept, and contagion triggers.

GT3203 2009-035231 978-0-674-03621-5TToo sseerrvvee tthhee lliivviinngg;; ffuunneerraall ddiirreeccttoorrss aanndd tthhee AAffrriiccaannAAmmeerriiccaann wwaayy ooff ddeeaatthh..Smith, Suzanne E.Harvard University Press, ©2010 257 p. $29.95Due to the important cultural role they have played in African Americanlife and their relative economic independence in their communities,African American funeral directors have played a unique role inAmerican society, often “serving the living as much as they buried thedead.” Smith (history, George Mason U.) examines the role that AfricanAmerican funeral directors played in promoting racial equality duringthe 20th century, particularly focusing on the activities of funeraldirectors’ professional associations and their interactions with the CivilRights movement and its organizations.

GT4985 2009-022234 978-1-60239-757-6CChhrriissttmmaass mmiisscceellllaannyy;; eevveerryytthhiinngg yyoouu aallwwaayyss wwaanntteedd ttookknnooww aabboouutt CChhrriissttmmaass..Green, Jonathan.Skyhorse Pub. Co., ©2009 172 p. $14.95Green has looked into the history of many of the elements of the tradi-tional Christmas—holly and ivy, mistletoe, Santa’s red coat, the threekings, reindeer, the Yule log, brussels sprouts, and why we shorten theword to Xmas, among others—and relates his findings, with many quotesand songs from original sources, in this charming book. Well-illustratedwith color photos, mainly of Victoriana, the volume also includes sometraditional recipes. Not indexed.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –86–

RREECCRREEAATTIIOONN,, LLEEIISSUURREE,, SSPPOORRTT,, DDAANNCCEE

GV14 2009-922163 978-1-4129-4552-3TThhee llaabboouurr ooff lleeiissuurree;; tthhee ccuullttuurree ooff ffrreeee ttiimmee..Rojek, Chris.Sage Publications, ©2010 208 p. $99.95The sixth book by Chris Rojek (sociology and culture, Brunel U.) onleisure theory, this is an academic study on the sociological aspects ofleisure and recreation. After covering the eventual demise of the leisuresociety thesis, he goes on to explore a currently useful framework—State-Corporate-Consumer-Academic-Social Movement-Illegal Leisure(SCCASMIL) and its theoretical use in the study of leisure. The volumeexplores a variety of issues related to this framework but consistentlycomes back to the concepts of emotional intelligence and emotional labor,which involve both perceiving, understanding and managing emotions,and managing the expression of emotions for an external audience.

GV181 2009-035783 978-0-7360-7131-4QQuuaalliittyy lleessssoonn ppllaannss ffoorr oouuttddoooorr eedduuccaattiioonn.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Redmond, Kevin et al.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 434 p. $54.00 (pa)For physical educators, youth and outdoor recreation leaders, and campand resort leaders, Redmond, a physical education teacher, et al. providea resource that contains 140 adaptable lesson plans presented in 14 unitsrelating to camping skills, navigation, environmental ethics, hiking andbackpacking, rock climbing, mountain biking, canoeing, kayaking,skiing, snowshoeing, archery, and fly casting and fishing. Written byphysical education teachers, professors, and other outdoor specialistsfrom the US and Canada, each unit covers equipment, site selection,social skills and etiquette, terminology, risk management, and descrip-tions of lessons. The CD contains eight additional units, printable lessonplans, worksheets, assessment tools, and other resources.

GV183 2009-047649 978-0-7360-8177-1IInncclluussiivvee rreeccrreeaattiioonn;; pprrooggrraammss aanndd sseerrvviicceess ffoorr ddiivveerrsseeppooppuullaattiioonnss..Title main entry.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 399 p. $64.00This text for students in recreation and tourism emphasizes thatinclusion in recreation programs and services is not only for individualswith disabilities, but must be extended to people of all ages, cultures, andethnicities. Part I covers the history of inclusive recreation and relatedlegislation, and seeks to build cultural competency. Part II covers mar-keting inclusive recreation experiences and staff training for inclusion.Part III focuses on universal design in recreation. Part IV offers chapterson specific service areas, such as playgrounds, recreation and fitness,outdoor recreation and summer camps, adventure and challenge courses,and inclusive travel, tourism, and amusements. Examples of programsfrom a variety of sectors and countries are provided. Sidebars introducereal-life professionals to help students explore career options. A 15-pageappendix provides summary information on physical, mental, and cog-nitive conditions. An online component offers learning activities, critical-thinking assignments for each chapter, and lists of Web sites.

GV192 2009-025901 978-0-415-56296-6CCaammppsstteeaaddiinngg;; ffaammiillyy,, ppllaaccee,, aanndd eexxppeerriieennccee aatt SSqquuaammLLaakkee,, NNeeww HHaammppsshhiirree..Brereton, Derek Pomeroy.Routledge, ©2010 308 p. $140.00Many families have cabins, cottages or even shacks in the woods or atthe shore to which they have gone for generations for a few weeks a year.Brereton (anthropology, Adrian College, Michigan) examines this familyexperience through the eyes of an anthropologist influenced by phi-losophy and critical realism. For this study he has coined the term“campsteading”. He studies the three levels of experience that themembers of the campsteading families have: personal, morphogenic anduniversal, working from the individual out. As his test subject, he chosethe many campsteads on or adjacent to Squam Lake in New Hampshire.Much of the book is a description of the daily life of the campsteads, toldin almost the tone of a memoir. The interaction of the generations, tra-ditions and the sense of being in a state of nature removed from thenorm, are all evoked in these mini-stories. The anthropology, tinged withthe philosophy of John Dewey, among others, is inserted painlesslyamong the tales. Bereton has created a theory to fit the subject, ratherthan forcing it to match one already designed. Social historians and soci-ologists as well as anthropologists will find this intriguing.

GV193 978-0-87558-170-5GGuuiiddee ttoo ssuummmmeerr ccaammppss aanndd ssuummmmeerr sscchhoooollss;; aannoobbjjeeccttiivvee,, ccoommppaarraattiivvee rreeffeerreennccee ssoouurrccee ffoorr rreessiiddeennttiiaallssuummmmeerr pprrooggrraammss,, 22001100//22001111 3322dd eedd..Title main entry.Porter Sargent Publishers, ©2010 895 p. $27.00 (pa)This guide for families, educators, and academic advisors gathers listingson summer camps and summer academic programs in the US andCanada, as well as travel, study, and special-interest programs in othercountries. All programs listed (except internships) accept boarders, andmany accept day students as well. Focus chapters cover academic pro-grams, academic programs for students with learning disabilities, musicand art programs, special-interest programs, travel and sports programs,special-needs programs, religious camps, and recreational camps. A“Featured Programs” section allows camps and programs to present theirown information. Listings contain information on contacts, ages/gradelevels, cost, sessions, and a brief description. Programs are cross-refer-enced by age, gender, and region. This edition expands focus chapterindexes, and includes more listings of academic programs. There is alsoa new chapter on summer internship opportunities. For this edition, pro-grams affiliated with a national organization, such as Girls Scouts orYMCA, are not listed, because they appeal to local rather than nationalaudiences. However, there is a section listing programs affiliated withassociations and organizations.

GV199 2009-022537 978-0-7627-4124-3RRoocckk cclliimmbbiinngg SSmmiitthh RRoocckk SSttaattee PPaarrkk;; aa ccoommpprreehheennssiivveegguuiiddee ttoo mmoorree tthhaann 11,,880000 rroouutteess,, 22dd eedd..Watts, Alan.Globe Pequot Press, ©2010 498 p. $40.00 (pa)Based in Bend, Oregon, Watts has been climbing at Smith Rock since1975 and spearheaded its rise to prominence as an international sport-climbing destination. He presents a long-awaited revised edition of his1992 climbing guide to Smith Rock State Park and the surrounding area.Offering 1,800 routes—hundreds new to this edition—the guide assumesreaders have a solid understanding of climbing techniques and vocab-ulary. Following an introductory description of the area—including adetailed account of its emergence as a sport-climbing mecca—the text con-tains 15 sections covering specific areas of the Park. Each section con-tains an overview of the area, the type of climbing, seasons and climateinformation, precautions and regulations, gear, camping and accommo-dations, and directions to the area, followed by written descriptions ofthe routes. The material is illustrated with linear diagrams, color photo-graphs—all new to the second edition—and topographical maps.

GV199 2009-003236 978-0-7627-3661-4RRoocckk cclliimmbbiinngg WWaasshhiinnggttoonn,, 22dd eedd..Smoot, Jeff. (FalconGuides)Globe Pequot Press, ©2009 498 p. $30.00 (pa)Seattle-based Smoot is a climber, hiker, and lawyer, and the author of fiveother FalconGuides. He presents a guide to a broad selection of some1,500 of the best, hardest, and most popular rock climbing routes in 20areas throughout Washington State, designed for climbers of all levels ofexperience and ability. Each of the 20 sections contains an overview ofthe area, the type of climbing, seasons and climate information, precau-tions and regulations, gear, camping and accommodations, and direc-tions to the area, followed by written descriptions of the routes illustratedwith linear diagrams, b&w photographs and topographical maps. Thesecond edition features some new crags and areas, “cleaning up” of somematerial of the first edition, and the addition of new routes or variationsto others.

GV200 2009-035774 978-0-7360-8469-7MMoouunnttaaiinneeeerriinngg;; pprreeppaarraattiioonn aanndd ttrraaiinniinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Carlton Cooke et al.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 275 p. $27.95 (pa)In mountaineering, preparation is the critical factor for a successfulclimb, whether the climber is a novice or an experienced veteran. Thisbook covers the essentials for climbers, including: logistics and planning,equipment, team selection, first aid, acclimatization, fitness and training,nutrition for training and expeditions, psychological skills in the out-doors, and leadership. Editors Cooke (sports and exercise science, LeedsMetropolitan U. U.K.), Bunting (training director and co-founder, My PeakPotential, a learning and development center, Germany), O’Hara (sportsperformance physiology, Leeds Metropolitan U.), and 13 co-authors con-tributed to the book.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–87–

GV200 2009-021964 978-0-7360-7525-1OOuuttddoooorr ssuurrvviivvaall gguuiiddee..Gerke, Randy.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 233 p. $17.95 (pa)Compact enough to carry on outdoor adventures (6x9″), this detailedguide gives step-by-step instructions for dealing with emergencies in thewilderness, covering everything from assessing the situation to survivingon insects (cook them first). Gerke, a member of the Ouray MountainRescue Team, covers both primitive and high-tech skills, such as usingcell phone batteries to start a fire, building animal traps, signaling withsatellite personal trackers or smoke, and avoiding dangerous animalsand environments. The book includes color photos of edible plants, b&wphotos of poisonous plants, and b&w illustrations of handmade trapsand tools. A final chapter gives instructions for assembling a survival kitto bring on every outdoor experience. The author is founder of acompany devoted to teaching wilderness survival and rescue.

GV351 2009-045809 978-1-4331-0568-5OOuutt ooff bboouunnddss;; wwhheenn sscchhoollaarrsshhiipp aatthhlleetteess bbeeccoommeeaaccaaddeemmiicc sscchhoollaarrss..Mahiri, Jabari and Derek Van Rheenen. (Counterpoints: studies in thepostmodern theory of education; v.363)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 139 p. $29.95 (pa)Mahiri and Van Rheenen (education, U. of California, Berkeley) discussthe paths and challenges of six male and female student athletes wholater became academic scholars and what this suggests about how sportand school experiences can be improved to support young people’s intel-lectual and physical growth and development. They consider the waysscholars think about the separation and integration of athletic and aca-demic practices and address the categories of race, gender, sexuality, andsocial class and how perceptions about these, as well as physical andintellectual capabilities, are embedded in educational institutions. Theyalso recommend better practices relating to sport and school. No index isprovided.

GV351 2009-022487 978-0-8047-6969-3VVaarrssiittyy ggrreeeenn;; aa bbeehhiinndd tthhee sscceenneess llooookk aatt ccuullttuurree aannddccoorrrruuppttiioonn iinn ccoolllleeggee aatthhlleettiiccss..Yost, Mark. (Stanford economics and finance)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 200 p. $24.95Sports business writer Yost takes readers on a tour of the big money sideof college athletics, from inflated coaches’ salaries to endorsement con-tracts, and from its hidden influence on communities and youth sportsin general to questionable recruiting practices. While easily offended die-hard fans may not appreciate what Yost has to say, it is a revealing exam-ination of what has become an entertainment industry. His book willinterest policy makers and fans alike—and it wouldn’t be a bad idea forplayers to read it, too.

GV361 2009-922262 978-1-885693-92-1HHiissttoorriicc ttrraaddiittiioonnss aanndd ffuuttuurree ddiirreeccttiioonnss ooff rreesseeaarrcchh oonntteeaacchhiinngg aanndd tteeaacchheerr eedduuccaattiioonn iinn pphhyyssiiccaall eedduuccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Lynn D. Housner et al.Fitness Information Technology, ©2009 393 p. $59.00 (pa)An October 2007 conference brought together experienced and beginningresearchers to reflect on research about teaching and teacher educationin physical education. Papers from the conference are presented in sec-tions on research on teaching physical education, teacher and studentcognition, philosophical issues, impediments and challenges, and youthsport, physical activity, public health, and social change. Some specifictopics considered include the research agenda in physical educationclassrooms, teacher burnout, evidence-based practice in physical edu-cation, and teaching personal and social responsibility. There is nosubject index. Housner is affiliated with West Virginia University.

GV361 2009-025667 978-0-7360-7518-3TTrraannssffoorrmmiinngg ppllaayy bbyy tteeaacchhiinngg ttaaccttiiccss aanndd ggaammee sseennssee..Slade, Dennis G.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 135 p. $29.00 (pa)Slade (coordinator, secondary physical education degree, MasseyUniversity, New Zealand) presents attack and defense games to use withstudents in upper primary through the junior year of high school,designed to teach general tactics and gross motor skills, such as dodging,catching, throwing, and kicking, which can later be applied to specificsports, including basketball, football, badminton, and netball. Each gamedescribed includes learning objectives, a list of equipment, instructionsand rules, and b&w play diagrams, plus FAQs and sport language tostress to students. A few b&w photos are included.

GV401 2009-034955 978-0-7360-8290-7MMaannaaggiinngg ssppoorrtt ffaacciilliittiieess,, 22dd eedd..Fried, Gil.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 355 p. $69.00For students and professionals, Fried (sport facility management, U. ofNew Haven) shows how sport facility managers administer a wide rangeof facilities, from professional sport stadiums to health clubs and recre-ation environments, and the broad range of their responsibilities.Bringing together aspects of safety, marketing, construction, and eventmanagement, he introduces the fundamental skills of facility man-agement, and discusses issues such as preventive maintenance, planning,event and personnel administration, finance, and box office, house andgrounds, and systems management, as well as the history of the field.This edition has been updated to include an expanded section on riskmanagement, new information on security issues, updated examples offacilities, and added sections by industry experts.

GV413 978-0-415-49998-9TThhee rriissee ooff ssttaaddiiuummss iinn tthhee mmooddeerrnn UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess;;ccaatthheeddrraallss ooff ssppoorrtt..Title main entry. Ed. by Mark Dyreson and Robert Trumpbour. (Sportin the global society)Routledge, ©2010 180 p. $125.00Sports stadiums as intersections between professional sports, municipalgovernment, business, and local economics are examined by contributorsidentified only by name. They cover mapping the new territories; whenAmericans really built programs to foster healthy lifestyles 1918-40;stadium building from Harvard’s innovations to Stanford’s Dirt Bowl; theplans for a national stadium and American Olympic desires; the myth ofWrigley Field; stadiums, boosters, politicians, and major league baseball’sreluctance to expand after the Second World War; the construction of SanFrancisco’s major league baseball stadiums; stadium dreams and rustbeltrealities in Cleveland; discrimination, jobs, and activism in the con-struction of Pittsburgh’s Three Rivers Stadium; and reflections on thepast, present, and future.

GV443 2009-014463 978-0-7360-8231-0EEvveerryybbooddyy mmoovvee!!;; aa mmuullttiimmeeddiiaa ppaacckkaaggee ffoorr ddaaiillyypphhyyssiiccaall aaccttiivviittyy,, 22dd eedd.. ((DDVVDD aanndd CCDD iinncclluuddeedd))Title main entry. Canadian Intramural Recreation Association ofOntario.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 240 p. $59.00 (pa)This book/DVD/audio CD package provides student-friendly fitness anddance activities that can be used by any teacher, even in limited spacessuch as classrooms and hallways. The DVD contains 90 minutes of videoshowing 14 complete dance routines, plus demonstrations of 100 movesthat teachers (and students!) can mix and match to create their own rou-tines. The DVD also offers 230 reproducible activity cards in PDF format.The audio CD features 80 minutes of music for use with fitness activities,aerobics, and dance routines. The book also includes tips for imple-menting a daily physical activity program, and advice on gainingprogram support and assessing a classroom fitness program, plus asample newsletter and an appendix of real life success stories.

GV452 2009-047377 978-1-4129-7954-2TThhee kkiinneesstthheettiicc ccllaassssrroooomm;; tteeaacchhiinngg aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg tthhrroouugghhmmoovveemmeenntt..Lengel, Traci and Mike Kuczala.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 156 p. $28.95 (pa)A physical education teacher and an educational consultant show K-12teachers how to incorporate simple movement activities into classroomlessons and how to use short activity breaks to keep students focused.Writing in plain language, they review research supporting the use ofmovement in the classroom, and provide a six-step framework thatallows teachers to introduce movement into the classroom at their ownpace. One chapter is devoted to classroom management issues whenusing movement. The rest of the book presents 170 movement activitiesfor various grades and ability levels. Most activities use little or noequipment, and many can be performed in two minutes or less. Some ofthe activities are designed to build class cohesion. About 60 of the activ-ities specifically teach and review academic content through movement.The book includes a b&w illustrations of some basic exercises. Theauthors both teach at Gratz College of Pennsylvania and The College ofNew Jersey.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –88–

GV558 2009-023394 978-1-4200-7216-7HHuummaann ffaaccttoorrss mmeetthhooddss aanndd ssppoorrttss sscciieennccee;; aa pprraaccttiiccaallgguuiiddee..Salmon, Paul et al.CRC Press, ©2010 342 p. $89.95Social network analysis is a Human Factors method for analyzing asso-ciations between entities in networks. Here a team of British andAustralian researchers in engineering, architecture, and physical edu-cation describe how to use it to analyze performance in team sports suchas soccer. They consider data collection methods, task analysis methods,cognitive task analysis, human error identification and analysis method,situation awareness assessment methods, mental workload assessmentmethods, teamwork assessment methods, interface evaluation, andhuman factors methods integration.

GV563 2009-036253 978-0-7360-7596-1SSppoorrtt cclluubb mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..Robinson, Matthew J.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 242 p. $39.00For administrators, managers, and coaches, Robinson (sport man-agement, legal studies, and education, U. of Delaware) describes how torun a sport club that is viable and financially successful and satisfies theneeds of athletes and their supporters, especially at a time when sportsare being dropped from school budgets. Along with a few colleagues whocontributed chapters, he addresses aspects other than coaching, such asstructuring a club, developing leadership, ethics, human resources,parental relations, legal aspects, business and marketing strategies, spon-sorship and fund-raising, facility design and management, and long-termathlete development.

GV571 2009-018088 978-0-415-77339-3RRoouuttlleeddggee ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo ssppoorrttss hhiissttoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Steven W. Pope and John R. Nauright.Routledge, ©2010 655 p. $155.00Pope (director, International Center for Performance Excellence, WestVirginia U.) and Nauright (School of Recreation, Health, and Tourism atGeorge Mason U.) present a handbook providing a broad overview of thestate-of-the-art in the relatively new field of sports history. The first 17chapters address theory, methods, and key themes under the titularheadings of theory, sources, the city, borderlands, Marxism, sociology,origins, gender, race, body culture, science and technology, entrepre-neurship, religion, imperialism, international relations, nationalism, andalternative sports. The remaining 21 chapters provide geographic contextthrough reviews of the sports historiography of different countries andregions, specifically: sub-Saharan Africa, Australia, Belgium and theNetherlands, Canada, the Caribbean, Central and Eastern Europe, China,France, Germany, Great Britain, Ireland, Japan, Mexico and CentralAmerica, the Middle East and North Africa, New Zealand, the Nordiccountries, the Soviet Union/Russia, South America, South Asia, South-EastAsia, and the United States. The volume includes a select bibliography.

GV571 2006-032995 978-0-8061-3995-1SSppoorrtt iinn aanncciieenntt ttiimmeess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Crowther, Nigel B. (Praeger series on the ancient world)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 183 p. $19.95 (pa)Crowther (classical studies, U. of Western Ontario, Canada) provides ahistorical overview of sport as a cultural practice around the world fromabout 3000 BCE to the Middle Ages, mentioning nonphysical recreationsand games occasionally but concentrating on “activities that embracecontests, skill, training, energy, and fitness. The survey, organized bygeography, discusses such topics as early forms of polo and golf in China,sumo wrestling in Japan, bull leaping and boxing in Crete, Homericdescriptions of Ancient Greek sport, Roman gladiatorial combats andchariot racing, and team ball games in Mesoamerica, among manyothers. The range of themes that arise is similarly broad and includessuch issues as bribery, cheating, ideals, amateurism and professionalism,violence, ritual, social class, tourism, and war. This is a paperbackreprint of a book published in 2007.

GV605 2009-023688 978-0-415-33990-2EExxaammiinniinngg ssppoorrttss ddeevveellooppmmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Michael F. Collins.Routledge, ©2010 327 p. $54.95 (pa)Sports development officers “started as promoters of youth participationin the youth service and promoters of performance in the national gov-erning bodies of sport,” and sports development has been defined byeditor Collins (U. of Gloucestershire) as “a process whereby effectiveopportunities, processes, system and structures are set up to enable andencourage people in all or any particular groups and areas to take partin sport and recreation or to improve their performance to whatsoeverlevel they desire,” within the context of sports development officers’ workas analysts and “fixers” of organizational weaknesses and strengths forpromoting sport. This volume provides a conceptual and theoreticaloverview of the field and draws lessons from case studies of sports devel-opment processes and outcomes, all within the context of the field aspracticed in the UK.

GV605 2009-050891 978-0-275-98999-6TThhee ssppoorrttiinngg lliiffee;; VViiccttoorriiaann ssppoorrttss aanndd ggaammeess..Anderson, Nancy Fix. (Victorian life and times)Praeger, ©2010 213 p. $44.95Focusing on England, Anderson (history, Loyola U. New Orleans) exploresthe role of sports in Victorian life, their development, players, and impli-cations for gender, race, class, imperialism, and national pride. Shesurveys sports in pre-Victorian England; addresses the impact of indus-trialism, military traditions, and urbanization; considers the influence ofevangelicalism and utilitarianism, which first opposed then adaptedsport; explores the association of sports with masculinity; and discussesuses during the spread of imperialism and in promoting and subvertingVictorian values. She also addresses the use of sports to release sexualrepression and other tension; the foundation of the YMCA and the rela-tionship between sports, religion, and manliness; technological influ-ences; professionalization; the standardization of rules; and women’sincreasing involvement. Focus is on physical competitive sports, and notnonphysical activities like billiards and chess.

GV706 2009-939898 978-1-935412-03-8TThhee ccuullttuurraall ttuurrnn iinn ssppoorrtt ppssyycchhoollooggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Tatiana V. Ryba et al.Fitness Information Technology, ©2010 422 p. $46.00 (pa)In the context of the postmodern turn in the social sciences to culturaltheory, Ryba (sport and exercise psychology, U. of Jyväskylä, Finland)introduces an anthology of contributions to a field that has been con-sidered slow to “embrace discursive understandings of culture....”International authors treat trends and areas in which physical educatorsare challenged to situate their work in larger sociopolitical, feminist, andcultural studies contexts than traditional positivistic research and practicewith white male athletes. For example, an emerging area is narrativeinquiry, in which stories link personal sports experiences to the culturalmilieu. Fitness Information Technology (FIT) is a division of theInternational Center for Performance Excellence, West Virginia U.

GV706 2009-022980 978-0-415-49314-7EEtthhiiccss,, kknnoowwlleeddggee aanndd ttrruutthh iinn ssppoorrttss rreesseeaarrcchh;; aanneeppiisstteemmoollooggyy ooff ssppoorrtt..McFee, Graham.Routledge, ©2010 217 p. $130.00The social-scientific investigation of sport requires a sound rationale forchosen methodologies and this rationale in turn suggests attention toboth epistemological and ethical issues and the connections betweenthem. This proposition forms the core premise of this discussion ofmethodology in sports research by McFee (philosophy, U. of Brighton,UK), which argues for avoiding either a scientistic approach that fails totake into account the human element and is therefore overly constrainingor post-modern approaches that amount to a form of truth-denial.Following the discussion of epistemological considerations, he addressesimplications for the ethics of research.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–89–

GV706 978-1-935412-00-7FFoouunnddaattiioonnss ooff eexxeerrcciissee aanndd mmeennttaall hheeaalltthh,, 22dd eedd..Leith, Larry M.Fitness Information Technology, ©2010 314 p. $42.00 (pa)This book presents an interesting study of the use of exercise in treatingand preventing mental health disorders, especially in view of American’scurrent rate of being overweight or obese (64% in 2004) and the relativelyhigh incidence of mental disorders. The relationships between exerciseand depression, anxiety, self-esteem issues, personality disorders, andmood problems are discussed. In an attempt to explain the treatmentrelationship, multiple hypotheses have been developed and are con-sidered in the book. Also included are strength/fitness tests and specificexercise “prescriptions.” Dr. Leith (sport psychology, University ofToronto) has published over 140 articles on health psychology, sport psy-chology, and exercise psychology. The book is very well referenced andindexed.

GV706 2009-015767 978-0-7360-7572-5SSoocciioollooggyy ooff ssppoorrtt aanndd ssoocciiaall tthheeoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Earl Smith.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 239 p. $54.00Contributors about equally from sociology and from sport and leisurestudies reconsider core theories, mid-range theories, and micro-level the-ories in sociology as they are applied to various issues in the study ofsport. Among their topics are figurational sociology and the sociology ofsport, doing auto-ethnography to explore intersections of biography andhistory, sport and urban development, examining big-time college sport,feminist theory and the study of sport, the role of high school sports inrace and school attachment, Tiger Woods and excellence in golf, andMcDonald Bailey as a case study of sport and multiple identities inpostwar Trinidad.

GV706 2009-025544 978-0-7360-8192-4SSppoorrtt aanndd cchhaarraacctteerr:: rreeccllaaiimmiinngg tthhee pprriinncciipplleess ooffssppoorrttssmmaannsshhiipp..Clifford, Craig and Randolph M. Feezell.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 128 p. $16.95 (pa)Arguing that sportsmanship must be practiced like any other part ofsport, coaches Clifford (philosophy, Tarleton State U.) and Feezell (phi-losophy, Creighton U.) detail how coaches, athletes, parents, teachers, andothers can teach and learn sportsmanship and why it supports the healthand welfare of individuals in competitive play, as well as society. Theyoutline the principles of sportsmanship, ways to teach and model it,objections to teaching it, and how sport relates to life, with real examplesthroughout. The book is a reworking and expansion of the earliervolume, Coaching for Character. No index is provided.

GV706 2009-054050 978-0-8133-4487-4SSppoorrtt,, ppoowweerr,, aanndd ssoocciieettyy;; iinnssttiittuuttiioonnss aanndd pprraaccttiicceess;; aarreeaaddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert E. Washington and David Karen.Westview Press, ©2010 462 p. $49.00 (pa)For courses on sport and society, Washington and Karen (sociology andAfricana studies, Bryn Mawr College) assemble a collection of 34reprinted essays on sports culture and its relationship to other socialinstitutions around the world. General topics relate to sports and educa-tional institutions, politics, the media, cultural images of the body andphysical health, violence and injuries, and fans and social community. Asampling of topics: corporate ownership, economics and commercial-ization, the media and rugby in Australia, race and gender in educa-tional sports, the Gay Games, masculinity, the effects of sports on fanidentities, physicality and female beauty, and the embodiment of nation-alism in sports in India. Each section ends with a journalistic article onspecific issues and topics.

GV709 2009-424709 978-0-88961-476-5PPoollyyggeennddeerreedd aanndd ppoonnyyttaaiilleedd;; tthhee ddiilleemmmmaa ooff ffeemmiinniinniittyyaanndd tthhee ffeemmaallee aatthhlleettee..Daniels, Dayna B.Women’s Press, ©2009 213 p. $39.95 (pa)Focusing on the lives and thoughts of female athletes, Daniels (women’sstudies and kinesiology and physical eduction, U. of Lethbridge, Canada)examines and challenges the meanings of the words gender and femi-ninity, and suggests changes that move toward a new construction of theconcepts and new understanding of who individuals are. Her topicsinclude the science behind the myth of gender, the sexing and embod-iment of femininity, the shape of her skin, the body as an ornamentalsurface, and a new polygendered beginning.

GV713 2009-934546 978-1-935412-01-4TThhee nneeww ssppoorrtt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt rreeaaddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by John Nauright and Steven Pope.Fitness Information Technology, ©2009 594 p. $58.00 (pa)The academic study of sports management has its roots in the 1970s, butdid not fully emerge until the 1990s, and most of the 30 articles reprintedhere were originally published after the turn of the century. They covercritical approaches; case studies; and the emergent themes of devel-opment, human rights, media culture, and sports tourism. Among spe-cific topic are understanding the social-cultural nexus of gender-powerrelations, managing and marketing heritage within the global sportsmarketplace, a model to explain support in Spanish football, mechanismsof international influence on domestic elite sport policy, recovering fromJanet Jackson’s breast, EURO 2012 in Poland and Ukraine as a case studyof assessing the impact of sports mega-events in transition economies,and child abuse and child protection in sport.

GV713 2009-032768 978-1-59460-467-6AA pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttoo ssppoorrtt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by John Miller and Todd Seidler.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 234 p. $30.00 (pa)This guide is geared to undergraduate and graduate students and theirinternship supervisors. Part I, on pedagogical issues in sport man-agement internships, gives insight on choosing and preparing for theinternship from the student’s perspective. There is also material for edu-cators on designing the internship, the importance of supervision, evalu-ation and assessment, and issues in international internships. Part II, onsafety and risk management considerations, looks at paid versus unpaidinternships, insurance issues and risk agreements, students with disabil-ities, and sexual harassment. Chapter discussion questions are included.About 20 pages of appendices list sport management programs in the US,and provide web links to organizations, sample cover letters andinternship proposals, and sample agreements and evaluation forms.Seidler coordinates the graduate program in sport administration at theUniversity of New Mexico. Miller teaches sport management at TexasTech University.

GV716 2009-040507 978-1-59460-506-2BBrraannddeedd;; bbrraannddiinngg iinn ssppoorrtt bbuussiinneessss..Title main entry. Ed. by Jason W. Lee.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 341 p. $40.00 (pa)This work can serve as a supplemental text for courses in sport business,sport marketing and promotion, branding, and sport finance. It profilessports brands and brands that have significant connections to sports, inthe categories of apparel and equipment, leagues and events, non-sportentities that use sport to enhance brands, and media and memorabilia.A section on controversies looks at topics such as marketing the WWEbrand to youth, and smokeless tobacco sponsorship in sport. Eachchapter includes an overview of the company, a timeline, key concepts,and discussion questions. The book is illustrated with a 16-page sectionof color photos. Lee is professor of sport management at the Universityof North Florida.

GV721 2009942556 978-1-935412-05-2RReetthhiinnkkiinngg tthhee OOllyymmppiiccss;; ccuullttuurraall hhiissttoorriieess ooff tthhee mmooddeerrnnggaammeess..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert K. Barney. (Sport & global cultures)Fitness Information Technology, ©2010 491 p. $36.95 (pa)The history of sport, the sociology of sport, kinesiology, and classics areamong the perspectives from which contributors view the now biennialgames, winter alternating with summer. In 17 essays they look at thelegacy of antiquity, modern evolution, the controversial games in Berlin1936, performance enhancement, the rise of commercialism, enduringcontroversies, the politics of hosting Olympic Games, and the problematiccomplexities of modern sport and Olympic Games raised by thedynamics of globalization.

GV838 2009-035767 978-0-7360-7900-6SSccuubbaa ddiivviinngg,, 44tthh eedd..Graver, Dennis K.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 233 p. $24.95 (pa)In this guide for beginning to intermediate divers and students, Graver,former director of training for the Professional Association of DivingInstructors, offers guidelines on selecting a dive course, background ondiving science and the dive environment, and advice on selecting andcaring for diving equipment, diving skills, dive planning, and preventingand managing underwater emergencies and hazards, with color photosand illustrations on every page. The book also includes an appendix ofassociations and periodicals, and a glossary. Dennis Graver has morethan 30 years of experience as a scuba instructor and instructor trainer.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –90–

GV863 2009-044286 978-0-89672-701-4PPllaayyiinngg iinn sshhaaddoowwss;; TTeexxaass aanndd NNeeggrroo lleeaagguuee bbaasseebbaallll..Fink, Rob.Texas Tech U. Press, ©2010 165 p. $29.95While the history of national Negro League baseball has become betterknown over the past 20 years, very little has been written about theregional leagues that were the home to most black players during thedecades in which segregation kept them out of “white” baseball. For thisbook, the author uses oral histories and rosters and box scores fromblack newspapers to chart the rise and fall of the semi-pro West TexasColored League and the short-lived professional Texas-Oklahoma-Louisiana League against the changing fortunes of the national blackbaseball leagues. Filling a big hole in the history of black baseball, thislively book will appeal to anyone interested in baseball or in AfricanAmerican history.

GV875 2009-049187 978-0-7864-3920-1EEvvaalluuaattiinngg bbaasseebbaallll’’ss mmaannaaggeerrss;; aa hhiissttoorryy aanndd aannaallyyssiiss ooffppeerrffoorrmmaannccee iinn tthhee mmaajjoorr lleeaagguueess,, 11887766--22000088..Jaffe, Chris.McFarland & Co., ©2010 323 p. $39.95 (pa)Jaffee (history instructor and columnist for The Hardball Times takessabermetrics, the statistical and mathematical study of baseball records,off the field and into the realm of people skills and basic management.The author delves into the duties of baseball’s managers such as dealingwith players, enforcing rules, evaluating talent, delegating authority,handling fans and media, dealing with stress, and teaching and moti-vating. The author’s central point and one readers will appreciate as theyprogress through the book is that managers manage men, not games—and that while management on the field matters, it is secondary. Andwhile statistics play a big part in the book, the text he offers is more artthan science—a lot like baseball.

GV884 2009-042203 978-0-8156-0946-9MMoooonnffiixxeerr;; tthhee bbaasskkeettbbaallll jjoouurrnneeyy ooff EEaarrll LLllooyydd..Lloyd, Earl.Syracuse U. Press, ©2010 142 p. $29.95Earl Lloyd was the first African American to play in a NationalBasketball Association game (it was in 1950) and also worked in thesport as an NBA coach and scout. Here Lloyd, with assistance fromaward-winning newspaper columnist and author Kirst, Lloyd tells his lifestory from his birth in Virginia, which he referred to as “the cradle ofsegregation” and through his playing career. He tells of the countlessinstances of prejudice he endured and with Kirst, manages to intertwinethe story of integration in the NBA with the story of an Americaenduring severe growing pains.

GV1033 2008-938274 978-0-7385-6925-3MMaazzddaa RRaacceewwaayy LLaagguunnaa SSeeccaa..Noble, Butch. (Images of sports)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Noble, a photojournalist, presents a pictorial account of the famousMazda Raceway Laguna Seca, near Monterey in California, whichconsists of many turns and the largest elevation change in the shortestdistance on any racetrack in the world. He provides b&w photos of thetrack, cars, wrecks, and racers in the past 50 years, as well as eventprograms.

GV1059 2009-030642 978-0-7627-4743-6MMoottoorrccyyccllee ttoouurriinngg iinn tthhee SSoouutthhwweesstt;; tthhee rreeggiioonn’’ss bbeessttrriiddeess..Karras, Christy and Stephen Zusy.Globe Pequot Press, ©2010 327 p. $18.95 (pa)Writer Karras and photojournalist Zusy provide a guidebook of 34 motor-cycle tours in the ultra-scenic American southwest. They provide helpfulinformation on a variety of topics in addition to tour information, suchas weather, clothing, supplies, helmet laws, and planning tips. The toursthey describe include routes in Utah, Colorado, Four Corners, Nevada,New Mexico, and Arizona.

GV1132 2009-018960 978-1-4384-3001-0BBlloowwss ttoo tthhee hheeaadd;; hhooww bbooxxiinngg cchhaannggeedd mmyy mmiinndd..Klein, Binnie.Excelsior Editions, ©2010 197 p. $19.95In this memoir, Klein (psychiatry, Yale U.) recounts how she took upboxing in her mid-fifties and how it led her back to her Jewish immi-grant roots. She describes her obsession with boxing, women’s boxingand boxers, her lessons and sparring, her childhood and family roots,and what she learned about herself in the process. An imprint of StateUniversity of New York Press.

GV1203 2009-049622 978-0-7864-4280-5RReeccrreeaattiioonn hhaannddbbooookk ffoorr ccaammpp,, ccoonnffeerreennccee aannddccoommmmuunniittyy,, 22dd eedd..Barrows, Roger E.McFarland & Co., ©2010 319 p. $45.00 (pa)Barrows, who has worked with young people at Northeast Music Campand the Chautauqua Institution, provides a second edition of hishandbook for youth recreation. It is intended as a guide for youth leaderssuch as camp counselors, religious directors, 4-H leaders, parents, andothers involved with young people between roughly eight and 18. Topicsinclude: icebreaker and team builder activities, games, nature activities,rainy day activities, dramatics and skits, storytelling, songs, and otherrelated activities.

GV1218 2009-039786 978-0-313-34798-6TTooyyss aanndd AAmmeerriiccaann ccuullttuurree;; aann eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa..Scott, Sharon M.Greenwood Press, ©2010 418 p. $85.00Scott, an author and journalist specializing in American popular culture,offers an encyclopedia of toys in American culture that addresses therelationship between the two and the invention and development of toysin terms of historical events, social movements, and internationalprogress. Entries trace developments in toy making and marketing in thetwentieth century, the history of influential toys, and important trends,individuals, designers, museums, events, organizations, companies, andpublications, with discussion of the cultural, social, and historical signif-icance of each toy. A sampling of entries: Barbie, action figures, Bratz,Cabbage Patch Kids, Chatty Cathy, Disney Company, Elmo, FAO Schwarz,Fisher-Price, gender stereotyping, guns, Lincoln Logs, PEZ, safety, StarWars toys, Toy Industry Association, and Walmart. B&w photos and illus-trations are included. Games are omitted. The bibliography incorporatesevents, organizations, and collections.

GV1301 2009-048274 978-1-59884-225-8TThhee iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ggaammbblliinngg;; 22vv..Thompson, William N.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 732 p. $180.00Thompson, the author of many books on the international gamblingindustry, offers a two-volume encyclopedia on the topic. Organized bysubject, entries includes general topics like casinos, cruise ships, dogracing, and the lottery; specific games; biographies of leading figures;venues and places around the world; and major law cases. He includesa lengthy annotated bibliography and short articles on the history andgrowth of Las Vegas, the best gamblers in the world, advertising, LatinAmerican casinos, taxes, social costs, compulsive gambling, and othertopics. This edition has been revised and expanded from the previous onevolume work, Gambling in America: An Encyclopedia of History, Issues,and Society, and includes new material on venues around the world,gambling figures, and world events, topics such as internet gambling,and a section incorporating reviews of films.

GV1312 2009-010700 978-1-60709-260-5AA bbooaarrdd ggaammee eedduuccaattiioonn..Hinebaugh, Jeffrey P.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 221 p. $14.95 (pa)In this resource for parents, teachers, educators, the author, a boardgame enthusiast, shows how classic, traditional board games, like Clue,Battleship, Risk, Scattergories, and Boggle, can help develop skills in logicand deductive reasoning, planning and negotiation, creative thinking,and word awareness. The book also offers a brief review of the use ofboard games in education and the curriculum, trivia and little-knownfacts on classic games, and an extensive list of references and resourcesrelated to education and games. Hinebaugh is a litigation partner in alaw firm. There is no subject index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–91–

GV1469 2009-029170 978-0-8166-6611-9GGaammeess ooff eemmppiirree;; gglloobbaall ccaappiittaalliissmm aanndd vviiddeeoo ggaammeess..Dyer-Witheford, Nick and Greig de Peuter. (Electronic mediations; 29)U. of Minnesota Press, ©2009 298 p. $19.95 (pa)Video games are a paradigmatic media of Empire (understood as plan-etary, militarized hypercapitalism as theorized in Michael Hardt andAntonio Negri’s Empire) and of some of the forces presently challengingit, hypothesize Dyer-Witheford (information and media studies, U. ofWestern Ontario, Canada) and de Peuter (a doctoral candidate in com-munications at Simon Fraser U., Canada). In support of this hypothesisthey examine the development of the corporate video game complex andthe interactions between game console and gamer; explore relationships“between games and reality, body and avatar, screen and street, first lifeand second life” and how they serve to shape subjectivities; and assessaspects of alternative gaming culture that challenge or subvert the dom-inant order.

GV1545 2009-910757 978-0-9825068-3-7BBeeaattiinngg aa ddeeaadd hhoorrssee;; tthhee lliiffee aanndd ttiimmeess ooff JJaayy MMaarrsshhaallll..Marshall, Alexander.Junto Publishing, ©2010 525 p. $69.95Marshall, son of Jay Marshall (1919-2005), provides an illustrated biog-raphy of his father and his career as a magician. The biography chron-icles Marshall’s middle class upbringing; his TV variety show, Broadway,and live performances (including with the Ziegfeld Follies and FrankSinatra); his time in the US Army; his personal life; and his career as awriter, ventriloquist, puppeteer, musician, publisher, historian, comedian,and in other roles, integrated with memories of his own life as his son.Many color photos, programs, and other ephemera are included. Teller(of Penn and Teller) provides the foreword.

GV1594 2009-036947 978-0-7360-8023-1EExxpplloorriinngg ddaannccee ffoorrmmss aanndd ssttyylleess;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo ccoonncceerrtt,,wwoorrlldd,, ssoocciiaall,, aanndd hhiissttoorriiccaall ddaannccee.. ((DDVVDD iinncclluuddeedd))Scheff, Helene et al.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 314 p. $64.00 (pa)Scheff, a veteran dance teacher now working for the National DanceEducation Organization; Marty Sprague (dance, Providence Academy ofInternational Studies, Rhode Island); and Susan McGreevy-Nichols, anational consultant in arts education programming and curriculum,provide dance teachers a tool that includes background material, sug-gestions for activities, teaching strategies, worksheets, and a disk with 83minutes of video showing 39 dance performances. The dances describedcome from all cultures and those in Western culture from the MiddleAges to the present.

GV1594 2009-036251 978-0-7360-7610-4WWrriittiinngg aabboouutt ddaannccee..Oliver, Wendy R.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 181 p. $29.00 (pa)Oliver (dance, Providence College, Rhode Island) offers other danceteachings some guidance and tools for helping their students learn towrite about dance. Writing helps people think critically, she says, butdance classes are structured such that little or no time is usually availablefor writing or learning to write. She looks at writing, dancing, andcritical thinking; the writing process; informal writing exercises; dancecritiques; dance essays; and dance research papers.

GV1788 2009-041772 978-0-8130-3459-1BBaalllleett ppeeddaaggooggyy;; tthhee aarrtt ooff tteeaacchhiinngg..Foster, Rory.U. Press of Florida, ©2010 150 p. $26.95 (pa)Foster (emeritus dance, DePaul U.) begins by explaining how well- trainedballet dancers cannot have the faintest idea how to teach: if they them-selves had good teachers, the pedagogy would have been invisible, nevercoming between the students and what they were learning. Then heexplains aspects that are essential for teaching ballet, from perspectivesof a historical synopsis of ballet pedagogy, the ballet class, anatomy forthe dancer, music for dance, the teaching and learning process, teachingyour class, dancer health and injuries, and establishing your own school.

GV1834 2008-042368 978-0-88240-773-9PPeennddlleettoonn RRoouunndd--UUpp aatt 110000;; OOrreeggoonn’’ss lleeggeennddaarryy rrooddeeoo..Bales, Michael and Ann Terry Hill. Ed. by Karen Kirtley.Graphic Arts Center Publishing, ©2009 299 p. $60.00Rather than treating the Pendleton Round-Up as mere history, the bookaims to describe the character of the West itself with a profusion of large,beautifully reproduced images, stories of tough and colorful characters,and a glimpse of the environment that produced them. It is hard toimagine a richer account. The authors use an engaging storytelling styleto weave together an understanding of local culture and history, aspectsof showmanship, racial and cultural tensions of the day, and the mythicimportance of Western heroes. Oversize: 11x12″

GV1853 2008-933810 978-0-7385-6236-0RRoocckkyy PPooiinntt PPaarrkk..Bettencourt, David and Stephanie Chauvin. (Images of America)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)Drawing from archives of the Warwick Historical Society, private collec-tions, and family albums, this volume presents historic photos of RockyPoint Park in Rhode Island. Through the b&w photos and illustrations,it traces the early years of the family park from its purchase in 1847; itsattractions, rides, food, and grounds; the people who went there; and itsdecline and closing in 1995. Bettencourt, a filmmaker, Rhode Islandnative, and adjunct professor at the U. of Rhode Island, produced a doc-umentary about Rocky Point Park, in which these images were used.Chauvin is a freelance writer living in Providence.

SSOOCCIIAALL SSCCIIEENNCCEESS ((GGEENNEERRAALL)),, SSTTAATTIISSTTIICCSS

H62 2008-943686 1-84787-006-6AAnnaallyyssiiss iinn qquuaalliittaattiivvee rreesseeaarrcchh..Boeije, Hennie.Sage Publications, ©2010 223 p. $99.95A practical guide for master’s students and researchers more comfortablewith quantitative research, this book outlines in much detail the nec-essary steps in conducting and presenting excellent qualitative research.Written by Boeije (social and behavioral sciences, Utrecht U.), it alsocovers how to describe the analysis process, a key factor in making theresearch more credible and verifiable. Each chapter ends with anotherstep to “doing your own qualitative research project,” sometimes in theformat of a checklist of things to do, but occasionally as a list of seriousconsiderations to step back and review.

H62 2009-012391 978-1-4129-5670-3EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ccaassee ssttuuddyy rreesseeaarrcchh;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Albert J. Mills et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 1106 p. $295.00Case study methodology, although pioneered in the 1920s, has not gar-nered as much research and attention as other methods of socialresearch, and yet it is widely used. The entries in this two-volume ref-erence deal with themes concerning the scientific method, how casestudy compares with other methodologies, theory, types, design, data col-lection and analysis, reports and evaluation, and incorporation of casestudies with multimethod programs. Coverage includes case studyresearch pertaining to anthropology, business management, businessethics, education, feminism, medicine, political science, psychology,public policy, sociology, and tourism. It’s worth noting some of the threeeditors’ stated areas of passion and expertise. Albert J. Mills (man-agement, Saint Mary’s U., Canada) has long held concerns with discrim-ination, knowledge and human liberation, and social change. GabrielleDurepos (organizational behavior, St. Francis Xavier U., Canada) is pas-sionately concerned with many facets of how knowledge, history, organ-izations, and policy intersect. Elden Wiebe (business, management &commerce, The King’s U. College, Canada) is particularly interested inorganizational change—how & why it happens or doesn’t happen, andhow & why it may happen and subsequently be reversed.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –92–

H62 2009-930844 978-1-4129-4856-2RReefflleeccttiivvee iinntteerrvviieewwiinngg;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Roulston, Kathryn.Sage Publications, ©2010 210 p. $99.95Roulston (U. of Georgia) offers concise instruction on conducting effectiveresearch interviews. The book is framed in the researcher’s considerationof three interrelated issues: the theoretical conception of the researchinterview, the subject’s positions in relation to the project and its partic-ipants, and methodological examinations of interview interaction toguide research design. Topics include: interviews with groups, theorizingthe qualitative interview, designing studies that incorporate interviews,conducting interview research, the reflective interviewer, examininginterview talk methodologically, and analyzing and representinginterview data.

H62 2009-928042 978-1-4129-2942-4VViiddeeoo iinn qquuaalliittaattiivvee rreesseeaarrcchh;; aannaallyyssiinngg ssoocciiaall iinntteerraaccttiioonniinn eevveerryyddaayy lliiffee..Heath, Christain et al. (Introducing qualitative methods)Sage Publications, ©2010 173 p. $99.95Three authors identified only by name introduce methods for using videofor research in the social sciences, particularly using audio-visualrecordings to support the analysis of everyday social activities. They con-sider using video at all stage of research from preliminary planningthrough data collection, to presenting findings. Unlike many texts onqualitative research, they emphasize analyzing data, including matters oftranscription, observation, and conception. The topics are video, analysis,and the social sciences; access, ethics, and project planning; collectingaudio-visual data; developing preliminary observations to analyze video;objects, participation, and institutional practice; preparing presentationsand publications; and implications, applications, and new developments.

H97 978-1-84720-827-9GGaammee tthheeoorryy aanndd ppuubblliicc ppoolliiccyy..McCain, Roger A.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 262 p. $115.00McCain (economics and international business, Drexel U.) presents avolume intended to clarify and assess the theorems currently in use ininteractive decision theory in the field of public policy. Exploring bothcooperative and non-cooperative game theory, it considers examples oftheir use, including discussion of some lesser known theorems. Whilesimplifying one’s assumptions permit the proof of broad mathematicaltheorems, their very simplification make them difficult to apply usefullyto the field of public policy. Nevertheless, this book assembles a tool-kitof the models that are currently most appropriate and makes some con-structive proposals for new approaches.

HA29 2009-035868 978-0-470-01154-6BBaayyeessiiaann aannaallyyssiiss ffoorr tthhee ssoocciiaall sscciieenncceess..Jackman, Simon. (Wiley series in probability and statistics)John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 564 p. $90.00Jackman (political science, Stanford U.), in his textbook on Bayesian sta-tistical inference as a social science tool, provides a strong argument forthe validity and practicality of applying Bayesian inference in a varietyof social science settings. The author discusses: Bayesian analysis forsimple models, simulation-based Bayesian analysis, and advanced appli-cations in the social sciences such as analysis of choice making andapproaches to measurement. The book also contains a probability reviewsection, proofs of selected propositions, and extensive references, as wellas an extensive figures and tables. The book would be suitable forgraduate and postgraduate students in sociology, political science, psy-chology, communications, education, economics, and statistics.

HA29 2009-024400 978-0-415-56055-9MMooddeellss iinn ssttaattiissttiiccaall ssoocciiaall rreesseeaarrcchh..Rohwer, Götz.Routledge, ©2010 146 p. $135.00Statistical social research starts from formally defined variables, in con-trast to case studies, explains Rohwer (methods of social research and sta-tistics, Ruhr-U. Bochum, Germany). He describes the models used in suchinquiry, focusing primarily on analytic models, and argues that they canbest be understood as functional models, which use deterministic or sto-chastic functions to connect modal variables. His topics are variables andrelations, notions of structure, processes and process frames, functionalmodels, functional causality, models and statistical data, models withevent variables, and multilevel and population-level models.

HA29 2009-031775 978-1-4129-7496-7SSttaattiissttiiccaall ppeerrssuuaassiioonn..Pearson, R. W.Sage Publications, ©2010 405 p. $89.95 (pa)Pearson (government, U. of Pennsylvania) offers a textbook on statisticsfor graduate students and advanced undergraduates in public policy,education, social work, criminology, urban planning, and other relatedprograms. His approach is to provide an understanding of statistics inthe real-world environment of policy issues rather than as an abstractiondrawn from nonpolicy topics or created to display elements not likely tobe found in the real world. Therefore, the problems and examples arefrom the world students are likely to confront as they begin their pro-fessional careers. The author illustrates the significance of solid researchdesign and measurement, appropriate statistical procedures, and how toemploy principled and persuasive statistical arguments and presentationsto nonacademic audiences.

HA31 2009-038693 978-1-4338-0705-3PPrreesseennttiinngg yyoouurr ffiinnddiinnggss;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ffoorr ccrreeaattiinnggttaabblleess,, 66tthh eedd..Nicol, Adelheid A. M. and Penny M. Pexman.American Psychological Assn., ©2010 171 p. $19.95 (pa)This guide shows researchers and students how to use statistical tablesto report findings. About 20 different types of statistical analyses, suchas logistic regression, confirmatory factor analysis, and structuralequation modeling, are covered in brief chapters, with overviews andexamples of tables included for each statistic. This sixth edition includesconfidence intervals. It has been updated to reflect current reportingstandards of the Publication Manual of the American PsychologicalAssociation and technological developments affecting graphics displays.Nichol teaches in the Military Psychology and Leadership Department atthe Royal Military College of Canada. Pexman teaches in the Departmentof Psychology at the University of Calgary, Canada.

HA32 2009-043892 978-1-4129-7494-3PPrraaccttiiccaall ssttaattiissttiiccss;; aa qquuiicckk aanndd eeaassyy gguuiiddee ttoo SSPPSSSS,, SSttaattaa,,aanndd ootthheerr ssttaattiissttiiccaall ssooffttwwaarree..Kremelberg, David.Sage Publications, ©2011 513 p. $35.95 (pa)For upper-level undergraduate and graduate students in the social andbehavioral sciences, Kremelberg, a statistical consultant and writer whohas held research positions at the U. of Connecticut and the Institute forCommunity Research in Connecticut, explains how to run a variety of sta-tistical analyses in IBM SPSS Statistics, STATA, and other programs. Afterintroducing quantitative methods and statistics, he focuses on the prac-tical use of statistics and descriptive statistics; commonly used tests likePearson’s coefficient, chi-square, and the ANOVA; linear and other formsof regression; factor analysis; time-series analysis; hierarchical linearmodeling; and structural equation modeling.

HA1501 978-1-84742-120-3SSttrreeeett ccaappiittaall;; bbllaacckk ccaannnnaabbiiss ddeeaalleerrss iinn aa wwhhiittee wweellffaarreessttaattee..Sandberg, Sveinung and Willy Pedersen.Policy Press, ©2009 193 p. $99.00Sociologists Sandberd (U. of Bergen) and Pedersen (U. of Oslo) examineyoung black men dealing cannabis at The River, a street drug market indowntown Oslo, going beyond the public perception of them as deprivedand violent to explore deeper dimensions of their lives. They cover tra-jectories to The River, street capital, marginalization and resistance, drugsand masculinity, street dealing and drug markets, violence and streetculture, and between the street and the welfare state. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

HA3005 978-1-921576-05-8IInn yyoouurr ffaaccee;; aa ccaassee ssttuuddyy iinn ppoosstt--mmuullttiiccuullttuurraall AAuussttrraalliiaa..Ford, Margot.Charles Darwin U. Press, ©2009 200 p. $38.22 (pa)Under the premiership of John Howard, Australian policy promotingmulticulturalism has largely been dismantled, argues Ford (U. ofNewcastle, Australia) as she explores the impact of the post-multiculturalera on racialized practices of inclusion and exclusion and their impacton self and identity in the city of Darwin, in the Northern Territory. Sheis particularly concerned with how national narratives of identity andbelonging, found both in formal government practice and in the socialpractices of the population as whole, are enacted in the everyday experi-ences of people in Darwin.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–93–

EECCOONNOOMMIICCSS

HB23 2009933408 978-1-84844-526-0FFoouunnddaattiioonnss ooff llaaww aanndd eeccoonnoommiiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert D. Cooter and Francesco Parisi.(International library of critical writings in economics)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 555 p. $295.00Fourteen papers are presented by Cooter (law, U. of California atBerkeley) and Parisi (law, U. of Minnesota) with the aim of providing “anoverview of recent [from 1990 onwards] developments in the essentialtheories and methods of law and economics, especially improvementsthat draw on neighboring disciplines.” The material is organized intothree sections addressing the philosophical and political foundations ofthe filed, particularly in reference to the questions of fairness and effi-ciency, and liberal and conservative political philosophies; methodologiesfrom game theory, psychological experiments, and econometrics; and theinteraction of law and social norms.

HB23 2009933409 978-1-84844-527-7LLeeggaall iinnssttiittuuttiioonnss aanndd eeccoonnoommiicc ddeevveellooppmmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert D. Cooter and Francesco Parisi.(International library of critical writings in economics)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 734 p. $370.00Cooter (law, U. of California at Berkeley) and Parisi (law, U. of Minnesota)present 20 papers, originally published between 1983 and 2006, thatexplore the effects of legal institutions and policies on economic growtharound the world. They are organized into four sections offering com-parative discussion of the relationship between law and economic devel-opment at the international level (comparing both different countries anddifferent legal systems); reviewing recent theory concerning the devel-opment of economic institutions and the common law; examining the-ories involving such aspects of public law as judicial interpretation ofstatutes, people’s reactions to constitutions, the market for votes, privatelegislatures, and public choice; and addressing connections betweenchoice of law, federalism, state competition, and immigration, on the onehand, and national economic and social development on the other. Forease of citation, original pagination of articles has been retained in com-bination with the volume’s overall pagination.

HB72 2009933412 978-1-84844-654-0EEccoonnoommiiccss ooff eetthhiiccss aanndd tthhee eetthhiiccss ooff eeccoonnoommiiccss;; vvaalluueess,,mmaarrkkeettss aanndd tthhee ssttaattee..Title main entry. Ed. by Geoffrey Brennan and Giuseppe Eusepi.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 216 p. $105.00Given Adam Smith’s background in moral philosophy, the discipline ofeconomics could be said to have been born out of ethics, note Brennan(economics, Australian National U., Australia) and Eusepi (economics,Sapienza U. of Rome, Italy), but it has certainly strayed far from thoseroots in the intervening couple of centuries. They urge a closer interdis-ciplinary relationship between economics and ethics and present 11papers demonstrating the fruits of such a relationship, with a focus onquestions of prices and values. Topics include the distinction betweeneconomic values and ethical values; the theoretical, ethical, and socialimplications of critical rationalism; the role of motivations in collectiveeconomic choices; the relationship between positive and normative the-ories of political economics; social norms and tax non-compliance; thedebates on just taxation in Italy during the period of constitution-making(1945-48); and the roles of cooperation, reciprocity, and self-esteem in eco-nomic exchanges.

HB74 2008-932670 978-0-465-00345-7AApppplliieedd eeccoonnoommiiccss;; tthhiinnkkiinngg bbeeyyoonndd ssttaaggee oonnee,, rreevv.. eedd..Sowell, Thomas.Basic Books, ©2009 336 p. $35.00This revised and updated edition adds a chapter on the economics ofimmigration and includes interesting examples and analysis designed forgeneral readers. The chapter on the economics of housing is up to date,exploring the recent subprime mortgage crisis and the role of “creative”financing. But the chapter on the economics of medical care, whileexpanded to cover the issue of organ transplants, appears to have beenwritten before many of the issues arose in the current debate aboutpaying for health care. Other chapters focus on labor, the economics ofdiscrimination, and the economic development over time of variousnations. Includes a sources section with the references written more in atext style. Sowell is a Scholar in Residence at the Hoover Institution.

HB74 2009-417561 978-0-06-073133-5FFrreeaakkoonnoommiiccss;; aa rroogguuee eeccoonnoommiisstt eexxpplloorreess tthhee hhiiddddeenn ssiiddeeooff eevveerryytthhiinngg..Levitt, Steven D. and Stephen J. Dubner.Harper Perennial, ©2009 315 p. $15.99 (pa)In this paperback edition of the 2005 bestseller, Levitt (economics, U. ofChicago) and Dubner (former New York Times Magazine writer/editor)present unconventional ideas about how economic, social, and moralincentives affect real situations. These include what motivates teachers aswell as sumo wrestlers to cheat, an association between abortions andreduced crime, and whether good parenting or genetics contributes moreto child outcomes. This edition includes a Q&A section with the authors.

HB74 2009-936215 978-1-84542-429-9TThhee nneeww bbeehhaavviioorraall eeccoonnoommiiccss;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Elias L. Khalil. (The international library ofcritical writings in economics; 238)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 1753 p. $895.00The value of a three-volume collection of previously published papers liesin an intelligent identification of themes, careful organization, and, ofcourse, thoughtful selection of works. Editor Khalil (Monash U.,Australia) begins his introduction by describing what is new about “newbehavioral economics,” including how it differs from “old behavioral eco-nomics” and whether the differences parallel the differences betweennew and old institutional economics. He has selected 72 papers—spanning a time period beginning in the late 1970s, through the present—from journals such as Econometrica, J. of Economic Behavior andOrganization, Quarterly J. of Economics, American Economic Review, and J.of Economic Literature, among many others. The section themes point to“tastes”—for “fairness,” “the present,” “endowment,” and “identity andemotions.” Under these themes, the articles address behavior involvingtrust, equity, motivation, losses and gains, and “weakness of will,”among other topics. A final section is devoted to the contributions of thenew behavioral economics to the rejuvenation of economics and therethinking of standard assumptions. The papers are reprinted in fac-simile (so typefaces vary), and they are not indexed.

HB74.5 2009-933411 978-1-84844-579-6EEdduuccaattiinngg eeccoonnoommiissttss;; tthhee TTeeaaggllee ddiissccuussssssiioonn oonn rree--eevvaalluuaattiinngg tthhee uunnddeerrggrraadduuaattee eeccoonnoommiiccss mmaajjoorr..Title main entry. Ed. by David Colander and KimMarie McGoldrick.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 242 p. $130.00In the fall of 2006, the Teagle Foundation awarded a grant to theAmerican Economic Association’s Committee on Economic Educationand five other disciplinary associations to investigate the role of theirrespective majors in promoting undergraduate liberal education. Thisvolume, edited by Colander (economics, Middlebury College) andMcGoldrick (economics, U. of Richmond, US) is the product of the dis-cussions resulting from the economics side of that project. Twenty-threechapters address the content of economics education at liberal educationinstitutions, pedagogical methods in economics education, structuralproblems and the interdisciplinary nature of economics, administrativeviews, and what economics majors think of economics education.

HB98 2009-930873 978-1-84844-104-0TThhee eeccoonnoommiiccss ooff iiggnnoorraannccee aanndd ccoooorrddiinnaattiioonn;;ssuubbjjeeccttiivviissmm aanndd tthhee AAuussttrriiaann SScchhooooll ooff EEccoonnoommiiccss..Aimar, Thierry. (New thinking in poitical economy)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 302 p. $135.00According to Aimar (economics, Sciences Po Paris and U. of Nancy 2,France) standard “efficient markets” and “rational expectations”economic theory fails to adequately treat the problem of coordinationbecause their cognitive hypotheses are too unfounded to justify thegeneral conclusion that in the absence of technological shocks, themarkets’ equilibrium is automatically guaranteed by price flexibility. Heargues that examination of the problem of coordination needs to bebased on the fact of economic actors’ ignorance and that theme ofinstitutions can be seen as a solution to the problem. In particular, therelatively neglected Austrian school of economics provides these answers,as he seeks to demonstrate through an explication of the Austrian andneo-Austrian traditions concerning the problem of ignorance in marketformation.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –94–

HB99 2009-031505 978-0-674-03538-6TThhee rreettuurrnn ttoo KKeeyynneess..Title main entry. Ed. by Bradley W. Bateman et al.Harvard University Press, ©2010 312 p. $49.95The anti-Keynesian counter-revolution of 1970-2000, which dismissed therole of monetary and fiscal policy in stabilizing the economy has effec-tively been overturned, even if the return of Keynesian thinking haslargely gone unnoted, declare Bateman (economics, Denison U., US), Hirai(economics, Sophia U., Japan), and Marcuzzo (political economy, U. ofRome, Italy), who present 14 papers exploring the changing policy land-scape of the last decade and its relation to Keynes. Essays examine thereemergence of macroeconomic policy as a tool for stabilization in theUnited States, Japan, and Europe; the prevalence or lack of prevalence ofKeynesian ideas in contemporary economic theory; the current state ofthe art in the scholarship of the history of economic thought on Keynes’slife and work; and the pertinence of Keynesian thinking on the currentglobal economic crisis.

HB143 2009-025907 978-0-470-74385-0HHaannddbbooookk ooff ccoommppuuttaattiioonnaall eeccoonnoommeettrriiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by David A. Belsley and Erricos JohnKontoghiorghes.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 496 p. $155.00This handbook will be useful for econometricians, financial statisticians,econometrics researchers, and advanced students of econometrics. Itreviews the field of computational econometrics and presents casestudies in the main subfields of econometrics: the development of com-putational techniques for carrying out econometrics; studies in which thecomputer is the central playing field, such as Monte Carlo experiments;studies in which the computer does the heavy lifting, such as massivesimulations; and the development of computational environments inwhich to conduct econometric studies, such as GAMS and Stata. Chaptertopics include heuristic optimization methods, nonparametric estimation,bootstrap hypothesis testing, and statistical signal extraction and filtering.Belsley is affiliated with Boston College. Kontoghiorghes is affiliated withthe University of London and the University of Cyprus.

HB171 2009-002602 978-0-7656-1795-8MMoonneeyy aanndd mmaaccrrooddyynnaammiiccss;; AAllffrreedd EEiicchhnneerr aanndd ppoosstt--KKeeyynneessiiaann eeccoonnoommiiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by Marc Lavoie et al.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 197 p. $98.95Put together to both honor the memory of Alfred Eichner, who died in1988, and to show his continued relevance, this volume contains sub-missions focusing on his thought in three areas: the link between micro-and macroeconomic analysis, competition and the globalized world, andcredit and endogenous money. Editors Lavoie, Rochon, and Seccareccia(economics at the U. of Ottawa and Laurentian U.) also explore Eichner’scriticism of neoclassical economics and his work in building a post-Keynesian school focused on the “corporate economy.”

HB172 2009-011624 978-0-8047-5884-0MMiiccrrooeeccoonnoommiicc tthheeoorryy oolldd aanndd nneeww;; aa ssttuuddeenntt’’ss gguuiiddee..Gowdy, John M.Stanford Economics & Finance, ©2010 189 p. $29.95 (pa)This volume begins by explaining the basics of Walrasian general equi-librium theory, a model the author says that all contemporary econo-mists must understand, even if they end up disagreeing with it. AndGowdy (economics, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute) does disagree withaspects of it, as becomes apparent with even a casual reading. In the firstpart of the book he does a thorough, mostly objective job in explainingthe underlying theories of modern economics, but does add regular com-ments about the assumptions and simplifications that were made in itsformulation. In the second part one senses that he comes into his own,exploring theoretical and behavioral critiques of Walrasian theory andsuggesting new approaches such as behavioral economics and evolu-tionary game theory and the necessity of incorporating the naturalresource base into equations.

HB238 2009922750 978-1-84542-526-5IInnnnoovvaattiioonn,, aagggglloommeerraattiioonn aanndd rreeggiioonnaall ccoommppeettiittiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Charlie Karlsson et al. (New horizons inregional science)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 405 p. $180.00Fifteen chapters, presented by Karlsson (economics of technologicalchange, Jönköping U., Sweden), Johansson (economics, Jönköping U.),and Stough (public policy, George Mason U., US), review key researchareas in the investigation of regional economics. All deal with the coretopics of agglomeration, innovation, and regional competition, althoughsome deal more with the influence of innovation and agglomeration onthe location of economic activity and others deal more directly with theissue of regional competition. Among the specific topics addressed arethe role of geographically overlapping markets for a municipality’sdiversity in retail and durables; opportunities for cross-border collabo-ration in support of Irish micro-enterprises; telecommunications andregional disparities in an era of globalization; spatial policies, planning,and urban competitiveness in London; regional research and devel-opment outsourcing in bioscientific industries; agglomeration economiesand firm growth in the Dutch information and communication tech-nology industry; and competition and cooperation in economic devel-opment among local jurisdictions in a large urban area.

HB501 2009-005720 978-0-06-156098-9TThhee ccaappiittaalliisstt’’ss bbiibbllee;; tthhee eesssseennttiiaall gguuiiddee ttoo ffrreeee mmaarrkkeettss——aanndd wwhhyy tthheeyy mmaatttteerr ttoo yyoouu..Title main entry. Ed. by Gretchen Morgenson.HarperCollins, ©2009 300 p. $16.99 (pa)The message of this Pulitzer Prize-winning New York Times business andfinancial columnist is that there has never been a more crucial time tobecome savvy about global financial markets. In this crash (pardon theexpression) course, Morgenson covers key economic theories, concepts,indicators, history, and personalities. With some rewritten text from theEncyclopedia of Capitalism (published by Facts on File), the guideincludes a glossary, annotated resources, and illustrations.

HB501 2009-038143 978-1-4128-1063-0MMiinndd vvss.. mmoonneeyy;; tthhee wwaarr bbeettwweeeenn iinntteelllleeccttuuaallss aannddccaappiittaalliissmm..Kahan, Alan S.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 302 p. $39.95Kahan (American Business School of Paris, France) examines the antag-onistic relationship between intellectuals and capitalists in the US andEurope and how the conflict must be moderated. He provides a briefhistory of Western intellectuals and the period when intellectuals thoughtcapitalism was good, and discusses when and why that changed; thealternatives they proposed (like that of Marx, Toennies, and Nietzsche);the impact of World War I, communism, fascism, social Catholicism, andthe New Deal; and the culture wars and recent battles like the greenmovement and feminism. He argues for a truce between mind andmoney, and that capitalism needs intellectuals, but that their role mustbe moderated.

HB501 2009-024865 978-1-59874-158-2MMooddeerrnn ccaappiittaalliisstt ccuullttuurree,, aabbrriiddggeedd eedd..White, Leslie A. Ed. by Burton J. Brown et al.Left Coast Press, ©2009 212 p. $34.95 (pa)Anthropologist Leslie white (1900-1975) was one of the foremost advo-cates promoting the idea of cultural evolution at the time when much ofthe anthropological field shied away from the concept. He presented hismajor ideas on the subject in The Evolution of Culture: The Developmentof Civilization to the Fall of Rome and had planned to follow up that workwith a volume titled Recent Trends and Future Probabilities: 1958-2058,but would up narrowing his focus from cultural development in generalto the evolution of the culture of capitalism from its origins to 20thcentury liberal democracy and would continue to work on the unfin-ished volume, Modern Capitalist Culture, until his death. This is anabridged version of the unfinished 1200-page manuscript. The editorshave sought to make the abridgement concise, yet comprehensive, and tohighlight those observations of White’s that retain the most applicability.The full manuscript is also available from Left Coast Press.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–95–

HB501 2009-036867 978-0-307-46422-4TThhee rrooaadd ffrroomm rruuiinn;; hhooww ttoo rreevviivvee ccaappiittaalliissmm aanndd ppuuttAAmmeerriiccaa bbaacckk oonn ttoopp..Bishop, Matthew and Michael Green.Crown Publishers, ©2010 371 p. $27.00The biggest mistake we could make in response to the financial crisisthat began in September 2008 would be to abandon capitalism, declareBishop (US business editor of The Economist) and Green (a former Britishgovernment official), but the second biggest would be to assume that nochanges are needed. In this work, they explain the causes of the crisis toa general audience and put forth their vision of what the changes needto be, pinning their discussion on “four big ideas” for a new, improvedcapitalism: rethink economics in a manner that recognizes that marketsdo not always act efficiently and rationally; establish new structures ofglobal governance founded on a new global reserve currency andaddress imbalances that lead to protectionist sentiments, such as in agri-culture; bring values back into business that encourage long-termthinking and responsible commercial practices; and promote financialliteracy among the public.

HB615 2008-023873 978-1-84720-074-7EEnnttrreepprreenneeuurrsshhiipp aanndd iinnnnoovvaattiioonnss iinn ffuunnccttiioonnaall rreeggiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Charlie Karlsson, et al.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 428 p. $155.00Proceedings from a subsection of the McGill InternationalEntrepreneurship Conference held in Uddavilla, Sweden, this volumebrings together academic scholars with broader interests than justbusiness. Here there is an added consideration of geography and regionalscience, as well as economics and public policy, in order to explore therole of innovation in largely urban regions. A functional region benefitsfrom attracting both knowledge-intensive labor and additional firmsseeking to take advantage of the research and development activities inthe firms, research laboratories and universities already there. Althoughmost of the papers give examples from specific regions such as Sweden,China, and the UK, the papers are for the most part abstract enough tohave wide application.

HB615 2009-930879 978-1-84844-434-8EEnnttrreepprreenneeuurrsshhiipp iinn ddeevveellooppiinngg ccoouunnttrriieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Thorsten Beck. (International library of entre-preneurship; 15)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 767 p. $400.00Beck (economics, Tilburg U., the Netherlands) collects 29 of what he con-siders the seminal papers on the connections between entrepreneurshipand development published over recent decades in such publications asthe Journal of Financial Economics, American Economic Review, andJournal of Developmental Economics. The papers are organized into sec-tions concerned with the theory of entrepreneurship; entrepreneurs,financing constraints, and microfinance; institutional barriers to entre-preneurship; the identity of entrepreneurs; and entrepreneurs, politi-cians, and rent-seeking. The papers are methodologically diverse andinclude theoretical models, cross-country studies, and firm- andhousehold-level studies that utilize both regression analysis and simu-lation techniques. Examples of specific topics include an estimated modelof entrepreneurial choice under liquidity constraints, entrepreneurshipand financial constraints in Thailand, distinguishing limited liabilityfrom moral hazard in a model of entrepreneurship, returns to capital inmicroenterprises, the impact of microcredit programs on self-employment profits, migration networks and microenterprises in Mexico,entry regulation as a barrier to entrepreneurship, entrepreneurship andthe evolution of income distributions in Poland and Russia, propertyrights and finance, evidence from African firms concerning ethnic tiesand the provision of credit, and the role of campaign contributions inpolitical connections and preferential access to finance.

HB615 2009-930866 978-1-84720-608-4HHaannddbbooookk ooff rreesseeaarrcchh oonn AAssiiaann eennttrreepprreenneeuurrsshhiipp..Title main entry. Ed. by Léo-Paul Dana et al.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 447 p. $270.00Dana (GSCM-Montpellier Business School, France), Han (Ryerson U.,Canada), Ratten (Duquesne U., US), and Welpe (Max Planck Institute ofEconomics, Germany) present 43 country studies that collectively providea survey of the private and public landscape of entrepreneurial devel-opment in Asia. Rather than adopt a uniform approach for the studies,authors concentrate on highlighting the distinctive characteristics of thelandscape for each country. For example, the chapter on Afghanistan dis-cusses international government support for entrepreneurship, thechapter on Brunei explores the relationship of Brunei’s exports to the oilindustry, the chapter on Indonesia focuses on the tourism and investmentsector, and the chapter on Lebanon focuses on that country’s stronglaissez-faire commercial tradition and internationalization in the bankingand tourism sectors. Also included is a chapter on drivers of internationalentrepreneurship in Asia as a whole.

HB615 2009-024941 978-0-470-45571-5IImmmmiiggrraanntt,, IInncc..;; wwhhyy iimmmmiiggrraanntt eennttrreepprreenneeuurrss aarreeddrriivviinngg tthhee nneeww eeccoonnoommyy ((aanndd hhooww tthheeyy wwiillll ssaavvee tthheeAAmmeerriiccaann wwoorrkkeerr))..Herman, Richard T. and Robert L. Smith.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 226 p. $29.95For business readers, Herman, an immigration and business attorney,and Smith, a journalist who covers international cultures and immi-gration, describe the entrepreneurial achievements of immigrants inAmerica and the culture that produces their success. They illustrate howthe many companies founded by immigrants create new jobs, the role ofimmigrants in the growth of industries and innovation, their successfultraits, and examples such as Sun Microsystems, Intel, Google,A123Systems, BioSilk, and Yahoo. There is no bibliography.

HB849 978-81-7708-217-3PPooppuullaattiioonn,, eennvviirroonnmmeenntt aanndd ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; aa gglloobbaallcchhaalllleennggee ffoorr tthhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by B.R.K. Sinha.New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2009 351 p. $86.25Sinha (geography, Banaras Hindu U., India) brings together scholars fromthe US, Canada, the UK, Hungary, Romania, South Korea, Japan, andIndia in order to discuss research on the interaction between population,the environment, and development in various areas of the world largelyfrom the disciplinary perspective of geography. Among the specific topicsaddressed are global aging and the rural health divide; the problems andprospects of the aging of the Baby Boomers in the US; the state of healthof the Hungarian population in the period of post-communist transition;air pollution and urban environmental degradation in Ghaziabad inIndia; urban development policy in South Korea; patterns of urban livingand quality of life in Bucharest, Romania, during the post-communistperiod; environment, population, and land use conflicts in the coastalsavannah of Ghana; and people, environment, and development of theupper Ganga basin area in Uttarkhand, India. Distributed in NorthAmerica by ISBS.

HB884 2009-030787 978-0-7546-7875-5TThhee ddyynnaammiiccss ooff mmiiggrraattiioonn,, hheeaalltthh,, aanndd lliivveelliihhooooddss;;IINNDDEEPPTTHH nneettwwoorrkk ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by by Mark Collinson et al.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 196 p. $99.95In 2003, demographers at INDEPTH Network formed the Migration andUrbanization Working Group to provide a different view of migrationthan other studies by using a different data structure. Among the fea-tures of the data are the ongoing registration of a whole district popu-lation so that accurate rates can be computed, based on verified movesthat occurred in the population. Event history analysis and other longi-tudinal methods highlight the exposures to risks related to migration.After an introductory section, the study takes up livelihoods and healthin turn. Among the topics are age-sex profiles of migration, migrationand socio-economic change in rural South Africa 2000-2007, assessing theeffect of mother’s migration on childhood mortality in the informal set-tlements of Nairobi, and migration and under five morbidity in Vietnam.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –96–

HB1971 2009-019224 978-0-8130-3403-4MMiiggrraattiioonn aanndd tthhee ttrraannssffoorrmmaattiioonn ooff tthhee mmooddeerrnn SSoouutthhssiinnccee 11994455..Cassanello, Robert and Colin J. Davis. (Working in the Americas)U. Press of Florida, ©2009 209 p. $65.00Labor historians in the region examine the South as a place of transfor-mation because of migration from elsewhere in the US and from othercountries, primarily in Latin America, and what that spells for theSouthern workplace. Recognizing geographical variation as well aschronological change, they describe how workplaces and communities inspecific locations across the region have responded to the transformation.Their topics include the Latinization of Miami’s workforce 1940-80, thepoultry industry and the problem of public work 1950-70, Latinos andBlack in the recent American South, and globalization and the coalfieldsof Alabama and Columbia 1970-2003.

HB3711 2009-036152 978-0-313-38163-8RReecceessssiioonnss aanndd ddeepprreessssiioonnss;; uunnddeerrssttaannddiinngg bbuussiinneessssccyycclleess,, 22dd eedd..Knoop, Todd A.Praeger, ©2010 280 p. $44.95For undergraduate students and general readers with some backgroundin economics, Knoop (economics and business, Cornell College) surveysfundamental business cycle theories and key market failures. He dis-cusses classical, Keynesian, and other economic theories and their devel-opment and policy implications, and provides studies of major businesscycle downturns in the US from the Great Depression and postwar reces-sions to the new economy of the 1990s, the 2001 recession, and the 2007global financial crisis, added in a new chapter in this edition. Thisedition also has updated statistics, coverage of recent international crisesin East Asia and Japan, a new chapter on financial market crashes andpanics and the role finance plays in macroeconomic volatility, and anupdated chapter on what is known and not known about business cycles.Praeger is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

HB3716 2009-034474 978-0-7656-2283-9RReecceessssiioonn pprreevveennttiioonn hhaannddbbooookk;; eelleevveenn ccaassee ssttuuddiieess,, 11994488--22000077..Frumkin, Norman.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 379 p. $119.95This text consists of eleven case studies of US economic recessions from1948 to 2009. The case studies look at the performance of the economyand the actions taken by the Federal Reserve, the president, and Congressduring the expansion period before the onset of each recession, as wellas certain other key factors such as the Vietnam War’s impact on therecession of 1969-70 or the Iranian Revolution’s impact on the recessionof 1980. The author finds “persistent failures over the last sixty-two yearsof the Federal Reserve and the president to forecast, or to acknowledgethe possibility of a future recession; to deal appropriately with actualinflation or a perceived potential future inflation, and to Congress’s weakoversight of the Federal Reserve.” He argues that the Federal Reserveshould switch focus on excessive demand as the cause of inflation to non-demand factors such as the psychology of inflationary expectations bybusinesses and workers, outsized speculation in the asset prices of stockequities and houses, and supply shocks causing temporary shortages ofcertain materials.

HB3730 2009-930432 978-1-84720-489-9TThhee mmaakkiinngg ooff nnaattiioonnaall eeccoonnoommiicc ffoorreeccaassttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Lawrence R. Klein.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 386 p. $170.00Because of growing computing capabilities, ever-developing statisticaltechniques, and the general worldwide growth in data, national eco-nomic forecasts can now be prepared more accurately and frequently.Klein (economics, U. of Pennsylvania) presents chapters focusing on indi-vidual countries, first giving an overview of their general economic back-ground and then outlining specific statistical techniques for makingmostly high-frequency forecasts of macroeconomic developments. Laterchapters also explore daily or better estimation of the U.S. Treasury yieldcurve, mathematical models for assessing growth at mixed frequencies,and using sentiment surveys to predict GDP growth and stock returns.

HC59 2009-020968 978-0-87586-723-6DDeevveellooppiinngg tthhee gglloobbaall SSoouutthh;; aa UUnniitteedd NNaattiioonnsspprreessccrriippttiioonn ffoorr tthhee tthhiirrdd mmiilllleennnniiuumm..Milkias, Paulos.Algora Publishing, ©2010 322 p. $23.95 (pa)Milkias (humanities and political science, Concordia U., Montreal) hastwo goals with this treatise. The first is to counter the many inadequateor contradictory statements about diplomacy, international organizations,and development problems of the Third World that policy makers andjournalists take for fact. The second is to introduce students takingcourses in such areas as international organizations and development tobe fully informed about the United Nations and what is being done dailyabout the economic gap between the North and the South.

HC59 978-0-8213-8226-4GGlloobbaall eeccoonnoommiicc pprroossppeeccttss;; ccrriissiiss,, ffiinnaannccee,, aanndd ggrroowwtthh..Title main entry.The World Bank, ©2010 164 p. $38.00 (pa)The 2010 volume of this yearly serial explores both the current prospectsfor developing countries and the expected medium-term impact on theireconomies of the recent financial crisis. While inherently false, the liq-uidity boom and growth in availability of new financial instrumentsexperienced earlier in the decade caused net capital inflows to quintuplein developing economies, along with a decline in domestic interest rates.While economic growth is expected to recover, finance is likely to bescarcer with increasing risk aversion as well as a tightening of financialregulations in high-income nations. This will invariably result in aslowing down of economic growth rates. Includes a number of figuresand tables, along with an appendix summarizing economic prospects forsix regions. There is no index.

HC59 2009-930889 978-1-84844-656-4SSeeccttoorraall ssyysstteemmss ooff iinnnnoovvaattiioonn aanndd pprroodduuccttiioonn iinnddeevveellooppiinngg ccoouunnttrriieess;; aaccttoorrss,, ssttrruuccttuurree aanndd eevvoolluuttiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Franco Malerba and Sunil Mani.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 394 p. $170.00A sectoral systems approach to the economics of innovation, as editorsMalerba (industrial economics, Bocconi U., Italy) and Mani (Centre forDevelopment Studies, India) explain in their introduction to this col-lection of 11 papers, examines innovation as the result of specific vari-ables of the firm, such as learning and capabilities, productioninvestments, strategies, and organizational structure and the type ofknowledge and technologies that characterize a sector; the links andinterdependencies with other related sectors; the role of actors such ascompetitors, financial organization, and the government; the character-istics of demand; and the type of institutions. It also takes a process viewthat pays attention to exchange, competition, and cooperation in a coevo-lutionary setting. The presented papers utilize this approach to explore avariety of sectoral systems across a range of countries. The main actorsand structures of sectoral systems of Indian pharmaceuticals, Brazilianinformation and communication technologies, Brazilian pulp and paperindustries, Uruguayan software producers, and Brazilian aeronautics areanalyzed in the first half of the book and, in the second, the dynamicsand evolution of motorcycle production in Thailand and Vietnam,salmon farming in Chile, machine tools in Korea, information and com-munication technology in Taiwan, and biofuels in Tanzania areexamined.

HC59 2009-022230 978-1-4000-6395-6SSoonniicc bboooomm;; gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn aatt mmaacchh ssppeeeedd..Easterbrook, Gregg.Random House, ©2009 243 p. $26.00Easterbrook, an author and contributing editor to The Atlantic Monthlyand The New Republic, argues that the world will become even moreglobalized, that the next wave of global change will be economically pros-perous, but that problems like job instability, economic insecurity, and adisruption of home and work life are likely to worsen. Each chapterfocuses one city from around the world that represents a specific globaleconomic trend, such as Erie, Pennsylvania, where a factory uses newmethods to build high-efficiency, low-polluting railroad locomotives;Yakutsk, Russia, the coldest major city in the world, which is benefitingfrom climate change; Shenzhen, China, which has become the fourthlargest port in the world; and Leipzig, Germany, which houses theworld’s largest solar power facility.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–97–

HC79 2009-024577 978-1-4200-8919-6AAnnaallyyssiiss ooff iinndduussttrriiaall cclluusstteerrss iinn CChhiinnaa..Yingming, Zhu.CRC Press, ©2010 234 p. $129.95After reviewing basic characteristics of industrial clusters, Zhu goes onto primarily consider the role of functional and spatial links in type iden-tification. He then identifies eleven industrial clusters in China and con-ducts structure and function analysis, making use of a suite of economicindexes. Full of tables, structure diagrams, and matrices, the book ana-lyzes scale distributions, functional types, and technological economicstructure relationships. Written for the professional it contains fourappendices, three of them offering extensive input and output tablesusing data from 1997.

HC79 2009-035114 978-1-933782-15-7BBeerrkksshhiirree eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ssuussttaaiinnaabbiilliittyy;; tthhee ssppiirriitt ooffssuussttaaiinnaabbiilliittyy;; vv..11..Title main entry. Ed. by Willis Jenkins.Berkshire Publishing Group, ©2010 469 p. $135.00This is the first volume of an interdisciplinary reference—intended forstudents and the general public—devoted to environmental challenges. Inher introduction publisher Karen Christensen discusses the planning andthinking behind the project, which will comprise ten volumes when com-pleted in 2011. She explains some of the decisions regarding how to focusand organize the material, and formulation of the goals of presentinggeneral knowledge, providing specific information not readily accessibleoutside the academic community, and connecting information withopportunities for individual involvement. It's a tall order, but the fruitsof this endeavor will no doubt be widely useful. This first volume on thespirit of sustainability was prepared in collaboration with the Forum onReligion and Ecology (FORE), Yale Divinity School (with which editorJenkins is affiliated). The 147 articles address a selection of carefullychosen topics such as African diasporan religions, bioethics, Christianity(of various types), fundamentalism, paganism, and sin and evil, to namejust a few. The signed entries are typically one or two pages in length,each beginning with an abstract and ending with a further reading list.Upcoming volumes will be devoted to business, law and politics, naturalresources, ecosystems management, measurements and indicators, Chinaand India, the Americas and Oceania, Afro-Eurasia, and the future ofsustainability.

HC79 2009-042994 978-1-60566-966-3BBrreeaakktthhrroouugghh ddiissccoovveerriieess iinn iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn tteecchhnnoollooggyyrreesseeaarrcchh;; aaddvvaanncciinngg ttrreennddss..Title main entry. Ed. by Mehdi Khosrow-Pour.Information Science Reference, ©2010 272 p. $180.00This text was designed to inform researchers and IT practitioners of newand emerging research trends in information science and technology inorder to encourage further study and innovation. The majority of thearticles within discuss outsourcing; it’s risks and benefits, and it’scurrent and future roles in IT. Other selections cover a broad assortmentof topics and include ethical concerns in research, biometrics, healthcareIT, fuzzy logic, and IT’s role in disaster prediction and prevention.Khosrow-Pour (president and publisher, IGI Global) has authored oredited over 20 books in IT management. Contributing authors come froman array of different educational backgrounds and professions.

HC79 2009-044651 978-0-8213-8169-4CCoonnvveerrggeennccee iinn iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn aanndd ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonntteecchhnnoollooggyy;; ssttrraatteeggiicc aanndd rreegguullaattoorryy ccoonnssiiddeerraattiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Rajendra Singh and Siddhartha Raja.The World Bank, ©2010 125 p. $15.00 (pa)Regulatory specialist Singh and policy analyst Raja, both in the PolicyDivision of the World Bank’s Global Information and CommunicationTechnologies, compile two studies that were published in 2008 and 2009on the eroding boundaries between the services, networks, and businesspractices of the converging fields. Their new introduction examines theacceleration of the convergence, especially as broadband networks arereaching into previously unserved areas.

HC79 2009-936230 978-1-84844-552-9DDooeess ddeecceennttrraalliizzaattiioonn eennhhaannccee sseerrvviiccee ddeelliivveerryy aannddppoovveerrttyy rreedduuccttiioonn??Title main entry. Ed. by Ehtisham Ahmad and Giorgio Brosio. (Studiesin fiscal federalism and state-local finance)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 401 p. $165.00Building on the Handbook of Fiscal Federalism (Edward Elgar, 2006), thiswork addresses the question of the impact of decentralization on servicedelivery and poverty reduction. Ahmad (International Monetary Fund,US) and Brosio (public economics, U. of Turin, Italy) first present bothpolicy-oriented papers that extend the literature on fiscal federalism tothe evaluation of the effectives of decentralized service delivery. Theythen include empirical evaluations of the decentralization process aroundthe world. The empirical papers examine the impact of decentralizationin Bolivia, Uganda, Poland, and Spain and include a focus on the politicaleconomy process and the outcomes of decentralization. A final set ofpapers discuss pro-poor institutional design in decentralization andpublic service provision, fiscal policy instruments and the politicaleconomy of designing programs for the poor, and cross-country experi-ences with subnational insolvency and governance.

HC79 2009-930862 978-1-84720-117-1TThhee ggoovveerrnnaannccee ooff nneettwwoorrkk iinndduussttrriieess;; iinnssttiittuuttiioonnss,,tteecchhnnoollooggyy aanndd ppoolliiccyy iinn rreerreegguullaatteedd iinnffrraassttrruuccttuurreess..Title main entry. Ed. by Rolf W. Künneke et al.. (Studies in evolutionarypolitical economy)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 212 p. $110.00As traditional infrastructure sectors are increasingly privatized, thisvolume seeks to highlight the major challenges for readjustment.Kunnecke, Groenewegen and Auger (all from the Economics ofInfrastructures department at Delft U. of Technology), explore how insti-tutional restructuring can take place in the context of constant techno-logical innovation and changing political preferences. The first part ofthe book covers possible institutional arrangements in water supply, roadmanagement, and the development of retail markets in the electricitysector. The second part primarily focuses on the effect of changing tech-nology in the computer network and electricity industries. The third partconsists of one paper empirically examining business strategies from theviewpoint of public values versus private interests and a closing piecesubmitted by an entrepreneur.

HC79 2009-038745 978-0-8133-4411-9GGrreeeenn ppllaanneett bblluueess;; ffoouurr ddeeccaaddeess ooff gglloobbaall eennvviirroonnmmeennttaallppoolliittiiccss,, 44tthh eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Ken Conca and Geoffrey D. Dabelko.Westview Press, ©2010 369 p. $43.00 (pa)While environmentalism is often viewed as an elite pursuit, thisanthology shows that this is not the case. Readings examine environ-mental politics from the perspectives of both the powerful and the pow-erless, and showing how debates on environmental issues not only dealwith scientific findings, but also with issues of class, wealth, and eco-nomic power. For this new edition, editors Conca (Government andPolitics, University of Maryland) and Dabelko (Environmental Changeand Security, Woodrow Wilson International Center for Scholars) com-pletely revised and updated the book, and added fourteen new readingson topics such as globalization and environmental change, transnationalactivist networks, and linkages between climate change and humanrights.

HC79 2009-026416 978-1-59451-811-9GGrreeeedd ttoo ggrreeeenn;; ssoollvviinngg cclliimmaattee cchhaannggee aanndd rreemmaakkiinngg tthheeeeccoonnoommyy..Derber, Charles.Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 268 p. $89.00The threat of global climate change is “capitalism’s time bomb, areflection of inner contradictions in the workings of our markets, pol-itics, and consumerist culture,” warns Derber (sociology, Boston College)as he explores the needed solutions that must be implemented in theUnited States and around the world in short order. He begins with a dis-cussion of the climate change science and climate change denial beforeturning to an examination of the systemic changes that must be effectedin the United States and globally in order to head off the dangers ofclimate change. While he holds out hope that President Obama and otherworld leaders will begin to act to change some of the worst aspects of theglobalizing US sociopolitical model of capitalism, he also urges grassroots activism in pursuit of radical change and considers the steps nec-essary to make such activism effective.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –98–

HC79 978-87-630-0222-6IInnddiiaa——CCrroossss--ccuullttuurraall bbuussiinneessss bbeehhaavviioorr;; ffoorr bbuussiinneessssppeeooppllee,, eexxppaattrriiaatteess aanndd sscchhoollaarrss..Gesteland, Richard R. and Mary C. Gesteland.Copenhagen Business School Pr., ©2010 192 p. $47.00 (pa)In order to provide advice to Western companies and organizations con-cerned with interacting with Indians in business settings in India andmanaging life and work as an expatriate family in India, the CopenhagenBusiness School Press turned to Richard Gesteland, who worked in Indiaon a number of assignment for Sears, Roebuck and Co., beginning in1969, and his wife Mary, who was responsible for managing the home.They have therefore separately authored the two sections of this book.Richard’s section addresses business culture, time management, businessbehavior, communication styles, and intercultural leadership challenges,while Mary’s section discusses preparations, moving into the new home,settling the children, culture shock, parties and etiquette, caste, body lan-guage and communication, beggars and traveling, and the diversity ofIndia. An addendum provides background information on population,languages, weather, history, cultural influences, government andeconomy, religions, and holidays and festivals.

HC79 2009-029558 978-1-4129-7877-4IIssssuueess ffoorr ddeebbaattee iinn eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;;sseelleeccttiioonnss ffrroomm CCQQ rreesseeaarrcchheerr..Title main entry.Sage Publications, ©2010 426 p. $34.95 (pa)Aimed at students and other researchers, this reader compiles 17 reportsfrom the weekly policy brief CQ Researcher on issues in environmentalmanagement. Each report includes an overview of the issue, currentdebates on the topic (including both sides of the argument), historicalbackground, contemporary policy issues, government activities, and pos-sible regulations, rulings, and initiatives. Issues address business policiesrelating to the environment, climate change, carbon emissions trading, oilin the Arctic region, the future of recycling, buying green, regulatingtoxic chemicals, coal as a clean energy source, ecotourism, rebuildingNew Orleans, protecting wetlands, the water crisis, ocean biodiversity,biofuels, and fish farming. There is no index.

HC79 2009-930874 978-1-84844-115-6KKnnoowwlleeddggee iinn tthhee ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ooff eeccoonnoommiieess;; iinnssttiittuuttiioonnaallcchhooiicceess uunnddeerr gglloobbaalliissaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Silvia Sacchetti and Roger Sugden. (New per-spectives on the modern corporation)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 296 p. $140.00Sacchetti (economic development policy, U. of Birmingham) and Sugden(management, U. of Stirling) present a volume which focuses on the roleof knowledge and creativity in economic development. The first part ofthe book deals with the underlying theme of uneven development andhow it is perpetuated by transnational corporations and the growingworldwide harmonization of intellectual property rights. There is a focusthroughout on economic geography with one chapter specifically treatingJacobian clusters. Two later chapters cover the commercialization ofhigher education and the growth there of public management, whileothers discuss social capital and the specific example of Italian socialcooperatives. The final section is devoted to creativity and its possible rolein localized economic development.

HC79 2009933366 978-1-84720-668-8PPoosstt KKeeyynneessiiaann aanndd eeccoollooggiiccaall eeccoonnoommiiccss;; ccoonnffrroonnttiinnggeennvviirroonnmmeennttaall iissssuueess..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard P.F. Holt et al.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 325 p. $135.00Post-Keynesian and ecological economics have their differences but theyshare much common ground in their criticisms of neoclassical eco-nomics, particularly in regards to environmental problems. In this col-lection, Holt (economics, Southern Oregon U., US), Pressman (economicsand finance, Monmouth U., US), and Spash (economics, CommonwealthScientific and Industrial Research Organisation, Australia) present 14papers exploring this common ground and discussing what each per-spective can give to the other. Topics addressed include recent develop-ments in post-Keynesian methodology related to realism and ontology,open systems, and the implications of ontology for uncertainty and theirvalue to ecological economics; how both schools deal with questions ofuncertainty and historical time; the insights of ecological economistKenneth Boulding and their compatibility with post-Keynesian eco-nomics; the post-Keynesian theory of consumer choice; the incorporationof the biophysical nature of human activity within the post-Keynesianmodel of production; the role of government deficit spending in guaran-teeing demand for environmentally friendly consumer goods; and eco-logical and post-Keynesian understandings of the roles of ecologicalservices, social capital, and human capital in sustainable development.

HC79 2009-030998 978-1-4398-2062-9SSuussttaaiinnaabbllee ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; pprriinncciipplleess,, ffrraammeewwoorrkkss,, aannddccaassee ssttuuddiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Okechukwu Ukaga et al. (Social environmentalsustainability)CRC Press, ©2010 216 p. $79.95International contributors in organizations and academia describe sys-tematic approaches to sustainable development and present caseexamples to illustrate the various models and frameworks discussed.Some areas considered include applying lean thinking approaches to sus-tainable development, collaboration to sustain the local economy andenvironment, a holistic management framework, and participatory lead-ership as a tool for sustainable development. Ukaga is executive directorof the Northeast Minnesota Sustainable Development Partnership at theUniversity of Minnesota.

HC85 2009-036497 978-1-4051-9656-7TThhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff ppoosssseessssiioonn;; pprrooppeerrttyy,, aauutthhoorriittyy aanndd aacccceessssttoo nnaattuurraall rreessoouurrcceess..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas Sikor and Christian Lund.(Development and change book series)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2009 213 p. $39.95 (pa)Nine essays, presented by Sikor (development studies, U. of East Anglia,UK) and Lund (international development studies, Roskilde U.,Denmark), explore the complex relationships between property, politicalauthority, and access to resources, such as the way that property is onlyproperty if socially legitimate institutions sanction it and the way thatinstitutions are effectively legitimized is if their interpretation of socialnorms such as property rights are heeded, as well as the complexitiesthat arise from the distinction between authority and power in thecontrol over access to resources. Specific topics include negotiations overland rights and social belonging and the constitution of authority in WestAfrica, property rights and the construction of ethnic identity inIndonesia, the construction of authority in land administration in aPeruvian comunidad campesina, struggles over authority in relation tocompeting claims on forests in rural Senegal, social power and itsimpacts on a land registration and titling program in rural Nicaragua,negotiations over access and property in the large-scale land reform pro-grams of post-socialist Albania and Romania, and contestations overauthority between two kinds of irrigation institutions in Indonesia.

HC85 2009-041260 978-981-283-394-5RReessoouurrccee aanndd eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall eeccoonnoommiiccss;; mmooddeerrnn iissssuueessaanndd aapppplliiccaattiioonnss..Tisdell, Clement A. (World Scientific series on energy and resource eco-nomics; v.7)World Scientific, ©2010 491 p. $85.00Tisdell (U. of Queensland, Australia) introduces the discipline by drawingon a variety of economic theories and perceptions of the nature of eco-nomic activity and its consequences, and emphasizing the dynamics ofeconomic thought. His topics include different types of approaches toenvironmental and resource economics, regulating natural resource useand pollution emissions, the economic valuation of environmentalspillovers and natural resources, sustainability as an environmental andeconomic issue, water management, biodiversity conservation, and healthand environmental economics. Each chapter ends with questions forreview and discussion.

HC94 978-1-58906-860-5RReeggiioonnaall eeccoonnoommiicc oouuttllooookk;; WWeesstteerrnn HHeemmiisspphheerree,, ccrriissiissaavveerrtteedd——wwhhaatt’’ss nneexxtt.. OOccttoobbeerr 22000099..Title main entry. Ed. by International Monetary Fund. (World economicand financial surveys)Intl. Monetary Fund, ©2009 69 p. $35.00 (pa)The October 2009 issue of the survey reports that the global economy isemerging from recession, that the impact on Latin America and theCaribbean was substantial but the worst is over now though the outlookvaries within the region, that policies will have to strike balances andadjust to an environment of lower growth, and that the region’sresilience must be built up to prepare for future shocks. Specific topicsinclude resilience amid turmoil in Canada, external shocks fading at dif-ferent speeds, stronger policy frameworks, and prudent fiscal policiesand some profligacy. There is no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–99–

HC108 2009-039614 978-0-7864-4469-4DDiiggiittaall DD..CC..;; hhooww iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn tteecchhnnoollooggyy iiss ttrraannssffoorrmmiinnggtthhee hhuubb ooff AAmmeerriiccaann ppoolliittiiccss..Dizard, Wilson P.McFarland & Co., ©2010 212 p. $45.00 (pa)As America has grown to become the leader in directing the shape andscope of the digital information era, Washington, D.C. has become itspolitical nerve center. Of course the majority of federal agencies, lead-ership, and offices are located there— but the nation’s capital also hasattracted thousands of businesses intent on providing the governmentand others with digital services and products. And scores of high-techprofessionals are migrating to the capital for the same reason. This bookprovides an overview of the capital’s clearly monumental transformationinto a true e-government, how those changes are occurring, and whatthey mean for the future. Author Dizard, a retired Georgetown Universityprofessor and senior fellow for the Center for Strategic and InternationalStudies, died in mid-2009 shortly after his manuscript was completed.

HC110 2009-046138 978-1-59884-187-9TThhee mmiilliittaarryy--iinndduussttrriiaall ccoommpplleexx aanndd AAmmeerriiccaann ssoocciieettyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Sterling Michael Pavelec.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 425 p. $85.00From US Secretary of State Dean Acheson, a formative figure of the earlyCold War, to World War II, some 100 alphabetical A-to-W entries dis-cussing the nature of the American military-industrial complex and itsimpact on American society are presented by Pavelec (airpower history,School of Advanced Air and Space Studies, Maxwell Air Force Base). Theentries discuss significant public and private organizations, individuals,events, and technologies, as well as such topics as propaganda, thinktanks, defense budgeting, the relationship between military industriesand the economy, and the role of the military-industrial complex in theVietnam War. Not including individuals, examples of specific topicsinclude Bell Aircraft, the bomber gap, Eisenhower’s farewell address (inwhich he warned of the dangers of the military-industrial complex), theGreat Society, Honeywell, the Iran-Contra Affair, Israel, Keynesian eco-nomics, the Manhattan Project, the North Atlantic Treaty Organization,and mutual assured destruction. Also included are a chronology and abibliography. Each entry includes a brief guide to further readings.

HC240 2009-014490 978-0-8047-6263-2TThhee lliibbrraarryy aanndd tthhee wwoorrkksshhoopp;; ssoocciiaall ddeemmooccrraaccyy aannddccaappiittaalliissmm iinn tthhee kknnoowwlleeddggee aaggee..Andersson, Jenny.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 200 p. $39.95While many critics have characterized “Third Way” politics (such as thatexemplified by former British Prime Minister Tony Blair and former USPresident Bill Clinton) as an essentially neoliberal project sharing muchwith Thatcherism, Andersson (Centre d’Études et des RechechesInternationales, Institut de Sciences Politiques, France) instead suggeststhat the Third Way draws on fundamental, if problematic, continuities inthe social democratic project. She defends this thesis through an explo-ration of the Third Way’s relationship to the knowledge economy,arguing that the Third Way is an ideological project seeking to establishcoherent articulations of the knowledge economy in an analogousmanner to the ways in which the social democrats of the 1950s and 1960ssought ideological coherence for the industrial economy and relatedsocial and cultural changes. She focuses on the different interpretationsof a knowledge age in the discourse of British New Labour and theSwedish Social Democratic Party.

HC256 2009-936225 978-1-84844-093-7HHaappppiinneessss,, eeccoonnoommiiccss aanndd ppoolliittiiccss;; ttoowwaarrddss aa mmuullttii--ddiisscciipplliinnaarryy aapppprrooaacchh..Title main entry. Ed. by Amitava Krishna Dutt and Benjamin Radcliff.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 362 p. $160.00The editors (both of the U. of Notre Dame) present a multi-disciplinarycollection of 16 papers in which scholars from the fields of history, psy-chology, sociology, economics, and political science address the “scienceof happiness,” which is concerned with understanding happinessthrough quantifiable and measurable concepts and the empirical andtheoretical tools of the social and biological sciences. Because of theirown disciplinary predilections, the editors have allowed the fields ofpolitical science and economics to be the dominant disciplines repre-sented by the papers, which address such topics as contemporary the-ories and methodological directions in the measurement of happiness,happiness and the relative consumption hypothesis, inequality and hap-piness surveys from Latin America, the causal link between happinessand democratic welfare regimes, labor organization and the quality oflife in the American states, and the possibilities of pursuing policies formaximizing happiness.

HC412 978-0-8213-8267-7TTrraannssffoorrmmiinngg tthhee rreebboouunndd iinnttoo rreeccoovveerryy;; EEaasstt AAssiiaa aannddPPaacciiffiicc uuppddaattee NNoovveemmbbeerr 22000099..Title main entry.The World Bank, ©2010 84 p. $35.00 (pa)This report, published twice a year by the World Bank (this edition inNovember 2009), reviews the developing economies in the East Asia andPacific region, addressing the region’s role as the driving force behindthe global rebound since the second quarter of 2009. It explains the roleof industrial production in the decline and rebound, the rebound ofexports and recovery of capital inflows, how small and medium com-panies are still in crisis, its effects on workers across sectors and regions,the role of China, the slowing of the pace of poverty reduction, andwhether growth can be sustained. Economic policies supporting recoveryare outlined, and the economic recovery of Cambodia, China, Fiji, LaoPDR, Indonesia, Malaysia, Mongolia, Papua New Guinea, the Philippines,the Solomon Islands, Thailand, Timor Leste, and Vietnam is detailed.There is no index.

HC427 2009-023554 978-0-06-185944-1CChhiinnaa’’ss mmeeggaattrreennddss;; tthhee eeiigghhtt ppiillllaarrss ooff aa nneeww ssoocciieettyy..Naisbitt, John and Doris Naisbitt.HarperCollins, ©2010 257 p. $27.99According to the authors, “China is already an equal competitor in theglobal marketplace and is on the way to creating a political counter-model to Western modern democracy, fitting to Chinese history andsociety.” John Naisbitt (Nankai University; Tianjin University) and DorisNaisbitt (director, Naisbitt China Institute; Yunnan University) give thename ‘vertical democracy’ to the new social and economic model beingcreated in China. They monitored local newspapers all across China todiscover the forces underlying China’s social, political, and economictransformation. Their interviews with Chinese journalists, entrepreneurs,academics, politicians, artists, and dissidents help identify eight prin-ciples driving China’s new society over the past 30 years.

HC428 2009-036023 978-0-8213-8048-2TTwwoo ddrraaggoonn hheeaaddss;; ccoonnttrraassttiinngg ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ppaatthhss ffoorrBBeeiijjiinngg aanndd SShhaanngghhaaii..Yusuf, Shahid and Kaoru Nabeshima.The World Bank, ©2010 222 p. $19.95 (pa)This study surveys economic development in Beijing and Shanghai, andrecommends strategies, based on the experiences of other global megac-ities, for each city to sustain economic growth in the medium term. Thestudy begins by reviewing the role of urban regions in China’s economicgrowth, then makes a case for continued investment in the manufac-turing industry. It then examines the economic patterns of four globalcities (Chicago, London, New York, and Tokyo) to find trends to informdevelopment in Beijing and Shanghai. For Shanghai, the book argues fora strategy that puts more stress on manufacturing industries producingcomplex capital goods and high-tech components. For Beijing, the bookproposes a strategy that focuses on the high-tech and creative industries,supporting business services, and activities that complement the func-tioning of government agencies. The study will be of interest to policymakers, urban planners, business people, and researchers. Yusuf andNabeshima are affiliated with the World Bank Institute.

HC430 978-81-7708-224-1AAssiiaann eeccoonnoommiicc aanndd ffiinnaanncciiaall iinntteeggrraattiioonn iinn gglloobbaallffrraammeewwoorrkk..Chauhan, Pradeep S.New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2009 357 p. $58.50Chauhan (U. of Oxford, UK) examines the status of integration in mon-etary, financial, trade, and production networks in Asia, offeringextensive comparative examination of European economic and monetaryintegration, as well as separate chapters on the North American FreeTrade Agreement (NAFTA), the Southern Common Market (MERCOSUR),and economic and monetary integration in Africa. He also includes achapter discussing the role of China and India in the integration process.Distributed in North America by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –100–

HC435 978-81-7708-225-8GGlloobbaall eeccoonnoommiicc ccrriissiiss aanndd tthhee IInnddiiaann eeccoonnoommyy..Sury, M.M.New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2009 181 p. $29.75Written by Sury (economics, U. of Delhi) this volume explores the causes,impact and worldwide response to the current economic crisis. Theprimary focus is on India, covering the impact, the policy response ofvarious governmental agencies, and the economic outlook. It begins,however, by describing the origin of the crisis in defaults on sub-primemortgage loans in the U.S. and its spread into international money,credit, equity and foreign exchange markets. Readable by a broaderaudience than just professional economists, it also contains extensiveexplanatory notes which provide more information. Includes two appen-dices summarizing the current Central Budget of India and describingeconomic reforms in India since 1991. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HC435 2009-045915 978-1-85788-524-8IInnddiiaa,, IInncc..;; hhooww IInnddiiaa’’ss ttoopp tteenn eennttrreepprreenneeuurrss aarreewwiinnnniinngg gglloobbaallllyy..Pota, Vikas.Nicholas Brealey Publishing, ©2010 232 p. $32.95Pota, founder of the first UK-India public affairs company, interviewsand profiles chairmen and CEOs of ten Indian companies representingall areas of the country and many sectors, including information tech-nology and biotechnology. He looks into common factors behind some ofthe successes of Indian business leaders to find uniquely Indian aspectsto globalization, and also asks whether these business leaders fulfill theirsocial responsibility to ensure that India’s growth does not continue toleave its masses behind. Those profiled reflect on their early days, whatit takes to succeed, and the role of family, faith, education, and politicsin their success. Each profile includes a b&w photo and a list of keyfacts. A conclusion summarizes some trends: competition with China, thefuture of the family-owned business in India, and the response to thecurrent global economic crisis. The author writes a blog on globalizationand India.

HC435 978-81-7708-219-7MMiiccrroo,, ssmmaallll aanndd mmeeddiiuumm eenntteerrpprriisseess ((MMSSMMEEss)) iinn tthheeIInnddiiaann eeccoonnoommyy;; bbuussiinneessss ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ssttrraatteeggiieess..Pooja.New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2009 197 p. $34.75Pooja (commerce, U. of Jammu, India) addresses issues related to thedevelopment of small enterprises in India, focusing on advantages, per-formance, and problems and policies for enhancing their competi-tiveness. He places small enterprises within the larger context of the Indiaeconomy; reviews the literature on small enterprises; describes the mainsmall enterprise sectors; discusses problems for small enterprises such asinadequate finance and credit, technological obsolescence, lack of infra-structural facilities, and exploitation of labor; and addresses policymeasures, particularly as relevant to meet the credit needs of the smallsector. Distributed in North America by ISBS.

HC444 978-87-630-0228-8TThhee nneeww AAssiiaann ddrraaggoonn;; iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaalliizzaattiioonn ooff ffiirrmmss iinnVViieettnnaamm..Title main entry. Ed. by Henrik Schaumburg-Müller and Pham HongChuong.Copenhagen Business School Pr., ©2009 255 p. $61.00 (pa)This collection of ten papers, edited by Schaumburg-Müller (business anddevelopment studies, Copenhagen Business School, Denmark) andChuong (scientific research management, National Economics U.,Vietnam), is the result of a collaborative research effort by researchersfrom Vietnamese and Danish universities. They look at strategic businessissues and challenges in Vietnam through the lens of contemporary inter-national business theories. In particular, they explore the drivers of theprocesses by which Vietnamese firms are internationalizing, examinecase studies of how Vietnamese firms have developed their export inter-nationalization strategies, discuss recent shifts that have taken place inthe entry mode and conversion of foreign direct investment projects,describes management issues related to the cultural and human resourcemanagement traditions of Vietnamese and foreign managers when oper-ating in Vietnam, and study how Vietnamese firms are integrating intoglobal value chains. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HC800 2009-025406 978-0-8213-8041-3AAffrriiccaa’’ss iinnffrraassttrruuccttuurree;; aa ttiimmee ffoorr ttrraannssffoorrmmaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Vivien Foster and Cecilia Briceño-Germendia.The World Bank, ©2010 355 p. $39.95 (pa)Multinational corporations have long cast hungry eyes on the publicinfrastructure of poor countries, and the Bank’s Africa InfrastructureCountry Diagnostic is a project to provide them with detailed informationas a baseline against future developments. As part of the effort, thisstudy proclaims that the time is right for investing much more moneythan impoverished governments and society’s can come up with. Thetopics include meeting the needs, closing the funding gap, facilitatingurbanization, and regional integration. Following the general topics arearguments for particular sectors, among them a boost for growth ofinformation and communication technologies, landlords needed for portsand shipping, tapping the potential of irrigation, and moving up the san-itation ladder.

HC800 2009-024614 978-1-60741-737-8PPoovveerrttyy iinn AAffrriiccaa..Beasley, Thomas W. (African political, economic, and security issuesseries)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 281 p. $98.00Most in Africa, contributors from such fields as health care, devel-opment, economics, and political science, describe programs andapproaches for relieving poverty on the continent. Among their topics arewomen’s perspectives on sanitary conditions in Mozambique, whetherChinese policies towards Africa alleviate or promote poverty, oystermushroom cultivation for resource-poor farmers in southern Africa, theevolution and dynamics of urban poverty in Zambia, gender inequalityand poverty in Kenya, and the globalization-AIDS-poverty syndrome inAfrica.

PPRROODDUUCCTTIIOONN,, IINNDDUUSSTTRRYY,, CCOOMMMMEERRCCEE

HD30 2009-034619 978-981-4280-08-2BBrreeaakktthhrroouugghh ssttrraatteeggiicc IITT aanndd pprroocceessss ppllaannnniinngg..Lientz, Bennet P.World Scientific, ©2010 519 p. $68.00Lientz (management, UCLA) combines the principles of business processand change management, process improvement, project management,and IT architecture and systems with strategic information technologyplanning for business planning and control staff, business and IT man-agers and senior staff, and consultants involved in IT, process man-agement, planning, and change management, as well as upper divisionand graduate students. He aims to help them understand the business,process, and systems environment; develop a strategic IT and processplan that includes the direction of key processes; get involvement,support, and endorsement from management and employees; create anorganized approach for allocating resources between the planning actionitems, projects, maintenance and enhancement, and support; implementthese items and measure results; and employ an affordable method forupdating the plan. The process detailed includes collecting information,aligning processes and IT to the business, developing each part of thestrategic plan, implementation, and measurement. An example of anIrish farming organization concludes the book.

HD30 2009-038736 978-0-465-01832-1CChhiieeff ccuullttuurree ooffffiicceerr;; hhooww ttoo ccrreeaattee aa lliivviinngg,, bbrreeaatthhiinnggccoorrppoorraattiioonn..McCracken, Grant.Basic Books, ©2009 262 p. $26.95McCracken (MIT C3 research affiliate, educator, author, and consultant)underscores the importance for companies with something to sell ofbeing able to read their audience’s culture and respond to it. The bookoffers guidance, with plenty of examples of unbelievable success anddismal failure, for companies that want their messages to click with theiraudiences and for those people who want to turn their keen under-standing of culture into a career. It’s a practical and engaging book.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–101–

HD30 2009-039210 978-0-470-74801-5CClliimmbb tthhee ggrreeeenn llaaddddeerr;; mmaakkee yyoouurr ccoommppaannyy aanndd ccaarreeeerrmmoorree ssuussttaaiinnaabbllee..Fetzer, Amy V. and Shari Aaron.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 268 p. $27.95Based on their survey and interviews with international sustainabilityleaders, a British journalist specializing in such issues and an Americanconsultant in sustainability and market research share success stories ofthe strategies people have used to made their companies and careersmore sustainable, ethical, and profitable. The book includes an anno-tated resources list, methodological notes, and the all-too-rare credit to theindexer.

HD30 2009-023944 978-1-4051-8098-6CCoonnssttrruuccttiioonn ssttaakkeehhoollddeerr mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Ezekiel Chinyio and Paul Olomolaiye.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 392 p. $118.99Based on a variety of international case studies, this book describes bestpractices in construction stakeholder management. It also underscoresthe importance of cooperation in an era when partnering among con-tractors has become mainstream in the built environment professions.Editors Chinyio (engineering and the built environment, U. ofWolverhampton, UK), Olomolaiye (construction engineering and man-agement, U. of the West of England), and 42 co-contributors addressissues such as: theoretical perspectives and implications, risk and con-struction stakeholder management, negotiations, communication, cultureand leadership, procurement impact, environmental stakeholder man-agement, using change management, and managing stakeholder con-flicts. The book is comprehensive and explanations are accessible andthorough.

HD30 2009-933403 978-1-84720-972-6CCrreeaattiinngg eeccoollooggiiccaall vvaalluuee;; aann eevvoolluuttiioonnaarryy aapppprrooaacchh ttoobbuussiinneessss ssttrraatteeggiieess aanndd tthhee nnaattuurraall eennvviirroonnmmeenntt..Boons, Frank.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 210 p. $105.00Boons (Erasmus U., the Netherlands) develops a theoretical frameworkwithin which businesses can determine the impact of their activities onthe natural environment, and what measures to take to deal with thisimpact. He covers how firms create ecological value, definitions of eco-logical value, technological change and strategic perspectives, elements ofstrategic perspectives and the internal dynamics of firms, shaping per-spectives through resource networks, the coffee and automobile pro-duction and consumption systems, an evolutionary approach to thestrategic perspective of firms, and the future of creating ecological value.

HD30 2009-019485 978-0-7656-2051-4CCrriissiiss ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn;; tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Zaremba, Alan Jay.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 245 p. $69.95Even well-managed organizations can suffer crises, says Zaremba (com-munication studies, Northeastern U.). Presenting foundational principlesthat are similar to those expounded by Robert Fulghum in Everything INeeded to Know I Learned in Kindergarten and research studies, heemphasizes the need for team planning for crises, transparent and honestcommunication, the golden rule, the role of an organization’s culture indetermining success, training for crisis communication, and acting ethi-cally as pragmatic as well as moral. The text includes case examples ofrecent crises in the news (e.g., political scandals, natural disasters, foodrecalls); practitioner perspectives; and exercises and discussion questions.

HD30 2009-026784 978-1-4200-8281-4TThhee ddeecciissiioonn mmooddeell;; aa bbuussiinneessss llooggiicc ffrraammeewwoorrkk lliinnkkiinnggbbuussiinneessss aanndd tteecchhnnoollooggyy..Von Halle, Barbara and Larry Goldberg.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 521 p. $59.95Von Halle, an author, trainer, and speaker who has worked in projectmanagement, data architecture, and business rules, and Goldberg, anentrepreneur who has worked in commercial enterprise applications andbusiness rules, detail an approach for business users and informationtechnology professionals, as well as academics in software engineeringand enterprise architecture, to creating a set of business rules that areadaptable as laws, regulations, marketplaces, and technologies change.They outline aspects of their Decision Model and its business, technical,and methodology implications and value to business process man-agement, service-oriented architecture, and business system requirementsgathering; its principles, application, and similarities and differences tothe Relational Model; and special topics like enterprise architecture, spec-ifications and standards, enterprise decision management, and Web 2.0and advances in collaboration. Additional authors working in businessand information technology contributed to the special topics chapters.

HD30 2009-035456 978-0-7494-5582-8HHooww ttoo wwrriittee aa bbuussiinneessss ppllaann,, 33dd eedd..Finch, Brian.Kogan Page, ©2010 173 p. $14.95 (pa)Business consultant Finch explains the purpose of each section of thewritten business plan and offers sound advice on defining the productand market, describing operations and management, and developing thesales forecast. Comments from venture capitalists will be valuable tostart-ups while the closing chapters on selling and improving a businessshare honest insights for existing companies. The detailed table of con-tents makes up for the lack of an index.

HD30 2009-015724 978-1-60566-922-9IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn tteecchhnnoollooggyy aanndd tthhee eetthhiiccss ooff gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn;;ttrraannssnnaattiioonnaall iissssuueess aanndd iimmpplliiccaattiioonnss..Schultz, Robert A.Information Science Reference, ©2010 255 p. $180.00Schultz (emeritus, Woodbury University) illustrates how globalizedethical challenges arise during IT activities and provides a framework foranalyzing the implications of alternative actions and choosing ethicalpaths. After examining existing theories of justice, transnational ethics,and cosmopolitanism, the author proposes two global social contracts,one for ethical relations between states and one governing the globaleconomy. The international social contract is adopted from Rawls’ Lawof Peoples, and the global economy social contract would require newglobal institutions. The last two chapters consider conflicts between eco-nomic development and the environment, and the value of IT-enabledglobalization.

HD30 2010-001041 978-0-07-170043-6IITT pprroojjeecctt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; oonn ttrraacckk ffrroomm ssttaarrtt ttoo ffiinniisshh,, 33ddeedd.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Phillips, Joseph.McGraw-Hill, ©2010 613 p. $49.99 (pa)This book/CD-ROM package explains how to manage an IT project andhelps prepare readers for CompTIA Project + certification. It walksthrough each step of IT project management, from initiating andplanning the project through budgeting, building and managing teams,implementing the project plan, and enforcing quality. Pedagogical fea-tures include chapter quizzes, interviews with professionals, exercisesand solutions, a glossary, and 40 pages of appendices on exam objectivesand working as an independent contractor. The CD-ROM contains apractice exam, a project management training video, templates and work-sheets, and a complete e-book. Phillips is director of education for ProjectSeminars. He has written other books on computing.

HD30 2009-018627 978-0-7656-2351-5KKnnoowwlleeddggee mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; ssyysstteemmss aanndd pprroocceesssseess..Becerra-Fernandez, Irma. and Rajiv Sabherwal.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 352 p. $129.95Becerra-Fernandez (management information systems, FloridaInternational U.) and Sabherwal (information systems, U. of Missouri)introduce the field of knowledge management, which they define as“doing what is needed to get the most out of knowledge resources” or asthe promotion of “the discovery, capture, sharing, and application of thefirm’s knowledge.” The first section discusses the principles ofknowledge management, covering the infrastructure, process, systems,tools, and technologies of knowledge management, as well as the fourtypes of knowledge management processes: knowledge application,knowledge capture, knowledge sharing, and knowledge discoverysystems. The next section focuses on technologies and systems for eachof those four systems and includes case studies of technology implemen-tation. The final section turns to management practices, discussing howthey can be improved with emergent practices and technologies such associal networks, communities of practice, wikis, and blogs; the variousfactors that affect knowledge management; and topics such as crowdsourcing, collective intelligence, privacy, and confidentiality that arelikely to be important in the future of knowledge management. A com-panion web site includes solution to chapter problems, power point slideson key concepts, a sample syllabus and sample student projects, lists ofrelevant accompanying case studies, and references to software providers.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –102–

HD30 2009-035794 978-1-4129-6667-2MMaannaaggiinngg rriisskk iinn ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn eennccoouunntteerrss;; ssttrraatteeggiieessffoorr tthhee wwoorrkkppllaaccee..Waldron, Vincent R. and Jeffrey W. Kassing.Sage Publications, ©2011 257 p. $39.95 (pa)How does one deal with a difficult coworker or the ethically- challengedcorporate culture that led to the current economic meltdown? Contendingthat better communication could help manage risk in these situations,Arizona State University professors of communication studies addressworkplace issues at individual, relational, and organizational levels ofanalysis. Following an introduction to the transformative potential ofrisky situations and their risk negotiation model, Waldron and Kassingpresent research on and examples of risky business likely to be encoun-tered by students. They conclude with a discussion of newer risks, e.g.,those presented by the virtual workplace.

HD30 2009-015173 978-0-7619-2595-8NNeeeeddss aasssseessssmmeenntt;; aann oovveerrvviieeww;; 55vv..Altschuld, James W. and David Devraj Kumar.Sage Publications, ©2010 719 p. $150.00 (pa)Altschuld (Ohio State U.) presents a five-volume series of interrelated andsequenced texts guiding readers through the steps of Witkin andAltschuld’s (1995) three-phase model of needs assessment and providingnumerous hands-on procedures for implementing an assessment. In thefirst volume, Altschuld and Kumar (Florida Atlantic U.) explain the basicconcepts of needs and needs assessment, and describe the three phasesof the model. In Volume 2, Altschuld and Eastmond (Utah State U.) focuson getting the effort started via Phase I pre-assessment activities. InVolume 3, Altschuld addresses Phase II, describing key procedures forcollecting assessment data. For Volume IV, he pairs up with White (U. ofLouisiana, Lafayette) to explain Phase III, the process of analyzing needsdata and deriving priorities from multiple sources. Volume V, written byStevahn (Seattle U.) and King (U. of Minnesota), examines the translationof results into action by the organization (Phase III) and how it changesas an outgrowth of being involved in the entire process. For needsassessment practitioners—managers/decision makers, facilitators of anassessment, members of a needs assessment committee, organizationalstaff—and academics.

HD30 978-0-596-15625-1TThhee nneeww hhooww;; ccrreeaattiinngg bbuussiinneessss ssoolluuttiioonnss tthhrroouugghhccoollllaabboorraattiivvee ssttrraatteeggyy..Merchant, Nilofer.O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2010 266 p. $24.99Promoting true collaboration at all levels of an organization in buildingand implementing business strategy, this book by Merchant (founder andCEO of Rubicon Consulting) provides practical models of how to makethis happen. The heart of the book outlines the QuEST process, withchapters devoted to question formulation, envisioning options, selectingthe best ideas, and the taking on of roles in their implementation. Thisfinal step can be accomplished through the use of a responsibility gridand this process is amply illustrated. The book contains several cartoonsper chapter, plus hand drawn illustrations that lightly present key points.Includes appendices featuring tools to use and a small bibliography offavorite resources. Has limited references referring mostly to popularbooks, articles in magazines and websites.

HD30 2009-930867 978-1-84720-777-7OOppeerraattiioonnss ssttrraatteeggyy iinn aaccttiioonn;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo tthhee tthheeoorryy aannddpprraaccttiiccee ooff iimmpplleemmeennttaattiioonn..Tan, Kim Hua and Rupert L. Matthews.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 223 p. $120.00The authors (of Nottingham U. Business School, UK) provide guidance toexecutives and managers at the level of those charged with organizationaltransformation on the development of capabilities for the implementationof an operations strategy, which is aimed at improving the value of theproduct being produced and therefore minimizing the need to competeon price (Toyota is cited as an example of a company that hassuccessfully focused on operations). They theorize the difficulties ofimplementation and examine its multiple challenges, providing a wideview of the complex factors involved in implementing an operationsstrategy. They also offer specific tools and approaches for the generationof supporting skills to assist implementation, moving away fromfunctional approaches that they feel overly focus on the specific workcarried out by an organization.

HD30 2009-042278 978-1-60566-968-7OOrrggaanniizzaattiioonnaall aaddvvaanncceemmeennttss tthhrroouugghh eenntteerrpprriisseeiinnffoorrmmaattiioonn ssyysstteemmss;; eemmeerrggiinngg aapppplliiccaattiioonnss aannddddeevveellooppmmeennttss..Gunasekaran, Angappa and Timothy Shea.Business Science Reference, ©2010 408 p. $180.00International contributors shed light on the latest developments in enter-prise information systems (EIS), in areas such as enterprise resourceplanning (ERP), the integration of enterprise systems, personalized ERP,and the semantic web. Some specific chapter topics include the role ofenterprise perceptions in acceptance of information systems, developingan enterprise-wide knowledge warehouse in the media industry,semantic web services for simulation component reuse and interoper-ability, and complex ERP systems used in small and medium enterprises.Gunasekaran teaches operations management and Shea teaches man-agement information systems at the University of Massachusetts.

HD30 2009-046828 978-1-60509-328-4TThhee ppoowweerr ooff aapppprreecciiaattiivvee iinnqquuiirryy;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttooppoossiittiivvee cchhaannggee,, 22dd eedd..Whitney, Diana Kaplin and Amanda Trosten-Bloom.Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2010 304 p. $32.95Whitney (Saybrook U.) and Trosten-Bloom, who are associated with aconsultancy that works with corporations, government agencies,healthcare systems, and other organizations in using AppreciativeInquiry, detail the principles, practice, and results-oriented approaches toAppreciative Inquiry, with cases from different organizations to illustratehow the approach to organizational change improves performance byengaging people to study, discuss, and build on what’s working. Thisedition incorporates a new chapter on community applications, updatesto the case on Hunter Douglas, a new section on sustainability, and newexamples, tools, and tips.

HD30 2009-045640 978-1-60427-033-4AA pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttoo rreedduucciinngg IITT ccoossttss..Cassidy, Anita and Dan Cassidy.J. Ross Publishing, ©2010 310 p. $44.95This work presents ideas for decreasing IT costs in an organization,offering practical advice based on interviews with 60 CIO and IT leaders.The main theme of the book is that there is no single magic bullet to ITcost reduction. The book begins with overall strategies for reducing ITcosts, then provides suggestions for surviving the budgeting process.Separate chapters are devoted to cost-reduction strategies in four areas ofIT: business applications, technical infrastructure, IT processes, and theIT organization. The book also gives ideas on implementation of budgetcuts and highlights budget pitfalls to avoid. Chapter key points andquotes from those interviewed are included. The audience for the bookincludes CIOs and IT managers. The authors are IT consultants

HD30 2009-015503 978-1-4398-1113-9TThhee SSIIMM gguuiiddee ttoo eenntteerrpprriissee aarrcchhiitteeccttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Leon A. Kappelman.CRC Press, ©2010 284 p. $59.95Twenty-four American academics, researchers, consultants, and IT man-agers contribute 24 papers to a publication developed by the Society forInformation Management’s (SIM) Enterprise Architecture Working Group(EAWG), designed to help executives and organization leaders betterunderstand and manage their enterprise architecture (EA) activities, andthereby all of their organization’s activities and resources. The papers arepresented in sections offering an overview of what EA is and its signifi-cance and then focusing on the theoretical and conceptual matters of EA,the practice-oriented aspects of EA and the challenges of doing EA suc-cessfully, findings from the 2007 SIM Information Management PracticesSurvey regarding the current state of EA practices and perceptions, andEA references and resources, including organizations, print and onlineresources, and a glossary of EA terms.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–103–

HD30 2009-044845 978-1-60566-920-5TTeecchhnnoollooggiiccaall aaddvvaanncceemmeenntt iinn ddeevveellooppeedd aanndd ddeevveellooppiinnggccoouunnttrriieess;; ddiissccoovveerriieess iinn gglloobbaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by M. Gordon Hunter and Felix Tan. (Advances inglobal information management series)Information Science Reference, ©2010 471 p. $180.00International contributors proffer perspectives on information systemsfrom developed and developing countries. Some areas discussed includefactors influencing career choice for women in the global informationtechnology workforce, IT offshore outsourcing risk evaluation, andawareness of computer security among American and Chinese computerusers. Other subjects covered include culture and consumer trust inonline businesses, the impact of leadership style on knowledge sharingintentions in China, and Internet-based e-commerce in small Chinesefirms in New Zealand. Hunter is affiliated with the University ofLethbridge, Canada. Tan is affiliated with Auckland University ofTechnology, New Zealand.

HD31 2009-035199 978-1-4398-0099-7TThhee eexxeeccuuttiivvee MMBBAA ffoorr eennggiinneeeerrss aanndd sscciieennttiissttss..Farley, James J.CRC Press, ©2010 267 p. $69.95For scientists and engineers who aspire to promotions in the corporateworld, Farley, who has worked in the pharmaceutical andpharmaceutical packaging industries and runs a consulting business thatassists pharmaceutical and biotechnology firms, details the businessprinciples and applications technical managers need to know to worktheir way up the ladder, including marketing, accounting, sales, finance,and manufacturing. Other topics he overviews include statistics; break-even analysis; graphs, charts, and equations; quality control; researchand development; corporate structure; people skills; career planning;social responsibility; telecommuting; and starting a business. There is nobibliography.

HD31 2009-022125 978-1-4221-4079-6MMaannaaggiinngg iinn aa ttiimmee ooff ggrreeaatt cchhaannggee..Drucker, Peter F.Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2009 310 p. $29.95This volume, a reissue, brings together 25 articles and two interviewswith the late Drucker, a writer, teacher, and consultant, on how tomanage in a rapidly changing environment. Drucker argues that man-agers must understand the impact of what has already happened (ratherthan predicting what might happen), discussing management, the infor-mation revolution, the world economy, and society and government, andquestions such as how to keep a business from becoming obsolete, howto use information for a competitive advantage, how new markets andindustries shift the centers of power in the global economy, and how toreinvent government for a new age. Other topics include teams, familybusinesses, China’s growth markets, nonprofits, and gender roles.Articles were written between 1991 and 1995. There is no bibliography.

HD31 2009-048774 978-0-313-38159-1MMaannaaggiinngg wwhheenn ttiimmeess aarree ttoouugghh..Dijk, Theo J. van.Praeger, ©2010 180 p. $34.95In light of the recent economic crisis, Van Dijk, an interim generalmanager for small to medium enterprises that encounter major diffi-culties, offers advice on management skills and techniques that areeffective in helping companies get through tough times. He argues thatmanagers should focus on issues they can control in the areas of envi-ronment, the business, oneself, and the team, like real cash flow, productdifferentiation, marketing tools that don’t add expense, and inverse mar-keting. He also addresses attribution bias, self-styled knowledge work,the concept of service economies, worldwide competition, promoting thebrand, and personal and business opportunities to strengthen thebusiness and management skills.

HD31 2009-036114 978-0-307-46374-6RReewwoorrkk..Fried, Jason and Heinemeier Hansson.Crown Business, ©2010 279 p. $22.00For entrepreneurs and small business owners, Fried and Hansson, whofounded a software company that makes web-based productivitysoftware for small businesses, outline a method to succeed in businessthat is based on their experiences. Going against conventional ideasabout business and showing that a company doesn’t need budgets, a lotof advertising, salespeople, a public relations firm, a plan, workaholics,or other touted elements, they address how to start a business, why itneeds less than conventionally thought, when to launch it, how to get theword out, whom and when to hire, and how to manage, as well as issuesof productivity, competition, damage control, and culture. No index.

HD38 2009-048250 978-0-313-38361-8BBeeccoommiinngg yyoouurr oowwnn bbuussiinneessss ccooaacchh..Watts, George W.Praeger, ©2010 179 p. $34.95Watts, a management and leadership consultant, describes ways execu-tives can grow through introspection, self-awareness, and development ofemotional intelligence. The book offers short personality tests and writtenreflection exercises in response to open-ended questions on leadership,motivation, change, confidence, and vision.

HD38 2009-029038 978-0-7494-5638-2HHooww ttoo sseellll yyoouurrsseellff..Grose, Ray.Kogan Page, ©2010 95 p. $14.95 (pa)This career guide encourages executives to be aware of their behavior andhow it impacts on their images, and to choose of reject behavior on thebasis of whether it enhances or damages that image. The appendix pullstogether a suggested plan for starting the process of selling oneself withinan organization using the exercises for self-evaluation and improvement.No index is provided.

HD38 2009-051936 978-0-470-53364-2HHyyppeerrffoorrmmaannccee;; uussiinngg ccoommppeettiittiivvee iinntteelllliiggeennccee ffoorr bbeetttteerrssttrraatteeggyy aanndd eexxeeccuuttiioonn..Waters, T. J.Jossey-Bass, ©2010 256 p. $27.95Waters, a senior consultant at the US Special Operations Command, pro-vides organizational leaders and practitioners with real-world tacticaland operational strategies for analyzing competitor, market, and cus-tomer information and acting on it, with examples from real organiza-tions large and small. Working trade shows and social network analysisare some areas explored. An appendix briefly reviews eight psychologicalassessment tools. A companion web site provides tools and templatesfrom the book. The author teaches in the Intelligence Management andAnalysis Program at Eckerd College. Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.

HD38 2009-045638 978-1-60427-025-9LLeeaann && aaggiillee vvaalluuee cchhaaiinn mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo tthheenneexxtt lleevveell ooff iimmpprroovveemmeenntt..Sabri, Ehap H. and Salim N. Shaikh.J. Ross Publishing, ©2010 454 p. $54.95For managers, consultants, and graduate students, Sabri, a businessstrategist and speaker who teaches at the U. of Dallas and U. of Texas-Dallas, and Shaikh, a management consultant and solution architect,offer a guide that outlines techniques and best practices for every aspectof value chain process redesign to cut waste and improve efficiency,explaining how to implement a lean and agile value chain transformationprogram. They show how to convert conventional processes into lean andagile value chain processes that will allow enterprises to collaborate withtheir internal and external suppliers and customers by providing visi-bility, replacing inventory with information, automating the paper-drivenbusiness processes, and interconnecting inventory, logistics, and planningsystems. The book has a management focus and includes best projectmanagement, benefits, technology, business justification, and ongoingsupport strategy for all the major processes in the value chain.

HD38 2009-037163 978-81-321-0233-5MMaannaaggiinngg iinn cchhaannggiinngg ttiimmeess;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorr tthhee ppeerrpplleexxeeddmmaannaaggeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Sid Lowe.Response Books, ©2010 398 p. $32.95 (pa)Lowe (strategy, marketing, and entrepreneurship, Kingston U. BusinessSchool, London, UK) brings together 12 chapters for managers and man-agement students and specialists that explore the future development ofmanagement and organizing in the context of new and difficult condi-tions in the West and East, such as the financial crisis, globalization, cor-ruption, income inequality, and other present-day problems. He aims tomove beyond scientific management and systems theory and promotedifferent styles, discourses, and voices in management, with chapters onthe theories of Schumacher and Capra, processes-based practice, ahuman-centered approach to technology development, an embodiedapproach to human ethics, a horizontal leadership paradigm, the use ofancient wisdom from the Bhagavad-Gita to help modern leaders, anapproach to self-awareness, and other ideas, within international andgeneral contexts. Contributors work in business and management, cor-porate responsibility, and communication in Europe, Asia, New Zealand,and the US. Response Books is an imprint of Sage India.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –104–

HD38 2009-024942 978-0-470-46171-6TThhee nneeww kknnooww;; iinnnnoovvaattiioonn ppoowweerreedd bbyy aannaallyyttiiccss..May, Thornton. (Wiley and SAS business series; 23)John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 236 p. $49.95May, an information technology communicator and futurist who createscollaborative knowledge places, explains how companies can usebusiness analytics to create an information-based competitive advantageand improve knowledge about the company and the ability to act oninformation. He outlines the tools, processes, and practices of businessanalytics, including statistics, forecasting, operations research, and datamining. He describes the knowledge needed about a company, the rapidrise of data and information management processes in different markets,what business analysts do and how they do it, their function in thebusiness life cycle, how they add value, and their role in innovation.

HD38 2009-024736 978-1-4200-9107-6PPrriinncciipplleess ooff ssuuppppllyy cchhaaiinn mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..Crandall, Richard E. et al. (Resource management; 41)CRC Press, ©2010 595 p. $89.95Written by two professors of business management and one of man-agement information systems, this thorough textbook covers all aspectsof the supply chain from the original source of materials through man-ufacturing and distribution. The ultimate focus is always on the needs ofthe customer, though, and this book never loses sight of that with threechapters devoted to the customer perspective and others considering theretail environment. Keeping up with current trends it also considers recy-cling (“the reverse supply chain”) and current sustainability conceptssuch as triple bottom line, cradle-to-grave and cradle-to-cradle. Overall, itis a complete treatment of business logistics in an increasingly globalbusiness world.

HD38 2009-028808 978-1-4200-8392-7SSuuppppllyy cchhaaiinn pprroojjeecctt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; aa ssttrruuccttuurreeddccoollllaabboorraattiivvee aanndd mmeeaassuurraabbllee aapppprrooaacchh,, 22dd eedd..Ayers, James B.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 400 p. $79.95A management consultant in Los Angeles, Ayers offers guidance forsupply chain practitioners seeking background on project management,and for project management practitioners wanting knowledge in supplychain management. In particular, he explains how the three concepts ofstructure, collaboration, and measurement can serve as a foundation foran entirely new approach to resource management. His topics includedrivers of supply chain change, five tasks, levels of project managementmaturity, project management knowledge areas, developing a supplychain strategy, implementing collaborative relationships, and improvingprocesses and systems.

HD38 2009-053984 978-0-313-36420-4SSuuppppllyy cchhaaiinn sseeccuurriittyy;; iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall pprraaccttiicceess aannddiinnnnoovvaattiioonnss iinn mmoovviinngg ggooooddss ssaaffeellyy aanndd eeffffiicciieennttllyy;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew R. Thomas.Praeger, ©2010 476 p. $104.95The chapters of this 2-volume reference address various threats to supplychains (Vol.1) and methods for meeting those threats (Vol.2). Every con-tributor to the collection has extensive experience working with security,piracy, theft, risk management, and other areas directly related to supplychain security worldwide, and the chapters are richly detailed and doc-umented with examples and outcomes. All types of transport are dis-cussed, including trucking, air cargo, maritime, pipelines, and ports, asare the security measures necessary for each. The contributors offerdetailed practical guidelines for responding to threats, continuallyassessing the supply chain, resuming the supply chain if it’s interrupted,international domain issues, and a wide variety of legal concerns. Wellwritten and authoritative, with a consistently global focus, this will be avaluable guide for those connected to global security and trade.

HD49 2009932645 978-1-60750-046-9BBuuiillddiinngg ssaaffeerr ccoommmmuunniittiieess,, rriisskk ggoovveerrnnaannccee,, ssppaattiiaallppllaannnniinngg aanndd rreessppoonnsseess ttoo nnaattuurraall hhaazzaarrddss..Title main entry. Ed. by Urbano Fra Paleo. (NATO science for peaceand security series E: Human and societal dynamics; v.58)IOS Press, ©2009 277 p. $196.00Fra Paleo (U. of Santiago de Compostela, Spain) brings together 17 con-tributions that address and analyze proactive approaches to the gover-nance of risk from natural hazards, arguing for a closer integration ofproactiveness with emergency preparedness and disaster response.Contributors who work in disaster and emergency management, envi-ronmental planning, city and regional planning, geophysics, geography,sustainable development, and other fields in Europe and the US exploreemergency and environmental management, climate change, vulnerabil-ities, community development, spatial planning, the regulation of landuse, demand for natural resources, social impact assessment, post-dis-aster recovery planning, and urban water governance, as well as casestudies of the Netherlands, China and Ghana, the US, and European pro-grams and systems.

HD49 2009-041493 978-1-4051-9441-9TThhee hhaannddbbooookk ooff ccrriissiiss ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by W. Timothy Coombs and Sherry J. Holladay.(Handbooks in communication and media)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 737 p. $199.95Seventy-three international academics and researchers contribute 39chapters to a resource for researchers and communication managers,intended to improve the practice of crisis communication and toencourage the development of crisis communication as its own field ofresearch rather than as a subdiscipline of public relations or corporatecommunication. Coverage includes the scope of crisis communicationand how it relates to similar fields; various research approaches used inthe field, from case studies to textual analysis, content analysis, andexperimental; the work crisis managers performs; specific applications invarious contexts such as the oil industry, government, education, andracial crises; ways that crisis communicators use online communicationtechnology; global crisis communication; theory development; and futureresearch directions. The text includes in-depth analyses of well-knowncase studies in crisis communication, including terrorist attacks inLondon and Madrid, Hurricane Katrina, the Virginia Tech shootings, andthe fen-phen diet drug crisis.

HD53 2009-017534 978-0-415-48095-6SSppaacceess ooff vveerrnnaaccuullaarr ccrreeaattiivviittyy;; rreetthhiinnkkiinngg tthhee ccuullttuurraalleeccoonnoommyy..Title main entry. Ed. by eds. Tim Edensor et al.Routledge, ©2010 258 p. $145.00Arising from presented papers and panel discussions that took place atthe 2007 Association of American Geographers conference, this volumeexplores the economic aspects of creativity from a geographical per-spective. It explores creative activity from art, music and photography tocommunity gardening and performance art in a variety of spacesincluding abandoned urban areas and rural and suburban settings.Edited by human and cultural geographers from Canada and the UK, itsultimate area of focus is on the role of creativity in urban regenerationand economic development.

HD57 2009-037627 978-0-8144-1513-9TThhee AAMMAA hhaannddbbooookk ooff lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp..Goldsmith, Marshall et al.AMACOM, ©2010 269 p. $29.95This work collects material on management and leadership by CEOs,consultants, and executive leadership coaches. Part One sheds light onthe global picture, with chapters on topics such as Asian and Westernexecutive styles, and Part Two looks at the leader’s role in developingnew leaders. Parts Three and Four show how a leader who engagespeople can facilitate change. Essays in Part Five describe the ideas andphilosophies of extraordinary thought leaders who ‘think outside thebox.’ The book will be of interest to organizational development profes-sionals, consultants, and executive coaches, and to managers in HR andorganizational development. Goldsmith is a leadership expert.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–105–

HD57 2009-025001 978-1-59102-764-5TThhee bbrraaiinn aaddvvaannttaaggee;; bbeeccoommee aa mmoorree eeffffeeccttiivvee bbuussiinneesssslleeaaddeerr uussiinngg tthhee llaatteesstt bbrraaiinn rreesseeaarrcchh..Van Hecke, Madeleine L. et al.Prometheus Books, ©2010 320 p. $19.00 (pa)In a book coauthored with a management consultant and neuroscientist,clinical psychologist Van Hecke summarizes the latest research on theimplications of “leading with the brain in mind” for leadership stylesand practices. For example, they claim that understanding how the brainoften operates on autopilot can help business leaders make decisionsmore consciously and objectively. The book includes cartoons and adecent bibliography.

HD57 2009-041345 978-0-470-49009-9CCoommmmoonn ppuurrppoossee;; hhooww ggrreeaatt lleeaaddeerrss ggeett oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnss ttooaacchhiieevvee tthhee eexxttrraaoorrddiinnaarryy..Kurtzman, Joel.Jossey-Bass, ©2010 212 p. $27.95Kurtzman describes the common purpose approach to business man-agement that encourages employees to internalize an organization’svalues, tools, objectives, and aspirations, enabling them to work towardone goal. Leadership examples from FM Global illustrate how a companycan become more flat by fostering an environment of fairness, open com-munication, and curiosity. No references or bibliography are provided.

HD57 2009-002590 978-1-60709-023-6FFrroomm lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp tthheeoorryy ttoo pprraaccttiiccee;; aa ggaammee ppllaann ffoorrssuucccceessss aass aa lleeaaddeerr..Palestini, Robert.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 198 p. $24.95 (pa)Focusing on the translation of theory into practice, Palestini (education,Saint Joseph’s U., Philadelphia, PA) presents a self-help text for leadersand aspiring leaders, from parents and teachers to school principals andCEOs. The text opens with an overview of leadership theory and thenexamines how effective leaders lead both with their mind—by learningthe science of leadership—and with the love, trust, and respect that createthe “heart” of leading. The ten chapters that follow focus on ten suc-cessful leaders from the world of football—Bill Belichick, Bobby Bowden,Bear Bryant, Tony Dungy, Joe Gibbs, Bill Parcells, Ara Parseghian, JoePaterno, Don Shula, and Bill Walsh—examining how their characteristicsand behaviors were informed by leadership theory. No subject index.

HD57 2009-021185 978-1-4221-3879-3HHaannddbbooookk ooff lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee;; aann HHBBSScceenntteennnniiaall ccoollllooqquuiiuumm oonn aaddvvaanncciinngg lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp..Title main entry. Ed. by Nitin Nohria and Rakesh Khurana.Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2010 822 p. $39.95Editors Nohria (administration, Harvard Business School), Khurana(leadership development, Harvard Business School), and 42 contributorson the responsibilities and components of leadership. The book is basedon the Harvard Business School Centennial Colloquium Leadership:Advancing an Intellectual Discipline. This multidisciplinary treatmentincludes work from professionals in psychology, economics, history, soci-ology. Topics include development of leadership as a discipline, the direc-tions leadership research should take to grow as a subject, developmentof individual leaders, challenges leaders face, and framing a researchagenda for future leadership researchers.

HD57 2009-030393 978-0-8213-8100-7LLeeaaddeerrsshhiipp aanndd ggrroowwtthh..Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Spence and David Brady.The World Bank, ©2010 271 p. $40.00 (pa)This report was prepared for the Commission on Growth andDevelopment to summarize the relationship between leadership and eco-nomic growth. Commissioned chapters by academics and policy makersoffer lessons from Rwanda, Singapore, Nigeria, Brazil, and Bangladesh.Some chapters detail specific cases, while others explore the general char-acteristics of policy choices across countries. Still other chapters highlightthe importance of leaders choosing the right growth model and the rightinstitutional arrangements as well as the right policies. The report findsthat leaders’ common issues can be sorted into four categories: pro-moting national unity, building good institutions, choosing innovativeand localized policies, and creating political consensus for long-termpolicy implementation. All of the chapters focus on one or more of thesethemes in one or more countries. Spence is chair of the GrowthCommission and professor emeritus at Stanford University. Brady is alsoaffiliated with Stanford University.

HD57 2009-037005 978-0-7494-5532-3LLeeaaddeerrsshhiipp ccooaacchhiinngg;; wwoorrkkiinngg wwiitthh lleeaaddeerrss ttoo ddeevveellooppeelliittee ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Jonathan Passmore.Kogan Page, ©2010 313 p. $34.95 (pa)Psychologists, coaches, and consultants from around the world describe15 popular and less-well known leadership coaching models. In additionto the Western view of leadership, a few of the models draw on other tra-ditions, such as ancient Asian philosophers and African myths. Somemodels explored include authentic leadership, coaching for emotionallyintelligent leadership, coaching political leaders, transformational lead-ership, and coaching global teams. Supporting research is reviewed foreach model, and each chapter includes case studies. Passmore is an occu-pational psychologist, coach, and coaching supervisor.

HD57 2009-038351 978-0-273-73089-7LLeeaaddeerrsshhiipp;; ppllaaiinn aanndd ssiimmppllee..Radcliffe, Steve. Ed. by Anthony Landale.Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2010 171 p. $19.99 (pa)Radcliffe is a UK leadership coach who has pioneered the Future-Engage-Deliver leadership model. In this book, he presents his model as a wayto stay focused on your vision, engage others, and deliver results. Thebook asks readers to reflect on their own attitudes and practicesthroughout, and includes step-by-step action plans and tips forimplementation. Readers can download templates and other tools froma web site.

HD57 2009-025055 978-0-470-42280-9LLeeaaddiinngg tthhee vviirrttuuaall wwoorrkkffoorrccee;; hhooww ggrreeaatt lleeaaddeerrssttrraannssffoorrmm oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnss iinn tthhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy..Sobel Lojeski, Karen. (Microsoft executive leadership series; 14)John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 155 p. $29.95Finding competent, effective leaders in times of changing economics andbusiness climates, unemployment, and recession is a challenge—not tomention the recent evolution of the virtual workforce. In fact, manywould say the shortage of such leadership is critical. Lojeski (technologyand society, Stony Brook U.) has interviewed the leaders of manyprominent companies such as IBM, Merck, Alcatel-Lucent, AT&T, WesternUnion, and more and asked them to describe what is different aboutleadership now. The author addresses common myths about leadershipfor the virtual workforce, what leaders do differently to succeed in globalenterprises, and offers a new leadership model for the realities of today.

HD57 2009-018885 978-0-06-171716-1TThhee rriigghhtt ffiigghhtt;; hhooww ggrreeaatt lleeaaddeerrss uussee hheeaalltthhyy ccoonnfflliicctt ttooddrriivvee ppeeffoorrmmaannccee,, iinnnnoovvaattiioonn,, aanndd vvaalluuee..Joni, Saj-nicole A. and Damon Beyer.Harper Collins Publishers, ©2010 2010 p. $26.99The authors’ research shows that creative dissent and controversy, incombination with employee and organizational alignment, is good fororganizations; it can help lower risks, create value, and grow betterleaders. They outline six principles for identifying and fighting “rightfights” that focus on the future and embrace a noble purpose. Examplesare from real-life companies including Coca-Cola, Dell, and Microsoft.Joni is a business strategist. Beyer is a senior executive advisor.

HD58 2009-025217 978-0-470-50368-3BBuussiinneessss rreessttrruuccttuurriinngg;; aann aaccttiioonn tteemmppllaattee ffoorr rreedduucciinnggccoosstt aanndd ggrroowwiinngg pprrooffiitt..Zilka, Carla.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 206 p. $60.00Aiming to demystify business restructuring, this book provides steps andtools for executing a business restructuring program and developing along-term strategy for maintaining corporate growth, profit, and com-petitive edge. The book includes case studies to aid in the restructuringprocess, sample calendars and checklists, and an extensive glossary. Zilkais a global business restructuring and transformation consultant.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –106–

HD58 2009-028125 978-1-4398-1117-7CCrriittiiccaall ssuucccceessss ffaaccttoorrss ssiimmpplliiffiieedd;; iimmpplleemmeennttiinngg tthheeppoowweerrffuull ddrriivveerrss ooff ddrraammaattiicc bbuussiinneessss iimmpprroovveemmeenntt..Howell, Marvin T.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 146 p. $39.95Since completing a career as a civil engineer in the US Air Force, Howellhas worked in the private sector for some 25 years, currently as a gov-ernment contractor developing, implementing, and maintaining an ISO-14001-based environmental management system (EMS) program atseveral government facilities. He presents a concise, practical text fororganization managers, team members, and process owners describinghow to identify and select critical-to-success factors (CSFs) for initiatives,how to measure their impact, and how to take corrective action whennecessary. Coverage includes background on CSFs, an outline of Rockart’sCSF method, powerful techniques for identifying external CSFs, a simpleprocess for generating internal CSFs, a road map for creating an organi-zation-wide CSF program, and specific applications of CSFs, fromstrategic planning to individual pursuits.

HD58 2009-042045 978-1-4398-1632-5FFlleexxiibbiilliittyy;; fflleexxiibbllee ccoommppaanniieess ffoorr tthhee uunncceerrttaaiinn wwoorrlldd..Eapen, Gill.CRC Press, ©2010 182 p. $59.95In the face of uncertainty, one of a firm’s greatest assets is flexibility.Such is the premise of this book by Eapen (founder and managing prin-cipal of Decision Options, LLC, “a boutique advisory services company”),which informally and anecdotally provides advice to managers on cre-ating an environment for implementing “options-based decisions.” Eapenaddresses flexibility in relation to the three primary components of anorganization: structure, system, and strategy. He then describes metricsfor measuring organizational flexibility and conducts a hypothetical flex-ibility audit of a technology company. Finally, he discusses creating aflexible company from scratch and considers flexibility at the nationallevel.

HD58 2009-021139 978-1-4221-8114-0SSiimmppllyy eeffffeeccttiivvee;; hhooww ttoo ccuutt tthhrroouugghh ccoommpplleexxiittyy iinn yyoouurroorrggaanniizzaattiioonn aanndd ggeett tthhiinnggss ddoonnee..Ashkenas, Ron.Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2010 214 p. $27.95Ashkenas, a leadership and organizational transformation consultant,show managers how to get around convoluted decision-making hierar-chies to simplify how work gets done. The book begins with a definitionof simplicity, then describes the four main ways complexity builds up inorganizations and describes how to deal with each. It gives advice onidentifying areas where complexity is holding back the organization, andprovides gives instructions for creating a tailored simplification strategy.Strategies described involve consolidating organization structures,pruning product and service lines, and partnering with vendors and cus-tomers. Examples from major companies, such as ConAgra Foods andGeneral Electric, demonstrate ideas.

HD58 2009-030781 978-1-4022-1450-9TThhee ssuurrpprriissiinngg ssoolluuttiioonn;; ccrreeaattiinngg ppoossssiibbiilliittyy iinn aa sswwiifftt aannddsseevveerree wwoorrlldd..Piasecki, Bruce.Sourcebooks, Inc., ©2009 316 p. $15.99 (pa)US management consultant Piasecki predicts the near future and offersadvice on how corporate and other business leaders can cash in on thechanges. His topics include competition and social needs, social responsecapitalism, Toyota and the search for the superior car, inside the cor-porate mansion, Hewlett Packard and the vast universe of consumerdelight, the global financial meltdown today and tomorrow, and lever-aging social change. The first edition was published in 2007.

HD58 2009-046410 978-0-313-38022-8WWhhyy oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnss ssttrruuggggllee ssoo hhaarrdd ttoo iimmpprroovvee ssoo lliittttllee;;oovveerrccoommiinngg oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnaall iimmmmaattuurriittyy..Klubeck, Martin et al.Praeger, ©2010 222 p. $34.95An overwhelming majority of efforts to improve organizational cultureand productivity fail. Why? Klubeck (Office of Information Technologies,the University of Notre Dame) blames organizational immaturity ratherthan placing all the blame on flawed leadership. He defines organiza-tional immaturity and explains how to determine an organization’smaturity level, then provides tools for achieving change within the limi-tations of an immature organization. About 20 pages of appendicesprovide assessment tools, sample policies and standards, a metrics imple-mentation guide, and advice on developing or modifying training plansand writing a strategic plan. A companion web site offers additional toolsfor assessing organizational maturity. The book’s audience includesorganization leaders and other stakeholders, managers at all levels, andstaff members.

HD59 978-3-8329-4966-2MMaakkiinngg EEUU ppoolliittiiccss ppuubblliicc;; hhooww tthhee EEUU iinnssttiittuuttiioonnssddeevveelloopp ppuubblliicc ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn..Altides, Christina. (Regieren in Europa; v.16)Nomos, ©2009 224 p. $43.00 (pa)This is a slightly revised version of the author’s doctoral thesis handedin at the University of Mannheim in September 2008. The dissertationtakes an actor- and process-oriented approach to analyze the pressmaterial produced by the European Commission and the EuropeanParliament in two case studies: the reform of chemical legislation(REACH) and the Services Directive. These press communications arecompared to normative and professional expectations. Interviews withthose involved in producing the press material offer further insight. Thestudy reveals the extent to which the European Commission andParliament are not unitary actors. It also looks at these institutions’ con-ceptions of democratic communication. The book will be of interest topractitioners of EU-institutional communication. It is distributed in theUS by ISBS.

HD60 2009-023015 978-1-4129-7756-2IIssssuueess ffoorr ddeebbaattee iinn ccoorrppoorraattee ssoocciiaall rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy;;sseelleeccttiioonnss ffrroomm CCQQ rreesseeaarrcchheerr..Title main entry.Sage Publications, ©2010 361 p. $34.95 (pa)Geared for students, these selections from CQ Researcher offer an acces-sible overview of hot button issues relating to corporate social respons-bility. The 10 contributors cover topics such as cutting CEO pay, thegender pay gap, labor unions, socially responsible investing, consumersafety, confronting global warming, carbon trading, ecotourism, andother relevant issues. Chapters introduce the topic and follow with sec-tions on background, the current situation, and the outlook. The bookalso will interest a general audience.

HD60 2009-048339 978-0-7494-5411-1PPeeooppllee,, ppllaanneett,, pprrooffiitt;; hhooww ttoo eemmbbrraaccee ssuussttaaiinnaabbiilliittyy ffoorriinnnnoovvaattiioonn aanndd bbuussiinneessss ggrroowwtthh..Fisk, Peter.Kogan Page, ©2010 226 p. $29.95Intended as a practical handbook for CEOs and business managers, thiswork seeks to inspire leadership and innovation in sustainability. Itincludes numerous case examples of innovative companies such as Ikea,Wal-Mart, Nike, Time Warner, and Coca-Cola. The book’s resource sectionincludes a glossary, a list of web sites, and a day-to-day outline of thePeople, Planet, Profit Program, a four-day development experience forsenior and middle managers. Fisk, a business coach, is founder ofGeniusWorks. The book also includes significant contributions fromDiana Verde Nieto, founder and CEO of Clownfish, a sustainability con-sulting firm, and Anthony Kleanthous, business advisor to theWorldwide Fund for Nature.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–107–

HD60 2009-043626 978-0-470-55842-3TThhee rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy rreevvoolluuttiioonn;; hhooww tthhee nneexxtt ggeenneerraattiioonn ooffbbuussiinneesssseess wwiillll wwiinn..Hollender, Jeffrey and Bill Breen.Jossey-Bass, ©2010 214 p. $27.95Hollender, cofounder of Seventh Generation, a maker of naturalhousehold and personal care products, and Breen, editorial director atSeventh Generation, draw on their experience building the greencompany to offer six essential principles for creating sustainable busi-nesses that benefit society and employees as well as shareholders. Partmanual and part manifesto, the book presents insider case stories thathold ideas for building financially, socially, and environmentally sus-tainable organizations. Some of the companies profiled began asmembers of the corporate responsibility and sustainability tribe, andothers had change forced upon them and now use sustainability as aforce for innovation. The book will be of interest to investors, entrepre-neurs, consumers, and policy makers, as well as general readers.Hollender is also director of Greenpeace USA and Vermont Businesses forSocial Responsibility, and former director of the Social Venture Network.Jossey-Bass is an imprint of Wiley.

HD61 2009-039314 978-0-313-37660-3EEnntteerrpprriissee sseeccuurriittyy ffoorr tthhee eexxeeccuuttiivvee;; sseettttiinngg tthhee ttoonnee ffrroommtthhee ttoopp..Bayuk, Jennifer L.Praeger, ©2010 163 p. $34.95Bayuk (information security management and information technologyconsultant) provides a guidebook for business executives intended to helpthem become familiar with information security, and give them theknowledge they need to manage and support their security team. Writtenin a readable, non-technical style, the book includes several real-life sce-narios that demonstrate the basics of security management. It alsoincludes several security horror stories that illustrate how to protectassets. Praeger is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

HD62 2009-007533 978-1-4128-1042-5CCiittiizzeenn ppaarrttiicciippaattiioonn iinn nnoonn--pprrooffiitt ggoovveerrnnaannccee..Koff, Sondra Z.Transaction Publishers, ©2009 206 p. $39.95Koff (emerita, political science, State U. of New York at Binghamton)explores the role of public members in nonprofit organizations, thoseindividuals participating in the governing structures as representatives ofthe public at large. Basing her study on questionnaires administered topublic members and executive directors sitting on boards of select non-profit organizations affiliated with the National Organization forCompetency Assurance (a nonprofit membership association consistingof certification agencies, testing and consulting firms, and individualsinvolved in professional certification endeavors), she constructs a demo-graphic profile of the public member constituency, inventories thegroup’s activities opinions concerning various facets of board mem-bership, catalogues executive directors’ perspectives on the publicmember role and experience, and surveys problems related to citizen par-ticipation and strategies for solving them.

HD62 2009-042135 978-1-4398-0394-3CCoorrppoorraattee ssiiggmmaa;; ooppttiimmiizziinngg tthhee hheeaalltthh ooff yyoouurr ccoommppaannyywwiitthh ssyysstteemmss tthhiinnkkiinngg..El-Homsi, Anwar and Jeff Slutsky.CRC Press, ©2010 260 p. $44.95Corporate Sigma is a quality metric that assesses quality levels of orga-nizational functions at different levels of the firm. It builds on thepopular Six Sigma business management strategy developed by Motorolain the early 1980s. El-Homsi (president, Transformation Partners Co.) andSlutsky (Bausch & Lomb Inc.) introduce Corporate Sigma, addressingissues of leadership, organizational culture and values, corporate successfactors, human capital, elimination of waste and corporate leanness, theSix Sigma protocol, systems thinking, marketing, technology devel-opment, product development, and sensory systems.

HD62 2009-003054 978-0-8144-1462-0EE--rriicchheess 22..00;; nneexxtt--ggeenneerraattiioonn mmaarrkkeettiinngg ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorrmmaakkiinngg mmiilllliioonnss oonnlliinnee..Fox, Scott C.AMACOM, ©2009 325 p. $25.00The author of Internet Riches, an Internet success coach in Hollywood,provides tips on how to profit from this “gold rush” with such onlinetools as social networking sites, blogs, microblogs (e.g., Twitter), e-mailpublishing, viral video productions, and search engine keyword adver-tising. Fox explains why some tactics do not work. The guide includesadvice from experts, case studies of Web entrepreneurs who have usedthese tools successfully, and recommended resources.

HD62 2010-000567 978-0-87389-783-9OOuutt ooff aannootthheerr @@##&&**%% ccrriissiiss!!;; mmoottiivvaattiioonn tthhrroouugghhhhuummiilliiaattiioonn..Micklewright, Mike.ASQ Quality Press, ©2010 242 p. $34.00This volume considers each of the 14 principles put forth in W. EdwardsDeming’s book Out of the Crisis (1982), which was written in response tothe challenging of US dominance in goods and services by Japan.Micklewright states that a crisis occurred in low quality, high costs, andlow competitiveness and notes that American companies are experi-encing other crises in the present by not following Deming’s principles,such as the recession, outsourcing, the credit meltdown, healthcare, andSocial Security. He analyzes how practices and tools such as qualitycircles, total quality management, zero defects, benchmarking, balancedscorecard, reengineering, ISO 9001, Six Sigma, and lean support do or donot support Deming’s principles, and how following the principles is thekey to success. Micklewright, who is associated with a company that inte-grates lean and quality and helps company executives understand theright principles to support continuous improvement activities, has pro-duced several training videos and provides presentations in which heimpersonates Deming.

HD62 2009-023530 978-0-8144-1478-1TThhee ppoowweerr ooff bbuussiinneessss pprroocceessss iimmpprroovveemmeenntt;; 1100 ssiimmpplleesstteeppss ttoo iinnccrreeaassee eeffffeeccttiivveenneessss,, eeffffiicciieennccyy,, aanndd aaddaappttaabbiilliittyy..Page, Susan.AMACOM, ©2010 338 p. $32.95Page, a human resources information systems manager and businessprocess improvement consultant for the computer, banking, and enter-tainment industries, offers a formula for evaluating business processesfor managers that focuses on three objectives: effectiveness, efficiency,and adaptability. She outlines ten actions to bring about an ongoing cycleof continuous improvement, including developing the process inventory,drawing a process map, estimating time and cost, applying improvementtechniques, testing and reworking, and implementing the change, as wellas how to adapt them, ending with a case study of process improvementfor a major bank.

HD62 2009-042044 978-1-4398-1380-5QQuuaalliittyy mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; tthheeoorryy aanndd aapppplliiccaattiioonn..Mauch, Peter D.CRC Press, ©2010 149 p. $49.95Mauch details how to set up a quality management system that is alignedwith business goals and accumulates and reports data useful for theachievement of management’s objectives. He explains the implementationand application of the system in the areas of organization, planning,control, staffing, motivating employees, risk analysis, reliability engi-neering, systems analysis, auditing, and statistical methods.

HD62 2009-936213 978-1-84376-417-5TThhee ssttrraatteeggyy ooff ssmmaallll ffiirrmmss;; ssttrraatteeggiicc mmaannaaggeemmeenntt aannddiinnnnoovvaattiioonn iinn tthhee ssmmaallll ffiirrmm..Mazzarol, Tim and Sophie Reboud.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 384 p. $170.00Mazzarol (U. of Western Australia Business School, Australia) andReboud (Burgundy School of Business, France) explore the theory andpractice of strategy and planning by owner-managers of small, inde-pendently owned and operated firms, arguing that strategy and planningis a key factor in the growth and innovative capacity of small firms.Their conceptual structure for the discussion is founded on a strategicgrowth of small firms framework that addresses the personal character-istics of entrepreneurship; innovation; strategic networking partnershipsand alliances; strategic growth options; and the “strategic triangle” ofstrategy, structure, and resources, combined with an operational man-agement framework that focuses attention on the task environment inwhich the firm is operating, the firm’s organizational configuration, andthe managerial characteristics of owners and managers. These frame-works are applied to analysis of two quantitative data sources: a ques-tionnaire survey of 204 Australian owner-managers of small firmsconcerned with the strategic management areas of focus and direction,customer orientation, strategic partnering, personality and culture,quality, and systems and a benchmarking database of 112 small firmsthat deals with the managerial activity areas of management intent,strategy and innovation, marketing and sales management, customerinterface, external integration, products, quality, operations, financialmanagement and reporting, process capability, internal integration, andmanagement information.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –108–

HD62 2009-930870 978-1-84844-085-2TTeemmppoorraarryy oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnss;; pprreevvaalleennccee,, llooggiicc aannddeeffffeeccttiivveenneessss..Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick Kenis et al.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 287 p. $135.00Defining temporary organizations as “two or more non-temporary organ-izations collaborating to accomplish a joint task with the duration of thecollaboration explicitly and ex ante fixed,” the editors (all of Tilburg U.,the Netherlands) suggest that they are under-analyzed and not wellunderstood as a unique form of organization. They present ten papersassessing and contributing to the understanding of temporary organiza-tions within the field of organization studies. Opening papers reviewcurrent research approaches and understandings, while later papersexplore such topics as the impact of temporariness on the functioningand performance of organizations, implications for goal attainment andlegitimacy, structures of temporary organizations, resource dilemmas oftemporary organizations, and innovation in temporary organizations.

HD62 2009936381 978-1-84542-654-5UUnnmmaasskkiinngg tthhee eennttrreepprreenneeuurr..Jones, Campbell and André Spicer.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 139 p. $100.00Jones (management, U. of Liecester, U.K.) and Spicer (industrial relationsand organizational behavior, U. of Warwick, U.K.) push aside the tradi-tional shiny image of the entrepreneur as a massive success with aprivate jet. Instead, they focus on what they see as a more realisticpicture: failed enterprises with the unfortunate entrepreneur suffering avariety of consequences, and sometimes descending to the point of livingon the street. The more “dismal” of them could be bankrupt, swindlers,and small time criminals, for example. The authors draw on a variety ofsources, from philosophical writings to critical social theory. Topicsinclude a critical theory of entrepreneurship, the birth of the entre-preneur, and entrepreneurial excess. The entrepreneur, they contend, isnot necessarily the astute businessman in a sharp suit but more likely tobe an ambiguous, paradoxical character far removed from the stereo-types.

HD69 2009-028028 978-81-321-0229-899 bbrraanndd sshhaaaassttrraass;; nniinnee ssuucccceessssffuull bbrraanndd ssttrraatteeggiieess ttoobbuuiilldd wwiinnnniinngg bbrraannddss,, 22dd eedd..Kapoor, Jagdeep.Sage Publications, ©2009 91 p. $25.95 (pa)Kapoor (chairman and managing director, Samsika MarketingConsultants Pvt Ltd, India) provides a revised second edition of his slimvolume on how to create winning brands. His nine shaastras (literallytranslated as sciences) illustrates his findings and instruction against abackdrop of current and relevant Indian examples from a variety ofindistries. This second edition offers more brand examples and the mostcurrent trends as seen through strategic analysis. The book is a step-by-step guide written in an evocative, conversational manner.

HD69 2009-045216 978-0-321-52561-1AAddaappttiivvee pprroojjeecctt ffrraammeewwoorrkk;; mmaannaaggiinngg ccoommpplleexxiittyy iinn tthheeffaaccee ooff uunncceerrttaaiinnttyy..Wysocki, Robert K.Addison-Wesley, ©2010 355 p. $44.99 (pa)Wysocki (project management consultant and founder, EnterpriseInformation Insights, Inc.) observes that traditional project managementpractices have, for the most part, outlived their usefulness. Advances inthe profession have changed the landscape as have changes in businesspractices, technology, and competition. The book is written for a wideaudience: project and program managers, software and product devel-opers, process designers, business analysts, and more. The author walksthe reader through an initial overview and through all of the stepsrequired to effectively manage a project, including extreme projects thatdo not follow accepted change management practices.

HD69 2004-056438 978-1-4391-7201-8BBrraanndd sseennssee;; sseennssoorryy sseeccrreettss bbeehhiinndd tthhee ssttuuffff wwee bbuuyy..((rreepprriinntt,, 22000055))Lindstrom, Martin.Free Press, ©2010 175 p. $15.00 (pa)In this updated paperback edition of the 2005 edition, Lindstrom(Buyology) explains how sensory aspects of products seduce consumers.Based on his global sensory branding research, the marketing expertpresents examples of how companies tempt us to purchase everythingfrom foods to computers and services by appealing to our senses and theneed for ritual and belonging. His Smash Your Brand test assesseswhether brand appeal is still sustainable even if a product’s features arechanged.

HD69 2009-037541 978-1-58115-672-0EEmmoottiioonnaall bbrraannddiinngg;; tthhee nneeww ppaarraaddiiggmm ffoorr ccoonnnneeccttiinnggbbrraannddss ttoo ppeeooppllee,, rreevv.. eedd..Gobé, Marc.Allworth Press, ©2009 325 p. $19.95 (pa)Designer, filmmaker, and writer Gobé is with Emotional Branding, LLC,a New York-based experimental think tank and consulting firm focusingon creating content for online experiences; he is a frequent speaker attrade association conferences and guest at universities in the US andEurope. Originally published in 2001, Gobé’s text focuses on three pow-erful generations—Baby Boomers, Gen X, and Gen Y—as it explores themeans and methodology for connecting products to the consumer in anemotionally profound way. In addition to a new chapter on social mediaand an updated report on advertising and the challenges advertisers face,the 2009 revised edition features discussion about the role of social mediain electing Barack Obama as president, how the idea behind Twitter istransforming society, and why new generations are reinventing business,commerce, and management using the power of the Web.

HD69 2009924030 978-0-87263-861-7FFrroomm ccoonncceepptt ttoo ccuussttoommeerr;; ppoorrttffoolliioo,, ppiippeelliinnee,, aannddssttrraatteeggiicc pprroojjeecctt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..Termini, Michael J.Society of Mfg. Engineers, ©2009 458 p. $72.00Termini, president and CEO of The Consulting Alliance Group, Inc. andexecutive management veteran, offers a proven, sound approach toproject management from beginning to end. Suitable for novice and expe-rienced project managers, the book’s topics include: portfolio andpipeline management, project proposal development, setting measurableexpectations, managing relationships, communications management,budgeting and cost management, risk management, quality and com-pliance, tactical project management planning tools, and contingencyplanning and trade-off analyses. Case studies are featured throughout.

HD69 2009-031666 978-1-4398-1605-9IImmpplleemmeennttiinngg pprrooggrraamm mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; tteemmppllaatteess aannddffoorrmmss aalliiggnneedd wwiitthh tthhee SSttaannddaarrdd ffoorr pprrooggrraamm mmaannaaggeemmeenntt,,22dd eedd.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Levin, Ginger and Allen R. Green.Auerbach Publications, ©2010 294 p. $79.95This book/CD-ROM set for new and experienced program managerspresents a step-by-step protocol for applying the 2008 second edition ofthe Project Management Institute’s Standard for Program Management, inall industries. The book includes practical details on many of the ele-ments referenced in the Standard, as well as material on related topics.Templates, forms, documents, and reports from the book can be cus-tomized and printed from the companion CD-ROM. Levin teaches projectmanagement at the University of Wisconsin-Platteville. Green is presidentof the North Carolina chapter of the Project Management Institute. Thebook is distributed in the US by Taylor & Francis.

HD69 978-1-890367-52-7PPMMPP eexxaamm;; pprraaccttiiccee tteesstt aanndd ssttuuddyy gguuiiddee,, 88tthh eedd..Ward, LeRoy J. and Ginger Levin.ESI International, ©2009 373 p. $44.98 (pa)This wire-comb-bound study guide for students preparing for the projectmanagement professional (PMP) certification exam provides 40 multiple-choice practice questions in each of the nine knowledge areas covered inthe fourth edition of A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge(The PMBOK Guide), plus 40 questions in the area of professional andsocial responsibility, for a total of 400 questions. The book’s 200-questionpractice test does not repeat any of the study guide’s questions.Rationales for correct answers are given, with each rationale providing areference to one or more of the six major project management domains.Special care has been taken to make sure that the practice test andexplained answers are written in terms equally accessible to those whoare not fluent in English. To reflect the current exam, this eighth editionincludes many scenario-based questions, and eliminates many of thepurely definitional questions. Ward is executive vice president of ESIInternational. Levin is a consultant and educator in project management.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–109–

HD69 978-0-470-27872-7PPrroojjeecctt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt wwoorrkkbbooookk aanndd PPMMPP//CCAAPPMM eexxaammssttuuddyy gguuiiddee,, 1100tthh eedd..Kerzner, Harold and Frank P. Saladis.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 460 p. $75.00 (pa)This workbook is intended for students in project management as a com-panion to the primary textbook Project Management: A Systems Approachto Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling, Tenth Edition. The tenth editionof the workbook includes exercises and homework problems as well asPMP edam study aids, situational exercises, and sample questions similarto those that might be found on the PMP exam. Authors are Kerzner(project, program, and portfolio management, International Institute ofLearning) and Saladis (senior consultant and trainer, InternationalInstitute of Learning).

HD69 2009-018575 978-0-470-48731-0PPuubblliicc--sseeccttoorr pprroojjeecctt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; mmeeeettiinngg tthhee cchhaalllleennggeessaanndd aacchhiieevviinngg rreessuullttss..Wirick, David W.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 270 p. $85.00Wirick (John Glenn School of Public Affairs, Ohio State U.) addresses thechallenges of managing public sector projects at a time when demandsfor more project managers—and more skilled project managers—per-meate every level of government, from local to national levels. The authorintroduces proven project management methods and tools, as well as thehard and soft skills necessary to negotiate and guide successful projects.Several high-profile projects are explored as illustrations: Project Apollo,the creation of the Peace Corps, the post-World War II Marshall Plan, andthe Manhattan Project among others. Some topics include: critical successfactors, software in project management, project process groups, thebasics of project quality management, human resource management, andmanaging changes and expectations in the vendor relationship.

HD70 978-90-420-2735-0BBeeyyoonndd PPeerreessttrrooiikkaa;; aaxxiioollooggyy aanndd tthhee nneeww RRuussssiiaanneennttrreepprreenneeuurrss..Gallopin, Gary G. (Value inquiry book series; v.210)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 361 p. $106.00Based on field work conducted in the Soviet Union/Russian Federationbetween July 1991 and November 1993 and already used by Gallopin(anthropology, College of Dupage) to produce his doctoral thesis on socialnetworks of Russian entrepreneurs, this work applies formal axiology,the mathematical study of values, to the material and synthesizes socialnetwork analysis and value analysis in order to understand what droveRussian entrepreneurs as they navigated the transition from the SovietUnion to the Russian Federation. In his study he found several recurringthemes related to Russian strategies of survival, the cultural legacies ofserfdom, the idea of a national work ethic, and the separation betweenpublic and private life.

HD70 2009-038680 978-0-313-36519-5IInnssiiddee tthhee CChhiinneessee bbuussiinneessss mmiinndd;; aa ttaaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ffoorrmmaannaaggeerrss..Sun, Ted.Praeger, ©2010 191 p. $34.95Sun, who teaches management at SMC U., an online university inSwitzerland, circulated a survey to a number of executives in the US andChina titled ‘values-beliefs survey’. He has extrapolated this book fromthe results, offering as well his own personal experiences as someonefrom China. Leadership principles and management principles aredescribed alongside basic explanations about Chinese culture, people,and their views about business and other relationships.

HD75 2009-030857 978-0-415-87332-1CCoonntteessttiinngg ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; ccrriittiiccaall ssttrruugggglleess ffoorr ssoocciiaallcchhaannggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Philip McMichael. (Contemporary sociologicalperspectives)Routledge, ©2010 269 p. $39.95 (pa)Case studies illustrate resistance to Western hegemony in local commu-nities around the world, and are intended to be used in a course on thesociology of development. Among them are contesting liquor productionand material distress in rural India, biodiversity conservation and pas-toral visions in Pakistan’s Northern Areas, contesting agricultural narra-tives in northern Malawi, corporate mobilization on the soybean frontierof Mato Grosso in Brazil, and self-determination and anti-military baseactivism in Okinawa.

HD75 2009-936229 978-1-84844-413-3MMuullttiinnaattiioonnaall eenntteerrpprriisseess aanndd tthhee cchhaalllleennggee ooff ssuussttaaiinnaabblleeddeevveellooppmmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by John R. McIntyre et al.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 313 p. $140.00Applying a diverse range of analytical frameworks to the question, 15papers explore the decision-making and organizational practices ofmultinational corporations with regards to sustainable development inthe context of globalization. The papers address the interaction of eco-nomic, political, cultural, and legal factors. Editors McIntyre (man-agement and international affairs, Georgia Institute of Technology, US),S. Vianaj (information systems, ICN Business School, France), and V.Ivanaj (management science, Institut National Polytechinque de Lorraine,U. of Nancy, France) have organized them into three sections addressingthe strategy process of multinationals within frameworks of corporategovernance; corporate strategy and assessment issues related to supplychain management, multinationals in the European Union, and sus-tainable development measurement and metrics; and the discourse ofsustainable development within the firm and the connections betweenrhetoric and practice.

HD75 2009-035625 978-0-415-87675-9TTrraannssiittiioonnss ttoo ssuussttaaiinnaabbllee ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; nneeww ddiirreeccttiioonnss iinntthhee ssttuuddyy ooff lloonngg tteerrmm ttrraannssffoorrmmaattiivvee cchhaannggee..Grin, John et al. (Routledge studies in sustainability transitions)Routledge, ©2010 397 p. $50.00Fill a gap they found in both the academic and technical literature onsustainable development, a team of researchers in political, policy, andtechnical fields, discuss the dynamics and governance of long-term trans-formative change. They approach transitions from the three angles ofcomplex systems analysis, sociology, and governance, which are also thepillars underlying the Dutch Knowledge Network on System Innovationsand Transitions, which they founded in 2005. Among their topics are atypology of transition pathways, a conceptual framework for analyzingtransitions, the Dutch energy transition, modernization processes inDutch agriculture since 1886, and lessons for further research.

HD111 2009-030972 978-0-07-160909-8GGrreeeenniinngg BBrroowwnnffiieellddss;; rreemmeeddiiaattiioonn tthhrroouugghh ssuussttaaiinnaabblleeddeevveellooppmmeenntt..Sarni, William.McGraw-Hill, ©2010 303 p. $79.95Sarni (business and technical sustainability solutions consultant) pro-vides practical approaches to reclaiming and revitalizing unused parcelsof land previously discarded. Those parcels, frequently contaminated, arethe brownfields of the book’s title and are becoming more valuable asavenues to house a growing urban population, cut sprawl, enhance taxrevenues and real estate value, and promote truly sustainable culture andlifestyles. The author explores the issue from the local to the global levelwith a practical, down-to-earth analytical style. He discusses the regu-lators and regulation, incentives, case studies, land planning, greenbuilding, and frameworks for greening brownfields.

HD1375 2009-019839 978-1-4051-5128-3GGlloobbaall ttrreennddss iinn rreeaall eessttaattee ffiinnaannccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Graeme Newell and Karen Sieracki. (Realestate issues)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 290 p. $129.00Despite significant reductions in global property investment in 2008,cross-border transactions still make up about 32% of the estimated $1trillion a year in commercial property transactions. An increasingamount of this is taking place within the context of real estate investmenttrusts (REITs), which now exist in twenty countries. This is accompaniedby an increase in the number of global property securities funds, thedevelopment of property derivatives, and growth in sophisticatedproperty financing products. Emerging markets have also improved theirmarket transparency, legal frameworks and financial structures. Thisbook explores all of these issues, taking a true global perspective on realestate investment, with chapters specifically focused on Asia, Central andEastern Europe, and Shariah-compliant investment in the Islamic world.Edited by Newell (property investment, U. of Western Sydney) andSieracki (owner, KASPAR Associates, Ltd.), it contains articles written byprofessionals from both academia and private industry.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –110–

HD1691 2009-018916 978-1-4398-0900-6GGrroouunndd wwaatteerr eeccoonnoommiiccss..Job, Charles A.CRC Press, ©2010 661 p. $139.95This volume makes use of micro- and macroeconomic analysis to discusseconomic valuation and cost-benefit analysis of groundwater in bothmarket and nonmarket settings. With a broader treatment than just eco-nomic considerations, it also touches on hydrogeology and engineering,sustainability and climate change, health concerns, planning and policyevaluation, legal and transboundary issues, and societal acceptance ofmanagement options. Although it covers economic issues related to use,protection, remediation and conservation, it makes sure to consider thesewithin the context of the whole ecosystem. Includes eleven case studies,five of which take place outside of the United States.

HD1741 2009-412214 978-3-8258-1624-7IInnssttiittuuttiioonnaall cchhaannggee aanndd iirrrriiggaattiioonn mmaannaaggeemmeenntt iinnBBuurrkkiinnaa FFaassoo;; fflloowwiinngg ssttrruuccttuurreess aanndd ccoonnccrreettee ssttrruugggglleess..Schaaf, Charlotte van der. (ZEF development studies; v.11)LIT Verlag, ©2008 328 p. $51.50 (pa)A program officer with the United Nations Water Decade Programme onCapacity Development, Shaaf conducted research in the small WestAfrican country for 13 months investigating small reservoir water man-agement in Burkina Faso. She looks at how integrated water managementpolicies are implemented on the ground, and at the management of twoirrigation systems, emphasizing relationships between the state as andthe population, and the influence of that relationship on the functioningof the water users’ associations. Another concern is the impact of landreform law and changing land tenure arrangements on the security ofaccess and control rights to land within the irrigation system. The studywas accepted as her dissertation at the Johannes-Gutenberg-University inMainz, Germany in 2008. It is not indexed. Distributed in North Americaby Transaction Publishers.

HD1761 2009-015508 978-1-4398-0973-0AApppplliieedd rriisskk mmaannaaggeemmeenntt iinn aaggrriiccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Dana L. Hoag.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 403 p. $79.95Although this book is edited by Hoag (agricultural and resource eco-nomics, Colorado State U.) he also participates in the writing of most ofthe chapters. This makes it less a collection of separate articles than acohesive outline of how to go about risk management in agriculture. Theheart of the book covers each of the ten steps involved in making use ofa strategic planning framework in building a risk management plan andbegins with an example of its application to a real farm. Six laterchapters explore advanced and customized risk management pro-gramming and the book is supported by the Risk Navigator SRM Website. Appropriate for both farmers and students focused on the businessside of agriculture, it contains a detailed breakdown of the contents foreach chapter and a well-constructed index.

HD2341 2009-038789 978-0-470-50362-1TThhee mmoosstt ssuucccceessssffuull ssmmaallll bbuussiinneessss iinn tthhee wwoorrlldd;; tthhee tteennpprriinncciipplleess..Gerber, Michael E.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 162 p. $24.95Gerber, author of 13 business books, presents 10 principles that will helpentrepreneurs start new businesses that can expand services and remainprofitable through all economic conditions, rather than businesses thatget stuck repeating the same service. He gives guidelines for instilling asense of purpose in the business, in employees, and in customers, andshows how the business can become a center of growth and learning foremployees. There is no subject index.

HD2358 2009-041628 978-0-313-35111-2TThhee AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaann eennttrreepprreenneeuurr;; tthheenn aanndd nnooww..Rogers, W. Sherman.Praeger, ©2010 316 p. $44.95Sometimes the best alternative for people who experience persistent dif-ficulty in finding employment is to start a business and hire themselves,says Rogers (law, Howard U.), but many of them lack the confidence, thecapital, or the knowledge to start, operate, and grow a new company. Heoffers help for African Americans in that situation, first with the confi-dence part by highlighting amazing success stories of black entrepre-neurs from the 1600s to the present. Especially this section, he says, couldserve as a supplemental text for courses in history, business, economics,or the social sciences. Then he sets out practical information that readerscan use to increase their chances of achieving entrepreneurial success.Among these are developing ideas, building a business plan, raisingcapital, tax matters, and estate planning. Praeger is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

HD2365 2009-047047 978-0-230-23550-2TThhee hhaannddbbooookk ooff gglloobbaall oouuttssoouurrcciinngg aanndd ooffffsshhoorriinngg..Oshri, Ilan et al.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 266 p. $39.95Oshri (strategic management, Rotterdam School of ManagementErasmus, the Netherlands), Kotlarsky (information systems and man-agement, Warwick Business School, UK), and Willcocks (technology workand globalization, London School of Economics and Political Science, UK)explore key issues for clients and vendors in information technology andbusiness process outsourcing. They first explore the historical back-ground and the current market for sourcing, the types of technology andprocesses that can be sourced globally and the various associatedsourcing arrangements, and the geographical aspect of sourcing deci-sions. They then provide analysis of how to build vendor capabilities, therole of expertise and knowledge from both the vendor and client per-spectives, and the vendor selection strategy from the viewpoint of clients.They later address managing sourcing relationships in terms of the out-sourcing life-cycle and its key activities, governance of outsourcingprojects, and the management of globally distributed teams. Finally, theyreview recent trends and emerging issues.

HD2741 2009-004643 978-1-60741-141-3CCooddeess ooff ggoooodd ggoovveerrnnaannccee aarroouunndd tthhee wwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Felix J. Lopez Iturriaga. (Business issues, com-petition and entrepreneurship)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 577 p. $79.00Edited by Lopez-Iturriaga (financial economics, U. of Valladolid), thisvolume starts off with an essay exploring questions such as the extent ofworldwide diffusion of good codes, whether or not they are convergingon the Anglo-Saxon model, standards of mandatory or voluntary firmcompliance, and exploration of country-level and firm-level considera-tions. It then contains twenty technical pieces exploring aspects of cor-porate governance in the United States and countries in South America,Europe and Asia. Although full of useful information, one suspects it washastily put together. Terms in the index such as brothers, relationship,relationships, or composition show that some type of automatic indexingwas used. In one case the index shows that both statutory and socialistcan be found on page 234, but that page is actually blank.

HD2741 2009-936235 978-1-84844-796-7DDooeess ccoommppaannyy oowwnneerrsshhiipp mmaatttteerr??Title main entry. Ed. by Jean-Philippe Touffut. (The Cournot Centre ofEconomic Study series)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 235 p. $115.00Six papers, presented by Touffut (director, Cournot Centre for EconomicStudies, France), explore the influences of types of company ownershipon modes of management, macroeconomic performance, and decision-making processes from economic, historical, and legal perspectives.Specifically, the papers discuss a statistical and econometric test of twotheories concerning the influence of the mode of control on macroeco-nomic performance, the macroeconomic impact of corporate capitalstructures, the typology of shareholders in France, the legal theorybehind the idea of shareholder supremacy, convergence in the share-holder systems of Britain and France, and multi-stakeholder corporategovernance as it related to corporate social responsibility. Also includedis a round table discussion of shareholder rights in European corpora-tions and their impact on economic performance.

HD2746 2007-943245 978-1-84787-057-5MMeerrggeerrss aanndd aaccqquuiissiittiioonnss;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey A. Krug. (SAGE library in business andmanagement)Sage Publications, ©2008 1104 p. $825.00In selecting the 58 articles to include in this three-volume overview ofresearch into the “soft side” issues of mergers and acquisitions (i.e. qual-itative issues such as analysis of acquisition candidates, merger negotia-tions, decision-making processes, and post-merger integration), Krug(strategic management and international business, VirginiaCommonwealth U.) sought to minimize the number of articles from themost widely read journals, thinking that including important pieces fromless well-known sources and authors would make a greater contribution.The first volume consists of five sections that deal with introductory def-initions and concepts; the motives of mergers and acquisitions; theo-retical determinants of mergers and acquisitions; hubris, agency costs,and the market for corporate control; and merger and acquisition waves.The second volume is devoted to the merger and acquisition process andcontains sections discussing corporate strategy and mergers and acquisi-tions, acquisition planning and analysis; acquisition decision making;and post merger employee effects. The final volume includes sections onpost-merger top management team effects, merger integration, determi-nants of merger performance, and best practices. The papers were pub-lished between 1965 and 2007—most are from the 1980s forward.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–111–

HD2746 2009-048038 978-1-4221-3111-4PPrrooffiitt ffrroomm tthhee ccoorree;; aa rreettuurrnn ttoo ggrroowwtthh iinn ttuurrbbuulleennttttiimmeess..Zook, Chris.Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2010 178 p. $29.95An updated edition of the 2001 classic, this book continues to presentideas about keeping your company’s focus on the core business, but withmore recent examples within the context of today’s economic situation.Zook and Allen, co-leaders of Bain & Company’s Global Strategy practice,outline how to clearly define your core, assess how it is operating, anddiscover hidden assets that already exist within it. They devote a laterchapter to the vital step of adjacency expansion, but explain how tochoose carefully and avoid common pitfalls. Due to rapid technologicalchange, a redefinition of the core is also increasingly necessary and thebook devotes a chapter to this challenge.

HD2755 2009933359 978-1-84376-592-9HHaannddbbooookk oonn ssmmaallll nnaattiioonnss iinn tthhee gglloobbaall eeccoonnoommyy;; tthheeccoonnttrriibbuuttiioonn ooff mmuullttiinnaattiioonnaall eenntteerrpprriisseess ttoo nnaattiioonnaalleeccoonnoommiicc ssuucccceessss..Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Van Den Bulcke et al.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 277 p. $170.00Van Den Bulcke (emeritus, international management and development,U. of Antwerp, Belgimu), Verbeke (management, U. of Calgary, Canada),and Yuan (international business, U. of Lethbridge, Canada) presentcountry case studies that review the evidence for the main thesis of thebook, which is that small nations increasingly need to rely on both home-grown and foreign multinational enterprises in order to achieve successin industries characterized by international competition, as these firmsaugment the “domestic diamond” of factor conditions; demand condi-tions; related and supporting industries; and strategy, structure, andrivalry. The cases were chosen with regards to indicators of sustainablehigh production and employment per capita vis-à-vis other nations inspecific industries. For each case, contributors discuss the strengths ofthe national economy in terms of the “domestic diamond” determinantsfor successful industries, explore the role of inward and outward foreigndirect investment (FDI) and multinational enterprise activity in theseindustries, examine domestic clustering in the industry and its con-nection to multinational activity, and considers the impact of governmentpolicy concerning FDI flows. The countries studied are the Netherlands,Belgium, Ireland, Slovenia, Denmark, Finland, Norway, Canada, Chile,Mauritius, New Zealand, and Cambodia.

HD2755 2009-011621 978-0-8047-6240-3MMuullttiinnaattiioonnaall ccoorrppoorraattiioonnss aanndd gglloobbaall jjuussttiiccee;; hhuummaannrriigghhttss oobblliiggaattiioonnss ooff aa qquuaassii--ggoovveerrnnmmeennttaall iinnssttiittuuttiioonn..Wettstein, Florian.Stanford U. Press, ©2009 410 p. $65.00Wettstein (ethics and business law, U. of St. Thomas) addresses the nor-mative obligations of multinational corporations within a framework ofrights-based global justice. After setting out his theory of rights-basedglobal justice and assessing the means of determining the normativeagents of justice based on concepts of power and authority, he puts fortha case for understanding multinational corporations as quasi-govern-mental organizations that have gained political power, especially duringthe neoliberal era, and therefore have assumed normative obligationstowards justice. He elaborates these obligations and contrasts hisapproach to three current approaches to interpreting corporate responsi-bilities: the neoclassical business model, conventional concepts of cor-porate social responsibility and corporate citizenship, and the currentdebate on business and human rights.

HD2755 2009-038117 978-0-268-04234-9VVaalluueess--bbaasseedd mmuullttiinnaattiioonnaall mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; aacchhiieevviinnggeenntteerrpprriissee ssuussttaaiinnaabbiilliittyy tthhrroouugghh aa hhuummaann rriigghhttss ssttrraatteeggyy..Tavis, Lee A. and Timothy M. Tavis.U. of Notre Dame Press, ©2009 347 p. $38.00 (pa)Given the globalization of business enterprises, the loss of policy freedomon the part of the nation state, and the slow emergence of internationalgovernance, this volume argues that it is up to multinational managersto take a proactive role in supporting universal human rights. Co-writtenby a professor emeritus of finance and a private practitioner holding aPh.D. in psychology, it makes the case that corporate social responsibility,along with partnership with non-governmental organizations (NGOs), isultimately in a corporation’s interest. It explores in-depth the UnitedNations Global Compact and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights,while also touching on socially responsible investing and Catholic socialthought. But it regularly returns to the need for corporate leaders toconsider ethical issues as part of their planning.

HD2756 2009-033701 978-1-4221-2481-9SSeeiizziinngg tthhee wwhhiittee ssppaaccee;; bbuussiinneessss mmooddeell iinnnnoovvaattiioonn ffoorrggrroowwtthh aanndd rreenneewwaall..Johnson, Mark W.Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2010 208 p. $29.95Johnson, cofounder and chairman of a strategic innovation consultingcompany, focuses not so much on the development of new technologiesand products as on the implementation of new business models. A suc-cessful business model depends on four aspects—a customer value propo-sition (CVR), a profit formula, and the key resources and processes thatneed to be in place in order to deliver value to the customer. Building onthis simple model, Johnson explores, using a number of case studies,how companies can move into transforming existing markets, creatingnew markets, and emerging in a strong position from times of industryupheaval.

HD3611 2009-048893 978-1-933116-78-5CCoommppaarriinngg ppuubblliicc ppoolliicciieess;; iissssuueess aanndd cchhooiicceess iinniinndduussttrriiaalliizzeedd ccoouunnttrriieess,, 22dd eedd..Adolino, Jessica R. and Charles H. Blake.CQ Press, ©2011 463 p. $49.95 (pa)The authors (professors of political science at James Madison U.) presentthe new edition of their textbook for courses on comparative publicpolicy at the undergraduate level. Adding coverage of the EuropeanUnion to the previous edition’s coverage of the United States, Japan,Germany, France, the United Kingdom, and Italy (as well as cross-national trends), the volume’s chapters discuss common policy problems,policy options, and policy dynamics in the realms of immigration policy,fiscal policy, taxation policy, health care policy, social policy, educationpolicy, and environmental policy. They also offer introductory infor-mation for readers with little previous knowledge of the general politicsand policy-making contexts of the governments under discussion or withthe conceptual schools associated with the study of policy.

HD3860 2009-027970 978-0-8213-8062-8PPuubblliicc pprrooccuurreemmeenntt ooff eenneerrggyy eeffffiicciieennccyy sseerrvviicceess;; lleessssoonnssffrroomm iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall eexxppeerriieennccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Jas Singh et al.The World Bank, ©2010 234 p. $30.00 (pa)Energy savings performance contracts (ESPCs) allow public agencies tosolicit various technical solutions and mobilize commercial financingfrom third parties. This work presents the results of a 2008-09 study onESPCs, undertaken by the Energy Sector Management AssistanceProgram in the World Bank’s Energy, Transport and Water Department.The study begins with background on barriers to energy efficiency in thepublic sector, then surveys models for public ESPC procurement,overviews the ESPC process, and describes key public procurement issuesand options. Six case studies from the US, Canada, France, Germany,Japan, and India highlight the benefits of ESPCs in areas includingbudgeting, energy audits, and bid evaluation. The study concludes by rec-ommending a flexible process in which procurement procedures are tai-lored to a country or public agency. Two appendices list characteristicsof World Bank and non-World Bank projects in 2000-2009. Singh is affil-iated with the Energy Sector Management Assistance Program.

HD4465 2009-019190 978-0-8213-7956-1PPuubblliicc--pprriivvaattee ppaarrttnneerrsshhiippss ffoorr uurrbbaann wwaatteerr uuttiilliittiieess;; aarreevviieeww ooff eexxppeerriieenncceess iinn ddeevveellooppiinngg ccoouunnttrriieess..Marin, Philippe. (Trends and policy opitions; no.8)The World Bank, ©2009 191 p. $28.00 (pa)For government policy makers and donors and other stakeholders,Marin, a water and sanitation specialist in the Energy, Transport, andWater department of the Sustainable Development Network of the WorldBank, examines the access, service quality, operational efficiency, andtariff levels of about 65 large water public-private partnership projects(PPPs) in different regions from 1990 to 2007, with an aim to improveunderstanding of how to tackle challenges of providing water and sani-tation services to urban populations in the developing world. He focuseson projects in which a private operator is introduced to run the utilityand reviews the spread of urban PPPs to see whether and how theyimproved services and expanded access, as well as how governments canbetter use private initiatives to improve water supply and sanitationservices in the developing world. The report synthesizes informationfrom a study carried out by the Water Anchor of the Energy, Transport,and Water department of the World Bank, in partnership with the Public-Private Infrastructure Advisory Facility, between 2006 and 2008. It doesnot cover contracts limited to bulk facilities for construction, financing,and operation of water purification and wastewater treatment plants ortechnical assistance and service contracts.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –112–

HD4964 2009-004107 978-0-7611-5137-111,,000011 tthhiinnggss tthheeyy wwoonn’’tt tteellll yyoouu;; aann iinnssiiddeerr’’ss gguuiiddee ttoossppeennddiinngg,, ssaavviinngg,, aanndd lliivviinngg wwiisseellyy..Dahl, Jonathan.Workman Pub. Co. Inc., ©2009 536 p. $16.95 (pa)Based on the “10 Things” column in Smart Money, the finance magazineof The Wall Street Journal, its editor-in-chief shares common retail/serviceprovider “oversights” and advice regarding consumer choices in areasincluding: the home, children’s education, shopping, banking, mailservice, healthcare, eating out, travel, news and entertainment. A one-year subscription to Smart Money is available for a limited time withbook purchase.

HD5109 2009-032784 978-0-8014-7585-6WWoorrkkppllaaccee fflleexxiibbiilliittyy;; rreeaalliiggnniinngg 2200tthh--cceennttuurryy jjoobbss ffoorr aa2211sstt--cceennttuurryy wwoorrkkffoorrccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen Christensen and Barbara Schneider.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 408 p. $24.95 (pa)The nursery rhyme might still go something like “This little parent goesto work, and this little parent stays home,” but the reality is very dif-ferent now, with the rise of dual-earner households, single parent/earnerhouseholds, and older couples facing joint retirement. Sociologists,anthropologists, economists, employment lawyers, and others explore21st-century workers and family life, the misfit between old workplacesand a new workforce, voluntary employer practices of workplace flexi-bility in the US, and workplace flexibility practices from abroad. Amongspecific topics are multitasking among working families as a strategy fordealing with the time squeeze, working families coming together atdinner, keeping engaged parents on the road to success, elderly laborsupply, employers who permit work hour reductions for childcare, USfamily-hostile public policy, parents’ experiences of flexible work arrange-ments in changing European workplaces, and flexible employment andthe introduction of work-life balance programs in Japan.

HD5701 978-87-574-2049-4TThhee nneeww ggoovveerrnnaannccee aanndd iimmpplleemmeennttaattiioonn ooff llaabboouurrmmaarrkkeett ppoolliicciieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Flemming Larsen and Rik Van Berkel.DJOEF Publishing, ©2009 203 p. $44.00 (pa)Mostly European scholars of labor studies examine how labor marketpolitics are governed, what new forms of governance have been intro-duced in various countries, why operational reforms and changes in gov-ernance structure now seem to dominate the employment and socialpolicy area, and the rationales behind the current institutional reforms.Teasing out international trends from previous studies of individualEuropean countries, they analyze in turn the tendency to dissolve thepublic employment services, attempts to marketize the services, theimpacts of institutional reforms on the implementation of employmentservices, and alternative governance mechanisms and strategies. There isno index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HD5764 2009-936234 978-1-84844-761-5TThhee iinntteeggrraattiioonn ooff EEuurrooppeeaann llaabboouurr mmaarrkkeettss..Title main entry. Ed. by Ewald Nowotny et al.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 301 p. $140.00European integration is leading to an increasingly relaxed regulation oflabor mobility within the European Union, but even without significantlabor mobility the opening up of borders could generate significanteffects on wages and employment, observe the editors (all of theOesterreichische Nationalbank, Austria) in their preface to this collectionof 13 papers exploring the relationship between integration and labormarkets, particularly as it impacts the decision-making of central banks.The papers are organized into sections examining the effects of migrationon labor markets, European migration after European Unionenlargement, and labor markets and trade integration.

HD5764 2009-936765 978-1-84844-478-2TThhee llaabboouurr mmaarrkkeett ttrriiaannggllee;; eemmppllooyymmeenntt pprrootteeccttiioonn,,uunneemmppllooyymmeenntt ccoommppeennssaattiioonn aanndd aaccttiivvaattiioonn iinn EEuurrooppee..Title main entry. Ed. by Paul de Beer and Trudie Schils. (Globalizationand welfare)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 238 p. $115.00This study examines strengths and weaknesses of social policy instru-ments in seven European countries, focusing on their unique combina-tions of unemployment insurance, employment protection, and activelabor market policies in the search for a balance between a functioninglabor market and protection for workers. Contributors in social policy,sociology, and economics go beyond simple statistical indicators ofsuccess, and examine administration and implementation of socialpolicy. Introductory and concluding chapters bring together results fromthe country studies and draw some general conclusions about the effec-tiveness of social policy. The book’s readership includes academics insocial policy research, as well as policy advisers and practitioners andrepresentatives of trade unions, employee associations, and politicalparties. De Beer teaches industrial relations at the University ofAmsterdam, The Netherlands. Schils teaches economics at MaastrichtUniversity, The Netherlands.

HD6054 2009-039703 978-0-313-37666-5TThhee nneexxtt ggeenneerraattiioonn ooff wwoommeenn lleeaaddeerrss;; wwhhaatt yyoouu nneeeedd ttoolleeaadd bbuutt wwoonn’’tt lleeaarrnn iinn bbuussiinneessss sscchhooooll..Rezvani, Selena.Praeger, ©2010 181 p. $29.95The author, a consultant and speaker on women and leadership, drawson interviews with 30 female executives, including the president of theLos Angeles Dodgers, the president of Saks Direct at Saks Fifth Avenue,and the chair of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, toglean advice for women on succeeding in the business world. Eachchapter is organized by theme: preparing for and finding the right job,building a network, asking for what you want, navigating office politics,balancing work and personal life, and long-term career planning. Anappendix of interview questions is included.

HD6054 978-81-7708-221-0WWoommeenn eemmppoowweerrmmeenntt;; tthhrroouugghh wwoorrkk ppaarrttiicciippaattiioonn..Paul, Tinku.New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2009 180 p. $29.50Despite India’s growing economy, women in rural areas have been leftbehind. Paul (G.B. Pant Social Science Institute, Jhusi, Allahabad)examines female employment as a prescription for change. Drawing ondata from India’s Census and National Sample Survey Organization andher empirical study of working but undervalued and nonworkingwomen in several villages, she examines the concept of work partici-pation, factors affecting women’s entrepreneurship, and India’s provi-sions for the empowerment of women. Distributed in North America byISBS.

HD6072 978-0-8213-8190-8EEggyyppttiiaann wwoommeenn wwoorrkkeerrss aanndd eennttrreepprreenneeuurrss;; mmaaxxiimmiizziinnggooppppoorrttuunniittiieess iinn tthhee eeccoonnoommiicc sspphheerree..Title main entry. Ed. by Sahar Nasr. (Directions in development; privatesector)The World Bank, ©2010 78 p. $35.00 (pa)This work reports on a study conducted by the Egyptian Ministry ofInvestment and the National Council for Women, and sponsored by theWorld Bank. It analyzes factors that influence women’s participation inlabor market activities and entrepreneurship in Egypt, and gives recom-mendations for addressing gender inequalities in the country. Topicsinclude the manufacturing sector, sex segregation in Egypt, social safetynets, and lack of separate physical accommodations for women in theworkplace. Some suggestions include improving employment conditionsfor female workers, increasing women’s access to credit, and enhancingvocational training. The book will of interest to donors, NGOs, andresearchers.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–113–

HD6073 2009-004248 978-0-8014-7440-8CCoouunntteerr ccuullttuurree;; tthhee AAmmeerriiccaann ccooffffeeee sshhoopp wwaaiittrreessss..Taylor, Candacy A.Cornell U. Press, ©2009 142 p. $19.95 (pa)Being a former waitress herself, it’s not surprising that oralhistorian/photographer Taylor turned her attention to “lifers”—the over-50career waitresses who often are the heart and soul of a coffee shop ordiner. After conducting interviews with 57 waitresses in 38 cities andtowns across the U.S., the author found these women to be satisfied withtheir lives and proud of their job skills and occupation. Besides pre-senting portraits of some of these women (in both words and photos),Taylor looks at how female servers came to dominate coffee shops anddiners; at the nuts and bolts of waitressing; and at the stereotypes thatthe larger culture has about waitresses. Delightful, thought provoking,and generously illustrated with the author’s color photographs, this bookwill be appreciated by any reader who has eaten at a “real” diner.

HD6073 2009-050709 978-0-313-38274-1TTyyrraa BBaannkkss;; aa bbiiooggrraapphhyy..Jacobs, Carole. (Greenwood biographies)Greenwood Press, ©2010 180 p. $35.00For high school students and general readers, Jacobs, an editor, writer,and author who specializes in travel, health, fitness, and celebrities,presents a biography of model, TV show host and producer, business-woman, and actress Tyra Banks. She chronicles Banks’ childhood andrise as a supermodel; how she broke through barriers by becoming thefirst African American model on the cover of GQ, Sports Illustrated, andthe Victoria’s Secret catalog; her stint as a correspondent for OprahWinfrey’s show; how she is a role model for young girls through herscholarship funds, summer camps, and self-help book; and her creationof America’s Next Top Model and The Tyra Banks Show. She also discussesfights with the media over weight and other issues, her personal failures,and her interviews with politicians like Barack Obama and HilaryClinton.

HD6096 2009-039721 978-0-87417-813-5EEaarrnniinngg ppoowweerr;; wwoommeenn aanndd wwoorrkk iinn LLooss AAnnggeelleess,, 11888800--11993300..Wallis, Eileen V. (Urban west series)U. of Nevada Press, ©2010 248 p. $39.95Wallis (history, California State Polytechnic U., Pomona) pursues herinterest in the lives of women in the urban West by exploring womenand work in her own home town during the half century when it grewfrom a typical western town to one of the largest in the country. She dis-cusses women in white-collar work; servants and retail workers; workingwomen and the limits of welfare capitalism; race, class, and gender inunions; suffrage and politics in Los Angeles; immigrant women, work,and Americanization; and wartime, protest, and new industries.

HD6509 2009-047441 978-0-313-36488-4CCééssaarr CChháávveezz..Title main entry. Ed. by Ilan Stevans. (The Ilan Stavans library ofLatino civilization)Greenwood Press, ©2010 160 p. $55.00Noting that Chávez is still unknown to many Americans, Stavans (LatinAmerican and Latino culture, Amherst College) compiles 12 essays andfirst-person narratives that examine the multiple dimensions of laborleader, social justice advocate, Chicano leader, and humanitarian CésarChávez, for students, specialists, and general readers. The essays, byauthors and scholars of education, communication, and ethnic, Chicano,and religious studies from the US, first offer critical assessments ofChávez’s life in the context of the Civil Rights movement and the ChicanoMovement; analyze his ideas; then present personal reflections thatexplore his religiosity, his role as an “everyman,” his quest for justice,and the decline of the United Farm Workers union. Excerpts from PeterMatthiessen’s Sal Si Puedes: Cesar Chavez and the New American Revolutionand John Gregory Dunne’s Delano: The Story of the California Grape Strikeare included.

HD6519 2009-034828 978-0-8014-7580-1WWoorrkkiinngg ffoorr jjuussttiiccee;; tthhee LL..AA.. mmooddeell ooff oorrggaanniizziinngg aannddaaddvvooccaaccyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Ruth Milkman et al.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 296 p. $21.95 (pa)The volume emerged from an intensive two-year collaboration betweenscholars of sociology at the University of California and activists workingto advance the interests of low-wage workers there in Los Angeles. Theydescribe such aspects as organizing workers along ethnic lines at thePilipino Workers’ Center, building power for noncitizen citizenship at theMulti-Ethnic Immigrant Workers Organizing Network, progressivelawyering and the Los Angeles car wash campaign, the Garment WorkerCenter and the Forever 21 campaign, black community leaders andSEIU’s Los Angeles security unionization campaign, and the janitorialindustry and the Maintenance Cooperation Trust Fund.

HD6955 2009-930875 978-1-84844-164-4WWoorrkk aafftteerr gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn;; bbuuiillddiinngg ooccccuuppaattiioonnaallcciittiizzeennsshhiipp..Standing, Guy.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 366 p. $160.00Standing (economic security, U. of Bath, UK) argues that the era of“industrial citizenship,” outlined in Karl Polanyi’s The GreatTransformation (1944), has passed and that its emphasis on the rela-tionship between the employer and the employee needs to be shiftedtowards a new era of “occupational citizenship,” in which work will“consist largely of self-chosen activity, with individuals in control of theirdevelopment, in a community of kindred spirits with enough checks andbalances to limit exploitation and oppression of the vulnerable by thepowerful, and to avoid stifling conformity.” He describes the commodi-fication of labor and the global class structures that will shape “occupa-tional citizenship,” as well as the institutions and policies that willfacilitate it, particularly advocating for basic income security.

HD6957 2009-013892 978-1-84545-575-0WWoorrkk iinn aa mmooddeerrnn ssoocciieettyy;; tthhee GGeerrmmaann hhiissttoorriiccaalleexxppeerriieennccee iinn ccoommppaarraattiivvee ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Title main entry. Ed. by Jürgen Kocka. (New German historical prospec-tives; v.3)Berghahn Books, ©2009 221 p. $60.00The nine essays presented by Kocka (history of the industrial world, FreeU. of Berlin, Germany) examine various aspects of the history of workand labor, as distinguished from the history of workers and labor move-ments, with a focus on the German experience in comparative Europeanperspective. Topics include the place of work in the value systems of dif-ferent social groups in the late Medieval and early modern periods, thedevelopment of the anthropology of work as a scholarly discourse, dif-ferences between the concepts of work and labor held by 19th centurylabor movements (particularly German social democracy) and those pro-posed by such theorists as Karl Marx, the development of intersectionsbetween the history of work and the history of women and gender, therole of trust in the history of work, similarities between experiences ofindustrial work and experiences in military organizations and modernwars, the organization and practices of forced labor in Europe underGerman rule during World War II, comparative Protestant and Confucianwork ethics in Europe and Japan, and the present state of research in thehistory of work.

HD6971 2009-029789 978-0-8047-6890-0RRaaiissiinngg tthhee gglloobbaall fflloooorr;; ddiissmmaannttlliinngg tthhee mmyytthh tthhaatt wweeccaann’’tt aaffffoorrdd ggoooodd wwoorrkkiinngg ccoonnddiittiioonnss ffoorr eevveerryyoonnee..Heymann, Jody and Alison Earle.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 240 p. $35.00This book by Heymann (director, Institute for Health and Social Policy,McGill U., Canada) and Earle (a principal research scientist atNortheastern U., US) is the first to emerge from the work of the WorldRights Legal Data (WoRLD) center, which examines the status of eco-nomic and social rights in 192 UN nations, with a focus on the promotionof equity. It focuses on laws pertaining to labor and working conditions,specifically looking at gender inequalities in paid and unpaid work,gender and job protections, income inequalities and access to labor pro-tections such as availability of paid leave and scheduling flexibility, andlack of access to childcare and its effects on children, among other issues.They further address the relationship between labor protections andnational economic performance and assess the actions needed at variouslevels to improve working conditions for people around the world.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –114–

HD7105 2009-043702 978-0-8213-8159-5EEvvaalluuaattiinngg tthhee ffiinnaanncciiaall ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee ooff ppeennssiioonn ffuunnddss..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Hinz et al. (Directions in development)The World Bank, ©2010 279 p. $35.00 (pa)This book is the product of a partnership between the World Bank, theOrganization for Economic Cooperation and Development, and threeprivate-sector partners with worldwide pension-related business. It bringstogether information on benchmarks for designing and evaluating theperformance of pension funds. The report finds that pension funds needto measure performance against optimal long-term benchmarks, andargues that governments can play an important role in setting up thesebenchmarks but should not interfere in asset allocations. The book’sintroductory chapter summarizes the main issues raised by the studiesexamined and their findings. The rest of the book is organized to allowthe reader to move from a review of the available data to a policy dis-cussion about the development of pension-specific benchmarks for eval-uating pension fund investment performance. There are also short essayscommenting on the challenges of life-cycle funds in the context of thefinancial crisis.

HD7105 2009-030223 978-1-4398-1752-0PPeennssiioonn ffuunndd rriisskk mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; ffiinnaanncciiaall aanndd aaccttuuaarriiaallmmooddeelliinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Marco Micocci et al. (Chapman & Hall/CRCfinance series; 5)CRC Press, ©2010 728 p. $99.95Micocci (financial mathematics and actuarial science, University ofCagliari, Italy) offers an international perspective on the integration ofactuarial and financial risks in the risk management of pension funds.Initial chapters on financial risk management focus on correct meas-urement of risk in pension funds and formalize an intuitive concept ofinvestment risk. A section on technical risk management deals withtopics such as longevity risk and private pensions, and actuarial fundingof dismissal and registration risks. Chapters on regulation and solvencylook at topics such as ways to improve the equity, transparency, and sol-vency of pay-as-you-go pension systems. Case studies in pension fundrisk management are presented from Spain, the UK, Greece, and Italy.The audience for the book includes pension fund executives, risk man-agement departments, consultants, and academic researchers.

HD7125 2009-042103 978-0-313-38169-0AA wweellll--ttaaiilloorreedd ssaaffeettyy nneett;; tthhee oonnllyy ffaaiirr aanndd sseennssiibbllee wwaayyttoo ssaavvee ssoocciiaall sseeccuurriittyy..Graham, Jed.Praeger, ©2010 196 p. $34.95For legislators, policy makers, and general readers, Graham, an economicpolicy writer who covered the Social Security reform debate of 2005 forInvestor’s Business Daily, offers a proposal for Social Security reform thatfocuses on a safety net that preserves the safety net for both lowerearners and the middle class, provides a right of ownership, decreasesinitial benefits, increases work benefits to help workers close toretirement adapt to less support, and enhances incentives for delayedretirement. He details the limitations of current proposals, and describeshow affordability, effectiveness, and fairness are key to reform, whileoffering a version that incorporates a change in the taxation of employer-provided health insurance and an alternative plan.

HD7164 2009-930850 978-1-84720-927-6PPeerrssoonnaall pprroovviissiioonn ooff rreettiirreemmeenntt iinnccoommee;; mmeeeettiinngg tthheenneeeeddss ooff oollddeerr ppeeooppllee??Title main entry. Ed. by Jim Stewart and Gerard Hughes.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 275 p. $135.00Many countries in the European Union (as well as the U.S. and Japan)face pension-funding problems due to the graying of their populations.Scholars affiliated with Trinity College Dublin, Ireland, overview theissues being debated on schemes to reform public pension systems, e.g.,raising the retirement age, indexing pensions in line with prices ratherthan wages. Contributors to 13 chapters discuss individual countries’experiences, public policy, and the issues of annuitization and regulationin individual pension provision. The book is based on papers presentedat a European Network for Research on Supplementary Pensions con-ference of the same title held in Paris in December 2007.

HD7256 2009-019679 978-1-4164-0436-1WWoorrkk aanndd ddiissaabbiilliittyy;; ccoonntteexxttss,, iissssuueess,, aanndd ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorreennhhaanncciinngg eemmppllooyymmeenntt oouuttccoommeess ffoorr ppeeooppllee wwiitthhddiissaabbiilliittiieess,, 33dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Edna Mora Szymanski and Randall M. Parker.PRO-ED, ©2010 492 p. $63.00 (pa)The 13 chapters of Szymanski (Minnesota State U. Moorhead) andParker’s (U. of Texas, Austin) third-edition text are designed to foster anunderstanding of the complex interaction of work and disability. Writtenfor researchers and vocational rehabilitation counselors/professionals, thetext opens with a discussion of the social and psychological aspects ofwork and description of current work trends, followed by discussion ofthe legislative background and other contextual matters regardingemployment of people with disabilities; vocational theories and researchrelated to disability; counseling interventions, multicultural issues, voca-tional assessment, labor market information, and accommodation ofpeople with disabilities in the workplace; job placement and job devel-opment; outreach through business consultation; and supportedemployment for individuals with developmental disabilities. Credentialsfor Szymanski, Parker, and the other 23 contributors are not stated, norare the revisions from the second to third edition.

HD7262 2009-038247 978-0-313-35983-5HHuummaann ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee eennhhaanncceemmeenntt iinn hhiigghh--rriisskkeennvviirroonnmmeennttss;; iinnssiigghhttss,, ddeevveellooppmmeennttss,, aanndd ffuuttuurreeddiirreeccttiioonnss ffrroomm mmiilliittaarryy rreesseeaarrcchh..Title main entry. Ed. by Paul E. O’Connor and Joseph V. Cohn.(Technology, psychology, and health)Praeger Security International, ©2010 295 p. $54.95O’Connor (operations research, Naval Postgraduate School) and Cohn, alieutenant commander in the US Navy who develops and evaluateshuman performance enhancing technologies, present 16 chapters thatdetail work being done by the military on technology-enhanced humanperformance issues for those in high-risk professions and industries,such as police forces, fire fighters, the security industry, and militarycontracting. A group of military experts and others from the US discussthe selection of team members, training, safety, and human-machineinterface design issues, how they are being addressed in the military, andhow they can be applied to nonmilitary organizations. Topics includestress, naval aviation and submarine team selection, psychometricassessment, high-risk environments, crew resource management training,effectiveness evaluation, physiology-based measures of training effec-tiveness, risk reduction strategies, human factors causes of accidents,user-centered design, and measures of workload and situation awareness.

HD7287 978-1-60750-035-3BBrriiddggiinngg tthhee ggaapp bbeettwweeeenn ssoocciiaall aanndd mmaarrkkeett rreenntteeddhhoouussiinngg iinn ssiixx EEuurrooppeeaann ccoouunnttrriieess??..Title main entry. Ed. by Marietta Haffner et al. (Housing and urbanpolicy studies; 33)IOS Press, ©2009 306 p. $94.00 (pa)The set of studies was conducted to test the impression that the tradi-tional distinction between market housing—which is allocated accordingto effective demand—and social housing—which is allocated according toneed—was softening, as projects increasingly combine public and privateinitiatives and resources. Among the topics are demographic and eco-nomic indicators, differences in whom the sectors are aimed at and gov-ernment policies toward the sectors, defining the components of therented sector in England, characteristics of tenants in Flanders andBelgium, French housing stock, the quality of housing stock in Germany,the Irish plan for social housing, movements between tenures in theNetherlands, and a summary of the similarities and differences in thesix countries.

HD7332 2009-388631 978-1-58603-977-6TToowwaarrddss aa ssuussttaaiinnaabbllee NNoorrtthheerrnn EEuurrooppeeaann hhoouussiinngg ssttoocckk;;ffiigguurreess,, ffaaccttss,, aanndd ffuuttuurree..Itard, Laure and Frits Meijer. (Sustainable urban areas; 22)IOS Press, ©2008 213 p. $87.00 (pa)This monograph provides an assessment of the energy efficiency ofcurrent residential and non-residential building stock in northernEurope, an examination of the types of renovation activities that arebeing undertaken to improve the energy efficiency of building stock, anexploration of policies being implemented to improve energy efficiencyof building stock, and a discussion of recommendations for improvingthe present situation. The study covers the countries of Austria, Finland,France, Germany, the Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, and the UnitedKingdom.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–115–

HD7333 978-1-84742-213-2HHoouussiinngg ppoolliiccyy ttrraannssffoorrmmeedd;; tthhee rriigghhtt ttoo bbuuyy aanndd tthheeddeessiirree ttoo oowwnn..King, Peter.Policy Press, ©2010 122 p. $99.00King (social thought, De Montfort U., United Kingdom) offers a detailedexplanation of Britain’s Right to Buy (RTB) program, a 30-year-old ini-tiative to allow working class families to buy homes. It also sought tobreak the hold local authorities had over public housing in the country.The author discusses the history of the program, how it works, and theeffects of the housing market collapse of 2007. He also notes that manygovernment-inspired social initiatives come and go, giving way to thenext big thing—but that RTB actually worked, is stable, and will probablyremain in place for some time. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HD7337 978-1-60750-058-2HHoouussiinngg ppoolliiccyy aanndd hhoouussiinngg ffiinnaannccee iinn tthhee CCzzeecchhRReeppuubblliicc dduurriinngg ttrraannssiittiioonn;; aann eexxaammppllee ooff tthhee sscchhiissmmbbeettwweeeenn tthhee ssttiillll--lliivviinngg ppaasstt aanndd tthhee nneeeedd ooff rreeffoorrmm..Lux, Martin. (Sustainable urban areas; v.28)Delft University Press, ©2009 284 p. $94.00Lux (sociology, Academy of Sciences, Prague) uses the concept of housingpolicy efficiency and effectiveness as the language tool to tell the story ofthe transition in the field of housing in the Czech Republic since its cre-ation in 1990 as a capitalist state. He offers a partial comparison Czechhousing policies and housing finance with other transition countries;housing condition, housing policy and housing affordability during tran-sition; the effectiveness and efficiency of Czech housing policy; and theeffectiveness and efficiency of new supply and demand-side subsidies inthe Czech Republic and other transition countries. The study is noindexed. Distributed by IOS Press.

HD8039 2008-052305 978-0-8018-9162-5RRaaiillrrooaaddss iinn tthhee AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaann eexxppeerriieennccee;; aapphhoottggrraapphhiicc jjoouurrnneeyy..Kornweibel, Theodore.Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 557 p. $40.00While the work of the Irish and Chinese in building U.S. railroads canbe found in almost any history book, the important role of AfricanAmericans in both building and operating those railroads has largelybeen forgotten. In this stunning book, Kornweibel (African AmericanHistory [emeritus], San Diego State University) takes readers through theentire African American railroad experience, from the slaves who builtmany of the country’s railways, through the civil rights activism of thePullman Porters’ union, to the modern workers who run trains onAmtrak and the freight railroads. Individual chapters mainly focus onparticular railroad occupations; all are profusely illustrated with periodimages. As the publicity material for this book asserts, this will indeedbecome the standard reference on African Americans in U.S. railroading.

HD8045 2009-009429 978-0-252-07670-1NNAAFFTTAA aanndd llaabboorr iinn NNoorrtthh AAmmeerriiccaa..Caulfield, Norman. (The working class in American history)U. of Illinois Press, ©2010 246 p. $25.00 (pa)Having written a history of Mexican labor through most of the 20thcentury, Caulfield (history, Fort Hays State U., Kansas) here both widensand lengthens his concern by looking at how the rights and prosperityof people who work for a living have declined in all three affected coun-tries since the 1994 imposition of the North American Free TradeAgreement (NAFTA). He discusses labor and global capitalism in NorthAmerica 1850-1970, the politics of Mexican labor and economic devel-opment in crisis, Mexican labor and workers’ rights under NAFTA andthe North American Agreement on Labor Cooperation (NAALC), labormobility and workers’ rights in North America, the crisis of union-man-agement relations in the US and Canada, the apex of concessionary bar-gaining in the North American automobile industry, and autoworkerslosing when union play casino capitalism.

HD8055 72-79771 978-0-87348-263-9LLaabboorr’’ss ggiiaanntt sstteepp;; tthhee ffiirrsstt ttwweennttyy yyeeaarrss ooff tthhee CCIIOO:: 11993366--5555.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11997722))Preis, Art.Pathfinder Press, ©2009 736 p. $30.00 (pa)The late Preis, a long-time member of the Socialist Workers Party andstaff writer for the SWP’s newsweekly The Militant, narrates the historyof the first twenty years of the Congress of Industrial Organizations,from its founding in 1936 to its merger with the American Federationof Labor. For Preis, who joined the 1934 Toledo Electric strike as a youngworker, the rise of the CIO was “the most significant event in modernAmerican history” in that it marked the emergence of class struggle byAmerican workers on a massive scale, whatever the failures of the CIOleadership, which constantly sought to subordinate the interests of theworkers to that of the capitalist state. Nevertheless, the story he tells isone of “historic achievement for the working class” in forging a “classorganization never equaled in size or surpassed in picket-line and shopmilitancy” In telling the story, Preis largely bases his history on eye-witness and contemporary accounts from the commercial daily press,union and socialist periodicals, The Militant in particular, which pub-lished many of Preis’s own eyewitness accounts of strikes and otherlabor events. This is a paperbound edition of a work first published in1964.

HD8066 00-708458 978-1-59237-441-0WWoorrkkiinngg AAmmeerriiccaannss 11888800--22000099;; vv..1100:: SSppoorrttss aannddrreeccrreeaattiioonn..Derks, Scott.Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2009 560 p. $145.00In order to shed light on the growth of professional sports and howAmericans spent their leisure time, this volume in the series profiles overa century of real-life professional and amateur athletes and others con-nected to the business of sports, including referees, coaches, a baseballstadium vendor, and a sportswriter, for a total of 36 men and womenrepresenting 18 American states. In addition to the well-known sportsand recreational activities represented, there are profiles of an ultimateFrisbee player, a professional strongman, an archer, and a Yale Universityoarsman. The profiles include bulleted chronologies of key events in theperson’s home and work life, and events and conditions in the place theylived and the sport they played. Each decade chapter also includes anintroduction, timelines, news articles, prices of common items, and b&wphotos, illustrations, postcards, cartoons, and other ephemera, to givereaders a glimpse into the period. Information on the author is not given.

HD8072 2009-034658 978-1-55849-725-2AAtt tthhee aallttaarr ooff tthhee bboottttoomm lliinnee;; tthhee ddeeggrraaddaattiioonn ooff wwoorrkkiinn tthhee ttwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt cceennttuurryy.. ((CCDD iinncclluuddeedd))Juravich, Tom.U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2009 236 p. $26.95 (pa)To look beneath the macroeconomic happy faces of soaring profits, andinvestigate the lives of American workers in today’s economy, Juravich(labor studies, U. of Massachusetts-Amherst) interviewed in depthworkers in four very different kinds of workplaces: call center represen-tatives, operating room nurses, undocumented workers in fish pro-cessing, and displaced industrial workers. He began in 2000 and spenteight years, thus unintentionally chronicling work under the presidencyof George W. Bush. In each case, he concludes, workers watched as cor-porate leaders made decisions to increase profits at the expense ofworker welfare. The accompanying audio disk contains excerpts of theinterviews and four songs composed and performed by Juravich.

HD8072 2008-047894 978-1-59558-321-5SSttuuddss TTeerrkkeell’’ss WWoorrkkiinngg;; aa ggrraapphhiicc aaddaappttaattiioonn..Pekar, Harvey. Ed. by Paul Buhle.The New Press, ©2009 197 p. $22.95 (pa)The late Studs Terkel is best known for his oral histories of commonAmerican people. His 1974 book, Working, collecting stories in which (asthe subtitle read) People Talk About What They Do All Day and How TheyFeel About What They Do, was critically acclaimed and has already beenadapted into a Broadway show and a radio broadcast. Now, HarveyPekar, the underground comic book writer best known for his autobio-graphical American Splendor, working together with 16 other comicartists, has transformed the oral histories of a stock broker, a labororganizer, a supermarket box boy, a proofreader, an airline reserva-tionist, a gravedigger, a mail carrier, a jazz musician, and others origi-nally appearing in the pages of Working into a graphic novel that visuallydepicts, in widely varying styles, the everyday experiences of labor in theUnited States.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –116–

HD8081 2009-039763 978-1-57675-945-5MMaannaaggiinngg HHiissppaanniicc aanndd LLaattiinnoo eemmppllooyyeeeess;; aa gguuiiddee ttoohhiirriinngg,, ttrraaiinniinngg,, mmoottiivvaattiinngg,, ssuuppeerrvviissiinngg,, aanndd ssuuppppoorrttiinnggtthhee ffaasstteesstt ggrroowwiinngg wwoorrkkffoorrccee ggrroouupp..Nevaer, Louis E. V.Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2010 269 p. $24.95 (pa)For managers, supervisors, and other administrators, Nevaer, a businessjournalist and author who is associated with a company that analyzesHispanic consumer behavior, explains how employers in the US candevelop Hispanic-friendly approaches to every aspect of the workplace,including recruitment, retention, supervision, evaluation, training, men-toring, and labor relations. He offers a culturally-aware and interdisci-plinary approach to management challenges organizations face with thedemographic shift in the workplace, and ways to develop healthy rela-tionships and implement strategies for success. He addresses the impactof Hispanics on the labor market, the characteristics of Hispanic workersand variations between cultures, their worldview, and their career needsin management positions.

HD8085 2009-007043 978-0-8018-9357-5VVeeggaass aatt ooddddss;; llaabboorr ssttrruuggggllee iinn aa lleeiissuurree eeccoonnoommyy,, 11996600--11998855..Kraft, James P. (Studies in industry and society)Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 273 p. $55.00For historians and general readers, Kraft (history, U. of Hawaii at Manoa)draws from interviews, personal and published accounts, and publicrecords to detail the labor relations in hotels and casinos in Las Vegasbetween 1960 and 1985. He discusses how changes in laws and corpora-tions affected service workers and their unions, and how they respondedto the changes in the ownership and management of casinos, includingsuccessful and failed organizing drives, struggles over pay and equalrights, and worker grievances and arbitration. He explores their workexperiences, the occupational hierarchies and institutional bases of theindustry, and the relationship between labor and management.

HD9000 2009-037033 978-0-313-36328-3TThhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff ffoooodd;; tthhee gglloobbaall ccoonnfflliicctt bbeettwweeeenn ffooooddsseeccuurriittyy aanndd ffoooodd ssoovveerreeiiggnnttyy..Schanbacher, William D.Praeger, ©2010 148 p. $34.95A scholar of religion and social ethics in Colorado, Schanbacher offers anethical analysis of the food security model proffered by corporations andthe food sovereignty model that small farmers and activists are offeringas an alternative. He examines how they function within discourses onglobal poverty, hunger, and malnutrition in order to provide a context inwhich to understand the role food plays with respect to discussions ofglobalization and global poverty. He covers globalization, development,food security, and the emergence of a global food regime; the undersideof development; food sovereignty as an alternative; human rights, humanresponsibilities, and the capabilities approach; and the ethical analysis offood sovereignty and the ethics of globalization.

HD9000 2010-001012 978-1-60358-263-6TTeerrrraa MMaaddrree;; ffoorrggiinngg aa nneeww gglloobbaall nneettwwoorrkk ooff ssuussttaaiinnaabblleeffoooodd ccoommmmuunniittiieess..Petrini, Carlo.Chelsea Green Publ. Co., ©2009 155 p. $20.00 (pa)One of the founders of the Slow Food movement, Petrini has been aleader in making people aware of the costs of fast food and industrialagriculture. In this book, he argues that food has become just anothercommodity by an agribusiness industry that is ravaging environmentsand peoples’ lives worldwide. To change this situation, Petrini advocateslocal alliances between consumers and food producers. These alliances,he argues, will give people control over what foods are grown, and overhow they are grown and distributed. Although a bit nostalgic in its viewof family farming, this very readable book will appeal to any reader con-cerned about the quality of the food they eat.

HD9005 2009-038244 978-1-60342-453-0TThhee llooccaavvoorree wwaayy;; ddiissccoovveerr aanndd eennjjooyy tthhee pplleeaassuurreess ooffllooccaallllyy ggrroowwnn ffoooodd..Cotler, Amy.Storey Publishing, ©2009 245 p. $12.95 (pa)Chef, cooking instructor, and cookbook author Cotler explains the stepsthat people can take to localize their eating and thus support farms andfarmers in the neighborhood while reducing the pollution and costs oflong-distance shipping. Her first step is buying, and she describesfarmers’ markets, farm stands, u-pick farms, community supported agri-culture, buying clubs, and stores. Next comes cooking and eating, whichentails storing and preparing local food, and looking for it when diningout. She includes recipes. The final stage is producing local food in theyard and garden, and becoming an advocate.

HD9017 2009-019928 978-0-8213-7952-3BBuuiillddiinngg ccoommppeettiittiivveenneessss iinn AAffrriiccaa’’ss aaggrriiccuullttuurree;; aa gguuiiddeettoo vvaalluuee cchhaaiinn ccoonncceeppttss aanndd aapppplliiccaattiioonnss..Webber, C. Martin and Patrick Labaste. (Agriculture and rural devel-opment)The World Bank, ©2009 187 p. $40.00 (pa)This study describes value chains, and shows how the concept can beapplied to agriculture for export from sub-Sarahan Africa. The goal is tohelp design programs and investment projects to increase the produc-tivity and performance of the industry. Specific tools are described andillustrated with a case study. Among them are choosing priority sectorsfor value chain interventions in Mozambique, upgrading and deepeningthe value chain in Kenyan green beens and other fresh vegetable export,creating and exploiting economies of scale in the Ghana and Côte d’Ivoirefresh pineapple exports, applying standards and certifications to achievegreater quality in Ugandan Nile perch, and identifying needed supportservices for the value chain in Zambian cotton.

HD9017 2009-006566 978-0-8130-3373-0TThhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff ffoooodd iinn mmooddeerrnn MMoorrooccccoo..Holden, Stacey E. (Critical issues in health and medicine)U. Press of Florida, ©2009 285 p. $69.95Holden (history, Purdue U.) offers a well-researched and well-writtenaccount of Morocco’s history and explains how, unlike most other MiddleEast and North African countries, it has maintained a stable governmentfor hundreds of years. She offers a convincing argument that a keyreason for that success and longevity is the government’s ability to keepMoroccans fed, equitably, regardless of the country’s dry conditions andless than optimal rainfall for food production. It also is a story ofordinary workers and how they have managed to successfully commu-nicate their interests and needs to a theocratic government.

HD9502 2009-047401 978-0-89206-593-6EEnneerrggyy aanndd ggeeooppoolliittiiccss iinn CChhiinnaa;; mmiixxiinngg ooiill aanndd ppoolliittiiccss..Ebel, Robert E.Ctr. for Strategic...Studies, ©2009 65. p. $19.95 (pa)In November of 2000, the Center for Strategic & International Studiesissued the report The Geopolitics of Energy into the 21st Century, the cul-mination of the work of the Strategic Energy Initiative (cochaired bySenator Sam Nunn and Dr. James Schlesinger), tasked with identifyingand examining significant geopolitical shifts that could impact futureglobal energy security, supply, and demand. What that report failed toanticipate was the sudden growth in Chinese demand for oil and the con-sequent growth in world oil prices. This report, then, addresses the Chinafactor in the geopolitics of oil. It examines the trajectories of Chinese eco-nomic growth, the Chinese approach to global warming, China’s securityof supply, China’s geopolitical oil planning for the future, and China’snon-oil sources of energy.

HD9502 2009-037417 978-0-7656-2413-0EEnneerrggyy ffoorr tthhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy;; aa ccoommpprreehheennssiivvee gguuiiddee ttooccoonnvveennttiioonnaall aanndd aalltteerrnnaattiivvee ssoouurrcceess,, 22dd eedd..Nersesian, Roy L.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 401 p. $59.95 (pa)Nersesian (energy, marine transportation, and public policy; Columbia U.and business, Monmouth U.) updates his survey of energy sources fornon-technical readers, particularly those looking for business opportu-nities and constraints within their lifetimes. Most of his attention isdevoted to the fossil fuels: coal, oil, and natural gas. Other topics includewhether there is a problem with depletion and pollution, electricity andthe utility business, biomass, nuclear and hydropower, sustainableenergy, looking toward the future, and an energy strategy. No date isnoted for the first edition.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–117–

HD9502 2009-930863 978-1-84720-352-6IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall hhaannddbbooookk oonn tthhee eeccoonnoommiiccss ooff eenneerrggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Joanne Evans and Lester C. Hunt.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 831 p. $330.00The editors (professors of economics at the U. of Surrey, UK) present ahandbook reviewing key aspects and research issues in the economics ofenergy that is intended to be accessible to final-year undergraduates andpostgraduate students studying the subject, as well as practitioners inindustry and government. It begins with a historical review of energyand associated public policy issues, followed by an overview of the eco-nomics of energy supply and demand. It then addresses the economicsof energy efficiency, including two chapters exploring the theoreticalfoundations of the rebound effect and definition and estimation of therebound effect. Modeling is examined in chapters that discuss modelingenergy savings of and environmental benefits from energy policies andnew technologies, bottom-up models of energy, the structure and use ofthe UK MARKAL model, combining top-down and bottom-up in energyeconomy models, and computable general equilibrium models for theanalysis of energy and climate policies. Key issues in the oil, coal, naturalgas, and electricity markets are then addressed, including petroleum tax-ation, the behavior of petroleum markets, the economics and regulationof power transmission and distribution, mechanisms for the optimalexpansion of electricity transmission markets, efficiency measurement inthe electricity and gas distribution sectors, and electricity retail compe-tition and pricing. Remaining chapters discuss international energyderivatives markets, the economics of energy in developing countries,energy security and climate change, and current issue in the design ofenergy policy.

HD9502 2009-043019 978-1-932716-52-8PPoowweerriinngg tthhee ffuuttuurree;; tthhee pprroobblleemmss aanndd ppoossssiibbiilliittiieess ooffggrreeeenn eenneerrggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Amy Kathryn Brown. (Sourcebook on contem-porary controversies)Int’l. Debate Educ. Assn. Pr., ©2010 197 p. $24.95 (pa)Brown (a public interest lawyer practicing in New Jersey) presents areview of current debates on the issue of green energy in the from of 21writings from such sources as the United Nations DevelopmentProgramme, the Council on Foreign Relations, International Rivers, theUnion of Concerned Scientists, the American Coalition for Clean CoalElectricity, the European Renewable Energy Council, GreenpeaceInternational, and the Natural Resources Defense Council. The pieces arepresented in sections concerned with the consequences of current globalenergy policies; the benefits of and philosophy required for a greenenergy revolution; the pros and cons of biofuels, hydroelectric power, so-called clean coal, and nuclear power; the debates over an “all-of-the-above” versus purely “clean” technologies approach; debates over carbontaxation versus cap-and-trade-policy; and international state cooperationin green energy implementation.

HD9502 978-1-60692-407-5RRuussssiiaann ppoolliittiiccaall,, eeccoonnoommiicc,, aanndd sseeccuurriittyy iissssuueess..Title main entry. Ed. by Harold J. Kowen. (Russian political, economic,and security issues)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 183 p. $69.00Four 2008 reports by the Congressional Research Service and a long essayby Stephen J. Blank—who teaches something or another in Alabama,Texas, and California—provide background information and opinions tohelp the US Congress forge policy toward Russia. They cover US interests;towards a new Russia policy; Russia’s economic performance andpolicies and their implications for the US; Russia’s accession to the WorldTrade Organization, and statutory procedures for Congressional consid-eration regarding a nuclear cooperation agreement with Russia.

HD9560 2009-036486 978-0-8213-8167-0PPeettrroolleeuumm eexxpplloorraattiioonn aanndd pprroodduuccttiioonn rriigghhttss;; aallllooccaattiioonnssttrraatteeggiieess aanndd ddeessiiggnn iissssuueess..Tordo, Silvana. (World Bank working paper; no.179)The World Bank, ©2010 106 p. $15.00 (pa)Tordo, a lead economist with the Oil, Gas, and Mining Division of theWorld Bank, presents the results of a study on countries’ experienceswith the allocation of petroleum exploration, development, and pro-duction (E&P) rights.The book analyzes the available evidence on alter-native practices used by petroleum producing countries to allocatepetroleum E&P rights, and draws conclusions about their relative effec-tiveness, and policy implications. The book includes a glossary, andalmost 100 pages of appendices on the life cycle of a typical oil and gasproject, fiscal instruments, fiscal terms, selected country experiences inlicensing policy, and examples of allocation systems design. There is nosubject index.

HD9576 2009042105 978-0-313-37791-4CChhiinnaa’’ss iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ppeettrroolleeuumm ppoolliiccyy..Kong, Bo. (Energy and security)Praeger Security International, ©2010 229 p. $44.95According to this study, restructured state-owned enterprises havebecome co-creators of China’s industrial policy. The detailed case studyshows how the Chinese government and its state-owned oil companieswork together to create and implement China’s international petroleumpolicy, and reveals the nature of the state-industry relationship in China.Focus is on how China deals with the economic, political, and securitydimensions of challenges stemming from its dependence on the interna-tional petroleum market. Coverage includes the development of thecountry’s international petroleum policy, the international expansion ofChina’s national oil companies, and policy implications. About 30 pagesof appendices provide charts and statistics on bureaucratic departments,oil executives and government leaders, state bank loans to the oil sector,Chinese and foreign investment, and oil operations. Kong directs theGlobal Energy and Environment Initiative at Johns Hopkins University.

HD9576 2009-042568 978-981-4277-94-5OOiill aanndd ggaass iinn CChhiinnaa;; tthhee nneeww eenneerrggyy ssuuppeerrppoowweerr’’ssrreellaattiioonnss wwiitthh iittss rreeggiioonn..Lim, Tai-Wei. (Series on contemporary China; v.18)World Scientific, ©2010 161 p. $75.00Lim (National U. of Singapore) presents the companion volume to his Oilin China: From Self-Reliance to Internationalization. Whereas that workfocused on the historical and developmental concepts and events in theChinese oil industry, particularly as connected to the empirical case ofthe oilfield of Daquing, this volume examines contemporary issues,including the impact of the search for new sources of oil on potentialregional rivalries, the role of regional agreements and bilateral/multi-lateral frameworks for easing tensions and resolving conflicts, China’sability to strike a balance between economic growth and energy con-sumption, internal debates over development and environmentalism,alternative energy trends, and the conservation and renewal of energyresources.

HD9576 2009-032730 978-0-8014-4781-5PPrriinncceess,, bbrrookkeerrss,, aanndd bbuurreeaauuccrraattss;; ooiill aanndd tthhee ssttaattee iinnSSaauuddii AArraabbiiaa..Hertog, Steffen.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 297 p. $35.00Although Saudi Arabia has often been held up as the quintessentialexample of the rentier state, Hertog (government and internationalaffairs, U. of Durham, UK) argues that the highly heterogenous outcomesof reform efforts related to privatization, Saudization of labor markets,capital markets reform, liberalization of foreign investment rules, andWTO accession point to a crucial weakness in the explanatory power ofthe rentier theory, particularly in relation to its lack of empiricalinvestigation of causal mechanisms. He seeks to overcome this weaknessby conducting a sociological investigation of rent distribution in thepolitical economy of Saudi Arabia. He first provides an historical accountof the development of the modern Saudi bureaucracy from the 1950sthrough the 1970s, arguing that the bureaucratic system should becharacterized as “segmented clientelism”—a heterogeneous system offormal and informal, rent-based clientelism in which vertical linksdominate. He then explores the workings of this segmented clientelismin recent policy cases of foreign investment reform, policies of labormarket Saudization, the adaptation of Saudi regulations to WTOrequirements, regular communications failures, fragmented policies, thediffuse blocking power of mid-level bureaucrats, networks of brokersaround administrative institutions, and games of patronage and informalclientelism.

HD9685 2009-002401 978-1-60741-078-2DDyynnaammiicc nnoonnccooooppeerraattiivvee ggaammee mmooddeellss ffoorr ddeerreegguullaatteeddeelleeccttrriicciittyy mmaarrkkeettss..Cruz, Jose B, Jr. and Xiaohuan Tan. (Energy policies, politics andprices)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 105 p. $79.00The fantasy—some might say outright deception—is that deregulated elec-tricity markets are perfectly competitive, though in fact they remain oli-gopolistic, and players exercise considerable power to game the market.There have been many studies of such gaming, say Cruz and Tan (bothelectrical and computer engineering, Ohio State U.), but only from staticperspectives. Here they formulate and describe the gaming behavior inthe deregulated electricity market from a dynamic point of view, consid-ering long-term interests within a changing environment. The topics arerestructuring in the electric industry, game theory and strategic bidding,adaptation for n-player games, the sensitivity analysis of uncertainties,and price strategies in mixed-strategy solutions.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –118–

HD9685 2009-029821 978-0-8247-2753-6EElleeccttrriicciittyy pprriicciinngg;; eennggiinneeeerriinngg mmeetthhooddoollooggiieess..Vogt, Lawrence J. (Power engineering; 33)CRC Press, ©2009 676 p. $139.95This is a multidisciplinary reference on ratemaking for electricity util-ities—covering both engineering and business aspects of electrical rateanalysis and design—that is intended by author Vogt (Manager of Rates,Mississippi Power Company) to serve as an introductory textbook forthose new to the discipline and as a one-stop reference for the experi-enced practitioner. Twelve chapters cover an overview of electricitypricing, prerequisite concepts, electric end uses, electric service require-ments of customers, transmission and distribution, electric power pro-duction, revenue metering and billing, pricing methods and risk in therate schedule, the mathematics of rates, billing data statistics and appli-cations, cost-of-service methodology, and translating costs to prices.

HD9696 978-1-84334-557-2TThhee GGooooggllee ggeenneerraattiioonn;; aarree IICCTT iinnnnoovvaattiioonnss cchhaannggiinnggiinnffoorrmmaattiioonn--sseeeeiinngg bbeehhaavviioouurr??Gunter, Barrie et al.Chandos Publishing, ©2009 207 p. $95.00Largely based on the British Library/Joint Information SystemsCommittee funded research project “The Behaviour of the Researcher ofthe Future,” this text explores the implications of changing informationand communications technologies for learning, particularly in the contextof higher education. It focuses on whether a distinctive generation ofinformation seekers and users has emerged whom take radically dif-ferent mental approaches in their information search strategies. Afterexamining the evidence, it considers the implications for informationproviders. Distributed in North America by Neal-Schuman.

HD9697 2009-050853 978-1-58648-795-9SSppaarrkk;; hhooww oolldd--ffaasshhiioonneedd vvaalluueess ddrriivvee aa ttwweennttyy--ffiirrssttcceennttuurryy ccoorrppoorraattiioonn;; lleessssoonnss ffrroomm LLiinnccoollnn EElleeccttrriicc’’ssuunniiqquuee gguuaarraanntteeeedd eemmppllooyymmeenntt pprrooggrraamm..Koller, Frank.PublicAffairs, ©2010 249 p. $25.95Koller, an economics journalist and former foreign correspondent for theCanadian Broadcasting Corporation, describes the multinationalcompany Lincoln Electric, a Cleveland-based arc welding equipmentmanufacturer, which promised its American workers since 1948 that nopermanent employee who meets the firm’s performance standardswould be laid off for economic reasons. It also has a unique incentivesystem and high yearly profit-sharing bonuses, which makes itsemployees among the highest-paid industrial workers in the country. Hedescribes the company’s history and what lessons can be learned fromits unique management system, especially those that can help Americancompanies at a time of economic crisis.

HD9710 2009-019982 978-0-8144-1378-4TThhee lleeaann mmaacchhiinnee;; hhooww HHaarrlleeyy--DDaavviiddssoonn ddrroovvee ttoopp--lliinneeggrroowwtthh aanndd pprrooffiittaabbiilliittyy wwiitthh rreevvoolluuttiioonnaarryy lleeaann pprroodduuccttddeevveellooppmmeenntt..Oosterwal, Dantar P.AMACOM, ©2010 254 p. $27.95Drawing on his experience as director of product development at Harley-Davidson, Oosterwal analyzes Harley-Davidson’s post-bankruptcy growthperiod, highlighting the role of improvements to the company’s productdevelopment process. He traces the evolution of the Harley-Davidsonproduct development team, and describes strategies readers can use toemploy techniques of Knowledge-Based Product Development at theirown organizations.

HD9711 978-1-84674-166-1MMeemmoorriieess ooff tthhee LLaannccaasshhiirree aaiirrccrraafftt iinndduussttrryy..Freethy, Ron. (Aspects of local history)Countryside Books, ©2009 176 p. $23.95 (pa)Freethy, a prolific author of books on his native Lancashire County,describes the region’s contributions to the British aviation industry, fromearly balloon ascents in the early 19th century to more contemporarybombers, jet fighters and components. The author includes interviewswith locals as well as their parents who reminisced about the county’ssingular involvement in aviation. Numerous period photographs also areincluded.

HD9999 2009-034921 978-1-84788-306-3DDeessiiggnn aanndd ccrreeaattiivviittyy;; ppoolliiccyy,, mmaannaaggeemmeenntt aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Guy Julier and Liz Moor.Berg Publishers, ©2009 278 p. $39.95 (pa)Eleven essays, presented by Julier (design, Leeds Metropolitan U.) andMoor (media and communications, U. of London, UK), situate thepractice of design within wider contexts of political-economic change.They are presented in two sections, the first of which explores the rela-tionship between public policy and design, particularly the instrumen-talization of design in the context of the New Public Management(entrepreneurial approaches to the delivery of public services), and thesecond of which deals with the management of design and creativity incommercial contexts. Also included are seven interviews with designpractitioners. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.

HD9999 2009-036896 978-0-89503-393-2SStteepp iinnttoo oouurr lliivveess aatt tthhee ffuunneerraall hhoommee..Michaelson, Jo. (Death, value, and meaning series)Baywood Publishing Co., ©2010 162 p. $39.95Now retired, former educator and psychotherapist Michaelson was co-owner of a funeral home for 23 years. She offers an insightful textsharing both personal and professional experiences she, her husband,children, and other colleagues and their families encountered working inthe funeral home industry, and what they learned from serving thosewho had experienced a loss. From a practical standpoint, she also dis-cusses the issues of dealing with the trauma of death, the grief processand resources to help in the recovery process, and how to handlestressors in the funeral home setting. For funeral home directors, hospicepatients, mortuary students, those who have lost loved ones, and inter-ested general readers.

HE147 2009-040112 978-1-60623-485-3SSuussttaaiinnaabbllee ttrraannssppoorrttaattiioonn;; pprroobblleemmss aanndd ssoolluuttiioonnss..Black, William R.Guilford Pr., ©2010 299 p. $60.00Drawing from a course he has taught since the late 1990s, and on hisexperience helping coordinate US and European research, Black(emeritus geography, Indiana U.-Bloomington) sets out his own under-standing of what sustainable transportation is and could be. He does notgo into detail about planning or methodology, but provides pointers forothers to take those routes. He begins by explaining the problem, in rela-tions to climate change, urban air quality, the finite nature of petroleumreserves, safety, congestion, and other factors. Then he surveys possiblesolutions in the areas of pricing, planning, policy, education, and tech-nology. Examples of topics include the full cost of transportation, indi-cator-based planning, the special role of speed and speed limit policies,and the potential of alternative fuels.

HE151 2009-936763 978-1-84844-411-9TTrraannssppoorrtt,, wweellffaarree aanndd eexxtteerrnnaalliittiieess;; rreeppllaacciinngg tthhee ppoolllluutteerrppaayyss pprriinncciippllee wwiitthh tthhee cchheeaappeesstt ccoosstt aavvooiiddeerr pprriinncciippllee..Schmidtchen, Dieter et al. (New horizons in law and economics)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 128 p. $100.00Contributors from the Center for the Study of Law and Economics atGermany’s Saarland University, along with colleagues from Luxembourgand Britain, ask what method of resolving a conflict between competingdemands on a resource such as the environment is cheapest for society.In answering, they diverge from the principle that whoever commits acrime should be the one to pay for it. In their example of road transport,they argue that everyone benefits from the activity that causes the pol-lution, and so everyone should contribute to paying for the damage. Theirtopics include the Pigovian tradition and the polluter pays principle, theCoasian revolution, Coase versus Pigou on reaching efficiency, strengthsand weaknesses of the principles beyond efficiency, case studies of theA44 and the Inn Valley Highway, and the European transport policy.

HE203 2009-042023 978-1-935308-23-2GGrriiddlloocckk;; wwhhyy wwee aarree ssttuucckk iinn ttrraaffffiicc aanndd wwhhaatt ttoo ddooaabboouutt iitt..O’Toole, Randal.Cato Institute, ©2009 277 p. $24.95Like some critics from Oregon and elsewhere, O’Toole (Cato Institute,Washington, DC), does not believe that high-speed trains and other formsof mass transit will reduce congestion on American roads. Nor does heagree with smart growth planners that land use policies will have muchimpact on travel outcomes. Following a historical overview of traveltrends in the U.S. in comparison to other countries, he argues for a userfee-driven system for all modes of transportation rather than furtherfunding of expensive rail transit projects that benefit only a few.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–119–

HE571 2009-279158 978-1-84383-472-4EEnntteerrpprriissiinngg wwoommeenn aanndd sshhiippppiinngg iinn tthhee nniinneetteeeenntthhcceennttuurryy..Doe, Helen.The Boydell Press, ©2009 272 p. $105.00Doe (Centre for Maritime Historical Studies, University of Exeter) wasresearching the nineteenth century port records of England when shebegan to discover (gasp!) women ship owners. Not only that, but shefound women in every aspect of shipping, from wharfingers to sailmakers, even a blacksmith. The results of her investigation are related inthis volume. Doe carefully backgrounds her findings in the legal statusof British women of the time. She then gives examples of how womenignored or worked around these laws. Widows and spinsters seemed tobe recorded most but she notes that it is impossible to tell from therecords how many women were active partners with their husbands inbusiness. This is a wonderful addition to the history of women and ofmaritime business. Her solid scholarship and work in primary sourcesis admirable and indicates that there is still much to be found that pre-vious historians have not included in their work.

HE945 978-1-84868-364-8CCuunnaarrdd’’ss tthhrreeee qquueeeennss;; aa cceelleebbrraattiioonn..Miller, William H.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 119 p. $34.99 (pa)In honor of the historic year (2008) in which all three ships were inservice, Miller collects color and b&w photos and descriptions of theCunard line’s three Queens: Queen Elizabeth 2, Queen Mary 2, and QueenVictoria. He shows their exteriors and interiors, places they traveled to,meetings with each other, their rendezvous in New York andSouthampton in 2008, and the farewell voyages of the QE2, as well asremembrances of passengers and those who worked on the ships.Distributed by Casemate.

HE1021 2009-038340 978-1-58648-834-5BBlloooodd,, iirroonn,, aanndd ggoolldd;; hhooww tthhee rraaiillrrooaaddss ttrraannssffoorrmmeedd tthheewwoorrlldd..Wolmar, Christian.PublicAffairs, ©2010 376 p. $28.95This history of railways is based on an immodest (but true) premise:Railroads changed the world, knitting together nations such as Canada,the U.S., and Russia, and making it possible for North American farmersto feed a hungry world. Wolmar tells the exciting story of how railroadsgrew from small beginnings to span entire continents, without leavingout the terrible price that was often paid for this growth by railwayworkers and indigenous peoples. Readers will see the engineeringmarvels that made the trans-Panama and Trans-Siberian railways, alongwith the epic bad planning that made it difficult to knit Australia’smulti-gauge railways into a single system. Although Wolmar occasionallygets mired in train-geek details, his vast knowledge of railroading andinfectious enthusiasm will carry readers along for an exciting ride.

HE4491 2008-929810 978-0-7385-6130-1TThhee iinncclliinneess ooff CCiinncciinnnnaattii..Kramer, Melissa. (Images of rail)Arcadia Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $21.99 (pa)First-time author Kramer, a Cincinnati native, local history enthusiast,and journalism student, writes of the hillside incline railroads that wereonce common sights in the city. The railroads are long gone, but Krameruses period photographs—some never previously published— to dwell onquestions such as why they disappeared and why wee none of them pre-served. The compelling photos depict the railroads themselves and theirhilltop resorts. Railroad buffs would be intrigued by the treatment of thiscurious mode of local transportation.

HE5623 2009-037724 0-230-61813-8CCaarrjjaacckkeedd;; tthhee ccuullttuurree ooff tthhee aauuttoommoobbiillee aanndd iittss eeffffeecctt oonnoouurr lliivveess..Lutz, Catherine and Anne Lutz Fernandez.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2010 254 p. $28.00Sisters Catherine Lutz (an anthropologist at Brown U.) and Anne LutzFernandez (a former marketer and investment banker) examine theimpact of the automobile on broad aspects of American society. Theirinvestigation is based on conversations with a varied group of driversand a similarly varied group of individuals involved in the car industryand its impacts—e.g., car salesmen, mechanics, automobile brand mar-keters, car museum directors, toll booth operators, emergency roomdoctors, police, and epidemiologists—as well as advertising analysis, autoindustry information, safety data from the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration, and government economics surveys.

HE6375 2009-036886 978-0-7627-4816-7TThhee PPoonnyy EExxpprreessss;; aann iilllluussttrraatteedd hhiissttoorryy..Guthrie, C.W. Photographs by Bart Smith.Globe Pequot Press, ©2010 181 p. $19.95 (pa)Although it existed for a scant 19 months in the early 1860s, the PonyExpress is one of the best known (and most legendary) outfits of theAmerican West. In text and pictures, author Guthrie tells the colorfulstory of this pioneering mail service and of the rough-riding young menwho raced the mail across half a continent in just 10 days. Profuselyillustrated with archival images and modern photographs by Bart Smith,this book will appeal to any reader with an interest in Western history.

HE7775 2009-366380 978-1-4438-0978-8TToooollss ooff tthheeiirr ttoooollss;; ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonnss tteecchhnnoollooggiieess aannddAAmmeerriiccaann ccuullttuurraall pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Grzegorz Kosc and Krzysztof Majer.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 315 p. $67.99Telephones, broadcast radio and television, digital telecommunications,computer-mediated communications, telegraphy, and computer networksare among the communication technologies that mostly Polish scholarsof American studies explore in relation to cultural practice in the US overthe past century and a half. Their topics include the public of the firesidechats in which Roosevelt interpreted the New Deal, Arab and MuslimAmericans after 9/11, online citizen critics’ reviews of Kevin Macdonald’sThe Last King of Scotland, writing poetry in the age of email, teleportationin the service of American cultural communication in Octavia Butler’s1979 Kindred, and the graphic revolution and representations of AfricanAmericans in American magazines 1880-1900. The 24 papers are basedon presentations and discussions at a conference in Lodz in November2007.

HE8789 2009-023206 978-81-321-0079-9EEmmppllooyyeeee iiddeennttiittyy iinn IInnddiiaann ccaallll cceennttrreess;; tthhee nnoottiioonn ooffpprrooffeessssiioonnaalliissmm..Noronha, Ernesto and Premilla D’Cruz.Response Books, ©2009 184 p. $19.95 (pa)The core theme that emerges from this qualitative study of the workexperiences and identities of agents employed at international facing callcenters located in the Indian cities of Bangalore and Mumbai is thetheme of professionalism. The authors (professors of organizationalbehavior at the Indian Institute of Management Ahmedabad, India) findthat agents have embraced professionalism as part of their identity,seeing themselves as possessing of superior cognitive abilities, advancedqualifications, and a sense of responsibility and commitment to work. Asprofessionals, they comply with organizational requirements and justifythe transactional psychological contracts of employment as a means ofdiscipline. This professional identity, additionally, precludes engagementwith collective responses to employers, posing challenges for trade unionsinvolved in organizing the sector. In addition to exploring the facets ofthis theme that emerged in their interviews with call center employees,the authors also compare their notions of professionalism with the soci-ological literature of the professions, examine labor activist responses tocall center industry, and analyze interviews with call center managersabout their perceptions of professionalism within their organizations.Response Books is an imprint of Sage India.

HE9715 2009-019349 978-0-471-74146-6TThhee ssiixx iimmmmuuttaabbllee llaawwss ooff mmoobbiillee bbuussiinneessss..Sugai, Philip et al.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 201 p. $45.00 (pa)As outsiders working inside the Japanese system and academicresearchers working under marketing professor Sugai at theInternational U. of Japan, consultants and developers Koeder and Ciferriare uniquely positioned to analyze, with Sugai, the Japanese mobileindustry for what, if any, universal lessons may apply to equallyadvancing the industry elsewhere. Written for carriers and content andservice providers, the text outlines six key factors: the value of the mobileservices to the users versus the culture within which they are developed;Japan’s ecosystem model for mobile innovation; the empowering natureof the mobile platform; knowing when, where, and for what users usemobile technologies; the necessity for mobile-specific business models;and the importance of “simplexity”—combining high tech complexitywith elegance and ease of use. Related material on the six immutablelaws is regularly expanded and updated on a companion website.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –120–

HF54 978-1-84334-366-0GGlloobbaall rreesseeaarrcchh wwiitthhoouutt lleeaavviinngg yyoouurr ddeesskk;; ttrraavveelllliinngg tthheewwoorrlldd wwiitthh yyoouurr mmoouussee aass ccoommppaanniioonn..Macoustra, Jane. (Chandos information professional series.)Chandos Publishing, ©2010 202 p. $99.95 (pa)UK-based Macoustra has been an information professional for some 30years, working with a diversity of people from many different countriesand expanding her understanding of the information profession and itsrelated disciplines across boundaries and cultures. She presents a quickreference guide to how the internet and its many components can assistserious researchers to locate business information and reliable sourcesquickly, while also being able to ignore the unreliable information thatcan be posted. The text includes information on global as well as country-specific resources providing quick access to different types of content,and also addresses major business issues such as terrorism, surveillance,and corruption; knowing your customer and ensuring customer data issecure; and social networking tools, including Web 2.0. For informationprofessionals, educators, students, librarians, and general users interestedin researching corporation or industry information. Distributed in NorthAmerica by Neal-Schuman.

HF1008 2009-041883 978-0-8213-7407-8BBuussiinneessss rreegguullaattiioonn aanndd eeccoonnoommiicc ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Norman V. Loayza and Luis Servén.The World Bank, ©2010 274 p. $40.00 (pa)Loayza, an economist at the World Bank, and Servén, who works inmacroeconomics and growth at the World Bank, compile six essays byeconomists working in universities in Latin America and the US, and atthe World Bank, who document the patterns of business regulationaround the world and their impact on aggregate economic performance,with particular attention to Latin America. They draw links betweenmicroeconomic regulatory policies and aggregate productivity, growth,and volatility from different perspectives, and discuss product marketregulations, the dynamics of firm renewal and resource reallocation,informality, and policy-induced rigidities and their impact on economies.

HF1040 2009-019394 978-1-4221-0315-9BBeeaattiinngg tthhee ccoommmmooddiittyy ttrraapp;; hhooww ttoo mmaaxxiimmiizzee yyoouurrccoommppeettiittiivvee ppoossiittiioonn aanndd iinnccrreeaassee yyoouurr pprriicciinngg ppoowweerr..D’Aveni, Richard A.Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2010 194 p. $27.95D’Aveni (strategic management, Dartmouth) defines the commodity trapas a form of hypercompetition in which companies are forced to contin-uously differentiate products and decrease prices in order to keep upwith competitors. He draws on a study of 30 industries to explain howcommoditization works, how to identify the three most common com-modity traps, and how to respond to each. Examples explore the tacticsof companies such as Harley-Davidson, iPhone, and Apple. An appendixoffers tips for doing price-benefit analysis.

HF1040 2009-036239 978-0-8166-4692-0CCoolldd wwaarr oonn tthhee hhoommee ffrroonntt;; tthhee ssoofftt ppoowweerr ooffmmiiddcceennttuurryy ddeessiiggnn..Castillo, Greg.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 278 p. $24.95 (pa)While the famed “Kitchen Debate” between President Richard Nixon andSoviet Premier Nikita Khrushchev, conducted at a model Americandomestic home at the 1959 American National Exhibition in Moscow, wasperhaps the first occasion of widespread recognition of the role of con-sumer design in the ideological contest between the superpowers (indeed,the Washington Post ran the headline: “U.S. Typical Home Enters ColdWar”), Castillo (College of Environmental Design, U. of California atBerkeley) argues that in fact it was really the parting volley of a ten-yearcampaign of Cold War consumption propaganda conducted by bothsides. He relates the history of this campaign, focusing on the role of themodel domestic home as a means of deploying American capitalist andSoviet communist ideological constructions of consumerism. A signif-icant part of the discussion concerns the way this propaganda warplayed out in a divided Germany.

HF1359 2009-031206 978-0-465-01876-5TThhee eenndd ooff iinnfflluueennccee;; wwhhaatt hhaappppeennss wwhheenn ootthheerr ccoouunnttrriieesshhaavvee tthhee mmoonneeyy..Cohen, Stephen S. and J. Bradford DeLong.Basic Books, ©2010 165 p. $22.00Cohen and DeLong (regional planning and economics, U. of California,Berkeley) explore how America’s international trade deficit might impactits power in the world. They illustrate the ways the US lost its money,how oil-producing and Asian manufacturing countries now hold themoney, and America’s relationship with China, which is the biggestholder of US debt. They discuss consequences regarding the loss offoreign policy, cultural, and industrial power. There is no bibliography.References are available online.

HF1379 2009-030156 978-0-7546-7439-9FFaaiirr ttrraaddee,, ccoorrppoorraattee aaccccoouunnttaabbiilliittyy aanndd bbeeyyoonndd;;eexxppeerriimmeennttss iinn gglloobbaall jjuussttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Kate Macdonald and Shelley Marshall.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 395 p. $134.95Labor organizers and scholar, economists and business leaders, politicalscientists, and others gathered during December 2007, apparently inMelbourne, Australia, to consider fair trade from the perspectives of indi-vidual and civic action, responsible consumers and corporations, mobi-lized workers, and a strengthened and transformed role for the state.Among the topics are fair trade brands and the problem of ownership,voluntarism, corporate responsibility and stakeholder governance in theAustralian garment sector, the threat to trade union rights posed by sup-posed corporate social responsibility, linking workers and campaigningto improve working conditions across the supply chain, the regulatoryimpact of using public procurement to promote better labor standards incorporate supply chains, and the renewed domestic response to laborabuses in China.

HF1379 2009928592 978-1-84542-195-3TThhee llaaww aanndd eeccoonnoommiiccss ooff gglloobbaalliissaattiioonn;; nneeww cchhaalllleennggeessffoorr aa wwoorrlldd iinn fflluuxx..Title main entry. Ed. by Linda Yueh.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 342 p. $160.00There was a time when the study of the law of international economicswas done be analyzing the discrete legal systems within individual coun-tries. That has changed with the development of more robust interna-tional trade, the rise of international trade agreements like NAFTA, theestablishment of new governmental jurisdiction like the European Union,and the effects of international web-commerce. This book, from OxfordFellow Linda Yueh, provides a detailed overview of these and other issuesin flux in the new global economy. The contributors are legal and eco-nomic experts from the US and Europe. Extensive references make thisa good starting point for more in-depth research.

HF1379 2007-938018 978-1-84376-310-9TThhee tthheeoorryy ooff iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ttrraaddee;; vv..22:: TThhee tthheeoorryy ooffiinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ccaappiittaall mmoovveemmeennttss..Chipman, John S. (Economists of the twentieth century)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 346 p. $160.00Having outlined the broad contours of international trade theory in thefirst volume, Chipman (emeritus, economics, U. of Minnesota) here col-lects 11 articles he has published on the international movement ofphysical and financial capital. Topics include physical capital movementas a substitute for technology transfer, the theory of exploitative trade andinvestment problems, the theory and application of trade utility func-tions, exchange-rate flexibility and resource allocation, a general-equi-librium framework for analyzing the responses of imports and exportsto external price changes, the classical transfer problem and the theoryof foreign exchanges, and the application of integrability and dualitytheory to the classical transfer problem in international trade.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–121–

HF1385 978-1-55458-156-6RReeddeessiiggnniinngg tthhee WWoorrlldd TTrraaddee OOrrggaanniizzaattiioonn ffoorr tthhee ttwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Debra P. Steger.Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2010 475 p. $44.95 (pa)Edited by Steger (law, U. of Ottawa, Canada), this volume arises out ofan international, collaborative project on institutional reform of theWorld Trade Organization that was organized by the Emerging DynamicGlobal Economies Network and funded by Networks of Centres ofExcellence Canada and the International Development Research Centre. Itfocuses on three major research themes: decision-making and internalmanagement of the WTO, the relationship between the WTO andregional trade agreements, and transparency. The volume’s 15 chaptersaddress such specific topics as the functional and normative analysis ofthe WTO system, the Secretariat and decision-making, lessons onimproving decision making from the International Monetary Fund andthe World Bank, internal management of the WTO, evolving WTOjurisprudence on transparency and good governance, domestic consul-tation and the WTO, lessons from China on enhancing business partici-pation in trade policy-making, options for public and non-governmentalorganization participation, debates over accommodating developingcountries in the WTO, and the WTO and regional trade agreements.

HF1456 2009-032773 978-0-8014-4823-2PPrrootteeccttiioonn ffoorr eexxppoorrtteerrss;; ppoowweerr aanndd ddiissccrriimmiinnaattiioonn iinnttrraannssaattllaannttiicc ttrraaddee rreellaattiioonnss,, 11993300--22001100..Dür, Andreas.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 246 p. $39.95The liberalization of trade between the US and European countries hasproceeded more rapidly than many economists assume, says Dür (inter-national politics, U. of Salzburg, Germany), but still not as rapidly as onemight expect if decision makers really did think it would increase eco-nomic efficiency. To solve this puzzle, he argues that the trade policyover the eight decades he examines has been designed to favor exporters.He says that there are often domestic interests arguing against imports,but exporters band together to further their interests, and politicians findthey need to listen. Among is topics are imperial preference and the USreaction 1932-47, deadlock in transatlantic trade negotiations 1948-57, thesingle market program and transatlantic trade policies during the 1980s,and competition between the European Union and the US for markets1995-2010.

HF1456 2009-049061 978-0-88132-439-6RReeeennggaaggiinngg EEggyypptt;; ooppttiioonnss ffoorr UUSS--EEggyypptt eeccoonnoommiiccrreellaattiioonnss..Kotschwar, Barbara and Jeffrey J. Schott. (Policy analyses in interna-tional economics; 90)Peterson Inst. Int’l Economics, ©2010 137 p. $20.95 (pa)Schott and Kotschwar—who move in and out of government, universities,and think tanks relating to US foreign and economic policy—exploreopportunities and constraints that US president Obama will encounter ifhe shifts the focus of US policy in the Middle East and North Africa frommilitary to economic. They argue that such a reorientation will requiremore attention to relations with Egypt because it holds a strategicposition economically and politically in the region, and because the USand Egypt already have significant economic relations that would beeasier to enhance than creating new ones elsewhere would be. Morespecifically, they suggest enhancing market access in goods, stimulatingservices trade, modernizing the bilateral investment treaty, cooperatingon trade facilitation, and cooperating to enhance Egypt’s trade capacity.

HF1604 2009-032150 978-1-58826-726-9CChhiinnaa,, tthhee ddeevveellooppiinngg wwoorrlldd,, aanndd tthhee nneeww gglloobbaallddyynnaammiicc..Title main entry. Ed. by Lowell Dittmer and George T. Yu.Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2010 251 p. $22.50 (pa)The underlying argument is that the People’s Republic of China hasalways identified strongly with the five-sixths of the world beyond thewealthy industrial pale, and this identity has intensified since the end ofthe Cold War, removing some of the country’s urgency of security com-petition with the superpowers, and providing an alternative reference tofill in the vacuum left by the collapse of the Communist bloc. Politicalscholars, most in the US or Britain, set the scene with discussions ofchange perspectives and policies, the rise of a new trading nation, andChina’s global identity. The core chapters survey Chinese relations withSoutheast Asia, South Asia, greater Central Asia, Africa, the Middle East,and Latin America.

HF1713 2009933410 978-1-84844-575-8GGlloobbaalliizzaattiioonn aanndd ffrreeee ttrraaddee..Title main entry. Ed. by Philip Booth and Ricard Wellings.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 713 p. $360.00The Institute of Economic Affairs is a UK-based think tank generallyassociated with the promotion of free-market policies and ideas. Thisvolume collects 27 papers from the publishing program of the Instituteon the topic of globalization and trade. Largely published in the 1990sand 2000s (although the earliest paper is from 1969), the papers providea sense of the general program of the Institute by addressing a broadrange of issues, including protectionism and market failure, Africantrade policies, the role of the World Bank in global trade, trade and theenvironment, capital controls, migration and globalization, civil societyand governance, regulation of child labor, development and wireless tech-nologies, and free trade agreements in Asia.

HF3535 978-1-84682-182-0BBrriissttooll’’ss ttrraaddee wwiitthh IIrreellaanndd aanndd tthhee CCoonnttiinneenntt,, 11550033--11660011;;tthhee eevviiddeennccee ooff tthhee eexxcchheeqquueerr ccuussttoommss aaccccoouunnttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Susan Flavin and Evan T. Jones.Four Courts Press, ©2009 1081 p. $85.00Listing the duties paid to the crown for every item that arrived ordeparted the country, Britain’s exchequer customs accounts provide themost complete record of any pre-modern country’s trade history. Thismassive volume contains copies of the extant account records for Bristolfor the 16th century, providing an unparalleled raw view of the port’strade with Ireland and the European mainland. Glossaries describecommodities, weights, and measures that appear in the accounts, as wellas place names and first names. Indexes facilitate searches for people,places, and ships. Distributed in the U.S. by ISBS.

HF3555 2009-034950 978-0-674-04726-6RReevvoolluuttiioonnaarryy ccoommmmeerrccee;; gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn aanndd tthhee FFrreenncchhmmoonnaarrcchhyy..Cheney, Paul. (Harvard historical studies; 168)Harvard University Press, ©2010 305 p. $49.95While thinkers in 18th century France did not use the term “global-ization,” many were concerned with “le progrés du commerce” and itsimpact on social and political relations inside and outside of France.Cheney (history, U. of Chicago) offers an intellectual history of Frenchthinking about “le progrés du commerce,” adopting the anachronisticword “globalization” to point to similar concerns in 18th century Franceconcerning transnational economic forces outside the control of indi-vidual states. He focuses on the thinking of merchants active in thechambers of commerce established in France’s port cities, consuls ofcommerce and diplomats stationed abroad, and bureaucrats working inVersailles and in the colonies for the minister of the navy as they wroteabout such issues as competitive pressures, imperial politics, modes ofgovernance, and related questions of culture and social structure.

HF3838 2009-027735 978-0-89680-271-1SSiinnoo--MMaallaayy ttrraaddee aanndd ddiipplloommaaccyy ffrroomm tthhee tteenntthh tthhrroouugghhtthhee ffoouurrtteeeenntthh cceennttuurryy..Heng, Derek Thiam Soon. (Ohio University research in internationalstudies. Southeast Asia studies series; no.121)Ohio University Press, ©2009 286 p. $28.00 (pa)During the four centuries of Song (960-1279) and Yuan (1279-1368) rule,China reigned as one of the most important economies of Asia and a keymaritime market for the Malay region. Heng (history, Ohio State U. atMarion) examines the changes in the nature of the economic and diplo-matic relationship between China and the Malay region during thisperiod, moving beyond discussion of state-sponsored exchanges in orderto also explore such aspects as port activities, the impact of the subre-gional demand markets in the Malay region on the export of Chineseproducts, and the meeting of changing market demands in China forforeign products. These issues are explored through three key themes:changes in China’s political and economic contexts and the adminis-tration of maritime trade and their impact on the Malay region, the waysthese developments determined the types of products traded between thetwo regions, and the impact of structural changes and developments inboth regions on the nature of maritime trade.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –122–

HF5381 2008-925908 978-1-56286-546-7CCaarreeeerr ddeevveellooppmmeenntt bbaassiiccss..Kroth, Michael and McKay Christensen. (ASTD training basics series)ASTD Press, ©2009 131 p. $29.95 (pa)Kroth (adult and organizational learning, University of Idaho) andChristiansen, a leader of several Fortune 500 companies, provide trainingand workforce development managers with tools for bringing a careerdevelopment focus to their organizations. They explain how a focus oncareer development will benefit the company and employees, and look atthe importance of mentors. They also give advice on helping olderemployees and using the performance review process to facilitate careerdevelopment. Each chapter includes tips, basic concepts, and action steps.

HF5381 2009-030666 978-1-4221-3343-9HHaarrvvaarrdd BBuussiinneessss rreevviieeww oonn mmaannaaggiinngg yyoouurr ccaarreeeerr iinnttoouugghh ttiimmeess..Title main entry. (A Harvard Business review paperback)Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2009 174 p. $22.00 (pa)Written for managers and professionals in all areas, this collection ofarticles published over the past 10 years offers examples, personal stories,and advice from survivors of the business world and the recent economicdownturn. It shows how to protect your job in a recession, how to (not)stay stuck in the wrong career, the right way to be fired, and how greatleaders rebound after career disasters. Contributors come from the fieldsof business, leadership, management, and organizational behavior.

HF5382 2009-051258 978-1-60138-239-9HHooww ttoo uussee tthhee IInntteerrnneett ttoo ggeett yyoouurr nneexxtt jjoobb..Nagle, Janet.Atlantic Publishing, ©2010 288 p. $21.95 (pa)A San Antonio-based writer/former employee relations manager offersadvice on how to use the virtual world to land a job in the real world.Nagle covers how the Internet has changed the job search process,Internet lingo, where to find online advice and courses to brush up skills,and privacy concerns. The guide includes a foreword by a staffingagency owner, case studies, resources, and sample résumés and coverletters.

HF5382 2009-043790 978-1-59357-664-6TThhee ssmmaarrtt nneeww wwaayy ttoo ggeett hhiirreedd;; uussee eemmoottiioonnaalliinntteelllliiggeennccee aanndd llaanndd tthhee rriigghhtt jjoobb..Kappesser, Lisa Caldas.JIST Publishing, ©2010 226 p. $14.95 (pa)Kappesser, a consultant in emotional intelligence, shows general readershow to use concepts and skills of emotional intelligence (EQ) for careergrowth, focusing on self-awareness, self-management, social awareness,and social skills. The book begins with an overview of EQ and why it’simportant in the job search, then shows how to use EQ to challengedestructive thoughts, understand your own strengths and weaknesses,and change behavior. Ideas move from the internal to the external withadvice on how to apply EQ to empathize with employers, communicateand collaborate, handle interview questions, and overcome common jobsearch obstacles. The b&w layout is enlivened by graphics, vignetteboxes, frequent headings and bullet points, and reflection exerciseworksheets.

HF5384 2009-034162 978-0-313-36521-8TThhee bboooommeerrss’’ ccaarreeeerr ssuurrvviivvaall gguuiiddee;; aacchhiieevviinngg ssuucccceessss aannddccoonntteennttmmeenntt ffrroomm mmiiddddllee aaggee tthhrroouugghh rreettiirreemmeenntt..Tanner, Ken.Praeger, ©2010 168 p. $29.95In a book dedicated in part to “all the other 79,999,966 Boomers,” anAtlanta-based human resources consultant specializing in employeeretention and career development gives advice to fellow baby boomers onworking through the second half of their lives in the changed job market.The book includes accounts of coping with such challenges as age dis-crimination, burnout, making a career change, re-entering the workforce(with a special focus on women), finding the right job at the rightcompany, and avoiding layoffs.

HF5386 2009-038100 978-0-8160-8225-4110011 ttiippss ffoorr ggrraadduuaatteess aa ccooddee ooff ccoonndduucctt ffoorr ssuucccceessss aannddhhaappppiinneessss iinn yyoouurr pprrooffeessssiioonnaall lliiffee,, rreevv.. eedd..Morem, Susan.Ferguson Publishing, ©2010 270 p. $35.00Morem, a business advice columnist and media personality, gives com-monsense career and workplace advice to recent graduates. Seven sec-tions of 1-3 page entries cover work skills, communication (turn off yourcell phone at work), leadership, social skills (surviving the companyparty), self-discipline, positive attitude, and how to live an extraordinarylife. This edition offers new material on using technology in the jobsearch, staying employed in a sluggish economy, job loss, money man-agement, the value of internships, and the pitfalls of social networking.An appendix provides insights and advice from real people working ina variety of industries. The book is marketed for recent high school andcollege graduates, but high school graduates may be turned off by thebook’s plain b&w layout and preachy tone.

HF5386 2009-031525 978-0-7494-5548-4TThhee ggrroowwiinngg bbuussiinneessss hhaannddbbooookk;; iinnssppiirraattiioonn aanndd aaddvviicceeffrroomm ssuucccceessssffuull eennttrreepprreenneeuurrss aanndd ffaasstt ggrroowwiinngg UUKKccoommppaanniieess,, 1122tthh eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Adam Jolly.Kogan Page, ©2010 455 p. $49.95This well-respected handbook provides advice for senior managers ingrowing companies to maximizing growth, exploiting and protectingtheir best ideas and inventions, and controlling risks. In 69 chapters, pro-fessionals representing companies and universities in Europe discusssuch topics as planning for growth, changing options for funding, out-thinking the competition, risk management, innovation, intellectualproperty issues, alternatives to redundancy, green technology, com-mercial sustainability, coaching for growth, creativity, marketing,employee relations, green businesses, leadership development, interna-tional expansion, acquisitions, and succession planning. There is noindex or bibliography. Jolly is a business writer specializing in growthmanagement, innovation, technology, and business risk.

HF5415 2009-051124 978-0-7897-4256-8BBllooggggiinngg ttoo ddrriivvee bbuussiinneessss;; ccrreeaattee aanndd mmaaiinnttaaiinn vvaalluuaabblleeccuussttoommeerr ccoonnnneeccttiioonnss..Butow, Eric & Rebecca Bollwitt.Que Publishing, ©2010 179 p. $21.99 (pa)This guidebook starts from scratch to show how to create blogs that willhelp enhance customer loyalty, find new customers, get more sales, and,possibly most importantly, get valuable feedback. Authors Butow (Webdesign and e-marketing company CEO) and Bollwit (Web site developerand social media consultant) discuss the importance of blogging, lever-aging blogs with marketing tools, creating a strategy, blogging respon-sibly, finding topics, getting readers, and taking advantage of Web 3.0blogs. A list of blogging sites also is included.

HF5415 2009-049001 978-81-321-0234-2BBrraannddiinngg ddeemmyyssttiiffiieedd;; ppllaannss ttoo ppaayyooffffss..Verma, Harsh V.Response Books, ©2010 247 p. $29.95 (pa)In this text on brand management, Verma (management studies, theUniversity of Delhi, India) reviews brand building in the context thatmost marketers face, with examples of Indian brands that have evolvedfrom regional to national prominence. Chapter topics include brandtransformation, brand vision, internal and external leveraging of brandassets, decoding branding strategy, and power branding. The book’saudience includes students of business management, advertising, andbranding, as well as professionals in marketing, advertising, consulting,and strategy. Response Books is an imprint of Sage India.

HF5415 2009-041069 978-1-58980-699-3BBuuiilldd yyoouurr oowwnn bbrraanndd..Dvorak, Doug.Pelican Publishing Co., ©2010 160 p. $23.00For individuals, entrepreneurs, and professionals, Dvorak, a sales trainer,management consultant, corporate humorist, and speaker who is asso-ciated with a marketing group, provides a straightforward and briefguide that explains how to create, sell, and sustain a memorable personalbrand. He gives examples of top brands like Coca-Cola, Microsoft, Disney,and Oprah Winfrey and how they work, how to build a personal brand,add humor, promote it, use the internet and social media, manage thebrand, be a one-person public relations firm, and how employees canbenefit from personal brands.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–123–

HF5415 2008-006057 978-0-385-52388-2BBuuyyoollooggyy;; ttrruutthh aanndd lliieess aabboouutt wwhhyy wwee bbuuyy.. ((rreepprriinntt,,22000088))Lindstrom, Martin.Broadway Books, ©2010 254 p. $15.00 (pa)In this paperback edition of the 2008 New York Times bestseller, a mar-keting expert goes beyond traditional market research to explain con-sumer behavior. Drawing on studies using functional brain scanningtechniques, Lindstrom discusses links between religion, superstitions,subliminal advertising (yes it’s lurking), and buying behavior. In a newchapter, he argues that today’s recession will have a long-term impact onshopping habits.

HF5415 978-0-470-57109-5EEnnggaaggee!!;; tthhee ccoommpplleettee gguuiiddee ffoorr bbrraannddss aanndd bbuussiinneesssseess ttoobbuuiilldd,, ccuullttiivvaattee,, aanndd mmeeaassuurree ssuucccceessss iinn tthhee nneeww wweebb..Solis, Brian.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 382 p. $24.95Written in a clear and persuasive style, this book teaches the reader aboutusing social media in business, the different media and how each con-nects with people, and how marketers can capture the personal connec-tions possible through social media to create a brand people love. Solisis very good at giving readers direction on the ways to present themselvesand their company so the two merge and foster the sense of the humanrelationship the company wishes to build with its customers. Filled withideas and information, this guide will benefit a wide readership at alllevels of business.

HF5415 2009-035143 978-0-470-48785-3FFlliipp tthhee ffuunnnneell;; hhooww ttoo uussee eexxiissttiinngg ccuussttoommeerr ttoo ggaaiinn nneewwoonneess..Jaffe, Joseph.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 286 p. $29.95Author and blogger Jaffe, president of crayon, a consultancy advisingclients on new media and social media, contends that far too many com-panies are using yesterday’s marketing strategies to deal with today’s cus-tomer. In his trademark no holds barred, tell it like it is style, Jaffe saysit is indeed time for marketers to “flip the funnel”—to turn what they typ-ically do upside down and toss their old marketing strategies. As he says,it’s time to stop focusing solely on acquiring new customers, but to takeadvantage of existing customers: they’re the people who can be advocatesand spread the word. Readers may not agree with everything he says,but it’s a refreshing read and great, thought-provoking fun.

HF5415 2009-035153 978-1-4200-9330-8LLiisstteenniinngg ttoo tthhee vvooiiccee ooff tthhee mmaarrkkeett;; hhooww ttoo iinnccrreeaasseemmaarrkkeett sshhaarree aanndd ssaattiissffyy ccuurrrreenntt ccuussttoommeerrss..Reidenbach, R. Eric.CRC Press, ©2010 193 p. $54.95Most companies have caught on to the need to satisfy and even anticipatethe needs of their customers. This book, however, focuses on techniquesfor exploring the demands of the entire market, including potential cus-tomers who currently have their needs met by one of your competitors.Introducing the Voice of the Market (VOM), Reidenbach constructs apractical guide to methods of data collection and analysis and thenmoves on to the construction of a competitive value proposition. Untilnow, Six Sigma practitioners have too often been mostly driven by costreduction strategies. Here there is a focus on using the VOM as a directorof where to apply Six Sigma in the future—as a tool to plan the overalldirection of the firm.

HF5415 2009-034618 978-981-283-827-8MMaannaaggiinngg ccuussttoommeerr vvaalluuee;; oonnee ssttaaggee aatt aa ttiimmee..Soman, Dilip and Sara N-Marandi.World Scientific, ©2010 401 p. $65.00Addressing what companies want customers to do, rather than whatmarketers can do, Soman and N-Marandi (U. of Toronto, Canada) drawfrom Soman’s class lectures and as an executive trainer to describe howto create and manage customer value using a framework based on cus-tomer and not firm activities, and on the concept of managing the inter-section between the value that the firm creates for a customer and thevalue of a customer to the firm. They detail how companies can developtheir best customer and discuss activities customers engage in, with thefocus on influencing purchase behavior, such as visiting stores andincreasing spending and loyalty. They discuss metrics, constructing avalue chain and modeling the value, and developing strategies, tactics,and execution plans, as well as harnessing customer intelligence, pricingand customer psychology, and aligning the organization. Case studies ofthree companies are included.

HF5415 2009-021715 978-1-4129-6312-1MMaarrkkeettiinngg mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; aa ccuussttoommeerr--oorriieenntteedd aapppprrooaacchh..Clow, Kenneth E. and Donald Baack.Sage Publications, ©2010 537 p. $92.95Clow (marketing, U. of Louisiana, Monroe) and Baack’s (management,Pittsburg State U.) textbook for marketing management students is struc-tured around four themes distinguishing it from other texts and makingit particularly useful to marketing students: a strong emphasis on cus-tomer service, a focus on entry-level and first-line supervisory positionsand in small and mid-sized companies, a careful integration of the dis-ciplines of marketing and management, and incorporation of statisticalmethodologies and approaches throughout the book. Each chapterincludes an opening vignette, critical thinking exercises, mini-cases forclass discussion, practical advice on marketing careers and profiles ofsuccessful marketing graduates, chapter terms, and review questions.Numerous supplemental materials for students and instructors areavailable at a companion website.

HF5415 2009-018628 978-0-7656-2363-8MMaarrkkeettiinngg tthheeoorryy;; ffoouunnddaattiioonnss,, ccoonnttrroovveerrssyy,, ssttrraatteeggyy,,rreessoouurrccee--aaddvvaannttaaggee tthheeoorryy..Hunt, Shelby D.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 490 p. $109.95Prepared by Hunt (marketing, Texas Tech U.) this is the 5th edition of atextbook exploring both the philosophy of marketing science and thelarger philosophical debates around issues such as scientific realism, pos-itivism, the nature of truth, and the possibility of objectivity. Perhaps thebiggest change in this edition is the growth in consideration of resourceadvantage (R-A) theory from a brief discussion to one of four parts of thebook. This reflects the growing viewpoint that R-A theory is a generaltheory of marketing that can also be used to study marketing strategy.More theoretical than your typical marketing textbook, it is intended fora more academic audience than undergraduate business majors.

HF5415 2009-930876 978-1-84844-165-1MMeeaassuurreemmeenntt iinn mmaarrkkeettiinngg rreesseeaarrcchh;; aann aalltteerrnnaattiivveeffrraammeewwoorrkk..Salzberger, Thomas.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 482 p. $225.00Salzberger (Wirtschaftsunivesität Wien, Austria) calls for incorporatingnew concepts of quantitative measurement into marketing science andparticularly promotes the application of approaches from psychometricsin an effort to gain measures that are better substantiated and theoreti-cally sound. He analyzes and compares the normative frameworksbehind the standard paradigm and the new approaches of formativeindicators, the C-OAR-SE approach for scale development, and itemresponse theory. He criticizes the standard approach for failing to takethe scientific requirements of measurement into account and proposesincorporating the concept of measurement from psychometrics into theRasch model for measurement, an item response theory model that isrelated to the theory of additive conjoint measurement. After describingthe model, he provides examples of its application in empirical settings.

HF5415 2009-033706 978-1-4221-1721-7RReeoorrggaanniizzee ffoorr rreessiilliieennccee;; ppuuttttiinngg ccuussttoommeerrss aatt tthhee cceenntteerrooff yyoouurr bbuussiinneessss..Gulati, Ranjay.Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2009 270 p. $35.00Filled with examples from companies that Gulati (business adminis-tration, Harvard Business School) studied over the past ten years, thisbook examines how shifting from an inside-out to an outside-in mindsetallows a company to respond creatively to market opportunities. Thisrequires the implementation of five levers: Coordination, Cooperation,Clout, Capability and Connection. These can be described as breakingdown organizational silos and insuring that attitudes and behaviorsacross the organization are customer focused, giving more clout to thoseindividuals who respond to customers and making sure they have thenecessary skills, and building external connections to provide responsivecustomer solutions. This is a quick read for business professionals andinterested laypersons.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –124–

HF5415 2009-926751 978-1-84787-505-1TThhee SSAAGGEE hhaannddbbooookk ooff mmaarrkkeettiinngg tthheeoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Pauline Maclaran et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 523 p. $140.00Citing a disciplinary need in marketing for building a distinct body oftheory, rather than simply borrowing theory from psychology and eco-nomics, the editors (of the U. of London an the U. of Leicester, UK, andRutgers U., US) hope to stimulate theory development through the pres-entation of 28 chapters that provide an overview of key theoreticalapproaches, issues, and debates in the field. Overarching topics includethe historical development of marketing theory, the philosophical under-pinnings of theory, major theoretical debates, the impact of theory onrepresentations of the customer, the impact of theory on representationsof the marketing organization, and contemporary and future issues inmarketing theory.

HF5415 2009-039573 978-0-672-33067-4SSaammss tteeaacchh yyoouurrsseellff MMiiccrroossoofftt DDyynnaammiiccss CCRRMM 44 iinn 2244hhoouurrss..Stanton, Anne A.Sams, ©2010 459 p. $34.99 (pa)Stanton (Microsoft Dynamics Systems CRM expert) gives readers a step-by-step guide to learning Microsoft Dynamics CRM 4, the versatilebusiness software that has several applications, including customer rela-tions management, sales force automation, and more. The author coversthe sales, service, and reporting capabilities of CRM and the primaryproduct building blocks and its extensibility. The book is intended forboth existing users looking for additional information and those whohave never touched the program.

HF5415 2009-051244 978-0-470-56341-0SSoocciiaall mmeeddiiaa 110011;; ttaaccttiiccss aanndd ttiippss ttoo ddeevveelloopp yyoouurrbbuussiinneessss oonnlliinnee..Brogan, Chris.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 337 p. $22.95Social media blogger Brogan explains the social media tools and tacticsfor readers who want to take advantage of them in their business oper-ations. Facebook, Twitter, blogs, and LinkedIn are all familiar terms tomost people in business, but the author emphasizes how to use themskillfully and in combination. He also discusses related topics such ascomposing effective emails, improving conferences, and using audio andvideo.

HF5422 2009-035110 978-0-313-36552-2TThhee ddiissttrriibbuuttiioonn ttrraapp;; kkeeeeppiinngg yyoouurr iinnnnoovvaattiioonnss ffrroommbbeeccoommiinngg ccoommmmooddiittiieess..Thomas, Andrew R. and Timothy J. Wilkinson.Praeger, ©2010 172 p. $29.95Thomas (international business, U. of Akron) and Wilkinson (marketing,Montana State U., Billings) argue that current marketing and distributionideas have wrongly convinced US innovators that the sale and distri-bution of their products and services is better left to outside forces, andthat this creates a distribution trap that dilutes their value and givespower to mega-distributors like Wal-Mart, who control the marketplace.They describe this trap, how it hurts companies by forcing them toreduce costs and obtain cheap labor overseas, and how innovators cantake control of the value of their products and services, get higher profitsand better sales, and keep jobs in the US, with examples such asGoodyear Tires, Levi Strauss, and Rubbermaid.

HF5548 2009-009592 978-1-60138-299-3AAmmaazzoonn iinnccoommee;; hhooww aannyyoonnee ooff aannyy aaggee,, llooccaattiioonn,, aanndd//oorrbbaacckkggrroouunndd ccaann bbuuiilldd aa hhiigghhllyy pprrooffiittaabbllee oonnlliinnee bbuussiinneesssswwiitthh AAmmaazzoonn..Cohen, Sharon L.Atlantic Publishing, ©2010 336 p. $24.95 (pa)Cohen discusses the different options for selling products throughAmazon’s website or selling Amazon products through other websites,and outlines the process of self-publishing a book, CD, or DVD throughAmazon’s CreateSpace eStore. Very general information skims over thestructure of the Amazon marketplace, advantage program, associateprogram, aStore, and WebStore application.

HF5548 2009-042992 978-1-60566-964-9EE--ccoommmmeerrccee ttrreennddss ffoorr oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnaall aaddvvaanncceemmeenntt;; nneewwaapppplliiccaattiioonnss aanndd mmeetthhooddss..Title main entry. Ed. by Mehdi Khosrow-Pour.Information Science Reference, ©2010 358 p. $180.00The 17 papers in this collection propose a component-based architecturefor delivering location-based services, a contract negotiation protocolbased on dependency relations, an integrated e-newspaper businessmodel, and an e-commerce web site evaluation method. Other topicsinclude context-aware query processing in ad-hoc networks, the evolutionof online relationships with consumers, IT competencies needed for e-services assimilation, and the adoption of internet technology by theOmani banking industry. The editor works for the Information ResourcesManagement Association. Most of the papers were previously publishedin the Journal of electronic commerce in organizations, vol. 6, in 2008 byIGI Publishing.

HF5548 2009-036871 978-1-61520-611-7EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ee--bbuussiinneessss ddeevveellooppmmeenntt aanndd mmaannaaggeemmeennttiinn tthhee gglloobbaall eeccoonnoommyy;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by In Lee.Business Science Reference, ©2010 1310 p. $1,695.00Since the early 1990s, propelled by new technologies and new globalreach, companies of all sizes have been transforming strategies and oper-ations, ditching long-held systems in order to find their way in radicallynew business environments. No one can really see the whole picture asit exists today, much less describe the future, but everyone is trying.Toward this end, three volumes present 129 articles written by a trulyinternational roster of experts, shaped by editor In Lee (emeritus, WesternIllinois University) with the help of an editorial board and a long list ofreviewers. Arrangement is in 12 sections addressing theoretical founda-tions, planning and performance evaluation, marketplaces, businessstrategies and models, management, online consumer behavior, mobilecommerce, web services and e-business integration, e-business systemdevelopment, issues and opportunities, and emerging trends. Students,policy-makers, e-business application developers, market researchers, andmany others involved with business will find thorough analysis ofcurrent thinking and future trends, along with substantial references tothe journal literature and definitions of key terms. Narrowly focusedarticles address such topics as the antecedents and consequences of e-pro-curement, factors that lead to a successful intermediary in electroniccommerce, strategy in franchising, patterns for web caching to speed upthe internet, and a data mining approach to building context-aware e-commerce systems, among many others. Business Science Reference is animprint of IGI Global. The set is available in print; perpetual access tothe online version requires an additional charge.

HF5548 2009-051000 978-0-471-76254-6IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn tteecchhnnoollooggyy rriisskk mmaannaaggeemmeenntt iinn eenntteerrpprriisseeeennvviirroonnmmeennttss;; aa rreevviieeww ooff iinndduussttrryy pprraaccttiicceess aanndd aapprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttoo rriisskk mmaannaaggeemmeenntt tteeaammss..Kouns, Jake and Daniel Minoli.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 421 p. $89.95Kouns and Minoli offer information security managers, security analysts,systems developers, auditors, consultants, and students a survey ofindustry approaches, best practices, and standards for how an organi-zation can manage the risks to their business-critical assets. Coverageincludes an overview of industry practices in risk assessment, mitigation,and management approaches and methodologies; processes for devel-oping a repeatable program to address technological issues and humanresources within an organization; analytical techniques for assessing riskand the benefit of risk remediation; and development of a riskassessment team that can properly foresee, prevent, and/or remediatepotential infractions. Co-founder of the nonprofit Open SecurityFoundation, Kouns is a business-focused technology and informationsecurity executive with an extensive knowledge base and internationalexperience; Minoli has substantial technical hands-on and managerialexperience in security, networking, and telecommunications for globalcarriers and financial companies, including Prudential Securities, CapitalOne Financial, ITT, and AT&T.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–125–

HF5548 2009-023914 978-0-470-99806-9IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall hhaannddbbooookk ooff wwoorrkk aanndd hheeaalltthh ppssyycchhoollooggyy,,33dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Cary L. Cooper et al.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2009 491 p. $199.95In this volume for students, researchers, and practitioners in organiza-tional psychology, health psychology, and occupational medicine, as wellas human resource professionals and policy makers, Cooper (externalrelations and organizational psychology and health, Lancaster U., UK) etal. compile 21 chapters that explore the intersection between organiza-tional health and psychology. Specialists in management, psychology,medicine, human factor development, and other areas from Europe, theUS, Israel, and Canada address psychosocial factors in the workplace,sources of stress, and individual and organizational interventions andprevention. They discuss the changing nature of work and the workplace,job strain and its impact on health; individual differences regardingwork stress and health; the role of workplace factors like new tech-nologies and career patterns; how to enhance well-being; and organiza-tional approaches, culture, leadership, and change. This edition has newchapters on positive psychology, well-being, gender differences, and olderworkers. It focuses on issues such as the psychological contract at work,flexible working, coaching, counseling and support systems, individu-alism versus communalism, and how careers are changing in contem-porary times.

HF5548 2009-034817 978-1-60566-916-8MMoobbiilliizzeedd mmaarrkkeettiinngg aanndd tthhee ccoonnssuummeerr;; tteecchhnnoollooggiiccaallddeevveellooppmmeennttss aanndd cchhaalllleennggeess..Title main entry. Ed. by Gonca Telli Yamamoto.Business Science Reference, ©2010 276 p. $180.00This work will be of interest to mobile marketers, IT managers, andinformation systems students in business schools. It covers generic con-cepts of mobile marketing, reports on technological developments andchallenges, and describes best practices for human interaction withinformation technologies. After an overview of the information age, achapter on mobile marketing practices looks at mobile services, adver-tising, portals, and mobile broadcast. Material on promotion and distri-bution focuses on SMS marketing, location based advertising, andBluetooth marketing. The mobile consumer is described in terms of pref-erences, expectations, and behaviors in a mobile culture that includesmobile entertainment and multimedia services, payment systems, socialnetworks, mobile dating, and buzz marketing. Some problems discussedare mobile gambling and mobile addiction, fraud, spamming and junkmessages, and malware. The book includes related articles co-authoredby the Yamamoto, totaling 45 pages. Yamamoto teaches in the School ofApplied Sciences at Okan University, Turkey.

HF5549 2009-031556 978-0-7656-2251-8CCoommppeennssaattiioonn aanndd oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnaall ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee;; tthheeoorryy,,rreesseeaarrcchh,, aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Gomez-Mejia, Luis R. et al.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 394 p. $59.95 (pa)Writing primarily for an academic audience, although practitioners andconsultants may also find the work of use, Gomez-Mejia (Arizona StateU., US), Berrone (IESE Business School, U. of Navarra, Spain) and Franco-Santos (Cranfield School of Management, UK) present a textbook thatreviews the scholarly literature on the linkages between compensationand firm performance. With a focus on upper management, as they areresponsible for most strategic decisions, they address the repertoire ofstrategic pay choices; pay choices and organizational strategies as aninterrelated set of decisions; theoretical foundations of executive com-pensation; determinants and consequences of executive pay; policychoices, strategic design of executive compensation programs, and imple-mentation; risk and executive pay; corporate social performance as analternative criteria for the design of executive compensation programs;measuring performance at different levels of the organization; and man-aging pay-for-performance systems.

HF5549 978-1-84519-317-1DDiivveerrssiittyy mmaannaaggeemmeenntt iinn pprraaccttiiccee;; aa ccrroossss--ccuullttuurraall &&mmuullttii--ddiisscciipplliinnaarryy aannnnoottaatteedd bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy aaddddrreessssiinnggppoolliiccyy aanndd wweellll--bbeeiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Susanne Küchler and Sandra Wallman.Sussex Academic Press, ©2009 208 p. $99.95The editors (professors of anthropology at U. College London, UK) presentan annotated bibliography that arose out of the work of the collaborativeresearch network “Sustainable Development in a Diverse World,” whichintegrates resources and expertise from such disciplines as anthropology,psychology, economics, sociology, political science, art history, economichistory, architecture, law, urban and regional studies, geography, and lin-guistics on diversity/sustainability issues in Europe. Some 172 entries ofbetween 300 to 400 words cover academic books and articles, journalisticand conference reports, novels, and fictional and documentary films andvideos. Each review specifies the subject, the main discipline, the locationwhere the study was conducted, the type of diversity at issue, and up tofive key words, details that were then used to construct the four indexesat the end of the text. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HF5549 2009-028926 978-0-7494-5693-1HHooww ttoo ppaassss sseelleeccttiioonn tteessttss;; eesssseennttiiaall pprreeppaarraattiioonn ffoorrnnuummeerriiccaall,, vveerrbbaall,, cclleerriiccaall aanndd IITT tteessttss,, 44tthh eedd..Bryon, Mike and Sanjay Modha.Kogan Page, ©2010 241 p. $17.95 (pa)Bryon, who runs a training consultancy in London and specializes inpsychometrics and training solutions, and Modha, a researcher and lec-turer in occupational and organizational psychology, offer a guide topreparing for numerical, verbal, clerical, and information technologyselection tests at the intermediate level, as well as improving scores onthem. After describing what these tests are, different types, how com-panies use and interpret them, and test-taking strategies and other briefinformation, the bulk of the book presents verbal, numerical, and clericalpractice tests with answers and explanations. This edition incorporates200 new questions and added explanations.

HF5549 2009-020603 978-0-7494-5688-7HHooww ttoo ssuucccceeeedd aatt aann aasssseessssmmeenntt cceennttrree;; eesssseennttiiaallpprreeppaarraattiioonn ffoorr ppssyycchhoommeettrriicc tteessttss,, ggrroouupp aanndd rroollee--ppllaayyeexxeerrcciisseess,, ppaanneell iinntteerrvviieewwss aanndd pprreesseennttaattiioonnss,, 33dd eedd..Tolley, Harry and Robert Wood.Kogan Page, ©2010 213 p. $19.95Tolley (School of Education, the University of Nottingham, UK) and Wood,a former professor, give background on the different types of tasks jobcandidates may encounter at assessment centers, such as group exercises,psychometric tests, panel interviews, role-play exercises, and electronicassessment. They offer advice on making successful presentations, andon projecting yourself authentically through personality, motivation, andemotional intelligence questionnaires. Readers can use the results ofpractice questions and explained answers to put together an individu-alized action plan. There is no subject index. Both authors have writtenother books on testing.

HF5549 978-81-8405-047-9TToowwaarrddss mmaannaaggiinngg ddiivveerrssiittyy;; ccuullttuurraall aassppeeccttss ooff bbuussiinneesssseennvviirroonnmmeenntt..Dogra, Deepak.Reference Press, ©2009 155 p. $25.00Dogra, who works with multinational and Indian companies on con-tinuous improvement and leadership skills, draws from a survey ofresearch and business practices of Western companies to address man-aging diversity in the workplace in India. He addresses culture, gender,affirmative action, Equal Employment Opportunity, human resourcesinterventions, best practices, individual and group behavior, and theIndian perspective. The awkward grammar and usage show that Englishis not the author’s first language. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HF5616 2009-035880 978-0-8213-8108-3AAccccoouunnttiinngg ffoorr ggrroowwtthh iinn LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa aanndd tthheeCCaarriibbbbeeaann;; iimmpprroovviinngg ccoorrppoorraattee ffiinnaanncciiaall rreeppoorrttiinngg ttoossuuppppoorrtt rreeggiioonnaall eeccoonnoommiicc ddeevveellooppmmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Henri Fortin et al. (Directions in development)The World Bank, ©2010 164 p. $29.95 (pa)This World Bank publication explores financial reporting, accounting,and auditing in Latin American and Caribbean countries. It is intendedto provide a background for policy discussions on accounting andauditing issues and to support financial reporting reform in thoseregions.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –126–

Book News places most science, medicine, technology, engineering, &agriculture books in SciTech Book News. Call for a sample issue.

HF5636 2009-035734 978-0-273-72395-0BBooookk--kkeeeeppiinngg aanndd aaccccoouunnttss ffoorr eennttrreepprreenneeuurrss..Quinn, Martin.Financial Times Prentice Hall, ©2010 191 p. $19.99 (pa)Written by entrepreneurs for entrepreneurs, this handbook explainsessentials of book keeping and accounts and shows how to manage thecompany’s finances. Short on theory and long on practical advice, thebook assumes no knowledge of accounting whatsoever. Early chapterscover accounting fundamentals, the business plan, and financing thebusiness. The next section covers keeping records and preparingaccounts, with chapters on the double-entry system, financial statements,and cash flow statements. The last part of the book tells how to analyzefinancial statements and value a business in preparation for selling it.The book includes key points, b&w screenshots, quick tips, and aglossary of accounting terms. A companion web site offers templates,blogs, and videos. Quinn is a chartered management accountant and alecturer in accounting at Dublin City University, Ireland.

HF5679 2009-037367 978-0-7637-8080-7SSAAPP EERRPP ffiinnaanncciiaallss aanndd FFIICCOO hhaannddbbooookk.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Padhi, S. N.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 322 p. $57.95This volume, written by Padhi (chartered accountant), covers in depth thebasics of Financial Accounting and Controlling (FICO) and explores theuse of a specific computer program. It starts off providing answers to223 frequently asked questions and then offers 171 typical certificationquestions, with the answers at the end of the section. Most of the rest ofthe book explores configuration and use of the software. There is no bib-liography, which might be expected in such a practical resource, butthere is an excellent index. Includes a CD-ROM with shortcuts, figuresand templates.

HF5681 2009-025053 978-0-470-45570-8FFiinnaanncciiaall ssttaatteemmeenntt ffrraauudd;; pprreevveennttiioonn aanndd ddeetteeccttiioonn,, 22ddeedd..Rezaee, Zabihollah and Richard Riley.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 332 p. $75.00Rezaee (accountancy, U. of Memphis) and Riley (public accounting, WestVirginia U.) offer a second edition of their book on detecting and pre-venting financial statement fraud. They explain in detail how fraud iscommitted and offer both theoretical and practical advice on how tocounter it. Coverage includes: financial reporting structure, why financialstatement fraud occurs, the role of corporate governance, oversightresponsibility of boards of directors, management responsibility, the roleof external auditors, digital approaches to fraud and forensic accounting,auditing standards, implementation rules, and emerging financialreporting and auditing initiatives.

HF5686 978-81-7708-220-3EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall aaccccoouunnttiinngg aanndd rreeppoorrttiinngg;; tthheeoorryy,, llaaww aannddeemmppiirriiccaall eevviiddeennccee..Pahuja, Shuchi.New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2009 314 p. $47.25Noting the increasing importance of the measurement of a company’senvironmental activities and impacts, Pahuja (PGDAV College, U. ofDelhi, India) explains the identification, measurement, recognition, anddisclosure of environmental costs, liabilities, and contingencies in thefinancial records of a company, with a focus on India. She covers envi-ronmental accounting, reporting, and auditing, their interrelationship,and how they form a part of a company’s comprehensive environmentalmanagement system, as well as the regulatory framework in variouscountries and specific practices in India. The book is aimed atresearchers, professionals, and academics. Distributed in North Americaby ISBS.

HF5734 2009-048846 978-1-57675-970-7SSttaannddiinngg iinn tthhee ffiirree;; lleeaaddiinngg hhiigghh--hheeaatt mmeeeettiinnggss wwiitthhccaallmm,, ccllaarriittyy,, aanndd ccoouurraaggee..Dressler, Larry.Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2010 216 p. $19.95 (pa)For facilitators, consultants, community activists, and organizationalleaders, Dressler, an organizational development consultant and processfacilitator who designs and facilitates high-stakes meetings in differentsettings, offers a guide to leading intense meetings using six internal“stances”: mental, emotional, and physical ways of being that help theleader remain steady, impartial, purposeful, compassionate, and good-humored. He outlines principles and practices that are self-directed andmeant for preparation, readiness, and use during and after the meeting.

HF5734 2009-035457 978-0-7494-6029-7TTaakkiinngg mmiinnuutteess ooff mmeeeettiinnggss,, 22dd rreevv..eedd..Gutmann, Joanna.Kogan Page, ©2010 150 p. $14.95 (pa)Training consultant Gutmann describes the tasks performed during eachstage of the meeting cycle from the decision to hold one through to thedistribution of the minutes. Short examples illustrate the format of anagenda, bullet points for taking notes, a process for structuring notes,which items to mention, and the proper layout and numbering of formalminutes.

HF5823 2009-034154 978-0-313-36582-9TThhee eennttrreepprreenneeuurr’’ss gguuiiddee ttoo aaddvveerrttiissiinngg..Ogden, James R. and Scott Rarick. (The entrepreneur’s guide)Praeger, ©2010 122 p. $39.95Ogden (marketing, Kutztown U.) and Rarick (director of media andaccount services, The Stevenson Group) provide tools for developingeffective advertising campaigns specifically for entrepreneurs. Needless tosay, advertising no longer amounts to a newspaper ad, a TV commercial,and a phone book listing. The authors explain how to take advantage ofthe ever-growing variety of additional outlets available such as theInternet, Twitter, and satellite radio. They also discuss brand devel-opment, media basics, choosing and implementing a media plan, inte-grating marketing communications, how advertising fits into marketingplans, and measuring effectiveness.

HF5827 2009-029115 978-0-470-44255-5IImmpplleemmeennttiinngg wwoorrdd ooff mmoouutthh mmaarrkkeettiinngg;; oonnlliinnee ssttrraatteeggiieessttoo iiddeennttiiffyy iinnfflluueenncceerrss,, ccrraafftt ssttoorriieess,, aanndd ddrraaww ccuussttoommeerrss..Cakim, Idil Miriam.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 204 p. $39.95Cakim, who is associated with a global public relations firm, explains anapproach to stimulating online word-of-mouth marketing programsthrough social media like blogs, conversation forums, and social net-works. Using examples ranging from Pepsi to Greenpeace, she describesthe process, including how to identify online influencers, craft andspread messages through social media experts, choose web-based tools,earn networking agents’ trust, turn negative into positive buzz, help net-working agents spread the message through online communities, build asocial media campaign, and measure its impact.

HF6146 978-0-596-15579-7GGooooggllee aaddvveerrttiissiinngg ttoooollss,, 22dd eedd..Davis, Harold and David Iwanow.O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2010 410 p. $34.99 (pa)Written for general business audience, this work shows how to useGoogle’s online advertising tools: AdSense, a contextual advertisingprogram for content sites, and AdWords, a program that allows anyonewith a credit card to place advertisements on the Internet. The first partof the book, 200 pages, examines features of successful web sites, andgives advice on creating a marketing plan, driving traffic to a web site,making money from a content-based web site, and making money withadvertising on a site. The book includes code examples for readers to usein programs and documentation. The rest of the book explains how touse AdSense and AdWords. This second edition focuses on best practices,with case studies demonstrating successful and unsuccessful approaches.It omits information on how to write code that takes advantage of theGoogle APIs. Davis has written other books on computing.

HF6146 2009-023392 1-59918-360-9UUllttiimmaattee gguuiiddee ttoo GGooooggllee aaddwwoorrddss;; hhooww ttoo aacccceessss 110000mmiilliioonn ppeeooppllee iinn 1100 mmiinnuutteess,, 22dd eedd..Marshall, Perry S. and Bryan Todd.Entrepreneur Press, ©2010 313 p. $24.95 (pa)Intended for online catalog and mail order businesses, this guideexplains how to setup a direct marketing campaign using GoogleAdWords placements on Google search result pages and other popularwebsites. The advice emphasizes the importance of choosing effectivekeywords and writing persuasive advertisements. The second editionadds a chapter on search engine optimization and sections on image adsand quality scores.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–127–

FFIINNAANNCCEE

HG106 2009-031871 978-1-4200-8266-1SSttoocchhaassttiicc ddoommiinnaannccee aanndd aapppplliiccaattiioonnss ttoo ffiinnaannccee,, rriisskk,,aanndd eeccoonnoommiiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by Songsak Sriboonchitta et alCRC Press, ©2010 443 p. $89.95Sriboonchitta, Sompong Dhompongsa (both Chiang Mai U., Thailand),Wing-Keung Wong (Hong Kong Baptist U.), and Hung T. Nguyen (NewMexico State U.-Las Cruces) present a textbook for a one-semester courseat the advanced undergraduate or beginning graduate level for eco-nomics students and others who have studied some calculus and someprobability and statistics. After a systematic exposit on of stochastic dom-inance emphasizing rigor and generality, they survey some new applica-tions of in finance, risk, and economics. Among their topics are utilityin decision theory, financial risk measures, foundational statistics for sto-chastic dominance, and models and data in econometrics.

HG177 2008-032592 978-1-60138-258-0HHooww ttoo ggeett yyoouurr sshhaarree ooff tthhee $$3300--pplluuss bbiilllliioonn ddoollllaarrssbbeeiinngg ooffffeerreedd bbyy UU..SS.. ffoouunnddaattiioonnss;; aa ccoommpplleettee gguuiiddee ffoorrllooccaattiinngg,, pprreeppaarriinngg,, aanndd pprreesseennttiinngg yyoouurr pprrooppoossaallss..Helweg, Richard.Atlantic Publishing, ©2010 336 p. $24.95 (pa)There are more than 65,000 foundations in the U.S., but the recession andhigh unemployment have cut their contributions at a time when the needhas grown. Author and consultant Helweg provides nuts and bolts helpin creating effective grant proposals with special attention paid to eachelement, from the cover letter and through goals and objectives. He alsohas included sample proposals, worksheets, interviews with foundationofficials and grant recipients, and checklists.

HG177 2007-027877 978-1-60709-554-5TThhee ““hhooww ttoo”” ggrraannttss mmaannuuaall;; ssuucccceessssffuull ggrraannttsseeeekkiinnggtteecchhnniiqquueess ffoorr oobbttaaiinniinngg ppuubblliicc aanndd pprriivvaattee ggrraannttss,, 66tthheedd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Bauer, David G. (ACE series on higher education)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 302 p. $27.95 (pa)Bauer (president of “a consulting firm that provides grant seminars andtraining programs for colleges and universities”) presents an updatededition of his guide to maximizing one’s returns in the grants market-place. The opening chapters of his guide lay out a systematic procedurefor developing and submitting grants proposals and identifying the bestorganizations to request grants from. Following this, he deals with thespecifics of public/government, private/foundation, and private/corporatefunding opportunities. This is a paperback reprint of a 2007 edition.

HG178 2009-041806 978-0-8213-8175-5LLiinnkkiinngg uupp aanndd rreeaacchhiinngg oouutt iinn BBaannggllaaddeesshh;; iinnffoorrmmaattiioonnaanndd ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonnss tteecchhnnoollooggyy ffoorr mmiiccrrooffiinnaannccee..Bagazonzya, Henry K.The World Bank, ©2010 132 p. $25.00 (pa)Arguing that microfinance institutions in Bangladesh are in need of aless ad hoc approach to the use of information technology, this WorldBank report presents a new paradigm for introducing technology thatcalls for establishing a centralized information and communication tech-nology platform for the microfinance industry and a centralized officefor offering technology tools, services, and know-how. This new par-adigm, the report contends, would allow for the exploitation ofeconomies of scale, bring down staff training needs at microfinance insti-tutions through outsourcing, and allow microfinance institutions to shareinformation about clients with each other. The report assesses whetherthe legal and regulatory framework is supportive of such a paradigmand considers which applications would increase outreach of financialservices in Bangladesh.

HG179 2009-014868 978-1-60138-313-6TThhee ccoommpplleettee gguuiiddee ttoo mmaannaaggiinngg yyoouurr ppaarreennttss’’ ffiinnaanncceesswwhheenn tthheeyy ccaannnnoott;; aa sstteepp--bbyy--sstteepp ppllaann ttoo pprrootteecctt tthheeiirraasssseettss,, lliimmiitt ttaaxxeess,, aanndd eennssuurree tthheeiirr wwiisshheess aarree ffuullffiilllleedd..Swan, Bill.Atlantic Publishing, ©2010 288 p. $24.95 (pa)Swan, who has written extensively on health, finances, and self-reliance,provides helpful advice for children who are managing their parents’finances because they are no longer able to do so alone. The authordetails how to protect assets, deal with taxes, fulfill parental wishes, howto keep the finances of parents and children separate, and other relatedtopics. The book includes worksheets, case studies, a glossary of relevantterms, and a listing of additional resources.

HG179 2009-014900 978-1-60709-288-9EExxttrreemmee eeccoonnoommiiccss;; tteeaacchhiinngg cchhiillddrreenn aanndd tteeeennaaggeerrssaabboouutt mmoonneeyy,, 22dd eedd..Babbage, Keen J.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 253 p. $34.95 (pa)Full of activities, sample quizzes, charts and case studies, this is a prac-tical guide for both teachers and parents in instructing students abouteconomic principles and personal finance. Student life experience is used,both as a resource for things to consider and a context in which skillscan be learned. The author has substantial experience teaching and haswritten four previous books on aspects of education, as well as the firstedition of this one, published in 2007. Nevertheless, the text seems disor-ganized and the author mixes personal opinions in freely—such as whenhe spends twelve pages talking about federal deficit spending and therecession of 2008. Contains no subject index or bibliography.

HG179 2009-048896 978-1-57660-348-2KKiiddss,, wweeaalltthh,, aanndd ccoonnsseeqquueenncceess;; eennssuurriinngg aa rreessppoonnssiibblleeffiinnaanncciiaall ffuuttuurree ffoorr tthhee nneexxtt ggeenneerraattiioonn..Morris, Richard A. and Jayne A. Pearl.Bloomberg Press, ©2010 272 p. $34.95Morris (Lake Forest Graduate School of Management) and Pearl, afinancial journalist and former editor of Family Business magazine,outline a method to help children from wealthy families make betterfinancial, intellectual, and spiritual and emotional choices and live suc-cessful, happy lives. They address how money can help or hindersuccess, how to discuss money with children, how to create estate plansand trusts for the family, and how to teach financial literacy. Guidelinesare given to help parents teach their kids to budget, invest, manage aportfolio and discover goals and purpose. The authors suggest exposingthem to family philanthropy and foundations, letting them fail, con-veying to children that money can’t buy happiness and encouragingthem to develop a separate identity.

HG179 2009-030375 978-1-59691-660-9TThhee nneeww ffrruuggaalliittyy;; hhooww ttoo ccoonnssuummee lleessss,, ssaavvee mmoorree,, aannddlliivvee bbeetttteerr..Farrell, Chris.Bloomsbury Publishing, ©2010 229 p. $24.00Farrell, host of the popular public radio show Marketplace Money, hasput together a brief book outlining the actions we can all take to shiftour spending and saving patterns in the direction of frugality. His fru-gality goes beyond penny-pinching toward wiser consumption practices,such as buying quality instead of quantity, and hopefully leads to towarda more sustainable lifestyle that in the end brings deeper satisfaction. Itincludes tips for the ordinary investor, along with interesting ways toassess issues like whether you would be better off renting or buying ahouse. With references to specific websites and information such ascurrent government taxation policies and regulations, portions of thebook will be out of date in a few years time. Nevertheless, the basicapproach should remain solid. Written for the general reader, it containsno references, but does have a useful index.

HG179 2009-050449 978-0-313-37718-1TThhee ssttuuddeenntt’’ss gguuiiddee ttoo ffiinnaanncciiaall lliitteerraaccyy..Lawless, Robert E.Greenwood Press, ©2010 220 p. $85.00Marketed toward students and young adults, this detailed, textbook-likeoverview attempts a lively presentation, with ‘guess what’ fact boxes, alist of mistakes to avoid, and b&w photos. But the text-heavy layout isdense and uninviting, the subject matter daunting, and treatment movesquickly from basic to advanced concepts. On the plus side, the book iswritten in a conversational style and includes a comprehensive glossary.Coverage progresses from educational costs versus benefits and payingfor college, to saving and investing, debt, financing the first home, taxes,insurance, and starting a business. The last chapter overviews conceptsof economics such as fiscal and monetary policy, booms and busts, andeconomic indicators. Lawless is chief financial officer for an investmentand advisory firm.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –128–

HG229 2009-93340 978-1-84720-938-2BBeeyyoonndd iinnffllaattiioonn ttaarrggeettiinngg;; aasssseessssiinngg tthhee iimmppaaccttss aannddppoolliiccyy aalltteerrnnaattiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Gerald Epstein and A. Erinc Yeldan.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 318 p. $155.00Economists from the Americas, Asia, and Australia report the results ofa three-year international research project evaluating the impacts of theinflation-targeting approach to central banking that has dominated theworld’s financial industry for the past decade or so. The goal was notjust to critique the approach, but to find alternatives to it, and researcherswere asked to devise innovative country-specific solutions rather thanmodifications of the ones already on offer. Introductory material includesthe theoretical framework, and the impact of inflation-targeting on classrelations and gender. Then the critiques and alternatives begin. Amongthem are Brazil 1999-2006, five years of competitive and stable realexchange rate in Argentina 2002-07, a general equilibrium assessment oftwin-targeting in Turkey, the design of monetary policy in India, thePhilippines, and Vietnam.

HG930 978-0-8213-8253-0CCoommppaarriinngg EEuurrooppeeaann aanndd UU..SS.. sseeccuurriittiieess rreegguullaattiioonnss;;MMiiFFIIDD vveerrssuuss ccoorrrreessppoonnddiinngg UU..SS.. rreegguullaattiioonnss..Boskovic, Tanja et al. (World Bank working paper; no.184)The World Bank, ©2010 171 p. $30.00 (pa)This study compares the scope and objectives of the EU’s Market inFinancial Instruments Directive (MiFID) with corresponding US securitiesregulations, including the 1934 Securities Exchange Act, the FINRA rules,and the Reg NMS. It looks at the financial regulatory and supervisoryframeworks in the EU and the US and the rules implementing the dif-ferent objectives of the regulations. Most of the book, about 130 pages,consists of a technical appendix offering a side-by-side comparison chart.The book will be of interest to professionals, scholars, and governmentofficials in the field of securities regulations; it will be especially usefulfor leaders and policymakers in World Bank member countries who areconducting market reforms. There is no subject index.

HG1660 2009-039465 978-1-60138-202-3TThhee ccoommpplleettee gguuiiddee ttoo IIRRAAss aanndd IIRRAA iinnvveessttiinngg;; wweeaalltthhbbuuiillddiinngg ssttrraatteeggiieess rreevveeaalleedd..Maeda, Martha.Atlantic Publishing, ©2009 360 p. $24.95 (pa)In what is introduced as “essential first-aid for any American lookingforward to a happy retirement,” the author of investment guides explainstraditional and nontraditional Individual Retirement Account (IRA)investments and regulations covering options including Roth IRAs andSEP IRAs. The guide includes a foreword by an expert on self-directedIRAs, tips on matching retirement funds to financial goals, a glossary ofacronyms and terms, resources, and life expectancy tables.

HG1660 2008-055757 978-1-60692-406-8IInnddiivviidduuaall rreettiirreemmeenntt aaccccoouunnttss;; aa pprriimmeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Felix R. Burnes.Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 139 p. $69.00Individual retirement accounts (IRAs) are said to hold more assets thanany other type of retirement vehicle, yet barriers exist that may dis-courage employers from offering payroll-deduction IRAs to theiremployees. Drawing on Congressional Record Service and GovernmentAccounting Office Reports, contributors to five chapters discuss trends inretirement plan design and defined contribution plans, an analysis of theretirement savings of American households, 401(k) plan fees andexpenses, and incentives for individuals and employers to participate inIRAs. Differences between traditional and Roth IRAs are explained. Thevolume is not indexed. Nor are the editor’s credentials given.

HG1978 2009-010011 978-1-85928-432-2TThhee wwoorrlldd ooff pprriivvaattee bbaannkkiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Youssef Cassis and Philip Cottrell. (Studies inbanking and financial history)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 302 p. $114.95Edited by Cassis and Cottrell (economic and social history at the U. ofGeneva and Leicester U. respectively), the 15 articles in this volume offera history and analysis of private banking in Europe over the last 250years and its impact on various aspects of society, including industry andphilanthropy. Often built on family networks, the histories of the banksowned by well-known names such as the Rothschilds and BaringBrothers are explored, as well as the history of private banking inLondon, Germany, France and Italy. Social and cultural networks, oftencreated through a shared religion, played a role as well, as can be seenwith two chapters devoted to Protestant and Jewish banking. Written bysenior scholars in the field and rich with material from primary sources,this volume is a notable addition to the field.

HG2040 2009-048428 978-1-57660-346-8CCoommpplliicciitt;; hhooww ggrreeeedd aanndd ccoolllluussiioonn mmaaddee tthhee ccrreeddiitt ccrriissiissuunnssttooppppaabbllee..Gilbert, Mark.Bloomberg Press, ©2010 182 p. $24.95Gilbert, the Bloomberg London Bureau Chief, examines the credit crisisof 2008 and what led up to it, and that everyone—politicians, regulators,money managers, realtors, lenders, and individuals—is to blame. He dis-cusses the housing market bubble, derivatives growth, the world secu-rities market, China’s role, investment bank trading and the collapse ofseveral banks, the role of central banks, money market funds, and theclimax of the crisis, along with recommendations to prevent problems inthe future. There is no bibliography.

HG2040 2009-033204 978-0-8144-1400-2DDeeccooddiinngg tthhee nneeww mmoorrttggaaggee mmaarrkkeett;; iinnssiiddeerr sseeccrreettss ffoorrggeettttiinngg tthhee bbeesstt llooaann wwiitthhoouutt ggeettttiinngg rriippppeedd ooffff..Reed, David.AMACOM, ©2010 249 p. $17.95 (pa)Reed, a loan officer and columnist, gives tips on how to get approved fora home loan in the new mortgage market and how to avoid potentiallandmines. He explains how new lending and underwriting rules affecthomebuyers, and looks at different loan types, including government-backed FHA, VA, and USDA loans, as well as lending institutions, suchas Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac. He also gives advice on overcomingcredit issues, reducing closing costs, and finding down-payment moneythrough nontraditional sources, such as nonprofit agencies, bond pro-grams, and equity transfers. An appendix presents sample monthlypayment schedules. A glossary is included.

HG3253 2009-936217 978-1-84720-372-4CCeennttrraall bbaannkkiinngg aanndd mmoonneettaarryy ppoolliiccyy iinn tthhee AAssiiaa--PPaacciiffiicc..Hossain, Akhand Akhtar.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 360 p. $165.00Hossain (economics, U. of Newcastle, Australia) surveys the major the-ories, models, and approaches to inflation and monetary policy, focusingon the developing countries in the region. The issues became of supremeimportance at the time of the currency crisis in 1997-98 as governmentsand economists debated what the problem was and what the solution.His topics include an Asian perspective on monetary and fiscal policiesfor macro-economic stability; concepts, debates, and issues around mon-etary policy; the choice of the strategy of monetary policy for price sta-bility; the money supply process and monetary management; andtransmission mechanisms of monetary policy and the demand formoney.

HG3368 978-1-904905-82-0VVaalluuiinngg bbaannkkss iinn uunncceerrttaaiinn ttiimmeess wwiitthh ssppeecciiaall aatttteennttiioonn ttooIIssllaammiicc bbaannkkss..Schoon, Natalie et al.Spiramus Press, Ltd., ©2009 148 p. $195.00An updated version of her doctoral dissertation, this volume extends thedata from 2003 to 2008 to include consideration of the current financialcrisis. Although the study itself covers only banks in the US and WesternEurope, this volume further delves into Islamic banking, where theauthor has worked since the late 1990s. Early on she settles on makinguse of the Residual Income Model (RIM) and the Institutional Brokers’Estimate System (I/B/E/S) and focuses on the relatively unexplored areaof valuation of financial institutions. Overall, the author shows thatfinancial accounting data, along with other information in the publicdomain, can yield useful estimates of fundamental value. Includes ahelpful glossary.

HG3821 2009-928593 978-1-84542-237-0PPuurrcchhaassiinngg ppoowweerr ppaarriittiieess ooff ccuurrrreenncciieess;; rreecceenntt aaddvvaanncceessiinn mmeetthhooddss aanndd aapppplliiccaattiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by D.S. Prasada Rao.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 400 p. $160.00Editor Rao (economics, U. of Queensland, Australia) and 16 contributorsexamine how purchasing power parities (PPPs) of currencies are usedinstead of exchange rates for a variety of purposes. While PPPs arebecoming more popular, many who use them know very little about thedata and methods used to create them. The book includes significantcurrent research and an extensive look at the most current methods usedin the creation and application of PPPs. The comprehensive overviewexplores both techniques and actual practice within a variety of interna-tional organizations. Topics include system methods for PPP compu-tation, methods for spatial linking and analysis of price structures, andapplications. Economists, researchers, academics, and economist statisti-cians should find the book useful.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–129–

HG3881 978-1-4398-1853-4TThhee bbaannkkiinngg ccrriissiiss hhaannddbbooookk..Title main entry. Ed. by Greg N. Gregoriou.CRC Press, ©2010 569 p. $89.95Pulling together different points of view on the current banking andfinancial industry crisis, the essays in this volume also propose a varietyof possible remedies. Written by academics and professionals in thefinance industry, and edited by Gregoriou (finance, State U. of NewYork), it is intended for bank executives and specialists in bank risk man-agement departments. Much of the discussion, however, is non-technicalenough to also be understood by the general reader. Its focus is broaderthan just the situation in the U.S., with chapters also considering thepicture in countries in Europe, Asia and Latin America.

HG3881 978-0-8213-8229-5GGlloobbaall ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ffiinnaannccee;; eexxtteerrnnaall ddeebbtt ooff ddeevveellooppiinnggccoouunnttrriieess,, 22001100..Title main entry.The World Bank, ©2010 317 p. $350.00 (pa)The 2010 volume of this yearly serial begins with an in-depth explorationof trends in international financing since the global crisis began in 2008.It then presents two informative tables showing key indebtedness indi-cators and the composition of total external debt stocks for the 128 coun-tries under consideration. The bulk of the book consists of two pagetables for each country, summarizing in ten detailed categories theexternal debt of these developing countries. Contains a thorough expla-nation of data sources and methodology, along with a glossary anduser’s guide to capitalized abbreviations and symbols.

HG3881 978-0-8213-8211-0TThhee WWoorrlldd BBaannkk rreesseeaarrcchh pprrooggrraamm;; 22000088--22000099,, aabbssttrraaccttssooff ccuurrrreenntt ssttuuddiieess..Title main entry.The World Bank, ©2010 264 p. $30.00 (pa)This volume contains abstracts of World Bank research projects initiated,under way, or completed in fiscal years 2008 and 2009. The abstractsdescribe questions addressed, analytical methods used, findings to date,policy implications, and use. They also identify the research team,reports or publications produced, and the email address for the researchproject’s supervisor. They are presented in sections on agriculture andrural development; environment and natural resources management;finance and banking; governance, political economy, and public sectormanagement; health, population, and nutrition; human capital devel-opment, labor, and employment; infrastructure and urban development;international migration and development; international trade andinvestment; macroeconomics, growth, and investment climate; povertyand inequality; private sector development; social development, gender,and social policies; and social protection and risk management. Alsoincluded is a complete list of research publications from the World Barkproduced during the same time period.

HG4009 978-0-9817091-4-7TThhee BBlluuee ppaaggeess;; aa ddiirreeccttoorryy ooff ccoommppaanniieess rraatteedd bbyy tthheeiirrppoolliittiiccss aanndd pprraaccttiicceess,, 22dd eedd..Crouse, Angie.PoliPoint Press, ©2010 322 p. $12.95 (pa)With this portable pocket directory (4x8.5″), activists, conscientious con-sumers, and other general readers will be able to see at a glance thepolitical contributions and business practices of about 1,000 companies.Companies are organized alphabetically into 13 product and servicesectors. Each section begins with an overview (new to this edition), anda list of top ten Democratic and Republican party contributors in thesector. Entries give dollar amounts spent by the company on politicalparty contributions and lobbying, as well as notes on employee benefitsand labor practices, the company’s human rights record, lawsuits, andsupport for causes. Each entry includes a simple visual chart showingwhere the company falls on the donkey-to-elephant continuum. Thissecond edition features expanded listings, updated data from the 2008election cycle, and more information on environmental policies. Thisedition also adds the expertise of the Center for Responsive Politics (CRP).Crouse is a political campaign consultant and researcher.

HG4026 2009-038817 978-0-273-72525-1CCoorrppoorraattee ffiinnaannccee;; pprriinncciipplleess aanndd pprraaccttiiccee,, 55tthh eedd.. ((oonnlliinneeaacccceessss iinncclluuddeedd))Watson, Denzil.Prentice Hall, ©2010 473 p. $69.79Written primarily for students in their second or final year of under-graduate study in accounting, business studies, and finance-relateddegree programs, this textbook introduces the core concepts and keytopic areas of corporate finance. Rather than adopt a theory-based ormathematical approach, the authors (both of the Sheffield BusinessSchool, Sheffield Hallam U., UK) aim to introduced the material “withoutburdening the reader with what [they] regard as unnecessary detail ortoo heavy a dose of theory.” The text contains end-of-chapter self-test,review, and discussion questions and side-box vignettes illustrating realworld events in finance. This new edition has been revised and updatedand contains new vignettes reflective of current developments, such asthe global financial crisis of 2008.

HG4515 2009-044114 978-1-4200-9345-2SSttoocchhaassttiicc ffiinnaanncciiaall mmooddeellss..Kennedy, Douglas. (Chapman & Hall/CRC Financial mathematicsseries)CRC Press, ©2010 257 p. $69.95Kennedy (Cambridge U.) combines material from two courses, one forfinal-year undergraduates and the other for first-year graduates. Heexpects students to have a solid knowledge of elementary probabilitytheory and perhaps some acquaintance with Markov chains, but not nec-essarily any background in measure-theoretic probability. He describeshis introduction to mathematical finance as fitting between the texts thatsurvey the profession with little or no mathematics, and those with a rig-orous formal approach to stochastic integration and probabilistic ideas.His treatment leans toward classically applied mathematics, and anemphasis more on calculations than generality. The models he covers arethe binomial, general discrete-time, Black-Scholes, and interest-rate. Otherchapters cover portfolio choice, Brownian motion, and mathematical pre-liminaries. Solutions to the exercises are appended.

HG4529 2009-048905 978-1-57660-359-8DDyynnaammiicc aasssseett aallllooccaattiioonn;; mmooddeerrnn ppoorrttffoolliioo tthheeoorryyuuppddaatteedd ffoorr tthhee ssmmaarrtt iinnvveessttoorr..Picerno, James.Bloomberg Press, ©2010 274 p. $29.95Picerno (editor, The Beta Investment Report) asks whether we havelearned anything since the introduction of modern portfolio theory (MPT)in a 1952 journal article by Harry Markowitz. His response is “no” and“yes.” While financial economists are still a long way from solving theinvestment risk-management challenge and the perfect asset allocationrebalancing strategy is a myth, he offers investors in today’s economyadvice based on the latest developments in MPT. The book includes anextensive bibliography.

HG4530 2009-048376 978-1-57660-363-5HHeeddggee hhuunntteerrss;; hhooww hheeddggee ffuunndd mmaasstteerrss ssuurrvviivveedd..Burton, Katherine.Bloomberg Press, ©2010 244 p. $16.95 (pa)Writing in non-technical terms, Burton, a reporter covering hedge fundsand investment management at Bloomburg News since 1993, presentsprofiles of hedge fund managers based on interviews. The originaledition was published in November 2007, before the credit crisis. A yearlater, only three of the 17 hedge fund managers originally profiled madea profit. This edition contains a brief new preface on the recent creditcrisis and its impact on market participants. Each chapter includes newmaterial on how funds were affected by the economic downturn andhow hedge fund managers reacted.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –130–

HG4551 2009-010125 978-1-60692-184-5GGlloobbaall ssttoocckk eexxcchhaannggeess;; ssttaabbiilliittyy,, iinntteerrrreellaattiioonnsshhiippss,, aannddrroolleess..Title main entry. Ed. by Paolo B. Cassedes.Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 210 p. $89.00International economists and other analysts contribute to nine chaptersthat explore the (in)stability, interrelationships, and roles of global stockexchanges. Analyses include a time-series study of trends in the institu-tional ownership of financial firms; “rational bubbles” in the IstanbulStock Exchange between 1998-2006; the Turkish experience as an exampleof an emerging market conducting policy under floating exchange rates;factors contributing to the globalization of stock markets; and the relativeperformance of local, foreign, and expatriate financial analysts onemerging Latin American markets. Of broad interest is the impact of theSarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 on the competitiveness of US stock exchanges.The editor’s credentials are not given.

HG4636 2009-043093 978-1-84821-158-2DDiissccrreettee--ttiimmee aasssseett pprriicciinngg mmooddeellss iinn aapppplliieedd ssttoocchhaassttiiccffiinnaannccee..Vassiliou, P-C. G. (Applied stochastic methods series)ISTE/Wiley, ©2010 401 p. $140.00Assuming knowledge of only an introductory course in probabilitytheory and basic mathematic analysis, Vassiliou (mathematics, AristotleU. of Thessaloniki, Greece) introduces the foundations of applied sto-chastic finance. He covers the basic financial instruments; fundamentalprinciples of financial modeling and arbitrage valuation of derivatives;the concept of conditional expectation, the discrete time binomial modeland its application to stochastic finance; the most important results fromthe theory of martingales in the theory and application of stochasticfinance; more advanced concepts such as the Randon-Nikodym deriv-ative, equivalent martingale measure, non-arbitrage, and completegeneral markets; American derivative securities using the binomialmodel and general markets; fixed-income markets and the interest ratetheory in discrete time; arbitrage pricing; credit risk; and the Heath-Jarrow-Morton model for the evolution of forward rate process.

HG4638 2009-042833 978-1-57660-300-0CChhaarrtt ppaatttteerrnnss..Kamich, Bruce M. (Bloomberg market essentials)Bloomberg Press, ©2009 192 p. $29.95Kamich (vice president, Morgan Stanley Smith Barney Technical AnalysisGroup) explains one of the oldest and most popular investor technicalanalysis tools: chart patterns. He also provides a foundation in chart pat-terns, what they are, how they work, how to recognized them, and howto trade them—and a varied sampling of 115 charts and graphs.

HG4651 2008-052662 978-1-60138-293-1TThhee ccoommpplleettee gguuiiddee ttoo iinnvveessttiinngg iinn bboonnddss aanndd bboonnddffuunnddss;; hhooww ttoo eeaarrnn hhiigghh rraatteess ooff rreettuurrnn——ssaaffeellyy..Maeda, Martha.Atlantic Publishing, ©2009 336 p. $24.95 (pa)For Main Street investors seeking lower-risk investments than stocks inthese volatile economic times, the author of The Complete Guide toInvesting in Exchange Traded Funds: How to Earn High Rates of Return—Safely offers an excellent introduction to the basics of investmentstrategies with the gamut of bonds. As an economic historian, Maeda isespecially qualified to discuss trends. The guide includes a preface by afixed-income professional, “insider” tips, self-assessment questions, aglossary demystifying bond-related terms, and references.

HG4751 978-81-7708-222-7VVeennttuurree ccaappiittaall ffuunnddiinngg;; gglloobbaall aanndd IInnddiiaann eexxppeerriieenncceess..Panwar, Vandana.New Century Pub. (New Delhi), ©2009 314 p. $48.25Although the first three chapters present an overview of venture capitaland look at the situation in the United States, Europe and Asia, the bulkof this book is focused on the experience of Indian firms. It includesthirteen recent case studies plus an extensive appendix summarizing the1996 Indian venture capital regulations. Written by Panwar (managementstudies, Takshilla Institute of Engineering and Technology), the volumecovers in detail specifics of the contracts between entrepreneurs andventure capital firms in India.

HG4928 2009-028511 978-0-307-45337-2TThhee qquuaannttss;; hhooww aa ssmmaallll bbaanndd ooff mmaatthh wwiizzaarrddss ttooookk oovveerrWWaallll SStt.. aanndd nneeaarrllyy ddeessttrrooyyeedd iitt..Patterson, Scott.Crown Business, ©2009 337 p. $27.00The ‘quants’ are a new breed of Wall Street investor, elite math whizzeswho use complicated algorithms and high-speed computers to profitfrom the system as a giant casino. In this a tale of greed, hubris, and thesearch for a secret that may not exist, Patterson, a staff reporter at TheWall Street Journal, tells the story of the rise and fall of the quants andtheir role in destroying the world’s financial markets, focusing on fourcharismatic figures. The book includes a list of players and a glossary ofmarket terms.

HG5782 2009-937891 978-1-84844-859-9IInnvveessttiinngg iinn tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess;; iiss tthhee UUSS rreeaaddyy ffoorr FFDDIIffrroomm CChhiinnaa??Title main entry. Ed. by Karl P. Sauvant. (Studies in internationalinvestment)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 269 p. $135.00Is the US ready to receive foreign direct investment (FDI) from China inthe form of cross-border mergers and acquisitions? The contributors tothis book, American academics in management, policy, business, andlaw, answer in the affirmative. After an introduction to economic andpolitical issues related to modes of entry by Chinese firms in the US,chapters cover the US regulatory and institutional framework for FDI,socio-political costs facing Chinese multinationals in the US, internationalinvestment law protections for Chinese investment into the US, andlessons from Japan’s experience in the 1980s. The book includes 50 pagesof appendices on regulations. It will be of interest to foreign investors andtheir partners, and to local and state governments. Sauvant is executivedirector of the Vale Columbia Center on Sustainable InternationalInvestment at Columbia University.

HG5993 2009-032587 978-0-8213-8095-6GGeennddeerr ddiimmeennssiioonnss ooff iinnvveessttmmeenntt cclliimmaattee rreeffoorrmm;; aa gguuiiddeeffoorr ppoolliiccyy mmaakkeerrss aanndd pprraaccttiittiioonneerrss..Simavi, Sevi.The World Bank, ©2010 236 p. $35.00 (pa)There is a growing realization that a country’s economic development(and eradication of poverty) is directly related to the increased partici-pation of women as entrepreneurs, employees and economic leaders.Prepared under the sponsorship of the IFC (International FinanceCorporation), this book presents tools that enable development practi-tioners and policy makers to promote investment climate reforms thatensure gender equity. Designed for hands-on usage, it is broken intomodules, each containing the specific steps of diagnosis, solution design,and implementation, with monitoring and evaluation. These are followedby annexes containing checklists and sample questionnaires.

HJ141 2009-943505 978-0-309-14723-1CChhoooossiinngg tthhee nnaattiioonn’’ss ffiissccaall ffuuttuurree..Committee on the Fiscal Future of the United States Division ofBehavioral and Social Sciences and Education.National Academies Press, ©2010 338 p. $53.95 (pa)A committee established jointly by the National Academy of Sciences andthe National Academy of Public Administration sets out options for sta-bilizing the US government budget. The report discusses the long-termchallenge, framing the choices, fiscal prudence, choices for a sustainablebudget, options for Medicare and Medicaid, options for Social Security,options for defense and other domestic spending, revenue options, mul-tiple paths to sustainability, a budget process for the long term, and whatshould be done now.

HJ2051 2009-023958 978-0-7656-2524-3BBuuddggeettiinngg ffoorr ppuubblliicc mmaannaaggeerrss..Swain, John W. and B. J. Reed.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 229 p. $99.95Public administration teacher and trainer Swain, and Reed (publicaffairs, U. of Nebraska-Omaha) write very specifically to help candidateMasters of Public Administration understand public budgeting from amanagement perspective, rather than any of the perspectives offered bythe many other books about it. Among their goals are placing publicbudgeting into the larger context of public organizations, presenting therevenue side of public budgets, discussing how budgetary politics relatesto public managers, and offering insight into the use of analysis in publicbudgeting. The information could be used in local, state, or national gov-ernment agencies, or in nonprofit organizations, they say.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–131–

HJ4113 2009-034470 978-1-55844-200-9CChhaalllleennggiinngg tthhee ccoonnvveennttiioonnaall wwiissddoomm oonn tthhee pprrooppeerrttyy ttaaxx..Title main entry. Ed. by Roy Bahl et al.Lincoln Institute of Land Policy, ©2010 370 p. $30.00 (pa)The conventional wisdom regarding the role of the property tax,according to Bahl (economics, Georgia State U.), Martinez-Vazquez (eco-nomics, Georgia State U.), and Youngman (Lincoln Institute of LandPolicy), is that it is an appropriate, fair, and feasible source of localrevenue that helps fund services that benefit property or improve itsvalue. They present ten papers that critically assess this conventionalwisdom for both developed and developing countries. The papers explorethe debate concerning whether the property tax is a benefit tax or a taxon capital and the implications for efficiency and equity arguments, theeffects of capitalization of property taxes and local government expendi-tures on house values, the horizontal equity or fairness dimension of theproperty tax, and the relative revenue productivity and lack of volatilityof the property tax. In addition to challenging the conventional wisdomregarding the property tax, the authors suggest policy and administrativereforms for improving the tax or replacing it with other forms of revenuegeneration.

HJ5715 2009-039991 978-1-59523-060-7TThhee FFaaiirrTTaaxx ssoolluuttiioonn;; ffiinnaanncciiaall jjuussttiiccee ffoorr aallll AAmmeerriiccaannss..Hoagland, Ken.Sentinel, ©2010 152 p. $19.95Hoagland is the national communications director for Americans for FairTaxation, the sponsoring organization for the FairTax legislation. In this5x7.25″ overview, he sets out arguments for replacing the federal incometax with the FairTax, a flat sales tax on all new goods and services. Hereviews the history of income tax collection in the US, and exposes thelobbying practices that have resulted in current tax regulations. He out-lines the effects the FairTax would have on the national economy, dis-cusses the politics of the FairTax, and makes suggestions for whatreaders can do to change the system.

HJ9801 2009-028342 978-0-470-41150-6GGoovveerrnnmmeennttaall aaccccoouunnttiinngg mmaaddee eeaassyy,, 22dd eedd..Ruppel, Warren.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 304 p. $39.95For professional managers, budget preparers, school boards, citycouncils, state legislators, and comptrollers who have little knowledge ofgovernmental accounting, Ruppel, a CPA and former assistant comp-troller of accounting for New York, offers information about govern-mental accounting and financial reporting. He explains basic accountingterminology, fund accounting, governmental financial statements, thereporting entity, revenues from non-exchange transactions, capital assets,accounting for pension and other postemployment benefits, and othertopics. This edition has new coverage of accounting for pollution reme-diation obligations, asset impairment, and asset classification, andrevised and expanded discussion of pension reporting and sales andpledges of receivables and future revenues. No bibliography is provided.

SSOOCCIIOOLLOOGGYY

HM538 2009-031377 978-0-470-47907-0SSuurrvveeyyiinngg ccuullttuurreess;; ddiissccoovveerriinngg sshhaarreedd ccoonncceeppttiioonnss aannddsseennttiimmeennttss..Heise, David R.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 229 p. $84.95Heise (emeritus sociology, Indiana U.-Bloomington) explains the method-ology of surveying a great number of people in order to identify featuresof their culture that persist across individual variation and through thefluctuation of days and lifetimes. He covers measuring sentiments, sen-timent repositories, surveys with vignettes, errors in surveys, correlates ofenculturation, consensus in sentiments, measurement reliability, andculture and surveys.

HM548 2009933360 978-1-84542-710-8EEccoonnoommiiccss,, ccuullttuurree aanndd ssoocciiaall tthheeoorryy..Jackson, William A. (New Horizons in institutional and evolutionaryeconomics)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 269 p. $130.00Jackson (economics, U. of York, England) traces the history of the cul-tural critique of economics through the 19th and 20th centuries, andshows how because of academic specialization it has been divertedoutside academia or into non-economic disciplines such as anthropology,sociology, and cultural studies. Meanwhile, he says, economics keptstrolling on its merry way totally oblivious to events and trends in schol-arship or the world. The cultural critique is still relevant, he argues, anddiscusses what it means for economic theory and considers the prospectsfor a culturally informed economics. Among his topics are the meaningof culture, culture and the social sciences 1870-1950, relativism andrealism, and interpretative methods.

HM585 2009-026672 978-1-4129-7860-6IIssssuueess ffoorr ddeebbaattee iinn ssoocciioollooggyy;; sseelleeccttiioonnss ffrroomm CCQQrreesseeaarrcchheerr..Title main entry.Sage Publications, ©2010 432 p. $34.95 (pa)Designed to inform and stimulate classroom discussions, this volume ofCQ Researcher provides in-depth, balanced reporting of controversial andimportant social and policy issues in the news. A sampling of topicsincludes celebrity culture, cyber socializing, closing Guantanamo, themiddle class squeeze, the future of marriage, student aid, women’srights, religious fundamentalism, the Obama presidency, and more.Coverage of each topic includes background analysis, pro and con argu-ments, a chronology of relevant dates and events, and an outlook sectionthat discusses action that could come from the administration orCongress within the next five to 10 years. A bibliography with Webresources also is included.

HM585 2009-023514 978-0-415-47016-2TThhee RRoouuttlleeddggee ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo ssoocciiaall tthheeoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony Elliott.Routledge, ©2010 327 p. $34.95 (pa)Edited by Elliot (sociology, Flinders U., Australia), this work aims toprovide a comprehensive, yet accessible, introduction to key traditions ofthought in social theory. It contains 13 chapters discussing classical socialtheory; symbolic interactionism; social theory and psychoanalysis; struc-turalist and post-structuralist social theory; theories of structuration;social theory of the body; postmodern social theory; identity and socialtheory; new media, popular culture, and social theory; citizenship, cos-mopolitanism, and human rights; cultural social theory; and socialtheory and globalization. He also includes an 80-page section that definesand describes key terms and thinkers from Theodor Adorno to KarlWeber.

HM585 2009-674602 978-1-4438-0199-7SSoocciioollooggyy ooff mmeemmoorryy;; ppaappeerrss ffrroomm tthhee ssppeeccttrruumm..Title main entry. Ed. by Noel Packard.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 395 p. $62.00Sociologist Packard has gathered essays on the sociological aspects ofmemory from several papers delivered at conferences over the past fewyears. The accuracy of memory is irrelevant to this study. Rather theauthors explore the ways in which memory is constructed by individualsand groups. Holocaust survivors, descendents of Russian nobility and thefamilies of those who vanished under the Uruguayan dictatorship allcreate memories that allow the survivors to cope. The refashioning ofmemory to capture a more comforting past is discussed, as well. The col-lection of data for storage in memory banks may seem totally objective,but as several essays reveal, the selection and analysis of the data areways of manipulating collective memory. Many of the articles dwell onthe work of early sociologist George Herbert Mead. The essays are oftencomplementary, as Packard’s introduction demonstrates, making this aninternational synthesis of the subject.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –132–

HM623 2009-036605 978-1-4331-0840-2TTaabboooo;; eessssaayyss oonn ccuullttuurree aanndd eedduuccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Shirley R. Steinberg and Lindsay Cornish.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 250 p. $34.95 (pa)This reader collects 15 articles from the pages of Taboo: The Journal ofCultural Studies and Education, founded in 1995 for the purpose of high-lighting cutting edge authors engaged in cultural studies and criticalpedagogy. Topics addressed by the essays include the movie ForrestGump as a tacit attempt to recover the supremacy of whiteness; HIV, gayidentity, and the media; the cultural signifiers and discourse sur-rounding Tiger Woods (written prior to the media spectacle concerningthe golfer’s extra-marital affairs); hip hop as a “pedagogy of the imag-inary;” gender and high school cheerleading; cultural anti-Semitism inthe media; critically discussing war in the classroom; and the “malegaze” in the movie Almost Famous.

HM626 2009-011558 978-0-415-45808-5TThhee RRoouuttlleeddggee hhaannddbbooookk ooff gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn ssttuuddiieess..Turner, Bryan S. (Routledge international handbooks)Routledge, ©2010 702 p. $200.00Turner (director, Centre for the Study of Contemporary Muslim Societies,U. of Western Sydney, Australia) presents 34 chapters exploring key the-ories and issues related to the causes and consequences of globalization(and therefore any of the below-mentioned topics should be understoodas referring to globalization or global phenomenon even if it is notexplicit). A section on theories and definitions addresses cultures of glob-alization, economic theories, the Internet, critiques and alternatives from“anti-globalization” movements, hegemony and the United States, and thesocial impact of globalization. Under the heading “substantive issues,”the reader discusses demographic changes, migration, climate change,infectious disease, disasters and disaster response, crime, religious fun-damentalism, indigenous peoples, genocide, ethnic conflict and nation-alism, and the commodification of pensions. A section on institutionsand cultures explores popular culture and fans, film, global cities, con-sumption, pluralism and the “modernization” of gender and sexual rela-tions in Asia, food, border regulation and mobility, the globalization ofspace, and Americanization. A final section discusses “critical solutions”in chapters that examine the role of the International LabourOrganization, human rights, civil society and the World Social Forum,Muslim cosmopolitanism, and possible futures of globalization.

HM651 2009-021215 978-1-59874-359-3BBeettwweeeenneerr ttaallkk;; ddeeccoolloonniizziinngg kknnoowwlleeddggee pprroodduuccttiioonn,,ppeeddaaggooggyy,, aanndd pprraaxxiiss..Diversi, Marcel. (Qualitative inquiry and social justice)Left Coast Press, ©2009 235 p. $79.00Diversi (human development, Washington State U. Vancouver) andMoreira (communications, U. of Massachusetts at Amherst) offer a col-laborative and performative text of autoethnography and short storiesthat reflects on six themes of “betweenness” in identity, class, race, sex-uality, indigenousness, and knowledge production. The authoethno-graphic texts, by Moreira, explore his own “betweenness” andmarginalities from living in Campinas and Uberlandia in Brazil and inthe United States and the short stories, by Diversi, are based on ethno-graphic field work with street children in Campinas. They conclude witha discussion of the theoretical and methodological framework informingtheir discussion and an exploration of future possibilities of decolonizingscholarship.

HM671 2009-674605 978-1-4438-1009-8PPrriivviilleeggee aanndd pprreejjuuddiiccee;; ttwweennttyy yyeeaarrss wwiitthh tthhee iinnvviissiibblleekknnaappssaacckk..Title main entry. Ed. by Karen Weekes.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 182 p. $54.00In her 1988 paper White Privilege and Male Privilege: A personal accountof coming to see correspondences through work in women’s studies, PeggyMcIntosh writes that privilege is like “an invisible package of unearnedassets … an invisible, weightless knapsack of special provisions, assur-ances, tools, maps, guides, codebooks, passports, visas, clothes, compass,emergency gear, and blank checks.” This invisible privilege is also theother side of the coin of prejudice, notes Weekes (English, PennsylvaniaState U.) as she re-presents that McIntosh paper, followed by seven con-tributions inspired by McIntosh’s insights to investigate the dynamics ofprivilege and prejudice as the impact the course of academic careers, thelaw school application process, female sterilization, interactions withinformation and communication technology, children’s birthday cardmessages, and representations of dance in film.

HM716 2009-026419 978-1-4129-4208-9EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ggrroouupp pprroocceesssseess aanndd iinntteerrggrroouupp rreellaattiioonnss;;22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by John M. Levine and Michael A. Hogg.Sage Publications, ©2010 998 p. $375.00This two-volume reference is not intended for professionals or expertswith extensive knowledge of social psychology, sociology, or organiza-tional behavior, but rather for undergraduate students primarily, andgraduate students, faculty, or even high school students, secondarily.Reaching for accessible utility, editors Levine (psychology, U. ofPittsburgh) and Hogg (social psychology, Claremont Graduate U.) shapedthe work of a long list of contributors. Alphabetically arranged, signed,and cross-referenced, the entries range between 1,500 and 4,000 words,depending on the importance or complexity of the topic. Broad themesinclude cognitions and feelings, conflict and cooperation within groups,decision making, group performance and problem solving, groupstructure, identity and self, influence and persuasion, intergroup rela-tions in society, methodology, organizations, theory, and types of groupsand subgroups.

HM756 2009-022508 978-0-415-49617-9CCoommmmuunniittyy,, 22dd eedd..Delanty, Gerard. (Key ideas)Routledge, ©2010 188 p. $35.95 (pa)Part of the Key Ideas series, this work by Delanty (sociology, U. of Sussex,UK) takes a critical and interdisciplinary look at the way that the term“community” has been understood by various schools of thought. Ninechapters address the utopian vision of community in Western thoughtand politics, the idea of community in classical sociology and anthro-pology, community in urban sociology and community studies, the riseof communitarian political thought, multiculturalism and conceptions ofcultural community, radical conceptions of community associated withsocial movements, postmodern theories of community, ideas concerningcosmopolitan community beyond the nation-state, and the technologi-cally-mediated virtual community.

HM821 2009-031364 978-0-7546-7961-5CCoommiinngg ttoo tteerrmmss wwiitthh cchhaannccee;; eennggaaggiinngg rraattiioonnaallddiissccrriimmiinnaattiioonn aanndd ccuummuullaattiivvee ddiissaaddvvaannttaaggee..Gandy, Oscar H.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 240 p. $99.95Statisticians know that results formulated by statistics depend totally onthe variables put in. Gandy (communications, University of Pennsylvania,emeritus) is concerned by the trend to make decisions on everythingfrom public policy to finance to insurance, based on probability charts.He points out that they do not allow for individual variance or random,unexpected events. The reliance upon what are purported to be impartialstatistics, he argues, perpetuates discrimination. His particular concern isthe ways in which African-Americans are hampered by blanket evalua-tions that result in higher interest rates, insurance payments or the denialof either credit or insurance altogether. The profiling of people todetermine if they are likely to commit crimes is another way of usingstatistics to reinforce discrimination. He also points out that the media,often from a desire to do good, uses statistics to emphasize inequalities,with the result that they are only exacerbated. Gandy concludes with acall to action. The danger of unfair and discriminatory applications ofprobability figures is not just to racial minorities. Anyone can be targetedas a result of the blind reliance on “statistics” to make decisions affectingthe way our society operates.

HM821 2009-036901 978-0-202-36338-7SSttaattuuss ppaassssaaggee.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11997711))Glaser, Barney G. and Anselm L. Strauss.AldineTransaction, ©2010 205 p. $24.95 (pa)A reprint from 1971, this volume aimed at sociologists, social psycholo-gists, and other social scientists examines the movement of individualsand groups in contemporary society from one status to another. Glaser,a research sociologist associated with the Grounded Theory Institute inCalifornia, and the late Strauss, who was a professor of sociology at theU. of California, San Francisco, explain how every organized action insociety can be seen as a form of status passage, including movementfrom childhood to adolescence to adulthood, from being single tomarried, or to a different income group, social class, or religion. Ratherthan concentrating on types of passages, they examine passages throughdifferent variables—reversibility, temporality, shape, desirability, circum-stantiality, and multiplicity—followed by chapters on individual, col-lective, aggregate, and multiple passages.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–133–

HM831 2009-017336 978-0-7391-3686-7PPaatthhwwaayyss ooff hhuummaann ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; eexxpplloorraattiioonnss ooff cchhaannggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Jay A. Mancini and Karen A. Roberto.Lexington Books, ©2009 396 p. $80.00The editors (both of the Institute for Society, Culture and Environment atthe Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State U.) present the product of aSeptember 2008 meeting bringing together social and behavioral scien-tists for the purpose of exploring antecedents, processes, and conse-quences of societal and individual change over the lifespan. Among thetopics addressed are swift transformations in close relationships, changeand continuity in young people’s lives, change in African Americanfemale adolescent sexuality, social anxiety disorder in youth, risk andprotective factors for drug use among American youth, health and adap-tation in late life, dialectics and transactional models of change in parent-child relationships, the dynamic cultural context of emotion socialization,transformation and change in parenting in Chinese societies, transfor-mation among grandparents raising grandchildren, processes of familystress and adaptation, a social organization theory of communityresilience, social capital and the dynamics of families, the psychosocialimpact of illness, change and homeless veterans, and theorizing humandevelopment and change.

HM851 2010-002719 978-1-4331-0698-9PPoosstt--gglloobbaall nneettwwoorrkk aanndd eevveerryyddaayy lliiffee..Title main entry. Ed. by Marina Levina and Grant Kien. (Digital forma-tions; v.60)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 200 p. $32.95 (pa)Scholars of communication and related disciplines look at everyday livesin which computer networks are no longer shiny toys, but simply one ofthe pedestrian dimensions of the world. Their topics include when col-lective intelligence agencies collide, not unpacking the infinite librarywith Walter Benjamin, voicing and placement in online networks, health2.0 and managing “dividual” care in the network, sport in the wires, tel-evision as everyday network of government, and the appropriation oflabor in the post-global network.

HM861 2009-035885 978-0-8213-7887-8SSoocciiaall ddiimmeennssiioonnss ooff cclliimmaattee cchhaannggee;; eeqquuiittyy aannddvvuullnneerraabbiilliittyy iinn aa wwaarrmmiinngg wwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Robin Mearns and Andrew Norton. (New fron-tiers of social policy)The World Bank, ©2010 317 p. $30.00 (pa)The editors (both of the World Bank’s Social Development Department)present 11 papers assessing the social dimensions of climate change fordeveloping countries. The focus is on developing “pro-poor adaptations”to changes that are now seen as unavoidable, but issues of greenhousegas emission mitigation in agriculture and land-use are also considered.The first six chapters address vulnerability to climate change, specificallydiscussing implications of climate change for armed conflict, climatechange and migration in the developing world, the gender dimensions ofpoverty and climate change adaptation, and the role of indigenousknowledge in crafting adaptation and mitigation strategies for climatechange in Latin America. The remaining chapters discuss local institu-tions and adaptation to climate change, climate change and agrarian soci-eties in drylands, pro-poor adaptation to climate change in the urbancenters of low-and middle-income countries, social policies for adaptationto climate change, and mitigating and adapting to climate changewithout undermining rights and livelihoods.

HM886 2009-042176 978-1-58826-687-3CCoolllleeccttiivvee vviioolleennccee iinn IInnddoonneessiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Ashutosh Varshney.Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2010 193 p. $49.95Six essays, presented and introduced by Varshney (political science,Brown U.), explore variation in collective violence in Indonesia on theassumption that the study of variation is one of the best ways to studycausation, while also shifting the focus on information sources toprovincial, rather than national, newspapers as a better source for ana-lyzing small-scale collective violence such as lynching. The papersaddress patterns of collective violence, the different perspective providedby local newspapers, the timing of ethnic conflict, and the changing roleof the Indonesian military in the political realm as an explanatorywindow into ethnic violence.

HM1033 2008-056139 978-0-925065-63-6CCoommpplleexx ssyysstteemmss aanndd hhuummaann bbeehhaavviioorr..Hudson, Christopher G.Lyceum Books, ©2010 721 p. $79.95 (pa)Hudson (social work, Salem State College, Massachusetts) offers afoundation for the study of human behavior by graduate-level studentsof social work and other human services who have a solidundergraduate background in the profession. He synthesizes the currentunderstanding in the field of matters dealing with theory, the person,the systemic context, and applications. They include assessing complexadaptive systems, the role of theory in the human services, motivationand personality, theories of mental dysfunction, small groups and theirprocesses, families as complex systems, and helping relationships andgeneralist practice in complex systems. A glossary is provided withoutpronunciation guides. An appendix sets out quantum approaches toconsciousness.

HM1033 2009-016357 978-1-4128-1034-0TThhee mmaannaaggeemmeenntt ooff ppuurrppoossee..Dexter, Lewis Anthony. Ed. by Martin Sánchez-Jankowski and Alan J.Ware.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 264 p. $49.95Sánchez-Janowski (sociology, U. of California, Berkeley) and Ware (pol-itics, U. of Oxford, UK), both students of Dexter, collect 20 writings by thelate political scientist, sociologist, and consultant, in which he addressestopics in the areas of sociology, political science, and practicing socialscience. After detailing his importance and work in the introduction,they present essays in which he integrates sociology and anthropologyinto political analysis, studies society’s response to social problems, putsforth labeling theory, and describes his work in organizational behavior.Among the topics are the role of the individual in group relations; therole of morals, beliefs, symbols, and culture in the society; the sociallabels of “mentally retarded” and “gifted”; and role relationships andconceptions of neutrality in interviewing. One essay, “Toward aSociological Analysis of Policy,” has not been published before.

HM1106 2009-010721 978-0-393-06703-3CCoonnsseeqquueennttiiaall ssttrraannggeerrss;; tthhee ppoowweerr ooff ppeeooppllee wwhhoo ddoonn’’ttsseeeemm ttoo mmaatttteerr......bbuutt rreeaallllyy ddoo..Blau, Melinda and Karen L. Fingerman.W.W. Norton, ©2009 276 p. $25.95Blau, a journalist and author who specializes in relationships and trends,and Fingerman (social science, Purdue U.) examine the role of “conse-quential strangers”—people who influence others’ lives but who areoutside their inner circle of family and friends, such as a yoga teacher,former coworker, barista, store owner, or professional contact. Theydiscuss the ascendance of these peripheral social ties; how and wherethey occur; how these strangers broaden the sense of self and link peopleto information and other resources; how they can help people stayhealthy or cope with an illness; their negative aspects; and how theseacquaintances will increase in importance to future generations.

HM1106 2009-036898 978-0-202-36325-7IInntteerrppeerrssoonnaall bbeehhaavviioorr;; hhiissttoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee ooff ppeerrssoonnaalliittyytthheeoorryy.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11996699))Carson, Robert C.AldineTransaction, ©2010 306 p. $39.95 (pa)Carson (psychology, Duke U.) analyzes, describes, and to some degreeexplains transactions that occur between individuals, believing that sucha study can account for most of what is called personality. He focuses onthe dyad—interactions between two people—to which he says all groupinteractions can be reduced. He covers the beginning of systematic inves-tigation by American psychiatrist and social scientist Harry StackSullivan (1892-1949), learning interpersonal behavior, varieties of it, nego-tiating interpersonal transactions, contractual arrangements in interper-sonal relations, personality disorder as extra-normative efforts atrelationship, and psychotherapy as disorder-reducing interpersonal rela-tionships. The 1969 edition was titled Interaction Concepts of Personality.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –134–

HM1111 2009-050274 978-1-4128-1006-7RReellaattiioonnss iinn ppuubblliicc;; mmiiccrroossttuuddiieess ooff tthhee ppuubblliicc oorrddeerr..((rreepprriinntt,, 11997711))Goffman, Erving.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 396 p. $34.95 (pa)First published in 1971, this is the fourth book on symbolic interac-tionism by sociologist Erving Goffman (1922-1982), “the public face ofinteractionist sociology and perhaps of American sociology in general,”in the words of Manning (sociology, Cleveland State U.), who has penneda new introduction for this edition that places the work in the context ofthe development of Goffman’s thought. The book elaborates onGoffman’s Durkheimian understandings of the world of face-to-face inter-action, particularly among strangers in urban settings. The focus of thework is on the regulation of normative expectations in social interactionsin public.

HM1121 2009-028310 978-0-415-55873-0CCoonnfflliicctt,, cciittiizzeennsshhiipp aanndd cciivviill ssoocciieettyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Patrick Baert et al. (Routledge/EuropeanSociological Association studies in European societies; 11)Routledge, ©2010 267 p. $130.00Presented by Baert (U. of Cambridge, UK), Koniordos (U. of Crete,Greece), Procacci (U. of Milan, Italy), and Ruzza (U. of Leicester, UK), 14papers originating from the 2007 Congress of the European SociologicalAssociation thematically address, in various ways, the relationshipbetween conflict, citizenship, and civil society, primarily in the context ofcontemporary Europe. Topics include civil society and citizenship inearly and late modernity; social science and the study of social move-ments and civil society; gendered understandings of the relationshipbetween citizenship, civil society, and conflict; democratization in Centraland Eastern Europe and the changing nature of minority issues; theextension of citizenship rights to non-citizens; welfare and citizenship forimmigrants and refugees in Scandinavia; the place of civil society in soci-ological analysis; and postcolonialism, trauma, and civil society.

HM1121 2009-033451 978-0-295-98950-1SSeeeeiinngg ccuullttuurree eevveerryywwhheerree,, ffrroomm ggeennoocciiddee ttoo ccoonnssuummeerrhhaabbiittss..Breidenbach, Joana and Pál Nyíri.U. of Washington Press, ©2009 416 p. $24.95 (pa)The authors view the growing use of “culture” as an explanatory framefor understanding everything from individual interactions to the “clashof civilizations” as often misleading and frequently dangerous. Theyprefer a process-centered view that provides information not about “cul-tures” but about the forces that stand behind cultural claims. In thiswork, they trace the consequences of various cultural claims from thelevel of interstate relations down to the functioning of institutions and thelives of individuals. They include chapters that look at the US “war onterror” and how ideas about culture have helped shape relations betweenthe US, Russia, and China; the impact of the rise of culture in devel-opment institutions and discourse; cultural interpretations of local con-flicts such as the wars in Bosnia, Chechnya, and Iraq; the role of culturein national public realms such as regulating immigration, urbanplanning, education, and the courts; cultural justifications concerningdebates over property involved in cases such as contesting rights to theownership of American Indian dances, Aboriginal land titles inAustralia, and whaling by the Makah Indians of Canada; the paradigmsof culture found in the intercultural communication industry advisingbusiness and government; and the rise of cultural marketing.

HM1166 2009-039366 978-1-4331-0397-1TThhee ddyynnaammiiccss ooff iinntteerrggrroouupp ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Howard Giles et al. (Language as social action;v.8)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 329 p. $34.95 (pa)With a brief history of the field and its major concepts, Giles (U. ofCalifornia, Santa Barbara) and other communication scholars introduce22 chapters that present current theoretical perspectives and empiricalevidence on how social identity and intergroup processes shape commu-nication. International contributors discuss how group membership andcontexts affect ordinary and online communication; how real and per-ceived differences between groups have resulted in stigmatized identitiesand deadly conflicts; and methods to improve communication (e.g., theASPIRe model). The book is an update of Harwood and & Giles’Intergroup Communication: Multiple Perspectives (Peter Lang, 2005).

HM1206 2009-040328 978-1-4331-0914-0DDiiggiittaall mmeeddiiaa ccrriittiicciissmm..Kavoori, Anandam P. (Digital formations; v.62)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 142 p. $29.95 (pa)Kavoori (journalism and mass communication, U. of Georgia) explainshow to apply media criticism, which grew up addressing film and tele-vision, to such new media as downloading ring tones, making newFacebook friends, creating an avatar, and texting. He writes for under-graduate students of media criticism, assuming that they know all aboutthe media under investigation but little or nothing about formal criticismof it. He recommends skepticism about the hype around the media, andhope about the promise that criticism can change the social order it isbuilt on. His topics include methods, genre criticism and consumer-gen-erated content, auteur criticism and social media, cultural criticism andthe cell phone, and ethnographic criticism and video games.

HM1256 2009-473760 978-3-89806-480-4NNaarrcciissssiissmm aanndd ppoowweerr;; ppssyycchhooaannaallyyssiiss ooff mmeennttaallddiissoorrddeerrss iinn ppoolliittiiccss..Wirth, Hans-Jürgen. Trans. by Ingrid Lansford. Ed. by Antje Becker andKeri Shewring. (Psyche and society)Psychosozial-Verlag, ©2009 266 p. $37.47Psychoanalyst Wirth (U. of Bremen, Germany) draws connectionsbetween individual psychopathology, with a particular focus on nar-cissism, and political power through case studies of the German RedArmy Faction and former Serbian leader Slobodan Milosevic. His goal isto test the usefulness of psychoanalytic, social-psychological, and socio-logical theories for developing interpretations of the irrational in politics.

HM1261 2009-035661 978-1-934691-13-7TThhee eevvoolluuttiioonn ooff lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp;; ttrraannssiittiioonnss iinn ddeecciissiioonnmmaakkiinngg ffrroomm ssmmaallll--ssccaallee ttoo mmiiddddllee--rraannggee ssoocciieettiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Kevin J. Vaughn et al. (Advanced seminarseries)School for Advanced Research, ©2009 349 p. $34.95 (pa)US anthropologists describe and interpret archaeological and ethno-graphic evidence for changes in the structure of prehistoric and modernsocieties that parallel the establishment of permanent, or at least per-sistent, leadership. Among their topics are food sharing and mag-naminity among Martu Aborigines; political alliance, economicresources, and reproductive success in the Ecuadorian Amazon; the evo-lution of managerial elites in intermediate societies; of leaders andlegacies in Native North America; leadership in middle-range Africansocieties; and identifying the pathways to permanent leadership. Theseminar where the 11 papers were presented was held in Santa Fe, NewMexico in December 2006.

HM1261 2009-025522 978-1-4129-7488-2LLeeaaddeerrsshhiipp;; tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee,, 55tthh eedd..Northouse, Peter G.Sage Publications, ©2010 435 p. $76.95 (pa)In an effort to bridge the gap between simplistic popular approaches toleadership and the more abstract theoretical approaches, Northouse(communication, Western Michigan University) reviews and analyzes 15leadership theories and approaches, including the situational approach,leader-member exchange theory, and transformational leadership. Thetext is written in an accessible style, and features a chapter format com-posed of description and explanation of the theory or approach, dis-cussion of its strengths and criticisms, applications and case studies, aleadership instrument, and a summary. This fifth edition contains newcase examples, reflection questions, and instruments, plus new coverageof authentic leadership and servant leadership. A new online study siteoffers quizzes, journal articles and discussion questions, Internet exer-cises, video clips, and social networking tools for student discussions. Thetext is for undergraduate and graduate classes in management, lead-ership studies, business, educational leadership, and public adminis-tration. It is particularly suited as a supplementary text for coreorganizational behavior courses or as an overview text within an MBAcurriculum.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–135–

HN18 2009933363 978-1-84720-143-0GGoovveerrnnaannccee ooff wweellffaarree ssttaattee rreeffoorrmm;; aa ccrroossss nnaattiioonnaall aannddccrroossss sseeccttoorraall ccoommppaarriissoonn ooff ppoolliiccyy aanndd ppoolliittiiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by Irene Dingeldey and Heinz Rothgang.(Globalization and welfare)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 263 p. $115.00Dingeldey (Institute for Labour and Economy, U. of Bremen, Germany)and Rothgang (health economics, U. of Bremen, Germany) present 11papers comparatively exploring the governance of welfare state change.As a whole, the volume focuses on the questions of how policies and reg-ulatory structures are changing, how reform processes in different policyareas or countries are being shaped, and whether there are signs of con-vergence or divergence across different welfare state types. The papersexplore the topic from an institutionalist and interactive perspective(examining forms of interaction and actors involved) with regard to boththe policies and politics of the welfare state. Changes in governance aretraced through developments in health, pensions, labor market, and edu-cation policy in countries of the Organisation for Economic Co-operationand Development and political reform processes are examined in theareas of health, pensions, the labor market, and education.

HN18 978-1-84742-404-4TThhee PPeetteerr TToowwnnsseenndd rreeaaddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Alan Walker et al.Policy Press, ©2010 678 p. $39.95 (pa)A collection of 58 articles and essays by British sociologist Townsend(1928-2009) is designed as a reader for a course in sociology, or as a sam-pling of his thinking for professional and lay readers. They are presentedin topical sections covering sociology and social policy, from welfare stateto international welfare, poverty, inequality and social exclusion, healthinequalities and health policy, older people, disability, and social justiceand human rights. Each section is edited and introduced by a fellow soci-ologist. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HN25 2009-034893 978-81-321-0240-3PPaacckkaaggiinngg lliiffee;; ccuullttuurreess ooff tthhee eevveerryyddaayy..Nayar, Pramod K.Sage Publications, ©2009 218 p. $39.95Examining discourses that constitute aspects of everyday life in therealms of health, risk, comfort, and mobility—discourses that emanatefrom representations in the media, the rhetoric of “experts,” and theadvertising narratives of commercial organizations—Nayar (English, U. ofHyderabad, India) argues that everyday life is being “packaged,” bywhich he means that it is now being constructed by consumer culture ina manner that involves more than the mere myth-making designed toencourage the consumption of goods and services but also influences thedevelopment of particular views and values of the self, the body, success,and health. He addresses how elements of public culture such as cinema,the comic book, museums, tourism, mobile phones, housing, property,shopping, and celebratory culture construct these “packaged” forms ofmeaning. While he by no means limits himself to his home country, sig-nificant comparative value is added by his greater attention to discoursesin India than is typical of his colleagues in the West.

HN49 2009-033126 978-0-8213-7658-4GGeennddeerr aanndd ggoovveerrnnaannccee iinn rruurraall sseerrvviicceess;; iinnssiigghhttss ffrroommIInnddiiaa,, GGhhaannaa,, aanndd EEtthhiiooppiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by the World Bank and International Food PolicyResearch Institute.The World Bank, ©2010 332 p. $35.00 (pa)The provision of agricultural extension services and rural drinking watersupply is often short-changed due to market, state, and communityfailure. This, coupled with widespread neglect of the needs of women,slows down development. A variety of governance reform efforts havebeen tried over the last two decades with mixed results and this volumeassesses their effectiveness while also making the point that no standardsolution exists due to the variance in local institutions and social norms.For quick access, the volume begins with a twenty eight page executivesummary that provides an overview of the empirical findings in thethree countries, and then goes on to give specific policy recommenda-tions for India, Ghana and Ethiopia.

HN49 2009-044425 978-0-313-35485-4GGeennddeerr,, hhuummiilliiaattiioonn,, aanndd gglloobbaall sseeccuurriittyy;; ddiiggnniiffyyiinnggrreellaattiioonnsshhiippss ffrroomm lloovvee,, sseexx,, aanndd ppaarreenntthhoooodd ttoo wwoorrllddaaffffaaiirrss..Lindner, Evelin. (Contemporary psychology)Praeger, ©2010 305 p. $44.95Transdisciplinary social scientist Linder is founding president of theHuman Dignity and Humiliation Studies network. In this third book, sheargues that the same approaches and values can lead to fulfilling rela-tionships at all scales from the intimate to the global. Her topics includehow culture frames emotions, how gender became segregated andranked, how gender roles can humiliate, the danger of humiliationaddiction, how to free love and sex, how to rescue parenthood, and howco-egalization can dignify everyone.

HN49 2009-037028 978-1-4129-7462-2IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo ccoommmmuunniittyy ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; tthheeoorryy,, pprraaccttiiccee,,aanndd sseerrvviiccee--lleeaarrnniinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Jerry W. Robinson, Jr. and Gary Paul Green.Sage Publications, ©2011 315 p. $59.95 (pa)Thirty leading American community development scholars contribute 18chapters to an introductory text on the field of community developmentfor students and practitioners. The text differs from others on the topicin its exploration of the linkages between community theory, communitydevelopment, and service-learning. Providing readers with a strongconceptual base for understanding local development issues, the texthelps users develop the ability and skills to understand the social,economic, and political dynamics at the local level, and to understandhow local communities are shaped and constrained by external forces.Topics addressed include the history of community development;technical assistance, self-help, and interactional approaches; the role ofconflict; action and evaluation research; local organizations, leadership,and coalitions; and current critical issues such as rural and inner-citydevelopment, engaging youth, health care, public schools, andsustainable development.

HN59 2009-048618 978-1-59884-105-3BBaabbyy bboooomm;; ppeeooppllee aanndd ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Rusty Monhollon and Peter C. Mancall.(Perspectives in American social history series)ABC-CLIO, ©2010 246 p. $85.00For high school and undergraduate students, Monhollon (history, HoodCollege) brings together 10 articles that follow different groups within theBaby Boom generation from the 1950s to the present to show how babyboomers experienced and impacted the same historical events differently,especially their influence on economy and culture, and how Americanswere affected by the Baby Boom generation. Scholars of history, sociology,anthropology, and journalism from the US consider the experiences offamilies, women, students, African Americans, Hispanic Americans,those in poverty, religious individuals, Organization Men, and subur-banites with the Cold War, the civil rights movement, Vietnam, the coun-terculture, Watergate, and other events. Key primary documents areincluded.

HN59 2009-025305 978-0-398-07899-7EEmmiiggrraattiinngg ffrroomm CChhiinnaa ttoo tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess;; aa ccoommppaarriissoonnooff ddiiffffeerreenntt ssoocciiaall eexxppeerriieenncceess..Li, Yushi (Boni).C.C. Thomas, ©2010 235 p. $52.95In a supplementary textbook for an introductory sociology course, Li(sociology, Northern Kentucky U.) helps students associate experience intheir daily lives with larger social forces, by using herself as a case study.She describes her own experience living in the US and China, and howevents have influenced and impacted her social values, attitudes, andbehavior. In general, she explains how she has been, and continues to be,resocialized and influenced by American and Chinese societies. Amongthe areas she discusses are society and social interaction, deviance, socialstratification, race and ethnicity, sex and gender, family and familyplanning, religion, and urbanization.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –136–

HN79 2009-030041 978-1-55849-712-2BBeeyyoonndd VViieettnnaamm;; tthhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff pprrootteesstt iinn MMaassssaacchhuusseettttss,,11997744--11999900..Surbrug, Robert. (Culture, politics, and the Cold War)U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2009 323 p. $29.95 (pa)While the dominant historical interpretation of 1960s protests in theUnited States emphasizes the decline of the left protest movements andthe ascendance of the politics of identity and a new conservatism in the1970s, a closer look at the activist history of the US left between 1974 and1990 reveals both a greater continuity in protest activities and a largerimpact on American politics than is typically acknowledged, arguesSurbrug (history, Bay Path College). He support this thesis through anexamination of grassroots left protest in Massachusetts in the 1970s and1980s, examining battles over nuclear power, nuclear weapons, and USpolicy in Central America and assessing their impact on the politicallandscape.

HN90 2009-038768 978-0-8133-4426-3PPrriivviilleeggee;; aa rreeaaddeerr,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Michael S. Kimmel and Abby L. Ferber.Westview Press, ©2010 270 p. $35.00 (pa)The privilege that is conferred by birth, race, gender or sexual orientationis generally discussed from the point of view of those denied that priv-ilege. In this reader Kimmel (sociology SUNY, Stoneybrook NY) andFerber (sociology, University of Colorado, Colorado Springs) have selectedarticles written 1988-2009 that examine the stereotypes of privilege. Theseminal essay is the first, by Peggy McIntosh, who steps back from hergender-based study of oppression to recognize the privileges she auto-matically receives by being white. Other essays follow on this revelationthat encourage the reader to rethink dividing lines. In America, “white”allows for privilege. Some authors look at variations on this: gay whitemen or the “whitening” of once marginalized immigrant groups, such asItalians and Jews. Others note distinctions within groups such as theoppression of the poor by the wealthy in the name of capitalism or thelevels of privilege among people of color. The concluding chapters givepossible methods to overcome the mentality of privilege. The book isintended for undergraduate classes but would be of interest to generalreaders.

HN90 2009-036452 978-1-4128-1157-6PPuubblliicc ooppiinniioonn iinn tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess;; ssttuuddiieess ooff rraaccee,,rreelliiggiioonn,, ggeennddeerr,, aanndd iissssuueess tthhaatt mmaatttteerr..Simon, Rita J. and Mohamed Alaa Abdel-Moneim.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 207 p. $39.95Through analysis of public opinion poll data from 1945 to 2008, Simonand Abdel-Moneim (both from public affairs, American U.) explore howviewpoints of the American public have evolved over time. A chaptereach is devoted to public opinion toward African-Americans, Jews,Muslim-Americans, gays and lesbians, immigration, abortion and affir-mative action. Later chapters focus on events that occurred in sevenperiods and their subsequent affect on public opinion. Perhaps thelargest effects resulted from the race riots of the 1950s and the war inVietnam, and one of the largest changes has been a shift toward moreaccepting attitudes toward homosexuality.

HN110 2009-9925322 978-1-4129-2085-8CCuullttuurraall eexxpprreessssiioonn,, ccrreeaattiivviittyy aanndd iinnnnoovvaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Helmut Anheier and Yudhishthir Raj Isar. (Thecultures and globalization series; 3)Sage Publications, ©2010 460 p. $131.95Anheier (sociology, UCLA and Heidelberg U., Germany) and Isar (culturalpolicy studies, American U. of Paris, France) compile 24 essays on therelationship between cultural expression, creativity and innovation, andglobalization. Essays analyze the interactions between these elements inarts practice, the emergence of creativity and innovation in culturalexpression, and the symbiotic relationship between artistic practice, glob-alization, and creativity and innovation. They address general topics likesocial recognition in creativity, globalized art circuits, art and knowledgeproduction, and copyright; specific issues in different world regions suchas hybridities in African art and Jamaican music, graphic design in theArab world, and artistic freedom in South Asia; and artistic genres andissues, including creativity in the music industry, the non-profit artssector, creative spaces, translation, digital culture, ethics in fashion, andthe role of philanthropy. Concluding sections feature cultural indicators,which profile the key dimensions of the relationship between culturalchange and globalization, and data suites that provide statistics, charts,and tables on policy, investment, diversity, creativity, and hybridity.Essays have been contributed by cultural critics, artists, dancers, writers,and scholars of media and communication studies, economics, literature,sociology, cultural policy studies, political science, arts and culture, andother fields from around the world.

HN373 978-2-503-53132-8OOlldd wwoorrllddss,, nneeww wwoorrllddss;; EEuurrooppeeaann ccuullttuurraall eennccoouunntteerrss,,cc..11000000--cc..11775500..Title main entry. Ed. by Lisa Bailey et al. (Late medieval and earlymodern studies, 18)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 217 p. $87.00Bailey, Digglemann, and Phillips, all from the history department of theUniversity of Auckland, have redefined the terms “old” and “new” worldto look at encounters between Europeans with other cultures. FromRichard the Lionheart and the Cypriots to eighteenth century Spanishsailors in Tahiti, it is not always discernable who represents the oldworld and who the new. Articles treat ways in which one culture triedto make sense of another. In the case of the importation of tobacco toEurope, it was necessary to take this seductive foreigner and fit it intothe humoral theory to make it acceptable. Other articles look at medievalEuropean ideas of Oriental sexuality and a hermaphroditic colonyimagined in Australia as a Swiftian commentary on contemporaryEurope. The ways in which the people of the Americas were fitted intoEuropean classifications are discussed in two other essays suggestinghow racism was established from the first encounter. The editors havechosen to treat the period from 1190-1750 as a seamless flow ofencounters that led to a final world view. This is an excellent approach.Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

HN380 2009-018974 978-1-59403-262-2EEuurrooppee’’ss gghhoosstt;; TToolleerraannccee,, JJiihhaaddiissmm,, aanndd tthhee ccrriissiiss iinn tthheeWWeesstt..Radu, Michael.Encounter Books, ©2009 773 p. $35.00Written by the late Radu (formerly of the Foreign Policy ResearchInstitute and the Hoover Institution on War, Revolution, and Peace), thisvolume warns that immigration of Muslims into Europe threatens theIslamization of Europe, a danger that will be impossible to avoid ifEuropeans stick to their misguided policies of multiculturalism. Likeothers of its essentialist ilk, the book largely treats Islam as an undiffer-entiated whole and elevates religion/culture over all other categories ofidentity. In furtherance of its argument, it commits mistakes of con-flation, treating, for example, the concept of the ummah, the worldwidecommunity of the Islamic faithful, a concept held by almost all Muslims,as basically the same as the wish for a renewed Caliphate, or single stateruling over all Islamic lands, which is an idea that is not even sharedamong all or even most adherents of political Islam. It also commitserrors of omission, for example as when it compares issues of assimi-lation for Islamic communities in Europe to issues of assimilation forHispanics in the United States, when a more apt comparison would beto, say, the highly-integrated and well-established Muslim communities inDearborn, Michigan (or even to more recent arrivals). Indeed, one mighteven begin to suspect bad faith in the argument when one reads asser-tions such as the idea that Turkey cannot be used as an example of asecular Muslim society because many Islamists disdain Kamal Ataturk,thus ignoring the views of millions of Turkish Muslims. While the ten-sions between newly arrived Muslim immigrants and their Europeanhost countries are surely real, if over-exaggerated by folks like Radu,neither the complex causes of those tensions (which are only partly cul-tural/religious and differ markedly across countries and communities)nor solutions are to be found here.

HN440 2009-041297 978-1-4128-1156-9TThhee nneeww ccuussttooddiiaannss ooff tthhee ssttaattee;; pprrooggrraammmmaattiicc eelliitteess iinnFFrreenncchh ssoocciieettyy..Genieys, William. Trans. by Marc Smyrl.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 213 p. $49.95Cenieys (Latin European politics, U. of Montpellier) takes France as a casestudy to argue that the technocrats that have been pulling the strings ofgovernment and society for the past few decades are being replaced bypeople who established themselves in specific sectors—programs—andwork with others like them, rather than fighting to the top in the centerring. Within the overall case study are case studies of the social welfarepolicy elite and defense elites. Specific topics include the professional con-struction of a policy elite, elite trajectories in the social policy sector,changing definitions of elite success, and elite competition and the limitsof influence.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–137–

HN740 2009-035620 978-0-8047-6942-6MMyytthh ooff tthhee ssoocciiaall vvoollccaannoo;; ppeerrcceeppttiioonnss ooff iinneeqquuaalliittyy aannddddiissttrriibbuuttiivvee iinnjjuussttiiccee iinn ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy CChhiinnaa..Whyte, Martin King.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 250 p. $27.95 (pa)Whyte (sociology, Harvard U.) examines how ordinary Chinese citizensweight the balance between a booming economy and rising inequality asthey evaluate the social order. He suggests that given the changes fromsocialist to market economy and from modest to sizeable income gaps,people’s attitude may well effect China’s future political stability. Amonghis topics are China’s post-socialist transition and rising inequality, whatChinese citizens see as fair and unfair about current inequalities, prefer-ences for equality and inequality, and views of stratification and classconflict. His detailed survey data show that gleeful predictions that anangry populace is on the verge of overthrowing the state are just wishfulthinking.

HN981 2009-026448 978-0-415-99562-7DDeevveellooppmmeenntt,, ppoovveerrttyy,, aanndd ppoolliittiiccss;; ppuuttttiinngg ccoommmmuunniittiieessiinn tthhee ddrriivveerr’’ss sseeaatt..Martin, Richard. (Routledge studies in development and society; 23)Routledge, ©2010 289 p. $95.00This text focuses on one particular aspect of development, urban devel-opment and the needs of the urban poor, and casts itself a “a search formethodologies which reflect the values of the people who will be the par-ticipants in and beneficiaries of the development.” In essence, the bookrecasts longstanding ideas and debates within development theory (“verylittle in this book is new” state the authors) in view of what benefits theurban poor in the broad sense. Due to the research experiences of theauthors, the focus is on issues concerning African cities.

HN981 2010-002326 978-0-8213-8194-6LLooccaall aanndd ccoommmmuunniittyy ddrriivveenn ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; mmoovviinngg ttoossccaallee iinn tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Hans P. Binswanger-Mkhize et al. (New fron-tiers of social policy)The World Bank, ©2010 248 p. $30.00 (pa)For rural and urban development practitioners, public administrators,and policy makers, Binswanger-Mkhize and others working in devel-opment programs at the World Bank provide the historical background(since World War II) and tools to successfully scale up local and com-munity driven development (LCDD) to the regional and national levels.They describe how LCDD gives control of development decisions andresources to community groups and representative local governments, sothat poor communities receive funds, decide on their use, plan andexecute local projects, infrastructure, governance, services, and economicand social development, and monitor the provision of services from theseprojects. Chapters draw from previous reports on individual aspects ofLCDD, and contributions in and outside the World Bank, to explain thesteps of scaling up in design, logistics, and implementation activities,with an example of Africa and its opportunities and challenges, andfindings and lessons learned from other countries.

HQ21 2009-034028 978-0-07-337088-0HHuummaann sseexxuuaalliittyy;; ddiivveerrssiittyy iinn ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy AAmmeerriiccaa,, 77tthheedd..Yarber, William L. et al.McGraw-Hill, ©2010 636 p. $130.00 (pa)Yarber (applied health science and gender studies and Kinsey Institutefor Research in Sex, Gender, and Reproduction, Indiana U.) et al. offer atextbook on human sexuality that integrates research and presents anapproach that encourages students to be proactive in and about theirsexual well-being. Emphasizing critical thinking and inclusion, it uses abiopsychosocial approach and also addresses ethnic differences. Revisedin design, this edition also has revised chapters on contraception, birthcontrol, and abortion; sex and health and illness; sexually transmittedinfections; and HIV and AIDS. It incorporates added critical thinkingquestions; updated menopause content; increased focus on inclusive, non-judgmental language and nomenclature; expanded global perspective;increased focus on gay, lesbian, bisexual, transgender, and intersex issuesand social networking and web-based resources; and updated materialon emergency contraception, managing HPV, menopausal hormonetherapy, assisted reproductive technologies, sexual function difficulties,laws related to sexuality, and HIV, among other content changes.

HQ75 2009-036702 978-0-415-87269-0TThhee ccuullttuurraall ppoolliittiiccss ooff ffeemmaallee sseexxuuaalliittyy iinn SSoouutthh AAffrriiccaa..Gunkel, Henriette. (Routledge research in gender and society; 25)Routledge, ©2010 181 p. $95.00This text investigates the cultural politics of female same-sex intimacy inpost-apartheid South Africa. The author explores the cultural claims ofhomophobic discourses that seek to portray homosexuality as un-African,examines the emergence of the lesbian and gay movement and itsengagement with constructions of sexuality under apartheid and withother social and political movements at the national and internationallevel, discusses the gender regime encapsulated in homophobic violenceand the potential of female homosocial structures for subverting thisgender regime, and reviews historical and contemporary forms of femalehomosocial structures and the contested meanings of female same-sexintimacy that are revealed therein.

HQ76 2009-022611 978-0-7546-7135-0TThhee AAsshhggaattee rreesseeaarrcchh ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo qquueeeerr tthheeoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Noreen Giffney and Michael O’Rourke. (Queerinterventions)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 539 p. $124.95This reader contains 29 papers that provide an overview of current con-cerns within queer theory, a field of critical theory that has emerged outof gay and lesbian studies and feminist studies. The essays address thefour key concerns of queer theoretical work—identity, discourse, norma-tivity, and relationality—while also engaging with intersecting theoreticaldiscourses such as feminist theory, gay and lesbian studies, postcolonialtheory, psychoanalysis, disability studies, Marxism, poststructuralism,critical race studies, and posthumanism. Examples of specific topicsinclude heterosexuality after queer theory, female-to-male masculinityand the trans culture of boyhood, taxonomies of identity in AIDS dis-course, queerness in the sociology of sport, queer theory and archae-ology, queer analysis of personal life in the early 21st century, and desirebetween women in Frankenstein.

HQ76 978-1-56023-754-9OOllddeerr GGLLBBTT ffaammiillyy aanndd ccoommmmuunniittyy lliiffee..Title main entry. Ed. by Christine A. Fruhauf and Dan Mahoney.Routledge, ©2010 180 p. $45.95 (pa)Despite the growing number of gay, lesbian, bisexual, and transgendered(GLBT) persons over age 65, little is known about these individuals’experiences and healthcare needs. Editors Fruhauf (Human Developmentand Family Studies, Colorado State University) and Mahoney (Nutrition,Ryerson University) have assembled essays that will educate professionalsabout the experiences of older GLBT adults and the issues they facewithin their families and communities. Topics include physical andmental health, transgender identities, friendship, and coming-out issuesfor gay grandfathers. This book will interest students and academicsspecializing in family studies, gerontology, health studies, psychology,social work, and sociology, or any professional working with oldercommunities.

HQ76 2009-002891 978-0-8298-1855-0PPllaattoo oorr PPaauull??;; tthhee oorriiggiinnss ooff WWeesstteerrnn hhoommoopphhoobbiiaa..Jennings, Theodore W.Pilgrim Press, ©2009 244 p. $25.00 (pa)Challenging the assertion in Western culture that homophobia is sanc-tioned by basic Christian teaching, Jennings (biblical and constructivetheology, Chicago Theological Seminary) has previously found biblicalnarratives from both the Hebrew Bible and the Gospels that accept andaffirm same-sex relationships of many kinds. Here he seeks the actualsource of the homophobia that is mistakenly attributed to Christianity.Ironically, he argues, it comes from the very Greek and Hellenistic cul-tures that are often portrayed as the ancient hotbeds of same-sexeroticism. This is neither mainstream theology nor mainstream gaystudies, but in this case your heretic’s heresy is not necessarily yourorthodoxy.

HQ76 2009-023289 978-0-7546-7675-1PPoosstt--qquueeeerr ppoolliittiiccss..Ruffolo, David V. (Queer interventions)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 193 p. $99.95Ruffolo (U. of Toronto) proclaims that queer has reached a political peak,that its theoretical movements have become limited by its incessantinvestment in identity politics, and its political outlook has attaineddormant status because of its narrowed interest in hetero-normativity.But help is on the way, he says, in the form of anti-canonical studiesnourished in the borderlands of feminist, postcolonial, and ability theory.He looks at post-queer mappings, a critical politics of becoming, dialogiccreativities, the materialities of life itself, schizo-academia, biovirtualities,and involuntionary matters.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –138–

HQ76 2009-510055 978-1-4438-0447-9QQuueeeerr iiddeennttiittiieess//ppoolliittiiccaall rreeaalliittiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce, Drushel and Kathleen German.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 288 p. $59.99Scholars mostly of communication examine the intersection betweenpolitical leadership, media coverage, and sexual identity, emphasizing thenegotiation of meaning between public and private behavior in the US.Within the themes of post-millennial politics, the political becomes per-sonal, identities in motion, and when identities collide, they considersuch topics as rhetorical apologia for indiscretions, the politics of jokingabout gay male identity, rural popular culture and its impact on lesbianidentity, and queering marriage and family in the 2006 Colorado election.

HQ471 2009-035988 978-1-4331-0207-3PPoorrnn..ccoomm;; mmaakkiinngg sseennssee ooff oonnlliinnee ppoorrnnooggrraapphhyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Feona Attwood. (Digital formations; v.48)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 287 p. $32.95 (pa)In this contribution to the emerging field of online porn studies, Attwood(media and communications studies, Sheffield Hallam U., UK) situatesthe Internet’s place in debates over the relationship between sex, freedomof expression, and technology. In 13 essays, international authors in cul-tural studies, sociology, women’s studies, and related fields examine thesocietal implications of porn practices and styles portrayed online. Issuesdiscussed include the mainstreaming of porn, conceptualizations of childpornography, netporn politics, “heteroflexibility,” and blurred boundariesbetween private and public. The anthology does not include images.

HQ536 2009-005229 978-1-933478-13-5TThhee ddyynnaammiiccss ooff ffaammiillyy ppoolliiccyy..Butterfield, Alice K. et al.Lyceum Books, ©2010 445 p. $59.95 (pa)This book provides a broad view of a number of family-related issuessuch as the diversity of families in the U.S., family trends, race, gender,sexual orientation, and class. It features a global comparison of familypolicies throughout industrialized countries, in-depth examples from theauthors’ interviews, analysis of successful policies intended to help fam-ilies confront problems and policies that make them worse, and a par-ticular focus on involving families in finding solutions through impactanalysis, research, and advocacy campaigns. The authors intended thatthe book be used as a textbook in child and family policy in social workand other human service programs, and as a springboard towardadvocacy and policy practice. Authors are Alice Butterfield (social work,U. of Illinois at Chicago), Rocha (social work, U. of Tennessee), andWilliam Butterfield (formerly social work, Washington U.).

HQ541 2009-026485 978-0-8130-3418-8FFaammiillyy vvaalluueess iinn tthhee OOlldd SSoouutthh..Title main entry. Ed. by Craig Thompson Friend and Anya Jabour.U. Press of Florida, ©2010 257 p. $69.95Friend (history, North Carolina State U.) and Jabour (history, U. ofMontana) compile 10 essays on family life in the nineteenth-centuryAmerican South and concepts relating to its structure, economics, andcultural and social aspects, such as mourning practices, tavern life, theeffects of politics, inter-racial marriages, cross-plantation marriagesamong slaves, white orphanages, childhood mortality, miscegenation andinheritance, domestic activities like sewing, and same-sex relationships.Historians from the US, Canada, and the UK aim to uncover aspects thatwere previously unknown about family life and values in the Old South,how southerners conceptualized it, and the tension between traditionaland modern values.

HQ555 2009-012372 978-1-4262-0504-0AAnn AAmmeerriiccaann ffaammiillyy;; tthhrreeee ddeeccaaddeess wwiitthh tthhee MMccGGaarrvveeyyss..Spaulding, Pam.National Geographic Society, ©2009 233 p. $35.00Photojournalist Spaulding didn’t know it in 1977, but her supposed one-year project to document the life of the McGarvey family in Louisville,Kentucky would last for 30 years. The 175 images in this compelling bookare fruit of that project, showing the large and small events that madeup the daily life of the McGarveys. Spaulding’s photos are accompaniedby Claude Cookman’s word portraits of each family member. Almostevery reader will recognize something of their own family in this book,which will appeal to a broad audience.

HQ581 2009-012989 978-0-7391-2867-1FFeewweerr mmeenn,, mmoorree bbaabbiieess;; sseexx,, ffaammiillyy,, aanndd ffeerrttiilliittyy iinnHHaaiittii..Schwartz, Timothy T.Lexington Books, ©2009 281 p. $75.00Focusing on the Haitian commune (county) of Jean Rabel, anthropologistSchwartz explains the extremely high fertility rates of Haiti, even in theabsence of financially eligible reproductive-age males and the presenceof high malnutrition and disease, by means of what he calls the“pronatal sociocultural fertility complex.” This complex encompasses aseries of behaviors and beliefs concerning sexuality and fertility. Theseinclude the “association of pregnancy and childbirth with duty; theconcern with conception and the care and rewarding attentivenesstoward pregnant women; the abhorrence of contraceptives and abortion;the misinforming of young women concerning the mechanics of preg-nancy; and the censuring of childless individuals.” He further extends hisresearch on Jean Rabel to exploration of high fertility rates across theCaribbean.

HQ691 2009-035618 978-0-8047-6960-0FFoorr bbeetttteerr,, ffoorr wwoorrssee;; tthhee mmaarrrriiaaggee ccrriissiiss tthhaatt mmaaddeemmooddeerrnn EEggyypptt..Kholoussy, Hanan.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 188 p. $21.95 (pa)In early 20th-century Cairo, the “marriage crisis,” a perceived rise in thenumber of middle class men choosing bachelorhood over marriage, wasa subject of great concern among the urban middle class and an issuethey felt demanded government intervention because it signified thedemise of the nation. For Kholoussy (history and Middle East studies,The American U. in Cairo, Egypt), the discourse of the “marriage crisis”served as a metaphor for middle-class understandings of gender, nationalidentity, law, and other socioeconomic and political concerns. He com-pares and contrasts this middle class discourse of the “marriage crisis”in the Cairo press with urban lower, middle, and upper class discoursesthat emerge from analysis of cases in the Islamic courts between 1898and 1936.

HQ755 2009-036806 978-0-07-337876-3TThhee pprroocceessss ooff ppaarreennttiinngg,, 88tthh eedd..Brooks, Jane B.McGraw-Hill, ©2011 504 p. $92.81 (pa)Learning features offered in this text for parents and caregivers includemain points, exercises, and chapter-opening newspaper articles, plusinterviews with real parents and professionals and quotes from parentson the joys of parenting. Part I reviews theories of growth and devel-opment and presents a problem solving approach to use throughout therest of the book. Of special interest is a chapter on nurturing family rela-tionships in a technological society. Part II covers parenting at differentdevelopmental stages. For this eighth edition, Part III, Parenting inVarying Life Circumstances, is reorganized into four chapters rather thanthree: parenting and working, single parenting, parenting in complexfamily structures, and parenting in challenging times. This edition alsoincludes new material explaining genetic, neuroendocrine, and neuro-physiological factors that influence children’s growth and behavior.There is new material on how culture shapes children’s and teens’ devel-opment, and how to talk to children about egg and sperm donation.Brooks is a practicing clinician working with parents and children.

HQ759 2009-047934 978-1-4129-6846-1EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff mmootthheerrhhoooodd;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea O’Reilly.Sage Publications, ©2010 1428 p. $375.00The subject of motherhood crosses many disciplines but has come intoits own as a discipline in the last decade or so. This three-volume ref-erence offers approximately 800 entries related to a variety of moth-erhood themes: history, social issues, families, health, society,motherhood around the world (entries for more than 200 countries) andin the United States (entries for every state), motherhood studies, andprominent mothers. Entries are written in a manner accessible to highschool students and general readers. They range in length from a columnor two (country entries, for example) to several pages (e.g. art and moth-ering, artificial insemination, drug abuse). Each has cross references anda bibliography. Arrangement is alphabetical, with thematic access pro-vided via the Reader’s Guide in the front matter and the index in volume3. A glossary and resource guide are included as well as a highlyselective chronology, and the appendix offers motherhood statisticsaround the world. Editor O’Reilly (women’s studies, York U., Canada)writes and works extensively in the realm of motherhood studies and isfounding a motherhood consortium and a museum.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–139–

HQ759 2009-053949 978-0-313-37950-5FFooccuuss oonn ssiinnggllee--ppaarreenntt ffaammiilliieess;; ppaasstt,, pprreesseenntt,, aanndd ffuuttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Annice D. Yarber and Paul M. Sharp.Praeger, ©2010 298 p. $54.95Writing with upper-level undergraduates and graduate students in mind,Yarber and Sharp (sociology, Auburn U. at Montgomery) compile 18 pre-viously published research articles and essays on single-parent familiesand their impact and place in society. They address the historical, demo-graphic, and economic trends of modern society that affect the growthof single-parent families; the diversity of these families in terms ofnationality, ethnicity, race, socioeconomic status, family size, and sexu-ality, as well as specific groups like children of incarcerated parents,grandmothers raising grandchildren, and single-father families; the dif-ferent experiences of families from these backgrounds in the areas ofincome, the law, psychological well-being, religious support, and teensexual activity; and social problems and policies that affect them.

HQ759 2009-003778 978-1-57591-129-8FFrroomm tthhee ppeerrssoonnaall ttoo tthhee ppoolliittiiccaall;; ttoowwaarrdd aa nneeww tthheeoorryyooff mmaatteerrnnaall nnaarrrraattiivvee..Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea O’Reilly and Silvia Caporale Bizzini.Susquehanna Univ. Press, ©2009 263 p. $61.00Scholars of literature and the social sciences look beyond the experienceparadigm of motherhood to motherhood as an intellectual and politicalpractice and institution. Understanding motherhood as both a culturaland personal construction, they argue, requires a profound rethinking ofconnections between self and world, experience and ideology. Theirtopics include the validation stories of ordinary women in extraordinarycircumstances, maternal subjectivities in midlife transition from a het-erosexual to a lesbian identity, motherhood and slavehood in HarrietJacobs’ Incidents in the Life of a Slave Girl, and a Kristevan reading ofAnne Enright’s memoir Making Babies: Stumbling into Motherhood.Distributed in the US by Associated University Presses.

HQ759 2009-027019 978-1-84905-009-8MMaannaaggiinngg ffaammiillyy mmeellttddoowwnn;; tthhee llooww aarroouussaall aapppprrooaacchhaanndd aauuttiissmm..Woodcock, Linda and Andrea Page.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 174 p. $18.95 (pa)This work for parents, carers, and educators describes strategies fordealing with challenging behaviors, such as self-injury and violent out-bursts, in individuals with autism, using a low-arousal approach basedon avoiding confrontation and reducing stress and anxiety. The methodcan be used with children who are non-verbal, as well as those withhigher functioning autism. Some related issues discussed include the useof video to record family interactions, pros and cons of medication, andways parents can look after their own health. The book provides tips onexplaining the diagnosis of autism to the child, discussing sexuality andrelationships, and preventing interactions with the criminal justicesystem. Woodcock, parent of a son on the autism spectrum, is affiliatedwith an organization specializing in non-aversive behavior management.Page teaches clinical nursing skills at Birmingham City University.

HQ759 2009-024417 978-1-56368-417-3SSiiggnniinngg iinn PPuueerrttoo RRiiccaann;; aa hheeaarriinngg ssoonn aanndd hhiiss ddeeaaffffaammiillyy..Torres, Andrés.Gallaudet University Pr., ©2009 232 p. $34.95 (pa)Torres (Puerto Rican studies, Hunter College, New York City) remembershis childhood in New York City, describing both the internal dynamicsof the family—he and his two deaf parents—and interactions with thedeaf community, the New York Puerto Rican community, and US societyas a whole. Both his parents were stalwarts in the Puerto Rican Societyfor the Catholic Deaf. Among his topics are a signing village, observingand learning, family truths, the whole world watching, God and mar-riage, a garden, and border crossings.

HQ766 2009-046085 978-1-60497-662-5WWoommeenn’’ss rreepprroodduuccttiivvee hheeaalltthh iinn YYeemmeenn..Sunil, T.S. and Vijayan K. Pillai.Cambria Press, ©2010 211 p. $104.99Complaining that a lack of standardized indicators for the measurementof reproductive health inhibits the ability to generalize empirical findingsacross populations and limits the possibilities that policy-makers will rec-ognized reproductive health problems, Sunil (sociology, U. of Texas at SanAntonio) and Pillai (social work, U. of Texas at Arlington) propose a the-oretical framework for analyzing reproductive health, based on thebroad definition of reproductive health provided by the United Nations:“a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and notmerely the absence of disease or infirmity, in all matters relating to thereproductive system and to its functions and processes.” They apply theirframework to producing a demographic portrait of reproductive healthin Yemen. They also discuss long-term policies and programs that theybelieve will improve the reproductive health conditions of women inYemen.

HQ767 2009-044819 978-1-4128-1059-3CChhiillddhhoooodd ssoocciiaalliizzaattiioonn,, 22dd eedd..Denzin, Norman K.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 235 p. $29.95 (pa)For social scientists, Denzin (sociology, cinema studies, and interpretivetheory, U. of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign) presents a social psychologicalaccount of how the lives of children are shaped by social interaction, par-ticularly with parents and other caregivers. Arguing that children mustbe viewed from their perspective as well as that of their caregivers, hefocuses on the roles of language development, social behavior, identityacquisition, and the politics of childhood in the socialization process,drawing from his observations of the everyday interactions of childrenin preschools, daycare centers, and family homes. He also discusses play,work, and situated activity; friendship and shifting group alignments;candor, openness, and truthfulness; deference, demeanor, and tact; ges-tures; and the development of the self. This edition adds a new intro-duction reviewing new developments.

HQ778 2009-039498 978-1-933653-85-3KKeeeeppiinngg yyoouurr ssmmiillee;; ccaarriinngg ffoorr cchhiillddrreenn wwiitthh jjooyy,, lloovvee,,aanndd iinntteennttiioonn..Johnson, Jeff A.Redleaf Press, ©2010 194 p. $17.95 (pa)In this sequel to Finding Your Smile Again: A Child Care Professionals’sGuide to Reducing Stress and Avoiding Burnout (2207), a veteran child careprovider offers tactics, tips, and tools for providers to take care of them-selves so that they can approach their work with more smiles thanfrowns. The guide features self- assessments about areas including lifepurpose and mind-set.

HQ784 2009-025993 978-1-4051-7948-5MMeeddiiaa aanndd yyoouutthh;; aa ddeevveellooppmmeennttaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Kish, Steven J.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 312 p. $99.95Kirsh (psychology, State U. of New York at Geneseo) reviews and critiquesthe media effects research conducted on infants, children, and adoles-cents, highlighting the context of developmental change throughout. Thekey questions addressed by the review concern the amount of mediayouth consume and the motivations for media consumption, the theo-retical rationales given to explain the impact of media consumption onyouth, the specific positive and negative effects associated with con-suming different types of media across development, the relative strengthof media in the lives of youth, and the proper techniques that can reducethe harmful consequences associated with media consumption.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –140–

HQ792 2009-040426 978-0-8213-7759-8TThhee pprroommiissee ooff eeaarrllyy cchhiillddhhoooodd ddeevveellooppmmeenntt iinn LLaattiinnAAmmeerriiccaa aanndd tthhee CCaarriibbbbeeaann..Vegas, Emiliana and Lucrecia Santibáñez. (Latin American developmentforum series)The World Bank, ©2010 188 p. $40.00 (pa)Vegas, an education economist in the Human Development Departmentof the World Bank, and Santibáñez, who is associated with a non-profitthink tank in Mexico City focusing on education and public policyanalysis, review early childhood development programs in Latin Americaand the Caribbean, including those related to education, health, andnutrition, and their design, implementation, policies, and institutional-ization. They discuss the impact and policies of programs worldwide indeveloped and developing nations like the US, the Philippines, Uganda,Turkey, Vietnam, and those in the Organisation for Economic Co-oper-ation and Development; argue for greater investment in programs inLatin America and the Caribbean, while addressing the need for betterevaluations and cost accounting; and examine the micro and macrocontext of early childhood development in these regions, the impact ofprograms on cognitive and socioemotional development, physical health,and well-being, and ways to develop a comprehensive policy.

HQ796 2009-922102 978-0-87822-609-2OOwwnniinngg uupp ccuurrrriiccuulluumm;; eemmppoowweerriinngg aaddoolleesscceennttss ttooccoonnffrroonntt ssoocciiaall ccrruueellttyy,, bbuullllyyiinngg,, aanndd iinnjjuussttiiccee.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Wiseman, Rosalind.Research Press, ©2009 439 p. $64.95 (pa)This manual offers a program for educators to use in preventing bullyingand other social problems by helping students to understand the impor-tance of support, respect, dignity, and social relationships.The programtakes gender, racism, classism, and homophobia into account, and fea-tures separate sessions and curriculum for girls and boys. It uses groupdiscussions, games, role-playing, and other activities to help studentsunderstand friendships, cliques, popularity, and support systems; gossip,reputations, and double standards; teasing, anger, bullying, and sexualharassment; dating, boundaries, and abusive relationships; self-image,media and culture, and cyberbullying; and eating disorders and bodyimage. The CD contains reproducible forms and handouts. There is noindex. Wiseman, who founded a national violence prevention program,is an author who specializes in children, teens, parenting, bullying, socialjustice, and ethical leadership.

HQ796 978-1-905541-57-7RRaaddiiccaall yyoouutthh wwoorrkk;; ddeevveellooppiinngg ccrriittiiccaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess aannddpprrooffeessssiioonnaall jjuuddggeemmeenntt..Belton, Brian A.Russell House Publishing, ©2010 124 p. $33.95 (pa)Belton grew up in working class London, passed through gang culture,and got training in youth and community work. He is now a sociologist,critical anthropologist, and social historian at a YMCA in Canning Town.Still working class and radical, he proposes measures to revitalize socialwork with young people from disadvantaged groups by helping themrecognize and resist the oppression. He explores education and colonial-ization; the state; the question of change; change, compliance, and colo-nization; “We don’t need to education,” from the matrix to convivialityand eutrapelia; dilemmas and possibilities for radical youth work; andregard, accompaniment, and consideration. The treatise is not indexed.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HQ796 2008-032692 978-1-84553-626-8TTeecchhnnoommaadd;; gglloobbaall rraavviinngg ccoouunntteerrccuullttuurreess..St. John, Graham. (Studies in popular music)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 312 p. $27.95 (pa)St John (Critical and Cultural Studies, University of Queensland) presentsa cultural history of global electronic dance music countercultures, doc-umenting an emerging network of techno-tribes. Drawing on extensiveethnographic, netogaphic, and documentary research, the author detailsthe post-rave trajectory through various local sites and global scenes, witheach chapter attending to unique developments in the techno counter-culture. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

HQ796 2009-044530 978-1-4331-0632-3YYoouutthh--ffuullll pprroodduuccttiioonnss;; ccuullttuurraall pprraaccttiicceess aannddccoonnssttrruuccttiioonnss ooff ccoonntteenntt aanndd ssoocciiaall ssppaacceess..Title main entry. Ed. by Nancy Ares. (Adolescent cultures, school andsociety; v.47)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 251 p. $34.95 (pa)Researchers and practitioners in education and related disciplines suchas language and psychology explain how they and their colleagues bringa cultural practice perspective to the leaning and development of youthwho are members of traditionally marginalized groups. Among theirtopics are youth as active agents, negotiating hybridity in youth culturalpractices, producing selves and knowledges, learning science, rejectingdeficit views of students and promoting ideological approaches to lit-eracies, and numeracy.

HQ799 2009-021594 978-1-60566-926-7AAddoolleesscceenntt oonnlliinnee ssoocciiaall ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn aanndd bbeehhaavviioorr;;rreellaattiioonnsshhiipp ffoorrmmaattiioonn oonn tthhee iinntteerrnneett..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert Zheng et al.Information Science Reference, ©2010 280 p. $180.00This work looks at issues related to adolescent use of social online mediasuch as blogs, chat rooms, and text messaging, and presents a unifiedtheoretical framework to guide research on adolescent online social com-munication. Major themes include social and cognitive development, ado-lescents’ social and psychological needs, and social norms in onlinecommunication. Section I presents emerging conceptual and theoreticalperspectives on issues such as Internet addiction, online relationship for-mation, and the Internet and adolescent sexuality. Section II exploreslegal perspectives. Section III presents recent research findings, educa-tional perspectives, and practical applications, with material on pre-venting adolescent victimization, social networking and socialresponsibility, and cyberbullying. Zheng teach instructional design andeducational technology in the Department of Educational Psychology atthe University of Utah.

HQ799 2009-018331 978-1-4331-0552-4WWhhoo ddoo tthheeyy tthhiinnkk tthheeyy aarree??;; tteeeennaaggee ggiirrllss aanndd tthheeiirraavvaattaarrss iinn ssppaacceess ooff ssoocciiaall oonnlliinnee ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn..Morrison, Connie.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 246 p. $32.95 (pa)On the social networking site WeeMee, users create free cartoon-likeavatars to represent themselves in online social spaces, then use real-lifecurrency (in the form of credit cards and prepaid WeeWorld cards) topurchase clothing and accessories for their avatars. Yes, really. Employinga critical media literacy framework to explore the ways in which onlineidentities are negotiated, Morrison (intermediate and high school Englishmethods, Memorial University) reports on her study of 10 Canadian girls,ages 13-17, as they created avatars on WeeMee and then participated inan online forum to discuss the creation and purchasing choices theymade. The book begins by introducing the girls and their avatars. Theauthor then examines virtual space as a laboratory for performativityand identity construction, and looks at how the girls struggled to rep-resent themselves accurately in the context of the site’s commercialcontent. The book’s readership includes educators and researchers inter-ested in the social construction of identity. It can be used in courses inareas such as literacy studies, media education, youth studies, teachereducation, and women’s studies.

HQ801 2009-050892 978-0-313-38357-1RReellaattiioonnsshhiipp rroouulleettttee;; iimmpprroovvee yyoouurr ooddddss aatt llaassttiinngg lloovvee..Diamond, Carol.Praeger, ©2010 138 p. $34.95Philadelphia-based Diamond has been a licensed practicing psychother-apist for 25 years. Combining insights from psychology with case studies,she offers general readers an exploration of the nature of relationships,possible destructive patterns that cause people to repeatedly choose thewrong person, and ways to make the necessary changes to achieve amore healthy, lasting relationship. The text includes discussion of one’soriginal family, how family dynamics are crucial to the way people relatein their childhood, and how those same dynamics are carried into anddominate one’s adult life and relationships.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–141–

HQ971 2008-053776 978-0-8061-4058-2DDrrooppppeerrss;; AAmmeerriiccaa’’ss ffiirrsstt hhiippppiiee ccoommmmuunnee,, DDrroopp CCiittyy..Matthews, Mark.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 233 p. $19.95 (pa)Founded in 1965, Drop City was an artists’ commune founded by EugeneVictor Debs Bernofsky and others in a utopian effort to meld life and artand was also memorialized in the eponymous 2003 novel by T. C. Boyle.Freelance journalist Matthews reconstructs the experiences of this “firsthippie commune,” basing his narrative on interviews with Bernofsky andother residents, as well as written sources.

HQ981 2009-030299 978-0-8248-3376-3PPoollyyggaammyy aanndd ssuubblliimmee ppaassssiioonn;; sseexxuuaalliittyy iinn CChhiinnaa oonn tthheevveerrggee ooff mmooddeerrnniittyy..McMahon, Keith.U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2010 215 p. $55.00Until the early 20th century, explains McMahon (Chinese language andliterature, U. of Kansas), the prominent man in China deserved multiplewomen, in the form either of a polygamous marriage or prostitution. Heexplores how the dominant sexual regime of polygamy—in which heencompasses wives, concubines, and prostitutes—met its first stages ofparadigmatic change in the 19th century, decades before the legal abo-lition of polygamy. He looks at sublime passion and the remarkablewomen, Qing can be with one and only one, the otherworldliness of thecourtesan, the love story and civilizational crisis, passive polygyny in twokinds of man-child, fleecing the customers in Shanghai brothels of the1890s, the polygynous politics of the modern Chinese man in Nine-timesCuckold, and cultural destiny and polygynous love in Zou Tao’s ShanghaiDust.

HQ1061 2010-002935 978-1-84742-192-0PPooppuullaattiioonn aaggeeiinngg aanndd iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; ffrroommggeenneerraalliissaattiioonn ttoo eevviiddeennccee..Lloyd-Sherlock, Peter.Policy Press, ©2010 288 p. $39.95 (pa)Lloyd-Sherlock (social policy and international development, U. of EastAnglia, England) argues that population aging must be seen as anintegral part of development rather than an external threat to it, and thatdevelopment can affect the experience of old age at the same time thatold age affects development. Among his topics are experiencing later lifein contexts of development, pensions, population aging and health, andsocial relations and migration. He provides extended case studies ofSouth Africa, Argentina, and India. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HQ1062 2009-008435 978-1-55753-502-3WWhheenn eevveerryy ddaayy iiss SSaattuurrddaayy;; ppllaannnniinngg ffoorr aa hhaappppyyrreettiirreemmeenntt;; rreevv.. 22dd eedd..Grace, Richard E.Purdue University Press, ©2010 140 p. $15.95Based on results of the Grace Retirement Inventory of attitudes towardretirement, a former vice president of Purdue University (who retiredmore than once) offers suggestions for successful retirement. Readers cancompare their responses to those of a sample of retirees on domains thatcorrelate with happiness: freedom and leisure, finances, work, familyand friends, health, and helping others. This is an update of the 2002edition.

HQ1064 2009-030407 978-0-313-35093-1AAggiinngg iinn AAmmeerriiccaa;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by John C. Cavanaugh et al. (Praeger perspectives)Praeger, ©2010 910 p. $184.95The 3 volumes of this reference are divided by topic. Vol. 1, psychologicalaspects, offers 11 chapters on a range of issues related to aging, includinglanguage and communication, everyday problem solving, personality andemotion, age stereotypes, memory, and end-of-life. The articles knowl-edgeably report on current scholarly research, with statistics and noteson sources appearing frequently throughout. Each chapter concludeswith a full bibliography. Vol. 2, on physical and mental health, continuesthis format with 10 chapters on topics that include longevity and health,cognitive and physical aging from the standpoint of behavioral genetics,the impact of psychosocial stress on aging, and mental healthassessment. Vol. 3 is on societal issues, with such topics as elder abuseprevention, housing, and Hispanic aging and social policy. Highly rel-evant and thought-provoking, this reference will be of interest to a broadreadership, including those involved in policy, planning, healthcare, andcaregiving, as well as the interested general reader. The editors have pub-lished in gerontology and higher education; the contributors are spe-cialists in gerontology, psychology, sociology, and policy in the US.

HQ1064 2009-028962 978-1-4128-1165-1AAggiinngg iinn IIssrraaeell;; rreesseeaarrcchh,, ppoolliiccyy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Sara Carmel. (Schnitzer studies in Israelisociety; v.13)Transaction Publishers, ©2010 491 p. $34.95 (pa)Israel is comparable demographically to the US and other developednations in the growing proportion of its senior population. Carmel(medical sociology and gerontology, Ben- Gurion U., Israel) thus intro-duces 25 reprinted journal articles by Israeli scholars from 1995-2005 onissues of identity, coping with change and loss, quality of life, caregiving,and what makes for successful aging. Themes include comparativestudies, predictors of reaching old age, and the experiences of elderlyHolocaust survivors. Not indexed.

HQ1075 2009-047285 978-1-4129-7906-1TThhee kkaalleeiiddoossccooppee ooff ggeennddeerr;; pprriissmmss,, ppaatttteerrnnss,, aannddppoossssiibbiilliittiieess,, 33dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Joan Z. Spade and Catherine G. Valentine.Sage Publications, ©2011 581 p. $59.95 (pa)In this third edition of their text, editors Spade (Sociology, College atBrockport, State University of New York) and Valentine (Sociology andWomen’s Studies, Nazareth College) use the metaphor of a kaleidoscopeto provide a comprehensive analysis of the key ideas, theories, and appli-cations in the field of gender. Including both classical/theoretical argu-ments and contemporary research, this collection of articles by topscholars examines how gender is constructed interpersonally, institu-tionally, and culturally. This text is suitable for undergraduate courses insex, gender, and sexuality, as well as for related courses in sociology andwomen’s studies.

HQ1075 2009-042098 978-0-313-36641-3PPllaayyiinngg ttoo ssttrreennggtthh;; lleevveerraaggiinngg ggeennddeerr aatt wwoorrkk..Adams, Alice.Praeger, ©2010 185 p. $34.95In this guide for managers and organizations, Adams, a corporate andacademic consultant who focuses on gender, details how to build a moreproductive work environment based on what men and women have incommon, rather than their differences. She discusses how an exaggeratedfocus on gender differences and stereotypes affect the workplace; the roleof gender outliers; current attempts to resolve conflict, promote fairness,and address gender segregation; which efforts work and why; andmethods for building better balance, including through gender-inclusiveteams, mentoring programs, middle management, and employeeresource groups.

HQ1121 2009-008531 978-1-4384-2938-0CCrriittiiccaall ttrraannssnnaattiioonnaall ffeemmiinniisstt pprraaxxiiss..Title main entry. Ed. by Richa Nagar and Amanda Lock Swarr. (Praxis;theory in action)State U. of New York Pr., ©2010 232 p. $24.95 (pa)In this book, activists and scholars look at transnational feminismthrough the lens of praxis—the combination of theory and practice.Essays deal with topics such as women’s studies curricula; non-govern-mental organizations (NGOs); transnational and LGBTQ studies; feministmethodologies; and film. Contributors look at how feminist collaborativepractices can subvert rigid dichotomies (such as theory/practice, aca-demic/activist, individual/collaborative, the global North/South) and seta 21st-century agenda for political engagement through feminist schol-arship. While the jargon level is fairly low, this book is mainly of interestto scholars and academics.

HQ1121 2009-027135 978-0-415-77868-8GGlloobbaalliizziinngg ffeemmiinniissmmss,, 11778899--11994455..Title main entry. Ed. by Karen Offen. (Rewriting histories)Routledge, ©2010 433 p. $46.95 (pa)In this collection, editor Offen has collected essays that chart the attemptsof feminists around the world to restore a balance of power between thesexes against a background of huge cultural, social, and political transi-tions. Highlighting the intersections between feminism and nationalism,an international group of feminist scholars examine women’s pursuit ofcitizenship between the French Revolution and the end of the SecondWorld War. A particular strength of the book is its examination of fem-inism in Japan, India, China, the Middle East, and Australasia, as wellas the usual suspects in Europe and North America. The selections arereadable and jargon-free, making this book suitable for many generalreaders as well as scholars and students of women’s history.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –142–

HQ1122 78-143808 978-0-87348-167-0PPrroobblleemmss ooff wwoommeenn’’ss lliibbeerraattiioonn;; aa MMaarrxxiisstt aapppprrooaacchh,, 22ddeedd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11997700))Reed, Evelyn.Pathfinder Press, ©2010 154 p. $15.00 (pa)Still timely 40 years after its original publication, Reed’s book examinesthe economic and social roots of women’s oppression from earliest timesto the contemporary capitalist world. She suggests that the institutions ofprivate property are central to this oppression, and argues that femaleoppression is a consequence of property relations, not gender relations.Reed refutes the myth of women’s inferiority and looks optimisticallytoward an egalitarian future.

HQ1150 2009-026968 978-0-7546-6539-7MMaatteerriiaall wwoommeenn,, 11775500--11995500;; ccoonnssuummiinngg ddeessiirreess aannddccoolllleeccttiinngg pprraaccttiicceess..Title main entry. Ed. by Maureen Goggin and Beth Tobin.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 384 p. $124.95This volume explores the relationship between women and possessionsover the period from 1750-1950. The articles are by scholars fromEnglish, history and art history. Goggin and Tobin, both in English atArizona State University, began this series on women and materialculture in a seminar they taught. The topic is divided into four parts. Thefirst is the desire for things. The second addresses the ways in whichhome furnishing and appliances helped form middle class tastes, pri-marily in Europe and America. The ways in which women used dress toexpress political opinions includes examples from Napoleonic France,India under the Raj, China in the 1930s and Senegal in the 1940s afterwomen there received the right to vote. The final section investigates theways in which women used collecting as a means to enter into areas ofsociety from which they were normally excluded. The parallels foundacross time and cultures make this collection one that will interest his-torians and sociologists.

HQ1154 2009-012934 978-1-4384-2944-1MMyy lliiffee aatt tthhee ggyymm;; ffeemmiinniisstt ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn ccoommmmuunniittyytthhrroouugghh tthhee bbooddyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Jo Malin.State U. of New York Pr., ©2010 164 p. $19.95Malin (education and English, Binghamton U., State U. of New York)brings together 16 essays, personal accounts, and poems that pay tributeto women’s experiences of exercise and exercise spaces as places of com-munity, important stories of the body, parts of women’s life narratives,and key to feminist identities. Academics in the humanities, education,law, and women’s and literary theory, poets, writers, and artists from theUS and Canada detail how they have found ways to exercise in theireveryday lives, gain meaning from sites of physical activity and the com-panions they exercise with, and understand aspects of body image,aging, the feminine, strength, empowerment, the mind/body rela-tionship, and friendship in dance, boxing, cycling, bodybuilding, rowing,skiing, running, walking, gymnastics, yoga, and at the gym. A few con-tributions have been previously published elsewhere.

HQ1155 2009-035873 978-0-8133-4444-7WWoommeenn’’ss mmoovveemmeennttss iinn tthhee gglloobbaall eerraa;; tthhee ppoowweerr ooff llooccaallffeemmiinniissmmss..Title main entry. Ed. by Amrita Basu.Westview Press, ©2010 495 p. $48.00 (pa)Basu (political science, Amherst College) has brought together reportsfrom all over the world on the state of women’s movements. She askedher contributors, most of whom are active in movements in their coun-tries, to work within the questions of what constitutes the women’s move-ments there, the impacts of international influences, how the movementswork with the state, the relationship between women’s movements andother struggles, the impact of the groups, the relationship between themand nongovernmental organizations and how much the movements haveaddressed violence against women, political under-representation,inequality in class and income and the rights of sexual minorities. Theessays do not follow these as a checklist but emphasize the points ofgreatest concern in their region. Most authors mention domestic violenceand some feel that solidarity within the movements helps women findboth courage and refuge. Reports are from South Africa, Zimbabwe,Pakistan, India, China, Poland, Russia, Brazil, Mexico, Palestine, Iran andthe United States, with an article on the Latin American Left and women.It is hoped that this report is translated into many languages so thatwomen everywhere will learn from the experiences of their sistersworldwide.

HQ1180 2009-035343 978-0-313-37596-5FFeemmiinniissmm aanndd wwoommeenn’’ss rriigghhttss wwoorrllddwwiiddee;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Michele A. Paludi. (Women’s psychology)Praeger, ©2010 806 p. $154.95This three-volume set deals with pivotal events, issues, and controversiesrelated to the global status of women, with chapters addressing repro-ductive rights, sexual slavery, harassment, forced marriage, mortality inbirthing, domestic violence and rape, job discrimination, pay inequities,and women in leadership positions. Rather surprisingly for a work thatclaims worldwide coverage, only a three of the 54 contributors are affil-iated with universities or institutions outside the U.S. Despite this short-coming, Feminism and Women’s Rights Worldwide is a valuable resourceand a significant contribution to feminist scholarship.

HQ1180 2009-009374 978-0-415-45214-4SSeeccrreeccyy aanndd ssiilleennccee iinn tthhee rreesseeaarrcchh pprroocceessss;; ffeemmiinniissttrreefflleeccttiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Róisín Ryan-Flood and Rosalind Gill.(Transformations; thinking through feminism)Routledge, ©2010 311 p. $130.00Ryan-Flood (Sociology, University of Essex) and Gill (Social and CulturalAnalysis, King’s College) have assembled essays that look past theemphasis on voice and speaking out in feminist research to interrogatethe moments of secrecy and silence. Essays examine the political conse-quences of these moments and the dilemmas and constraints that theyrepresent, and explore the question of whether they could be constructivemoments in the research encounter rather than indications of voice-lessness or powerlessness. This scholarly book will interest researcherswho have grappled with dilemmas about who and what to omit orinclude in their research.

HQ1190 2009-674926 978-1-4438-0986-3FFeemmiinniissmm aanndd tthhee bbooddyy;; iinntteerrddiisscciipplliinnaarryy ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Catherine Kevin.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 255 p. $59.99For this book, editor Kevin (History, Flinders University) has assembledessays that explore the myriad domains in which a variety of discursiveeffects come to life in the embodied subject. Contributors examine themeanings of sexual difference in the human body in settings that rangefrom medical surgery and law to the discussion forums of sex therapyand marriage guidance experts; from Peruvian villages of the late twen-tieth century to African-American theatres of the 1930s and 1940s; andfrom explicitly feminist novels and films to the mainstream press.

HQ1236 978-0-7748-1768-4QQuueebbeecc wwoommeenn aanndd lleeggiissllaattiivvee rreepprreesseennttaattiioonn..Tremblay, Manon. Trans. by Käthe Roth.U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 258 p. $85.00Although Quebec’s women have been able to vote and run for officesince 1940, they still make up less than half of the members of theprovince’s National Assembly and of its representatives in Canada’s par-liament. To explain this disparity, Tremblay (Political Science, Universityof Ottawa) looks at how Quebec’s women gained the right to vote, andexamines the problems faced by women when working within politicalparties and the current electoral system. The author shows how the par-liamentary system shortchanges women (both nationally and in Quebec),and suggests strategies for increasing women’s representation in leg-islative bodies. This scholarly book will interest students and scholars ofgender and politics, as well as political activists and policy makers whoare working to increase women’s presence in politics. (Distributed byUTP Distribution)

HQ1236 2009-042786 978-1-60497-655-7WWoommeenn aanndd tthhee DDeemmooccrraattiicc PPaarrttyy;; tthhee eevvoolluuttiioonn ooffEEmmiillyy’’ss LLiisstt..Pimlott, Jamie Pamelia.Cambria Press, ©2010 209 p. $104.99Pimlott (Niagara U., Niagara Falls, NY) traces the history of EMILY’s List—Early Money Is Like Yeast—a political action committee founded in 1985to support female pro-choice, pro-ERA Democratic candidates forCongress and state/local offices. Coverage includes an overview of howthe women’s movement set the stage for the formation of EMILY’s List inthe 1970s; a review of the first two women’s PACs and how EMILY’s Listdiffers from the earlier organizations; how EMILY’s List planned andexecuted its highly successful transformation in the 1980s, expanding intonew arenas of influence while staying rooted to its mission and history;the relationships between the members and the organization, andbetween candidates and the organization; and the 2008 election, EMILY’sList’s entreé into presidential politics, and what that meant for the organ-ization, its mission, its leadership and members, and its future.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–143–

HQ1240 2009-021464 978-0-415-77563-2GGeennddeerr aanndd ddeevveellooppmmeenntt,, 22dd eedd..Momsen, Janet Henshall. (Routledge perspectives on development)Routledge, ©2010 285 p. $43.95 (pa)Writing for a student audience, Momsen (Geography [emeriti], Universityof California at Davis) introduces gender and development issues in thedeveloping world and in the former communist states of Eastern andCentral Europe. Using examples and case studies drawn from her ownfield work, the author discusses social and biological reproduction(including differing attitudes to family planning) and variation ineducation and access to housing; differences in health and violence atmajor life stages for women and men; natural disasters and gender rolesin rural and urban areas; the impact of globalization and other broadeconomic changes on gender differences in economic activity; andinternational progress towards gender equality. This text is suitable forcourses in women’s studies, sociology, anthropology, geography, anddevelopment.

HQ1397 2009-029549 978-0-415-20587-0TThhee eedduuccaatteedd wwoommaann;; mmiinnddss,, bbooddiieess,, aanndd wwoommeenn’’ss hhiigghheerreedduuccaattiioonn iinn BBrriittaaiinn,, GGeerrmmaannyy,, aanndd SSppaaiinn,, 11886655--11991144..Rowold, Katharina. (Routledge research in gender and history; v.24)Routledge, ©2010 311 p. $95.00Rowold (humanities, London Metropolitan University) has compared theentry of women into institutions of higher learning in the countries ofBritain, Germany and Spain 1865-1914. The first surprise is that womenwere admitted to universities in all three countries at about the sametime. The second is the extent to which scientific theories about genderdifferences were marshaled by both sides in all three countries to bolsterthe arguments for and against educating women. British and Germanopponents used eugenics to state the education was too stressful forwomen and would result in substandard children, while proponents feltthat educated women would be better mothers, producing more intel-ligent offspring. In Spain the arguments centered on the welfare ofchildren with a mother distracted by a profession. Christian ideas offemale inferiority played a lesser role in all three countries. This study ofthe different ways in which women achieved the right to education andentry into the professions is fascinating. Many of the questions raisedthen are still being debated, a reminder of how fragile that achievementcan be.

HQ1416 2009-051084 978-0-313-35552-3WWoommeenn’’ss rroolleess iinn eeiigghhtteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy AAmmeerriiccaa..Smith, Merril D. (Women’s roles in American history)Greenwood Press, ©2010 182 p. $59.95For high school students and general readers, Smith, an independentscholar and author and editor, explores the various roles of women ineighteenth-century America. She discusses the roles of white, black, andNative American women of different classes and religions, how theywere affected by war, slavery, religious awakenings, political change, andperceptions about gender; their influence on the world around them; andmarriage and family, the effects of the law, their work, how and whythey traveled, and changes in opportunities in education and the arts.

HQ1438 2009-020366 978-0-8130-3412-6TThhee vvaarriieettiieess ooff wwoommeenn’’ss eexxppeerriieenncceess;; ppoorrttrraaiittss ooffSSoouutthheerrnn wwoommeenn iinn tthhee ppoosstt--CCiivviill WWaarr cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Larry Eugene Rivers and Canter Brown.U. Press of Florida, ©2009 342 p. $69.95The essays in this book examine the lives of fourteen ordinary Southernwomen who lived between the end of the Civil War and the mid-20thcentury—the period of “Southern womanhood” when women werelargely restricted to lives centered on the home. The women profiled hereare black and white, gentile and Jew, rich and poor, and they include apioneering African American nurse, a Florida widow, a town founder, asuffragist, and the founder of a hospital for Key West’s Cuban com-munity. Their lives show the complexity of what is was to be a womanin the South, and how opportunities for achievement existed for womenwho were willing to take them. This book will appeal to readers inter-ested in women’s history, African American history, and the South.

HQ1593 2009-016052 978-0-8047-6311-0MMeenn aanndd tthhee mmaakkiinngg ooff mmooddeerrnn BBrriittiisshh ffeemmiinniissmm..Chernock, Arianne.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 257 p. $60.00Chernock (History, Boston University) argues that the contributions maleadvocates of women’s emancipation were important in the creation ofmodern British feminism. Focusing on the 1790s, the author looks atseveral dozen men who helped women get published, advocated educa-tional reforms, and challenged existing notions about women’s place insociety. Chernock suggests that these male reformers were truly com-mitted to feminist goals, despite the complex motivations behind theiractions and the difficulties that male reformers had when translating ide-ological support for women’s emancipation into changes in the ways theytreated women in their day-to-day lives.

HQ1600 2009-675218 978-1-85635-645-9MMnnaa nnaa hhEEiirreeaannnn;; wwoommeenn wwhhoo sshhaappeedd IIrreellaanndd..Depuis, Nicola.Mercier Press, ©2009 288 p. $39.95Journalist Depuis presents short biographies of 49 women who have beenimportant in Ireland’s history, most of them from the last 150 years.Ranging from the 16th-century pirate queen Grace O’Malley to contem-porary feminist journalist Nell McCafferty, and from Gaelic storytellerPeig Sayers to singer/musician Sinéad O’Connor, this book is a livelyintroduction to women who are often omitted or given short shrift instandard Irish histories. While some readers will be puzzled by Depuis’inclusion of Irish-American labor organizer Mary Harris “Mother” Jones(who left Ireland at age 5, never to return), this book will be enjoyed byany reader with an interest in Irish history. (Distributed in the U.S. byDufour Editions, Inc.)

HQ1600 978-1-85594-211-0SSiisstteerrss;; tthhee ppeerrssoonnaall ssttoorryy ooff aann IIrriisshh ffeemmiinniisstt..Levine, June.Attic Press, ©2009 271 p. $37.95One of the founders of the women’s movement in Ireland, the late Levinewas also an excellent writer of exceptional candor. In this personalhistory (first published in 1982), she captures both the excitement of thefirst decade of second wave feminism in Ireland, as well as the ups anddowns of her personal life. Not a bit shy with her opinions, Levineincludes her own assessment of the Irish women’s movement and manyof its prominent figures. (Distributed in the U.S. by ISBS.)

HS2330 2009-039298 978-0-7864-4653-7TThhee KKuu KKlluuxx KKllaann iinn MMiissssiissssiippppii;; aa hhiissttoorryy..Newton, Michael.McFarland & Co., ©2010 246 p. $75.00The white supremacist paramilitary group has been a powerful force inthe state since 1866, says Newton, but until now no systematic history ofits presence there has appeared. He divides the century and a half intoperiods of Reconstruction and redemption to 1877; hiatus and revival to1921; invisible empire to 1944; a closed society to 1962; a ticket to theeternal 1963-69; and yesterday, today, and forever 1970-2007.

HT108 2009-026609 978-1-4129-1432-1EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff uurrbbaann ssttuuddiieess;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Ray Hutchison.Sage Publications, ©2010 1039 p. $295.00This two-volume reference begins with a list of the approximately 300alphabetically-arranged entries, from acropolis to zoöpolis. The scope ofthe discipline and of this reference is so broad that readers definitelyneed thematic access to the contents. To this aim a Reader’s Guide in thefront matter identifies entries related to the disciplines of urban eco-nomics, geography, history, politics, and sociology; the Guide also sortsentries by topical areas, with brief descriptions. These topics includeurban studies (architecture, gender & sex, social space), planning, theory,transportation, culture, places in the urban environment, cities (historicaloverviews as well as specific cities), and influential scholars and non-aca-demics. The entries themselves vary in length according to the specificityof their subject matter; each includes cross references and a reading list.General editor Hutchison (sociology, urban & regional studies, U. ofWisconsin, Green Bay) shaped contributions from a long list of profes-sionals in the many intertwined areas of study that constitute the disci-pline; most are based in the US, but some are based in Mexico, Europe,and elsewhere.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –144–

HT123 978-1-59237-411-3AAmmeerriiccaa’’ss ttoopp--rraatteedd ssmmaallll ttoowwnnss && cciittiieess;; aa ssttaattiissttiiccaallhhaannddbbooookk;; vv..11:: AAllaabbaammaa--OOhhiioo..Title main entry.Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2010 1854 p. $65.00 (pa)Prepared in anticipation of a wide readership, this first edition referencecomplements the publisher’s other statistical references on cities, and onsmaller cities. The focus is on places with populations of 3,000 to 5,000.Profiles of 8,908 places are arranged by state in two volumes, of whichthis is the first, covering Alabama through Ohio. Institutional buyers willmost likely want both volumes (sold separately), because nationalrankings (sorting 29 data points) and a complete list of places occupyabout one half of volume 2 but are not present in volume 1. The sourceof the data is the 2000 census, updated by Claritas, a company devotedto “applied demography” and demographic estimates (when the 2010census data comes in this company will have its hands full determiningthe accuracy of its projections!). The front matter includes a user’s guideexplaining criteria for the star ratings (from one star at the low end tofive) and the sources for information on physical & geographical char-acteristics, history, population, economy, income, housing, safety, andeducation. For each state a rankings section follows the profiles, listingplaces according to categories such as race or ethnicity (black, white,Asian, Hispanic), median and average household income, student/teacherratio, home ownership rate, and various types of crime rate (total, violent,property), among others. Readership will include individuals trying toidentify a place to relocate, realtors, government personnel, and marketresearchers.

HT123 978-1-59237-412-0AAmmeerriiccaa’’ss ttoopp--rraatteedd ssmmaallll ttoowwnnss && cciittiieess;; aa ssttaattiissttiiccaallhhaannddbbooookk;; vv..22:: OOkkllaahhoommaa--WWyyoommiinngg..Title main entry.Grey House Pub., Inc., ©2010 1817 p. $65.00 (pa)Readership will be broad, including individuals trying to identify a placeto relocate as well as realtors, government personnel, and marketresearchers. This first edition reference steps up alongside the publisher’sother statistical references on cities, and on smaller cities. The focus hereis on places with populations of 3,000 to 5,000. Profiles of 8,908 placesare arranged by state in two volumes, of which this is the second, cov-ering Oklahoma through Wyoming. The source of the data is the 2000census, updated by Claritas, a company devoted to “applied demography”and demographic estimates. The front matter includes a user’s guideexplaining criteria for the star ratings (from one star at the low end tofive) and the sources for information on physical & geographical char-acteristics, history, population, economy, income, housing, safety, andeducation. For each state a rankings section follows the profiles, listingplaces according to categories that include race or ethnicity (black, white,Asian, Hispanic), median and average household income, student/teacherratio, home ownership rate, and various types of crime rate (total, violent,property), among other characteristics. National rankings (sorting 29data points) and an alphabetical listing of places occupy about one halfof volume 2, and these sections are not present in volume 1. Most insti-tutions will want both volumes, although they are sold separately.

HT127 2009-047792 978-1-84545-582-8RReetthhiinnkkiinngg tthhee iinnffoorrmmaall cciittyy;; ccrriittiiccaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess ffrroommLLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Felipe Hernández et al. (Re-mapping culturalhistory; v.11)Berghahn Books, ©2010 249 p. $85.00Although focused on the informal urbanism often seen in slums, favelas,or squatter settlements in Latin America, this volume seeks to expand theconsideration of “kinetic” cities, taking into consideration such abstractconcepts as simultaneity and coexistence. It is a thesis of this book thatthe informal sector deserves more consideration than just lumping it allinto the category of non-regulated housing. In Lima, Peru, for instance,70 percent of the city can be described as informal, with the majority ofthe citizens also making their living in the informal economy. Here theybuild temporary structures from recycled materials but also provideservices, establish networks, and engage in celebrations and festivals. Thestudy of such phenomena depends on alternative methods of analysis.Two of the editors and most of the contributors come with a backgroundin architecture, so as expected there is also much emphasis on the socialaspects of temporary urban construction.

HT147 2009-024812 978-0-674-03632-1OOnnee ccoouunnttrryy,, ttwwoo ssoocciieettiieess;; rruurraall--uurrbbaann iinneeqquuaalliittyy iinnccoonntteemmppoorraarryy CChhiinnaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Martin King Whyte. (Harvard contemporaryChina series; 16)Harvard University Press, ©2010 445 p. $27.95 (pa)Whyte (sociology, Harvard U.) presents 15 papers from a conference pre-senting new research on the foremost social cleavage in contemporaryChina, the rural-urban inequality gap. Opening papers provide a his-torical perspective on rural-urban relations, present an institutionalanalysis on the rights of rural migrant workers, and assess the size ofthe rural-urban income gap. Later papers examine rural-urban dispar-ities in access to education, health care, digital technologies, and housing.Others discuss the experience of being a rural migrant in terms of per-ception of justice, rural prejudice and gender discrimination in the urbanjob market, and institutional and cultural determinants of social statusin Tibet. Two concluding papers discuss the evolving policy towardsrural-urban issues and the household registration system in particular.

HT151 2007-017062 978-1-84720-459-2IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall hhaannddbbooookk ooff uurrbbaann ppoolliiccyy;; vv..22:: IIssssuueess iinn tthheeddeevveellooppeedd wwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by H.S. Geyer. (Elgar original reference)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 326 p. $170.00This is the second in a series of three volumes exploring a broad rangeof issues in the field of urban policy studies. Whereas the first volumeexamined globally significant issues and the third will explore issues per-tinent to the developing world, this volume focuses primarily on theUnited States and Europe. Editor Geyer (director, Centre for Regional andUrban Statistical Exploration, Stellenbosch U., South Africa) presents the13 contributions in sections concerned with the policy context of urban-ization, evolving urban systems, forces of spatial economic change, andchanging demographics. Specific topics include the role of knowledgeand information and communication technology infrastructure in largeurban economies, organizational networking and world cities, landmarkets and their regulation, spatial planning and institutional design,and international labor migration.

HT168 2009-022222 978-0-8139-2867-8BBuuiillddiinngg CChhaarrlleessttoonn;; ttoowwnn aanndd ssoocciieettyy iinn tthhee eeiigghhtteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy AAttllaannttiicc wwoorrlldd..Hart, Emma.U. of Virginia Press, ©2010 274 p. $45.00Hart (modern history, U. of St. Andrews, Scotland) examines Charleston,the fourth largest and wealthiest town in colonial America, within aBritish perspective, detailing the rise of the city and its importance to thedevelopment of South Carolina and the British Atlantic world during theeighteenth century. Challenging the narrative of southern developmentthat is dominated by staple agriculture study, she questions why theplantation has been central to understanding the region and instead,whether Charleston’s urban and commercial elements influenced SouthCarolina. She links the urban process and the shaping of Low Countrysociety from the late 1730s on; discusses how its growth brought wealthand innovation to sectors outside the plantation economy, such as man-ufacturing and housing construction; describes the development of a newsocial class—a “middling sort,”—that created an non-unified white popu-lation; and examines how Charleston was a provincial British Atlantictown with a diverse marketplace. The book is based on her dissertation.

HT168 2009-031794 978-1-60497-642-7IImmmmiiggrraannttss aanndd tthhee rreevviittaalliizzaattiioonn ooff LLooss AAnnggeelleess;;ddeevveellooppmmeenntt aanndd cchhaannggee iinn MMaaccAArrtthhuurr PPaarrkk..Sandoval, Gerardo.Cambria Press, ©2010 288 p. $114.99When he first heard of plans to redevelop the neighborhood ofMacarthur Park in Los Angeles, Sandoval (community and regionalplanning, Iowa State U.) expected the project to lead to the displacementof low-income residents, as is typical of such top-down redevelopmentprojects. Instead, Macarthur Park proved to be an anomaly, where theinstitutions of the low-income Mesoamerican immigrant community inthe neighborhood and the exogenous city-planning institutions managedto co-adapt to each other and use the project to strengthen theMesoamerican communities of the neighborhood. He examines how theimmigrant community used its social, political, financial, and culturalcapital within this process and, from an institutionalist perspective,explores how city agencies interacted with the community in imple-menting redevelopment plans.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–145–

HT169 2009-045536 978-0-7864-3807-5CCiittiieess aanndd aadduulltt bbuussiinneesssseess;; aa hhaannddbbooookk ffoorr rreegguullaattoorryyppllaannnniinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Roger L. Kemp.McFarland & Co., ©2010 256 p. $39.95 (pa)Edited by Kemp (Golden Gate U. and the U. of New Haven), this volumeexamines the experiences of cities and towns around the United Stateswith regulatory practices concerned with adult businesses (businessesoffering sexually-oriented materials or entertainment). After an intro-ductory section discussing the zoning, planning, licensing, and other reg-ulatory practices pertinent to adult businesses, the bulk of the volumeconsists of 41 case studies seeking to identify best practices in the variouscommunities under examination. Concluding chapters explore futuretrends.

HT169 978-0-8213-8157-1CCoommppeettiittiivveenneessss aanndd ggrroowwtthh iinn BBrraazziilliiaann cciittiieess;; llooccaallppoolliicciieess aanndd aaccttiioonnss ffoorr iinnnnoovvaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Ming Zhang.The World Bank, ©2010 200 p. $25.00 (pa)Starting off with a general discussion of what makes cities competitiveand an exploration of ways that local policies can encourage innovation,this volume then goes on to benchmark the competiveness of Braziliancities and to explore in comprehensive case studies the situation in twourban areas. Zhang (urban economist, World Bank) explores strategiessuch as joint marketing, support to R&D, specialized infrastructure,attention to the regulatory environment, and entrepreneurship devel-opment in small business and microenterprises. He ultimately advocatessupporting the growth of existing cluster zones that rely upon bothprivate sector networking and local government policies to create a citywith industry specific comparative advantage.

HT169 2009-414111 978-1-58603-978-3NNeeww iinnssttrruummeennttss iinn ssppaattiiaall ppllaannnniinngg;; aann iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaallppeerrssppeeccttiivvee oonn nnoonn--ffiinnaanncciiaall ccoommppeennssaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Leonie Janssen-Jansen et al. (Sustainable urbanareas; 23)IOS Press, ©2008 258 p. $94.00 (pa)Planners, economists and lawyers shed light on aspects of non-financialcompensation planning instruments in this collection of papers from theFebruary 2007 and February 2008 conferences of the InternationalAcademic Association on Planning, Law and Property Rights, and fromthe June 2007 conference held by the European Network for HousingResearch. Beginning chapters introduce a framework for comparativeanalysis of non-financial compensation instruments, and explain con-cepts of non-financial compensation as used in spatial planning. Casestudies offer a comparison of the use of several types of market-orientedplanning instruments (especially transferable development rights, orTDRs) in six countries: Japan, Spain, Korea, Italy, the US, and theNetherlands. The concluding chapters look at these instruments from eco-nomic, legal, and spatial perspectives. There is no subject index. Janssen-Jansen teaches at the University of Amsterdam’s Institute forMetropolitan and International Development Studies.

HT361 2009-018491 978-1-4200-8557-0UUrrbbaanniizzaattiioonn,, ppoolliicciinngg,, aanndd sseeccuurriittyy;; gglloobbaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Gary Cordner et al.CRC Press, ©2010 461 p. $129.95In this volume, academics and practitioners from around the worldaddress crime and disorder problems associated with increasing urban-ization, and police and private security responses to them. Cordner(criminal justice, Kutztown U. of Pennsylvania) et al. compile 25 chaptersbased on papers given at the 14th annual International Police ExecutiveSymposium, held in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, in April 2007 on“Urbanization and Security.” They tackle terrorism, drugs, trafficcrashes, the proliferation of arms, organized crime, corruption, humantrafficking, lack of housing, drug abuse and smuggling, and mass evac-uation, in urban centers that are undergoing transitions, such as inSerbia, South Africa, Russia, and Kampala. Responses addressed includecommunity policing, honoring human rights, handling protests, crimereporting and investigation practices, private security, body guarding,and other tactics.

HT371 2009-930888 978-1-84844-523-9SSuussttaaiinnaabbllee cciittiieess;; ddiivveerrssiittyy,, eeccoonnoommiicc ggrroowwtthh aanndd ssoocciiaallccoohheessiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Maddy Janssens et al. (The Fondazione EniEnrico Mattei series on economics, the environment and sustainabledevelopment)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 206 p. $110.00Janssens (Katholieke U. Leuven, Belgium), Pinelli (Fondazione Eni EnricoMattei, Italy), Reymen (IDEA Consult, Belgium), and Wallman (U. CollegeLondon, UK) present some of the work of a multidisciplinary researchnetwork concerned with how cultures and cultural diversity interact withgrowth and economic development in urban settings. Opening chaptersdiscuss the conceptual landscape of the issues and seek to identify thepolitical approaches available for governing diversity. This is followed byeconometric analysis of the relationship between diversity and devel-opment in Europe and econometric case studies of the cities ofStockholm, Sweden; Baroda, India; Banská Bystrica, Slovakia; Chicago,US; London, UK; Rome, Italy; and Antwerp, Belgium. Also included is acomparative study of diversity, deprivation, and space in immigrantneighborhoods in Germany, Denmark, and Britain.

HT384 2009-019701 978-0-415-99322-7CCiittyy lliiffee ffrroomm JJaakkaarrttaa ttoo DDaakkaarr;; mmoovveemmeennttss aatt tthheeccrroossssrrooaaddss..Simone, Abdoumaliq. (Global realities)Routledge, ©2010 403 p. $29.95 (pa)This book brings cities of the global South, from Jakarta, Indonesia, toDakar, Senegal, into the urban studies discussion. Simone (sociology, U.of London, UK) focuses on the way people engage “cityness” in everydaylife or, in other words, how they negotiate the “demands of puttingtogether livelihoods, managing domestic spaces, and demonstratingaccountability to key institutions and personal networks.” Not only isSimone engaged with the urban spaces of what is sometimes called theperiphery, focusing on cities of Africa and Southeast Asia, he is also con-cerned with demonstrating that much of what is considered peripheralto urban life is in fact central to it.

HT384 2009-030935 978-0-674-03561-4NNeeggoottiiaattiinngg uurrbbaann ssppaaccee;; uurrbbaanniizzaattiioonn aanndd llaattee MMiinnggNNaannjjiinngg..Fei, Si-yen. (Harvard East Asian monographs; 320)Harvard University Asia Center, ©2009 361 p. $45.00Based on close readings of written sources and a thorough study ofarchives, Fei (history, U. of Pennsylvania) offers a rich picture of thepeople of Nanjing, their notion of their city, and the issues that affectedthem, through presentation of four separate studies. The first two studies,based in archival material and first-hand accounts, detail efforts of thecitizens to achieve a reasonable and well-regulated system of taxation,and the controversy over the government’s mandate to build a city wall.The second two are based in two types of written sources on Nanjing: theguide book to Nanjing by Zhu Zhifan and the transcriptions of conver-sations of the city’s elites, compiled by Gu Qiyuan and Zhou Hui. Ofinterest to scholars and students of Chinese history and urbanism, thevolume marks an important addition to the field. Distributed by HarvardU. Press.

HT395 2008-425002 978-1-58603-882-3TThhee iinnssttiittuuttiioonnaalliissaattiioonn ooff EEuurrooppeeaann ssppaattiiaall ppllaannnniinngg..Waterhout, Bas. (Sustainable urban areas; 18)IOS Press, ©2008 225 p. $65.00 (pa)While European Union ministers responsible for spatial planning gather,issue policy documents, and set up new organizations, it is unclear,according to Waterhout (a researcher at OTB Research Institute forHousing, Urban and Mobility Studies, Delft U. of Technology, theNetherlands), the extent to which spatial planning has been integrated inthe EU policy-making processes and the amount it provides a policyframework for domestic planning. His research assesses these topics,examining the period from 1999 to 2007. In particular he examines thedebates and discourses concerning territorial cohesion; the manner inwhich the concepts of the European Spatial Development Perspective (alegally non-binding policy framework document issued by the ministersof spatial planning) have been applied in the interregional cooperationinitiative INTERREG IIB programs, priorities, and projects; and episodesof Europeanization of Dutch national spatial planning.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –146–

HT1050 2009-025448 978-1-84545-636-8WWhhoo aabboolliisshheedd ssllaavveerryy??;; ssllaavvee rreevvoollttss aanndd aabboolliittiioonniissmm;; aaddeebbaattee wwiitthh JJooããoo PPeeddrroo MMaarrqquueess..Title main entry. Ed. by Seymour Drescher and Pieter C. Emmer.(European expansion & global interaction; v.8)Berghahn Books, ©2010 208 p. $39.95Marques (Instituto de Investigação Científicia Tropical, Lisbon) haswritten widely on slavery, abolition, and other colonial issues. In the 82-page essay Slave Revolts and the Abolition of Slavery: AnOverinterpretation here, he argues that slaves revolted in order to freethemselves, not to end slavery, which was the ideological realm of aboli-tionists. Then follow 10 commentaries by prominent historians and socialscientists about his argument. Among those topics are who abolishedslavery in the Dutch Caribbean, the case of Saint-Domingue, two variantsof slave revolts in the age of revolution, and shipboard slave revolts andabolition. He himself responds.

HT1162 2009-033389 978-0-8214-1902-1AAbboolliittiioonniissmm aanndd iimmppeerriiaalliissmm iinn BBrriittaaiinn,, AAffrriiccaa,, aanndd tthheeAAttllaannttiicc..Title main entry. Ed. by Derek R. Peterson. (African studies fromCambridge)Ohio University Press, ©2010 235 p. $28.95 (pa)During 2007, while the British government was celebrating the bicen-tenary of the Act for the Abolition of the Slave Trade with much pompand ceremony, the Centre of African Studies at the University ofCambridge was conducting a lecture series focusing critical scholarlyattention on British abolitionism, its geographical and temporal terrain,and its meaning for African historians. The seven essays here are revisedfrom the latter events. Among the topics are African political ethics andthe slave trade, why Britain outlawed her slave trade, a Caribbean andAtlantic context, imperialism, and racial violence and echoes of abolitionin 20th-century Zanzibar.

HT1234 978-0-9774094-8-8GGrraaeeccoo--RRoommaann ssllaavvee mmaarrkkeettss;; ffaacctt oorr ffiiccttiioonn??..Trümper, Monika.Oxbow Books, ©2009 148 p. $45.00Trümper (classical archaeology, U. of North Carolina-Chapel Hill) con-tributes her contribution to the debate over whether there were buildingsor sites that were designed and outfitted specifically for the sale of slavesin the Graeco-Roman world. She begins by analyzing slave markets inmany other countries, including the US, to assess whether better knownslave-holding cultures had purpose-built slave markets, and if so, wherethey might be located and what they might look like. Then she examinesancient written sources for clues about locations and features of slavemarkets. With all this in hand, she looks at eight potential sites that sheand other archaeologists have excavated, and finds none of them con-vincingly identified as a slave market. Distributed in North America byThe David Brown Book Co.

HT1521 2009-024800 978-0-8139-2875-3TTrruussttbbuuiillddiinngg;; aann hhoonneesstt ccoonnvveerrssaattiioonn oonn rraaccee,,rreeccoonncciilliiaattiioonn,, aanndd rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy..Corcoran, Rob.U. of Virginia Press, ©2010 286 p. $29.95Through the story of his founding of the effort Hope in the Cities,Corcoran provides a model of dialogue and community change that hasbeen adopted nationally and internationally. He details how in 1993,Richmond, Virginia, became a place for interracial dialogue and trustbuilding through Hope in the Cities, a citizen-led movement whichcreated honest conversation and reconciliation, and the taking of respon-sibility for racial problems in a city affected by a history of slavery, civilwar, and racial discrimination. He also describes other efforts around theworld, and the tools and methodologies used in Richmond. Corcoran hasfacilitated dialogue, reconciliation, and partnerships in diverse groupsaround the world.

HT1581 2009-008522 978-1-4384-2947-2BBeeyyoonndd nneeggrriittuuddee;; eessssaayyss ffrroomm WWoommaann iinn tthhee cciittyy..Nardal, Paulette. (Suny series, philosophy and race)State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 109 p. $45.00Paulette Nardal was an educated woman from Martinique, fluent inFrench and English, who was very much involved in intellectual life inParis between the wars. In this lovely dual-language edition, Sharpley-Whiting (African American and Diaspora studies and French, VanderbiltUniversity) has translated and annotated essays Nardal published afterher return to Martinique after World War II and the end of the Vichy gov-ernment there. Among her many causes, Nardal believed in the edu-cation of women. She believed that it was not enough to have the vote,one must exercise it. Her concern with the rights of women was only partof her commitment to human rights and equality for people of all races.These short articles would be perfect for high school classes. Nardalwould have wanted her message to reach students as early in their edu-cation as possible.

HV11 2007-932605 978-1-4129-1021-7EExxppeerriieenncciinngg ssoocciiaall wwoorrkk;; lleeaarrnniinngg ffrroomm sseerrvviiccee uusseerrss..Doel, Mark and Lesley Best.Sage Publications, ©2008 148 p. $108.00The real-life stories collected here provide accounts of positive experiencesof social work from the point of view of adult UK clients from differentbackgrounds. The stories and commentaries offer a perspective on howclients experience social work sessions and interventions and how theyimpact their lives. A common theme is that the quality of the relationshipbetween the client and the social worker, rather than the method used,is of primary importance to the client. The book is of interest to studentsand practitioners in social work. Information on the authors is not given.

HV11 2009-039544 978-81-321-0238-0SSkkiillll ttrraaiinniinngg ffoorr ssoocciiaall wwoorrkkeerrss;; aa mmaannuuaall..Title main entry. Ed. by Sudha Datar et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 266 p. $29.95 (pa)Eleven Indian social work academics contribute 11 chapters to a text forIndia’s social work educators, scholars, and students, bridging the gapbetween theory-based textbook descriptions of social work methods andthe development of the method-linked skills social workers need toperform their jobs effectively. The text resulted from skill lab sessionresearch conducted by faculty and outside experts at the Karve Instituteof Social Service, Pune, India, as part of a larger effort by the TataInstitute of Social Sciences, Mumbai, to revise India’s social work edu-cation curriculum. Coverage includes using the laboratory approach inskill training for social workers; understanding perception, self-awareness, and sensitivity development as preparation for social work;communication processes; using audio-visual and other innovative com-munication media; and working with individuals and families, withgroups, and with communities. Each section contains theoretical back-ground and several workshops using various exercises and activities toteach the specific skills.

HV40 2009-048679 978-0-415-80311-3HHuummaann bbeehhaavviioorr iinn tthhee ssoocciiaall eennvviirroonnmmeenntt,, 22dd eedd..Rogers, Anissa Taun. (New directions in social work)Routledge, ©2010 354 p. $89.95Addressing undergraduate and graduate students in social work, thistextbook by Rogers (social work, U. of Portland) addresses theories ofhuman behavior relevant to the practice. It addresses biopsychosocial,sociocultural, and social change-oriented theories of human behavior inthe social environment and then examines a broad range of behavioralissues at all stages of life-span development. A companion websitepresents interactive cases for applying the knowledge from the text.

HV40 978-1-84742-195-1SSoocciiaall wwoorrkk aanndd gglloobbaall hheeaalltthh iinneeqquuaalliittiieess;; pprraaccttiiccee aannddppoolliiccyy ddeevveellooppmmeennttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Bywaters et al.Policy Press, ©2009 303 p. $39.95 (pa)Edited by Bywaters (social work, Coventry U.), McLeod (social work, U.of Warwick), and Napier (education and social work, U. of Sydney) thisvolume focuses on social work within the context of neoliberal global-ization. It first focuses on outlining the extent of global health inequal-ities and then describes specific cases of social work intervention. Thebook concludes with a few chapters looking at the big picture wheresocial work is involved in the international struggle for equity, rights andsocial justice.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–147–

HV40 2009-366925 978-1-55130-364-2SSttrruuccttuurraall ssoocciiaall wwoorrkk iinn aaccttiioonn;; eexxaammpplleess ffrroomm pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Steven F. Hick et al.Canadian Scholars’ Press, ©2009 246 p. $34.95 (pa)The unique contribution of this work on the practice of structural socialwork (which focuses on structures as the root cause of social problems,rather than individuals) is that instead of just discussing how theoryshould be applied in practice, it discusses how theory actually is appliedin practice by pairing academics and practitioners for each of its discus-sions of structural social work in various settings.

HV41 2009-021141 978-0-470-46998-9EEffffeeccttiivvee ggrraanntt wwrriittiinngg aanndd pprrooggrraamm eevvaalluuaattiioonn ffoorrhhuummaann sseerrvviiccee pprrooffeessssiioonnaallss..Yuen, Francis K.O. et al.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 265 p. $40.00 (pa)Yuen, Terao, and Schmidt’s text offers human service professionals—program developers, managers, and evaluators, and agency adminis-trators—and students the knowledge and skills for obtaining the fundingto deliver quality services, and to demonstrate service results andaccountability. Based on years of experience in the public and nonprofitsectors, the authors describe four key components of grant-writing andprogram evaluation activities—community and target population, serviceproviders, funding sources, and the craft of research and managementevaluation. They examine how and why to write grant proposals andconduct program evaluation, and present exercises and successful real-life examples to aid readers in getting hands-on experience and gaininginsiders’ knowledge about into grant writing and program evaluation.Yuen teaches social work at California State U., Sacramento; Terao andSchmidt are with a private social science research firm in the SanFrancisco Bay Area.

HV45 978-1-84742-012-1PPaarrttiicciippaattoorryy pprraaccttiiccee;; ccoommmmuunniittyy--bbaasseedd aaccttiioonn ffoorrttrraannssffoorrmmaattiivvee cchhaannggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret Ledwith and Jane Springett.Policy Press, ©2010 252 p. $32.95 (pa)The term “participatory practice,” as Ledwith (community developmentand social justice, U. of Cumbria, UK) and Springett (health promotionand public health, Liverpool John Moores U., UK) use it here, has com-munity development at its heart and it involves “restoring the essence ofour being through living cooperatively” and “developing projects that arefounded on mutuality.” It is also influenced by the pedagogy of PauloFreire. In this text, they present a multi-dimensional model of partici-patory practice that understands participation as: practice, critical edu-cation, empowerment, theory, social justice, democracy, biodiversity, andworldview. They consider the place of participatory practice in a non-par-ticipatory world and explore skills related to participatory practice, suchas the use of story, the role of dialogue, and critical reflection. Distributedin the US by ISBS.

HV91 2009-039777 978-1-933478-28-9CCaauugghhtt iinn tthhee ssttoorrmm;; nnaavviiggaattiinngg ppoolliiccyy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee iinn tthheewweellffaarree rreeffoorrmm eerraa..Ferguson, Miguel et al.Lyceum Books, ©2010 95 p. $19.95 (pa)In a fictional non-profit organization in a fictional city, social workerstry to help families and individuals meet their basic needs after a fic-tional hurricane, while staff and administrators tread the treacherouspolitical maneuvering necessary to get funding. Ferguson (social work, U.of Texas-Austin), Heather Neuroth-Gatlin (Lutheran Social ServicesDisaster Response), and Stacey Borasky (social work and sociology, St.Edward’s U., Austin, Texas) draw from their years of clinical practice,experience working in disaster relief in the wake of Hurricane Katrina,and a longitudinal program evaluation of welfare-to-work projects allacross Texas.

HV91 2009-031194 978-1-933478-53-1IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo ssoocciiaall wwoorrkk;; tthhee ppeeooppllee’’ss pprrooffeessssiioonn,, 33ddeedd..Colby, Ira and Sophia F. Dziegielewski.Lyceum Books, ©2010 475 p. $69.95 (pa)Colby (social work, U. of Houston) and Dziegielewski (social work, U. ofCentral Florida) introduce the social work profession for students. Theydescribe its history, the roles of social workers, education, and levels ofpractice and different settings, as well as how the profession is changing,while incorporating profiles of contemporary social workers. This editionhas been redesigned around the 2008 Educational Policy andAccreditation Standards for social work education and Code of Ethics,and includes topics like traditional agency-based practice and lessconventional settings like political and international social work. Itincorporates more group activities and case studies, and new sections oncounseling survivors of abuse, working with children, and policyimplications.

HV91 2009-023085 978-0-415-80504-9SSoocciiaall wwoorrkk aanndd ssoocciiaall wweellffaarree;; aann iinnvviittaattiioonn,, 22dd eedd..Berg-Weger, Marla. (New directions in social work)Routledge, ©2010 319 p. $89.95 (pa)Written by Berg-Weger (School of Social Work, Saint Louis U.), this is thesecond edition of an introductory text aimed at students considering acareer in social work. Chapters cover the history of social work andsocial welfare, US poverty and the implications for social work, the socialwork environment, diversity in social work practice, values and ethics insocial work practice, social work perspectives and methods, fields ofsocial work practice, social work practice with individuals and families,social work practice with groups, social work practice with organizationsand communities and policy practice, and trends in social workemployment opportunities and salaries. The material has been updatedto reflect current demographic, statistical, legislative, policy, and researchinformation.

HV415 978-0-8213-7631-7MMoovviinngg oouutt ooff ppoovveerrttyy;; vv..44:: RRiissiinngg ffrroomm tthhee aasshheess ttooccoonnfflliicctt..Title main entry. Ed. by Deepa Narayan and Patti Petesch. (Moving outof poverty)The World Bank, ©2010 548 p. $40.00 (pa)This text is the fourth and final volume reporting on the World Bank’sMoving Out of Poverty study, which was based on quantitative and qual-itative data about poor people’s economic mobility in 500 communitiesin 15 countries around the world. This volume, edited by Narayan (theproject director of the Moving Out of Poverty study) and Petesch (thestudy coordinator of the study), is focused on a subset of seven countriesaffected by conflict: Afghanistan, Cambodia, Colombia, India (in the stateof Assam), Indonesia (North Maluku), the Philippines (Mindanao), andSri Lanka. The analysis is guided by the overall conceptual frameworkfor the study, which considers mobility to be an outcome of the inter-action between individual initiative; collective actions; and local-levelsocial, political, and economic institutions, as mediated by social inequal-ities. The first section of the book focuses on the issue of post-conflictstate-building and the second presents country case studies. Co-publishedwith Palgrave Macmillan.

HV530 978-1-86134-981-1RReelliiggiioonn,, bbeelliieeff aanndd ssoocciiaall wwoorrkk;; mmaakkiinngg aa ddiiffffeerreennccee..Furness, Sheila and Philip Gilligan.Policy Press, ©2010 190 p. $28.95 (pa)The social work curriculum, argue the authors (professors of social workat the U. of Bradford, UK), needs to “include explanations of matters suchas religious belief and the nature and application of social work values,and make links between them and the ethical dilemmas that often facesocial workers when making decisions.” They have produced this text inorder to fulfill this need, focusing on the relevance and impact of religionand spiritual belief on the users and practitioners of social work in theUK; the extent to which social work takes account of such belief in itspursuit of culturally sensitive and competent practice; and the consider-ation of specific issues, settings, communities, and stages in the lifecourse which require social workers to give particular attention to issuesof religion and belief in the context of their professional practice andcurrent social policy debates in the UK. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –148–

HV553 2009-031291 978-81-321-0148-2WWoommeenn,, ggeennddeerr aanndd ddiissaasstteerr;; gglloobbaall iissssuueess aanndd iinniittiiaattiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Elaine Enarson and P.G. Dhar Chakrabarti.Sage Publications, ©2009 380 p. $49.95These 25 papers place the issue of gender at the heart of their discussionof disaster risk management and mitigation around the world. Followinga section addressing basic and overarching conceptual and theoreticalissues, chapters present gendered perspectives on disaster mitigation inNicaragua, the Middle East, New Zealand, the post-Hurricane Katrina USGulf Coast, the Great Hanshin Earthquake in China, and the 2005Pakistan Earthquake. Other contributions examine women’s organizedinitiatives of disaster relief and mitigation in India, Central America,Kenya, Sri Lanka, Brazil, and the British Caribbean territory ofMontserrat. Finally, gender-sensitive policies towards disaster mitigationare assessed and proposed.

HV599 978-0-8213-8045-1SSaaffeerr hhoommeess,, ssttrroonnggeerr ccoommmmuunniittiieess;; aa hhaannddbbooookk ffoorrrreeccoonnssttrruuccttiinngg aafftteerr nnaattuurraall ddiissaasstteerrss..Jha, Abhas K.The World Bank, ©2010 370 p. $29.95 (pa)Employed with the World Bank since 2001, Jha manages disaster riskmanagement practice in the Bank’s East Asia and Pacific Region. Hispractical handbook is designed to help policy makers and project man-agers engaged in large-scale post-disaster reconstruction programs makedecisions about how to reconstruct housing and communities afternatural disasters. Part I addresses the principal stages of reconstruction:assessment and policy making, planning, and implementation. Part II—monitoring and information management—contains advice about tech-nology use in reconstruction, project monitoring, and involving affectedcommunities in project oversight. Part III provides an overview of howthe World Bank assists governments after disasters and of the policiesand procedures that apply in World Bank projects. The text incorporatesinput and material from 22 international post-disaster reconstruction spe-cialists, and is supported by a companion website containing additionalmaterials related to each chapter and other relevant topics.

HV640 978-0-85303-842-9JJeewwiisshh rreeffuuggeeeess ffrroomm GGeerrmmaannyy aanndd AAuussttrriiaa iinn BBrriittaaiinn,,11993333--11997700;; tthheeiirr iimmaaggee iinn AAJJRR iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn..Grenville, Anthony.Vallentine Mitchell, ©2010 286 p. $74.95Wartime Kindertranports were not the only case in which England per-mitted Jewish immigration to escape Nazi persecution. This book is pre-sented as the first historical study of Jewish refugees from Austria,Germany, and Czechoslokavia who settled in Britain between 1933 and1939 and their adaptation in later decades. Drawing on AJR Information,the journal of the Association of Jewish Refugees that he edits, Grenville,the son of Jewish refugees from Vienna, traces British immigrationpolicy, refugees’ exodus, their initial reception, contributions to the wareffort, and largely successful integration into British society (representedin photographs) while maintaining a distinct communal identity.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV640 2009-047793 978-1-84545-587-3RReeffuuggeeeess ffrroomm NNaazzii GGeerrmmaannyy aanndd tthhee lliibbeerraall EEuurrooppeeaannssttaatteess..Title main entry. Ed. by Frank Caestecker and Bob Moore.Berghahn Books, ©2010 346 p. $100.00In the study of Europe and the Second World War, the flight of peoplefrom Nazi Germany before 1939 has been seen as something of a preludeto the main event (whether thought of as the war itself or as theHolocaust). For this volume, editors Caestecker (History, University ofGhent) Moore (Twentieth-Century European History, University ofSheffield) have assembled a collection of essays that examine the chal-lenges that the movement of refugees from Germany and Austria duringthe pre-war years posed to the immigration controls of countries inEurope and beyond. Contributors look at how the immigration policiesof European states changed over the 1930s to reflect both domesticpolitical concerns and the changing situation in Germany and Austria(annexed by Germany in 1938), and they compare the similarities anddifferences in those national policies.

HV640 978-0-85303-778-1RReessccuuee tthhee ppeerriisshhiinngg;; EElleeaannoorr RRaatthhbboonnee aanndd tthhee rreeffuuggeeeess..Cohen, Susan.Vallentine Mitchell, ©2010 283 p. $75.00Cohen recounts the campaign by British Member of Parliament Rathbone(1872-1946) on behalf of Europe’s Jewish refugees, and her commitmentto the refugee question during the Nazi era—an effort that she began in1933 and continued until her death at the end of World War II. The firstsection sets the stage by reviewing her previous advocacy regarding Indiaand other imperial concerns, humanitarian causes in Palestine, andforeign policy and collective security. Then she the Czech refugee crisis,internment at home and abroad, confronting the Holocaust, rescuing theperishing, and the National Committee for Rescue from Nazi Terror.

HV689 2009-043893 978-1-4129-8138-5TThheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee iinn cclliinniiccaall ssoocciiaall wwoorrkk,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Jerrold R. Brandell.Sage Publications, ©2011 859 p. $89.95Substantially revised to reflect changes in the field since 1997, this workfor graduate students in clinical social work examines common theo-retical frameworks and systems used in social work practice. The firstpart of the book describes systems theory, behavior and cognitive the-ories, psychoanalytic theory, and neurobiology theory (new to thisedition). The second part covers treatment modalities with children, ado-lescents, adults, couples, and groups. The book’s third section looks atspecial issues such as depressed clients, alcohol and drug problems, andurban school settings. A final chapter offers an overview of psychophar-macology. This second edition contains new chapters on terrorism andnatural disasters, clinical case management, and cross-cultural clinicalpractice, and expanded material on brief and time-limited clinical socialwork and clinical practice with gay men. A companion web site for stu-dents includes chapter summaries, key words, and recommended websites and readings. A site for teachers offers a test bank. Brandell teachessocial work at Wayne State University.

HV690 978-1-4129-3504-3UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg ssoocciiaall wwoorrkk pprraaccttiiccee iinn mmeennttaall hheeaalltthh..Coppock, Vicki and Bob Dunn.Sage Publications, ©2010 170 p. $99.95Coppock and Dunn (social work and mental health and social and psy-chological sciences, Edge Hill U., UK) explore the historical, theoretical,and political contexts related to changes in mental health law and policyin the UK and their impact on practitioners and users of mental healthservices and their carers. They identify contributions social work bringsto mental health and focus on the belief that social work makes animportant contribution to advancing a social model of mental healththeory and practice. They outline the knowledge, understanding, skills,and values of professional social work practice for students and practi-tioners, from the perspectives of users, carers, and mental health profes-sionals. Included are discussions of treatment approaches, discriminationand inequalities, interprofessional work, and policy developments.

HV741 2009-018636 978-1-4128-1076-0CChhiillddrreenn aatt rriisskk;; tthhee pprreeccaarriioouuss ssttaattee ooff cchhiillddrreenn’’ss wweellll--bbeeiinngg iinn AAmmeerriiccaa..Crouse, Janice Shaw.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 218 p. $34.95Crouse (The Beverly LaHaye Institute), who has served as an official del-egate to the UN and as a presidential speech writer under the BushAdministration, argues that without morals, children in the US are atrisk, and that morals provide a way to protect them and preserve theirinnocence. She contends that the rejection of Judeo-Christian values andmorality is the root of most of the broken relationships childrenencounter and documents the consequences suffered by generations ofchildren in the US as a result of policies based on liberal ideology andthe shift away from these values. She focuses on problems like thedecline in marriage, the breakdown of the family from the traditionalmother/father model, the prevalence of single mothers, and the resultantpoverty and cohabitation; negative cultural influences like abortion,childhood sexual exploitation, and child abuse; and outside influenceslike the media, child and foster care, childhood obesity, health and safety,and public education.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–149–

HV755 978-1-903765-96-8LLeeaarrnniinngg ffrroomm cchhiilldd ddeeaatthhss aanndd sseerriioouuss aabbuussee iinnSSccoottllaanndd..Vincent, Sharon. (Protecting children and young people)Dunedin Academic Press, ©2010 133 p. $29.95 (pa)This work reviews high-profile child death and abuse cases in Scotland,both in and outside of the home, which resulted in inquiries over theperiod 1975 to 2008, and examines the impact of these cases on policy.The book begins with a chapter on child deaths in general, using datafrom the UK as a whole, and discusses the difficulty of determiningwhether a death has been caused by abuse and neglect. Currentprocesses for reviewing child deaths in Scotland and the UK areexamined. Three subsequent chapters find family, environment, andagency patterns in significant cases in Scotland, and compare them toinquiries and reviews in England and Wales. The book then looks majorpolicy shifts associated with inquiries from 1945-2007. The book is forstudents, policymakers, and professionals working in children’s servicesin Scotland. Vincent is a research fellow in child protection at theUniversity of Edinburgh/NSPCC Center for UK-wide Learning in ChildProtection. The book is distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV784 978-1-84742-406-8SSoocciiaall wwoorrkk aanndd cchhiilldd wweellffaarree ppoolliittiiccss;; tthhrroouugghh NNoorrddiicclleennsseess..Title main entry. Ed. by Hannele Forsberg and Teppo Kröger.Policy Press, ©2010 206 p. $99.00Scholars mostly of social work but also sociology in the European farnorth explore the actual practice of social work in societies that the restof the world characterize as child-centered welfare paradises for children.Their topics include constructing contexts for social work with families,public concern for Finnish childhood, professional challenges of family-focused social work in the 21st century, children in families receivingfinancial welfare assistance, listening to children’s experiences of beingparticipant witnesses to domestic violence, and institutions in child pro-tection policy. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV874 2009-048640 978-0-313-34270-7FFiinnddiinngg oouurr ppllaaccee;; 110000 mmeemmoorraabbllee aaddoopptteeeess,, ffoosstteerreeddppeerrssoonnss,, aanndd oorrpphhaannaaggee aalluummnnii..McCaslin, Nikki.Greenwood Press, ©2010 363 p. $85.00Librarian and bibliographer McCaslin (U. of Colorado, Denver) learnedas an adult that she was adopted, and is herself the mother of twoadopted daughters. She presents a unique compilation of concise biogra-phies about 100 famous people who were adopted, fostered, or lived inorphanages as children. The featured individuals are from various cen-turies, countries, and walks of life, and include artists, architects,designers, entertainers, business people, clergy, philosophers, educators,civic leaders, scientists and explorers, military leaders, athletes,statesmen, writers, broadcasters, and journalists. Each entry contains thesubject’s major achievements, a brief vita, and description of the person’schildhood experiences, based on personal interviews, where possible, andautobiographies and published letters and interviews. For students andgeneral readers, particularly those interested in learning about positiverole models in adoption and children’s issues.

HV875 2009-023281 978-0-202-36345-5HHeerreeddiittyy aanndd eennvviirroonnmmeenntt iinn 330000 aaddooppttiivvee ffaammiilliieess;; tthheeTTeexxaass aaddooppttiioonn pprroojjeecctt..Horn, Joseph M. and John C. Loehlin.AldineTransaction, ©2010 209 p. $49.95Horn and Loehlin, emeritus professors of psychology at the University ofTexas-Austin, presents the results of a 35-year research project involving300 families, each of whom adopted at least one child at birth from aTexas home for unwed mothers during the period 1962-1970. The studywas intended to investigate the influence of genetic and environmentalfactors on children as they grow into adulthood. It examined areasincluding intellectual abilities, personality, academic achievement, psy-chological adjustment, occupation, and personal relationships. The bookis accessible to general readers as well as specialists, with a glossary andan introductory guide provided for the non-specialist reader, explainingthe statistical tables. Additional technical material for specialists is con-tained in appendices.

HV891 2009-032678 978-1-60623-442-6TTeeaacchhiinngg ssoocciiaall ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn ttoo cchhiillddrreenn wwiitthh aauuttiissmm;; aapprraaccttiittiioonneerr’’ss gguuiiddee ttoo ppaarreenntt ttrraaiinniinngg aanndd AA mmaannuuaall ffoorrppaarreennttss;; 22vv.. ((DDVVDD iinncclluuddeedd))Ingersoll, Brooke and Anna Dvortcsak.Guilford Pr., ©2010 386 p. $85.00 (pa)This two-volume set serves as a comprehensive training curriculum forfamilies of young children with autism spectrum disorder up to age six.It includes a practitioner’s guide to teaching families to use naturalisticevidence-based intervention strategies to enhance their child’s socialengagement, language, imitation, and play skills, and a manual forparents, as well as a DVD that contains video clips of parents using thetechniques and PowerPoint slides for group sessions. The guide providesstep-by-step guidelines for conducting parent training individually or ingroups by special educators, speech-language pathologists, occupationaltherapists, social workers, psychologists, and behavioral specialists. Thecompanion manual for parents includes instructions, illustrations, andhomework practice sheets. Reproducible handouts and forms are pro-vided. Ingersoll (psychology, Michigan State U., East Lansing) andDvortcsak, a speech-language pathologist, co-directed the AutismTreatment and Research Program at the Hearing and Speech Institute(now the Artz Center) in Portland, Oregon.

HV1568 2008-053945 978-1-59857-001-4CCoommbbaattiinngg vviioolleennccee aanndd aabbuussee ooff ppeeooppllee wwiitthh ddiissaabbiilliittiieess;;aa ccaallll ttoo aaccttiioonn..Fitzsimons, Nancy M.Brookes Publishing, ©2009 220 p. $34.95 (pa)Focusing on adults with all types of disabilities, Fitzsimons (social work,Minnesota State U.) provides guidance for people with disabilities, as wellas professionals and families, to fighting against violence and abuse. Shediscusses theories of abuse and the barriers that perpetuate violence; vul-nerable situations and personal barriers; indicators of abuse, includingneglect and financial exploitation; the use of supportive services andsystems; and how to conduct training sessions to educate people with dis-abilities about prevention. The concluding chapter illustrates principles ina university-community collaboration she was involved with, TheAdvocacy and Empowerment Project.

HV1570 2009-928863 978-1-84787-585-3DDyysslleexxiiaa--ffrriieennddllyy ffuurrtthheerr && hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn..Pavey, Barbara et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 124 p. $99.95Written in the context of recent UK legislation, this textbook/resource foreducators, teachers, and non-specialists discusses pedagogy and offerspractical guidelines. It can be used in mainstream, academic-related pro-grams and in-service training. Each chapter begins with a graphicaloverview using software available to dyslexic students, and concludeswith a summary of key points and voices of real students, case studies,and discussion questions. Coverage includes the dyslexia friendly college,dyslexia-friendly written work, lab work, and benchwork, social andemotional aspects of dyslexia-friendly higher and further education, andnational and international perspectives. Pavey, an inclusion and specialeducation practitioner, is a lecturer on the faculty of Education andTheology at York St. John University.

HV2474 2009-025298 978-0-398-07901-7AAddvvaanncceedd ssiiggnn llaanngguuaaggee vvooccaabbuullaarryy;; rraaiissiinngg eexxppeeccttaattiioonnss::aa rreessoouurrccee tteexxtt ffoorr eedduuccaattoorrss,, iinntteerrpprreetteerrss,, ppaarreennttss,, aannddssiiggnn llaanngguuaaggee iinnssttrruuccttoorrss,, 22dd eedd..Coleman, Janet Renee and Elizabeth England Wolf.C.C. Thomas, ©2009 191 p. $39.95Coleman and Wolf combine years of experience facilitating literacy devel-opment as teachers, interpreters, counselors, and presenters at the localand regional levels to create an updated resource of signs collected fromestablished base signs and initialized signs observed within the Deafcommunity throughout the US. The vocabulary is organized by topic:English, social studies, science, mathematics, health, non-academics, edu-cation, and general vocabulary such as emotions, actions, religion,quality, and condition. The second-edition text reflects idiomatic and con-ceptual changes within American Sign Language (ASL), including newconcepts resulting from the enormous technological explosion—the era ofcell phones, laptops, and the Internet—that has occurred since publicationof the first edition. The authors have also updated and replaced some ofthe original illustrations for improved clarity, consistency, and conceptualaccuracy.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –150–

HV2813 2009-039656 978-1-56368-419-7DDeeaaff hhiissttoorryy aanndd ccuullttuurree iinn SSppaaiinn;; aa rreeaaddeerr ooff pprriimmaarryyddooccuummeennttss..Fraser, Benjamin.Gallaudet University Pr., ©2009 299 p. $80.00Even though sign language has been recognize as an independent lan-guage in many countries, there are still misconceptions about the exis-tence of a Deaf Culture. Fraser (Spanish, Christopher Newport University,Newport News, VA) a hearing scholar who has studied both ASL andSpanish as foreign languages, has translated Spanish documents and lit-erature from the fifteenth century to the present in order to trace thedevelopment of deaf education and the growth of deaf culture. Hestresses the insistence that many people still have on the deaf learning tospeak and chronicles attempts to do this over the years. The voices of thedeaf are heard in several of the contemporary articles, including angryarguments for the recognition of their language as valid. In choosing hissources, Fraser differentiates between the experiences of those who wereborn deaf or lost their hearing before learning to speak and those wholost hearing in later life. The exception to this is the section of poetry inwhich the state of the authors is not always given. One of the loveliest isthat written by Dopin to her hearing daughters. For those interested indeaf history or the study of marginalized groups, this reader is a won-derful source.

HV3187 2009-033350 978-1-933478-57-9SSoocciiaall wwoorrkk pprraaccttiiccee wwiitthh LLaattiinnooss;; kkeeyy iissssuueess aannddeemmeerrggiinngg tthheemmeess..Title main entry. Ed. by Rich Furman and Nalini Negi.Lyceum Books, ©2010 298 p. $39.95 (pa)For social work students and practitioners, Furman (social work, U. ofWashington-Tacoma) and Negi (social work, U. of Maryland) compile 17chapters that address historical vulnerabilities among Latinos and pro-grams that may be beneficial to them. Practitioners and scholars of socialwork, sociology, Latin American studies, family therapy, and anthro-pology from the US, many of whom are Latinos, discuss the contexts ofglobalization, migration, similarities and differences among Latinos, andthe history of work and labor issues; psychosocial issues and specificstrengths and risk factors, such as family and community, spiritualityand religion, art, health care disparities, and violence; and methods touse these strengths in a culturally-competent approach to practice,including using the family, child welfare, substance abuse prevention,working with older Latinos, and groupwork.

HV3944 978-1-84392-741-9RReelleeaassee ffrroomm pprriissoonn;; EEuurrooppeeaann ppoolliiccyy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Nicola Padfield et al.Willan Publishing, ©2010 460 p. $89.95Scholars of law, criminology, and penology explore the policy, practice,and underlying principles of releasing sentenced prisoners from prisonin 13 individual European countries. Overall they demonstrate thatthough there are major procedural differences, there are also funda-mental shared values about liberty and the rule of law, against whichevolving systems can be critically evaluated by criminal justice practi-tioners and the general public. A chapter also looks at the Europeandimension in general. Most of the studies were discussed in a July 2008workshop at Cambridge University. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV4701 2009-018562 978-1-4051-9937-7AAnniimmaallkkiinndd;; wwhhaatt wwee oowwee ttoo aanniimmaallss..Kazez, Jean. (Blackwell public philosophy)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 206 p. $89.95Kazez (philosophy, Southern Methodist U.) takes the middle ground inthe debate about animal rights and argues for respect for animals. Sheconfesses to her own inconsistencies and dilemmas and refrains frompreaching about what people should and shouldn’t do; instead, sheexplores the ethical issues arising from human-animal interactions. Shediscusses what has been said about the human-animal differences inancient religion and indigenous myth and the writings of Western andEastern philosophers, what can be learned from animal psychologistsand ethologists, and whether humans and animals are on differentmoral planes. She describes uses of animals throughout human history,such as for food, warmth, vaccines, and sport, and declining species.

HV4708 2009-013830 978-1-84519-325-6TThhee lliinnkk bbeettwweeeenn aanniimmaall aabbuussee aanndd hhuummaann vviioolleennccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Linzey.Sussex Academic Press, ©2009 346 p. $44.95 (pa)Scholars of psychology, philosophy, social sciences, law, and other fieldslook at the existing research; emotional development and emotionalabuse; children, family violence, and animals; animal abuse and serialmurder; ethical perspectives on relations between humans and animals;law enforcement, offenders, and sentencing policy; prevention and pro-fessional obligations; and the abuse of wild animals. Specific topicsinclude a lifespan perspective on human aggression and animal abuse,empathy as an indicator of emotional development, the role of animalsin public child welfare work, developmental animal cruelty and its cor-relates in sexual homicide offenders and sex offenders, the structure ofevil, laws and policy to address the link of family violence, the role ofveterinarians and other animal welfare workers in reporting suspectedchild abuse, and hunting as a morally suspect activity. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

HV5801 2009-024852 978-1-84310-696-8SSuubbssttaannccee mmiissuussee;; tthhee iimmpplliiccaattiioonnss ooff rreesseeaarrcchh,, ppoolliiccyy,,aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Joy Barlow.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 240 p. $36.95 (pa)For social workers, students, health professionals, counselors, and othersworking with substance abusers, Barlow (Scottish Training on Drugs andAlcohol, U. of Glasgow, UK) compiles 13 chapters that detail policy andpractice in substance abuse work. Social work, substance abuse, soci-ology, psychology, criminology, and public health specialists from the UK,New Zealand, and Italy address the shift in emphasis from immediaterisk minimization to long-term recovery, the importance of prevention,the role of workforce development, issues surrounding children and fam-ilies affected by substance abuse, and ways of implementing newapproaches. They also discuss aspects such as the historical context ofdrug and alcohol policy, treatment and recovery, crime, the impact ofsocial exclusion and poverty, and smoking.

HV5825 2009-022363 978-1-55849-705-4TThhee mmyytthh ooff tthhee aaddddiicctteedd aarrmmyy;; VViieettnnaamm aanndd tthhee mmooddeerrnnwwaarr oonn ddrruuggss..Kuzmarov, Jeremy. (Culture, politics, and the Cold War)U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2009 303 p. $26.95 (pa)One of the more pernicious, if often overlooked, myths underpinning theemergence of the “War on Drugs,” was the overblown fear that theAmerican army in Vietnam was awash with drug addiction. So arguesKuzmarov (history, U. of Tulsa), who here shows how the myth was con-structed by the media and various political actors, including RichardNixon, who sought justifications for a harsher punitive approach to crimeand a move away from liberal social policies, and even the antiwarmovement, which used the myth of the addicted army as a means of con-demning the war. He also shows how the myth was rhetorically deployedboth for incarcerating larger and larger numbers of Americans and inconnection with other nationalistic myths concerning the failures of theVietnam War.

HV5840 978-1-84742-375-7LLeeggaalliissiinngg ddrruuggss;; ddeebbaatteess aanndd ddiilleemmmmaass..Bean, Philip.Policy Press, ©2010 157 p. $26.00 (pa)Bean (emeritus criminology and criminal justice, Loughborough U.England) has expanded a chapter from the 2008 third edition of hisDrugs and Crime to help stimulate a debate in Britain about linksbetween drugs and crime and the possibility of legalizing illegal drugs.He draws on empirical data when needed, but is primarily interested inthe theory of legalization. He covers prohibition, economic liberalism,and legal moralism; harm reduction, medicalization, and decriminal-ization; legalization and crime; the special problem of juveniles; and thecommunity, the personal, and the commercial. Distributed in the US byISBS.

HV5840 2009-040259 978-0-8157-0328-0SShhoooottiinngg uupp;; ccoouunntteerriinnssuurrggeennccyy aanndd tthhee wwaarr oonn ddrruuggss..Felbab-Brown, Vanda.Brookings Institution Press, ©2010 273 p. $28.95Felbab-Brown (defense initiative, Brookings Institution and securitystudies, Georgetown U.) contributes to the right wing conflation of theWar on Drugs and the War on Terror. Her topics include illicit economiesand belligerents, the political capital model of illicit economies, the cocapath in Peru, the narco wars in Columbia, Afghanistan swimming in asea of poppies, and policy implications.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–151–

Books reported NYP? Call Book News for publication dates. (503) 281-9230

HV6017 978-1-84392-371-8HHaannddbbooookk oonn ccrriimmee..Title main entry. Ed. by Fiona Brookman et al.Willan Publishing, ©2010 946 p. $69.95 (pa)This hefty handbook explains the nature and patterns of different formsof crime. Contributors are academics in the UK and discussion centerson crime in a UK context, except for the section on state, political, andwar crimes. Chapters present historical and definitional issues, analyzestatistical and other descriptive information, discuss theoretical debatesabout specific forms of crime, and review academic, political, and policydebates. Coverage encompasses crimes committed by individuals,criminal groups, corporations, and governments. The last section looksat examples of corporate and individual behavior regarded by many ascriminal but often dealt with through regulatory law, such as eco-crimeand corporate violence. Readership includes students, researchers, aca-demics, practitioners, policy makers, and journalists. Brookman is affil-iated with the Center for Criminology at the University of Glamorgan,Wales. The book is distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV6018 2009-027701 978-0-268-02213-6CCrriimmiinnaalliittyy,, ppuubblliicc sseeccuurriittyy,, aanndd tthhee cchhaalllleennggee ttooddeemmooccrraaccyy iinn LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Marcelo Bergman and Laurence Whitehead.(From the Helen Kellogg Institute for International Studies)U. of Notre Dame Press, ©2009 344 p. $40.00 (pa)The 11 papers presented here by Bergman (law, Centro de Investigacióny Docencia Económicas, Mexico) and Whitehead (politics, Oxford U., UK)explore the contemporary relationship between crime and political andlegal institutions in Latin America by documenting empirically newtrends in criminality, analyzing major components of the criminal justicesystem in the region, and assessing the strengths and weaknesses ofLatin American democracies in combating crime. Specific topics includeregional homicide patters in Brazil, perceptions of citizen security inChile, the effects of changes in labor markets and community breakdownon crime in Mexico and Brazil, current dilemmas of Latin Americanpolice reform, the Colombian criminal justice system and the pursuit ofefficiency, criminal process reform and citizen security, prison systemsin Latin America, and dynamics of crime and democratic governability.

HV6024 2010-002999 978-1-4129-7875-0TThhee pprraaccttiiccee ooff rreesseeaarrcchh iinn ccrriimmiinnoollooggyy aanndd ccrriimmiinnaalljjuussttiiccee,, 44tthh eedd..Bachman, Ronet and Russell K. Schutt.Sage Publications, ©2011 443 p. $95.95 (pa)Bachman (U. of Delaware) and Schutt’s (U. of Massachusetts, Boston)updated textbook for undergraduate and beginning graduate criminaljustice courses and programs combines instructions in research methodswith investigations of key research questions in the field, to prepare stu-dents to conduct research of their own. The fourth edition features a newchapter on research ethics, examples of criminological research as theyoccur in real-world settings, updated discussion of causation thatincludes more field experiments and other unique methods, expandeddiscussion of systematic observation and crime mapping, new discussionof evidence-based policy and meta-analysis in evaluation research used toinvestigate social programs, and a streamlined chapter on reportingresults.

HV6025 2009924975 978-1-84787-087-2CCrriimmiinnaall llaaww && ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn..Cross, Noel.Sage Publications, ©2010 230 p. $39.95 (pa)Why should criminology and criminal justice students study criminallaw? Beyond the obvious answer, Cross (criminal justice, Liverpool JohnMoores U.) suggests that it is important to understand the gap betweenthe rules set out by criminal law and the actual practices of police andcriminal justice organizations that often use their own power, discretion,and working rules more than the criminal law itself. This, then, specifi-cally as it concerns England and Wales, is the main subject of his text. Itis split into two main parts, the first of which looks at general principlesof liability in criminal law and how they are implemented in criminaljustice practice in relation to different groups of people within thecriminal justice process. The second examines specific types of criminaloffence and how they are implemented in criminal justice practice.Exercises and discussion questions for students are included, as are “def-inition boxes” explaining key concepts and terminology.

HV6025 2009-043891 978-1-4129-7971-9IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo ccrriimmiinnoollooggyy;; tthheeoorriieess,, mmeetthhooddss,, aannddccrriimmiinnaall bbeehhaavviioorr,, 77tthh eedd..Hagan, Frank E.Sage Publications, ©2011 553 p. $79.95 (pa)This introductory criminology text for university and community collegecourses offers a color layout with high-interest color photos, graphs andcharts, and summary tables. The first part of the text covers researchmethods in criminology, biological and psychological theories, socio-logical mainstream theories, sociological critical theories, and integratedtheories. Subsequent chapters deal with specific types of crime, includingviolent crime, property crime, white collar and corporate crime, politicalcrime and terrorism, organized crime, public order crime, and computercrime (new to this edition). These chapters include real-world cases. Acompanion web site contains podcasts, quizzes, flashcards, video clips,and the chapter on the criminal justice system from the previous edition.This seventh edition offers expanded material on terrorism, a new photoprogram with links to corresponding videos on the web site, end-of-chapter theory-policy connections, and web research exercises. Hagandirects the graduate program in administration of justice at MercyhurstCollege.

HV6025 978-1-84392-402-9KKeeyy rreeaaddiinnggss iinn ccrriimmiioollooggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Tim Newburn.Willan Publishing, ©2009 908 p. $55.00 (pa)Newburn (criminology, London School of Economics) offers a reader toaccompany his 2007 textbook Criminology, but he says the anthologycould be used with other textbooks or in any legal manner the ownerchooses. The readings are primarily excerpts from books and articles,and are organized to parallel the chapters in the textbook. The goal is toprovide students with recent examples of writing in the field, and todemonstrate how the ideas presented in the textbook are applied inactual research. Among the 35 themes are crime and punishment inhistory, biological positivism, interactionism and labeling theory, feministcriminology, drugs and alcohol, the police and policing, restorativejustice, criminal and forensic psychology, and doing criminologicalresearch. Each section begins with an introduction and a set of dis-cussion questions. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV6071 2009-022445 978-0-8166-5070-5CCaappttuurriinngg tthhee ccrriimmiinnaall iimmaaggee;; ffrroomm mmuugg sshhoott ttoossuurrvveeiillllaannccee ssoocciieettyy..Finn, Jonathan M.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2009 163 p. $22.50 (pa)Jonathan Finn (communications studies, Wilfrid Laurier U.) begins byexploring the early use of photography in the nineteenth century and thedevelopment of theories of physiognomy and phrenology to explaincriminal behavior. He goes on to analyze the role of more modernmethods of analysis such as fingerprints, DNA analysis, and surveillanceprograms and databases. The focus of the book is mainly on develop-ments in the U.S. in the wake of September 11th, such as the introductionof the National Security Entry-Exit Registration System (NSEERS) and onits eventual replacement, the U.S. Visitor and Immigrant Status IndicatorTechnology Program (US-VISIT). Although containing its share of prac-tical information, this volume is ultimately a work of ideas about policeprocedures and criminality.

HV6080 2009-042795 978-0-398-07918-5TThhee ccrriimmiinnaall ttrriiaadd;; ppssyycchhoossoocciiaall ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ooff tthheeccrriimmiinnaall ppeerrssoonnaalliittyy ttyyppee..Harmening, William M.C.C. Thomas, ©2010 280 p. $62.95Career Illinois law enforcement officer and psychology Harmening offersa new model for understanding the psychosocial development of acriminal propensity, through a new combination and perspective ofexisting theories of Freud, Erikson, Banura, Kohlberg, and others. Inorder to understand why some people commit crime, he says, it isimportant to understand why others do not. He covers the evolution ofcrime; psychoanalytic, behaviorist, and cognitive traditions; defining thecriminal personality type; attachment in early childhood; moral devel-opment in middle-late childhood; morality and the criminal triad;identity formation in adolescence; criminal beginnings; and interventionstrategies.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –152–

HV6080 2009-015693 978-0-425-23226-2TThhee ffoorreennssiicc ppssyycchhoollooggyy ooff ccrriimmiinnaall mmiinnddss..Ramsland, Katherine M.Berkley Publishing Group, ©2010 303 p. $15.00 (pa)A voluminous popular writer on crime, and especially serial murder,Ramsland draws on her education in forensic psychology as she looks atthe real cases that inspired some of the hit TV show Criminal Minds’most memorable episodes. Her topics include the history and purpose ofcriminal profiling, psychological autopsy and victimilogy, varieties ofdeviance, negotiations, the mass market and the culture of serial murder,profiling abroad, and the new generation.

HV6080 2010-000283 978-1-4224-6329-1TThhee ppssyycchhoollooggyy ooff ccrriimmiinnaall ccoonndduucctt,, 55tthh eedd..Andrews, D. A. and James Bonta.LexisNexis, ©2010 672 p. $61.95 (pa)Andrews (Carleton U.) and Bonta (Public Safety Canada) update oncemore their holistic and interdisciplinary general personality and socialpsychology of criminal conduct. Though drawing on a number of theo-retical positions, they find particular value in general personality andcognitive-behavioral and cognitive social learning perspectives. Thisedition recognizes the return of crime prevention as concerns in justiceand corrections after being long exiled by such attitudes as just desertsand getting tough. Data from surveys and discipline-based criticism arenow relegated to Technical Notes in the end matter, so they do notinterrupt the flow of the main text. The sections cover the theoreticalcontext and knowledge base, the major risk and need factors of criminalconduct such as antisocial personality patterns and substance abuse, andapplications in such contexts as prevention and rehabilitation andcriminal types from the common to the exceptional. Earlier editionsappeared between 1994 and 2006.

HV6190 2009-044992 978-1-59460-775-2CCrriimmee aanndd ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee iinn ddiissaasstteerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Dee Wood Harper and Kelley Frailing.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 344 p. $38.00 (pa)For students in criminal justice and criminology, Harper (sociology andcriminal justice, Loyola U.) and Frailing, a doctoral student in crimi-nology at the U. of Cambridge, UK, bring together 16 essays by sociolo-gists, criminologists, and law enforcement professionals from the US andIndia, who explore why and how crime occurs in the wake of disastersand how the criminal justice system responds. They consider crime anddisaster within a historical context, propose a typology that places certaintypes of crime in different phases of disaster, discuss emergency responseplanning and preparedness, and look at crimes like looting, sexualassault, robbery, drug dealing, and fraud, and specific disasters such as9/11, Hurricane Katrina, the Los Angeles riot of 1992, the Exxon Valdezoil spill, and the Mumbai terrorist attack.

HV6197 2009-014930 978-0-674-03597-3TThhee ccoonnddeemmnnaattiioonn ooff bbllaacckknneessss;; rraaccee,, ccrriimmee,, aanndd tthheemmaakkiinngg ooff mmooddeerrnn uurrbbaann AAmmeerriiccaa..Muhammad, Khalil Gibran.Harvard University Press, ©2010 380 p. $35.00Muhammad (history, Indiana U.) traces the development of statistical dis-courses of race and crime in the US urban north from the 1890s to the1930s. His central argument concerns the comparative discourses sur-rounding two sets of newcomers to the urban north: white ethnic immi-grants and African Americans of the Great Migration. He finds thatstatistical comparisons between the Foreign-born and the Negro werefoundational to the modern discourse of race and crime, withProgressive-era social scientists using statistics and sociology to explaincrime amongst European immigrants and working-class whites in termsof class and crime amongst African Americans in terms of racial inferi-ority. This process was part and parcel of a project that sought to demon-strate “the assimilability of the Irish, the Italian, and the Jew by explicitcontrast to the Negro.”

HV6250 2009-031780 978-1-4129-6047-2EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff vviiccttiimmoollooggyy aanndd ccrriimmee pprreevveennttiioonn;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Bonnie S. Fisher and Steven P. Lab.Sage Publications, ©2010 1174 p. $350.00Often considered as a sub-discipline or in the context of other fields suchas criminology, economics, sociology, and public health, victimology ishere given center stage. Focusing on crimes and their prevention at anindividual level, this two-volume reference does not encompass the theoryor practicalities of economic, educational, and health system factors. Aninitial “Reader’s Guide” groups entries according to themes such as cor-relates of victimization (e.g. age, gangs, immigration, mental illness);courts (alternative remedies, law & justice); crime prevention partner-ships; interventions and intervention programs; legislation and statutes;and various kinds of offenses and their prevention—intrafamilial, per-sonal, property, school and workplace, among others. Editors Fisher (U.of Cincinnati) and Lab (Bowling Green State U.) have shaped thisresource by selecting 28 broad themes for consideration in about 450entries of two types: anchor essays (approximately 5,000 words), andheadword entries (1,000 to 3,000 words). Arrangement is alphabetical,with resources and indexing in the second volume.

HV6250 2009-036831 978-1-58826-702-3JJuuddggiinngg vviiccttiimmss;; wwhhyy wwee ssttiiggmmaattiizzee ssuurrvviivvoorrss,, aanndd hhoowwtthheeyy rreeccllaaiimm rreessppeecctt..Dunn, Jennifer L. (Social problems, social constructions)Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2010 241 p. $55.00Dunn (sociology, Southern Illinois U.) examines why society stigmatizessurvivors of rape, battering, incest, and clergy abuse, and how this typeof victim identity (usually gendered violence) has developed and changedover time. She focuses on how the second and third wave of the women’smovement constructed women and children as victims of sexual violenceand aimed to show that women do not bring violence on themselves. Sheconsiders the contradictions that occur when victims do not conform tostereotypes, the production of identities that counter negative and stig-matizing representations, how changing representations of victims reflectlarger cultural codes, and how the concept of agency affects people’sideas about victims and their choices. She looks at types of victim images,like blameless and blameworthy, and various survivor movements, fromantirape to the battered women’s movement.

HV6251 2009-510122 978-1-4438-0198-0IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn ccrriimmee aanndd jjuussttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by K. Jaishankar.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 741 p. $97.99Crime in many different places around the world, crime that crossesnational borders, and local measures for preventing crime that can beapplied elsewhere are explored from perspectives of criminology, soci-ology, criminal justice, law, geography, and other disciplines. Researchersand practitioners consider such topics as white-collar and corporatecrime, rethinking the conceptual definitions of criminal career and serialcriminality, asset forfeiture in Ireland, inter-country adoption and humanrights violation in India, jurisdictional and definitional issues of cyber-stalking, and Native American Indian tribal and community and tertiarypower.

HV6252 2009-044568 978-0-230-23818-3TThhee iinnvveennttiioonn ooff iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ccrriimmee;; aa gglloobbaall iissssuuee iinn tthheemmaakkiinngg,, 11888811--11991144..Knepper, Paul.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2010 254 p. $90.00Knepper (sociological studies, U. of Sheffield, UK) describes the emergingperception of crime as an international issue in Great Britain between1881 and 1914. He first explores developments in transportation, com-munication, and commerce and how police, journalists, and others per-ceived them to give impetus to a “professional criminal” class. He thendiscusses how the globe-spanning nature of the British Empire impactedperceptions of crime and crime policies of the Empire, the greatmigration of Jews to the West and anti-Semitic fears of “alien crimi-nality,” the popularization of fears of “white slavery” and its connectionsto concerns over immigration and increased mobility of people, andanarchist refugees in London and tensions over the possibility of “anar-chist outrages” (i.e. bombings and assassinations). Finally, he examinesthe organization of criminology as an academic enterprise that conceivedof itself as an international project.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–153–

HV6275 2009-037018 978-1-59448-895-5VVooooddoooo hhiissttoorriieess;; tthhee rroollee ooff tthhee ccoonnssppiirraaccyy tthheeoorryy iinnsshhaappiinngg mmooddeerrnn hhiissttoorryy..Aaronovitch, David.Riverhead Books, ©2010 388 p. $26.95It is much easier to state a conspiracy theory than to refute it. Britishjournalist Aaronovitch knows this well. He also believes that widely-believed fabrications can influence the actions of individuals and states.In this entertaining book, Aaronovitch looks at some of the most popularlegends that continue to affect us. Some have destroyed lives such as theimaginary Protocols of Zion or Joseph McCarthy’s list of communists inHollywood and the State Department. Others have, so far, not had suchdrastic consequences, such as theories surrounding the deaths of Johnand Robert Kennedy, David Kelly, Princess Diana and Martin LutherKing. The theories about the validity of the moon landing and the 9/11bombings are also treated. Aaronovitch notes the paranoia associatedwith the Internet and the suspicion of many that some Big Brother ismonitoring everything we do. He also takes on the source of Dan Brown’sThe Da Vinci Code, Holy Blood, Holy Grail and its descendents. Along theway, he gives several excellent indicators of how one can sort baselessnonsense from fact. He offers this book to those who have been forced tolisten to conspiracy theorists but not had the data at hand to argue. Hedoes not expect his work to convince the theorists themselves. One of hisindicators is that they are not swayed by logic or facts.

HV6322 978-90-420-2853-1MMeettaacciiddee;; iinn tthhee ppuurrssuuiitt ooff eexxcceelllleennccee..Title main entry. Ed. by James R. Watson. (Value inquiry book series;v.216)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 314 p. $91.00 (pa)Thirteen papers are presented from conference panels of the Society forthe Philosophic Study of Genocide and the Holocaust in one of a seriesof planned volumes serving as an outlet for the work of the Society.Topics addressed in this volume include Rousseau, Plato, and westernphilosophy’s anti-genocidal strain; the reception of four Shoah(Holocaust) photographs; uneasiness and the dislocation of Holocaustcinema; time disorder in the work of essayist Jean Améry; and feministphilosophical interventions in genocide.

HV6322 2009-036343 978-1-59451-558-3PPrreevveennttiinngg ggeennoocciiddee;; pprraaccttiiccaall sstteeppss ttoowwaarrdd eeaarrllyy ddeetteeccttiioonnaanndd eeffffeeccttiivvee aaccttiioonn,, rreevv.. eedd..Hamburg, David A.Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 374 p. $24.95 (pa)Falling generally within the ambit of liberal humanitarian interventionliterature, this work by Hamburg (Weill Medical College) discusses inter-ventions for preventing genocide. He discusses the Armenian Genocide,the Holocaust, and the Rwandan Genocide as examples of the nature andseverity of the problem and South Africa as an example of genocide pre-vention. Preventive diplomacy, democracy promotion, promotion ofsocioeconomic development, education, international justice institutions,and arms control are examined in separate chapters as “pillars of pre-vention.” Organizational roles are explored for the United Nations, theEuropean Union, the Organisation for Security and Cooperation inEurope, and the North Atlantic Treaty Organization. For this revised andupdated edition, a new chapter has been added on recent developments.

HV6430 2009-043355 978-0-313-35374-1OOssaammaa BBiinn LLaaddeenn;; aa bbiiooggrraapphhyy..Mockaitis, Thomas R. (Greenwood biographies)Greenwood Press, ©2010 152 p. $35.00In this political rather than personal biography, Mockaitis (history,DePaul University) examines the political and religious roots of infamousterrorist Osama bin Laden’s radicalism, with an overview of the historyof Saudi Arabia in the 20th century, the growth of radical Islam, and thehistory of al-Qaeda. A section on his early life provides information onthe rise of the bin Laden family, bin Laden’s childhood and family rela-tionships, and the impact of the political and social upheavals occurringduring his coming of age. An annotated bibliography comments on thestrengths and weaknesses of the book’s sources, and an appendix listsprimary sources, historic Islamic writers, and UK, US, and UN gov-ernment documents, as well as secondary sources including books,articles, and web sites. The book includes a timeline and a section ofhigh-interest b&w photos and maps, and is written for general readersand students in high school and up. The author is affiliated with thecounterterrorism program at the Center for Civil-Military Relations at theNaval Postgraduate School.

HV6431 2009-037174 978-0-87289-961-2DDeebbaattiinngg tteerrrroorriissmm aanndd ccoouunntteerrtteerrrroorriissmm;; ccoonnfflliiccttiinnggppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn ccaauusseess,, ccoonntteexxttss,, aanndd rreessppoonnsseess..Title main entry. Ed. by Stuart Gottlieb.CQ Press, ©2010 395 p. $42.95 (pa)Gottlieb (policy studies, Macmillan Center for International and AreaStudies, Yale U.) presents point-counterpoint essays debating contentiousissues of terrorism and counterterrorism relevant to the US so-called “waron terror.” Each of the following topics is addressed with opposed view-points: the “newness” of al-Qaeda’s type of terrorism, poverty as a causalfactor in terrorism, the justifiability of terrorism, the role of Islam inmodern religious terrorism, the effectiveness of suicide terrorism, thethreat of nuclear terrorism, military versus civil reconstructionapproaches to counterterrorism, the role of democracy promotion incounterterrorism strategy, the role of the United Nations in fighting ter-rorism, the use of torture in counterterrorism strategy, the expansion ofexecutive power and the constraining of civil liberties in pursuing thefight against terrorism, and the actual level of threat posed by terrorismto the United States.

HV6431 2009-021003 978-0-470-75380-4TThhee ffaacceess ooff tteerrrroorriissmm;; mmuullttiiddiisscciipplliinnaarryy ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by David Canter.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2009 300 p. $124.95Perspectives from psychology, politics, and crime are about equally pro-vided in the effort to produce a rounded picture of what it means to bea terrorist and what terrorism means for society today. They concludethat counterinsurgency activities need to embrace the public castigationof terrorism, and engage with the conceptual systems of those who starton the pathways to violent action. Among their topics are becoming aparamilitary in Northern Ireland, the primacy of grievance as a struc-tural cause of oppositional political terrorism, terrorist networks andsmall-group psychology, the enemy of my enemy is my friend, mediaframing of terrorist incidents in the US and Britain, and de-radicalizationand the staircase from terrorism.

HV6431 2009-029788 978-0-8047-6305-9FFoorr lloovvee ooff tthhee ffaatthheerr;; aa ppssyycchhooaannaallyyttiicc ssttuuddyy ooff rreelliiggiioouusstteerrrroorriissmm..Stein, Ruth. (Meridian; crossing aesthetics)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 220 p. $22.95Stein (Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, New York University) employspsychoanalytic theory to explain suicidal terrorism, arguing that Islamicextremists perform destructive and self-destructive actions in order tomerge with God. Rather than being motivated by hatred or political gain,the author suggests that extremists are driven by love of God, killing Hisenemies to express their total submission to the deity. Stein goes on toshow that this pattern of submission and sacrifice is not unique to Islam(or to Islamic extremists), but is present in other forms of patriarchalmonotheism. This important book should will appeal to any reader whowants to understand the motivations of the 9/11 attackers (as well thoseof any other religious terrorists).

HV6431 2009-029802 978-0-415-87540-0TThhee ppoolliicciinngg ooff tteerrrroorriissmm;; oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnaall aanndd gglloobbaallppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Deflem, Mathieu. (Criminology and justice studies series)Routledge, ©2010 229 p. $39.95 (pa)Deflem (sociology, U. of South Carolina) presents a criminologicalanalysis, based on the sociology of crime and social control, of key char-acteristics and dimensions of the policing of terrorism in various nationaland international settings, focusing on the organizational and globaldevelopments of counterterrorism policing in the post-9/11 era. Hisanalysis outlines a model of policing of terrorism based on the bureau-cratization theory of policing and then applies it to empirical examina-tions of counterterrorism policing in the US at the federal and locallevels, comparatively in some other countries of the world, by theInternational Criminal Police Organization (Interpol) and the EuropeanPolice Office (Europol), in undercover operations by Israel in occupiedPalestine, and in the development of civilian policing in Iraq andAfghanistan under American occupation.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –154–

HV6431 2009-017578 978-1-4200-7181-8SScciieennccee aanndd tteecchhnnoollooggyy ooff tteerrrroorriissmm aanndd ccoouunntteerrtteerrrroorriissmm,,22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Mark A. Prelas et al. (Public administrationand public policy; 156)CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 582 p. $95.95Twenty-nine chapters describe technological and scientific aspects of ter-rorism and counterterrorism to a general audience. After discussions ofthe general relationship between technology and terrorism and the grouppsychology of terrorism, biological terrorism is addressed in chaptersthat discuss aerosols; effects, toxicity, and effectiveness; classification andmanufacture; weaponization and delivery systems; sensors and detectionsystems; consequences and medical preparedness; government anti-ter-rorism policy, and agroeconomic bioterrorism. Nuclear terrorism is thenexamined in chapters that discuss the nature of radiation, radiationdetection and detectors, dose and biological effects, nuclear weapons, andthreats and countermeasures. Chemical terrorism is examined in ref-erence to classification, synthesis, and properties; toxicity, medical man-agement, and mitigation; destruction and decontamination; sensors anddetection systems; weaponization and delivery systems; and threats andcountermeasures. Remaining chapters look at cyber-terrorism, personalprotective equipment, the national response plan and preparedness, gov-ernment and voluntary agencies, and the National InfrastructureProtection Plan.

HV6432 2009-023557 978-1-4200-8567-9HHoommeellaanndd sseeccuurriittyy;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo pprriinncciipplleess aannddpprraaccttiiccee..Nemeth, Charles P.CRC Press, ©2010 518 p. $69.95For students and practitioners, Nemeth (professional studies, CaliforniaU. of Pennsylvania) outlines the origins, evolution, structure, organi-zation, and strategic mission of the Department of Homeland Securityand the roles of multi-jurisdictional agencies, law enforcement, the mil-itary, the intelligence community, emergency managers, and the privatesector. He describes its law, regulations, and budgeting; the nature of riskmanagement and types of threats and hazards; training and exercises;national vs. state and local security; the Federal Emergency ManagementAgency; border security and immigration and naturalization; trans-portation security; public health; and intelligence and counterterrorismefforts.

HV6432 2009-040337 978-0-7637-5785-4HHoommeellaanndd sseeccuurriittyy;; pprriinncciipplleess aanndd pprraaccttiiccee ooff tteerrrroorriissmmrreessppoonnssee..Maniscalco, Paul M. and Hank T. Christen.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 227 p. $65.95 (pa)Maniscalco (retired deputy chief, Fire Department of New York) andChristen (retired battalion chief, Atlanta Fire Department) present thistext as a dual-use pragmatic guide to terrorism response for emergencyresponse practitioners and as a textbook for the academic community.Two overarching perspectives frame the work: the all-hazards approachand its application to terrorism and homeland security and the generalapplicability of strategic planning and incident management principles tofire/rescue operations, emergency medical services, law enforcement,and beyond. Chapters discuss the National Incident Management System;the National Response Framework; critical infrastructure protection,emergency response, and management; planning for terrorism; terrorismresponse procedures; operations security, site security, and terrorismincident response; weapons of mass effect; mass casualty decontami-nation; personal protective equipment; and crime scene operations.

HV6432 2008-033141 978-1-60456-854-7NNeeww tteerrrroorriissmm iissssuueess..Title main entry. Ed. by Lucy S. MacLeod and Olivia C. Thomson.Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 160 p. $79.00Some US government reports from 2005, and studies by academics insuch fields as political science and oceanography and by people whosepositions and fields are not identified, contribute to the ongoing pro-duction of literature about terrorism. The Institute for Counter-Terrorismprovides the background. Among the topics are the US strategicpetroleum reserve, terrorism financing, the impact of terrorism and anti-terrorism on capital markets, China’s energy policy in Africa and itsimplications for US national security, and the vulnerability of nuclearpower plants to terrorist attack. A final chapter, with fuzzy illustrationsand curt descriptions of terrorism organizations, is not attributed toanyone at all.

HV6432 2009-034062 978-1-58322-895-1TTeerrrroorriissmm aanndd tthhee eeccoonnoommyy;; hhooww tthhee wwaarr oonn tteerrrroorr iissbbaannkkrruuppttiinngg tthhee wwoorrlldd..Napoleoni, Loretta.Seven Stories Press, ©2010 170 p. $13.95 (pa)A journalist and author specializing in money laundering and terrorfinancing, Napoleoni (Terror Incorporated, Insurgent Iraq) explains howthe Global War on Terror, or whatever its brand is today, is a major causeof the economic disaster in the industrial world. Among her topics areDubai and the rise of Islamic finance, the War on Terror as America’ssuicidal mission, the self-inflicted wound of the USA PATRIOT Act,scenes from a global house of cards, the politics of fear, the danger ofprotectionism, and a new economic model.

HV6437 2009-029431 978-0-398-07905-5SSttrreeeett ggaannggss tthhrroouugghhoouutt tthhee wwoorrlldd,, 22dd eedd..Covey, Herbert C.C.C. Thomas, ©2010 315 p. $63.95Affiliated with the Adams County Human Services Department, Covey(U. of Colorado-Boulder) incorporates evidence that has come to lightduring the six years since the first edition, especially regarding streetgangs beyond the US and Europe. Officials in many countries arebeginning to encounter street gangs for the first time, he says, and arelooking for information about the phenomenon. He begins with a com-parative perspective, explaining how the gangs fit into urban society andthe larger crime picture, and why it is important to study them. Then hesurveys the US; Europe; the rest of the western hemisphere; Russia andeastern Europe; Asia; and Africa, the Middle East, Australia, and thePacific islands.

HV6515 2009-017795 978-1-60741-625-8HHoommiicciiddee;; ttrreennddss,, ccaauusseess aanndd pprreevveennttiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Randal B. Toliver and Ulrich R. Coyne.(Criminal justice, law enforcement and corrections)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 203 p. $89.00Some contributors identify their field—corrections, law enforcement,forensic pathology, for example—but most merely cite their affiliate insti-tution, and their location in Europe, North America, or India. Among thetopics are a new model for profiling homicide offenders, homicide bymentally disordered offenders in England and Wales, the impact of guncontrol on murder and suicide in Canada, homicide trends in Delhi, arace-specific analysis of the effect of marital status on male homicide vic-timization, and culpable homicide not amounting to murder as a causeof mortality in the South India district of South Candara.

HV6515 2009-001837 978-0-8139-2826-5IIss kkiilllliinngg wwrroonngg??;; aa ssttuuddyy iinn ppuurree ssoocciioollooggyy..Cooney, Mark. (Studies in pure sociology)U. of Virginia Press, ©2009 254 p. $39.50Most people, when confronted with the question posed in the title byCooney (sociology and law, U. of Georgia), will probably reflexivelyanswer “of course!” However, when one looks at how homicide is treatedin reality, one finds that penalties and punishments for killing varywidely across time and place and certain killings are even treated withsocial acclaim. He suggests that the best way to explain this disparitycould be through the sociological theory of legal conflict proposed inDonald Black’s The Behavior of Law (1976), which proposed that “caseoutcomes vary with their location and direction in social space, or theirsocial geometry,” which encompasses such variables as social class, thedivision of labor, social networks, social control, and marginality. He con-structs a theory of moral relativity based on Black’s work and then testsit on evidence concerning the handling of homicide in human societies.

HV6535 978-1-84563-102-4UUnnssoollvveedd LLoonnddoonn mmuurrddeerrss;; tthhee 11994400ss && 11995500ss..Oates, Jonathan. (True crime)Wharncliffe, ©2009 173 p. $32.95Oates, the Ealing Borough Archivist and Local History librarian, recon-structs 18 unsolved murder cases from London in the 1940s and 1950s.The first chapter introduces the police and criminal world of Londonduring the period, describing the forces that created new types of villainsand criminals during WWII, and overviews crime investigation tools andtechniques of the time. The cases offer details and speculations on mainlyordinary citizens who would otherwise be lost to history had they notbeen murdered. The book includes contemporary b&w photos of loca-tions, and a bibliography of primary and secondary sources. It is dis-tributed n the US by Casemate

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–155–

HV6545 2009-928292 978-1-4129-4635-3CCoouunnsseelllliinngg ssuuiicciiddaall cclliieennttss..Reeves, Andrew. (Counselling in practice)Sage Publications, ©2010 182 p. $99.95This guide will be useful for counselors, social workers, psychologists,therapists, and other helping professionals. The first part of the bookexplores contextual aspects of working with suicide risk. It describes themedical model and psychiatry, then goes beyond then to examine the‘self’ in relation to relevant historical developments. The next section ana-lyzes how policy, ethics, and the prediction-prevention model cometogether to inform intervention choices, and offers a risk-factor basedapproach to understanding suicidality. There is also material on howorganizations influence work with suicidal clients. Chapters on the clientprocess show how to explore suicidal thoughts with clients in sessions,and chapters on the counselor process focus on understanding what wehear from suicidal clients. The book concludes with guidelines for whatcounselors should do when clients talk about feeling suicidal, and alsoincludes ideas for counselor self-care.

HV6545 2009-014717 978-1-60741-360-8PPrreevveennttiinngg ssuuiicciiddee;; cclloossiinngg tthhee eexxiittss rreevviissiitteedd..Lester, David.Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 149 p. $79.00In 1989, authors Davis Lester and Ronald Clarke published a book calledSuicide: Closing the Exits, reporting on their research lowering the suiciderate by restricting access to lethal methods of suicide. This work surveyscurrent research on restricting access to six methods for suicide: domesticgas, car exhaust, jumping from bridges and high buildings, jumping infront of trains and subways cars, medication and poisons, and control offirearms in Canada and Australia. Control of firearms in the US is notcovered due to the wealth of material elsewhere. An introduction reviewsother methods for preventing suicide, such as educational programs andsuicide prevention centers. Lester has background in suicidology andsuicide prevention.

HV6548 2009-024186 978-0-8014-4766-2LLoosstt ttoo tthhee ccoolllleeccttiivvee;; ssuuiicciiddee aanndd tthhee pprroommiissee ooff SSoovviieettssoocciiaalliissmm,, 11992211--11992299..Pinnow, Kenneth M.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 276 p. $49.95During the 1920s there was deep concern surrounding the issue ofsuicide in Soviet society, a phenomena that many connected with culturaldecadence, individualism, and a general loss of faith in the 1917Bolshevik Revolution. Pinnow (history, Allegheny College) explores howthe Soviets approached suicide as problem of governance, arguing thatthe phenomena of suicide “acted as a vehicle for the creation of a scien-tific-political apparatus that was designed for the comprehensive care ofthe population,” or, as he also labels it, a “Soviet social science state” thatsought to transform both individual subjectivity and the larger society.

HV6556 978-1-84392-526-2MMaannaaggiinngg hhiigghh rriisskk sseexx ooffffeennddeerrss iinn tthhee ccoommmmuunniittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Karen Harrison.Willan Publishing, ©2010 310 p. $44.95 (pa)Psychologists, criminologists, law scholars, and others in crime andjustice fields look at the actual data about danger from sex offenders,much of which contradicts the public and political furor. Focusing onpedophilia, they look at its definitions and etiology and at policy issuesregarding high-risk offenders. Then they consider risk management,treatment and risk reduction, special offender groups, and social andmoral responsibilities. Among specific topics are effective multi-agencypublic protection, using pharmacotherapy with high-risk sex offenders,enhancing community collaboration to stop sexual harm by youth, andthe role of human rights in the issue. Most of the contributors, and sothe examples, come from Britain, but others are from the Netherlandsand anglophone North America. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV6556 2009-043177 978-1-59884-177-0SSeexxuuaall ccrriimmee;; aa rreeffeerreennccee hhaannddbbooookk..Neumann, Caryn E. (Contemporary world issues)ABC-CLIO, ©2010 311 p. $55.00For high school and college students, scholars, and general readers,Neumann (history, Miami U. of Ohio) provides an introduction to con-temporary issues related to sexual crime that includes causes and defi-nitions, legal and cultural attitudes throughout history, common myths,categories, types of rapists, victims and attackers, and issues such as daterape, crimes involving male victims, rape in prison, female perpetrators,law enforcement, the judicial and correctional systems, and internationalperspectives and issues. Biographical sketches of activists, scholars, policymakers, and other figures, a directory of organizations, statistics anddata, and an annotated list of sources are included.

HV6558 2009-032818 978-1-4338-0741-1TTaallkkiinngg aabboouutt sseexxuuaall aassssaauulltt:: ssoocciieettyy’’ss rreessppoonnssee ttoossuurrvviivvoorrss..Ullman, Sarah E. (Psychology of women)American Psychological Assn., ©2010 209 p. $69.95For educators, researchers, policy makers, professionals who work withsexual assault victims, survivors, and students, Ullman (criminology, law,and justice, U. of Illinois at Chicago) examines issues American womenexperience when talking about their sexual assault, including why, howoften, and to whom they disclose their rape; how people respond; andhow these responses affect survivors. She also addresses social attitudestowards rape, advocates’ and clinicians’ experiences helping survivors,factors influencing their responses, her experience conducting interviewswith survivors, her methods of coping, ethical considerations, and rec-ommendations for changing social attitudes and responses. She focuseson female adults, but includes social reactions to child sexual abuse sur-vivors. Information is drawn from interviews and mail surveys.

HV6570 2009-032435 978-0-465-01688-4TThhee ttrraauummaa mmyytthh;; tthhee ttrruutthh aabboouutt tthhee sseexxuuaall aabbuussee ooffcchhiillddrreenn aanndd iittss aafftteerrmmaatthh..Clancy, Susan A.Basic Books, ©2009 236 p. $25.00To counter misconceptions about the nature and consequences of childsexual abuse—whose common occurrence is no myth, Clancy (Center forWomen’s Advancement, Development and Leadership, Central AmericaInstitute for Business Administration, Nicaragua) presents transcripts ofinterviews with adult survivors conducted while she was doing researchat Harvard. Questioning the prevailing traumatic stress model, sheargues that there are psychological and other factors besides the abuseexperience itself (often characterized as having been more confusing thattraumatic) that contribute to its long-term impact on the victim.

HV6595 2009-044108 978-0-398-07920-8CCoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn iinn ccrriissiiss aanndd hhoossttaaggee nneeggoottiiaattiioonnss;;pprraaccttiiccaall ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn tteecchhnniiqquueess,, ssttrraattaaggeemmss,, aannddssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr llaaww eennffoorrcceemmeenntt,, ccoorrrreeccttiioonnss,, aannddeemmeerrggeennccyy sseerrvviiccee ppeerrssoonnnneell iinn mmaannaaggiinngg ccrriittiiccaall......,, 22ddeedd..Slatkin, Arthur A.C.C. Thomas, ©2010 208 p. $39.95 (pa)Slatkin (police and criminal psychologist, Kentucky Department ofCorrections and Louisville Metro Police Department) provides a secondedition of his resource on communication techniques and strategies incrisis and hostage negotiations. Intended for law enforcement, correc-tions, and emergency medical service personnel, the book explores andexplains skills needed for dealing with critical situations such as hostagetaking or threatened suicide. Topics include: communication and com-munication techniques, strategies, listening, negotiating with variedsubject types (for example a terrorist or alcohol or drug-impairedsubject), interviewing, and communications and role-play training exer-cises and scenarios.

HV6626 2009-028620 978-1-4224-6138-9FFaammiillyy vviioolleennccee aanndd ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee;; aa lliiffee--ccoouurrsseeaapppprrooaacchh,, 33dd eedd..Payne, Brian K. and Randy R. Gainey.LexisNexis, ©2009 533 p. $47.95 (pa)For future professionals, researchers, college professors, and policymakers, Payne (criminal justice, Georgia State U.) and Gainey (sociologyand criminal justice, Old Dominion U.) offer a text on family violencefrom a life-course perspective. They address theories, research methods,the historical context, forms of violence, and responses of the criminaljustice system. This edition contains a new chapter on the collaborativeresponse to family violence cases over the life course. Chapters on co-occurring child abuse/domestic violence and domestic violence have beencombined. Also added are tips for professionals dealing with issues dis-cussed in each chapter and new sections on quasi-experiments, social dis-organization and the power control wheel, child maltreatment trends,child facilities, economic abuse, elder sexual abuse, elder abuse trends,the processing of criminal justice cases, and restorative justice.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –156–

HV6626 2009-028095 978-1-878060-77-8IInnttiimmaattee ppaarrttnneerr vviioolleennccee;; aa rreessoouurrccee ffoorr pprrooffeessssiioonnaallsswwoorrkkiinngg wwiitthh cchhiillddrreenn aanndd ffaammiilliieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Angelo P. Giradino and Eileen R. Giardino.STM Learning, Inc., ©2010 372 p. $55.00 (pa)Nearly half of children were found to have been exposed to intimatepartner violence (IPV) in a survey by the National Child Traumatic StressNetwork. A. Giradino (pediatrics, Baylor College of Medicine) and E.R.Giardino (nursing, U. of Texas Health Science Center-Houston) introduce15 interdisciplinary chapters that address professional barriers to dealingwith IPV and its effects on children. The tension between advocates forchildren and advocates for adult IPV victims is also addressed. The textfeatures historical background, conceptual frameworks (e.g., the stages ofchange model), relevant laws, research findings and recommendations, areview of domestic violence assessment/ screening instruments, and pre-vention programs and other resources.

HV6626 2009-041050 978-1-59332-368-4IInnttiimmaattee ppaarrttnneerr vviioolleennccee aanndd wwoommeenn’’ss eeccoonnoommiicciinnsseeccuurriittyy..Resko, Stella M. (Criminal justice; recent scholarship)LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2010 240 p. $70.00Using data from the Fragile Families Survey, Resko (social work, WayneState U) tests two explanations of intimate partner violence: the first, sug-gesting that violence would decrease when women’s economic resourcesincrease because, in gaining greater resources, women also gain morepower, and the second, the backlash hypothesis derived from exchangetheory, which argues that women’s greater relative economic powerincreases men’s likelihood of being abusive when men feel theirpower/roles are threatened. Her findings support the idea that improvingwomen’s economic position can reduce intimate partner violence, butsuggest there is little evidence to uphold the backlash hypothesis. She alsofinds that the strength of the two models differs across racial and ethnicminority groups, and may not adequately explain partner violence expe-rienced by African American women and Latinas. For students, scholars,academics, researchers, and practitioners in the fields of criminology,police science, sociology, victimology, and the law.

HV6665 2009-040766 978-1-4027-6651-0FFllaawwlleessss;; iinnssiiddee tthhee llaarrggeesstt ddiiaammoonndd hheeiisstt iinn hhiissttoorryy..Selby, Scott Andrew and Greg Campbell.Union Square, ©2010 319 p. $24.95In February 2003, a band of professional Italian thieves known as “TheSchool of Turin” carried out the largest diamond heist in history: half abillion dollars worth of diamonds and other valuables from the ultra-secure vault of the Antwerp Diamond Center in Belgium. This narrativeaccount takes readers on a global adventure into the secret world ofdiamond dealing. It investigates how the thieves discovered the building’ssecurity flaws, details the night of the heist, and recounts the thieves’eventual capture, drawing on documents from several countries andinterviews with prisoners, underworld figures, and diamond dealersaround the world. The book includes an appendix on other historicheists, plus a few b&w photos and maps. Selby wrote a Master’s thesison diamonds. Campbell is an award-winning journalist who also wroteBlood Diamond, which inspired the movie with Leonardo DiCaprio.

HV6675 2009-043174 978-1-59884-143-5IIddeennttiittyy tthheefftt;; aa rreeffeerreennccee hhaannddbbooookk..9Hoffman, Sandra K. (Contemporary world issues)ABC-CLIO, ©2010 262 p. $55.00Aided by high-speed global communication, identity theft has become aworldwide crime. It is not just performed by criminals looking forfinancial gain, but also by terrorists and those involved in human anddrug trafficking. In addition to entertaining and well-researched intro-ductory material, this reference handbook, prepared by Hoffman(criminal justice, Michigan State U.) and McGinley (Bowling Green StateU.), provides a chronology of events, biographical sketches, and the actualtext of legislation related to the issue. Includes a directory of organiza-tions, an extensive list of print and nonprint resources which functionsas an annotated bibliography, and a useful glossary.

HV6710 2009-011029 978-0-415-99677-8GGlloobbaall ggaammbblliinngg;; ccuullttuurraall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn ggaammbblliinnggoorrggaanniizzaattiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Sytze F. Kingma.Routledge, ©2010 248 p. $95.00Inspired by a 2006 conference on risk-taking and gambling held, appro-priately enough, in Reno, Nevada, this volume takes a multi-disciplinary,though largely sociological look at gambling from an international per-spective. Chapters offer analysis on gambling from the point-of-view oforganizations in Finland, South Africa, California, and Australia amongothers. Broader themes include such topics as the social dynamics atblackjack tables and gambling at home. Specific aspects of gamblinginterspersed with sociological and anthropological analysis make this acurious, but intriguing collection of scholarship.

HV6768 2009-936219 978-1-84720-892-7RReesseeaarrcchh ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo ccoorrrruuppttiioonn iinn oorrggaanniissaattiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Ronald J. Burke and Cary L. Cooper. (Newhorizons in management)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 310 p. $210.00Burke (organizational behavior, York U., Canada) and Cooper (organiza-tional psychology and health, Lancaster U., UK) present a reader exam-ining causes, consequences, and responses to corruption inorganizations. Fourteen chapters explore individual and organizationalantecedents of corruption; the interaction of individual and organiza-tional causal factors of corruption; the utilization of conjoint analysis formeasuring perceptions of the seriousness of corruption in organizations;ethical issues relating to labor relations and trade unions in extractiveindustries in southern Africa; predictors of misconduct by scientists;comparative Kantian, utilitarian, and virtue ethics perspectives on cor-ruption; the characteristics of ethical organizational leaders; commontactics of whistleblowers and those wishing to silence them; the effec-tiveness of interventions aimed at reducing employee theft; ethical codesas a vehicle for reducing corruption in organizations; the developmentalhistory of Transparency International and its measurement of metrics ofcorruption; and reforms needed to address corruption in the Canadianfinancial sector.

HV6769 2009-015530 978-0-470-48196-7FFrraauudd 110011;; tteecchhnniiqquueess aanndd ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr uunnddeerrssttaannddiinnggffrraauudd,, 33dd eedd..Pedneault, Stephen.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 234 p. $49.95Pedneault, founder and principal of Forensic Accounting Services LLC,offers guidance and advice for detecting, preventing, and investigatingfinancial fraud. In this third edition, the author discusses why fraud iscommitted, how financial fraud works, white collar crime, employeeembezzlement, internal controls, evidence collection, and sample investi-gation techniques. Case examples also are included. This very clearlywritten book will be useful for business owners, accountants, auditors,and managers.

HV6773 2009-048693 978-0-313-36546-1CCyybbeerrccrriimmee;; ccrriimmiinnaall tthhrreeaattss ffrroomm ccyybbeerrssppaaccee..Brenner, Susan W. (Crime, media, and popular culture)Praeger, ©2010 281 p. $44.95Brenner (law and technology, U. of Dayton) explains what cybercrime isand how it affects the average citizen. She addresses legal and policyissues; the rise of cybercrime from mainframe computer hacking in the1950s to today; different types, including identity theft, stalking,extortion, fraud, harassment, and viruses and worms; who criminals are;investigation and prosecution; the challenges cybercrime poses for lawenforcement at the national and global levels; and balancing law with theprivacy of US citizens.

HV6773 2009-020550 978-1-60566-836-9HHaannddbbooookk ooff rreesseeaarrcchh oonn ccoommppuuttaattiioonnaall ffoorreennssiiccss,, ddiiggiittaallccrriimmee,, aanndd iinnvveessttiiggaattiioonn;; mmeetthhooddss aanndd ssoolluuttiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Chang-Tsun Li.Information Science Reference, ©2010 595 p. $295.00This handbook is intended for students, researchers, law enforcementpersonnel, and IT and multimedia practitioners involved in the use,design, and development of digital devices and techniques for forensicsand crime prevention. In addition to devices, the book also considerslegal issues and information security. The first four chapters review con-cepts and applications of biometrics. Later chapters cover imaging deviceidentification and content integrity verification, data hiding and cryp-tography in document forensics, network security and forensics, SIM andUSIM card forensics, and virtualization technologies. B&w images areincluded. Li teaches computer science at the University of Warwick, UK.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–157–

HV6773 2009-047310 978-1-4129-8025-8HHaattee ccrriimmeess;; ccaauusseess,, ccoonnttrroollss,, aanndd ccoonnttrroovveerrssiieess,, 22dd eedd..Gerstenfeld, Phyllis B.Sage Publications, ©2011 347 p. $44.95 (pa)This undergraduate/ graduate text for courses in departments of crimi-nology, criminal justice, social work, and sociology is designed to makestudents aware of the many controversies surrounding hate crimes. Mostof the book looks at hate crime in the US, but there is also a chapter onhate crime in other countries and the problem of international hatecrime. Special interest boxes address topics such as hate on campus, statehate crime laws, classics of extremist literature, and how to start an anti-hate campaign. An appendix offers excerpts from selected hate crimelaws of different countries. This second edition offers new learning fea-tures: chapter conclusions, discussion questions, Internet exercises, andportraits of victims and perpetrators of hate crimes and individuals whoare active in stopping hate crimes. There is new material on the homelessand immigrants as targets of hate, and a new appendix listing recom-mended films. Gerstenfeld is affiliated with California State University-Stanislaus.

HV6785 978-0-313-35451-9AAmmeerriiccaann ggaannggsstteerrss,, tthheenn aanndd nnooww;; aann eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa..Hendley, Nate.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 275 p. $85.00Toronto-based crime writer and biographer Hendley offers a reference onpeople who control or participate in a criminal organization that usesviolence and illicit means to amass personal money and power. He doesnot include lone criminals nor groups seeking political or social change.He does include people whose career mix criminal gangs with local pol-itics. Though he charts in considerable detail the American Mafia fromits origins in late 19th-century New Orleans to the rise and fall of JohnGotti, he emphasizes that organized crime is not the turf of any one par-ticular ethnic group. A few law enforcers are also included.

HV6789 978-1-904750-42-0WWhhyy wwee kkiillll;; uunnddeerrssttaannddiinngg vviioolleennccee aaccrroossss ccuullttuurreess aannddddiicciipplliinneess..Title main entry. Ed. by Nancy Loucks et al.Middlesex Univ. Press, ©2009 202 p. $37.50 (pa)Criminology, law, and psychology are the main disciplinary frameworkswithin which researchers explore the ethics of killing humans. Theycover homicide in a domestic context, serial killing, whether capital pun-ishment creates more victims, understanding the moral issues sur-rounding abortion, euthanasia, suicide, terrorism as a unique form ofpolitical violence, collective violence and war, and the rank and filekillers of genocide in the massacre at Murambi. Distributed in the US byISBS.

HV6943 2009-046236 978-0-313-38355-7HHoooolliiggaannss,, hhaarrlloottss,, aanndd hhaannggmmeenn;; ccrriimmee aanndd ppuunniisshhmmeennttiinn VViiccttoorriiaann BBrriittaaiinn..Taylor, David. (Criminal history of Britain)Praeger, ©2010 288 p. $44.95Taylor (History [emeritus], University of Huddersfield) examines the evo-lution of the British criminal justice system during from 1837 to 1914, aperiod of modernization, urbanization, and social change. Arranged intofour sections, chapters examine the nature and incidence of crime in theVictorian period; the ways in which authorities attempted to explaincrime and deviant behavior; the creation of criminals by the courts andconstabulary; and the changing punishments meted out to convictedcriminals. Despite the formalization and rationalization of the criminaljustice system, the author suggests that working class behavior was lessregulated during the Victorian period than it had been in EdwardianBritain, and that the police and courts frequently acted to improve theconditions of working people.

HV6947 2009-051901 978-0-202-36351-6CCrriimmee aanndd ppuunniisshhmmeenntt iinn BBrriittaaiinn;; tthhee ppeennaall ssyysstteemm iinntthheeoorryy,, llaaww,, aanndd pprraaccttiiccee,, 22dd eedd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11996677))Walker, Nigel.AldineTransaction, ©2010 373 p. $39.95 (pa)First published in 1965, this work by Walker (emeritus, criminology, U.of Cambridge, UK) examined the British penal system at the time of pub-lication and assessed its characteristics against then current theories ofcriminology. It addressed the scope of the penal system, trends and pat-terns in crime, theories explaining and predicting crime, the system ofdisposal for adults and young offenders, sentencing, and special cate-gories of offender (i.e. the “mentally abnormal,” women, and recidivists).

HV7240 2009-032767 978-1-59460-425-6PPoolliicciinngg tthhee wwoorrlldd;; tthhee pprraaccttiiccee ooff iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall aannddttrraannssnnaattiioonnaall ppoolliicciinngg..Casey, John.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 245 p. $30.00 (pa)Casey (public affairs, Baruch College, City U. of New York) addressesinternational policing responses to new dimensions of crime such as ter-rorism, e-crime, and human trafficking that are increasingly global. Heexplores three key areas: comparative policing and the creation of inter-national good practice, cooperative efforts to respond to transnationaland international crime threats, and peace operations and capacitybuilding in post-conflict and transnational societies. He discusses policingmodels around the world, with case studies of Belize, Norway, andUganda; cross-national comparisons of policing strategies and the chal-lenges of transferring operational approaches from one country toanother; the growth of international and transnational crime and opera-tional responses to it; international arrangements between agencies; andthe implications of the military-police-civilian interface. The focus is oninstitutional level work of police agencies, and policing, not crime.

HV7419 2009-037022 978-1-4129-5081-7AAddmmiinniissttrraattiioonn aanndd mmaannaaggeemmeenntt iinn ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee;; aasseerrvviiccee qquuaalliittyy aapppprrooaacchh..Allen, Jennifer M. and Rajeev Sawhney.Sage Publications, ©2010 529 p. $74.95 (pa)Allen (political science and criminal justice, North Georgia College &State U.) and Sawhney (management, Western Illinois U.) offer a textbookgeared toward encouraging students to take a personal stake in theirfuture roles in criminal justice services. It also asks them to examinetheir own views of what management is in the criminal justice field. Theauthors tackle an array of topics, including: the service quality approach,environmental influences, motivation and leadership, communication,police administration, courts, probation and parole, prisons and jails,security management, and conflict, power, and ethical issues. The bookalso may interest justice administrators.

HV7419 978-1-84392-769-3CCoommppaarraattiivvee ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee,, 22dd eedd..Pakes, Francis.Willan Publishing, ©2010 212 p. $35.95 (pa)This text for well-prepared students employs a thematic rather thancountry-by-country approach to examine the ways different countries andjurisdictions deal with the stages of the criminal justice process, frompolicing through sentencing. The book focuses more on proceduralaspects of justice than on substantive issues, with in-depth analysis ofprosecution systems and the way trials are conducted. Examples aregiven from around the world, from policing styles in Japan to the genderbalance of the judiciary in the Czech Republic. This second editionreflects advances in research since the first edition was published in2004. There is expanded material on global trends in crime and justice,and individual chapters are now devoted to developments in interna-tional policing and international criminal justice. Pakes is a reader incomparative criminology at the Institute of Criminal Justice Studies,University of Portsmouth. The book is distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV7419 2010-001773 978-1-4129-7057-0CCrriittiiccaall iissssuueess iinn ccrriimmee aanndd jjuussttiiccee;; tthhoouugghhtt,, ppoolliiccyy,, aannddpprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Maguire and Dan Okada.Sage Publications, ©2011 377 p. $49.95 (pa)All the conventional themes in a criminal justice or criminology cur-riculum are touched on in this textbook, designed to service a capstonecourse or a first introduction to the field. Scholars of the two disciplinesdiscuss paradigms, offenses and offenders, policing and lawenforcement, and corrections and societal response. Among specifictopics are unleashing the power of criminal justice theory, sex crimes,police work in the 21st century, the juvenile justice system, and the philo-sophical and ideological underpinnings of correction.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –158–

HV7419 978-1-84392-514-9CCrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee;; llooccaall aanndd gglloobbaall..Title main entry. Ed. by Deborah Drake et al.Willan Publishing, ©2010 270 p. $39.95 (pa)DNA-testing kits on British subways to prevent scofflaws from spitting atauthorities? A mandatory system for tracking the children of prisoners,on the grounds that they are likely to commit crimes in the future? Thisundergraduate criminal justice text asks readers to reconsider the via-bility of viewing criminal justice systems as self-contained sovereignentities in an era when nation-state sovereignty is being challenged byinternational courts, human rights instruments, multinational private-security enterprises, and possibilities for global surveillance. The text con-tains activities and discussion questions in a lively two-color layout withhigh-interest b&w photos, news excerpts, and document extracts focusingon current examples from the UK and around the world. Topics coveredinclude cultures of control, restoration and informal justice, risk pre-diction, surveillance and social ordering, transnational policing andsecurity, and globalization and human rights. The book is distributed inthe US by ISBS. Drake is affiliated with The Open University, UK.

HV7431 2009-019911 978-1-4200-6214-4CCrriimmee pprreevveennttiioonn;; tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Schneider, Stephen.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 369 p. $69.95 (pa)Written for students and practitioners, this textbook explores basic con-cepts and theories of crime prevention, as well as the skills necessary toplan, implement, evaluate, and sustain effective interventions. Schneider(sociology and criminology, Saint Mary’s U., Canada) considers dominantprevention approaches such as community policing, the role of the gov-ernment and police, and process-oriented issues like planning and imple-mentation. Some background in criminology and knowledge of basicterms and concepts is assumed.

HV7921 2009-031080 978-1-59451-545-3DDeemmooccrraattiicc ppoolliicciinngg iinn aa cchhaannggiinngg wwoorrlldd..Manning, Peter K.Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 306 p. $88.00Observing that policing in a democracy is not by definition democraticpolicing, Manning (College of Criminal Justice, Northeastern U.) theo-rizes, using a modified version of John Rawls’ theory of justice andpolitical liberalism, the nature and function of policing in relation to thepromotion or impedance of democratic social order in Anglo-Americandemocracies. He defines democratic policing with reference to the dif-ference principle of Rawls, which concerns the obligation of those inpublic office to refrain from doing injustice via stated policies or apattern of concerted action. He then analyzes the structural features ofAmerican policing and examines efforts to reform policing over the past25 years. Finally, he turns to the practices of routine policing, discussinghow nondemocratic policing can have a range of negative consequences,from promoting a race-based view of policing to greatly increasing prisonpopulations.

HV7921 978-1-84392-760-0IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ppoolliiccee ccooooppeerraattiioonn;; eemmeerrggiinngg iissssuueess,, tthheeoorryy,,aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Frédéric Lemieux.Willan Publishing, ©2010 366 p. $49.50 (pa)Lemieux (police science, The George Washington U.) presents 16 researchpapers that draw on concepts from criminology, ethics, organizationalscience, political science, and sociology in order to probe current changesand issues in transnational police cooperation. The papers are organizedinto four sections that address such conceptual issue as the differencesand similarities between multilateral and bilateral cooperation incriminal matters at the European level, European police cooperation andevolutionary governance, and Europol’s utilization of informal networksfor information exchange; specific initiatives of police cooperation suchas a regional analysis center in Switzerland, law enforcement cooperationin the Meuse-Rhine Euroregion, and police cooperation in investigationsof organized crime and terrorism in Canada; special issues such as coop-eration between the US and the European union in counter-terrorism,cross-strait cooperation between China and Taiwan, the role of police inpeacekeeping efforts in Africa, and cooperation between Australianpolice and military personnel deployed in East Timor and the SolomonIslands; and finally issues of accountability and effectiveness. Distributedin the US by ISBS.

HV7935 2009-052186 978-1-4224-6324-6PPoolliiccee aaddmmiinniissttrraattiioonn,, 77tthh eedd..Cordner, Gary W. and Kathryn E. Scarborough.LexisNexis, ©2010 531 p. $73.65 (pa)Material in this text for students in police administration is presented inthe simplest possible terms. Part I introduces police administration, andPart II focuses on the traditional perspective, with chapters on formu-lation of policies, functions of police management, and the police exec-utive. Part III takes the human perspective, covering individuals andgroups in the police organization, cultural diversity, and leadership. PartIV highlights the strategic management perspective, with discussion ofareas such as evaluating police performance, and crime control and com-munity relations strategies. A final chapter looks at contemporary issues,such as greener police departments, and modern management perspec-tives, such as emotional intelligence. Five detailed case studies invite stu-dents to apply the theories and tools introduced in the text toorganizational problems. This seventh edition contains a new chapter onthe police and homeland security, and increased information on topicssuch as information sharing and interagency cooperation. Cordner isaffiliated with Kutztown University. Scarborough is affiliated withEastern Kentucky University.

HV7936 2009-048276 978-1-932777-90-1LLaaww eennffoorrcceemmeenntt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; wwhhaatt wwoorrkkss aanndd wwhhaattddooeessnn’’tt!!..Carpenter, Michael J. and Roger Fulton.Looseleaf Law Publications, ©2010 165 p. $19.95Carpenter (criminal justice, Adirondack Community College) and Fulton(author, formerly New York State Police) offer practical nuts and boltsadvice for law enforcement personnel with an eye on leadership careersin supervision and administration. The authors’ pragmatic adviceincludes: preparing for management positions, reading and getting alongwith superiors, getting feedback from subordinates without sacrificingleadership credibility, improving management style, and protecting theagency from corruption, insubordination, and other critical problems.

HV8023 2009-023220 978-1-60714-626-1HHiissttoorryy iinn bblluuee;; 116600 yyeeaarrss ooff wwoommeenn ppoolliiccee,, sshheerriiffffss,,ddeetteeccttiivveess,, aanndd ssttaattee ttrrooooppeerrss..Duffin, Allan T.Kaplan Publishing, ©2010 337 p. $27.95Duffin, a historian, writer, TV producer, and military veteran whoteaches American history, documents the history of women in Americanlaw enforcement from 1845 to the present. He describes how womenentered the profession in what was considered “women’s work”—caringfor female prisoners, helping runaway children and delinquents, andpatrolling department stores and dance halls—to their rise, with the helpof changes in federal law, to being about 13 percent of the police force.Using personal stories of both active and retire officers and newspaperarticles as a basis, he addresses changes in social attitudes; the effects ofevents in women’s history; challenges they faced; the tools and technologyof the job, which were not originally provided to women; and problemslike deaths on duty, relationships among coworkers, and women whodidn’t make the force. He focuses on municipal police forces, includinghighway patrol, sheriff’s departments, and transit police and park patrol.

HV8073 2008-412108 978-1-60692-296-5EElleeccttrroonniicc ccrriimmee sscceennee iinnvveessttiiggaattiioonn,, 22dd eedd.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Title main entry. Ed. by David E. Learner [U.S. Dept. of Justice, Officeof Justice Programs].Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 202 p. $62.10This guide for state and local law enforcement personnel and other firstresponders is an edited and excerpted edition of two US Department ofJustice publications. It offers detailed guidelines on recognizing, col-lecting, preserving, and storing digital evidence at the crime scene. PartI provides general guidelines on handling digital evidence. It reviewstypes of electronic devices that may be found at the crime scene, andtools for collecting digital evidence. Part I continues by setting outdetailed processes for securing, evaluating, and documenting the sceneand moving and storing digital evidence. It also sorts digital evidenceconsiderations by crime category, such as child abuse, counterfeiting, andfraud. Part II focuses on investigations involving e-mail, web sites, filesharing networks, bulletin boards, and message boards. There is detailedinformation on tracing Internet addresses to the source. The bookincludes glossaries, cases, sample documents, and a list of organizationsproviding technical resources, as well as b&w photos and illustrations.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–159–

HV8073 2009-042280 978-1-4200-8893-9EEtthhiiccss;; aanndd tthhee pprraaccttiiccee ooff ffoorreennssiicc sscciieennccee..Bowen, Robin T. (International forensic science and investigation series)CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 197 p. $69.95Bowen, assistant director of the Forensic Science Initiative, discusses theethics involved in forensic work. In textbook format, she looks at dif-ferent situations, asking the reader/student to construct the ethics of thebehavior cited, giving alternate actions that might have been taken. Shealso covers the ethical problems in related fields of law enforcement andtrials. The mutability of ethics among cultures presents a problem butBowen notes that this is one reason for codes of ethics established by pro-fessional groups. The social pressures on a forensic scientist, particularlyto fudge the data, are addressed as well. The situational examples areparticularly useful for the student as they demonstrate the fine lines ofethical behavior that exist.

HV8073 2009-036755 978-0-7637-6241-4AAnn iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo ccrriimmee sscceennee iinnvveessttiiggaattiioonn..Dutelle, Aric W.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 532 p. $83.95 (pa)Dutelle, who has extensive field work in crime scene investigation alongwith being a professor of criminal science at the University of Wisconsin-Platteville, has compiled an introduction to the subject for use as atextbook. He covers every aspect of the investigation and the methodsused to collect evidence. Cases of death, drugs, sex crimes, and others arediscussed but the procedure is similar in each case. The chapter on arsonwas written by expert Joseph Lefebvre. Each chapter contains a list of keyterms and a summary of learning objectives. Boxes give examples ofcases in which evidence was mishandled or badly interpreted, an inter-esting caution for students. There is a glossary and appendices giving ahistorical timeline, forensic databases and lists of what to put in a crimescene kit. Websites provide accompanying information for both studentsand teachers.

HV8073 2009-028634 978-0-398-07903-1PPrroobbiinngg iinnttoo ccoolldd ccaasseess;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorr iinnvveessttiiggaattoorrss..Mendell, Ronald L.C.C. Thomas, ©2010 302 p. $63.95Mendell, an investigator and computer professor, takes the readerthrough the process of finding information on cold cases. This is notintended as a manual for professionals but as a starting point for classes.He also explains the subject in terms that a general reader who wants toknow how accurate television and film dramas are can find the answers.While homicide cases are the most dramatic, Mendell also discusses com-puter fraud, liability cases and theft. The book is balanced between solidinformation on collecting and understanding evidence and methods forsynthesizing it systematically to find the truth. He covers witness inter-views, official reports such as autopsies and information to look for oncea suspect is identified. There are many Internet sources listed but theycome with the caveat that not everything on the web is accurate. The sec-tions on finding background information on different aspects of aninvestigation are useful both to those planning to become investigatorsand those who are writing scripts. The appendix gives a series of check-lists drawn from the text and the bibliography contains websites for gov-ernment bureaus as well as print resources.

HV8073 2009-039257 978-1-59102-775-1SShhoocckkiinngg ccaasseess ffrroomm DDrr.. HHeennrryy LLeeee’’ss ffoorreennssiicc ffiilleess..Lee, Henry C. and Jerry Labriola.Prometheus Books, ©2010 264 p. $26.00Lee (forensic science, U. of New Haven) and Labriola (former pedia-trician, lecturer, and author) offer five true crime stories. What makesthis book more interesting than many in the genre is that Lee’s expe-rience in forensics also gave him an ability to observe acutely and recounthis observations in great detail. Some of the stories here include the PhilSpector murder case, the brutal murder of a nun in an Ohio church, andthe genocide in Bosnia-Herzegovina.

HV8144 2009-040219 978-1-55849-729-0TThhee FFBBII aanndd tthhee CCaatthhoolliicc CChhuurrcchh,, 11993355--11996622..Rosswurm, Steven.U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2009 330 p. $39.95The story is about men and power, says Rosswurm (history, Lake ForestCollege), more broadly about gendered values and institutional authority.He recounts how members of the American Catholic Church, especiallyits hierarchy, worked with the US Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI)and its director Herbert Hoover (1895-1972) to defend, among other corevalues, patriarchal authority in society and family. He explains that theycould not imagine a good social order in which power was not exercisedthus. Though the main Catholic actors were clerics, he shows there is evi-dence for mutual admiration between Hoover and the laity as well.

HV8195 978-1-84392-773-0AA cceerrttaaiinn sshhaarree ooff llooww ccuunnnniinngg;; aa hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee BBoowwSSttrreeeett rruunnnneerrss,, 11779922--11883399..Cox, David J.Willan Publishing, ©2010 280 p. $69.95Cox (Institute of Law, Politics and Justice, Keele U., the UK) has writtenan expansive history of the early foreruners of modern police force,describing cases of all types, both in London and the surrounding areas.Frequently including quotes from primary sources, the history details theway the Principal Officers were hired, trained, and employed; their rolefollowing the creation of a police force in 1829; and detailed accounts ofactual cases. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV8242 2009-033046 978-1-58826-729-0TThhee ppoolliiccee iinn wwaarr;; ffiigghhttiinngg iinnssuurrggeennccyy,, tteerrrroorriissmm,, aannddvviioolleenntt ccrriimmee..Bayley, David H. and Robert M. Perito.Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2010 195 p. $55.00Prompted by a question from a US Marine officer regarding how heshould have gone about training police in occupied Iraq, this work byBayley (criminal justice, State U. of New York at Albany) and Perito (asenior program officer at the US Institute of Peace) explore the role ofpolicing in “foreign stabilization and reconstruction” efforts. Theyaddress such issues as the role of the police in confronting violence, thedivision of labor between the military and the police in suppressing polit-ically destabilizing violence, the proper training of the police for sup-porting “sustainable self-government,” the overarching governmentalreforms that may be required in order to enable local police to beeffective as an instrument of “democratic development,” and possiblereforms of US policy for improving the approach to the security sector in“post-conflict environments.” In addressing these topics, they examinethe experience of US military interventions, particularly in Afghanistanand Iraq, and explore the place of policing in counterinsurgency doctrine.

HV8290 2009-040274 978-1-4200-7870-1RRiisskk aannaallyyssiiss aanndd sseeccuurriittyy ccoouunntteerrmmeeaassuurree sseelleeccttiioonn..Norman, Thomas L.CRC Press, ©2010 396 p. $59.95Security consultant Norman describes a risk analysis process that hebelieves fits the requirements of every methodology approved by the USDepartment of Homeland Security and takes into account all of therequirements of every major risk analysis methodology. The approachalso created budgets that are prioritized by relative effectiveness and rel-ative risk. Twenty chapters address Department of Homeland Security-approved risk analysis methods, risk analysis skills and tools, criticalthinking and the risk analysis process, asset characterization and identi-fication, criticality and consequence analysis, threat analysis, assessingvulnerability, estimating probability, the risk analysis process, priori-tizing risk, security policy and countermeasure goals, developing effectivesecurity policies, countermeasure goals and strategies, types of counter-measures, countermeasure selection and budgeting tools, security effec-tiveness metrics, cost-effectiveness metrics, and writing effective reports.

HV8599 2009-015068 978-1-59451-508-8TToorrttuurree aass ppuubblliicc ppoolliiccyy;; rreessttoorriinngg UU..SS.. ccrreeddiibbiilliittyy oonn tthheewwoorrlldd ssttaaggee..Pfiffner, James P.Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 209 p. $86.00 (pa)The “few bad apples” dismissal of US soldiers torturing prisoners in Iraq(and probably elsewhere) is belied by the US administration publiclyseeking guidelines for torture, says Pfiffner (public policy, George MasonU.), and there can be question now that torture is now official US policy.His response to the recognition has been to trace the path and mecha-nisms by which it happened. He covers US detainee policy, policymakingon torture, operations as the implementation of policy, moral and behav-ioral issues in the logic of torture, torture and the law, and commandresponsibility.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –160–

HV8665 2009930406 978-0-7546-2905-4TThhiinnkkiinngg aabboouutt ppuunniisshhmmeenntt;; ppeennaall ppoolliiccyy aaccrroossss ssppaaccee,,ttiimmee aanndd ddiisscciipplliinnee..Tonry, Michael. (Pioneers in contemporary criminology)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 518 p. $165.00Tonry (U. of Minnesota Law School) collects sixteen of his own writingsin the field of criminal law, previously published between 1978 and 2009.In putting together the collection, he has chosen to emphasize key themesof his career: the role of race and ethnicity in crime and punishment,comparative and American penal policy, sentencing policy in the UnitedStates, and the normative theory of punishment that underlies sentencingpolicy. Specific topics include ethnicity, crime, and immigration; themalign affects of drugs and crime control policies on black Americans;punishment policies and patterns in Western countries; determinants ofpenal policies; sentencing reform in the United States; mandatorypenalties; purposes and functions of sentencing; interchangeability ofpunishments in principle; and obsolescence and immanence in penaltheory and policy. Also included is a bibliography of Tonry’s publishedwritings.

HV8688 2009-019467 978-1-84310-979-2WWhhaatt hhaavvee II ddoonnee??;; aa vviiccttiimm eemmppaatthhyy pprrooggrraammmmee ffoorryyoouunngg ppeeooppllee.. ((DDVVDD iinncclluuddeedd))Wallis, Pete et al.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 204 p. $49.95 (pa)For individuals working with young offenders in schools, institutions,restorative justice services, children’s homes, youth groups, and other set-tings, Wallis (restorative justice, Oxfordshire Youth Offending Service, UK)et al. present a program to encourage empathy in young people who havecommitted crimes or hurt others through their actions, challenging themto face what they have done and consider how they can repair thedamage. The program can be used with youth of different ages, offenses,backgrounds, and abilities, in individual and group settings, and recog-nizes that youth offenders often experience victimization themselves.Exercises help youth explore the causes of their crimes, empathize withtheir victims and others affected, and repair the harm, and as a part ofa restorative process. The DVD contains interviews with offenders andvictims.

HV8693 2009-049037 978-1-59460-589-5RRaannkkiinngg ccoorrrreeccttiioonnaall ppuunniisshhmmeennttss;; vviieewwss ffrroomm ooffffeennddeerrss,,pprraaccttiittiioonneerrss,, aanndd tthhee ppuubblliicc..May, David C. and Peter B. Wood.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 168 p. $22.00 (pa)May (criminal justice, Eastern Kentucky U.) and Wood (sociology, EasternMichigan U.) offer new perspectives on the prison/probation “continuumof corrections” proposed by Morris and Tonry in Between Prison andProbation: Intermediate Punishments in a Rational Sentencing System(Oxford U. Press, 1990). Based on data collected by May and Wood overthe past decade from convicted offenders in prison and in community-based sanctions, criminal court judges, probation and parole offices, andthe general public, the authors question whether prison and probationdefine the upper and lower boundaries of a continuum of punishments.A “rational” sentencing system and continuum of sanctions developed bythe criminal justice researchers and practitioners may not be effective ifit is not seen in the same way by the criminal offenders it is meant todeter. For criminal justice students, scholars, and practitioners.

HV8699 2009-036900 978-0-202-36328-8CCaappiittaall ppuunniisshhmmeenntt.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11997722))Title main entry. Ed. by James A. McCafferty.AldineTransaction, ©2010 273 p. $29.95 (pa)In this reprint from 1972, McCafferty, a sociologist specializing in crimi-nology and statistics who has worked for the US Courts, provides 16 pre-viously published essays on both sides of the debate of capitalpunishment. Essays discuss the death penalty as it existed under Englishcriminal law in the sixteenth century; the legal status of capital pun-ishment in the world and the US, showing there is no evidence it pro-vides deterrence; and concerns like deterrence, discrimination, protectionof society, the role of public opinion, and legal issues. Position papersboth for and against the death penalty follow, by philosophers, police andprison practitioners, activists, and attorneys, who also tackle such issuesas rehabilitation and abolishment. The book is meant for sociology,political science, and law courses.

HV8964 2009-041576 978-0-89357-366-9TThhee lliittttlleesstt eenneemmiieess;; cchhiillddrreenn iinn tthhee sshhaaddooww ooff tthhee gguullaagg..Title main entry. Ed. and trans. by Deborah Hoffman.Slavica Publishers, ©2009 189 p. $22.95 (pa)Despite Stalin’s claim that “the son does not answer for the father,”children of enemies of the people often ended up homeless, in police-runorphanages or forced labor camps. A freelance translator collects andprovides historical context on personal narratives drawn from DetiGulaga (Children of the Gulag), compiled/edited by Semyon Vilenssky,founder of a Moscow-based organization of prison camp survivors.Ironically, many letters ended with a thank-you to Comrade Stalin for ahappy childhood. Hoffman includes a brief glossary.

HV9069 2009-052375 978-0-7637-5810-3JJuuvveenniillee ddeelliinnqquueennccyy;; aann iinntteeggrraatteedd aapppprrooaacchh,, 22dd eedd..Burfeind, James W. and Dawn Jeglum Bartusch.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 382 p. $96.95 (pa)Integrating theory and research, Burfeind (sociology, U. of Montana,Missoula) and Bartusch’s (sociology and criminology, Valparaiso U,Indiana) textbook provides students with an introductory overview of thesocietal problem of juvenile delinquency including theories and toolsused in the study of the issue; the nature of delinquency; biological, psy-chological, and sociological theories used by criminologists to explaindelinquency and social responses to it; prevention and early intervention;and contemporary juvenile justice. For the second edition, all chaptershave been revised and updated, and two new chapters added on pre-vention and intervention, and on the “delinquent event” and the imme-diate factors surrounding the decision to offend.

HV9069 978-1-84392-717-4YYoouutthh jjuussttiiccee hhaannddbbooookk;; tthheeoorryy,, ppoolliiccyy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Wayne Taylor et al.Willan Publishing, ©2010 266 p. $89.95For practitioners and students, Taylor (health and social care, Open U.,UK) et al. compile 23 chapters that explain the theory, policy, and practiceof the youth justice system in the UK. They cover the knowledge andskills needed for practice in childhood and youth contexts, includingstructural factors, social class, bullying, and equality; research and evi-dence; policy and penal realities, parenting, and restorative justice;reflective practice; and international rights and comparative practice.Many of the contributors, who work in health and social care, socialwork, criminal justice, criminology, youth justice, and criminal psy-chology in the UK, attended a colloquium organized by the Open U. inOctober 2007 to inform the curriculum for the UK’s Foundation Degreein Youth Justice. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HV9104 2009-041047 978-1-59332-376-9SSttaattee wwaarrddss,, lloonngg--tteerrmm ccaarree,, aanndd ddeelliinnqquueenntt aaccttss;; aannaannaallyyssiiss ooff ssoocciiaall bboonndd ffaaccttoorrss..Bost, Noel S. (Criminal justice: recent scholarship)LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2010 184 p. $62.00This study tests two structural models of violent delinquency amongfoster care youth, which are derived from elements of Hirschi’s (1969)social bond theory. Using survey data from the Midwest Study of theAdult Functioning of Former Foster Youth, the study examines twomodels that hypothesize that adverse out-of-home care experience isassociated with violent delinquency directly and also indirectly throughpoor social bonds such as poor parent/caregiver attachments and poorschool commitment. In the first model, parent/caregiver attachments arecharacterized by closeness to birth parents and grandparents. In thesecond model, parent/caregiver attachments are characterized bycloseness to foster parents. About 30 pages of appendices give infor-mation on the study instrument and distribution of variables. Bostteaches at the University of North Carolina-Greensboro.

HV9105 2009-027664 978-0-8070-0064-9II ddoonn’’tt wwiisshh nnoobbooddyy ttoo hhaavvee aa lliiffee lliikkee mmiinnee;; ttaalleess ooff kkiiddssiinn aadduulltt lloocckkuupp..Chura, David.Beacon Press, ©2010 216 p. $24.95US courts send 250,000 minors to adult prisons each year. Drawing onhis experience teaching juveniles in an adult county penitentiary for 10years, Chura profiles 18 kids, some of whom have never lived in a stablesingle-family home situation. Despite the drugs, gang violence, AIDS,poverty, and abuse, the kids’ spirits still shine through. Chura also intro-duces correctional officers hardened by the system, who deal withproblems at home similar to the ones the young inmates have suffered.The author has worked with teenagers for 40 years. His writing hasappeared in the New York Times. There is no subject index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–161–

HV9147 978-1-903765-91-3YYoouutthh jjuussttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Jenny Johnstone and Michele Burman. (Policyand practice in health and social care; no.9)Dunedin Academic Press, ©2010 113 p. $24.65 (pa)For individuals working with children and young people in Scotland,trainees, researchers, and others outside Scotland, Johnstone (law, U. ofNewcastle-upon-Tyne, UK) and Burman (Scottish Centre for Crime andJustice Research) compile seven essays that provide an overview of theScottish youth justice process within the context of a recent majoroverhaul of the system. Contributors working in criminology, socialwork, and law in the country describe the different contexts of youthjustice and the effectiveness of policy and prevention programs, as wellas problems and future challenges. They consider how the system works,its structures, practices, philosophy, legal framework, and evidence-basedpolicy, the anti-social behavior agenda, what crimes are committed byyoung offenders, and where and why they occur. Distributed in the USby ISBS.

HV9275 2009-043897 978-1-4129-7018-1RReetthhiinnkkiinngg ccoorrrreeccttiioonnss;; rreehhaabbiilliittaattiioonn,, rreeeennttrryy,, aannddrreeiinntteeggrraattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Lior Gideon and Hung-En Sung.Sage Publications, ©2011 427 p. $89.95Empirical studies and theoretical discussions comprise a textbook for agraduate or advanced undergraduate corrections course on getting pris-oners ready and letting them go. They examine what the public thinkspublic policy should be regarding convicted offenders, and view theentire corrections process, beginning with intake and assessment, fromthe perspective of their eventual return to society. Among the topics arehow supportive people really are of getting-tough-on-crime policies andthe Second Chance Act, major rehabilitation approaches, diversion pro-grams, prison-based educational and vocational training programs,seeking medical and psychiatric attention, faith-base prisoner reentry,moving parole forward with a new model of behavioral management,and employment barriers to reintegration.

HV9276 2009-027455 978-1-4224-6140-2CCoorrrreeccttiioonnaall ccoouunnsseelliinngg aanndd rreehhaabbiilliittaattiioonn,, 77tthh eedd..Van Voorhis, Patricia et al.LexisNexis, ©2009 399 p. $49.95 (pa)Many criminal acts are linked to psychological problems that can betreated. This text covers correctional and offender counseling and reha-bilitation with two objectives; to provide an orientation to readers inter-ested in a career in the field, and to supply professionals who work withoffenders a skill set of applicable interventions. Subjects discussedinclude the history of offender counseling, therapeutic interventions,assessment and diagnosis, and contemporary approaches. Van Voorhis(criminal justice, University of Cincinnati) and contributors provide anoverview of offender counseling, and comprehensive coverage of themain approaches to rehabilitation. The final chapter is dedicated to asynthesis of the work presented in earlier chapters, and a analysis of thereal-world effectiveness of the different treatments.

HV9345 978-1-84392-766-2WWhhaatt eellssee wwoorrkkss??;; ccrreeaattiivvee wwoorrkk wwiitthh ooffffeennddeerrss..Title main entry. Ed. by Jo Brayford et al.Willan Publishing, ©2010 290 p. $39.95 (pa)Four of the 13 studies are revised from presentations to an April 2008annual conference in Newport, England, and the anthology as a wholewas inspired from ideas expressed there. British and North Americanscholars and practitioners in criminology, criminal justice, lawenforcement, corrections, psychology, and other fields challenge the pre-vailing top-down approaches to policy and the cognitive behaviouralismit relies on. Among their topics are desistance theory and probationpractice, women offenders as more troubled than troublesome, creativeworking with minority ethnic offenders, incorporating circles of supportand the good lives model into contemporary sex offender treatment, andoffenders in forestry and conservation work settings. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

HV9466 2009-043020 978-0-202-36334-9AAmmeerriiccaann ppeennoollooggyy;; aa hhiissttoorryy ooff ccoonnttrrooll,, 22dd eedd..Blomberg, Thomas G. and Karol Lucken.AldineTransaction, ©2010 299 p. $29.95 (pa)Blomberg (criminology, Florida State U.) and Lucken (criminal justice, U.of Central Florida) begin their account in colonial America during the1600s and extend it to 2009. They describe the context, ideas, practices,and consequences of various penal reforms and identify patterns andrelationships that draw conclusions that some, they warn, might find tooOrwellian to stomach. Among the stages they describe are public pun-ishment in colonial America 1600-1790, the age of the penitentiary in the19th century, Progressivism and juvenile court from 1900 to the 60s,prison subcultures during the 1950s and 1960s, decentralizing correc-tions in the 1960s and 1970s, the penal system as surrogate institutionfor special populations, and punishment in the millennial age. No date iscited for the first edition; the second is expanded.

HV9650 978-1-905483-72-3WWrriitttteenn iinn ssttoonnee;; tthhee ggrraaffffiittii iinn KKiillmmaaiinnhhaamm jjaaiill.. ((CCDDiinncclluuddeedd))O’Sullivan, Niamh.Liberties Press, ©2010 100 p. $24.95 (pa)For 125 years, Dublin’s Kilmainham jail housed many key figures inIrish history, from the heroes of the 1798 rebellion to political prisonersfrom the Irish War of Independence and Civil War of the 20th century.Many of these prisoners inscribed their names and other messages onthe prison’s walls and doors—graffiti that has been falling victim to timeand decay. Kilmainham preservationist O’Sullivan has photographed theremaining graffiti and researched the people who made them. The resultof her labors is this handsome and sometimes heart-wrenching book,which will appeal to readers interested in Ireland and its history.

HV9950 2009-048614 978-0-313-38347-2TThhee AAmmeerriiccaann ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee ssyysstteemm;; hhooww iitt wwoorrkkss,, hhoowwiitt ddooeessnn’’tt wwoorrkk,, aanndd hhooww ttoo ffiixx iitt..Falk, Gerhard.Praeger, ©2010 250 p. $44.95In this work for students and general readers, Falk (sociology, the StateUniversity of New York-Buffalo) looks at the shortcomings of the UScriminal justice system and provides suggestions for making it moreequitable and more attuned to the needs of citizens in the 21st century.He reviews the history of the US criminal justice system and the ‘prisonindustrial complex,’ and gives background on some of the mostimportant changes in the administration of criminal justice, such asefforts to abolish the death penalty. Other subjects explored are thepolice, prosecuting violent crime, prosecuting white-collar crime,defending the accused, and the American jury. The bibliography citesbooks, journals and magazines, newspapers, and documents. The authorhas written 19 other books.

HV9950 2009-025349 978-1-4200-8670-6EEtthhiiccss ffoorr ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee pprrooffeessssiioonnaallss..Roberson, Cliff and Scott Mire.CRC Press, ©2010 285 p. $79.95For students and professionals in criminal justice, Roberson (criminaljustice, Kaplan U.) and Mire (criminal justice, U. of Louisiana atLafayette) introduce ethical issues that confront law enforcement, judicialsystem, and correctional professionals like judges, lawyers, police, andprison officers. They cover the definition, history, and principles ofethics, schools of thought, and aspects such as corruption and man-agement, abuse of authority and power, lying and deception, prejudiceand discrimination, the criminal justice system and prosecutions, thepolice, corrections, and victims’ services, with examples of cases andlaws.

HV9950 2009-035996 978-1-59332-381-3PPoolliiccee uussee ooff iinntteelllliiggeennccee nneettwwoorrkkss ffoorr rreedduucciinngg ccrriimmee..Johnson, Charles L. (Criminal justice: recent scholarship)LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2010 251 p. $70.00Johnson (criminal justice, Washington State U.) offers a well-reasoned dis-cussion of policing and the overwhelming need for improved communi-cations. The author points out that police agencies typically are, becauseof the specialized nature of the work police personnel do, siloed—dividedinto sub-agencies that don’t routinely communicate with each other. Theauthor details agency structure and the benefits to be gained from com-munications and information sharing as policy rather than as incidentalto a given occasion. The author also addresses the current state ofpolicing, police technologies, people, and professional culture.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –162–

HV9950 2009-006972 978-0-8166-3901-4PPrriissoonnss ooff ppoovveerrttyy..Wacquant, Loïc. (Contradictions; 23)U. of Minnesota Press, ©2009 217 p. $20.00 (pa)European governments are increasingly relying on guns and prisons todeal with the effects of unemployment and the withering of social pro-tection, says Wacquant (sociology, U. of California-Berkeley and Center desociologie européenne in Paris), and he lays the blame squarely on thedoorstep of the US. Writing for both academics and activists, he describeshow Reagan-era conservative think tanks devised this new punitivereality as a weapon in their crusade to dismantle the welfare state, andhow it jumped borders and became established in the Old World. Theshift from social state to penal state, he warns portends a society inwhich the Invisible Hand of the market is enforced by the Iron Fist ofpunishment. Les Prisons de la misère was first published in 1999 byRaisons d’agir Editions, Paris.

PPOOLLIITTIICCAALL SSCCIIEENNCCEE

HX39 2009-025879 978-1-4027-6888-0MMaarrxx.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11998800))Singer, Peter. (Brief insights)Sterling Publishing Co., ©2010 148 p. $14.95Singer (bioethics, Princeton U.) sets out a central vision of the world thatunderlies and unites the voluminous writing of economist and politicalphilosopher Marx (1818-83). He covers a life and its impact, the youngHegelian, from God to money, enter the proletariat, the first Marxism,alienation as a theory of history, the goal of history, economics, and com-munism. He concludes by suggesting what ideas of Marx should beretained and which dropped or revised.

HX40 2010920350 978-1-60488-027-4LLeenniinn’’ss ffiinnaall ffiigghhtt;; ssppeeeecchheess aanndd wwrriittiinnggss,, 11992222--2233,, 22dd eedd..Lenin, V. I.Pathfinder Press, ©2010 379 p. $20.00 (pa)Following the Bolshevik Revolution, a major split erupted in theCommunist Party concerning the proletarian nature of the state and theinternationalist outlook of the communist movement. This work fromPathfinder presents a collection of late writings by Lenin in order toanswer the question of what his views on these matters were as he suf-fered illness and finally death brought on by multiple strokes while thispolitical battle was being waged. The collection aims to demonstrate thatLenin was opposed to the trajectory that the politically victorious Stalinand his allies were to embark upon following Lenin’s death. Severalarticles and letters appear in English for the first time. Jack Barnes, theNational Secretary of the Socialist Workers Party, and Steve Clark,Pathfinder Press editor, provide an introduction and analysis of thehistory of the struggle.

HX83 2009-044442 978-1-4128-1056-2TThhee ccoommmmuunniisstt eexxppeerriieennccee iinn AAmmeerriiccaa;; aa ppoolliittiiccaall aannddssoocciiaall hhiissttoorryy..Klehr, Harvey.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 277 p. $39.95Klehr (politics and history, Emory U.) collects 27 essays that illustrate thecourse of his career studying communism, espionage, and the Cold War.They are arranged topically, in sections on American exceptionalism,American communism and its splinters, the debate between revisionismand traditionalism, and espionage and scholarship on Venona docu-ments. Among specific topics are Marxist theory in search of America,immigrant leadership in the Communist Party USA, new evidence on anold controversy concerning communism and the United Auto Workers,the case of the legless veteran, a vigil against totalitarianism, the myth ofpremature anti-fascists, reflections on anti-anti-communism, and thestrange case of Roosevelt’s secret agent.

HX800 2009-031754 978-1-84519-291-4TThhee ffuuttuurriisstt ssyynnddrroommee..Ohana, David. (Nihilist order; v.III)Sussex Academic Press, ©2010 206 p. $74.95Ohana (modern European history, Ben-Gurion U. of the Negev, Israel)concludes his The Nihilist Order trilogy, consisting of The Dawn of PoliticalNihilism, Homo Mythicus, and this work. Together, they investigate theconnections between nihilism and totalitarianism in the historical devel-opment of the European radical right and radical left. Here, he focuseson aesthetic aspects through an analysis of the futurist movements inItaly, Russia, and Britain associated respectively with the figures ofFilippo Marinetti, Vladimir Mayakovsky, and Wyndham Lewis. In each,he finds the intellectual, cultural, mythical, and political elements of the“futurist syndrome.” These elements include “destruction of the past andcontempt for history, glorification of modern dynamism and political vio-lence, a cult of the future and innovation, and the creation of an ex nihilomyth.” Distributed in the US by ISBS.

HX917 2009-018098 978-1-58322-894-4BBaakkuunniinn;; tthhee ccrreeaattiivvee ppaassssiioonn;; aa bbiiooggrraapphhyy.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000066))Leier, James Mark.Seven Stories Press, ©2009 374 p. $17.95 (pa)Long dismissed as an ideology of 19th-century bomb-throwers, anarchy“came back” in the 1990s with the anti-globalization movement and anti-WTO protests in Seattle and elsewhere. In this book, Leier (Labor Studies,Simon Fraser University) presents the first comprehensive biography ofanarchist theorist Mikhail Bakunin in over 60 years. Relying on primarysources and academic writings largely inaccessible to most readers, theauthor offers a fresh interpretation of Bakunin’s life and work and cor-rects many long-standing misconceptions about his political philosophy—including the notion that Bakunin’s brand of anarchy was a type ofwishful thinking. While not for everyone, many readers will find Leier’saccount of Bakunin’s life an engaging and intellectually stimulating read.

JA61 2009-037880 978-1-4129-5865-3EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ppoolliittiiccaall tthheeoorryy;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Mark Bevir.Sage Publications, ©2010 1584 p. $425.00Surrounded as everyone is by headlines, sound-bite explanations, andfear-mongering interpretations of current events, readers with access tothis three-volume reference might find some solace in connecting withthe context of political ideas and their thoughtful contemplation. Bevir (U.of California, Berkeley) has brought together 475 entries contributed byan international roster of scholars who discuss the ideas of significantpolitical theorists, the main schools of political philosophy, institutionsand practices, and concepts and issues central to the concerns of politicaltheorists. The writing is clear and condensed, without over-simplifi-cation—accessible and of interest to a broad audience including studentsand others who hear a passing reference to a person or idea and wantto know more, or are trying to make sense of rhetoric from variouspolitical factions. Arrangement is alphabetical, but thematic access isavailable via an initial Reader’s Guide and the index. Each entry has itsown references and cross references. Appendices provide a chronology ofpolitical theory and a list of web resources.

JA66 2009-039921 978-1-60426-639-9TThhee cchhaalllleennggee ooff ppoolliittiiccss;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo ppoolliittiiccaallsscciieennccee,, 33dd eedd..Riemer, Neal et al.CQ Press, ©2011 534 p. $94.95 (pa)This textbook for an introductory course integrates four traditional sub-fields of political science: political theory, American government, com-parative politics, and international relations. It encourages students toask questions about how to create a more just society and how to balancethe rights of the individual with the interests of society. Part I providesan introduction to political science, and Part II, on political philosophyand ideology, covers liberal democracy, democratic socialism and com-munism, and dictatorship and authoritarian states. Part III addressescomparative and world politics. Part IV invites students to apply the toolsof political science to four policy areas: war and peace in the modern age,the battle for human rights, the struggle for economic well being, andecological health. This third edition adds discussion of the George W.Bush administration, plus an expanded art program of b&w photos andillustrations. The redesigned companion web site contains chapter objec-tives and summaries, flashcards, quizzes, and links. Riemer was affil-iated with Drew University.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–163–

JA66 2009-044995 978-1-60871-410-0EExxpplloorriinngg ppoolliittiiccaall iiddeeaass;; ccoonncceeppttss tthhaatt sshhaappee oouurr wwoorrlldd..Schechter, Stephen L. and Thomas S. Vontz.CQ Press, ©2010 442 p. $59.00This introductory political science text combines accessible language witheye-catching color graphics, color and b&w contemporary and historicalphotos, and boxes on high interest topics, events, and important figureson every page. The first unit introduces the comparative method forexamining political ideas. Units 2-4 provide seven conceptual chapters onthe origins and development of particular ideas and their applicability topolitics in different civilizations and time periods. Units 5-8 containprovide eight historical chapters ranging from ancient Greece to Africa,Asia, the Americas, and Europe. The final unit focuses on the spread ofdemocracy from 1800 to the present. Each unit begins with an overviewof the function of each chapter. Chapter learning features include keyterms and ideas, review questions, and annotated lists of web sites.Schechter teaches political science at Russell Sage College. Vontz directsthe Center for Social Studies Education at Kansas State University.

JA66 2009-034826 978-0-87289-999-5AA nnoovveell aapppprrooaacchh ttoo ppoolliittiiccss;; iinnttrroodduucciinngg ppoolliittiiccaall sscciieenncceetthhrroouugghh bbooookkss,, mmoovviieess,, aanndd ppooppuullaarr ccuullttuurree,, 22dd eedd..Van Belle, Douglas A. and Kenneth M. Mash.CQ Press, ©2010 436 p. $59.95 (pa)Warning: This is not your grandparents’ textbook. In this undergraduateintroductory text designed to sustain student interest, Van Belle (VictoriaUniversity of Wellington) and Mash (East Stroudsburg University)introduce political science through books, movies, TV, and popularculture. They use fiction to illustrate concepts because of the way fictionexplicitly explores the political and social dynamics of choice, action, andconsequences. “Our narrative tone is casual, sarcastic, and occasionallyjust a bit crass,” they admit. Chapter key terms, summaries, study ques-tions, exercises, and web links are included.The text includes an extensiveglossary, and an appendix of short summaries of books, films, and TVshows students can use for projects, covering everything from SpongeBobSquarePants to Dr. Strangelove. A brief overview of academic writing isalso included

JA71 2009-049942 978-0-87586-759-5““AArriissttooccrraatt”” aanndd ““tthhee ccoommmmuunniittyy””;; ttwwoo pphhiilloossoopphhiiccaallddiiaalloogguueess..Pappas, Nicholas J.Algora Publishing, ©2010 227 p. $21.95 (pa)Since leaving his career as a lawyer, Pappas has written short stories andpoems as well as over 100 philosophical dialogues such as the two here.These take place between friends through the course of a night,Aristocrat dealing with what it means to want to rule, and Communitydemonstrating how to create a new city determined to set itself apartfrom the outside world. The Director appears in both, as he does in allthe dialogues. There is no index.

JA71 2009-483189 978-1-4438-0444-8AA FFoouuccaauulltt ffoorr tthhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy;; ggoovveerrnnmmeennttaalliittyy,,bbiiooppoolliittiiccss aanndd ddiisscciipplliinnee iinn tthhee nneeww mmiilllleennnniiuumm..Title main entry. Ed. by Sam Binkley and Jorge Capetillo.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 377 p. $67.99In April 2008, sociologists and related academics journeyed to Bostonfrom across North America and Europe to attend the fifth annual SocialTheory Forum, which was devoted to clarifying the central theoreticallegacy of French philosopher Michel Foucault (1926-84) and applying hisideas to a range of contemporary empirical phenomena. The 24 paperslook at neoliberalism and economic conduct; subjection, subjectivation,and the government of the self; biopower and the life of bodies; edu-cation and pedagogy; governing national populations; control and theprison industrial complex; religion and political spirituality; genetics,genomics, and racialized life; and consumption as a way of life.

JA71 2009-044627 978-0-202-36344-8PPoowweerr,, aauutthhoorriittyy,, jjuussttiiccee,, aanndd rriigghhttss;; ssttuuddiieess iinn ppoolliittiiccaalloobblliiggaattiioonnss.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11997700))Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony De Crespigny and Alan Wertheimer.AldineTransaction, ©2010 320 p. $29.95 (pa)Political scientists, philosophers, and political philosophers from Britain,anglophone North America, and Australia offer views on seven themes—those cited in the title plus liberty, equality, and political obligation.Among their topics are some notes on the concept of power, the exerciseand possession of political authority, negative and positive freedom, theidea of equality as a substantive principle of society, justice as fairness(by John Rawls), natural rights, and the obligation to disobey. A selectbibliography is provided for each section. The 1970 edition was publishedby Atherton Press, New York, as Contemporary Political Theory.

JA76 978-3-86649-143-4PPoolliittiiccaall ssoocciioollooggyy——tthhee ssttaattee ooff tthhee aarrtt..Title main entry. Ed. by Subrata Mitra et al. (The world of politicalscience—the development of the discipline)Barbara Budrich Publishers, ©2010 154 p. $29.95 (pa)Mitra (U. of Heidelberg, Germany), Pehl (College of Charleston, US), andSpiess (U. of Heidelberg, Germany) present the seventh volume in a seriesdedicated to providing up-to-date overviews of specific sub-fields ofpolitical science around the world, in this case, political sociology. Ratherthan attempt a comprehensive overview, the six chapters aim to examinesome of the most pertinent issues and controversies in contemporarypolitical sociology. They discuss political culture and its relevance forpolitical sociology; the field of research into political parties and organi-zations; issues of democracy and inequality in the context of inter-classand inter-elite competition; different approaches to studying the state; anddebates over calls for post-modern, cultural, and post-structuralapproaches to the field. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

JA84 2009-025084 978-81-321-0225-0MMooddeerrnn IInnddiiaann ppoolliittiiccaall tthhoouugghhtt;; tteexxtt aanndd ccoonntteexxtt..Chakrabarty, Bidyut and Rajendra Kumar Pandey.Sage Publications, ©2009 430 p. $29.95 (pa)Chakrabarty (political science, U. of Delhi, India) and Pandey (humanrights, Jamia Hamdard, India) aim to introduce students to the politicalthought of modern Indian history by placing the texts and themes ofprominent thinkers within the socio-economic and politico-cultural con-texts in which their ideas were developed and articulated. Individualchapters explore the political thought of the early nationalists, MahatmaGandhi, Rabindranath Tagore, B. R. Ambedkar, Jayaprakash Narayan,Jawaharlal Nehru, Muhammad Iqbal, M. N. Roy, Ram Manohar Lohia,Subhas Chandra Bsoe, V.D. Savarkar, and Pandita Ramabai. In addition,an extended discussion is included of the various constitutional devicesdeveloped by the British colonial government prior to independence andtheir legacy.

JA86 2009-000514 978-0-691-12959-4UUssaabbllee tthheeoorryy;; aannaallyyttiicc ttoooollss ffoorr ssoocciiaall aanndd ppoolliittiiccaallrreesseeaarrcchh..Rueschemeyer, Dietrich.Princeton U. Press, ©2009 338 p. $27.95 (pa)Focusing on social and political research, this volume considers researchdesign, theory formation, and data analysis within the process ofempirical research. Rueschemeyer (sociology, Brown U.) presents the ana-lytic tools he considers useful, all within the context of theory frames.Arising out of lectures to graduate students, this book goes beyond beinga standard textbook, promising instead methods for the integration oftheory and rigorous research. Contains lengthy footnotes offering furtheranalysis along with a well-constructed index.

JC21 978-0-7748-1780-6TThhee CCaannaaddiiaann yyeeaarrbbooookk ooff iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall llaaww;; vv..4466,, 22000088..Title main entry. (Series: title)U. of British Columbia Press, ©2009 802 p. $175.00This is the 46th volume of this Yearbook which is issued under the aus-pices of the Canadian branch of the International Law Association (theCanadian Society of International Law) and the Canadian Council onInternational Law. It contains six articles discussing the topics of objec-tivity and statutory interpretation concerning end use in the Canadiancustoms tariff, the notion of conditionality in relations between devel-oping and developed countries, the future of the Law of Occupation, civildisobedience and international law, Canadian international human rightsobligations in the context of assisted human reproduction, and interna-tional humanitarian law and the protection of civilians in transnationalarmed conflicts. It also includes commentaries on such issues as out-of-province judgments in class action suits and determinations of the extra-territorial reach of the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms asconcerns the case of Guantanamo prisoner Omar Khadr, as well as bookreviews and a digest of Canadian activity in international law for 2007-8involving the Department of Foreign Affairs and International Trade,Parliament, treaties, and public and private international law cases.Material is presented in both French and English, with summaries inboth languages included for all articles. Distributed in the US by UTPDistribution.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –164–

JC121 978-2-503-52923-3TThhee lliiffee aanndd wwoorrkkss ooff TToolloommeeoo FFiiaaddoonnii ((PPttoolleemmyy ooffLLuuccccaa))..Blythe, James M. (Disputatio; v.16)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 275 p. $87.00This biography of the thirteenth-century writer Tolomeo Fiadoni, alsoknown as Ptolemy of Lucca, places him squarely in the middle of thepolitical and religious movements of his day. Blythe (history, Universityof Memphis) emphasizes the many aspects of Tolomeo’s life, as com-panion and confessor to the philosopher, Thomas Aquinas, as aDominican brother during the early days of the order, as a participantin papal politics and as an independent thinker who has been called thefirst of the “Renaissance” humanists. The first section relates the life ofTolomeo, emphasizing hitherto unexplored sources. The second discusseshis major works, which cover topics from biblical commentary to the-ories of government. Blythe’s ability to blend social, political and philo-sophical trends makes the biography particularly satisfying. Thediscussions of the contents and reception of the treatises serve as anexcellent introduction to the works. This is the first of two volumes. Thesecond will focus on the world view of Tolomeo. Together they will cer-tainly ad much to our understanding of the crucial years from 1275-1325in Europe. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co,

JC121 978-2-503-52926-4TThhee wwoorrllddvviieeww aanndd tthhoouugghhtt ooff TToolloommeeoo FFiiaaddoonnii ((PPttoolleemmyyooff LLuuccccaa))..Blythe, James M. (Disputatio, v.22)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 276 p. $87.00In an earlier biography, Blythe (U. of Memphis) traces the life andwritings of Italian student of Thomas Aquinas and eventually bishop ofTorcello, Tolomeo (ca.1236-ca.1327), and here offers a companion volumeon his thinking. He characterizes his ideas as innovative but not radical,simply embedding the practices of the Italian city republics into a theo-retical framework. But the framework itself, he says, generated implica-tions that undermined the widely European political traditions. Thechapters here look at such areas as women and the family, God’s planfor history, empire and papacy, The Roman Republic and northern Italy,varieties of government, and city governments and civic humanism.Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

JC143 2009-011703 978-0-7546-6697-4MMaacchhiiaavveellllii iinn tthhee BBrriittiisshh IIsslleess;; ttwwoo eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnnttrraannssllaattiioonnss ooff TThhee PPrriinnccee..Petrina, Alessandra. (Anglo-Italian renaissance studies)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 289 p. $99.95Machiavelli’s The Prince had widespread influence across Europe from itsfirst appearance. It was translated first into French and Latin. By the1560s it had made its way to the British Isles. Petrina (English literature,Universitá di Padova, Italy)examines English translations of The Prince.She gives an analysis of eight early translations before concentrating ontwo. One is by Scotsman William Fowler; the other is an anonymousEnglish work. The Fowler is discussed against the political situation inScotland and its relationship to Italy in the time of James VI. The otheris more enigmatic. A note on the inside binding suggests that it mighthave come from the library of scholar and mystic, John Dee, althoughthat has not been proved. Petrina has carefully transcribed both manu-scripts and reproduced them, including marginalia and cross outs.Sixteenth century scholars will appreciate the meticulous work andaccess to these two examples of Machiavelli rendered in English.

JC179 2009-045032 978-1-4331-0939-3FFrreeeeddoomm iinn FFrreenncchh EEnnlliigghhtteennmmeenntt tthhoouugghhtt..Gregory, Mary Efrosini. (Currents in comparative Romance languagesand literatures; v.177)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 249 p. $76.95American scholar of French Gregory has written books about Diderotand Pascal, among other topics. Here she identifies contributions to the18th-century spirit of freedom by Montesquieu, Diderot, Rousseau,Voltaire, and Condorcet. The ideals expressed by these philosophershelped inspire both the American and the French revolutions. She alsoincludes a chapter from her Evolutionism in Eighteenth-Century FrenchThought on how various French philosophers contributed to the aboli-tionist movement in France.

JC311 2009-019647 978-1-84519-328-7TThhee nneeww iimmaaggiinneedd ccoommmmuunniittyy;; gglloobbaall mmeeddiiaa aanndd tthheeccoonnssttrruuccttiioonn ooff nnaattiioonnaall aanndd MMuusslliimm iiddeennttiittiieess ooffmmiiggrraannttss..Shavit, Uriya.Sussex Academic Press, ©2009 209 p. $74.95Countering the popular assumption that satellite television and theinternet are turning the world into one global village where nationalidentities erode, Shavit (Middle Eastern studies, Tel Aviv U.) argues thatthe technology in fact creates a world where instruments essential to theinfusion and endurance of national sentiments are extended outsidenational boundaries, so the imagination of the nation can be nearly asvivid in exile as at home. He considers such topics as the territorialdimension of modern national imageries, national imageries and modernmigration, and imagining the homeland from afar. Then he turns to hiscase study—the Muslim nation—from the perspectives of constructing theidentity of Muslim immigrants in the West, advanced technologies in theservice of the ummah, European and German contexts of the Muslimnation, and imagining the Muslim nation from afar. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

JC319 2009-039709 0-230-62181-3GGlloobbaall wwaarrrriinngg;; hhooww eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall,, eeccoonnoommiicc,, aannddppoolliittiiccaall ccrriisseess wwiillll rreeddrraaww tthhee wwoorrlldd mmaapp..Paskal, Cleo.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2010 280 p. $27.00Paskal (Royal Institute of International Affairs, Chatham House, UK)places likely environmental changes, particularly climate change, withinthe context of predictable geopolitical developments (“such as thegrowing influence of Asia in world affairs and the West’s attempts tomaintain it current geopolitical position”) in order to make a baseassessment of the potential repercussions of environmental change forsome of the major geopolitical powers. Her discussion is organized intofours sections that focus in turn upon the impacts upon the West of risingsea levels and storm surges, the possible alteration oftransportation/trade routes due to climate change, changing precipitationpatterns and its impact on internal disruptions and geopolitical relation-ships (particularly for China and India), and how rising sea levels mightaffect access to resources and China’s ability to project power in thePacific.

JC328 2009-024250 978-0-7546-7612-6PPeerrssiisstteenntt ssttaattee wweeaakknneessss iinn tthhee gglloobbaall aaggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Denisa Kostovicova and Vesna Bojicic-Dzelilovic.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 213 p. $99.95Contradicting the idea that state weakness is a precursor to state failure,this volume focuses on the causes and characteristics of persistent stateweakness. The editors (both of the London School of Economics andPolitical Science, UK) present 11 chapters discussing such topics as therole of elite networks in enfeebling post-communist bureaucraciesthrough their project of extraction from the state, the role of the com-munist legacy in the operation of informal networks as the force behindenduring state weakness in the Caucasus, informal mechanisms of gov-ernance and control of the security sector in post-Milosevic Serbia, his-torical roots for persistent state weakness in Afghanistan and the MiddleEast, policy approaches to foreign interventions in post-conflict state-building in Bosnia-Herzegovina and Lebanon, weak states and models ofstate-building in sub-Saharan Africa, methods of measuring stateweakness (using the Balkans as an illustration), and the implications forinternational policy of the Western conceptualization of “stateness” asreflected in the Western democratization initiatives in Central andEastern Europe and in sub-Saharan Africa.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–165–

JC330 2009-015699 978-0-7546-7182-4TThhee AAsshhggaattee rreesseeaarrcchh ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo ppoolliittiiccaall lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp..Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph Masciulli et al.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 568 p. $165.00This volume reviews theories of political leadership across different cul-tural, ideological, and analytical traditions. The editors (professors ofpolitical science at St. Thomas U. and the U. of Alberta, Canada) present23 chapters examining traditions of leadership as reflected in Chinese,Indian, Judaic, and Christian religious and philosophical canons; thepostmodern critique of principle in political leadership; the Machiavellianconcepts of leadership as applied to the analysis of Shakespeare’s JuliusCaesar; leadership traits analysis and conceptions of global political lead-ership; Martin Heidegger’s writings about Hitler’s leadership; the rela-tionship between leadership and management in the context of idealisticnetwork theories of leadership; feminist critiques of the masculine char-acteristics of ideal-typical understandings of leadership in global politics;presidential leadership and civil-military relations in the United States;gendered constructs of leadership in Anglo-American systems; Chineseleadership and the process of modernization; concepts of Islamic lead-ership, particularly in the case of Iran; the dynamics of the TrioPresidency in the European Union; the leadership capacity of non-gov-ernmental organizations in the realms of human rights, the environment,and health; the socio-economic and organizational drivers of politicalleadership in Russia; judicial power and leadership; political leadershipin times of war and the Bush administration’s “war on terror;” a neo-Aristotelian critique of prominent Canadian views on the education ofpolitical leaders; and the leadership of rural women in Canada.

JC330 2009-048432 978-0-202-36346-2PPoolliittiiccaall eelliitteess iinn aa ddeemmooccrraaccyy.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11997711))Bachrach, Peter.AldineTransaction, ©2010 175 p. $24.95 (pa)Paul Goodman on the case for decentralization and Herbert Marcuse onrepressive tolerance are among the seven essays exploring the apparentcontradiction between political elites and democracy. Other topics are theelite concept, democratic practice and democratic theory, the Americansystem in crisis, a critique of the elitist theory of democracy, and furtherreflections on that theory. These discussion rise is an era when a US pres-ident was claiming that if he did something, it was thereby not illegal.Of course, they are only of historical interest now. Atherton Press, in NewYork, published the 1971 edition.

JC355 2008-053459 978-0-7546-7131-2TThhee AAsshhggaattee rreesseeaarrcchh ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo ffeeddeerraalliissmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Ann Ward and Lee Ward. (Federalism studies)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 585 p. $154.95Editors Ann Ward (philosophy and classics, political science, U. ofRegina), Lee Ward (political science, U. of Regina, Canada), and 32 con-tributors provide a comprehensive overview of federalism from ancienttimes to the present day. Intended as a reference for researchers andscholars, the book covers the concepts of federalism, its development andinstitutionalization, and integrates both theoretical and practical compo-nents of federalism studies. It also address European federalism andregional experiences with federalism in North and South America, theMiddle East, India, Africa, and Australia. Each chapter includes refer-ences and/or suggestions for further reading.

JC375 978-1-84682-178-3TThhee rriittuuaallss aanndd rrhheettoorriicc ooff qquueeeennsshhiipp;; mmeeddiieevvaall ttoo eeaarrllyymmooddeerrnn..Title main entry. Ed. by Liz Oakley-Brown & Louise J. Wilkinson.Four Courts Press, ©2009 287 p. $74.50The days in which historians mentioned queens only as political pawnsor mothers are, fortunately, long gone. In this addition to the list ofqueenship studies, Oakley-Brown (Renaissance literature, LancasterUniversity) and Wilkinson (medieval history, Canterbury, Christ ChurchUniversity) present essays on the roles of English-born queens from thethirteenth to the seventeenth century. The sections are divided into“rituals” and “rhetoric”, followed by one on the subversion of both by thequeens themselves. The final section discusses later representations of thefirst two queens regnant, Mary and Elizabeth Tudor. Ritual emphasizesthe traditional roles of queens, mainly in the realm of family connec-tions. The sixteenth century, which saw the first English and Scottishfemale rulers, was also one in which the status of women declined. Thearticles on rhetoric and subversion give clues as to the reason for this, asthe queens labored to assert their masculine right to rule especially whenthey became the subjects of often slanderous treatises designed to subvertthem. Elizabeth I and Mary Stuart receive the most attention, includingstudies of their letters. It would be interesting to see a second volume onhow these British women compare with their continental contemporaries.Distributed in North America by ISBS

JC423 2009-937880 978-1-84787-504-4CCoommppaarriinngg ddeemmooccrraacciieess 33;; eelleeccttiioonnss aanndd vvoottiinngg iinn tthhee 2211ssttcceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Lawrence LeDuc et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 293 p. $44.95 (pa)The first edition, published in 1996, focused on large countries, but hereless populous countries are stirred into the mix, along with some coun-tries where democracy may be a minority practice. Political scientistsmostly from English-speaking countries cover electoral systems andelection management, political parties and party systems, party and cam-paign finance, election campaigns campaign communication and media,ideology and partisanship, democratic development, political partici-pation, elections and the economy, women and elections, and conse-quences of elections.

JC423 2010-005300 978-1-935049-18-0DDiilleemmmmaass ooff ddeemmooccrraattiicc ccoonnssoolliiddaattiioonn;; aa ggaammee--tthheeoorryyaapppprrooaacchh..Ulfelder, Jay.FirstForum Press, ©2010 177 p. $59.95Ulfelder proposes a theory of modern democracies that he developedwhile working for a corporation that was under contract to the USCentral Intelligence Agency for a research project on political instability.He discusses the democracy game, patterns in cross-national data on howfragile democracy is, evidence from random narratives on howdemocracy breaks down, exploring confounding cases, and implicationsfor promoting democracy.

JC480 2009-032379 978-0-465-01539-9FFrreeeeddoomm ffoorr ssaallee;; wwhhyy tthhee wwoorrlldd iiss ttrraaddiinngg ddeemmooccrraaccyy ffoorrsseeccuurriittyy..Kampfner, John.Basic Books, ©2010 294 p. $27.95British journalist Kampfner takes the reader on a world tour of countriesthat he argues are characterized by or witnessing the rise of a new formof capitalist authoritarianism in which populations appear willing to sac-rifice public freedoms such as free speech and freedom of association inexchange for often illusory government promises of protection of theprivate freedoms of security and prosperity. His discussion is based oninterviews with intellectuals, journalists, lawyers, cultural figures, politi-cians, and ordinary people in Singapore (which has pride of placebecause it is in many ways the paradigmatic example), China, Russia, theUnited Arab Emirates, India, Italy, the UK, and the US (this last being“where the pact has been played out most visibly”).

JC497 2009937884 978-1-84844-794-3GGoovveerrnnaannccee iinn aa ddiisseenncchhaanntteedd wwoorrlldd;; tthhee eenndd ooff mmoorraallssoocciieettyy..Willke, Helmut.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 166 p. $95.00Yes, yes, there are those fundamentalists popping up all over the world,says Wilke (global governance, Zeppelin U., Germany), but he is talkingabout the fate of modern democratic societies undergoing deep transfor-mation related to the dynamics of an emerging world society and anemerging knowledge society. He covers globalization as the context forcontemporary governance, the normative paradox of secular politics,global law and the cases for social responsibilities, the spirit of liber-alism, consequences, and the outlook for governance in a disenchantedworld.

JC571 2009-008175 978-0-7546-7723-9NNeeggoottiiaattiinngg ssoovveerreeiiggnnttyy aanndd hhuummaann rriigghhttss;; aaccttoorrss aannddiissssuueess iinn ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy hhuummaann rriigghhttss ppoolliittiiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by Noha Shawki and Michaelene Cox.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 238 p. $99.95Shawki and Cox (both of Illinois State U.) present 12 chapters high-lighting actors and issues “that are still on the fringe of the mainstreamof international human rights politics.” They focus on topics that haveonly recently emerged as an important part of the international humanrights agenda and entail a challenge to entrenched notions of state sov-ereignty and entrenched ways of policy making. Specific topics includehumanitarianism’s challenge to sovereign immunity, sovereignty and therole of national human rights institutions, universalism versus sover-eignty at the International Criminal Court, contributions of truth com-missions in post-conflict environments, the Liberian Truth andReconciliation Commission and the documentation of human rightsabuses among the diaspora, the intersection of human rights and stateinterests in the United Nations’ Millennium Development Goals, humanrights and ecopolitics within contested landscapes of sovereignty, themarriage of disability rights to human rights, and small arms traffickingand human rights.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –166–

JC571 978-3-8329-5136-8PPrroommoottiinngg hhuummaann rriigghhttss iinn AAssiiaa aanndd EEuurrooppee;; tthhee rroollee ooffrreeggiioonnaall iinntteeggrraattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Apirat Petchsiri. (Transformation, development,and regionalizatin in greater Asia; 7)Nomos, ©2009 138 p. $33.00 (pa)This is the eighth volume to emerge from the project EU-NESCA: AResearch Dialogue, where EU is the European Union and NESCA isNetwork of European Studies Centres in Asia. The project was initiatedby the European Commission in 2006 to investigate relations between theEuropean Union and Asia through conferences and workshops andrelated research and cooperation activities. Eight studies look first atregionalism and human rights, then at the impact of regional integrationon human rights. Specific topics include economic rights and regionalintegration, cultural relativism and human rights, whether the EU isleading by example in human rights, whether the EU’s transmission ofhuman rights to Africa represents normative power or hegemony, and acomparison of gender issues in the EU and in China. There is no index.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

JC574 2009-483905 978-1-904750-84-0TThhee eenndd ooff tthhee LLiibbeerraall ssttaattee aanndd tthhee ffiirrsstt tteerrrroorriisstt..Castellino, Joshua.Middlesex Univ. Press, ©2009 107 p. $11.24 (pa)Castellino (law, Middlesex U. London, UK) writes in defense of the liberalstate and warns that it is being undermined, particularly in the UnitedStates and the United Kingdom, by the governments’ responses to ter-rorism, which he suggests have caused more harm to the liberal state athome and abroad through “with us or against us rhetoric,” the elevationof security values over human rights values, propaganda for war,“extraordinary renditions,” racial profiling, detention without trial,ramped-up surveillance, and other aspects of the so-called “War onTerror” than the terrorist acts themselves. Maintaining and defending theliberal states’ commitment to human and civil rights and democraticvalues, he notes, is particularly important as political and economicpower shifts inexorably from west to east and new hegemons emerge thatcould be potentially constrained from such abuses in the future by arobust defense of liberal values in the present.

JC578 2009-014924 978-0-674-03613-0TThhee iiddeeaa ooff jjuussttiiccee..Sen, Amartya.Belknap Press, ©2009 467 p. $29.95The conventional approach to justice, argues Nobel laureate economistSen (Harvard U.), is for academics to imagine a perfectly just society, thenshake their head at the impossibility of creating it. Drawing on a dif-ferent strand of Enlightenment thought, he advocates reducing injusticeat every opportunity. There will be disagreement of course, but he saysthat the ensuing debates over what is and is not unjust can lead to afunctional theory of justice, while on the ground, injustice is being elim-inated. His overall themes are the demands of justice, forms of reasoning,the materials of justice, and public reasoning and democracy. The workis sure to increase his reputation as a leading intellectual of the time.Belknap Press is an imprint of Harvard University Press.

JC578 2010-003908 978-0-87462-177-8WWhhaatt iiss rreeppaarraattiivvee jjuussttiiccee??..Walker, Margaret Urban. (The Aquinas lecture, 2010)Marquette University Press, ©2010 70 p. $15.00Each year, the Wisconsin-Alpha chapter of the International HonorSociety for Philosophy at Marquette University invites a scholar to delivera lecture in honor of St. Thomas Aquinas. In 2010, that was MargaretUrban Walker (ethics and philosophy, Arizona State U.), who discussedthe history, current thinking, and potential future application of thenotion that amends are owed for wrongs and wrongful harms. Despiteits venerable past since Aristotle’s Nicomachean Ethics, she says, repar-ative justice has not received the degree of attention in contemporarythought that distributive and retributive justice have enjoyed. There is noindex.

JC596 978-1-60692-312-2DDiiggiittaall ssuurrvveeiillllaannccee;; llaawwss,, sseeccuurriittyy aanndd rreellaatteedd iissssuueess..Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph G. Massingale. (Criminal justice, lawenforcement and corrections series)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 94 p. $43.00 (pa)Time was, digital surveillance meant keeping an eye on your fingerswhile you shook hands with a lawyer, but now it refers to electronic tech-nologies used in fighting crime and in homeland security. Here arereports from the Congressional Research Service on the 1994Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act, and an overviewof data mining and homeland security. Both are revised from theirrelease in 2008. The volume also includes the February 2008 Data MiningReport prepared by the Office of the Director of National Intelligence tocomply with the 2007 law that each agency using data mining mustreport it to Congress.

JC596 2009-026320 978-0-8047-5237-4PPrriivvaaccyy iinn ccoonntteexxtt;; tteecchhnnoollooggyy,, ppoolliiccyy,, aanndd tthhee iinntteeggrriittyy ooffssoocciiaall lliiffee..Nissenbaum, Helen Fay.Stanford Law and Politics, ©2010 288 p. $24.95 (pa)Nissenbaum (media, culture, and communication; computer science; andinformation law; New York U.) does not try to resolve issues regardingprivacy in the age of digital information, but investigates why the hugeand growing set of technical systems and technology-based practices haveprovoked, and continue to provoke, anxiety, protest, and resistance in thepseudonym of privacy. She covers information technology’s power andthreat, a critical survey of predominant approaches to privacy, and theframework of contextual integrity. Among her specific topics are massiveand deep databases that allow strangers to know us better than we knowourselves, locating the value in privacy, and breaking rules for good.

JC598 978-0-596-80435-0OOppeenn ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Lathrop and Laurel Ruma.O’Reilly Media, Inc., ©2010 408 p. $44.99 (pa)The Enlightenment idea that citizens should have access to their gov-ernment’s documents and proceedings is recognized by most democ-racies, but recently has been influenced by principles and practices inthe open software movement. Here contributors from technical fields andfrom academic and practical politics consider the trend in light of state-ments by incoming President Obama, which the subtitle quotes. Amongtheir perspectives are government as a platform, engineering good gov-ernment, online deliberation and civil intelligence, Barack Obama andthe wisdom of crowds, emergent democracy, why opensecrets.com optedfor full frontal data sharing, liberating government data, promises andrealities of Freedom of Information Acts, and utah.gov as one of severalcase studies.

JC599 2009-040720 978-1-932716-56-6FFrreeeeddoomm vvss.. sseeccuurriittyy;; tthhee ssttrruuggggllee ffoorr bbaallaannccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Lee-Sean Huang et al.Int’l. Debate Educ. Assn. Pr., ©2010 209 p. $24.95 (pa)This volume collects 12 readings that engage in the debate concerning theproper balance of civil liberties and security policies in the age of the“War on Terror.” It addresses the constitution and the enactment of emer-gency powers, detention policies and habeas corpus, free speech issues,and surveillance. It includes writings by such figures as John Yoo, theBush administration lawyer who authored what came to be known asthe “torture memos;” Bush administration Attorney General JohnAshcroft; Kenneth Roth, the executive director of Human Right Watch;Andrew C. McCarthy of the National Review; representatives of theAmerican Civil Liberties Union; and prominent sociologist AmitaiEtzioni, among others.

JC599 2009-047754 978-1-61614-159-2VVeeiilleedd aattrroocciittiieess;; ttrruuee ssttoorriieess ooff oopppprreessssiioonn iinn SSaauuddiiAArraabbiiaa..Alrabaa, Sami.Prometheus Books, ©2010 275 p. $19.00 (pa)An academic who has taught in Arab universities (as well as in the U.S.and Germany), sociologist Alrabaa presents a disturbing collection ofaccounts of daily life under fundamentalist Islam in Saudi Arabia.Typical of the stories is that of a deaf-mute woman who was picked upon suspicion of prostitution—and later stoned to death—when her real“crime” was waiting for her brother in front of a shop window. Whilethe book’s stories of human rights violations by Saudi Arabia’sWahhabist authorities are appalling, it is important to note that theauthor ascribes those abuses to the nature of Islam itself, not to funda-mentalist interpretations of Islamic scripture.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–167–

JF515 978-1-84383-503-5AA sshhoorrtt hhiissttoorryy ooff ppaarrlliiaammeenntt;; EEnnggllaanndd,, GGrreeaatt BBrriittaaiinn,, tthheeUUnniitteedd KKiinnggddoomm,, IIrreellaanndd aanndd SSccoottllaanndd..Title main entry. Ed. by Clyve Jones.The Boydell Press, ©2008 386 p. $145.00Jones (editor of the journal Parliamentary History) and his contributorshave produced an institutional history of British parliaments, limitingdiscussion of politics to when political events, as they often did, had insti-tutional repercussions. Subjects include the membership of parliaments;constituencies, elections, and franchises; places of meeting; how businesswas arranged and managed in terms of such issues as the use of com-mittees, the development of parties, lobbying, and voting procedures;recording and reporting of business and debates; balances of powerbetween bicameral houses; and the position of the monarch in theParliament. Twenty-six chapters discuss the Parliament of England fromits origins to 1707; the Parliament of Great Britain from 1707 to 1800; theParliament of the United Kingdom since 1801; the Parliament of Scotlandto 1707; the Parliament of Ireland to 1800; the Northern IrelandParliament; legislatures of the Isle of Man, the Channel Islands, and theRepublic of Ireland; and the post-devolution legislatures of Scotland andWales.

JF801 2009-042457 978-0-230-21666-2CCiittiizzeennsshhiipp;; aa rreeaalliittyy ffaarr ffrroomm iiddeeaall..Title main entry. Ed. by Andrew Kakabadse et al.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 211 p. $94.95A. Kakabadse (international management development, Cranfield Schoolof Management, UK), N. Kakabadse (management and business research,U. of Northampton, UK) and Kalu (political science, Auburn U., US)present nine chapters produced in response to the broad brief: “feel freeto express your views of citizenship and in so doing identify the criticalissues and challenges we should all be considering.” The resulting papersdiscuss whether the nation state provides citizens with the ability toresists the corrosive influence of wealthy elites, compare and contrastliberal and cosmopolitan notions of global citizenship, warn of an ever-growing alienation of the citizen, explore relationships between thecitizen and the state in various models of governance, discuss the role oflegitimacy in the relationship between the citizen and the state, considerthe individual’s experience of citizenship, critique the use of new tech-nologies by the state to exert control over citizen mobility, analyze citizenparticipation in local council governments, and explore the notion of cor-porate citizenship.

JF1081 2009-020831 978-0-8157-0329-7CCoorrrruuppttiioonn,, gglloobbaall sseeccuurriittyy,, aanndd wwoorrlldd oorrddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert I. Rotberg.Brookings Institution Press, ©2009 497 p. $39.95 (pa)Rotberg (director, Program on Intrastate Conflict and Conflict Resolution,Kennedy School of Government, Harvard U.) places corruption at thecenter of the problem of world order, arguing that in both old and newforms, it is “much more a threat to world order than ever in the past”because it facilitates weapons proliferation, assists the spread of terror,and undercuts international efforts to improve the welfare of peoples. Hepresents 19 papers discussing corruption and efforts to combat cor-ruption around the world. Among the topics addressed by the papers arecorruption in the wake of domestic national conflict; trafficking, cor-ruption, and politics; corruption and nuclear proliferation; the rela-tionship between corruption and terrorism; corruption, the criminalizedstate, and post-Soviet transitions; combating corruption in Papua NewGuinea; popular participation in corruption in Nigeria; corruption andhuman rights; the role of the multi-national corporation in fighting cor-ruption; and anti-corruption incentives.

JF1338 2009-018629 978-0-7656-2336-2CCaassee rreesseeaarrcchh iinn ppuubblliicc mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..McNabb, David E.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 314 p. $89.95McNabb (research, Pacific Lutheran U.) provides guidance in conductingcase study research in government, nonprofits, and political science inpublic organizations. The author explains the importance of caseresearch and offers numerous examples of case studies in a variety ofareas, including performance management, sustainable government,technology management, emergency and disaster management, security,healthcare services, transportation, and others. He also addresses thevariety of case research designs and how to use them, analysis methods,and how to organize and write case study reports.

JF1338 2009-018631 978-0-7656-2312-6RReesseeaarrcchh mmeetthhooddss ffoorr ppuubblliicc aaddmmiinniissttrraattoorrss,, 22dd eedd..Johnson, Gail.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 275 p. $59.95 (pa)Consultant, researcher, and author Johnson has worked in severalagencies of the federal government, and has taught in MPA programs for15-plus years. She presents a practical text for beginning MPA studentsand practitioners, reflecting her belief that public administrators, policymakers, elected officials, and nonprofit managers need to be able todetermine whether those arguing for action are using convincing evi-dence based on credible research. The second edition contains moreexamples to provide a realistic picture of the types of research and issuestypically found in public administration, as well as the addition of exer-cises at the end of each chapter.

JF1351 2009-930878 978-1-84844-308-2CCoonnttiinnuuiittyy aanndd cchhaannggee iinn ppuubblliicc ppoolliiccyy aanndd mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..Pollitt, Christopher and Geert Bouckaert.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 223 p. $110.00Pollit and Bouckaert (Public Management Institute, Katholieke U. Leuven,Belgium) offer a comparative analysis and what might be termed a majorrethinking of long-term policy making and organizational change. Theauthors compare public policy making and management in Belgium andBritain, and two primary public services: hospitals and police. They alsocompare shifts in national policy with what actually occurred in twospecial local areas, and compare developments over time. In their work,the authors drew from numerous interviews and document analysis. Theintended audience is students and educators in public management andpublic policy as well as anyone with a general interest in comparativepublic policy and management.

JF1351 2009933392 978-1-84720-810-1PPuubblliicc mmaannaaggeemmeenntt rreeffoorrmm aanndd mmooddeerrnniizzaattiioonn;;ttrraajjeeccttoorriieess ooff aaddmmiinniissttrraattiivvee cchhaannggee iinn IIttaallyy,, FFrraannccee,,GGrreeeeccee,, PPoorrttuuggaall aanndd SSppaaiinn..Ongoro, Edardo.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 316 p. $140.00Ongaro (Bocconi U., Italy) comparatively describes the reform of publicmanagement in France, Greece, Italy, Portugal, and Spain, countries hefeels have been relatively neglected in the literature. The goal is to explorekey topics of theoretical interest in debates about public management.These topics include the ways the national politico-administrative contextaffects the dynamics of public management reform, the influence ofEuropeanization on public management reform, the compatibility of theNew Public Management and other major paradigms of reform with thebasic premises of the administrative systems of the countries in theNapoleonic tradition, the characteristics and evolving features of theNapoleonic tradition, and whether the idea of the Neo-Weberian State asan emerging model of reform in the European public sector is applicableto this tradition.

JF1351 2009-030627 978-0-7656-2471-0SSoocciiaall eeqquuiittyy aanndd ppuubblliicc aaddmmiinniissttrraattiioonn;; oorriiggiinnss,,ddeevveellooppmmeennttss,, aanndd aapppplliiccaattiioonnss..Frederickson, H. George.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 169 p. $79.95For teachers and practitioners of public administration, Frederickson(public administration, U. of Kansas) collects essays he previously pub-lished on the origins of social equity in public administration and itsemergence as one of the central principles in the field. He addresses theplace of fairness, justice, and equity in the theory and practice of publicpolicy and administration, their values and norms and philosophies andprocedures, the historical development of the theory and practice ofsocial equity, and how social equity may have influenced the perceptionsof events and responses to them. He then considers social equity in budg-eting and long-range borrowing, law and research, education, and merit.

JF1525 2004-011712 978-0-7619-3260-4EE--ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt;; ffrroomm vviissiioonn ttoo iimmpplleemmeennttaattiioonn;; aa pprraaccttiiccaallgguuiiddee wwiitthh ccaassee ssttuuddiieess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000044))Bhatnagar, Subhash.Sage Publications, ©2008 202 p. $44.95 (pa)Bhatnagar (information systems, Indian Institute of Management, India)notes that the adoption of information and communications technologiesby governments in the developing world have increased substantiallyover the past few years. Based on 12 case studies from six countries, theauthor analyzes and maps e-government trends, their effects on publicsector reform, empowerment, and the reduction of poverty. Topicsinclude: key factors that contribute to success in the implementation ofe-government, implementation challenges, and a methodology for evalu-ation of E-government projects.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –168–

JF1525 2009045757 978-0-313-38265-9IInntteelllliiggeennccee aannaallyyssiiss;; hhooww ttoo tthhiinnkk iinn ccoommpplleexxeennvviirroonnmmeennttss..Hall, Wayne Michael and Gary Citrenbaaum.Praeger, ©2010 440 p. $59.95Hall (retired, Army intelligence) and Citrenbaum (chief scientist andCEO, Systems Analytics Corporation) explore modern intelligenceanalysis in this time of terrorists and insurgents. Because the rules ofconventional warfare don’t apply in this new type of conflict, old waysof looking at intelligence are no longer adequate, the authors contend.The authors offer a new approach to intelligence analysis as it applies toirregular warfare, examine technical requirements needed to optimizeadvanced analysis, and provide the methods for creating sustainableadvantages over adversaries regardless of the type of engagement or oper-ating environment.

JF1525 2009-04466 978-1-60566-918-2SSoocciiaall aanndd oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnaall ddeevveellooppmmeennttss tthhrroouugghh eemmeerrggiinnggee--ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt aapppplliiccaattiioonnss;; nneeww pprriinncciipplleess aanndd ccoonncceeppttss..Weerakkody, Vishanth.Information Science Reference, ©2010 427 p. $180.00Reprints 21 papers previously published in the International journal ofelectronic government research by IGI Publishing during 2008. Theresearchers discuss e-government as it pertains to national security anddefense in the U.S., analyze e-governance practices and trends in 12European cities, and explore the institutional opportunities and chal-lenges of adopting wireless communications for mobile government atthe local level. Case studies from developing counties evaluate the effectsof institutional arrangements on the enacted technology in Mexico, theeffectiveness of an internet service network project in rural India, and theperformance of e-government citizen service centers. The editor is afaculty member in Brunel University’s business school.

JF1658 2009-048089 978-0-7656-2633-2DDiivveerrssiittyy aanndd ppuubblliicc aaddmmiinniissttrraattiioonn;; tthheeoorryy,, iissssuueess,, aannddppeerrssppeeccttiivveess,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Mitchell F. Rice.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 322 p. $42.95 (pa)Political scientists and related researchers update their examination ofhow administration in government, education, and business mustbecome more diverse and culturally competent to serve the increasingracial and cultural mosaic in the US. No date is cited for the first edition,but new chapters here discuss diversity ideology; managing diversity incommunities, workplaces, and society; moving beyond organizationalconflict; institutional racism, diversity, and public administration; cul-tural competency, public administration, and public service delivery; anddiversity management and cultural competencies.

JK31 2009-031161 978-1-85109-713-5AA hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee UU..SS.. ppoolliittiiccaall ssyysstteemm;; iiddeeaass,, iinntteerreessttss,, aannddiinnssttiittuuttiioonnss;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard A. Harris and Daniel J. Tichenor.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 1430 p. $295.00Appropriate for a serious general readership (high school level andabove) seeking a historically grounded understanding of the UnitedStates, this three-volume reference has been shaped by editors Harris(political science, and public policy and administration, Rutgers U.) andTichenor (social science, law & politics, U. of Oregon), bringing together50 contributions from a mix of political scientists and historians. Materialis arranged thematically and chronologically, with the first two volumespresenting original essays supplemented by primary documents. Theirfocus is the evolution of both government and nongovernment institu-tions and policy debates, beginning with the foundations of liberalism,republicanism, and reform and ending with domestic and foreign policy-making processes. The third volume presents an additional 153 primarydocuments organized into 10 time periods, from the early Republic tocontemporary American politics (the final document is a letter from theco-chairs of the Iraq Study Group Report, Dec. 6, 2006). The editorsselected documents with the intent of representing a broad spectrum ofvoices, including but purposefully not limited to those of traditional elitesand policy makers.

JK271 2009-038023 978-1-60426-459-3AAmmeerriiccaann ppuubblliicc ppoolliiccyy;; pprroommiissee aanndd ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee,, 88tthheedd..Peters, B. Guy.CQ Press, ©2010 568 p. $79.95 (pa)Peters (American government, U. of Pittsburgh, and comparative gover-nance, Zeppelin U., Germany) provides a comprehensive view of federalpolicy and policymaking in the US for students in public policy classes.He explains the nature of public policy and alternative approaches tounderstanding the policymaking process and evaluating its outcomes, thestructure and process of the system, important areas such as economy,taxes, health care, Social Security and welfare, education, energy and theenvironment, defense and law enforcement, and culture wars, and cost-benefit and ethical analysis.

JK271 2009-048429 978-0-202-36347-9PPooppuullaarr ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt iinn tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess;; ffoouunnddaattiioonnss aannddpprriinncciipplleess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11996688))Hyneman, Charles S. Ed. by Charles E. Gilbert.AldineTransaction, ©2010 320 p. $34.95 (pa)US political scientist Gilbert set about to meld into an integrated volumethe views of his colleague Hyneman (1900-85); the original plan just toreprint published articles and papers in a proper order did not work outvery well, so much the material was rewritten, though Hyneman avowedit represented his views at the time. It covers democratic ideals, populargovernment, the structure of authority, limited government, anddemocracy on trial. The 1968 edition was published by Transaction inNew Jersey.

JK325 2009-041267 978-0-202-36330-1UUrrbbaanniizzaattiioonn iinn aa ffeeddeerraalliisstt ccoonntteexxtt.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11996655))Martin, Roscoe C.AldineTransaction, ©2010 200 p. $24.95 (pa)In exploring the interplay between urbanization and government, USpolitical scientist Martin (1903-72) is particularly interested in how citygovernments have become part of the federal government since 1933. Heapplauds the trend, arguing that it expands the depth of federalism toinclude another level of functioning government alongside the nationaland state governments. His topics include a nation of cities, the manyand the one of the American system, the case of the reluctant state, theemergence of an urban partner, the expanded partnership, three viewsof the expand partnership, anticipated and unanticipated consequences,and real and fancied problems.

JK421 2009-021183 978-1-4221-6636-9IIff wwee ccaann ppuutt aa mmaann oonn tthhee mmoooonn......;; ggeettttiinngg bbiigg tthhiinnggssddoonnee iinn ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt..Eggers, William D. and John O’Leary.Harvard Bus. School Press, ©2009 296 p. $24.95Eggers, an author and columnist who works in global research for apublic-sector industry practice, and O’Leary (Ash Institute for DemocraticGovernance and Innovation, Harvard Kennedy School), who has workedin the Massachusetts state government, argue that if the US can put aman on the moon, then the government can achieve anything, and thatthe difference between success and failure is in policy execution. Using asystems perspective, they review about 75 successful and failed gov-ernment undertakings in the US and abroad to show the steps it takes tosuccessfully bring a large, important public initiative from an idea toresults, including lessons learned from policy initiatives, reform, regu-lation, capital projects, creating new institutions, process and IT initia-tives improvement, peacekeeping and defense, and disaster and crisisresponse like the Challenger and Columbia tragedies, California’s elec-tricity reform, immigration reform, the wars on poverty and inflation,wars in Iraq and Vietnam, the Bay of Pigs fiasco, Hurricane Katrina,9/11, and the Marshall Plan, and patterns and characteristics of success.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–169–

JK421 2009-028181 978-1-4200-8420-7OOrrggaanniizzaattiioonnaall aasssseessssmmeenntt aanndd iimmpprroovveemmeenntt iinn tthhee ppuubblliiccsseeccttoorr..Immordino, Kathleen M. (American Society for Public Administrationbook series on public administration & public policy)CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 228 p. $59.95Plenty has been written about how to conduct organizational assessmentand improvement in the private sector, but can’t the public sector—gov-ernments and government agencies—do the same? Immordino (organi-zational research and assessment, Rutgers, State U. of New Jersey) saysthey can and should. The author notes that interest in organizationalassessment in the public sector has grown for two reasons: responsibilityand capability. Public sector organizations typically have a broad rangeof critical responsibilities. And ever-growing demands affect theircapacity to respond effectively. The author provides an explanation ofassessment practices in the public sector and an assessment andimprovement model, as well as implementation guidelines, case studies,and best practices.

JK468 2009-042248 978-0-87389-779-2MMaakkiinngg ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt ggrreeaatt aaggaaiinn;; mmaappppiinngg tthhee rrooaadd ttoossuucccceessss wwiitthh IISSOO 99000011::22000088..Baranzelli, John.ASQ Quality Press, ©2010 187 p. $75.00For managers of public and private sector organizations who wish tolearn about the correct application of the ISO 9001:2008 standard,Baranzelli, an ISO quality assurance officer for IDOT, provides a casestudy of the first state transportation agency in the country to achieveISO 9001 certification for its major business processes: the IllinoisDepartment of Transportation (IDOT). He outlines the standards and cer-tification process; the eight quality management principles of ISO 9001,from leadership to customer focus, and the major requirements of thestandards within their context; the successful application in IDOT; andhow these principles and techniques can be applied in any organizationto improve quality management and the ability to implement strategyand achieve goals.

JK468 2009-030372 978-0-8014-4785-3WWhhyy iinntteelllliiggeennccee ffaaiillss;; lleessssoonnss ffrroomm tthhee IIrraanniiaann RReevvoolluuttiioonnaanndd tthhee IIrraaqq WWaarr..Jervis, Robert. (Cornell studies in security affairs)Cornell U. Press, ©2010 238 p. $27.95Despite the resources at their command, U.S. intelligence services failedto anticipate the fall of the Shah’s government in Iran in the late 1970sand, more recently, insisted that Saddam Hussein’s regime possessedweapons of mass destruction. In this book, Jervis (International Politics,Columbia University) examines both failures, and rejects the commonexplanations that attribute these failures to political pressure and group-think. Instead, the author suggests that the failures were a result of anorganizational culture that failed to look into the factors behind intelli-gence assessments or to investigate alternative explanations. AlthoughJervis’ writing can be on the dry side (especially in the part of the bookabout Iran), this his book is an essential read for anyone wanting tounderstand the workings of U.S. intelligence agencies, or the history ofU.S. involvement in Iraq and Iran.

JK516 2009-028520 978-1-60426-565-1DDeebbaattiinngg tthhee PPrreessiiddeennccyy;; ccoonnfflliiccttiinngg ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn tthheeAAmmeerriiccaann eexxeeccuuttiivvee,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard J. Ellis and Michael Nelson.CQ Press, ©2010 253 p. $42.95 (pa)Edited by Ellis (politics, Willamette U.) and Nelson (political science,Rhodes College), this text is designed to engage undergraduate studentsin primarily normative issues of the American presidency through thepresentation of “pro” and “con” essays debating the following issues: therelationship of the modern presidency to that intended by the framers ofthe Constitution, the possible institution of a national primary for nomi-nating presidential candidates, the direct election of the President, therepeal of the 22nd Amendment (limiting the number of terms a pres-ident can serve), media treatment of the President, the President asJacksonian representative of the American people, presidentialusurpation of congressional war powers, the “war on terror” and checkson presidential power, the use of presidential signing statements, presi-dential power in the selection of judges, the possible abolition of the vicepresidency, the President’s personal attributes as a predictor of presi-dential performance, and the President as agent of democratic change.

JK516 2009-032145 978-0-8262-1866-7PPrreessiiddeennttss aanndd ppoolliittiiccaall tthhoouugghhtt..Siemers, David J.U. of Missouri Press, ©2009 243 p. $49.95Illustrating how American society can better understand presidentsthrough knowledge of the theoretical ideas they brought to office,Siemers (political science, U. of Wisconsin-Oshkosh) offers a comparativestudy of presidents and their political theory. He explores the connectionbetween philosophy and practical politics in the presidencies of JohnAdams, Thomas Jefferson, James Madison, Woodrow Wilson, Franklin D.Roosevelt, and Bill Clinton, examining their attitudes about politicaltheory, the theorists they read and admired, and uses of the theory intheir presidential activities.

JK524 2008-055027 978-0-202-36276-2TThhee sseelleeccttiioonn aanndd eelleeccttiioonn ooff pprreessiiddeennttss.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11998822))Title main entry. Ed. by Robert S. Hirschfield.AldineTransaction, ©2009 153 p. $29.95 (pa)In order to show future French leaders how Americans select their pres-ident, the French-American Foundation organized The American PoliticalProcess: Election 1980 seminar. The speakers and panelists included aca-demic political scientists, politicians, and lawyers. The 13 transcripts ofdiscussions consider such topics as voters, parties and candidates, mediaand money, primaries and delegate selection, conventions, strategies andtactics in presidential campaigns, and the press and polls. The 1982edition was titled Selection/election and published by Aldine. There is noindex.

JK526 2009-040944 978-1-60426-520-0CChhaannggee aanndd ccoonnttiinnuuiittyy iinn tthhee 22000088 eelleeccttiioonnss..Abramson, Paul R. et al.CQ Press, ©2010 427 p. $47.95 (pa)For courses in elections and American voting behavior, Abramson(political science, Michigan State U.) et al. evaluate the 2008 presidentialand congressional elections within historical and theoretical context,arguing that the election was more about rendering judgment on GeorgeW. Bush and the Republican Party than the policies of Obama andMcCain. Drawing on election results, surveys, polls, and data fromAmerican National Election Studies surveys, they examine the nomi-nation process; election campaigns; vice presidential selection; votingbehavior in the areas of turnout, social groups, issues, presidential per-formance and retrospective voting, and party loyalties; and outcomes, tosee why the Republicans lost the majority, whether Democrats cansolidify their majority, and why postwar American politics are so volatile.

JK1021 2009-038747 978-0-8133-4412-6CCoonnggrreessss iinn ccoonntteexxtt..Haskell, John.Westview Press, ©2010 417 p. $45.00 (pa)Using the analogy of Congress as the “board of directors” of the nation,Haskell (Georgetown U. and Claremont McKenna College) thoroughlycovers its role in authorizing, funding, and overseeing governmentactions. Full of recent real-life examples it begins by explaining the rolesof the House and the Senate and looks closely at the electoral process,including the roles of redistricting and monetary donations. A laterchapter explores in-depth why Congress has ceded authority for foreignpolicy to the president, particularly for the act of going to war.Appropriate for use as an undergraduate textbook, the book includes anappendix graphing the past 100 years of Congress and a glossary of keyterms and clauses.

JK1041 2009-027138 978-1-59451-794-5OOnn aapppprreecciiaattiinngg CCoonnggrreessss;; tthhee ppeeooppllee’’ss bbrraanncchh..Fisher, Louis. (On politics)Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 182 p. $82.00Fisher (a specialist in constitutional law at the Law Library of the Libraryof Congress) defends the role of the US Congress in the American con-stitutional system, arguing that while all three branches of governmenthave records that are decidedly mixed, the calumny that is often reservedfor Congress as inherently inept threatens its subordination to the lessdemocratic institutions of the executive and the judiciary. After tracing ashort history of representative government and discussing the constitu-tional sources and limits of presidential power, he offers chapters thatdescribe the role of Congress in shaping constitutional issues, discuss theways that safeguarding the rights of minorities has often been a jobcarried out by Congress more effectively than the judiciary, explore theweakness of Congress in defending its own institutional powers, andprovide advice on how to strengthen Congress’s role in government.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –170–

JK1726 2008-933210 978-1-84787-019-3CCuullttuurraall aannaallyyssiiss..McGuigan, Jim.Sage Publications, ©2010 183 p. $89.95The author of numerous publications on cultural studies, McGuigan(social sciences, U. of Loughborough, UK) tackles the topic of culturalanalysis, drawing largely on the British tradition of cultural studies andthe European tradition of critical social theory. McGuigan explains hisconcept of a cultural public sphere—i.e. the aesthetic and emotionalaspects—and how art and popular culture articulate public issues cap-turing people’s attention and imagination. He examines several contem-porary topics, including the public response to the death of PrincessDiana as a manifestation of the cultural public sphere; the controversyover London’s Millennium Dome in 2000; the 2000 Parekh Report onmulticultural Britain; the counter reaction to “political correctness” as evi-denced by the popular television comedy, Little Britain; the sociology ofthe mobile phone; risk and individualization; neoliberalism, urban regen-eration, and cultural policy; and the consumerist trajectory of devel-opment in the field of cultural studies.

JK1846 2009-047751 978-0-313-38550-6OOff tthhee ppeeooppllee,, bbyy tthhee ppeeooppllee,, ffoorr tthhee ppeeooppllee;; aaddooccuummeennttaarryy rreeccoorrdd ooff vvoottiinngg rriigghhttss aanndd eelleeccttoorraall rreeffoorrmm;;22vv..Baldino, Thomas J. and Kyle L. Kreider.Greenwood Press, ©2010 689 p. $180.00There are plenty of reasons for current high interest in voting rights andelectoral reform; the subject is hot, as it should be in a democracy. Thisthoughtfully prepared reference intended for students (high school andabove, including pre-law) and for serious general readers offers an abun-dance of information and insight regarding the ongoing processes ofdemocratic development. In two volumes 100-plus documents arrangedchronologically are set in context with section introductions and analysesof individual documents as well as supplementary sidebars. Volume 1deals with foundations, 1689-1959; volume 2, the development of themodern franchise, 1960-2009. A Reader’s Guide sorts the documentsaccording to themes such as age requirements and restrictions, Black suf-frage, colonial and state constitutions, disputed elections, federal courtdecisions, and voter requirements and restrictions, among other topics.Both authors are affiliated with the political science department ofWilkes U., Pennsylvania.

JK1991 2010-001640 978-1-933146-90-4CCrreeaattiinngg ppoolliittiiccaall eeqquuaalliittyy;; AAmmeerriiccaann eelleeccttiioonnss aass aa ppuubblliiccggoooodd..Mandle, Jay R.Academica Press, LLC, ©2010 137 p. $69.95In researching political campaign finance, Mandle (economics, ColgateU.) discovered that though public financing for electoral campaigns iswidely discussed and advocated, there was no theory underlying it. Hebegins the process of developing such a theory, by arguing that the elec-toral system shares many of the characteristics of a public good, andtherefore should be paid for with tax revenues. In addition to con-tributing to academic theory, he hopes to provide ammunition foractivists, of which he is one through the campus-based reform organi-zation Democracy Matters, which he co-founded in 2000.

JK2071 978-1-60426-536-1GGuuiiddee ttoo UU..SS.. eelleeccttiioonnss,, 66tthh eedd..;; 22vv..Title main entry.CQ Press, ©2010 904 p. $394.00The sixth edition of this esteemed two-volume reference first published35 years ago retains the original’s core emphasis: the origins and devel-opment of US elections (at the federal and state levels), and the contextof such issues as campaign finance reform. Initial chapters cover the evo-lution of American elections and the expansion of the franchise.Subsequent chapters address various aspects of political parties—theirdevelopment, politics and issues, and historical profiles. Coverage of pres-idential elections includes chronological discussion, characteristics andactivities of nominating conventions, the activities of the electoral college,and a biographical directory of candidates. Congressional and guberna-torial elections are similarly covered with discussion of their structuresand their evolution, as well as identification of personnel. Mixed in withthe narrative essays are substantial numbers of tables, figures, and boxesfeaturing demographic and statistical portraits of particular elections aswell as changes in institutions and legal reforms. Along with a generalindex, access to the contents is available through indexes of House can-didates, Senate general election candidates, Senate primary candidates,and gubernatorial general election and primary candidates.

JK2261 2009-015578 978-0-8108-5599-1HHiissttoorriiccaall ddiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess ppoolliittiiccaall ppaarrttiieess,, 22ddeedd..Bass, Harold F. Jr. (Historical dictionaries of U.S. history and politics;no.14)Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 437 p. $120.00In this dictionary, Bass (political science, Ouachita Baptist U.) describesthe historical development, organization, operation, and leadership of USpolitical parties from the past and present, both major and minor (fromthe Liberty Party to the Communist Party to the Republican Party).Emphasizing the national level in the federal system, entries includeinstitutions, terms such as filibuster, concepts like federalism, offices,voting behavior and the electoral process, issues like campaign financeand abortion, and labels, with the bulk on leaders, including presidentsand vice presidents, presidential nominees, chairs, and congressionalparty leaders. Also provided are a chronology and an introductory essayon the US constitutional framework and party system.

JK2265 2009-036149 978-1-59451-667-2PPaarrttiieess,, ppoollaarriizzaattiioonn,, aanndd ddeemmooccrraaccyy iinn tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess..Baumer, Donald C. and Howard J. Gold.Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 243 p. $88.00Baumer and Gold (both government, Smith College) empirically inves-tigate the academic and popular impression that the two parties thatdominate US electoral politics are diverging ideologically to offer voters aclear choice between two radical alternatives. They discuss politicalparties in the 21st century; images of the parties; the dynamics of partypolarization; the midterm elections of 1994 and 2006; congress, presi-dents, and gridlock when parties are in power; political parties in Anglo-America; and the election of 2008 and the future of American politics.

JK2356 2009-013973 978-0-230-62079-7TThhee CChhrriissttiiaann rriigghhtt iinn RReeppuubblliiccaann ssttaattee ppoolliittiiccss..Conger, Kimberly H.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 202 p. $80.00While many books have been written about the role of the religious rightin the national Republican Party, Conger (Political Science, Iowa StateUniversity) has instead turned her eye toward the activities and influenceof Christian conservatives at the state level. Looking at Indiana, Missouri,and Arizona, the author examines how the tactics of the religious rightvary according to the political opportunities offered in each state andaccording to the experience and sophistication of conservative Christianactivists. Surprisingly accessible for a political science book, Conger’svolume should find an audience both among scholars of state andnational politics and among political activists wanting a better under-standing of an important force in U.S. politics.

JL966 2009-027001 978-0-8047-6085-0DDeemmooccrraattiicc ggoovveerrnnaannccee iinn LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Scott Mainwaring and Timothy R. Scully.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 415 p. $29.95 (pa)The editors (professors of political science at the U. of Notre Dame)present 12 chapters exploring and assessing the Latin American expe-rience with democratic governance since the early 1990s, with a focus onthe areas of economic policy, social policy, and state capacity to providecitizen security. The opening chapter proposes a means for measuringsuccess in democratic governance and then compares 20 Latin Americancases according to the dimensions outlined. Six thematic chapters thenaddress issues of economic growth, policy reform, the balance betweenthe market and the state, social policy regimes, the courts and the pros-ecution of rights regimes, and the tension between strong political insti-tutions and populism. Three case studies then consider the democraticexperience in Chile, Costa Rica, and Brazil.

JN94 978-3-8329-4606-7CCoonntteennttiioouuss rreeggiioonnss iinn tthhee EEuurrooppeeaann UUnniioonn;; nnaattiioonnaalliissttppaarrttiieess aanndd tthhee ccoooorrddiinnaattiioonn ooff EEuurrooppeeaann ppoolliicciieess iinnffeeddeerraall mmeemmbbeerr ssttaatteess..Laiz, Alvaro Morcillo. (Politik; 170)Nomos, ©2009 210 p. $43.00 (pa)Laiz (Center for Research and Teaching in Economics, Mexico City)examines how regions in federal states, particularly regions governed bynationalist parties, decide to collaborate with the central governmentsand other regions on making European Union policy. His goal is todetermine whether regional interests as defined by nationalist partiesreceive more consideration from member states, the Commission, or theEuropean Parliament than do those of other regions. He is surprised tofind that the European Parliament appears to be a more effective ally ofsuch regions than the Commission, and has even promoted agendas thatoverlap with those of regions and of cultural minorities. Audiovision andcohesion policy provide his case studies. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–171–

JN96 2009-049860 978-1-4331-0531-9BBrraannddiinngg ddeemmooccrraaccyy;; UU..SS.. rreeggiimmee cchhaannggee iinn ppoosstt--SSoovviieettEEaasstteerrnn EEuurrooppee..Sussman, Gerald. (Frontiers in political communication; v.17)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 232 p. $33.95 (pa)Sussman (urban studies and communications, Portland State U.) con-ducts a critical analysis of the so-called “democracy promotion” initia-tives of public and private agencies in the United States and WesternEurope, with his principal emphasis on the policies and propagandatechniques of the U.S. Agency for International Development; the quasi-public National Endowment for Democracy; and affiliated private organ-izations such as Freedom House, the various Soros foundations, andother allied groups as they operated in the early years of the 21st centuryin Serbia, Georgia, Ukraine, and Belarus. He offers comparative analysisof some Western and Central European organizations and their propa-ganda activities in the “color revolutions” of Eastern and Central Europe.Fundamentally, he argues that the foreign policy propaganda of“democracy promotion” is an extension of domestic political propagandaand also that it corresponds to democracy’s decline in the United States.

JN96 978-87-7934-434-1PPaatthhwwaayyss——aa ssttuuddyy ooff ssiixx ppoosstt--ccoommmmuunniisstt ccoouunnttrriieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Lars Johannsen & Karin Hilmer Pedersen.Aarhus University Press, ©2009 170 p. $29.00 (pa)A political science research project at Aarhus University in Denmark pro-duced papers on the current workings of the polity in 15 countries,emphasizing differences with other countries in the region, and espe-cially with Western European experiences. Six of them were selected forthis volume as describing in each case a key feature decisive for theinitial institutional choices that frame the capability or incapability ofgovernment to produce policies and thus stabilize the political system.They cover managing heterogeneity in Kazakhstan, Schevardnadze’spolitical strategies, the limits of tutelary transition in Estonia, constitu-tional corporatism and polico-administrative relations in Slovenia, Czechpolitics in the context of the consequences of its party system, andbreaking with post-communism in Poland. There is no index. Distributedin North America by The David Brown Book Co.

JN1129 2009-046620 978-0-8047-6235-9TThhee NNeeww LLaabboouurr eexxppeerriimmeenntt;; cchhaannggee aanndd rreeffoorrmm uunnddeerrBBllaaiirr aanndd BBrroowwnn..Faucher-King, Florence and Patrick Le Galés. Trans. by Gregory Elliott.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 183 p. $21.95 (pa)The authors (both of the Centre d’Etudes Européennes, Sciences Po,France) conduct an assessment of the policies of New Labour under TonyBlair and Gordon Brown and their impact on British policy and gov-ernment-society relations from 1997 to 2009. They find that New Labourhas helped transform Britain into a “market society” while underminingcollective democratic purpose. They also argue that ideas of equality havebeen subordinated to ideas of opportunity. The New Labour society, then,“is a meritorcratic society, geared towards the needs and the priorities ofthe middle class, but also an inclusive society in which the issue of socialjustice is bound up with individual effort and brownie points thanks toan ability to make the “right” choices.”

JN1541 978-1-85607-990-7TThhee ccaannddiiddaattee..O’Keeffe, Susan.Currach Press, ©2009 192 p. $27.95 (pa)O’Keeffe, an investigative journalist who ran for the Labour Party in theEuropean election in 2009 for the seat in Dublin, presents a diary of theelection campaign from March 2009 to just after polling day on June 5,when she lost. The diary reveals aspects of Irish political life, the stressesof campaigning, her low budget campaign, her travels across the con-stituency, her experiences with kind and hostile people, the growth of herpolitical consciousness, and how politics work. Distributed in the US byDufour.

JN3971 978-3-86649-934-8TThhee GGeerrmmaann PPaarrlliiaammeenntt..Görtemaker, Manfred et al. Ed. by Edmund Budrich.Barbara Budrich Publishers, ©2009 272 p. $109.95In this mix of political science and political, architectural, and culturalhistory, five extended essays discuss the parliamentary ideal and parlia-mentarianism in Germany, 1800-1945; the reconstruction of democracysince 1945 and German reunification; the functions, organization, anddecision-making process of the German Bundestag; the history of theReichstag building in Berlin; and the parliamentary quarter in Berlin—politics, architecture, and art. The presentation features attractive pagedesign and abundant illustrations, including generous-size photos ofpeople and places, past and present, in a slightly oversize format(9.5x11.5″). The German-language version is in its fifth edition; thisEnglish translation is apparently the first, and it is distributed in the USby ISBS.

JN6529 2009-042348 978-0-7603-3753-0KKGGBB’’ss ppooiissoonn ffaaccttoorryy;; ffrroomm LLeenniinn ttoo LLiittvviinneennkkoo..Voldarsky, Boris.Zenith Press, ©2009 288 p. $25.00For general readers and espionage and intelligence experts, Volodarsky, aformer Russian military intelligence officer and current independentintelligence analyst, describes how, since 1917 and Lenin’s rise, theRussian security service has carried out poisoning operations all over theworld to eliminate their enemies. He documents about 20 cases of poi-soning assassinations, including that of Alexander Litvinenko, a formerlieutenant colonel of the Russian security service, in London in 2006; theradioactive thallium poisoning of the Soviet defector Nikolai Khokhlov inFrankfurt in 1957; and the ricin umbrella murder of the Bulgarian dis-sident Georgi Markov in 1978. Zenith Press is an imprint of QuaysidePublishing.

JN7395 2009-049016 978-1-4331-0713-9AAssppeeccttss ooff tthhee ggoovveerrnniinngg ooff tthhee FFiinnnnss..Maude, George. (Studies in modern European history; v.66)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 314 p. $83.95Historian Maude relates the political history of Finland from 1918 to thepresent. He starts with the paradox of the Finns winning their freedomfrom Russia apparently with the aid of the Germans, although the newBolshevist government had announced earlier that it was grantingFinnish independence. The relationship of Finland with Russia, the SovietUnion and Russia again is a continuing thread through the book. Maudetreats internal tensions as well as the relationship of Finland to theEuropean Union. The work is heavily footnoted, with an extensive bibli-ography but, unfortunately, lacks an index.

JQ24 2009-038075 978-1-60497-632-8IIssllaamm aanndd ddeemmooccrraattiizzaattiioonn iinn AAssiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Shiping Hua.Cambria Press, ©2009 339 p. $119.99Hua (political science, U. of Louisville) presents ten chapters examiningthe relationship between Islam, Muslims, and democratization within thecontext of Asian cultures from the perspective of theory and empiricalcountry studies in South, Southeast, and Central Asia. Topics include thenecessity of democratization within one conceptualization of Islamistgovernance, survey evidence concerning the attitudes of ordinaryMuslims towards democracy, “underdog” strategic political thinking inMuslim minority countries and weak Muslim states and its relationshipto democratization; Islamic identity and governance in Pakistan; politicalIslam in Bangladesh; Muslim experience of Indian democracy; politicalIslam in post-Suharto Indonesia; Islam and democracy in Malaysia;alleged ties between Iraqi and Afghan insurgents opposing US occupa-tions; and the impact of China on Islam and democracy in Central Asia.

JQ1539 2009-050890 978-0-313-36505-8CCoommppeettiinngg CChhiinneessee ppoolliittiiccaall vviissiioonnss;; HHoonngg KKoonngg vvss..BBeeiijjiinngg oonn ddeemmooccrraaccyy..Lo, Sonny Shiu Hing.Praeger, ©2010 294 p. $59.95Lo (political science, U. of Waterloo, Canada) has written extensivelyabout China, Hong Kong, and Macao. Here he explores the tension inHong Kong between the Western model of democracy with its popularlyelected executives and legislatures, and the socialist model as establishedin the People’s Republic, which must be procedurally incremental, pub-licly accountable, and culturally Chinese. His topics include the politicsof the July 1 March since 2003, from democratic defeat in 2007 districtcouncils elections to rebound in 2008 legislative council elections, theHong Kong Democratic Party, and whether the pro-Beijing DAB and pro-business Liberal Party can promote democratization in Hong Kong.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –172–

Prices are U.S. "list." They may vary outside the U.S. Bookstores, jobbers,or the presses will fill orders. Do not order books from Book News Inc.

JQ1875 2009-026880 978-0-87289-407-5RReeffrraammiinngg ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy AAffrriiccaa;; ppoolliittiiccss,, eeccoonnoommiiccss,, aannddccuullttuurree iinn tthhee gglloobbaall eerraa..Title main entry. Ed. by Peyi Soyinka-Airewele and Rita Kiki Edozie.CQ Press, ©2010 394 p. $39.95 (pa)Soyinka-Airewele (African and international politics, Ithaca College) andEdozie (international relations, Michigan State U.) provide a textbook of22 essays that reframe discourses on African politics, histories, contem-porary struggles, and accomplishments. African, New Zealand,European, and North American scholars of African literature, interna-tional relations and law, government, economics, politics, and women’sand black studies, as well as authors and historians, cover such topics asidentity, gender, slavery, the diaspora, colonialism, HIV, oil, humanrights, history, politics, economics, security, society, literature, film, andhealth from diverse points of view and analytical perspectives, meant toprovoke debate and challenge the Western framing, as well as presentAfrica as a comprehensive regional entity rather than dividing the con-tinent between sub-Saharan and North Africa. There is no index.

JQ1998 2009-284410 978-1-84467-356-8AAfftteerr tthhee ppaarrttyy;; ccoorrrruuppttiioonn,, tthhee AANNCC aanndd SSoouutthh AAffrriiccaa’’ssuunncceerrttaaiinn ffuuttuurree..Feinstein, Andrew.Verso, ©2009 301 p. $26.95A former member of parliament in the African National Congress (ANC)party, Feinstein contributes to British and US newspapers and television.Here he charges that the party responsible for ending apartheid andbringing democracy to South Africa is in the process of being destroyedby corruption. His story leads through such matters as a dry whiteseason, stirrings of change, place of gold, Cape Town calling, an Africanarises, on being Jewish, dying of politics, hard-wired for corruption, thefall of the mighty, presidential trials, and speaking truth to power.

JS78 978-1-84742-217-0CChhaannggiinngg llooccaall ggoovveerrnnaannccee,, cchhaannggiinngg cciittiizzeennss..Title main entry. Ed. by Catherine Durose et al.Policy Press, ©2009 231 p. $42.95 (pa)Noting a policy preoccupation on the part of both New Labour and theConservatives in the UK towards renegotiating the role of citizens andtheir relationships to public governance, Durose (De Montfort U., UK),Greasley (U. of East Anglia, UK), and Richardson (U. of Manchester, UK)present 12 papers that explore this renegotiation through a variety ofempirical contexts. Papers discuss neighborhood policy under NewLabour; urban housing market restructuring and changing neigh-borhood governance; housing policy, women, and ethnicity; intergroupcontact and the development of community cohesion; the inclusion ofnew migrants in local governance; faith participation in governance;citizen perspectives on behavior change policies; children’s participationin governance; and local citizenship and the online world. Distributed inNorth America by ISBS.

JS395 2009-031172 978-0-8133-4451-5TThhee ccaammppaaiiggnn mmaannaaggeerr;; rruunnnniinngg aanndd wwiinnnniinngg llooccaalleelleeccttiioonnss,, 44tthh eedd..Shaw, Catherine M.Westview Press, ©2010 427 p. $37.50 (pa)Basing her advice on her own experiences in Oregon politics, the authorprovides advice on how to run local political campaigns, including issue-based campaigns. Her approach is based on the premise that bybreaking a campaign down into manageable units and organizing theactivities within each component, you can avoid overloading the work-force. Chapters discuss precinct analysis, the campaign team, developingthe campaign theme and message, organizing volunteers, fund-raising,lawn signs, targeting voters, media, packaging the candidate, the detailsof the issues-based campaign, getting out the vote, the campaign flowchart, and post-campaign issues.

JS7192 2009-007180 978-0-8047-6853-5LLooccaalliissiinngg ppoowweerr iinn ppoosstt--aauutthhoorriittaarriiaann IInnddoonneessiiaa;; aaSSoouutthheeaasstt AAssiiaa ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Hadiz, Vedi R. (Contemporary issues in Asia and the Pacific)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 247 p. $22.95 (pa)Hadiz (sociology, National U. of Singapore) contributes to the literatureon how the global integration of capitalist commerce is accompanied bydemands for increased local autonomy in the social, economic, and cul-tural fields by looking at the process in Indonesia. He argues that theheavily centralized authoritarianism of the New Order left little room forthe emergence of relatively autonomous local strongmen, as has beenseen often in other parts of the region such as Thailand and Philippines.At the same time, he says, these three countries share the puzzle that thelocalization of power has not led to more fundamental transformationsin the prevailing relations of power. Among his topics are technocraticambitions and the challenge of predatory power, a political sociology oflocal elites, money politics and thuggery in new local democracies, andthe politics of inclusion and exclusion.

JV305 978-0-7748-1621-2UUrrbbaanniizziinngg ffrroonnttiieerrss;; iinnddiiggeennoouuss ppeeoopplleess aanndd sseettttlleerrss iinn1199tthh--cceennttuurryy PPaacciiffiicc RRiimm cciittiieess..Edmonds, Penelope.U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 317 p. $85.00Colonial frontiers, notes Edmonds (U. of Melbourne) in his introduction,existed not just at the borderlands of colonial settler projects but also atthe heart of early town and city building. This proposition lies at thecenter of his comparative historical examination of race, gender, segre-gation, urban space, and indigenous and non-indigenous lives in thePacific Rim cities of Victoria, Canada and Melbourne, Australia in the19th century.

JV6091 2009-022753 978-0-415-77666-0MMiiggrraattiioonn..Samers, Michael. (Key ideas in geography)Routledge, ©2010 374 p. $39.99 (pa)Part of Routledge’s Key Ideas in Geography series, this work provides acritical and multi-disciplinary introduction to migration and immigrationat a level intended for advanced undergraduates and masters-levelgraduate students. Samers (geography, U. of Kentucky) brings in insightsfrom human geography, political science, social anthropology, sociology,and economics while reviewing key terms, theories, concepts, and issuesconcerning geographical and spatial understandings of migration andimmigration. He also sets out a core argument that “in the context ofmigration, spatially-explicit concepts such as ‘transnationalism’ requiremore nuance, while many of the concepts and theories which have thusfar neglected space or have not been ‘treated’ spatially, need to be re-written with space in mind.”

JV6217 2009-036151 978-1-59451-813-3MMaassss mmiiggrraattiioonn iinn tthhee wwoorrlldd--ssyysstteemm;; ppaasstt,, pprreesseenntt,, aannddffuuttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Terry-Ann Jones and Eric Mielants. (Politicaleconomy of the world- system annuals series; v.31)Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 248 p. $87.00The editors (professors of sociology at Fairfield U.) present 12 papers thatengage with the issue of mass migration utilizing, or while criticallyengaged with, the world systems theory developed by ImmanuelWallerstein and others, which sees the capitalist world-system as charac-terized by a global division of labor resulting from unequal bulk tradelinkages between the core, the periphery, and the semiperiphery. Thework begins with Wallerstein himself drawing theoretical linkagesbetween flows of peoples and long-term Kondratieff economic cycles.Other theoretical papers explore the impact of increased speed ofmigration on the world system, the need to understand inequality in thecontext of center-periphery relations alongside nationwide and regionalinequalities, and the potential of conflict related to environmental degra-dation and environmental migration. The next set of papers consists ofcase studies of migration flows and labor markets around the world. Thevolume concludes with three discussions of migrant rights and anti-immigration backlashes in the United States and France.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–173–

JV6450 2009-054334 978-1-58765-599-9EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff AAmmeerriiccaann iimmmmiiggrraattiioonn;; 33vv.. ((oonnlliinnee aacccceessssiinncclluuddeedd))Title main entry. Ed. by Carl L. Bankston.Salem Press, ©2010 1232 p. $395.00At a time when immigration policy and policy reform are coming to theforefront, this three-volume reference intended for students and generalreaders offers quite comprehensive coverage of the subject in straight-forward entries ranging in length from about 1,000 words to severalthousand. Approximately half the pages—one-third of the 533 entries—offer overviews of such issues as AIDS, affirmative action, and worldmigration patterns, and of art, music, food customs, films, and literature.Other articles address specific ethnic and national groups, historicalevents and eras, regional differences and history in each of the 50 states,US immigration policy, and significant individuals. Each article beginswith top matter that summarizes who, what, where, and significance;and each ends with at least a couple suggestions for further reading.Arrangement is alphabetical. The third volume contains appendixesoffering a biographical directory of notable immigrants, US SupremeCourt rulings on immigration, federal government agencies and com-missions, federal laws, a filmography, a bibliography of general workson immigration, a glossary, and a timeline. Indexing is by category ofarticle, court case, laws and treaties, personage, and subject. Purchase ofthe print edition includes access to the online version until the end of2011.

JV6471 2009-035400 978-0-9800560-4-4MMeexxiiccaann mmiiggrraattiioonn aanndd tthhee UU..SS.. eeccoonnoommiicc ccrriissiiss;; aattrraannssnnaattiioonnaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Title main entry. Ed. by Wayne A. Cornelius et al. (CCIS anthologies; 7)Ctr. for Comp. Immigration Studies, ©2010 269 p. $65.00Cornelius (director emeritus, Center for Comparative ImmigrationStudies, U. of California, US), Fitzgerald (associated director, Center forComparative Immigration Studies), Fischer (Instituto Nacional deAntropologia e Historia, Mexico), and Muse-Orlinoff (a doctoral candidateat the U. of California) present the fifth in a series based on the annualresearch projects of the Mexican Migration Field Research and TrainingProgram, based at the Center for Comparative Immigration Studies. Itfocuses on how the recent global economic crisis has impacted migrationflows between Mexico and the United States by examining survey dataand in-depth interviews from the indigenous Yucatán community ofTunkás and its satellite communities in Southern California. The sepa-rately authored chapters of the book explore the economic copingstrategies of the communities; discuss interactions between the economicsituation and border enforcement; explore connections between labormarket opportunities, educational attainment, and upward mobility;examine cultural attitudes towards migration; and examine the status ofnutrition-related health problems within the communities. Distributed inthe US by Lynne Rienner Publishers.

JV6483 2009-936233 978-1-84844-636-6NNaattiioonnss ooff iimmmmiiggrraannttss;; AAuussttrraalliiaa aanndd tthhee UUSSAA ccoommppaarreedd..Title main entry. Ed. by John Higley et al. (Monash studies in globalmovements)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 206 p. $100.00An anthology addressing exactly the same matters was published in 1992by Oxford University Press, and the social scientists here think thatenough has changed since then to take another look. Alternating papersoffer Australian and US perspectives on compositions and contours ofrecent immigration flows, policy convergences and divergences betweenthe two anglophone countries, immigration’s effects on their labormarkets, policies aimed at integrating new groups of immigrants into theEuropean diaspora, and changing shapes of ethnic relations and multi-culturalism. Among the issues raised are the transformation of immi-gration politics in the US from disordered expansion to disorderedstalemate, new groups and social cohesion in Australia, Latinos in theUS, and immigrant settlement and ethnic relations in Australia.

JV7048 2009-035994 978-1-59332-232-8IImmmmiiggrraannttss aanndd tthhee ccuullttuurraall ppoolliittiiccss ooff ppllaaccee;; aaccoommppaarraattiivvee ssttuuddyy ooff NNeeww YYoorrkk aanndd LLooss AAnnggeelleess..Keogan, Kevin. (The new Americans: recent immigration and Americansociety)LFB Scholarly Publishing, LLC, ©2010 192 p. $62.00Focusing on two major urban destinations for immigrants to the US,Keogan (Montclair State University) surveys news stories in The New YorkTimes and Los Angeles Times to analyze the differences between por-trayals of immigrant issues and communities in mass media and inscholarly texts. The book looks at demographics and socio-economicrecords for each city’s main immigrant-ethnic groups, and attempts tounderstand how and why distinct cultural contexts emerged in each city.

JV7220 2009-482557 978-0-88975-246-7TThhee eeffffeeccttss ooff mmaassss iimmmmiiggrraattiioonn oonn CCaannaaddiiaann lliivviinnggssttaannddaarrddss aanndd ssoocciieettyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Herbert Grubel.Fraser Institute, ©2009 236 p. $19.95 (pa)Political scientists, economists, and other scholars point out some positivebut mostly negative effects of people coming into Canada, which is saidto boast the world’s highest rate of immigration. The topics includecurrent immigration policy, comparisons with the US and France, a labormarket and productivity perspective, growth and age structure of thework force, and the creation of a global suburb and its impact onCanadian national unity. The 12 essays were presented at the June 2008conference Canadian Immigration Policy: Reassessing the Economic,Demographic and Social Impact on Canada, held in Montreal. They arenot indexed.

JV7590 2009-936228 978-1-84844-371-6MMiiggrraattiioonn aanndd mmoobbiilliittyy iinn EEuurrooppee;; ttrreennddss,, ppaatttteerrnnss aannddccoonnttrrooll..Title main entry. Ed. by Heinz Fassmann et al.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 312 p. $135.00In September 2007, Vienna hosted the international conference Migrationin Europe: Threat or Benefit, the fifth in a series put on by Strategic Elitesand EU Enlargement network and sponsored by the British Council. Ofthe 22 papers presented, 13 were selected for revision and publicationhere, along with the introduction and one additional paper. Social scien-tists from across Europe, including or and (which is the crux of the issue)Turkey, examine costs and benefits of migration, patterns of migrationand mobility, problems of return and migrant integration, and statecontrol and citizen rights. Among the topics are myths and realities ofthe shortage of skilled workers, Turkey as the new destination for inter-national retirement migration, employment rates of return migrants inFinland, and the future of border control in Britain.

JV7590 2009-045271 978-1-84545-618-4TTrraannssnnaattiioonnaall ffaammiilliieess,, mmiiggrraattiioonn,, aanndd ggeennddeerr;; MMoorrooccccaannaanndd FFiilliippiinnoo wwoommeenn iinn BBoollooggnnaa aanndd BBaarrcceelloonnaa..Zontini, Elisabetta. (New directions in anthropology; v.30)Berghahn Books, ©2010 268 p. $90.00Southern Europe is peculiar in its experience of highly genderedmigration flows. Zontini (sociology and social policy, U. of Nottingham,UK) seeks an explanation for the causes and consequences of this gender-selective migration for the individual migrant worker and their familiesthrough an ethnographic comparison of Christian Filipino and MuslimMoroccan female migrants in the domestic labor market in Bologna, Italyand Barcelona, Spain. She explores how women’s roles in households,families, and kinship groups shape their migration; the impact ofmigration and transnationalism in turn on households and families andwomen’s roles in them; and patterns of settlement that result forwomen’s immigration and women’s roles in those patterns.

JV8202 978-87-7674-413-7IImmmmiiggrraattiioonn ttoo DDeennmmaarrkk;; aann oovveerrvviieeww ooff tthhee rreesseeaarrcchhccaarrrriieedd oouutt ffrroomm 11999999 ttoo 22000066 bbyy tthhee RRoocckkwwoooollFFoouunnddaattiioonn RReesseeaarrcchh UUnniitt..Matthiessen, Poul.U. Press of Southern Denmark, ©2010 232 p. $38.00 (pa)Danish demographer Matthiessen synthesizes the findings of a studydesigned to provide data and insight into conditions of life for non-Western immigrants to Denmark. The initial focus was their integrationinto the labor market, but the study was later widened to consider otheraspects as well. Among them are education and language proficiency,crime among immigrants, the welfare system, the public exchequer, geo-graphical distribution, the integration of non-Western immigrants inDenmark and Germany, attitudes of the Danish population to admittingrefugees, whether Danes are hostile towards immigrants, and foreignersin the Danish newspaper debate. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –174–

JZ1160 2009043692 978-1-4051-5238-9TThhee iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ssttuuddiieess eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa;; 1122vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert A. Denemark.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 8029 p. $2,495.00This massive effort offers a one-stop resource for both students and aca-demics to the wealth of topics and disciplines of the field. Topics rangefrom counterintelligence, methods of foreign policy analysis, and thegeography of diplomacy, to global indigenous rights and responses, andfeminist ethics in international relations. The essays are arranged alpha-betically, but the material is usefully sub-categorized and introduced insection introductions presented in Vol.1. The heading of the section intro-duction lists all the essays that fall within the realm of their topic, noti-fying the reader of the often diverse areas in which the topic occur. Thebody of the introduction describes the scope of the topic as well as thecontent of each of the essays listed. In this way, students new to thesubject have a clear guide to what might otherwise be an overwhelmingamount—12 volumes worth—of material. The essays themselves present athorough overview of the topic, describing not only the history of itsdevelopment, but the varying interpretations or controversies ongoing inthe field. The encyclopedia is notable for the thoroughness of coverage,with a wealth of references cited and discussed in each essay, and thecredentials of its contributors. Each essay concludes with a full list of ref-erences, a list of online resources, and a note on the author. Vol.12 is acomprehensive index volume and each volume contains a table of con-tents. Denemark (U. of Delaware) has done a laudable job of overseeingthis fine reference work, which was sorely needed in the field.

JZ1242 2009-040270 978-0-87289-919-3WWoorrlldd aatt rriisskk;; aa gglloobbaall iissssuueess ssoouurrcceebbooookk,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry.CQ Press, ©2010 822 p. $160.00Demographics and settlement; economics; environment; education,health, and welfare; politics and governance; and security are the areascovered by researchers in the various fields or journalists and writersspecialized in them. Among the 32 specific topics are refugees and forcedmigrants, labor and employment, biodiversity, hunger and food security,international criminal law, and ethnic and regional conflict. The detaillevel should be useful to non-specialist journalists, writers, and teachers.The first edition was published in 2002.

JZ1249 2009-936212 978-1-84376-226-3WWoorrllddss iinn ttrraannssiittiioonn;; eevvoollvviinngg ggoovveerrnnaannccee aaccrroossss aassttrreesssseedd ppllaanneett..Camilleri, Joseph A. and Jim Falk.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 682 p. $260.00Camilleri (La Trobe U., Australia) and Falk (U. of Melbourne, Australia)hypothesize that the organization of human affairs is undergoing a tran-sition away from the characteristics of the Modern era, a transition thatis “as momentous in its significance and possible ramifications for gov-ernance as many of the preceding transitions in human evolution.” Theyargue that governance in the Modern era is characterized by a reduc-tionist and compartmentalizing approach to the social and natural order,of which the idea of sovereignty played a key part. Their aim here is toidentify the theoretical and practical limits of this approach to gover-nance through examination of the complexities of interactions in therapidly evolving flows associated with economic activity, atmosphericpollution, climate change, the information revolution, communicable dis-eases, and security threats, as well as emerging normative, legal, andinstitutional governance responses to these issues, which they suggestcould be pointing the way toward a “new stage in human evolution” thatwill involve a higher degree of reflexivity. They propose the term “holore-flexivity” (a portmanteau combining holism and reflexivity) to define theneeded temporal and spatial frame of reference that can more effectivelymonitor and diagnostically integrate the rising volume, speed, andintensity of flows that characterize wide-ranging aspects of human life.

JZ1305 2009-053126 978-0-8133-4418-8FFuunnddaammeennttaall pprriinncciipplleess ooff iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall rreellaattiioonnss..Rochester, J. Martin.Westview Press, ©2010 412 p. $50.00 (pa)This is an undergraduate-level textbook on international relations. Ratherthan promote any particular paradigm of the field, Rochester (politicalscience, U. of Missouri—St. Louis) encourages students to critically thinkabout problems through multiple lenses. He has organized the text intofour sections that cover key terms, theoretical schools, and the basics ofthe evolution of world politics over the centuries; standard topics of thefield such as states and foreign policy, diplomacy and bargaining, warand the use of armed force, and international organizations and law; keyissue-areas of international security, human security, and internationaleconomics; and “loose ends” (i.e., global governance of the environment,the Internet, and other issues) and final reflections.

JZ1305 2009-025420 978-0-7546-7815-1IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall rreellaattiioonnss;; aa EEuurrooppeeaann ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Telò, Mario.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 224 p. $99.95Whereas the academic development of international relations theory haslargely been determined in the United States, no doubt due to its hege-monic place in the post-1945 world order, this volume by Teló (U. Librede Bruxelles, Belgium) explicitly considers the subject from a European(but not Eurocentric, he disclaims) perspective. The central theme hebrings to analyzing and comparing realist, Marxist, institutionalist, andconstructivist theories of international relations is the tensions betweenthe Westphalian paradigm of sovereign states and the ongoing Europeanintegration project and their implications for theory.

JZ1305 2009-042274 978-1-60426-993-2IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall rreellaattiioonnss iinn ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee;; aa rreeaaddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Henry R. Nau.CQ Press, ©2010 754 p. $44.95 (pa)In this companion volume to the undergraduate-level text Perspectives onInternational Relations: Power, Institutions, and Ideas, Nau (Elliott Schoolof International Affairs, George Washington U.) presents scholarly essaysand essays by political and other figures illustrating the varioustheoretical perspectives and levels of analysis found within internationalrelations and discussed in said companion volume. The 47 papers arepresented along the same thematic lines as the other volume, withchapters covering perspectives and levels of analysis in internationalrelations; perspectives on world history; World War I; World War II; theorigins and end of the Cold War; the world of the 1990s; terrorism andthe world after 9/11; the history of globalization; how globalizationworks in practice; trade, investment, and finance; development in Asiaand Latin America; development in Africa and the Middle East; criticaltheory on global inequality, imperialism, and injustice; population,pollution, and pandemics; global civil society; and global governanceinstitutions.

JZ1318 2009-028504 978-963-9776-53-1GGlloobbaalliizzaattiioonn aanndd nnaattiioonnaalliissmm;; tthhee ccaasseess ooff GGeeoorrggiiaa aannddtthhee BBaassqquuee ccoouunnttrryy..Sabanadze, Natalie.Central European U. Press, ©2010 209 p. $40.00Senior political adviser to the High Commissioner on National Minoritiesof The Organization for Security and Co-operation in Europe, Sabanadzechallenges the widespread assumption that globalization and nation-alism are diametrically opposite, and that the conflict between themdefines contemporary political life. She argues that the forces of nation-alism tend to develop pragmatic relations with globalization that servepolitical and security interests of a national community. This is possible,she says, because today’s nationalism is neither cultural nor an exclu-sively defense and isolationist force. Her case studies are the Republic ofGeorgia and the occupied Basque nation.

JZ1318 2009-021453 978-0-8047-6376-9HHyyppeerrccoonnfflliicctt;; gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn aanndd iinnsseeccuurriittyy..Mittelman, James H.Stanford Security Studies, ©2010 256 p. $24.95 (pa)Mittelman (international affairs, American U.) investigates how global-ization is connected to security or insecurity, and the implications of thatconnection for world order. Introducing the novel concept of hypercon-flict, he argues that a novel pattern is forming as insecurity is being glob-alized, political violence reorganized, pervasive uncertainty marked by arising climate of fear, and structures of armed and other conflict movingbeyond the hands of governments and their agents. After reviewingcoercive globalization, he looks in turn at conflicts involving theMultilateral Agreement on Investment, Asia, Seattle, and 9/11. Then heconsiders post-national security. Stanford Security Studies is an imprintof Stanford University Press.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–175–

JZ1318 978-0-7748-1717-2UUnnsseettttlleedd lleeggiittiimmaaccyy;; ppoolliittiiccaall ccoommmmuunniittyy,, ppoowweerr,, aannddaauutthhoorriittyy iinn aa gglloobbaall eerraa..Title main entry. Ed. by Steven Bernstein and William D. Coleman.U. of British Columbia Press, ©2009 392 p. $85.00Edited by Bernstein (political science, U. of Toronto) and Coleman (glob-alization and public policy, Balsillie School of International Affairs) theessays presented here discuss the issue of legitimacy at all levels of gov-ernment. As globalization proceeds, state sovereignty is being eroded byinternational governing bodies, such as the European Union, and bytrade arrangements enforced by institutions such as the World TradeOrganization. A chapter by Nyers (political science, McMaster U.) outlineshow the United Nations is also moving in the direction of regarding mil-itary intervention as legitimate in cases where there is a “responsibilityto protect” people, even in cases such as the Burmese reluctance to acceptaid in the wake of Cyclone Nargis in 2008. At the same time, indigenouscultures are demanding more autonomy than ever before which chal-lenges legitimacy from within a state. The contributors come from awider range than just political science, including anthropology, eco-nomics and literature.

JZ1480 2009-030235 978-0-7546-4862-8TThhee AAsshhggaattee rreesseeaarrcchh ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo UUSS ffoorreeiiggnn ppoolliiccyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert J. Pauly. (Ashgate research companion)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 342 p. $124.95Presented by Pauly (U. of Southern Mississippi), the 16 papers in thisvolume examine the formulation and implementation of foreign policy inthe United States from the beginnings of the republic to the post-9/11 erafrom historical and political science perspectives. The papers in the firstsection discuss the evolution of US foreign policy from its emergence asglobal power to the present, international relations theory and US foreignpolicy, containment and neo-realism during the Cold War, US foreignpolicy and constructivist theory, and alternative theoretical perspectives.The next set of papers offer regional perspectives on US foreign policy,with separate chapters being included for Europe, the Greater MiddleEast, China and the Far East, Latin America, and Africa. The final set ofpapers discuss contemporary issues, including terrorism, globalization,nation-state-building, and democratization.

JZ1480 2009-050659 978-0-465-01361-6TThhee BBeeiijjiinngg ccoonnsseennssuuss;; hhooww CChhiinnaa’’ss aauutthhoorriittaarriiaann mmooddeellwwiillll ddoommiinnaattee tthhee ttwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt cceennttuurryy..Halper, Stefan A.Basic Books, ©2010 296 p. $28.95“China poses the most serious challenge to the United States since thehalf-century Cold War struggle with the Soviet Union,” warns Halper (pol-itics and international studies, U. of Cambridge, UK), who argues that themarket authoritarian model of China’s governing system could spreadacross the developing world as China increases its political and economicconnections in Africa and Latin America, leaving the US in a worldunsympathetic to democratic values and less open to American economicinterests. Exploring the internal and external dynamics of China’s eco-nomic growth and increasing role in world affairs, he suggests thatwithout a change in the US approach to China, a “Beijing Consensus” ofmarket authoritarianism and its promise of economic prosperitythreatens to replace the “Washington Consensus” of neoliberalism, whichHalper sees as a force for both economic growth and democratic values.

JZ1480 2009-043857 978-1-60871-000-3IIssssuueess ffoorr ddeebbaattee iinn AAmmeerriiccaann ffoorreeiiggnn ppoolliiccyy..Title main entry.CQ Press, ©2010 412 p. $35.95 (pa)The CQ Researcher, founded in 1923 as Editorial Research Reports, is aweekly policy brief publication that seeks to explain difficult conceptsand provide balanced coverage of competing perspectives relevant toAmerican political issues to high school and college students. Thisvolume collects materials from the CQ Researcher exploring current issuesin American foreign policy. The 16 chapters address the Afghanistan war,counterinsurgency warfare, nuclear disarmament, the Guantanamo Bayinternment camp, homeland security, reform and the financial crisis, the“border fence” on the US-Mexican border, the international politics of thedollar, the humanitarian crisis in Darfur, the global food crisis, humanrights in China, political crisis in Pakistan, Middle East peace prospects,policy towards the Horn of Africa, US-Russian relations, and the drugwar in Mexico.

JZ1480 2009-026781 978-0-87078-514-6TThhee ssuurrvviivvaall aanndd tthhee ssuucccceessss ooff lliibbeerrttyy;; aa ddeemmooccrraaccyyaaggeennddaa ffoorr UU..SS.. ffoorreeiiggnn ppoolliiccyy..Halperin, Morton H. and Michael Hochman Fuchs.Century Foundation, ©2009 289 p. $19.95 (pa)Foreign policy specialist who work for the US government, democraticpolitical campaigns, and foundations as the wind blows, Halperin andFuchs argue that US foreign policy should give priority to supportingstates on the path to democracy. They explain why they think so, andsuggest principles and methods for accomplishing it. Among their topicsare the state of democracy, rhetoric and reality around America’s expe-rience with democracy promotion, tailoring support for democracy,incentivizing democratization, a community of democracies, and theinternational obligation to defend democratic regimes.

JZ1570 978-3-8329-5095-8MMeeddiitteerrrraanneeaann ppoolliicciieess ffrroomm aabboovvee aanndd bbeellooww..Title main entry. Ed. by Isabel Schäfer and Jean-Robert Henry.Nomos, ©2009 616 p. $123.00 (pa)Schäfer (political science, Humboldt U., Germany) and Henry (emeritusdirector of research, Institute for Research and Study on the Arab andMuslim World, Maison Méditerranéenne des Science de l’Homme,France) present the results of a interdisciplinary research project aimedat realizing a comprehensive comparative analysis of the Mediterraneanpolicies of governmental and non-governmental actors such as thoseundertaken in the framework of the Euro-Mediterranean Partnershipand the European Neighborhood Policy. With a focus on the logics andstrategies of the different political actors involved in Mediterraneanpolicies, the 29 included papers provide case studies of the policies ofFrance, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Germany, the UK, Finland, countries inSouth East Europe, the European Union, Egypt, Israel, Syria, thePalestinian private sector, Algeria, Tunisia, Morocco, Turkey, and theEuropean Parliament; issues of transnational and non-governmental net-works related to Euro-Moroccan migratory mobility, the Euro-Mediterranean human rights network as an intermediary actor,entrepreneurs and regional identity, Euro-Turkish business cooperation,and feminist networks of the Arab southern Mediterranean; and the roleof civil society actors in Algeria, Egypt, Tunisia, Morocco, and Israel.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

JZ1734 2009-050889 978-0-313-38517-9CChhiinnaa rreessttoorreedd;; tthhee MMiiddddllee KKiinnggddoomm llooookkss ttoo 22002200 aannddbbeeyyoonndd..Anderson, Eric C.Praeger, ©2010 323 p. $44.95China is not bent on imperial conquest, argues Anderson (US NationalDefense Intelligence College), but it is striving to achieve a regionalhegemony or sphere of influence in Asia similar to that the United Statesenjoys with regard to the rest of the Americas, mainly in order to furtherits economic goals. These aspirations, to be achieved “by carefully maxi-mizing future options through avoiding unnecessary provocations,shunning excessive international burdens, and building-up China’spower over the long term,” are consistent with China’s historical self-con-ception of itself as the Middle Kingdom and a long-standing aversion toterritorial acquisition. Furthermore, Beijing’s abjuring of the role ofglobal hegemon is good news for the United States, because it leavesChina with few choices but to abet the continuance of the current (USfriendly) international economic and political order. As he advances thiscentral argument, primarily from the perspective of US policymakers, healso addresses the role of the People’s Liberation Army in Chinese societyand US and Chinese policy towards Taiwan.

JZ4984 2009-031173 978-0-8133-4435-5TThhee UUnniitteedd NNaattiioonnss aanndd cchhaannggiinngg wwoorrlldd ppoolliittiiccss,, 66tthh eedd..Weiss, Thomas G. et al.Westview Press, ©2010 434 p. $47.00 (pa)Major scholars of political science and international relations who haveengaged personally as well as academically with the world body updateonce again their comprehensive analysis of how the United Nations andits agencies interact with, respond to, and influence the world. Withinthematic sections on international peace and security, human rights andhumanitarian affairs, and sustainable human development, they reviewevents and opinions on such topics as security efforts during and afterthe Cold War, operations in five specific localities, challenges of the 21stcentury, applying human rights standards, theories of development at theUnited Nations, and United Nations organizations and norms for sus-tainable development as process.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –176–

JZ5538 2009-026976 978-1-58826-696-5CCiivviill ssoocciieettyy aanndd ppeeaacceebbuuiillddiinngg;; aa ccrriittiiccaall aasssseessssmmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Thania Paffenholz.Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc., ©2010 511 p. $69.95Paffenholz (Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies)presents the results of a collaborative research project aimed at under-standing the role of civil society, as defined broadly, in support of peace-building during and after armed conflict. Opening chapters lay out theconceptual and theoretical framework of the study by exploring the rela-tionship between civil society and the state and identifying the sevenpeacebuilding functions of civil society: protection, monitoring, advocacyand public communication, in-group socialization, social cohesion, inter-mediation and facilitation, and service delivery. They then apply theframework to case studies of conflicts in Guatemala, Northern Ireland,Bosnia-Herzegovina, Turkey, Cyprus, Israel/Palestine, Afghanistan, Nepal,Sri Lanka, Somalia, and Nigeria before drawing conclusions concerningenabling and disenabling factors for civil society peacebuilding.

JZ5584 2009-050893 978-0-313-38262-8UU..SS.. ppeeaacceeffaarree;; oorrggaanniizziinngg AAmmeerriiccaann ppeeaaccee--bbuuiillddiinnggooppeerraattiioonnss..Smith, Dane F. Jr.Praeger, ©2010 301 p. $44.95This study by Smith (Center for Strategic and International Studies) ana-lyzes five US government agencies charged with dealing with interna-tional conflict and conducting American “peacefare.” The analysis isWashington-centered, focused on organization and the interagencyprocess and relatively little on overseas implementation. The bureau-cracies that come under scrutiny are the National Security Council, theState Department (with a specific focus on the Office of the Coordinatorfor Reconstruction and Stabilization within the State Department),Defense Department sections concerned with stability operations, USAID,and the US Institute of Peace. Smith also examines the budget process forUS “peacefare” in the context of the actions of authorizing and appro-priating committees in Congress. Based on his examination of the expe-riences of the Bush and Clinton years, he presents advice to PresidentObama for improving organizational performance at these agencies. Co-published with the Center for Strategic and International Studies.

JZ5588 2009-046036 978-0-313-36507-2TThhee nneeww gglloobbaall iinnsseeccuurriittyy;; hhooww tteerrrroorriissmm,, eennvviirroonnmmeennttaallccoollllaappssee,, eeccoonnoommiicc iinneeqquuaalliittiieess,, aanndd rreessoouurrccee sshhoorrttaaggeessaarree cchhaannggiinngg oouurr wwoorrlldd..Moghaddam, Fathali M.Praeger, ©2010 199 p. $34.95Moghaddam (conflict studies, Georgetown U.) argues that globalizationhas led to a new interconnectedness in the realm of security that, com-bined with a rise in clashing identities, has brought on a new era of inse-curity and unpredictability. Writing for students and laypersons, heexamines broad issues of global security, basing his discussion on a dual-source theory of security that places individual security experienceswithin the context of collective security experiences and takes account of“soft” security capital related to social, cultural, historical, and psycho-logical factors and “hard” security capital of material resources, capabil-ities, and the physical environment. As he presents the theory, headdresses issues of cultural conflict, economic threats to security, and ter-rorism and torture.

JZ5588 978-81-8405-048-6SSeeaarrcchh ffoorr hhuummaann sseeccuurriittyy;; tthhee sshhiiffttiinngg ppaarraaddiiggmmss..Gaan, Narottam.Reference Press, ©2009 538 p. $72.00Indian political scientist Gaan surveys contemporary political thinking onthe conception of security. He particularly focuses on the myriadalternate notions of security, especially human security, that have beenoffered as alternatives to the realist state-security paradigm connected tothe Westphalian order. Chapters address neoliberal and neorealist viewsof security, the poststructuralist view of security, environmental security,gender and violent conflict, digital age security threats as challenge tointernational relations theories, feminist perspectives on security in inter-national relations, and conceptualizing human security. Distributed inNorth America by ISBS.

JZ5599 978-87-635-2588-6PPeerrffoorraattiinngg tthhee iirroonn ccuurrttaaiinn;; EEuurrooppeeaann DDéétteennttee,,TTrraannssaattllaannttiicc rreellaattiioonnss,, aanndd tthhee CCoolldd WWaarr,, 11996655--11998855..Title main entry. Ed. by Poul Villaume and Odd Arne Westad.Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2010 272 p. $61.00While détente between the United States and the Soviet Union collapsedin the late 1970s, the easing of tensions between Eastern and WesternEurope were far more concrete and lasting, note Villaume (contemporaryhistory, U. of Copenhagen, Denmark) and Westad (international history,London School of Economics and Political Science, UK), who identifythree key reasons: admiration for the wealth and relative lack ofinequality in Western Europe on the part of Eastern Europeans; theGerman acceptance of its post-war territorial boundaries; and (paradoxi-cally enough) the strength of the alliance relationships between WesternEurope and the United States. They present ten papers exploring theseand related issues for the period from the mid-1960s to the mid-1980s.Specifically, they address such topics as Polish leadership’s reactions toWest German Ostpolitik (policy toward the east); perceptions andstrategies of the East German party leadership; negotiations between theNixon administration and West European countries concerning détente;the activities of the foreign policy cooperation body of the EuropeanCommunity; the contributions of the European neutral and non-alignedstates to the process of European détente; and French support forEuropean dissidence as a “détente from below” initiated by Trotskyites,trade unionists, and others. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

JZ6385 2009933400 978-1-84720-808-8EExxppllaaiinniinngg cciivviill wwaarr;; aa rraattiioonnaall cchhooiiccee aapppprrooaacchh..Murshed, Sayed Mansoob.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2010 244 p. $125.00Murshed (economics of conflict and peace, The Institute of Social Studies,the Netherlands) applies rational choice theory from the fields of eco-nomics and political science to analysis of conflict and civil war. He firstdiscusses lack of economic growth as a pre-condition that increases thechances of conflict and then turns to greed (elite competition over naturalresource rents) and grievance (relative deprivation) as the root causes ofconflict, although he argues that they are not necessarily sufficientwithout the breakdown of institutions of peaceful conflict resolution,which he discusses later. He also deals with longer-term issues in sus-taining peace, including ideas of fair division from social choice theory,power-dividing institutions, post-war economic reconstruction, and theidea of the peace effects of liberal democracy.

JZ6392 2009-282277 978-0-7456-4168-3TThhee eetthhiiccss ooff wwaarr aanndd ppeeaaccee;; ccoossmmooppoolliittaann aanndd ootthheerrppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Dower, Nigel.Polity Press, ©2009 220 p. $24.95 (pa)Retired now from teaching ethics in international relations, Dower (hon-orary, U. of Aberdeen) sets out in a manner he considers fair and clearthe main arguments and positions taken on the issues of war and peace.At the same time, believing that academics should be committed people,he advocates a particular perspective that he calls cosmopolitan pacifism.He covers preliminary considerations; realism and militarism; interna-tionalism and cosmopolitanism; the justification of war; pacifism, non-violence, and the way of peace; peace and pacifism; and modern issues.Distributed by Wiley.

LLAAWW

K235 2009-930887 978-1-84844-445-4EEvvoolluuttiioonnaarryy tthheeoorryy aanndd lleeggaall pphhiilloossoopphhyy..Zaluski, Wojciech.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 166 p. $100.00Zaluski (philosophy of law and legal ethics, Jagiellonian U., Poland) pro-vides a monograph on the ways evolutionary theory can be used in ana-lyzing significant legal-philosophical problems. The author explores anumber of issues, including: the evolutionary view of human nature andthe classification of views of human nature, the concept of justice, thetendency to obey the law, the evolutionary current in legal philosophy setagainst the background of traditional currents, the characterization ofpolitical-philosophical conceptions, and the ontologies of law implied bymodels of the origins of law. The book will interest graduate and post-graduate students, professionals, and philosophers in legal philosophy.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–177–

K236 2009-025232 978-0-7546-7944-8MMuullttiijjuurraalliissmm:: mmaanniiffeessttaattiioonnss,, ccaauusseess,, aanndd ccoonnsseeqquueenncceess..Title main entry. Ed. by Albert Breton et al.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 238 p. $114.95At the general level, multijuralism “is the coexistence of two or more legalsystems or sub-systems within a broader normative legal order to whichthey adhere,” as editors Breton (U. of Toronto, Canada), Des Ormeaux(Department of Justice, Canada), Pistor (Columbia U., US) and Salmon (U.de Bourgogne, France) explain in their introduction, but at a finer levelof analysis, it can be defined “as the coexistence of systems of normsconsidered binding by a subset of actors.” Such a definition leads tounderstanding of the highly fluid nature of multijuralism, where formsof multijuralism may ebb and flow due to the deliberate actions of publicor private agents; technological, sociological, or economic developmentsthat are largely independent of identifiable decisions; or, paradoxically,policies aimed at harmonizing the law, because the implementation ofharmonized rules often give rise to new diversity. They present ninechapters that explore specific aspects of multijuralism, addressing theeffects on legal systems of globalization and technological innovations,international treaties and European Union directives, and the persistenceof legal and quasi-legal traditions of minorities such as in Canada’sindigenous populations and Muslim communities.

K487 2009-936737 978-1-84542-326-1RReecceenntt ddeevveellooppmmeennttss iinn llaaww aanndd eeccoonnoommiiccss;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert D. Cooter and Francesco Parisi. (Theinternational library of critical writings in economics)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 1875 p. $950.00In their introduction editors Cooter (law, U. of California, Berkeley) andParisi (law, U. of Minnesota; and economics, U. of Bologna, Italy) discusshow the subject, which began to see light in the 1960s, developed somecore “insights of deterrence-as-demand and contracting-as-competition inthe law of property, torts, crimes, contracts, and corporations.”Subsequently those traditional core insights were challenged by changesin economic theory, and the resulting burgeoning literature makes thisselection of seminal papers particularly useful to those who don’t wantto wade through the massive amounts of material that the subject is gen-erating. Selected and collected here are 41 papers, which originallyappeared in such publications such as J. of Tort Law, RAND J. ofEconomics, and Yale Law Journal. Arrangement is in thematic sectionsfocused on property law, intellectual property, tort law, remedies, and,respectively, on criminal, contract, and corporate law. No index.

K623 2009-044818 978-1-4128-1153-8TThhee iinnssttiittuuttiioonnss ooff pprriivvaattee llaaww aanndd tthheeiirr ssoocciiaall ffuunnccttiioonnss..((rreepprriinntt,, 11994499))Renner, Karl.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 307 p. $39.95 (pa)The first and fourth president of Austria, Renner (1870-1950) was alsoone of the early founders of the sociology of law, and one the of lesserknown Austrian Marxists during the first decades of the 20th century.His third book, Rechtsinstitute des Privatrechts und ihre soziale Funktionwas published in 1904, and the 1949 English translation published byRoutledge and K. Paul, London. In it he covers legal institutions and eco-nomic structure, the functional transformation of property, and the soci-ological analysis of functional change.

K670 2009929785 978-1-59460-560-4FFaammiillyy llaaww iinn tthhee wwoorrlldd ccoommmmuunniittyy;; ccaasseess,, mmaatteerriiaallss,, aannddpprroobblleemmss iinn ccoommppaarraattiivvee aanndd iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ffaammiillyy llaaww,, 22ddeedd..Blair, D. Marianne et al. (Carolina Academic Press law casebook series)Carolina Academic Press, ©2009 911 p. $90.00Blair (U. of Tulsa), Weiner (U. of Oregon), Stark (Hofstra Law School), andMaldonado (Seton Hall Law School) present the second edition of theircasebook for American law school courses in comparative and interna-tional family law. For the new edition, they have trimmed the materialssomewhat, but have sought to retain the versatility of the text forinstructors with a range of teaching objectives and topical interests. Thebeginning of the text focuses on relationships between adult partners,covering regulation of marriage, dissolution of marriage, domestic part-nerships and same-sex marriage, recognition of foreign marriages anddivorce, and violence between family members. The remaining chaptersare focused on rights and responsibilities of parents, children, and thestate and include discussions of custody; child abduction, jurisdiction,and enforcement in international custody disputes; financial support ofchildren; international adoption; and reproductive rights. The casebook’smaterials include judgments from international tribunals and thedomestic courts of different countries, statutes from around the world,and excerpts from professional journals. Each chapter includes problemsand exercises.

K1375 2009-039585 978-0-8213-8261-5AA gglloobbaall vviieeww ooff bbuussiinneessss iinnssoollvveennccyy ssyysstteemmss..Title main entry. Ed. by Jay Lawrence Westbrook et al.The World Bank, ©2010 300 p. $35.00 (pa)Written by four international professors of law, this volume comparesand contrasts bankruptcy law, corporate reorganizations, and theresulting debtor/creditor relations found in a range of countries. Thefocus is primarily descriptive and analytical, focusing on how well insol-vency laws meet the criteria of transparency, predictability and effi-ciency, while also taking account of differences in values andimplementation in countries around the globe. A key chapter focuses onemployee rights in insolvency proceedings, while later chapters explorecross-border considerations and the growing push for international-ization of the law. Includes both footnotes and an extensive bibliography.

K1401 2009-051831 978-1-932159-85-1IInntteelllleeccttuuaall pprrooppeerrttyy ffoorr iinntteeggrraatteedd cciirrccuuiittss..Yeo, Kiat Seng et al.J. Ross Publishing, ©2010 220 p. $99.95 (pa)While the main audience for this book consists of integrated circuit (IC)and semiconductor engineers and inventors who want to understandintellectual property rights, practitioners in intellectual property law andpatents will appreciate the book’s non-technical explanation of semicon-ductor and integrated circuit design. Focus is on IC design protection inthe US, UK, EC, and Asia Pacific markets, with cases from Singapore.Chapters cover the technical context of ICs, types of intellectual property,ownership and duration of intellectual property rights related to ICs, andinfringements.

K3239 2009-051891 978-1-60509-330-722004488;; hhuummaanniittyy’’ss aaggrreeeemmeenntt ttoo lliivvee ttooggeetthheerr..Boyd, J. Kirk.Berrett-Koehler Publishers, ©2010 219 p. $15.95 (pa)Boyd international human rights, civil rights, free speech, and constitu-tional law; U. of California) sets out the plan of the 2048 Project that hedirects. It promotes a written agreement to live together that isenforceable in the courts of all countries by the centenary of theUniversal Declarations of Human Rights. He describes how themovement began and reviews its goals of freedom of speech, of religion,from want, for the environment, and from fear. Then he charts a courseto victory through such stages as regional and humanity’s agreements,the path together, and deciding together.

K3247 2009-013937 978-0-674-03565-2SSeettttlleerr ssoovveerreeiiggnnttyy;; jjuurriissddiiccttiioonn aanndd iinnddiiggeennoouuss ppeeooppllee iinnAAmmeerriiccaa aanndd AAuussttrraalliiaa,, 11778888--11883366..Ford, Lisa. (Harvard historical studies; v.166)Harvard University Press, ©2010 313 p. $49.95Culminating in the 1820 and 1830s, courts in the United States, Canada,and Australia began asserting their jurisdiction over indigenous peoples,basing their decision on a territorialization of sovereignty, which Ford(history, U. of New South Wales, Australia) identifies as a radical changein legal doctrine and the moment in which “the legal obliteration ofindigenous customary law became the litmus test of settler statehood.”He describes this development through the exemplars of the state ofGeorgia in the US and the Australian colony of New South Wales from1783 to 1836, focusing on the transformation of everyday legal practices(rather than the development of legal treatises) and the clash betweentenacious pluralities of legal practice and emerging notions of settler statesovereignty.

K3465 2009-048887 978-1-59460-664-9CCoommppaarraattiivvee aanndd iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ppoolliicciinngg,, jjuussttiiccee,, aannddttrraannssnnaattiioonnaall ccrriimmee..Title main entry. Ed. by Sesha Kethineni.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 426 p. $45.00 (pa)Kethineni (criminal justice sciences, Illinois State U.) presents 15 chaptersthat are collectively intended to provide students with a broad overviewof topics and issues of transnational crime and international policing andjustice. The chapters, many of which deal with sovereignty as a centraltheme, discuss theories of international justice and international law(with a focus on those of John Rawls); international regulatory agenciesand enforcement; so-called renditions and the co-mingling of criminaland military justice; comparative justice in selected countries; interna-tional justice and law enforcement organizations; the organization andstructure of policing in selected countries; the international human rightsmovement; international responses to genocide; groups and minorityrights and specific crimes against humanity; international terrorism;international drug trafficking; and, in the final chapter, the varied topicsof international cyber crime, crimes against cultural heritage, environ-mental crimes, and money laundering.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –178–

K3581 2009-936764 978-1-84844-422-5TThhee mmaakkiinngg ooff iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall ttrreeaattiieess;;nneeoolliibbeerraall aanndd ccoonnssttrruuccttiivviisstt aannaallyysseess ooff nnoorrmmaattiivveeeevvoolluuttiioonn..Nagtzaam, Gerry.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 376 p. $155.00For academics and practitioners in international environmental politicsand law, Nagtzaam (law, Monash U., Australia) considers how neoliberalinstitutionalist scholarship on global environmental regimes and con-structivist scholarship on the key role played by norms in internationalpolitics each illustrate why and how different environmental norms takehold in some regimes and not others, which approach better explainsthese norms, and whether the two approaches can be combined. Heexplores why some global environmental treaties seek to preserve andprotect nature from human use, some conserve nature for human devel-opment, and others allow exploitation of nature without accounting forconsequences. He traces these three norms through case studies onwhaling, mining in Antarctica, and tropical timber to show how inter-national political battles to shape environmental regimes result in clashesbetween competing environmental norms.

K3585 2009-013723 978-0-674-03543-0TThhee aarrtt aanndd ccrraafftt ooff iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall eennvviirroonnmmeennttaall llaaww..Bodansky, Daniel.Harvard University Press, ©2010 359 p. $39.95It is not the substance of international environmental law the concernsBodansky (international law, U. of Georgia) here, but the processes bywhich it is developed, implemented, and enforced. He covers the entiregamut, integrating recent research from such areas as negotiation, treatydesign, social norms, policy implementation, and effectiveness. Amonghis topics are diagnosing the causes of environmental problems, varietiesof environmental norms, negotiating agreements, international carrotsand sticks, and whether international environmental law is effective.

K3585 2009-043265 978-0-87289-966-7TThhee gglloobbaall eennvviirroonnmmeenntt;; iinnssttiittuuttiioonnss,, llaaww,, aanndd ppoolliiccyy,, 33ddeedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Regina S. Axelrod et al.CQ Press, ©2011 378 p. $48.95 (pa)This reader brings together scholarly perspectives from the fields ofpolitical science, international relations, international law, policy studies,and comparative politics on international environmental institutions,laws, and policies at the beginning of the 21st century. Editors Axelrod(political science, Adelphi U.), VanDeveer (political science, U. of NewHampshire), and Downie (politics and environmental studies, FairfieldU.) first present papers on international institutions and regimes thatdiscuss the evolution of global institutions, the role of international lawin environmental protection, regimes of environmental governance, andthe role of environmental non-governmental organizations in interna-tional regimes. Cases and questions of global environmental policy areexamined next in chapters that address multilevel international gover-nance of global warming, global politics and the policy of hazardouschemicals, economic integration and environmental protection, and com-pliance with global environmental policy. The remaining chaptersexplore issues of policy implementation, including US unilateralism inenvironmental politics, policy making in the European Union, developingcountries’ perspectives, energy and environmental policy in China,nuclear power in the Czech Republic, and the environmental ramifica-tions of consumption and commodity chains.

K3791 2009-023785 978-90-04-16036-1CCuullttuurraall hheerriittaaggee iissssuueess;; tthhee lleeggaaccyy ooff ccoonnqquueesstt,,ccoolloonniizzaattiioonn,, aanndd ccoommmmeerrccee..Title main entry. Ed. by James A. R. Nafziger and Ann M. Nicgorski.Martinus-Nijhoff, ©2010 466 p. $130.00As shown by news stories about the repatriation of cultural material toNative American tribes or the fate of thousands of artifacts looted fromIraq’s museums during the 2003 U.S. invasion, the protection of culturalheritage is of more than academic concern. Essays in this book deal withvarious aspects of cultural heritage, including protection of the Maori cul-tural heritage in New Zealand; the return of African cultural objectslooted during the colonial era; the treatment of shipwrecks and theircargo; and the return of artworks looted during the Holocaust. Thewriting ranges from very accessible to somewhat heavy legalese. Non-spe-cialist readers will find the essays on protecting Iraq’s archaeological her-itage and on the mythology of the antiquities trade particularlyinteresting. Both editors are at Willamette U., Salem, Oregon, whereNicgorski teaches art history and archaeology, and Nafziger teaches lawand directs the program of international studies.

K3820 2009-936216 978-1-84720-113-3EEccoonnoommiiccss ooff ccoonnssttiittuuttiioonnaall llaaww;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard A. Epstein. (Economic approaches tolaw; 25)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 1183 p. $595.00Editor Epstein is affiliated with the U. of Chicago, the Hoover Institution,and New York U. Law School. He provides an extensive introduction tothe law and economics of constitutionalism before presenting hisselection of 29 previously published articles (including several of hisown), the earliest dating from the late 1970s and the latest published in2006. Arrangement is in two volumes, the first devoted to the structuralconstitution, with articles pertaining to the themes of self-interest and tothe separation of powers, federalism, and unconstitutional conditions.The second volume focuses on individual rights, and articles arearranged in sections on property and contract, freedom of speech andreligion, and due process and equal protection. The selections are fromsuch sources as the International Review of Law and Economics, CatoJournal, Columbia Law Review, and the Journal of Law, Economics, andOrganization, among others. They are reprinted in facsimile, and there isno index.

K3850 2007-047853 978-1-84720-761-6AAnnttiittrruusstt aanndd rreegguullaattiioonn iinn tthhee EEUU aanndd UUSS;; lleeggaall aannddeeccoonnoommiicc ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by François Léveque, Howard Shelanski. (Newhorizons in competition law and economics)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 207 p. $110.00Antitrust laws in theory affect all business, but regulation is specific toa particular sector, such as communication or health care. The questionsunder discussion here are the extent to which sector-specific regulation isstill warranted in light of monopoly power eroding, and whetherantitrust law in a given jurisdiction is up to the task of protecting con-sumers and promoting competition. Specialists in law and economicsfrom both sides of the Atlantic met to ponder these issues in Paris duringJanuary 2006. Seven papers from that gathering cover synthetic compe-tition, European competition policy and regulation, contrasting legal solu-tions and the comparability of European Union and US experiences,modeling an antitrust regulator for telecommunications, harmonizingregulatory oversight with antitrust merger review, market power in theUS and European Union electricity generation, and two-sided markets inmobile call termination.

K3876 2009-020466 978-0-7546-7611-9FFoooodd sseeccuurriittyy,, bbiioollooggiiccaall ddiivveerrssiittyy,, aanndd iinntteelllleeccttuuaallpprrooppeerrttyy rriigghhttss..Lightbourne, Muriel. (Intellectual property, theory, culture)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 308 p. $124.95Lightbourne (an in-house legal counsel with the Institut National de laRecherche Agronomique, France) argues that the United Nations’ Foodand Agricultural Organization’s International Treaty on Plant GeneticResources for Food and Agriculture can serve as a bridge between twoconflicting stances regarding access, benefit-sharing, agricultural negoti-ations, and intellectual property rights in agriculture. The first, promotedby developing countries, is expressed within the Convention on BiologicalDiversity forum, aims for equity in terms of sharing the burdens andbenefits of conservation, sustainable use, and commercialization ofgenetic resources, while the second, promoted by developing countriesand the World Trade Organization, emphasizes private rights, particu-larly the intellectual property rights of businesses and the protection ofdomestic agricultural markets. The problem, she argues, is that exchangeof genetic resources, necessary for promoting food security, conservation,and equity, can be hindered by access regulations in biodiversity-richcountries and by intellectual property rights on final products.Expanding the coverage of the FAO’s International Treaty to all foodcorps, she further argues, can lead to the co-existence of managedcommons with private property rights such as patents and plantbreeder’s rights, the exact balance of which can be determined by thecountry concerned.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–179–

K3924 2009-930860 978-1-84376-619-3TThhee WWTTOO,, iinntteelllleeccttuuaall pprrooppeerrttyy,, ee--ccoommmmeerrccee aanndd tthheeiinntteerrnneett;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Rohan Kariyawasam.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 985 p. $525.00Within these two volumes, Kariyawasam (commercial law, Cardiff U.,UK) brings together 37 articles on international economic law and policythat explore issues related to telecommunications, electronic commerceand the Internet, information technology, technology transfer, intellectualproperty rights, and the impact of these issues on developing countries.A particular focus of the compendium is the role of the World TradeOrganization in promoting world trade in electronic goods and services,as the WTO is expected to be the most influential institution in that areain coming years. The first volume opens with a section on the WTO,telecommunications, and antitrust that explores telecommunications reg-ulation, multilateral rules on access to telecommunications, and theimpact of the WTO agreement on telecommunications services, amongother issues. The next set of articles discusses the classification of elec-tronic intangibles in the WTO, as well as Internet issues arising from theGeneral Agreement on Trade and Services agreement. A section on theWTO and electronic commerce begins the second volume with articles onmultilateral and European responses to e-commerce, international traderules, and regulation of services. Intellectual property rights, bilateralism,and technology transfer is the subject of the next section. The finalsection looks at developing countries, the “new economy,” and the WTO.

K4720 2009-016473 978-0-7546-7346-0DDoommeessttiicc ddeeppllooyymmeenntt ooff tthhee aarrmmeedd ffoorrcceess;; mmiilliittaarryyppoowweerrss,, llaaww aanndd hhuummaann rriigghhttss..Head, Michael and Scott Mann. (International and comparative criminaljustice)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 203 p. $99.95Terrorist acts of the 21st century have broken down traditional philo-sophical and legal resistance to the use of nations’ armed services to dealwith domestic crises. Historical precedence for domestic use of the mil-itary abounds, frequently with dire consequences for the resultant impacton human rights. Using history as a frame of reference, the authorsanalyze the issues related to domestic deployment of armed forces, bothin general terms, and as they apply to specific First World countries: theUnited States, Canada, Great Britain, Germany, Italy, Japan, andAustralia.

K5189 978-1-905541-56-0OOnnlliinnee ggrroooommeerrss;; pprrooffiilliinngg,, ppoolliicciinngg aanndd pprreevveennttiioonn..Davidson, Julia and Petter Gottschalk.Russell House Publishing, ©2010 189 p. $49.95 (pa)While the Internet has opened up a wealth of opportunities, it also hasregrettably made it easier for sexual predators to “groom” (identify andcommunicate with) their potential child victims. This book explores thecharacteristics of the Internet that make it a tool for predators, how thosecharacteristics are exploited, legislation against online grooming, pro-filing and policing, prevention of online grooming and offenses, andrelated topics. The book will interest anyone responsible for care andsafety of children, including educators, policy makers, police, and thoseworking on safer Internet technology. Authors are Davidson (criminologyand sociology, Kingston U., UK) and Gottschalk (information systems andknowledge management, Norwegian School of Management). Distributedin the US by ISBS.

K5301 978-1-84392-703-7SSttaattee ccrriimmee iinn tthhee gglloobbaall aaggee..Title main entry. Ed. by William J. Chambliss.Willan Publishing, ©2010 306 p. $34.95 (pa)The International Institute for the Sociology of Law invited sociologists,criminologists, legal scholars, and others to a workshop in Onati, BasqueCountry, Spain during May 2008, and most of the 16 essays here arerevised from presentations there. They respond to the shift in crimi-nology from accepting the state definition of crime, to a more humanis-tically focused definition of social harms; sooner than some might like,this change leads to judging the actions of states by standards other thanthe ones they choose. Within overall themes of framing state crime, itsbrutal realities, and responding to it, they consider such topics as the cen-trality of empire in the study of state crime and violence, the normal-ization of the terror bombing of civilians from Guernica to Hiroshima toBaghdad, and the politics of harm reduction policies. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

K5485 2009-023915 978-0-470-98576-2FFoorreennssiicc sscciieennccee iinn ccoouurrtt;; tthhee rroollee ooff tthhee eexxppeerrtt wwiittnneessss..Wall, Wilson.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2009 164 p. $140.00A British consultant in forensic genetics, Wall offers scientists a guide forproviding expert testimony in court cases. He begins by setting out themoral and political foundations of the legal system and the obligationsof someone choosing to engage with it. In particular, he points out thatthere are two approaches to deciding a court case, adversarial andinquisitorial, and the science witness is charged with contributing to thelatter and should stay far from the former. Then he explains themechanics and dynamics of the system, rules of evidence as they applyto an expert witness, the appointment of experts and the written report,the expert forensic scientists in court, statistics and statistical inferences,and ethical and scientific considerations. A glossary of commonly usedterms and phrases is provided, weighted heavily to the British legalsystem.

KD2079 2009-930861 978-1-84542-699-6NNaattiioonnaall ccoorrppoorraattee llaaww iinn aa gglloobbaalliisseedd mmaarrkkeett;; tthhee UUKKeexxppeerriieennccee iinn ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Milman, David. (Corporations, globalisation and the law)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 197 p. $115.00Milman (Lancaster U., UK) explores how and to what extent UK corporatelaw has been affected by processes of economic and legal globalization,both on its own terms and in comparison to other national systems ofcorporate law. His chapters compare core regulatory strategies, look atthe commonality of fundamental principles, explore the regulation offoreign shareholders and non-resident controllers, discuss the receptionof overseas companies by the UK legal system, examine cooperation withforeign courts and overseas regulators, discuss corporate law and conflictof laws, address legal approaches to dealing with transnational corporatecollapse, and explore the future of national corporate law systems.

KD7869 978-1-84392-696-2CCrriimmiinnaall llaaww,, 55tthh eedd..Storey, Tony and Alan Lidbury.Willan Publishing, ©2009 446 p. $34.95 (pa)Written mainly for A-level students, this study guide for the Oxford,Cambridge and RSA Examination (OCR) will also be useful for otherstaking professional exams, or for undergraduates. It reviews general prin-ciples of criminal law, and examines common offenses against personsand property and defenses. There is also material on legal resources onthe Internet. Chapters at the end of the book deal with some of the keyfeatures that were introduced under Curriculum 2000. Section examquestions and answers are included, along with a table of cases and atable of statutes. This fifth edition is updated to reflect the new four-unitspecifications for A-level law. It contains new OCR specimen papers withguidance on suggested answers. Storey and Lidbury are affiliated withA-level Law, one of the major examination boards. Distributed in the USby ISBS.

KD8364 978-1-904380-55-9SSiirr WWiilllliiaamm GGaarrrrooww;; hhiiss lliiffee,, ttiimmeess aanndd ffiigghhtt ffoorr jjuussttiiccee..Hostettler, John and Richard Braby.Waterside Press, ©2009 271 p. $55.00The biography has two goals. One is to trace Garrow’s (1760-1840) life inthe context of his time and family, and the other is to describe how, asa criminal lawyer, he changed the relationship between the state and theindividual by introducing adversary trial. The two aspects are handled,conversely, by retired London solicitor Hostettler and by Brady, who is adirect descendent of Garrow and a family storyteller. Garrow’s contri-bution has been well known among scholars and historians of law, theysay, but after his death and until recently even most lawyers were notaware they he had begun many of the practices they engage in.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

KD8470 978-1-84392-272-8HHeeaarriinngg tthhee vviiccttiimm;; aaddvveerrssaarriiaall jjuussttiiccee,, ccrriimmee vviiccttiimmss aannddtthhee ssttaattee..Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony Bottoms and Julian V. Roberts.Willan Publishing, ©2010 292 p. $74.95Criminology, law, criminal justice, and other social sciences are the per-spectives through which scholars consider rights of crime victims, inBritain, Canada, and the US. Among their topics are the status of crimevictims and witnesses in the 21st century, the costly consequences of pop-ulist rhetoric, whether victims at court are necessary accessories or prin-cipal players, the expressive function of Victim Impact Statements atsentencing, and whether victim impact at parole is probative or preju-dicial. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –180–

KDK171 2009-529631 978-1-84592-278-8TThhee IIrriisshh lleeggaall ssyysstteemm,, 55tthh eedd..Byrne, Raymond and Paul McCutcheon.Bloomsbury Professional, ©2009 892 p. $158.00 (pa)This is a revised and updated edition of an established text reviewing theIrish legal system. Authors Byrne (director of research, Law ReformCommission, Ireland), McCutcheon (law, U. of Limerick, Ireland), Bruton(a practicing barrister in Ireland), and Coffey (law, U. of Limerick) haveincorporated legal developments through 2009 that have taken placesince the last edition was published eight years before. Chapters addressthe development of the Irish legal system, the court system, the judiciaryand administration of the Courts Service of Ireland, the first instancejurisdiction of the courts, civil and criminal court procedure, theappellate jurisdiction of the courts, alternative dispute resolution, accessto law, remedies and enforcement, law reform, precedent, legislation,interpretation of legislation, the Constitution and its interpretation,European Community law and the EU, and international law.

KE3619 2009-529165 978-1-55221-131-1EEnnvviirroonnmmeennttaall llaaww,, 33dd eedd..Benidickson, Jamie. (Essentials of Canadian law)Irwin Law, ©2009 435 p. $50.00 (pa)Benidickson (law, U. of Ottawa, Canada) presents an introduction toCanadian environmental law that emphasizes representative examplesfrom the range of Canadian provincial and federal jurisdictions. Chaptersaddress basic concepts in environmental law, constitutional (includingCharter of Rights and Freedoms) considerations, the international legalcontext, common law in relation to the environment and the basic regu-latory regime, financial compensation for spills and the restoration ofcontaminated lands, environmental assessment, toxic substances, pro-tected spaces and species, alternative dispute resolution, economic instru-ments, sources of environmental information, and climate changeinitiatives at different governmental levels.

KEB165 978-0-7748-1864-3TThhee BBrriittiisshh CCoolluummbbiiaa ccoouurrtt ooff aappppeeaall;; tthhee ffiirrsstt hhuunnddrreeddyyeeaarrss,, 11991100--22001100..Moore, Christopher.U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 284 p. $85.00For scholars, judges, lawyers, and general readers, Moore, a writer ofCanadian history and author of books on legal history, provides a historyof the British Columbia Court of Appeal from 1910 to 2010. He presentsan institutional, jurisprudential, and biographical account of the courtand its role in the province, including how it evolved, how it hasoperated, its judges, and how it has shaped and has been shaped by thesocial, political, and legal development of the province. He includes biog-raphical sketches and b&w photos of judges, exploration of significantcases, administrative and procedural history, the issues facing judges,and the evolution of legal thinking. Distributed by UTP Distribution.

KF224 2009-932788 978-0-9779058-3-6EExxoonneerraattiioonn;; tthhee RRoosseennbbeerrgg--SSoobbeellll ccaassee iinn tthhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy..Alman, Emily Arnow and David Alman.Green Elms Press, ©2010 471 p. $24.95 (pa)Emily and David Alman co-founded the Committee to Secure Justice inthe Rosenberg Case immediately following the 1951 sentencing of Juliusand Ethel Rosenberg to death on charges of nuclear espionage in a casethat spawned a world-wide, but ultimately unsuccessful, movement forclemency. In this new analysis of the case, which incorporates a signif-icant amount of new documentary materials and testimonies frominvolved persons, it becomes clear that the Almans allow that JuliusRosenberg (with the best of motivations) participated in passing non-atomic secrets to the Soviet Union during the time that it was a WorldWar II ally, but maintain their stalwart belief in the innocence of theRosenbergs of treason, and perhaps more importantly, in the corruptionof the legal system that brought about their execution.

KF228 2009-038971 978-1-55778-884-9OOlliivviiaa’’ss ssttoorryy;; tthhee ccoonnssppiirraaccyy ooff hheerrooeess bbeehhiinndd SShheelllleeyy vvss..KKrraaeemmeerr..Copeland, Jeffrey S.Paragon House, ©2010 352 p. $19.95Olivia Merriweather Perkins, an African-American teacher, was part of agroup of people in St. Louis, Missouri, who protested against housing dis-crimination. Their actions led to the 1948 Supreme Court decision Shelleyv. Kraemer, which eliminated race-based housing restrictions. This nar-rative account, told in a the first-person voice of Olivia, draws onmaterial from archives, records centers, letters, and legal documents ofthe period, as well as interviews with participants and their grownchildren. It includes b&w historical photos, but no index. Copeland ishead of English Language and Literature at the U. of Northern Iowa.

KF240 2009-036285 978-1-59460-747-9LLeeggaall rreesseeaarrcchh ssccaavveennggeerr hhuunntt wwoorrkkbbooookk;; NNoorrtthh CCeennttrraallRReeggiioonn..Noyes, Dianna L. and Terri L. Lindfors.Carolina Academic Press, ©2009 230 p. $30.00 (pa)Written as a companion to research books for paralegal students, thisworkbook provides exercises to build research skills and increase stu-dents’ knowledge of the types of legal resources. Perforated pages containspace for written responses. Part of a new regional series, the workbookbegins with exercises giving students practice in researching federalcases, statutes, regulations, and procedures. The second part of theworkbook supplies state-specific exercises for the North Central Region:Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Michigan, Minnesota, Missouri, Nebraska,North Dakota, Ohio, South Dakota, and Wisconsin. Some exercisesrequire students to use the library to locate resources, and some requirevarious types of free and proprietary online research. A final section pro-vides legal memoranda assignments utilizing skills from previouschapters. Noyes teaches at MTI College and at the American Institute forParalegal Studies. Lindfors is dean of Paralegal Studies for GlobeEducation Network based in Minnesota.

KF242 2009-011880 978-1-4133-1052-8LLeeggaall rreesseeaarrcchh;; hhooww ttoo ffiinndd && uunnddeerrssttaanndd tthhee llaaww,, 1155tthheedd..Elias, Stephen.Nolo, ©2009 386 p. $49.99 (pa)Elias, an attorney and co-author of many other Nolo publications, showsnon-lawyers how to conduct legal research both in the local library andon the Web. He also devotes some space to how to narrow the area oflaw to be researched and better define the legal question, as well asunderstanding statutes, regulations and cases. Includes a substantial 108page glossary, and a useful appendix which lists websites devoted to spe-cific topics.

KF250 2009-043208 978-1-59460-663-2SScchhoollaarrllyy wwrriittiinngg;; iiddeeaass,, eexxaammpplleess,, aanndd eexxeeccuuttiioonn..Clark, Jessica L. and Kristen E. Murray.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 202 p. $25.00 (pa)This guide walks advanced law students through a five-step process,from developing a thesis to publishing, for writing a scholarly legalresearch paper, using three real-life student papers (on parental rights,deportation of alien widows, and employment discrimination claims) asexamples throughout the book. Self-assessment quizzes help readersdetermine where they are in the writing process, and checklists allowthem to track their progress. An appendix presents a complete, 15,000-word paper by a second-year law student, with comments showing howthe student executes concepts discussed in the book. The book can beused as a text for a course in scholarly legal writing, and can also be usedby students working alone, working with a supervisor, or working witha peer-review group. Clark is associate director of the Legal Research andWriting Program at George Washington University School of Law. Murrayteaches law at Temple University.

KF281 2009-043251 978-1-60714-495-3MMaakkee yyoouurr aarrgguummeenntt;; ssuucccceeeeddiinngg iinn mmoooott ccoouurrtt aanndd mmoocckkttrriiaall..Korzen, John.Kaplan Publishing, ©2010 240 p. $17.95 (pa)Korzen (legal writing, Wake Forest U. School of Law), coach of theNational Moot Court Team and chair of the Moot Court AdvisorsCommittee, outlines the processes for Moot Court and Mock Trial for lawstudents thinking about competing in them. He provides strategies andtips for surviving in the competitions, including what they are, reasonsto participate, earning a spot, writing briefs, preparing arguments, teams,judging, mock trial problems, courtroom behavior, and all phases ofmock trials. There is no bibliography.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–181–

KF300 2009-039770 978-1-60714-498-4TThhee llaawwyyeerr’’ss gguuiiddee ttoo jjoobb sseeccuurriittyy;; hhooww ttoo kkeeeepp yyoouurr jjoobb——aanndd mmaakkee tthhee mmoosstt ooff iitt——iinn ggoooodd ttiimmeess aanndd bbaadd..Hermann, Richard L.Kaplan Publishing, ©2010 226 p. $19.95 (pa)Drawing from his career advising attorneys, Hermann (legal career man-agement, Concord Law School) delineates 230 tips based on commonsense and preparation for lawyers wanting to maintain their job security,take countermeasures against job loss, and achieve career goals. He pro-vides advice related to starting out on the right foot, building value to theorganization, securing status, workplace don’ts, personal growth, neverassuming indispensability, and legal management. These include tips forappearance, friendliness, etiquette, understanding the firm, studyingcompetition, becoming an expert, professional reading, delegating, andnetworking.

KF306 2009-034811 978-1-59460-684-7LLaawwyyeerrss ccrroossssiinngg lliinneess;; tteenn ssttoorriieess,, 22dd eedd..Seigel, Michael L. and James L. Kelley.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 229 p. $27.00 (pa)This collection of real-life cautionary tales will trigger discussion aboutethics in law classrooms. The stories center on ethical lapses by lawyerssuch as Mike Nifong, the prosecutor in the Duke rape case; a family lawattorney who had sexual relationships with six of his clients; and acriminal defense attorney whose deliberately ineffective assistance led tohis client receiving the death penalty. Each story comes with commentsand questions for exploring the ethical issues in greater depth. The casesdraw on original records, including those from courts and disciplinarytribunals, and on present-day interviews with participants in the events.Many chapters also rely on secondary sources such as magazines, news-papers, and Internet sites. The book employs the ABA Model Rules onProfessional Conduct (2008) as its primary source of law. The authorsassume that students will have a copy of the ABA Model Rules availableto them as they consider the cases. Seigel teaches law at the University ofFlorida. Kelley taught at the Georgetown University School of Law.

KF311 2009-044111 978-1-59460-517-8EEtthhiiccaall iissssuueess iinn ffaammiillyy rreepprreesseennttaattiioonn..Fines, Barbara Glesner.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 343 p. $35.00 (pa)Fines (law, U. of Missouri-Kansas City School of Law) notes that ethicalissues for attorneys practicing family law remain unaddressed by pro-fessional regulation because of the unique responsibilities of the field.This text offers guidance and instruction appropriate for family lawteachers and would be a resource for family law attorneys who facedilemmas in their practice. The author explains why family law differsfrom other aspects of law practice and addresses other pertinent topics,such as clients and conflicts, representing children and the interests ofchildren, litigation ethics, and alternative dispute resolution.

KF325 978-1-84868-699-1TTiittaanniicc ssccaannddaall;; tthhee ttrriiaall ooff tthhee MMoouunntt TTeemmppllee..Molony, Senan.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 256 p. $34.95 (pa)As the Titanic was sinking, witnesses in lifeboats observed another shipin the vicinity. But the other vessel did not respond to the distress signalsnor come to the ship’s aid, and was nowhere to be seen by the followingmorning. Nearly a century later, Molony explores allegations that themystery ship was the Canadian Pacific liner Mount Temple, captained byJames Moore, and considers the possible validity of the claims that Capt.Moore knowingly turned away from the desperate passengers and crewof the Titanic. The author is a deputy editor with Ireland’s largest-sellingdaily newspaper, the Irish Independent, and has 25-plus years of expe-rience in journalism.

KF373 2009-023219 978-1-60714-434-2AAnnggeell ooff ddeeaatthh rrooww;; mmyy lliiffee aass aa ddeeaatthh ppeennaallttyy ddeeffeennsseellaawwyyeerr..Lyon, Andrea D.Kaplan Publishing, ©2010 267 p. $24.95Lyon (DePaul U. College of Law), called the “Angel of Death Row” by themedia, presents a memoir of her career as a death penalty defenseattorney. She was the first woman to serve as lead attorney on a deathpenalty case, and here she recounts the stories of her clients, includingthe 19 she spared from the death penalty, as well as her years as a legalaid attorney, on the Cook County Public Defender’s Homicide Task Force,and her founding of the Center for Justice in Capital Cases. She aims toillustrate the importance of criminal defense, help people understand thedeath penalty and when and why it is sought, and the difficultydefending against it, and the humanity the criminal justice systemdenies.

KF386 2010-000201 978-1-57859-217-3TThhee hhaannddyy llaaww aannsswweerr bbooookk..Hudson, David L. Jr.Visible Ink Press, ©2010 413 p. $21.95 (pa)From the U.S. Constitution to tort law, Hudson (Vanderbilt Law Schooland other law schools in Tennessee) offers a useful primer on majoraspects of the American legal system and those who shaped it, plus tipson legal rights and processes. The book includes key cases and legalissues, an explanation of case and statute citations, the Constitution,online resources, and a glossary. Distributed by Independent PublishersGroup.

KF390 2009-030848 978-1-59451-701-3EEvveerryyddaayy llaaww ffoorr sseenniioorrss..Frolik, Lawrence A. and Linda S. Whitton. (The everyday law series)Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 189 p. $90.00Law scholars Frolik (U. of Pittsburgh) and Whitton (Valparaiso U.) spe-cialize in elder law, and here explain to lay readers how it works andcan be made to work for the benefit of people who are officially old. Thefirst chapters ponders the definition of senior and implications of beingone. Subsequent chapters cover age discrimination in employment; socialsecurity and supplemental security income employer-provided retirementbenefits and individual retirement accounts (IRAs); Medicare; Medicaidand long-term care insurance; housing; mental incapacity, guardianship,and conservatorship; substitute decision-making for health care andproperty; and elder abuse, neglect, and exploitation.

KF390 2009-028660 978-1-59460-737-0NNeeww ttiimmeess,, nneeww cchhaalllleennggeess;; llaaww aanndd aaddvviiccee ffoorr ssaavvvvyysseenniioorrss aanndd tthheeiirr ffaammiilliieess..Hegland, Kenney F. and Robert B. Fleming.Carolina Academic Press, ©2009 286 p. $27.00 (pa)Hegland (U. of Arizona College of Law) and Fleming, an attorney spe-cializing in elder law, provide advice for seniors and their families con-cerning legal issues they can expect as they age, with some advice onaging like how to recognize a stroke. They address issues in retirement,estate planning, advance directives, elder abuse, scams, divorce andremarriage, age discrimination, bills, aging parents, disabled relatives,hospices, death, sex, doctors, lawyers, taxes, and driving. There is no bib-liography. The book is a rewrite of their volume Alive and Kicking: LegalAdvice for Boomers.

KF526 2009-921391 978-1-59460-596-3CCoommmmuunniittyy pprrooppeerrttyy iinn tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess,, 77tthh eedd..Reppy, William A., Jr. and Cynthia A. Samuel. (Law casebook series)Carolina Academic Press, ©2009 488 p. $70.00For law students, Reppy (Duke U. School of Law) and Samuel (TulaneLaw School) provide a casebook presenting the statutes and cases relatingto all nine community property states: Arizona, California, Louisiana,Idaho, Nevada, New Mexico, Texas, Washington, and Wisconsin. Theytake a comparative approach that notes the similarities and differencesbetween states and discuss basic community property law as well as con-flict of laws approaches to solving multi-state marital property problems,the law concerning putative marriage and property rights arising out ofunmarried cohabitation, and special rules of federal income tax law forcommunity property.

KF547 2009-013758 978-1-60442-492-8SSppeecciiaall nneeeeddss cchhiillddrreenn aanndd ddiivvoorrccee;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttooeevvaalluuaattiinngg aanndd hhaannddlliinngg ccaasseess.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Price, Margaret S.American Bar Association, ©2009 343 p. $99.95 (pa)Price, a family law attorney who has family members with special needs,considers how children with special needs are relevant in the arena ofdivorce, and how attorneys can make the system work better for thesechildren and their families in family court cases. She reviews a varietyof types of special needs; how to recognize and handle issues in familylaw cases; how special needs affect a child in a divorce case; why childsupport guidelines and standard visitation do not meet the needs of thesechildren; legislation, case law, and parenting plans; a model childsupport chart, parenting plan, and modifications; maintenance andproperty distribution; roles of the parties; school, law enforcement, andreligion issues; and guardianship, special needs trusts, and other estateplanning issues. Sample forms and checklists are included, as is a CD-ROM.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –182–

KF553 2009-037035 978-0-313-37827-0PPuubblliicc gguuaarrddiiaannsshhiipp;; iinn tthhee bbeesstt iinntteerreesstt ooff iinnccaappaacciittaatteeddppeeooppllee??Teaster, Pamela B. et al.Praeger, ©2010 262 p. $44.95For the aging public, attorneys, policy makers, public administrators,researchers, social workers, long-term care staff, students, guardians, andothers, Teaster (gerontology and health behavior, U. of Kentucky,Lexington) et al. detail what happens to disabled and elderly adults whenno family member or friend can be a caregiver or guardian to them, andanalyze the operation and impact of state statutes governingguardianship, including guardian eligibility, investigation, due process,rights, powers, costs, and monitoring. They compare public guardianshiptoday with that of 1981 (updating the pioneering work done in 1981 bySchmidt et al.); present case studies of public guardianship programs inArizona, California, Delaware, Florida, Illinois, and Maryland; and rec-ommend ways to improve them.

KF560 2009-928146 978-1-59460-715-8PPrrooppeerrttyy;; ccaasseess aanndd ssttaattuutteess,, 22dd eedd..Bernhardt, Roger et al. (Carolina Academic Press law casebook series)Carolina Academic Press, ©2009 820 p. $85.00Bernhardt (Golden Gate U. School of Law) et al. provide a casebook forfirst-year students on property law that aims to present contemporarycases in a clear manner. They present cases relating to possessing andowning assets, common law estates, co-ownership, the landlord andtenant, servitudes, land use regulations, and real estate transactions, withexcerpts from opinions from related cases, statutes, and relevant articles.This edition includes new decisions and introductions to cases.

KF665 2009-037558 978-1-4224-0746-2CCoommmmeerrcciiaall rreeaall eessttaattee ttrraannssaaccttiioonnss;; aa pprroojjeecctt aanndd sskkiillllssoorriieenntteedd aapppprrooaacchh,, 22dd eedd..Durham, James Geoffrey et al.LexisNexis, ©2009 906 p. $129.00This law school textbook is presented by Durham (U. of Dayton School ofLaw), Stark (The John Marshall Law School), and White (U. of VirginiaSchool of Law) for the purpose of imparting the knowledge and skillsneeded for representing the various parties involved in the field of com-mercial real estate. It addresses both legal and business issues andemphasizes the necessity of developing such transactional skills as com-municating, negotiating, drafting, and problem spotting and solving. Thematerial is organized around the “life-cycle” of a single commercial realestate project, an auto care center in Aurora, Illinois, in order to illustratethe development of real estate project from raw land into finishedproject.

KF730 2009-042387 978-1-4224-2740-8FFuunnddaammeennttaallss ooff ssppeecciiaall nneeeeddss ttrruussttss.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Zimring, Stuart D. et al.LexisNexis, ©2009 — p. $210.00This is Release No. 0—a new publication as of December 2009—presentedin a five ring binder to accommodate future updates. A CD-ROM(included) contains word processor-friendly copies of forms and check-lists. Special needs trusts (SNTs) protect a fund of money for the benefi-ciary without interfering with the beneficiary’s eligibility for publicbenefits. This complicated area is covered in 12 chapters beginning withan overview and history and proceeding through ethics and liability,sources of assets to establish the trusts, the gathering of accurate andcomplete information, selection of the trustee, administration, specialissues, contractual relationships, sources of income and health care cov-erage, termination (usually because of death), and the complexities ofincome, gift and estate tax rules. The three authors are Stuart D. Zimring(based in California), Rebecca C. Morgan (elder law, Stetson College ofLaw, Florida), and Bradley J. Frigon (based in Englewood, Colorado).

KF850 978-1-904905-69-1PPuurrcchhaassiinngg ccoonnttrraaccttss;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee,, 22dd eedd..Fuller, Graham.Spiramus Press, Ltd., ©2010 236 p. $42.50This compact manual is for those who work with contracts for the pro-curement of goods and services. Early chapters cover general topics suchas prior commitment, formation of written contracts, negotiating the con-tract, clarity in contract drafting, and the specification. Later chaptersanalyze specific UK legislation, such as the Sale of Goods Act of 1979,and the Supply of Goods and Services Act of 1982. Other chapters covertopics such as assignment and subcontracting, damages and otherremedies for breach of contract, intellectual property rights, and elec-tronic commerce. Appendices of cases are included. This second editionis updated to reflect changes in the law since 2001, and is current to thelaw of England and Wales as of November 2009. It contains new chapterson misrepresentation, public procurement, and dispute resolution. Fullerlectures on procurement law at the School of Engineering andManagement at the University of Warwick, UK. The book is distributedin the US by ISBS.

KF1250 2009-928147 978-1-59460-699-1SSttuuddiieess iinn AAmmeerriiccaann ttoorrtt llaaww,, 44tthh eedd..Johnson, Vincent R. and Alan Gunn. (Carolina Academic Press lawcasebook series)Carolina Academic Press, ©2009 1050 p. $95.00Johnson (law, St. Mary’s U.) and Gunn (emeritus, law, U. of Notre Dame)present the fourth edition of an instructional law text that uses cases andother materials in order to illuminate current tort law in the UnitedStates, as well as the policy issues underlying current tort law. They havesought to include a range of views pertinent to the dominant themes andissues in tort law, such as fault, proportionality, deterrence, internal-ization of costs, and distribution of losses. This new edition includes 22new principle cases addressing recent issues such as liability relating toclergy sexual abuse, negligent enablement of identity theft, and “loss ofa chance” damages in medical malpractice. It also examines recentSupreme Court decisions on federal preemption of state law and punitivedamages and includes statutory excerpts of new legislative developmentssuch as state laws changing the duty to retreat in self-defense and federallegislation limiting the liability of handgun marketers and distributors.

KF1306 2009-039365 978-1-4224-7027-5CCoonnssttiittuuttiioonnaall ttoorrttss,, 33dd eedd..Nahmod, Sheldon H. et al.LexisNexis, ©2010 785 p. $129.00This casebook focuses exclusively on constitutional tort damages actionsbrought against governments and their officials under 42 U.S.C. section1983 and the United States Constitution (or Bivens actions) and integratesaspects of torts, constitutional law, federal courts, and civil procedurewithin the field of litigation. Organized around the statutory language ofsection 1983, it emphasizes important circuit court decisions togetherwith relevant Supreme Court case law. Authors Nahmod (Chicago-KentCollege of Law), Wells (U. of Georgia School of Law), and Eaton (U. ofGeorgia School of Law) also address issues of strategy and ethics for lit-igators, affirmative duties, constitutional tort actions in state courts, andattorney’s fees. Cases are accompanied by notes, comments, and ques-tions for students. This new edition has been updated in light of case lawdecided between 2004 and 2009.

KF1307 2009-038516 978-1-4224-6139-6CCiivviill lliiaabbiilliittyy iinn ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee,, 55tthh eedd..Ross, Darrell L.LexisNexis, ©2009 497 p. $41.95 (pa)Providing general information on the civil liability process as it affectspolice and correctional institutions, this text uses Supreme Court andlower court decisions to illustrate how different cases have been appliedin criminal justice agencies. Coverage of recent research on civil liabilityunderscores liability trends, policy and procedure issues, and individualofficer and administrative responsibilities. Chapter topics include liabilityfor failure to train, liability and wrongful custodial death, and personnelissues and liability. This fifth edition is updated with 120 new cases,including nine Supreme Court decisions, and material on 53 newresearch studies to show how cases are applied at the criminal justiceagency level. The book can be used as a stand-alone text for a legal courseor as a supplement to an administrative course. Ross is director of theSchool of Law Enforcement and Justice Administration at Western IllinoisUniversity.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–183–

KF1380 2009-011884 978-1-4133-1054-2FFoorrmm yyoouurr oowwnn lliimmiitteedd lliiaabbiilliittyy ccoommppaannyy,, 66tthh eedd.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Mancuso, Anthony.Nolo, ©2009 267 p. $44.99 (pa)Attorney Mancuso, a corporations and limited liability company (LLC)expert and consultant, offers a sixth edition of his guidebook on how toform a LLC. He provides an overview describing which businessesbenefit from LLC status, basic legal issues, tax aspects, preparing LLCarticles of organization, preparing operating agreements, and givesadvice on finding the right tax advisor and attorney. The information isappropriate for all 50 states. The book also includes tear-out LLC formsand a CD-ROM.

KF1389 2009-013314 978-0-470-50378-2FFuunnddrraaiissiinngg llaaww mmaaddee eeaassyy..Hopkins, Bruce R.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 362 p. $45.00Hopkins, an attorney specializing in representing charitable and othernonprofit organizations, has written a plain English guide to thenumerous legal requirements and regulations governing fundraising.Issues addressed include: state regulation of charitable fundraising,public charities and private foundations, federal annual reportingrequirements, charitable giving rules, constitutional law, fundraising andgovernance, IRS audits, and more. The author also covers “red flag”issues and tax law traps.

KF1422 2009-042021 978-1-59460-739-4CCoorrppoorraattee ggoovveerrnnaannccee;; llaaww,, tthheeoorryy aanndd ppoolliiccyy,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas W. Joo.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 663 p. $65.00 (pa)Joo (law, U. of California, Davis) presents an edited collection of previ-ously-published, recent scholarship on the law of corporate governancein public traded corporations. The 64 selections, written by 60 academicsand legal practitioners—the majority from the US—address current policyissues from a wide range of both established and developing approachesto legal analysis, such as law and economics, corporate finance, publicchoice theory, expressive law, organizational behavior, and sociology.Suitable as both a primary text in a corporate governance course, or asa supplemental text in a basic law school corporations course, the textincludes questions for classroom discussion or self-directed study. Thesecond edition contains materials on the 2008 financial collapse and anew chapter on creditors and bankruptcy.

KF1649 2009-936232 978-1-84844-632-8CCoommppeettiioonn llaaww,, iinnnnoovvaattiioonn aanndd aannttiittrruusstt;; aann aannaallyyssiiss ooffttyyiinngg aanndd tteecchhnnoollooggiiccaall iinntteeggrraattiioonn..Schmidt, Hedvig.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 280 p. $135.00Tying is a practice in which the holder of a patent requires a party topurchase or license additional unpatented products as a condition ofbeing granted a license to the patent itself. Schmidt (European Union law,U. of Southampton, England) analyzes the law regarding tying in Europeand the US in light of two major court cases involving Microsoft, andongoing judicial questions and monitoring of the corporation. He coverstying from an economic perspective, arrangements under Article 82 EC,US antitrust law, an alternative approach using intellectual property law,and developing a new regulatory model to provide alternative solutions.The study is based on his March 2008 doctoral dissertation, but the scopeand focus are different.

KF1659 2009-037823 978-1-4133-1098-6LLeeggaall ffoorrmmss ffoorr ssttaarrttiinngg && rruunnnniinngg aa ssmmaallll bbuussiinneessss,, 66tthheedd.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Steingold, Fred S.Nolo, ©2010 482 p. $29.99 (pa)This book/CD-ROM provides small business owners with about 60 legaland business forms and documents, written in plain language, with line-by-line instructions for completing them. Material is in chapters on con-tract basics, forming a business, running a corporation, borrowingmoney, and buying a business, in addition to leasing space, purchasingreal estate, buying, selling, manufacturing, renting, and storing goods,and hiring employees and independent contractors. Each chapter pro-vides background information on creating and using the documents andagreements. Integrated throughout each chapter are suggestions for otherNolo books to consult. All of the reproducible forms in the book can alsobe found on the CD-ROM. This fifth edition is updated to reflect currentlaw, and offers a new chapter on extending credit and getting paid.Steingold practices small business law in Michigan. He has written otherbooks on business law.

KF2042 2009-022579 978-1-4398-1542-7TThhee eelleemmeennttss ooff pprriivvaattee iinnvveessttiiggaattiioonn;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttootthhee llaaww,, tteecchhnniiqquueess,, aanndd pprroocceedduurreess..Manley, Anthony D.CRC Press, ©2010 414 p. $79.95Aimed at new private and corporate security professionals, this volumeintroduces the professional requirements, basic investigative techniques,and legal responsibilities of a private investigator. Emphasizing legal andliability issues, it provides a history of the field and discussion of the law,criminal and civil litigation processes, and the legal powers and limita-tions of an investigator; commercial and industrial crimes and vulnera-bility including fraud, accident investigation, and arson investigation;and other situations like undercover operations, executive and celebrityprotection, terrorism, bomb threats, strikes, and workplace violence.Manley, a security consultant, has been a police officer, detective investi-gator, and instructor for police officers and security guards.

KF2979 2009-936226 978-1-84844-183-5IInntteelllleeccttuuaall pprrooppeerrttyy pprrootteeccttiioonn ooff ffaacctt--bbaasseedd wwoorrkkss;;ccooppyyrriigghhtt aanndd iittss aalltteerrnnaattiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Robert F. Brauneis.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 344 p. $160.00The ten chapters presented in this volume by Brauneis (intellectualproperty law, George Washington U. Law School) are based on paperspresented at a September 2007 symposium co-sponsored by the GeorgeWashington U. Law School and the Software and Information IndustryAssociation and titled “Feist, Facts, and Function: IP Protection for WorksBeyond Entertainment.” Topics addressed include the historical per-spective, the debate over copyright in news and its effects on originalitydoctrine, comparative notions of originality in copyright law, contestedunderstandings of fact in copyright law, the challenge of protecting tradesecret information in a digital world, and assessing the protection ofinformation through tort law.

KF2979 2009-936227 978-1-84844-303-7PPoolliittiiccss ooff iinntteelllleeccttuuaall pprrooppeerrttyy;; ccoonntteessttaattiioonn oovveerr tthheeoowwnneerrsshhiipp,, uussee,, aanndd ccoonnttrrooll ooff kknnoowwlleeddggee aannddiinnffoorrmmaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Sebastian Haunss and Kenneth C. Shadlen.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 249 p. $110.00Political and other social scientists explore the mechanisms by which con-flicts over the ownership, control, and use of information and knowledgeare resolved, mostly in the context of global capitalism, which has trans-formed them—along with everything else—into commodities available forsale or hoarding. Among the topics are the politics of patents as condi-tions for implementing public health policy in Thailand, intellectualproperty and the underground proliferation of agricultural biotech-nologies, bringing parliaments and civil society into patent governance,contemporary German political conflicts over intellectual property rightsin the digital movie industry, and an empirical analysis of who benefitsfrom Australian and US patent ownership. The 10 studies, now highlyrevised, represent about half of the presentations at an April 2008workshop in Rennes.

KF3022 978-87-574-2213-9BBrriittiisshh aanndd FFrreenncchh ccooppyyrriigghhtt;; aa hhiissttoorriiccaall ssttuuddyy ooffaaeesstthheettiicc iimmpplliiccaattiioonnss..Teilmann-Lock, Stina.DJOEF Publishing, ©2009 265 p. $52.00 (pa)Teilmann-Lock characterizes copyright from an aesthetic viewpoint,finding to approach to reveal some new insights into concepts and prac-tices of art and literature, creation and ownership. She begins byreviewing the history, theories, and mechanics of copyright generally,and the role of such notions as author and imitation. Then she takes upher case studies. Under the British question to copy or not to copy, shediscusses the act of copying in literature, reproduction and imitation inart, and copyright. Metamorphoses of moral rights in France include theright of integrity in works of literature and of art, and copyright in textsand images. A final section returns to Britain to look at moral right. Thestudy is not rigorously legal, she says, but readers would benefit by someknowledge of copyright law. It began as her 2005 Ph.D. dissertation atthe University of Southern Denmark in Odense, and parts have been pub-lished in law journals. She has not indexed it.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –184–

KF3319 2009-018630 978-0-7656-2350-8EEmmppllooyymmeenntt rreegguullaattiioonn iinn tthhee wwoorrkkppllaaccee;; bbaassiiccccoommpplliiaannccee ffoorr mmaannaaggeerrss..Robinson, Robert K. et al.M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 425 p. $99.95 (pa)Management academics Robinson (U. of Mississippi), Franklin (U. ofDallas), and Wayland (Eastern Illinois U.) present an up-to-date, practicalresource for business and management professionals and students,designed to acquaint readers with the major federal statues andregulations controlling management and employment practices in theAmerican workplace. Written from a pro-business/pro-managementperspective, the text is intended to provide managers with a basicknowledge of their HR compliance obligations so they are able to avoidexposing their employers to employment litigation. Coverage includes theimpact of regulation on HRpractices; an historical overview of equalemployment opportunity (EEO) regulation; specific aspects of EEOprohibitions; aspects of employment relations, such as wage and benefits,workplace health and safety, e mployee discipline, hiring, and privacyissues; and job relatedness/business necessity defenses for disparateimpact allegations.

KF3455 2009-021436 978-1-4133-1070-2TThhee mmaannaaggeerr’’ss lleeggaall hhaannddbbooookk,, 55tthh eedd..Guerin, Lisa.Nolo, ©2010 504 p. $49.99 (pa)This fifth edition of an employment law handbook for managers andsupervisors of employees and independent contractors is updated toreflect recent changes to the FMLA, ADA, and COBRA. The handbook isdesigned for easy reference; each chapter focuses on a specificemployment law topic, such as compensation, privacy in the workplace,and trade secrets, and breaks the subject down into issues managers aremost likely to face. Each chapter includes state-by state summaries oflaws related to concepts and situations discussed in the chapter,including listings of state health insurance continuation laws, layoff andplant closing laws, and state laws on family and medical leave. Thehandbook also includes FAQs, boxes on real-world lessons, legal dos anddon’ts, and chapter-ending true/false questions and explained answers.An appendix of resources gives contacts for federal and state agencies,plus a list of the publisher’s other employment and human resourcestitles. Guerin is an expert in employment law.

KF3455 2009-029432 978-0-8014-4844-7AA sshhaammeeffuull bbuussiinneessss;; tthhee ccaassee ffoorr hhuummaann rriigghhttss iinn tthheeAAmmeerriiccaann wwoorrkkppllaaccee..Gross, James A.ILR Press, ©2010 251 p. $59.95 (pa)Gross (labor law, Cornell U.) assesses current US labor relations againstthe human rights standards articulated by the International LabourOrganization and other international instruments in the realms offreedom of association, racial discrimination, management rights, work-place safety and health, and human resources. Not only do they notmeasure up in his view, but current practices, rooted in the history ofthe country, amount to crimes against humanity. He calls for reformingthe US National Labor Relations Act in conformity with internationalhuman rights law and calls on labor to make human rights a centralplank of its platform forthwith.

KF3457 2009-021426 978-1-4133-1068-9DDeeaalliinngg wwiitthh pprroobblleemm eemmppllooyyeeeess;; aa lleeggaall gguuiiddee,, 55tthh eedd..DelPo, Amy and Lisa Guerin.Nolo, ©2010 402 p. $49.99 (pa)American attorneys Guerin and DelPro are recognized employment lawspecialists and the co-authors of several books on the topic. They offerbusiness owners and private sector HR professionals, supervisors, andmanagers a practical guide to handling workplace personnel issues in afair, legal manner. The text is designed for conscientious, well-intentionedbusiness owners/employers—not shady operators looking for ways toevade their legal responsibilities. Coverage includes strategies for han-dling the most common employment problems; employers’ legal rightsand responsibilities; proactive management practices for preventing thedevelopment of employee problems; steps for firing problem employees,when nothing else has worked; and developing sound hiring and per-sonnel policies to avoid hiring problem employees in the future. The fullyupdated fifth edition reflects the latest employment laws in every state,and includes sample policies, forms, and checklists.

KF3463 2009-045895 978-1-57018-398-0DDrraaffttiinngg aanndd eennffoorrcciinngg ccoovveennaannttss nnoott ttoo ccoommppeettee..McDonald, M. Scott and Jacqueline Johnson Lichty.BNA Books, ©2009 517 p. $410.00McDonald and Lichty (Littler Mendelson P.C.) present a comprehensiveone-stop guide for attorneys preparing noncompete contracts and othersimilar restrictive covenants. The instructions and discussions includedare intended to eliminate the need for plowing through hundreds of casesto find relevant tips for drafting those contracts and covenants. Topicsinclude: an analysis of how to identify the covenants that should apply,foundational issues such as choice of law and venue, a sequential guideto structuring the document, different types of contractual arrangements,and more. The guide also includes model sample language and wordingused in actual cases. The authors note that their suggestions are justthat—suggestions, and that there is substantial leeway and difference ofopinion in this area of law. The book is clearly written and includes anextensive selection of questions for attorney to consider while preparingtheir drafts.

KF3512 2009-044112 978-1-59460-639-7EEmmppllooyyeeee bbeenneeffiitt ppllaannss..Kozak, Barry.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 592 p. $55.00 (pa)This text for students who plan to become employee benefits profes-sionals explains the statutory and regulatory provisions related toemployee benefit and retirement plans. Written in plain language acces-sible even to non-attorneys, the book can be used in law, business, actu-arial, and human resources courses, and also as a desktop reference. Asection on preliminary concerns explains types of employee benefits andbasic tax concepts, and reviews the Employment Retirement IncomeSecurity Act of 1974. Sections then cover qualified retirement plans, laborrights and protection in ERISA plans, and other employee benefits plans,such as executive compensation and health and welfare benefit plans.Final chapters look at ethics, career issues, and public policy of an agingpopulation. Each chapter is divided into three sections, with a bullet-pointoverview of several pages, a description of the regulatory framework, anda section on practical applications. About 30 pages of appendices providebasic law concepts for non-law students, organizational charts, stan-dards, conversions, and tables of statutes and regulations. Kozak is anemployee benefits professional and educator affiliated with The JohnMarshall Law School.

KF3650 2009-037825 978-1-4133-1097-9SSoocciiaall sseeccuurriittyy,, mmeeddiiccaarree && ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt ppeennssiioonnss;; ggeett tthheemmoosstt oouutt ooff yyoouurr rreettiirreemmeenntt aanndd mmeeddiiccaall bbeenneeffiittss,, 1155tthheedd..Matthews, Joseph L.Nolo, ©2010 482 p. $29.99 (pa)Author and attorney Matthews offers a 15th edition of his guidebook onSocial Security retirement and medical benefits. While the topic can seemdaunting and complicated, the author’s guidance and explanations areclearly written and free of industry jargon. He covers: the variety ofSocial Security benefits (for example, retirement, disability, dependents),when to claim benefits and which ones to claim, appeals, Federal CivilService retirement benefits, veterans benefits, Medicare, Medicaid, andmore.

KF3750 2009-039768 978-1-55849-738-2CCaattaassttrroopphhee;; llaaww,, ppoolliittiiccss,, aanndd tthhee hhuummaanniittaarriiaann iimmppuullssee..Title main entry. Ed. by Austin Sarat and Javier Lezaun.U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2009 202 p. $26.95 (pa)Catastrophe, say the editors, tests the ability of political and legal systemsto reduce human suffering. The essays in this book present a number oftheoretical and methodological approaches for studying the relationshipsbetween politics, law, and catastrophe (whether natural, such as a hur-ricane, or human-created, such as war). After an intitial chapter definingthe meaning of catastrophe in terms of law, politics, religion, and science,contributors examine how social systems can make a disaster worse; theeffects that catastrophes have on legal institutions themselves; the dis-semination of information about environmental risks; and the reverber-ation of catastrophes through societies long after the initial shock haspassed.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–185–

KF3989 2009-050588 978-0-7637-3650-7SSppoorrttss llaaww..Thornton, Patrick K.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 823 p. $89.95 (pa)In this textbook primarily of use to students focusing on sports man-agement, Thornton (law, U. of Houston Law Center and S. Texas Collegeof Law) packs a lot of information into its 823 pages, including the pres-entation of edited court cases. The book begins with a general firstchapter exploring subjects such as sports ethics, violence in sports, andrace issues. Subsequent chapters cover important legal concerns such ascontracts, labor relations, agents, tort and risk management, and intel-lectual property. Gender equity and discrimination concerns also receivefocus, along with a discussion of the issue of drug testing. Each chapterends with a series of notes and discussion questions that for some reasonare mixed together. On the positive side it also provides extensive foot-notes, lists of suggested readings and reference materials, and a separatecase index.

KF4156 2009-031960 978-1-60709-571-2EEdduuccaattiioonnaall rreeccoorrddss;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ffoorr lleeggaallccoommpplliiaannccee..Murphy, Daniel R. and Mike L. Dishman.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 277 p. $95.00 (pa)Education law attorneys Murphy and Dishman (educational leadership,Kennesaw State U.) offer a resource for educators to legal questions abouteducational records. Presented in a question-and-answer format, topicscover the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act and other federallaws; identification, maintenance, and disclosure; parent and studentrights; external and internal school disclosures without prior permission;directory information; electronic instruction and records; special edu-cation records; the Protection of Pupil Rights Amendment; and com-pliance self-audits. An index of questions takes the place of a generalindex.

KF4243 2009-035452 978-1-4331-0741-2HHaannddbbooookk ffoorr ssttuuddeenntt llaaww ffoorr hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonnaaddmmiinniissttrraattoorrss..Castagnera, James.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 255 p. $35.95 (pa)Castagnera, an employment attorney who serves as legal counsel to aNew Jersey university, provides a guide for administrators in four-yearhigher education institutions that addresses the relationship betweenhigher education and the law. He discusses legal issues relating to admis-sions; financial aid and tuition; student activities; academic standing,probation, and dismissal; academic integrity, plagiarism, and cheating;harassment, discrimination, hazing, and violence; disabilities; privacyrights and intellectual property; and international students. The impactof the Higher Education Opportunity Act, where applicable, is included.

KF4527 2009-022907 978-0-674-03606-2TThhee aannnnoottaatteedd UU..SS.. CCoonnssttiittuuttiioonn aanndd DDeeccllaarraattiioonn ooffIInnddeeppeennddeennccee..Rakove, Jack N.Harvard University Press, ©2009 354 p. $24.95The complete text of the US Constitution and Declaration of Independenceare presented in compact (5x7″) form, with notes by a Pulitzer-prizewinning historian providing historical contexts and interpretive com-mentary. There is special focus on explaining language that has been con-troversial over the years. A 70-page introductory essay offers a narrativeaccount of how the documents came to be written. The book includeshigh-interest b&w photos and illustrations from numerous periods in UShistory, a timeline of key events from 1607 through 2008, and a list offurther reading, making it useful for general readers and students.Rakove teaches history, American studies, and political science atStanford University. He is author of the Pulitzer-Prize winning OriginalMeanings: Politics and Ideas in the Making of the Constitution.

KF4550 2010-002201 978-0-313-38008-2AA ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess CCoonnssttiittuuttiioonn aanndd iittssaammeennddmmeennttss,, 55tthh eedd..Vile, John R.Praeger, ©2010 311 p. $54.95Vile (political science, Middle Tennessee State U.-Murfreesboro) updatesyet again his textbook, which he tries to balance between serious schol-arship and reader accessibility. He seeks balance as well between rep-utable scholarship on what the framers of the Constitution had in mind,and the judicial decisions over the past two centuries that have inter-preted its provisions. This edition is extensively rewritten and reor-ganized to make it more thorough and clear, and incorporates SupremeCourt decisions through its 2008-09 term.

KF4748 2009-043199 978-1-60426-515-6CCoonnssttiittuuttiioonnaall llaaww ffoorr aa cchhaannggiinngg AAmmeerriiccaa;; rriigghhttss,,lliibbeerrttiieess,, aanndd jjuussttiiccee,, 77tthh eedd..Epstein, Lee and Thomas G. Walker.CQ Press, ©2010 823 p. $84.95 (pa)What sets this textbook on American constitutional law by Epstein(Northwestern U. School of Law) and Walker (political science, Emory U.)apart from other casebooks on the subject is its focus on the role ofpolitical processes within the formation of law. While also discussingclassic cases that illustrate the development of constitutional law, theyemphasize the arguments raised by lawyers and interest groups and thepolitics surrounding litigation as related to the legal, social, economic,and political contexts in which the Supreme Court reaches its decisions.Fourteen chapters are presented in sections concerned with the structureof the judiciary and the incorporation of the Bill of Rights, civil liberties,the rights of the criminally accused, and civil rights.

KF4755 2009-031264 978-0-7546-7553-2CCiivviill rriigghhttss iinn wwaarrttiimmee;; tthhee ppoosstt--99//1111 SSiikkhh eexxppeerriieennccee..Sidhu, Dawinder S. and Neha Singh Gohil.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 214 p. $89.95With their distinctive, religiously mandated turbans, many Sikhs becamethe targets in the wake of 9/11 of violent attacks at the hands of peopleapparently unaware of the difference of Islam and Sikhism, the fifthlargest religion in the world. They also became the victims of other formsof ongoing discrimination and marginalization, as Sidhu (Georgetown U.Law Center) and Gohil (Sikh Coalition) describe in this work. In additionto documenting the civil rights violations of Sikhs, they seek to promoteunderstanding of Sikhism and the significance of the turban (while alsocondemning attacks and discrimination against innocent Muslims andothers), particularly as civil rights litigation involving Sikhs often involveshaving to give “a little mini-history and religion lesson” on the Sikhs.They describe the legal remedies available to Sikhs facing civil rights vio-lations and, finding them inadequate, also examine the non-legalremedies, such as outreach and training efforts, engaged in by the Sikhcommunity.

KF4783 2009-042567 978-0-8028-6465-9RReelliiggiioouuss lliibbeerrttyy;; vv..11:: OOvveerrvviieewwss aanndd hhiissttoorryy..Laycock, Douglas. (Emory University studies in law and religion)W.B. Eerdmans, ©2010 864 p. $35.00 (pa)Here begins the comprehensive four-volume collection of writing on reli-gious liberty by Laycock (law, U. of Michigan and emeritus law, U. ofTexas). The overviews section contains articles and letters on normativeoverviews, analytic and descriptive overviews, book reviews, and judicialnominations. Among specific topics are general theories about the freeexercise clause and the establishment clause, vouching towardsBethlehem, Jesse H. Choper’s Securing Religious Liberty, and philosophy isenough to deny Senate consent. History is covered in ten essays on suchmatters as founders wanted total neutrality, the Declaration is not law,and regulatory exemptions of religious behavior and the original under-standing of the establishment clause. An appendix explains to non-legalreaders how to read legal citations.

KF4850 2009-034768 978-0-398-07912-3TThhee PPaattrriioott AAcctt;; iissssuueess aanndd ccoonnttrroovveerrssiieess..Smith, Cary Stacy and Li-Ching Hung.C.C. Thomas, ©2010 262 p. $58.95Smith (Ph.D. candidate, psychology, Mississippi State U.) and Hung(Overseas Institute of Technology, Taiwan) take a moderate approach asthey put the controversial and polarizing Patriot Act into the context ofAmerica before and after the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001.Enacted little more than a month after the attacks, the act has beenpraised as a godsend for those who believe traditional rules of conflictdon’t apply where terrorism is concerned. It also has been hotly criticizedas a deadly instrument capable of decimating the civil liberties ofAmericans. The authors chronicle the far-reaching impacts of the PatriotAct on government, the war against terror, and Americans.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –186–

KF5060 2009-029638 978-0-674-03602-4JJuussttiiccee iinn bblluuee aanndd ggrraayy;; aa lleeggaall hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee CCiivviill WWaarr..Neff, Stephen C.Harvard University Press, ©2010 350 p. $45.00Neff (public international law, Edinburgh Law School) takes the knottyproblem of the legal questions raised by the American Civil War andmakes them comprehensible to the general reader. He believes that thewar was fought as fiercely in the courts as on the fields. The question ofwhether the North was an invader or a sovereign state putting down arebellion was essential to the way in which the war was seen by otherpowers. He notes that, legally, neither side saw it as a civil war. For theNorth it was an internal matters; for the South, a war of independence.He also considers the confiscation of property, the “rules of engagement”for battle, the emancipation of slaves and the ramifications of interna-tional law, especially concerning trade and blockades. Neff also demon-strates how many of the decisions made then concern problems that arestill with us. This well-written account will interest historians, legal prac-titioners and general readers.

KF5599 2009-030411 978-0-313-35344-4EEvviicctteedd;; pprrooppeerrttyy rriigghhttss aanndd eemmiinneenntt ddoommaaiinn iinn AAmmeerriiccaa..Schultz, David.Praeger, ©2010 233 p. $44.95The US Supreme Court case Kelo v. City of New London elicited wide-spread commentary in the media about the government abuse ofeminent domain rules, yet much of it, suggests Schultz (Institute for Lawand Politics, U. of Minnesota Law School), was perhaps of the same char-acter as the shock professed in the movie Casablanca by the Claude Rainscharacter that there was gambling going on at Rick’s Café Américaineven as he collected his winnings from the croupier. He seeks to cutthrough “all the hype, hysteria, and hullabloos” surrounding the decisionand provide the general reader with an understanding of the relationshipbetween property rights and eminent domain and the place of the Kelodecision within this area of American law. He provides on overview ofproperty law, discusses the limits on property ownership, offers a generalhistory of eminent domain in Anglo-American law, explores the publicuse justification for the taking of private property, describes the eminentdomain process, describes the legal context of Kelo, and concludes withan examination of its political and legal aftermath.

KF5599 2009-042365 978-1-4224-7654-3RReegguullaattoorryy ttaakkiinnggss,, 44tthh eedd..Eagle, Steven J.LexisNexis, ©2009 1366 p. $129.00Eagle (law, George Mason U.) provides a textbook for law students on reg-ulatory takings of private property by the government, a relatively newterm that has been used increasingly in recent cases. The text addressesproperty rights and their sources, the police power and its justifications,the ascendancy of land use regulation, regulatory preferences and sub-sidies for residents, taxpayers, and local businesses, regulations pro-tecting social rights and values, regulations enhancing public safety andthe environment, analytical issues in regulatory takings legislation, andregulatory takings remedies.

KF5627 2009-036829 978-0-313-37831-7MMaarriinnee aanndd ccooaassttaall llaaww;; ccaasseess aanndd mmaatteerriiaallss,, 22dd eedd..Nixon, Dennis W. et al.Praeger, ©2010 527 p. $94.95Nixon (marine affairs, U. of Rhode Island) et al. provide a guidebook foradvanced undergraduates, graduate students, and law students incourses in marine affairs that covers the leading legal decisions andstatutory provisions in US marine and coastal law. It follows the devel-opment of case law with a focus on cases, which are edited, and limitedstatutory material. It covers the traditional law of the shore in the US, thecontemporary law of coastal management, state and federal fisheries law,selected issues in admiralty law, and laws relating to marine mammalsand pollution. This edition has been updated to include newer statutesand opinions, many new cases, and added editorial commentary,examples, and introductions. It also has two new co-authors: Daly, a mar-itime lawyer, and Farady (Marine Affairs Institute, Roger Williams U.School of Law, and Rhode Island Sea Grant Legal Program).

KF6324 2009-007364 978-1-4384-2889-5GGeettttiinngg aa ppoooorr rreettuurrnn;; ccoouurrttss,, jjuussttiiccee,, aanndd ttaaxxeess..Howard, Robert M.State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 126 p. $65.00Despite a widespread perception of the American courts as the branchof government that protects the minority against the governing majority,Howard (political science, Georgia State U.) argues that in the areas of taxpolicy and tax enforcement rulings by the courts, the courts generallyreflect the dominant political beliefs of the dominant or governingcoalition in power, and that is therefore unreasonable to expect the low-income taxpayer to fare well in the court system. To argue this premise,he examines the tax litigation process from the initial decision ofchoosing the tax forum, through an analysis of the decision makingprocess in the competing courts, to an examination of the respectiveinfluence and impact of the different tax forums.

KF6495 2009-021429 978-1-4133-1079-5TTaaxx ddeedduuccttiioonnss ffoorr pprrooffeessssiioonnaallss,, 55tthh eedd..Fishman, Stephen.Nolo, ©2010 528 p. $39.99 (pa)In this updated edition with the tax laws for 2009 returns, a SanFrancisco-based attorney offers income tax basics, tips, and cautions todoctors, therapists, accountants, and anyone else who runs a professionalpractice. Even for those who work with a tax professional (and he dis-cusses when that is advisable), the author of Deduct It! summarizes howtax deductions work and which ones are allowable, e.g., home officeexpenses, to avoid that dreaded IRS audit. The guide includes examplesand access to legal updates on the publisher’s website.

KF7620 2009-043567 978-0-275-99366-5MMiilliittaarryy jjuussttiiccee;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo tthhee iissssuueess..Morris, Lawrence J. (Contemporary military, strategic, and securityissues)Praeger, ©2010 211 p. $44.95Writing primarily for the layman, Morris (a retired US Army colonel whospent most of his career involved with military law) introduces the fea-tures of the current US military justice system. Often bringing in casematerial as illustrations (such as the trials of William Calley, a key figurein the My Lai massacre, and Billy Mitchell, a general court-martialed forinsubordination after criticizing Army and Navy leaders of an “almosttreasonable administration of the national defense”), he offers chapterson the history and development of American military justice, structureand levels of military courts, the investigative and pretrial processes, def-initions of criminal conduct in the military, the trial and appellateprocesses, implementation of the Uniform Code of Military Justice, andnonjudicial punishment and administrative separations. The concludingchapter discusses military tribunals for war criminals and the recentdevelopment of military commissions for trying detainees of the “War onTerror.”

KF8700 2009-923999 978-0-8063-1797-7CCoouunnttyy ccoouurrtthhoouussee bbooookk,, 33dd eedd..Bentley, Elizabeth Petty.Genealogical Publishing, ©2009 322 p. $49.95 (pa)This directory for the genealogical researcher gives contact and recordinformation for county courthouses in all 50 states and the US territories.Entries include current addresses and phone numbers, and informationon four record groups of special interest to genealogists: land records,naturalization records, vital records, and probate records. Entries givesinformation on the dates covered in each group, plus information on feesfor searches and photocopying, and any restrictions on the use of records.When available, information is also provided on other types of recordssignificant for genealogists, such as name changes, school records, andvoter registrations. Because the directory is intended to facilitate researchdone by mail, information on office hours and reading room fees is notgiven. A brief introduction offers tips for searching for country recordsand dealing with county offices. The directory can also be used for landtitle searches, legal investigations, and other searches. This third editionoffers updated entries. Information on the author is not given.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–187–

KF8742 2009-032495 978-1-60426-462-3TThhee SSuupprreemmee CCoouurrtt,, 1100tthh eedd..Baum, Lawrence.CQ Press, ©2010 256 p. $39.95 (pa)Baum (political science, Ohio State U.) provides a guide to the SupremeCourt, for novice and experienced readers. Focusing on the current era,he explains its function, history, and work; the justices; how cases reachthe Court; the effects of its decisions; changes in its role as a policymaker; the actions of people and groups that participate in cases; andthe Court’s impact on government and society. This edition integratesrecent developments, including the appointment of Justice Sotomayorand the effects of President Bush’s appointments in 2005 and 2006, aswell as recent decisions on gun control, the rights of terrorists, and otherareas.

KF8742 2009-046365 978-0-393-06474-2SSuupprreemmee ppoowweerr;; FFrraannkklliinn RRoooosseevveelltt vvss.. tthhee SSuupprreemmeeCCoouurrtt..Shesol, Jeff.W.W. Norton, ©2010 644 p. $27.95The recent uproar over the Supreme Court’s ruling that overturned lawlimiting corporate contributions to political campaigns is nothing com-pared to the conflict between President Franklin Roosevelt and theSupreme Court during the mid-1930s. During FDR’s first term, the Courtruled unconstitutional many of the core programs of his New Deal.Roosevelt responded with a plan to add six more justices to the Court—aplan that led to a political firestorm and the biggest political defeat ofFDR’s career. Shesol’s book is the most comprehensive account of the“Court-packing” controversy to date, providing both an inside look at thethinking and actions of all the actors and an analysis of the long-termeffects of Roosevelt’s ill-fated move. Written more like a good novel thana history, this book is essential reading for anyone who wants to under-stand the current controversies surrounding the Supreme Court.

KF8775 2009-019801 978-0-691-14280-7BBeeyyoonndd tthhee ffoorrmmaalliisstt--rreeaalliisstt ddiivviiddee;; tthhee rroollee ooff ppoolliittiiccss iinnjjuuddggiinngg..Tamanaha, Brian Z.Princeton U. Press, ©2010 252 p. $24.95 (pa)Tamanaha (law, Washington U.) begins by reviewing the story so far: for-malism reigned from the 1870s to the 1920s, when judges were thoughtmerely to apply universal law in a mechanical way to particular cases;then the realists ascended, and law was considered unfinished in its pureform so that judges had to clarify and complete it through specific cases.Then he leads legal and political scholars and practitioners, as well ascitizens and other interested parties, out of the double bind, hackingthrough a thicket of interlocking misinterpretations and confusions thatare taken for the reality that they in fact hide.

KF9219 2009-042373 978-0-7637-5525-6AAnn iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo ccrriimmiinnaall llaaww..Carlan, Philip E. et al.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 224 p. $91.95Carlan, Lisa S. Nored, and Ragan A. Downey (all criminal justice, U. ofSouthern Mississippi-Hattiesburg) present a first textbook, setting outsubstantive law and its elemental components in simple and practicalmanner so as not to excite the well known skittishness of beginning lawstudents faced with the usual whelm of legalese most textbook authorsseem to feel necessary. Among their topics are principles and workingvocabulary, constitutional limitations and protections, theft offenses andfraudulent practices, criminal homicide, sex offense, crimes againstmoral values, crimes against the administration of justice and publicorders, inchoate offenses and party liability, defense to criminal respon-sibility, and white collar crime. Appendices contain the Declaration ofIndependence, the US Constitution with the Bill of Rights, and answersto the test questions.

KF9219 2008-055646 978-1-4224-2987-7UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg ccrriimmiinnaall llaaww,, 55tthh eedd..Dressler, Joshua.LexisNexis, ©2009 606 p. $39.00 (pa)Dressler (law, Ohio State U.) provides a text for law students and under-graduates taking courses in criminal law and substantive criminal lawthat considers common law doctrine, statutory reform (with emphasis onthe Model Penal Code), and constitutional law affecting the substantivecriminal law in the US. All chapters have been updated for this edition,including references to new scholarship.

KF9325 2009-929786 978-1-59460-600-7SSeexxuuaalliittyy llaaww,, 22dd eedd..Leonard, Arthur S. and Patricia A. Cain. (Law casebook series)Carolina Academic Press, ©2009 907 p. $95.00This legal casebook, put together by Leonard (New York Law School) andCain (Santa Clara U. School of Law), explores the intersection betweenlegal policy and human sexuality in the United States, placing the focus“somewhere between the narrower focused approach on homosexualityand the broadly-encompassing gender.” They have sought to addresspractical issues that haven’t necessarily been covered in other works,such as tax issues for same-sex couples, and to address the issues froma public interest perspective. Chapters address Supreme Court rulingsgoverning the constitutional rights of sexual minorities; government reg-ulation of sexual conduct; recognition of same-sex relationships; recog-nition of the parent-child relationship; discrimination, fairness, andequality; and sexual expression, free speech, and association. They haveonly lightly edited the cases so as to “leave in the full flavor and contextof the original opinion.” This second edition updates the material in lightof recent case law through 2009.

KF9375 2010-008854 978-1-60442-908-4CCiivviill RRIICCOO;; aa ddeeffiinniittiivvee gguuiiddee,, 33dd eedd..Joseph, Gregory P.American Bar Association, ©2010 316 p. $115.00 (pa)Joseph, an attorney and president of the American College of TrialLawyers, provides a concise analysis of the major legal issues arising incivil actions litigated under the Racketeer Influenced and CorruptOrganizations Act (RICO). He focuses on opinions of the Supreme Courtand federal courts of appeals, and identifies important issues, clarifiesthe analysis and resolution of RICO disputes by identifying questions thatare settled and those that are not, and addresses practical problemsposed by uncertainty of legal standards. This edition includes all majoremerging issues in civil RICO litigation and current developments likerecent Supreme Court rulings, circuit splits on issues, and Congressionalamendments and predicate act statutes. A copy of the statute is included.

KF9430 2009-038910 978-0-8157-0310-5LLeeggiissllaattiinngg tthhee wwaarr oonn tteerrrroorr;; aann aaggeennddaa ffoorr rreeffoorrmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Benjamin Wittes.Brookings Institution Press, ©2009 420 p. $34.95Citing a waning societal willingness to tolerate unrestrained executiveleadership in the “war on terror” and a second “phase of reaction” inwhich the Supreme Court and the legislature increasingly asserted them-selves in regard to rules governing the detention of terrorist suspects,restrictions on interrogation, and the proper institutional venues fordealing with terrorism, Wittes (senior fellow and research director inpublic law, Brookings Institution) now sees a third phase, “characterizedby the attempt to synthesize the insights of the first two phases and todevelop more durable law that reflects that synthesis.” He presents tenpapers by authors that “span a considerable swath of the U.S. politicalspectrum” (as defined by the very establishment standards of Brookings,of course), but are unified in their belief in the value of legislative actionto shape anti-terror policy. They address legislative action with respect todetention, surveillance, interrogation, criminal prosecution of terrorists,the role of immigration law in counterterrorism, the Foreign IntelligenceSurveillance Act, national security issues in civil litigation, and “targetedkilling” (i.e. assassinations).

KF9619 2009-031776 978-1-4129-8130-9CCrriimmiinnaall pprroocceedduurree..Lippman, Matthew.Sage Publications, ©2011 688 p. $84.95 (pa)Designed as a core text in undergraduate criminal justice programs,Lippman’s (U. of Illinois, Chicago) textbook is organized around thetheme of balancing the need to detect, investigate, prosecute, and punishcrime against the constitutional commitment to protecting the rights andliberties of individuals. Each chapter includes an opening vignette drawnfrom a case in the chapter, an outline of core concepts and summarystatements, an essay introducing the topics, edited versions of leadingcases and related discussion questions, exercises for students to apply thelaw to actual cases, chapter summary, review questions, legal termi-nology, and supplemental online materials.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –188–

KF9657 2009-029217 978-1-60156-098-8CCrriimmiinnaall lliittiiggaattiioonn aanndd lleeggaall iissssuueess iinn ccrriimmiinnaall pprroocceedduurree;;rreeaaddiinnggss aanndd hhyyppootthheettiiccaall eexxeerrcciisseess,, 33dd eedd..Newton, Brent E.National Inst. for Trial Advocacy, ©2009 224 p. $45.00 (pa)Now with the US Sentencing Commission in Washington, DC, Newtonpracticed criminal defense for some two decades in Texas and Florida.He presents an updated text incorporating the substantive law of criminalprocedure into a trial advocacy course. The material is organized into 14chapters containing the materials for 14 class sessions covering each stageof a criminal case from preliminary hearings to bail hearings, pretrialmotions, pretrial suppression motions, voir dire, legal objections duringtrial, motions for judgment of acquittal, jury instructions, closing argu-ments, sentencing hearings, and post-conviction challenges to a con-viction or sentence. Each session includes a brief lecture about therelevant substantive law application to the particular stage at issue, fol-lowed by oral advocacy exercises involving factual hypotheticalsrequiring students to play the role of either defense counsel or prosecutor.Specific revisions from the second to third edition are not stated. Nosubject index.

KF9660 2009-038517 978-1-4224-6141-9CCrriimmiinnaall eevviiddeennccee,, 1100tthh eedd..Ingram, Jefferson L.LexisNexis, ©2009 962 p. $81.95 (pa)Ingram (U. of Dayton) presents the new edition of his textbook, with illus-trated cases, for the study of the evidentiary framework in the adminis-tration of criminal justice in the states and the federal justice system ofthe United States. The material is presented in sections covering thehistory of rules evidence and approach to the study of criminal evidence,proof by evidence and substitutes, general admissibility tests, evidencevia witness testimony, evidence via documents and real evidence, andexclusion of evidence on constitutional grounds. The text contains anextensive collection of judicial decisions, with a number of new caseshaving been incorporated for the new edition, although many of theolder cases have been retained due to the quality of the judges’ expla-nation of rules of evidence. Appendixes contain the Federal Rules ofEvidence for United States Courts and Magistrates, the Universal Rules ofEvidence with 2005 amendments, and a table of jurisdictions in whichthe Uniform Rules of Evidence have been adopted as of 2009,

KF9660 2009-042381 978-0-7637-6661-0LLaaww && eevviiddeennccee;; aa pprriimmeerr ffoorr ccrriimmiinnaall jjuussttiiccee,,ccrriimmiinnoollooggyy,, llaaww,, aanndd lleeggaall ssttuuddiieess,, 22dd eedd..Nemeth, Charles P.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 334 p. $85.95 (pa)Nemeth (legal studies, California U. of Pennsylvania) presents an intro-ductory overview of evidence law for undergraduate or graduate studentsin any of the fields he lists, noting that it tends to be litigation drivenand neglected by theorists because it moves directly from the street to thecourtroom. The textbook covers real evidence, demonstrative evidence,documentary evidence, lay witnesses, expert evidence, admissions andstipulations, motion practice and evidence, and trial evidence.

KF9662 2009-050359 978-1-59460-819-3TThhee ccoonnssttaabbllee hhaass bblluunnddeerreedd;; tthhee eexxcclluussiioonnaarryy rruullee,, ccrriimmee,,aanndd ccoorrrruuppttiioonn..Signorelli, Walter R.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 245 p. $30.00 (pa)While granting that it may have had some positive effects on policeconduct, Signorelli (John Jay College of Criminal Justice), a former policeofficer, argues that the exclusionary rule barring evidence obtained inviolation of constitutional rights from being used in criminal trial,because of its “hyper-technicality, inconsistency, and unfairness,” not onlyleads to many viable prosecutions failing and unequal treatment ofdefendants, but also “has generated widespread police corruption, greatlyincreased perjury in our courts, incited animosity towards the police,spread a substantial disrespect for the law, and led to an overall increaseof crime.” He offers a history of the development of the exclusionary ruleand its application and details how it leads to the above failings, illus-trating the argument with discussion of significant cases. He also offersremedies for otherwise deterring police from violating constitutionalrights related to search and seizure and interrogation practices.

KF9731 2009-051177 978-1-59345-503-3CCoonnssttiittuuttiioonnaall rriigghhttss ooff pprriissoonneerrss,, 99tthh eedd..Palmer, John W.Anderson Publishing Co., ©2010 959 p. $81.95 (pa)This is the ninth edition of a text that reviews the federal case law con-cerning the constitutional rights of prisoners in the United States. For thenew edition, Palmer (of counsel, Yavitch & Palmer, Columbus, Ohio) hasbrought the material up to date to the end of the 2008-2009 term of theUS Supreme Court and includes treatment of recent decisions concerningthe burden of proof on prisoners pleading exhaustion of administrativeremedies under the Prison Litigation Reform Act, limitations of theFederal Tort Claims Act involving prisoner claims of unlawful detentionof property, and the authority of school officials to conduct warrantlessstrip searches of juveniles. He also includes new material on theAmericans with Disabilities Act and on the administrative law processapplicable to correctional systems. Issues concerning the treatment ofaccused terrorists under US control but outside the US and issues of inter-national treaties banning torture and their application to Americanprisons, both covered in the last edition, are not discussed in this newedition, partly because of a lack of domestic case law. AndersonPublishing is a member of the LexisNexis Group.

KF9763 2009-039191 978-1-59460-578-9CCrriimmee vviiccttiimm rriigghhttss aanndd rreemmeeddiieess,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Peggy M. Tobolowsky et al.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 348 p. $40.00 (pa)Tobolowsky (criminal justice, University of North Texas) overviews devel-opments in the field of crime victim rights and remedies since theNational Task Force on Victims of Crime was convened by PresidentReagan in 1982. The text begins with an overview of the victim’smovement, then examines specific rights, such as the right to be presentat criminal justice proceedings, and the right to be heard regarding sen-tencing and parole. It also covers remedies for victims’ rights violations,restitution and compensation for crime victims, and civil litigation. Stateand federal cases and policy analysis are presented in each chapter.Appendices provide the recommendations of the original task force, aproposed Constitutional Amendment, and state constitutional provisions.This second edition is updated to reflect legislation, court decisions, andempirical studies completed since the first edition in 2001.

KFC446 2009-015134 978-1-59460-659-5TThhee eesssseennttiiaall gguuiiddee ttoo CCaalliiffoorrnniiaa rreessttaauurraanntt llaaww..Tour-Sarkissian, Paul and Tania Tour-Sarkissian.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 465 p. $65.00This guide for attorneys representing restaurant owners surveys legalissues related to the daily operation of California restaurants. The guideis intended as a starting point for an attorney’s review of applicable law,and as such, does not discuss topics related to starting a restaurantbusiness. A section on serving food and alcohol looks at regulationsregarding kitchens, equipment, insurance, and liability. The section onensuring the safety and security of customers and employees addressesaspects such as coat checks and valets, lost property, credit card fraud,and natural disaster preparation. Chapters on the rights of customersand employees cover avoiding discrimination, making facilities acces-sible, employee background checks, and sexual harassment. The finalsection of the book addresses issues such as nutritional and menulabeling, the smoking ban, music and jukeboxes, arcade games and bil-liards, and outdoor dining and playgrounds. A table of cases and a tableof statutes and regulations are included. The authors are attorneys.

KFN2190 2009-030099 978-0-8047-6354-7FFrraammiinngg eeqquuaall ooppppoorrttuunniittyy;; llaaww aanndd tthhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff sscchhoooollffiinnaannccee rreeffoorrmm..Paris, Michael.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 322 p. $27.95 (pa)In order to illuminate the crucial and often neglected role of legal trans-lation in litigation-driven reform efforts, Paris (political science, City U. ofNew York-College of Staten Island) explores legal aspects—lawyers, rightsclaims, litigation, courts, and the like—in struggles to produce more egal-itarian school finance and education policies. He focuses attention onwould-be reformers and their mobilization of law and courts.Comparative case studies in New Jersey 1970-2009 and Kentucky 1983-2009 demonstrate details about the interplay between law and politics inlitigation-based reform projects.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–189–

KFP596 978-1-904380-53-5YYoouutthh jjuussttiiccee aanndd tthhee yyoouutthh ccoouurrtt;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn..Watkins, Mike and Diane Johnson.Waterside Press, ©2010 269 p. $39.95 (pa)Taking into account the changes introduced by the UK’s Criminal Justiceand Immigration Act of 2008 and reforms in 2009, Watkins, a non-prac-ticing attorney and a trainer of magistrates who has written materials forthe U. of Birmingham and Cambridge and other groups in the UK, andJohnson (Service for Warwickshire Youth Offending Team) provide aguide to the youth justice process in England and Wales. They cover eachof the areas in which youth offenders come into contact with the system,and the roles of the youth court, police, Crown prosecutors, youthoffending teams and panels, voluntary sector, and wider community.Also addressed are sentencing, the responsibilities of the Youth JusticeBoard, and ways in which crime prevention and anti-social behavior byyoung people are dealt with, as well as the welfare-based culture andrestorative approaches. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

KJA172 2009-006433 978-1-59460-556-7TThhee eesssseennttiiaallss ooff GGrreeeekk aanndd RRoommaann llaaww..VerSteeg, Russ.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 249 p. $40.00 (pa)Writing for students and educated lay readers, Versteeg (law, NewEngland Law, Boston) describes the development of the legal systems ofancient Greece and Rome (with the focus of the chapters on Greece set-tling primarily on ancient Athens in the Fifth and Fourth CenturiesB.C.E.). For each, he includes a “Background and Beginnings” chapterdiscussing the historical context and introducing relevant principles ofjurisprudence; a chapter on procedural aspects of the law, such as courtstructure, judges, trial procedure, evidence, and legislations; and achapter on substantive legal topics such as property, contracts, familylaw, and criminal law. Throughout, he draws attentions to the connec-tions and influences of social, cultural, economic, philosophical, andpolitical forces. Also included are short sections on the law in literature,which discuss, for example, the legal philosophies found in Cicero’s DeLegibus and Caesar’s De Bello Gallico.

KJE5132 2008-046145 978-1-59460-648-9HHuummaann rriigghhttss iinn EEuurrooppee;; ccoommmmeennttaarryy oonn tthhee CChhaarrtteerr ooffFFuunnddaammeennttaall RRiigghhttss ooff tthhee EEuurrooppeeaann UUnniioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by William B.T. Mock and Gianmario Demuro.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 398 p. $45.00 (pa)Legal scholars analyze the provisions, underlying theory, political andhistorical background, and implications of the Charter’s 54 articles,which cover dignity, freedoms, equality, solidarity, citizen’s rights, justice,and general matters. Among specific articles are the prohibition oftorture and inhuman or degrading treatment or punishment, right toeducation, the rights of the elderly, social security and social assistance,the right to vote and to stand as a candidate at municipal elections, pre-sumption of innocence and right of defense, and the level of protection.L’Europa dei Diritti: Commento alla Carta dei diritta fundamentali del-l’Unione Europa was published in 2001 by Societá editrice il Mulino,Bologna. This American edition has been translated, and the discussionabout the Italian charter on human rights has been dropped.

KJE6536 2009-930877 978-1-84844-307-5EEccoonnoommiiccss aanndd tthhee eennffoorrcceemmeenntt ooff EEuurrooppeeaann ccoommppeettiittiioonnllaaww..Decker, Christopher.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 288 p. $135.00This book examines the growing use of economic thinking, techniques,and data in European competition law enforcement. Ecker (RegulatoryPolicy Institute, U. of Oxford) focuses, in particular, on how the EuropeanCommission and courts have made use of economic models in tacklingtacit collusion in oligopolistic markets. After reviewing both the law andeconomics of tacit coordination, he goes on to review specific collectivedominance decisions and the use of economics in enforcement.

KJV130 2009-043210 978-1-4128-1152-1TThhee ttrriiaall ooff PPiieerrrree LLaavvaall;; ddeeffiinniinngg ttrreeaassoonn,, ccoollllaabboorraattiioonn,,aanndd ppaattrriioottiissmm iinn WWoorrlldd WWaarr IIII FFrraannccee..Brody, J. Kenneth.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 287 p. $39.95A retired lawyer and corporate executive in Seattle, Brody writes booksabout the war he served in and the period generally. Here he details thepostwar treason and spying trial of French politician Laval (1883-1945),who as prime minister of the Third Republic, sought to resist NaziGermany, but also served as prime minister of the Vichy governmentduring German occupation. A major theme of his account is howpolitical trials differ from simple criminal trials.

KJV3252 978-3-8329-4855-9FFaacctt--ggaatthheerriinngg iinn ppaatteenntt iinnffrriinnggeemmeenntt ccaasseess;; rruullee 3344ddiissccoovveerryy aanndd tthhee SSaaiissiiee--CCoonnttrreeffaaccoonn..Seitz, Esther. (MIPLC studies; 4)Nomos, ©2009 55 p. $26.00 (pa)Documents, tangible items, and processes are the most vital evidenceavailable for proving patent validity and infringement, says Seitz, and sodocument discovery provides the evidentiary foundation of most patentinfringement actions. She compares and contrasts the objectives, prac-tices, policies, and implications of discovery in applicable US and Frenchlaw. For Rule 34, she looks at such matters as premise inspections, theobligation to preserve and spoliations, privileges, and motions to compeland sanctions. The Saisie-Contrefacon she takes in procedural order—before, during, and after. After comparing the basic aspects of the two,she examines specific patent-related aspects of evidence gathering, andoffers an evaluative comparison of the strength of the procedures. Thereis no index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

KMC156 2009-039475 978-0-8156-3235-1FFaammiillyy,, ggeennddeerr,, aanndd llaaww iinn aa gglloobbaalliizziinngg MMiiddddllee EEaasstt aannddSSoouutthh AAssiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth M. Cuno and Manisha Desai. (Genderand globalization)Syracuse U. Press, ©2009 308 p. $45.00Cuno (history, U. of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign) and Desai (women’sstudies, U. of Connecticut) present a collection of 12 papers originally pre-sented in preliminary versions at the eponymous international sym-posium, held in October of 2004, that focused on issues of family andgender in relation to law, especially family law, in eleven states of theMiddle East and South Asia. Topics include marital relations and familylaw reform in Egypt; the impact of colonial state policies on gender rela-tions in India; debates over legal pluralism versus a uniform civil codein India; institutions of religion, state, and family and women’s rights inTurkey; struggles of personal status and family law in post-Baathist(American-occupied) Iraq; family, gender, and law in Jordan andPalestine; the debate on family law in Morocco; conflicting visions ofwomen’s rights in contemporary Pakistan; moral regulation in contem-porary Bangladesh; nontraditional relationships among Sunni MuslimEgyptians and Emiratis; and constructions of the family and Afghanrefugee women in Iran.

KMK1067 2009-009442 978-0-252-03458-9MMuuttiinngg IIssrraaeellii ddeemmooccrraaccyy;; hhooww mmeeddiiaa aanndd ccuullttuurraall ppoolliiccyyuunnddeerrmmiinnee ffrreeee eexxpprreessssiioonn..Schejter, Amit. (History of communication)U. of Illinois Press, ©2009 192 p. $20.00 (pa)Schejter (communications, Penn State U.) analyzes legal documentsrecorded in Israel from 1961 to 2007 to show how free speech is mutedby laws affecting telecommunications and the media, court rulings, andregulatory acts that have developed around television broadcasting.Starting with a description of the view of official Israeli culture thatIsrael is exclusively Jewish and Western, the book goes on to explore thesubstantial influence of the media on the political culture and thus thestrong level of attention it has received. It describes how government reg-ulation has kept pace despite the expansion from one television channelbefore 1993 to today’s explosion of cable and satellite broadcasting. Finalchapters cover how the Israeli state has dealt with transborder broad-casting and the effect of communication polices on the Palestinianminority.

KPA2020 978-89-8421-300-5LLaaww aanndd ddeemmooccrraaccyy iinn SSoouutthh KKoorreeaa;; ddeemmooccrraattiiccddeevveellooppmmeenntt ssiinnccee 11998877..Yoon, Dai-Kyu. (Explorations in Korean studies)IFES Kyungnam University, ©2010 289 p. $39.95 (pa)Yoon (law, Kyungham U., South Korea) offers a legal perspective onpolitical changes over the two decades since the country adopted a newconstitution. After a historical review, he covers the new political process,the transformation of political structures, human rights and socialjustice, and relations between North and South Korea. Among more spe-cific discussions are the fight against corruption, an independent judi-ciary and judicial reform, the criminal process, and the status of women.Distributed in the US by Lynne Rienner Publishers, Inc.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –190–

KPT834 2009-035121 978-0-8047-6382-0TToorrtt,, ccuussttoomm,, aanndd kkaarrmmaa;; gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn aanndd lleeggaallccoonnsscciioouussnneessss iinn TThhaaiillaanndd..Engel, David M. and Jaruwan S. Engel. (The cultural lives of law)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 190 p. $21.95 (pa)David (law) and Jaruwan (Thai language, both State U. of New York-Buffalo) first conducted research in the Chiangmai region beginning in1975 that yielded a 1978 book on law and society in Thailand. Theyreturned in 1990, and much of this present work is concerned with howthe role of law to injury cases had declined during the 15 year interval.They discuss Buajan’s injury narrative, a history of globalizations inChaingmai, state law and the law of sacred centers, injury practices in atransformed society, litigation, justice, and Ming’s injury narrative.

KQC90 2009-047432 978-1-4331-0848-8TThhee ggoollddeenn bbooookk;; pphhiilloossoopphhyy ooff llaaww ffoorr AAffrriiccaa ccrreeaattiinnggtthhee NNaattiioonnaall SSttaattee ooff AAffrriiccaa uunnddeerr GGoodd;; tthhee kkeeyy iiss tthheennuummbbeerr sseevveenn;; vv..11:: DDyynnaammiicc jjuurriisspprruuddeennttiiaall tthhoouugghhtt..Mwalimu, Charles.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 1071 p. $179.95A native of Gambia, Mwalimu has studied and worked in the US in lawand law librarianship, and written extensively on theoretical and prac-tical dimensions of law for Africa. Here he launches a multi-volumeoutline of strategies and solutions designed to eliminate human rightsviolations entirely through the proposed theory of the divinity of God asthe source of law. His topics include the meaning of the journey anddivine mandate, the humanity of Christ Jesus in the Psalms andHebrews, the nexus of spiritual and empirical norms, by God’s decisiononly, the two houses of one eternal life, the fulfillment of the Book ofDaniel prophecies on the way to year 2024, humanity as Africans, thejustice and judgment of God, challenges to constitutional efficacy in sub-Saharan, Africa, and the indigenous ethos of tribalism.

KRP43 2009-288181 978-1-84701-320-0TThhee EEtthhiiooppiiaann rreedd tteerrrroorr ttrriiaallss;; ttrraannssiittiioonnaall jjuussttiicceecchhaalllleennggeedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Kjetil Tronvoll et al. (African issues)James Currey Publishers, ©2009 158 p. $27.95 (pa)After having overthrown Haile Selassie, the Derg military junta that ruledEthiopia from 1974 to 1991 instituted a “Red Terror” in which tens ofthousands of intellectuals, opposition party members, and others wereimprisoned, tortured, and killed. Following their ouster by the EthiopianPeoples’ Revolutionary Democratic Front, a Special Prosecutor’s Officewas established for investigating these crimes and bringing the perpe-trators to justice. In this work, Tronvoll (Norwegian Center for HumanRights, U. of Oslo, Norway), Schaefer (African history, Valparaiso U.,Chile), and Aneme (Norwegian Center for Human Rights, U. of Oslo)present the results of a research project dedicated to assessing theconduct of the subsequent trials in relation to international standards ofhuman rights and analyze the impact and understanding of the trials inbroader Ethiopian context. It discusses the relevant history, the rights ofthose accused by the Special Prosecutor’s Office, the role of the SpecialProsecutor’s Office, a comparison of the trials versus traditions ofrestorative justice in Ethiopia, the trials as a project for constructingpolitical legitimacy, and related topics. Distributed in the US by Ohio U.Press.

KU1509 2009933405 978-1-84844-226-9CClliimmaattee llaaww aanndd ddeevveellooppiinngg ccoouunnttrriieess;; lleeggaall aanndd ppoolliiccyycchhaalllleennggeess ffoorr tthhee wwoorrlldd eeccoonnoommyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Bejamin J. Richardson et al. (New horizons inenvironmental and energy law)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 425 p. $200.00The editors (law professors from York U. and the U. of Ottawa, Canada)present 16 papers from a September 2008 conference examining legalaspects of climate change and climate change mitigation in developingcountries. Topics addressed include state responsibility for damagecaused by climate change, climate change and Indian constitutionalrights, justice for climate refugees within the international legal system,regional and local strategies for indigenous peoples in the South Pacific,climate agreement mechanisms that will allow for adaptation to new sci-entific developments (such as better understanding of bio-sequestration),legal mechanisms for balancing economic efficiency versus sustainabilityand environmental integrity in the Clean Development Mechanism(CDM), policy and legal dimensions of CDM projects in Uganda’s forestrysector, the development and regulation of biodiesels in Brazil, the regu-lation of the voluntary carbon offset market in the United Kingdom andthe Netherlands, the compatibility of US legislative initiatives and theinternational trade regime, and lessons for climate change cooperationfrom the European Union development cooperation policy.

KZ1238 978-1-905221-14-1AA gguuiiddee ttoo iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall llaaww ccaarreeeerrss..Smit, Anneke and Chris Waters.British Inst. of Intl & Comparative Law, ©2009 70 p. $45.00 (pa)Written in Q&A format, this guide will help law students explore optionsbeyond domestic law career paths. It overviews different types ofemployers and employment in international law, such as internationalorganizations, domestic civil service in foreign countries, and interna-tional employment in the public sector, and describes various specializa-tions, work conducted in international courts and tribunals, and areas ofinternational human rights law. The book also suggests courses and activ-ities to prepare for a career in international law. Boxes highlight thevoices of real professionals in various international law fields. Anappendix lists selected internships, short courses, and Master’s programs.The book is distributed in the US by ISBS. Smit teaches law, and Watersteaches public international law and international humanitarian law, atthe University of Windsor, Canada.

KZ1242 978-90-486-0142-4TThhee ccoommpprreehheennssiivvee gguuiiddee ttoo iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall llaaww..Cogen, Marc.die Keure, ©2009 534 p. $109.00 (pa)Cogen (international law, Ghent U., Belgium) presents an overview of thehistory and current status of international law. Chapters discuss thesources of international law, the history of international law, states andterritories, the rights and responsibilities of states, the global commons,international organizations, the individual, diplomatic and consular law,the law of treaties, and the laws regarding armed activities. The focus ofthe work is on the straightforward presentation of the principles andrules of international law in these key areas.

KZ1268 978-0-7748-1488-1AA ppeerriilloouuss iimmbbaallaannccee;; tthhee gglloobbaalliizzaattiioonn ooff CCaannaaddiiaann llaawwaanndd ggoovveerrnnaannccee..clarkson, Stephen and Stepan Wood. (Law and society)U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 347 p. $85.00Highlighting both the benefits and the costs of the movement towards aglobal “supraconstitution” governing Canadian political and economiclife, this volume explores the results of international agreements thatimplement neo-conservative principles to suit transnational business. Co-written by Clarkson (political economy, U. of Toronto) and Wood (law,York University), it also covers what could be considered the third cornerof a triangle—the increasing influence of civil society organizations andtransnational social movements. It ends by considering how the growthof this sector, along with the renegotiation of globalization structures toallow for human, labor and environmental concerns could improvefuture results.

KZ3684 2009-013534 978-1-60741-628-9TThhee llaanndd aanndd mmaarriittiimmee bboouunnddaarryy ddiissppuutteess ooff EEuurrooppee..Guo, Rongxing. (European political, economic and security issues)Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 138 p. $89.00Having produced analogous volumes on Asia, Africa, and the Americas,Guo (Regional Sciences Association of China, Beijing) describes disputesbetween two or more independent states, at least one of which is inEurope, over territory on land or water. In each case he sets out thecauses and consequences of the boundary dispute, and the experiencesand lessons of existing efforts to resolve the conflict. The material couldbe useful to researchers interested in particular disputes or in the phe-nomenon generally or regionally, and to policy makers in countriesinvolved who have been wondering what all that racket in the far corneris about. An index of sort lists countries with disputes and refers to thearticles, which are arranged alphabetically by the geographical feature atissue. Among them are Bagys and Turkestan villages betweenKazakhstan and Uzbekistan; Denmark and Norway and the Greenland-Jan Mayen maritime boundary; Penon de Velez la Gomera, which usedto be a Spanish island but is now a peninsula that Morocco says is partof Africa; and the Tumen River Delta disputed by China and Russia.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–191–

KZ6368 2009-044432 978-0-313-36259-0IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall llaaww aanndd tthhee uussee ooff ffoorrccee;; aa ddooccuummeennttaarryyaanndd rreeffeerreennccee gguuiiddee..Scott, Shirley V. et al.Praeger Security International, ©2010 328 p. $94.95The editors (all of the U. of New South Wales, Australia) gather keydocuments concerning the international law on the use of force by states,with an emphasis on the international law on the use of force as apolitical endeavor. Each document, they write, is of significance for oneor more of three reasons. “Either it sheds light on the political storythrough which this body of law evolved; or it is a legal document, a“source” of international law; or, third, it helps us to assess the real-worldimpact of that law.” Chapters address the historical background of thecurrent legal regime, outline the current UN Charter frameworkregarding the use of force; address issues relevant to the right to self-defense, the crime of aggression, and terrorism; and explore the legalityof the US invasion of Iraq. Each chapter contains an introduction to thetopic, followed by a selection of documents, each of which isaccompanied by an analysis of the document’s significance and contents.Various sidebars contain associated facts or portions of relateddocuments.

KZ6374 2009-023434 978-90-04-17855-7SSttooppppiinngg wwaarrss aanndd mmaakkiinngg ppeeaaccee;; ssttuuddiieess iinn iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaalliinntteerrvveennttiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Kristen Eichensehr and W. Michael Reisman.(International humanitarian law series; v.27)BRILL, ©2009 223 p. $200.00These six papers are taken from a seminar involving law and graduatestudents at the Yale School of Law. The seminar was based on thepremise that what are often called “peacekeeping” operations are in factjust “keeping stopped wars stopped” and should be understood as dis-tinct from the actual process of making peace. The students were taskedwith examining one conflict in depth, identifying the processes of warstopping and peace making involved in the conflict, and extractinggeneral lessons. The chapters discuss the 1982 Falklands War; the late1980s/early 1990s conflict in Nagorno Karabakh, Azerbaijan; Rwanda inthe early 1990s; the Malayan Emergency of 1948-1960; separatist insur-gency in southern Thailand over the course of the 20th century; and theMozambican Civil War of 1976-1992.

EEDDUUCCAATTIIOONN

LA205 2009-024311 978-0-415-80211-6TThhee sscchhooooll iinn tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess;; aa ddooccuummeennttaarryy hhiissttoorryy,,22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by James W. Fraser.Routledge, ©2010 419 p. $54.95Fraser (history and education, New York U.) despaired of finding asuitable textbook for his courses on the history of education in the US,so assembled this reader to serve the purpose. It provides an overview ofissues in education from when Europeans arrives, through first-personaccounts, reports, and contemporary textbooks. His arrangement ischronological, and a sampling of texts shows Virginia statutes in 1656 onthe education of Indian children held hostage, Noah Webster’s 1783 TheAmerican Spelling Book, Frederick Douglass’ 1845 Narrative, The New Wayto Education by Marcus Garvey, John Dewey on education versus trade-training in 1915, the Asian experience in California 1919-20, the NationalDefense Education Act of 1958, John Holt’s 1964 How Children Fail, schooldesegregation in Boston in 1967, the Rough Rock Demonstration Schoolof the Navajo Nation in 1970, and the No Child Left Behind Act of 2001.The first edition was published in 2001 by McGraw-Hill.

LA217 2009-050406 978-0-465-01491-0TThhee ddeeaatthh aanndd lliiffee ooff tthhee ggrreeaatt AAmmeerriiccaann sscchhooooll ssyysstteemm;;hhooww tteessttiinngg aanndd cchhooiiccee aarree uunnddeerrmmiinniinngg eedduuccaattiioonn..Ravitch, Diane.Basic Books, ©2010 283 p. $26.95Ravitch (a professor of education at New York U. and a former AssistantSecretary of Education and member of the National Assessment Board)reverses her previous support of educational policies of testing, account-ability, choice, charter schools, and markets as panaceas for the failuresof the American educational system. Addressing a general audience, shereviews the recent experience with these policies at various levels, fromthe national on down, and details their failures, often echoing the argu-ments of longstanding critics of such policies. In her conclusion, sheargues that the most important area of schooling that requires attentionis the improvement of curricula, pointing to Japan and Finland asexamples of excellence in this area (she remains critical of what she seesas left- and right-wing attempts to limit curricula for political reasons).

LA217 2009-041959 978-1-4166-0913-1EEdduuccaattiioonn uunnbboouunndd;; tthhee pprroommiissee aanndd pprraaccttiiccee ooffggrreeeennffiieelldd sscchhoooolliinngg..Hess, Frederick M.Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2010 178 p. $23.95 (pa)Greenfield is a term typically used by investors, engineers, and buildersto refer to an area where there are unobstructed opportunities to inventor build. In this book, Hess, director of education policy studies at theAmerican Enterprise Institute and a former high school teacher, appliesthe term to an entrepreneurial approach to school reform: starting fromscratch and creating new schools based on data on performance and pro-ductivity. He discusses how to remove formal and informal barriers tocreating new schools and school organizations, and addresses the needto focus on performance and to hold education providers accountable. Heexplains how entrepreneurs get capital for projects, and gives guidingprinciples for reformers. Examples of new school organizations are pre-sented, such as charter school ventures like KIPP Academics and YESPrep, and for-profit schools such as EdisonLeanring and K12 Inc. Thebook will be of interest to teachers and education leaders, policymakers,civic and business leaders, education entrepreneurs, and students.

LA217 2009-032106 978-1-60709-468-5FFaallllaacciieess iinn eedduuccaattiioonn;; wwhhyy sscchhoooollss aarree mmiirreedd iinnmmeeddiiooccrriittyy..Trani, Randy K. and Robert K. Irvine.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 227 p. $37.95 (pa)Trani (principal of the Corbett School, a K-12 charter school in Oregon)and Irvine (vice president of PARC Resources, “a consulting firm focusedon development specializing in working with tribes, nonprofits, andrural governments”) provide advice on reforming the US school system.Their advice involves trimming the size of schools such that there is a 1-to-24 teacher/student ratio, adopting a continuous progress model thatinvolves multi-age classes and maintains teacher-student relationshipsbeyond single grade levels, properly meeting teacher resource needs,investing in teacher professional development, and focusing on tailoredgoals responsive to the needs of the community instead of seeking toimplement a comprehensive curriculum.

LA217 2009-020061 978-1-60709-407-4RReeffoorrmm ccaann mmaakkee aa ddiiffffeerreennccee;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo sscchhooooll rreeffoorrmm..Leiding, Darlene.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 176 p. $34.95This work provides an overview of school reform issues in the UnitedStates. It explores the history of school reform and assesses the variousproposals for improving schools. Rejecting high-stakes testing and similarprograms as likely to increase inequality between school and students,the author (a special education facilitator at the High School forRecording Arts Minnesota) advocates for a reform program that is guidedby the following objectives: enhancing emotional education and culti-vating students as emotionally well-rounded human beings, allowing forindividual choice and interests in education, and promoting schoolautonomy and decentralization of school administration.

LA217 2009-015580 978-1-60709-275-9TThhee ssiixx vviirrttuueess ooff tthhee eedduuccaatteedd ppeerrssoonn;; hheellppiinngg kkiiddss lleeaarrnn,,sscchhoooollss ttoo ssuucccceeeedd..Hurley, J. Casey.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 163 p. $26.95 (pa)Arguing that current ways of thinking about education ignore theessential question of what it means to be educated, Hurley (educationaladministration, Western Carolina U.) identifies six virtues of educatedpeople: understanding, imagination, strong character, courage, humility,and generosity. He explains what has driven public education in the past,including politics, public interest, improvement of test scores, and abureaucratic structure, and how it teaches only three of the virtues, alongwith the vices of intellectual incompetence, fear, and pride. He explainshis model, how it departs from the current one, how it benefits students,schools, and the wider world, and how schools should be structured ascommunities. No index is provided.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –192–

LA217 2009-942744 978-1-934742-426TTrraannssffoorrmmiinngg ppuubblliicc eedduuccaattiioonn;; ccaasseess iinn eedduuccaattiioonneennttrreepprreenneeuurrsshhiipp..Title main entry. Ed. by Stacey M. Childress.Harvard Education Press, ©2010 490 p. $59.95 (pa)This textbook by Childress (management, Harvard Business School) usesa case study method to introduce students to the theories and practicesof “social entrepreneurship” in education in the US, which she defines as“the pursuit of an opportunity to create pattern-breaking social changeregardless of the resources currently controlled.” Clearly supportive ofand in response to the charter schools movement and other forms ofmarket penetration of the school system, the text presents 19 cases in sec-tions that are intended to give students a grounding in the overall currentcontext of entrepreneurship opportunities in US public education, humanresources mobilization issues, the utilization of performance man-agement tools and systems, and launching and growing new schools.

LA226 2009-038762 978-0-8130-3422-5BBeenneeaatthh tthhee iivvoorryy ttoowweerr;; tthhee aarrcchhaaeeoollooggyy ooff aaccaaddeemmiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Russell K. Skowronek and Kenneth E. Lewis.U. Press of Florida, ©2010 341 p. $59.95Archaeologists generally leave the university in order to excavate exoticancient sites. In this volume it is the university itself that is beinguncovered. Skowronek (history and anthropology, University of Texas-PanAmerican) and Lewis (anthropology, Michigan State University) presentreports on excavations at colleges and universities situated in many partsof the United States. These digs served several purposes. The first was toinvestigate artifacts from the early years of the institution. The work alsoserved to involve current students and townspeople in the history of theschool. Finally, they allowed passers-by to see and sometimes participatein, the work of the archaeologist, far different from that shown in films.The book is divided into three sections, bracketed by articles by theeditors. The first asks what sorts of remnants are left behind by literatesocieties. The second hunts for clues as to life on the campus. (It is notsurprising that shards of a wine bottle turn up at Harvard.) The finalpart looks at the role archaeology can play on campus and in the com-munity as a means of self-definition. All articles are accompanied bybrief histories of the schools, diagrams of the digs and photographs. Thebook is fun for those connected with the schools mentioned and servesas an example of how academic disciplines can be made relevant to therest of the university and to the community.

LA227 2007-038555 978-1-60709-652-8MMaannaaggiinngg ddiivveerrssiittyy ffllaasshhppooiinnttss iinn hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn..((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Garcia, Joseph E. and Karen J. Hoelscher. (ACE series on higher edu-cation)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 151 p. $25.95 (pa)Garcia and Hoelscher (management education and elementary education,respectively, Western Washington U.) offer a systematic guide toaddressing interpersonal conflict that may arise in college and universitysettings. They focus on explaining how to diagnose diversity flashpointsituations and remedy them without creating defensiveness and barriersto dialog. Working from their extensive research, the authors describewhat they have found to be trends in diversity on college campuses,analyze diversity-friendly campus climates, and show how diversityflashpoints relate to learning and communication. They give advice ondiagnosing and understanding diversity flashpoints and diffuse them, tofocus on local actions, and to recognize evidence of future changes inidentity politics. They include materials intended to be used in work-shops based upon this book. This is a paperback reprint of the 2008edition.

LA628 978-3-8329-4718-7RReesseeaarrcchh aanndd tteerrttiiaarryy eedduuccaattiioonn iinn cceennttrraall aanndd ssoouutthh--eeaassttEEuurrooppee;; ddeevveellooppmmeennttss,, ssttrruuccttuurreess aanndd ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess iinn tthheelliigghhtt ooff EEUU iinntteeggrraattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph Marko and Hedwig Unger.(Minderheiten und automonien; 17)Nomos, ©2010 155 p. $45.00 (pa)Marko and Unger (both South East European Studies, U. of Graz) werepart of a team appointed by the Austrian Ministry of Science in 2005 toinvestigate the developments, structures, and perspectives of institutionsof research and tertiary education in Europe. This volume represents thefinal product of the second part of the large research project. After sum-marizing the background and initiation of the endeavor and its method-ology and procedures, it presents findings for the region regarding theinstitutional settings of universities, the performance of functions, acad-emies of science, and conclusions and recommendations. Distributed inthe US by ISBS.

LA628 2009-036859 978-963-9776-49-4UUnniivveerrssiittiieess aanndd rreefflleexxiivvee mmooddeerrnniittyy;; iinnssttiittuuttiioonnaallaammbbiigguuiittiieess aanndd uunniinntteennddeedd ccoonnsseeqquueenncceess..Vlasceanu, Lazar.Central European U. Press, ©2010 194 p. $27.95 (pa)Vlasceanu (sociology, Bucharest U.) teaches, but also serves on nationalagencies seeking to reform higher education and research institutionsthroughout Romania. He draws on his experiences at both scales tochronicle recent and current changes in the university. Among them theclash between academic traditions, markets, and the General Agreementon Trade in Services; risks and prospective approaches to demographyand higher education; whether university and development form avicious or virtuous circle; and continuities and discontinuities in aca-demic transformations. Distributed in the US by Books International.

LA2317 2009-032073 978-0-89990-149-7AA lliiffee oonn tthhee rruunn;; sseeeekkiinngg aanndd ssaaffeegguuaarrddiinngg ssoocciiaall jjuussttiiccee..Telford, John.Harmonie Park Press, ©2010 419 p. $24.95Telford is a record-holding sprinter and a lifelong advocate for equalityin education. He most recently served as the superintendent of theMadison District Schools and was fired for recruiting hundreds of Detroitstudents against the wishes of white residents. He tells his life story withhonesty and humor, from his childhood to expulsion from high schoolfor a brawl with an administrator, through his college and sports career,to his controversial educational and social initiatives. The book includesa wealth of b&w personal photos. The author has taught at Wayne StateUniversity and Oakland University.

LB14 2009-018025 978-0-415-99769-0CCrroossss--ccuullttuurraall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn ppoolliiccyy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee::ddeeccoolloonniizziinngg ccoommmmuunniittyy ccoonntteexxttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer Lavia and Michele Moore. (Routledgeresearch in education)Routledge, ©2010 227 p. $95.00These 13 essays are motivated, according to editors Lavia and Moore(both of the School of Education, U. of Sheffield, UK), by a concern forsocial justice and the necessity to pursue social justice within cross-cul-tural educational settings. The guiding theoretical and conceptual issuesfor the collection as a whole concern the meaning of “decolonizing com-munity contexts,” the relationship between decolonizing and under-standing communities, links between education and communitydevelopment, and the connections of these links to the decolonizingprocess. Other unifying themes, they note, include autobiography, citi-zenship, resistance, peacemaking, critical literacies, and second-chanceopportunities. Examples of specific topics include lessons fromindigenous education in Brazil concerning culturalism, difference, andpedagogy; changing perceptions of community amongst children andteachers in Kingston, Jamaica; inclusion, narrative, and voices of disabledchildren in Trinidad and St. Lucia; inclusion of disabled students inhigher education in Zimbabwe; and community perspectives on povertyand poverty alleviation in the Caribbean.

LB14 978-90-8790-823-2LLeeaarrnniinngg ffoorr mmeeaanniinngg’’ss ssaakkee;; ttoowwaarrdd tthhee hheerrmmeenneeuuttiiccuunniivveerrssiittyy..Mackler, Stephanie. (Educational futures; rethinking theory andpractice; v.31)Sense Publishers, ©2009 124 p. $49.00 (pa)For university educators and administrators and proponents of theliberal arts, Mackler argues that higher education should educate formeaning rather than job training and knowledge production. She aimsto provide a model of education that invites people to perceive, make, anddeepen their connections to ideas, texts, and humans, resulting from herview of the lack of human connection in the world. She notes that theuniversity lacks a unifying purpose and that there is a cultural strugglewith meaninglessness in society in general. She addresses what thetwenty-first university should be for, the importance of meaning, andmaking meaning that enhances what it is to be a human being. She pro-poses an ideal—but not practical advice—to connect knowledge pro-duction with meaning making, connect higher education to ethical acts,and use apprenticeship and stories as activities for meaning making.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–193–

LB14 2009-008530 978-1-4384-2925-0MMeeddiiuummiissmm;; aa pphhiilloossoopphhiiccaall rreeccoonnssttrruuccttiioonn ooff mmooddeerrnniissmmffoorr eexxiisstteennttiiaall lleeaarrnniinngg..Arcilla, René V.State U. of New York Pr., ©2010 119 p. $55.00Liberal education is one of the few remaining havens for existentiallearning, i.e., cultivating an understanding of what it is like to exist.Building on Christopher Higgins’ definition that “something is educativeif it facilitates human flourishing,” Arcilla (educational philosophy, NewYork U.) derives from modernism, a cultural movement blending com-ponents of high culture and the counterculture of the 1960s to counterconsumerism, mediumism as a path to cultivating awareness of our“strangerhood” regarding reality and presentmindedness. She presentsexamples of pedagogical works and types of mediumist educators thatpossess these characteristics.

LB41 978-1-84706-416-5WWaasstteedd;; wwhhyy eedduuccaattiioonn iissnn’’tt eedduuccaattiinngg..Furedi, Frank.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 246 p. $26.95Furedi (sociology, U. of Kent at Canterbury, UK) examines what educationis and what has gone wrong with it, and the responsibilities of adultsociety for the socialization of children. He challenges the low expecta-tions that influence pedagogic thinking and creates a culture of schoolingthat is narrow-minded and anti-intellectual, focusing on the paradox thatthe more society invests and expects of education, the less schools anduniversities demand of students and value education for its own sake,rather than for economic or societal gains. Addressing aspects in the UK,he critiques education policies and the current obsession with change,the concept of adult authority, how young people can also socializeadults, the politicization of the school and how it impacts the curriculum,the loss of faith in education, and the over concern with the happinessand well-being of the child.

LB43 978-90-8790-971-0NNoorrddiicc vvooiicceess;; tteeaacchhiinngg aanndd rreesseeaarrcchhiinngg ccoommppaarraattiivvee aannddiinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall eedduuccaattiioonn iinn tthhee nnoorrddiicc ccoouunnttrriieess..Holmarsottir, Halla B. and Mina O’Dowd.Sense Publishers, ©2009 317 p. $49.00 (pa)Education researchers described as comparatives look at differences andsimilarities among the Nordic countries in conducting research aboutteaching and learning in the areas of discourse, theory, and method;teachers, schools, and children; and the international context. Amongtheir topics are global influences and national peculiarities in Finnisheducation and training, social cartography mapping in theory andpractice as a method for visualizing discourse and social change, privateschools and social segregation in Norwegian basic education, teachereducation students in Denmark and the US, challenges and opportunitiesfor learners and schools on each side of the digital divide, languagepolicy in Namibia and South Africa, and education that builds peace orfuels armed conflict. The 17 essays are not indexed.

LB173 2009-047380 978-1-4129-7297-0BBrriinnggiinngg yyoouurr lleeaarrnniinngg ccoommmmuunniittyy ttoo lliiffee;; aa rrooaadd mmaapp ffoorrssuussttaaiinnaabbllee sscchhooooll iimmpprroovveemmeenntt..Kaagan, Stephen S. and Linda Headley.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 134 p. $31.95 (pa)This resource for school and district leaders and education professionalsdescribes a collaborative process for establishing a professional learningcommunity (PLC) in a school or district over the course of 9-12 months.In addition to creating PLCs, the tools and strategies presented can beused to facilitate innovations such as the transition to schools withinschools. The book begins by introducing ten pillars for productive dis-cussions essential to PLCs, and looking at discussion responsibilities ofthe individual and the group. The rest of book, 3 chapters, gives exercisesfor conducting meetings, improving communication skills, and buildinggroup identity. Each exercise contains a rationale, suggestions for prepa-ration, and detailed instructions. Two-page mini-case studies ofclassroom and administration problems invite discussion on implicationsand applications. Kaagan is professor emeritus at Michigan StateUniversity. Headley is an educational consultant.

LB175 2009-024313 978-0-415-95470-9TTeeaacchhiinngg UU..SS.. hhiissttoorryy;; ddiiaalloogguueess aammoonngg ssoocciiaall ssttuuddiieesstteeaacchheerrss aanndd hhiissttoorriiaannss..Title main entry. Ed. by Diana Turk et al. (Transforming teaching)Routledge, ©2010 215 p. $36.95 (pa)For middle and secondary school history teachers, Turk (social studieseducation, New York U.) et al offer an approach to teaching social studiesthat connects historians to social studies classrooms and teachers. Theypresent seven chapters by scholars and educators who participated in theNew York History Teaching Collaborative and collectively developedhistory lessons with historians and education professors in classrooms inNew York from 2006 to 2008. They address key US history eras andevents from slavery through the Civil Rights movement and method-ological approaches like primary source analysis, role-playing, oralhistory, historical debate, and inquiry to create hands-on learning andengagement with critical thinking. Each chapter begins with an interviewwith a historian from the US and an essay on teaching the topic, followedby lesson frameworks and activities.

LB875 2009-036559 978-1-4331-0870-9EEiinnsstteeiinn aanndd ZZeenn;; lleeaarrnniinngg ttoo lleeaarrnn..Pritscher, Conrad P. (Counterpoints; studies in the postmodern theoryof education; v.384)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 242 p. $32.95 (pa)This book is an extended meditation on how the examples of Einsteinand Zen practices provide lessons on learning and knowing. Pritscher(former President of the Ohio Valley Philosophy of Education Society)draws in insights from brain research, neuroscience, and physics to drawconnections between Einstein’s practice of free inquiry and Zen’s insis-tence on living in the present in order to consider their implications foreducation.

LB1025 2009-030115 978-1-59667-132-45500 wwaayyss ttoo iimmpprroovvee ssttuuddeenntt bbeehhaavviioorr;; ssiimmppllee ssoolluuttiioonnss ttooccoommpplleexx cchhaalllleennggeess..Breaux, Annette and Todd Whitaker.Eye On Education, ©2010 130 p. $29.95 (pa)Worthwhile and thought-provoking for any teacher, the 50 short chaptersof this guide each present a classic classroom problem or truth, astrategy for its solution, and a concluding “bottom line” that often voicesa moral to the story. The authors are particularly adept at describing thehuman factor of the issue, so that the reader will be able to grasp whatthe student is feeling and how the solution creates a positive and suc-cessful learning environment. A sampling of topics includes how ateacher acknowledging a mistake becomes a useful life lesson to the stu-dents, the importance of not showing anger and how to master it, andways to notice when and how students attack a teacher’s weakness andhow to overcome sensitivity to such attacks. The volume is not indexed.

LB1025 978-90-420-2795-4LLeeaarrnniinngg aanndd tteeaacchhiinngg iinn aa mmeettrrooppoolliiss..Title main entry. Ed. by Lynn Ang et al. (At the interface/Probing theboundaries; v.60)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 242 p. $70.00 (pa)For students, teacher educators, practitioners, and academics in edu-cation, Ang et al. (education, U. of East London) assemble 14 essays byscholars of education at the U. of East London, UK, that examine teachingand learning in the diverse urban context of the twenty-first century,with a focus on studies of East London. Looking at the formation ofteachers, learning and teaching in primary and secondary education, andhigher education in the city, they consider teacher training programs, theexperiences of newly qualified teachers, inclusive education, educationdelivery in a diverse context, pedagogical strategies that recognizediversity, and how strategies address issues of inequality, includingpoverty, special needs, and Muslim students in East London. No index isprovided.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –194–

LB1025 2009-042981 978-1-59667-141-6PPllaannnniinngg,, iinnssttrruuccttiioonn,, aanndd aasssseessssmmeenntt;; eeffffeeccttiivvee tteeaacchhiinnggpprraaccttiicceess..Grant, Leslie W. et al.Eye On Education, ©2010 142 p. $34.95 (pa)This companion to the author’s The Supportive Learning Environment:Effective Teaching Practices reviews recent research and concepts relatedto instructional planning and delivery and student assessment; it alsosupplies reproducible resources including templates, lesson plans,rubrics, and record forms, which are also available for download. Thebook also contains a 25-page annotated bibliography of key publicationson theory and practice of planning, instruction, and assessment. There isno subject index. The book is for teachers, administrators, and staffdevelopment specialists. Grant teaches in the School of Education at TheCollege of William and Mary.

LB1025 2009-031840 978-1-60709-557-6TThhee tteeaacchheerr’’ss hhaannddbbooookk;; ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr ssuucccceessss..Fredericks, Anthony D.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 315 p. $49.95 (pa)Fredericks (education, York College) offers a resource that addresses whatbeginning teachers need to know to be exceptional educators. He coversthe different roles of the teacher, successful qualities, how students learn,lesson plans, using technology, time management, assessment and eval-uation, teaching strategies, motivation, classroom management, specialneeds students, cooperative learning, elementary and secondary edu-cation, working with parents, stress management, building a career, andother topics. No index is provided.

LB1025 2009-051869 978-1-4129-7850-7WWoorrkksshheeeettss ddoonn’’tt ggrrooww ddeennddrriitteess;; 2200 iinnssttrruuccttiioonnaallssttrraatteeggiieess tthhaatt eennggaaggee tthhee bbrraaiinn,, 22dd eedd..Tate, Marcia L.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 158 p. $30.95 (pa)Tate, an educational consultant, presents brief descriptions of ideas forclassroom activities to maximize student engagement and learning, inchapters on 20 instructional strategies such as artwork, field trips,games, graphic organizers, humor, manipulatives and labs, movement,music, role plays and drama, and writing and journals. Each chapterbegins with a definition of the strategy and a review of the theoreticalframework that supports it, and then presents ideas for instructionalactivities in different content areas for all levels. The book ends withguidelines for brain-compatible lesson design. The author is former exec-utive director of professional development for the DeKalb County Schools.

LB1025 2009-053744 978-1-4129-7839-2ZZiinngg!!;; sseevveenn ccrreeaattiivviittyy pprraaccttiicceess ffoorr eedduuccaattoorrss aannddssttuuddeennttss..Mora, Pat.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 140 p. $23.95 (pa)Mora, an author, former teacher and administrator, and presenter whooffers workshops on literacy, creativity, leadership, writing, and servingdiverse populations, outlines seven practices for educators and studentsto use to access creativity. Using the format of letters to teachers, shedescribes how to value the creative self, enjoy quiet, gather materials,begin the project, revise, share creations, and persist in creative work,with writing and other exploration exercises included. There is no index.

LB1027 2008-048841 978-1-4164-0380-7TThhee aaccccoouunnttaabbllee sscchhooooll ccoouunnsseelloorr,, 22dd eedd..Loesch, Larry C. and Martin H. Ritchie.PRO-ED, ©2009 264 p. $41.00 (pa)Loesch (counselor education, U. of Florida) and Ritchie (school coun-seling, U. of Toledo) present an updated resource for school counselorsand those studying to enter the profession, offering practical informationfor initiating and conducting accountability activities in their schools. Thesecond edition provides a broader context for school counselor accounta-bility by explaining how an individual school counselor’s accountabilityefforts are integrated with overall school counseling program evaluationand accountability. It also features a restructured framework and moredetailed table of contents for easier navigation of the text; added activitiesat the end of each chapter to aid readers’ understanding of each chapter’smajor ideas; and an increased number of activities to give readers moreideas for their individual accountability efforts and actions. No subjectindex.

LB1027 2009-047365 978-1-4129-6061-8LLeeaaddiinngg tthhrroouugghh qquuaalliittyy qquueessttiioonniinngg;; ccrreeaattiinngg ccaappaacciittyy,,ccoommmmiittmmeenntt,, aanndd ccoommmmuunniittyy..Walsh, Jackie Acree and Beth Dankert Sattes.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 125 p. $28.95 (pa)Building on their previous work, Quality Questioning: Research-BasedPractice to Engage Every Learner, the authors offer a practical manual forusing quality questioning, a process for engaging individuals in thinkingtogether, as an approach to decision making in schools. The book beginswith a framework for leading through quality questioning and arationale for adopting it, then explains the questioning skills andstrategies associated with this practice. The rest of the book focuses onfour leadership functions: maximizing, mobilizing, mediating, and mon-itoring. Chapters contain scenarios of structured group processes thatleaders can use to engage the school community in thinking andresponding together. Detailed instructions for facilitating 20 of thesestructured group processes can be found in an appendix. A final chapteroffers a case study. The book includes numerous summary and com-parison tables and lists of closed and open-ended questions, plus a self-assessment. It will be of interest to school and education leaders at alllevels. Walsh is a consultant specializing in the design of learning expe-riences for adults. Sattes is an educational consultant.

LB1027 2008-038459 978-1-55766-843-1PPeeeerr ssuuppppoorrtt ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr iimmpprroovviinngg aallll ssttuuddeennttss’’ ssoocciiaalllliivveess aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg..Carter, Erik W. et al.Brookes Publishing, ©2009 140 p. $29.95 (pa)Carter (special education, U. of Wisconsin-Madison) et al. provide a guidefor middle and high school educators, paraprofessionals, and staff topeer support strategies and how they improve the social lives andlearning opportunities of students with severe disabilities in general edu-cation classrooms. They discuss new developments in service deliveryand educational programs for students with severe disabilities, peersupport arrangements based on research, the use of collaboration incrafting support plans, and ways to identify students who will work welltogether, orient students to their new roles, promote collaborative workand encourage social interactions, and reflect on progress.

LB1027 2010-001676 978-1-4129-7541-4TTeeaacchhiinngg ddiiggiittaall nnaattiivveess;; ppaarrttnneerriinngg ffoorr rreeaall lleeaarrnniinngg..Prensky, Marc.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 203 p. $33.95 (pa)Prensky, an international speaker, writer, consultant, education andlearning futurist, and founder of educational companies, detailsapproaches for teachers and school leaders to make learning relevant fortoday’s technologically-intelligent students. Arguing that the increasinglytechnological world has created a need for a pedagogy that incorporatesit, he proposes a partnership model that promotes student learningthrough technology in which students specialize in content finding,analysis, and presentation via multiple media, and teachers specialize inguiding student learning, providing questions and context, designinginstruction, and assessing quality, with administrators who support,organize, and facilitate the process. He outlines strategies, steps, ideas,and examples for this partnering, and methods for implementation,setting up the classroom, connecting to current curriculum, using stu-dents’ passions to motivate them, emphasizing skills, making learningreal, using technology like cell phones, games, and Web 2.0, student cre-ation, continuous improvement, and assessment. An annotated list ofabout 130 technologies is included.

LB1027 2009-037012 978-1-4129-7290-1WWaayyssiiddee tteeaacchhiinngg;; ccoonnnneeccttiinngg wwiitthh ssttuuddeennttss ttoo ssuuppppoorrttlleeaarrnniinngg..Powell, Sara Davis.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 181 p. $30.95 (pa)For teachers, Powell (education, Belmont Abbey College) explains waysideteaching, an approach to teaching that focuses on the relationshipbetween the teacher and student between classes, and how it buildsstudent self-concept, motivates learners to engage in the curriculum, andprovides a sense of belonging and safety. She outlines its components,including creating an inviting classroom, knowing students, learning tolisten, speaking carefully, teaching skills that help students becomeautonomous, and encouraging imagination and creativity; what it lookslike in elementary, middle, and high school; and goals for waysideteachers.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–195–

LB1027 2009-043854 978-1-4129-7490-5WWhheenn kkiiddss aarree ggrriieevviinngg;; aaddddrreessssiinngg ggrriieeff aanndd lloossss iinnsscchhooooll..Title main entry. Ed. by Donna M. Burns.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 108 p. $25.95 (pa)Burns (educational psychology, College of Saint Rose) explains how edu-cators, administrators, and school counselors can understand andrespond to challenges that children and adolescents face when dealingwith loss and grief. She introduces concepts and terms; provides aprimer for those with limited training in these issues; discusses differenttypes of grief and loss reactions, how children and adolescents under-stand loss, and factors influencing them; and outlines strategies,including school based-crisis response, that can be used with studentsaffected by divorce, the death of a loved one, violence, chronic illness,and other losses. Charts, checklists, case studies, tables, and activities areincorporated.

LB1028 2009-037146 978-1-60709-646-7AAccttiioonn rreesseeaarrcchh ffoorr eedduuccaattoorrss,, 22dd eedd..Tomal, Daniel R.Rowman & Littlefield, ©2010 197 p. $55.00 (pa)Tomal (educational leadership and research, Concordia U.-Chicago) offersa guide to research methods that can be used by educators and admin-istrators at any level to increase student learning and self-esteem, and thequality of school life in the classroom. He covers the principles andhistory of action research, ethical and legal considerations, methods forconducting formal and informal research, data collection, analysis andinterpretation, action planning and initiation, and results evaluation.Published research studies and commentary round out the book. Thisedition has been updated to include additional content on qualitative andquantitative research, data-driven decision making, ethics, sampling tech-niques, conducting a literature review, tests of significance, statisticalapplications, evaluation of action research, and other topics.

LB1028 2009037645 978-1-56484-262-6TThhee ccoommppuutteerr llaabb tteeaacchheerr’’ss ssuurrvviivvaall gguuiiddee,, 22dd eedd..;; KK--66uunniittss ffoorr tthhee wwhhoollee yyeeaarr.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Poteete, Holly.ISTE, ©2010 216 p. $36.95 (pa)This book/CD-ROM package is designed for K-6 teachers, curriculumcoordinators, and other educators who lack computer lab teachertraining but who are responsible for technology education. The guidebegins with advice on lab set up, Internet security, and ergonomics, thenpresents 10 units, each containing two or three lessons, on areas such asdigital citizenship, Internet research, messaging and communication,multimedia presentations, virtual fieldtrips, and blogs and podcasts. Thelessons are keyed to National Educational Technology Standards forStudents, and include lists of materials and equipment, step-by-step pro-cedures, ideas for guided and independent practice, and evaluationmethods. Each lesson also includes extension, remediation, and accom-modation ideas. The companion CD-ROM, suitable for any operatingsystem, platform, Web browser, or Internet connection, contains work-sheets, quizzes, and multimedia presentations to accompany the lessons.Much of the content in this second edition is new or revised. Poteete leadstechnology workshops for teachers.

LB1028 2009-021596 978-1-60566-972-4DDiiggiittaall iimmaaggeerryy aanndd iinnffoorrmmaattiioonnaall ggrraapphhiiccss iinn ee--lleeaarrnniinngg;;mmaaxxiimmiizziinngg vviissuuaall tteecchhnnoollooggiieess..Hai-Jew, Shalin.Information Science Reference, ©2010 331 p. $180.00This book combines features of a handbook and a survey text. Becausefaculty and staff work in a do-it-yourself environment, emphasis is onpractical methods for acquiring and creating digital imagery for onlinelearning, with an overview of related pedagogical theories, visual literacy,and instructional design. Chapters cover types and practical applicationsof graphics in online learning, then explore capturing and authoringtools for graphics, the creation of game and simulation spaces, collabo-rative image creation, and storage and access issues. Final chapters covermulticultural contexts and ethical issues. B&w images and screenshotsare included. Most contributions are from the US. The book’s readershipincludes faculty, technologists, instructional designers, and graduate stu-dents. Hai-Jew works as an instructional designer at Kansas StateUniversity.

LB1028 2009-025888 978-1-4331-0635-4DDIIYY mmeeddiiaa;; ccrreeaattiinngg,, sshhaarriinngg aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg wwiitthh nneewwtteecchhnnoollooggiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Michele Knobel and Colin Lankshear. (New lit-eracies and digital epistemologies; v.44)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 266 p. $33.95 (pa)Scholars of education, communication, and media introduce educatorsand caregivers to the self-made digital media that the young people theyencounter now use on the daily basis. Within sections on audio, still, andmoving media, they look at such aspects as music remix in theclassroom, learning and photosharing over visual networks, why to thinkgames when thinking film, and do-it-yourself animation and interactivedesign.

LB1028 978-94-6091-017-3EEdduuccaattiioonnaall rreesseeaarrcchh bbyy aassssoocciiaattiioonn;; AAAARREE pprreessiiddeennttiiaallaaddddrreesssseess aanndd tthhee ffiieelldd ooff eedduuccaattiioonnaall rreesseeaarrcchh..Title main entry. Ed. by Trevor Gale and Bob Lingard. (Review ofAustralian research in education; no.7)Sense Publishers, ©2010 180 p. $29.00 (pa)Former AARE presidents Gale (U. of South Australia) and Lingard (U. ofQueensland, Australia) collect 11 addresses delivered by retiring presi-dents from 1974 to 2007 to the annual conference of the AustralianAssociation for Research in Education (AARE) and published annually inits academic journal, The Australian Educational Researcher. Theaddresses track the development of educational research in Australia andconsider its functions, purposes, and impact, as well as issues likedefining the field and its researchers, the role of the AARE, dissemi-nation, publication, quality, the relationship to policy and practice,teacher education, ethnocentrism, globalization, researcher and practi-tioner collaboration, and educational psychology.

LB1028 2007-018648 978-1-57886-798-1EEdduuccaattiinngg tthhee ffiirrsstt ddiiggiittaall ggeenneerraattiioonn.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Harwood, Paul G. and Victor Asal.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 191 p. $27.95 (pa)The two authors (both in political science) discuss the impact of infor-mation technology on modern K-12 schools and their students, focusingmainly on the US. Subjects include issues of privacy in a wiredclassroom, how students and teachers integrate digital technology intothe teaching and learning experience, the sources of inequality in accessto technology education, electronic cheating, and distance learning. Thisis a paperback reprint of a 2007 edition.

LB1028 2009-047072 978-0-470-53807-4HHaarrnneessssiinngg AAmmeerriiccaa’’ss wwaasstteedd ttaalleenntt;; aa nneeww eeccoollooggyy oofflleeaarrnniinngg..Smith, Peter. (The Jossey-Bass higher and adult education series)John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 179 p. $40.00About one-third of all American 9th graders don’t graduate from highschool; another one-third graduate but don’t go on to college. Smith,author of The Quiet Crisis: How Higher Education Is Failing America,argues that institutions of higher education must focus reform efforts onserving these two thirds of the population. Drawing on research, trendanalysis, and his own broad professional experience, he explores thecauses and the social and economic impact of the failure of Americanschools, and introduces a new paradigm that uses technology and onlinetools to personalize education for every learner. Smith is affiliated withKaplan Higher Education. He is former assistant director for educationof the United Nations Education, Scientific, and Cultural Organization,and served as the founding president of California State University atMonterey Bay.

LB1028 2009-035757 978-1-55753-547-4TThhee iimmppaacctt ooff TTaabblleett PPCCss aanndd ppeenn--bbaasseedd tteecchhnnoollooggyy oonneedduuccaattiioonn;; hhoorriizzoonnss,, 22000099..Title main entry. Ed. by Dave A. Berque et al.Purdue University Press, ©2010 163 p. $25.95 (pa)This volume explores the effects of technological innovations on edu-cation, mostly in a higher educational setting. It is made up of 16 peer-reviewed conference papers, along with 14 abstracts of keynote talks,posters, and video presentations from the Workshop on the Impact ofPen-based Technology on Education. The use of tablet PCs appears tomostly be taking place in mathematics, computer science, engineering,and some areas of the natural sciences. The volume is edited by Berque(computer science, DePauw U.), Konkle (president of DyKnow, a softwarecompany in educational technology), and Reed (consultant with theInternational Society for Technology in Education),

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –196–

LB1028 2008-939457 978-1-4129-4849-4SScchhooooll--bbaasseedd rreesseeaarrcchh;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorr eedduuccaattiioonn ssttuuddeennttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Elaine Wilson.Sage Publications, ©2009 289 p. $89.95This volume is aimed at beginning teachers involved in classroomresearch in order to complete their Postgraduate Certificate in Educationin the UK, as well as serving teachers completing Masters courses. EditorWilson (science education, U. of Cambridge) presents contributions byexperts who have experience both in academic research and classroomteaching. After discussing the formulation of a research question andmethods for finding and reviewing literature, the largest section of thebook deals with actually carrying out and reporting on research thattakes place within the classroom. There are chapters on collecting, han-dling, and analyzing data, exploring both qualitative and quantitativeapproaches, and the art of writing professional papers. Later chapters arespecifically devoted to action research and grounded theory, followed bya general discussion of the larger issues or paradigms.

LB1028 2009-051388 978-1-4129-6699-3SSmmaarrtteerr cclliicckkiinngg;; sscchhooooll tteecchhnnoollooggyy ppoolliicciieess tthhaatt wwoorrkk!!..Wells, Christopher.Sage Publications, ©2010 134 p. $26.95 (pa)This guide will help school and district administrators and technologyteam members develop policies on instructional technology that con-tribute to a community of learning rather than an ‘electronic lockdown’where students and staff feel restricted. The book emphasizes a collabo-rative approach to technology policy development, involving students,parents, staff, and administrators, and other community members. Itoffers jargon-free explanations of legal considerations, and outlinesstrategies for evaluating a school’s needs, managing technology to protectstudent and staff privacy, responding to challenges of social networkingand emerging technologies, and developing acceptable use policies. Theresource section provides sample policy documents and templates. Wellsis IT policies and communication director for Gwinnett County PublicSchools.

LB1028 2009-032717 978-1-4129-7210-9TTeecchhnnoollooggyy lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp ffoorr sscchhooooll iimmpprroovveemmeenntt..Papa, Rosemary.Sage Publications, ©2011 297 p. $52.95 (pa)For K-12 educational leaders and educational leadership students at thegraduate level, Papa (learning-centered leadership, Northern Arizona U.)assembles 13 chapters that detail the skills and knowledge needed tomanage and administrate technology in school settings. Researchers,practitioners, and writers working in education and educational tech-nology in the US discuss technology standards; data-driven decisionmaking; leadership and management styles in the digital environment;leading adult learners; planning, designing, implementing, and evalu-ating technology; the design of creative online learning; social, cultural,and legal issues, including internet safety, copyright, and plagiarism; andassessment and evaluation.

LB1028 2009-035434 978-1-60566-884-0TTeecchhnnoollooggyy--ssuuppppoorrtteedd eennvviirroonnmmeennttss ffoorr ppeerrssoonnaalliizzeeddlleeaarrnniinngg;; mmeetthhooddss aanndd ccaassee ssttuuddiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by John O’Donoghue.Information Science Reference, ©2010 510 p. $180.00Contributors from the UK report on recent research and cases in usingtechnology to respond to the specific needs and interests of each student.The cases described range from whole class to individual delivery, inlarge universities and small departments, and among all content areas.Section I considers major infrastructural, cultural, and organizationalchanges required. Section II, on pedagogical issues, presents caseexamples illustrating both the potential and drawbacks of personalizedlearning technologies such as video-enriched learning experiences for per-forming arts students. Several chapters focus on training for educators ininstructional design and personalized e-learning. The last sectiondescribes tools such as V-ResORT and the ViP for online video narrative,and physical metaphorical modeling with LEGO. O’Donoghue is pro-fessor of learning and technology at the University of Central Lancashire,UK.

LB1028 978-1-4129-3844-0UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg tthhee ddiiggiittaall ggeenneerraattiioonn;; tteeaacchhiinngg aannddlleeaarrnniinngg iinn tthhee nneeww ddiiggiittaall llaannddssccaappee..Jukes Ian, et al. (21st century fluency series)Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 150 p. $29.95Jukes, McCain, and Crockett combine years of experience in education,as teachers, administrators, media specialists, and consultants, as theyexplore the new digital landscape and the profound implications that itholds for the future of education in the U.S. The authors provide teachersand administrators with an examination of the gap between the life expe-rience of students today and that of their parents and teachers, sum-marize findings from current neuroscience and psychological researchdescribing how the digital generation’s cognitive processes are beingrewired and reshaped, discuss ways that educators might reconcile thesenew developments with current instructional practices, and suggestclassroom strategies suited to the learning preferences and communi-cation needs of digital learners while simultaneously honoring traditionalassumptions and practices concerning teaching, learning, andassessment. Co-published with the 21st Century Fluency Group.

LB1029 2009044844 978-1-61520-731-2EEdduuccaattiioonnaall ggaammeeppllaayy aanndd ssiimmuullaattiioonn eennvviirroonnmmeennttss;; ccaasseessttuuddiieess aanndd lleessssoonnss lleeaarrnneedd..Title main entry. Ed. by David Kaufman & Louise Sauvé.Information Science Reference, ©2010 500 p. $180.00Recent research from Canada is collected here, shedding light on tech-niques for design and use of educational games and simulations, espe-cially in the area of health-related learning. The papers are based onresearch arising from Canada’s Simulation and Advanced GamingEnvironments (SAGE) for Learning Project (2003-2008), and cover theo-retical, social, and practical issues. Chapters are in sections on founda-tions and theory, design and prototyping, learning efficacy, and gameshell and game creation. Sample topics include the role of narrative ineducational games and simulations, gender and digital gameplay,designing a simulation for teaching ethical decision making, the use ofvirtual reality in psychology research, and games for children with long-term health problems. B&w illustrations and screenshots are included.The book’s readership includes researchers, designers, teachers, healthprofessionals, and technicians. Kaufman is affiliated with Simon FraserUniversity, Canada. Sauvé is affiliated with Télé-université, Canada.

LB1029 2009-047363 978-1-4129-7162-1RRTTII ffoorr ddiivveerrssee lleeaarrnneerrss;; mmoorree tthhaann 220000 iinnssttrruuccttiioonnaalliinntteerrvveennttiioonnss..Collier, Catherine.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 275 p. $38.95 (pa)Response to intervention (RTI) models were originally developed toidentify learning disabilities in English-speaking students. This guideprovides 200 instructional interventions for teaching culturally and lin-guistically diverse students within an RTI framework. The book isorganized by the four tiers of RTI, and will help classroom teachersaddress students’ cognitive, behavior, literacy, and communication issues.Each intervention includes notes on purpose, simple instructions, a list ofsupporting research, and notes on what to watch for with ELL/CLD stu-dents. Collier is a specialist in bilingual/cross-cultural special education.

LB1033 2009-038224 978-1-4166-0903-2IInnvviittiinngg ssttuuddeennttss ttoo lleeaarrnn;; 110000 ttiippss ffoorr ttaallkkiinngg eeffffeeccttiivveellyywwiitthh yyoouurr ssttuuddeennttss..Edwards, Jenny.Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2010 170 p. $23.95 (pa)For teachers, parents, and others working with learners, Edwards (edu-cational leadership and change, Fielding Graduate U.) offers 100 tips fortalking differently with students at any level that will help them educatestudents better, and build relationships with them, help them plan forthe future, respond to objections, encourage and influence them, andresolve conflicts. She also discusses developing a positive mindset forcommunication, sending inviting messages to students, using differentintonations, and tips related to using technology, interacting with parents,reaching out to diverse groups, managing the classroom, giving feedback,writing notes and making phone calls, writing report cards, and com-municating online.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–197–

LB1042 2009-044842 978-1-56484-259-6DDiiggiittaall ssttoorryytteelllliinngg gguuiiddee ffoorr eedduuccaattoorrss..Frazel, Midge.ISTE, ©2010 158 p. $29.95 (pa)For K-12 educators, administrators, curriculum specialists, and teachereducators, Frazel, a professional development teacher and author whohas an educational technology website and blog, provides an overview ofdigital storytelling and its variations (like e-portfolios, digital photoessays, and scrapblogs) and how students can use text, music, images,sounds, and narration to produce a digital story. She covers aspects ofpreparation, production, presentation, and evaluation; specific digitaltools; and ways to use digital storytelling to build enthusiasm forlearning, with family history, and for cultural, scientific, and globallearning. There is no index or bibliography, but online resources areprovided.

LB1042 2009-026365 978-1-59158-600-5SSttoorryytteelllliinngg;; aarrtt && tteecchhnniiqquuee,, 44tthh eedd..Greene, Ellin and Janice M. Del Negro.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 455 p. $55.00Former U. of Chicago professor Green is an internationally known story-teller, lecturer, and author; Del Negro (library and information science,Dominican U., Illinois) has written several books for children and youngadults. They present a revised text for beginning and experienced story-tellers—from public library and school media center librarians, to adultsworking with children in Head Start programs, daycare centers,museums, and other recreational centers—providing a history of story-telling in libraries and accessible instruction for bringing oral storytellingto contemporary listeners. The fourth edition contains updated researchand bibliographies, expanded discussion of the relationship between oralstorytelling to young children and becoming a lifelong reader, new tipson storytelling to young adults, a new “International Perspective” section,full texts of 13 stories for various ages and occasions, and a reformattedand enlarged section of print and online resources. Libraries Unlimitedis an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

LB1044 2009-034904 978-1-60566-940-3AAffffeeccttiivvee,, iinntteerraaccttiivvee aanndd ccooggnniittiivvee mmeetthhooddss ffoorr ee--lleeaarrnniinnggddeessiiggnn;; ccrreeaattiinngg aann ooppttiimmaall eedduuccaattiioonn eexxppeerriieennccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Aimilia Tzanavari and Nicolas Tsapatsoulis.Information Science Reference, ©2010 354 p. $180.00This collection presents several design approaches to technologyenhanced learning based on interactive behavior, cognitive theories, andaffective characteristics. The 15 chapters discuss the transition fromteaching to learning in contemporary education in the context of ICT andthe Web, and explore the role of multimedia and virtual reality. Topicsinclude interface design for social interaction in e-learning environments,a pedagogics pattern model of blended e-learning, ontology engineeringfor courseware design, and pattern drills for foreign language acqui-sition. Tzanavari is an associate professor in the department of designand multimedia at the University of Nicosia, and Tsapatsoulis is anassistant professor of communication science and technology at theCyprus University of Technology.

LB1044 2009-051376 978-1-4129-7747-0BBllooggss,, wwiikkiiss,, ppooddccaassttss,, aanndd ootthheerr ppoowweerrffuull WWeebb ttoooollss ffoorrccllaassssrroooommss,, 33dd eedd..Richardson, Will.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 171 p. $31.95 (pa)Since the 2006 edition, more teachers and students have realized thatlearning is being transformed by Web media. But the former teacher/con-sultant who advocates for the use of Internet technologies in schools notesthat many adults still don’t have a clue as how to utilize these media forlearning. Following background on the vision and development of“Read/Write” Web media, Richardson explains how educators use suchtools as weblogs, wikis, RSS, and social networking media in theclassroom. The book concludes with a day in the life of a teacher in thisnew learning environment.

LB1044 2009-043363 978-1-60566-942-7CCaasseess oonn ssuucccceessssffuull EE--lleeaarrnniinngg pprraaccttiicceess iinn tthhee ddeevveellooppeeddaanndd ddeevveellooppiinngg wwoorrlldd;; mmeetthhooddss ffoorr tthhee gglloobbaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonneeccoonnoommyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Bolanle Olaniran.Information Science Reference, ©2010 357 p. $180.00The international case studies presented here survey e-learning best prac-tices for various contexts and audiences in both developed and less-developed countries, and will be of interest to practitioners in knowledgeand information management and organizational development. Thecases are grouped in sections on innovative uses of e-learning, inequitiesin e-learning, the user-centered focus in e-learning, and special consider-ations. Some specific topics covered are implications of virtual structuresfor rural societies, anti-hegemonic adult education practices in a cyber-education environment, users’ satisfaction with e-learning at theUniversity of Botswana, the effects of e-learning on African Americanmales, and using activity theory to guide e-learning initiatives. Olaniranteaches in the Department of Communication Studies at Texas TechUniversity.

LB1044 2009-042991 978-1-61520-729-9EE--ccoollllaabboorraattiivvee kknnoowwlleeddggee ccoonnssttrruuccttiioonn;; lleeaarrnniinngg ffrroommccoommppuutteerr--ssuuppppoorrtteedd aanndd vviirrttuuaall eennvviirroonnmmeennttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Bernhard Ertl.Information Science Reference, ©2010 335 p. $180.00Ertl (University of Bundeswehr-Munich, Germany) gathers perspectivesand scenarios on e-collaborative knowledge construction. Material is insections on environments for e-collaborative knowledge construction,approaches in the context of e-collaborative knowledge construction, andsupport measures to facilitate learners’ processes and outcomes in e-col-laborative knowledge construction. A final section on e-collaborativeknowledge construction in school and organizational contexts contains achapter on three stages in the social construction of virtual learning envi-ronments. Interdisciplinary contributors come from the US, Europe, andNew Zealand.

LB1044 2009-052655 978-1-60566-938-0NNoovveell ddeevveellooppmmeennttss iinn wweebb--bbaasseedd lleeaarrnniinngg tteecchhnnoollooggiieess;;ttoooollss ffoorr mmooddeerrnn tteeaacchhiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Nikos Karacapilidis.Information Science Reference, ©2010 401 p. $180.00Recent work on the development of web-based learning systems, by con-tributors from around the world, addresses technical, social, and con-ceptual issues. Specific topics include virtual communities of practice inhigher education, onsite and online students’ and professors’ perceptionsof ICT use in higher education, social tagging systems, e-learning withwikis and discussion forums, and implementation of server-based com-puterized adaptive testing on mobile devices. Some cases exploredinclude profiling group activity of online academic workspaces at theHellenic Open University of Greece, and web-based corporate training inBrazil. The book will interest professionals, researchers, and practi-tioners. The editor is affiliated with the University of Patras, Greece.

LB1044 2009-033983 978-0-7637-7747-0TThhee vviirrttuuaall wwoorrlldd’’ss hhaannddbbooookk;; hhooww ttoo uussee SSeeccoonndd LLiiffeeaanndd ootthheerr 33DD vviirrttuuaall eennvviirroonnmmeennttss.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Hodge, Elizabeth et al.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 336 p. $49.95 (pa)The virtual worlds of gamers are being tapped by educators. Hodge(business and information technologies, East Carolina U.) explains howthe popular free Second Life (SL) virtual world is being integrated intovirtual classrooms and learning communities. Step- by-step instructionsand screenshots present integration strategies, tips for developing andusing a virtual environment, adding interactivity and scripts to objects,and SL educational and training sites. Appendices include virtual hot-spots for “in-world” educational spaces by type, web resources, computershortcut keys, a glossary, and explanation of automatic script viewer. Thecompanion CD-ROM and website offer further resources.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –198–

LB1044 2010-003720 978-1-61520-963-7WWeebb--bbaasseedd eedduuccaattiioonn;; ccoonncceeppttss,, mmeetthhooddoollooggiieess,, ttoooollss aannddaapppplliiccaattiioonnss;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Information Resources ManagementAssociation.Information Science Reference, ©2010 1905 p. $1,495.00The first chapter of this three-volume reference offers a brief history ofe-learning; indeed, the time span of e-learning’s existence has been brief,but it’s here to stay, and there’s plenty that educators, administrators,and policy-makers need to talk about. Changes must be considered atevery level of education, incorporating careful analyses of the technologyitself (does it deliver all that it promises?), student learning (making thevirtual classroom function), teachers’ experiences, and the organizationof institutions. Arrangement of 124 contributed chapters is in eight sec-tions addressing fundamental concepts and theories, development anddesign methodologies, tools and technologies, utilization and application,organizational and social implications, managerial impact, critical issues,and emerging trends. Although most of the contributors are based in theUS, some are based in Europe and elsewhere. Primary responsibility forshaping the material is given to a group (Information ResourcesManagement Association) rather than an individual. Each chapter is sim-ilarly organized, beginning with an abstract and ending with conclu-sions; and each is well-referenced and includes a listing of key terms anddefinitions. Online access to the contents (enhanced) is included withpurchase through the life of the edition. Information Science Reference isan imprint of IGI Global.

LB1048 2009-031964 978-1-60709-444-9HHiiddddeenn ddaannggeerrss ttoo kkiiddss’’ lleeaarrnniinngg;; aa ppaarreenntt gguuiiddee ttoo ccooppeewwiitthh eedduuccaattiioonnaall rrooaaddbblloocckkss..Gunzelmann, Betsy.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 123 p. $24.95 (pa)Gunzelmann, chair of psychology at Southern New HampshireUniversity, adapts material from her Hidden Dangers: Subtle Signs ofFailing Schools to address parents of school children directly. She givesbackground on children’s emotional and academic needs and how boyslearn differently from girls, and overviews the impact of No Child LeftBehind on schools. She describes ‘hidden dangers’ related to misguidedattitudes and procedures in schools, testing, labeling with ADHD or otherdiagnoses, gender issues, and bullies, and also touches on problems withthe physical school building related to air quality and dangerous sub-stances. She provides suggestions for parents for short-term and long-term school improvement, gives advice on how to deal with a child’steachers, and outlines methods for finding out about other educationaloptions. An annotated list of organizations and informational web sitesis included. There is no subject index.

LB1050 2009-021917 978-1-60623-474-7BBrriinnggiinngg rreeaaddiinngg rreesseeaarrcchh ttoo lliiffee..Title main entry. Ed. by Margaret G. McKeown and Linda Kucan.Guilford Pr., ©2010 320 p. $38.00In a book that honors the contributions of retired colleague Isabel Beck(Learning Research and Development Center, U. of Pittsburgh) totranslating research on reading into instructional practice, Mckeown andKucan introduce 16 chapters by educators with a summary of thelandmark 1978 Beck and McCaslin report on effective reading learningstrategies. From experiential and empirical perspectives, contributorsdiscuss its legacy of reading programs that incorporate phonemicawareness activities, and current issues, models, and directions intraditional and digital literacy teaching, learning, and interventions (e.g.,Reading Recovery) for reading disabilities at all levels and across thecurriculum.

LB1051 2009-047382 978-1-4129-6872-0GGeenneettiicc aanndd aaccqquuiirreedd ddiissoorrddeerrss;; ccuurrrreenntt ttooppiiccss aannddiinntteerrvveennttiioonnss ffoorr eedduuccaattoorrss..Title main entry. Ed. by Paul C. McCabe and Steven R. Shaw.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 171 p. $33.95 (pa)For educators, school psychologists, counselors, and administrators,McCabe (school psychology, Brooklyn College of the City U. of New York)and Shaw (educational and counseling psychology, McGill U., Canada)provide a guide that outlines issues affecting children with genetic andacquired disorders. School psychologists and neuroscientists from the USand Canada contribute 14 chapters on chromosomal, genetic, and meta-bolic disorders such as autism, phenylketonuria, prenatal exposure toalcohol and antidepressants, celiac disease, maternal postpartumdepression and its relationship to children’s behavior problems, asthma,food allergies, and diabetes, with scientific information on these diseases,key medical terms, educational strategies, case studies, and handouts, aswell as advice on dealing with grief and bereavement, the biology ofshyness, and helping families. The book originated in a regular feature,“Pediatric School Psychology,” of the National Association of SchoolPsychologist publication Communiqué, and is the second in a three-volume series on Current Topics and Interventions for Educators,reviewing scientific research on pediatric topics relevant to schools.

LB1057 2009042848 978-1-4166-0918-6BBrraaiinn--bbaasseedd tteeaacchhiinngg iinn tthhee ddiiggiittaall aaggee..Sprenger, Marilee.Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2010 177 p. $23.95 (pa)Despite her use of digital devices, an educational consultant on brain-based teaching admits that as a “digital immigrant” she would ratherread a book the old-fashioned way rather than on a screen unlike manyof today’s “digital natives.” Sprenger explains how such technology is re-shaping the brain; brain-based learning principles; their relevance tolearning styles, intelligence, and memory; and ways to balance tech andpeople skills in learning environments. The guide includes a primer onthe brain, student tech-savvy assessment checklist, and glossary of digitalterms.

LB1060 2009-044207 978-0-415-99185-8LLeeaarrnniinngg,, ccrreeaattiinngg,, aanndd uussiinngg kknnoowwlleeddggee;; ccoonncceepptt mmaappssaass ffaacciilliittaattiivvee ttoooollss iinn sscchhoooollss aanndd ccoorrppoorraattiioonnss,, 22dd eedd..Novak, Joseph D.Routledge, ©2010 317 p. $49.95 (pa)The future of economic well being in today’s knowledge and informationsociety rests upon the effectiveness of schools and corporations toempower their people to be more effective learners and knowledge cre-ators, claims Novak (Florida Institute for Human and Machine Cognitionand emeritus education and biology, Cornell U.). He sets out his theoryfor meaningful learning and autonomous knowledge building, and thetools for implementing it. His topics include the need for a theory of edu-cation, the construction of new meanings, the nature of knowledge andhow humans create knowledge, the effective teacher/manager, and eval-uation and rewards. The first edition was published in 1998 by LawrenceErlbaum Associates.

LB1060 2009-004077 978-1-60709-137-0TTeeaacchh tthhee wwaayy tthhee bbrraaiinn lleeaarrnnss;; ccuurrrriiccuulluumm tthheemmeess bbuuiillddnneeuurroonn nneettwwoorrkkss..Laster, Madlon T.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 195 p. $31.95 (pa)Laster, a retired middle school teacher, provides a companion to her firstbook, Brain-based Teaching for All Subjects: Patterns to Promote Learning(2008), that outlines a teaching approach that makes connections betweensubjects, uses themes, and is based on the way the brain links relatedconcepts. The approach involves all of the senses and links related ideas,materials, and skills. She offers strategies, lesson plans, and activities foruse at the elementary and middle school levels, including social studies,geography, reading, and simulation. There is no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–199–

LB1062 2009-041263 978-0-87766-762-9CCrreeaattiinngg aa nneeww tteeaacchhiinngg pprrooffeessssiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Dan Goldhaber and Jane Hannaway.Urban Institute Press, ©2009 335 p. $29.50 (pa)For policy makers and others, Goldhaber (interdisciplinary arts and sci-ences, U. of Washington, Bothell) and Hannaway (Education PolicyCenter, Urban Institute) compile 16 contributions by education, eco-nomics and public affairs, education reform and policy, educationaladministration, and other scholars from the US who examine howteacher quality is the most important factor influencing studentachievement and propose ways to improve the quality of the teachingworkforce in the US from a human capital perspective. They considertrends in teacher quality, what can be learned from other countries andother sectors of the economy, the characteristics of recent teachers incomparison with the past, the effects of salary, good human resourcemanagement principles, innovative use of technology, and reforms inrecruitment, training, retainment, staffing, and reward structures, con-cluding with a section of reaction essays from a dean, superintendent,teachers’ union leader, and policy analyst.

LB1062 2008-048544 978-0-07-337512-0PPeeaakk ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee;; ssuucccceessss iinn ccoolllleeggee aanndd bbeeyyoonndd,, 77tthh eedd..Ferrett, Sharon K.McGraw-Hill, ©2010 530 p. $66.33 (pa)Offering an appealing color layout, journal exercises, and profiles of pro-fessionals in many fields, this study skills text for beginning undergrad-uates emphasizes connections between study skills and students’ futurecareers. Sections cover areas such as lifelong learning, emotional intelli-gence, and time management, as well as study skills for taking notes,active reading, test taking, and writing and speaking. An applicationssection covers critical thinking, taking care of mind, body, and spirit,building supportive relationships, and exploring majors and careers.Some of the text’s many pedagogical features include chapter summarieswritten as first-person ‘take charge’ statements, web research tips andactivities, and tear-out worksheet pages with review questions, briefcases, application exercises. This seventh edition contains many newhow-to boxes, new material on personal safety and a new section onabuse of prescription and over-the-counter drugs. Ferrett is affiliated withHumboldt State University.

LB1065 2008-047601 978-0-8058-6290-4HHaannddbbooookk ooff mmoottiivvaattiioonn aatt sscchhooooll..Title main entry. Ed. by Kathryn R. Wentzel and Allan Wigfield. (Thepsychological foundations of teaching and learning)Routledge, ©2009 686 p. $114.95 (pa)For policy makers, administrators, and teachers, Wentzel and Wigfield(human development, U. of Maryland) compile 29 chapters that presenttheory and research on children’s motivation at school. Contributorsworking in human development, psychology, educational psychology,and other areas in the US and Europe address theories such as self-efficacy theory, goal-directed behavior, and self-worth theory, and theirapplication to instruction, learning, social adjustment and connectedness,well-being, and achievement, including the role of social processes, social-ization agents, and contextual factors like parenting, student’s relation-ships with teachers, peers, teacher expectations, gender, and race andethnicity. The final section addresses motivation in academic domainslike reading, math, and physical education, and aspects such as emo-tions, teacher motivation, and learning disabilities. Each section endswith a commentary.

LB1065 2009-032120 978-1-60709-371-8SSaavviinngg ssttuuddeennttss ffrroomm aa sshhaatttteerreedd ssyysstteemm;; aa gguuiiddeelliinnee ttooiiggnniittee aa ppaassssiioonn ffoorr lleeaarrnniinngg..Lee, Eldon “Cap” and Mary Gale Budzisz.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 138 p. $32.95 (pa)Lee, a former teacher and administrator, and Budzisz, a retired teacher,delineate a method of education that is student-centered, has a flexiblecurriculum, and incorporates real-world learning, designed to help stu-dents to become successful in the adult world. They outline problemswith the current system and offer suggestions for a hands-on curriculumthat involves parents and integrates community involvement, intergener-ational awareness, and the arts, and propose alternatives to standardizedtesting such as portfolio assessment and exhibitions.

LB1072 2009-035964 978-1-4129-7974-0BBeeccoommiinngg aann eemmoottiioonnaallllyy iinntteelllliiggeenntt tteeaacchheerr..Powell, William and Ochan Kusuma-Powell.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 192 p. $33.95 (pa)Classroom teachers, school administrators, and staff developers will findideas for developing emotional awareness and interpersonal skills thatcan increase their effectiveness in the classroom, based on DanielGoleman’s five components of emotional intelligence: self-awareness, self-regulation, motivation, social awareness, and relationship management.Each chapter contains discussion of theory and research-based evidenceto support the notion that emotionally intelligent teachers are moreeffective in the classroom, plus case studies, exercises, activities, and self-assessment inventories. The book can be used by readers independentlyor in professional development groups. Powell and Kusuma-Powell areeducators and consultants.

LB1139 2009-034037 978-0-07-337848-0EEaarrllyy cchhiillddhhoooodd eedduuccaattiioonn;; lleeaarrnniinngg ttooggeetthheerr..Casper, Virginia and Rachel Theilheimer.McGraw-Hill, ©2010 522 p. $68.75 (pa)Casper (Bank Street College of Education) and Theilheimer (Borough ofManhattan Community College) present a text on early childhood edu-cation (developed in conjunction with the Bank Street College ofEducation) that encourages undergraduate students to think criticallyabout the early care and education of young children and develop theskills, knowledge, and dispositions of early childhood educators. Theyinclude discussion of children in different contexts, like poverty andhomelessness, the role of culture, and the role of relationships. Eachchapter incorporates a first-person account by a student, educator, orparent, and activities related to National Association for the Education ofYoung Children Professional Preparation Standards.

LB1139 978-94-6091-121-7EEssssaayyss oonn aaeesstthheettiicc eedduuccaattiioonn ffoorr tthhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Tracie Costantino and Boyd White.Sense Publishers, ©2010 217 p. $49.00 (pa)The impetus for this collection was a presentation of four of the papersat the American Educational Research Association conference in NewYork in 2008. Costantino (U. of Georgia, Athens) and White (McGill U.,Montreal, Canada) have added eight papers to this core group, three ofthem presenting European perspectives, making this a nicely filled outvolume on the topic of curriculum theory and practice in art education.Detailing their own classroom experiences at all levels, the papersdescribe current research in the field alongside classroom observations.The volume is not indexed.

LB1139 2009-025476 978-0-07-337877-0FFoouunnddaattiioonnss ooff eeaarrllyy cchhiillddhhoooodd eedduuccaattiioonn;; tteeaacchhiinnggcchhiillddrreenn iinn aa ddiivveerrssee ssoocciieettyy,, 55tthh eedd..Gonzalez-Mena, Janet.McGraw-Hill, ©2011 443 p. $116.25Gonzalez-Mena, who served on the faculty of the child and family studiesprogram at Napa Valley College and was a former preschool teacher andchild care coordinator and director, provides a textbook on earlychildhood care and education programs that aims to increase theirquality through teacher training. Using a family-centered approach, sheprovides an overview of these programs; links care to education; includeschapters on modeling as teaching; and integrates themes like diversity,special needs, observation, and guidance throughout. This edition hasupdates to the history of the early childhood field and communicationbetween adults in early childhood settings; emphasis on the importanceof play and exploration as ways of learning; more on guidance and dis-cipline and the differences between them; and discussion of dual-lan-guage classrooms, nature education, nonviolent communication, andphysical-care centers.

LB1139 2009-037010 978-1-4129-7423-3MMaakkiinngg aa ddiiffffeerreennccee;; 1100 eesssseennttiiaall sstteeppss ttoo bbuuiillddiinngg aa pprreeKK--33 ssyysstteemm..Sullivan-Dudzic, Linda et al.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 162 p. $25.95 (pa)This guide shows principals, administrators, school board members, andearly child directors how to connect school districts to local early-childhood learning sites, maximize the benefits of full-day kindergarten,and share strengths between preschool and K-3 programs. Sullivan-Dudzic, an educational consultant, draws on 20 years of experience witha preK-3 system in Washington state, to present a 10-step model for iden-tifying children’s needs, sharing information about children as they tran-sition to kindergarten, and aligning resources, curriculum, instruction,and assessment. The book includes appendices of books and web sites,steps for the first leadership meeting, and sample forms.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –200–

LB1139 2009-929035 978-1-84787-527-3MMuullttii--aaggeennccyy wwoorrkkiinngg iinn tthhee eeaarrllyy yyeeaarrss;; cchhaalllleennggeess aannddooppppoorrttuunniittiieess..Gasper, Michael.Sage Publications, ©2010 154 p. $99.95For undergraduates and practitioners in a multi-agency context, Gasper,a former teacher and an early years consultant, trainer, coach, mentor,and facilitator in the UK, discusses multi-agency working in the earlychildhood setting in the UK; what it is and why it is important; its ben-efits and practice; the needs and benefits to children, parents, and com-munities; challenges in supporting successful partnership working; andthe skills and training new professionals need. He also presents threecase studies of Denmark, Italy, and New Zealand and how they haveinfluenced partnership working in England and Wales. Information isdrawn from questionnaires sent to 190 managers of children’s centers in2008.

LB1181 2009-937944 978-1-84920-138-4WWrriittee ddaannccee iinn tthhee eeaarrllyy yyeeaarrss,, 22dd eedd.. ((AAuuddiioo CCDDiinncclluuddeedd))Oussoren, Ragnhild A.Sage Publications, ©2010 128 p. $120.00A recent study found decreases in children’s pre-writing skills, due to lesstime spent using writing, drawing, and cutting tools. The Write Dancehandwriting program uses music, stories, songs, sensory play, art, anddance to foster wrist strength and flexibility and fill the missing gaps inmovement and coordination development. The book’s introductionexplains the rationale and goals of the program in plain language, andgives tips on easy-to-find materials. Each of the program’s nine themescontains a story and matching song with sets of large-motor movementsand ‘finger dancing’ and ‘scrimbling’ movements on paper or other sur-faces. Most movements can be performed standing, waking, sitting, oreven lying down. The companion audio CD contains songs composedspecifically for the program. The book was first published in 2004 in TheNetherlands. There is no subject index, and information on the author isnot given. The book is also available in paperback with an audio CD anda DVD under ISBN 9781849203920.

LB1205 2009-028845 978-1-59874-494-1RReeuubbeenn’’ss ffaallll;; aa rrhhiizzoommaattiicc aannaallyyssiiss ooff ddiissoobbeeddiieennccee iinnkkiinnddeerrggaarrtteenn..Leafgren, Sheri L. (International Institute for Qualitative Methodologyseries)Left Coast Press, ©2009 287 p. $69.00When Rueben fell, a classmate rushed over to help him, and was pun-ished for talking and for getting out of line. Then a new teacher, Leafgren(teacher education, Miami U. of Ohio) was horrified, or at least per-plexed, and decided to learn more about discipline in kindergarten. Theresult, which also served as her Ph.D. dissertation at Kent State University(no date noted), discusses such aspects as disobedience texts and con-textual literature; rhizoanalysis, qualitative inquiry, and a twist of lather;schools, kindergartens, and teachers; and moments in kindergarten. Sheappends discipline and management plans.

LB1527 2009-042251 978-1-59158-830-6WWiinnddoowwss oonn tthhee wwoorrlldd;; iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall bbooookkss ffoorreelleemmeennttaarryy aanndd mmiiddddllee ggrraaddee rreeaaddeerrss..Blass, Rosanne.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 214 p. $40.00 (pa)Elementary and middle school librarians and teachers will find a bibli-ography of 400 fiction, nonfiction, and poetry titles to help studentsunderstand different cultures around the world. The guide focuses onabout 100 lead books and 350 related books published in the last tenyears. In addition to work by international authors and illustrators, theguide includes reissues of classics, and a few American titles with rep-resentations of other cultures. Each entry includes bibliographic data,information on the author and illustrator, age level, a synopsis, andrelated activities correlated with national curriculum standards. Anappendix lists national curriculum standards identified by nine nationalprofessional associations. Blass is retired from the University of SouthFlorida’s College of Education.

LB1528 2009-023676 978-1-60623-497-6TTeeaacchhiinngg nneeww lliitteerraacciieess iinn ggrraaddeess KK--33;; rreessoouurrcceess ffoorr 2211sstt--cceennttuurryy ccllaassssrroooommss..Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara Moss and Diane Lapp. (Solvingproblems in the teaching of literacy)Guilford Pr., ©2010 321 p. $30.00 (pa)Teachers of grades K-3 can use the 23 lessons provided here to introducereading skills to students using traditional and nontraditional texts, fromfiction and drama to graphic novels, song lyrics, and digital storytelling.Lessons include activities for promoting decoding, fluency, compre-hension, and other literacy skills, as well as classroom vignettes, thinkalouds, assessment guidelines. There are also suggestions for groupingstudents and differentiating instruction. Lesson is keyed to standardsfrom the International Reading Association/National Council of Teachersof English. B&w illustrations and reproducibles are included. Moss andLapp teach education in the Department of Teacher Education at SanDiego State University.

LB1573 978-1-60623-511-9CCoommpprreehheennssiioonn aaccrroossss tthhee ccuurrrriiccuulluumm;; ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess aannddpprraaccttiicceess KK--1122..Title main entry. Ed. by Kathy Ganske and Douglas Fisher. (Solvingproblems in the teaching of literacy)Guilford Pr., ©2010 335 p. $34.00 (pa)Methods for supporting reading comprehension across the content areasin grades K-12 are presented. The book offers guidelines on selecting non-fiction texts, ideas for fostering student engagement, and overviews oftheoretical perspectives and current research. Special attention is given tointegrating out-of-school literacies into instruction and developing com-prehension in English language learners. Chapters present general tech-niques for primary, elementary, middle, and high school grades, andtechniques to use in content areas including math, social studies science.A few templates, worksheets, and examples of student work are included.Ganske teaches literacy in the Graduate Teacher Education Program atOberlin College. Fisher teaches language and literacy education at SanDiego State University.

LB1575 2009-035374 978-0-415-87164-8LLiitteerraaccyy iinn ttiimmeess ooff ccrriissiiss;; pprraaccttiicceess aanndd ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Laurie MacGillivray.Routledge, ©2010 199 p. $41.95 (pa)For teachers and teacher educators, MacGillivray (literacy, U. of Memphis)brings together nine studies that examine the importance of literacy intimes of crisis, including natural disasters, cultural and community dis-juncture, homelessness, family upheaval, teen pregnancy, and disability.Education and reading scholars from the US consider how literacy affectsthe way families, schools, and communities respond to crisis, and how itplays different roles in facilitating communication, maintaining con-nection, expressing grief, shaping memories, providing information, andother areas. They also address literacy practices that ease the impact ofcrisis, and the role of community and school practices. Studies examinethe role of blogs and emails after Hurricane Katrina, Yemeni refugeewomen forced to chose between marriage and learning English, dialoguejournals between parents and children during divorce, the use of blogsand anime by a teen whose father was incarcerated, and other subjects.A group of teachers conclude with commentary discussing applicationsto their fields.

LB1576 2009-035795 978-1-4129-5643-7CCaasseess ooff ssuucccceessssffuull lliitteerraaccyy tteeaacchheerrss..Lacina, Jan and Cecilia Silva.Sage Publications, ©2011 226 p. $34.95 (pa)Lucina (literacy, Texas Christian U.) and Silva (second language acqui-sition and bilingualism, Texas Christian U.), along with ten other con-tributing authors, present case studies intended for upper levelundergraduate and graduate students and in-service teachers. Theauthors select excellent reading and writing teachers practicing at an ele-mentary school level and then highlight and summarize their practices.Each chapter begins with focus questions and ends with concludingthoughts, questions for discussion, a list of terms to know, and a col-lection of useful books and web sites for consultation.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–201–

LB1576 2009-04196 978-1-934338-66-7EEvveerryyddaayy ccoonntteenntt--aarreeaa wwrriittiinngg;; wwrriittee--ttoo--lleeaarrnn ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorrggrraaddeess 33--55..Title main entry.Maupin House, ©2010 151 p. $23.95 (pa)Kopp, a teacher and author of the Learning Through Writing series andbooks on content-area learning and technology, presents a way forteachers in grades three through five to use writing in daily activities andas a means to learn content areas. She explains how to teach content-areavocabulary, prepare lesson plans that target writing skills, use assess-ments to direct instruction, and integrate technology into the writingprocess.

LB1576 2009-018391 978-0-415-87123-5OOffffiicciiaall ppoorrttrraaiittss aanndd uunnooffffiicciiaall ccoouunntteerrppoorrttrraaiittss ooff ““aattrriisskk”” ssttuuddeennttss;; wwrriittiinngg ssppaacceess iinn hhaarrdd ttiimmeess..Meyer, Richard J.Routledge, ©2010 291 p. $48.95 (pa)Meyer (language, literacy, and sociocultural studies; U. of New Mexico)explores writers in a fifth-grade and a sixth-grade class in a public schoolserving an impoverished rural area in the US southwest. His topicsinclude writers revealing themselves, claiming spaces to write, expandingwriting spaces as communities of practice, heroes and dark secrets, pre-sentations and power, suffering and struggles, and writing spaces forbetter times.

LB1576 2009-043778 978-1-59667-138-6TTeeaacchhiinngg ggrraammmmaarr;; wwhhaatt rreeaallllyy wwoorrkkss..Benjamin, Amy & Joan Berger.Eye On Education, ©2010 174 p. $29.95 (pa)This guide for teachers gives creative ideas on teaching grammar usingstudents’ own writing, visual and hands-on manipulatives, rhythm,inductive reasoning, problem-solving, wordplay, and pattern finding. Thefirst part of the book updates traditional notions about teachinggrammar, and explains how to teach students about parts of speech andhow to recognize a complete sentence. Part II outlines a month-by-monthcalendar of grammar lessons that embed grammar into writinginstruction. The book includes day-by-day units and reproducibles. Thereis no subject index. Benjamin is a literacy consultant and president of theAssembly for the Teaching of English Grammar of the National Councilof Teachers of English. Berger is a veteran teacher and writer.

LB1576 2009-023675 978-1-60623-501-0TTeeaacchhiinngg nneeww lliitteerraacciieess iinn ggrraaddeess 44--66;; rreessoouurrcceess ffoorr 2211sstt--cceennttuurryy ccllaassssrroooommss..Title main entry. Ed. by Barbara Moss and Diane Lapp. (Solvingproblems in the teaching of literacy)Guilford Pr., ©2010 354 p. $30.00 (pa)This resource provides 24 complete literacy lessons for teachers of grades4-6, using traditional texts, such as fiction, poetry, drama, non-narrativetexts such as newspapers and persuasive essays, and nontraditional textslike graphic novels, political cartoons, maps, web-based texts, song lyrics,and advertisements. The book includes lessons for synthesizing infor-mation through writing in different genres, such as biographies, sum-maries, and reports. B&w illustrations and reproducibles are included.Each lesson includes a classroom vignette, think alouds, student practiceactivities, and assessment guidelines, plus ideas for scaffolding, groupingstudents, and differentiating instruction. Lessons are keyed to standardsof the International Reading Association/National Council of Teachers ofEnglish. Moss and Lapp teach education in the Department of TeacherEducation at San Diego State University.

LB1576 2009-007379 978-1-4384-2906-9WWrriittiinngg--bbaasseedd tteeaacchhiinngg;; eesssseennttiiaall pprraaccttiicceess aanndd eenndduurriinnggqquueessttiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Teresa Vilardi and Mary Chang.State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 186 p. $24.95 (pa)For writing center directors and secondary school and college teachers ofEnglish, history, literature, and science, Vilardi, Chang, and faculty fromBard College’s Institute for Writing and Thinking offer a guide to writing-based teaching in their respective fields: literature, composition, poetry,math, anthropology, and education. In the eight chapters, they stress theneed for teachers to develop a practice rather than a collection ofstrategies, as they describe their stories at the Institute and the writingpractices they used in classrooms, teacher workshops, and academic dis-ciplines. They illustrate strategies for fostering critical thinking, inquiry,and reasoning, and topics such as freewriting, dialectical notebooks,exploring thinking, radical revision, process writing, collaborativelearning, learning culture, and community.

LB1584 2009-010084 978-0-415-99671-6SSoocciiaall ssttuuddiieess aanndd ddiivveerrssiittyy eedduuccaattiioonn;; wwhhaatt wwee ddoo aannddwwhhyy wwee ddoo iitt..Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth E. Heilman.Routledge, ©2010 412 p. $47.95 (pa)The anthology was intended as a textbook for a teacher education coursein diversity, but the contributing education instructors included so manydetailed examples for K-12 teaching that the examples themselves wouldbe useful for practicing teachers interested social studies or diversity edu-cation across those levels. The studies cover purposes, beliefs, and con-texts for social education; democratic values and government; evidence,sources, and interpretation in history; history in social contexts; per-spective consciousness about identity, power, and culture; local andglobal communities and economics; current events and controversialissues; using a range of resources; and instruction and curriculumdesign.

LB1585 2009924394 978-1-84860-118-5UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg pprriimmaarryy sscciieennccee;; sscciieennccee kknnoowwlleeddggee ffoorrtteeaacchhiinngg,, 33dd eedd.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Wenham, Martin and Peter Ovens.Sage Publications, ©2010 277 p. $99.95Wenham, a science teacher, and Ovens (professional and curriculumdevelopment, Nottingham Trent U., UK) describe science subjectknowledge needed by new and experienced primary school teachers inthe UK and related activities for use in the classroom. They link scienceknowledge to pedagogical, practical, and other aspects of teaching,learning, and assessment, and follow subjects related to the UK’sAttainment Targets of the Science National Curriculum, such as matter,electricity, energy, and gravity. The CD contains activity ideas for investi-gations in the book. There is no bibliography.

LB1623 2009-043852 978-1-4129-6342-8MMoorree bbeesstt pprraaccttiicceess ffoorr mmiiddddllee sscchhooooll ccllaassssrroooommss;; wwhhaattaawwaarrdd--wwiinnnniinngg tteeaacchheerrss ddoo..Title main entry. Ed. by Randi Stone.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 178 p. $30.95 (pa)Written by middle school teachers for middle school teachers, this workdescribes best practices used in real classrooms and offers ready-to-uselessons and units complete with recommended grade levels, objectives,lists of relevant standards, suggested materials, directions, and tips. Thereare ideas on teaching academic content areas as well as art, music, andphysical education, in addition to ideas on classroom management, usingtechnology, and assessment. Some interesting methods include student-created podcasts, creating a prairie, edible color wheels, and teachingdescriptive writing using song lyrics. Contributor profiles and e-mail con-tacts are included. There is no subject index. Stone, who holds a doctoratein education, has written other books on teaching practices.

LB1631 2009-051374 978-1-4129-7980-1TTaakkiinngg tthhee lleeaadd oonn aaddoolleesscceenntt lliitteerraaccyy;; aaccttiioonn sstteeppss ttoosscchhoooollwwiiddee ssuucccceessss,, ffoorr ggrraaddeess 44--1122..Title main entry. Ed. by Judith L. Irvin et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 230 p. $35.95For educational leaders, Irvin (Florida State U., Tallahassee, and NationalLiteracy Project) et al. offer a guide for developing or enhancing an ado-lescent literacy plan in grades four through 12 to raise student per-formance, graduation rates, employability, and higher education success.They address aspects of design, assessment, implementation, and moni-toring, using a five-stage process based on a model developed through aproject that examined what literacy leaders need to improve literacy andlearning in these grades. They outline the goal areas of the model, whichinclude motivation, engagement, and achievement; integrating literacywith learning in content areas; and sustaining development through theschool environment, parents and community, and school district.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –202–

Assume that all books contain appropriate scholarly paraphernalia. We note ifthe book should contain, but lacks, a subject index and/or a bibliography.

LB1631 2009-05185 978-1-60709-630-6TTeeaacchhiinngg mmiiddddllee sscchhooooll llaanngguuaaggee aarrttss;; iinnccoorrppoorraattiinnggttwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt--cceennttuurryy lliitteerraacciieess..Roseboro, Anna J. Small.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 320 p. $49.95 (pa)For new and experienced middle school teachers, Roseboro, a veteranEnglish language arts teacher with experience in public and privateschools, explains how to teach language arts using a plan that is theory-based, student-centered, aligned with standards, and progresses towardsmore independent student work. She provides specific assignments forthe course of the school year that incorporate old and new media andapply National Writing Project concepts for planning, assignments, andassessment. Lessons show how to get students to work together, under-stand the story and genre, explore traditional and contemporarygrammars, discuss and write short stories, and read twentieth-centurynovels, classical fiction, poetry, historical fiction, and drama, in additionto public speaking and researching names.

LB1631 2009-039126 978-0-13-158735-9UUssiinngg tteecchhnnoollooggyy ttoo iimmpprroovvee aaddoolleesscceenntt wwrriittiinngg;; ddiiggiittaallmmaakkee--oovveerrss ffoorr wwrriittiinngg lleessssoonnss..Stephens, Liz Campbell and Kerry H. Ballast.Pearson Education, ©2011 146 p. $29.99 (pa)Middle and high school teachers are provided with ideas for makinggood inquiry-based reading and writing lessons better with the additionof Web 2.0 tools, including Wikipedia. After a discussion of the ideas ofeducational theorists and well-known names in writing studies, lessonsin four areas are presented: pre-writing or invention, responsive writing,purposeful writing cutting across different kinds of texts and mediaobjects, and social action writing. Each lesson plan includes a list ofmaterials, goal and rationale, connections to curriculum standards,student objectives, and step-by-step activities. Lessons also provide sug-gestions for adapting elements of the makeover for other content areas,and suggestions for teaching ELLs. Chapter summaries, discussion ques-tions, and b&w photos are included. The book ends with lists of termsevery teacher should know, people to Google, professional organizations,books, journals, and web sites for teachers, and free online tools.Stephens teaches graduate courses in educational technology at TexasState University-San Marcos. Ballast is a teacher consultant for the CentralTexas Writing Project.

LB1632 2009-021198 978-1-58683-347-3RReesseeaarrcchh--bbaasseedd rreeaaddiinngg ssttrraatteeggiieess iinn tthhee lliibbrraarryy ffoorraaddoolleesscceenntt lleeaarrnneerrss..Bernadowski, Carianne and Patricia Liotta Kolencik.Linworth Publishing, Inc., ©2010 108 p. $40.00 (pa)Bernadowski (elementary education, Robert Morris U.) and Kolencik(teacher education, Clarion U. of Pennsylvania) provide a resource forlibrarians, classroom teachers, literacy coaches, and other teachers onresearch-based reading comprehension and vocabulary strategies to helpall types of secondary students read and write proficiently and becomeengaged in learning content. Strategies include think alouds, reciprocalteaching, questioning the author, semantic feature analysis, word ques-tioning maps, word journals, and word sorts. Each strategy includesinformation on research findings, standards, extensions for diverse andspecial needs students, collaboration, assessment, web extensions, andreproducibles.

LB1715 978-1-60709-629-0CCuullttiivvaattiinngg ccuurriioouuss aanndd ccrreeaattiivvee mmiinnddss;; tthhee rroollee oofftteeaacchheerrss aanndd tteeaacchheerr eedduuccaattoorrss,, ppaarrtt II..Title main entry. Ed. by Cheryl J. Craig and Louise F. Deretchin.(Teacher education yearbook; 18)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 272 p. $29.95 (pa)Texas-based educational consultants Craig (U. of Houston) and Deretchinpresent the first of a two-part series combining discussions of theoreticalframeworks with practical recommendations for nurturing and encour-aging creativity; the second volume, addressing teacher education andstudents/programs/schools, is due out in 2011. Eleven chapters written by25 international academics and K-12 classroom teachers—the majorityfrom the US—examines the role of P-12 teachers in fostering student cre-ativity through the education of the whole child and offers recommen-dations for organizational structures within the P-12 setting to supportand promote the teachers’ abilities to fulfill these roles. The text includeschapters on incorporating creativity into specific subject areas—math,science, physical education—and teaching and learning about diversity inmulticultural/cross-cultural contexts. No subject index.

LB1715 2009-043856 978-1-4129-7275-8TTeeaacchhiinngg wwiitthh tthhee ttoooollss kkiiddss rreeaallllyy uussee;; lleeaarrnniinngg wwiitthh wweebbaanndd mmoobbiillee tteecchhnnoollooggiieess..Brooks-Young, Susan.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 137 p. $28.95 (pa)For educators, administrators, and support staff, Brooks-Young, anauthor, consultant, and former teacher, administrator, and technologyspecialist, details how to integrate mobile technologies and Web 2.0 toolsstudents use away from school into the K-12 classroom. She discusses cellphones, netbooks, MP3 players, blogs, wikis, and social networks, theirtechnology, and strategies and suggestions for classroom use. She con-cludes with chapters on digital citizenship and a decision-making modelfor selecting technologies. She does not include references to multiplemodel projects.

LB1731 2009-017326 978-1-4129-6552-1LLeeaaddiinngg pprrooffeessssiioonnaall lleeaarrnniinngg tteeaammss;; aa ssttaarrtt--uupp gguuiiddee ffoorriimmpprroovviinngg iinnssttrruuccttiioonn..Sather, Susan E.Corwin Press Inc., ©2009 151 p. $30.95 (pa)Filled with useful guidelines and information about all aspects of theProfessional Learning Teams approach, this volume presents an overviewof the approach and how it can be implemented. The PLT approach isdefined in the first chapter and subsequent chapters offer a descriptionof the goals of the approach, including a chapter on leadership. Manytips and case studies are mentioned, with attention to schedules andplans used. Lists of resources are provided. This is a revision of a 2005publication. It’s jointly published with the American Association ofSchool Administrators and Education Northwest (where Sather is seniorprogram advisor).

LB1731 2008-940596 0-07-149681-5TThhee mmaasstteerr tteeaacchheerr;; eexxppaanndd yyoouurr sskkiillllss aanndd sshhaarree yyoouurrttaalleennttss ttoo iimmpprroovvee yyoouurr sscchhooooll..Springer, Steve et al.McGraw-Hill, ©2009 289 p. $19.95 (pa)Springer and Alexander, teachers, and Persiani-Becker (curriculum andinstruction, Cal State U. at Los Angeles) offer a resource for teachers whotake on different out-of-the-classroom responsibilities and school-wideleadership roles to becoming a master teacher who goes beyond the basicteaching responsibilities to bring together the classroom, school, com-munity, and education. They explain aspects related to professional devel-opment, including presenting at conferences and pursuing highereducation; leadership, mentoring, and supporting student teachers; after-school programs, getting parents involved, fund-raising, and grantwriting; and preparing for a formal evaluation. Chapters includeresources, checklists, and forms. There is no bibliography or index.

LB1731 2009-043855 978-1-4129-7806-4MMooddeellss ooff pprrooffeessssiioonnaall ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; aa cceelleebbrraattiioonn ooffeedduuccaattoorrss..Joyce, Bruce R. and Emily Calhoun.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 149 p. $28.95 (pa)Rather than recommending strict adherence to one method, this bookworks from the assumption that all professional development models cansucceed if properly implemented. The book identifies and describes fivetypes of contemporary models of professional development for educators:models that support individuals, collaborative models such as mentoringand coaching, cooperative models, models designed to achieve curricularand instructional change, and the traditional workshop model.Guidelines are given for implementation and program evaluation foreach type of model. The book’s readership includes staff developers,principals, and other education leaders. Joyce is retired from theUniversity of Delaware. Calhoun is a practitioner and researcher inschool improvement and professional development.

LB1731 2009-032278 978-1-60709-332-9PPeerrffoorrmmaannccee aanndd aaccccoouunnttaabbiilliittyy iinn ttooddaayy’’ss ccllaassssrroooomm;; aaffrraammeewwoorrkk ffoorr eeffffeeccttiivvee mmaarrkkeettiinngg..Strike, Kimberly T.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 125 p. $26.95 (pa)Intended for new teachers and their mentors, this workbook includesactivities and questions that are designed to help prepare new teachersfor their first year. Topics include understanding school culture, handlingdifficult students, standardized testing and assessment, organization andprofessionalism. Appendices provide accountability checklists, suggestedgoals, and rating scales for the mentor and mentee to complete in thesecond and third years. The author earned her doctorate from MarquetteUniversity and has served for twenty years as a teacher, principal, pro-fessor, instructional supervisor, and consultant. Contains a short list ofreferences, but no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–203–

LB1731 2009-051389 978-1-4129-7975-7PPoowweerrffuull pprrooffeessssiioonnaall ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; bbuuiillddiinngg eexxppeerrttiisseewwiitthhiinn tthhee ffoouurr wwaallllss ooff yyoouurr sscchhooooll..Yendol-Hoppey, Diane and Nancy Fichtman Dana.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 174 p. $31.95 (pa)Yendol-Hoppey (education, West Virginia U.) and Dana (education, U. ofFlorida, Gainesville) provide a resource of tools that can be used by edu-cators, including teacher leaders, principals, coaches, staff-developmentdirectors, and superintendents, for job-embedded professional devel-opment, especially when they lack time and money. They overview avariety of strategies that can be used for different purposes, like bookstudies, webinars, podcasts, online libraries, research-in-action days, co-teaching, protocols, open-space technology, knowledge cafes, lesson study,teacher inquiry/action research, coaching, and professional learning com-munities. They include statements from educators who have used thesetools and illustrations of them in action, concluding with ways to matchstrategies to professional development needs.

LB1775 2009-019861 978-1-60709-143-1AAllll nneeww rreeaall--lliiffee ccaassee ssttuuddiieess ffoorr tteeaacchheerrss..Hayes, William.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 153 p. $24.95 (pa)This volume presents 24 case studies for use in undergraduate andgraduate teacher education courses, as well as by new and experiencedteachers, to help them prepare for the first year of teaching. They addressissues like pay-for-performance, achievement by boys, No Child LeftBehind, special education students, parents that are too involved, blockscheduling, autistic students in regular classrooms, gifted students, dropout rates, mentoring, culture, preschool programs, cheating, advising,technology, online communication, grades, and classroom management.There is no index. Hayes has been a high school social studies teacher,administrator, superintendent, and professor of educational leadership atRoberts Wesleyan College.

LB1775 2009-032718 978-1-4129-6593-4TThhee tteeaacchheerr iinn AAmmeerriiccaann ssoocciieettyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Eugene F. Provenzo, Jr.Sage Publications, ©2011 259 p. $41.95 (pa)Provenzo’s anthology offers pre-service—and in-service— educators selec-tions from 21 previously-published novels and first-person accounts,drawn from a wide range of historical, sociological, and literary sourcesas a means of understanding not only the work and experience ofteachers but also the perception of them in American society. The mate-rials are organized into eight thematic sections: on being a teacher,beginning to teach, teaching as the practice of freedom, teaching others,teaching as work, teaching as social activism, myths and stereotypesabout teaching, and teaching and sexuality. Each section includes two orthree readings, a general overview of the section, an introduction to eachof the readings, questions for each selection, and suggestions aboutmovies and other popular culture sources, such as cartoons and YouTubevideos, relevant to the chapter.

LB1778 2009-021904 978-0-415-99090-5AAccaaddeemmiicc aanndd pprrooffeessssiioonnaall iiddeennttiittiieess iinn hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn;;tthhee cchhaalllleennggeess ooff aa ddiivveerrssiiffyyiinngg wwoorrkkffoorrccee..Title main entry. Ed. by George Gordon and Celia Whitchurch.(International studies in higher education)Routledge, ©2010 270 p. $160.00The diversification of higher education systems worldwide to whichGordon (emeritus, U. of Strathclyde, UK) and Whitchurch (Centre forHigher Education Studies, U. of London, UK) refer in their title to this col-lection results from a range of factors, including new entrants to theacademy from the health and social fields; the emergence of highly qual-ified professional staff in such areas as information services, institutionalresearch and development, enterprise, and community partnership; andincreasingly distributed responsibilities within institutional structures.They present 14 papers exploring the implications of this diversificationfor changing academic and professional identities, both institutional andindividual.

LB1779 2009-035720 978-1-4129-7084-6NNooww wwhhaatt?? ccoonnffrroonnttiinngg aanndd rreessoollvviinngg eetthhiiccaall qquueessttiioonnss;; aahhaannddbbooookk ffoorr tteeaacchheerrss..Mackenzie, Sarah V.Sage Publications, ©2010 157 p. $33.95 (pa)This handbook for teachers offers principles of ethical behavior and sug-gests ways in which they can be applied to practical situations,employing the voices of teachers explaining real-life situations involvingteachers, students, colleagues, supervisors, parents, taxpayers, and otherstakeholders in elementary through high school. The role of teachers indeveloping, sharing, and implementing ethical policies for their schoolsis stressed. Detailed case studies examine ethical questions related toareas such as discipline, confidentiality of student information, properuse of e-mail, and hiring. To encourage reflection and discussion,answers to cases are not provided. Appendices offer material for teachertraining workshops. Sarah Mackenzie is teaches educational leadershipat the University of Maine.

LB2157 2009-034214 978-1-60709-185-1IImmpprroovviinngg tteeaacchheerr qquuaalliittyy;; uussiinngg tthhee tteeaacchheerr wwoorrkk ssaammpplleettoo mmaakkee eevviiddeennccee--bbaasseedd ddeecciissiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by John E. Henning et al.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 245 p. $45.95 (pa)A teacher work sample (TWS) is a description of a complete unit ofinstruction during student teaching, including the context of the unit,learning goals, instructional decisions made during the lesson, ananalysis of student learning, and the student teacher’s reflections. Theauthors of this book were part of the original development of the TWSat Western Oregon University in the 1980s. Here, they explain how to usethe TWS as a tool for instruction and assessment of teacher candidates.They discuss the validity and reliability of the TWS, address implemen-tation and assessment, and show how to use the TWS as a source of datafor conducting inquiries. About 100 pages of appendices offer a 30-pageexample of an actual TWS, plus other examples and prompts. Theaudience for the book includes teacher educators, student teachers,student teacher supervisors, and program coordinators. There is nosubject index. Henning is professor and chair of the Department ofTeacher Education at Ohio University.

LB2322 2009-674623 978-1-4438-1131-6AAccaaddeemmiicc ffuuttuurreess;; iinnqquuiirriieess iinnttoo hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn aannddppeeddaaggooggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by iPED Research Network.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 276 p. $62.00This collection of fifteen papers is primarily the product of the 2007 inter-national conference of iPED (inquiring pedagogies), which is “a highereducation research network which facilitates research into teaching andlearning, complemented by international interaction amongst practice-based scholars, academic developers and innovators, leaders and man-agers.” It addresses a range of issues concerning present and futuredirections of academic endeavors, including pleasure and the intellectualdevelopment of the student; the ratio between core budget funding andexternal funding at universities; establishing identities in professionalacademic learning communities in Ireland; academics as entrepreneurs;systems theory and teaching in a variety of communication forums;mobile devices, knowledge, and learning; and investigating students’ per-ceptions of individualized writing consultations.

LB2322 2008-050961 978-0-415-99043-1IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall oorrggaanniizzaattiioonnss aanndd hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn ppoolliiccyy;;tthhiinnkkiinngg gglloobbaallllyy,, aaccttiinngg llooccaallllyy??..Title main entry. Ed. by Roberta Malee Bassett and Alma Maldonado.(International studies in higher education)Routledge, ©2009 311 p. $160.00Twenty-five international scholars, academics, and researchers, as well aspolicy and implementation specialists from global organizations such asthe World Bank, UNESCO, OECD, and WTO contribute 15 chapters exam-ining how the development of higher education policies of individualnations are increasingly subject to global pressures and the ways thatinternational organizations impact directly on the trajectory of policy inmany countries. Coverage includes an overview of the growing trend;analyses of multilateral organizations and regimes, from internal andexternal perspectives; regional perspectives on the influences and roles ofthese organizations in Africa, Asia, Europe, and Latin America; and thedifferent types of international aid provided to higher education bymultinational and other organizations. Throughout the text, the authorsconsider multiple issues of development, poverty, equity, geopolitics, andpower related to higher education.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –204–

LB2322 2009-030027 978-0-393-06275-5TThhee mmaarrkkeettppllaaccee ooff iiddeeaass..Menand, Louis. (Issues of our time)W.W. Norton, ©2010 174 p. $24.95In this volume, The Marketplace of Ideas: Reform and Resistance in theAmerican University, Menand (English, Harvard U.), who was involved inthe development of a new general education curriculum at Harvard, ana-lyzes the American university system, the philosophical and historicalideas that created it in the nineteenth century, and their developmentsince then. Focusing on the liberal arts and sciences, he notes that thesystem has changed very little and focuses on four questions—why it isdifficult to institute a general education curriculum, why the humanitiesdiscipline underwent a crisis of legitimation, why interdisciplinarity hasbecome important, and why professors have the same politics—and pro-poses reforms to the system.

LB2325 2009-034448 978-1-4331-0526-5GGlloobbaall ccrreeaattiioonn;; ssppaaccee,, mmoobbiilliittyy aanndd ssyynncchhrroonnyy iinn tthhee aaggeeooff tthhee kknnoowwlleeddggee eeccoonnoommyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Simon Marginson et al.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 304 p. $34.95 (pa)The second of three books on creativity in the age of the knowledgeeconomy, this volume explores the role of globalization in the spread ofcreative work and also its effect on science and knowledge systems,power and hierarchy, and the decrease in American hegemony andsimultaneous rise of Asia. Several of the chapters also focus on the rela-tions of global creativity to the world of higher education, perhapsreflecting the area of academic specialization of two of the authors. Anunderlying theme of exploration is the possible emergence of new globalforms of political organization, a process that has so far lagged behindcultural and linguistic integration and the development of worldmarkets.

LB2326 2010-001085 978-1-933146-85-0AAccttiioonn rreesseeaarrcchh ffoorr hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattoorrss;; ccoollllaabboorraattiivveepprriinncciipplleess aanndd pprraaccttiicceess ffoorr ppoossiittiivvee cchhaannggee..Schmuck, Richard A. and Joseph Martin Stevenson.Academica Press, LLC, ©2010 153 p. $49.95 (pa)This book provides frameworks and strategies for applying actionresearch in the college classroom and in other academic matters con-cerning student persistence and curriculum planning, development,design, and implementation. It is written especially for faulty at histori-cally black and minority colleges and universities, but will also be usefulfor all state and private institutions trying to raise the level of researchengagement among their core faculty. The methodology presented buildson the principles of access and equality in higher education, andmethods described are specifically targeted toward the needs of low-income, high-risk students. Chapters describe the components ofproactive, responsive, and collaborative action research methods. Casescenarios are given of collaboration and shared govnernance betweengoverning boards and faculty. The book culminates with a list ofprominent scholars in action research, sample interview questions, andsample survey instruments. Schmuck is professor emeritus at theUniversity of Oregon. Stevenson is affiliated with Mississippi Valley StateUniversity.

LB2326 2009-018687 978-0-415-87198-3TThhee ttrroouubbllee wwiitthh hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn;; aa ccrriittiiccaall eexxaammiinnaattiioonnooff oouurr uunniivveerrssiittiieess..Hussey, Trevor and Patrick Smith.Routledge, ©2010 153 p. $37.95 (pa)Hussey (philosophy, Buckinghamshire New University, emeritus) andSmith (learning and teaching Buckinghamshire New University) are nothappy with the state of higher education in the United Kingdom. Theyfeel that since the 1960s universities have gone from being “the equiv-alent of a family business to a massive industry” (p.129) Like most indus-tries, they feel it is overloaded with middle management. While theyapplaud the extending of higher education to a greater part of the pop-ulation, the authors deplore the lack of funding that means most grad-uates start their careers thousands of pounds in debt. The concept of theuniversity has also changed to become more of a white-collar tradeschool. The authors do not propose a return to the old days of only theelite having a university education. They do propose that more effort bemade to support universities and that technology be a tool and not a sub-stitute for teaching. They also believe that flexibility in class length andsize and teaching methods should be instituted. Some of the concerns areparticular to the current British system but others are universal. The pos-sible solutions will also be of interest to educators outside of the UK.

LB2331 2006-038813 978-1-60709-566-8SSeeaarrcchhiinngg ffoorr hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp;; aaddvviiccee ffoorrccaannddiiddaatteess aanndd sseeaarrcchh ccoommmmiitttteeeess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Dowdall, Jean A. (ACE series on higher education)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 197 p. $32.95 (pa)Attempting to meet the needs of readers from elite national research andliberal arts institutions, regional comprehensive institutions, and publicand private institutions, educational leadership consultant Dowdall pro-vides advice on the executive search process for presidents, chancellors,or vice presidents/vice chancellors for academic affairs, student affairs,advancement, enrollment, or finance. She begins with advice for candi-dates, including chapters on effective cover letters, curriculum vitae, andreferences; the dynamics of preliminary and second-round interviews;the nature of contacts between the candidate and the search committee,the appointing officer, and other key participants; decisions to reviewbefore accepting an offer; assessments to make upon failing to get theoffer; and transition details. Advice for search committees follows, withcoverage of assessing types of candidates being sought and other foun-dational issues, assembling the search committee, the role of search con-sultants, recruiting and evaluating candidates, and setting up a smoothtransition. This is a paperbound reprint of the 2007 edition.

LB2332 2009-025076 978-0-415-99683-9TThhee mmaarrkkeett ffoorr aaccaaddeemmiiccss..Musselin, Christine. Trans. by Amy Jacobs. (Studies in higher edu-cation)Routledge, ©2010 264 p. $95.00Musselin (Centre de Sociologie de Organisations, Centre National de laRecherche Scientifique and Sciences Po, France) analyses the hiringprocesses and discourses involved in hiring academics in Germany, theUnited States, and France. He describes the procedures and overallacademic job situation in each country, examines the decisions that gointo determining candidate profiles and job announcements, discusseshow recruitment committees conduct their work and the dimensions ofcandidates they evaluate (including those unrelated to scholarship),assesses the different qualities that go into understandings of the “bestcandidate,” and examines the processes of salary and working conditionsnegotiation.

LB2335 2009-031843 978-1-60709-584-2LLaabboorr rreellaattiioonnss iinn eedduuccaattiioonn;; ppoolliicciieess,, ppoolliittiiccss,, aannddpprraaccttiicceess..DeMitchell, Todd A.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 203 p. $34.95 (pa)DeMitchell (education, U. of New Hampshire) examines the role of unionsand collective bargaining in the US public education system. He firstexamines the role of the contract in formalizing and standardizing laborrelations and the relationship of the unions to the National LaborRelations Act. He then addresses the politics of collective bargaining,including the competing interests that shape the collective bargainingexperience, the ambiguity of teaching being considered a professionwhile teachers are in unions, and the politics of educational reform atthe collective bargaining table. Finally, he focuses in on the practices ofcollective bargaining and gives advice on how to prepare. An appendixdescribes a collective bargaining simulation in which students can playthe roles of management or a member of the collective bargaining team.

LB2341 2006-039613 978-1-60709-660-3AAccaaddeemmiicc ttuurrnnaarroouunnddss;; rreessttoorriinngg vviittaalliittyy ttoo cchhaalllleennggeeddAAmmeerriiccaann ccoolllleeggeess aanndd uunniivveerrssiittiieess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Title main entry. Ed. by Terrence MacTaggart. (ACE series on highereducation)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 129 p. $25.95 (pa)This volume aimed at trustees, presidents, faculty members, donors, stateofficials, accreditors, and others details how academic institutions get introuble and how they can recover. Focusing on schools with financial dif-ficulties or problems with quality, reputation, and finances, the eightchapters by former and current university administrators address stagesof institutional turnarounds, success factors, early indicators of a uni-versity’s need for a turnaround, financial trends and other indicators ofdistress, the importance of marketing and branding, public institutions,advice to new presidents, and benchmarks for the various stages in aneffective turnaround, with examples of cases of specific schools.MacTaggart served as chancellor of the U. of Maine system and theMinnesota State system, and participated in turnaround strategies forWebster U., the U. of Wisconsin, and the U. of Maine.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–205–

LB2341 2009-035068 978-1-57858-089-7AAppppllyyiinngg SSEEMM aatt tthhee ccoommmmuunniittyy ccoolllleeggee..Title main entry. Ed. by Bob Bontrager and Bruce Clemetsen.Am. Assn./ Collegiate Registrars, ©2009 204 p. $80.00 (pa)This collection of essays on strategic enrollment management (SEM) atcommunity colleges points the way toward a more open and authenticengagement model, grounded in the student experience. Chapters coverSEM practice areas such as defining and measuring student success, SEMand instruction, data and decision making, building effective communitycollege/university partnerships, and marketing community colleges.Other areas explored include the role of technology in SEM efforts, devel-oping and implementing a student recruitment plan, financial dynamicsof SEM, and SEM and campus leadership. There is no subject index.Bontrager has 25 years of experience in enrollment management; he isnow affiliated with Oregon State University. Clemetsen is dean of studentservices at Linn-Benton Community College.

LB2341 2009-906228 978-0-9821933-8-9IItt’’ss oonnllyy tthhee jjaanniittoorr;; aa hhaannddbbooookk ffoorr nneeww aaccaaddeemmiiccaaddmmiinniissttrraattoorrss..Park, Roderic B.Rockpile Press, ©2010 217 p. $29.95Park spent 34 years at the University of California-Berkeley, serving asdepartment chair, provost, and dean of the College of Letters and Science,and as vice chancellor. Here, he gives advice for faculty members whohave been asked to take an administrative post. He describes the beliefs,behaviors, and fears of the constituencies aspiring administrators willface: faculty members, students, alumni, staff, and governing boards.Topics addressed include learning from mistakes, grade inflation, ethnicstudies, and leadership. Written with a sense of humor, his advice drawson stories from his own career. An appendix offers a short essay by F.M. Cornford, first published in 1908. The author is now senior associateto the chancellor at the University of California-Merced.

LB2341 2007-022765 978-1-60709-662-7LLeeaaddeerrsshhiipp lleeggaaccyy mmoommeennttss;; vviissiioonnss aanndd vvaalluueess ffoorrsstteewwaarrddss ooff ccoolllleeggiiaattee mmiissssiioonn.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Bogue, E. Grady. (ACE series on higher education)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2007 130 p. $25.95 (pa)Bogue (higher education administration, University of Tennessee) reflectson skills and values for effective leadership in higher education, offeringpersonal narratives from his career to demonstrate ideas and values inactual practice. Early chapters engage questions of leadership roles andinvite readers to consider the nature of the collegiate enterprise and theevolution of leadership role metaphors. The author then considersleadership strategies, conflict management, and authority, and exploresleadership values such as, trust, empathy, and patience. The book’s finaltwo chapters examine questions of individual and institutionalperformance effectiveness. The readership for the book includes collegeand university administrators and managers, members of governingboards, students, staff, faculty, and others with a stake in the work ofcolleges and universities.

LB2341 2007-013449 978-1-60709-654-2SSttrraatteeggiicc lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp;; iinntteeggrraattiinngg ssttrraatteeggyy aanndd lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp iinnccoolllleeggeess aanndd uunniivveerrssiittiieess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Morrill, Richard L. (ACE series on higher education)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 295 p. $30.95 (pa)For higher education faculty, administrators, and board members whoparticipate in decision making, Morrill, former president and chancellorof the U. of Richmond and a current consultant on governance, lead-ership, and strategy to colleges and universities, describes how and whyto use the process of strategy as a form of leadership in colleges and uni-versities. He redefines the role of strategy in decision making andexplores how strategy and leadership have been developed in differentcontexts, through discussion of the elements of leadership, analysis ofpresidential leadership in higher education, values as standards ofchoice, how responsibility can be used to situate strategy, strategicplanning and governance, a strategy process, and limitations.

LB2345 2009-030005 978-0-398-07909-3VViioolleennccee ggooeess ttoo ccoolllleeggee;; tthhee aauutthhoorriittaattiivvee gguuiiddee ttoopprreevveennttiioonn aanndd iinntteerrvveennttiioonn,, 22dd eedd..Nicoletti, John et al.C.C. Thomas, ©2010 369 p. $87.95For college administrators, personnel, students, and parents, Nicoletti, aclinical/police psychologist who specializes in identifying, assessing, anddefusing attack-related behaviors and violence in workplaces and schools,et al. provide a resource for the prevention of violence on collegecampuses, including sexual assault, rioting, hazing, suicide, avengerviolence, homicide, arson, bombing, and hate crimes. The 18 chapters bylaw, counseling, communication, mental health, and other specialists inthe US address risks; how alcohol contributes to violence; preventionstrategies like environmental protection and safety, understanding redflags, developing policy and procedures, and dealing with the aftermath;and specific acts of violence and definitions, laws and policies, theexperiences of victims, and prevention strategies. This edition has newcontributors.

LB2366 2009-019665 978-0-8047-6121-5MMeeaassuurriinngg ccoolllleeggee lleeaarrnniinngg rreessppoonnssiibbllyy;; aaccccoouunnttaabbiilliittyy iinnaa nneeww eerraa..Shavelson, Richard J.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 238 p. $21.95 (pa)For education policy makers in academia, government, and the public,Shavelson (education and psychology, Stanford U.) examines currentpractice in the measurement of learning and accountability in Americanhigher education. He looks at direct measures of achievement, like certi-fication exams, and ability, like the Graduate Record Exam, as well asindirect measures like graduation and retention rates and information onhigher education quality sought by educators and policy makers. He pro-vides an overview and analysis of options from the past and present forcreating learning assessment and accountability systems that meet theneeds for teaching and learning improvement and external accounta-bility, including alternative ideas such as the Collegiate LearningAssessment, campus-based programs, and accountability in differentparts of the world. He concludes by offering an assessment and account-ability approach that integrates cognitive outcomes and broad abilities.

LB2375 2009-021333 978-0-415-87128-0IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaalliissaattiioonn aanndd tthhee ssttuuddeenntt vvooiiccee;; hhiigghheerreedduuccaattiioonn ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Elspeth Jones.Routledge, ©2010 210 p. $47.95 (pa)This work looks at the impact of international education initiatives fromthe student’s point of view; all chapters are based on direct research withstudents. Of special interest is material on supporting students fromlower socioeconomic backgrounds who lack confidence crossing culturalboundaries. The first part of the book demonstrates that students see therelevance of intercultural and global dimensions of their learning forfuture employability and personal growth. Part II looks at the impact ofstudy abroad and international volunteering, and Part III reports onstudent perceptions of group work in a mixed cultural setting. Part IVexamines transnational education and support for international students.Jones is professor of the internationalization of higher education at LeedsMetropolitan University.

LB2376 2009-015730 978-0-8047-6253-3IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaalliissmm,, nnaattiioonnaall iiddeennttiittiieess,, aanndd ssttuuddyy aabbrrooaadd;;FFrraannccee aanndd tthhee UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess,, 11889900--11997700..Walton, Whitney.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 258 p. $65.00Using study abroad to link the usually estranged histories of interna-tionalism and nationalism, Walton (history, Purdue U.) describes how stu-dents, teachers, and scholars from France and the US visited each other’scountry over the course of the 20th century, and through that experienceboth learned to appreciate a different culture and gave serious thoughtto what they liked in their own. Her topics include the American questfor knowledge and the French quest for Americans 1870-1919, negotiatingnational identities in inter-war France, warm relations in a Cold Waratmosphere, and sex and gender.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –206–

LB2386 2009-030718 978-1-4022-2667-0HHooww ttoo ssuurrvviivvee yyoouurr PPhhDD;; tthhee iinnssiiddeerr’’ss gguuiiddee ttoo aavvooiiddiinnggmmiissttaakkeess,, cchhoooossiinngg tthhee rriigghhtt pprrooggrraamm,, wwoorrkkiinngg wwiitthhpprrooffeessssoorrss,, aanndd jjuusstt hhooww aa ppeerrssoonn aaccttuuaallllyy wwrriitteess aa 220000--ppaaggee ppaappeerr..Karp, Jason R.Sourcebooks, Inc., ©2009 209 p. $16.99 (pa)Of use to any advanced grad student, or anyone who thinks they mightbecome one, this book offers viable, common-sense advice to problemsthat may seem insurmountable from within the halls of academe. Karp,who holds a PhD in exercise physiology, describes in concrete, practicalterms the goals and priorities needed to select a PhD program and, oncein it, to maximize the experience. He’s especially acute in describing themindset needed to excel in research, on the one hand, and the diplomaticskills and savvy needed to achieve a good working relationship withadvisors, on the other. The volume is not indexed.

LB2395 2009-005748 978-0-415-99775-1LLeeaarrnniinngg wwiitthh ddiiggiittaall ggaammeess;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttooeennggaaggiinngg ssttuuddeennttss iinn hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn..Whitton, Nicola. (The open and flexible learning series)Routledge, ©2010 214 p. $44.95 (pa)Whitton (Education and Social Research Institute, ManchesterMetropolitan U.) explores computer game-based learning for higher edu-cation teaching and learning professionals. The author explains techno-logical concepts, current trends, and more. The three primary sections ofthe book detail the theory of digital games in education, the practice ofintegrating them into the curriculum, and the technology involved,including developing new games and evaluating them. A number of casestudies also are included.

LB2395 2009-011579 978-0-415-98935-0SSttuuddeennttss’’ eexxppeerriieenncceess ooff ee--lleeaarrnniinngg iinn hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn;;tthhee eeccoollooggyy ooff ssuussttaaiinnaabbllee iinnnnoovvaattiioonn..Ellis, Robert A. and Peter Goodyear. (Open and flexible learning series)Routledge, ©2010 208 p. $44.95 (pa)For higher education teachers and administrators, Ellis and Goodyear (e-learning and education, U. of Sydney, Australia) describe how e-learningrelates to and can be integrated with other learning experiences in highereducation. Taking a systemic approach to improving the design and man-agement of modern digital learning environments, they address bothgood learning and how it fits into a larger ecology of education, as e-learning is inseparable from everyday university activities. They arguethat enhancing learning depends on awareness of the relationshipbetween student experiences and the environment, and provide strategiesto achieve effective leadership, design, and management to create a betterecosystem. They discuss research on students’ use of technology, theirconceptions of and approaches to learning through discussion andinquiry, university teachers’ conceptions of and approaches to teachingwith technology, and implications for policy and practice, as well as edu-cational leadership and teaching teams.

LB2802 2009-035218 978-0-674-03554-6AAss ggoooodd aass iitt ggeettss;; wwhhaatt sscchhooooll rreeffoorrmm bbrroouugghhtt ttoo AAuussttiinn..Cuban, Larry.Harvard University Press, ©2010 288 p. $25.95Looking in depth at school reform efforts in Austin, Texas, Cuban (pro-fessor emeritus, education, Stanford University) questions whetherschools have the power to change socioeconomic and ethnic differencesin students’ academic performance. The city of Austin is chosen becauseit is similar demographically to many big-city school systems, andbecause it is located in a state that has a 20-year history of test-basedaccountability rules similar to newer policies recently enacted in otherstates with big-city systems. An introduction offers a detailed review ofthe national history of various urban school reform movements of thepast 50 years. Statistics are given and interpreted to demonstrate thatalthough the district has shown overall improvements in test scores andgraduation rates, the improvements are unevenly distributed among ele-mentary schools and among schools located in affluent neighborhoods,leaving high schools in poor and ethnic neighborhoods in the same direstraights. An appendix offers data tables on the district. The author haswritten two other books on school reform.

LB2805 2009-008523 978-1-4384-2916-8DDeecciissiioonn mmaakkiinngg ffoorr eedduuccaattiioonnaall lleeaaddeerrss;; uunnddeerreexxaammiinneeddddiimmeennssiioonnss aanndd iissssuueess..Johnson, Bob L. and Sharon D. Kruse. (Education leadership)State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 238 p. $24.95 (pa)For graduate students, school leaders, and scholars of educational lead-ership, Johnson (educational leadership and policy, U. of Utah) and Kruse(educational leadership, U. of Akron) offer an approach to educationaldecision making that integrates the influences of school and communitymembers with data and the organizational context. Bringing togetherwhat they see as underexamined dimensions and issues, they addressdecision making aspects in educational leadership like the art of theoryuse, political dynamics, inferential leaps and causal assumptions, the roleof intuition, the role of emotions and affect, and making tough decisions.

LB2805 2009-026080 978-1-4129-5664-2EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff eedduuccaattiioonnaall rreeffoorrmm aanndd ddiisssseenntt;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas C. Hunt et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 1042 p. $315.00As in other Sage Reference Publications, entries (a total of 450) arearranged alphabetically, but a Reader’s Guide in the front matter offersa thematic listing so that readers can access logically connected discus-sions. Here the themes include accountability, biographies, concepts andtheories, curriculum and instruction, diversity, finances and economics,government, organizations, professional development, public policy,religion and religious education, reports, school types, special needs, andtechnology. The preface underscores how reformers have sought tochange educational structures, and dissenters (often affiliated with reli-gious reformers) have sought to establish new paradigms. These efforts,the people and motivations behind them, and their history, influence,and impact are the subjects of this two-volume reference. Hunt and twoof other editors are affiliated with the U. of Dayton; the fourth is withthe U. of South Carolina.

LB2805 2009-030594 978-1-59667-134-8EExxeeccuuttiivvee sskkiillllss ffoorr bbuussyy sscchhooooll lleeaaddeerrss..Hitch, Christopher and Dave Coley.Eye On Education, ©2010 164 p. $39.95 (pa)Hitch (U. of North Carolina) and Coley (Western Carolina U.) combinedecades of experience as classroom teachers, principals, and educators offuture principals in creating a professional development text for aspiring,new, and experienced principals. Drawing on wisdom and experience ofschool principals as well as senior leaders in federal government, the mil-itary, and the business world, the authors present a number of practicaltips and strategies for effective school leadership. Coverage includes tran-sitioning into the role of school principal, time management, data-drivendecision making, school budget management, human resource man-agement, leading the multigenerational faculty, high performance teams,school improvement planning, avoiding decision-making disabilities, andmaking meetings work. The text contains numerous sample forms andtemplates, also available at a companion website. No subject index.

LB2805 2009-044107 978-1-4129-7986-3FFrroomm ccoonnfflliicctt ttoo ccoonncciilliiaattiioonn;; hhooww ttoo ddeeffuussee ddiiffffiiccuullttssiittuuaattiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by William Watson Purkey et al.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 166 p. $28.95 (pa)Purkey (professor emeritus, counselor education, The University of NorthCarolina-Greensboro) introduces a simple process for dealing with largeand small conflicts among students, teachers, administrators, andparents in educational settings. The Six-C Process, which moves from thelowest level of action, concern, to the highest levels of confrontation,combat, and conciliation, is anchored in democratic values, and followsthe tradition of understanding behavior from another person’s point ofview. Each chapter includes numerous brief scenarios, discussions, andkey points. The book’s readership consists of professionals who work inschools, including teachers, administrators, counselors, psychologists,social workers, and nurses.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–207–

LB2805 2009-031913 978-1-60709-134-9LLeeaaddeerrsshhiipp bbllooooppeerrss aanndd bblluunnddeerrss;; hhooww ttoo ddooddggee lleeggaallmmiinneeffiieellddss..Title main entry. Ed. by Hope M. Jordan et al.Rowman & Littlefield, ©2010 77 p. $19.95 (pa)In this guide for teachers and school leaders, Jordan (School ofEducation, Regent University) presents real-life stories demonstratingcommon leadership mistakes in educational settings. Some of the storiesare based on court cases or situations that made the news, while othersare compiled by the authors’ colleagues. Topics raised include specialeducation law, cyberbullying, addressing sensitive topics in theclassroom, and inappropriate attire in teachers and students. Discussionquestions accompany each story. The book concludes with a list of booksand web sites. There is no subject index.

LB2805 2009-040670 978-1-60709-026-7PPrraaccttiiccaall lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp ssttrraatteeggiieess;; lleessssoonnss ffrroomm tthhee wwoorrlldd ooffpprrooffeessssiioonnaall bbaasseebbaallll..Palestini, Robert H.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 218 p. $32.95 (pa)Palestini (education, Saint Joseph’s U.) draws from the world of baseballto profile ten coaches and show how leaders can apply their leadershippractices. He uses Bolman and Deal’s situational leadership theory andfour frames of reference—structural, human resource, political, and sym-bolic—to examine whether the practices of Walter Aston, SparkyAnderson, Tommy Lasorda, Frank Robinson, Casey Stengel, Joe Torre,Earl Weaver, Leo Durocher, Tony La Russa, and Billy Martin conform tothis theory, and if not, whether modifications need to be made to theoryor practice. The book is the third in a series that relates leadership to bas-ketball, football, and baseball coaching. There is no index.

LB2805 2009-042937 978-0-87389-757-0PPrroocceessss mmaannaaggeemmeenntt iinn eedduuccaattiioonn;; hhooww ttoo ddeessiiggnn,,mmeeaassuurree,, ddeeppllooyy,, aanndd iimmpprroovvee eedduuccaattiioonnaall pprroocceesssseess..Ewy, Robert W. and Henry A. Gmitro.ASQ Quality Press, ©2010 101 p. $60.00Ewy, a consultant in strategic planning, continuous improvement, andprocess management for school districts, and Gmitro, a superintendentand former teacher, explain how to apply the concepts, guidelines, andpractices related to process management to education. They argue thatmanaging processes is the key to educational improvement, and illustratehow it relates to the US Department of Education’s reform areas basedon rigorous standards, recruiting and retaining effective teachers,building data systems, and turning around low-performing schools. Theydescribe the concepts and components of process management and whatmanagers do in design, measurement, deployment, and improvement ofprocesses, and provide examples of flow charts for the reform areas.

LB2805 2009-053743 978-1-4129-7819-4RReeffrraammiinngg tthhee ppaatthh ttoo sscchhooooll lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorrtteeaacchheerrss aanndd pprriinncciippaallss,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by editors, Lee G. Bolman and Terrence E. Deal.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 160 p. $25.95 (pa)Extended narrative dialogues between a novice and a master teacher andbetween a new and a seasoned principal tell the story of one year in thelife of a school and illuminate issues of school leadership in this workfor new and experienced educators, teachers, and principals. The booklooks at schools through four frameworks: political (individual versusgroup), human resources (individual needs and motives), structural(goals and responsibilities), and symbolic (culture, meaning, belief)frameworks. A final section treats ethics and spirit. This second editioncontains leadership lesson summaries and reflection questions. There isno subject index. Bolman is chair in leadership at the University ofMissouri-Kansas City. Deal is retired from teaching at the University ofSouthern California’s Rossier School.

LB2805 2009-028671 978-1-60709-534-7RReessiilliieenntt lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp ffoorr ttuurrbbuulleenntt ttiimmeess;; aa gguuiiddee ttootthhrriivviinngg iinn tthhee ffaaccee ooff aaddvveerrssiittyy..Patterson, Jerry L. et al.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 180 p. $24.95 (pa)Patterson (leadership studies, U. of Alabama at Birmingham) et al. drawfrom resilience research, best practices, and interviews with educationalleaders to consider how school leaders can move ahead in the face ofadversity. They offer strategies for strengthening leadership skills usingtheir Leader Resilience Profile, which measures a leader’s resilience in 12categories that include thinking, capacity building, and action skills.There is no index.

LB2805 2009-036460 978-1-60709-513-2SSttrroonngg sscchhoooollss,, ssttrroonngg lleeaaddeerrss;; wwhhaatt mmaatttteerrss mmoosstt iinnttiimmeess ooff cchhaannggee..Wiseman, Perry P.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 145 p. $24.95 (pa)Wiseman, a middle school principal in a large urban school district,explains the practices of the foundational leader and actions for imple-menting them, for school administrators wanting to grow successful,resilient schools. He discusses the practices of listening to people and theenvironment, building agreements among different constituencies, co-creating purpose, and fostering effective teams, and approaches for initi-ating, implementing, and institutionalizing each of these foundations.There is no index.

LB2805 2009-942746 978-1-934742-44-0WWhhaatt nneexxtt??;; eedduuccaattiioonnaall iinnnnoovvaattiioonn aanndd PPhhiillaaddeellpphhiiaa’’sssscchhooooll ooff tthhee ffuuttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Cullinane and Frederick M. Hess.Harvard Education Press, ©2010 245 p. $29.95 (pa)Philadelphia’s high-tech School of the Future (SOF), the result of cooper-ation between the school district of Philadelphia and Microsoft, offerslessons in high-school redesign, sustainable leadership, public-privatepartnerships, community engagement, and the use of technology inschool reform. This detailed study of the school’s first 3 years (2006-2009)looks at how SOF was created and what technologies, practices, and toolswere built into the design. It examines how these elements have changed(or have not changed) teaching and learning. Contributors includeresearchers, educators, and practitioners. A final chapter presents voicesof SOF classroom teachers. Cullinan is US director of innovation andbusiness development for the Microsoft Education Group. Hess is directorof educational policy studies at the American Enterprise Institute.

LB2805 2009-041869 978-1-60709-056-4WWoorrkkiinngg ffoorr kkiiddss;; eedduuccaattiioonnaall lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp aass iinnqquuiirryy aannddiinnvveennttiioonn..Lytle, James H. (New frontiers in education)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 163 p. $29.95 (pa)Detailing his career as a teacher, school administrator, and superin-tendent, Lytle (educational leadership, U. of Pennsylvania) describes howhis leadership practice evolved and how other leaders can lead to supportlearning for adults and children, be entrepreneurial in conventional orga-nizational settings, and teach leadership to others. He addresses the emo-tional commitment, energy, cost, sense of responsibility and pressure,satisfaction and despair, and opportunities to learn that characterizebeing an administrator, referring to the educational and organizationalleadership literature, and how opportunities to teach and invent are pre-sented constantly in a school leader’s day. There is no index.

LB2806 2009-051373 978-1-4129-7873-6AAllll ssyysstteemmss ggoo;; tthhee cchhaannggee iimmppeerraattiivvee ffoorr wwhhoollee ssyysstteemmrreeffoorrmm..Fullan, Michael.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 113 p. $23.95 (pa)Drawing from his work with school districts and systems in the US, UK,and Canada, Fullan (Ontario Institute for Studies in Education, U. ofToronto, Canada), an education adviser for Ontario, details an actionplan for achieving whole system school reform. He discusses what whole-system reform is, its components, and why it is critical; current strategiesthat fail; the elements of collective and individual capacity; how politi-cians and professionals must work together; and successful reform ini-tiatives in the US, Canada, Asia, and Scandinavia. The book is intendedfor politicians, teachers, principals, community leaders, superintendents,board members, and others.

LB2806 2009-035423 978-1-4166-0940-7CCuurrrriiccuulluumm 2211;; eesssseennttiiaall eedduuccaattiioonn ffoorr aa cchhaannggiinngg wwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Heidi Hayes Jacobs.Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2010 251 p. $26.95 (pa)In the first four chapters of this book, editor Jacobs, a curriculum con-sultant who teaches at Columbia University’s Teachers College, offersshort-term and long-term recommendations for updating and upgradingthe K-12 curriculum and specific content areas, focusing on four areasthat need to be changed: schedules, the grouping patterns of learners, theconfigurations of professional personnel, and the use of physical andvirtual space. The rest of the book’s nine chapters look at socio-tech-nology trends impacting learning and teaching, such as digital portfoliosand sustainability education. Contributors include school principals, ajournalist who develops curriculum tools for teaching media literacy, anddevelopers of educational technology.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –208–

LB2806 2009-038918 978-1-4129-4934-7DDaattaa eennhhaanncceedd lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp..Title main entry. Ed. by Alan M. Blankstein et al. (The soul of educa-tional leadership; v.7)Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 148 p. $25.95 (pa)This work shows how educational leaders can apply data strategically tostrengthen school leadership and improve professional learning, studentlearning, and schoolwide performance. Topics include creating a cultureof inquiry, harnessing data for professional learning, using data to driveinstruction and assessment in the standards-based classroom, infor-mation and communications technology in education, and how to avoidpitfalls in the use of data. Blankstein is founder and chairman of theHOPE (Harnessing Optimism and Potential through Education)Foundation.

LB2806 2009-032559 978-1-4129-5883-7EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff ccuurrrriiccuulluumm ssttuuddiieess;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Craig Kridel.Sage Publications, ©2010 1013 p. $350.00Emphasizing neither a fixed nor a completely open definition of cur-riculum studies, this reference aims to set forth a basic foundation ofinformation—for those new to the field and those who want a frame ofreference for research or practical endeavors. Editor Kridel (U. of SouthCarolina) took up the project after the original editor, William H.Schubert, had to withdraw; and the contents migrated away strong rep-resentation of Schubert’s concept of “outside curricula.” In two volumes500 alphabetically arranged entries are distributed among ten themes:biography and prosopography; concepts and terms; content descriptions;influences on curriculum studies; inquiry and research; the nature ofcurriculum studies; organizations, schools, and projects; publications;theoretical perspectives; and types of curricula. Entries are signed andcross-referenced. The appendix consists of a list of fundamental questionson curriculum making used as the basis for the general statement pub-lished in the 26th Yearbook of the National Society for the Study ofEducation.

LB2806 2009-031912 978-1-60709-020-5LLeeaaddeerrsshhiipp ddeevveellooppmmeenntt ffoorr eedduuccaattoorrss..Rubenstein, Herb et al.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 182 p. $36.95 (pa)The authors introduce the importance of leadership skills to PreK-12teachers, then help them develop those skills though numerous exercisesand examples. The lengthiest chapter outlines the four levels of lead-ership and explains how each type of leader can contribute to their com-munity. The next chapter focuses on how teachers can expand theirleadership capacity. Another chapter looks briefly at leadership devel-opment for librarians, coaches, special education teachers and coun-selors. Miles is a superintendent at the Harrison School District;Rubenstein and Bassi hold top positions with consulting firms in theprivate sector. Contains three appendices, one of which provides addi-tional leadership development exercises, but there is no index.

LB2806 2009-031205 978-1-4166-0886-8OOtthheerr dduuttiieess aass aassssiiggnneedd;; ttiippss,, ttoooollss,, aanndd tteecchhnniiqquueess ffoorreexxppeerrtt tteeaacchheerr lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp..Burgess, Jan.Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2009 160 p. $26.95 (pa)Burgess, a former elementary and middle school principal, teacher, andcounselor, provides a guide that outlines the skills and processes ofteacher leaders. Focusing on strengthening relationships and teachingand learning, she discusses practices, dilemmas, challenges, tools, andresources relating to shared leadership, roles and responsibilities,building a team and team relationships, strengthening professionalpractice, and evaluating progress.

LB2822 2009-942743 978-1-934742-46-4AAggaaiinnsstt tthhee ooddddss;; iinnssiigghhttss ffrroomm oonnee ddiissttrriicctt’’ss ssmmaallll sscchhoooollrreeffoorrmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Larry Cuban et al.Harvard Education Press, ©2010 169 p. $24.95 (pa)Cuban (education, Stanford University) tells the story of the transfor-mation of two traditional high schools in an urban, low-income districtin Colorado, into seven small schools of 400 students or less, in a projectfunded by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation. The book chroniclesthe successes and challenges of the transition, and provides lessons forother districts considering small school reform. Material based on inter-views with the superintendent, students, board members, private foun-dation staff, and state officials highlights the difficulty of school reformas a political process open to many stakeholders. The first chapteroverviews the school reform movement since the 1980s, then details howdistrict leaders chose small school models, hired teachers and principals,and restructured district administration. Final chapters look at test scoresand other indicators to see if reform is working.

LB2822 2009-028602 978-1-60709-401-2BBrreeaakkiinngg tthhee mmoolldd ooff sscchhooooll iinnssttrruuccttiioonn aanndd oorrggaanniizzaattiioonn;;iinnnnoovvaattiivvee aanndd ssuucccceessssffuull pprraaccttiicceess ffoorr tthhee ttwweennttyy--ffiirrssttcceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea Honigsfeld and Audrey Cohan.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 274 p. $42.95 (pa)The editors (both of the Division of Education at Molloy College) present34 chapters written by or about practicing educators that describe“uncommon successes with nontraditional initiatives” in the field of edu-cation, with most examples coming from the United States. The chaptersare organized into sections dedicated to classroom innovations, positive(unconventional) school leadership, school and district-wide initiatives,community involvement and support, building and facility design, andeducational innovations from around the world.

LB2822 2009-031914 978-1-60709-095-3IImmpprroovviinngg tthhee ooddddss,, aa bbaassiiss ffoorr lloonngg--tteerrmm cchhaannggee..Larson, Rodney.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 235 p. $42.95 (pa)Larson, a teacher and consultant, argues that school functions can andshould be centralized. He presents a paradigm for improving theAmerican education system, based on building improvement into theprocess of training and educating both teachers and students. The par-adigm is based on management methods developed in William EdwardDeming’s work on factory design and business control to improve pro-ductivity and quality. There is no subject index.

LB2822 2009-031853 978-1-60709-549-1IItt’’ss tthhee ccllaassssrroooomm,, ssttuuppiidd;; aa ppllaann ttoo ssaavvee AAmmeerriiccaa’’sssscchhoooollcchhiillddrreenn..Hettleman, Kalman R.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 203 p. $39.95 (pa)For educators, policy makers, parents, and the public, Hettleman, an edu-cation policy analyst who has served as deputy mayor for education andas a school board member in Baltimore, challenges conventional wisdomabout K-12 education in the US, particularly for poor children, and pro-vides an untraditional prescription for reform that focuses on theclassroom. He draws on policy research and analysis, and his own expe-riences, to detail a plan that mandates a single set of national standardsand tests, guarantees funding for high-quality instruction, and ensuresthat teachers and students benefit from first-class research and devel-opment into the most effective instructional programs and methods. Heargues that local school boards should be eliminated and mayors put incharge of local school policy, and outside leadership—including non-edu-cators—should be brought in to retool and manage instructional supportsystems for teachers. He also addresses equity, and groundbreaking ini-tiatives in specific states. There is no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–209–

LB2822 2009-031907 978-1-60709-341-1SScchhoooollss tthhaatt ssuucccceeeedd,, ssttuuddeennttss wwhhoo aacchhiieevvee;; pprrooffiilleess ooffpprrooggrraammss hheellppiinngg aallll ssttuuddeennttss ttoo lleeaarrnn..Deneen, James R.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 99 p. $27.95 (pa)Deneen, a retired teacher, administrator, and program director who isnow a consultant to schools and other educational institutions, considersthe problems related to raising students achievement levels in the US andpresents profiles of successful elementary, middle, and high schools inpoor to affluent communities, with an emphasis on schools that achievedsuccess with economically disadvantaged students. He describes thedemographic characteristics of each school and community, particularlyacademic achievement levels; the growth of students and resources andprograms used to realize growth; and the problems they have overcome.There is no index.

LB2822 2009-039572 978-1-934009-72-7TTuurrnniinngg yyoouurr sscchhooooll aarroouunndd;; aa sseellff--gguuiiddeedd aauuddiitt ffoorrsscchhooooll iimmpprroovveemmeenntt..Barr, Robert D. and Debra L. Yates.Solution Tree Press, ©2010 208 p. $29.95 (pa)This guidebook for a self-guided school improvement audit will be usefulfor schools in danger of failing as well as moderately successful schools.Based on rubrics found in The Kids Left Behind, by Robert D. Barr andWilliam H. Parrett, the practical protocol allows schools and districts toassess personnel, student demographics, and achievement, finances, andprofessional development. The book’s step-by-step explanation of theaudit process is combined with practice exercises designed to facilitateconsensus-building, dialogue, trust, collaboration, and studentachievement. Part I presents the research background to the protocol andsample training exercises. Part II contains sections for each of the ninerubrics of the school improvement audit, with examples of sample doc-uments at each step. Three appendices provide reproducible forms andtables for performing the audit. Barr is affiliated with the Boise StateUniversity Center for School Improvement. Yates teaches education at theCollege of Idaho.

LB2825 2009-033212 978-1-60709-149-3SScchhooooll ffiinnaannccee eelleeccttiioonnss;; aa ccoommpprreehheennssiivvee ppllaannnniinngg mmooddeellffoorr ssuucccceessss,, 22dd eedd..Lifto, Don E. and J. Bradford Senden.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 163 p. $34.95 (pa)Lifto, a former school superintendent now associated with the public edu-cation group of a finance and consulting firm, and Senden, who workswith school districts to win voter approval for finance proposals, offer aplanning model that has been used by districts in the US, for leaderspreparing for and conducting school finance elections. They stresssystems and strategies rather than specific campaign tactics, and dividetheir model into the key elements of school finance elections, from usinga research-based approach to analyzing past elections to writing a cam-paign plan. This edition has expanded sections on the attitudes of voterswhose children have grown and graduated, research on the nature oforganized opposition, and using the internet. There is no index.

LB2830 2009-037011 978-1-4129-8049-4WWhhaatt bbrraaiinn rreesseeaarrcchh ccaann tteeaacchh aabboouutt ccuuttttiinngg sscchhoooollbbuuddggeettss..Olsen, Karen D.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 — p. $33.95 (pa)Education scholar and reform activist, Olsen suggests how principlesfrom brain research can be used by school boards and administrators tomake needed cuts in school budgets based on dispassionate and rationaldecision making. She covers attitude and action, tools, organization anduse of time in instruction, staffing, professional development, movementand aerobic exercise, emotion, a double-link curriculum for two-steplearning, and testing. The theories of learning that she draws from arethose devised by Susan Kovalik.

LB2831 2009-038068 978-1-4129-7277-2TThhee ssuurrvviivvaall kkiitt ffoorr tthhee eelleemmeennttaarryy sscchhooooll pprriinncciippaall,, rreevv..eedd..Bergman, Abby Barry et al.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 385 p. $43.95 (pa)Former and current school principals Bergman et al. provide a guide forelementary school principals to help them with daily challenges in lead-ership and administration. The toolkit combines forms, procedures,sample letters, charts, and checklists with strategies for planning theschool year, decision making, teacher observation and evaluation, cur-riculum development and renewal, assessment, testing, reporting studentprogress to parents, programs for students with special needs, studentdiscipline, professional development programs, communication, parentand community relations, technology, budgeting, safe school environ-ments, class placement policies, scheduling, staffing and hiring, and fos-tering school culture. Suggestions have been drawn from discussionswith principals in urban, suburban, and rural settings. All forms areavailable online. There is no bibliography.

LB2831 2009-027160 978-1-60709-308-4WWhhaatt tthheeyy nneevveerr ttoolldd mmee iinn pprriinncciippaall’’ss sscchhooooll;; tthhee vvaalluueeooff eexxppeerriieennccee ccaannnnoott bbee oovveerreessttiimmaatteedd..Connolly, Michael.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 95 p. $21.95 (pa)In short, readable chapters, Connolly, a veteran school principal, drawson his experiences in urban, suburban, and rural schools in the US andabroad to share lessons learned on leadership issues such as boundarysetting, change and continuity, communication skills, and promotingfaculty growth. He provides advice and survival strategies that can’t begained in courses. There is no subject index.

LB2832 2009942747 978-1-934742-49-5TTeeaacchhiinngg ttaalleenntt;; aa vviissiioonnaarryy ffrraammeewwoorrkk ffoorr hhuummaann ccaappiittaalliinn eedduuccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Rachel E. Curtis and Judy Wurtzel.Harvard Education Press, ©2010 253 p. $29.95 (pa)The ability of schools and school districts to attract and retain the bestteachers is, of course, critical to improving the effectiveness of educationand raising the level of student achievement. The authors advocate for abreak from past practices to meet the needs of the present. Based on aninitiative by the Aspen Institute Education and Society Program, the bookidentifies strategies for making that happen. General topics include:making human capital management a priority; recruiting, retaining, andleveraging talent; and creating conditions for success. Educators andsupervisory education professionals are the intended audience. EditorsCurtis (consultant for school systems, foundations, education policyorganizations), Wurtzel (planning, evaluation, policy development, U.S.Department of Education), and 13 co-authors contributed to the book.

LB2835 2009-022698 978-1-60709-218-6GGeettttiinngg aanndd kkeeeeppiinngg nneeww tteeaacchheerrss;; ssiixx eesssseennttiiaall sstteeppss ffrroommrreeccrruuiittmmeenntt ttoo rreetteennttiioonn..Mulvey, Janet S. and Bruce S. Cooper.Rowman & Littlefield, ©2009 103 p. $17.95 (pa)Mulvey (Pace University’s School of Education) and Cooper (educationalleadership, Fordham University) offer six essential steps for recruitingand retaining new public school teachers, especially in inner city, rural,and other high-needs school districts. Recommendations are made in acase study format, drawing on the voices of real teachers and other edu-cation leaders to outline the characteristics of good schools and comparesthem to the actual environments in which new teachers work. Some sub-jects explored include supporting new teachers, collegiality andteamwork, overcoming student apathy, classroom management, andways in which principals can drive more funds and resources toward theclassrooms. The book’s readership includes principals and school admin-istrators, school board members, other school leaders, and students.

LB2840 2009-040363 978-1-60709-398-5TThhee nnuurrttuurriinngg tteeaacchheerr;; mmaannaaggiinngg tthhee ssttrreessss ooff ccaarriinngg..VanSlyke-Briggs, Kjersti.Rowman & Littlefield, ©2010 99 p. $21.95 (pa)Vanslyke-Briggs (secondary English education and literacy, State U. ofNew York College at Oneonta) offers a stress management plan forteaching-related stress, especially nurturance suffering, a stress related toemotional ties to students. She provides case studies of teachers she hasworked with and coping mechanisms to use, along with discussion of theeffects of the feminization of teaching. There is no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –210–

LB2844 2009-047378 978-1-4129-8050-0TThhee aaccttiivvee mmeennttoorr;; pprraaccttiiccaall ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr ssuuppppoorrttiinngg nneewwtteeaacchheerrss..Nash, Ron.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 126 p. $28.95 (pa)For educators, students, administrators, mentors, coaches, and profes-sional developers, Nash, a former teacher, instructional coordinator, andorganizational development specialist who now works with teachers inthe area of brain-compatible learning, explains how to build mentoringprograms to help new teachers anticipate, understand, and overcomeobstacles in the classroom. He identifies nine qualities of effectiveteachers, ways to create more support for new teachers to keep themfrom leaving the profession, the role of the teacher mentor, ways to builda relationship, and how mentors can help with planning, instruction,and continuous improvement.

LB2866 2009-029552 978-1-60709-344-2LLeeaaddiinngg sscchhoooollss dduurriinngg ccrriissiiss;; wwhhaatt sscchhooooll aaddmmiinniissttrraattoorrssmmuusstt kknnooww..Title main entry. Ed. by Matthew J. Pepper et al.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 284 p. $49.95 (pa)This volume uses twelve cases to present leadership skills for schoolleaders, superintendents, and board members to prevent, get through,and recover from crises. The authors synthesize and apply crisis researchin the American school context, with a theoretical framework overlaidonto case studies that follow past and present school leaders in crisessuch as 9/11, Hurricane Katrina, school shootings, grade fraud, teacherturnover, accountability, funding, and rezoning, and how they handledthem. Pepper (National Center on Performance Incentives, PeabodyCollege) works in research and data quality at Metro-Nashville PublicSchools. London and Dishman, a school attorney, work in educationalleadership at Queen’s U. Belfast, Ireland, and Kennesaw State U., respec-tively. Lewis researches at the National Center on Performance Incentives.There is no index.

LB3012 2009-031908 978-1-60709-338-1CCuullttuurreess iinn ccoonnfflliicctt;; eelliimmiinnaattiinngg rraacciiaall pprrooffiilliinngg,, 22dd eedd..Bireda, Martha R.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 108 p. $19.95 (pa)Biredam, a counselor and educational consultant who specializes inracial disparity in discipline and the racial achievement gap, providesadministrators and teachers with information on the behaviors and pre-cipitating factors that increase the potential for African American stu-dents, especially males, to be referred for disciplinary actions. Sheexplains the cultural communication style, beliefs, and assumptions ofAfrican American students that affect teacher-student relationships, andstrategies that can be used to reduce the frequency of disciplinaryreferrals and actions. She also discusses the impact of No Child LeftBehind and high stakes testing, stereotyping, and Hispanic/Latinoculture. This edition incorporates two new chapters and addresses therelationship between the discipline and achievement gaps and the waysin which authoritarian, punitive, and controlling school climates con-tribute to disciplinary events. There is no index.

LB3012 2009-019936 978-1-60709-116-5MMaakkiinngg llaarrggee sscchhoooollss wwoorrkk;; tthhee aaddvvaannttaaggeess ooff ssmmaallllsscchhoooollss..Shapiro, Arthur.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 194 p. $32.95 (pa)Shapiro (education, University of South Florida) looks at unforeseen con-sequences of the historical trend toward large schools, compares and con-trasts large and small schools, and describes practical approaches fordecentralizing large schools into smaller learning communities. Ofspecial interest is a section on the organizational dynamics at work inschools. Three case studies detail change processes at the elementary,middle, and high school levels. The book includes reflection questionsand key terms, and will be of interest to educators and policy makers.There is no subject index

LB3012 2009-001596 978-0-8264-3877-5MMaannaaggiinngg vveerryy cchhaalllleennggiinngg bbeehhaavviioouurr,, 22dd eedd..Leaman, Louisa.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 131 p. $29.95 (pa)For teachers of all levels, Leaman, a behavior support teacher, educationalwriter, consultant, trainer, and children’s author, provides advice fordealing with very challenging behavior. After addressing why studentsmisbehave, she gives instructions for managing fidgeting and rest-lessness, attention-seeking behavior, attitude, group disruption, generaldisruption, uncooperative students, verbal abuse, and physicalaggression, with strategies to encourage long-term progress and changesin attitude rather than punishment, and emphasizing student responsi-bility and choice. This edition has been expanded to include sections onissues such as dealing with gang culture, understanding groupdynamics, and coping with stress. There is no bibliography.

LB3013 2009-031958 978-1-60709-221-6BBaanniisshhiinngg bbuullllyyiinngg bbeehhaavviioorr;; ttrraannssffoorrmmiinngg tthhee ccuullttuurree ooffppaaiinn,, rraaggee,, aanndd rreevveennggee..Fried, SuEllen and Blanche Sosland.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 197 p. $29.95 (pa)Consultant Fried is the author of two books on bullying and pastchairman of Prevent Child Abuse America; Sosland (Park U., Parkville,MO) is an educational consultant specializing in reading problems, andin children with special needs. They offer a thoughtful analysis of bul-lying in schools, communicating compassion for both the targets and per-petrators and exploring programmatic efforts to make schools morepositive places for children and youth. A resource for educators, parents,support staff, concerned citizens, and kids themselves, the text examineshow the social system of school plays a decisive role in the process ofbullying, sexual harassment, and emotional violence in children’s lives.It also considers strategies for changing this trend, includingBullySafeUSA, a school-based bullying prevention program founded byFried that has been introduced to 85,000 students in 36 states to reducebullying and promote pro-social behavior.

LB3013 2009-502501 978-1-59909-028-3BBeehhaavviioorraall rreessppoonnssee ttoo iinntteerrvveennttiioonn;; ccrreeaattiinngg aa ccoonnttiinnuuuummooff pprroobblleemm--ssoollvviinngg aanndd ssuuppppoorrtt.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Sprick, Randall S. (Randy Sprick’s safe & civil school series)Pacific Northwest Publishing, ©2009 329 p. $50.00 (pa)This is a guidebook for education professionals in some way responsiblefor ensuring that students’ behavioral support needs are met. One keycomponent of the book is a framework for organizing those supportservices. The consequences of failing to provide effective can be severe:dropouts and lower graduation rates and overworked school counselorsand behavior specialists, to name a few. The authors note that studentswill function best if educators communicate high expectations for studentsuccess, develop good relationships with students, use consistent andpredictable routines in the classroom and throughout the school, teachsuccessful behavior, give consistent monitoring and supervision, provideregular positive feedback, and deal with misbehavior calmly and consis-tently. The book provides specific steps for educators to achieve thosegoals. Authors are Sprick (consultant, teacher, author), Booher (psychol-ogist, Guilford County Schools), and Garrison (school improvementdirector in a joint venture with Oregon education institutions). A CD-ROMis included.

LB3013 2009-031801 978-1-4129-7292-5CCyybbeerr kkiiddss,, ccyybbeerr bbuullllyyiinngg,, ccyybbeerr bbaallaannccee..Trolley, Barbara C. and Constance Hanel.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 166 p. $31.95 (pa)Trolley (counselor education, St. Bonaventure U.) and Hanel (school coun-selor, skills coach) offer an introduction and guidebook for educators oncyber bullying. The authors focus on prevention, intervention,assessment, and evaluation. They also stress the importance of helpingstudents understand the good and the bad aspects of technology withreal-life scenarios. The book also includes legal guidelines and repro-ducible incident reports, student assessments, and evaluations.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–211–

LB3013 2009-031678 978-0-07-337862-6EElleemmeennttaarryy ccllaassssrroooomm mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; lleessssoonnss ffrroomm rreesseeaarrcchhaanndd pprraaccttiiccee,, 55tthh eedd..Weinstein, Carol Simon et al.McGraw-Hill, ©2011 417 p. $75.94 (pa)Weinstein (learning and teaching, Rutgers U.) et al. provide a text onclassroom management for beginning elementary teachers that combinesresearch-based recommendations with real-life examples, focuses ondiverse settings, and details how to respond to inappropriate behavior,organize and manage instruction, communicate with parents, and helpstudents with disabilities while emphasizing the importance of positivestudent-teacher relationships. Profiles of five teachers in grades K-5 in dif-ferent school settings detail their management practices. This edition hasnew and expanded material on the importance of being warm andassertive, positive behavior supports, professional presentation, thenorms and values of middle-class white culture, learning about student’slives, working with other adults in the classroom, participating in the IEPand 504 planning process, the developing elementary child, using mul-tiple intelligences, and working with students who are poor or homeless.Each section is introduced, and well-known educators are profiled.

LB3013 2009034689 978-0-8058-6393-2HHaannddbbooookk ooff bbuullllyyiinngg iinn sscchhoooollss;; aann iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaallppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Title main entry. Ed. by Shane R. Jimerson et al.Routledge, ©2010 614 p. $114.95 (pa)For scholars, practitioners, and other professionals, Jimerson (school psy-chology, U. of California, Santa Barbara) et al. bring together research in41 chapters that review and analyze bullying internationally, includingthe theoretical and empirical foundations for understanding bullying,assessment and measurement, and research-based prevention and inter-vention methods. Researchers in educational psychology and relatedfields, teachers, authors, and creators of anti-bullying programs fromNorth America, Europe, Japan, and Australia address aspects such as theroles of gender and race, sports, social status, the bystander, and parent-child relationships; the social behavior of bullies and victims; cyberbul-lying; cultural and regional differences; neurobiology; and preventionprograms at different school levels and in different countries that includeteacher management, bilingual approaches, and peer processes, andimplications for practice.

LB3013 2009-031679 978-0-07-337861-9MMiiddddllee aanndd sseeccoonnddaarryy ccllaassssrroooomm mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; lleessssoonnssffrroomm rreesseeaarrcchh aanndd pprraaccttiiccee,, 44tthh eedd..Weinstein, Carol Simon and Ingrid Novodvorsky.McGraw-Hill, ©2011 412 p. $71.56 (pa)For prospective and beginning middle and secondary school teachers,Weinstein (learning and teaching, Rutgers U.) and Novodvorsky (scienceteacher preparation, U. of Arizona) present a guide to classroom man-agement that details how to establish classrooms that are supportive,inclusive, caring, and orderly. Throughout the text, they integrate theexperiences of four real teachers in different content areas and school dis-tricts, with discussion of aspects from environment to behavior, as wellas working with families and using time effectively. This edition has newand expanded chapter material on the importance of being warm andassertive, professional presentation, the norms and values of middle-classwhite culture, learning about students’ lives, the developing adolescent,working with students who are poor or homeless, positive behavioralsupports, and dealing with the inappropriate use of electronic devices.

LB3013 2009-017243 978-1-60709-392-3PPrreevveennttiinngg ddiissrruuppttiivvee bbeehhaavviioorr iinn ccoolllleeggeess;; aa ccaammppuuss aannddccllaassssrroooomm mmaannaaggeemmeenntt hhaannddbbooookk ffoorr hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn..Seeman, Howard.Rowman & Littlefield, ©2010 153 p. $29.95 (pa)This guide helps college teachers deal with and prevent disruptiveclassroom behaviors, and can be used by teachers of all teaching styles.The first section covers student categories and disruptive behaviorstypical of each category, and shows how to distinguish true disciplineproblems from miscalls such as bringing children to class and doinghomework for another class. Advice is given for handling miscalls andfor handling discipline problems such as racism and sexism, cheatingand plagiarism, monopolizing discussions, and coming to class on drugsor alcohol. There is also material on campus wide disruptions such asthreats, violence, and binge drinking. A section on prevention empha-sizes student/teacher congruence and the course syllabus as a contract.The book provides syllabus examples, guidelines for student papers,engagement methods, and a discussion of legal considerations. Seemanhas 30 years of experience teaching in colleges, and has trained teachersin classroom management.

LB3013 2009-053508 978-1-4129-7048-8PPrreevveennttiinngg pprroobblleemm bbeehhaavviioorrss;; sscchhoooollwwiiddee pprrooggrraammss aannddccllaassssrroooomm pprraaccttiicceess,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Bob Algozzine et al.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 231 p. $35.95 (pa)Written in plain language, this guide for school leaders, administrators,behavior specialists, and classroom teachers provides strategies for pre-vention of behavior problems in PreK-12 schools and classrooms. Aftermaterial on foundations, there is a section describing different types ofinterventions, such as cognitive-behavioral interventions, social skillsinstruction, bullying prevention, and individual behavior plans. Chapterson collaboration look at home-school partnerships, community and inter-agency partnerships, and culturally responsive teaching. Evaluationmethods are provided for monitoring student progress and evaluatingand sustaining prevention practices. The book’s layout features checklists,bullet points, summary and comparison tables, and sample studentworksheets. This second education features new information on pre-school behavior support. Algozzine teaches in the Department ofEducational Leadership at the University of North Carolina.

LB3013 2009-019084 978-0-205-62502-4PPrriinncciipplleess ooff ccllaassssrroooomm mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; aa pprrooffeessssiioonnaallddeecciissiioonn--mmaakkiinngg mmooddeell,, 66tthh eedd..Levin, James and James F. Nolan.Pearson Education, ©2010 266 p. $66.80 (pa)In this text for pre- and in-service teachers, Levin and Nolan (both affil-iated with Pennsylvania State University) offer an alternative to thecoercive cookbook approach, demonstrating their belief that children canbe influenced to behave appropriately through the use of encouragementand logical consequences. The book begins with foundation chapters onwhy children misbehave, stages of cognitive and moral development, andphilosophical approaches to classroom management. Verbal and non-verbal interventions for common misbehavior problems and for chronicbehavior problems are then outlined. Each chapter contains cases,chapter exercises, and reflection journal prompts. An appendix offers theDiscipline Problem Analysis Inventory, plus guidelines for working withspecial needs students and tips for beginning the school year. B&wphotos are included. This sixth edition contains new and expandedmaterial on cyberbullying, classroom management models, and culturalsynchronization.

LB3013 2009-019722 978-1-60709-411-1TThhee ttrruutthh aabboouutt bbuullllyyiinngg;; wwhhaatt eedduuccaattoorrss aanndd ppaarreennttssmmuusstt kknnooww aanndd ddoo..Urbanksi, Jan and Steve Permuth.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 221 p. $32.95 (pa)This guide helps teachers, administrators, and parents understand bul-lying and its negative influence on a school and how to develop andmodify prevention programs to meet the needs of all children. It coversthe myths and realities of bullying; types, warning signs, and conse-quences; the latest trends such as hazing, contagion bullying, and cyber-bullying; risks for special needs students; research on school climate, riskand protective factors, and the roles of grade level, race and ethnicity,and gender; and ways to create a better school community. There is noindex. Urbanski (Safe and Drug Free Schools Office) has been a pre-vention specialist, school counselor, teacher, and trainer in bullying pre-vention and other areas. Permuth teaches education at the U. of SouthFlorida.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –212–

The two Book News periodicals alert you to more than 19,000 new, high-levelbooks each year. Our mission is to get reliable news to you quickly.

LB3013 2009-043508 978-1-4331-0466-4TTrruutthhss aanndd mmyytthhss ooff ccyybbeerr--bbuullllyyiinngg;; iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaallppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn ssttaakkeehhoollddeerr rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy aanndd cchhiillddrreenn’’ssssaaffeettyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Shaheen Shariff and Andrew H. Churchill.(New literacies and digital epistemologies, v.38)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 301 p. $33.95 (pa)For teachers, administrators, researchers, lawyers, advocates, policymakers, and those involved in technology, Shariff (education, McGill U.,Canada) and Churchill, a writing instructor and research assistant for theInternational Project on Cyber-bullying at McGill U., assemble 11 essaysthat address the issues of cyberbullying and internet safety. Researchersand program directors working in education, children’s services, com-munication, business studies, and child development around the worldplace less emphasis on acts of cyberbullying and specific behaviors andstress the broader social, legal, ethical, policy-making, and pedagogicalconcerns. They dispel common myths and discuss the roles and respon-sibilities of educators, child safety organizations, policy makers, andothers; introduce the ways researchers conceptualize cyberbullying, withexploration of children’s behaviors as well as systemic influences onthem; review the legal considerations and communication rights relatingto freedom of expression, privacy, and supervisory responsibilities; andaddress intervention programs designed to build safer communities.They aim to promote responsible and ethically acceptable forms of com-munication, interaction, and relationships relating to technology.

LB3013 2008-054809 978-1-85539-443-8UUssiinngg NNLLPP ttoo eennhhaannccee bbeehhaavviioouurr aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg;; aahhaannddbbooookk ffoorr tteeaacchheerrss..Elston, Terry and Kate Spohrer.Network Continuum, ©2009 154 p. $44.95 (pa)Elston, an international NLP trainer who works with schools to solvecommunication issues in classrooms, and Spohrer, a behavioral con-sultant, ADHD family coach and trainer, NLP practitioner, and formerteacher, describe how teachers can use neuro-linguistic programming(NLP) to enhance student behavior and learning. They define NLP andits presuppositions, instruct teachers to use the techniques on themselvesand in their daily practice, and show them classroom techniques andactivities that relate to awareness, different communication styles,anchoring, reframing, and metaphor, models for thinking and commu-nication, and goal setting.

LB3031 2009-043850 978-1-4129-6908-6SSeeaassoonn iitt wwiitthh ffuunn!!;; aa yyeeaarr ooff rreeccooggnniittiioonn,, ffuunn,, aannddcceelleebbrraattiioonnss ttoo eennlliivveenn yyoouurr sscchhooooll..Hodges, Diane.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 223 p. $33.95 (pa)Hodges, a former educator, principal, and counselor who is associatedwith an educational consulting firm, outlines ways schools can rec-ognize, appreciate, and motivate teachers and staff by creating a workenvironment that is fun. She offers ideas for each part of the school year,such as retreats, welcome back gifts, awards and rewards, holiday activ-ities, parties, theme days, and other ideas, which are interspersed withillustrations, songs, and other light humor. No bibliography is provided.

LB3064 2009-032282 978-0-415-80591-9EEdduuccaattiioonnaall ttrraannssiittiioonnss;; mmoovviinngg ssttoorriieess ffrroomm aarroouunndd tthheewwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Divya Jindal-Snape. (Routledge research in edu-cation)Routledge, ©2010 261 p. $95.00Jindal-Snape (School of Education, Social Work and CommunityEducation at the U. of Dundee, UK) presents 13 chapters surveying thecurrent research landscape concerning educational transitions. Itaddresses nursery to primary, primary to secondary, and secondary topost-school transitions. For each it includes a review of the literature, dis-cussion of recent research and interventions, and identification of gapsin the literature and research. The discussion takes place in the contextof a number of different countries, as well as learners with differentneeds (students transitioning from Chinese to UK universities or tran-sition from secondary school to employment in Japan for students withdisabilities, for example).

LB3430 2009-040341 978-0-7637-7612-1PPrroommoottiinngg hheeaalltthh aanndd eemmoottiioonnaall wweellll--bbeeiinngg iinn yyoouurrccllaassssrroooomm,, 55tthh eedd..Page, Randy M. and Tana S. Page.Jones & Bartlett, ©2011 437 p. $74.95 (pa)This guide for pre-service and in-service teachers of all grades is packedwith classroom ideas for promoting healthy lifestyle choices. Material isframed around the National Health Education Standards and the Centersfor Disease Control and Prevention’s six risk behaviors. Early chaptersaddress teaching to make a difference and teaching today’s students.Later chapters focus on life skills, healthy eating and physical activity, atobacco-free and drug-free lifestyle, sexual health, and dealing with crisesand critical issues such as terminal illness and suicide. The book con-tains about 275 interactive teaching activities, more than half of whichare new to this edition. There is also new material on information lit-eracy, cyber bullying, and stress management. A web site offers unit andlesson plans for every grade level, plus video clips, PowerPoint presenta-tions, sample course syllabi, and assignment ideas. The authors are affil-iated with Brigham Young University.

LC40 2009-018390 978-0-415-99757-7HHoommee--sscchhooooll ccoonnnneeccttiioonnss iinn aa mmuullttiiccuullttuurraall ssoocciieettyy;;lleeaarrnniinngg ffrroomm aanndd wwiitthh ccuullttuurraallllyy aanndd lliinngguuiissttiiccaallllyyddiivveerrssee ffaammiilliieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Maria Luiza Dantas and Patrick Manyak.(Language, culture, and teaching)Routledge, ©2010 294 p. $41.95 (pa)Contributors mostly from the US but also Canada and Britain examineperspectives of teachers, and the decisions they make when they interactwith students and parents whose family structures, customs, knowledgebase, everyday activities, and language practices are unlike their own.The goal is to incorporate the student’s out-of-school experience into theireducation rather than trying to exclude and counteract it. The topicsinclude learning from Asian families about the impact of socialdynamics on immigrant children’s language and literacy practice, dis-continuities and differences among Muslim Arab-Americans, fosteringacademic identities among Latino immigrant students, using the parentstory approach to listen to and learn from African American parents, keyconcepts from a study of Appalachian families and schooling, andtalking family knowledge and lived experience into being as resource foracademic action.

LC58 2009-504061 978-1-84706-287-1PPrreepp sscchhooooll cchhiillddrreenn;; aa ccllaassss aappaarrtt oovveerr ttwwoo cceennttuurriieess..Brendon, Vyvyen.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 246 p. $29.95Brendon, a retired history teacher who is a researcher and writer, tellsthe stories of prep school children between the ages of seven and 13 fromthe early nineteenth century to the present. Through excerpts frommemoirs, letters, diaries, poetry, fiction, and interviews, she describes thelives of these children and the unique nature of the prep school expe-rience in Britain, both good and bad. She addresses their feelings aboutteachers and headmasters, the separation from family, parental contact,punishment, homesickness, bullying, sports, and other aspects.

LC65 978-81-8405-056-1EEdduuccaattiioonn iinn tthhee aaggee ooff gglloobbaalliissaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Sudhansu Sekhar Mishra et al.Reference Press, ©2009 202 p. $28.00When India signed the General Agreement on Trade in Services in 1996,education became one of the sectors of the economy open to internationalcompetition and market forces. This can take the form of cross borderdistance education, students or faculty going abroad, or an increase inprivatization, with domination by multinational corporations. The likelyeffect of globalization on higher education in India is explored in thenon-technical essays presented here. Most of the writers and editors donot appear to have English as their native tongue as can be seen in sen-tences that appear too often like “Before plunging it, globalisation athread bare national debate should precede.” No index is provided.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–213–

LC66 2009-018965 978-0-415-99790-4CCrriittiiccaall ppeeddaaggooggiieess ooff ccoonnssuummppttiioonn;; lliivviinngg aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg iinntthhee sshhaaddooww ooff tthhee ““sshhooppooccaallyyppssee””..Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer A. Sandlin and Peter McLaren.(Sociocultural, political, and historical studies in education)Routledge, ©2010 278 p. $44.95 (pa)Edited by Sandlin (education, Arizona State U.) and McLaren (urbanschooling, U. of California at Los Angeles), this volume is a response tocalls for the field of education to take seriously the topic of capitalist con-sumption and its relation to learning, identity development, and edu-cation. Twenty-two chapters are presented in sections that review theoriesof consumption and education and explore societal impacts of consumercapitalism and its likely effects on education; discuss the role of formalinstitutions of education in crafting “consumer-citizens” both in terms ofthe formal curriculum and in terms of other spaces where commer-cialism has arisen within schools; examine public pedagogy andeveryday life as consumption-promoting sites of education and learning;and explore sites of contestation and resistance to consumerism.

LC67 2009-002887 978-0-8018-9374-2NNaattiioonnaall iinnnnoovvaattiioonn aanndd tthhee aaccaaddeemmiicc rreesseeaarrcchh eenntteerrpprriissee;;ppuubblliicc ppoolliiccyy iinn gglloobbaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Dill, David D. & Frans A. van VughtJohns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 578 p. $70.00Within the countries of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation andDevelopment, the Academic Research Enterprise (i.e. “the academicsector’s proportion of a nation’s research system,” encompassing aca-demic research, research doctoral training, and academic knowledgetransfer) is increasingly viewed as an integral element of nationalsystems of science-based innovation. In this work, Dill (emeritus, publicpolicy, U. of North Carolina, US) and van Vught (public policy, U. ofTwente, the Netherlands) present case analyses of public policiesaffecting the Academic Research Enterprise within this context of inno-vation. Case studies are presented for Australia, Canada, Japan, theEuropean Union, Finland, Germany, the Netherlands, the UnitedKingdom, the United States, and the US states of Pennsylvania andCalifornia.

LC71 2009-041564 978-0-415-99596-2GGlloobbaall ccrriisseess,, ssoocciiaall jjuussttiiccee,, aanndd eedduuccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Michael W. Apple.Routledge, ©2010 211 p. $38.95 (pa)Six essays, presented by Apple (educational policy studies, U. ofWisconsin at Madison), analyze the way neoliberal and neoconservativeprocesses of globalization are impacting education in four areas of crisis:the impact of global economic and ideological forces on definitions ofimportant knowledge, literary practices, and values in education in theUnited States; the reconstruction of educational policies and practices inJapan in service of conservative nationalism and neoliberalmarketization; struggles over economic, political, and cultural autonomyin Israel/Palestine; and neoliberal encroachment in Mexico. In additionto analyzing the negative impacts of globalization on education, chaptersalso highlight the ways in which critical and democratic educational andsocial movements have fought against these processes and pursuedalternatives.

LC149 2009-023203 978-0-415-80157-7MMuullttiilliitteerraacciieess iinn mmoottiioonn;; ccuurrrreenntt tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by David R. Cole and Darren L. Pullen.Routledge, ©2010 273 p. $46.95 (pa)Specialists in multiliteracies and technology-enhanced education describethe current work in the field, demonstrating how it permeates educa-tional practice around the world. Their topics include lesson andknowledge structure in school science, introducing multimodal literacy toyoung children learning English as a second language, the agencyinvolved with computer operations in education, the politics of desire,using the principles of multiliteracies to inform pedagogical change,young Australians reading in a digital world, and a virtual school forrethinking learning.

LC158 2009-017641 978-0-415-99963-2LLiitteerraaccyy aanndd ppoowweerr..Janks, Hilary. (Language, culture, and teaching)Routledge, ©2010 245 p. $41.95 (pa)Janks (applied English language studies, U. of the Witwatersrand,Johannesburg, South Africa) has written a guide to the theory andpractice of critical literacy, using test cases from her own work for illus-tration. Theory is the overriding theme. Janks describes the philosophiesof Paolo Freire and Foucault then discusses at length the impact of theirapproaches on literacy studies with a special focus on her work in SouthAfrica. The definition of literacy itself is a central motif, as Janks demon-strates the social impact of critical literacy to visual as well as all kindsof written texts, and the power critical literacy can give to the reader.

LC191 2009-006370 978-1-85539-623-4OOvveerrsscchhoooolleedd bbuutt uunnddeerreedduuccaatteedd;; hhooww tthhee ccrriissiiss iinneedduuccaattiioonn iiss jjeeooppaarrddiizziinngg oouurr aaddoolleesscceennttss..Abbott, John and Heather MacTaggart.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2010 310 p. $27.95Arguing that society treats adolescence as a problem and not an oppor-tunity, Abbott, a former teacher and headteacher associated with The 21stCentury Learning Initiative in the UK (a transnational association of edu-cational practitioners, policy makers, and researchers), and McTaggart,who is associated with a Canadian education organization, examine thedevelopment and education of adolescents. Focusing on the context inEngland, they draw from the work of Education 2000, a British nonprofitfoundation which Abbott directed, and The 21st Century LearningInitiative, to show how research from the physical and social sciences cancontribute to a better understanding of human learning and how itrelates to adolescence. They argue that education should be natural to theway people learn and this would prepare children for the self-definingstruggle of adolescence, which would include a mix of guidance fromadults and the space to work things out on their own, helping themdevelop strength for adulthood. The problem, they say, is in an archaicschool system that keeps children in school rather than providing themexperiential learning. They also discuss the foundations of British edu-cation, comprehensive education, the disappearance of apprenticeship,recent policies, and how to better prepare students for society.

LC191 978-1-903765-23-4TThhee ssoocciiaall aaggeennddaa ooff tthhee sscchhooooll..O’Brien, Jim and Gale Macleod. (Policy and practice in education, 12)Dunedin Academic Press, ©2010 81 p. $24.65 (pa)For students, teachers, education policy makers, and administrators,O’Brien and Macleod (leadership and professional learning and post-graduate studies, education, U. of Edinburgh, UK) trace and critique thedevelopments associated with policy initiatives in Scotland related to thepersonal and social development of students—guidance and pastoral care,support for learning, the inclusion agenda, new community schools, andpersonal and social education—the reasons for these developments, prac-tices, what is needed for improvement, issues of policy, and contrasts todevelopments in England and the US. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

LC196 2009-044525 978-1-4331-0545-6CCrriittiiccaall ppeeddaaggooggyy,, eeccoolliitteerraaccyy,, aanndd ppllaanneettaarryy ccrriissiiss;; tthheeeeccooppeeddaaggooggyy mmoovveemmeenntt..Kahn, Richard V. (Counterpoints: studies in the postmodern theory ofeducation; v.359)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 186 p. $32.95 (pa)For students and teachers of critical pedagogy, and others interested inenvironmental studies and sustainability education, Kahn (educationalfoundations and research, U. of North Dakota) presents the foundationsof an ecopedagogy, arguing that the world’s current path of social andenvironmental disaster can be traced to the evolution of an anthro-pocentric worldview, a global technocapitalist infrastructure, an unsus-tainable model of institutional science, and the marginalization andrepression of pro-ecological resistance. He claims that environmental edu-cation needs a makeover, and draws from the theories of Paulo Freire,Herbert Marcuse, and Ivan Illich to show how a northern version ofecopedagogy must be concerned with the larger hidden curriculum ofunsustainable life and look to how social movements and a democraticpublic sphere provide knowledge about and against it. He describes thenorthern movement as one concerned with the cosmological, techno-logical, and organizational dimensions of social life and providing ecol-iteracy programs, creating alliances between scholars and the public, andcreating a critical dialogue and solidarity across groups in education.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –214–

LC196 2009-043513 978-1-4331-0880-8FFiinnddiinngg ffrreeeeddoomm iinn tthhee ccllaassssrroooomm;; aa pprraaccttiiccaalliinnttrroodduuccttiioonn ttoo ccrriittiiccaall tthheeoorryy,, rreevv..eedd..Hinchey, Patricia H. (Counterpoints: studies in the postmodern theoryof education; v.24)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 154 p. $32.95 (pa)Hinchey (education, Penn State U., U. of Colorado at Boulder, andArizona State U.) introduces aspects of critical theory to help teachersexplore and use alternatives in teaching. She explains concepts like epis-temology, hegemony, praxis, cultural capital, instrumental rationality andpost-formalism, social reproduction and resistance, and critical con-sciousness, and presents real world examples that relate to them. Thisedition has been revised to connect theories to contemporary examplesand references to current thinking and writing. Each chapter nowincludes suggestions for further reading.

LC196 2009-036983 978-1-4331-0406-0FFrreeiirree,, tteeaacchhiinngg,, aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg;; ccuullttuurree cciirrcclleess aaccrroossssccoonntteexxttss..Souto-Manning, Mariana. (Counterpoints: studies in the postmoderntheory of education; v.350)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 218 p. $32.95 (pa)As a child, Souto-Manning’s (early childhood education, Columbia U.)problem-posing approach to learning was shaped by her schooling atPaulo Freire’s (1921-1997) progressive, liberatory school in Recife, Brazil.She has lived Freire’s concept of critical pedagogy as an educator inBrazil and, following her immigration, has continued to employ it as ateacher educator in the US. After explaining the concepts of culturecircles and critical pedagogy, she provides teachers and teacher educatorswith in-depth descriptions of her successful application of Freireanculture circles in several contexts including an American first-gradeclassroom, a Brazilian adult education program, a pre-service earlychildhood teacher education program at an American university, an in-service teacher education program at a university-affiliated preschool inthe US, and utilizing Boalian theater—the performative version of theFreierian concepts developed by Freire’s colleague, Augusto Boal (1931-2009)—in a teacher education workshop in the US.

LC196 2009-025655 978-0-415-80126-3HHaannddbbooookk ooff ppuubblliicc ppeeddaaggooggyy;; eedduuccaattiioonn aanndd lleeaarrnniinnggbbeeyyoonndd sscchhoooolliinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Jennifer A. Sandlin et al.Routledge, ©2010 682 p. $114.95 (pa)For teachers, researchers, scholars, activists, and theorists, Sandlin(advanced studies in education policy, leadership, and curriculum,Arizona State U.) et al. offer a handbook on the history, scope, and prac-tices of public pedagogy, with 65 chapters written by US, UK, Australian,South African, and Canadian scholars, teachers, performance artists, andactivists in education and fields such as anthropology, women’s studies,and philosophy. They critique the conventional notions of education andquestion how, where, and when learning occurs, and what pedagogyoccurs in public spaces. They discuss historical, theoretical, and method-ological perspectives, and how movies, music, zines, gaming, Facebook,blogging, graffiti, and other popular media and aspects of everyday lifeteach about identity, literacy, and other areas. They then addressinformal and activist sites of learning like the Nevada Test Site,museums, knitting as feminist protest, and photo narratives of batteredwomen; how educators in formal institutions can incorporate popular ormass culture in the classroom; the rise of neoliberalism as a pedagogicalforce; and the work of public intellectuals.

LC196 978-90-8790-842-3IInn tthhee ssppiirriitt ooff UUbbuunnttuu;; ssttoorriieess ooff tteeaacchhiinngg aanndd rreesseeaarrcchh..Caracciolo, Diane and Anne M. Mungai. (Transgressions; culturalstudies and education)Sense Publishers, ©2009 201 p. $29.00 (pa)Caracciolo and Mungai (curriculum and instruction, Adelphi U.) collect12 stories to encourage teachers and researchers to embrace the spirit ofUbuntu to guide their work. Educators and education, philosophy, andNative American and world indigenous peoples scholars based in the US,New Zealand, and Canada present experiential narratives and personalhistories from different communities around the world, to show the waysto integrate the individual with the community and the secular with thesacred. They address the themes of healing, respect, and community,dimensions of shared humanity that are embodied in the term Ubuntu,and how they are related to experiences with poverty, race, sexuality,peace, understanding indigenous peoples, culture, collaborative edu-cation, and the role of community in education.

LC196 2009-018318 978-1-4331-0501-2MMaakkiinngg ccoonnnneeccttiioonnss;; sseellff--ssttuuddyy && ssoocciiaall aaccttiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen Pithouse et al. (Counterpoints, studiesin the postmodern theory of education; v.357)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2009 334 p. $34.95 (pa)The essays in this volume are mostly written in the first person and focuson the role of self-study and social action in the area of education.Editors Mitchell (education, McGill U.) and Pithouse and Moletsane(Gender and Development Unit of the Human Services Research Councilof South Africa), offer diverse perspectives on the self in memory,(re)positioning the self, creative (re)presentations of the self, and ulti-mately the development of self-knowledge. They present research andcase studies throughout and provide substantial references to existing lit-erature. The essays tend to fall into the realms of critical pedagogy andpostmodernism.

LC205 2009-026386 978-0-8144-1519-1TThhee BBllaacckk--WWhhiittee aacchhiieevveemmeenntt ggaapp;; wwhhyy cclloossiinngg iitt iiss tthheeggrreeaatteesstt cciivviill rriigghhttss iissssuuee ooff oouurr ttiimmee..Paige, Rod and Elaine Witty.AMACOM, ©2010 210 p. $22.00For African American leaders and communities, parents, and general cit-izens, Paige, a former US Secretary of Education who spearheaded theNo Child Left Behind Act, and Witty (education, Norfolk State U.) identifythe causes and consequences of the achievement gap between black andwhite students in the US and propose solutions to it. Arguing that thegap is a barrier to racial equality and social justice, and focusing on edu-cation rather than politics, they trace its history, explanations, and bar-riers to closing it. They emphasize the need for effective leadership in theAfrican American culture, how it has been part of the problem, and howleaders must address lower test scores; economic, social, and racial con-sequences; the failure of past efforts; taking responsibility; and the impli-cations for the stigma of African American intellectual inferiority.

LC212 2009-025385 978-0-415-99512-2BBllaacckk yyoouutthh mmaatttteerrss;; ttrraannssiittiioonnss ffrroomm sscchhooooll ttoo ssuucccceessss..Wright, Cecile et al. (Critical youth studies)Routledge, ©2010 163 p. $36.95 (pa)Wright (sociology, Nottingham-Trent U.), Penny Standen (health psy-chology and learning disorders, U. of Nottingham) and Patel (crimi-nology, U. of Salford) describe how young British black people manage,survive, and recover from failure in education, focusing on theirresourcefulness of the youth in forging their futures and how the notionof aspirational capital promotes resilience and a culture of possibility.The longitudinal study draws on quantitative data and qualitative inter-viewing of 33 people aged 14-19 who had experienced permanentexclusion from school in Nottingham or London. Among the topics arethe role of family and kinship, peers and friendship networks, collectiveresistance, and social mobility.

LC220 2009-046221 978-1-60709-621-4AA gglloorriioouuss rreevvoolluuttiioonn ffoorr yyoouutthh aanndd ccoommmmuunniittiieess;; sseerrvviiccee--lleeaarrnniinngg aanndd mmooddeell ccoommmmuunniittiieess..Whitehead, George I. and Andrew P. Kitzrow.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 129 p. $27.95 (pa)The authors have established the Youth Leadership Academy inWicomico County, Maryland, an area designated by the America’sPromise Alliance as one of the 100 Best Communities for Young Peoplethree years in a row. Here, they share their thoughts on the relationshipsamong service learning, youth development, and model communities.They cite current and classic psychological research to support ideas onusing service learning to teach higher order thinking and information lit-eracy, critical and creative thinking, and problems solving. They definethe concept of model communities and explain how they can empoweryoung people, and show how youth and other stakeholders can becomeadvocates for model communities. The book holds up examples ofnational initiatives and organizational efforts, such as America’s PromiseAlliance, the Search Institute, and Scouts. Chapter exercises and dis-cussion questions are included. The book’s audience includes teachers,education students, teacher educators, developmental psychologists,policy makers. There is no subject index. Whitehead teaches psychologyat Salisbury University. Kitzrow is a youth recreation programmer.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–215–

LC221 2009-927817 978-1-934742-35-8CCoommmmuunniittyy oorrggaanniizziinngg ffoorr ssttrroonnggeerr sscchhoooollss;; ssttrraatteeggiieessaanndd ssuucccceesssseess..Mediratta, Kavitha et al.Harvard Education Press, ©2009 230 p. $29.95 (pa)This book explores community organizing for school reform. The authorsexamine the role of community organizations in improving education forstudents in some of the nation’s most deficient school districts. They alsooutline the strategies and organizational makeup that lead to successfulinitiatives and examine how community organizations can promoteincreased civic engagement and continued reform. In conclusion, theauthors address challenges to organizing efforts in a new period ofAmerican politics. Authors are Mediratta (education program officer,New York Community Trust), Shah (principal associate, AnnenbergInstitute for School Reform, Brown U.), and McAlister, (research associate,Annenberg Institute for School Reform).

LC221 2009-043868 978-1-4129-7949-8TThhee eennggaaggeedd ssoocciioollooggiisstt;; ccoonnnneeccttiinngg tthhee ccllaassssrroooomm ttoo tthheeccoommmmuunniittyy,, 33dd eedd..Korgen, Kathleen and Jonathan M. White.Pine Forge Press, ©2011 225 p. $29.95 (pa)Intended as a brief core text (or an affordable supplement) for under-graduates, this new edition offers updated coverage of issues such as the2008 election, the current recession, and environmental racism. Writtenby Korgen (sociology, William Paterson U.) and White (sociology,Bridgewater State), each chapter contains a number of exercises whichinclude conducting interviews, taking surveys, and making sociologicalobservations. The authors include discussion questions as well as sug-gestions for specific actions—allowing students to move beyond academicstudy and to positively engage with the world. Includes a website withadditional resources for students, as well as password-protectedPowerPoint slides, chapter objectives, and teaching tips for instructors.

LC221 2009-043123 978-1-60709-519-4SSeerrvviiccee--lleeaarrnniinngg aanndd ssoocciiaall jjuussttiiccee;; eennggaaggiinngg ssttuuddeennttss iinnssoocciiaall cchhaannggee..Cipolle, Susan Benigni.Rowman & Littlefield, ©2010 177 p. $34.95 (pa)Cipolle, a teacher, service-learning practitioner, and administrator whodeveloped and instituted a service-learning program at a school inMinnesota, describes how teachers, teacher educators, and adminis-trators, can create service-learning programs in K-12 and higher edu-cation to help students develop a commitment to service and social justiceand become better citizens. Drawing from her research with schoolalumni who participated in service-learning programs, she explains howindividuals become committed to social justice, how orientation toservice-learning and social justice changes as more critical consciousnessis developed, and strategies teachers can use to support and guide stu-dents as they become more critically aware, including research-basedstrategies, connections to multicultural education, and program devel-opment. No index is provided.

LC225 2008-054218 978-0-415-96376-3HHaannddbbooookk ooff sscchhooooll--ffaammiillyy ppaarrttnneerrsshhiippss ffoorr pprroommoottiinnggssttuuddeenntt ccoommppeetteennccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra L. Christenson and Amy L. Reschly.Routledge, ©2010 525 p. $114.95 (pa)The key questions that have motivated this research handbook concernthe ways families and schools can work together to enhance studentlearning and development, how research can inform such efforts, andhow the field can be advanced. Edited by Christenson (educational lead-ership, U. of Minnesota) and Reschly (educational psychology andinstructional technology, U. of Georgia), the handbook addresses the the-oretical and empirical bases for school-family partnerships, issues asso-ciated with different student development levels, and issues concerningthe research agenda for informing policy and practice. Common themesthat emerge include the importance of understanding culture, families asan educational resource, the value of relationships, and the importanceof evidence-based programs and interventions.

LC239 2009-034063 978-0-415-87519-6PPllaaccee-- aanndd ccoommmmuunniittyy--bbaasseedd eedduuccaattiioonn iinn sscchhoooollss..Smith, Gregory A. and David Sobel. (Sociocultural, political, and his-torical studies in education)Routledge, ©2010 167 p. $36.95 (pa)For educators and the public, Smith (education and counseling, Lewisand Clark College) and Sobel (teacher certification, Antioch U. NewEngland) explain the purpose and nature of place and community-basededucation to go beyond the classroom and provide children with contactwith the natural world and community. They provide examples ofpractice in specific schools, models, and guidance for developing lessons,and discuss definitions of place and community-based education,antecedents, their rationale, research studies, the role of communitypartners and school leaders, and the use of cultural, environmental, eco-nomic, and governmental issues in teaching, as well as traditional aca-demic disciplines.

LC268 2010-290701 978-0-8264-4303-8TTeeaacchhiinngg hhaappppiinneessss aanndd wweellll--bbeeiinngg iinn sscchhoooollss;; lleeaarrnniinngg ttoorriiddee eelleepphhaannttss..Morris, Ian.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 226 p. $44.95 (pa)For secondary school teachers, Morris, who specializes in well-being atWellington College, UK, where he developed one of the first well-beingand happiness curricula in Britain, introduces the theory and practice ofteaching happiness and well-being in the classroom. He focuses onstudents’ experiences and helping them reflect on them, as he discussesthe nature of happiness, Positive Psychology, teaching them to care forthemselves and their bodies, and teaching philosophy, emotionalawareness, resilience, nurturing strengths and talent, formingrelationships, understanding the elements of relationships, andmeditation and spirituality, as well as problems with modern society likeconsumerism and technology.

LC311 2009-038231 978-0-313-35103-7AA ccaallll ffoorr cchhaarraacctteerr eedduuccaattiioonn aanndd pprraayyeerr iinn tthhee sscchhoooollss..Jeynes, William.Praeger, ©2010 332 p. $54.95In this volume meant for parents and educators, Jeynes (education,California State U., Long Beach, and Baylor U.) argues for bringing backmoral instruction and nonspecific religious moments in schools as a wayto deal with problems relating to violence, sexual behavior, and academicachievement, and therefore restore morality in American society. Hetraces the history of character education in public schools, including non-Western philosophies and leading advocates of its inclusion like ThomasJefferson, DeWitt Clinton, and Horace Mann. He describes court casesand decisions since the Supreme Court rulings in 1962 and 1963 thatbanned school prayer and Bible readings, and draws connections toincreased shootings, corporate corruption, foreign policy, and other areasof society. He also discusses research that illustrates how moralinstruction and religious freedom in schools could improve behavior andachievement.

LC538 2009-007057 978-0-8018-9372-8SSeeeeiinngg tthhee lliigghhtt;; rreelliiggiioouuss ccoolllleeggeess iinn ttwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt cceennttuurryyAAmmeerriiccaa..Schuman, Samuel.Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 326 p. $50.00Schuman, retired chancellor at the U. of Minnesota, Morris, examines theplace of religious colleges and universities, especially evangelicalProtestant institutions, in contemporary American higher education. Hediscusses the history of post-secondary US education from the perspectiveof the religious traditions from which it developed, and Roman Catholic,Baptist, denominational, and nondenominational Christian institutionslike the College of New Rochelle, Villanova U., Thomas Aquinas College,Baylor U., Anderson U., Calvin College, George Fox U., Oral Roberts U.,Northwestern College, and Wheaton College, what educational factorscontributed to their success, their similarities and differences with eachother and mainstream institutions, and what can be learned from them.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –216–

LC1029 2009-031963 978-1-60709-435-7CCoocckkeeyyeedd eedduuccaattiioonn;; aa ccaassee mmeetthhoodd pprriimmeerr..Giordano, Gerard.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 159 p. $29.95 (pa)The case method is a question-based approach to teaching and learning.Giordano (education, University of North Florida) introduces the casemethod and helps readers apply it to various events and trends in edu-cation. The cases are designed to enable readers to differentiate sub-stantive ideas from ‘cockeyed’ advice, and focus on recommendations forschools made by two groups: persons directly involved with schools, suchas teachers and administrators, and those involved indirectly, such asparents, psychologists, and business leaders. Issues addressed in thecases include education and race, religion, and poverty, as well as otherissues such as video games and standardized tests. The book is aimed atparents, educators, and community leaders. There is no subject index.

LC1059 2009-014134 978-1-59451-678-8TTrraannssnnaattiioonnaall ccoommppeetteennccee;; eemmppoowweerriinngg pprrooffeessssiioonnaallccuurrrriiccuullaa ffoorr hhoorriizzoonn--rriissiinngg cchhaalllleennggeess..Koehn, Peter H. and James N. Rosenau.Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 210 p. $86.00Kohen (political science, U. of Montana) and Rosenau (internationalaffairs, George Washington U.) discuss how university faculties andadministrators can help instill “transnational competence” in studentsgraduating into professions that are dealing with more and more withinternational issues. They present a transnational competenceframework, consisting of analytical competence, emotional competence,creative/imaginative capacity, communicative facility, and functionaladroitness, and discuss how to encourage transnational competence ineducation for business management, engineering, social-justice work,international development practice, and medicine and public health.

LC1085 2009-034212 978-1-60709-356-5SSoocciiaall eennttrreepprreenneeuurrsshhiipp iinn eedduuccaattiioonn;; pprriivvaattee vveennttuurreess ffoorrtthhee ppuubblliicc ggoooodd..Sandler, Michael R. (New frontiers in education)Rowman & Littlefield, ©2010 161 p. $32.95 (pa)Drawing on first hand accounts, company and personal profiles, anddata from enterprises and industry, Sandler, chairman of an advisoryfirm supporting social entrepreneurship in education, describes lessonslearned by education entrepreneurs who responded to the call of the1983 report, A Nation At Risk. Focusing on the stories of innovators whoused entrepreneurial principles to solve public problems, the bookdemonstrates the possibilities for non-traditional business approaches toeducation. After an exploration of the motivations of private sector entre-preneurs operating in the education system, the book details the case ofEduVentures, an education entrepreneur working to build a research andconsulting business.

LC1090 2009-026878 978-1-59451-755-6AAddvvaanncciinngg gglloobbaall eedduuccaattiioonn..Dickson, Janet R. et al. (Patterns of potential human progress; v.2)Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 333 p. $99.00Dickson et al.(international futures and international studies, U. ofDenver) examine global advances in education participation andattainment and apply a long-range forecast and alternative futures towidespread education participation and attainment. They explore thetransition in global patterns of participation in education, the historicalcontext since 1960, efforts to increase education and the benefits of con-tinuing and enhancing them, forecasts of where the transition will be in2060 if current expansion continues, and economic and sociopoliticalconsequences, using a computer software modeling tool that also iden-tifies problems and shortfalls that exist. A lengthy section of forecasttables and measures of poverty, health, education, infrastructure, andgovernance by country is included. The volume, and others in the series,originated in a modeling and analysis project at the U. of Denver’s JosefKorbel School of International Studies.

LC1090 2009-036131 978-1-59451-676-4TThhee gglloobbaall ccllaassssrroooomm;; aann eesssseennttiiaall gguuiiddee ttoo ssttuuddyy aabbrrooaadd..Lantis, Jeffrey S. and Jessica DuPlaga. (International studies intensivesseries)Paradigm Publishers, ©2010 177 p. $84.00Lantis and DuPlaga (political science and off-campus studies, College ofWooster) help students, faculty, and study abroad professionals under-stand the study abroad experience within an academic context and howto get the most of a program as part of a holistic educational plan.Connecting each phase of study to academic objectives, they addressreasons to study abroad, choosing a program, and preparation and activeengagement in foreign communities and cultures, as well as health andsafety issues, reorientation, and integrating experiences into education.

LC1090 2009-014917 978-1-4331-0659-0TThhee ttwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt cceennttuurryy uunniivveerrssiittyy;; ddeevveellooppiinngg ffaaccuullttyyeennggaaggeemmeenntt iinn iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaalliizzaattiioonn..Childress, Lisa K. (Complicated conversation; v.32)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 174 p. $32.95 (pa)For university administrators, Childress, an internationalization con-sultant who has served as a leader at universities in the US and Japan,details what successful institutions have done to engage faculty in theinternationalization process. She considers two examples (Duke U. andthe U. of Richmond) of internationalization and the strategies universitiesneed to adapt their culture, history, and priorities to support the processand equip students with the broad intellectual skills needed to succeedin the global world. She also discusses the historical context of interna-tionalization, rationales and plans, the faculty’s role, and the strategiesneeded to move through the phases of implementation.

LC1091 2009-012996 978-1-4384-2961-8EEdduuccaattiinngg ddeemmooccrraaccyy;; AAlleexxiiss ddee TTooccqquueevviillllee aannddlleeaaddeerrsshhiipp iinn AAmmeerriiccaa..Danoff, Brian.State U. of New York Pr., ©2010 218 p. $75.00Danoff (political science, Miami U. in Ohio) unpacks Alexis deTocqueville’s ideas about political leadership, focusing on the famedDemocracy in America, but also touching on Tocqueville’s other writings.He also examines other thinkers who have built on, contested, andimproved Tocqueville’s understanding of democratic leadership. Heargues that Tocqueville’s writings point the way towards resolving thetensions between advocates of strong leadership suspicious of partici-patory democracy and participatory democrats hostile towards lead-ership, as Tocqueville “embraces participatory democracy and leadershipin a single, complex vision.” Leaders, in this understanding, are politicalactors who seek to shape the norms, or educate, their fellow citizens.After having elucidated Tocqueville’s theory of leadership, he uses it toexamine the thinking about leadership of the Antifederalists, AbrahamLincoln, Woodrow Wilson, political scientist Robert Putnam, and sociol-ogist Robert Bellah.

LC1091 2009-039540 978-0-415-87223-2GGlloobbaalliizzaattiioonn,, tthhee nnaattiioonn--ssttaattee aanndd tthhee cciittiizzeenn;; ddiilleemmmmaassaanndd ddiirreeccttiioonnss ffoorr cciivviiccss aanndd cciittiizzeennsshhiipp eedduuccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Alan Reid et al. (Routledge research in edu-cation; 34)Routledge, ©2010 251 p. $95.00The underlying notion here is that civics and citizenship education bothreflects and produces the dominant version of citizenship in any society,so that changes in the former can illuminate changes in the latter. In thatlight, scholars of education in many countries look at how civics and cit-izenship education is dealing with the pressure multinational corpora-tions and their organizations are placing on democracy at the nationallevel. Among their topics are Australian schooling and the changing con-texts of citizenship, changing policies and practices in changing social-political contexts in Pakistan, perceptions of past and the education offuture citizens in contemporary Russia, whether the US is seeing a par-adigm shift in the political culture and in educating for citizenship, andnon-statism and post-globalization as contexts for new times.

LC1091 2009-041492 978-1-4051-9988-9PPaattrriioottiissmm aanndd cciittiizzeennsshhiipp eedduuccaattiioonn.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000099))Title main entry. Ed. by Bruce Haynes.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 108 p. $39.95 (pa)Editor Haynes (retired, teacher education, Edith Cowan U.) and seven co-contributors provide a variety of viewpoints on patriotism, associatedcontroversies, and commentary on how it should be dealt with in citizeneducation programs. The authors—from the United States, New Zealand,South Africa, Australia, England, and Japan— offer their views from thebackground of their understanding of education in their respective coun-tries. Topics range from the legitimate goals of American education toeducation from a world citizenship perspective. While a slim volume, itis thought-provoking and well-written. Originally published as Volume41, Issue 4 of Educational Philosophy and Theory.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–217–

LC1099 2009-035963 978-1-4129-7794-4TThhee ccuullttuurraall pprrooffiicciieennccyy jjoouurrnneeyy;; mmoovviinngg bbeeyyoonndd eetthhiiccaallbbaarrrriieerrss ttoowwaarrdd pprrooffoouunndd sscchhooooll cchhaannggee..CampbellJones, Franklin et al.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 127 p. $26.95 (pa)This work reinforces cultural proficiency as a framework for ethicaldecision-making surrounding issues of educational equity. Part Idescribes a framework for understanding cultural proficiency as moraldiscourse and action, and introduces fictional Oakland Hills SchoolDistrict, the setting for case analysis throughout the book. Part II presentscase studies for critical reflection and group discussion. Cases aredesigned to reveal participants’ assumptions about ethnicity, ability,socio-economic status, or sexual orientation, and raise awareness of therole of those assumptions in shaping participants’ beliefs. The bookincludes reflection activities with space for written answers. FranklinCampbellJones is associate professor of education leadership at RowanUniversity in Glassboro, New Jersey.

LC1200 2009-929119 978-1-84787-940-0IInncclluussiivvee eedduuccaattiioonn;; iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall ppoolliiccyy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Armstrong, Ann Cheryl et al.Sage Publications, ©2010 162 p. $120.00Ann Armstrong (professional learning, U. of Sydney, Australia) et al. cri-tique some of the directions that inclusive education has taken in policyand practice in the developed and developing world. They discusscurrent international debates about inclusive education, especially thedeveloping world perspective; the history of special education; thecurrent state of inclusive education; the Education for All policy of theUnited Nations; and how policy has been translated into practice andhow models have been exported to the South. They include case studiesof sponsored interventions by UN policy agencies and internationalfunding agencies into educational development in countries of the South,the European Union, and in England.

LC1200 2009-044580 978-1-4331-0434-3WWhhaatteevveerr hhaappppeenneedd ttoo iinncclluussiioonn??;; tthhee ppllaaccee ooff ssttuuddeennttsswwiitthh iinntteelllleeccttuuaall ddiissaabbiilliittiieess iinn eedduuccaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Phil Smith. (Disability studies in education;v.7)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 251 p. $33.95 (pa)Smith (special education, Eastern Michigan U.) compiles 11 chaptersbased on the argument that schools in the US have failed to provide basiceducational rights to students with disabilities. Using post-critical theoryand disability studies frameworks, education scholars from the USexamine the inclusion of students with intellectual disabilities in generaleducation classrooms from national and state perspectives. They discussbenefits and barriers to inclusion, and consider cases in specific states,what has worked, and the changes that need to be made in teacherpreparation programs, policy, funding, and local schools.

LC1201 2009-032121 978-1-60554-013-9IInncclluuddiinngg oonnee,, iinncclluuddiinngg aallll;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo rreellaattiioonnsshhiipp--bbaasseeddeeaarrllyy cchhiillddhhoooodd iinncclluussiioonn..Roffman, Leslie.Redleaf Press, ©2011 257 p. $39.95 (pa)Lead author Roffman is cofounder and director of The Little School, arelationship-based inclusive preschool in operation since the mid-1980s.Here, she shares ideas and inspiration for developing an early childhoodprogram that supports all students, including those with behavioral,physical, and learning challenges. Classroom scenarios, illustrated withb&w photos of innovative equipment, toys, and activities in action at TheLittle School, demonstrate ideas for creating safe spaces to allow childrento work out their aggression in play, and props for helping children sitstill for longer periods of time. The book is for child care providers andpreschool and elementary teachers and aides. Roffman holds a degree inearly childhood education.

LC1568 2009-012071 978-0-415-99777-5RReeccoonnssttrruuccttiinngg ppoolliiccyy iinn hhiigghheerr eedduuccaattiioonn;; ffeemmiinniissttppoossttssttrruuccttuurraall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Elizabeth J. Allan et al.Routledge, ©2010 250 p. $44.95 (pa)Responding to a awareness that feminist poststructural perspectives areneeded to enhance understandings of policy and professional practice inpost-secondary education, scholars mostly of higher education considerproductions of power through presence within absence, subjects andobjects of policy, and discursive constructions of change. Among theirspecific topics are purposes of higher education and visions of the nationin the writing of the Department of Education, who is paying the pricefor consuming higher education, and a policy discourse analysis ofdiversity action plans.

LC2575 2009-011340 978-1-4331-0671-2BBeeyyoonndd pprrooggrreessss aanndd mmaarrggiinnaalliizzaattiioonn;; LLGGBBTTQQ yyoouutthh iinneedduuccaattiioonnaall ccoonntteexxttss..Bertram, Corrine C. et al. (Adolescent cultures, school and society; v.48)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 316 p. $34.95 (pa)American scholars, mostly of psychology but also education and relatedfields, explore the interplay between the two narratives about youngpeople with minority sexual orientations—one that discrimination isdeclining and the other that not much has changed over the past coupledecades. Their topics include the roles of gay-straight alliance advisers inpublic high schools, attitudinal ambivalence in the development contextsof LGB adolescents, the role of educational settings in identity devel-opment among gay and bisexual male youth of color, excavating LGBTQyouth knowledge from liminal spaces, and how lesbian and gay side-kicks in mainstream US cinema can influence lesbian and gay youth andthose who work with them. The anthology is not indexed.

LC2669 2009-019791 978-0-8058-5840-2HHaannddbbooookk ooff LLaattiinnooss aanndd eedduuccaattiioonn;; tthheeoorryy,, rreesseeaarrcchh,, aannddpprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Enrique G. Murillo, Jr. et al.Routledge, ©2010 673 p. $114.95 (pa)For educational researchers, graduate students, teacher educators, andothers, Murillo (language, literacy, and culture, California State U., SanBernardino) et al. provide an overview of the scope and areas of studyrelated to Latinos and education in the US, in 48 articles that discuss edu-cational issues with respect to history, theory, and methodology; policiesand politics; language and culture; and teaching and learning. Scholarsfrom the US review theory, research, and practice related to the field,including how scholars, educators, teachers, community leaders, youths,and parents have currently and historically addressed challenges in edu-cation; the effects of globalization and transnationalism; the constructionof race and identity; the role of testing and accountability; higher edu-cation opportunities; Latino faculty; educational achievement, bilin-gualism, language socialization, families, and special education; andearly childhood education, teaching English learners, and assessment.Resources lists relate to adult/continuing education, software, demo-graphics, events, groups, libraries, internet tools, print and nonprintmedia, and parents and teachers.

LC2670 2009-024314 978-0-415-95794-6PPeerrssiisstteenntt iinneeqquuaalliittyy;; ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy rreeaalliittiieess iinn tthheeeedduuccaattiioonn ooff uunnddooccuummeenntteedd LLaattiinnaa//oo ssttuuddeennttss..López, María Pabón and Gerardo R. López. (The critical educator)Routledge, ©2010 216 p. $37.95 (pa)María (law, Indiana U.-Indianapolis) and Gerardo (education, Indiana U.-Bloomington) begin with the US Supreme Court’s 1982 Plyler v. Doe rulingthat children of people who are unlawfully present in the country shouldbe allowed to attend public schools. But that is only introduction to theirmain theme: the social, legal, and political realities facing Latino undoc-umented students and the structures that disempower them a generationlater. They consider bases for their access to public education, higher edu-cation for the undocumented and the use of student movements toachieve it, language education policy from Lau to the Unz initiative andbeyond, implications for undocumented students of accountability underNo Child Left Behind, and critical implications of racial privacy initiativesand immigration school raids.

LC2672 2009-039511 978-0-8077-5045-2FFoorrbbiiddddeenn llaanngguuaaggee;; EEnngglliisshh lleeaarrnneerrss aanndd rreessttrriiccttiivveellaanngguuaaggee ppoolliicciieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Patricia Gándara and Megan Hopkins.(Multicultural education series)Teachers College Press, ©2010 242 p. $32.95 (pa)Thirty-three American academics and researchers in bilingual educationcontribute 13 chapters presenting new research on the impact of English-only policies on English learner (EL) students and their teachers in theUS. The majority of the contributors are based in California, Arizona,and Massachusetts—three states that have passed language policies in thepast decade seriously restricting the use of bilingual instruction. The textcontains reports of recent empirical studies examining new and never-before-analyzed national and state-level data, which suggest that English-only policies not only fail to deliver on their promises but also mayactually be creating new educational and social inequalities. The text alsoexamines effective alternative instructional strategies for EL students andoutlines potential legal options to address the educational needs of ELlearners. For teachers, teacher educators, researchers, school adminis-trators, policy makers, and social activists.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –218–

LC2717 2009-021171 978-1-60709-489-0AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaann ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn lleeaaddeerrsshhiipp iinn sscchhoooollss;;bbuuiillddiinngg aa ccuullttuurree ooff eemmppoowweerrmmeenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Lenoar Foster and Linda C. Tillman.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 255 p. $29.95 (pa)The late Foster (educational leadership and higher education, WashingtonState U.) and Tillman (educational leadership, U. of North Carolina-Chapel Hill) compile 11 essays on African American school leadership,its history, constructs, and circumstances. Scholars of educational lead-ership, economics and business management, cultural studies, education,and other areas in the US discuss the relationship between racial history,spirituality, communal memory, traditions, and practices as key aspectsof African American leadership and student achievement in schools;examples of how principles and policies of African American leadershipcan empower achievement in schools across the country; and currentbarriers to achievement of African American students and the values andprinciples of African American leadership. The book is aimed at pro-fessors of educational administration, administrators, school personnel,graduate students, and scholars.

LC2771 2009-012015 978-1-60709-233-9EEdduuccaattiinngg AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaann ssttuuddeennttss;; ffoouunnddaattiioonnss,,ccuurrrriiccuulluumm,, aanndd eexxppeerriieenncceess..Title main entry. Ed. by Abdul Pitre et al. (Critical black pedagogy ineducation)Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 174 p. $24.95 (pa)After outlining the history of African American education and setting thecontext for current performance, three chapters consider the curriculumin the social sciences, mathematics and special education. Five chaptersfeaturing summaries of empirical research round out the book. The firstin a new series call Critical black pedagogy in education, this volumealso explores the larger social questions, including the apparent overrep-resentation of African American males in special education. Referencesare at the end of individual chapters, but the volume doesn’t include anindex.

LC2771 2009-017308 978-1-4129-4050-4EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaann eedduuccaattiioonn;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Kofi Lomotey.Sage Publications, ©2010 1111 p. $325.00Editor Lomotey (education, Southern U. and A&M College) was enlistedby the Sage Publications expert reference team to undertake a projectintended as a thorough presentation of topics relevant to the educationof African Americans in the US, for students, scholars, and generalreaders. Their combined efforts, along with those of a long list ofcontributors, has resulted in an accessible reference comprising 247entries ranging from approximately 1,000 words to 4,000 words. Theformat is in two volumes, entries alphabetically arranged, with broaderthematic access provided by a topical listing of entries (as well asindexing and cross referencing). Themes include curriculum, economics,legal cases, psychology and human development, public policy, andsegregation and desegregation, among others. About two-thirds of thesecond volume is taken up with the appendix, which consists of “TheComplete Bibliography of The Journal of Negro Education, 1932-2008,”briefly introduced.

LC2781 2009-043476 978-0-89789-857-7AAccaaddeemmiiccaallllyy ggiifftteedd AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaann mmaallee ccoolllleeggeessttuuddeennttss..Bonner, Fred A.Praeger, ©2010 217 p. $44.95Bonner (higher education administration and student affairs, Texas A&MU.) looks again at interviews he conducted with two academically giftedAfrican American men a decade ago, and is sad to report that the expe-riences and challenges they articulated then remain salient today. Helooks at the history of giftedness and gifted theorists, giftedness and theP-12 and collegiate African American student, the interviews themselvesand what he learned from them, and interviews with each of them 10years later. Six of his articles published over the years in various edu-cation journals follow the study. They include such topics as transitionsin the development of giftedness, capitalizing on leadership capabilityamong gifted African American males in high school, and debunking themyths of meritocratic education.

LC2781 2009-037347 978-1-4331-0768-9TTeeddiioouuss jjoouurrnneeyyss;; aauuttooeetthhnnooggrraapphhyy bbyy wwoommeenn ooff ccoolloorr iinnaaccaaddeemmee..Title main entry. Ed. by Cynthia Cole Robinson and Pauline Clardy.(Counterpoints: studies in the postmodern theory of education; v.375)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 199 p. $32.95 (pa)Robinson and Clardy begin the volume by analyzing their experiences asfemale African American professors in the culture of predominantlyWhite institutions, showing how racism and sexism are embedded in thethe cultures of the universities as well as in classrooms of a majorityWhite student population. Then other women tell their stories of atenured Latina professor, three African American junior faculty, theculture of racism in higher education, two sisters navigating identity anddiscourse at public and private White institutions, and challenges andopportunities of critical cultural feminist leadership in academe. Theanthology is not indexed.

LC2851 2009-028225 978-0-8262-1862-9IInn sseeaarrcchh ooff tthhee ttaalleenntteedd tteenntthh;; HHoowwaarrdd UUnniivveerrssiittyy ppuubblliicciinntteelllleeccttuuaallss aanndd tthhee ddiilleemmmmaass ooff rraaccee,, 11992266--11997700..Williams, Zachery R.U. of Missouri Press, ©2009 250 p. $39.95This is a history of the black public intellectual community thatdeveloped at Howard University in the era of segregation. Williams(African American history, U. of Akron) combines social, intellectual, andinstitutional history as he explores the personal and professional lives ofHoward University’s black scholars; the impact of racial segregation onthe lives of the community; and the impact of the Howard group onblack intellectual life in the United States. He argues that Howard func-tioned as a prototype for the black studies institute and helped lay thefoundations of the disciplines of black and Africana studies.

LC3275 2009-038917 978-1-4129-7802-6TTeeaacchhiinngg iinn ttwwoo llaanngguuaaggeess;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorr KK--1122 bbiilliinngguuaalleedduuccaattoorrss..Reyes, Sharon Adelman and Tatyana Kleyn.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 173 p. $31.95 (pa)Reyes (Gonzaga U.) and Kleyn (The City College of New York) provideinformation and describe strategies that they hope will aid teachersworking in bilingual K-12 settings. Each chapter begins with an overar-ching thematic question and then proceeds through thematically relatedvignettes illustrating instructional dilemmas that are linked with explicitinstructional strategies. The thematic questions addressed by the chaptersinvolve the use of two languages in the bilingual classroom, the impor-tance of culture in the bilingual classroom, the differences betweenteaching a minority language versus teaching English, approaches forteaching content to English language learners in bilingual classrooms, theeffective development of vocabulary in the bilingual classroom, strategiesfor second language instruction, the role of assessment in the bilingualclassroom, the application of bilingual curriculum and instruction tomultiple learning context, and the role of the bilingual teacher inadvocacy and promoting equity.

LC3501 978-1-921576-07-2IInnddiiggeennoouuss iissssuueess iinn AAuussttrraalliiaann uunniivveerrssiittiieess;; rreesseeaarrcchh,,tteeaacchhiinngg,, ssuuppppoorrtt..Title main entry. Ed. by Jack Frawley et al.Charles Darwin U. Press, ©2009 127 p. $28.66 (pa)Presenters at the 2006 Indigenous Higher Education Symposium held inBrisbane were invited to contribute to this anthology of stories from uni-versities across Australia at different levels of engagement withIndigenous people. Focusing on the role of institutions, some describeprogress while other focus on the remaining problems. Their topicsinclude Indigenous governance and leadership in Australian universities,work in progress at James Cook University, decolonizing researchagendas and claiming voice and power in academia, struggles and tri-umphs in the leadership struggles of university-educated Indigenouswomen, and cultural safety training for health professionals.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–219–

LC3731 2009-018072 978-1-60709-395-4WWhhaatt hhaappppeennss wwhheenn ssttuuddeennttss aarree iinn tthhee mmiinnoorriittyy;;eexxppeerriieenncceess tthhaatt iimmppaacctt hhuummaann ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Charles B. Hutchison.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 242 p. $32.95 (pa)Hutchison (U. of North Carolina at Charlotte), a former classroom teacher,compiles 31 essays written by educators in different settings that explorehow minority students experience schools and how this affects theirlearning. The educators recount their experiences becoming “consciousminorities” in specific social contexts like a church, and discuss thebehavioral patterns and teaching implications related to the minorityeffect, drawn from observations and discussion as they participated inan exercise in which they experienced being a minority in a social situ-ation. Chapters include narratives by racially different and white edu-cators, and themes from the lessons or concepts they learned, theories,and applications in the classroom. There is no index.

LC3986 2009-929350 978-1-84920-157-5TThhee mmaannuuaall ffoorr tthhee eeaarrllyy yyeeaarrss SSEENNCCOO,, 22dd eedd.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Drifte, Collette.Sage Publications, ©2010 124 p. $69.95Presenting material in a UK context, this book/CD-ROM is designed forSpecial Educational Needs Coordinators (SENCOs) working withproviders of care for children from birth to age 7. Self-contained chaptersare organized according to the SENCO’s roles and responsibilities as out-lined in the Special Educational Needs (SEN) Code of Practice. Each chapteraddresses one of these roles in the context of the early years sector, suchas policy in practice, supporting colleagues, record keeping, and part-nership with parents. A list of recommended books focuses on practical,reader-friendly titles rather than theoretical works, and an appendix listsstandards for the award of Early Years Professional Status (EYPS). TheCD-ROM contains PowerPoint slides for training sessions, plus sampleforms, polices, letters to parents, referral letters, and case studies. Drifteis a freelance author and trainer with 22 years of experience in main-stream and special education.

LC4019 2009-046577 978-1-60623-539-3WWoorrkkiinngg wwiitthh ffaammiilliieess ooff yyoouunngg cchhiillddrreenn wwiitthh ssppeecciiaallnneeeeddss..Title main entry. Ed. by R.A. McWilliam. (What works for special-needslearners)Guilford Pr., ©2010 265 p. $35.00 (pa)McWilliam, director of the Center for Child and Family Research at SiskinChildren’s Institute, presents methods for working with families of youngchildren with disabilities, based on research over the past 35 years. Thebook is based on two important theoretical and empirical frameworks:the family-centered approach and social support theory. It emphasizesfamily-friendly working methods, and describes methods for assessingfunctional needs in everyday situations, using home visits to providesupport, and consulting collaboratively with child care providers. Thebook includes a glossary of terms as well as numerous reproduciblesample checklists and assessment forms. Its readership includes profes-sionals working with families, local program administrators, and stu-dents in areas such as early children special education, social work,psychology, and speech-language.

LC4031 2009-045334 978-1-4129-7142-3AAccaaddeemmiicc iinnssttrruuccttiioonn ffoorr ssttuuddeennttss wwiitthh mmooddeerraattee aannddsseevveerree iinntteelllleeccttuuaall ddiissaabbiilliittiieess iinn iinncclluussiivvee ccllaassssrroooommss..Downing, June E.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 189 p. $35.95 (pa)General and special education teachers will find ideas on how to helpstudents with significant intellectual disabilities in the context of K-12general education classrooms. Ideas are based on empirical research andpersonal experience. The first chapter describes recommended practicesand looks at factors such as family involvement, inclusion, and positivebehavior support. Further chapters cover instructional strategies andteaching arrangements, determining student needs with variousassessment methods, teaching the core curriculum, and teaching as a col-laborative effort. Examples of progress forms are included. Downing isprofessor emerita of special education at California State University.

LC4031 2009-047381 978-1-4129-7937-5IInncclluussiioonn ssttrraatteeggiieess tthhaatt wwoorrkk!!;; rreesseeaarrcchh--bbaasseedd mmeetthhooddssffoorr tthhee ccllaassssrroooomm,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Toby J. Karten.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 390 p. $40.95 (pa)Karten, a special educator, offers a guide for K-12 general and specialeducation teachers to helping students of all abilities learn. She detailsresearch-based strategies, step-by-step practices, and activities for creatinginclusive classrooms, and addresses legal aspects and reasons forinclusion; special education terminology; writing and applying the indi-vidualized education program (IEP); addressing social, emotional, andbehavioral issues; co-teaching; instruction and assessment of the basicsand other content areas; comprehension and study skills; working withparents and families of students with disabilities; using technology; andreflecting on practice. This edition has new information on nationalmandates affecting special education.

LC4065 2009-040785 978-0-07-352604-1RReetthhiinnkkiinngg ddiissaabbiilliittyy;; aa ddiissaabbiilliittyy ssttuuddiieess aapppprrooaacchh ttooiinncclluussiivvee pprraaccttiicceess..Valle, Jan W. and David J. Connor.McGraw-Hill, ©2011 235 p. $31.25 (pa)In a series aimed at pre-service and beginning in-service teachers that ismeant to boost teacher retention, this volume by Valle (City College, CityU. of New York) and Conner (Hunter College, City U. of New York) bringstogether theory and practice in explaining how and why to implementinclusive education. They discuss inclusion through the frame of dis-ability studies in education, which offers new ways to think about dis-ability as a marker of identity and inclusive practices through a socialmodel. They address the effects of teachers’ knowledge, beliefs, andvalues on practice; misperceptions of disability; problems with themedical model of disability; how to create inclusive classrooms throughclassroom culture, assessment, and co-teaching; and acknowledging dis-ability as part of diversity.

LC4065 2009-025272 978-1-60709-471-5SSttuuddeennttss wwiitthh ddiissaabbiilliittiieess ccaann mmeeeett aaccccoouunnttaabbiilliittyyssttaannddaarrddss;; aa rrooaaddmmaapp ffoorr sscchhooooll lleeaaddeerrss..O’Connor, John.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 146 p. $27.95 (pa)O’Connor (special services, DeKalb County School System, metro Atlanta)offers guidance for education professionals who are working to improvethe performance and achievement of students with disabilities. Theauthor identifies the instructional elements needed to increaseachievement and performance and offers a step-by-step format for schooladministrators to ensure that all teachers can provide appropriateinstruction for students with disabilities.

LC4069 2009045204 978-1-4331-0673-6HHaannggiinngg iinn wwiitthh kkiiddss’’ iinn ttoouugghh ttiimmeess;; eennggaaggeemmeenntt iinnccoonntteexxttss ooff eedduuccaattiioonnaall ddiissaaddvvaannttaaggee iinn tthhee rreellaattiioonnaallsscchhooooll..Smyth, John et al. (Adolescent cultures, school & society; v.49)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 257 p. $32.95 (pa)Young people in affluent society, especially those from minority or dis-advantaged populations, are increasingly turning away from school,declining to finish high school, but Australian education researchers andinstructors Smyth, Peter McInerney (both U. of Ballarat) and Barry Down(Murdoch U.) are not convinced by the politicians and media to attributethe trend to moral laxity among both youth and “those people.” Instead,they investigate the lives, experiences, interests, aspirations, and commu-nities of the disengaged, and use that to suggest education policy that willserve the young people, the school system, and society as a whole.Among their topics are poverty and class, power and pedagogy, rela-tionships, community voice, identity formation, and reinventing the highschool.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –220–

LC4096 2009-009022 978-0-8264-3465-4MMeeeettiinngg tthhee nneeeeddss ooff ddiissaaffffeecctteedd ssttuuddeennttss;; eennggaaggiinnggssttuuddeennttss wwiitthh ssoocciiaall,, eemmoottiioonnaall aanndd bbeehhaavviioouurraallddiiffffiiccuullttiieess..Vizard, Dave.Network Continuum, ©2009 122 p. $34.95 (pa)For teachers and other educational staff, Vizard, an independent con-sultant who has taught in a variety of contexts and trains lecturers,teachers, and support workers in the UK on behavior management andteaching and learning, discusses ways to meet the needs of disaffectedstudents. He addresses causes of disaffection, using emotional literacyand impact techniques to raise self-esteem and resilience, using Neuro-Linguistic Programming, strategies for specific syndromes and condi-tions, building good relationships and creating positive learningenvironments, personalizing learning, focusing on fun, helping studentsself-manage, managing disruptive, defiant, and confrontational behavior,and developing a consistent approach.

LC4165 978-90-8790-700-6IInnssiiddee tthhee cchhiilldd’’ss hheeaadd;; hhiissttoorriieess ooff cchhiillddhhoooodd bbeehhaavviioouurraallddiissoorrddeerrss..Laurence, Jennifer and David McCallum. (Studies in inclusive edu-cation; v.1)Sense Publishers, ©2009 112 p. $39.00 (pa)Laurence and McCallum (Victoria U., Australia) trace the emergence ofbiomedical diagnoses of behavior disorders such as ADHD in childrenfrom the nineteenth century to the present. They aim to move beyond thecontemporary debate about whether the origins of childhood conduct dis-orders are biological or social and trace the historical processes by whichsocial problems are translated into biological problems, which allowthem to be a means for knowing and managing a population. Theyaddress historical shifts in understanding of conduct disorders; discussthe laboratory, schoolroom, and street as sites of emergence of conductdisorders; and examine the role of brain imaging technology like EEGand the emergence of a cognitive information processing model. Parts ofsome chapters have been previously published.

LC4705 2008-022251 978-0-205-60838-6CChhaarraacctteerriissttiiccss ooff aanndd ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr tteeaacchhiinngg ssttuuddeennttsswwiitthh mmiilldd ddiissaabbiilliittiieess,, 66tthh eedd..Henley, Martin et al.Pearson Education, ©2009 436 p. $112.00 (pa)The 6th edition of an undergraduate textbook, this volume focuses firston describing students with mild intellectual, emotional and other dis-abilities, then goes on to explore teaching strategies (including classroommanagement), ways of developing social skills in students, and buildingfamily partnerships. Written by Henly, Ramsey, and Algozzine (edu-cation, Westfield State College, Georgia U., U. North Carolina, respectively)the new edition includes additional information on Response toIntervention (RTI), use of technology, and new guidelines established bythe American Association on Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities.It also includes a new feature called “Speedbumps” which breaks up textwith shaded areas featuring comments, humor, or questions.

LC4717 2009-029380 978-1-84905-052-4SSuucccceessssffuull sscchhooooll cchhaannggee aanndd ttrraannssiittiioonn ffoorr tthhee cchhiilldd wwiitthhAAssppeerrggeerr ssyynnddrroommee;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorr ppaarreennttss..Lawrence, Clare.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 156 p. $24.95 (pa)Lawrence, a teacher, autism worker, school governor, and mother of achild with Asperger’s syndrome, helps parents of children withAsperger’s syndrome, as well as teachers and education professionals,prepare their child to move to a new school. She addresses choosing theright school, supporting the child before, during, and after the transition,and identifying and practicing the new social rules and expectations ofthe school. Focusing on transitions from primary to secondary school,she suggests such strategies as identifying a named adult and “safehaven,” identifying useful technologies, looking at strategies to minimizedistress at leaving the old school, and monitoring and supportinghomework.

LC4717 2009-038375 978-1-59363-382-0SSuucccceessss ssttrraatteeggiieess ffoorr tteeaacchhiinngg kkiiddss wwiitthh aauuttiissmm..Ashcroft, Wendy et al.Prufrock Press Inc., ©2010 242 p. $19.95 (pa)Ashcroft (education, Christian Brothers U.) et al., special educationteachers who lead a support program for children with autism, compilestrategies they have used when teaching autistic students. Strategies arebased on applied behavior analysis, which they overview, with method-ologies and strategies that have been developed using it. They illustratehow strategies such as visual supports, work systems, and sensory ormusic activities can be used to change behavior and accomplishIndividualized Education Programs objectives. They also explain thecharacteristics of autism, what makes a successful education program forautistic children, and creating an evidence-based classroom. There is noindex.

LC4718 2009-041555 978-0-205-54575-9AAuuttiissmm ssppeeccttrruumm ddiissoorrddeerrss;; ffoouunnddaattiioonnss,, cchhaarraacctteerriissttiiccss,,aanndd eeffffeeccttiivvee ssttrraatteeggiieess..Boutot, E. Amanda and Brenda Smith Myles.Pearson Education, ©2010 310 p. $48.00 (pa)Boutot (Texas State U.) and Myles, chief of programs for the AutismSociety of America, present an introductory textbook on the range of dis-orders for pre-service and in-service teachers seeking a deeper under-standing of autism and a clear explanation of intervention strategies. Itcan be used for special and general education courses or for courses inrelated fields such as psychology and speech pathology that touch on theautism spectrum lightly. Each chapter starts with learning objectives andcase studies and ends with a summary, review questions, a list of keyterms, and Internet and print resources. Among the topics areassessment for the purpose of instructional planning, evidence-based edu-cation practices, working with families, applied behavior analysis, socialchallenges of children and youth with autism spectrum disorders,assistive technology, and transition and adulthood.

LC4813 2009-027979 978-1-890627-95-9TThhee ppoowweerr ttoo sspprriinngg uupp;; ppoossttsseeccoonnddaarryy eedduuccaattiioonnooppppoorrttuunniittiieess ffoorr ssttuuddeennttss wwiitthh ssiiggnniiffiiccaanntt ddiissaabbiilliittiieess..Katovitch, Diana M.Woodbine House, ©2009 265 p. $24.95 (pa)Katovitch, a special education teacher, offers a guide to postsecondaryeducation (PSE) and vocational and life skills training for disabled stu-dents ages 14 and up with a variety of significant disabilities, includingautism spectrum disorders (ASD), Down syndrome, cerebral palsy, andacquired brain injury. The beginning chapters outline reasons to makepostsecondary education available to all disabled students, and reviewswhat special education law does and does not support as children moveinto adulthood. The second half of the book profiles a dozen programsthe author has visited in person, ranging from a modified academicprogram on a university campus, to a vocational residential programdesigned for students with special needs. The book closes with shortchapters of practical advice for students, their parents, and their sec-ondary school teachers, related to self-advocacy skills, financial planning,and the application process. The book is for students, their families,advocates, and secondary school professionals.

LC4813 2009-038321 978-1-59857-016-8PPrreeppaarriinngg ssttuuddeennttss wwiitthh ddiissaabbiilliittiieess ffoorr ccoolllleeggee ssuucccceessss;; aapprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttoo ttrraannssiittiioonn ppllaannnniinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Stan F. Shaw et al.Brookes Publishing, ©2010 293 p. $34.95 (pa)During their pre-college education, students with disabilities generallyhave the support of an interdisciplinary team of professionals andparents who often make decisions for the student related to courseworkand accommodations; once they enter higher education, students arefaced with a challenging, increasing need for self-determination. In thispractical text, 15 American academics, researchers, disability specialists,and independent consultants contribute 11 chapters outlining the com-plexities students with disabilities face in making the transition tocollege, and offering a variety of practical solutions and strategies to helpstudents throughout the process. Using vignettes, tips, and activities, thetext translates current research in a user-friendly format to guide studentsand their families. Each chapter focuses on early, coordinated, student-centered planning to help students develop the academic and personalskills needed for a successful adjustment to college. For secondary edu-cators, transition specialists, postsecondary support professionals, andstudents with disabilities and their parents.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–221–

LC4818 2009-028524 978-1-84905-050-0AAddddrreessssiinngg tthhee uunnpprroodduuccttiivvee ccllaassssrroooomm bbeehhaavviioouurrss ooffssttuuddeennttss wwiitthh ssppeecciiaall nneeeeddss..Chinn, Stephen J.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 142 p. $32.95 (pa)Chinn, founder of an award-winning school for students with dyslexia inthe UK, provides easy-to-use screening checklist for identifying learningproblems, such as Asperger syndrome, dyslexia and dyspraxia, ADHD,and speech-language disorders, and outlines strategies for addressingproblem behaviors and improving students’ self-esteem and social skills.The first half of the book covers classroom behaviors and how to rec-ognize common and uncommon learning disabilities. The second halfreviews relevant theories, including Gardner’s multiple intelligences andtransactional analysis, to help teachers understand classroom behaviorsof students with special needs. A list of useful organizations is included.The book is for those working in primary and secondary schools.

LC5131 2003-026733 978-1-4331-0886-01199 uurrbbaann qquueessttiioonnss;; tteeaacchhiinngg iinn tthhee cciittyy,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Shirley R. Steinberg. (Counterpoints; studies inthe postmodern theory of education; v.215)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 311 p. $45.95 (pa)Why is urban education different from suburban and rural education?How do we locate resistance in urban schools? What does it mean to bein a gang? How do we teach towards a critical bilingual/bicultural urbanpedagogy? Steinberg, director of the Paulo and Nita Freire Project forCritical Pedagogy, gathers teacher and scholars engaged in a social justiceurban pedagogy to ask direct questions related to urban schools, teachereducation, and urban school research. The questions and answers aredesigned to stimulate classroom discussion and generate further dis-course in the field of education. The book is grounded in critical ped-agogy, which recognizes that educators work with students within theirown cultural context. B&w classroom photos are included. This secondedition adds new questions and a new brief afterword, while retainingthe original brief afterword from the first edition. There is no subjectindex.

LC5131 978-94-6091-078-4BBeeyyoonndd sstteerreeoottyyppeess;; mmiinnoorriittyy cchhiillddrreenn ooff iimmmmiiggrraannttss iinnuurrbbaann sscchhoooollss..Title main entry. Ed. by Rupam Saran and Rosalina Diaz.(Transgressions; cultural studies and education)Sense Publishers, ©2010 233 p. $29.00 (pa)Saran and Diaz (education, Medgar Evers College, City U. of New York)compile 10 chapters by education and immigration scholars, researchers,and educators from the US who provide research on the effects of ethnicstereotyping on the educational outcomes of youth who are minoritychildren of immigrants in America. They present life stories, histories,and experiences of these youths in the context of urban schools andAmerican society and how they contradict their stereotyped images andunravel social, cultural, and educational issues that affect school experi-ences and shape their identities. Arguing that their actions are controlledby a desire to gain power by achieving academic success or by becomingAmerican at the cost of academics, they consider Asian Americans,Latinas and Latinos, Muslim-American women, and working classwomen, and issues of underachievement, behavior problems, academicsuccess, identity, marginalization, math and science experiences, schoolengagement, and youth culture and peer status among children in NewYork and London. No index is provided.

LC5131 2009-931672 978-1-934742-40-2BBrriinnggiinngg sscchhooooll rreeffoorrmm ttoo ssccaallee;; ffiivvee aawwaarrdd--wwiinnnniinngguurrbbaann ddiissttrriiccttss..Zavadsky, Heather.Harvard Education Press, ©2009 335 p. $29.95 (pa)Zavadsky (policy and communications, Institute for Public SchoolInitiatives, U. of Texas), who has served as a project director of the BroadPrize, examines five school districts that have been honored recently bythe Broad Foundation, whose annual award is granted to urban schooldistricts that show the greatest overall performance and improvement instudent achievement while also reducing achievement gaps among poorand minority students. She details the successes of the Long Beach andGarden Grove Unified School Districts in California, Norfolk PublicSchools in Virginia, Boston Public Schools, and Aldine IndependentSchool District in Texas, and the paths they have taken over years offocus on the sustainable improvement of teaching and learning and thealignment reforms at all levels of their systems, through use of an orga-nizational schema. She then compares the districts through the NationalCenter for Educational Achievement Best Practice Framework themes andother factors.

LC5800 2009-014489 978-1-60709-283-4LLeexxiiccoonn ooff oonnlliinnee aanndd ddiissttaannccee lleeaarrnniinngg..Tomei, Lawrence A.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2010 267 p. $99.00In this resource for educators, technologists, and students involved in dis-tance learning, Tomei (education, Robert Morris U., Pittsburgh, PA) anda team of about a 100 experts in the fields of education and technologypresent some 800 alphanumeric citations for terms from “10Base-T” and“academic integrity” to “XML scripting language” and “zero tolerance.”To help users speak a common vocabulary, citations are categorizedaccording to their taxonomic specificity as general, educational, techno-logical, instructional, or distance education terms. Citations—most in the50-150 word range—include the term’s definition, references, relatedterms and acronyms. Seom Terms may have multiple citations.

LC5803 2009-043101 978-1-61520-672-8DDiissttaannccee lleeaarrnniinngg tteecchhnnoollooggyy,, ccuurrrreenntt iinnssttrruuccttiioonn,, aanndd tthheeffuuttuurree ooff eedduuccaattiioonn;; aapppplliiccaattiioonnss ooff ttooddaayy,, pprraaccttiicceess ooffttoommoorrrrooww..Title main entry. Ed. by Holim Song.Information Science Reference, ©2010 387 p. $180.00This work explores technical foundations, applications, best practices,and challenges of distance education. Contributors include teachers,researchers, and practitioners from around the world. Some areasstudied include integrating contemporary technology into classroom ped-agogy, theory and practice of online social constructivism, technologiesand practices for lecture capture, and societal issues, legal standards, andinternational realities that universities face in the distance-learningmarket. The book’s readership includes university faculty, K-12 edu-cators, instructional designers, and those developing distance educationin international communities. Song teaches in instructional technology atTexas Southern University.

LC5803 2009-047891 978-1-60566-380-7HHaannddbbooookk ooff rreesseeaarrcchh oonn hhyybbrriidd lleeaarrnniinngg mmooddeellss;;aaddvvaanncceedd ttoooollss,, tteecchhnnoollooggiieess,, aanndd aapppplliiccaattiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Fu Lee Wang et al.Information Science Reference, ©2010 571 p. $295.00Hybrid learning (or blended learning) combines face-to-face instructionwith computer-mediated instruction. This book collects work from Asia,Europe, the US, and Australia by professionals in education and engi-neering, describing recent ideas and projects in hybrid leaning.Education theories and e-learning and hybrid learning models areaddressed, and case studies of software implementation and use aregiven. Some chapters discuss advantages of hybrid learning over tradi-tional education. Specific subjects explored include using metanotation asa tool for describing learning systems, the use of podcasting and digitalaudio in higher education, hybrid inquiry-based learning, anddeployment of a web-based critiquing systems for essay writing in hybridlearning. Wang is affiliated with Caritas Francis Hsu College, Hong Kong.

LD729 2009-043178 978-0-87772-435-3TThhee ppeeooppllee’’ss uunniivveerrssiittyy;; aa hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee CCaalliiffoorrnniiaa SSttaatteeUUnniivveerrssiittyy..Gerth, Donald R.Inst. of Governmental Studies, ©2010 664 p. $35.00 (pa)For faculty, students, staff, alumni, and others, Gerth, who served as aCalifornia State U. president for 27 years, presents a history of theCalifornia State U. system, from its founding as a single institution in SanFrancisco in 1857 to the present-day system of 23 campuses. He detailsits development from teachers’ colleges to state colleges to comprehensivestate institutions, the Master Plan for Higher Education, the impact oftechnology, and its undergraduate and graduate programs, purpose, stu-dents, alumni, faculty, staff, organization, governance, financial admin-istration, and future.

LD3241 2008-043570 978-0-8214-1827-7MMiiaammii UUnniivveerrssiittyy,, 11880099--22000099;; bbiicceenntteennnniiaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Curtis W. Ellison.Ohio University Press, ©2009 459 p. $50.00 (pa)In honor of the bicentennial of the college, Ellison (history and Americanstudies, Miami U.) tells the story of Miami U.’s evolution from a smallmidwestern college in Ohio to an international university. He draws onarchival materials, oral histories, and firsthand accounts to detail thehistory of the Miami people in the region, the origins of the institutionin 1809, its Presbyterian heritage, early students and their activities, theMiami Classical and Scientific Training School, its colleges for women,the emergence of professional schools, and athletics, school traditions,planning and building strategies, school life, expansion, and programsthroughout its history, along with illustrations, photos, and facsimiles ofdocuments.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –222–

LD3781 2009-030304 978-0-8263-4812-8TThhee UUnniivveerrssiittyy ooff NNeeww MMeexxiiccoo..Price, V. B. Photographs by Van Dorn Hooker.U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 — p. $34.95This book is essentially a photographic essay of the unique University ofNew Mexico supported by explanatory text. Award-winning author Priceand internationally-known architectural and interior design photog-rapher Reck collaborate to more than adequately explore and define whatit is that makes the university more than an educational facility. Theplace, as the author and photographer explain, is not only an outstandinguniversity, but also a unique esthetic environment. Oversize: 9x11.5″.

LD4168 2009-028715 978-0-8214-1887-1CCoonnssttrruuccttiinngg BBllaacckk eedduuccaattiioonn aatt OObbeerrlliinn CCoolllleeggee;; aaddooccuummeennttaarryy hhiissttoorryy..Baumann, Roland M.Ohio University Press, ©2010 418 p. $65.00Oberlin College was the first American college to admit students of color.Oberlin’s 175-year history of the education of African-American students,from the college’s original 1835 resolution through informal discrimi-nation, tokenism, renewed commitment to equality, black separatism,and multiculturalism, is chronicled here with 30 annotated archival doc-uments from the college’s archives. The documents are presented in fivechronological chapters. Each chapter includes chapter and documentintroductions, providing a context for understanding Oberlin’s place inthe history of American higher education and in the history of African-American education. A wealth of b&w historical photos is included.Baumann is emeritus archivist and professor of history at OberlinCollege.

LF123 2009-016692 978-1-84545-685-6RReefflleeccttiioonnss oonn CCaammbbrriiddggee..Macfarlane, Alan.Social Science Press, India, ©2009 223 p. $24.95 (pa)For students, colleagues, and others associated or interested in the uni-versity, Macfarlane, who has been a professor of anthropological scienceat the U. of Cambridge for almost 40 years, describes the history, culture,customs, society, colleges, associations, community, ideas, and politics ofthe U. of Cambridge in the UK, based on his experiences and reflections.Along the way, he addresses the ways that the university has helped orhindered intellectual creativity over the centuries, and the university as amicrocosm of English national character and within the context of Asiancultures and other periods of English history. Distributed by BerghahnBooks.

LG53 2009-007382 978-1-4384-2913-7TThhee mmaakkiinngg ooff aa ffaammiillyy ssaaggaa;; GGiinnlliinngg CCoolllleeggee..Feng, Jin.State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 314 p. $80.00Feng (Chinese and Japanese, Grinnell College) chronicles the history ofGinling College, a women’s college in China founded by WesternChristian missionaries. Ginling’s mixing of a Christian education withthe Confucian ideal of family life gave the school a remarkably stronginfluence on China, given its relatively short life (less than 50 years) andsmall number of graduates (just over 1000). Relying largely on writtenand oral records from the Western and Chinese women who foundedand ran the school, Feng shows how Ginling’s self-identity as a familywas a source of both strength and conflict (especially during its twoperiods of exile from its home in Nanjing). This well-written andscholarly book will not only appeal to academics, but also to generalreaders interested in China.

MMUUSSIICC

ML74 2009-924519 978-1-4354-5419-4MMyySSppaaccee ffoorr mmuussiicciiaannss;; tthhee ccoommpprreehheennssiivvee gguuiiddee ttoommaarrkkeettiinngg yyoouurr mmuussiicc oonnlliinnee,, 22dd eedd..Vincent, Fran.Course Technology PTR, ©2011 377 p. $34.99 (pa)Vincent, a musician and marketing and public relations specialist whois associated with a social media, web PR, and music industry consultingfirm, describes how musicians can design a MySpace page for pro-moting, distributing, and marketing their music. She introduces the siteand social media, and discusses what type of account to open, featuresof the site, customizing a profile and page, adding friends, using themusic player, creating bulletins and blogs, email marketing, and security.This edition has been updated to include recent changes to the site andhas new chapters on applications, videos, widgets, and advertising.

ML105 2009-933313 978-1-4354-5441-5FFuullll mmeettaall JJaacckkiiee cceerrttiiffiieedd;; tthhee 5500 mmoosstt iinnfflluueennttiiaall hheeaavvyymmeettaall ssoonnggss ooff tthhee ‘‘8800ss,, aanndd tthhee ttrruuee ssttoorriieess bbeehhiinndd tthheeiirrllyyrriiccss..Kajzer, Jackie and Roger Lotring. Photographs by Mark Weiss.Course Technology PTR, ©2010 337 p. $29.99 (pa)If you could get a degree in heavy metal, both authors of this book wouldhave PhDs. Using that background, they selected the fifty songs that (intheir opinion) had the most influence in the genre during the 1980s, andthen interviewed the writers of those songs. These interviews (includingmusicians such as Ronnie James Dio, Lita Ford, Dee Snider, and GeoffTate) will surprise many outside the genre, as they show heavy metaltunesmiths to be intelligent, sensitive, and insightful—and prove thatthere was much more to 1980s heavy metal music than big hair, powerchords, and smoke bombs.

ML128 2008-043968 978-0-7864-3399-5TThhee OOffff BBrrooaaddwwaayy mmuussiiccaall,, 11991100--22000077;; ccaasstt,, ccrreeddiittss,, ssoonnggss,,ccrriittiiccaall rreecceeppttiioonn aanndd ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee ddaattaa ooff mmoorree tthhaann11,,880000 sshhoowwss..Dietz, Dan.McFarland & Co., ©2010 648 p. $295.00Dietz, a former professor of composition, world literature, and moderndrama at West Carolina U., catalogs 1,804 Off Broadway, Off OffBroadway, showcase, workshop, and cabaret musicals which opened inNew York from 1910 to 2007. He includes performance pieces, magicshows, and mime shows and plays with incidental songs, as well asAmerican operas. Information listed includes the identification tag; nameof the theatre; opening date; number of performances; names of thelibrettist, sketch writer, lyricist, composer, director, choreographer,designers, musical director, producer, and cast; the source; setting andtime period; number of acts; and titles of songs. Notes follow, whichaddress plot, critical comments, albums, film versions, and other infor-mation. Appendices include a discography, filmography, and lists ofblack, children’s, gay, Jewish, women’s, and burlesque musicals andrevues, as well as others like musicals based on Shakespeare, and thoseby specific composers or producers. Indexes are by song, name, andtheatre.

ML134 2009-037017 978-0-8108-7264-6DDmmiittrrii SShhoossttaakkoovviicchh ccaattaalloogguuee;; tthhee ffiirrsstt hhuunnddrreedd yyeeaarrssaanndd bbeeyyoonndd,, 44tthh eedd..Hulme, Derek C.Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 784 p. $160.00Hulme, a jet engine designer and dance-band trumpeter who has pub-lished articles and recording notes on Dmitri Shostakovich, catalogs allknown musical compositions by the Russian composer. The catalog listsabout 175 major works, presented chronologically and by opus number,their titles and subtitles, dates of composition, instrumentation, form,and duration; information on dedications and premieres; arrangementsby the composer and others; publication details; notes on bibliographicalreferences and the location of the autograph score; and fully detailedlistings of recordings and videos. Indexes are by name and composition,and appendices include lists of film, radio, TV, and theater productions;abandoned and obscure works; and the monogram DSCH and the motifin his compositions. This edition includes a chronological chart of hisworks and historical events, new recordings, and some photos.

ML166 2008-043894 978-1-84553-409-7AA ccoommppeennddiiuumm ooff mmuussiiccaall iinnssttrruummeennttss aanndd iinnssttrruummeennttaalltteerrmmiinnoollooggyy iinn tthhee BBiibbllee..Kolyada, Yelena. (BibleWorld)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 304 p. $140.00Russian music scholar Kolyada revised her 1987 Ph.D. dissertation at theVilnius Conservatory for publication in 2003 by Kompozitor, Moscow,and translated it herself for this English edition, with the assistance ofDavid J. Clark. The instruments and related topics are considered inalphabetical order as transliterated from the original Hebrew, Greek,Persian, or other ancient language. The chapters cover instrumentalmusic of the Bible, plucked stringed instruments, wind instruments, per-cussion instruments, ambivalent instrumental terms, generic and unclearmusical terms, and biblical musical instruments in post-biblical sourcesand in Bible translations. Distributed in North America by The DavidBrown Book Co.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–223–

ML410 2009-014492 978-0-8108-6657-7TThhee aauutthheennttiicc MMaaggiicc fflluuttee lliibbrreettttoo;; MMoozzaarrtt’’ss aauuttooggrraapphh oorrtthhee ffiirrsstt ffuullll ssccoorree eeddiittiioonn??..Freyhan, Michael.Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 277 p. $65.00Musicologist Freyhan makes a radical suggestion in this study of thelibretto of Mozart’s The Magic Flute, He posits that the first printededition is actually taken from a lost autograph manuscript that predatesthe one written by Mozart that has long been considered the ur-version.His argument involves the travels of the known manuscript and the meninvolved with it as well as contemporary comments on the content of thefirst performances of the opera. Various editions were consulted andcompared. Freyhan also explores Mozart’s work habits to determine thepossibility of a second holographic manuscript. He concludes with theGerman text as printed with a literal translation in English. Whether ornot the reader is convinced by Freyhan’s suggestions, the research intothe background of the libretto will intrigue anyone fascinated by Mozartand his Masonic opera.

ML410 2009-032277 978-0-8108-7260-8TThhee bbaarrtteerreedd bbrriiddee——PPrrooddaannáá nneevveessttaa;; ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee gguuiiddeewwiitthh ttrraannssllaattiioonnss aanndd pprroonnuunncciiaattiioonn..Cheek, Timothy.Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 301 p. $45.00 (pa)For singers and coaches, conductors, stage directors, and amateurs andprofessionals, Cheek, a pianist, vocal coach, and professor of performingarts at the U. of Michigan who specializes in Czech vocal music, providesa performance guide to Czech composer Bedrich Smetana’s comic opera,The Bartered Bride. Focusing on Czech and English-language perform-ances, he presents instructions for singing the work in Czech, Englishtranslations of the complete libretto and International Phonetic Alphabetfor Czech pronunciation, and translations of stage and musical direc-tions. He includes a performance history, synopsis, musical comments,discussion of the roles, and notes on the dances and choreographers.

ML410 2009-280586 978-1-84383-460-1EErriikk CChhiisshhoollmm,, SSccoottttiisshh mmooddeerrnniisstt,, 11990044--11996655;; cchhaassiinngg aarreessttlleessss mmuussee..Purser, John.Boydell & Brewer, ©2009 283 p. $95.00Purser (Research fellow, Sabhal Mòr Ostaig [Scotland]) brings us the firstcomprehensive biography of Erik Chisholm, Scotland’s most importantclassical composer during the first half of the twentieth century. Thebook presents Chisholm in all his aspects (pianist and organist,conductor, composer, lecturer, entrepreneur, and administrator) andfollows his life from Glasgow to Singapore and and Cape Town.Chisholm also brought many important composers to Scotland for thefirst time, including Bartók and Hindemith, and these visits are fullydescribed. Generously illustrated, this book will interest scholars andstudents of twentieth century music in general and that of Scotland’smusic in particular.

ML410 2009-018010 978-0-8108-6977-6FFrraannccoo AAllffaannoo;; ttrraannsscceennddiinngg TTuurraannddoott..Dryden, Konrad.Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 203 p. $40.00 (pa)Dryden (music and German, U. of Maryland University College-Europe)offers a biography of neglected Italian composer Franco Alfano (1875-1954), who was chosen to complete Puccini’s Turandot in 1924. Drydenpresents Alfano’s view of the events relating to his selection to completethe opera (as opposed to the Toscanini/Puccini perspective), as well as hislife and his major operas and their literary origins, including Cyrano deBergerac and Don Juan de Manara. Dryden draws from unpublished cor-respondence he translated, and discussions with the composer’s latedaughter, Nina. Previously unpublished photos are included.

ML410 2009-025401 978-0-8108-6997-4GGeeoorrggee RRuusssseellll;; tthhee ssttoorryy ooff aann AAmmeerriiccaann ccoommppoosseerr..Heining, Duncan. (African American cultural theory and heritage)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 373 p. $55.00This biography is the first to recount the life and career of jazz composer,bandleader, drummer, educator, and theorist George Russell (b. 1923).Heining draws from interviews with Russell, his friends, family, musi-cians, associates, and commentators to describe his relationships withmusicians like Charlie Parker, Dizzy Gillespie, and Bill Evans; how hedealt with racism in his early life and career in Cincinnati; his devel-opment of the Lydian Chromatic Concept of Tonal Organization; his com-positions and recordings; and aspects of his life such as his adoption andillnesses from tuberculosis. Heining also aims to explain why Russell isless well-known and regarded than his achievements deserve. Heining isa record reviewer for Jazz Journal International and Storyville.

ML410 2009-015762 978-0-7546-6412-3GGiillbbeerrtt aanndd SSuulllliivvaann;; ccllaassss aanndd tthhee SSaavvooyy ttrraaddiittiioonn,, 11887755--11889966..Oost, Regina B. (The nineteenth century series)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 168 p. $99.95Oost (English, Wesleyan College, Georgia) examines a neglected characterin the story of Gilbert and Sullivan, the man who advanced the money,set the stage and promoted the operas, Richard D’Oyly Carte. Whileacknowledging the brilliance of the collaboration, she demonstrates thatthe success of the early operas was partially due to the publicity acumenof Carte. In this study, Oost covers the London theater scene that wastheir competition and shows how Carte used advertising and promo-tional gimmicks to set up anticipation for the operas. He placed ads innewspapers, produced elegant programs to give to patrons and offeredthe librettos for sale so that, eventually, audiences knew the words oftheir favorites and sang them with friends. The content of the operas isalso mentioned, especially the insertion of familiar themes and char-acters to satisfy the expectations of the audience. Gilbert and Sullivanwere aware, as much as Carte, that the target audience of middle andupper class theater goers required familiarity along with innovation. Thetalent of Carte equaled that of his composer and author. With illustra-tions from the time and photographs of early performances, this is anenjoyable and informative book that will fascinate the many devotees ofthe “Savoy operas”.

ML410 2009-036620 978-1-58046-309-6JJaannáácceekk bbeeyyoonndd tthhee bboorrddeerrss..Katz, Derek. (Eastman studies in music; v.72)U. of Rochester Press, ©2009 175 p. $80.00In this critical and interpretive study of Leos Janácek’s major operas,Katz (Music History, University of California Santa Barbara) questionsestablished views of the composer’s relationship to the Czech languageand Slavic culture. Instead, argues the author, Janácek developed hisoperatic aesthetic through emulation and creative adaptation of elementsof major operas from the French, Italian, and German traditions. Katzalso discusses the composer’s notorious “speech-melody” theories and fas-cination with Russia. The text is accompanied by many musicalexamples.

ML410 2009-016959 978-0-7546-6022-4JJoonnaatthhaann HHaarrvveeyy;; SSoonngg ooffffeerriinnggss aanndd WWhhiittee aass jjaassmmiinnee..Downes, Michael. (Landmarks in music since 1950)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 149 p. $69.95Downes (music, U. of St. Andrews, Scotland) analyzes two works byBritish composer Harvey, Song Offerings (1985) and White as Jasmine(1999), characterizing them as succinct, concise pieces in which a clearsense of movement is maintained from beginning to end. His goal is toelucidate, explain, and place into context features of the musical structurethat listeners will be able to hear. At all points, he refers to track numbersof the accompanying compact disk with recordings of performances byLondon Sinfonietta and BBC Scottish Symphony Orchestra. In addition tothe particular pieces, he discusses Harvey’s musical development fromthe 1950s to the 1980s, metaphysical preoccupations in his music, and hismusic in the 21st century.

ML410 2009-017747 978-0-7546-6484-0LLeeoonnaarrdd BBeerrnnsstteeiinn,, WWeesstt SSiiddee ssttoorryy.. ((CCDD iinncclluuddeedd))Simeone, Nigel. (Landmarks in music since 1950)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 177 p. $69.95Simeone (historical musicology, U. of Sheffield, UK) examines the originsand creation of Leonard Bernstein’s West Side Story. He discussesBernstein’s work in theater up to 1957, the collaborative process of themusical, early sketches and drafts of the score and script, and its musicalcharacteristics and compositional techniques, such as motivic devel-opment, the use and reinvention of Broadway and other conventions, thecreation of dramatic continuity, dissonance and rhythmic complexity,and the integration of Latin-American dance forms. He also addresses themusical’s reception and financing and the making of the originalBroadway cast recording, which is included on the accompanying CD. Hedoes not discuss the film version.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –224–

ML410 2009-515051 978-88-222-5838-0VViivvaallddii aanndd ffuugguuee..Talbot, Michael. (Studi di musica veneta. Quaderni vivaldiani; 15)Leo S. Olschki Publishing, ©2009 260 p. $40.80 (pa)Vivaldi is not known particularly for his fugues, but his use of the formbegan in the early years of his activity and continued almost to the end.Talbot, who has studied the works of Vivaldi for many years, feels thathis talent for fugue has been overlooked. In this study, he reviews thehistory of fugue and the ways in which Vivaldi used the form in subtleand personal ways. He reviews selected works and categories of work inturn, including many music examples, as he identifies the fugal elementswithin each composition. Musicians and music students will be fasci-nated by this little-studied aspect of Vivaldi’s art. Leo S. OschikiPublishing is based in Florence, Italy; there is no US distributor.

ML410 2009-052379 978-0-313-34969-0TThhee wwoorrddss aanndd mmuussiicc ooff PPaauull MMccCCaarrttnneeyy;; tthhee ssoolloo yyeeaarrss..Benitez, Vincent Perez. (Praeger singer-songwriter collection)Praeger, ©2010 208 p. $44.95Benitez (music, Pennsylvania State U.) analyzes McCartney’s compositionafter his time with The Beatles, beginning with his 1970 albumMcCartney and through the 2007 Memory Almost Full. The focus is on theelements of his musical language, and how he integrates music and textinto a unified song. His time with the band Wings is represented by suchalbums as Band on the Run (1973) and London Town (1978); his collabo-rations with others 1980-89 by six albums, among them /Pipes of Peaceand Flowers in the Dirt. Final sections look at classical music, Beatlesreunions, and musical roots 1991-99 and renewal 2000-2007. A biogra-phical sketch is also included.

ML410 2009-050174 978-0-313-35594-3TThhee wwoorrddss aanndd mmuussiicc ooff JJoonnii MMiittcchheellll..Bennighof, James. (Praeger singer-songwriter collection)Praeger, ©2010 213 p. $44.95Benninghof (music theory, Baylor U., Texas) analyzes the work ofCanadian singer-songwriter Mitchell, who came up through the folkscene during the 1960s, and has made a mark in several genres. Focusingmostly on her own recordings, he considers all 167 songs on her albumsover the past 45 years. After a brief biography, he looks at stylistic con-texts, out of the urban folk tradition, the personal voice, new perspectives,to jazz and back, to technology and back and consolidation.

ML419 2009-012628 978-0-8166-6678-2MMiiddnniigghhtt aatt tthhee BBaarrrreellhhoouussee;; tthhee JJoohhnnnnyy OOttiiss ssttoorryy..Lipsitz, George.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 235 p. $24.95Written by Lipsitz (black studies and sociology, U. of California), this isthe first full biography of the “godfather of R&B,” Johhny Otis, amusician, bandleader, radio host, politician, church pastor, and busi-nessman, among other hats he has worn in his life. One of the keythemes of the biography is how Otis, the son of Greek immigrants, choseto become “Black by persuasion,” embracing the collective identity ofBlack people in a white supremacist society, and the implications of thischoice for issues of race and identity in America.

ML420 2010-563210 978-0-8264-2965-0LLiittttllee RRiicchhaarrdd;; tthhee bbiirrtthh ooff rroocckk ‘‘nn’’ rroollll..Kirby, David.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 218 p. $19.95Kirby (English, Florida State U.) offers a short biography of Little Richardthat places his song “Tutti Frutti” at the origin of rock ‘n’ roll. Throughinterviews with relatives and locals and other sources, he describes LittleRichard in the days before his career in Macon, Georgia, within thecontext of the town and music at the time; the recording of “Tutti Frutti”;his impact on teen culture; and his place in history, showbiz persona, hismovie roles, and concerts.

ML420 2009-032879 978-0-8108-7256-1RRaammbblliinn’’ JJaacckk EElllliiootttt;; tthhee nneevveerr--eennddiinngg hhiigghhwwaayy..Reineke, Hank. (American folk music and musicians series; no.12)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 397 p. $55.00 (pa)Reineke, a music writer and research consultant, provides the first biog-raphy of folk singer and guitarist Ramblin’ Jack Elliot (b. 1931), whichshows how his career parallels the rise of folk music’s renaissance fromthe 1940s through the present. He describes Elliott’s relationships withand influences on folk, rock, and country artists, most notably WoodyGuthrie and Bob Dylan. He focuses on Elliott’s career and music andalbums recorded from 1954 to 2009, including his role in bringingAmerican folk music to English and European audiences beginning inthe 1950s. Discographies of solo and other recordings are included.

ML420 2009-035881 978-0-393-33861-4WWhheerree hhaavvee aallll tthhee fflloowweerrss ggoonnee;; aa ssiinnggaalloonngg mmeemmooiirr,,rreevv.. eedd.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Seeger, Pete. Ed. by Michael Miller and Sarah A. Elisabeth.Sing Out!, ©2009 313 p. $24.95This is a musical autobiography of American folksinger/activist PeteSeeger (1919- ). This revision of the 1993 and 1997 editions includes back-stories on how he created his many songs, including the title Vietnamprotest song. The book features original and adapted versions of songs,“Take It from Dr. King”—a newer song honoring the civil rights leader,photos of family and fellow singers, drawings, notes on musical notation,a bibliography, discography, and new to this edition, a companion CDwith 267 audio files that correspond to links in the book.

ML421 2009-046477 978-0-313-36523-2UU22;; aa mmuussiiccaall bbiiooggrraapphhyy..Kootnikoff, David. (The story of the band)Greenwood Press, ©2010 173 p. $35.00For high school students and general readers, Kootnikoff, a Canadianwriter based in Hong Kong, offers a biography of the band U2, fromtheir origins in 1976, early years, and talent show win that got them theirfirst recording contract, to their critically acclaimed albums, tours, andsupport for human rights. He traces their commercial success, singlesand shows, international success with The Joshua Tree, and other albumssuch as Achtung Baby, Zooropa, All That You Can’t Leave Behind, and NoLine on the Horizon.

ML422 2009-543458 978-1-84383-517-2TThhee ggeenniiuuss ooff VVaallhhaallllaa;; tthhee lliiffee ooff RReeggiinnaalldd GGooooddaallll..Lucas, John.Boydell & Brewer, ©2009 231 p. $27.95 (pa)This 1993 biography of British conductor Reginald Goodall has beenupdated by Lucas, who knew Goodall and had access to his papers aswell as being intimately acquainted with the British world of opera.Lucas covers Goodall’s childhood in Lincoln and his days as a choristerthere as well as his relationship with his family. But the main thrust ofthe book is his musical development, especially as an interpreter ofBritten and Wagner. The ups and downs of his career are followed,exposing the intricacies of opera politics. Goodall’s long-time refusal tobelieve in Nazi atrocities is also discussed, but it is clear that this wasnot the reason for his fall from favor in England after the war. Operafans will be fascinated by this behind the scenes account of a great con-ductor in his milieu.

ML422 2009-026000 978-0-8108-6974-5KKiirriillll KKoonnddrraasshhiinn;; hhiiss lliiffee iinn mmuussiicc..Tassie, Gregor.Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 353 p. $65.00This biography recounts the life and career of Russian conductor KirillKondrashin (1914-1981). Drawing from firsthand accounts and previouslyunavailable archives from the Soviet Party and KGB sources, Tassiedetails Kondrashin’s early conducting experience, his years in Leningradand at the Bolshoi Theatre, his subsequent symphonic career, and hisdefection in 1978 to the Netherlands. He describes how he conducted thefirst performances of Prokofiev and Shostakovich, his work with famoussoloists, how he campaigned for a more democratic system at the BolshoiTheatre and Moscow Philharmonic Orchestra, and how he was ulti-mately cast out of his homeland. Tassie has written for Gramophone,Musical Opinion, Classical Record Collector, and other magazines.

ML457 2009-005561 978-0-7546-5483-4TThhee ssoouunnddss aanndd ssiigghhttss ooff ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee iinn eeaarrllyy mmuussiicc;;eessssaayyss iinn hhoonnoouurr ooff TTiimmootthhyy JJ.. MMccggeeee..Title main entry. Ed. by Brian E. Power and Maureen Epp.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 291 p. $99.95Musicologists Epp and Power have compiled this collection of essays onmedieval and Renaissance music and performance in honor of Universityof Toronto professor emeritus Timothy J. McGee. The work is dividedinto two parts, studies of evidence of performance in early manuscriptsand performance in a social context including dance as performance andparticipation. Many of the articles find new information in previouslystudied texts. The final essay, on the recent reinterpretations of the musicof twelfth century abbess and mystic, Hildegard of Bingen, exemplifiesthe constant irresolvable debate about the nature of musicalperformance.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–225–

ML980 2008-050804 978-0-7546-6669-1TThhee HHiigghhllaanndd bbaaggppiippee;; mmuussiicc,, hhiissttoorryy,, ttrraaddiittoonn.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Title main entry. Ed. by Joshua Dickson. (Ashgate popular and folkmusic series)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 377 p. $69.95While the highland bagpipes never fell out of fashion in Scotland (unlikesome of their bellow-driven cousins), their popularity among scholarsand the public has increased greatly over the past two decades. EditorDickson (Scottish Music, Royal Scottish Academy of Music and Drama)has brought together an impressive roster of historians, musicologists,and pipers to discuss the bagpipe’s oral and written history, piping tra-ditions in Scotland and beyond, the role of revivalism in piping culture,and the revival of the “cauld wind” bagpipe and other bellow-drivenpipes in Scotland. This full-length treatment of Scotland’s iconicinstrument will interest ethnomusicologists and anthropologists, as wellas musicians with a more academic bent (especially pipers). Includes CDand numerous music examples.

ML1015 978-0-7603-3646-5TThhee FFeennddeerr TTeelleeccaasstteerr hhaannddbbooookk;; hhooww ttoo bbuuyy,, mmaaiinnttaaiinn,,sseett uupp,, ttrroouubblleesshhoooott,, aanndd mmooddiiffyy yyoouurr TTeellee..Balmer, Paul.MBI Publishing Co., ©2009 196 p. $25.00This is a heavily-illustrated handbook giving instruction on the repair,maintenance, and modification of the Fender Telecaster, the solid-bodiedelectric guitar that is widely used in country, blues, funk, rock and roll,and other forms of popular music. In addition to the how-to advice, thevolume also profiles a handful of unique telecasters, as well as a numberof famous telecaster players, including Chrissie Hynde of The Pretenders;Steve Cropper of Booker T. and the MGs (the house band for many of theclassic Stax soul recordings of the 1960s), Keith Richards of the RollingStones, and Andy Summers of The Police (who also provides theforeword).

ML1083 978-0-9825996-0-0TThhee AAnngglloo--GGeerrmmaann ccoonncceerrttiinnaa;; aa ssoocciiaall hhiissttoorryy;; vv..11..Worrall, Dan M.Concertina Press, ©2009 322 p. $19.00 (pa)Popular from Victorian times until the 1930s, Anglo-German concertinaslargely disappeared into dusty attics after the Second World War, re-emerging only with the increased interest in English and (especially)Irish traditional music in the 1970s. Worrall (a concertina player himself)has written the first comprehensive history of the instrument, relyingheavily on primary sources to chronicle the concertina’s ups and downsfrom its first appearance in the 1830s up to the present day. This firstvolume looks at the production and marketing of the concertina; thehistory of the instrument in England and Ireland; and at the concertinaat sea (giving an authoritative answer to the vexing question of whethersailors really did play concertinas). Well written and profusely illustratedwith period graphics and photographs, this volume will appeal toscholars, musicians, and many general readers.

ML1083 978-0-9825996-1-7TThhee aanngglloo--GGeerrmmaann ccoonncceerrttiinnaa;; aa ssoocciiaall hhiissttoorryy;; vv..22..Worrall, Dan M.Concertina Press, ©2009 272 p. $19.00 (pa)This second volume of Worrall’s comprehensive history of Anglo-Germanconcertina looks at how the instrument fared as it moved farther awayfrom its European home, examining its histories in Africa, Australia,New Zealand, and North America. (The discussion of concertina playingamong the South African Boers and by indigenous African groups [suchas the Zulu and Xhosa peoples] is particularly interesting, and will likelybe new information even to veteran players of the instrument.) Worrallalso examines styles and techniques that developed during the con-certina’s pre-WW2 heyday, and provides transcriptions for 28 tunesplayed by musicians who were active during the pre-war period. Thismeticulously researched volume is generously illustrated with periodgraphics and photographs.

ML1731 2009-020285 978-0-7546-6614-1MMuussiicc aanndd mmuussiicciiaannss oonn tthhee LLoonnddoonn ssttaaggee,, 11669955--11770055..Lowerre, Kathryn. (Performance in the long eighteenth century)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 412 p. $99.95Musicologist Lowerre takes the pivotal years from 1695-1705 to examinethe role of music in the London theater. Using extant librettos, newspaperreports and state records, she traces the fortunes of the two main com-peting companies, the United and Lincoln’s Inn, as they search for theperfect offering to capture the interest of London. Often theatrical historydoes not take the role of music into account. Lowerre begins byexplaining the importance of music, both instrumental and vocal, incomedy and drama. She then gives a blow-by-blow commentary on theproductions mounted through the period, showing the constant strainbetween the too familiar and the too radical in the style and content ofthe entertainment. She also notes the increased competition from recitalsin which the music alone was the focus. Appendices give a glossary ofterms and a list of composers, many of whom were also performers.

ML2075 2009-030839 978-0-8166-6088-9DDrreeaammss ooff ddiiffffeerreennccee,, ssoonnggss ooff tthhee ssaammee;; tthhee mmuussiiccaallmmoommeenntt iinn ffiillmm..Herzog, Amy.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 236 p. $25.00 (pa)In this examination of musicals, Herzog (Media Studies, City Universityof New York) looks at the powerful disruptive potential of the musicalmoment: instances where music and movement erupt from within morelinear narrative frameworks. In her quest to discover just how themusical moment works, the author looks at works ranging fromScopitone jukebox films (a predecessor of the music video) to the syn-chronized swimming sequences of Esther Williams and an apocalypticmusical by Taiwanese director Tsai Ming-liang. Drawing on the philo-sophical work of Gilles Deleuze, Herzog explores all of these dissonancesin these works as productive forces, and demonstrates the transformativepower of the unexpected.

ML3027 2009-016960 978-0-7546-6821-3SSaaccrreedd rreeppeerrttoorriieess iinn PPaarriiss uunnddeerr LLoouuiiss XXIIIIII;; PPaarriiss,,BBiibblliiootthhèèqquuee nnaattiioonnaallee ddee FFrraannccee,, MMSS VVmmaa rrééss.. 557711..Bennett, Peter. (Royal Musical Association monographs; 17)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 213 p. $99.95Bennett (music, Case Western Reserve University) has performed anexcellent work of scholarship in his in-depth study of the seventeenth-century manuscript of Latin religious music known only as MS Vma Rés.571. He begins with the physical evidence of the manuscript, compiled ata time when music books were increasingly printed. The watermarksand content of the paper are analyzed in the effort to establish the prove-nance of the work. Bennet then examines the music, only a small partof it attributed to a composer. In painstaking steps, he assembles anargument for the compiler of the text being André Pechon, maitré demusique at the church of St.-Germain-l’Auxerrois in Paris and later atMeaux Cathedral. He then makes a good case for much of theanonymous music having been composed by Antoine Boesset. As well asproposing a solution to a musical mystery, Bennet also sheds light on thepolitical use of religious music in the period following the Wars ofReligion.

ML3470 2008-049688 978-0-7546-6476-5TThhee AAsshhggaattee rreesseeaarrcchh ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo ppooppuullaarr mmuussiiccoollooggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Derek B. Scott.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 557 p. $144.95Popular musicology, as editor Scott (critical musicology, U. of Leeds, UK)defines it, is a branch or subset of critical musicology that has tended,for the most part, to interest itself in the music industry, its output, andits audiences, although it is also properly concerned with those who maybe reacting against the music industry and its products but still com-municate in a “popular voice.” His research reader in popular musi-cology is intended to familiarize research students and scholars with thework of cutting-edge researchers that demonstrates recent researchmethodologies and the application of relevant theoretical models in thefield. He presents 26 papers in thematic sections covering film, video,and multimedia; technology and studio production; gender and sexuality;identity and ethnicity; performance and gesture; reception and scenes;and the music industry and globalization.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –226–

ML3470 2009-017753 978-0-7546-6804-6JJeewwss,, rraaccee,, aanndd ppooppuullaarr mmuussiicc..Stratton, Jon. (Ashgate popular and folk music series)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 227 p. $99.95In a book with Bob Dylan and Amy Winehouse on the jacket cover,Stratton (humanities, Curtin U. of Technology, Australia) offers a study ofJews as a racialized group in the 20th and early 21st centuries popularmusic of the US, UK, and Australia. In treating how racial typing/stereo-typing has influenced the choice and reception of their music, he tracesJews’ identification with African Americans, their ‘whitening’ of theblues in folk music, and role in ‘white’ rap groups, e.g., the Beastie Boys.Renée Geyer is discussed in the context of post-World War II antisemitismin Australia, and British solo artist Winehouse as winner of the Music ofBlack Origin award. The book includes references but no photos.

ML3479 2009-036698 978-0-8108-7286-8CCuullttuurraall ccooddeess;; mmaakkiinnggss ooff aa BBllaacckk mmuussiicc pphhiilloossoopphhyy;; aanniinntteerrpprreettiivvee hhiissttoorryy ffrroomm ssppiirriittuuaallss ttoo hhiipp hhoopp..Banfield, William C. (African American cultural theory and heritage)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 220 p. $40.00 (pa)Exploring the broad history of black music, Banfield (Africana studies,Berklee College of Music) seeks out the “cultural codes” found in Blackmusic from its African roots to Hip Hop, defining “cultural codes” as“sets of principles, representations, practices, and conventions under-stood to be embraced by an artistic community” and as “cultural, ideo-logical inscriptions of meaning…which suggest certain ways of being,thinking, looking, and styling are normative, preferable, and validated.”His exploration of the cultural codes of black music is intended to pointthe way towards a Black music philosophy driven by the social, cultural,aesthetic, performance history of the music; unique artistry and musicalmovements; social themes of freedom, equality, identity, finding “voice,”empowerment, and cultural preservation; and cultural image con-struction, cultural rituals, and the public dissemination of expressions ofblack culture.

ML3502 2009-019774 978-0-8248-3369-5CCrriieess ooff jjooyy,, ssoonnggss ooff ssoorrrrooww;; CChhiinneessee ppoopp mmuussiicc aanndd iittssccuullttuurraall ccoonnnnoottaattiioonnss..Moskowitz, Marc L.U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2010 165 p. $40.00Although Mandopop (Mandarin Chinese-language pop music) is oftendismissed as vapid by Americans somewhat familiar with it, Moskowitz(anthropology, U. of South Carolina) finds that it has surprisinglycomplex cultural implications, having introduced new gender roles toChina, created a vocabulary to express individualism, and introducedtransnational culture to audiences. Basing his analysis on interviews con-ducted with laypersons, lyricists, performers, and others working in themusic industry, primarily women, in Shanghai, China and Taipei,Taiwan (where much of the music is produced) he examines the gen-dered meanings and identities constructed by Mandopop, as well as thereception of themes of loneliness and isolation in Taiwan and China,themes that are very different from those found in the musical genres ofthe People’s Republic of China. First, however, the recent histories ofmusical production and genre in both China and Taiwan are discussedin order to provide context.

ML3508 2009-037977 978-0-8108-6652-2WWhheerree tthhee ddaarrkk aanndd tthhee lliigghhtt ffoollkkss mmeeeett;; rraaccee aanndd tthheemmyytthhoollooggyy,, ppoolliittiiccss,, aanndd bbuussiinneessss ooff jjaazzzz..Sandke, Randall. (Studies in jazz; no.60)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 277 p. $40.00The literature on jazz music has been generally shaped by a raciallyexclusionary theme that may have been laudatory in terms of the goal ofadvancing the social position of African Americans in a racist society, buthas done a disservice both to a complete understanding of the history ofjazz and to the music itself, according to Sandke (a professional jazzmusician). While certainly not denying the due respect that should beaccorded to African-American jazz musicians, who have generally beenthe greatest exponents of the art form, he aims to correct the record con-cerning the interracial aspects of the music and to assess the impact ofthe exclusionary narrative on perceptions of the music and on businesspractices associated with jazz.

ML3521 2009-025802 978-1-887366-87-8UUpp ffrroomm tthhee ccrraaddllee ooff jjaazzzz;; NNeeww OOrrlleeaannss mmuussiicc ssiinncceeWWoorrlldd WWaarr IIII..Berry, Jason et al.Center for Louisiana Studies, ©2009 373 p. $30.00 (pa)Berry, an author and music columnist for New Orleans Magazine, et al.chronicle the rhythm and blues music of New Orleans from its originsin the 1950s to the present day, within social and historical context. Theydiscuss why so many musicians come from New Orleans, the culturethat cultivated musical talent, the tradition of musical families in the citylike the Marsalises and the Lasties, and the importance of neighborhoodsand kinship lines, clubs and bars, oral traditions and rituals, as well asthe contributions of musicians like Professor Longhair, Fats Domino,Huey Smith, Guitar Slim, Allen Toussaint, Dave Williams, Harry ConnickJr., Dr. John, the Mardi Gras Indians, Willie Tee, the Neville Brothers, andothers. This edition has been updated through Hurricane Katrina. Thebook originated in a documentary of the same name.

ML3526 2009-040997 978-0-393-06675-3HHoott ssttuuffff;; ddiissccoo aanndd tthhee rreemmaakkiinngg ooff AAmmeerriiccaann ccuullttuurree..Echols, Alice.W.W. Norton, ©2010 338 p. $26.95In this revisionist history of the 1970s, Echols (American Studies andHistory, Rutgers University) looks at the history of disco as a musicalstyle and as a social phenomenon that produced lasting cultural change.The book shows how disco was the soundtrack for an era that saw agrowing black middle class, the movement of huge numbers of womeninto the workplace, and the refusal of gay men and lesbians to continueliving in the shadows. Paying equal attention to the development of discomusic itself and to the social changes that disco reflected and promoted,Echols’ lively book will appeal to any reader interested in—or who livedthrough—the Disco Era.

ML3551 2009-051216 978-0-275-99387-0DDiissccoovveerriinngg ffoollkk mmuussiicc..Ledgin, Stephanie P.Praeger, ©2010 181 p. $34.95Writing for a general audience, Ledgin (a founding member of FolkAlliance International) guides the reader around the world of Americanfolk music. She provides a map of the paths and by-ways of the genre,discusses many individual artists and their contribution to the music,and explores the development of folk over the course of the decades. Shealso includes guides to folk resources.

ML3634 978-1-85607-985-3IInn bblloooomm;; IIrriisshh bbaannddss nnooww..Huston, Jenny.Currach Press, ©2009 191 p. $36.95Unknown to many, there’s more to Irish rock than U2, Van Morrison, anda few other big-name artists. Over the past decade, a slew of excellentbands have been active in Ireland, and broadcaster/DJ Huston profiles 15of them for this book, and provides short looks at 22 more. Especiallynoteworthy is the introduction by Glen Hansard of the Frames, in whichhe describes his band’s experiences in the record industry withuncommon honesty. Generously illustrated with band photos, this bookwill appeal to readers interested in contemporary rock and indie music.Distributed in the U.S. by Dufour.

ML3790 978-87-7307-965-2MMuussiicc iinn aaddvveerrttiissiinngg;; ccoommmmeerrcciiaall ssoouunnddss iinn mmeeddiiaaccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn aanndd ootthheerr sseettttiinnggss..Title main entry. Ed. by Nicolai Graakjær and Christian Jantzen.Aalborg University Press, ©2009 304 p. $52.95 (pa)This pioneering volume contains 13 articles on the aesthetic features ofmusic in TV commercials and other media, and how it is used topromote sales. Emphasizing the interdisciplinary nature of studying thetopic, a group of European scholars of musicology, cultural studies, mar-keting and management, and communication and psychology analyzethe interaction of music and image; jingles; the textual and contextualproperties of the music; the hidden promotion of musical products in TVprograms; the use of music for promoting TV programs and channels;radio and internet advertising; music used to stimulate sales in stores;production aspects; the ontology of music in films; and comparisonbetween music videos and commercials. Graakjaer and Jantzen teachcommunication and psychology at Aalborg U. in Denmark. There is noindex. Distributed in North America by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–227–

ML3790 20099925264 978-1-84787-005-6PPeeeerr ttoo ppeeeerr aanndd tthhee mmuussiicc iinndduussttrryy;; tthhee ccrriimmiinnaalliizzaattiioonnooff sshhaarriinngg..David, Matthew. (Theory, culture & society)Sage Publications, ©2010 186 p. $99.95In this volume aimed at students and scholars of sociology, media andcommunications, criminology, and cultural studies, David (sociology ofculture, Brunel U.) addresses file-sharing in the music industry, and theassociated economics, social psychology, and philosophy. He discusses therelated technical, economic, and social networks, the dynamics ofchange, the rise of file-sharing, the challenge to intellectual property lawposed by new technologies, digital rights management, and the responsesof the mass media and multi-national corporations to manage the issue.He considers how corporations seek to monopolize markets, how inter-national and state agencies defend property, and how individualsundermine and reinvent both to create a new model. He considers theroyalty-based system in the recording industry and new business modelsused by musicians as alternatives that change the balance of power.

ML3795 2009-035802 978-1-4129-7679-4MMuussiicc bbuussiinneessss hhaannddbbooookk aanndd ccaarreeeerr gguuiiddee,, 99tthh eedd..Baskerville, David and Tim Baskerville.Sage Publications, ©2010 573 p. $79.95Written for students in music business, music and media, and surveycourses, this textbook overviews the music industry. David Baskerville, aretired music management professor at the U. of Colorado at Denver, andTim Baskerville, a writer-producer, publisher, entrepreneur, and con-sultant in the music industry, cover aspects of the industry from itssystem, copyright, and artist management to record production andmusic broadcasting. The final section addresses the global music scene.Along with a new companion website, this edition has more on digitaltechnology and its implications; new business models including inde-pendent labels; additional and updated information on careers; dis-cussion of the concert business, alternatives to radio airplay and recordstores, marketing research tools and social networking, and video games;and reflection on the shift in the music business as it becomes moreglobal and less centered on the US.

ML3845 2009-030148 978-0-7546-6612-7UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg mmuussiicc;; tthhee nnaattuurree aanndd lliimmiittss ooff mmuussiiccaallccooggnniittiioonn..Eggebrecht, Hans Heinrich. Trans. by Richard Evans.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 151 p. $79.95Late in life, German musicologist Eggebrecht (1919-99) summarizedeverything he had thought and written about music over the years, clar-ifying and supplementing when appropriate. He addresses both musiclovers who are willing to reflect on music and their encounter with it,and more academically-minded enthusiasts and specialists. His topicsinclude aesthetic understanding and identification; ontology, interpre-tation, and performance; cognitive understanding and the limits to it; theencircling approach; and John Cage identifying life with art. A Britishmusician who studied in Germany, Evans translated the 1999 secondedition of Musik Verstehan, published by Florian Noetzel.

ML3916 2008-047658 978-0-7546-3457-7MMuussiicc aanndd tthhee ppllaayy ooff ppoowweerr iinn tthhee MMiiddddllee EEaasstt,, NNoorrtthhAAffrriiccaa aanndd CCeennttrraall AAssiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Laudan Nooshin. (SOAS musicology series)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 340 p. $124.95Nooshin (music, City University, London) has assembled essays thatdiscuss the power of music in the Middle East, North Africa and CentralAsia. The introduction gives an excellent overview of the role that musichas played in political and social manifestations of power and resistanceto authority. The essays discuss the way that music has been used tosupport governments and subvert them. The role of Umm Kulthüm isrestoring national pride in Egypt after the disastrous six-day war beginsthe essays. Other authors discuss the ways in which religious music cansubtly change attitudes or be a protest against orthodoxy. Gender andrace are also defined through music in Tunisia and among Syrian Jews.The examples are from countries such as Tajikistan and Iran but thepower of music and its manipulation by governments or their opponentscan be found in every society. The question, asked but not answered, iswhy melody evokes a response so much stronger than words. The col-lection is both informative and thought-provoking.

ML3918 2009-041377 978-0-313-36456-3PPuunnkkss;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo aann AAmmeerriiccaann ssuubbccuullttuurree..Hannon, Sharon M. (Guides to subcultures and countercultures)Greenwood Press, ©2010 181 p. $35.00Rather than describing the U.S. punk subculture only through its music,Hannon takes a broader look at how punk has influenced the media,fashion, and language since its beginnings in the 1970s. Thematicchapters deal with topics including punk gathering places, women inpunk, and punk fashion and art. Especially interesting is the collectionof primary documents that end the book, which includes interviews withDead Kennedys front man Jello Biafra and Riot Grrrl founder KathleenHanna. Hannon’s guidebook is an excellent guide to punkdom for theuninitiated.

ML3918 2009-024263 978-0-7546-7577-8SSoouunndd,, ssoocciieettyy aanndd tthhee ggeeooggrraapphhyy ooff ppooppuullaarr mmuussiicc..Title main entry. Ed. by Ola Johansson and Thomas L. Bell.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 305 p. $99.95For readers inside and outside of the geography field, Johansson (geog-raphy, U. of Pittsburgh at Johnstown) and Bell (geography, U. ofTennessee, Knoxville, and Western Kentucky U.) compile 16 case studiesof popular music in the context of geography, by scholars of geography,sociology, and communication from the US and Australia. They considerthe use of music, lyrics, and forms of media by Billy Bragg and JohnLennon to create spaces of social activism; places that have specificmeanings in a sacred or quasi-religious way, such as Elvis’s Graceland;the memorialization and meaning of places as they are represented inmusic and lyrics in California and the Caribbean; the relationshipbetween specific artists or music forms and the places from which theyoriginate, including Cuba, LA and the Red Hot Chili Peppers, and Canadaand the Rheostatics; the geographic unevenness in the production andconsumption of music, with case studies of Newfoundland, independentmusic scenes, and the US; and geographic perspectives on specific genres,such as Christian pop music, techno, and hip hop.

MT10 2009-034484 978-1-60709-314-5MMiiddddllee sscchhooooll ggeenneerraall mmuussiicc;; tthhee bbeesstt ppaarrtt ooff yyoouurr ddaayy..McAnally, Elizabeth Ann.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 103 p. $21.95 (pa)Arguing that music instruction should be for all students, McAnally, amiddle school general music teacher and choral director, presents a guidefor middle school general music teachers that follows the nine NationalStandards for Music Education and includes strategies and lessons tomeet them. Chapters relate to singing; performing on instruments; impro-vising; composing and arranging; reading, notating, listening to, ana-lyzing, and describing music; evaluating music and performances; andunderstanding the relationship between music, the arts, other disciplines,and history and culture. There is no index.

MT10 2009-014526 978-1-60709-266-7SSiinnggiinn’’,, sswweeaattiinngg,, aanndd ssttoorryyttiimmee;; lliitteerraattuurree--bbaasseeddmmoovveemmeenntt aanndd mmuussiicc ffoorr tthhee yyoouunngg cchhiilldd.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Hamik, Rebecca E. and Catherine Wilson.Rowman & Littlefield Education, ©2009 411 p. $49.95 (pa)Hamik (physical education, Hastings College) and Wilson, a musicteacher, outline a curriculum that integrates music, movement, and liter-ature activities to teach children the joy and excitement of all three areas.They provide about 170 lessons based on the National Standards forMusic and Physical Education that are each 45-60 minutes and include astory, a music activity, and a physical activity. Lessons relate to bodyawareness, music elements, positive personality, movement skills,seasons and cultures, and holidays and special times. Music scores anda CD are included.

MT146 2009-037719 978-1-57647-186-9AAnnaallyyzziinngg jjaazzzz——aa SScchheennkkeerriiaann aapppprrooaacchh..Larson, Steve. (Harmonologia: studies in music theory; no.15)Pendragon Press, ©2009 204 p. $99.00A jazz pianist himself, Larson (Music, University of Oregon) demon-strates that the theories of Heinrich Schenker can illuminate the artisticcontent of jazz, not just its technical aspects. Although the author doesqualify the applicability of these theories to jazz, he nonetheless showsthat Schencker offers basic theoretical principles and practical examplesfor explaining dissonance treatment in jazz, as well as models that canbe used when creating, explaining, and experiencing jazz. Larson offersdetails analyses of Larson’s transcriptions of five performances ofTheolonius Monk’s composition Round Midnight, making this book thefirst to include complete transcriptions of the same piece as played bydifferent jazz performers.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –228–

AARRTT,, AARRCCHHIITTEECCTTUURREE

N71 2009-021993 978-1-58115-666-9AArrtt wwiitthhoouutt ccoommpprroommiissee**..Richmond, Wendy.Allworth Press, ©2009 219 p. $24.95 (pa)A pioneer in mixing traditional media and new technology, Richmondpresents a manifesto of sorts, but also a book of advice for aspiringartists. She asks them to analyze what they see every day and place it inthe context of their art, to reconsider the landscape that affects their cre-ative processes, and most of all not to compromise what they know theyneed make their best art. Her topics include bring play to work,respecting cultures, designing the self-critique, improvisation andinterface, memory is cheap, concentrating on context, the forwardmomentum of failure, the invasion of public privacy, excitement meter,and the value of time.

N332 978-2-08-030120-8BBaauuhhaauuss wwoommeenn;; aarrtt,, hhaannddiiccrraafftt,, ddeessiiggnn..Müller, Ulrike.Flammarion, ©2009 152 p. $39.95Translated from the German edition, this volume chronicles the lives andcareers of 20 women who were actively responsible for the renaissancein craft and design of the Bauhaus movement. The entry for each artistfeatures images of their works in color and b&w plates as well as periodphotos of their cohorts, workshops, and residences. The biographies tracethe lives and design theories of artists who overcame the pressure toconform to traditional women’s roles, then managed to follow their for-tunes, mainly from exile, once the Nazis destroyed the creative milieuthey’d help to make. Among the artists surveyed are Anni Albers,Marianne Brandt, Ida Kerkovius, and Ilse Fehling. Distributed by Rizzoli.

N350 978-94-6091-035-7TThhee qquueesstt ffoorr mmeeaanniinngg;; nnaarrrraattiivveess ooff tteeaacchhiinngg,, lleeaarrnniinnggaanndd tthhee aarrttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Mary Beattie.Sense Publishers, ©2009 270 p. $39.00 (pa)Scholars of education and the arts—especially music and literature—explore how the two can be combined to help students understand andtake control of their lives. Among the topics are a narrative, arts-basedpedagogy; tracing the creative thread and healing the self whole; autobi-ography as genesis; and a narrative of an embodied relationship with thearts.

N380 2009-012016 978-0-415-99376-0HHiissttoorryy aass aarrtt,, aarrtt aass hhiissttoorryy;; ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy aarrtt aanndd ssoocciiaallssttuuddiieess eedduuccaattiioonn..Desai, Dipti et al. (The Teaching/Learning social justice series)Routledge, ©2010 269 p. $47.95 (pa)Countering the focus on educational testing and bureaucratic schoolreform mandates, Desai (graduate art education, New York U.) and fellowart educators present an alternative approach that promotes creativethinking in today’s visual learners. Drawing on interviews with artistsand their provocative art that frames the past, they offer a toolkit ofstrategies for incorporating contemporary works of art into social studiesand art curricula to enhance an understanding of visual culture andhistory in line with current education standards. The text includes manyillustrations, some in color; primary documents relating to major themesin history lessons (e.g., the civil rights movement); and art and teachingresources.

N3810 2009-031573 978-0-8166-6519-8IImmaaggiinneedd mmuusseeuummss;; aarrtt aanndd mmooddeerrnniittyy iinn ppoossttccoolloonniiaallMMoorrooccccoo..Pieprzak, Katarzyna.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 223 p. $25.00 (pa)In this study of Moroccan museums, Pieprzak (French and comparativeliterature, Williams College) examines the decay of national museums inlight of monumentalizing discourses of history and identity, which sheargues aim to control collective memory and limit the intervention andparticipation of inappropriate actors and thereby produce their own irrel-evance. Intertwined with this discussion, she also explores “discursive,ephemeral, and nomadic museologies” that provide alternative narra-tives, visibilities, and ways to display art and memory.

N5310 2009-046055 978-1-84217-383-1AAnn eennqquuiirriinngg mmiinndd;; ssttuuddiieess iinn hhoonnoorr ooff AAlleexxaannddeerrMMaarrsshhaacckk..Title main entry. Ed. by Paul G. Bahn. (American school of prehistoricresearch monograph series)Oxbow Books, ©2010 332 p. $40.00Scholars of paleolithic art honor their esteemed colleague Marshack(1918-2004) with 22 essays about him, his contribution to the field, andtopics of particular interest to him. They discuss such matters as abstractand figurative artistic expressions in the Levant, support for a new skyhero from a conquered land, eye and vision in paleolithic art, the oldestrepresentation of childbirth, a diachronic analysis of Santa Claus and theEuropean sky bears, claw marks and ritual traces in the paleolithic sanc-tuaries of the Quercy, the little-known prehistoric Sardinian figurine TheVenus of Macomer, four forms of finger flutings as seen in France’sFouffignac Cave, a nest of Neanderthal enigma, and evolution and thehuman capacity. There is no index.

N5925 978-1-84682-175-2EEuurrooppeeaann iinnfflluueennccee oonn CCeellttiicc aarrtt..Laing, Lloyd.Four Courts Press, ©2010 247 p. $70.00Over the last century or so it was popular to treat Celtic art as somethingdistinct and untouched by that of other cultures. This was a political,rather than historical view. In this study, intended for students andgeneral readers, Laing (archaeology, University of Nottingham) modifiesthis unlikely supposition by showing how Celtic art from 350-1200 ADwas influenced by Roman, Anglo-Saxon, Danish, French and even NearEastern forms and themes. He begins with a short history of the Celticpeople before discussing the art chronologically, by Roman, EarlyChristian and “mature” Celtic works. The many illustrations depict thepatterns that Celtic artists appropriated and adapted to their own tastes,often greatly elaborating on them. Laing also places the art within theculture with sections on workshops and artisans, patrons and symbols.The ways in which Irish artists interacted with other cultures, borrowingwhat seemed useful in art to create masterpieces unique to themselves,should be a satisfaction to even a die-hard Celtic chauvinist. Laing’s workemphasizes the cosmopolitan nature of the Celtic people. Dist. by ISBS.

N6250 2009-043591 978-0-86698-426-3BByyzzaannttiinnee aarrtt;; rreecceenntt ssttuuddiieess,, eessssaayyss iinn hhoonnoorr ooff LLooiissDDrreewweerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Colum Hourihane. (Medieval and Renaissancetexts and studies; v.378, Arizona studies in the Middle Ages and theRenaissance; v.33)ACMRS, ©2009 197 p. $60.00Hourihane, director of the Princeton Index of Christian Art, invitedscholars to present papers on iconography in Byzantine art. Articlesrange from particular types of images, such as towers and ladders, toindividual church frescos, to iconographic representations of royalty inmany media. Appropriately, iconoclasm is also discussed, in this casedone by both Christian and Muslim believers. An article on how friezework and borders indicate the beginnings of eastern heraldry showsanother aspect of art research, as does one on marks of ownership inmanuscripts. The final essay is on the Princeton collection itself, the storyof the collectors who donated the basis for this fantastic resource forscholars. Black and white illustrations of the art discussed give a glimpseinto the wealth of material available in the collection. Erratum: Thecaption for Figure 1A on pg. 3 should read: Fig. 1A: Vatican Virgil, Ms.lat. 3225, f. 35v, Carthage, 4th century. The caption appears correctly inthe List of Illustrations on pg. xiii. This volume was co-published by theArizona Center for Medieval and Renaissance Art, Brepols, and the Indexof Christian Art.

N6494 2009-007783 978-0-8166-6522-8SSccrreeeennss;; vviieewwiinngg mmeeddiiaa iinnssttaallllaattiioonn aarrtt..Mondloch, Kate. (Electronic mediations; v.30)U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 130 p. $25.00 (pa)Mondloch (art history, U. of Oregon) conducts a critical exploration ofEuropean and North American art installations incorporating film,video, and computer screens from the late 1960s to the present, concen-trating on case studies of exemplary works by Eija-Liisa Ahtila, DougAitken, Peter Campus, VALIE EXPORT, Dan Graham, Bruce Nauman,Michael Snow, and others. She is concerned both with how the artistsincorporated screens into their works but also situates the work as aspectatorship study that is equally concerned with how viewing subjectsare themselves defined by interactions with screens. Topics include thescreen’s role in orchestrating the spectator’s physical interaction withsculptural screen-based works, the use of time as a material in recentfilm and video installations, and the transformations in the spatial con-ditions of viewing media art associated with digital technology.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–229–

N6537 2009-015024 978-1-57233-676-6TThhee lliiffee,, aarrtt,, aanndd ttiimmeess ooff JJoosseepphh DDeellaanneeyy,, 11990044--11999911..Moffatt, Frederick C.U. of Tennessee Press, ©2009 305 p. $44.95A student of Thomas Hart Benton, though his work is also reminiscentof the German Expressionist Max Beckmann, Delaney lived in New YorkCity for 60 years, until he returned to Tennessee in 1986 to teach. Hispaintings show city scenes of nighttime parties, crowded bars, rundownapartment rooms with groups of writers talking and smoking, portraits,and views of Manhattan, all of them displaying an acute interest in noiseand people and life. Moffatt (emeritus, art, U. of Tennessee-Knoxville) dis-cusses the individual works within the account of Delaney’s life, studies,and career. New York City and its art world from the 1930s through the1980s is described in detail in the first section, with discussion of howthis life was experienced by an African American from the South. Theremaining chapters focus closely on the works of art. The book is wellillustrated with color plates of excellent quality.

N6537 2009-031585 978-1-887366-93-9LLoorrrraaiinnee GGeennddrroonn;; LLoouuiissiiaannaa ffoollkk aarrttiisstt..Gendron, Lorraine.Center for Louisiana Studies, ©2009 128 p. $40.00This collection of the work of versatile Louisiana folk artist LorraineGendron features a comprehensive sampling of her varied multimediaart. Gendron, a self-styled cultural preservationist, works in many media:Mississippi River mud sculptures, painted wood cutouts, acrylic on wood,and primitive dolls. The book also includes photographs of Gendron’shome which she also freely has used as her canvas. It also includes aninterview with the artist and photographs of her, her family, fans, andfriends through the years.

N6537 2009-020456 978-0-89551-109-6MMaarrííaa BBrriittoo..Martínez, Juan A. (A ver: revisioning art history; v.4)UCLA Chicano Studies Res. Ctr., ©2009 108 p. $24.95 (pa)One of the foremost artists of the Cuban-American experience, MaríaBrito is known for mixed-media works that incorporate Catholic iconog-raphy to examine themes of identity, displacement, and loss. Brito’sworks use a personal iconography based on her multiple identities as awoman, a mother, a Cuban exile, a naturalized American, and aCatholic. This book examines Brito’s career, and shows how her installa-tions, sculptures, and paintings challenge cultural, social, and artistic bar-riers. Beautifully designed and generously illustrated with photographsand reproductions of the artist’s works, this book will appeal to readersinterested in contemporary art, women artists, and the Cuban-Americanexperience.

N6537 2009-022127 978-0-915977-71-0TThhee SSoouutthh iinn bbllaacckk aanndd wwhhiittee;; tthhee ggrraapphhiicc wwoorrkkss ooffJJaammeess EE.. RRoouutthh JJrr..,, 11993399--11994466;; JJuullyy 2200--OOccttoobbeerr 22,, 22000099..Georgia Museum of Art.Georgia Museum of Art, ©2009 32 p. $20.00The collection of drawings by Atlanta artist Routh accompanies an exhi-bition of the same name that showed at the Robert C. Williams PaperMuseum from July to October 2009. Stephen J. Goldfarb, the curator, pro-vides an essay placing the drawings in the context of Routh’s career,Southern life, and regional art. The scenes are mostly rural, even theindustrial topics, and all but one are in stark black and white. Only 1,000copies of the catalogue were printed.

N6537 2009-010470 978-0-8166-6096-4SSuuzzaannnnee LLaaccyy;; ssppaacceess bbeettwweeeenn..Irish, Sharon.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 266 p. $25.00The radical art of Suzanne Lacy has challenged viewers and participantssince she emerged on the scene in the early 1970s. In this first criticalvolume on the artist’s career and work, author Irish examines the pivotalroles that Lacy has had in public art, feminist theory, and communityorganizing. The author looks at how Lacy’s artistic projects investigatethe spaces between art and life, self and other, and the body and physicalstructures, and shows how Lacy has created art that resists racism, pro-motes feminism, and explores challenging human relationships.

N6537 2008-031025 978-0-89551-110-2YYoollaannddaa MM.. LLóóppeezz..Davalos, Karen Mary. (A ver: revisioning art history; v.2)UCLA Chicano Studies Res. Ctr., ©2008 140 p. $24.95 (pa)Conceptual artist Yolanda López is known for works that challengestereotypes about Mexicans and Mexican Americans, particularly thoseheld about women. Although she is fluent in numerous media, her mostfamous works are her late-1970s Virgin of Guadalupe paintings, in whichshe depicted everyday Chicanas as the iconic saint. For this generouslyillustrated book, Davalos (Chicano/a Studies, Loyola MarymountUniversity) examines López’s life and career, and demonstrates herimportant contributions to Chicano/a art and Chicana feminism.

N6538 2009-051061 978-1-933565-15-6HHiiddee;; sskkiinn aass mmaatteerriiaall aanndd mmeettaapphhoorr..Title main entry. Ed. by Kathleen Ash-Milby.Nat’l Mus. of the Amer. Indian, ©2010 136 p. $23.95 (pa)The volume accompanies an exhibition at the National Museum of theAmerican Indian in New York March 2010-January 2011. Works of eightartists are illustrated, along with essays titled A Thick-Skinned Beast;Under My Skin, Deep in the Heart of Me; HIDE; Secret Skin; Scarscapes;Shorelines, Flux, Origins, and Dark Water—The Slowness of Things; SkinSeven Spans Thick; and A Post-Mortem on the Racialized Indian Body.

N6797 2009942451 978-0-8478-3433-4HHeennrryy MMoooorree..Title main entry. Ed. by Chris Stephens.Skira Editore, ©2010 240 p. $50.00A lovely book, assembled in conjunction with a 2010 retrospective exhibitfeaturing the work of celebrated sculptor Henry Moore (1898-1986), inparticular his early and mid-career work from the 1920s through theearly 1960s. Primarily sculptures, but also paintings and drawings, arepresented in 153 color and b&w illustrations. Accompanying the platesare essays discussing his life and work, including the origins of hisvision, his engagement with primitivism, his relationships with interna-tional figures (among them, Naum Gabo, Alberto Giacometti, andPicasso), his founding of the Henry Moore Foundation, and his lastinginfluence. These essays are by editor Stephens (a curator at Tate Britain),Jennifer Munday (Tate Britain), Johnathan Wood (Henry Moore Institute,Leeds), and Lyndsey Stonebridge (U. of East Anglia). Further enhancingthe presentation are comments by living artists (from a couple para-graphs to a couple pages in length) on the importance of Moore to theirown work. The end matter includes a chronology. Distributed by Rizzoli.

N6888 2009-049891 978-3-8055-9381-6PPaauull KKlleeee aanndd hhiiss iillllnneessss;; bboowweedd bbuutt nnoott bbrrookkeenn bbyyssuuffffeerriinngg aanndd aaddvveerrssiittyy..Suter, Hans. Trans. by Gill McKay and Neil McKay.S. Karger, AG, ©2010 271 p. $120.00The incomparable artist Paul Klee (1880-1940) died at age 60 of a diseasethat was identified in a biography written over a decade after his deathas scleroderma, a diagnosis that has since been called into question. Withhis expertise as a dermatologist and as aficionado and collector of 20th-century Swiss art, Hans Suter found himself uniquely suited and pas-sionately compelled to investigate Klee’s illness. He thoroughly researchedthe course of the disease, piecing together symptoms through Klee’sdiaries and letters, following his treatments, and incorporating all this toform ideas about the impact of the illness on the artist’s mind and work.Translated from the original German publication, this unusual bookincludes a detailed chapter about scleroderma, intended for lay readers,in addition to a generous selection of Klee’s art. Readership will includedermatologists and medical historians as well as art historians.

N7380 2009-011218 978-0-674-03622-2AAffrriiccaann aarrtt iinn ddeettaaiill..Spring, Chris.Harvard University Press, ©2009 144 p. $22.95Spring, curator of the African galleries at the British Museum, prefacesthis gorgeous assemblage of African art with the reminder that there aremany misconceptions about Africa, one especially being that the Sub-Saharan area is a basically homogenous culture. In his selection andorganization of the art, he reinforces his point. The works vary in timefrom 1400 BCE to the twenty-first century. Most of the examples are fromthe twentieth century. The artists both live in Africa and in the countriesof the diaspora but they all draw on the forms of their particular Africantraditions. Many of the artists are profiled along with the art. Eachcolored photograph is accompanied by background notes. The art isarranged by medium for the most part: textiles, painting, tools and met-alwork and ceramics. Exceptions are chapters on West African represen-tations of kingship and the final chapter, “Africa around the World”. Thisis a beautiful introduction to the kaleidoscope of African art.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –230–

N7430 2009-025960 978-1-4331-0779-5TThhee wwoorrlldd ccrreeaatteedd iinn tthhee iimmaaggee ooff mmaann;; tthhee ccoonnfflliiccttbbeettwweeeenn ppiiccttoorriiaall ffoorrmm aanndd ssppaaccee iinn ddeeffiiaannccee ooff tthhee llaawwooff tteemmppoorraalliittyy..Bradsky, V. E.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 125 p. $64.95Two universal existential notions—temporal continuity and finitudedetermine—certain related compositional requirements in paintings, con-tends Brodsky (emeritus history of art, Westfield State College,Massachusetts), and investigates the third dimension—depth—as a com-petitive contact between the internal world of the painting and theexternal world of the viewer. He shows how the introduction of thesefactors brought a vital element to art both in the West and in the East,which he represents with Japan. The five essays explore Japanesedefiance of the Chinese concept of unlimited space, The Virgin ofVladimir (early 12th century) and The Virgin of the Don (c. 1392) strivingto particularize feeling, the changing meaning of the arch motive inItalian Renaissance art, contained emotion and the hostility of darknessin Rembrandt and the Baroque, and French impressionism as heir to theclassical tradition and its encounter with Japanese “Pictures of theFloating World.”

N7433 2009-034229 978-0-8166-5609-7SSttrriinngg,, ffeelltt,, tthhrreeaadd;; tthhee hhiieerraarrcchhyy ooff aarrtt aanndd ccrraafftt iinnAAmmeerriiccaann aarrtt..Auther, Elissa.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 247 p. $29.95 (pa)Fiber art, textiles, quilts, soft sculpture—the arts made of fabric andthread have struggled for recognition in the art world, where they’reoften relegated to the category of mere craft and decoration. Feminist andother artists who began making fiber art in the 1960s broke with thesedistinctions and established the place of fiber art as a significantAmerican art. These are the central issues in this impressive history byAuther (contemporary art, U. of Colorado, Colorado Springs), who detailsthe theory and careers of artists who include Faith Ringgold, Eve Hesse,and Robert Morris. She’s especially adept at describing the criticalreception of their work and how critics eventually came to comprehendand appreciate a genre that was once rejected as unworthy of the nameof art. The volume is heavily illustrated with color and b&w plates.

N7480 2009-031171 978-0-8133-4450-8TThhee mmeetthhooddoollooggiieess ooff aarrtt;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn,, 22dd eedd..Adams, Laurie Schneider.Westview Press, ©2010 286 p. $36.00 (pa)Adams (art history, City U. of New York-John Jay College) surveys someof the methodologies used not for creating visual art, but for reading pic-tures, sculptures, and architecture in order to enrich a viewer’s responseto works of art. She covers what art is, formalism and style, iconography,contextual approaches, biography and autobiography, semiotics, psycho-analysis, and aesthetics. An epilogue applies some of the methodologiesto Titian’s Rape of Lucrezia. A battery of color plates is includes, alongwith many black-and-white reproductions.

N7630 2009-035214 978-0-313-33821-2IIccoonnss ooff bbeeaauuttyy;; aarrtt,, ccuullttuurree,, aanndd tthhee iimmaaggee ooff wwoommeenn;; 22vv..Mancoff, Debra N. and Lindsay J. Bosch. (Greenwood icons)Greenwood Press, ©2010 746 p. $175.00In this two-volume set that is part of a series that examines iconicpopular culture figures, authors affiliated with the Art Institute ofChicago) compile in-depth entries that survey diverse icons of beauty andrelated practices and standards from the prehistoric Woman fromWillendorf statue to the Afghan girl who hauntingly graced a 1984National Geographic magazine cover. In the introduction, the authorsstress that it is the deeper cultural associations that give beauty its iconicpower. Volume one covers prehistory to 16th and 17th century Europeanand Chinese ideals of beauty. Volume 2 treats Romantic beauty as rep-resented in a Gainsborough portrait to contemporary images by Warhol.Relevant to art history, women’s studies, cultural studies, and relatedfields, the entries feature b&w illustrations, boxed material, referencenotes, and further reading.

N8193 2008-056023 978-0-295-98920-4WWiitthh aa ssiinnggllee ggllaannccee;; BBuuddddhhiisstt iiccoonnss aanndd eeaarrllyy MMiikkkkyyoovviissiioonn..Bogel, Cynthea J.U. of Washington Press, ©2009 476 p. $75.00Ninth century Japan saw the arrival of a new form of Buddhism,Mikkyo. It brought a different form of art and ritual, particularly in rep-resentations of gods and meditative interaction with the Mandela. Bogel(Japanese art, University of Washington) gives readers more than adescription of new artistic forms. She provides a synthesis of howMikkyo was received within Japanese culture detailing the sacred spaces,the two and three-dimensional forms, even the workshops that createdthem. But much more than that, Bogel enters into the religious, emotionalreactions of the participants in Mikkyo. The tenets of the sect are notsimply a background to explain the symbolism of the art; they are inter-twined with it. By combining art, theology, history and ethnology alongwith many beautiful images, Bogel brings the contemporary reader closerto the experience of Mikkyo in ancient Japan.

N8241 2009-529960 978-1-4438-0982-5TTaakkiinngg aa hhaarrdd llooookk;; ggeennddeerr aanndd vviissuuaall ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Amanda du Preez.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 260 p. $62.00Du Preeze (visual arts, U. of Pretoria, South Africa) presents 13 papersfrom the eponymous academic conference organized by The Institute ofGender and Women’s Studies at the U. of Pretoria in June 2007. Whilemany works have been published on the intersection between gender andvisual culture, this collection brings an avowedly Global South per-spective to the proceedings. Specific topics addressed include visual iden-tities performed in Australian youth arts education, discourses ofmaternity in works by South African artist Christine Dixie, subversiverepresentations of religious femininity in the works of South Africanartists Diane Victor and Tracey Rose, feminist psychoanalytic reading ofSophocles’ Oedipus Rex, representations of bourgeois heterosexual sub-jectivity in South African bridal magazines, the construction of mas-culinity in post-apartheid South African men’s lifestyle magazines,challenges to the heterosexual sensibility in the staging of masculinity inTamil film and south Indian public visual culture, and a psychoanalyticreading of the masculinity of Tarzan of the Apes by Edgar Rice Burroughs

N8354 2009-014063 978-0-7546-5431-5LLiiffee ssttoorriieess ooff wwoommeenn aarrttiissttss,, 11555500--11880000;; aann aanntthhoollooggyy..Dabbs, Julia Kathleen.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 487 p. $99.95It is an old adage that “anonymous” was a woman. However not allfemale artists are anonymous. In this anthology of biographies of femaleartists, Dabbs (art history, University of Minnesota) and her colleaguesreproduce biographies of female artists written by their contemporaries.Each one is prefaced with an introduction on the biographer and any-thing more known about the artist. Each entry concludes with referencesfor further research. The biographies are fascinating in that the authors’admiration for their subjects is evident, something not often understoodby later scholars. The stories reflect both the constraints on women andalso the appreciation many of them achieved in their lifetimes. While thetime frame is 1550-1800, the first chapters discuss women mentioned inClassical and medieval texts. Historians of art, culture and women willenjoy this useful compilation.

N8551 2009-015388 978-0-89236-981-2LLooookkiinngg aatt EEuurrooppeeaann ffrraammeess;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo tteerrmmss,, ssttyylleess,, aannddtteecchhnniiqquueess..Karraker, D. Gene. (Looking at)Getty Publications, ©2010 87 p. $18.95 (pa)An assistant conservator of frames in the J. Paul Getty Museum’sdepartment of painting conservation, Karraker briefly defines expres-sions commonly used to describe the history, construction, and conser-vation of picture frames. He covers frames in the West from Italianpaintings of the 13th century to French Postimpressionist works of thelate 19th century, focusing on examples in the Museum. His guide shouldbe useful to general readers, students, collectors, and museum profes-sionals, he says.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–231–

N8558 2009939004 978-0-936770-28-4PPrreesseerrvviinngg EEggyypptt’’ss ccuullttuurraall hheerriittaaggee;; tthhee ccoonnsseerrvvaattiioonnwwoorrkk ooff tthhee AAmmeerriiccaann RReesseeaarrcchh CCeenntteerr iinn EEggyypptt 11999955--22000055..Title main entry. Ed. by Randi Danforth.Am. Research Center in Egypt, Inc., ©2010 298 p. $49.50Oversize (10x13″) and elegantly produced on heavy coated stock, thisbook showcases projects undertaken over a period of ten years by theAmerican Research Center in Egypt, funded primarily by the UnitedStates Agency for International Development. The funding has served notonly to ensure conservation of important sites but also to train Egyptianarchaeologists and field researchers. This volume, which is probably sim-ilarly subsidized given its low price, begins with an introductory essaytelling something of the overall project’s history and reasons for itssuccess, and celebrating the promise of continued funding. With colorphotos and text each of some 50 projects is described in terms of its back-ground and significance, challenges of conservation or restoration,specifics of the site, and results. Among the projects are prehistoric sitesin the Sinai, Greco-Roman mosaics in Alexandria, Coptic wall paintingsin early Christian monasteries, Islamic buildings in Cairo. Maps identi-fying site locations, and a chronology are included.

N8600 2009-039893 978-1-58115-673-7TThhee bbuussiinneessss ooff bbeeiinngg aann aarrttiisstt,, 44tthh eedd..Grant, Daniel.Allworth Press, ©2010 392 p. $27.50 (pa)This reference for developing a successful career as a professional visualartist addresses emotional and psychological issues, such as handlingcriticism and post-exhibition blues, as well as business, legal, andfinancial and funding issues. The book provides overviews, advice, andguidelines on exhibiting and selling art, developing relationships with artdealers, managers and representatives, transitioning from school to theworking world, and safe practices regarding materials. This fourthedition includes new sections on how to market and sell art in a weakeconomy, how to use online marketing, and tips on creating a successfulWeb site and blog. Grant is a contributing editor of American Artistmagazine.

N8600 2009-047843 978-1-57660-333-8FFiinnee aarrtt aanndd hhiigghh ffiinnaannccee;; eexxppeerrtt aaddvviiccee oonn tthhee eeccoonnoommiiccssooff oowwnneerrsshhiipp..Title main entry. Ed. by Clare McAndrew.Bloomberg Press, ©2010 317 p. $39.95For art investors, artists, and collectors, McAndrew, a cultural economist,investment analyst, and art economy consultant who lectures at Sotheby’sInstitute of Art in Singapore and the National College of Art and Designin Dublin, compiles 12 chapters that examine the key economic issuesunique to the international art market. Focusing on fine and decorativeart, a group of European and North American legal, financial, and artindustry specialists discuss how fine art is bought and sold, the rela-tionship between supply and demand, art’s subjective and financialvalue, art appraisal and price data, the development of art funds in themarket, government regulation, tax issues, art banking, insurance, riskanalysis, conservation and restoration, and the illegal art trade.

N8795 2009-044854 978-0-313-36047-3CCrriimmeess ooff tthhee aarrtt wwoorrlldd..Bazley, Thomas B.Praeger, ©2010 230 p. $44.95A retired postal inspector with an academic foot in criminology, Bazley(U. of South Florida) weaves his early interest in art history together withhis recent experiences to explore the intersection of art and crime. Heconsiders art theft and selected cases of it, art forgeries and fakes, arttheft and destruction as perils of war and civil and religious unrest,looting cultural heritage objects, white-collar crime in the art world, van-dalism and malicious destruction, responding to art crime, and securityand prevention as the best response to art crime.

NA380 978-1-85669-514-5TThhee aarrcchhiitteeccttuurree ooff YYeemmeenn;; ffrroomm YYaaffii ttoo HHaaddrraammuutt..Damluji, Salma Samar.Laurence King Publishing, ©2007 304 p. $85.00Damluji is a London-based architect who began fieldwork in Yemen in1985, and through the years became an expert on mud brick architecture,travelled extensively in the country, and enlisted the participation ofother architects in the often difficult and uncomfortable mission of con-ducting architectural surveys and documenting an extraordinary her-itage. In this oversize volume (10x13″) readers will find an in-depthresource that illustrates the spirit, the practicalities, the esthetics, and thegenius of individual buildings as well as the sophisticated cities of theregion. The appreciation and preservation of this legacy is strongly in theinterests of current and future generations, and of course, must beaccomplished in the face of accelerating processes of destruction. Thevolume is abundantly illustrated with photos and schematic drawings,and the glossary of Yemeni building terms will be of particular interestto those in the field. Distributed in the US by Chronicle Books.

NA380 978-2-08-030110-9TThhee gglloorryy ooff tthhee ssuullttaannss;; IIssllaammiicc aarrcchhiitteeccttuurree iinn IInnddiiaa..Porter, Yves and Gérard Degeorges.Flammarion, ©2009 303 p. $95.00Muslim art specialist Porter (Iranian studies, U. of Aix-en-Provence,France) joins forces with photographer Degeorges (an architect, civilengineer, and world-travelling photographer) to address a neglectedrealm of study: the architectural fusion in the Indian subcontinent,reflecting influences from Islamic, Persian, and Turkish sources betweenthe 12th and 19th centuries. The text begins with India’s earliest contactswith Islam and the foundations of the Mughal empire. Following is closerexamination of the independent sultanates and the great Mughals andtheir heirs. The abundant gorgeous color photos, big and small, are pre-sented in an oversize format: 9.5x12.5″. Appendices offer a timeline andbibliography. An enticing work, simultaneously published in English andFrench versions. Distributed in the US by Rizzoli.

NA730 2009-005808 978-0-393-73274-0FFoouurr FFlloorriiddaa mmooddeerrnnss;; tthhee aarrcchhiitteeccttuurree ooff AAllbbeerrtt AAllffoonnssoo,,RReennéé GGoonnzzáálleezz,, CChhaadd OOppppeennhheeiimm,, && GGuuyy WW.. PPeetteerrssoonn..Henry, Saxon.W.W. Norton, ©2010 311 p. $50.00Filled with photos of their many projects, this volume surveys the com-mercial, public, and residential buildings of four Florida architectsworking in a classic modern style. A short interview with each architectprecedes the survey of their buildings and introduces the reader to theirphilosophy and working method. Projects are accompanied by a briefdescription and multiple views. Some include ground plans.

NA737 2008-047574 978-0-8214-1862-8IInncciiddeennttaall aarrcchhiitteecctt;; WWiilllliiaamm TThhoorrnnttoonn aanndd tthhee ccuullttuurraalllliiffee ooff eeaarrllyy WWaasshhiinnggttoonn,, DD..CC..,, 11779944--11882288..Brown, Gordon S. (Perspectives on the art and architectural history ofthe United States Capitol)Ohio University Press, ©2009 141 p. $24.95 (pa)A retired diplomat turned historian, Brown looks beneath the politicsand the real estate in the newly built capital of the newly minted republicto reveal cultural aspects of daily life for the middling sorts, the lowestclasses for which any substantial records are available. His case study isThornton, a physician by trade but architect by avocation, who designedthe Capitol building just after he returned to Philadelphia from his plan-tation in the Caribbean in 1793. The topics include the government comesto town, a community germinates, cultural amenities emerge, the DolleyMadison effect, and Phoenix. Biographical sketches of early Washingtoncultural leaders are appended.

NA737 978-0-8478-3069-5RRiicchhaarrdd MMeeiieerr,, aarrcchhiitteecctt;; vv..55..Meier, Richard. Ed. by Kenneth Frampton et al.Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2009 427 p. $80.00The fifth volume documents the renowned architect’s work since publi-cation in 2004 of the previous volume in this series (begun at an earlystage in Meier’s career when he was delighted to have enough materialto assemble in a book). Thirty projects—residential, commercial, andcivic—are featured in some 400 pages primarily consisting of images:photographs, drawings, and architectural plans. Text includes a prefaceby Meier himself, an essay by architectural historian Kenneth Framptonand another by critic Paul Goldberger, and a personal postscript by artistFrank Stella who reminisces about his youthful intellectual and creativefriendship with the architect. A chronology and selected bibliographycomplete the monograph (which measures 10x11″).

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –232–

NA749 2009-032669 978-1-56898-821-4PPeetteerr RRoossee;; hhoouusseess..Title main entry.Princeton Architectural Press, ©2010 159 p. $40.00Pete Rose, an award winning and recognized leader in architecturaldesign, has worked on everything from large-scale urban designs tosmaller renovations and additions. Author Morgan (architectural his-torian) concentrates on five of Rose’s single-family homes. The text andnumerous photographs illustrate Rose’s fondness for solid building mate-rials, craftsmanship, old-fashioned building methods, and a talent forplacing structures so they become part of the landscape they inhabitrather than intrusions. The book follows the process from initial clientcollaboration through to construction.

NA997 2009-289791 978-0-470-69729-0EEccoommaasstteerrppllaannnniinngg..Yeang, Ken.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 256 p. $50.00Yeang’s ideas on masterplanning are introduced as a leap forward inapproaching sustainable built environments. As a pioneer of the ‘greenskyscraper,’ Yeang presents his innovative ideas of planning as an envi-ronmentally benign, seamless integration of the green ecoinfrastructure,grey engineering infrastructure, blue water management infrastructure,and red or human built infrastructure. He warns against being seducedinto thinking that technology defines ecological design. These ideas areapplied in illustrations of plans for and completed projects globally, e.g.,the Rotterdam waterfront ecocity; Green Square Town Centre, Sydney;and the Vancouver, BC, waterfront. Project descriptions include site spec-ifications, ecological design features, and general design components.

NA1559 2009-012269 978-1-56898-779-8MMaatteerriiaall//iimmmmaatteerriiaall;; tthhee nneeww wwoorrkk ooff KKeennggoo KKuummaa..Bognar, Botond.Princeton Architectural Press, ©2009 255 p. $40.00 (pa)In this heavily illustrated, oversized volume (8.75x11″), Bognar (archi-tecture, U. of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign) describes 30 recent projects bythe celebrated Japanese architect. Kuma seeks to dissolve walls and meldhis buildings into their surroundings, using screens of bamboo poles,zigzag-cut stone, wood, and glass, and other effects. The projects includeresidential and commercial works, including the Asahi BroadcastingCorporation headquarters, the Food and Agriculture Museum in Tokyo,and other restaurants, museums, hotels, spas, and retail groupings. Eachproject is presented with plans, sections, and multiple interior andexterior views with a short description by Bognar, who also contributesan introductory essay on Kuma’s theory and methods. Includes biogra-phical notes and lists of awards. There is no index.

NA1996 2009-020257 978-1-4051-8187-7MMaarrkkeettiinngg && sseelllliinngg pprrooffeessssiioonnaall sseerrvviicceess iinn aarrcchhiitteeccttuurree&& ccoonnssttrruuccttiioonn..Sawczuk, Basil.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 254 p. $72.99 (pa)Although written by Sawczuk (business development, DGI International)for those engaged in selling professional services in architecture and con-struction, the bulk of this book could be used by those seeking to marketor sell any type of large project. The first chapter presents sophisticatedtechniques for analyzing current and prospective clients and sortingthem into gold, silver, and bronze categories. Topics include getting pastthe “gatekeeper,” delivering an excellent pitch, using effective listeningskills, and techniques for networking. Although originally published inthe UK, the emphasis on sales and marketing techniques makes it appli-cable in the US as well.

NA2500 2009-455166 978-0-470-77928-6TThhee tthhiinnkkiinngg hhaanndd;; eexxiisstteennttiiaall aanndd eemmbbooddiieedd wwiissddoomm iinnaarrcchhiitteeccttuurree..Pallasmaa, Juhani. (AD primers)John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 159 p. $130.00Early in his book, Pallasmaa, Finnish architect and philosopher, statesthat most people live in their bodies as they live in houses as if the bodyis something discreet from the self. This is a key point in his thoughtabout creation, architecture and what it means to be a complete human.The hand as an existential force that can learn and create as much as themind is the metaphor that runs through the text. The hand as anessential element in what makes humans different from other animalsis the starting point. The tools we create lead to the things we design andbuild and eventually to the houses that, ideally, become as much anextension of our essence as the body and mind should be. The work isa reflection on life, creativity and personal satisfaction more than a linearprogression of theories. Lavishly illustrated, this book is one that needsto be read slowly and then reread for savor.

NA2542 2009-018520 978-0-8263-4797-8BBuuiillddiinngg ttoo eenndduurree;; ddeessiiggnn lleessssoonnss ooff aarriidd llaannddss..Lusk, Paul and Alf Simon.U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 296 p. $45.00Lusk (emeritus, architecture and planning, U. of New Mexico), Simon(architecture and planning, U. of New Mexico), and nine co-authorsexplored the history of human habitation in the American southwest andother dry areas to develop new—and in some cases very old— ways ofcreating adaptable and durable communities. The authors address themultiple reasons for changing the approach to building or rebuildingcommunities: climate change, limited non-renewable energy sources, andexcessive water use to name a few. The book is a combination of nutsand bolts guidelines and big picture ideas as well as case studies.Photographs and other illustrations are included.

NA2543 2009-017360 978-0-393-73244-3TThhee ffuuttuurree ooff tthhee ppaasstt;; aa ccoonnsseerrvvaattiioonn eetthhiicc ffoorraarrcchhiitteeccttuurree,, uurrbbaanniissmm,, aanndd hhiissttoorriicc pprreesseerrvvaattiioonn..Semes, Steven W.W.W. Norton, ©2009 272 p. $60.00Focusing on a new traditional approach to architecture, this book bySemes (U. of Notre Dame School of Architecture; formerly historicalarchitect, National Park Service) explores the best approaches todesigning new buildings in historical settings or in making additions tohistoric buildings. Current practice regards anything but a modernistdesign as false history. This, however, leads to an overall result that isoftentimes dissonant with the surrounding environment. Full of wellillustrated examples, drawings, and photographs of the results of bothapproaches, this volume is likely to take up important space in futurediscussions.

NA2543 2009-455047 978-1-58603-965-3MMeetthhooddoollooggyy ffoorr pprroodduucctt ddeevveellooppmmeenntt iinn aarrcchhiitteeccttuurree..Eekhout, Mick.IOS Press, ©2008 230 p. $87.00 (pa)This monograph by Eekhout (product development, Faculty ofArchitecture, Delft U. of Technology, the Netherlands) is dedicated to themethodology and processes of designing, development, and research ofstandard building products, building product systems, and specialbuilding components, as well as to their applications in buildings. Theemphasis throughout is on the development and deployment of sys-tematic and methodical processes of design using computers.

NA2545 978-82-519-2344-6IInncclluussiivvee bbuuiillddiinnggss,, pprroodduuccttss aanndd sseerrvviicceess;; cchhaalllleennggeess iinnuunniivveerrssaall ddeessiiggnn..Title main entry. Ed. by Tom Vavik.Tapir Academic Press, ©2009 289 p. $119.00 (pa)Universal design “targets the needs of those groups of people in societywho are excluded from or marginalized by conventional design practicesprimarily due to age or disability.” This volume collects 11 chapters exam-ining universal design strategy and its implementation in the core fieldsof architecture, product design, and information and communicationtechnologies. Vavik (Institute of Industrial Design, Oslo School ofArchitecture and Design, Norway) presents chapters by architects, edu-cators, product designers, and researchers in information and communi-cation technology in sections that mirror this tripartite focus. Examplesof specific topics include the development, promotion, and execution ofuniversally designed housing in Norway; teaching universal design to stu-dents of architecture; the “Design for All” paradigm in commercial per-spective; a case study in packaging design from the Norwegian companyJordan; and use of mobile video telephony by blind people. Distributedin the US by ISBS.

NA2700 2009-004203 978-0-470-39911-8AArrcchhiitteeccttuurraall ggrraapphhiiccss,, 55tthh eedd..Ching, Francis D.K.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 250 p. $45.00 (pa)Ching (registered architect and emeritus, U. of Washington) offers a fifthedition of his textbook and reference on the drawing tools, conventions,and techniques used in architectural renderings. The author addressestools and materials, architectural drafting and drawing systems, drawingstyles, tonal values, rendering context, presentations, and freehanddrawing. He also discusses the digital tools available due to improve-ments in computer technology. The writing is straightforward and, as onewould expect, illustrations are plentiful and very well executed.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–233–

NA2728 2009-034455 978-0-7637-7630-5AAuuttooddeesskk RReevviitt AArrcchhiitteeccttuurree 22001100 iinn pprraaccttiiccee.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Title main entry. Ed. by Kogent Learning Solutions, Inc.Jones & Bartlett, ©2009 332 p. $49.95 (pa)Designed to be used along with the new version of Autodesk RevitArchitecture software, this practical guide explains how to use this com-puter-aided design (CAD) tool for building information modeling (BIM).When working with this software one project file is created that contains3D views, drawing sheets, schedules, cost estimates, renderings and walk-throughs. The 2010 version features several improvements such as anenhanced user interface, a new feature called conceptual design envi-ronment, more worksharing capabilities, and visibility and graphicsenhancements. Includes a DVD trial version of Autodesk RevitArchitecture 2010.

NA2765 2009-455167 978-0-470-51942-4SSppaaccee rreeaaddeerr;; hheetteerrooggeenneeoouuss ssppaaccee iinn aarrcchhiitteeccttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Hensel et al. (AD reader)John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 224 p. $130.00In response to their belief that architectural and urban design theory hasbeen dominated by form, representation, and program in the Post-Modern decades, unfortunately to the neglect of attention to heteroge-neous space, the editors (affiliated variously with the EmTech MasterProgram at the Architectural Association in London, UK; AHO the OsloSchool of Architecture and Design, Norway; Rice U. School ofArchitecture, US; and the Institute for Computational Design at theFaculty of Architecture and Urban Planning, Stuttgart U., Germany) seekto promote such a discourse by presenting 12 essays that they see as keycoordinates in the construction of a discourse about heterogeneous space.They have emphasized seminal, out-of-print writings by architects, ortexts crucial to their work, and have drawn connections between theseessays in the introduction, short texts preceding each selection, and com-missioned essays updating older texts in order to demonstrate thepotential of recent work in the field.

NA2850 2009-011299 978-0-7546-5647-0DDoommeessttiicc iinnssttiittuuttiioonnaall iinntteerriioorrss iinn eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn EEuurrooppee..Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra Cavallo and Silvia Evangelisti. (Visualculture in early modernity)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 267 p. $99.95Nine essays from a November 2004 conference in London explore theinterior design of places besides private houses where people lived forlong or short periods in early modern Europe, among them monasticinstitutions, houses for the poor, hospitals, orphanages, and colleges. Arthistorians consider both spaces and objects from such perspectives asRenaissance graffiti in the Ducal Palace of Urbino, the Oxford college ashousehold 1580-1640, domestic spatial economies and Dutch charitableinstitutions in the late 16th and early 17th centuries, male and femaleobjects at the Portuguese courts 1480-1580, the reception of garland pic-tures in 17th-century Flanders and Italy, and the material possessions ofAmsterdam orphans.

NA5458 978-90-8506-637-8EEuurroo IIssllaamm aarrcchhiitteeccttuurree;; nneeww mmoossqquueess iinn tthhee wweesstt..Welzbacher, Christian. (SUN statement; no.1)SUN Architecture, ©2008 110 p. $39.00 (pa)This is a study of the architecture of Islamic mosques in Europe.Including a large number of color photographs and other illustrationsalongside the text, the author places the architecture of new mosques inrelation to Islamic and European architecture and in the context ofongoing debates over the role of Islam in Europe. Not indexed.

NA5469 978-1-84868-419-5AAbbbbeeyyss aanndd pprriioorriieess..Coppack, Glyn.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 188 p. $29.95 (pa)Although the 1987 book on the archaeology of the sites of Catholicabbeys and priories managed by English Heritage (formerly the HistoricBuildings and Monuments Commission for England) bears the same titleas this work, author Coppack (a monastic scholar who works for EnglishHeritage) has substantially rewritten the work based on new research byhimself and others such that this is essentially a new book. He synthe-sizes the archaeological research in chapters that discuss the archaeologyof monasteries in general, the monastic church, the cloister buildings, thewider precinct, sanitation and the use of water, and the impact of thesuppression of monastic life after Henry VIII’s break with Rome in 1534.Distributed in the US by Casemate.

NA5471 978-1-84802-026-9HHoouusseesstteeaaddss RRoommaann FFoorrtt——tthhee ggrraannddeesstt ssttaattiioonn;; eexxccaavvaattiioonnaanndd ssuurrvveeyy aatt HHoouusseesstteeaaddss,, 11995544--9955,, bbyy CChhaarrlleess DDaanniieellss,,JJoohhnn GGiillllaamm,, JJaammeess CCrrooww aanndd ootthheerrss;; 22vv..Rushworth, Alan. (Archaeological reports)English Heritage, ©2009 614 p. $200.00 (pa)Extensive archaeological studies of this important fort on Hadrian’s Wallwere conducted by Newcastle University between 1974 and 1981—a periodin which radical advancement in archaeological techniques exploded theamount of data that could be gathered; but this information did not getconsolidated and published, thus allowing the importance of the findingsand of the site itself to be overshadowed by work done at other sites. Thistwo-volume compendium rectifies the situation, combining the Newcastlefindings with those done between 1959 and 1961 by Durham Universityto present a complete plan of the north-east part of the fort and of devel-opments over a 300-year period of the Roman military frontier. The firstvolume presents the structural report and discussion; the second volume,the material assemblages. Early in his career, Rushworth was part of the1980 season’s team. Distributed in North America by The David BrownBook Co.

NA5482 978-0-7165-3073-2MMaajjeessttiicc sshhrriinneess aanndd ggrraacceeffuull ssaannccttuuaarriieess;; tthhee cchhuurrcchhaarrcchhiitteeccttuurree ooff PPaattrriicckk BByyrrnnee 11778833--11886644..Grimes, Brendan.Irish Academic Press, ©2009 197 p. $65.00Grimes (architecture, Dublin Institute of Technology) provides a profes-sional biography of nineteenth century Irish architect, Patrick Byrne(1783-1864) With the repeal of laws that prohibited Catholics frombuilding churches there was a rush of construction. Byrne was one of themajor designers. Grimes looks at fifteen churches and two chapels byByrne, done in either Neo-Classical or Gothic Revival style. Each chapterhas many illustrations, including a number of photographs of thebuildings taken by Grimes. While many of the churches, especially inDublin, are on a grand scale, Byrne suited the churches to the parish andmany are small gems. Grimes gives background on the circumstances ofthe building of each and the design. An appendix gives floor plans of thebuildings discussed. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

NA7126 2009-284900 978-0-470-51275-3TThhee uurrbbaann hhoouussiinngg hhaannddbbooookk..Firley, Eric and Caroline Stahl.John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 327 p. $85.00Firley and Stahl, both Paris-based architects, employ comparative analysisof traditional and contemporary architecture and numerous photographsand architectural drawings as they examine 30 very different housingtypes. Exploring the relationship between housing and the urban blockenvironment, the authors describe in detail examples from Ecuador,China, France, Spain, New York, Vietnam, Argentina, and more. Whilenot intended as a history, the book offers sufficient context for readersto understand how the varied housing styles came to be. The book isintended for architects, other building professionals, and students, butalso would be enjoyable for general readers interested in the art ofarchitecture.

NA7562 2009924757 978-0-8478-3300-9RRuussttiicc;; ccoouunnttrryy hhoouusseess,, rruurraall ddwweelllliinnggss,, wwooooddeedd rreettrreeaattss..Morgan, Bret.Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2009 228 p. $55.00From private leisure lodges of the wealthy in the Gilded Age to inns fre-quented by contemporary urban dwellers, such back-to- nature retreatshad always held an allure. Following a historical overview of their majorstyles, a noted photographer of architecture and interiors presents a tourof 20 retreats that span America and over a century of architectural andcultural history. Morgan presents images and commentary on their stylesand architects including traditional rustic architecture (Old Faithful Inn,Yellowstone National Park, WY, Robert C. Reamer); Arts & Crafts (CharlesMillard Pratt House, Ojai, CA, Greene & Greene); modernist(Fallingwater, Mill Run, PA, Frank Lloyd Wright); and Northwest mod-ernist (Roland Terry’s House, Lopez Island, WA). The volume includes abibliography.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –234–

NA8210 2009-004413 978-1-57965-364-4IIttaalliiaann rruussttiicc;; hhooww ttoo bbrriinngg TTuussccaann cchhaarrmm iinnttoo yyoouurrhhoommee..Helman-Minchilli, Elizabeth.Artisan, ©2009 226 p. $35.00Since her Restoring a Home in Italy (Artisan, 2001), Helman- Minchilli hasreceived queries from all over about incorporating traditional Italianmaterials and techniques into new or existing homes. The Americandesign/culture writer based in Italy offers advice on rough-hewn stonewalls, terra cotta roof tiles, hand-cut interior features, wall finishes,cucinas, bathrooms, and gardens. The volume includes a glossary andresources. The photographs are by Simon McBride, who lives in Tuscany.

NA9013 2009-018435 978-0-470-27863-5BBeeccoommiinngg aann uurrbbaann ppllaannnneerr;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo ccaarreeeerrss iinnppllaannnniinngg aanndd uurrbbaann ddeessiiggnn..Bayer, Michael et al. (Becoming series)John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 320 p. $39.95 (pa)Treating urban planning as problem-solving, senior planners and aninstructor in the field explain what planners do, the educational require-ments, future of the profession, and areas of specialization for those con-sidering urban planning as a career. They distinguish between urbanplanning and related fields such as urban design, geography, and publicadministration. The guide includes numerous profiles of public andprivate sector planners in North America, recommendations on degreeoptions and courses, illustrations of types of projects, resources, and ref-erences. Published in conjunction with the American PlanningAssociation.

NA9031 2009-051902 978-0-202-36371-4RReebbuuiillddiinngg cciittiieess ffrroomm mmeeddiieevvaall ttoo mmooddeerrnn ttiimmeess..((rreepprriinntt,, 11996666))Johnson-Marshall, Percy.AldineTransaction, ©2010 374 p. $195.00 (pa)Urban designer and regional planner Johnson-Marshall (1915-93) taught(U. of Edinburgh), worked with the London County Council, and was amember of the Royal Institute of British Architects. In 1955 he decidedthat enough planning and building had been undertaken in some of thebombed cities of Western Europe to make recording it a useful exercise.He covers the historical background of growth, the components ofplanning, visions and designs, new planning legislation and techniques,comprehensive development in London, Coventry, Rotterdam, the city ofthe 21st century, and work in progress. Lewis Mumford wrote the intro-duction to the 1966 edition.

NA9052 2009-011986 978-0-470-39183-9SSiittee ffuurrnniisshhiinnggss;; aa ccoommpplleettee gguuiiddee ttoo tthhee ppllaannnniinngg,,sseelleeccttiioonn,, aanndd uussee ooff llaannddssccaappee ffuurrnniittuurree aanndd aammeenniittiieess..Main, Bill and Gail Greet Hannah.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 259 p. $65.00Engagingly written, thorough, and filled with examples, this slightly over-sized volume (8.75x11.25″) discusses all types of furniture and otheruseful accessories used in outdoor public areas. Of interest to the designprofessional, the volume offers detailed discussion of the many optionsof each that considers the various site and use needs. A lengthy intro-ductory chapter provides in-depth discussion of the many things to beconsidered when choosing the objects and their placement, with a prac-tical step-by-step process described in detail that designers of parks andpublic spaces of all kinds will find invaluable. Issues such as securityand safety are considered alongside planning for views, accessibility,usability, sociability, appearance, comfort, and maintenance. Among theobjects discussed are tables, chairs, and benches of all types; seat walls;litter receptacles; smoking receptacles; transit shelters; bollards and otherdevices for marking a perimeter; garden borders; and tree grates andguards. Many color photos are included.

NA9070 2009-034019 978-0-393-73173-6GGrreeaatt ppuubblliicc ssqquuaarreess;; aann aarrcchhiitteecctt’’ss sseelleeccttiioonn..Gatje, Robert F.W.W. Norton, ©2010 224 p. $65.00Gatje, formerly a partner of Marcel Breuer and Richard Meier, retiredfrom practice in 1995, and found plenty to do, including spending a halfa dozen years on this project. He selected 40 great public squares in theUnited States and western Europe, and he describes their features andhow they function in the engaging voice of someone who has visited eachplace. So that architects and urban planners can make comparisons, heassembled information regarding dimensions and created color illustra-tions of ground plans at the scale of 1:1000. Photos, plans, data descrip-tions, and narrative text for each square are presented in an oversizesquare volume: 11.5x11.5″.

NB90 2009-033217 978-1-84217-344-2SSttrruuccttuurree,, iimmaaggee,, oorrnnaammeenntt;; aarrcchhiitteeccttuurraall ssccuullppttuurree iinn tthheeGGrreeeekk wwoorrlldd;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..Int’l Conference on Ancient Greek Sculpture (2d: 2004: Athens, Greece)Ed. by Peter Schultz and Ralf von den Hoff.Oxbow Books, ©2009 238 p. $80.00The papers presented here grew from at conference held at the AmericanSchool of Classical Studies in Athens in 2004. The focus is on Greek archi-tectural sculpture found on columns, metodes, friezes and free standingsculpture within structures. Schulz (Concordia College) and Hoff(Institute for Archaeological Research, Albert-Ludwigs-Universität,Freiburg) have arranged the articles into four subheadings. The first, onstructure and ornament, looks at what the ornamentation on buildingsmight have meant to the contemporary viewer. This includes inscriptionsand even the design on the capitals of columns. The second section is ontechnique and agency. The possible form of now-lost metal ornamen-tation affixed to figures is the subject of two essays here with the thirdfocusing on the craftsmen involved in the creation of the works. Theways in which known mythologies or histories are interpreted or alteredon public structures is the subject of the third section. The final sectiondiscusses the diffusion of artistic forms in the Greek colonies and to theRoman world. Illustrations accompany each article. There is a list of ref-erences but no index. Oversize 8.5 x 12 ″ Distributed in North Americaby the David Brown Book Co.

NB110 978-88-596-0628-4TThhee CChhiimmaaeerraa ooff AArreezzzzoo..Title main entry. Ed. by Mario Iozzo.Edizioni Polistampa, ©2010 51 p. $15.00 (pa)This translated catalog was produced for the title exhibit at the J. PaulGetty Museum, Los Angeles, held July 16, 2009-February 8, 2010. Iozzo(National Archeological Museum, Florence) and the Getty’s senior curatorof antiquities describe their collaboration for the loan of this largeEtruscan bronze chimera dating to the 5th century B.C., its 16th centurydiscovery in Arezzo, symbolism of the mythical creature, and place inclassical art and Medici history. Distributed in North America by TheDavid Brown Book Co.

NB225 2009-034475 978-1-4403-0314-2SSccuullppttuurree ooff tthhee RRoocckkiieess;; 9977 ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy aanndd ttrraaddiittiioonnaallaarrttiissttss..Title main entry. Ed. by the editors of Southwest art.F&W Publications, ©2010 206 p. $50.00In a 9x12.5″) format, the editors of Southwest Art present 25 artists of theRocky Mountain states: Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Utah, and Wyoming.For each we see a two-page spread comprising a full-page color image, abrief biography, and the artists’ answers to five questions regarding theinspiration for the piece, prep work and techniques, greatest challenge increating the piece, the final results—those anticipated and surprises, andthe personal meaning of the piece for the artist. The sculptures rangefrom conventional to highly innovative; many are bronze, but other mate-rials (wire, stone, stainless steel) are lightly represented.

NB237 2009-033705 978-1-55595-323-2CCaarroollee AA.. FFeeuueerrmmaann;; ssccuullppttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Dena Merriam and Eleanor Munro.Photographs by David Finn.Hudson Hills Press, ©2009 185 p. $50.00Essays by Dena Merriam (executive editor, Sculpture Review magazineand Eleanor Munro (critic & writer, former editor of Art News magazine)combine with images created by eminent sculpture photographer DavidFinn to showcase Feuerman’s provocative work. She uses super-realisttechniques to create bodies—in resin, cast marble, bronze, and othermaterials (often painted)—selecting, capturing, and intensely conveying adistinctive compendium of physical and emotional sensations in eachsculpture. The book is oversize (10.5x12″) allowing for generous full-pagedisplay of the images. The end matter consists of a chronology, bibliog-raphy, lists of exhibitions and holdings in collections, and an index totitles of works.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–235–

NB237 978-0-9725657-4-5WWiillllaarrdd SSttoonnee..Title main entry.Gilcrease Museum, ©2010 190 p. $24.95 (pa)The work of Cherokee woodcarver Stone (1916-85) is shown in lavishcolor photographs and analyzed by curators at the Museum RandyRamer and Carole Klein, Stone’s grandson Regan Hansen, and art scholarKimberly Roblin. His works were the first holdings in the Tulsa,Oklahoma museum founded by Creek oilman Thomas Gilcrease, whichis now home to the world’s largest collection art and artifacts of TheAmerican West. Distributed by the University of Oklahoma Press.

NB1255 2008-924199 978-0-940717-94-7AArrtt aanndd ppoowweerr iinn tthhee CCeennttrraall AAffrriiccaann ssaavvaannnnaa;; LLuubbaa,,SSoonnggyyee,, CChhookkwwee,, LLuulluuwwaa..Petridis, Constantijn.Cleveland Museum of Art, ©2008 159 p. $60.00This generously illustrated oversize (10x12″) catalogue was published toaccompany an eponymous exhibition organized by the ClevelandMuseum of Art and held in various venues during 2008-2009. Petridis,the Museum’s African art curator, provides the text, describing and com-paring the four cultures. The term fetish has given way to the morerespectful power object to refer to objects carved of wood, in human oranimal shape, associated with religious beliefs and the mediation ofspirit and human worlds. These objects are conventionally distinguishedfrom art that serves political purposes, but Petridis argues that in themeticulously made, relatively large-size figures presented here, the twopurposes merged. Distributed in North America by Cornell UniversityPress.

NC139 978-0-9725657-3-8CChhaarrlleess BBaannkkss WWiillssoonn.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000077))Title main entry.Gilcrease Museum, ©2010 200 p. $19.95 (pa)This volume reproduces 175 works of art produced by painter CharlesBanks Wilson (b. 1918), an American artist best known for his por-traiture and murals depicting people and life of his home state ofOklahoma. The art is accompanied by essays on Wilson’s biography, hisdepictions of everyday life, his work in portraiture of Native Americansand more generally, his printmaking, and his murals. Contributorsinclude Randy Ramer, Carole Klein, Kimberly Roblin, and Regan Hansen.This paperbound edition is distributed by the U. of Oklahoma Press.

NC730 978-90-8790-874-4DDrraawwnn ttoowwaarrdd ttrraannssffoorrmmaattiioonn;; ccoonnvveerrssaattiioonnss oonn tteeaacchhiinnggaanndd lleeaarrnniinngg ddrraawwiinngg..Kalin, Nadine.Sense Publishers, ©2009 255 p. $49.00 (pa)For teachers, teacher educators, educational researchers, and others inter-ested in professional development, complexity thinking, curriculumstudies, collaborative action research, and arts-based educationalresearch, Kalin (U. of North Texas) shares the experiences of a collabo-rative venture between her and a group of three non-art teachers as theyinvestigate the teaching and learning of drawing in elementary class-rooms within the context of an action research group. She focuses on pos-sible processes of change in teaching and learning drawing, as she relatesthe practices and personal histories of the teachers, their feelings ofincompetence, the influence of their past experiences with drawing, ideasabout assessment, their perceptions of drawing, and other aspects. Noindex is provided.

NC975 2009-016766 978-0-8166-6771-0WWaannddaa GGáágg;; aa lliiffee ooff aarrtt aanndd ssttoorriieess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999944))Hoyle, Karen Nelson. (Fesler-Lampert Minnesota heritage book series)U. of Minnesota Press, ©2009 139 p. $16.95 (pa)Probably best known for her book, Millions of Cats, artist and children’sauthor Wanda Gág was an eccentric figure in the world of children’s lit-erature. Hoyle (Children’s Literature, University of Minnesota) recountsGág’s life from the difficult days as sole support of her six siblings andsick mother to her ultimate success as an author and illustrator based inNew York City. The book includes 12 pages of Gág’s delightful artwork.

NC997 2009-017330 978-0-470-24670-2SSuussttaaiinnaabbllee ggrraapphhiicc ddeessiiggnn;; ttoooollss,, ssyysstteemmss aanndd ssttrraatteeggiieessffoorr iinnnnoovvaattiivvee pprriinntt ddeessiiggnn..Jedlicka, Wendy.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 506 p. $49.95 (pa)Jedlicka (faculty, Minneapolis College of Art and Design’s SustainableDesign Certificate Program) and 17 co-contributors provide instruction ona greener way for graphic designers to develop more effective and sus-tainable work. The authors discuss how sustainability works in business,graphic communications, ethics in marketing and business, sustain-ability and graphic design, the holistic approach, materials andprocesses, responsible purchasing and environmentally preferable bestpractices, and more related subjects.

NC1002 2009-029579 978-1-932907-67-4FFrroomm wwoorrdd ttoo iimmaaggee;; ssttoorryybbooaarrddiinngg aanndd tthhee ffiillmmmmaakkiinnggpprroocceessss,, 22dd eedd..Begleiter, Marcie.Michael Wiese Productions, ©2010 266 p. $26.95 (pa)This is the second edition of a text providing guidance on the creationand use of storyboards in filmmaking. It covers the history of story-boarding, the place of storyboards in preproduction, creating a visualshot list, overhead diagramming, drawing, the expression of cameramovement with the use of frames extended beyond typical aspect ratio,the role of narrative in storyboard composition, and related topics. Addedto this new edition is discussion of the use of color in storyboarding, aswell as the use of previsualization techniques for animation, new media,and visual effects. The appendixes, which have been revised andexpanded, provide information on software for storyboarding, list filmDVDs with storyboards, list websites with visualization content, andprovide frame templates.

NC1766 2009-050134 978-0-8126-9670-7AAnniimmee aanndd pphhiilloossoopphhyy;; wwiiddee eeyyeedd wwoonnddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Josef Steiff and Tristan D. Tamplin. (Popularculture and philosophy; v.47)Open Court Publishing, ©2010 348 p. $19.95 (pa)The co-editors of Battlestar Galactica and Philosophy return with an explo-ration of the philosophical and psychological themes of the Japaneseanime films and TV series that have become the most popular withWestern audiences, such as the films of Hayao Miyazaki and the Ghostin the Shell films. Contributors are academics in philosophy, popularculture studies, creative writing, film, and communication studies, andhighlight characters who grapple with questions of societal violence,morality, justice, heroism, identity, and the soul. Essays are in sectionson body, mind, spirit, conflict, heroes, devils, and future worlds. Thebook includes b&w illustrations, a glossary of the anime universe, andlists of recommended films, books, web sites. Its readership includesfans, newbies, and students. Steiff is associate chair of the Department ofFilm and Video at Columbia College Chicago. He is also co-author ofManga and Philosophy. Tamplin holds a PhD in philosophy.

NC1849 2009-013581 978-0-8139-2855-5WWaanntteedd;; tthhee oouuttllaaww iinn AAmmeerriiccaann vviissuuaall ccuullttuurree..Hall, Rachel. (Cultural frames, framing culture)U. of Virginia Press, ©2009 195 p. $19.50 (pa)Despite what you’ve seen on TV and the movies, there were no “wanted”posters in the Old West. (The first one—advising the public about a “noto-rious” draft dodger—didn’t appear until 1917.) From precursors such asrunaway slave notices up to the recent “Iraq’s Most Wanted” playingcards distributed to soldiers in the Mideast, shows how “wanted” postershave developed as an iconic American print genre. The use and historyof these posters, suggests the author, helps us understand contemporaryAmerican fantasies of vulnerability and the increasingly pervasivesecurity measures taken against domestic and foreign enemies.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –236–

NC1882 978-87-635-0774-5CCoovveerrssccaappiinngg;; ddiissccoovveerriinngg aallbbuumm aaeesstthheettiiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by Asbjørn Grønstad and Øyvind Vagnes.Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2010 209 p. $34.00 (pa)Noting that the album cover is a “highly visible yet strangely unac-knowledged genre” in academia, Gronstad (visual culture, U. of Bergen,Norway) and Vagnes (information science and media studies, U. ofBergen, Norway) present ten essays that explore the aesthetics of thealbum cover in diverse ways, although a unifying premise of the col-lection is that the album cover should be seen as part of a compositemedium that includes the album art, the musical object, liner notes andother text, and even (in at least one case noted below) cinema. Topicsaddressed include the discourse of patriotism and masculinity found inBruce Springsteen’s Born in the U.S.A.; the ways Neil Young’salbum/movie project, Greendale, shifts the idea of the concept album; theimpact of digital technology on the relationship between music andimage; the aesthetics of the self-made (DIY) CD; the visual and tactilecharacter of the mix compilation; racial representation on the recordsleeves produced by The Smiths; the construction of identity on the coverof De La Soul is Dead; the aesthetics of musical star portraiture of TheClash and Captain Beefheart in the photographic works of, respectively,Pennie Smith and Anton Corbijn; Goth album covers as critiques of reli-gious ideology; and neglected aesthetic parallels between JacksonPollock’s painting White Light and the music of Ornette Coleman’sgroundbreaking album Free Jazz, which features White Light on thecover.

ND115 2009-517574 978-0-06-155828-3TThhee lloosstt cchhaalliiccee;; tthhee eeppiicc hhuunntt ffoorr aa pprriicceelleessss mmaasstteerrppiieeccee..Silver, Vernon.William Morrow & Co., ©2009 344 p. $26.99Silver has written a page-turner in this true account of the police trailinto the international dealings, not always legal, that lay behind apriceless Greek vase by the celebrated painter Euphronius which sur-faced in the 1990s. Silver, an archaeologist, covers the illicit antiquitiestrade for Bloomberg News in Rome. His close knowledge of the Italianand the international art world and his fast-paced style make this anexciting read.

ND195 978-87-635-2597-8CCoonntteemmppoorraarryy ppaaiinnttiinngg iinn ccoonntteexxtt..Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Ring Petersen. (Novo Nordisk art historyproject; v.1)Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2010 220 p. $34.00 (pa)Petersen (modern culture, U. of Copenhagen, Denmark), along with co-editors Mikkel Bogh (rector, The Royal Danish Art Academy), Hans DamChristensen (Royal School of Library and Information Science, Denmark),and Peter Nørgaard Larsen (The National Gallery, Denmark), offer a col-lection of ten essays that engage with the larger issues and trends in con-temporary painting, citing a wealth of artists, critics, and theorists.Gender, space, post-modernism, design, and medium are some of thethemes, with Ida Applebroog, Jonathan Meese, Peter Bonde, OlafurEliasson, and Michael Krebber among the artists discussed. The artistKatharine Grosse contributes a photo-essay with extended comments onher process. The volume, which will be of interest in the undergraduateclassroom as well as to professional artists and critics, is well illustratedwith color plates. It’s distributed in the US by ISBS.

ND237 978-0-578-03970-1FFoollllooww tthhee ssuunn;; RRoobbeerrtt LLoouugghheeeedd..Hedgpeth, Don.Diamond Tail Press, ©2010 359 p. $65.00Lougheed (1910-1982) made his living as a designer (for example, theMobil Oil Company’s flying Pegasus) but also painted prolifically in theUS and abroad, with a particular passion for horses and the West. Hisskills and subject matter transcended the category of “cowboy art,”although he was a member of the Cowboy Artists of America and helpedfound the National Academy of Western Art. Much of the work is housedin the Claggett/Rey Gallery in Vail, Colorado, but with this oversizevolume (11.25x11.5″) readers can see at close hand his loose, evocativebrush strokes and skillful technique with oils. Showcased in this gen-erous presentation are 334 paintings or details in color and 85 b&wdrawings—with text by long-time admirer Don Hedgpeth, founding editorof the journal of the National Cowboy & Western Heritage Museum inOklahoma City. The book is distributed by the U. of Oklahoma Press.

ND237 2009-902642 978-0-9778399-1-9LLaauurraa WWooooddwwaarrdd;; tthhee aarrttiisstt bbeehhiinndd tthhee iinnnnoovvaattoorr wwhhooddeevveellooppeedd PPaallmm BBeeaacchh..Pollack, Deborah C.Blue Heron Press, ©2009 264 p. $39.99In a well-illustrated volume published in association with the HistoricalSociety of Palm Beach County for the county’s centennial anniversary, aPalm Beach resident draws on public and private archives and othersources to give proper due to now little- known artist Laura Woodward(1834-1926). As one of the few women members of the Hudson River andWhite Mountain Schools, Woodward inspired tycoon/art patron HenryMorrison Flagler in the development of his resorts with her paintingsdepicting the area as a tropical paradise. Pollack discusses challenges forfemale artists in the social milieu of the era.

ND237 2009-036798 978-1-55595-326-3RRaannssoommiinngg MMaatthheeww BBrraaddyy..Phillips, John Ransom.Hudson Hills Press, ©2010 244 p. $60.00This book highlights a series of oils and watercolors in which artistPhilips interprets the complexity of 19th century photographer MathewBrady, whose images of the Civil War and Abraham Lincoln haveachieved iconic status. The book is beautifully designed and includesmore than 280 plates (all but 17 in color) showing Philips’ works andsome of Brady’s photographs, as well as a descriptive essay byAlan Trachtenberg. Despite the book’s visual appeal, however, manyreaders will be left wondering why the artist spent so much effort rein-terpreting Brady when the original photographs speak so eloquently bythemselves.

ND237 978-1-55458-190-0WWoollddeemmaarr NNeeuuffeellddss’’ss CCaannaaddaa;; aa MMeennnnoonniittee aarrttiisstt iinn tthheeCCaannaaddiiaann llaannddssccaappee;; 11992255--11999955..Tiessen, Hilde Froese and Paul Gerard Tiessen. Ed by Laurence Neufeldand Monika McKillen.Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2010 146 p. $50.00An artist who can be claimed by both Canada and the U.S., WoldemarNeufeld was concerned with documenting landscapes and cityscapes,showing ordinary places and things in a way that would appeal to theproverbial “person on the street.” Presenting a huge selection of Neufeld’spaintings (both oils and watercolors), drawings, and block prints, thisbeautifully produced book documents his stylistic evolution over a careerthat lasted more than seven decades. Of particular interest is the frequentappearance of bridges in the artist’s works (whether they were thesubject or just an element of a larger scene), reflecting Newfeld’s beliefthat every bridge was unique and had its own story to tell.

ND497 978-88-596-0529-4TThhee AAllaannaa CCoolllleeccttiioonn,, NNeewwaarrkk,, DDeellaawwaarree,, UUSSAA;; IIttaalliiaannppaaiinnttiinnggss ffrroomm tthhee 1133tthh ttoo 1155tthh cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Miklós Boskovits.Edizioni Polistampa, ©2009 256 p. $65.00Beautifully illustrated with full-page color plates and many b&w plates,this oversized volume (9.75x12.5″) offers a detailed catalog of the richAlana collection of Italian paintings. The material is grouped alphabeti-cally by artist, with the artist’s biography followed by detailed entries onhis work (most are panel paintings). The entries document the work’sphysical condition, its provenance, the history of conservation andrestoration, as well as the religious content and local patronage. Thecatalog concludes with an exhaustive bibliography and indexes of namesand places. It’s distributed in North America by The David Brown BookCo.

ND497 978-1-85635-638-1IInn sseeaarrcchh ooff tthhee pprroommiisseedd llaanndd;; tthhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff ppoosstt--wwaarrIIrreellaanndd..Murphy, Gary.Mercier Press, ©2009 352 p. $48.95Contrary to interpretations that see Irish politics in the post-war era asdefined largely by isolationism, Murphy (politics, Dublin City U., Ireland)argues that Irish political leaders were actively engaged in search of aneconomic “promised land” and that this search was successfully reflectedin the decision to apply for entry into the European EconomicCommunity and in the development of the “social partnership” agree-ments between government, employer groups, and trade unionsregarding wage, tax, and welfare issues that began in the 1980s. Inrecounting this political history of the 1950s and onwards, he links thesepolitical decisions to the prosperity enjoyed by Ireland prior to the globalfinancial crisis and suggests that it provides lessons for current politi-cians and policy-makers. Distributed in the US by Dufour Editions, Inc.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–237–

ND497 2009-510208 978-1-86205-856-9AA mmaann’’ss wwoorrlldd..Vettriano, Jack.Pavilion Books, ©2009 112 p. $13.95This selection of paintings by contemporary Scottish artist (and formermining engineer) Vettriano (b. 1951) includes works that illustrate hisview of men’s preoccupations—notably women—and range of emotions.His paintings evoke the hard edge of the film noir genre, with a dash ofsurrealim. This volume is a good complement to his Women in Love.

ND497 2009-510207 978-1-86205-855-2WWoommeenn iinn lloovvee..Vettriano, Jack.Pavilion Books, ©2009 112 p. $13.95This selection of paintings by contemporary Scottish artist (and formermining engineer) Vettriano (b. 1951) includes works that illustrate hisconcept of love and the attributes of women that attract him. Hispaintings evoke the film noir genre, often with romantic or nude motifs,softened by a touch of Impressionism. This volume is a good complementto his A Man’s World.

ND623 978-99932-7-249-6BBaarrooqquuee ppaaiinnttiinngg iinn MMaallttaa..Sciberras, Keith.Midsea Books Ltd, ©2009 450 p. $148.00Baroque painting in Malta reflects that of the Italian peninsula in manyways and yet has some of its own character, shaped by the island’s smallsize. Sometimes Malta was at the forefront, sometimes it was insulated,and sometimes particular currents or figures profoundly influencedwhat happened there. Aiming to address and clarify issues of attributionand dates of paintings of the Maltese Baroque, Sciberras (art history, U.of Malta) nurtured this project for 15 years, engaging in extensivearchival research and connoisseurship study. Along with Sciberras’s text,this lavish volume (measures 9.5x12.5″) presents full works and detailsin 445 plates, as well as a listing of over 1,000 works attributed to artistsincluding Filippino Dingli, Lucas Garnier, and Mattia Preti, amongothers. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

ND623 2009-002320 978-1-84519-186-3MMiicchheellee TToossiinnii aanndd tthhee GGhhiirrllaannddaaiioo wwoorrkksshhoopp iinncciinnqquueecceennttoo FFlloorreennccee..Hornik, Heidi J.Sussex Academic Press, ©2009 211 p. $55.00 (pa)Because Tornik was an important enough artist to be recorded by nameduring his lifetime, he has attracted the attention of art historians duringthe 20th century, says Hornik (Italian Renaissance and Baroque arthistory, Baylor U., Texas), but very little has been known about his life,his relationships with colleagues, and his children until now. She con-fesses that the investigation has not been easy. Archival documents, mostpublished here for the first time, record the major events and importantdetails on his life. Of particular significance is the role of the children inhis artistic career. Among the crucial documents is his testament, whichshe located in 1989 and published in Paragone. She integrates historicaland biographical concerns with a stylistic iconography of the originalworks of art. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

ND813 978-0-9819666-0-1TThhee oorriiggiinnss ooff EEll GGrreeccoo iiccoonn ppaaiinnttiinngg iinn VVeenneettiiaann CCrreettee..Title main entry. Ed. by Anastasia Drandaki.Alexander S. Onassis Foundation, ©2009 131 p. $20.00 (pa)Published to accompany an exhibition held from November-February2009-2010 at the Onassis Cultural Center in collaboration with the BenakiMuseum of Athens and the Holy Archdiocese of Crete, this slightly over-sized catalog (9x11.75″) contains superb color plates of the 46 icons andpaintings from the exhibition, with detailed entries for each. Notable aswell are the three well-illustrated essays on the legacy of icon painting inCrete during El Greco’s time, its tradition of architecture and sculptureduring the Venetian period, and El Greco’s early and late work. Thevolume concludes with a glossary, timeline, and bibliography, but is notindexed. It’s distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

ND1010 2009-035224 978-81-321-0239-7TThhee aalltteerrnnaattee nnaattiioonn ooff AAbbaanniinnddrraannaatthh TTaaggoorree..Banerji, Debashish.Sage Publications, ©2010 136 p. $59.95Banerji (Asian Art History, Pasadena City College) takes a new look at thework of Abanindranath Tagore, founder of the Bengal School of art. Theauthor argues that, rather than being bound by nationalism,Abanindranath’s works negotiated the boundaries between a communi-tarian past and a colonial present, thus conducting a critical engagementwith post-Enlightenment modernity and regional subalternity. The bookis generously illustrated with color plates, mainly reproductions ofAbanindranath’s works.

ND1337 2009-051287 978-1-58839-357-9AAmmeerriiccaann ppoorrttrraaiitt mmiinniiaattuurreess iinn tthhee MMeettrrooppoolliittaann MMuusseeuummooff AArrtt..Barratt, Carrie Rebora and Lori Zabar.Metropolitan Museum of Art, ©2010 316 p. $65.00The Metropolitan Museum of Art in New York holds the largest collectionof portrait miniatures, a now lost art that was once a way to keep theimage of your loved ones close. Painted in watercolor on ivory and ofastonishing quality and naturalism, the Met’s miniatures date from thecolonial era to the mid-20th century. This oversized volume (9.5x11.25″)catalogues the entire collection, grouped chronologically, with detailedentries for each artist, two essays by Barratt and Zabar on the history ofthe collection and the cases created to hold individual miniatures, aglossary, and full bibliography. As is the norm for this press, the repro-ductions, in b&w and color plates, are of the best quality. Given theintimate nature and use of the portraits, the collection is unusual foroffering the viewer the sense of a personal encounter with Americansfrom an earlier time. Distributed by Yale University Press.

ND1351 978-1-55595-353-9LLeemmuueell MMaayynnaarrdd WWiilleess;; aa rreeccoorrdd ooff hhiiss wwoorrkkss,, 11886644--11990044..Fleming, Geoffrey K.Hudson Hills Press, ©2009 158 p. $40.00Co-published with the Southold Historical Society, this volume presents acomplete inventory of the paintings of this early New Yorker. Born inwestern New York state, Wiles painted landscapes of the area and wenton to be an influential instructor of painting. Fleming, the SoutholdHistorical Society’s director, presents a detailed biography of the painter,with many quotes from letters and other writings and illustrated withperiod photographs. The inventory of his works is beautifully presented,with the works presented in the original order of the painter’s ledger, bysize, title, and by location. A full bibliography is also included.

ND1650 978-1-905375-28-8TThhee WWeessttmmiinnsstteerr RReettaabbllee;; hhiissttoorryy,, tteecchhnniiqquuee,, ccoonnsseerrvvaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Paul Binski and Ann Massing. (Painting andpractice)Harvey Miller Publishers, ©2009 464 p. $196.00Considered one of the most beautiful medieval paintings, the Retable,according to recent consensus, was probably the high altarpiece of HenryIII’s Abbey church and might have been in place for the dedication ofthe building in 1269. Somehow, it survived and now resides in theMuseum of Westminster Abbey. Restoration was completed in 2005, bythe Hamilton Kerr Institute, a department of the Fitzwilliam Museum, U.of Cambridge, and a great deal of information was learned during thecourse of the long, supremely cautious restorative work. In this mono-graph 37 scholarly contributions discuss the Retable’s history, function,and manufacture, as well as the restoration process itself. Abundant illus-trations document the painting as it looked before and after. Distributionin the North America is by The David Brown Book Co.

ND2590 2009-922509 978-0-8109-8049-5GGrraaffffiittii wwoorrlldd;; ssttrreeeett aarrtt ffrroomm ffiivvee ccoonnttiinneennttss,, rreevv.. eedd..Ganz, Nicholas. Ed. by Tristan Manco.Harry N. Abrams, ©2009 391 p. $35.00This stunning book lays to rest any lingering doubts as to whethergraffiti is truly an art from. A graffiti artist himself, Ganz presents hun-dreds of photos of graffiti from five continents (although heavilyweighted toward Europe and the Americas), along with informationabout the artists. Showcasing graffiti ranging from fairly simple tags tosophisticated social commentary, the book documents the evolution ofstyle and subject matter in an outsider art form that increasingly influ-ences “mainstream” art and graphic design. Ganz’s book will fascinategeneral readers, and provide almost endless inspiration for artists.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –238–

ND2920 978-87-635-2604-3AAlleexxaannddeerrss ssaaggaa;; AAMM 551199aa 44 iinn tthhee AArrnnaammaaggnnææaannCCoolllleeccttiioonn,, CCooppeennhhaaggeenn.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Title main entry. Ed. by Andrea de Leeuw van Weenen. (Manuscriptanordica; early Nordic manuscripts in digital facsimile; v.2)Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2009 352 p. $138.00 (pa)Thorough in its analysis and clearly presented, this volume offers a com-plete print and digital transcription of the Old Icelandic saga ofAlexander the Great, with the digital version on the accompanying CD-ROM. The transcription is preceded by a complete morphologic andorthographic analysis and is followed by a lemmatized index and a bib-liography, making this an exemplary, self-contained reference work.Images of the bookcover and a sample page of the manuscript areincluded. The volume is distributed in North America by ISBS.

ND4972 978-0-8478-3438-9DDoo iitt yyoouurrsseellff;; DDaammiiáánn OOrrtteeggaa..Ortega, Damián et al.Rizzoli Intl. Pub. Inc., ©2009 208 p. $40.00The exhibition is titled Damián Ortega: Do It Yourself, perhaps to distin-guish it from its catalogue; it was presented at the Institute ofContemporary Art in Boston from September 2009 to January 2010.Mexican installation artist Ortega often focuses on how the componentsof complex things—cars and clocks for example—relate to human per-ception and use of the objects as a single unit. Most of the pieces areillustrated with color photographs. The text is in English and Spanish.There is no index.

NE539 2009-040115 978-1-55595-290-7JJoohhnn BBaallddeessssaarrii;; aa ccaattaalloogguuee rraaiissoonnnnéé ooff pprriinnttss aannddmmuullttiipplleess,, 11997711--22000077..Hurowitz, Sharon Coplan.Hudson Hills Press, ©2009 539 p. $125.00Hurowitz, an art adviser and independent curator, was pleased to havethe opportunity (despite the immense amount of work) of compiling thiscatalogue raisonné of work by Baldessari, a major figure in contem-porary art who has been an innovative and prolific printmaker since1970. She was delighted to engage Wendy Weitman (former curator ofprints, The Museum of Modern Art) to write an extensive essay titled“Between the Ink and the Photograph,” offering a detailed survey andinterpretation of Baldessari’s work. The essay covers influences and col-laborations, early projects, etchings of the 1980s (including 39 illustra-tions for The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, Gentleman,politically-linked projects (posters, page inserts, album covers, billboards),the artist’s use of color and move into three dimensions, and his smallportfolios. The catalogue itself offers generous display of images on heavycoated stock in an oversize format (9x12″).

NK1174 2009-011752 978-0-7546-6550-2WWoommeenn aanndd tthhiinnggss,, 11775500--11995500;; ggeennddeerreedd mmaatteerriiaallssttrraatteeggiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Maureen Daly Goggin and Beth Fowkes Tobin.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 373 p. $124.95Goggin and Tobin, both in the English department at Arizona StateUniversity, take a closer look at the often undervalued objects created bywomen. The time frame is from 1750-1950 and the objects vary fromembroidered underwear to public sculpture. The essays discuss ways inwhich women created expressions of themselves through the objects theymade or collected. Some of the women are nameless to us, the only relicof their lives being the things they made. The cultures are as apparentlyfar removed as Aboriginal Australia, Native North America and middleclass Britain, yet the common thread is strong. This is the first of whatis now three volumes edited by Tobin and Goggin, all part of a series onwomen artists and craft makers. The essays are well illustrated withexamples of the work. This book and its companions belong in any col-lection of women’s history.

NK1548 978-1-85669-621-0TThhee ppaatttteerrnn ssoouurrcceebbooookk;; aa cceennttuurryy ooff ssuurrffaaccee ddeessiiggnn.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Cole, Drusilla.Laurence King Publishing, ©2009 304 p. $35.00 (pa)Beautifully designed, this pattern idea-book presents a rich sampling ofdesigns executed on textiles, ceramic, furniture, and wallpaper, amongother media. Each design fills the majority of the page in color plates ofexcellent quality. The short text accompanying each design provides thedate, artist, place of manufacture, and a description of the design’scontext and unique features. The volume concludes with a list of sourcesand a bibliography. It is not indexed. Cole is with the Central SaintMartins College of Art & Design, London, the UK.

NK2115 2009-029551 978-0-393-73320-4AArrttss aanndd ccrraaffttss rruuggss ffoorr ccrraaffttssmmaann iinntteerriioorrss;; tthhee CCrraabbTTrreeee FFaarrmm ccoolllleeccttiioonn..Parry, Linda et al.W.W. Norton, ©2010 167 p. $45.00Focusing on an under-studied element of the Arts and Crafts Movement,this book presents contributed essays and 125 thoroughly captioned colorand b&w illustrations featuring rugs drawn primarily from the collectionof Crab Tree Farm, which is located in Lake Bluff, Illinois. The five farmbuildings were designed by architect Solon Spencer Beman in 1911, andtoday house collections of furniture and decorative arts of the Movement.The first essay discusses Gustav Stickley and his magazine TheCraftsman, which he published from 1901 to 1916. Following are essayson the rugs and of C.F.A. Voysey; Donegal and Dun Emer rugs of Ireland;rag rugs; Scotch rugs; Druggets of India; Navajo, Crex grass, and Abnákeerugs. The two primary authors, Linda Parry and David Cathers, arejoined by three others: Diane Boucher, Ann Lane Hedlund, and DruMuskovin. All have extensive writing, curating, and textile experience.

NK2116 2009-011954 978-0-470-19053-1IInntteerriioorr ddeessiiggnn iinn pprraaccttiiccee;; ccaassee ssttuuddiieess ooff ssuucccceessssffuullbbuussiinneessss mmooddeellss..Maurer, Terri L. and Katie Weeks.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 227 p. $65.00 (pa)Through case studies of successful businesses, Maurer, a business con-sultant, commercial interior designer, author, and educator, and Weeks,a design writer and editor, detail how new and seasoned designers canplan and launch an interior design business. They discuss financing,insurance and contracts, hiring, building relationships, branding andmarketing, communications and technology, networking, ethics, sus-taining and growing a business, personnel management, and successionplanning. Sample forms are included.

NK4315 978-3-7774-2271-8TThhee HHoocckkeemmeeyyeerr ccoolllleeccttiioonn;; 2200tthh cceennttuurryy IIttaalliiaann cceerraammiiccaarrtt..Title main entry.Hirmer Verlag, ©2009 240 p. $138.00This lavishly prepared volume represents an extraordinary collection ofItalian ceramic art, a few from the 1930s, the majority from the periodimmediately after the war until the 1960s, assembled by Bernd and EvaHockemeyer. Explanatory essays discuss the history of the Italian ceramictradition and the specifics of the collection. The catalogue itself displays60 pieces full-page (the format is oversize: 9.5x13″), with some contextualinformation on facing pages. Following is a section of artists’ biographies,and a bibliography is appended. Throughout, the text is in both Englishand German, and an Italian-language insert is included. Distributed inNorth America by The David Brown Book Co.

NK8809 2009-005558 978-0-7546-6538-0WWoommeenn aanndd tthhee mmaatteerriiaall ccuullttuurree ooff nneeeeddlleewwoorrkk aannddtteexxttiilleess,, 11775500--11995500..Title main entry. Ed. by Maureen Daly Goggin and Beth Fowkes Tobin.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 296 p. $99.95Textile creation is so associated with women that “distaff side” is still aphrase for anything pertaining to women, although few people knowwhat a distaff is. In this book on women and the material culture sur-rounding needlework and cloth making, Tobin and Groggin, both inEnglish at the University of Arizona, have assembled a cross-disciplinarygroup of articles on how women have revealed themselves through thisquintessentially feminine occupation between the years of 1750-1960.Some essays focus on the objects themselves. Samplers, intended asexamples of sewing skill, could also become statements of belief orrecords of a family. Handmade clothing can show pride in ones skill andprove that poverty does not exclude artistic sense. The design of quiltsamong Anglo-American pioneers and also Native American women,speaks for those who were usually silent to history. The creation offactory cloth and lace for sale to stores is studied, as well. Knitting assupport for soldiers at war is addressed, as are the banners made bywomen fighting for their rights. The ways in which women have inter-acted with the craft of the distaff are multifold. This superb collectionreveals how much they were saying through it.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–239–

NK9112 2009-016951 978-0-7649-5165-7AAmmiisshh aabbssttrraaccttiioonnss;; qquuiillttss ffrroomm tthhee ccoolllleeccttiioonn ooff FFaaiitthhaanndd SStteepphheenn BBrroowwnn..Smucker, Janneken et al.Pomegranate Communications, ©2010 127 p. $29.95Since the late 1960s, the geometric piecework quilts made by the Amishhave been much sought after by art collectors and art museums. Thisstunning volume includes color plates of 74 quilts, accompanied byessays describing both the quiltmaking process and the ways in whichAmish quilts embody the important social and religious values of thecommunities where they were made. This beautifully produced andscholarly (but not staid) look at a living craft tradition will appeal tomany readers. Quiltmakers will be especially interested in JoeCunningham’s essay on the color choices and construction details forseveral quilts.

NX83 978-0-7748-1542-0AArrtt iinn ttuurrmmooiill;; tthhee CChhiinneessee ccuullttuurraall rreevvoolluuttiioonn 11996666--7766..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard King. (Contemporary Chinese studies)U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 282 p. $85.00An art exhibit titled Art of the Great Proletarian Cultural Revolution, 1996-76 (2002), showed viewers at the Morris and Helen Belkin Art Galleryin Vancouver how greatly art was impacted by Mao’s Cultural Revolution.Given the resurgence of interest in this period of political and socialupheaval in China, King (Chinese studies, U. of Victoria) introduces ninechapters by scholars and noted artists who began their careers then thatexamine this period of both brutally-enforced conformity and subversiveexperimentation in the visual and other arts, and its implications for con-temporary China. The volume includes numerous art illustrations andextensive bibliographic material. Distributed by UTP Distribution.

NX180 2009-483868 978-1-4438-0537-7FFrroomm wwoorrdd ttoo ccaannvvaass;; aapppprroopprriiaattiioonnss ooff mmyytthh iinn wwoommeenn’’ssaaeesstthheettiicc pprroodduuccttiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by V.G. Julie Rajan and Sanja Bahun-Radunovic.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 174 p. $52.99Taking particular works as examples, practitioners and scholars of liter-ature, film, and drama explore how female-centered myth that has comedown the generations in spoken and now written form, is translated intovisual media to express women’s aesthetics. Their topics include thePersephone figure in Eavan Boland’s The Pomegranate” and LizLochhead’s “Lucy’s Diary,” the subversive voice of Christa Wolf’s Cassandra,female appropriation of violent authochthonous mythology through aes-thetic transmission to the diaspora as seen in Nguyen Nguyet Cam’s TwoCakes Fit for a King, and the languages of the Black Medusa in DorotheaSmartt and Maria Cristina Nisco.

NX180 2009-048322 978-1-84520-492-1AA hhiissttoorryy ooff vviissuuaall ccuullttuurree;; WWeesstteerrnn cciivviilliizzaattiioonn ffrroomm tthhee1188tthh ttoo tthhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Jane Kromm and Susan Benforado Bakewell.Berg Publishers, ©2010 403 p. $39.95 (pa)The images examined here fail to fit neatly into the traditional categoriesof high art, and can be used to illuminate the role of images in modernWestern culture. Art historians and theorists, along with a few scholarsof literature, look at this visual culture from the perspectives of revoltand revolution; science and empiricism; gaze and spectacle; acquisition,display, and desire; conquest, colonialism, and globalization; image andreality; and media and visual techniques. The illustrations are mono-chrome. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.

NX449 2009-020181 978-1-4051-9933-9TThhee mmyytthh ooff ppooppuullaarr ccuullttuurree ffrroomm DDaannttee ttoo DDyyllaann..Meisel, Perry. (Blackwell manifestos)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 206 p. $89.95The myth is that there is a distinction between high and low culture, andMeisel (English, New York U.) sets out to dispel it, particularly Adorno’scontention that popular culture is not dialectic. His case studies are theAmerican novel, Hollywood movies, and American rock music. Amongspecific topics are Johnson and the long 18th century, Andy Warhol,American fiction from Cooper to Chandler, Harlow and Monroe, theblues misreading gospel, and Buddy Holly and the British invasion. BobDylan gets a whole section to himself, with chapters on such aspects ashe and his critics, words and music, himself, and his relation to FrankSinatra and Elvis Presley.

NX454 2009-006979 978-0-8166-5159-7MMooddeerrnniissmm aafftteerr WWaaggnneerr..Koss, Juliet.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 381 p. $29.50 (pa)The composer Richard Wagner codified the notion of Gesamtkunstwerk,or total work of art, one that encompasses the viewer and listener in anatmosphere of artistic sensation. In this study, Koss (art history, ScrippsCollege, Claremont, Calif.) first describes how Wagner developed the ideain his music and in the building of the grand auditorium at Bayreuth,then explores the use of the concept in other works and media inGermany. Chapters discuss the 1908 Munich Exhibition, the elaborateopening ceremony of the Darmstadt Artists’ Colony in 1901, the BauhausTheater of Human Dolls, and re-interpretations of the experience ofcinema. A terrific addition to the scholarship on European modernism,the volume is well illustrated with many color and b&w plates.

NX456 2009-034100 978-0-7649-5274-6CCoonnssttrruuccttiivvee ssppiirriitt;; aabbssttrraacctt aarrtt iinn SSoouutthh aanndd NNoorrtthhAAmmeerriiccaa,, 11992200ss--5500ss..O’Hare, Mary Kate.Pomegranate Communications, ©2010 196 p. $39.95The catalogue accompanies an exhibition of the same name organized bythe Newark Museum that shows there from February to May 2010, thenin Fort Worth, Texas from June to September 2010. Curators and art his-torians contribute essays on a lasting dialogue between Joaquín Torres-García and American art, native paradigms in American abstract art,light play in abstract art and film, identity and abstraction in theAmericas, and the early São Paulo Bienais. The paintings are reproducedin 83 color plates.

NX650 2010-000616 978-0-8166-6593-8CChhrroommaa;; aa bbooookk ooff ccoolloorr.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999955))Jarman, Derek.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 151 p. $18.95 (pa)One of Britain’s most important and controversial filmmakers, Jarmanwas known for (among other things) his interest in and distinctive useof color and light. Near the end of his life, he wrote this meditation onthe color spectrum. Using a combination of visual theory, anecdotes,poetry, and reminiscence, Jarman takes the reader through the spectrum,introducing each color as the embodiment of an emotion.

LLAANNGGUUAAGGEE,, LLIITTEERRAATTUURREE

P35 2008-052639 978-1-84553-342-7AAssppeeccttss ooff ccooggnniittiivvee eetthhnnoolliinngguuiissttiiccss..Bartminski, Jerzy. Ed. by Jörg Zinken. (Advances in cognitive lin-guistics)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 250 p. $120.00Polish linguist Jerzy Bartminski, together with other members of the“Ethnolinguistic school of Lublin,” has developed a distinctive cognitive-linguistic approach to the study of language in its cultural context that iswell known in the international Russian-speaking academic discourse ofthe humanities in Eastern Europe, but is not well known in the Anglo-American scholarly literature. This volume presents English translationsof key papers by Bartminski, together with papers penned specifically forthis book. The 16 papers collectively describe the idea of the linguisticworldview and how to investigate and analyze it, while also offeringexamples of specific analyses, for example, investigations into thestereotype of the sun in folk Polish, varieties of “fate” in Polish andRussian, and changes in the Polish stereotype of “a German.” Distributedin North America by The David Brown Book Co.

P35 978-87-7307-948-5CCoonnssttrruuccttiinngg hhiissttoorryy,, ssoocciieettyy aanndd ppoolliittiiccss iinn ddiissccoouurrssee;;mmuullttiimmooddaall aapppprrooaacchheess..Title main entry. Ed. by Torben Vestergaard et al.Aalborg University Press, ©2009 181 p. $45.95 (pa)This third and final volume emerging from a conference at AalborgUniversity (no date cited) contains 10 papers offering differentapproaches to media news discourse and ways of analyzing it. Theirtopics include the frozen oppositional mode, how the Asahi Newspaperargued its editorial stance toward the US attack on Afghanistan, a com-parative case study of British and Irish current affairs coverage in theimmediate aftermath of September 11, the construction of images ofhistory in Austrian mass media discourse, looking back at Italianpolitical violence in the 1970s, a multi-systemiotic approach to sellingMozart in Salzburg, and political discourse in the feminine manifes-tation. The other two volumes were published in 2004 and 2006. Thereis no index. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –240–

P35 2009-045167 978-0-415-80279-6EEtthhnnoolliinngguuiissttiicc ddiivveerrssiittyy aanndd eedduuccaattiioonn;; llaanngguuaaggee,, lliitteerraaccyy,,aanndd ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Marcia Farr et al.Routledge, ©2010 272 p. $42.95 (pa)Despite a marked increase in the linguistic and cultural diversity ofschool populations in the United States, schooling remains ineffective forstudents speaking vernacular dialects, Creoles, and non-English lan-guages, according to editors Farr (education and English, Ohio Sttate U.),Seloni (English, Indiana U. of Pennsylvania), and Song (English and phi-losophy, Murray State U.), who present 11 chapters reviewing sociolin-guistic research concerned with pedagogical strategies and approachesfor improving the educational outcomes for such student populations, aswell as correcting common myths/ideologies concerning ethnolinguisticdiversity in the United States.

P37 2009-030081 978-1-84553-216-1MMooddeelliinngg uunnggrraammmmaattiiccaalliittyy iinn ooppttiimmaalliittyy tthheeoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by Curt Rice and Sylvia Blaho. (Advances in opti-mality theory)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 297 p. $45.00 (pa)In linguistics, the study of grammaticality involves, for syntax, modelsthat focus on movements that apply to inputs to satisfy the requirementsa particular grammar imposes on its outputs and, in phonology, themanipulation of inputs through operations such as spreading, syllabifi-cation, deletion, and insertion. Any generative theory of grammar,declare Rice (director, Center for Advanced Study in TheoreticalLinguistics, U. of Tromsø, Norway) and Blaho (a researcher at theLinguistics Institute of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences), mustaccount for the flipside, cases in which no movement or manipulation isinvoked to create a grammatical output for some particular input, whichthe phenomena of ungrammaticality (also called ineffability in the realmof syntax). They present seven papers exploring to the problems pre-sented by ungrammaticality for the architectural structure of OptimalityTheory, which with its focus on outputs and constraint violability is par-ticularly challenged by the phenomenon. The papers include contribu-tions from both syntacticians and phonologists. Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

P53 2009-033461 978-1-84769-222-1LLeexxiiccaall iinnffeerreenncciinngg iinn aa ffiirrsstt aanndd sseeccoonndd llaanngguuaaggee;; ccrroossss--lliinngguuiissttiicc ddiimmeennssiioonnss..Wesche, Marjorie Bingham and T. Sima Paribakht. (Second languageacquisition; 46)Multilingual Matters, ©2010 193 p. $49.95 (pa)After a comprehensive review of research on lexical inferencing, Wescheand Paribakht (both languages and bilingualism, Ottawa U., Canada)present a trilingual study of first-language influences in second languagelexical inferencing and other cross-linguistic dimensions of lexical infer-encing by Persian, French, and English speakers. This follows theirbilingual studies a decade ago. They consider the conceptualization andmethodology of their study, first-language influences on knowledgesource use in second-language lexical inferencing, inferencing successand initial development of word knowledge, and discussion and impli-cations of the study. Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.

P53 2009-674604 978-1-4438-0972-6PPrraaggmmaattiiccss aapppplliieedd ttoo llaanngguuaaggee tteeaacchhiinngg aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Reyes Gomez Moron et al.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 457 p. $85.00Calling for the incorporation of pragmatics (the linguistic subfield con-cerned with the ways context contributes to meaning) into foreign/secondlanguage teaching, the editors (a trio of professors of philology and trans-lation from Pablo de Olavide U., Spain, and one professor of English atthe U. of Seville, Spain) present 20 chapters exploring the advantages ofdealing with pragmatic issues in the foreign/second language teachingclass and examining pragmatic perspectives on particular aspects offoreign/second language teaching. They are organized into five sectionsdealing cognitive issues in second language instruction, teaching lan-guages across cultures, intercultural aspects of communication, teachinglanguages for academic and specific purposes, and other methodologicalissues on pragmatics teaching.

P53 2009-043991 978-1-60235-138-7PPrraaccttiicciinngg tthheeoorryy iinn sseeccoonndd llaanngguuaaggee wwrriittiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Tony Silva and Paul Kei Matsuda.Parlor Press, ©2010 312 p. $32.00 (pa)Seventeen linguistics and second language (L2) academics from the USand Canada contribute 14 chapters exploring various aspects of the the-oretical work that occurs in the field of second language writing. Topicsaddressed include the nature and role of theory in L2 writing; howvarious theories from other areas of inquiry inform L2 writing research,instruction, and assessment; possible advantages and limitations of usingtheories from other fields; how to assess the value of new theoretical per-spectives; how L2 writing teachers, researchers, and administrators createtheories of L2 writing; what a theory of L2 writing might look like; therelationship between the conceptual work of theorizing and data-driventheory building; practical issues in working with various types of theory;how L2 writing specialists learn to work with theory; and how theoryinforms instruction, administration, and materials development.

P90 2009-044963 978-1-4331-0936-2TThhee 2211sstt cceennttuurryy mmeeddiiaa ((rr))eevvoolluuttiioonn;; eemmeerrggeennttccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn pprraaccttiicceess..Macnamara, Jim.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 408 p. $38.95 (pa)Macnamara (public communication, U. of Technology, Sydney, Australia)strives to avoid the hyperbolic self-promotional of his industry bygrounding his analysis of media changes in research, and investigatingwhether—rather than proclaiming that—the changes will radically changesociety. Among his topics are media language and terminology today, thefuture of community and culture, mediated politics, journalism, adver-tising, business models, and public relations.

P90 2009-053989 978-1-60426-600-9MMaassss ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn;; lliivviinngg iinn aa mmeeddiiaa wwoorrlldd,, 33dd eedd..Hanson, Ralph E.CQ Press, ©2011 659 p. $59.95 (pa)To keep up with changes in the mass media business, Hanson (commu-nications, U. of Nebraska-Kearney) updates again his introductorytextbook, which was first published in 2004. He covers print and elec-tronic media, strategic communication, and regulation and control ofmedia. Among specific topics are the consolidation and globalization ofmedia corporations, newspapers and the news as a reflection of a dem-ocratic society, mass production of entertainment through movies, adver-tising, and free speech and fairness in media law.

P91 2009-043899 978-1-4129-4457-1IInnttrroodduucciinngg ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn rreesseeaarrcchh;; ppaatthhss ooff iinnqquuiirryy..Treadwell, Donald.Sage Publications, ©2011 226 p. $99.95 (pa)Well-prepared undergraduate students will get the most from this text oncommunication research. Coverage begins with material on basicassumptions and controversies in human communication, how to readresearch, and researchers’ ethical responsibilities. The book then coversmainstream research methods, statistics, and sampling, with chapters onsurveys, experiments, observation, and content analysis. A final chaptergives tips for writing up and presenting research. Pedagogical featuresinclude objectives, summary and comparison tables, research-in-practicecase boxes written by industry professionals, and campus-based sce-narios, in addition to recommended reading, web resources, and aglossary. The two-color layout is eye-friendly. A web site provides studentswith e-flashcards, study questions, and links. There are also resources forteachers on the site, including slides, lecture notes, discussion questions,and a test bank. Treadwell teaches communication at Westfield StateCollege.

P91 2009-035450 978-1-4331-0760-3MMeeddiiaa eedduuccaattiioonn ggooeess ttoo sscchhooooll;; yyoouunngg ppeeooppllee mmaakkeemmeeaanniinngg ooff mmeeddiiaa aanndd uurrbbaann eedduuccaattiioonn..Butler, Allison.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 232 p. $32.95 (pa)Drawing from interviews with students at Lincoln Square High School inNew York City, Butler (communication, Western Connecticut State U.)explores how students make meaning of media and media education inthe context of a small theme-based school that emerged from schoolreform in the city. She finds that media education is uncomfortablyenfolded into the start-up school, and that students have neither linguisticnor conceptual tools to talk about media, media education, or schoolreform. Among her topics are the trajectory of media education in theUS, urban public education in neoliberalism, representations and under-standings of adolescence and education, and looking outside to under-stand the inside.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–241–

P91 2009924990 978-1-84860-166-6OOrrddiinnaarryy ppeeooppllee aanndd tthhee mmeeddiiaa;; tthhee ddeemmoottiicc ttuurrnn..Turner, Graeme. (Theory, culture & society)Sage Publications, ©2010 189 p. $120.00As evidenced by the subtitle, this is an academic treatment of activitiesengaged in by ordinary people, such as reality TV, blogs and talk radio.Although the author is Australian, it explores examples from around theworld, including attention to American phenomena such as the successof Rush Limbaugh after the removal of the Fairness Doctrine during theReagan era. Although doubtful of claims that the media is democratizingdiscourse, the author does see YouTube and the growth of other socialnetworking sites as some of the best examples of the emergence of newparticipatory cultures. The final chapter explores how the line betweennews and entertainment is getting blurred and how that content isincreasingly being determined by commercial interests. Written byTurner (cultural studies, U. of Queensland), the book periodically slipsinto a first person point of view which I found a bit distracting.Otherwise, it has some interesting ideas built on solid research.

P91 2009-038557 978-1-4129-7087-7TThhee SSAAGGEE hhaannddbbooookk ooff ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn aanndd iinnssttrruuccttiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Deanna L. Fassett and John T. Warren.Sage Publications, ©2010 471 p. $135.00For communication researchers, students, and instructors, Fassett (com-munication studies, San Jose State U.) and Warren (communication ped-agogy, Southern Illinois U., Carbondale) bring together 21 essays onissues at the intersection of communication and instruction.Communication scholars from the US and Canada address both howcommunication is taught and learned and how it is a key part of allteaching and learning. Sections cover philosophical and methodologicalfoundations, and communication education, with chapters on intro-ductory courses, communication across the curriculum, future teacherpreparation, textbooks, and service learning; instructional communi-cation and the “Power in the Classroom” articles, instructor immediacy,humor in the classroom, instructor clarity, and the relational approachto teaching; and critical communication pedagogy, including perfor-mative pedagogy, identity scholarship, critical race theory, sexuality, andtechnology and critical feminist pedagogy.

P92 2009-042490 978-0-313-35517-2110000 mmeeddiiaa mmoommeennttss tthhaatt cchhaannggeedd AAmmeerriiccaa..Willis, Jim.Greenwood Press, ©2010 229 p. $85.00Suitable as a reference for journalism and history majors and generalreaders, Willis’ (communication studies, Azusa Pacific U., California) textfeatures an annotated list of 100 important moments in the developmentof newspapers, magazines, radio, television, and their online counter-parts and how the media report the news. The majority of the eventsdescribed are also significant to the development of America and itsculture in general. The 100 events are organized chronologically into fourperiods: the colonial years and formation of the country (1690-1799), the19th century, the 20th century, and 21st century up to 2009. The text alsoexplores ways that the media has evolved from a knowledge-dissemi-nating tool to a mechanism that shapes and influences the opinions andreactions of the American people. Illustrated with b&w photographs.

P92 2009-006046 978-0-8135-4687-2DDiiggiittaall ddiilleemmmmaass;; tthhee ssttaattee,, tthhee iinnddiivviidduuaall,, aanndd ddiiggiittaallmmeeddiiaa iinn CCuubbaa..Venegas, Cristina. (New directions in international studies)Rutgers U. Press, ©2010 229 p. $24.95 (pa)Venegas (film and media studies, U. of California-Santa Barbara) ana-lyzes the impact of the Internet and digital media on media policies, pro-cedures, and practices in the Caribbean island nation. In particular, sheseeks to understand institutional and human networks evolving out ofcontested public and private interests in the artistic and personal terrainthat the technologies have helped construct. She covers inventing, recy-cling, and deploying technologies; media technologies and Cubandemocracy, tourism and the social ramification of media technologies,film culture in the digital millennium, and digital communities and thepleasures of technology.

P94 2009-034204 978-0-8166-4737-8EElleeccttrroonniicc eellsseewwhheerreess;; mmeeddiiaa,, tteecchhnnoollooggyy,, aanndd tthheeeexxppeerriieennccee ooff ssoocciiaall ssppaaccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Chris Berry et al. (Public worlds; v.17)U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 280 p. $25.00 (pa)An “electronic elsewhere,” as Berry (film and television studies, U. ofLondon, UK), Kim (cinema studies, Korean National U. of Arts, SouthKorea), and Spigel (screen cultures, Northwestern U., US) formulate theterm for the purpose of this collection of 12 papers, refers to the idea thatplaces are not just represented in the media, but are produced. Thepapers explore how media technologies contribute to the spatial relationsof modern/postmodern life in a variety of contexts and lie at the inter-section between the disciplines of film and media studies and culturaland social geography. Topics include the creation of the virtual homeonline, utopian discourses of the role of media technology in the “smarthome,” the avatars created by women at online pregnancy sites as chal-lenges to the established imaginaries of the female body, new docu-mentary practices and forms in China and their relation to the publicarena, satellite television in Algeria and the politicization of the neigh-borhood and home, the role of the media in producing nationalism andthe communalist violence between Hindus and Muslims in the Indianstate of Gujarat, Turkish satellite television and the constitution ofEuropean Turkish audiences as a public, the media discourses sur-rounding the London Underground (subway system), mediations of NewYork’s “Ground Zero” site, and mediated imaginations of Tokyo as globalcity.

P94 978-1-55458-178-8TThhee rraaddiioo eeyyee;; cciinneemmaa iinn tthhee NNoorrtthh AAttllaannttiicc,, 11995588--11998888..White, Jerry.Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2009 281 p. $85.00White (Film Studies, University of Alberta) examines the way that mediaexperiments in Quebec, Newfoundland, the Faeroe Islands, and Ireland’sGaeltacht used film, video, and television to advocate for marginalizedcommunities and “smaller” languages. Rather than being a study of fourdiscrete cases, however, the book lays out the links between these projectsand shows how media makers in the North Atlantic were very aware ofeach other’s work and cultures. Quite readable, White’s book will appealto readers interested in media or in the cultures of any of the localescovered.

P95 2009-028755 978-0-470-76034-5AAnnaallyyssiinngg iinntteerraaccttiioonnss iinn cchhiillddhhoooodd;; iinnssiigghhttss ffrroommccoonnvveerrssaattiioonn aannaallyyssiiss..Title main entry. Ed. by Hilary Gardner and Michael Forrester.John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 275 p. $55.95 (pa)For academics, students, and professionals working in children’s com-munication and development, Gardner (human communication sciences,Sheffield U., UK) and Forrester (psychology, U. of Kent, UK) bringtogether 13 chapters that discuss how conversation analysis can be usedto understand how children interact with peers, parents, and otheradults. Researchers in language, psychology, conversational analysis, andchildhood interactions from Europe and Canada address intersubjec-tivity, gaze, gesture, and other resources, and conversation in typicallydeveloping children, across cultures, in learning contexts, in mother-childinteractions, in health and counseling contexts, and with atypicalchildren with cerebral palsy, autism spectrum disorder, the deaf, andthose with speech and language difficulties.

P95 2010-002622 978-1-4331-0773-3TThhee ppoolliittiiccaall eeccoonnoommyy ooff mmeeddiiaa aanndd ppoowweerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffery Klaehn.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 361 p. $38.95 (pa)Contributing to the study of intersections between media and power,European and North American scholars of communication and jour-nalism, law, sociology and other social sciences ponder making powervisible, media and government relations, foreign policy and hegemony,media and academia, popular media and culture, and the politicaleconomy of media and culture. Among specific topics are discourses onpower, links between mainstream journalists and the intelligence servicesin Britain, the power of images at times of war, why the propagandamodel is marginalized in US journalism schools, policing the borderthrough Canadian TV crime drama, and why a market approach tobroadcasting does not work.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –242–

P96 2009-044581 978-1-4331-0517-3AAlltteerrnnaattiivvee mmeeddiiaa aanndd ppoolliittiiccss ooff rreessiissttaannccee;; aaccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee..Atkinson, Joshua D. (Frontiers in political communication; vol.16)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 177 p. $32.95 (pa)Atkinson (media and communication, Bowling Green State U.) has spentthe past decade connecting two lines of research concerning alternativemedia and social movements—the first concerning the role of alternativemedia in the construction of resistance within new social movementsand the second dealing with the performance of resistance by new socialmovement activists—and this volume synthesizes the results of thoseefforts. The goals of the work are to outline the history of socialmovement and alternative media research in the fields of communi-cation, journalism, and media studies; provide a theoretical frameworkfor understanding the role of alternative media in shaping the commu-nicative strategies of social movement networks; describe the types ofalternative media content that shape the construction and performanceof resistance; and examine the impact of alternative media and activists’performance of resistance on the contemporary political landscape. Theanalysis is based upon fieldwork carried out among social movementactivists in two mid-sized American cities, one in the Midwest and theother in the Northeast.

P96 2009-048176 978-0-313-37519-4HHooww ttoo wwrriittee aabboouutt tthhee mmeeddiiaa ttooddaayy..Tovares, Raúl Damacio and Alla V. Tovares. (Writing today)Greenwood Press, ©2010 183 p. $35.00Raúl Tovares (communication, Trinity U.) and Alla Tovares (English,Howard U.) detail an approach for media practitioners and students incommunications courses at the high school and college levels toresearching and preparing a report, paper, or presentation on someaspect of today’s mass communication. They first address different typesof media outlets, from newspapers to the internet, then strategies forselecting topics, conducting research, specific problems and solutions,and writing about media-related events and issues. Included are a sectionon style, grammar, and punctuation; information for ESL writers; andsample pages in different formats.

P96 978-82-7477-454-4TThhee ppoowweerr ooff ccoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn;; cchhaannggeess aanndd cchhaalllleennggeess iinnAAffrriiccaann mmeeddiiaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Kristin Skare Orgeret & Helge Rønning.Unipub, ©2009 362 p. $35.00 (pa)The nine papers in this collection on African media and democratization,presented by Orgeret (journalism, Oslo U. College, Norway) and Rønning(media studies, U. of Oslo, Norway), are focused on issues directly relatedto democratic processes and the development of media systems and newtechnologies and how they are affected by changes in media structures,political systems, and cultures, as well as issues related to domesticdigital gaps and their relation to new technologies and processes ofdemocratization. Specific topics include developments at the SouthAfrican Broadcasting Corporation in the 1990s, debates over publicbroadcasting and tabloidization in South Africa, the relationship betweenpublic television and political power in Zimbabwe since 1980, theinfluence of the media in Mozambique, the principles of the communitymultimedia center model in Uganda, and the Ethiopian digital diaspora.Distributed in North America by ISBS.

P98 978-90-420-2800-5CCoorrppuuss--lliinngguuiissttiicc aapppplliiccaattiioonnss;; ccuurrrreenntt ssttuuddiieess,, nneewwddiirreeccttiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Stefan Th. Gries et al. (Languages and com-puters; studies in practical linguistics; no.71)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 260 p. $74.00Gries (U. of California at Santa Barbara), Wulff (U. of North Texas), andDavies (Brigham Young U.) present 15 selected papers from the March2008 conference of the American Association for Corpus Linguistics withthe aim of providing a coherent and representative sampling of the con-ference proceedings in terms of current topic areas and corpus-linguisticmethodologies covered. They have organized the papers into sectionsdealing with diachronics, genre, forms of functions, and methods appli-cations. Examples of specific topics include journalistic corpus similarityover time, subject omission in Russian, linguistic realizations ofrhetorical strategy, lexical bundle distribution in university classroomtalk, suggestions and recommendations in academic speech, dispersionsand adjusted frequencies in corpora, exploration of scientific texts usingdata mining, and automated learning of appraisal extraction patterns.Price is converted from Euros.

P99 2009-043057 978-3-11-021370-6EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiicc ddiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff sseemmiioottiiccss,, 33dd eedd..;; 33vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas A. Sebeok and Marcel Danesi.De Gruyter Mouton, ©2010 1662 p. $1,083.00Initiated and edited by one of the 20th-century’s great semioticians, EDSwas originally published in 1986, and Sebeok himself saw to the 1993second edition’s light revisions; but for the third edition, with Sebeokdeceased, Danesi was called on to edit this fundamental three-volume ref-erence. In contrast to many other academic disciplines, semiotics has notevolved dramatically in recent decades, and most of the original entrieswere left virtually untouched for this edition. Some of these, according toDanesi, are “veritable treatises...[by] some of the most important namesin semiotics (Umberto Eco, John Deely, and others)....” When possible,original authors were contacted for revisions, but the editor tweaked inminor, cosmetic ways the works of those who are deceased or wereimpossible to contact, and he included additional references. He alsoadded entries, some reflecting changes in the world (such as internet andhypertext, others rounding out subjects he deemed important (e.g. entriespertaining to the newly developing area of biosemiotics), and othersgiving readers information about a few living semioticians or scholars(including some contributors to the encyclopedia). Purchase of this worknow includes online access.

P99 2009-027084 978-3-11-021850-3SSiiggnniiffyyiinngg aanndd uunnddeerrssttaannddiinngg;; rreeaaddiinngg tthhee wwoorrkkss ooffVViiccttoorriiaa WWeellbbyy aanndd tthhee SSiiggnniiffiicc mmoovveemmeenntt..Petrilli, Susan. (Semiotics, communication and cognition; 2)De Gruyter Mouton, ©2009 1048 p. $201.00Victoria Welby’s life would be considered too unbelievable for fiction.Born into English nobility, she traveled the world as a child untilstranded in Beirut by her mother’s sudden death. With little, if any,formal education, she developed the early concepts of what she called“significs” and is now known as “semiotics”. Petrilli, of the University ofBari, Italy, gives examples of Welby’s monographs and correspondence.While the book concentrates on theories of meaning as propounded byWelby, the letters to and from many of the major thinkers of the latenineteenth century show Welby’s role in the intellectual life of the period.Her reinterpretations of the masculine nature of God and the Virgin birthas parthenogenic will resonate with contemporary feminists. Therefore,this compilation of documents, with lucid introductions to each section,is far from being an academic tome. Rather it shows the workings of abrilliant mind that questioned every aspect of understanding. Welby andher thought should be better known. This book is an excellent beginning.

P99 2009-023368 978-1-4128-1067-8SSiiggnn ccrroossssrrooaaddss iinn gglloobbaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivvee;; sseemmiioottiiccss aannddrreessppoonnssiibbiilliittiieess..Petrilli, Susan.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 330 p. $59.95The collection of eight articles was first published as a special issue ofThe American Journal of Semiotics 24.4 (2008), and distributed at theOctober 2008 occasion of Petrilli (signs, language, and communication; U.of Bari, Italy) being inducted into the Semiotic Society of America as theSeventh Seboek Fellow. The topics include international trends among20th-century sign theorists, iconicity and the origin of language inCharles S. Peirce and Giorgio Fano, and contributions to the human sci-ences and to humanism from semiotics understood as semioethics.

P115 2009-045069 978-3-11-022447-4TThhee mmuullttiippllee rreeaalliittiieess ooff mmuullttiilliinngguuaalliissmm;; ppeerrssoonnaallnnaarrrraattiivveess aanndd rreesseeaarrcchheerrss’’ ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Elka Todeva and Jasone Cenoz. (Trends inapplied linguistics; 3)De Gruyter Mouton, ©2009 302 p. $155.00This book collects 12 autobiographical narratives by “linguistically ori-ented language learners” in which the authors discuss how they havelearned multiple languages. They are presented in order to demonstratediverse backgrounds of language acquisition, various ways of learning,and different aspects of learning processes and outcomes. Bracketing theautobiographical narratives are two theoretical chapters exploring theimplications of the narratives from both emic and etic perspectives onmultilingualism.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–243–

P118 2008-045995 978-0-7637-4723-7LLaanngguuaaggee ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; ffoouunnddaattiioonnss,, pprroocceesssseess,, aannddcclliinniiccaall aapppplliiccaattiioonnss..Shulman, Brian B. and Nina C. Capone.Jones & Bartlett, ©2010 514 p. $89.95For speech, language, and communication students, Shulman andCapone (health and medical sciences and speech-language pathology,Seton Hall U.) compile 15 chapters in this textbook on language devel-opment as it applies to a child’s communication needs. Speech-languagepathologists, psychologists, communications disorders specialists, andlanguage and literacy specialists from the US outline the typical courseof language development within the clinical context of assessment andintervention, as well as the context of overall development. Topics includedisorders, cultural diversity, language impairment, and the role of aug-mentative communication with children with multiple disabilities.

P119 2010-000561 978-1-60497-677-9SSiinnggaappoorree ssttoorriieess;; llaanngguuaaggee,, ccllaassss,, aanndd tthhee CChhiinneessee ooffSSiinnggaappoorree,, 11994455--22000000..Koh, Ernest.Cambria Press, ©2010 277 p. $104.99Koh (history and international studies, Monash U., Australia), who grewup in Singapore in the 1980s and 90s, argues that society in Singapore isnot homogenous and that economic, linguistic, and cultural differencesexist. He looks at the story of the country from the perspectives of thosewho are literate in English and those who are not, integrating the voicesof ordinary people to Singapore’s history after 1945. He interviewedabout 80 individuals about their lives, and draws on statistical reports,to show how the theme of class manifested itself in the lives of ordinaryindividuals, drawing on ideas of Max Weber about structure and agency,and particularly how English literacy creates economic opportunity, mir-roring the experiences of those literate in English and those who are notin alternating chapters on education and employability, occupationalstatus, the emergence of an English monoliterate society, the industrial-ization and development of the 1980s, and the 1990s.

P120 2009-048180 978-3-11-018002-2LLaanngguuaaggee aanndd ssppaaccee;; aann iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall hhaannddbbooookk oofflliinngguuiissttiicc vvaarriiaattiioonn;; vv..11:: TThheeoorriieess aanndd mmeetthhooddss..Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Auer and Jüurgen Erich Schmidt.(Handbooks of linguistics and communication science; 30.1)De Gruyter Mouton, ©2010 889 p. $510.00This is the first of two cross-linguistic foundational volumes inauguratingthe series Language and Space, which investigates spatial variation in lan-guages and language groups. This volume attends to theories andmethods, the second will explore the overarching issues related to the cre-ation and use of maps in the investigation of linguistic distribution andvariation, and later volumes will be concerned with individual languagesand language groups. Following introductory essays exploring languagein terms of geographical, social, political, and transnational spaces, 23essays address issues of theory in sections devoted to linguisticapproaches to space, structure and dynamics of a language space, andstructure and dynamics across language spaces. The focus then turns tomethodology in seven papers addressing data collection, corpus-building,data analysis, and presentation of results. Seven “exemplary” studies arethen presented as illustration of the state-of-the-art and the volume con-cludes with examination of the methodological problems concerningareal variation in segmental phonetics and phonology, areal variation inprosody, areal variation in morphology, lexical variation in space, arealvariation in syntax, and areal variation and discourse.

P120 2009-036289 978-3-11-022094-0TThhee nnaattiivvee ssppeeaakkeerr ccoonncceepptt;; eetthhnnooggrraapphhiicc iinnvveessttiiggaattiioonnss ooffnnaattiivvee ssppeeaakkeerr eeffffeeccttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Neriko Musha Doerr. (Language, power andsocial process; 26)De Gruyter Mouton, ©2009 390 p. $125.00This collection of articles discuses the concept of being a native speaker.Doerr, a lecturer at Brookdale Community College, conceived the projectafter a session at the 2005 American Anthropological Association annualmeeting. The authors address the imagined standardization of languageby governments and institutions versus the reality of wide variations inthe speech of “native speakers”. Languages considered include Catalan,Japanese, Rapa Nui, and many forms of English. The daily language ofpeople living in a multilingual society, such as South Africa, or of immi-grants living among other immigrants, as is the case withMayan/Spanish/English speakers working in San Francisco brings intodoubt the idea that everyone has a native language that they are fluentin. The ramifications of this altering of a paradigm are forceful for theteaching of a second language. Added to this is the new language of theInternet, which may become a “native language” to the next generation.

P138 2009-037473 978-3-11-020564-0SSttaattiissttiiccss ffoorr lliinngguuiissttiiccss wwiitthh RR;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn..Gries, Stefan Th. (Trends in linguistics. Studies and monographs; 208)De Gruyter Mouton, ©2009 335 p. $152.00This book is an introduction to statistics for linguists using the opensource programming language and environment R in order to conductquantitative studies. The author explains statistical concepts, tests, andgraphs, as well as the design of tables to store and analyze data andsome basic aspects of experimental design. He describes how to do thestatistical methods examined “by hand”—thus providing insight into thelogic of the statistical tests (while avoiding anything requiring mathe-matical expertise)—as well as with the software. He covers methods ofdescriptive statistics, analytical statistics, and mutifactorial procedures forthe simultaneous investigation of several potential cause-effect relations.The book is paired with a companion website containing exercise files,data files, answer keys, errata, et cetera. A Google newsgroup is alsoavailable for questions and discussion.

P146 2009-051323 978-3-11-021917-3LLaanngguuaaggee uussaaggee aanndd llaanngguuaaggee ssttrruuccttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Kasper Boye and Elisabeth Engberg-Pedersen.(Trends in linguistics; studies and monographs; 213)De Gruyter Mouton, ©2010 354 p. $155.00For most of the 20th century, the dominant view within linguistics, par-ticularly propagated by generative grammar, was that language use andlanguage structure were independent of each other and could bedescribed separately, but with the appearance of functional-cognitiveapproaches, it began to be argued that language must be understoodbasically as a communicative and cognitive phenomenon and languagestructure can thus only be understood in terms of cognitive and social-communicative restrictions on language use. In light of this development,this volume presents 11 papers investigating theoretical and method-ological aspects of the relationship between language use and languagestructure from different theoretical perspectives. They are contained insections devoted to the case of clausal complementation in the rela-tionship between usage and structure; the emergence of structure fromusage; structure, usage, and variation; and methodology.

P158 2009-931446 978-1-84564-426-0SSccaatttteerreedd ccoonntteexxtt ggrraammmmaarrss aanndd tthheeiirr aapppplliiccaattiioonnss..Meduna, A. and J. Techet.WIT Press, ©2010 199 p. $170.00In formal language theory in computer science, “scattered contextgrammars” are used to mathematically formalize scattered informationprocessing or the processing of broadly scattered pieces of mutuallyrelated information throughout various computer systems. Summarizingand synthesizing the literature on this topic, itself somewhat scattered,Meduna (computer science, Brno U. of Technology, Czech Republic) andTechet (PhD, computer science, Brno U. of Technology) provide a unifiedtreatment of scattered context grammars and their languages from a the-oretical point of view. They also discuss the practical issues of how toprocess scattered information by these grammars in linguistics, as wellas in a few other application areas. Their treatment combines rigorousmathematical formalisms with intuitive explanations. Also available asan ebook: ISBN 978-1-84564-427-7.

P211 2009-037924 978-90-04-17446-7TThhee iiddeeaa ooff wwrriittiinngg;; ppllaayy aanndd ccoommpplleexxiittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Alex de Voogt and Irving Finkel.BRILL, ©2010 396 p. $169.00Derived from 5 symposia called The Idea of Writing, sponsored by theRoyal Dutch Academy of Sciences, Leiden U., and the Research SchoolCNWS, the 18 papers of this volume represent issues and research in thedelightful topic of play in writing. Written by specialists in the individuallanguages described, the articles assume no knowledge of the languageas they detail the puns and tricks and unusual expressions of the scriptsused. Individual articles discuss puns, loanwords, foreign words, foreignsigns, the use of foreign alphabets, the effect of new alphabets back andforth with traditional ones, and acrostic poems with subversive mes-sages. Among the scripts and languages featured are Chinese, Japanese,Akkadian, Sumerian, Assyrian, Mayan, Egyptian hieroglyphs, cuneiform(in several languages), and writing dance. The volume is a pleasure toread, introducing the reader to the overflowing richness and creativity ofwriting throughout history. Indexed by author, subject, and language(group) and script.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –244–

P217 2007-019454 978-1-84553-221-5PPhhoonnoollooggiiccaall aarrgguummeennttaattiioonn;; eessssaayyss oonn eevviiddeennccee aannddmmoottiivvaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Steve Parker. (Advances in optimality theory)Equinox Publishing Limited, ©2009 377 p. $45.00 (pa)Optimality theory (OT), the most widely-practiced theoretical model informal phonology, is based on the premise that grammars consist of afinite set of universal but violable constraints which are idiosyncraticallylinked in each language. With optimality theory as the background, thisbook’s 11 essays probe the validity of phonological argumentation. Thefirst six papers focus on methodology, asking questions concerning howconstraints are formed and what sort of evidence is relevant in positingthem. The remaining five papers are cases studies examining particulartheoretical issues within OT, including the acoustics of epenthetic vowelsin Lebanese Arabic, the onset of the prosodic word, infixation as mor-pheme absorption, and vowel length in Arabic verb stems. Distributed inNorth America by The David Brown Book Co.

P221 2009-033872 978-1-4051-4590-9TThhee hhaannddbbooookk ooff pphhoonneettiicc sscciieenncceess,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by William J. Hardcastle et al. (Blackwell hand-books in linguistics)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 870 p. $199.95For the 2d edition of this impressive handbook, earlier chapters havebeen completely revised and updated and ten new chapters have beenadded: these are on acoustic phonetics, the brain, orofacial control,speech acquisiton, rhythm and timing, tone and intonation, phoneticnotation, sociophonetics, signal processing, and automatic speech recog-nition. Forming a trio with two other handbooks by this publisher—onphonological theory and clinical linguistics—the volume presents up-to-date information on the acquisition of speech and the theories andmodels applied to speech production and perception. The 22 chapters aredivided into sections supporting this central theme, with topics thatinclude experimental phonetics, biological perspectives, linguistic pho-netics, and speech technology. The chapters are clearly organized, pro-viding an introduction and conclusion, discussion of the sources ofresearch, extensive lists of references, and many clear drawings, dia-grams, and clinical photographs. The volume will be essential for pro-fessionals and invaluable to graduate students. The volume’s editors areWilliam J. Hardcastle and John Laver (both are emeritus, speech sciencesat Queen Margaret U., in Edinburgh, Scotland), and Fiona E. Gibbon(speech and hearing sciences at U. College Cork, Ireland).

P295 2009-043027 978-3-11-020603-6AAlltteerrnnaattiivveess ttoo ccaarrttooggrraapphhyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Jeroen van Craenenbroeck. (Studies in gener-ative grammar; 100)De Gruyter Mouton, ©2009 376 p. $152.00This volume collects ten papers from the June 2007 second BrusselsConference on Generative Linguistics addressing alternatives to cartog-raphy, which in the field of generative grammar refers to the idea thatsentence structure can be represented as a template of fixed positions,each which can be filled by a limited set of syntactico-semantic elements,that are seen as universal totally ordered sets of functional projections,the specifiers of which serve as merger sites or as landing sites for XP-movement. Topics addressed by the papers include a syntactic typologyof topic, focus, and contrast; a compositional view of focus, topic, andword order; left-to-right merge, scrambling, and binary structure inEuropean Portuguese; auxiliary inversion in German verb clusters;adjective placement and linearization; and implications of impropermovement for cartography.

P295 978-90-420-2768-8AA rreessoouurrccee--lliigghhtt aapppprrooaacchh ttoo mmoorrpphhoo--ssyynnttaaccttiicc ttaaggggiinngg..Feldman, Anna and Jirka Hana. (Language and computers; studies inpractical linguistics; v.70)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 185 p. $62.00This book addresses the problem of rapid development of morpho-syn-tactic taggers for resource-poor languages (languages without availableannotated corpora). It describes a rapid, low-cost approach to the devel-opment of taggers by approximating resources of one language usingresources of a related language. The method presented in this bookreflects the authors’ experimentation in various tagging algorithms anddifferent language pairs. It has been tested on Catalan, Portuguese, andRussian, and can be applied to any inflected language. The book includesabout 40 pages of appendices. The readership includes researchers andstudents in natural language processing, morphology, corpus linguistics,and linguistic annotation. Feldman teaches linguistics and computerscience at Montclair State University. Hana is a researcher at CharlesUniversity in Prague.

P301 2009-008223 978-0-8386-4214-6AAggeennccyy iinn tthhee mmaarrggiinnss;; ssttoorriieess ooff oouuttssiiddeerr rrhheettoorriicc..Title main entry. Ed. by Anne Meade Stockdell-Giesler.Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2010 317 p. $69.50While some attention has been turned recently to rhetoric as it is prac-ticed outside of the male privilege forums of political office, pulpit, andmarketplace, outsiders have not been characterized as using a specifickind of rhetoric suitable to their marginalization. That is the taskscholars of English take up here. Their topics include recovering the lostrhetoric of resistance in the voices of the Florida turpentine slaves,Invisible Man as outsider rhetoric, outsider rhetoric in Italian Americanimmigrant autobiographies, early Pentecostal rhetoric in America, andstrategic essentialism and the representation of the natural by ecofem-inist and scientist Wangari Maathai.

P301 2009-018148 978-1-4331-0680-4CCrriittiiccaall eessssaayyss oonn DDaaggaaaabbaa rrhheettoorriicc..Naaeke, Anthony Y. (American University studies; VII. Theology andreligion; v.295)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 118 p. $60.95Naaeke (communication arts, Marymount Manhattan College, New YorkCity) analyzes the rhetorical dimension in various aspect of cultureamong the Dagaaba people of Ghana. The first essay describes the peoplethemselves. Other topics are a reader-response analysis of the Bagre mythwith reference to the role and place of women in Dagaaba society,African art and persuasion, consolatory rhetoric in funeral rituals andsymbolic action, missionary activity as persuasion, breaking the silenceof domestic violence, and the prophetic role of development communi-cation. Some of the material has been previously published. There is noindex.

P302 2009-483598 978-1-4438-1308-2CCoohheerreennccee aanndd ccoohheessiioonn iinn ssppookkeenn aanndd wwrriitttteenn ddiissccoouurrssee..Title main entry. Ed. by Olga Dontcheva-Navratilova and RenataPovolná.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 204 p. $59.99Czech scholars of English language and literature explore how peoplemake sense of impromptu discourse, academic spoken and written dis-course, political discourse, media discourse, and fictional discourse.Among their topics are the development of co-fluency in English as alingua franca, participial adverbials in academic lectures, creating iden-tities in political speeches, textual structure and coherence in live textsports commentaries, between writing and orality in women’s lifestylemagazines, discourse approaches to specialized and popular academicEnglish, and a comparative perspective of pragmatic dimensions in lit-erary texts.

P302 2009-015185 978-0-415-87137-2CCoorrppuuss--aassssiisstteedd ddiissccoouurrssee ssttuuddiieess oonn tthhee IIrraaqq CCoonnfflliicctt;;wwoorrddiinngg tthhee wwaarr..Title main entry. Ed. by John Morley and Paul Bayley. (Routledgeadvances in corpus linguistics; 10)Routledge, ©2009 334 p. $128.00Scholars of English linguistics at universities across Italy collaborated ona project to apply corpus linguistics and corpus analysis to the body oftexts justifying the US attack on Iraq in 2003. The findings they reporthere are the compilation and markup of the corpus, congressional posi-tioning, arguments for doing the right thing, White House press briefingsas a message to the world, the anchor on CBS and the news presenter onBBC, how British and American news reported the conflict, a transversalstudy of editorials and opinion articles, facework and impoliteness inhostile cross-examination, and government messages.

P302 2009-026537 978-3-11-022242-5NNaarrrraattoollooggyy iinn tthhee aaggee ooff ccrroossss--ddiisscciipplliinnaarryy nnaarrrraattiivveerreesseeaarrcchh..Title main entry. Ed. by Sandra Heinen and Roy Sommer.(Narratologia; 20)De Gruyter, ©2009 309 p. $155.00Heinen and Sommer (U. of Wuppertal) present revised and translated ver-sions of papers presented at the Inaugural Symposium of the Center forNarrative Research. The field of narratology has a history of limited inter-disciplinary research. This is perhaps due to its usual sole focus onrecurrent features shared by narratives and on the discipline’s roots inliterary studies. This volume, however, explores the revision of existingnarratological models based on input from related subjects, the export ofnarratology into fields such as film analysis, and the development oftransdisciplinary research with hermeneutics, linguistics and cognitivetheory. Includes citations at the end of each chapter, but no index.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–245–

P324 2009-045067 978-3-11-021843-5LLooaannwwoorrddss iinn tthhee wwoorrlldd’’ss llaanngguuaaggeess;; aa ccoommppaarraattiivveehhaannddbbooookk..Title main entry. Ed. by Martin Haspelmath and Uri Tadmor.De Gruyter Mouton, ©2009 1081 p. $310.00Sponsored by the department of linguistics of the Max Planck Institutefor Evolutionary Anthropology, Leipzig, the Loanword Typology project(LWT) was officially launched in 2004, with the goal of assembling dataregarding words that tend to be borrowed among languages. Forexample, it may be commonly observed that words identifying parts ofthe body are less likely to be adopted into another language than arewords connected with new technology; but such generalizations havebeen guesswork until this project, which organized a methodology andcreated a database that rests or tests such observations in the context of40 languages. The database of 70,000 words is online, of course, and thisbook is but a milestone in this ambitious and eminently useful ongoingendeavor. Several opening chapters explain the design and evolution ofthe research as well as concepts and issues relevant to lexical borrowingand findings and results regarding loanwords in the world’s languages.Following are chapters devoted to each of the languages, contributed bythe experts who participated in the study.

P925 978-87-635-3025-5TToocchhaarriiaann aanndd IInnddoo--EEuurrooppeeaann ssttuuddiieess;; vv..1111..Title main entry. Ed. by Georges-Jean Pinault et al.Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2009 123 p. $61.00 (pa)Contributors identified only by name look at aspects of the Indo-European language spoken during the end of the first millennium in thevicinity of the Tarim Basin in China. Of enduring academic concern isestablishing its connection with any other Indo-European languages inthe region. One of the seven studies is in German. The topics include howto tell a sheep’s age and some other animal husbandry terms inTocharian B, additions and correction to words beginning with vowelsfor A Dictionary of Tocharian B, Tocharian “camel,” and reflexes of thedeletion and insertion of Proto-Tocharian *ä in Tocharian B. No index isprovided. The Museum is in Copenhagen.

PA344 2009-044510 978-0-8204-7487-8TThhee GGrreeeekk iimmppeerraattiivvee mmoooodd iinn tthhee NNeeww TTeessttaammeenntt;; aaccooggnniittiivvee aanndd ccoommmmuunniiccaattiivvee aapppprrooaacchh..Fantin, Joseph D. (Studies in biblical Greek; v.12)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 406 p. $91.95Fantin (New Testament, Dallas Theological Seminary) takes a more theo-retical than exegetical approach to understanding the linguistic form,arguing that the former must precede the latter rather than the viceversa. In his introductory chapter, he explains the goal, methods, andlimitations of the different analytic approaches. Then he considers pre-vious accounts of the Greek imperative mood in New Testament and lin-guistic studies. Final chapters present semantic analysis and pragmaticanalysis. He concludes that the inherent, semantic meaning of the imper-ative mood was volitional-directive, and each use of it should be clas-sified according to the force of the benefit participants would receivefrom the fulfillment of the command. The study served as his Ph.D. dis-sertation at the Dallas Theological Seminary.

PA3014 978-0-7156-3892-7LLaaww aanndd ddrraammaa iinn aanncciieenntt GGrreeeeccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Edward M. Harris et al.Duckworth, ©2010 200 p. $70.00Ancient Athenians, due to the significant amounts of time spent hearingcases and their own responsibility to conduct their cases as litigants,were far more versed in the law than most people, so it is probably nosurprise that a wide variety of aspects of Athenian law can be found inAttic drama, with Aristophanes’ Wasps being perhaps the best example.In this volume, Harris (Greek history, Durham U., UK), Leão (classics, U.of Coimbra, Portugal), and Rhodes (ancient history, U. of Durham, UK)present ten essays that illustrate different approaches to the subject oflaw and Athenian drama, with some discussing how understanding ofAthenian law can enhance the appreciation of dramatic passages andtechniques of Attic drama and others examining the philosophies of lawpresented in the plays. In general, they focus on the contribution of lawto the understanding of literature. Distributed in the US by InternationalPublishers Marketing.

PA3052 2009-017347 978-0-674-03558-4OOuutt ooff AAtthheennss;; tthhee nneeww aanncciieenntt GGrreeeekkss..duBois, Page.Harvard University Press, ©2010 236 p. $29.95The study of Greek classical literature is somewhat out of favor today asa remnant of an elitist education. In this monograph, duBois revises theway in which Greek culture is approached. Using a postcolonial, global,gendered, comparative lens, she looks at aspects of Greek history andculture that can still resonate today. Slavery is examined through thestory of Spartacus and foreign slaves in Athens. Influences from as faras China and Southeast Asia are suggested, along with non-privilegingcomparisons of the cultures. The endurance of Greek myths, especiallyOedipus and Antigone, is seen as having a resonance in postcolonialtheory. Her argument for revitalization in teaching the Classics is strong.While not everyone will agree with her examples, this book shouldengender much discussion and, possibly, an expansion of the areacovered in classical studies.

PA3238 978-0-7156-3826-2TThheeoorriissiinngg ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee;; GGrreeeekk ddrraammaa,, ccuullttuurraall hhiissttoorryyaanndd ccrriittiiccaall pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Edith Hall and Stephe Harrop.Duckworth, ©2010 305 p. $40.00 (pa)Classicists and theater scholars and practitioners gathered in Oxford,England in September 2007 to investigate whether there is anything dis-tinctive about the intellectual framework that underlies scholarship onancient Greek and Roman drama in post-Renaissance performance. Mostof the 20 papers here are revised from presentations to that gathering.Their topics include why Kant is no place to start reception studies, theseductions and challenges of performance archives, whether a Deleuzeanphilosophy of radical physicality leads to the death of tragedy, genericambiguity in modern productions and new versions of Greek tragedy,revising authenticity in staging ancient Mediterranean drama, negoti-ating translation for the stage, the phenomenology of performance as aroute to reception, and physical performance and the languages of trans-lation. Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing (IPM).

PA3622 2009-032907 978-0-393-06083-6TThhee GGrreeeekk ppooeettss;; HHoommeerr ttoo tthhee pprreesseenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Constantine et al.W.W. Norton, ©2010 692 p. $39.95Constantine et al., a translator and scholars of English and Greek liter-ature in the US, present an anthology of Greek poetry that contains about1,000 poems translated into English. Poems are arranged by historicalperiod, from classical antiquity to the twentieth century, and include 185poets, such as Homer, Sappho, Pindar, Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides,Vitsentzos Kornaros, Andreas Kalvos, Dionysios Solomos, GeorgiosSouris, George Seferis, Odysseus Elytis, C.P. Cavafy, Angelos Sikelianos,Katerina Anghelaki-Rooke, Yannis Ritsos, Kostis Palamas, and JennyMastoraki, as well as folk songs from 1400 to 2000. Half of the poemshave new translations, and many have not previously appeared inEnglish.

PA3827 978-1-85399-707-5TThhee ppllaayyss ooff AAeesscchhyylluuss..Garvie, A. F. (Classical world series)Bristol Classical Press, ©2010 80 p. $23.00 (pa)Of the perhaps 80-90 plays by Aeschylus (525-456 BC), the oldest of thethree great Greek tragedians, only six survive. Garvie (emeritus Greek, U.of Glasgow) examines these six in the chronological order of their firstproduction. He also include a essay on Prometheus Bound, which seemsto have been uncritically attributed to Aeschylus by ancients, but is nowthought not to be his. He uses the same format as in his Plays of Sophoclesfor the series. Distributed in the US by Associated University Presses.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –246–

PA3936 978-3-515-09426-9IImmaaggeess aanndd tteexxttss oonn tthhee ““AArrtteemmiiddoorruuss PPaappyyrruuss””;; wwoorrkkiinnggppaappeerrss oonn PP.. AArrtteemmiidd ((SStt JJoohhnn’’ss CCoolllleeggee OOxxffoorrdd,, 22000088))..Title main entry. Ed. by Kai Brodersen and Jas Elsner. (Historia -einzelschriften, 214)Franz Steiner Verlag, ©2009 171 p. $80.00The unveiling of the “Artemidorus Papyrus” in Turin in 2006 was amedia event that was timed to coincide with the Winter Olympics. Theconference on the fragmentary sheet of papyrus that was held at St.John’s college, Oxford in 2008 was not so celebrated but produced soliddiscussions as to the nature and authenticity of the papyrus. It has beenprovisionally dated to the first century BCE but, as the scholars suggest,that can be called into question. Most agree that it seems to be an artist’ssketchpad with a passage from Artemidorus, a map of Spain and anumber of drawings of heads, hands, feet and animals. The papyrus isreproduced in several illustrations for the reader to examine. Brodersen(Universität Erfurt) and Elsner (Oxford) present the views of experts inGreek language, paleography, art, cartography and in the compositionand use of papyrus. They are all unsure whether or not the papyrus isgenuine but speculate on the intellectual worth of it should it prove to be.Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co

PA4276 2009-047742 978-0-674-03627-7PPiinnddaarr’’ss vveerrbbaall aarrtt;; aann eetthhnnooggrraapphhiicc ssttuuddyy ooff eeppiinniicciiaannssttyyllee..Wells, James Bradley. (Hellenic studies; 40)Center for Hellenic Studies, ©2009 266 p. $19.95 (pa)Bradley (classics, Hamilton College) analyzes the epinician ode that Greeklyric poet Pindar (518-438 BC) perfected in order to celebrate victory inthe national games, and that remained in use for as long as Europeanpoetry had meter. He stresses speech and performance, drawing on suchfields as linguistic anthropology, folklore, and oral tradition studies. It isimportant to remember, he insists, that the surviving texts record spokennot written poetry. His topics include philology as perspective on theinteraction of language and social life, text and sign, epinikion as event,ways of epinician speaking, and novelistic features of epinician style. TheCenter for Hellenic Studies in an imprint of Harvard University Press.

PA4279 2009-010278 978-0-8061-4025-4PPllaattoo’’ss AAppoollooggyy ooff SSooccrraatteess;; aa ccoommmmeennttaarryy..Miller, Paul Allen and Charles Platter. (Oklahoma series in classicalculture; v.36)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 225 p. $26.95 (pa)Miller (classics and comparative literature, U. of South Carolina) andPlatter (classics, U. of Georgia) present a highly annotated edition of theGreek text followed by essays commenting on the text in a mannersuitable for intermediate students of ancient Greek. The introduction dis-cusses the historical background and the two philosophers and their rela-tionship. An appendix explains changes they have made to John Burnet’s1900 edition, which is the basis for their own. A glossary is included.

PA4414 978-0-7156-3713-5SSoopphhoocclleess;; OOeeddiippuuss aatt CCoolloonnuuss..Sophocles. (Duckworth companions to Greek and Roman tragedy)Duckworth, ©2009 176 p. $24.00 (pa)Kelly (Ancient Greek Literature, Balliol College, Oxford U., UK) has pro-duced a companion to the final play of the great ancient Greek play-wright, Sophocles, Oedipus at Colonus, in which he returns to thecharacter of Oedipus, now an aged man who has come into conflict withhis son, Polyneices, over a planned attack on Thebes. In the companionhe provides biographical, historical, festival, and socio-political context forthe play; presents a synopsis; discusses the relation of the play to theOedipus myth in general; and conducts a critical analysis of the play.Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.

PA6047 2009-036325 978-1-59017-338-1PPooeettss iinn aa llaannddssccaappee.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11995577))Highet, Gilbert. (New York Review Books classics)New York Review Books, ©2010 276 p. $17.95 (pa)Scottish-born American classicist and public intellectual Highet (1906-78)here displays the verbal style that made his lectures, radio programs, andbooks so popular among the general public. He evokes the beauty of thedifferent parts of Italy that produced seven of Rome’s greatest poets:Catullus, Vergil, Propertius, Horace, Tibullus, Ovid, and Juvenal. He com-bines excerpts from poems with biographical, geographical, and his-torical information in a manner that illuminates both the poet and theplace. A final chapter looks at Rome herself, the urban magnet that drewthem all to a greater or lesser degree. The 1957 edition was published byHamish Hamilton, London.

PA8540 2009-024172 978-0-8387-5759-8LLaannddoorr’’ss LLaattiinn ppooeemmss;; ffiiffttyy ppiieecceess..Title main entry. Ed. and trans. by Niall Rudd.Bucknell University Pr., ©2010 108 p. $35.00Retired from a teaching career in Ireland, the US, and England, Ruddcontinues to pursue his interest in the Latin poets and the English poetswho drew on them. Walter Savage Landor (1775-1864) was a celebratedEnglish poet who wrote many poems in Latin, and Rudd was dissatisfiedwith the modern editions and translations, the most reputable of which,two massive volumes, was too expensive for almost anyone to buy. Heoffers a more modest collection, with the Latin verse followed by com-mentary and English prose translation. He assumes that readers willengage with the Latin to some degree or another. Distributed in the USby Associated University Presses.

PA8555 978-0-86698-407-2AArrcchhiibbaalldd PPiittccaaiirrnnee;; tthhee LLaattiinn ppooeemmss..Pitcairne, Archibald. Ed. and trans. by John MacQueen & WinifredMacQueen. (Bibliotheca Latinitatis novae; Medieval and Renaissancetexts and studies; v.359, Neo-Latin texts and translations)ACMRS, ©2010 484 p. $89.00Archibald Pitcairne (1652-1713), was “the latest, the liveliest and, in someways, the most original Scottish writer of neo-Latin verse,” but until thispublication there has never been a complete edition of his poems.Barring new discoveries, it contains the entire corpus of Pitcairne’s Latinverse, together with introduction, translation, and commentary. Thepoems are important, suggest the translators and editors, “for theirquality and originality, and for the vivid image they present of an intel-lectual universe, historical certainly, but by now almost wholly unfa-miliar, which combines the new world of science and medicine with theold world in which the Divine Right of Kings and the authority of theclassical past predominated.” The original Latin and the English transla-tions are presented on facing pages.

PB1306 978-90-420-2828-9SSuubb--vveerrssiioonnss;; ttrraannss--nnaattiioonnaall rreeaaddiinnggss ooff mmooddeerrnn IIrriisshhlliitteerraattuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Ciaran Ross. (Studies in literature, DQR; 44)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 299 p. $86.80Contributors indentified only by name mine recent novels, poetry, anddrama for insights into perennial issues of the Irish literary psyche suchas Irishness, identity, history, political engagement, and otherness.Among the topics are subversive redemption in Sebastian Barry’s TheWhereabouts of Eneas McNulty, gender trouble in contemporary Irishfiction, forms of negativity in the work of W. B. Yeats, Paul Durcan’sunsettled poetry, re-radicalizing Beckett’s Irish Protestant legacy in AllThat Fall, and contesting and reversing gender stereotypes in three playsby contemporary Irish women writers.

PE1097 2009-051189 978-1-59884-372-9BBrruusshhiinngg uupp oonn ggrraammmmaarr;; aann aaccttss ooff tteeaacchhiinngg aapppprrooaacchh..Carroll, Joyce Armstrong and Edward E. Wilson.ABC-CLIO, ©2010 216 p. $25.00 (pa)The authors of this book for teachers, educators, and parents are codi-rectors of Abdyos Learning International. They believe that assigninggrammar worksheets is not the same as teaching grammar. In order tohelp students understand grammar conceptually, teachers must help stu-dents work with grammar within their own writing so that they realizethat English grammar is functional. The book offers a review grammarfrom the ground up for teachers, and provides teaching ideas to use withstudents of different levels. A final chapter follows five real-life ele-mentary, middle, and high school student papers through the writingand revision process.

PE1128 2009-024043 978-0-415-99145-5DDooiinngg aaccttiioonn rreesseeaarrcchh iinn EEnngglliisshh llaanngguuaaggee tteeaacchhiinngg;; aagguuiiddee ffoorr pprraaccttiittiioonneerrss..Burns, Anne. (ESL & applied linguistics professional series)Routledge, ©2010 196 p. $24.95 (pa)Burns (linguistics, Macquarie U., Australia) explains how teachers of asecond language can incorporate reflection and self-criticism into theirdaily practice, drawing on the experience and insights of languageteachers who have done so. She discusses what action research in,planning the action, putting the plan into action, observing the results ofthe plan, and reflecting and planning for further action.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–247–

PE1128 2009-034340 978-0-205-62760-8TThhee SSIIOOPP mmooddeell ffoorr tteeaacchhiinngg EEnngglliisshh--llaanngguuaaggee aarrttss ttooEEnngglliisshh lleeaarrnneerrss..Vogt, MaryEllen et al.Pearson Education, ©2010 196 p. $34.99 (pa)Vogt, Echevarría (both California State U, Long Beach), and Short (Centerfor Applied Linguistics, Washington, DC) offer a practical text for K-12teachers of the English-language arts (ELA)—classroom teachers, literacycoaches, intervention teachers, reading specialists—who have familiaritywith the Sheltered Instruction Observation Protocol (SIOP) Model forteaching English language learners (ELLs). Written in response tonumerous requests from teachers for specific application of the (SIOP)Model to ELA, the text covers the academic language that ELLs need forsuccess in the ELA; lesson planning and unit design; effective activitiesand instructional techniques; sample SIOP ELA lessons and units forgrade clusters K-2, 3-5, 6-8, and 9-12; and a concluding summarization oflesson and unit planning, including insights from the authors’ own expe-riences working with the SIOP Model over the years.

PE1128 2009-046494 978-1-60623-529-4TTeeaacchhiinngg EEnngglliisshh llaanngguuaaggee lleeaarrnneerrss;; lliitteerraaccyy ssttrraatteeggiieessaanndd rreessoouurrcceess ffoorr KK--66..Xu, Shelley Hong. (Tools for teaching literacy)Guilford Pr., ©2010 304 p. $26.00 (pa)An experienced teacher of English as a foreign language and as a secondlanguage, Xu (teacher education, California State U, Long Beach) offers aninsightful research- and practice-based text to help K-6 teachers skillfullysupport all of their English language learners (ELLs), from a singlestudent to an entire classroom. Coverage includes eight guiding prin-ciples for teaching literacy to ELLs; language acquisition theories and con-cepts; instructional strategies, activities, and materials for thedevelopment of oral language, phonological and orthographic knowledgeand fluency, vocabulary, reading comprehension, and writing; andteaching grammar as an isolated skill. Each chapter features a classroomscenario reflecting a reality of teaching ELLs; questions based on the sce-nario; and teaching and assessment examples to illustrate the methodsand activities, including differentiated instruction for students with dif-ferent needs. Multiple reproducible forms are included in the appendices.

PE1128 2009-040131 978-1-4166-0912-4TTeeaacchhiinngg EEnngglliisshh llaanngguuaaggee lleeaarrnneerrss aaccrroossss tthhee ccoonntteennttaarreeaass..Haynes, Judie and Debbie Zacarian.Assn/Supervision & Curric. Dev., ©2010 183 p. $23.95 (pa)Professional development provider Haynes has taught elementary andsecondary ESL for 29 years; Zacarian has 20-plus years of experience atthe high school and university level, and currently directs a professionaldevelopment, consulting, and support center for teachers and adminis-trators of English language learners (ELLs) in Massachusetts. They offeran accessible text for teachers, supervisors, curriculum specialists, prin-cipals, and superintendents filled with ideas and tools to help teachersstrengthen students’ abilities to learn content vocabulary and concepts,activate students’ background knowledge, modify content area materialsto address language and content learning, and communicate contentinformation to ELLs. Each chapter begins with a classroom scenariodepicting a typical challenge in content area classes, and then describesspecific ways to modify instruction for the benefit of ELLs.

PE1129 978-87-635-3024-8EEnngglliisshh iinn DDeennmmaarrkk;; llaanngguuaaggee ppoolliiccyy,, iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaalliizzaattiioonnaanndd uunniivveerrssiittyy tteeaacchhiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Harder. (Angles on the English-speakingworld; v.9)Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2009 142 p. $23.00 (pa)The annual journal is produced by the Department of English, Germanic,and Romance Studies at the University of Copenhagen, and examines lin-guistic, cultural, historical, and other dimensions of the anglophoneworld. Foreign contributors often appear, but this volume is devoted toDanish scholars discussing political and educational aspects of Englishin their own country, the main concern being that it might displace thenative tongue in higher education. Among the 11 topics are the nationallanguages and English as working languages in European universities,the English influence on Danish, a case for the active social constructionof parallel language use, chemistry education in Danish and English, lan-guage policy at the University of Copenhagen’s faculty of life sciences,and Danish under pressure. There is no index. Distributed in the US byISBS.

PE1130 2009-000121 978-1-60741-024-9CChhiinnaa EEFFLL ccuurrrriiccuulluumm rreeffoorrmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Martin Wolff.Nova Science Publishers, ©2009 289 p. $78.00Three professors at Xinyang Agricultural College in Henan Provincepresent their Holistic English program that merges the current four sep-arate English classes into one English conversation class, and helps stu-dents communicate in comprehensible oral and written English inaddition to preparing for the National English proficiency examinations.The program has been adopted by PetroChina at its English trainingfacility. A few black and white photos and color graphs are provided.The volume also reprints ten papers previously published in Englishtoday by Cambridge University Press and Frontiers in higher educationand Education in China: 21st century issues and challenges by Nova SciencePublishers.

PE1130 2009-051346 978-1-60497-670-0GGrraammmmaarr aanndd tthhee CChhiinneessee EESSLL lleeaarrnneerr;; aa lloonnggiittuuddiinnaallssttuuddyy oonn tthhee aaccqquuiissiittiioonn ooff tthhee EEnngglliisshh aarrttiiccllee ssyysstteemm..Lang, Yong.Cambria Press, ©2010 371 p. $124.99Lang (applied linguistics, U. of Texas-Pan American) presents findingsfrom a 1996-1998 case study investigating the development of article per-formance in the spontaneous English speech of a nine-year-old Chineseboy arriving in the US in December 1995 with no prior English studiesat school. Based on some ten hours of interview speech data, the studyexamines the subject’s acquisition sequence of the English articles andacquisition stages for each article, syntactic locations associated withcorrect article use and misusage, types of article errors, semantic func-tions of articles used by the learner, relationships between articles andvarious types of determiners, influences of the first language on thesubject articles acquisition, and possible strategies of Chinese ESLlearners. Lang suggests possible pedagogical implications and recom-mends future research directions. The appendices include a 190-page,single-spaced transcription of the ten hours of speech data.

PE1404 2009-047228 978-0-87421-767-4FFaacciinngg tthhee cceenntteerr;; ttoowwaarrdd aann iiddeennttiittyy ppoolliittiiccss ooff oonnee--ttoo--oonneemmeennttoorriinngg..Denny, Harry C.Utah State Univ. Press, ©2010 176 p. $24.95 (pa)Denny draws on his experiences at the writing center at St. John’sUniversity in New York City to explore the pedagogical dynamics andimplications of identity politics in the college writing center. In discussionof issues of race and ethnicity, class, sex and gender, and nationality, theauthor encourages those working in writing centers to ask how theythemselves, or the writing centers in which they work, might be perpet-uating cultures and practice that undermine inclusive, progressive edu-cation. Discussion encompasses the ideas of thinkers including PierreBourdieu, Michel Foucault, Peter Elbow, Paulo Freire, Jonathan Kozol,Victor Villanueva, and Carol Severino. Interchapters present the questionsand comments of real writing center professionals, and responses by theauthor. The book grew out of a panel presentation at the 2007 Conferenceon College Composition and Communication in New York City. It can beused for high-level tutor education courses, and by classroom teachers.

PE1404 98-36828 978-1-4331-0710-8WWoorrkkiinngg wwiitthh ssttuuddeenntt wwrriitteerrss;; eessssaayyss oonn ttuuttoorriinngg aannddtteeaacchhiinngg,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Leonard A. Podis and JoAnne M. Podis.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 396 p. $38.95 (pa)This second edition of the guide for teachers and tutors of writing hasbeen revised and expanded. Many of the papers included are written bythe student tutors at the Podis’s college of Oberlin and Ursuline colleges.The authors attempt to balance teaching theory with practical advice, butthis is not a how-to book of exercises. It is rather a cross section of per-spectives on the many ways in which writing is done. Some focus onwriting academic papers, others on personal narratives. The interactionbetween tutor and tutee is an important consideration in many of thepapers. Helping non-English speakers and those with Attention DeficitDisorder are two topics not generally mentioned in teaching guides butoften encountered in practice. Cultural and social differences are treated,always a difficult area for teachers. Electronic communication and theIM creation of a new shorthand are discussed in terms of academicexpectations. This is a useful text for anyone wishing to teach writingclasses or volunteer as a tutor.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –248–

PE1405 2010-005567 978-0-8156-3242-9GGrraavvyyllaanndd;; wwrriittiinngg bbeeyyoonndd tthhee ccuurrrriiccuulluumm iinn tthhee CCiittyy ooffBBrrootthheerrllyy LLoovvee..Parks, Stephen.Syracuse U. Press, ©2010 219 p. $24.95Parks (writing and rhetoric, Syracuse U.) reports from his classroom andothers on the state of composition/rhetoric, particularly the degree towhich the field was able to retain the commitment to working-class andworking-poor students from diverse and international backgrounds, whofilled the basic writing classrooms of the 1960s and 1970s, through theconservative onslaught of the following decades. His topics includebreaking bounds and reaffirming connections, the hybrid nature of part-nerships between universities and public schools, oppositional strategiesand collective politics, the role of community publishing in Englishstudies, New City Community Press, and the aftermath of survival.

PE1408 2009-504246 978-1-55111-908-3AAccaaddeemmiicc wwrriittiinngg;; aann iinnttrroodduuccttiioonn,, 22dd eedd..Giltrow, Janet et al.Broadview Press, ©2009 324 p. $46.95 (pa)Giltrow (English, U. of British Columbia, Canada) et al. introduce uni-versity students to the conventions of academic writing in this conciseversion of Academic Writing: Writing and Reading in the Disciplines. Theytake a genre-based approach to writing, provide examples and exercises,and discuss academic readers, citation and summary, summarizingvarious writers, definition, theories about reading and interpretation,scholarly styles, creating knowledge, and methodology. This edition hasbeen revised and contains new exercises, updated examples, expandeddiscussion of research writing in the sciences, new glossary entries, anda new section on research ethics and the moral compass of disciplines.

PE1408 2009-037340 978-0-321-42287-3TThhee wwrriitteerr’’ss hhaannddbbooookk ffoorr ccoolllleeggee aanndd ccaarreeeerr..Dees, Cathy et al.Longman, ©2010 566 p. $53.33 (pa)One feature of this wire-spiral-bound, tabbed handbook is its emphasison connections between academic and workplace writing, with separatesections devoted to each. Throughout the handbook, readers follow astudent intern as she completes academic and workplace assignments,with annotated sample documents showing her progress from researchthrough drafting and revision. A chapter on online learning introducescourse management platforms and gives tips for online and hybridcourses. The handbook also features a chapter on communication in dis-ciplinary and professional cultures and across ethnic, national, and reli-gious backgrounds. A chapter on ethical writing contains guidelines forworking in groups, writing collaboratively, and avoiding plagiarism. Thebook’s color layout offers color diagrams, charts, and screenshots, plususe of color to make grammar and mechanics examples clear. Chapteropening activities are brief enough to be completed in class. A web siteoffers multimedia tutorials, exercises, and e-portfolio features.

PE1431 2009-023878 978-0-321-09184-0AAccaaddeemmiicc rreesseeaarrcchh aanndd wwrriittiinngg;; iinnqquuiirryy aanndd aarrgguummeenntt iinnccoolllleeggee..Bergmann, Linda S.Longman, ©2010 344 p. $38.00 (pa)Bergann (Purdue U.) presents a textbook for a course teaching college stu-dents skills they need to produce effective researched writing in a varietyof genres. She also suggests some of the purposes of research in collegesand universities and encourages students to identify themselves as novicemembers of the larger research community. Her topics are essential con-cepts of argument in academic writing; reading, evaluating, andresponding to arguments; understanding plagiarism and using academicsources responsibly; moving from inquiry to argument; using the libraryand its databases effectively; using sources effectively; revising andediting to meet audience expectations; adapting writing for professionalaudiences; writing a personal research narrative; and writing an argu-mentative research paper. A series of readings is included, along withfundamental of oral presentations and visual design.

PE1431 2009-048643 978-0-313-37837-9HHooww ttoo wwrriittee ppeerrssuuaassiivveellyy ttooddaayy..Davis, Carolyn. (Writing today)Greenwood Press, ©2010 143 p. $35.00In this handbook for students, business professionals, and generalreaders, information is not arranged for easy reference; instead, readersare expected to sift though long-winded, preachy explanations. On theplus side, the book offers a wealth of examples from essays, politicalspeeches, biographical sketches, religious texts, book and grant proposals,and humorous fictional examples. The book begins with an overview ofhow persuasive writing is incorporated into academic and professionalwriting, and descriptions of different types of persuasive writing andhow they can be used for different purposes. Other topics discussedinclude establishing credibility, interpreting historical facts, plagiarism,dealing with hostile or apathetic audiences, and writing proposals andresearch reports. The book also gives readers tools for evaluating dif-ferent types of persuasive writing, and discusses the use of satire to makea point. An annotated bibliography of print and electronic resources isincluded. Davis is a professional librarian and researcher.

PE1689 2009-032274 978-0-87462-022-1CCaarrddiinnaall mmeenn aanndd ssccaarrlleett wwoommeenn;; aa ccoolloorrffuull eettyymmoollooggyy ooffwwoorrddss tthhaatt ddiissccrriimmiinnaattee..Keessen, Jan.Marquette University Press, ©2009 200 p. $25.00 (pa)Keessen (English, Augustana College) discusses the etymology of specificwords and how these can inform people about prejudices and how theydevelop. She presents conversational, narrative essays of etymologies,rather than short entries, for topics such as words people call each other;gendered words like “scarlet woman”; words related to patriotism, pol-itics, war, and religion; fairy tales; words associated with women and sex-uality; the use of animal terms like “cat call” and “swan song”; racialterms; words related to disability; and academic language. The book orig-inated in her narrations of word histories for Augustana College’sNational Public Radio station.

PE2113 2009-020956 978-0-7546-5812-2RReennaaiissssaannccee ssyynnttaaxx aanndd ssuubbjjeeccttiivviittyy;; iiddeeoollooggiiccaall ccoonntteennttssooff LLaattiinn aanndd tthhee vveerrnnaaccuullaarr iinn SSccoottttiisshh pprroossee cchhrroonniicclleess..Leeds, John C.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 232 p. $99.95The title of this book gives no clue to the wealth of philosophical dis-cussion within. Leeds (English, Florida Atlantic University, DavieCampus) sets out to compare syntax within Neo-Latin Scots writing andthe sixteenth century vernacular. This sounds very specialized but it soonexpands to the entire world of the Reformation and the humanistmovement with excursions to medieval society. Leeds demonstrates howgrammar can reinforce the status of the subjects or give them autonomy.For example, he notes the difference in understanding if the word“people” is singular or plural. Are “people” a special unit different froma person? Leeds roams through history and language to show why theanswer matters. In this book the Scots authors are subjects from whichto leap into wonderful speculations about human thought that can onlybe contemplated through knowledge of the languages they used.

PE3245 2009-512067 978-1-4438-0590-2SSttuuddiieess iinn CCaannaaddiiaann EEnngglliisshh;; lleexxiiccaall vvaarriiaattiioonn iinn TToorroonnttoo..Bednarek, Adam.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 125 p. $52.99Bednarek (pragmatics and international studies, U. of Lodz) is a spe-cialist in the Canadian dialect of the English language, which he says hasbeen relegated to shadows within the research on the General NorthAmerican dialect. Here he focuses on vocabulary, which reflects uniqueCanadian traits, and the dialect specific to the country’s largest and mostmulticultural city. His topics are a national standard for CanadianEnglish, the background and methodology of the Lodz Corpus forToronto English Study, cultural influence and shift in reference, cultureand identity in everyday discourse, and Canadianisms in the media.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–249–

PE3502 2009-033462 978-1-84769-228-3CChhiinnaa aanndd EEnngglliisshh;; gglloobbaalliissaattiioonn aanndd tthhee ddiilleemmmmaass ooffiiddeennttiittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph Lo Bianco et al. (Critical language andliteracy studies)Multilingual Matters, ©2009 315 p. $49.95Scholars of linguistics and language learning in China and Melbourne,Australia ponder how Chinese speakers can negotiate a productive rela-tionship with English, and with Western ideas more broadly, without sac-rificing Chinese cultural identity. Among their perspectives areintercultural encounters and deep cultural beliefs, Zhang Haidi’sBeautiful English versus Natasha Lvovich’s The Multilingual Self, motiva-tional force and imagined community in crazy English, the negotiatednon-participation of unsuccessful learners, and being Chinese whilespeaking English. Distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.

PG3097 2009-050923 978-1-934843-44-4TThhee RRuussssiiaann ttwweennttiieetthh--cceennttuurryy sshhoorrtt ssttoorryy;; aa ccrriittiiccaallccoommppaanniioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Lyudmila Parts. (Cultural revolutions; Russiain the twentieth century)Academic Studies Press, ©2010 359 p. $49.00Parts (Russian, McGill University) brings together an international groupof scholars for an analysis of the Russian short story in the twentiethcentury. She considers first if there is something particular about thecharacter Russian short story but leaves the reader to decide. The essaysdiscuss writers well known in the West, such as Chekhov, Nabokov andPasternak along with those not yet recognized outside Russia: AndreiPlatonov, Yury Olesha, Isaak Babel, Abram Tertz, Vasili Shukshin, VarlanShamalov, Tatiana Tolstaia, Lyudmila Petrushevskaia, VictorErofeev,Andrei Bitov and Viktor Pelevin. One chapter is a translation ofa story by Petrushevskaia. Some of the essays place the stories withinCommunist or pre-revolutionary society. Others are seen as a reflectionof universal emotions. The themes of memory, childhood and loss appearoften in the stories chosen for commentary. The authors speculate onwhether there is a difference in the way these are treated by the Russianwriters. This is an interesting study of both Russian writers and the formof the short story itself.

PG3328 2009-039772 978-1-4331-0883-9CCoonnffrroonnttiinngg DDoossttooeevvsskkyy’’ss DDeemmoonnss;; aannaarrcchhiissmm aanndd tthheessppeecctteerr ooff BBaakkuunniinn iinn ttwweennttiieetthh--cceennttuurryy RRuussssiiaa..Goodwin, James. (Middlebury studies in Russian language and liter-ature; v.33)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 251 p. $77.95After being acclaimed as Russia’s “most scathing fictional treatment ofdestructive tendencies in the [Bolshevik] revolutionary movement” for itsnot-so-veiled critique of anarchist Bakunin, Doestoevsky’s Demons (1873)went out of favor and print in the Stalin era. It reemerged in the late per-estroika and post-Soviet era as one of the author’s most publicized andpopular works. Goodwin (Russian studies, U. of Florida) explains thereasons for the peaks and valleys in the publication and regard for thisnovel, in which the author said he sacrificed aesthetic to polemical aims,and its reception as either reactionary or prescient.

PG3458 2009-036132 978-0-230-61883-1AAnnttoonn CChheekkhhoovv;; aa bbrrootthheerr’’ss mmeemmooiirr..Chekhov, Mikhail Pavlovich. Trans by Eugene Alper.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2010 238 p. $25.00This is a translated version of Vokrug Chekhova: Vstrechi i vpechatlenia[Around Chekhov: Encounters and Impressions] (originally published inthe Soviet Union in 1933), in which writer and translator MikhailChekhov recalls his famous brother, the playwright and short-storywriter Anton Chekhov (1860-1904), for whom he worked as assistant andsecretary and was thereby a more intimate witness to the growth of thewriter’s career and development beyond mere brotherhood.

PG3467 2009-054032 978-1-934843-89-5IIvvaann KKoonneevvsskkooii:: ““WWiissee CChhiilldd”” ooff RRuussssiiaann ssyymmbboolliissmm..Grossman, Joan Delaney.Academic Studies Press, ©2009 275 p. $45.00Grossman (Slavic languages and literatures, U. of California at Berkeley)offers the first study of the life, ideas, and achievements of Russian mod-ernist poet, thinker, and mystic Ivan Konevskoi (1877-1901). Focusing onhis inner life (rather than all aspects of his biography), she examines itsrepresentation in his poetry, his exploration of pantheism, mysticalencounters during his European travels, the influence of painter ArnoldBöcklin, his affair with Anna Nikolaevna Gippius, his friend andposthumous publisher Valerii Briusov, his poetry collection Dreams andMeditations, his desire to abolish death through mysticism, the influenceof Nietzsche, and his accidental drowning at the age of twenty-three.Selected poems are provided in Russian.

PG3476 2009-054033 978-1-934843-28-4MMaannddeellssttaamm..Lekmanov, Oleg. (Studies in Russian and Slavic literatures, cultures andhistory)Academic Studies Press, ©2010 196 p. $32.00A specialist in Russian poetry of the 20th century, Lekmanov (MoscowState U.) discusses the life and work of Russian poet Osip Mandelstam(1891-1938), emphasizing his conflicting desires to be part of society andto stand apart from it. He also sorts through the condemnation of hischaracter and behavior by many contemporaries, and vehement denial ofthe accusations by others. He begins before the first “Stone” 1891-1913,and progresses through “Tristia” in 1922, “Poems” in 1928, before thearrest 1928-34, and the final years. Translated from Russian by TatianaRetivov. Only names are indexed.

PG7158 2009-042817 978-1-55753-552-8GGoommbbrroowwiicczz,, PPoolliisshh mmooddeerrnniissmm,, aanndd tthhee ssuubbvveerrssiioonn ooffffoorrmm..Goddard, Michael. (Comparative cultural studies)Purdue University Press, ©2010 155 p. $35.00 (pa)Witold Gombrowicz (1904-1969) is a central figure in Polish literary mod-ernism whose writing and thinking, according to Goddard (mediastudies, U. of Salford, UK), anticipated many of the latest developmentsin literary and cultural theory regarding the complex relations betweenliterature, philosophy, and culture. Goddard conducts a textual and con-textual reading of Gombrowicz’s work, placing it in dialogue with thework of contemporary thinkers, in particular the aesthetic theories ofGilles Deleuze.

PJ2382 2009-496663 978-3-89645-924-4DDiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff tthhee TTaammaasshheeqq ooff NNoorrtthh--EEaasstt BBuurrkkiinnaa FFaassoo..Sudlow, David. (Berber studies; v.24)Rüdiger Köppe Verlag, ©2009 355 p. $79.83Sudlow covers both dialects of Tamasheq as spoken in Oudalan provinceof North-East Burkina Faso, the majority sha and minority za, as thelocal people call them, though scholars sometimes refer to them asTamaghit and Tudalt. He suggests that people using the dictionary havea grammar of the Burkina dialects to hand, and ideally a Tamasheq-speaking helper. In the Tamasheq-English section, entries are in rootorder, which keeps word clusters together but makes it harder for neo-phytes to look words up. The English-Tamasheq section is little morethan an index to the first section. Much of the material is probably appli-cable to speakers of Mali and Niger dialects. The price was convertedfrom Euros on 12 March 2010.

PJ4567 2008-937594 978-1-888009-33-0BBeeggiinnnniinngg BBiibblliiccaall HHeebbrreeww;; iinntteennttiioonnaalliittyy aanndd ggrraammmmaarr..Sacks, Robert D.Green Lion Press, ©2008 197 p. $18.00 (pa)Sacks (St. John’s College, Annapolis and Santa Fe) introduces the lan-guage by suggesting what need the original speakers, and later writers,intended to satisfy with the linguistic structure they invented. He con-siders such matters as the origins of writing, the vocalic modes, what isa syllable, on prediction, the generation of verbs, and the origins of verbs.Then he walks learners through sample texts, all from I Samuel 20. Thetutorial would be suitable for self-study or for classrooms. Distributed inthe US by Enfield.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –250–

PJ4667 2009-016425 978-0-8204-7276-8TThhee vvaanniisshhiinngg HHeebbrreeww hhaarrlloott;; tthhee aaddvveennttuurreess ooff tthheeHHeebbrreeww sstteemm ZZNNHH..Riegner, Irene E. (Studies in biblical literature; v.73)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2009 239 p. $74.95The Hebrew stem ZNH (as translated into the Latin alphabet) has a gen-erally accepted lexical meaning of “commit fornication, be/act as aharlot.” Riegner (PhD, religious studies, Temple U.) challenges this under-standing, arguing that the most prominent meaning of ZNH in Hebrewreligious texts signifies Israelite women and men who participate in non-Yahwist religious ceremonies. In the context of Hebrew religious texts, theceremonies generally involved sacrifice and not cultic sexual rituals as isoften assumed. She is led to this conclusion because of the absence ofdata on cultic sexual activity in the Ancient Near East, the legal andsocial situation of prostitution in the Bible, the absence of specificityabout cultic sexual activity within the Biblical texts, and the inadequacyof prostitution as a figure for apostasy.

PJ5282 2009-046087 978-90-04-17682-9TThhee JJeewwiisshh NNeeoo--AArraammaaiicc ddiiaalleecctt ooff CChhaallllaa..Fassberg, Steven E. (Studies in Semitic languages and linguistics; v.54)BRILL, ©2010 314 p. $176.00Fassberg (Hebrew language, Hebrew University, Jerusalem) provides aphilological study of the now extinct Neo-Aramaic dialect from the townof Challa, in southeastern Turkey. This was spoken by Jews living in thetown until the middle of the twentieth century, when most resettled inIsrael. While the dialect contains a number of Kurdish loan words, thegrammar and phonology remain Aramaic. After giving an analysis of thelanguage and a glossary, Fassberg presents a dual-language transcript ofinterviews with the last known fluent native speaker, Shabbo Amrani.These interviews demonstrate how the language was used in dailyspeech. They also are the idiosyncratic memories of a man who lived ina minority culture in Kurdish Turkey. For this reason the book will beof interest to historians of the Kurds, sociologists and anthropologists aswell as linguists.

PJ6095 978-90-04-17702-4EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff AArraabbiicc llaanngguuaaggee aanndd lliinngguuiissttiiccss;; 55vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Kees Versteegh.BRILL, ©2006 3183 p. $1,258.00The introduction begins with an extensive discussion of Arabic studiesreference tools—for history, literature, the Qu’ran, and Islam; yet for lin-guistics, the resources are sparse, some being outdated and othersintended as grammar textbooks, for example, rather than comprehensivetreatments. General editor Versteegh (U. of Nijmegen, The Netherlands)and five associate editors (based in the US, Poland, and The Netherlands)have brought together an ambitious project, which was initiated in 1995,with the intention of filling that lacuna. From an initial list of 2,000prospective entries, 500 were chosen to represent the major topics, and35 for general survey articles. Contributors were asked to synthesizerecent research (emphasizing bibliographical coverage) and to write froman objective point of view; they were also invited to present their ownviews, clearly identified, so that readers could be exposed to controversiesand innovative ideas. Arrangement is in five volumes (a total of morethan 3,000 pages), the first four containing the entries and the finalvolume comprising the index. This is an indispensable reference forlibraries with holdings in any facet of Arabic studies or linguistics.

PJ6123 978-977-416-292-3WWrriittiinngg AArraabbiicc;; ffrroomm ssccrriipptt ttoo ttyyppee..Moginet, Stefan F.American U. in Cairo Press, ©2009 111 p. $29.95 (pa)Moginet, a graphic and type designer based in Morocco, presents aconcise visual history of Arabic writing, from its origins to the presentday. The brief text is beautifully presented in mainly two-page chaptersdominated by extensive visual examples of the scripts throughout history.Includes a brief glossary and a bibliography of sources (most are inFrench). Lacks an index. Distributed in the U.S. by InternationalPublishers Marketing (IPM).

PJ7521 978-3-447-05933-6EEssssaayyss iinn AArraabbiicc lliitteerraarryy bbiiooggrraapphhyy,, 11335500--11885500..Title main entry. Ed. by Joseph E. Lowry and Devin J. Stewart. (Mizan;Studien zur Literatur in der islamischen Welt; v.17)Harrassowitz, ©2009 431 p. $117.00This is the middle of three chronological volumes containing biogra-phical essays on Arabic literary figures. This volume contains essays on38 figures who lived between 1350 and 1850. This period has beenwidely dismissed as an era of decadence and decline, which is animpression the editors hope to begin to overturn with this collection.They have sought an even temporal and geographical distribution ofauthors discussed (although they admit to an unfortunate lack of repre-sentation of Arabic regions of Africa). They have adopted a wide defi-nition of the term literature but have sought an emphasis on authors ofbelletristic works. Some well-known figures, such as Ibn Khaldun and al-Maqrizi, have been omitted in order to make room for less well-knownindividuals. Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

PJ7694 978-90-420-2718-3AArraabb vvooiicceess iinn ddiiaassppoorraa;; ccrriittiiccaall ppeerrppeeccttiivveess oonnAAnngglloopphhoonnee AArraabb lliitteerraattuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Layla Al Maleh. (Cross cultures; 115)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 491 p. $140.00Presented by Al Maleh (English literature, Kuwait U., Kuwait), 18 paperscritically engage with Anglophone literature produced by Arab writersand writers of Arab descent, with special emphasis given to Arab-American literature, although considerable attention is given to the Arab-British, Arab-Canadian, and Arab-Australian experiences. The key themesthat emerge from the collection, according to Al Maleh, can be “summa-rized as double-consciousness, hybridity, in between-ness, transculturalsingular experiences, as well as questions of stereotyping, ethnic repre-sentation, and reception.” Among the authors whose works are discussedare Kahlil Gibran, Rabih Alameddine, Diana Abu Jaber, Fadia Faqir, LeilaAboulela, Leila Ahmed, Mohja Kahf, and Nada Awar Jarrar.

PJ8190 2009-045031 978-1-4331-0942-3TThhrreeee vvooiicceess ffrroomm tthhee GGaalliilleeee;; sseelleecctteedd sshhoorrtt ffiiccttiioonn bbyyMMoohhaammmmaadd NNaaffffaaaa,, ZZaakkii DDaarrwwiisshh,, aanndd NNaajjii DDaahheerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Jamal Assadi.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 112 p. $62.95This volume collects English translations of seventeen short storieswritten by three Palestinian Arabs with Israeli citizenship: MohammadNaffaa, a Druze political activist living in his native village of Bet Jann;Zaki Darwish, an educator whose native village, Birwah, was demolishedin 1948; and Naji Daher, a journalist who lives as a refugee in Nazarethafter his native village, Sereen, was also destroyed in 1948. Also includedare three interviews with the writers, conducted by editor Assadi (TheCollege of Sakhnin for Teacher Education, Israel), about their biographiesand “what is paradoxically called Israeli-Palestinian life.”

PK2042 2009-045829 978-90-04-17731-4TTrraacciinngg tthhee bboouunnddaarriieess bbeettwweeeenn HHiinnddii aanndd UUrrdduu;; lloosstt aannddaaddddeedd iinn ttrraannssllaattiioonn bbeettwweeeenn 2200tthh cceennttuurryy sshhoorrtt ssttoorriieess..((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Everaert, Christine. (Brill’s indological library; v.32)BRILL, ©2010 299 p. $169.00Given their mutual intelligibility when spoken, Everaert (Hindi, U. ofCalifornia at Irvine) decided to investigate whether the languages ofHindi and Urdu can really be considered separate languages, even if theydo use different scripts and are written in the opposite directions on thepage. As her investigative material, she has chosen to compare shortstories written in Hindi, Urdu, or both; focusing on short stories becauseshe considers them less politicized then language and media texts andbecause the language used “feels like natural, everyday, be it correct,speech.” She first examines changes in the story itself between transla-tions, as well as instances of “explicitation” and “implicitation” (“explici-tation” being the translation practice of putting details and informationthat had been implicit in the source text explicitly in the target text and“implicitation” being the opposite). She then examines morpho-syntactic,syntactic, lexical, and orthographic/phonological changes in words andgrammatical structures. Finally, she interprets the findings of the aboveinvestigations within the context of factors of time, author background,language usage of the authors, and translation as a genre. The accom-panying CD-ROM contains the annotated translations of all the storiesand the transliterations of the Hindi and Urdu editions of the bilingualstories.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–251–

PK6973 2009-291849 978-1-58901-269-1TTaajjiikkii rreeffeerreennccee ggrraammmmaarr ffoorr bbeeggiinnnneerrss..Khojayori, Nasrullo and Mikael Thompson.Georgetown U. Press, ©2009 168 p. $22.50 (pa)The reference supports a two-volume elementary textbook on Tajiki, alsospelled Tadzhiki, a form of Persian spoken in Central Asia. Like the texts,it can be used for a course or for self-study. Khojayori is from Tajikistanand has taught Tajiki and Persian; Thompson teaches Mongolian andinner Asian writing systems. Both are now at Indiana University, homeof the Center for Languages of the Central Asian Region (CelCAR), whichproduced the series. The grammar follows the conventional form,explaining orthography and phonology, nominals and prepositions,verbs, adverbs and particles, and compound and complex sentences. Aglossary and detailed index are provided.

PL721 2009-029596 978-4-8053-1092-2JJaappaanneessee gghhoosstt ssttoorriieess;; ssppiirriittss,, hhaauunnttiinnggss,, aanndd ppaarraannoorrmmaallpphheennoommeennaa..Ross, Catrien.Tuttle Publishing, ©2010 158 p. $14.95 (pa)Ross presents a collection of the eerie and terrifying from around Japan,dipping into the country’s rich tradition of supernatural legend and tra-dition. This book shows readers the hidden aspects of the Japanese worldof the paranormal, where trees grow human hair, rocks weep, and agraveyard may be the final resting place of Jesus. Featuring tales fromancient and modern times, Ross’ book offers insights into Japaneseculture and society as well as a clutch of scary stories.

PL725 2009-026081 978-0-8047-6198-7BBeeccoommiinngg mmooddeerrnn wwoommeenn;; lloovvee aanndd ffeemmaallee iiddeennttiittyy iinnpprreewwaarr JJaappaanneessee lliitteerraattuurree aanndd ccuullttuurree..Suzuki, Michiko.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 233 p. $21.95 (pa)Suzuki (East Asian Languages and Cultures, Indiana University) looks atthe works of three pre-war Japanese women writers in order to inves-tigate the role of love in Japanese culture during the first half of the 20thcentury. The author interprets women’s fiction along with with non-fiction from a range of media, including early feminist writing, sexologybooks, newspapers, and bestselling love treatises, showing how theconcept of “woman” was constructed through the modern experience oflove. Suzuki also explores the historical and ideological shifts of theperiod, underscoring the broader connections between gender,modernity, and nationhood.

PL729 2009-396858 978-1-4438-1133-0HHaaiikkuu;; tthhee ggeennttllee aarrtt ooff ddiissaappppeeaarriinngg..Rosenstock, Gabriel.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 135 p. $62.00Irish poet Rosenstock leads readers through phases of spiritual insight,linking haiku to haiku with advice on finding calm. Some of the poemsare his, and others he has translated or adapted from Japanese poets. Theprice is converted from 39.99 British pounds.

PL2303 2009-483798 978-1-4438-0571-1BBeelliieeff,, hhiissttoorryy,, aanndd tthhee iinnddiivviidduuaall iinn mmooddeerrnn CChhiinneesseelliitteerraarryy ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Artur K. Wardega.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 192 p. $54.00Wardega (twentieth century Chinese and French literature, Macau RicciInstitute, China) assembles 10 essays by Chinese and European scholarswho participated in the Macau Ricci Institute’s Symposium on “TheIndividual and Society in Modern Chinese Literature,” held in November2007. They discuss modern and contemporary works and authors suchas Wang Xiaobo and Ye Shengtao, and the treatment of history, humannature, melancholy and ennui, and identity, as well as Chinese women’sliterature, Christian poetry, and literature in Macau and Hong Kong.

PL2303 2009-027237 978-0-8108-5516-8HHiissttoorriiccaall ddiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff mmooddeerrnn CChhiinneessee lliitteerraattuurree..Ying, Li-hua. (Historical dictionaries of literature and the arts; no.35)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 466 p. $100.00Ying (Chinese and Japanese, Bard College, New York State) adopts a moreinclusive, and so more controversial, view of the intersection betweenChinese and modern than many might. She chronologically she extendsfrom the May Fourth generation in the early 20th century to the present.She limits her study to literature in the Chinese language, but acknowl-edging the role of vernacular language, she excludes texts in classicalChinese. Geographically, she encompasses Chinese writers in the People’sRepublic, Taiwan, Hong Kong, and those who have settled in the Westbut continue to address matters Chinese and are considered part of theChinese literary universe. All but a very few of the entries cite novelists,poets, playwrights, essayists, and other writers. Other topics include TheLeft-Wing Association of Chinese Writers, The New Culture Movement,women’s emancipation, the Sino-Japanese War 1937-45, and scar liter-ature. There is no index.

PM2081 2009-051459 978-0-8061-3844-2OOssaaggee ddiiccttiioonnaarryy..Quintero, Carolyn.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2009 328 p. $55.00Based on Qunitero’s work with the last few fluent speakers of Osage, thisvolume is the definitive lexicon for the language, including over 3000main entries. Entries give full grammatical information for Osage words,noting variant pronunciations and provide phrases and sentences thatillustrate usage. Introductory sections describe Osage syntax, morphology,and phonology, and an index provides Osage equivalents for more thanfive thousand English words and expressions, facilitating quick ref-erence. Besides its obvious interest to linguists, this book is an invaluablereference for Osage students wanting to relearn their native language.

CCRRIITTIICCIISSMM,, TTHHEEAATTEERR,, FFIILLMM,, JJOOUURRNNAALLIISSMM,, EETTCC..

PN2 978-0-404-63569-5SSyymmbboolliissmm;; aann iinntteerrnnaattiioonnaall aannnnuuaall ooff ccrriittiiccaall aaeesstthheettiiccss;;vv..99..Title main entry. Ed. by Rüdiger Ahrens and Klaus Stierstorfer.AMS Press, ©2010 400 p. $157.50This volume’s special section considers the great grandmother of allsymbols, the circle, and more specifically literature and circularity.Among the 11 essays are discussions of Neoplatonic versions of the selfin early modern poetry, cultural constructions of time between historyand memory, the circle and the straight line in William Faulkner’s Lightin August, the motif of recurrence in Philip K. Dick, circularity and thequest in the novels of Jeannette Winterson, and unreliable narration andthe circularity of reading in Ford Madox Ford’s The Good Soldier andChuck Palahnuik’s/David Fincher’s Fight Club). Five other articles addressgeneral topics, such as the immanent symbolism of De Chirico’s paintingand writing, science and magic in Prospero’s Books by Peter Greenawayand The Tempest by William Shakespeare, and symbols and icons inDante’s Divine Comedy. Five reviews look at recently published books orgroups of books.

PN21 978-90-420-2716-9LLiitteerraattuurree ffoorr EEuurrooppee??Title main entry. Ed. by Theo D’haen and Iannis Goerlandt. (Textxet:studies in comparative literature; v.61)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 437 p. $123.00This volume is a collection of 22 papers originally presented during ajoint European Science Foundation-Linköping University ESF ResearchConference on Literature for Europe held in Sweden in May 2007. Topicsvary widely and include a definition of European literature, European lit-erature in a global context, and constructing European identity in fiction.The collection was edited by D’haen (American literature, K.U. Leuven,Belgium) and Goerlandt (teaching assistant, K.U. Leuven). Price is con-verted from Euros.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –252–

PN43 2009-021711 978-0-7808-1122-5RRuuffffnneerr’’ss aalllluussiioonnss;; ccuullttuurraall,, lliitteerraarryy,, bbiibblliiccaall,, aannddhhiissttoorriiccaall;; aa tthheemmaattiicc ddiiccttiioonnaarryy,, 33dd eedd..Ruffner, Frederick G. and Laurence Urdang.Omnigraphics, Inc., ©2009 969 p. $70.00This thematic dictionary contains entries in about 730 categories for stu-dents and general readers interested in understanding the meaning ofallusions found in literature, history, religion, language, and culture. Itdocuments the meaning of about 13,000 words from Shakespeare,Dickens and other authors; the Bible and other theological texts; Greek,Roman, and other mythologies; American, European, Eastern, and otherlegends; and music, the arts, business, comics, movies, television, radio,and popular culture. For instance, “Othello” is listed and defined underthe category of anger and “Gloomy Gus” under pessimism. Entries arearranged by category, with several allusions for each, a brief definition,origin, and source references. About 3,500 allusions have been added tothis edition, especially in the areas of real people, technology and media,popular culture, religions like Islam, Buddhism, and Hinduism,children’s literature, and politics and world history. The late Urdang wasa lexicographer, and Ruffner is a reference publisher.

PN45 2009-021943 978-0-8047-6876-4FFiiccttiioonn aaggoonniisstteess;; iinn ddeeffeennssee ooff lliitteerraattuurree..Jusdanis, Gregory.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 154 p. $18.95 (pa)Jusdanis, who is not further identified, defends literature as a form ofart, and art as a purveyor of beauty, and beauty as one of the necessaryconditions for being human, one that has been neglected at best but toooften heaped with facile praise or denigration in the jaded spheres ofacademe. He considers overture and themes, art’s apology, twoautonomies, art as parabasis, the line between living and pretending, andthe future of a fiction.

PN51 2009-020926 978-0-7546-6882-4UUrrbbaann ccoonnffrroonnttaattiioonnss iinn lliitteerraattuurree aanndd ssoocciiaall sscciieennccee,,11884488--22000011;; EEuurrooppeeaann ccoonntteexxttss,, AAmmeerriiccaann eevvoolluuttiioonnss..Ahearn, Edward J.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 236 p. $99.95In this multidisciplinary work, Ahearn (comparative literature andFrench studies, Brown U.) draws on findings from a range of social sci-ences and the insights of “unconventional” literary texts in order topropose interdisciplinary juxtapositions and conflicts that illuminateaspects of urban life. Eight chapters are presented in sections addressingthe early expression of modern urban sensibility in the writings of foun-dational sociologists Georg Simmel and Emil Durkheim and the liter-ature of Charles Baudelaire and Bertolt Brecht; intersections betweenChicago School sociological studies of urban African American andJewish urban experiences and Richard Wright’s Native Son and SaulBellow’s The Adventures of Augie March; and social science writings on the“post-industrial,” the “dual city,” and the “information society” as theyrelate to Tony Morrison’s Jazz, works by Mexican-American and Chinese-American women writers Sandra Cisneros and Fae Myenne Ng, andother writings.

PN56 2009-018579 978-1-4051-9307-8EEppiicc aanndd hhiissttoorryy..Title main entry. Ed. by David Konstan and Kurt A. Raaflaub. (Theancient world, comparative histories)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 442 p. $149.95The volume results from a project of the Program in Ancient Studies atBrown University to investigate one of the important means by whichpre-modern societies commemorated the past and transmitted suchmemories over time. Specialists in the literature and culture of varioustraditions in which written or oral epic existed or exists explore the rela-tionship between a performance of narrative and the events in the pastthey portray. The anthology allows comparison between the traditionscovered, and adds to the sparse knowledge about epic and history by pro-viding a number of concrete examples. Among the studies are historicalevents and the process of their transformation in Akkadian heroic tradi-tions, epic and history in the Hebrew Bible, historical narrative in archaicand early classical Greek elegy, historicity and anachronism in Beowulf,traditional history in South Slavic oral epic, and epic and history in theArabic tradition.

PN56 2009-032772 978-1-59460-637-3LLaaww,, lliitteerraattuurree,, aanndd tthheerraappeeuuttiicc jjuurriisspprruuddeennccee..Ronner, Amy D.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 307 p. $45.00Ronner (property, wills and trusts, and criminal procedure, St. ThomasU. School of Law) examines the law and literature movement and its con-nection to Therapeutic Jurisprudence, which integrates psychology,mental health, and other disciplines to enrich and humanize the law andconcerns itself with the human, emotional, and psychological side of thelegal process. She discusses the history of the law and literaturemovement and the principles and applications of TherapeuticJurisprudence, describes how they are compatible, and considersHerman Melville’s Billy Budd and Bartleby, Dostoyevsky’s Crime andPunishment, Arthur Miller’s The Crucible, William Wright’s Harvard’sSecret Court, W.H. Hudson’s A Crystal Age, and other works through theseperspectives, and how they impart wisdom about the psychological effectof the law, legal procedures, and practice, including criminal procedure,confession, witch hunts, homophobia, and legal education.

PN56 2009-032018 978-0-8047-6237-3TThhee lloonngg ssppaaccee;; ttrraannssnnaattiioonnaalliissmm aanndd ppoossttccoolloonniiaall ffoorrmm..Hitchcock, Peter. (Cultural memory in the present)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 295 p. $24.95 (pa)Hitchcock (English, film studies, and women’s studies; City U. of NewYork-Graduate Center and Baruch College) looks at the extended narra-tives—trilogies and tetrologies—by Pramoedya Ananta Toer, WilsonHarris, Nuruddin Farah, and Assia Djebar. They display an under-standing of narration, a logic of form that diverges from postcolonialworld literature, world republic of letters, or normative transnationalism,he argues. In addition to the title chapter, he discusses the language ofform, the extopy of place, meanwhile on Buru, and this quartet which isnot one.

PN56 2009-025057 978-0-8130-3424-9MMooddeerrnniisstt ccuullttuurraall ssttuuddiieess..Driscoll, Catherine.U. Press of Florida, ©2009 280 p. $69.95Driscoll (gender and cultural studies, U. of Sydney) demonstrates how hisconventional education in modern literature has informed his subsequentengagement cultural studies. His topics include cinema as modernism;modernism and adolescence; sex education, popular culture, and thepublic sphere; art and the everyday; the order of things; the time of mod-ernism; the age of the world picture; the invention of culture; andpopular music.

PN56 2009-043339 978-1-57003-862-4TThhee ppaassssiioonnss ooff mmooddeerrnniissmm;; EElliioott,, YYeeaattss,, WWoooollff,, aannddMMaannnn..Cuda, Anthony.U. of South Carolina Press, ©2010 235 p. $49.95Cuda (literature, University of North Carolina at Greensboro) reexaminesthe work of T. S. Eliot, W. B. Yeats, Virginia Wollf and Thomas Mann interms of “passion scenes”. This does not mean erotic qualities but thedepth of feeling experienced by the authors that is reflected in theirwork. Using a wide breadth of sources, including letters and mono-graphs, Cuda argues that these authors were not dispassionateModernists but fully invested in strong human emotions. Using quotesfrom his subjects as examples, Cuda also reevaluates the concept ofModernism, encouraging the reader to consider the underlying passionin other writers of the time.

PN56 978-87-635-0790-5PPlloottttiinngg wwiitthh EErrooss;; eessssaayyss oonn tthhee ppooeettiiccss ooff lloovvee aanndd tthheeeerroottiiccss ooff rreeaaddiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Ingela Nilsson.Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2009 292 p. $58.00Beginning with nontraditional readings of a fragment of a Sappho lovepoem, Nilsson (Byzantine studies, Uppsala U., Sweden) introduces adozen chapters on the themes of literary and narratological analysis.Contributors interpret the relationship between author and reader indrawing meanings from ancient Greek and Roman love poetry (ofCatulles, Sulpicia, Dioscorides) and early Greek novels, throughByzantine period texts (e.g., the 11th century Persian epic poem , Vámiqand ‘Adrá, and Niketas Choniates’12th century Historical Narrative(which is more erotic than it sounds). The anthology was inspired by asymposium titled Loving Reading: Narrative, Poetics, and Eros held at theeditor’s campus in 2006. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–253–

PN56 2009-483911 978-1-904750-68-0AA sshhoorrtt hhiissttoorryy ooff ffaannttaassyy..Mendlesohn, Farah and Edward James.Middlesex Univ. Press, ©2009 285 p. $25.00 (pa)James (medieval history, U. College Dublin) and Mendlesohn (sciencefiction and fantasy literature, Middlesex U.) follow the lead of authors,publishers, and readers about what is and is not fantasy, but if there isa question, they insist on the presence of the impossible and the unex-plainable. They begin with the journey from myth to magic, then use onechapter as a bridge to Tolkien and Lewis. The period from the 1950s tothe 1990s is covered in chapters on each decade. Then come Pullman,Rowling, and Pratchett. The most recent decade follows. A chronology ofimportant writers is provided, along with a glossary of literary terms.

PN56 2009-028684 978-0-8047-6380-6TThhiinnkkiinngg aalllleeggoorryy ootthheerrwwiissee..Title main entry. Ed. by Brenda Machosky.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 276 p. $50.00Machosky (English, U. of Hawaii) presents 11 essays for which contrib-utors were asked to “think differently” about allegory, although what thatexactly means is not well-specified beyond reference to the essays “pre-senting a variety of topics, not restricted to historical period or genericmode;” “offering experimental ideas;” and “posing complex questions.”Specific topics include the allegorical construction of colonialism and theideology of the museum, the allegorical structures found within thearchitectural debates and broadsides of early modern Paris, the role ofallegory in the performative aspects of Bruno’s La Cena de le Cenari andGalileo’s Massimi sistemi, allegorical structures in philosophy andHannah Arendt’s Life of the Mind, and the place of allegory in contem-porary scientific discourse.

PN56 2009-010310 978-0-691-14407-8WWaarr aatt aa ddiissttaannccee;; rroommaannttiicciissmm aanndd tthhee mmaakkiinngg ooffmmooddeerrnn wwaarrttiimmee..Favret, Mary A.Princeton U. Press, ©2010 262 p. $26.95 (pa)Favet (English, Indiana University) has written a lyrical, yet harsh, por-trait of the ways in which poets and novelists have grappled with thecomprehension of wars they have not seen. She begins with the begin-nings of the war in Iraq before moving back to the Napoleonic era andthen working forward again. Using examples from writers as disparateas Jane Austen and Robert Frost, she notes the attempts to understanddistant wars, to contain or even domesticate them. Images from nature,particularly winter, abound. The bleakness of the season is undercut bythe hope of spring, a way of making chaos follow an orderly progression.The way in which Austen presents life in the navy as similar to ordinarydaily life ashore is contrasted with naval journals of the times showingthe stark reality. It is not only the subject matter that makes this studyimpressive, but the author’s use of language and the interludes in the textin which she considers her own reactions to the literature in the light ofcontemporary scenes of war. The title indicates that this is a study ofRomantic literature about war. It is more a meditation on the humanneed to make sense of the senseless. As such it deserves an audiencemuch wider than academics.

PN98 2009-028207 978-1-60497-633-5RReeaaddiinngg bblliinnddllyy;; lliitteerraattuurree,, ootthheerrnneessss,, aanndd tthhee ppoossssiibbiilliittyyooff aann eetthhiiccaall rreeaaddiinngg..Fernando, Jeremy.Cambria Press, ©2009 166 p. $99.95Fernando is a scholar of literature, philosophy, and the media—as well asa filmmaker and artist—who does not seem to live or work anywhere.Here he explores reading as a pact with the devil, blindness, Venus inFurs or how to read the other, rereading J. Hillis Miller’s The Ethics ofReading, reading and writing Roland Barthes, only fiction is strangerthan fiction, and reading or just gaming.

PN147 2009-046936 978-1-60138-407-2HHooww ttoo wwrriittee aanndd ppuubblliisshh aa ssuucccceessssffuull cchhiillddrreenn’’ss bbooookk;;eevveerryytthhiinngg yyoouu nneeeedd ttoo kknnooww eexxppllaaiinneedd ssiimmppllyy..Reeser, Cynthia.Atlantic Publishing, ©2010 288 p. $24.95 (pa)Reeser, a visual artist and editor of a literary journal, explains how towrite and publish a children’s book, from story development, writing,and illustrating, to publishing. She includes information on assessing themarket, categories of books, understanding the children’s book industry,what publishers are looking for, e-publishing, self-publishing, agents, sub-missions, networking and public relations, and career development.

PN159 2009026079 978-0-8108-5647-9WWrriittiinngg aanndd ppuubblliisshhiinngg;; tthhee uullttiimmaattee tteeeenn gguuiiddee..Schwartz, Tina P. (It happened to me; no.27)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 270 p. $42.00This guide for teen writers features a lively layout with b&w photos andcartoons, decorated boxes, and movie notes about films based on books,along with book synopses, writing exercises, and author profiles. Thebook explains different educational and career paths for writers, empha-sizing the importance of reading widely. Separate chapters are devoted tofiction and nonfiction techniques, poetry, and songwriting. There is alsomaterial on connecting with other writers through online and in-personcritique groups, with ideas on how to respond to criticism. A chapter onwriting about difficult subjects gives real-life examples of how youngwriters approach topics like sexual orientation and drug abuse.Unfortunately, the chapter on publishing and marketing doesn’t mentionelectronic publishing or zines. The book’s final chapter on contests,awards, and grants tells how to avoid scams and gives a list of web sitesfor legitimate contests and awards. Schwartz has taught programs forteens on writing and getting published.

PN171 2009-015280 978-1-58683-343-5MMLLAA mmaaddee eeaassyy;; cciittaattiioonn bbaassiiccss ffoorr bbeeggiinnnneerrss..Heath, Marilyn.Linworth Publishing, Inc., ©2010 212 p. $35.00 (pa)Media specialist and educator Heath abstracts the Modern LanguageAssociation’s (MLA) widely used Handbook for Writers of Research Papers,which sets out standards for referencing citations, quotations, and for-matting papers in academic contexts. Among her topics are under-standing MLA citation, citing a book with an author and an editor,newspaper articles, online sources, and other sources. Under paren-thetical documents she explains how to indicate summarizing, para-phrasing, and quoting, and emphasizes accuracy and readability. Thefinal section describes how to format the Works Cited page, and for-matting a whole paper using Microsoftwear.

PN218 2009-037844 978-0-7864-4179-2LLiitteerraarryy aafftteerrlliiffee;; tthhee ppoosstthhuummoouuss ccoonnttiinnuuaattiioonnss ooff 332255aauutthhoorrss’’ ffiiccttiioonnaall cchhaarraacctteerrss..Drew, Bernard A.McFarland & Co., ©2010 408 p. $45.00 (pa)Drew, a journalist and reference book writer, provides a catalog of worksby 325 authors whose characters or situations have been continued byothers. He identifies pastiches like the continuation of the Dracula story,Gone With the Wind, Perry Mason, the tales of V.C. Andrews and RobertLudlum, and stories by Mark Twain and Jane Austen, in the genres ofaction and adventure, classics, humor, crime and mystery, espionage,fantasy and horror, juvenile literature, poetry, pulp, romance, sciencefiction, and westerns. Organized by genre and author, entries includebook series, offshoots issued under the new writer’s name, posthumouscollaborations, unauthorized books, and biographies of literary char-acters. They are comprised of biographies of the creators, overviews oftheir books, reasons the series continued, and lists of original and pas-tiche works. Books and planned series written under house names, mul-tiple-author novelizations, spin-offs, shared universes, or series based onmovies or TV shows, comics, and parodies are generally omitted.

PN501 2009-018607 978-1-4051-4170-3AA ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo tthhee pphhiilloossoopphhyy ooff lliitteerraattuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Garry L. Hagberg and Walter Jost. (Blackwellcompanions to philosophy)Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 552 p. $199.95Aristotle, Derrida, Flaubert, Wittgenstein, Bakhtin, Hemingway; themeanings and concerns of thinkers and writers like these are exploredin the 28 chapters of this terrific work, written by leading scholars in thefields of philosophy, law, aesthetics, and literature. Using direct, ratherthan theory-laden, language to present the challenging concepts that arecurrent in the field, the text is designed both for graduate students andscholars and will be thought-provoking to both. The material is dividedinto 7 themes: the relations between philosophy and literature; emotionalengagement and the experience of reading; philosophy, tragedy and lit-erary form; literature and the moral life; narrative and the question ofliterary truth; intention and biography in criticism; and literary lan-guage. A sampling of topics includes an impassioned critique of ten-dencies in literary theory to move away from expressions of humanityand morality in favor of textuality, by Martha C. Nussbaum (law andethics, U. of Chicago); moralism in Henry James, by Cora Diamond (phi-losophy, U. of Virginia); and a platonic view of truth in literature, byPeter Lamarque (philosophy, U. of York, the UK). Each chapter concludeswith a bibliography.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –254–

PN621 2009-674625 978-1-4438-0988-7TThhee hheeaalliinngg ppoowweerr ooff aanncciieenntt lliitteerraattuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Bertman and Lois Parker.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 127 p. $54.00Three scholars in literature and three in mental health explore howancient literature possesses power to heal souls, contending that suchhealing is especially needed today when the rapidity of change and theforce of world events drives peace from the mind. Among their topics arethe wisdom tradition of Egypt, a Mesopotamian hero for a melancholyage, the wisdom of Torah, epic women and the absence of healing in theIliad, the healing of society in Homer’s Odyssey, stoic healing, and thehealing power of the Tao. The price is converted from 2/10 Britishpounds sterling. The papers were presented at a June 2008 symposiumin Reno, Nevada.

PN671 2009-032924 978-1-58044-127-8PPooeettrryy,, ppllaaccee,, aanndd ggeennddeerr;; ssttuuddiieess iinn mmeeddiieevvaall ccuullttuurree iinnhhoonnoorr ooff HHeelleenn DDaammiiccoo..Title main entry. Ed. by Catherine E. Karkov.Medieval Institute Pub., ©2009 380 p. $70.00These essays in honor of Norse and Anglo-Saxon scholar Helen Damicoreflect her interest in the culture of the medieval North and her beliefthat interdisciplinary studies can reveal new aspects even to long studiedworks. Karkov (art history, University of Leeds) has selected severalpapers that provide different slants on texts such as Beowulf, The Dreamof the Rood and the writings of the Venerable Bede, including a freshexamination of the single Beowulf manuscript. Translation is also a topicwith examples of how material was altered, omitted, added to or sub-verted through illustrations. The two articles on this topic discuss textsthat are hundreds of years apart but share much in the mentality of thetranslators. An English translation of an Orkney proverb poem comple-ments these, demonstrating the challenges of transmitting the sense of awork a thousand years removed from us. A comparison of Welsh andAnglo-Saxon petitionary poems points out the differences in two poetictraditions. Interpretations of plastic art, an icon of the Virgin and theHorsewoman on the Hilton of Cadboll Cross-slab are looked at in bothreligious and feminist lights. The secular side of sculpture and its relationto land holdings is examined for Anglo-Scandinavian Northumbria. Themutability of symbolism is shown in the change in interpretations for thewound in Christ’s side, with an emphasis on Bede’s commentary. Thefinal essay, on Dante’s representation of Muslims and Jews, reflects thediversity of Damico’s interests. The book as a whole is a superb exampleof solid scholarship by some of the most respected scholars in medievalstudies.

PN721 2009-011743 978-0-7546-6738-4EEaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn wwoommeenn aanndd ttrraannssnnaattiioonnaall ccoommmmuunniittiieess oofflleetttteerrss..Title main entry. Ed. by Julie D. Campbell and Anne R. Larsen.(Women and gender in the early modern world)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 330 p. $124.95Derived from a workshop and two conference sessions, the 11 essays ofthis volume offer a remarkably rich account of the life of letters ofwomen in early modern Europe as one that was driven by keenawareness of and correspondence with their colleagues in other coun-tries. Treated as a phenomenon of cultural geography, the essays detailthe intricate literary communication practiced by women who saw theirworks commercially printed, knew classical languages, and were activelyinvolved, variously, in humanist, family, and religious pursuits. EstherInglis, Catherine des Roches, Giulia Gonzaga, and Anne Vaughan Lockare among the women whose literary lives are described. The volumeconcludes with a lengthy bibliography of primary and secondarysources. The contributors teach English, Italian, French, and history inthe US, Europe, and Australia.

PN761 2009-052365 978-1-4331-0913-3SSaannccttuuaarriieess ooff lliigghhtt iinn nniinneetteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy EEuurrooppeeaannlliitteerraattuurree..Walter, Hugo G. (Studies on themes and motifs in literature; v.102)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 256 p. $71.95Walter (English and humanities, Berkeley College, New York) exploresseveral sanctuaries of light, natural beauty, creativity, harmony, andserenity in 19th-century European literature that celebrate and exemplifythe spirit of and some characteristics of luminescent refuge in PercyShelley’s Prometheus Unbound. He focuses on description, depictions, andportrayals of such sanctuaries in the work of William Wordsworth, E. T.A Hoffmann, Joseph van Eichendorff, and Charlotte Brontë.

PN770 2009-041776 978-3-11-021771-1EEuurrooppaa!! EEuurrooppaa??;; tthhee aavvaanntt--ggaarrddee,, mmooddeerrnniissmm,, aanndd tthheeffaattee ooff aa ccoonnttiinneenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Sascha Bru et al. (European avant-garde andmodernism studies; v.1)De Gruyter, ©2009 534 p. $155.00In this first volume of the new series European Avant-Garde andModernism Studies, 33 multidisciplinary papers explore aspects of therelations between the “avant-garde,” “modernism,” and “Europe,” with afocus mainly on the decades from the late 19th century to the SecondWorld War. The essays are organized into sections devoted to general the-oretical and historiographical issues; the way ideas of “Europe” circu-lated in the avant-gardes and modernism; how older forms of Europeanidentity informed modernists and avant-gardists; and how “Europe” wasrelated to other continents in the avant-garde and modernism and howexperimental cultural producers from non-European regions understood“Europe.” Twenty-one of the papers are in English and the rest are inFrench or German.

PN849 2009-040154 978-3-11-021773-5TThhee eexxiillee aanndd rreettuurrnn ooff wwrriitteerrss ffrroomm EEaasstt--CCeennttrraall EEuurrooppee;;aa ccoommppeennddiiuumm..Title main entry. Ed. by John Neubauer and Borbála Zsuzsanna Török.De Gruyter, ©2009 626 p. $149.95Edited by Neubauer (comparative literature, U. of Amsterdam, theNetherlands) and Török (U. of Konstanz, Germany), this multiply-authored volume is the product of a cohesive research project begun ata September, 2006, workshop at the Collegium in Budapest: “BetweenHome and Host Cultures: Twentieth-Century East European Writers inExile.” The project focused on the personal and social experiences of exileas found in diaries, letters, memoirs, and fiction and all contributorsagreed to read the formal and linguistic aspects of writing as indices ofpsychological, social, and historical states of mind. A key theme thatemerged from the project is the topic of “homecoming,” or the repatri-ation of exile writers and their works. Among the writers discussed areDanuta Mostwin, Irodalmi Újsáj, Mikes Kör, Magyar Mühely, PavelTigrid, Monica Lovinescu, Paul Goma, Milan Kundera, Sándor Márai,Herta Müller, and Albert Wass.

PN849 2009-033598 978-963-9776-10-4OOrriieennttaattiioonnss;; aann aanntthhoollooggyy ooff EEaasstt EEuurrooppeeaann ttrraavveellwwrriittiinngg;; ccaa.. 11555500--22000000..Title main entry. Ed. by Wendy Bracewell. (East looks west; v.1)Central European U. Press, ©2009 402 p. $45.00Bracewell (History, University College London) has assembled over 100examples of travel writing about Europe, written by east Europeans overthe past 450 years. Ranging from pilgrimage diaries from the 1600s tocontemporary accounts of Europe after the fall of the Iron Curtain, thesewritings show the broad range of lenses through which travelers fromthe east viewed the rest of Europe. While delightful and entertaining,these travel accounts also show how notions of “us” and “them” held byeast Europeans have changed over the centuries.

PN849 2009-035196 978-0-7876-8171-5TTwweennttyy--ffiirrsstt--cceennttuurryy CCeennttrraall aanndd EEaasstteerrnn EEuurrooppeeaannwwrriitteerrss..Title main entry. Ed. by Steven Serafin and Vasa Mihailovich.(Dictionary of literary biography; v.353)Gale, ©2010 445 p. $288.00For students, general readers, teachers, and researchers, Serafin (HunterCollege of the City U. of New York) and Mihailovich (U. of North Carolinaat Chapel Hill) present profiles of 60 of the most prominent literaryfigures of Central and Eastern Europe, specifically from Albania,Bulgaria, Croatia, the Czech Republic, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia,Lithuania, Macedonia, Poland, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, and Slovenia.Ranging from the generation of writers emerging in the decade afterWorld War II to those of today, the profiles trace each author’s career, thedevelopment of his or her canon, and the evolution of his or her repu-tation, within the context of literary history. They include RyszardKapuscinnski, Imre Kertesz, Ismail Kadare, Emiliya Dvoryanova, IvanTeofilov, Lulijeta Lleshanaku, Maris Caklais, and Stefan Chwin. Worklists, photos, and illustrations are included.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–255–

PN865 978-90-420-2708-4MMeettaammoorrpphhoossiiss;; ttrraannssffoorrmmaattiioonnss ooff tthhee bbooddyy aanndd tthheeiinnfflluueennccee ooff OOvviidd’’ss MMeettaammoorrpphhoosseess oonn GGeerrmmaanniicc lliitteerraattuurreeooff tthhee nniinneetteeeenntthh aanndd ttwweennttiieetthh cceennttuurriieess..Gallagher, David. (Internationale Forschungen zur allgemeinen und ver-gleichenden Literaturwissenschaft; 127)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 470 p. $133.00Gallagher, who is not further identified, traces depictions of humanstransforming into animals in German fictive literature, to specific pas-sages in Roman poet Ovid’s (43 BC-18 AD) collection of myths pivotingon the theme. He begins by introducing Metamorphoses itself. Then heconsiders arachnids, invertebrates, and lepidoptera in such works asJeremias Gotthelf’s 1842 Die schwarze Spinne and tragedy andZarathustra in Nietzsche; avian and serpentine in Richard Wagner’sLohengrin (1845-48), the Leda myth in Goethe’s Faust II (1832), and otherworks; myriad arboreal, mammalian, feline, and lupine transformationssuch as Herbert Eulenberg’s 1913 Katinka, die Fliege and of courseHermann Hesse’s 1927 Der Steppenwolf among others; melusinas,nymphs, water sprites, and undinas in Hans Christian Anderson’s Denlille havfrue (1837), Thomas Mann’s mermaids, and others; and ChristophRansmayr’s 1988 Die Letzte Welt.

PN865 978-90-420-2731-2TTeexxttuuaall iinntteerrsseeccttiioonnss;; lliitteerraattuurree,, hhiissttoorryy aanndd tthhee aarrttss iinnnniinneetteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy EEuurrooppee..Title main entry. Ed. by Rachael Langford. (Internationale Forschungenzur allgemeinen und vergleichenden Literaturwissenschaft; 129)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 231 p. $64.40 (pa)Scholars of literature, art, and music examine how textual material in19th-century Europe addressed non-literary cultural artifacts and con-cepts. Among the topics are a genealogy of 19th-century dandyisn, inter-sections with music and the visual arts in the German novel of the long19th century, Ranke’s problem of narrative and Schiller’s solution,Manet’s A Bar at the Folies-Bergère as an allegory of nostalgia, the effectof the pre-Raphaelites on the cultural consciousness of D’Annunzio, andRomantic interpretations of ancient Greek music in Greece 1890-1910.

PN865 978-90-420-2743-5WWoorrdd aanndd iimmaaggee iinn ccoolloonniiaall aanndd ppoossttccoolloonniiaall lliitteerraattuurreessaanndd ccuullttuurreess..Title main entry. Ed. by Michael Meyer. (Cross cultures; 116, ASNELpapers; 14)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 379 p. $118.00The interplay of text and image in colonial and post-colonial literatureand art is addressed in this collection in terms of cultured perspectives.Meyer (English, University of Koblenz-Landau) emphasizes this in hisintroduction. The essays begin with early representations of the Other inEngland, Shakespeare’s Caliban from The Tempest and Africans inHogarth’s satirical drawings and British studies of life in the MiddleEastern harem. This section ends with a look at R. L. Stevenson’s portraitof the Edinburgh he had left forever. The second part of the book isgrouped by continent. Much of the work studied is by post-colonialartists, novelists and filmmakers. The tensions and social misconceptionsin South Africa are examined in five essays covering photography, op-edcartoons and novels. All three forms blend image and text. The focusmoves to Asia and the Indian subcontinent with articles on Mo’s novelThe Monkey King and Rushdie’s Midnight’s Children followed by twoessays on Indian films and one on Asian-British rap and hip-hop lyrics.The final essays are on different presentations through art of the leg-endary Australian outlaw, Ned Kelly; the creation of self-image in booksby and for indigenous children in New Zealand, Canada and the USA,an example of public art using photographs and text and an analysis ofthe cult film Dead Man in terms of the genocide of Native Americans. Allof the articles use the intersection of word and image to show how theartists perceive cultural intersection in a post-colonial world and chal-lenge their readers/viewers to rethink their own points of view. Price con-verted from Euros.

PN1008 2009-483180 978-1-4438-0493-6YYoouunngg aadduulltt lliitteerraattuurree aanndd ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Harry Edwin Eiss.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 176 p. $54.00Eiss (English Language and Literature, Eastern Michigan University)presents a collection of essays that lacks a real center, with the only con-nection between essays being the fact that young adults are somehowinvolved in the subject matter. (The link between an article on Chinesepublic education since the time of Confucius and another on The Sistersof the Traveling Pants, for example, is very unclear.) Essays frequentlyread more like fan literature or extra- long blog posts than anythingsuitable for inclusion in an academic book, and the text suffers frompoor or non-existent copy-editing. This publisher has done far better withits other offerings; one can only hope that their next book is a return toform.

PN1009 2009-045563 978-0-8108-7293-6CCaammppbbeellll’’ss ssccoooopp;; rreefflleeccttiioonnss oonn yyoouunngg aadduulltt lliitteerraattuurree..Campbell, Patricia J. (Scarecrow studies in young adult literature; no.38)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 245 p. $40.00Campbell, editor of the publisher’s series on young adult (YA) literature,looks at trends in the field and the joys of the genre in this collection ofher essays, articles, columns, and speeches. She addresses the boundariesbetween children’s and adult literature, and examines issues of cen-sorship and other problems. One section of the book shares insights fromher experience in the American Library Association, and another isdevoted to defining YA. Some other topics explored include graphicnovels, the glut of YA novels with death as the main theme, and thesometimes dubious value of awards.

PN1303 2009-018541 978-0-87413-076-8TThhee ffeemmaallee HHoommeerr;; aann eexxpplloorraattiioonn ooff wwoommeenn’’ss eeppiiccppooeettrryy..Downes, Jeremy M.Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2010 350 p. $72.50Downes (English, Auburn U.) unearths the occluded tradition of thefemale epic poem, which he argues has a history that ranges from theancient Sumerian Descen of Inanna, inscribed on clay tablets between1900 and 1600 BCE, to Lisa Robertson’s Debbie: An Epic (1997). He takesa thematic, rather than chronological approach to the topic, addressingsuch issues as cyclical mythic structure, internalized mythic structure,monumental time, the gods and religious thought, feminist discourse,oral culture and women’s performance, the local and the global, andpoetry as heroic action. Distributed in the US by Associated UniversityPresses.

PN1979 2009-049895 978-1-59158-873-3TThhee kkaammiisshhiibbaaii ccllaassssrroooomm;; eennggaaggiinngg mmuullttiippllee lliitteerraacciieesstthhrroouugghh tthhee aarrtt ooff ““ppaappeerr tthheeaatteerr””..McGowan, Tara M.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 99 p. $40.00 (pa)Kamishibai is a form of Japanese storytelling using simple illustratedcards, developed by candy-vending street storytellers carting portable the-aters on their bicycles in the 1920s. In this resource for teachers,librarians, and storytellers, McGowan, a visual artist and storyteller whohas worked and studied in Japan, presents step-by-step directions for con-ducting hands-on classroom workshops to encourage students to createand perform their own kamishibai stories. After an illustrated history ofkamishibai, McGowan discusses kamishibai as visual literacy, showshow to focus on narrative elements and parts of speech when usingkamishibai to teach the writing process, and gives tips on usingkamishibai to write personal stories and using kamishibai in the socialstudies and science curriculum. An appendix offers instructions forbuilding a kamishibai stage out of cardboard boxes. The book is illus-trated with the author’s b&w drawings, but unfortunately there are noexamples of student work. McGowan is a doctoral candidate in educationat the University of Pennsylvania. Libraries Unlimited is an imprint ofABC-CLIO, LLC.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –256–

PN1991 2008-024138 978-1-58985-109-2DDaavvee PPrraatttt;; bbeehhiinndd tthhee mmiicc:: tthhiirrttyy yyeeaarrss iinn rraaddiioo..Pratt, Dave.Five Star Publications, Inc, ©2009 356 p. $30.00Pratt, a morning radio personality in Phoenix known as the “MorningMayor,” offers an autobiography of his 30-year career and as host of thelongest running rock morning show in the US. He details how he grewup in Elko, Nevada; how he went from being a college dropout to the topradio host in Arizona; his career on KUPD (which started out in broad-casting from a trailer); his move to KMLE; his Sex Machine Band; hisbattle with prostate cancer; and his family (with a chapter written by hiswife); along with memories of celebrities and friends and a collection oflistener memories. Many color photos are included. There is no index.

PN1992 2009-047045 978-1-84457-302-8AArraabb tteelleevviissiioonn iinndduussttrriieess..Kraidy, Marwan and Joe F. Khalil. (International screen industries)Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 193 p. $32.95 (pa)If Westerners think of Arab television at all, they usually presume thatal-Jazeera is the only one, but Kraidy (communication, U. ofPennsylvania) and Khalil (Southern Illinois U.-Carbondale) say that therenown of the one channel obscures the breadth and rich diversity of theindustry. They show how its growth is driven a handful of leading insti-tutions that differ in institutional identity, political perspective, and com-mercial agenda. Among the aspects they examine are pan-Arabentertainment channels, niche channels and socio-cultural change, newchannels, Ramadan, and television policy and regulation in the Arabworld.

PN1992 978-0-7165-3022-0CCiinneemmaa oonn tthhee ppeerriipphheerryy;; ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy IIrriisshh aannddSSppaanniisshh ffiillmm..Holohan, Conn.Irish Academic Press, ©2010 198 p. $69.95Noting that the rejection of symbols and concerns of traditional culturemight open recent Irish and Spanish films to the accusation that theylack national specificity, Holohan (Trinity College Dublin, Ireland) callssuch a view inadequate in addressing “the complexity of the relationshipbetween tradition and modernity, between the national past and thetransnational cultural and economic interactions of the present.” It is thisfocus on the interactions between the national and the transnational thatdrives his comparative analysis of contemporary Irish and Spanishcinema. He finds similarities in Irish and Spanish cinemas that he tracesto the common positions of Ireland and Spain at the cultural and eco-nomic periphery of Europe, their common conservative and Catholic cul-tures, and their both having strongly nationalist political regimes, all ofwhich caused both countries to engage uncertainly with modernizationand globalization. Textual analysis of films produced between 1992 and2006 are central to the work, but they are contextualized through ref-erence to social, cultural, and political developments. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

PN1992 2009-040544 978-0-8126-9674-5MMrr.. MMoonnkk aanndd pphhiilloossoopphhyy..Title main entry. Ed. by D.E. Wittkower. (Popular culture and phi-losophy; v.46)Open Court Publishing, ©2010 266 p. $19.95 (pa)In this collection of tongue-in-cheek essays, contributors in philosophy,Buddhism, cultural studies, and psychology examine the world of fic-tional print and television detective Adrian Monk through the lens of phi-losophy, touching on the emotion-reason dilemma, Mr. Monk as theBodhisattva ideal, and Mr. Monk and Nietzsche’s übermensch. Wittkowerteaches philosophy at Coastal Carolina University. He is the editor of iPodand Philosophy and Facebook and Philosophy.

PN1992 2009-035080 978-1-57912-638-4SSeessaammee SSttrreeeett;; aa cceelleebbrraattiioonn;; 4400 yyeeaarrss ooff lliiffee oonn tthhee ssttrreeeett..((DDVVDD iinncclluuddeedd))Gikow, Louise A.Black Dog and Leventhal, ©2009 303 p. $40.00Perhaps someone who had been sleeping for the past 40 years wouldhave no notion of Sesame Street; anyone who has been awake in the 120countries and territories of the world where the ground-breaking educa-tional show for children has been distributed will be familiar with it tosome degree. This oversize book (11x13″) offers a compendium of history,interviews, and photos of personnel and sets—skillfully arranged in lively,complicated pages. There’s plenty to talk about, including all the behind-the-scenes creative work, the challenges of making education entertainingand entertainment educational, the reactions and responses of childrenand adults, and the political complications and economic practicalities ofmaking the show. Gikow is an author who has been heavily involvedwith Henson Productions, among many other activities. She interviewedcast and crew and spent a season on the set to prepare this celebratorybook, whose purchase helps support the non-profit organization behindthe show.

PN1992 2009-042546 978-0-313-36492-1TTeelleennoovveellaass..Title main entry. Ed. by Ilan Stavans. (The Ilan Stavans library ofLatino civilization)Greenwood Press, ©2010 144 p. $55.00For students, specialists, and general readers, Stavans (Latin Americanand Latino culture, Amherst College), whose father is a telenovela actor,brings together ten essays on the telenovela. A playwright and scholars oflanguages and literature, sociology, communication studies, and mediatheory in the US, Mexico, and Europe discuss differences from US soapoperas; the impact on Latino culture; how they depict stereotypes, gender,and class roles; their varying topics and themes; the concept of reality;the international debate relating to cultural imperialism; and specifictelenovelas like Xica, Betty la fea, and Laberintos de Pasión.

PN1993 2009-529462 978-0-9582750-9-5110000 eesssseennttiiaall NNeeww ZZeeaallaanndd ffiillmmss..McDouall, Hamish.Awa Press, ©2009 267 p. $40.00 (pa)Film critic Hamish McDouall devotes a page or two each to his favoriteone hundred New Zealand films in this handy and entertaining guide.The author draws on extensive viewing experience (he watched nearlyevery New Zealand film ever made) and a thorough knowledge of filmhistory and familiarity with New Zealand culture to create a mix of back-ground information, anecdotes, and insights on the significance of eachfilm. A glossy color still is included next to each review, and the formatincludes a quick reference box with the date, running time, director,writer and producer. Useful information on how to find the films isincluded.

PN1993 2008-011225 978-0-8108-6896-0TThhee AA ttoo ZZ ooff IIttaalliiaann cciinneemmaa.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Moliterno, Gino. (The A to Z guide series; no.109)Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 449 p. $40.00 (pa)Italian cinema has been among the most influential and popular in theworld, and is blessed with many good histories in Italian and English,says Moliterno (film studies, Australian National U.-Canberra), but com-plains that only one English-language reference has been produced, andthat too slender to do justice to the field. He strives here to offer accurate,up-to-date, readily accessible entries covering the entire history of Italiancinema from 1895 to the present. Of course some discernment is nec-essary to keep to a single volume. Most of the entries cite people—actors,directors, screenwriters, producers, composers, and the like. Somedescribe movie characters. Other topics include specific movies, tech-niques, and genres. The cross-referencing is extensive, mitigating the lackof an index. A chronology is provided.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–257–

PN1993 2009-027714 978-0-8248-3337-4CCiinneemmaa,, ssppaaccee,, aanndd ppoollyyllooccaalliittyy iinn aa gglloobbaalliizziinngg CChhiinnaa..Zhang, Yingjin. (Critical interventions)U. of Hawai’i Press, ©2010 257 p. $49.00As Zhang (Chinese comparative literature and comparative studies, U. ofCalifornia at San Diego) explains in his introduction, his goals in pro-ducing this book are twofold: to explore the new perspectives andinsights that can be gained from investigating contemporary Chinesecinema and culture in terms of space and polylocality and to explore thediscursive mechanisms of Chinese cinema that articulate ideas of spaceand polylocality. His exploration is guided by three major theoreticalframeworks: Henri Lefebvre’s understandings of the relationshipbetween the production of space and the space of production; MiriamBatu Hansen’s theory of early cinema and the public sphere, which sur-mises the spatiality of the cinema as constituting an experiential publicsphere different from rationalization in the bourgeois public sphere orcommodification in the industrial-commercial public sphere; and Michelde Certeau’s theory of “spatial practices,” i.e. practices that serve todefine space “as much by preconceived borders as by improvised move-ments, as much by rigid institutional systems as by imaginative indi-vidual subjects, as much by strategies of the dominant power as bytactics of performative appropriation.” Within these theoretical frame-works, he discusses the transnationalism of Chinese cinema, the space ofproduction in postsocialist Chinese cinema, cinematic representations ofBeijing and of polylocality in hinterland China, Chinese independentdirector experiments with various documentary modes and styles, andthe reception context for Chinese cinema of polylocality.

PN1993 2009-052318 978-0-8166-7010-9TThhee ggeenniiuuss ooff tthhee ssyysstteemm;; HHoollllyywwoooodd ffiillmmmmaakkiinngg iinn tthheessttuuddiioo eerraa.. ((rreepprriinntt 11998888))Schatz, Thomas.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 514 p. $24.95 (pa)In this lively account of the Hollywood studio system, Schatz (Radio-TV-Film, University of Texas, Austin) shows how artistry and business com-bined to produce one of cinema’s golden ages. Focusing on four studios(Warner, MGM, Selznick, and Universal), the book traces the developmentof house styles, the rise and fall of careers, and the making (andunmaking) of movies. Schatz puts the lie to the notion that business killsart, showing instead how the interplay between studios’ business and cre-ative wings was responsible for creating so many classic films.Generously illustrated, this book will appeal to any reader interested infilm or in the history of film making.

PN1993 2009-366371 978-1-4438-1112-5PPrraaccttiiccaall aapppprrooaacchheess ttoo tteeaacchhiinngg ffiillmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Rachel S. Ritterbusch.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 191 p. $59.99Only one of the contributors is a teacher of film, and most of the essaysdescribe teaching film in other academic settings, and using movies topromote critical thinking, create an awareness of the male gaze, chal-lenge dominant ideology, and unmask the constructedness of film.Among their topics are teaching English composition and introduction tofilm is the same course, teaching scene analysis through remakes,teaching film to trouble verisimilitude, and the pedagogical applicationsfor Susan Stretfield’s film Female Perversions in gender studies courses.

PN1995 2009-034206 978-0-8166-5007-1AAfftteerriimmaaggeess ooff GGiilllleess DDeelleeuuzzee’’ss ffiillmm pphhiilloossoopphhyy..Title main entry. Ed. by D. N. Rodowick.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 396 p. $27.50 (pa)The late French philosopher Gilles Deleuze published his two-volumestudy of film in the 1980s—a work that has had a huge influence onscholars of film, media, and culture. In this volume, editor Rodowick(Visual and Environmental Studies, Harvard University) has assembledthe first collection of critical studies on Deleuze’s film theories in nearlya decade. Essays by a roster of international contributors evaluate thecontinuing significance of Deleuze’s film theories and offer new direc-tions for research. This is definitely a book for specialists; the heavylevels of academese will discourage all but the most determined readers.

PN1995 2009-032999 978-1-84520-796-0AAmmeerriiccaann sscciieennccee ffiiccttiioonn ffiillmm aanndd tteelleevviissiioonn..Geraghty, Lincoln.Berg Publishers, ©2009 156 p. $24.95 (pa)In this critical history of late 20th century American science fiction filmand television, Geraghty (film studies, U. of Portsmouth, UK) mapsthemes and trends in the genre and relates them to cultural, industrial,political, and social developments in the wider culture. Each chapter rep-resents a separate chronological moment and offers consideration of aniconic film and an iconic television show in relation to concerns of thatera. For example, the film Invasion of the Body Snatchers and the tele-vision series The Twilight Zone are discussed in relation to the Cold Warand the space race, while the film Transformers and the reworked tele-vision show Battlestar Galactica are examined in the context of the post-9/11 era. The other films discussed are 2001: A Space Odyssey, SoylentGreen, *batteries not included, and The Matrix and the television showsare Star Trek, The Six Million Dollar Man, Star Trek: The Next Generation,and The X-Files. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.

PN1995 2009-366378 978-1-4438-0975-7CCiinneemmaass,, iiddeennttiittiieess aanndd bbeeyyoonndd..Title main entry. Ed. by Ruby Cheung.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 244 p. $59.99Transnational cinemas and identities, and spatial and temporal identitynegotiations are the overarching themes as mostly English and Scottishfilm scholars analyze various movies, filmmakers, genres, and trends.Their topics include cultural specificity and cross-cultural analysis,mobile phones and transforming masculinity in The Matrix trilogy, themonstrous Chinese Other in the Thai horror movie Zee-Oui, regional filmpolicy and regional identity in England, American landscape and theordinary-life hero in The Straight Story, and true goddess Irene Papas andthe representation of Greekness. There is no index.

PN1995 2009-483872 978-1-4438-0527-8CCiinneemmaattiicc nnaarrrraattiioonn aanndd iittss ppssyycchhoollooggiiccaall iimmppaacctt;;ffuunnccttiioonnss ooff ccooggnniittiioonn,, eemmoottiioonn aanndd ppllaayy..Wuss, Peter.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 357 p. $67.99In an analysis of films’ psychological impact on viewers, Wuss (emeritus,Film and Television Academy “Konrad Wolf,” Potsdam-Babelsberg,Germany) proposes a perception-, conception-, and stereotype/archetype-based (PCS) model of cinematic narrative and structure as engagingmental stimuli. For example, he applies potentially testable hypothesesfrom the PCS model about conflict situations in High Noon, dreamlikesequences in Fellini’s 8-1/2, catharsis in classical genres, and complexemotions elicited by postmodern cinema (e.g., Life is Beautiful). The bookfeatures film stills and indicators of physiological measures.

PN1995 2009-029886 978-1-932907-69-8CCoossttuummee ddeessiiggnn 110011;; tthhee bbuussiinneessss aanndd aarrtt ooff ccrreeaattiinnggccoossttuummeess ffoorr ffiillmm aanndd tteelleevviissiioonn,, 22dd eedd..La Motte, Richard.Michael Wiese Productions, ©2010 201 p. $24.95 (pa)La Motte, who has worked as a costume designer, writer, producer,director, technical advisor, storyboard artist, and production designer,offers a guide for students and professionals to the process of becominga professional costume designer for film and television, and related jobrequirements. He explains how to get into the business, conduct inter-views, make costume presentations to producers and directors, breakdown scripts for requirements and budgets, hire and run costumedepartments, engage in manufacture, work with rental companies, fitactors, and run on-set production. This edition has a new chapter on tel-evision, and information about the role of the designer and foreignlocation shooting, by industry experts. There is no index or bibliography.

PN1995 2009-000772 978-0-8135-4630-8DDrriivveenn ttoo ddaarrkknneessss;; JJeewwiisshh eemmiiggrree ddiirreeccttoorrss aanndd tthhee rriisseeooff ffiillmm nnooiirr..Brook, Vincent.Rutgers U. Press, ©2009 285 p. $26.95 (pa)“...And they shall be driven to darkness” (Isaiah 8:22) aptly describes thedark themes of German and Austrian Jewish film directors who fledNazi Europe. Brook (media and cultural studies, U. of California, LosAngeles; U. of Southern California) chronicles the under-estimated con-tributions to the evolution of the film noir genre by émigrés includingFritz Lang, Billy Wilder, Otto Preminger, Max Ophuls, and John Brahm(who directed episodes of The Twilight Zone among other TV series in the1950s-1960s). The book includes movie stills and a filmography.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –258–

PN1995 2009-017764 978-0-8166-4292-2FFiillmm nnaattiioonn;; HHoollllyywwoooodd llooookkss aatt UU..SS.. hhiissttoorryy;; rreevv.. eedd..Burgoyne, Robert.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 235 p. $22.50 (pa)Contemporary American cinema is playing the leading role in rewritingthe historical narratives that define the American nation, according toBurgoyne (film studies, U. of St. Andrews, UK). In doing so, he argues,American cinema is seeking a message that will validate the increasinglyhybrid and polycultural reality of American life, although at the sametime it reflects the construction of “identity from across,” in whichidentity is formed in antagonism towards the other, hence threateningthe project of polycultural nationalism. He advances this argumentthrough readings of the films Glory, Thunderheart, Born on the Fourth ofJuly, JFK, and Forrest Gump.

PN1995 2010-001355 978-1-60497-683-0FFrreenncchh wwaarr ffiillmmss aanndd nnaattiioonnaall iiddeennttiittyy..McLaughlin, Noah.Cambria Press, ©2010 289 p. $114.99McLaughlin (French, Kennesaw State U.) charts new territory in the rela-tionship of French national identity to its cinema by exploring the rela-tionship between the form of a film and its historical and socialreflections, whether overt or covert. As a case study, he formally analyzes10 French war films from across the 20th century, some dealing withconflicts long over and others gaping into unclosed wounds. After anintroductory section, he covers literary appropriation, allegory, myth,artificial myth, experiments in history, and Hiroshima’s atomic sil-houette. Among specific topics are adapting the past for the present withUne affaire de femmes, chimeras of equality in La Grance Illusion, TheBattle of Algiers and history as camouflage, Melvillian resistancialism inL’Armée des ombres, Un long dimanche de fiaçailles and the poet’s pointof view, and Hiroshima and Nevers.

PN1995 2009-051321 978-0-7864-4787-9FFuunnddaammeennttaallss ooff ffiillmm ddiirreeccttiinngg..Irving, David K.McFarland & Co., ©2010 185 p. $35.00 (pa)Irving (the chair of the graduate film program at New York U.’s TischSchool of the Arts Asia Campus) gives advice to aspiring film directorson what he sees as the ten key necessities for successful directing,devoting a chapter to each. The first five are practical in nature. They area screenplay, a cast, a crew, a budget, and good health. The others aremore ineffable and psychological and are craft, command, pace, luck,and chutzpah (i.e., “boldness coupled with extreme self-confidence.”)

PN1995 2009-010828 978-1-932907-64-3GGeettttiinngg tthhee mmoonneeyy:: aa sstteepp--bbyy--sstteepp gguuiiddee ffoorr wwrriittiinnggbbuussiinneessss ppllaannss ffoorr ffiillmm..Juuso, Jeremy.Michael Wiese Productions, ©2009 221 p. $26.95 (pa)A consultant specializing in this very matter, Juuso walks readersthrough the process of creating a business plan that will convinceinvestors to pay for a film that has not yet been made. As important asgetting the money, he says, is keeping control of the production and dis-tribution of the film. He covers financial projections, market analysis andstrategy, motion picture distribution, company description, productdescription, financing, industry overview, executive summary, infor-mation and risk statement, and the completed plan.

PN1995 2009-037329 978-1-84788-485-5HHoollllyywwoooodd bblloocckkbbuusstteerrss;; tthhee aanntthhrrooppoollooggyy ooff ppooppuullaarrmmoovviieess..Sutton, David and Peter Wogan.Berg Publishers, ©2009 178 p. $29.95 (pa)For students and scholars of film, media, anthropology, sociology, andcultural studies, Sutton (anthropology, Southern Illinois U.) and Wogan(anthropology, Willamette U.) examine the popularity of the films Jaws,Field of Dreams, The Big Lebowski, and The Godfather, as well as the lesspopular film The Village, showing that they engage audiences because theplay upon underlying tensions and problems in American culture. Theyapply anthropological theories about ritual, kinship, social regulation,masculinity, temporality, power, egalitarianism, the Other, and other con-cepts to provide new ideas about these movies, American society, and cul-tural processes. Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.

PN1995 978-1-4426-1017-0HHooookkeedd;; ddrruugg wwaarr ffiillmmss iinn BBrriittaaiinn,, CCaannaaddaa,, aanndd tthheeUUnniitteedd SSttaatteess..Boyd, Susan C.U. of Toronto Press, ©2008 250 p. $27.95 (pa)The same years that saw the emergence of film as a mass medium alsosaw the rise of drug prohibition laws in the U.S., Canada, and Britain.Looking at over a century’s worth of films depicting drug use and thedrug trade (including Reefer Madness, The Trip, Superfly, andTrainspotting, Boyd (Studies in Policy and Practice, University of Victoria)examines the ways in which these depictions reflect changing attitudestoward illegal drugs. The author looks at the depiction of illegal drugs interms of issues such as race, class, and gender.

PN1995 978-1-84619-157-2MMeeddiicciinneemmaa——ddooccttoorrss iinn ffiillmmss..Glasser, Brian.Radcliffe Publishing, ©2010 148 p. $38.00 (pa)For students of medical or film history, researchers in the medicalhumanities, and medical practitioners interested in the portrayal and cul-tural representation of their profession, Glasser (medical humanities, U.College London Medical School, UK) examines representations of med-icine in film, from early cinema to the 2000s, especially what films sayabout doctors and doctoring. He considers a variety of themes andselected movies, such as medicine in horror films, travelers and doctorsin strange lands, films about war, and those with hospital settings, withdiscussion of Crisis, The Last King of Scotland, Dive Bomber, MASH, DirtyPretty Things, Le Corbeau, Wild Strawberries, and others, as well as filmsbased on real lives, such as Kinsey. He also discusses films made bydirectors John Ford and Akira Kurosawa. Published by RadcliffePublishing, UK, and distributed in the US by BookMasters.

PN1995 2009-048543 978-0-313-37922-2SSaaccrreedd pprrooffaanniittyy;; ssppiirriittuuaalliittyy aatt tthhee mmoovviieess..Malone, Aubrey.Praeger, ©2010 342 p. $54.95A Dublin-based writer on popular culture, Malone surveys a number ofintersections between religion and cinema. Arranging his discussion bytheme rather than film or period, he considers quoting scripture forone’s purpose, the changing face of Jesus, members of the cloth, reelspirits, real spirits, the symbolic mode, and Hell can wait. The filmsrange from Griffith’s 1915 Birth of a Nation and DeMille’s 1923 The TenCommandments to Ron Howard’s 2006 The Da Vinci Code and 2009 Angelsand Demons.

PN1995 2009-052751 978-0-7864-4380-2SSooccrraatteess aanndd ssuubbttiittlleess;; aa pphhiilloossoopphheerr’’ss gguuiiddee ttoo 9955tthhoouugghhtt--pprroovvookkiinngg mmoovviieess ffrroomm aarroouunndd tthhee wwoorrlldd..Smith, William G.McFarland & Co., ©2010 238 p. $35.00 (pa)Smith (philosophy, Millersville U.) presents the sequel to his earlier Platoand Popcorn: A Philosopher’s Guide to 75 Though-Provoking Movies that isfar more internationally oriented than its predecessor. He discusses 95movies from around the world, including examples Europe, LatinAmerica, Africa, the Middle East, East Asia, India, and North America.For each, he explores philosophical questions for students to considerduring and after watching the movie in question. Where the earliervolume was organized by philosophical topic, this volume is organizedby geography.

PN1996 2009-009397 978-1-932907-63-6TThhee HHoollllyywwoooodd ssttaannddaarrdd;; tthhee ccoommpplleettee aanndd aauutthhoorriittaattiivveegguuiiddee ttoo ssccrriipptt ffoorrmmaatt aanndd ssttyyllee,, 22dd eedd..Riley, Christopher.Michael Wiese Productions, ©2009 197 p. $24.95 (pa)Riley (professional screenwriter and screenwriting trainer) offers asecond edition of his guide to professional script formats that are theHollywood standard. He explains what to avoid, single-camera and multi-camera film formats, shot headings, direction, dialogue, transitions,punctuation, special pages, script typing software, proofreading, and theevolution of the script from first draft to production draft.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–259–

PN1996 2009-029892 978-1-932907-70-4TTaallkk tthhee ttaallkk;; aa ddiiaalloogguuee wwoorrkksshhoopp ffoorr ssccrriippttwwrriitteerrss..Penniston, Penny.Michael Wiese Productions, ©2009 242 p. $24.95 (pa)Chicago area playwright and screenwriter Penniston presents 20beginner, intermediate, and advanced exercises to tone a scriptwriter’sdeftness with the most important and most difficult aspect of the craft.The readers she has in mind are mainly university-level students and pre-professionals, but also perhaps some professionals who want to sharpentheir dialogue skills; she does not name anyone in particular. Within sec-tions on how people talk, how people talk to each other, and dialoguewith direction, the exercises address such matters as imitating a voice,creating an original voice, give and take, dialogue on shifting sands,friends and foes, populating the scene, from line to line, maneuveringthrough the scene, and scene to script. There is no index.

PN1997 2009-022009 978-0-295-98943-3IInnggmmaarr BBeerrggmmaann’’ss TThhee SSiilleennccee;; ppiiccttuurreess iinn tthhee ttyyppeewwrriitteerr,,wwrriittiinnggss oonn tthhee ssccrreeeenn..Koskinen, Maaret. (Nordic film classics)U. of Washington Press, ©2010 208 p. $24.95 (pa)Koskinen (cinema studies, U. of Stockholm) analyzes in detail Swedishdirector’s 1963 film, integrating his own written comments and descrip-tions, accounts by others, the screenplay and other documents, and thefilm itself in progress and in finished form. Among other aspects, sheconsiders the art of reinventing authorship, nudity and power relationsbetween director and actress, from word to sound, senses and synes-thetics of the published screenplay, paintings and tableaux vivants, andthe eroticism of vision in mirrors and doorways.

PN1997 2009-043667 978-0-8108-7296-7PPeeddaaggooggyy ooff aaddaappttaattiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis A. Cutchins et al.Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 183 p. $40.00 (pa)Thirteen academics from the U.S., Canada, and Turkey from a variety offields—film, radio, theater, language studies—contribute 11 chaptersexamining the adaptation of novels into film. The collection supports theidea that “adaptation” is much more than simply the transfer of materialfrom one medium to another. It should be seen as a creative process thathas shaped and will continue to shape both literary and film theory.Adaptation as a separate discipline can be used to encourage reflectionon cultural, historical, and political differences. The chapters examinehow the processes of adaptation may vary across different contexts andin different disciplines. The text includes lesson plans and tips demon-strating how the teaching of literature and film can help develop stu-dents’ skills and their literacy.

PN1997 2009-043755 978-0-8108-7298-1RReeddeeffiinniinngg aaddaappttaattiioonn ssttuuddiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Dennis Cutchins et al.Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 182 p. $40.00 (pa)Cutchins (English, Brigham Young University) gathers academics intheater studies, media studies, and English to demonstrate benefits andnew approaches to teaching literature adaptation, in this resource forteachers of high school and university courses. The essays focus on whatthe idea of adaptation means in different sociopolitical contexts. Ofspecial interest is a chapter on a group writing project adaptingBrokeback Mountain using e-mail and mobile phone text messageexchanges between the characters, contributed anonymously by studentsin the class. Some other ideas explored include teaching English texts tostudents from another culture, teaching radio drama adaptations, stage-to film adaptation, adapting Wilde for the performance classroom, e-adapting Blake in the classroom.

PN1997 2009-010980 978-0-06-176123-2SSoommee lliikkee iitt hhoott;; tthhee ooffffiicciiaall 5500tthh aannnniivveerrssaarryy ccoommppaanniioonn..Maslon, Laurence.Collins Design, ©2009 191 p. $35.00The American Film Institute selected Billy Wilder’s Some Like It Hot asAmerica’s Funniest Movie. Maslon (New York U. Tisch School of the Arts)relates the evolution of the 1960 comedy starring Marilyn Monroe, JackLemmon, and Tony Curtis, from its roots in an obscure 1951 Germanfilm to its setting in Prohibition- era Chicago. The oversize volumeincludes previously unpublished images, production anecdotes, scriptexcerpts, further reading, and notes on its casting, a previously undis-covered TV show pilot based on the movie, and its legacy as a dragcomedy.

PN1998 2010-000615 978-0-8166-6592-1AAtt yyoouurr oowwnn rriisskk;; aa ssaaiinntt’’ss tteessttaammeenntt.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999933))Jarman, Derek.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 151 p. $18.95 (pa)British filmmaker and author Jarman’s (1942-94) memoir was first pub-lished in 1993 by Overlook Press, Woodstock, New York. Arranged bydecade from the 1940s to the 1990s, it recounts not only his artisticcareer, but his life and relationships as a queer and HIV activist inBritain and the US. There is no index.

PN1998 2009-042445 978-0-7867-2099-6AA hhuunnddrreedd oorr mmoorree hhiiddddeenn tthhiinnggss;; tthhee lliiffee aanndd ffiillmmss ooffVViinncceennttee MMiinnnneellllii..Griffin, Mark.Da Capo Press, ©2010 346 p. $15.95 (pa)In this biography, Griffin, a writer and reviewer, traces the life and filmsof filmmaker Vincente Minelli (1903-1986), director of Meet Me in St.Louis, An American in Paris, and Gigi. Drawing from interviews withactors, colleagues, and friends (but neither of his daughters), Griffinrecounts his childhood, unconventional upbringing, ambiguous sexuality,the autobiographical nature of his work, his work with famous actors,his many films, his family secrets, his marriages, including to JudyGarland, and his relationship with daughter Liza Minelli.

PN1998 2009-047791 978-1-84545-677-1JJeerrzzyy SSkkoolliimmoowwsskkii;; tthhee cciinneemmaa ooff aa nnoonnccoonnffoorrmmiisstt..Mazierska, Ewa.Berghahn Books, ©2010 212 p. $90.00One of the few Polish directors who has gained international recognition,Jerzy Skolimowski is known for films that refuse to be pigeonholed intogenres. In this book, Mazierska (Contemporary Cinema, University ofCentral Lancashire) looks at the director’s career from his early successesin Poland (Identification Marks: None, Barrier, through his emigré films(Deep End, Moonlighting, The Lightship, to his return to Poland where hemade the internationally acclaimed Four Nights with Anna. Drawing ona range of cinematic and literary texts, the author addresses the mainfeatures of Skolimowski’s films and situates his work within the contextof Polish and world cinema.

PN1998 2009-030637 978-0-7864-3610-1MMaacckk SSeennnneetttt’’ss ffuunn ffaaccttoorryy;; aa hhiissttoorryy aanndd ffiillmmooggrraapphhyy ooffhhiiss ssttuuddiioo aanndd hhiiss KKeeyyssttoonnee aanndd MMaacckk SSeennnneetttt ccoommeeddiieess,,wwiitthh bbiiooggrraapphhiieess ooff ppllaayyeerrss aanndd ppeerrssoonnnneell..Walker, Brent E.McFarland & Co., ©2010 663 p. $125.00Between 1912 and 1933, Max Sennett was one of the most importantfigures in cinema, producing over 1000 films. These films (such as thewell-known “Keystone Kops” comedies) helped to create a visual languagefor humor that is still used in today’s film comedies. Film historianWalker has written the definitive volume on Sennett and his work, clearlyshowing the producer’s central role in the early U.S. film industry. Thebook’s first part is a comprehensive account of Sennett’s years in film;the second part contains a detailed description of each film that Sennettwas involved with; and the last part contains short biographies of per-formers in Sennett’s films, as well as of creative and technical personnel.Comprehensive, engagingly written, and generously illustrated, thisvolume belongs in any serious collection of books on cinema.

PN1998 2009-015582 978-0-8108-6951-6TThhee RRiiddlleeyy SSccootttt eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa..Raw, Laurence.Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 337 p. $85.00Raw (Baskent U., Turkey) provides an encyclopedia of all aspects of thework of filmmaker Ridley Scott, including his work as a designer, pro-ducer, film mogul, and advertising executive. Presented in alphabeticalorder, entries encompass four categories: his directing in film, TV, andcommercials, from The Duellists to Alien to Body of Lies; actors, writers,and others involved in his projects; topics such as gender construction,political issues, and geographical locations; and influential films by otherdirectors. Entries include information on the genesis of productions, aselection of reviews, and brief critical analysis.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –260–

PN2051 2009-464436 978-0-230-22115-4GGeett rreeaall;; ddooccuummeennttaarryy tthheeaattrree ppaasstt aanndd pprreesseenntt..Title main entry. Ed. by Alison Forsyth and Chris Megson.(Performance interventions)Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 256 p. $90.00The past twenty years have seen a proliferation of documentary forms(both fact-based and verbatim) in Western theater. Editors Forsyth(Theatre Studies, Aberystwyth University) and Megson (Drama andTheater, University of London) have assembled a roster of contributors toexamine the various ways in which documentary theater confronts con-temporary social and political realities. Using a variety of critical per-spectives, their essays look into the relationship of documentary theaterto new technology and media, and to the archive, memory, autobiog-raphy, and national identity.

PN2071 2009-033491 978-1-59874-476-7PPllaayybbuuiillddiinngg aass qquuaalliittaattiivvee rreesseeaarrcchh;; aa ppaarrttiicciippaattoorryy aarrttss--bbaasseedd aapppprrooaacchh..Norris, Joe. (Developing qualitative inquiry)Left Coast Press, ©2009 271 p. $89.00Norris (drama in education and applied theatre, Brock U., Canada)merges the research and drama fields to illustrate the genre of arts-basedqualitative research. Drawing from his experiences as director of MirrorTheatre, a theatre-in-education troupe in Canada, he details a play-building process that can be used by researchers and artists, methodsused to generate data and the theatrical approaches used to disseminateresearch, working with the audience, and scenes by actors, researchers,and teachers from Mirror Theatre’s programs and workshops whocreated and compiled voice collages, puppetry, narrated-mime, song, andother theatrical devices, with information on the history of each scene,its dissemination style, and its themes, such as sexuality, gender, sub-stance abuse, and prejudice. In doing so, he questions the definition ofknowledge and the concepts of analysis and data interpretation, con-siders the participatory aspects of research, and acknowledges thatresearch is a constructed narrative.

PN2277 2009-045720 978-0-313-34264-6BBrrooaaddwwaayy;; aann eennccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff tthheeaatteerr aanndd AAmmeerriiccaannccuullttuurree;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas A. Greenfield.Greenwood Press, ©2010 779 p. $180.00Editor Greenfield (English and American studies, State U. of New York)and 77 contributors offer an extensive encyclopedic treatment ofBroadway, that midtown Manhattan section of only a few city blocks thathas so significantly influenced and affected American culture. The two-volume covers the Great White Way from the mid-19th century and intothe present with more than 30 essays on how much the theater has hadon American life, with topics including film, media, race relations,women in society, tourism, technology, sexuality, and off-Broadway. Italso includes 110 profiles of major players and institutions and, ofcourse, profiles of 30 of the most notable productions such as Death of aSalesman and Rent.

PN2287 2008-046586 978-1-58985-118-4JJaacckk aanndd WWaalltteerr;; tthhee ffiillmmss ooff LLeemmmmoonn aanndd MMaatttthhaauu..Costello, Ben.Five Star Publications, Inc, ©2009 165 p. $45.00Costello, a writer, director, actor, and film and TV buff, describes the 11films that featured the pairing of Jack Lemmon and Walter Matthau,from The Fortune Cookie to The Odd Couple II. He includes biographies ofboth actors, memories from co-workers and co-stars, many b&w photos,and describes films such as Grumpy Old Men, Out to Sea, Kotch, The FrontPage, Buddy Buddy, JFK, and The Grass Harp, with a list of cast and crew,synopsis, backstory, and excerpts from critics for each. There is no index.

PN2658 2009-050903 978-1-4128-1347-1FFrroomm tthhee sshhtteettll ttoo tthhee ssttaaggee;; tthhee ooddyysssseeyy ooff aa wwaannddeerriinnggaaccttoorr.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11994455))Granach, Alexander.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 279 p. $29.95 (pa)Granach (1893-1945) presented one of the fullest and most vivid examplesof the well-known literary genre in which a boy from a poor orthodoxJewish in Eastern Europe struggles to break into the modern world cul-turally, intellectually, and perhaps politically. His is autobiography,though the genre also accepts novels. His journey to Broadway passedthrough such territory as How I came into this world on a rainy night,Mama dreams, The village spits us out, Everyone fights with theweapons he has, It is good to have a big brother when you are far fromhome, First steps in Berlin, Almost a stranger in my native land, Roadsalways lead somewhere, Life comes to meet you halfway, A man is nota tree, and Shylock. The 1945 edition was published by Doubleday, Doranin New York as There Goes an Actor.

PN2784 2009-023629 978-0-8387-5751-2PPaaiinnttiinngg oonn ssttaaggee;; vviissuuaall aarrtt iinn ttwweennttiieetthh--cceennttuurryy SSppaanniisshhtthheeaatteerr..Drumm, Elizabeth Anne.Bucknell University Pr., ©2010 198 p. $50.00Drumm (Spanish and humanities, Reed College, Oregon) describes howsome Spanish dramatists, typically themselves painters as well, use avariety of techniques, to stage a painting or series of paintings, therebystaging the central tension between visual images and language that isinherent in all theater and predominant in 20th-century plastic art. Hertopics include ekphrasis in Valle-Inclán’s Comedias bárbaras; the stageenframed in Rafael Alberti’s Noche de guerra en el Museo del Prado; thepainting absent from Buero Vallego’s Las Meninas; Goya’s monstrousimagination in Vallejo’s Sueño de la razón; Guernica on stage by Arrabal,López Mozo, and Torres Monreal; and painting, performance, and the-atricality in Paloma Pedrero’s El color de agosto. Distributed in the US byAssociated University Presses.

PN2874 2009-029003 978-90-04-17744-4MMaaooiisstt mmooddeell tthheeaattrree;; tthhee sseemmiioottiiccss ooff ggeennddeerr aannddsseexxuuaalliittyy iinn tthhee CChhiinneessee CCuullttuurraall RReevvoolluuttiioonn ((11996666--11997766))..Roberts, Rosemary A. (Women and gender in China studies; v.2)BRILL, ©2010 285 p. $132.00The yangbanxi or “model works,” explains Roberts (Chinese, U. ofQueensland, Australia) in her introduction, “were a small group ofvisually exciting, artistically innovative and ideologically extrememodernized Beijing operas, ballets and symphonies, that dominatedmainland Chinese public culture in the radical Maoist years of theCultural Revolution (1966-1976)” and “were uniquely representative of thedominant cultural discourse of their time.” She conducts a semioticanalysis of the construction of gender identity in nine of the yangbanxi.She compares the representation of male and female heroic charactersthrough various theatrical systems including role assignment, use ofprops, linguistic and para-linguistic systems, plot development, and vocalstyle; explores the way that costumes gendered and sexualized charactersin ways that are not generally recognized; discusses the issues of genderdifference/androgyny and gender hierarchy/equality raised by the modelheroines of the yangbanxi; assesses the extent to which changes weremade to the conventions of ballet in the model ballets in order topromote gender-egalitarianism and to avoid the expression of eroticism;and considers “evidence of the feminisation, emasculation and queeringof the counter-revolution” in the presentation of the villains of theyangbanxi.

PN3324 978-1-56478-562-6AAiiddaann HHiiggggiinnss;; tthhee ffrraaggiilliittyy ooff ffoorrmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Neil Murphy.Dalkey Archive Press, ©2010 358 p. $29.95 (pa)This collection of essays is as unique as its subject, Irish writer AidanHiggins. Some articles are by fellow authors, John Banville, Annie Proulxand Martin Kluger, for example. Others are written by literary critics andscholars, although the authors should not be excluded from that classi-fication, either. Many of them are long time friends of Higgins. Murphy(literature, NTU, Singapore) is among the many who are enthralled byHiggin’s stories and novels. However, all the articles agree that Higginsis still largely unknown. Several look at the way the themes of identityand self-discovery reappear, along with variations of earlier charactersthroughout his work, even in his internal autobiographies. Three of theessays are reprints, including an early one by Higgins himself. This dis-cussion on Higgins is refreshingly free of literary cant, making it a grandintroduction to those eager to discover this intriguing contemporaryauthor. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–261–

All books cited here are new, and all are in print and available. We prepare entries from bound books only, never galleys.

PN3377 2009-052946 978-0-7864-4797-8TThhee bbuussiinneessss ooff sscciieennccee ffiiccttiioonn;; ttwwoo iinnssiiddeerrss ddiissccuusssswwrriittiinngg aanndd ppuubblliisshhiinngg..Resnick, Mike and Barry N. Malzberg.McFarland & Co., ©2010 269 p. $35.00 (pa)This collection of Dialogue columns published in the SFWA Bulletin, theofficial publication of the Science Fiction Writers of America, offers a ten-year perspective on the field from two prolific and respected sciencefiction writers and magazine editors. Their ongoing dialogue explorestraditional areas such as the marketplace, anthologies, and awards, aswell as new issues such as print-on-demand, e-publishing, piracy, and theGoogle settlement. Other topics are works for hire, collaborations, foreignsales, and agents. Resnick and Malzberg are both award-winning sciencefiction authors.

PN3377 2009-025725 978-1-4022-2661-8WWrriittiinngg ggrreeaatt bbooookkss ffoorr yyoouunngg aadduullttss..Brooks, Regina.Sourcebooks, Inc., ©2009 191 p. $14.99 (pa)Brooks, a literary agent, provides advice to those writing young adultfiction, and how to avoid the challenges and pitfalls of writing for thataudience. She discusses how to engage readers, find story ideas, createcharacters, understand and build plot, create settings and timelines,experiment with points of view, write dialogue, find a theme, getfeedback, and find an agent. There is no bibliography.

PN3435 978-90-420-2806-7FFeeaarr iittsseellff;; rreeaassoonniinngg tthhee uunnrreeaassoonnaabbllee..Title main entry. Ed. by Stephen Hessel and Michèle Huppert. (At theinterface/probing the boundries; v.61)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 175 p. $53.00 (pa)Following his now cliché of “...the only thing we have to fear is fearitself,” President Franklin D. Roosevelt defined fear as “nameless, unrea-soning unjustified terror which paralyzes needed efforts to convertretreat into advance.” Hessel (Spanish graduate instructor, U. at Buffalo)and Huppert (behavioral studies, Monash U., Australia) introduce tenOxford conference-based papers. Multidisciplinary contributors examinefacets of fear in studies of literature (e.g., Don Quixote’s Spanish Baroqueera link between horror and laughter); feminized fear (e.g., in the filmPan’s Labyrinth, Edgar Allan Poe’s dopplegänger narrative Ligeia); horrorfilms (including Corpse Bride, 2005, and the Ringu film adaptation ofJapanese Koji Suzuki’s fantasy novels); and politics and power (as in fun-damentalism and terrorism).

PN3435 2009-046456 978-1-59158-703-3FFeelllloowwsshhiipp iinn aa rriinngg;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorr sscciieennccee ffiiccttiioonn aannddffaannttaassyy bbooookk ggrroouuppss..Hollands, Neil.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 300 p. $40.00 (pa)Hollands (librarian, Williamsburg Regional Library) offers an enter-taining and useful guide to successfully running a book club devoted toscience fiction and fantasy, two rapidly growing genres. The bookincludes discussion questions for 50 titles from light, escapist works toheavier, more complex works. It also offers book lists for 40 differentscience fiction and fantasy themes, 100 additional recommended books,a chronology of science fiction and fantasy history, a glossary of dis-cussion terms, a bibliography of both print and Web sources, andinstructions on how to start a book group. Libraries Unlimited is animprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

PN3441 2009-027093 978-0-8018-9463-3PPoossssiibbllee wwoorrllddss ooff ffiiccttiioonn aanndd hhiissttoorryy;; tthhee ppoossttmmooddeerrnnssttaaggee..Dolezel, Lubomir.Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 171 p. $60.00The theory that history is nothing more or less than literature is not ashomogeneous as the postmodern establishment has made it out to be,argues Dolezel (emeritus comparative literature, U. of Toronto). He con-tributes to the postmodern debate on metahistory, and to the emerginghistory of postmodernism, which he notes may be dead, or dying, or stilldominating the literary and cultural scene. He covers the postmodernchallenge, representations of the past and possible worlds, postmodernhistorical worlds with Simon Schama as a case study, postmodern his-torical fiction, and counterfactual narratives of the past.

PN3448 2009-011304 978-0-7546-6848-0DDeetteeccttiivvee ffiiccttiioonn iinn aa ppoossttccoolloonniiaall aanndd ttrraannssnnaattiioonnaallwwoorrlldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Nels Pearson and Marc Singer.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 214 p. $99.95For this study of postcolonial and transnational detective fiction, Pearon(English, Fairfield University) and Singer (English, HowardUniversity)have selected essays that deal with the disjointed nature of theborders where cultures and sense of identity collide. Some of the authorsdiscussed are well known to English speakers, like Walter Mosley andPaco Ignacio Taibo. Others, such as Patrick Chamoiseau, have yet to bediscovered by the general public. Several of the essays deal with societiesat war, either social struggles or civil disorder. The authors note that theform of the detective novel is a perfect starting point for an explorationof the discordances of the detective’s world. Of course, the writers them-selves might say that they write about conflict because it makes a goodstory.

PN3451 2009-044410 978-1-58765-535-7CCrriittiiccaall ssuurrvveeyy ooff lloonngg ffiiccttiioonn;; 1100vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Carl Rollyson.Salem Press, ©2010 5849 p. $995.00Covering 678 novelists, representing 60-plus countries and works fromthe 19th century to the 21st, this reference consists of ten volumes and,in addition, access to Salem Literature, which is Salem Press’s new liter-ature database; the purchase of one ink & paper set entitles the schoolor library to free online access (to that set) until the end of 2011.Arranged alphabetically, the author essays (generally about four to eightpages in length) include coverage of biography and achievements as wellas literary and contextual analysis of major works. Sixty-one thematicessays (up to 10,000 words) offer genre overviews and consider variousaspects of long fiction in history (origins and development of the novel),and in various regions of the world outside of North America and withinNorth America (by ethnicity). There are plentiful auxiliary resourcesincluding a time line, a glossary, a chronological list of authors, and aguide to online resources. Indexing is by geography, category, andsubject. This third revised edition has as its antecedents separate English-and foreign-language works published in 1983 and 1984, and combinedrevised editions in 1991 and 2000; all essays were evaluated for currencyand 130 were replaced or substantially revised while about 100 newentries were added.

PN3499 2009-041225 978-1-4128-1047-0BBaallzzaacc,, DDiicckkeennss,, DDoossttooeevvsskkyy;; mmaasstteerr bbuuiillddeerrss ooff tthhee ssppiirriitt..((rreepprriinntt,, 11993300))Zweig, Stefan.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 238 p. $34.95 (pa)Austrian novelist, playwright, journalist, and biographer Zweig (1881-1942) wrote separate essays about the three 19th-century novelists—respectively French, English, and Russian—over the course of ten years,but juxtaposed them to demonstrate how the writers represent varietiesof a single type. Each created his own sphere, he says: Balzac the worldof society; Dickens the world of the family; and Dostoeffsky the world ofOne and of the All. One of his hopes was that his accounts would inspirea German novelist to join them. There is no index. The 1930 edition waspublished by Viking Press, New York, as the first volume in the seriesMaster Builders of the Spirit.

PN4129 2009-043853 978-1-4129-7692-3TThhee cchhoorreeooggrraapphhyy ooff pprreesseennttiinngg;; tthhee sseevveenn eesssseennttiiaallaabbiilliittiieess ooff eeffffeeccttiivvee pprreesseenntteerrss..Zoller, Kendall and Claudette Landry.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 136 p. $31.95 (pa)Zoller, who provides professional learning seminars and speaks on facil-itation and presentation skills and leadership, and Landry, an ele-mentary school principal who gives professional and organizationaldevelopment workshops and presentations, outline seven attributes ofeffective presenters that can enhance the learning of participants. Theydetail the patterns of communication that effective presenters use,including verbal and nonverbal communication, and methods for estab-lishing credibility; building and sustaining rapport; reading the group;balancing task, process, and group development; listening to andacknowledging participants; responding appropriately; and recoveringwith grace. They do not discuss creating or preparing a presentation.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –262–

PN4142 2009-033614 978-1-60426-549-1TThhee ppoolliittiiccaall ssppeeeecchhwwrriitteerr’’ss ccoommppaanniioonn;; aa gguuiiddee ffoorrwwrriitteerrss aanndd ssppeeaakkeerrss..Lehrman, Robert.CQ Press, ©2010 362 p. $32.95 (pa)Written by Lehrman, who served as chief speechwriter to Vice PresidentAl Gore and the Democratic National Committee in the 2004 election, itis compared on the cover to Strunk and White’s The Elements of Style—except for the spoken word. Although a few brief sections do focus onthe art of speaking in front of an audience, this is mostly a guidebookfor speechwriters with vital tips on understanding the potential audience,the need for extensive research, and utilizing language that people willunderstand and remember. The need to personalize the style, through theuse of wit and anecdotes, is also strongly advised. Contains an appendixwith some examples of full-text speeches along with ratings on the wordcount, grade level, sentence length, and use of passive voice.

PN4192 2009-031065 978-1-4338-0730-5PPuubblliicc ssppeeaakkiinngg ffoorr ppssyycchhoollooggiissttss;; aa lliigghhtthheeaarrtteedd gguuiiddee ttoorreesseeaarrcchh pprreesseennttaattiioonnss,, jjoobb ttaallkkss,, aanndd ootthheerr ooppppoorrttuunniittiieessttoo eemmbbaarrrraassss yyoouurrsseellff..Feldman, David B. and Paul J. Silva.American Psychological Assn., ©2010 159 p. $29.95 (pa)This almost-pocket (5x8″) guide to public speaking for psychologists fea-tures plain language explanations with a sense of humor. Part I coversgeneral principles of public speaking, such as understanding theaudience, writing and delivering presentations, answering questions,managing anxiety, and handling unexpected problems. Part II givesadvice on specific presentations, such as research talks, poster presenta-tions, job talks, and presentations for lay audiences. The ‘Woeful Tales ofWoe’ interspersed throughout the book warns readers about real-life mis-takes the authors will never make again. The book includes a few b&willustrations. Feldman teaches in the Department of CounselingPsychology at Santa Clara University. Silva teaches in psychology at theUniversity of North Carolina-Greensboro.

PN4784 2010-003025 978-1-60426-480-7TThhee NNeeww YYoorrkk ttiimmeess rreeaaddeerr;; aarrttss && ccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Don McLeese and the writers of The New YorkTimes.CQ Press, ©2011 259 p. $24.95 (pa)Popular arts critic McLeese (journalism, U. of Iowa) compiles exemplaryreviews, critical essays, reportage, and profiles written by reporters andcritics—the boundary is recognized as thin— for The New York Times inrecent years. Topics include TV shows and video games as well astheater, art, films, books, and music. The anthology features a forewordby the Times’ arts and leisure editor, commentary on what makes forgood criticism, conversations with the writers, and critical thinkingquestions.

PN4784 2010-002819 978-1-60426-481-4TThhee NNeeww YYoorrkk TTiimmeess rreeaaddeerr;; sscciieennccee && tteecchhnnoollooggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by S. Holly Stocking and the writers of The NewYork Times.CQ Press, ©2011 258 p. $24.95 (pa)The science editor for The New York Times notes the diverse career pathsof science writers. Stocking (who taught science writing at Indiana U.)introduces science stories written by reporters for The New York Times inrecent years that exemplify good science writing. Topics include researchstudies, profiles of scientists at work, trends, and controversies. Theanthology also features conversations with the writers, commentary onwhy these pieces work, suggested activities, and resources.

PN4784 2010-000031 978-1-60426-482-1TThhee NNeeww YYoorrkk ttiimmeess rreeaaddeerr;; hheeaalltthh && mmeeddiicciinnee..Title main entry. Ed. by Tom Linden and the writers of the New YorkTimes.CQ Press, ©2011 292 p. $24.95 (pa)The medical editor of The New York Times says that health- related storiesare among the most difficult to write. Linden (MD, medical journalism,U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) introduces some 50 exemplary pieceswritten in recent years by Times reporters of medical news, features, andcommentary. Topics include trends, health care reform, drug recalls,medical pioneers, and the search for disease cures. The anthologyincludes comments on what makes these selections effective and criticalthinking questions.

PN4784 2009-045810 978-1-4331-0726-9PPeeaaccee jjoouurrnnaalliissmm,, wwaarr aanndd ccoonnfflliicctt rreessoolluuttiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Richard Lance Keeble et al.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 373 p. $35.95 (pa)This book is an engaging and up-to-the-moment look at the role of themedia in conflict resolution. Suggesting that mainstream media tend tofavor the interests of governments and their militaries in war coverage,twenty journalists and other experts examine the notion of “peace jour-nalism”—a journalism that gives a voice to all parties in a conflict in theinterest of finding solutions, rather than promoting war and violence.Looking at media ranging from mainstream newspapers to blogs andwebsites, sections focus in detail on theory, international practice, andcritiques of mainstream media performance from a peace perspective.Very accessibly written and engaging, this book will interest journalists,activists, and new consumers who are interested in knowing more abouthow the media covers conflict.

PN4784 2009-046845 978-1-4331-0895-2TTVV nneewwss aanncchhoorrss aanndd jjoouurrnnaalliissttiicc ttrraaddiittiioonn;; hhoowwjjoouurrnnaalliissttss aaddaapptt ttoo tteecchhnnoollooggyy..Meltzer, Kimberly.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 215 p. $32.95 (pa)The journalistic community often feels that TV news anchors underminejournalistic values. Meltzer (the Graduate Program in Communication,Culture and Technology, Georgetown University) explores the impact thattelevision has had on what is valued in journalism, how one becomes ajournalist, who is counted as a journalist, and who is believed as ajournalist. She focuses on three elements of the TV anchor’s job:appearance, personality, and emotion. Meltzer analyzes written materialfrom the popular and trade press, scholarly literature, memoirs, andnetwork archives, as well as broadcasts from the 1950s onward andpersonal interviews, to uncover the codes of behavior of the journalisticcommunity.

PN4784 2009-023701 978-1-84519-278-5WWeebb jjoouurrnnaalliissmm;; aa nneeww ffoorrmm ooff cciittiizzeennsshhiipp??..Title main entry. Ed. by Sean Tunney and Garrett Monaghan.Sussex Academic Press, ©2010 347 p. $74.95For undergraduate and graduate students, journalists, and others,Tunney (journalism and news media, Roehampton U., UK) andMonaghan (media studies, U. of Portsmouth, UK) assemble 21 chaptersthat explore how the internet has changed the news. A group of profes-sional journalists and academic theorists mostly from the UK and USconsider whether the rise of interactive forms of mainstream media,blogging, and citizen journalism provide citizens with new opportunitiesto dialogue with those who control the news and how the relationshipbetween traditional media and their audience has changed, as well as therole of the journalist. Focusing on the US and Britain, they examine howjournalism has changed its practices; the impact of these changes on themedia, truth, citizenship, and the world; the gatekeeping role of main-stream news organizations; the impact and role of blogging, includingthe roles of race and accountability; the participation of citizens in theBBC; and how journalism can facilitate new forms of citizenship inplaces like China, India, and Uganda, and among Palestinians andIsraelis. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

PN4833 2009-032745 978-1-60426-560-6JJoouurrnnaalliissmm nneexxtt;; aa pprraaccttiiccaall gguuiiddee ttoo ddiiggiittaall rreeppoorrttiinngg aannddppuubblliisshhiinngg..Briggs, Mark.CQ Press, ©2010 359 p. $21.95 (pa)This resource for students, professors, and professionals packs essentialinformation into a small (5x8″), reader-friendly package. Briggs, previ-ously a newspaper editor and now a technology consultant to publishers,provides a list of recommended blogs and web sites and suggests assign-ments like starting a Twitter account and reporting live from a newsevent using a cell phone. The section on basics provides an overview ofhow web servers and browsers work, and explains concepts of syndi-cated content, RSS feeds, blogging and microblogging, crowdsourcing,mobile journalism, and mobile publishing. The multimedia section givesinstructions on choosing and using equipment for digital photography,audio, video, and podcasting, and disseminating multimedia stories. Thesection on editing and decision making outlines concepts of data-drivenjournalism, building communities online, and social media tools as dis-tribution channels. Every chapter includes a profile of a journalist froma leading news organization. The book is illustrated with numerous b&wscreenshots, photos of devices, and examples of real news web sites.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–263–

PN4855 2010-001846 978-0-8204-8153-1NNeewwssppaappeerrss;; aa ccoommpplleettee gguuiiddee ttoo tthhee iinndduussttrryy..Farrell, Mike and Mary Carmen Cupito. (Media industries; v.6)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 229 p. $32.95 (pa)Farrell (journalism and telecommunications, U. of Kentucky) and Cupito(journalism, Northern Kentucky U.) offer a textbook for beginning jour-nalism students overviewing what was a generation ago the primarycontext for doing news. Among their perspectives are the history of news-papers, the roles of a free press, readership and ownership, ethics, thelaw, the newspaper meets the Internet, and the assured but obscuredfuture.

PN4888 2009-053927 978-1-4331-0685-9FFuunnddiinngg jjoouurrnnaalliissmm iinn tthhee ddiiggiittaall aaggee;; bbuussiinneessss mmooddeellss,,ssttrraatteeggiieess,, iissssuueess aanndd ttrreennddss..Kaye, Jeff and Stephen Quinn.Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 185 p. $32.95 (pa)People expect information on the Internet to be free and are increasinglyready to also play a role in creating it. Yet quality, unbiased journalismcosts money and continuing to fund it has become a central problemwithout a clear resolution. The global financial crisis that hit home in2008 only accelerated the process. After providing a brief history of thenews business and exploration of the current situation, Kaye (media con-sultant) and Quinn (journalism, Deakin U.) cover a range of possibilitiesfor continuing to secure advertising revenue and/or deliver new products.They give coverage to current innovative for-profit projects in the UnitedStates, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, South Korea and Singapore.They also cover other possibilities such as news organizations moving toa non-profit status, the implementation of trusts, and industry-universitypartnerships. Includes index, but no references.

PN4888 2009-043511 978-1-4331-0379-7TThhee mmeeddiiaa’’ss rroollee iinn ddeeffiinniinngg tthhee nnaattiioonn;; tthhee aaccttiivvee vvooiiccee..Copeland, David. (Mediating American history; v.5)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 326 p. $34.95 (pa)Copeland (communications, Elon U.) traces how the news media of dayhas shaped people’s identities and opinions throughout the history of theUS. This is not a comprehensive history, he says, but a selection of topicsto demonstrate the continuing influence of news. His arrangement ischronological, with chapters on such stages as colonial and revolutionaryAmerica, the antebellum era and Civil War, the muckrakers and press ofthe early 20th century, the World Wars and the Cold War, the journalismof change in th 1950s-70s, and media transformation in the 21st century.

PN5367 2009-044170 978-1-60497-660-1WWoommeenn jjoouurrnnaalliissttss aanndd ffeemmiinniissmm iinn CChhiinnaa,, 11889988--11993377..Ma, Yuxin.Cambria Press, ©2010 447 p. $129.95Ma (East Asian history, University of Louisville) looks at the writing offemale journalists in China from 1898 to 1937 through the periodicalsthat they edited and wrote themselves. Unlike Western feminists at thesame time, these women were facing a national revolution that was over-turning centuries of rigid social order. The concerns of many of thesewomen were both nationalistic and feminist. Many of them wantedpolitical change and were supported in this by male journalists. However,Ma points out that the male idea of women’s liberation did not alwaysconform to that of the women themselves. She stresses the politicaldiversity among the women: socialist, communist, nationalist, evenChristian. The many voices are a welcome change from histories thatassume a unified agenda. The changes in the tone of the writing overtime are a fascinating revelation, as the women become more objectivein their writing. The desire of many of the journalists to reach all Chinesewomen, rather than those of their own educated class, becomes evidentwith the increased use of colloquial dialects in place of archaic classicalChinese in their articles. While there were Western influences, Ma makesit clear that this was Chinese feminism, addressing issues that were par-ticular to their society. She should be thanked for bringing their uniquevoices to a wider audience.

PN6069 2009-529612 978-1-4438-0613-8NNeeww wwoommaann wwrriitteerrss,, aauutthhoorriittyy aanndd tthhee bbooddyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Melissa Purdue and Stacey Floyd.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 160 p. $54.00Purdue (English, Minnesota State University, Mankato) and Floyd(English, Cardinal Stritch University) present a collection of essays on theemerging voices of “New Women” writers in the closing years of the 19thcentury. These writers created a distinctive body of literature thatreflected their concerns about women’s limited role in society, and dealtwith themes such as marriage reform, social activism, sexual freedom,and greater career opportunities. Essays examine topics such as the NewWoman’s relationship with Darwinian theory, the use of suffering as atool of social protest in the writings of Mona Caird, the drive for equalityas shown by engagement with athletics and physical fitness, and theNew Woman’s navigation of urban life.

PN6147 978-90-420-2824-1HHyybbrriidd hhuummoouurr;; ccoommeeddyy iinn ttrraannssccuullttuurraall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Graeme Dunphy and Rainer Emig.(Internationale forschungen zur allgemeinen und vergleichenden liter-aturwissenschaft; v.130)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 192 p. $53.00 (pa)Dunphy (English, Regensburg U., Germany) and Emig (English literatureand culture, Liebniz U. Hanover, Germany) present six essays applyingthe postcolonial studies concept of hybridity to the study of humoramong cultural dissidents and migrant and ethnic minority communitiesin Europe in a variety of oral and written texts. Topics include hybridityand humor in modern Polish literature, Italian comic stereotypes inEnglish texts as viewed by Italian migrants, humor in Dutch migrantwriting, hybrid humor among the Beurs of France (second and third gen-eration descendants of North African migrants), domesticating anddemythologizing the exotic in the satirical writings of Turkish-Germanwriters, and hybrid humor in contemporary Asian-British comedy. Priceis converted from Euros.

PN6149 2009-047188 978-1-4128-1060-9SSaattiirree;; oorriiggiinnss aanndd pprriinncciipplleess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11996699))Hodgart, Matthew.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 255 p. $29.95 (pa)Hodgart (English, University of Sussex) looks at the various shapes thatsatire has taken over more than 2000 years. The author suggests thatsatire’s universality is demonstrated by the development of lampoon andtravesty in numerous cultures, and by the persistence of allegory, fable,aphorism, and other literary subgenres. A new introduction by BrianConnery places Hodgart’s analysis in its proper place in the developmentof twentieth-century criticism. (This reprint includes the illustrationsfrom the 1969 edition. Sadly, they are poorly reproduced.)

PN6210 2009-047191 978-0-89357-351-5PPoolliittiiccaall hhuummoorr uunnddeerr SSttaalliinn;; aann aanntthhoollooggyy ooff uunnooffffiicciiaalljjookkeess aanndd aanneeccddootteess..Title main entry. Ed. by David Brandenberger.Slavica Publishers, ©2009 158 p. $22.95 (pa)Brandenberger has reprinted and translated a selection of jokes from theanthology The Kremlin and the People compiled by Evgenii Andreevichand published in 1951 apparently by the anti-communist Munich weeklyGolos naroda. The arrangement is by such topic as the new economicpolicy, collectivization, everyday life, the great terror, the Great PatrioticWar, and the early postwar years. Russian and English are in parallelcolumns. The appendix presents some jokes told by former Soviet citizensbeing interviewed in 1950-51 by a Harvard University project assessingpublic support for the Stalinist regime.

PN6728 2009-517938 978-0-8264-2984-1LLooookkiinngg ffoorr CCaallvviinn aanndd HHoobbbbeess;; tthhee uunnccoonnvveennttiioonnaall ssttoorryyooff BBiillll WWaatttteerrssoonn aanndd hhiiss rreevvoolluuttiioonnaarryy ccoommiicc ssttrriipp..Martell, Nevin.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 247 p. $24.95Martell, an author, editor, and music journalist, traces the life and careerof Bill Watterson, creator of Calvin and Hobbes. Drawing from interviewswith artists and writers like Dave Barry, Harvey Pekar, Jonathan Lethem,and Brad Bird, as well as Watterson’s friends, colleagues, and mother, hedetails his childhood and family, early influences and education, earlycomics, the genesis of Calvin and Hobbes, its ten years in publication, hisbooks, his refusal to merchandise, why he ended the strip, and thesearch for an interview with the elusive and private Watterson.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –264–

RROOMMAANNCCEE LLIITTEERRAATTUURREESS

PQ149 2009-044583 978-1-4331-0803-7FFrraannccoopphhoonnee wwoommeenn;; bbeettwweeeenn vviissiibbiilliittyy aanndd iinnvviissiibbiilliittyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Cybelle H. McFadden and Sandrine F. Teixidor.(Francophone cultures and literatures; v.56)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 146 p. $66.95Scholars of French literature at US and Irish universities explore writingabout the female body by women across the French- speaking worldsince the beginning of the 20th century. The emphasis is on how theauthors portray tensions between visibility and invisibility, public andprivate, presence and absence, and excess and restraint. They discuss cor-poreal performance and visible gender position in Colette’s The Pure andthe Impure; after-images of Muslim women: vision, voice, and resistancein the work of Assia Djeber; the gaze beneath the veil: a portrait ofwomen in Algeria and Morocco; vision, voice, and the female body: NinaBouraoui’s sites/sights of resistance; the Métix body: double mirror; andthe body, sexuality, and the photo in L’Usage de la photo.

PQ283 2009-017772 978-0-7546-6643-1MMooddeellss ooff ccoollllaabboorraattiioonn iinn nniinneetteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy FFrreenncchhlliitteerraattuurree;; sseevveerraall aauutthhoorrss,, oonnee ppeenn..Title main entry. Ed. by Seth Whidden.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 187 p. $99.95Scholars of French literature in the US, Belgium, and Canada explore col-laboration in novels and other genre, and focus the collaborative textsthemselves rather than trying to plumb the depths of the authors’ minds.Their topics include the collective strategies of the Romantic cenacle,sharing one’s death in Le Tombeau de Théophile Gautier (1873), the MédenGroup and the campaign of naturalism, and La Revue Wagnérienne as acase of collective experiment in literary journalism. The main body isframed on the early side by essays on becoming an author in earlymodern France and conviviality and collaboration in the FrenchEnlightenment; and on the later side by one on a model for network col-laboration in Belgian, modernist, and avant-garde literary journals fromthe early 1920s.

PQ637 2009-023661 978-0-8047-6384-4IInnvveennttiinngg tthhee IIssrraaeelliittee;; JJeewwiisshh ffiiccttiioonn iinn nniinneetteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy FFrraannccee..Samuels, Maurice. (Stanford studies in Jewish history and culture)Stanford U. Press, ©2010 323 p. $60.00Jews of 19th century France are often portrayed as having contributedlittle to Jewish culture and having failed to respond to the antisemitismignited by the Dreyfus affair, despite being the first Jews afforded citi-zenship in Europe. To provide insights into how they perceived emanci-pation and assimilation, Samuels (French, Yale U.) examines theirliterature despite some historians’ claim that there was no Jewish fictionbefore Proust. Starting with the romantic works of Eugènie Foa (e.g., Lajuive: The Jewess), he reads works representing reformist (Ben-Lévi); con-servative (Ben Baruch); fundamentalist (Alexandre Weill); and ghettofiction (Daniel Stauben, David Schornstein) themes. The volume includesimages of authors and book illustrations.

PQ648 2009-020791 978-0-87413-074-4TThhee ffiiccttiioonn ooff eennlliigghhtteennmmeenntt;; wwoommeenn ooff rreeaassoonn iinn tthheeFFrreenncchh eeiigghhtteeeenntthh cceennttuurryy..Bostic, Heidi.Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2010 270 p. $59.50Women writers of the French 18th century claimed reason, argues Bostic(French, Baylor U.), and contributed to the Enlightenment. She focuses onworks of imaginative literature by three authors from the middle of thecentury to after the Revolution: Françoise de Graffigny, Marie JeanneRiccoboni, and Isabelle de Charriére. She shows how they express theirviews on reason and gender in creative works that provide a counter-weight to sweeping modern dismissals of Enlightenment thinkers.Indeed, she contends that by exposing and critiquing gender bias, theyembraced the egalitarian ethos of the Enlightenment more fully thantheir male contemporaries. Distributed in the US by Associated UniversityPresses.

PQ1905 2009-046589 978-0-8166-6084-1RRaacciinnee;; ffrroomm aanncciieenntt mmyytthh ttoo ttrraaggiicc mmooddeerrnniittyy..Greenberg, Mitchell.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 287 p. $25.00 (pa)Greenberg (Romance studies, Cornell U.) offers explanations for why thetragedies by French dramatist Jean Racine (1639-99) so affected theiroriginal audiences and continue to move audiences today, when thepassing of the classical world they lamented is no longer an open wound.He considers politics and monstrous origins in La Thèbaïde, myth andmelancholy in Andromaque, sacrifice and sovereignty in Iphigénie, andreligion and revolution in Racine’s heavenly city. Quotations are in Frenchwith English translation following.

PQ2605 2009-034850 978-0-8014-4805-8AAllbbeerrtt CCaammuuss,, eelleemmeennttss ooff aa lliiffee..Zaretsky, Robert.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 181 p. $24.95Zaretsky (French history, U. of Houston, Texas) aspires to neither a fullbiography of French Algerian writer and philosopher Camus (1913-60),nor a scholarly commentary on his work. Rather he traces some familiarideas about the man, pegging each to a specific event in his life. Theyare his 1939 visit to Kabylia to report on the conditions of local Berbertribes, signing a petition to commute the death sentence of collabora-tionist Robert Brasillach in 1945, his quarrel with his friend Jean-PaulSartre over the nature of communism, and his silence after 1956 aboutthe war of liberation in Algeria. Some unexpected figures turn up, amongthem Thucydides, Augustine, Montaigne, and Synge.

PQ2605 2009-291809 978-0-7206-1258-5MMyy ccoonntteemmppoorraarriieess.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11996677))Cocteau, Jean. Ed. by Margaret Crossland. (Peter Owen modern classics)Peter Owen, Ltd., ©2009 141 p. $22.95 (pa)A man of many talents, Jean Cocteau made friends in all of the fields inwhich he worked. To honor these friendships, Cocteau wrote portraits ofmany of people that he met—portraits that spoke almost as much aboutCocteau’s genius as they did about that of their subjects. Among the por-traits included in this volume are those of Charlie Chaplin, the EmpressEugénie, Collette, Pablo Picasso, and and Marcel Proust.

PQ3814 2009-040987 978-1-4331-0348-3FFrraannccooggrraapphhiieess;; iiddeennttiittéé eett aallttéérriittéé ddaannss lleess eessppaacceessffrraannccoopphhoonneess eeuurrooppééeennss;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..Conference on Francographies (2008: Edinburgh, Scotland) Ed. bySusan Bainbrigge et al. (Belgian francophone library; v.23)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 418 p. $93.95First presented at the March 2008 conference held at the U. of Edinburghin Scotland, the 23 papers and roundtable discussion included in thisproceedings concern the large, but neglected body of French-languagework produced outside of France. Belgium, Switzerland, Guinea-Bissau,and Algeria are some of the countries whose writers and publications arerepresented, with works ranging through the 19th and 20th centuries tothe present. Post-colonialism, feminism, and the writing of immigrantsare some of the themes. All of the essays, and the roundtable discussionon identity and alterity, are in French. Lacks an index.

PQ4153 2009-020255 978-0-7546-6557-1PPaassttoorraall ddrraammaa aanndd hheeaalliinngg iinn eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn IIttaallyy..Schneider, Federico.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 236 p. $99.95Schneider (Italian, University of Mary Washington) revisits the sixteenthcentury pastoral, through Guarini’s Pastor Fido and Tasso’s Aminta todemonstrate how this theatrical form, once thought frivolous, has as itsgoal a psychological approach to health. He notes how often medicalcures are suggested for lovesick or suicidal characters so that there is ahealing within the plays. But even more, Schneider feels that the authorsintended to arouse feeling of empathy in the audience, so that they feltpity and fear for the characters and relief when the situation wasresolved. In this way the pastorals were intended to be a remedy formelancholy. Moreover, in an age when religion was in turmoil, the pas-toral provided a comforting sense that there was still order in the world.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–265–

PQ4432 978-0-8020-9626-5DDaannttee’’ss jjoouurrnneeyy ttoo ppoollyypphhoonnyy..Ciabattoni; Francesco.U. of Toronto Press, ©2010 250 p. $55.00Ciabattoni (French, Dalhousie U.) examines the underlying musicalframework of Dante’s Commedia and how the presentation of sacredmusic unfolds along the way and creates a structural pillar for the nar-rative. He focuses on the manner and meaning of musical performancein Dante’s poem, discussing the meaning of the songs quoted and theirmodes of performance. He addresses the philosophical foundations ofmusic and the proliferation of polyphony in Tuscany during the thir-teenth century, how polyphony distinguishes the environment of Paradisofrom the monophonic Purgatorio, Dante’s treatment of music of thespheres, and how music becomes the medium through which beatitudeis delivered.

PQ6066 2009-022164 978-0-8047-6954-9TThhee tthheeaatteerr ooff ttrruutthh;; tthhee iiddeeoollooggyy ooff ((nneeoo))bbaarrooqquueeaaeesstthheettiiccss..Egginton, William.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 170 p. $55.00Egginton (German and Romance languages and literatures, JohnsHopkins U.) suggests that the recent period generally called postmoderncould as well be characterized as neobaroque, not because of cyclingfashions, but because the Baroque is the aesthetic counterpart to aproblem of thought that is coterminous with Western modernitystretching from the 16th century to the present. The problem is therelation of appearances to the world they ostensibly represent. His per-spectives are Baroque holes and Baroque folds, Cervantes as the masterarchitect on how to build a Baroque house, the theater of truth, theopacity of language and transparency of being in Góngora’s poetics, thecorporeal image and the New World Baroque, the dream life of Calderónand Borges, and the world well dressed in the later cinema of PedreAlmodóvar.

PQ6075 978-0-85668-863-8BBooookk ooff AAlleexxaannddeerr ((LLiibbrroo ddee AAlleexxaannddrree))..Title main entry. Ed. by Peter Such and Richard Rabone. (Aris &Phillips Hispanic Classics)Aris & Phillips, ©2009 733 p. $33.95 (pa)Such (Sherborne School) wrote his doctoral thesis at the University ofCambridge on the Libro de Alexandre, and teams up with Rabone (OxfordU.) to present a modern edition with facing English translation of theanonymous 13th-century Spanish verse account of Alexander the Great.It holds an important place in Spanish literature, they say, as the mostsubstantial and probably first work in the learned cuaderna vía verseform. It is also of interest to historians because its breadth of scholarshipreveals the contours of the intellectual milieu in which it was composed,and its portrayal of ancient virtues comprises a critique of the poet’s con-temporary society. The text is supported by 80 pages of introduction, and50 pages of endnotes. Distributed in North America by The David BrownBook Co.

PQ6144 2009-053887 978-1-55753-558-0HHiissttoorryy,, vviioolleennccee,, aanndd tthhee hhyyppeerrrreeaall;; rreepprreesseennttiinngg ccuullttuurreeiinn tthhee ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy SSppaanniisshh nnoovveell..Everly, Kathryn. (Purdue studies in Romance literatures)Purdue University Press, ©2010 214 p. $45.00 (pa)Everly (Spanish, Syracuse U.) samples some treatments of social con-sciousness and national identity in Spanish novels of the past 20 years,suggesting ways of looking at the genre rather than trying to fit it intoany particular set of features. The texts lead her to a structuralist theo-retical model, she says, but history and politics are never far. Indeed shefinds some works so specific to a time and place that they quicklybecome dated and outdated. Her topics include sacred violence in CarmeRiera’s Dins el darrer blau, the impossible invention of history and thehero in Javier Cerca’s Soldados de Salamina and La Velocidad de la luz,textual violence and the hyper-real in De todo lo visible y lo invisible byLucía Etxebarria, and intertextuality in José Ángel Mañas; Historias deKornen and La pella.

PQ6555 2009-01913 978-0-85668-893-5DDooññaa PPeerrffeeccttaa..Gladós, Benito Pérez.Aris & Phillips, ©2009 362 p. $34.00 (pa)Spanish writer Galdós (1843-1920) was a avid student of the novel as itappeared in French, English, and Russian during his early life, and madeconsiderable contribution to the development of the genre with 25 novelsof his own, beginning with Doña Perfecta (1876). In his introduction,Graham Whittaker (languages, Lees Brook Community Sports College)explains that though the novel was popular with general readers, it wasnot well received by critics and scholars because it dealt with the middleclass, which the educated elite had already written off as boring. Thisedition includes the Spanish and English translation on facing pages, andvoluminous end notes as well as the introduction. Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

PQ7081 2009-006557 978-0-8265-1677-0TThhee iinnvveerrtteedd ccoonnqquueesstt;; tthhee mmyytthh ooff mmooddeerrnniittyy aanndd tthheettrraannssaattllaannttiicc oonnsseett ooff mmooddeerrnniissmm..Mejías-López, Alejandro.Vanderbilt University Press, ©2009 248 p. $55.00A Hispanic literary movement that flourished across the four decadesstraddling the 19th and 20th centuries was the first to coin and theorizethe term modernism, explains Mejías-López (Spanish and Portuguese,Indiana U.), but perhaps more critically, it was the first time a post-colonial literature backwashed to deluge the former colonial power. Healso discusses how modernismo, though it radically changed the literatureof Spain and Europe as a whole, has been erased from literary andintellectual history since the 1970s by the dominance of the AngloEuropean triumphalist versions of modernism. He covers the myths ofEuropean modernity, the transatlantic field and the rise of modernismo,the conquest of the metropolitan literary field, and rewriting modernityand authoring Spain. Quotations are in Spanish followed by Englishtranslation.

PQ7082 2009-011145 978-0-8387-5736-9OOnn tthhee ddaarrkk ssiiddee ooff tthhee aarrcchhiivvee;; nnaattiioonn aanndd lliitteerraattuurree iinnSSppaanniisshh AAmmeerriiccaa aatt tthhee ttuurrnn ooff tthhee cceennttuurryy..González Espitia, Juan Carlos.Bucknell University Pr., ©2010 250 p. $58.50González Espitia (Spanish, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill)uses narratives outside the romantic and realist traditions to examine19th-century nation-building in the Spanish-speaking countries of LatinAmerica. The author focuses on the “non-canonical” novels that critiquetraditional ideals—including turn-of-the-century works by Jose MariaVargas Vila, Horacio Quiroga, Clemente Palma, and Jose Marti—and con-cludes with a study that compares the literary portrayal of doomed soci-eties in the nineteenth-century with the work of contemporary SpanishAmerican authors. Distributed by Associated University Presses.

PQ7361 2009-011592 978-0-8387-5729-1VVooiicceess oouutt ooff AAffrriiccaa iinn ttwweennttiieetthh--cceennttuurryy SSppaanniisshhCCaarriibbbbeeaann lliitteerraattuurree..Cuervo Hewitt, Julia. (The Bucknell studies in Latin American literatureand theory)Bucknell University Pr., ©2009 402 p. $80.00Hewitt (Spanish and Portuguese, Pennsylvania State U.) explores the rep-resentation of Africa and “Afro-Caribbean-ness” in Spanish Caribbean lit-erature of the 20th century. Her main argument “is that the literaryrepresentation of Africa and “Africanness,” meaning practices, beliefsystems, music, art, myths, popular knowledge, in Spanish-speakingCaribbean societies, constructs a self-referential discourse in which Africaand African “things” shift to a Caribbean landscape as the site of the(M)Other.” Or, in other words, these representations imaginatively rescueand simultaneously construct a “Caribbean cultural imaginary conceivedas the Other within that associates Africa with a cultural womb.” Amongthe texts she explores are Fernando Ortiz’s interpretations of the “BlackCarnival” in Cuba, the early Afro-Cuban poems of Alejo Carpentier, theAfro-Cuban stories of Lydia Cabrera, a number of literary representationsof the figure of the runaway slave, and two works by Puerto Rican nov-elist Edgardo Rodìguez Julía.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –266–

PQ8098 2009-010970 978-0-8387-5734-5CCiippaannggoo..Harris, Tomás. Trans. by Daniel Shapiro.Bucknell University Pr., ©2010 321 p. $44.50Chilean poet Harris (b. 1956) builds his long poem on the metaphor ofjourney, and specifically the voyage of Columbus and his belief that whatis now Hispaniola, in the Caribbean Sea, was the Cipango, or Japan, thathe was taking a short cut to. That mistake becomes the foundation for asustained comment on the oppressive colonialism of Latin America,down to the poet’s own experience of the US-sponsored dictatorship ofPinochet in Chile. He wrote the poem during the 1980s, and it was pub-lished in 1992. Poet and translator Shapiro presents an English versionfacing pages of the original Spanish, and explains allusions in end notes.

PQ9571 2009-034635 978-0-8130-3421-8BBrraazziill,, llyyrriicc,, aanndd tthhee AAmmeerriiccaass..Perrone, Charles A.U. Press of Florida, ©2010 250 p. $69.95Perrone (Portuguese and Luso-Brazilian literature and culture, U. ofFlorida) explores thematic aspects of Brazilian poetry of the late 1980sonwards, selecting the poets and poems to be studied in terms of their“articulating a bi- or multilateral disposition and/or manifesting hemi-spheric spirit.” Seven thematic chapter discuss transamerican poetics inthe age of globalization and their engagement with the geographical term“America,” plus its variants; Brazilian engagement with US-AmericanEnglish and poetry; the “America-scape” in Brazilian poetry involvingexpressive media other than literature, including comics, film, popularmusic, icons of tourism, and US-originated digital worlds; neo-epicalworks by Brazilians envisioning the Americas as a whole; Brazilian-Hispanic American relations in contemporary lyric and efforts to cul-tivate commonalities; the application of the modernist notion of poetryfor export and hemispheric ethics to popular music, particularly thehybrid phenomenon known as mangue beat; and concluding thoughts.

EENNGGLLIISSHH--LLAANNGGUUAAGGEE LLIITTEERRAATTUURREESS

PR21 2009-036664 978-1-4094-0039-4AA ggeenneeaallooggyy ooff ccyybboorrggootthhiicc;; aaeesstthheettiiccss aanndd eetthhiiccss iinn tthheeaaggee ooff ppoosstthhuummaanniissmm..Yi, Dongshin.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 164 p. $99.95Yi (English, Texas A&M University) takes an imaginary/imaginativeapproach to exploring the transformative power of the cyborg, examiningthe cyborg’s literary manifestations in novels (including Frankenstein,Dracula, and Arrowsmith, alongside philosophical and critical texts fromEdmund Burke, Immanuel Kant, John Stuart Mill, and William James.Arguing that humans imagine the cyborg in ways that are seriouslylimited by fear of the unknown and by current understandings of scienceand technology, Yi identifies in gothic literature a practice of the beau-tiful that extends the operation of sensibility.

PR113 978-90-420-2808-1‘‘BBeetthhiinnkkee tthhyy sseellffee’’ iinn eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn EEnnggllaanndd;; wwrriittiinnggwwoommeenn’’ss iiddeennttiittiieess..Tancke, Ulrike. (Costerus NS; v.180)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 266 p. $77.00 (pa)Recently a number of neglected works by female writers have been redis-covered and read from the perspective of the new feminism. Tanckeexplores writings by early Modern English women to find how theynegociated a sense of self within the structure of their time. The formsvary: advice books, diaries, poetry, plays and autobiographies. Whilewell-versed in contemporary theory, Tancke tries to see these women notas proto-feminists but as individuals in the process of defining them-selves through the religious and social beliefs shared by the men andwomen around them. She notes that the very act of writing is anannouncement of self. Each of the women studied creates her ownidentity differently in terms of others, both those who support her andthose who threaten her self worth. Importantly, they emerge as singularhuman beings, a part of the make up of the era in which they lived.

PR113 2009-020468 978-0-7546-6678-3MMeeddiiccaall aauutthhoorriittyy aanndd EEnngglliisshhwwoommeenn’’ss hheerrbbaall tteexxttss,, 11555500--11665500..Laroche, Rebecca. (Literary and scientific cultures of early modernity)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 196 p. $99.95The study of medical practice in the sixteenth century has usually beenthat of a slow triumph of science over superstition. This idea was pro-moted by the male writers of English herbals. They often contrasted theirsuperior knowledge with that of “old women” selling herbs in the street.Laroche (English, University of Colorado, Colorado Springs)ignores themale appropriation of medicine by investigating the women who readthese herbals. In the course of reading marginalia by women in theircopies of the herbals, she noted that they did not follow the recipes slav-ishly and, in many ways, these women had reappropriated the medicalknowledge that the authors had tried to keep from them. Laroche doesnot focus solely on gender. She also looks at social class as a factor in theacceptance of women practicing medicine and the danger, especiallyamong urban women, of being accused of witchcraft. The class dif-ference is evident in Laroche’s account of herbal remedies in autobio-graphical writings of women of the time. This study exemplifies theinformation that can be garnered from non-traditional and neglectedsources and encourages further similar research.

PR115 2009-034323 978-0-8262-1869-8GGiillbbeerrtt aanndd GGuubbaarr’’ss TThhee MMaaddwwoommaann iinn tthhee AAttttiicc aafftteerrtthhiirrttyy yyeeaarrss..Title main entry. Ed. by Annette R. Federico.U. of Missouri Press, ©2009 272 p. $42.50The 1979 book The Madwoman in the Attic by Sandra M. Gilbert andSusan Gubar created a furor well outside the field of Victorian women’sliterature. Their feminist re-examination of books such as Jane Eyre,Frankenstein and Wuthering Heights influenced a generation of women totake another look at the classics they had grown up with. But, as editorFederico (English, James Madison University) states it also made womenlook at their own lives in terms of a patriarchal society. This retrospectiveof thirty years of feminist and post-feminist criticism in the light ofMadwoman is partly an homage and partly a report on the state of thefield. All of the contributors have a personal comment on how the bookinfluenced them and even those who criticize certain points stillacknowledge the importance of the work. This collection is a fine com-panion to the still-important Madwoman in the Attic.

PR116 2009-030059 978-0-7546-6510-6DDrreessss ccuullttuurree iinn llaattee VViiccttoorriiaann wwoommeenn’’ss ffiiccttiioonn;; lliitteerraaccyy,,tteexxttiilleess,, aanndd aaccttiivviissmm..Kortsch, Christine Bayles.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 201 p. $99.95In this terrific study, Kortsch (English, Eastern U., St. Davids, Penn.) putsan entirely new spin on the rich field of Victorian women’s fiction bytreating the worlds of literature and of women’s dress culture as “dualliteracy”, developing the many stories and references to sewing andclothing to indicate their relation to the ferocious reactions to the changesin clothing styles that accompanied changes in women’s roles in society.Olive Schreiner’s From Man to Man and Woman and Labour, SarahGrand’s The Beth Book, Gertrude Dix’s The Image-Breakers, and MargaretOliphant’s Kirsteen are among the works discussed, placed within con-texts of societal upheaval, society’s perception of seamstresses, and, asalways in the Victorian era, threats to morality. The volume is illustratedwith b&w plates.

PR116 2009-030054 978-0-7546-6734-6FFoooodd aanndd ffeemmiinniinniittyy iinn ttwweennttiieetthh--cceennttuurryy BBrriittiisshh wwoommeenn’’ssffiiccttiioonn..Adolph, Andrea.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 183 p. $99.95Adolph (English, Kent State University-Stark Campus) uses the tropes offood consumption, preparation and serving to explore a unification ofmind and body in the fiction of British writers, Barbara Pym, AngelaCarter, Helen Dunmore, Helen Fielding and Rachel Cask. She has alsoconsulted manuals and guides for women on presenting themselves andtheir homes, which Adolph concludes were “auto-objectifying” for thewomen who followed them. In the first examples from novels, the use offood consumption as identifying types of women and emphasizing themind/body split is stressed while the attempts of female writers to createcharacters that integrate mind and body are examined in the finalchapters.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–267–

PR116 2009-674632 978-1-4438-1127-9NNaarrrraattiivvee,, ssoocciiaall mmyytthh aanndd rreeaalliittyy iinn ccoonntteemmppoorraarryySSccoottttiisshh aanndd IIrriisshh wwoommeenn’’ss wwrriittiinngg;; KKeennnneeddyy,, LLoocchhhheeaadd,,BBoouurrkkee,, NNii DDhhuuiibbhhnnee,, aanndd CCaarrrr..Balinisteanu, Tudor.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 320 p. $70.00Balinisteanu reinterprets the concept of myth in order to examine therelationship between narrative and social reality as represented in textsby contemporary Scottish and Irish women writers. The texts analyzed inthis book reconfigure naturalized stories that have become normativeand constraining in conveying identities and visions of legitimate socialorders. These writers, suggests the author, continue the revisionist workbegun by other women writers, and share a view of narratives as toolsfor continually negotiating our identities, social worlds, and socializationscenarios.

PR179 2009-027576 978-0-86698-412-6AAnngglloo--SSaaxxoonnss aanndd tthhee nnoorrtthh;; eessssaayyss rreefflleeccttiinngg tthhee tthheemmeeooff tthhee 1100tthh mmeeeettiinngg ooff tthhee IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall SSoocciieettyy ooff AAnngglloo--SSaaxxoonniissttss iinn HHeellssiinnkkii,, AAuugguusstt 22000011..Title main entry. Ed. by Matti Kilpiö et al. (Medieval and renaissancetexts and studies; v.364)ACMRS, ©2009 191 p. $44.00The articles presented here originated at a 2001 conference on Anglo-Saxon studies held in Helsinki. Kilpiö, of the University of Helsinki,selected papers that focus on the North. Each looks at the interpene-tration of cultures between Anglo-Saxon England and Scandinavia. Thefirst essays compare shared mythology and literary forms. They alsopoint out differences, particularly in the Norse Edda Anglo-Saxon epicpoetry. Brown’s paper on the sources and peregrinations of the St.Petersburg Bede manuscript leads to a shift in focus from literature toarchaeological evidence. The final articles are on Victorian representa-tions of Saxons and “Vikings”, a linguistic analysis of ship building termsand an investigation into a possible Scandinavian influence on Anglo-Saxon farming practices. Scholars will appreciate the erudition of thisvolume. Many of the essays shed new light on questions that have con-cerned specialists for many years.

PR428 2009-022163 978-0-8047-3856-9OOnn ddeemmaanndd;; wwrriittiinngg ffoorr tthhee mmaarrkkeett iinn eeaarrllyy--mmooddeerrnnEEnnggllaanndd..Baker, David J.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 199 p. $55.00Baker (English, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill) considers theother side of successful Early Modern writing. Talent was all very well,but business acumen and a sense of what the pubic wanted was whatsold books and filled theaters. Baker looks at works by Shakespeare, BenJonson, Thomas Nashe and Robert Burton to judge how these men fol-lowed the market in producing their plays and poems. First, however, heexplains the changes in British economy that created a market for poemsand plays along with buttons and butter. In this context he points out theTroilus and Cressida was a flop and rarely performed in Shakespeare’slifetime. The Bard of Avon shelved a play than didn’t make money. Nashewas well aware that he was writing to sell. Jonson made merchants hisprotagonists and villains, as well as commenting on the China trade andBurton wanted the English to produce more goods for export, as well asbuy his books. The focus here is on money, not art, which puts thesegreat writers back into the world in which they lived rather than only assubjects of rarified literary studies.

PR438 2009-046462 978-0-8207-0423-4WWrriittiinngg tthhee ffoorreesstt iinn eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn EEnnggllaanndd;; aa ssyyllvvaannppaassttoorraall nnaattiioonn..Theis, Jeffrey S. (Medieval & Renaissance literary studies)Duquesne University Press, ©2009 368 p. $60.00Theis (English, Salem State College) blends ecohistory and literature inthis study of the pastoral form in Early Modern England. The forests asimagined in several of Shakespeare’s plays form the first half, with theexperience of the characters in the woods creating changes in status andbehavior. The final chapter is on Milton’s view of the forest which wasaffected by his religious beliefs and the events of the Civil War. Lesserknown writers are also studied, one of the most intriguing being theleader of the utopian movement, the Diggers. His writing might be con-sidered the practical application of theoretical, metaphorical ideas of theforest as part of a national identity.

PR445 2008-011777 978-0-8047-5877-2TThhee ffrriinnggeess ooff bbeelliieeff;; EEnngglliisshh lliitteerraattuurree,, aanncciieenntt hheerreessyy,,aanndd tthhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff ffrreeeetthhiinnkkiinngg,, 11666600--11776600..Ellenzweig, Sarah.Stanford U. Press, ©2008 240 p. $60.00Ellenzweig (English, Rice U., Texas) contends that in the English imagi-nation it was possible to reject Christianity as divine truth whiledefending the necessary authority of the Anglican Church, and this rap-prochement between religious skepticism and the interests of theProtestant establishment represents a crucial and untold dimension ofthe secularization of the West. She shares elements in the literature ofEnglish freethinking that convinced her of this, among them Rochester,Blount, and the faith of unbelief; Behn, Fontenelle, and the cheats ofrevealed religion; Swift’s Tale of a Tub and the anthropology of religion;Swift, credulity, and the pious fraud; and Pope’s Essay on Man and theafterlife of English freethinking. The study is revised from her Ph.D. dis-sertation at Rutgers University (no date noted).

PR448 2009-033959 978-0-7546-6977-7MMeennttoorriinngg iinn eeiigghhtteeeenntthh--cceennttuurryy BBrriittiisshh lliitteerraattuurree aannddccuullttuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Anthony W. Lee.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 254 p. $99.95for the purpose of this study of eighteenth century mentors, “mentoring”is expanded to include the influence of one person on another withoutthe mentor’s knowledge. In this case, as Lee (English, Arkansas TechUniversity)points out, the influence of Fielding’s Tom Jones on Voltaire isa textual mentoring. However, most of the articles stick to more tradi-tional relationships, those of people established in their fields passing oninformation and giving critical suggestions to those starting out. Severalof the articles look at cases where the mentorship does not work out; thatof Richardson and the Hill sisters or Alexander Pope, Jonathan Swift andanyone they attempted to mentor. Mentoring that was beneficial includesthe interchange between Dryden and female writers, a subject largelyignored previously. There are several articles on Samuel Johnson whowas a haphazard, even needy, mentor. The most poignant of the essaysis the final one that looks at the work of Mary Wollstonecraft and MaryHays, writing in the hope of mentoring women yet unborn. This is aninteresting take on relationships between creative individuals in whichthe transmission of knowledge, authority and influence does not alwayssucceed.

PR457 2009-029787 978-0-8047-6228-1BBrriittiisshh ssttaattee rroommaannttiicciissmm;; aauutthhoorrsshhiipp,, aaggeennccyy,, aannddbbuurreeaauuccrraattiicc nnaattiioonnaalliissmm..Frey, Anne.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 204 p. $55.00Romantic period authors are stereotyped as imaginative geniusesworking in isolation from politics. In a rethinking of 19th century BritishRomantic fiction, Frey (English, Texas Christian U.) argues that thewritings of Samuel Taylor Coleridge, William Wordsworth, Walter Scott,Jane Austen, and Thomas De Quincey were not immune from beinginfluenced by the increasing centralization of state power and bureau-cratized cultural economy. Drawing on Foucault’s model of the pastoralstate, she contends that this “State Romanticism” movement offered anaesthetic model in which authors served as both creators and agents ofthis type of power structure. As in Austen’s Persuasion, the state (via thenavy in this case) is regarded as a means to shape individual andnational character.

PR468 2009-021114 978-0-8139-2874-6RRoommaannttiicc wwrriittiinngg aanndd tthhee eemmppiirree ooff ssiiggnnss;; ppeerriiooddiiccaallccuullttuurree aanndd ppoosstt--NNaappoolleeoonniicc aauutthhoorrsshhiipp..Fang, Karen.U. of Virginia Press, ©2010 236 p. $35.00Fang (English, U. of Houston) explores the power that late Romanticauthors accorded literary periodicals, through which their writingreached increasing numbers of readers between Waterloo and the firstReform Bill. Political and social upheaval convinced many writers to turnaway from the staid book publishing establishment, she says, and newtechnology made printing much faster and cheaper. She discussesporcelain economy in Lamb’s Essays of Elia, James Hogg’s Napoleoncomplex in The Private Memoirs, Corinne and the making of Landon’sgiftbook style, and Byron’s Island and the Liberal.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –268–

PR535 2009-042858 978-0-8014-4835-5RRooyyaall ppooeettrriiee;; mmoonnaarrcchhiicc vveerrssee aanndd tthhee ppoolliittiiccaalliimmaaggiinnaarryy ooff eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn EEnnggllaanndd..Herman, Peter C.Cornell U. Press, ©2010 229 p. $45.00The body of verse by Tudor and Stuart monarchs Henry VIII, MaryStuart, Elizabeth I, and James VI/I has been surprisingly little studiedsays Herman (English, San Diego State U.). He looks at the poetry in thecontext of the various fields of cultural meaning surrounding the rulers,and how it changes the modern concept of courtly verse. He considersHenry VIII and the political imaginary of early Tudor England, MaryQueen of Scots and the poetics of monarchy, privacy and the per-formance of monarchic verse by Elizabeth I, James VI/I and the scene ofmonarchic verse, and Charles I and the end of monarchic verse.

PR585 2009-017871 978-0-415-80586-5CChhrriissttiiaann aanndd llyyrriicc ttrraaddiittiioonn iinn VViiccttoorriiaann wwoommeenn’’ss ppooeettrryy..Gray, F. Elizabeth. (Routledge studies in nineteenth-century literature;v.3)Routledge, ©2010 264 p. $103.00Gray (School of English and Media Studies, Massey U., New Zealand)revisits the works of a number of obscure Victorian women religiouspoets in order to demonstrate the significant contribution they made toChristian discourse, lyric tradition, and contemporary views of wom-anhood. She is most concerned with the ways these women sought torelate to the masculinized Victorian God and to the ways they articulatedthe feminized I in relation to God. She offers chapters addressing thestrategies adopted by the poets in the textual and hermeneutic negotia-tions with the Bible, the poets’ deployments of female biblical characters,their production of a feminized I that could participate in direct rela-tionship to God, and strategies of form and style in terms of arrogatingpower and making meaning.

PR610 2009-014774 978-0-8040-1115-0OOnn ppooeettss aanndd ppooeettrryy..Pritchard, William H.Swallow Press, ©2009 336 p. $24.95 (pa)Pritchard (English, Amherst College, Massachusetts) collects essays he haswritten over the past half century or so, many of them in response to arequest to review a newly published collection or biography of a poet.Within sections on poets before the 20th century, the modernist gener-ation, the middle generation, and three critics of poets and poetry, heponders such matters as Hardy’s poetry of old age, Wallace StevensCollected Poetry and Prose, T. S. Eliot The Varieties of Metaphysical Poetry,Selected Letters of William Empson edited by John Haffenden, PhilipLarkin: A Writer’s Life by Andrew Motion, and Hugh Kenner’sachievement. Names are indexed.

PR658 2009-030060 978-1-4094-0029-5SSeexx aanndd ssaattiirriicc ttrraaggeeddyy iinn eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn EEnnggllaanndd;;ppeenneettrraattiinngg wwiitt..Rieger, Gabriel A. (Studies in performance and early modern drama)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 147 p. $89.95Rieger (medieval and Renaissance literature, Concord College) examinesthe use of sexual imagery in satiric tragedies of Early Modern England.Concentrating on specific plays by Shakespeare, Thomas Middleton, JoshMarston and John Webster, Reiger shows how sexual metaphors are aptfor the bitter social satire apparent in Hamlet The Duchess of Malfi OthelloThe Revenger’s Tragedy and other plays. He puts the subject in the contextof Elizabethan and Jacobean politics and censorship as well as theRoman works of Juvenal, upon which many of the playwrights drew.Examples demonstrate the complex ways in which sexual imagery, par-ticularly negative, could serve as a means to comment on the corruptionof contemporary society.

PR658 2009-005823 978-1-84519-329-4SSuuppeerrnnaattuurraall ffiiccttiioonn iinn eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn ddrraammaa aanndd ccuullttuurree..Friesen, Ryan Curtis.Sussex Academic Press, ©2010 249 p. $74.95Acts of magical efficacy were no more possible then than now, saysFriesen (English, U. of Wisconsin-LaCrosse), so the reports of them canbe analyzed not with science but with literary analysis and criticalreading. Among his examples are Heinrich Cornelius Agrippa, GiordanoBruno’s natural philosophy, fictional witchcraft, alchemy and angeliccommunication in the career of John Dee, confusing religious andmagical fiction in Marlowe’s Doctor Faustus, Middleton’s The Witch, BenJonson’s drama, and the critique of rough art and harsh reason in TheTempest. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

PR721 2009-047796 978-1-933146-66-9OOrriiggiinnss ooff EEnngglliisshh ddrraammaattiicc mmooddeerrnniissmm,, 11887700--11991144..Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Meyer-Dinkgrafe and Gregory F. Tague.Academica Press, LLC, ©2010 398 p. $79.95Meyer-Dinkgräfe (drama, University of Lincoln, UK) and Tague (English,St. Francis College, NY) have selected articles that concentrate on playswritten between 1870 and 1914 which provide seminal examples of earlydramatic modernism in English. The first essay sets the stage by com-paring popular entertainment, such as music halls, with theater. Thisputs many of the playwrights into a social and literary context. Most ofthe following articles focus on the major playwrights of the time: Shaw,Wilde, Synge, J. M. Barrie and Pinero. Others known mainly as poets ornovelists such as T.S. Eliot, Galsworthy, D. H. Lawrence and Yeats are dis-cussed. The role of the producer and actor-manager, the latter now nearlyextinct, are also subjects with the final essay complementing the first insummarizing the conclusions of the authors.

PR767 2009-027379 978-0-7546-6675-2TTiimmee,, nnaarrrraattiivvee,, aanndd eemmoottiioonn iinn eeaarrllyy mmooddeerrnn EEnnggllaanndd..Wood, David Houston. (Literary and scientific cultures of earlymodernity)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 199 p. $99.95Wood (English, Northern Michigan University) looks at three EarlyModern English writers, Sidney, Shakespeare and Milton, through thelens of the perception of time as revealed in medical texts of the day. Theworks of these three men are filled with references to the standardbeliefs of the day, that the body was a combination of four humours andthat an imbalance in any one would cause either physical or mentalillness. This is the backdrop for Wood’s analysis of Old Arcadia, Othello,A Winter’s Tale and Samson Agonistes. The introductory chapter discussestheory and explains the early modern concepts of time within thehumoral vision of medicine and how they relate to the subjectivity of thecharacters in these works.

PR800 978-90-420-2538-7TTrraannssccuullttuurraall mmooddeerrnniittiieess;; nnaarrrraattiinngg AAffrriiccaa iinn EEuurrooppee..Title main entry. Ed. by Elisabeth Bekers et al. (Matatu journal forAfrican culture and society; no.36)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 442 p. $129.00Over the past twenty years the voices of African immigrants to Europeand their Euro-African children have been more and more expressedthrough literature. This issue of Matatu, Journal for African Culture andSociety is devoted to an exploration of these voices. Bekers (British andPostcolonial literatures, University of Brussels) and Helff (new literaturesin English, University of Frankfurt) have chosen essays that discuss theliterature of the immigrant experience. Some of the authors are fromformer colonies of their adopted countries, but others come from areaswith no connection to it. The first two sections look at authors in Spain,Italy, Belgium and Scandinavia, where Euro-African literature is new.Several focus on specific authors. The third section focuses on film,theater and art, including that created in Africa about the emigrant expe-rience. The final section mixes points of view between the host countriesand the authors. The book ends with two short stories, one in French theother in English. It is intriguing that both of these, by African-bornauthors, only peripherally mention Africa or cultural differences. Theyboth address human quandaries that are universally understandable.Price converted from Euros.

PR830 2009-017434 978-0-87413-075-1TThhee eenndd ooff ddoommeessttiicciittyy;; aalliieennaattiioonn ffrroomm tthhee ffaammiillyy iinnDDiicckkeennss,, EElliioott,, aanndd JJaammeess..Hatten, Charles.Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2010 316 p. $67.50One of the epochal changes in British literature is the shift from the mid-Victorian celebration of familial life, such as that found in A ChristmasCarol by Charles Dickens, to modernist portrayals of alienation from thefamily and rejection of the moralizing and emotionalism of Victorianfamilialism such as embodied in Oscar Wilde’s comment that “One musthave a heart of stone to read the death of Little Nell without laughing.”Hatten (English, Bellarmine U.) investigates the decline of Victorian famil-ialism as evidenced in the writings of Dickens, George Eliot, and HenryJames, who he sees as emblematic of the sudden shift in the Victorianportrayal of domesticity. He argues that this shift came about as writersresponded to changing understandings of the role of women in societyand in the patriarchal family, particularly as related to rapid socioeco-nomic changes of industrialization.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–269–

PR830 978-87-7307-962-1MMaarrvveelllloouuss ffaannttaassyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Jørgen Riber Christensen.Aalborg University Press, ©2009 296 p. $54.95 (pa)Editor Christensen (Communication & Psychology, Aalborg University)presents a multidisciplinary introduction to the study of fantasy. Using avariety of analytical and aesthetic approaches, thirteen contributorsexamine works by authors such as J.R.R. Tolkien, C.S. Lewis, HansChristian Andersen, China Miéville, Simon Green, and J.K. Rowling.Topics covered include swords and sorcery, Xena: Warrior Princess, PeterPan, and music in fantasy films. (Distributed in North America by ISBS.)

PR858 2009-009803 978-0-8018-9384-1HHaarrmm’’ss wwaayy;; ttrraaggiicc rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittyy aanndd tthhee nnoovveell ffoorrmm..Macpherson, Sandra.Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2010 237 p. $55.00In this unconventional study of the 18th century novel, Macpherson(English, the Ohio State University) argues that accident and injury,rather than volition and intention, are key elements in the early realistnovel’s view of personhood and belonging. She offers fresh readings ofDefoe, Richardson, and Fielding, demonstrating that the liberal counter-tradition which she explores emerges from 18th century novels based onquestions about agency and from contemporary developments in laws of‘strict liability.’

PR878 2009-048868 978-1-60497-668-7TTeecchhnnoollooggiieess ooff ppoowweerr iinn tthhee VViiccttoorriiaann ppeerriioodd;; pprriinnttccuullttuurree,, hhuummaann llaabboorr,, aanndd nneeww mmooddeess ooff ccrriittiiqquuee iinnCChhaarrlleess DDiicckkeennss’’ss HHaarrdd ttiimmeess,, CChhaarrlloottttee BBrröönnttee’’ss SShhiirrlleeyy,,aanndd GGeeoorrggee EElliioott’’ss FFeelliixx HHoolltt..Murray, John Condon.Cambria Press, ©2010 163 p. $99.99A specialist in British literature and film of the 19th and 20th centuries,Murray (English, Curry College) deploys the three popular novels todemonstrate how the growth of capitalism production and the devel-opment of new industrial technologies within the early to mid-Victorianperiods encouraged privileging the printed word over oratory and speech.The difference in power between authors and readers of mass producedbooks was much greater than any possible difference between twospeakers, he points out, so print culture was intrinsically less egalitarianthan oral culture. He looks at the carnivalesque in Hard Times; crowds,mobs, and spatial separations in Shirley; and the absence of place-identityin Felix Holt.

PR878 2009-030042 978-0-8166-6092-6VViiccttoorriiaann vvoogguuee;; BBrriittiisshh nnoovveellss oonn ssccrreeeenn..Sadoff, Dianne F.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 329 p. $25.00 (pa)Sadoff (English, Rutgers U.) analyzes films that have been adapted fromnineteenth-century novels, arguing that these heritage films perform dif-ferent cultural functions in the twentieth century. Focusing on the 1930sand 1940s, and 1980s and 1990s, she discusses the dialogue films havewith the decades of their source narratives; the concept of fidelity aes-thetics; the influence of horror films on ideas about the body; sex andHenry James movies; Jane Austen films and economic globalization;homosexuality and Oscar Wilde films; and the effects of Bollywood onnew movie versions of Austen, Forster, Dickens, and others.

PR881 2009-674930 978-1-4438-1247-4VVooiicceess aanndd ssiilleennccee iinn tthhee ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy nnoovveell iinn EEnngglliisshh..Title main entry. Ed. by Vanessa Guignery.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 292 p. $59.99French scholars of English literature explore various processes at work inexpressing silence and excessive speech, and look for mechanisms thatare used for both extremes. Separate sections are devoted to the novels ofWill Self and Graham Swift, discussing such matters as demotic Englishin Self’s The Book of Dave and towards quietism in Swift’s Shuttlecock.Other sections focus in turn on British and American literature, and thepoetics of silent voices from beyond the pale. The topics include fromlogorrhoea to silence in John Fowles’ The Collector, voices and silences ofbiblical women, making the voice wordless in A Pale View of Hills byKazuo Ishiguro, cries and whispers in the novels of Arundhati Roy andSalman Rushdie, the erotics of silence and excess in Jamaica Kincaid’sLucy and Zadie Smith’s On Beauty, and J. M. Coetzee’s The Life and Timesof Michael K.The The 20 essays were selected from papers presented at aDecember 2007 conference held at the Sorbonne in Paris.

PR888 2009-015758 978-0-7546-5672-2EEnngglliisshh mmooddeerrnniissmm,, nnaattiioonnaall iiddeennttiittyy aanndd tthhee GGeerrmmaannss,,11889900--11995500..Rau, Petra.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 233 p. $99.95English modernism of the late 19th and early 20th centuries, accordingto Rau (English and European literature, U. of Portsmouth, UK), wascharacterized to such an extent by anxieties about modernity and mod-ernization that it almost becomes an oxymoronic label. Furthermore,these anxieties were often channeled onto the figures of Germany andGerman modernity, “others” through which the anxieties could be moreeasily articulated. Based on this understanding, he explores representa-tions of German modernity in works by British writers from 1890 to1950. The authors discussed include Joseph Conrad, E.M. Forster, FordMadox Ford, William Le Queux, Hector Hugh Munro (Saki), John Buchan,Virginia Woolf, D.H. Lawrence, Christopher Isherwood, Graham Greene,and Elizabeth Bowen.

PR888 2009-032313 978-0-313-36282-8WWaarr ooff tthhee ffaannttaassyy wwoorrllddss;; CC..SS.. LLeewwiiss aanndd JJ..RR..RR.. TToollkkiieennoonn aarrtt aanndd iimmaaggiinnaattiioonn..Sammons, Martha C.Praeger, ©2010 237 p. $44.95Sammons (English, Wright State U., Ohio) argues that the two Britishwriters invented a new genre—now called religious fantasy among otherthings—by combining the spiritual and mythopoeic in popular fiction.Though good friends, they did not agree about everything, mostfamously about the proper Christian denomination, but it is not thatdispute that concerns her here. Rather she explores their different ideasabout the role of the author in the story, and particularly the degree towhich the author’s faith should be represented in the narrative. She dis-cusses the artist, art, applications, art theories and metaphors, achievingother worlds, allegory and applicability, and advantages of fantasy.

PR1109 2005-030799 978-0-205-65524-3TThhee LLoonnggmmaann aanntthhoollooggyy ooff BBrriittiisshh lliitteerraattuurree,, 44tthh eedd;; vv..11..Title main entry. Ed. by David Damrosch et al.Longman, ©2010 2853 p. $66.67 (pa)The first in a two-volume set, this anthology brings together poetry,prose, and drama from the literary history of Great Britain, focusing onthe Middle Ages through the Restoration and the eighteenth century,from Beowulf to Samuel Johnson. Damrosch (comparative literature,Harvard U.) and Dettmar (English, Pomona College) group readingschronologically and according to issues and themes like women andgender, related cultural debates, or texts in which later authors respondto their precursors. Also included are writings providing social context,color plates showing images that influenced literary creation, introduc-tions containing historical context, and notes for each text. Major andlesser known authors like Sir Thomas Wyatt are included. This editionhas new thumbnail sketches of daily life during each period, new textsby William Baldwin, Edmund Spenser, Shakespeare, John Donne, JohnSkelton, and others, the Irish epic The Táin Bó Cuailnge, new translationsand groupings, and new response pairings.

PR1109 2005-030799 978-0-205-65519-9TThhee LLoonnggmmaann aanntthhoollooggyy ooff BBrriittiisshh lliitteerraattuurree,, 44tthh eedd;; vv..22..Title main entry. Ed. by David Damrosch et al.Longman, ©2010 2891 p. $66.67 (pa)The second in a two-volume set, this anthology collects literature fromGreat Britain, including poetry, prose, and drama, from the Romanticperiod to the twentieth century and beyond, from Jane Austen to ZadieSmith. Damrosch (comparative literature, Harvard U.) and Dettmar(English, Pomona College) arrange readings in chronological order, aswell as by themes and issues like slavery and abolition, and related cul-tural moments or debates, or texts in which later authors respond to theirpredecessors. Other readings provide social or historical context, andlesser-known authors like Benjamin Disraeli are integrated. Other mate-rials include color plates of images that influenced literature, introduc-tions providing historical context, and notes within the texts. This editionincorporates thumbnail sketches of daily life for each period, new textsfrom Emily Brontë, Carol Ann Duffy, W.H. Auden, Philip Larkin, SeamusHeaney, Alan Moore and David Lloyd, Tom Stoppard, Nick Hornby, HanifKureishi, Sir Walter Scott, Elizabeth Barrett Browning, T.S. Eliot, andothers, and new response pairings.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –270–

PR1125 2009-037182 978-0-8207-0426-5TThhee ppllaagguuee iinn pprriinntt;; eesssseennttiiaall EElliizzaabbeetthhaann ssoouurrcceess,, 11555588--11660033..Title main entry. Transcribed and ed. by Rebecca Totaro. (Medieval &Renaissance literary studies)Duquesne University Press, ©2010 300 p. $58.00After the fourteenth century horror of the Black Death there were lesserrecurrences of the plague over the next three hundred years. Totaro(English, Florida Gulf Coast University) has transcribed several textsdealing with the plague in Elizabethan England. They contain advice onhow to prevent and treat plague, a treatise from the queen on civic actionto be taken to avoid an epidemic, religious reactions and prayers and listsof the numbers who died by parish. The longest entries are an early(1564) dramatic allegory in which Death comes for Civis. This includesmedical and theological information, laced with dark humor. It is aversion of the late-medieval Everyman. The final entry, by playwrightThomas Dekker, is a stark picture of a society ruled by fear, with Deathas king. The selections, each with an explanatory introduction, are wellchosen to show how the plague affected the psychology of theElizabethans, revealing another facet of that turbulent time.

PR1203 978-2-503-52836-6SSaaiinnttss EEddiitthh aanndd ÆÆtthheelltthhrryytthh;; pprriinncceesssseess,, mmiirraaccllee wwoorrkkeerrss,,aanndd tthheeiirr llaattee mmeeddiieevvaall aauuddiieennccee:: tthhee WWiillttoonn CChhrroonniicclleeaanndd tthhee WWiillttoonn LLiiffee ooff SStt.. ÆÆtthheelltthhrryytthh..Dockray-Miller, Mary. (Medieval women; texts and contexts)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 475 p. $116.00For the latest in Brepols’ series of medieval texts by and about women,Dockray-Miller (English, Lesley University) has edited and translated twoMiddle English saint’s lives composed at Wilton Abbey around the year1420. The women commemorated are the Anglo-Saxon princesses, Edithand Æthelthryth, both of whom fled the court to enter monastic life.Dockray-Miller’s introduction puts the lives in the double perspective ofthe pre-conquest time in which the women lived and the fifteenthcentury, the time in which they were written, when England wasreaching back to its pre-Norman Conquest roots to create a nationalidentity. In the translations she has wisely refrained from over-editing,letting the redundancies and oddities of speech remain, thus giving themodern reader more of a sense of the original. A glossary is providedalong with a critical bibliography. Distributed in North America by theDavid Brown Book Co.

PR2032 2009-050461 978-1-58044-148-3MMuummmmiinnggss aanndd eenntteerrttaaiinnmmeennttss..Lydgate, John. Ed. by Claire Sponsler. (Middle English texts series)Medieval Institute Pub., ©2010 182 p. $15.00 (pa)The Medieval Institute at Western Michigan University is noted for its rea-sonably-priced authoritative editions of works by medieval authors. Thisedition of Lydgate’s Mummings and Entertainments continues the qualityof previous texts. Sponsler has prepared the edition of the text, giving def-initions of unfamiliar words on the same page. Her introduction putsLydgate in the context of his time and the performance tradition. Thenotes give background on each poem followed by line by line explana-tions of terms and references. This is an excellent guide for classroom useand for those interested in early English literature.

PR2276 2009-017621 978-0-87413-081-2AAccttss ooff rreeaaddiinngg;; iinntteerrpprreettaattiioonn,, rreeaaddiinngg pprraaccttiicceess,, aanndd tthheeiiddeeaa ooff tthhee bbooookk iinn JJoohhnn FFooxxee’’ss AAcctteess aanndd mmoonnuummeennttss..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas P. Anderson and Ryan Netzley.Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2010 306 p. $65.00North American scholars of English literature place Foxe’s 17th-centurymartyrology, better known as the Book of Martyrs, in the history of thebook in early modern England. Their topics include Derrida’s theory ofthe archive and the search for origins in Foxe’s Actes and Monuments, redletter days in the age of digital reproduction, reading providence in earlymodern England as exemplified by the Duchess of Suffolk, reading thejudicial examinations in the book, the reader’s object, and number andmeaning for apocalyptic calculations. Distributed in the US by AssociatedUniversity Presses.

PR2326 2009-045029 978-0-86698-428-7NNiicchhoollaass OOllddiisswwoorrtthh’’ss mmaannuussccrriipptt ((BBooddlleeiiaann MMSS.. DDoonn..cc..2244))Title main entry. Ed. by John Gouws. (Medieval and renaissance textsand studies; v.380; Renaissance English Text Society, 7th series; v.34)ACMRS, ©2009 256 p. $54.00In 1644, Oldisworth (1611-45) collected some 120 poems he had writtenas an undergraduate at Oxford many years before. The volume remainedin his family for half a century after his death, vanished, appeared as acollector’s trophy, then vanished again during the 1930s into the vastnessof the Bodleian Library. Gouws, a South African scholar now retiredfrom teaching, brings them to light once more, with notes and a longintroduction. One of his concerns is how to approach poems that are soold yet have no critical baggage.

PR2364 978-0-404-19224-2SSppeennsseerr ssttuuddiieess;; aa RReennaaiissssaannccee ppooeettrryy aannnnuuaall;; vv..2244::SSppeecciiaall iissssuuee;; SSppeennsseerr aanndd PPllaattoonniissmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Kenneth Borris et al. (series: title)AMS Press, ©2009 526 p. $174.50The primary theme for this 24th volume of the annual Spenser Studies isthe engagement of English poet Edmund Spenser (c. 1552-1599) withPlatonic philosophy. Fourteen articles consider such topics as the preva-lence of Platonism at Oxford and Cambridge Universities duringSpenser’s era; the influence of Platonists Flaminio Nobili, Marsilio Ficino,Everard Digby, and Guy le Févre de a Boderie on Spenser’s intellectualmilieu; the relationship of Spenser’s poetic to Platonic theories of beautyand love; and the story of Merlin’s mirror and of the true and falseFlorimells in Books III to V of The Faerie Queene as an engagement andrefutation of Plato’s anti-poetics. A secondary theme arises out of thefinal four papers, which relate Spenser’s The Faerie Queene to his FowreHimnes.

PR2880 2009-007092 978-1-55753-529-0SShhaakkeessppeeaarree iinn HHoollllyywwoooodd,, AAssiiaa,, aanndd ccyybbeerrssppaaccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Alexander C.Y. Huang and Charles S. Ross.(Comparative cultural studies)Purdue University Press, ©2009 297 p. $39.95 (pa)Huang (comparative literature, The Pennsylvania State U.) and Ross(comparative literature, Purdue U.) present a diverse collection of 22papers conducting readings of the relationships between Shakespeareand—largely separately—Hollywood, Asia, and cyberspace. Examples oftopics addressed include Shakespeare’s Taming of the Shrew andscrewball comedy, method acting and Al Pacino’s Looking for Richard,cultural anxiety and the female body in Zeffirelli’s Hamlet, thevisualization of metaphor in two Chinese versions of Macbeth, silenceand sound in Kurosawa’s Throne of Blood, intercultural Shakespeare inCambodia, mobilizing foreign Shakespeares in media, appropriation andthe design of an online Shakespeare journal, and performingShakespeare for the Web community. Also included are a chronology anda selected bibliography.

PR2950 978-0-306-81831-8TThhee bbooyy wwhhoo wwoouulldd bbee SShhaakkeessppeeaarree;; aa ttaallee ooff ffoorrggeerryy aannddffoollllyy..Stewart, Doug.Da Capo Press, ©2010 229 p. $24.95Stewart, a freelance journalist who writes about history and the arts, tellsthe story of the falsification of documents by a 19-year old British clerk,William-Henry Ireland, in 1795, who tried to pass them off asShakespeare’s in an attempt to impress his father. Since nothing survivedin Shakespeare’s own hand, he was able to produce letters, deeds, poetry,drawings, and a play that he claimed were Shakespeare’s, which wasstaged in 1796. Stewart describes Ireland’s family and life, his father’sobsession with collecting antiquities, the cult of Shakespeare that existedat the time, publication of the papers, the inquiry into the forgeries, andhis confession. A few facsimiles of the forgeries are included.

PR2976 2009-030169 978-0-631-23548-4PPhheennoommeennaall SShhaakkeessppeeaarree..Smith, Bruce R. (Blackwell manifestos)John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 206 p. $84.95Smith (English and theater, U. of Southern California) explains to stu-dents and other readers of Shakespeare how to analyze the plays andpoems by looking at actions that occur as opposed to ideas that areexpressed. He discusses as it likes you, how one should read aShakespeare sonnet, carnal knowledge, and touching moments.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–271–

PR2991 2009-033626 978-0-313-34304-9WWoommeenn iinn tthhee aaggee ooff SShhaakkeessppeeaarree..Kemp, Theresa D. (The age of Shakespeare)Greenwood Press, ©2010 263 p. $65.00Contributing to the series exploring the relationship betweenShakespeare’s work and the world he lived in, Kemp (English andwomen’s studies, U. of Wisconsin-Eau Claire) introduce non-specialist stu-dents and general readers to some of the issues that rise in the academicstudy of women in the Elizabethan and Jacobian eras generally and inShakespeare’s works in particular. Among the questions she asks whatkind of women are and are not represented in the plays, what rules seemto govern the behavior or women characters, and how early-modernpatriarchy constricts them and how the resist and collude. In addition toportrayals of women at the time, she also discusses the sources for theideas that then prevailed.

PR3091 978-1-84868-333-4SShhaakkeessppeeaarree’’ss LLoonnddoonn;; eevveerryyddaayy lliiffee iinn LLoonnddoonn 11558800--11661166..Porter, Stephen.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 286 p. $29.95An expert on London’s history, Porter vividly re-creates life in England’slargest and most important city during the years that Shakespeare livedand worked there. Using contemporary records, the author takes readersonto London’s bustling streets, introducing them to the merchants,churchmen, courtiers, scholars, immigrants, and other people who madethe city’s economic, cultural, political, and intellectual life so vibrant.Generously illustrated with photographs and period images, Porter’svolume will appeal to readers interested in Shakespearean England andin the history of London.

PR3508 2009-015023 978-0-87413-022-5GGeeoorrggee HHeerrbbeerrtt’’ss ppaassttoorraall;; nneeww eessssaayyss oonn tthhee ppooeett aannddpprriieesstt ooff BBeemmeerrttoonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Christopher Hodgkins.Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2010 311 p. $69.50An international conference on English poet and priest Herbert (1593-1633) was held at Sarum College, near where he worked and lived, inOctober 2007, and was devoted to exploring the relationship between hispoetry and his pastoral life inf early Stuart Wiltshire. The 15 papers herefrom that gathering look at pastoral poetry and pastoral practice; his-torical personalities and places; biblical and liturgical connections; pastor,garden, and pasture; and beyond Bemerton. Among specific topics arevocation and the theology of presence, his gardener Adrain Gilbert, theliturgical experience of scripture, Herbert as herbalist, and underSalisbury Spire with the fictional George Herbert. Distributed in the USby Associated University Presses.

PR3546 2009-026929 978-0-8386-4256-6AAnnddrreeww MMaarrvveellll’’ss ““UUppoonn AApppplleettoonn HHoouussee””;; aann aannaallyyttiiccccoommmmeennttaarryy..Eyber, Vitaliy.Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2010 250 p. $57.50Eyber, who has Ph.D. in English Renaissance literature from the U. ofCalifornia, Berkeley, provides analytic commentary to Andrew Marvell’slong poem “Upon Appleton House” (written between 1650 and 1653) thatexamines the wit in the poem and focuses on the reading experiences ofthe original Renaissance audience and today. After providing historicalinformation and the poem’s text, he notes, line by line, its internal coher-ences and instances of the author’s wit in wordplay, syntax, ambiguities,and phonic and associative connections—aspects that have been previ-ously neglected. He makes observation of these instances, but avoidsinterpretation. There is no index. Distributed by Associated UniversityPresses.

PR3592 2009-053998 978-1-58243-437-7JJoohhnn MMiillttoonn;; aa hheerroo ooff oouurr ttiimmee..Hawkes, David.Counterpoint, ©2009 354 p. $28.00Acknowledging the many fine existing biographies of British poet Milton(1608-74), Hawkes (English, Arizona State U.) departs from them byemphasizing what he has to tell people today about the postmodern age.He himself claimed to be speaking to future generations, he says, and weshould take him at his word. Among his perspectives are the fruit ofusury, Samson Sybariticus, revolution and romance, killing no murder,uxorious usurers, and blind man’s bluff.

PR3592 978-2-503-52877-9PPaarraaddiissee lloosstt aanndd RReeppuubblliiccaann ttrraaddiittiioonn ffrroomm AArriissttoottllee ttooMMaacchhiiaavveellllii..Walker, William. (Cursor Mundi)Brepols Publishers, ©2009 332 p. $116.00Walker (English literature, U. of New South Wales) specializes in Locke,Milton, and the history of republican political thought. Over the past fewdecades, he says, most scholars have come to see the in work of Englishpoet John Milton (1608-74) an argument for English republicanism, andhowever much they disagree over what exactly that is—or was—they dotend to agree that he was highly influenced by a tradition of republicanthought that stretched from classical Greece to Renaissance Italy. He takeson the task here of making the connection explicit, finding links betweenMilton’s magnus opus and political philosophy in such realms as humannature, virtue, forms of government, civil liberty, and history. Distributedin North America by The David Brown Book Co.

PR3727 978-0-7165-2949-1JJoonnaatthhaann SSwwiifftt..Hammond, Brean. (Visions and revisions; Irish writers in their time)Irish Academic Press, ©2010 214 p. $74.95Hammond (modern English literature, U. of Nottingham) says that Swift(1667-1745) was a great writer because he was an extremist, starting hisintellectual and moral journey where sensible people stopped, dealingwith untouchable matters, asking fundamental questions, experimentingwith mixed genres, and exhibiting a humor unbound by staid notions ofpropriety and taste. His account considers the historical and cultural con-texts, early Swift, his religious satire, women, Ireland, Swift the poet, andcontexts and the text of Gulliver’s Travels. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

PR4024 2009-033165 978-0-8214-1899-4TThhee ccuullttuurraall pprroodduuccttiioonn ooff MMaatttthheeww AArrnnoolldd..Harrison, Antony H.Ohio University Press, ©2009 152 p. $49.95Harrison (English, North Carolina State U.) explores the construction ofBritish poet and critic Arnold (1822-88) as a cultural icon in several fieldsduring his life and since—lionized for a century then rejected and vilifiedalong with the Modernism that he represented. Drawing on method-ologies from recent historicist, sociological, deconstructive, and feministcriticism, he situates Arnold’s poetry in various contexts that partiallyshaped it, and point out clues to his personal values and his perceptionsof his world. The themes are revolution and medievalism, Keats andspasmodicism, poetesses, and Gypsies.

PR4710 2009-011307 978-0-7546-6573-1EElliizzaabbeetthh GGaasskkeellll’’ss CCrraannffoorrdd;; aa ppuubblliisshhiinngg hhiissttoorryy..Recchio, Thomas. (Ashgate studies in publishing history)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 273 p. $99.95Recchio (English, University of Connecticut) examines the “afterlife” ofCranford by Elizabeth Gaskell. This story was first published in Dickens’sjournal Household Words in segments from 1851-1853. This appearancewas anonymous and heavily edited by Dickens. It was published as awhole in 1853, under her name. Recchio follows the subsequent editionsin Britain and America, including those printed for use in schools. Hepays special attention to the way illustration was used to subtly alter theemphasis in the text. Especially in America, Cranford helped to solidifyupper class connection to British culture as opposed to that of theSouthern and Eastern European immigrants entering America at the endof the nineteenth century. The study concludes with a look at dramaticproductions, up to the most recent one in 2007. Recchio demonstrateshow a work lives and even mutates after it leaves the hands of the authorand is appropriated by others.

PR4984 2009-033960 978-0-7546-6831-2HHaarrrriieett MMaarrttiinneeaauu,, VViiccttoorriiaann iimmppeerriiaalliissmm,, aanndd tthheecciivviilliizziinngg mmiissssiioonn..Logan, Deborah A.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 280 p. $99.95Hoping to establish her intellectual authority as political, economic, andhistorical writer and place her on a more level playing field with thecanonical authorities of Victorian England, Logan (English, WesternKentucky U.) reads the nonfiction of Harriet Martineau (1802-1876) as itrelates to questions of empire. Logan first offers a broad overview ofMartineau’s views of empire, establishing her basic views on the eco-nomics, politics, and cultural issues of the British Empire and her under-standings of the relationship between the First Empire (the “white”colonies of the United States, Australia, New Zealand, Van Diemen’sLand, and Canada) and the Second Empire (the “empire of color”). Shethen offers chapters exploring Martineau’s writings on Ireland, slaveryand Caribbean trade, India, the north India frontier, China, North Africa,and sub-Saharan Africa.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –272–

PR6019 978-0-7165-2907-1JJaammeess JJooyyccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Sean Latham. (Visions and revisions; Irishwriters in their time)Irish Academic Press, ©2010 228 p. $32.95 (pa)For undergraduate and graduate students and scholars, Latham (English,U. of Tulsa) compiles 10 essays on James Joyce’s life and writings. Essaysdiscuss major works such as Ulysses, Finnegans Wake, Dubliners, APortrait of the Artist as a Young Man, and his minor works, and topicslike connections to his life, theoretical approaches to his work, narrativetechniques, modernism, sexuality, and why he didn’t win the NobelPrize. Contributors are scholars of English and literature in the US,Europe, New Zealand, and Canada. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

PR6019 2009-025058 978-0-8130-3423-2JJooyyccee,, mmeeddiicciinnee,, aanndd mmooddeerrnniittyy..Plock, Vike Martina. (The Florida James Joyce series)U. Press of Florida, ©2010 187 p. $69.95Plock (English literature, Northumbria U.) explores Irish writer JamesJoyce’s (1882-1941) obsession with health, debility, and medicine, and theappearance of such concerns throughout his work. Among her topics aremodern medicine, alcoholism and doubling in “Counterparts,” medicineand morals in A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man, obstetrics and theaesthetics of reproduction in “Oxen of the Sun,” Eugen Sandow andphysical culture in “Ithaca,” and gynecology and domestic medicine in“Penelope.” Some of the chapters have been published as journal articles.

PR6023 978-90-420-2791-6DDeenniiss WWiilllliiaammss;; aa lliiffee iinn wwoorrkkss;; nneeww aanndd ccoolllleecctteedd eessssaayyss..Title main entry. Ed. by Charlotte Williams and Evelyn A. Williams.(Cross/Cultures; 120)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 238 p. $73.00The daughters of Williams, Charlotte Williams (social justice, Keele U.,UK) and Evelyn Williams, a painter and former teacher of art and design,compile 14 new and previously published essays on the work of painter,teacher, novelist, art theorist, and archaeologist Denis Williams, one ofthe founding fathers of modern Guyana. Scholars of African studies,telecommunications, art, literature, and English, and artists and writersin the UK, US, and the Caribbean, analyze aspects of his artistic, aca-demic, and literary work, commenting on the connections between hislife and work and representations of the changing nature of theCaribbean condition. Including an overview of his life, the essays con-sider how he saw himself as a painter, phases of his artworks, his self-portraits, reception and public recognition of his work, and themes ofidentity, migration, and postcolonial reconstruction. They consider theexperimental aspects of his literary work, and how it mirrors his art,including Other Leopards, The Third Temptation, “A Long Long Pause,”and The Sperm of God. They also discuss his African art research studyIcon and Image, his exploration Prehistoric Guiana, and the contributionsof his archaeological research to Guyana’s history. There is no index.

PR6059 978-0-8264-9724-6KKaazzuuoo IIsshhiigguurroo;; ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy ccrriittiiccaall ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess..Title main entry. Ed. by Sean Matthews and Sebastian Groes.(Contemporary critical perspectives)Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 151 p. $29.95 (pa)This book presents up-to-date critical essays on Kazuo Ishiguro, one ofthose rare contemporary writers whose critical acclaim is matched bytheir popularity with the general public. Chapters trace the main themesof Ishiguro’s writing (including issues of class, ethics, ethnicity,nationhood, place, and gender) and examine his short stories and writingfor television. The book also includes a new interview with Ishiguro anda preface by noted author Haruki Murukami.

PR6066 2009-529954 978-1-4438-0594-0PPiinntteerr eett cceetteerraa..Title main entry. Ed. by Craig N. Owens.Cambridge Scholars Publishing, ©2009 201 p. $62.00Scholars of literature in general and drama in particular counter the viewthat towering British playwright Harold Pinter (1930-2008) represented asui generis, by showing how particular plays, and his body of work as awhole, fit in the dramatic tradition and contemporary scene of Englishlanguage. Among their topics are his influence on Samuel Beckett; Pinterjoining Beckett and Edward Albee as absurd jokers; women, torture, andwitness in Ariel Dorman’s Death and the Maiden and his Ashes to Ashes;his positions of subjectivity and a case study by Claude Lévi-Strauss; andPinter and the plastic arts. The price is converted from British pounds.

PR6068 2009-041207 978-1-59460-645-8TThhee llaaww aanndd HHaarrrryy PPootttteerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Jeffrey E. Thomas and Franklin G. Snyder.Carolina Academic Press, ©2010 414 p. $35.00 (pa)Editors Thomas (Law, University of Missouri—Kansas City School of Law)and Snyder (Law, Texas Wesleyan University School of Law) asked aroster of legal academics to consider how law and legal institutions aredepicted in the popular Harry Potter books. The 22 essays that resultedare arranged in five broad topic areas: Legal Traditions and Institutions,Crimes and Punishments, Harry Potter and Identity, the WizardEconomy, and Harry Potter as an Archetype. Authors often use examplesfrom the Potter stories to illuminate legal or societal issues, such ashuman rights, torture, justice, and difference. This volume is suitable foruse in college or law school courses, and should also appeal to HarryPotter fans of a legal bent.

PR8585 978-1-905125-36-4GGeeoorrggee BBuucchhaannaann;; ppooeett aanndd ddrraammaattiisstt..Title main entry. Ed. by Philip Ford and Roger P.H. Green.Classical Press of Wales, ©2009 322 p. $100.00The Scottish writer and Humanist, George Buchanan (1506-1582), islargely forgotten today, even in his home country. However in the six-teenth century and beyond, he was internationally known. He taught inFrance, moved in court circles and was imprisoned for a time by theInquisition. However, the fact that he chose to write his poems and playsin Latin means that few study him now. Ford (French and Neo-Latin,University of Cambridge) and Green (Humanity, University of Glasgow,emeritus) present papers delivered at a conference in honor of the halfmillennial of Buchanan’s birth that seek to introduce him to a new gen-eration. Articles comment on his Latin plays, his secular and religiouspoems, his translation of the Scots poet, William Dunbar, and Classicalsources for his work. A final section looks at how Buchanan’s work wasreceived in his own time and respected for at least two centuries after.Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

PR8789 978-0-7165-3013-8DDiissssiiddeenntt ddrraammaattuurrggiieess;; ccoonntteemmppoorraarryy IIrriisshh tthheeaattrree..Jordan, Eamonn.Irish Academic Press, ©2010 277 p. $69.95Jordan (Drama Studies, University College Dublin) examines the dra-maturgical patterns of the writings of Irish playwrights of the contem-porary generation (from 1980 to the present). Chapters look at thedramaturgical process according to six configurations or constructions:the relationships between history, memory, and metatheatre; how thenotion of innocence is contested; the use of a range of myths by con-temporary playwrights; the consequences of perverting pastoral con-sciousness; and the repercussions of storytelling on a tradition of writing.Jordan shows how Irish plays embody a coerced and admired notion of“Irishness” that is both a commodity and something that is uniquelydefiant, liberating, and dissident. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

PR8858 978-0-7165-2910-1OOtthheerr eeddeennss;; tthhee lliiffee aanndd wwoorrkk ooff BBrriiaann CCooffffeeyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Benjamin Keatinge.Irish Academic Press, ©2010 288 p. $69.95In October 2005, a symposium was held at Trinity College Dublin toherald the centenary of Coffey’s (1905-95) birth. New and veteranscholars of the Irish poet reflect on his six decades of literaryachievement from post-independence to post-modern eras. Among the 21essays are discussions of opposing the invitable, the music of ThirdPerson, his relationship with George Reavey, his review of Beckett’sMurphy, “Missouri Sequence” and the search for a habitat, his meta-physics of love, the two fat ladies, antiquity and the modern moment, histime with television, and his son’s memories as a child. Authors herewere allowed to examine and quote from unpublished manuscripts.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–273–

PR9080 978-90-420-2812-8LLooccaall nnaattuurreess,, gglloobbaall rreessppoonnssiibbiilliittiieess;; eeccooccrriittccaallppeerrssppeeccttiivveess oonn tthhee nneeww EEnngglliisshh lliitteerraattuurreess..Title main entry. Ed. by Laurenz Volkmann et al. (Cross/Cultures; 121.ASNEL papers; 15)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 370 p. $109.00Volkmann (EFL teaching, Friedrich Schiller U., Jena, Germany) et al.bring together 24 essays that examine nature and the environment in lit-erary texts and how they contribute to a sense of global responsibility.Essays range in topic from literature as a living organism to nature as acategory like race, class, and gender. They include discussion of ecocrit-icism and News from Nowhere, Herland, and Men Like Gods; novels andfilms that feature nature, or have an ecocritical or dystopian theme, suchas The Hungry Tide, The Hunter, Shallows, and River Thieves; nature as acultural construct; notions of place; Western dualisms like human versusanimal and man versus nature in books such as The Whale Caller, Foe,and Heart of Darkness; and representations of ecological disasters innovels and films like Frankenstein, Oryx and Crake, The Day AfterTomorrow, and Videodrome. Papers are revised from presentations givenat the nineteenth annual conference of the German Society for the Studyof New English Literatures, held in Jena, Germany, in May 2007.Contributors work in literature, languages, and cultural studies aroundthe world.

PR9080 2009-039370 978-1-4331-0601-9TThhee ppoossttccoolloonniiaall cciittiizzeenn;; tthhee iinntteelllleeccttuuaall mmiiggrraanntt..Dutt-Ballerstadt, Reshmi. (Postcolonial studies; v.3)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 150 p. $67.95Dutt-Ballerstadt (postcolonial literature, creative writing, and genderstudies; Linfield College, Oregon) presents a deliberate multi-genre dis-course containing autobiographical, literary, and theoretical narratives ofdisplacement. Taking South Asians as a case study, she addresses issuesof subjectivity and cultural articulation in intellectual migration, amovement she argues is quite different from other forms of movementthat produce, for example, exiles, nomads, and refugees. Her topicsinclude predicaments for entering and leaving, Meena Alexander’smemoir Fault Lines, questions of belonging in Jhumpa Lahiri’s narra-tives, remapping home, and the irresolution of locations in the questionof returns.

PR9080 978-90-420-2764-0AA sseeaa ffoorr eennccoouunntteerrss;; eessssaayyss ttoowwaarrddss aa ppoossttccoolloonniiaallccoommmmoonnwweeaalltthh..Title main entry. Ed. by Stella Borg Barthet. (Cross/cultures; 117)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 412 p. $119.00Barthet (English, U. of Malta, Malta) presents 28 essays from the March2005 meeting of the European Association for Commonwealth Literatureand Language Studies. The papers are presented in sections entitled“towards a postcolonial commonwealth;” “borders and crossings;” “per-ception, space, and time;” “religion and the sacred;” “history and nar-rative;” and “language and translation.” Specific topics include theoreticaland pedagogical implications of the teaching of African literature in theUK, transcultural outlooks in The Buddha of Suburbia and Some Kind ofBlack, the politics of creolization in Austin Clarke’s Pigtails ‘n Breadfruit,spatial linearity and postcolonial parody in Murray Bail’s Holden’sPerformance, mall and female spaces in Things Fall Apart, the question ofpolitical engagement and Michael Ondaatje’s historiographic metafiction,carnival and drama in the Anglophone Caribbean, and identity andissues of language choice in Malta. More essays from the same con-ference are contained in the 118th volume of the Cross/Culture series,Shared Waters.

PR9080 978-90-420-2766-4SShhaarreedd wwaatteerrss;; ssoouunnddiinnggss iinn ppoossttccoolloonniiaall lliitteerraattuurreess..Title main entry. Ed. by Stella Borg Barthet. (Cross/cultures; 118)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 412 p. $119.00Barthet (English, U. of Malta, Malta) presents 29 essays from the March2005 meeting of the European Association for Commonwealth Literatureand Language Studies. The papers are presented in sections entitled “pro-jecting postcolonialism,” “war and remembrance,” “writing women,”“islands and the sea,” and “shared spaces.” Specific topics include con-solidation and diversity in postcolonial studies, women representing maleviolence in Zimbabwe’s wars, historical trauma in the poetic imaginationof New Zealand, aesthetic (dis)continuities in Nigerian women’s writing,Indian spice shops as gendered diasporic spaces in the novels of Indianwomen writers of the diaspora, women and writing in the novels of TheaAstley, representations of community in Maltese poetry in English,Maltese identity in Edgar Allan Poe’s “The Murders in the Rue Morgue,”and writing second-generation migrant identity in Meera Syal’s fiction.More essays from the same conference are contained in the 117th volumeof the Cross/Cultures series, A Sea for Encounters.

PR9084 2009-005524 978-0-8214-1881-9MMaakkiinngg wwoorrddss mmaatttteerr;; tthhee aaggeennccyy ooff ccoolloonniiaall aannddppoossttccoolloonniiaall lliitteerraattuurree..Hai, Ambreen.Ohio University Press, ©2009 377 p. $26.95 (pa)Hai (English literature and language, Smith College) investigates both themanner in which literature impacts its surrounding world, and—takingKipling and Rushdie as examples—what that impact has been. Amongher topics are Kipling’s stories as inter-racial progeny; the art of empirein Kim; A Passage to India and the language of re-vision; Rushdie’s bodilyidiom; and truth in his storytelling, dreams, and endings. In an epilogue,she looks at the body as the basis for literary agency in South Asia,Africa, and the Caribbean.

PR9084 2009-039584 978-1-4331-0503-6MMiiggrraanntt ffoorrmm;; aannttii--ccoolloonniiaall aaeesstthheettiiccss iinn JJooyyccee,, RRuusshhddiieeaanndd RRaayy..Majumdar, Gaurav. (Postcolonial studies; v.4)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 169 p. $69.95Majumdar (English, Whitman College) examines the work of three verydifferent postcolonial artists: writers James Joyce and Salmon Rushdieand filmmaker Satyajit Ray. He looks at them in terms of an anti-colonialaesthetics in which traditional forms are bent or shattered. As a standardfrom which to deviate, Majumdar selects John Ruskin, the nineteenthcentury arbiter of artistic taste. Ruskin’s belief in a modulated unity inart along with refined British sensibility being the pinnacle of aestheticsis a perfect foil for the iconoclasm of Majumdar’s subjects. Joyce is seenas an example of indecorous partiality and unsanctioned language.Rushdie demonstrates a “non-narcissistic gesture” and the “shock of thegrotesque”. The films by Ray show a “figural wandering”. All of theseredefine the aesthetic into something not bound by national strictures, atruly migrant form.

PR9185 2009-006395 978-0-87013-861-4EEmmiiggrraattiioonn,, nnaattiioonn,, vvooccaattiioonn;; tthhee lliitteerraattuurree ooff EEnngglliisshheemmiiggrraattiioonn ttoo CCaannaaddaa,, 11882255--11990000..Hanson, Carter F.Michigan State U. Press, ©2009 194 p. $29.95 (pa)Seeking to understand the complexity of colonial settlement beyond gen-eralizations about imperialism, Hanson (English, Valparaiso U., Indiana)traces the rise and decline of an ideology of work, the “landed vocation,”that emerged as a theme in English fiction about the immigrant expe-rience in Victorian-era Canada. Reading well-known texts by CatharineParr Traill and Susanna Moodie as well as less-known texts by authorsincluding John Mackie and Mrs. H.B. King, he examines middle-classemigrants’ ambivalence over attempts to transplant the English classsystem and its evolution into more individualistic and gender-specificpostcolonial literary images.

PR9205 2009-019898 978-0-8014-4814-0CCaarriibbbbeeaann mmiiddddlleebbrrooww;; lleeiissuurree ccuullttuurree aanndd tthhee mmiiddddlleeccllaassss..Edmondson, Belinda.Cornell U. Press, ©2009 223 p. $45.00Edmondson (English and African American and African studies, RutgersU.-Newark) tells the story of leisure culture in the Anglophone Caribbeanfor the past 150 years as a story of the nascent and aspiring black middleclass striving to reconcile their origins in black-identified culture, withaspirations for social ascendance and international recognition. Most ofthe many studies of the emerging black and brown middle class in theCaribbean tell it as politics, and she traces the parallel culturaldimension. Among her topics are early literary cultures, brownness andsocial desire, gentrifying dialect, the politics of beauty, organic imports,and new pop fiction.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –274–

We're always delighted to hear from our readers. Contact us at (503) 281-9230 or booknews@booknews.com.

PR9340 2009046260 978-1-60497-664-9EEmmeerrggiinngg AAffrriiccaann vvooiicceess;; aa ssttuuddyy ooff ccoonntteemmppoorraarryyAAffrriiccaann lliitteerraattuurree..Title main entry. Ed. by Walter P. Collins.Cambria Press, ©2010 335 p. $119.99Collins (French and English, University of South Carolina, Lancaster)found while teaching a class on contemporary African literature thatthere was almost no critical analysis of most of the novels and poetry hehad assigned. Therefore, he assembled this collection of comments onwriting by twenty-first century authors who grew up in a post-colonialAfrica. Some of those discussed live in Africa, primarily Senegal, Nigeriaand South Africa, but others are part of the African diaspora. The criticswere free to choose any approach; the only requirement was that theydiscuss their author in terms of how these “new writers reinscribe andrefocus traditional African texts....” (p.3) The contributors also addressissues of the colonial past, globalization and traditional literary formsand values. The fact that all the authors studied write in English orFrench is commented upon, either as appropriation of the colonialculture or as a subversion of it. This volume will serve as an introductionto talented new authors as well as a new trend in African literature.

PR9381 2009-027381 978-0-7546-5825-2NNgguuggii wwaa TThhiioonngg’’oo,, ggeennddeerr,, aanndd tthhee eetthhiiccss ooff ppoossttccoolloonniiaallrreeaaddiinngg..Nicholls, Brendon.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 213 p. $99.95Nicholls (English, University of Leeds) considers the evolution of thework of male Gikuyu author Ngugi wa Thiong’o in terms of the womenhe presents. Nicholls feels that in the early books women appeared assymbols of colonial oppression, a landscape fought over by men. In laterbooks, the practice of female circumcision becomes a metaphor for thetriumph of Gikuyu national customs and the rise of the post-colonialstate, from which women are still excluded. As Nicholls follows Ngugi’smetamorphosis to his most recent book, he notes the change in theauthor’s political views and in his female characters. They go from beingvoiceless representations of concepts to genuine characters who interactwith men on an equal basis. This is both a literary history and a dis-cussion of how Ngugi’s novels are inseparable from the history of Kenya.

PR9485 2009-018362 978-1-4331-0631-6IInnddiiaann wwrriitteerrss;; ttrraannssnnaattiioonnaalliissmmss aanndd ddiiaassppoorraass..Title main entry. Ed. by Jaspal K. Singh and Rajendra Chetty.(Postcolonial studies; v.5)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 189 p. $76.95Singh (English, Northern Michigan U.) and Chetty (education, CapePeninsula U. of Technology, South Africa) present 12 essays on writers ofthe Indian diaspora. The diasporic experience is the thematic focus of theessays, particularly in relation to such issues as cultural identity andauthenticity, the impact of location on the reception of the writers, andhow the subaltern or “other” is represented and read. Among the writersdiscussed are Jhumpa Lahiri, Imraan Coovadia, Amitav Ghosh, MiraKamdar, Bharati Mukherjee, Meena Alexander, Aziz Hassim, and SalmanRushdie.

PR9492 2009-035234 978-1-933146-77-5BBrriittiisshh nnoovveelliissttss aanndd IInnddiiaann nnaattiioonnaalliissmm;; ccoonnttrraassttiinnggaapppprrooaacchheess iinn tthhee wwoorrkkss ooff MMaarryy MMaarrggaarreett KKaayyee,, JJaammeessGGoorrddoonn FFaarrrreellll aanndd ZZaaddiiee SSmmiitthh..Kalpakli, Fatma.Academica Press, LLC, ©2010 232 p. $79.95This work explores changes in British writers’ attitudes towards Indiannationalism between 1957 and 2000 through readings of Indian andEnglish characters’ attitudes toward Indian nationalism—and related cri-teria such as race, class, gender, religion, region, education, and age—inthree novels: Mary Margaret Kaye’s Shadow of the Moon (1957), JamesGordon Farrell’s The Siege of Krishnapur (1973), and Zadie Smith’s WhiteTeeth (2000).

PR9639 978-90-420-2676-6FFrraammeewwoorrkkss;; ccoonntteemmppoorrttaarryy ccrriittiicciissmm oonn JJaanneett FFrraammee..Title main entry. Ed. by Jan Cronin and Simone Drichel. (Cross/cul-tures; 110)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 227 p. $70.00Edited by Cronin (English, U. of Auckland, New Zealand) and Drichel(English, U. of Otago, New Zealand), this is the first collection of criticismexamining the writings of New Zealand author Janet Frame (1924-2004)since a 1993 special issue of the Journal of New Zealand Literature. It con-tains nine essays that illustrate current directions in the critical study ofFrame’s writings. Topics include radical narcissism and intertextuality inIntensive Care and Daughter Buffalo, self possession and Frame’s autobi-ography, Janet Frame and existential thought, the metaphysics of Frame’spoetry, aesthetic and political violence in Frame’s work, symbolicexchange and seduction in Living in Maniototo and The Carpathians, andFrame and ethical transcendence.

AAMMEERRIICCAANN LLIITTEERRAATTUURREE

PS144 2009-041239 978-0-8156-3236-8AAmmeerriiccaann wwrriitteerrss iinn IIssttaannbbuull;; MMeellvviillllee,, TTwwaaiinn,,HHeemmiinnggwwaayy,, DDooss PPaassssooss,, BBoowwlleess,, AAllggrreenn,, BBaallddwwiinn,, aannddSSeettttllee..Fortuny, Kim.Syracuse U. Press, ©2009 260 p. $34.95Fortuny (English, Bogazici University, Istanbul) looks at how Istanbulwas viewed by American writers from Herman Melville to Mary LeeSettle. It is her contention that even the most apparently open minds sawthe city through a cultural haze that had been formed by centuries ofstereotyping of the Turkish/Ottoman society and character. Each chapterfocuses on the experience of a different writer. Some came as tourists,like Melville and Twain. Others, such as Hemingway and James Baldwin,stayed for a time. Before analyzing their comments on Istanbul, Fortunyestablishes a background for the writers along with their reasons forcoming to the city. Many of the chapters offer interesting insights onrarely studied influences on the authors in question. She points out pas-sages in their work that have echoes of their visits. However, the under-lying theme remains the perpetuation of myths about Istanbul that werecreated before America was colonized and still refuse to die.

PS153 2009043496 978-0-8204-8637-6BBllaacckk oouuttllaawwss;; rraaccee,, llaaww,, aanndd mmaallee ssuubbjjeeccttiivviittyy iinn AAffrriiccaannAAmmeerriiccaann lliitteerraattuurree aanndd ccuullttuurree..Van Thompson, Carlyle. (African American literature and culture; v.13)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 215 p. $32.95 (pa)Thompson (African American and American Literature, City Universityof New York) examines the relationship between Black males in the U.S.and a legal establishment designed to maintain white supremacy andwhite male privilege. By looking at the challenges faced by the protago-nists in four novels—Richard Wright’s The Outsider, , Walter Mosley’sDevil in a Blue Dress, Ernest J. Gaines’ A Lesson Before Dying, and ChesterBomar Himes’ The Third Generation, the author both how Black men’slives are affected by legal and extralegal restrictions based on race.

PS153 2009-017905 978-1-4384-2996-0BByy tthhee bbrreeaatthh ooff tthheeiirr mmoouutthhss;; nnaarrrraattiivveess ooff rreessiissttaannccee iinnIIttaalliiaann AAmmeerriiccaa..Bona, Mary Jo. (Suny series in Italian/American culture)State U. of New York Pr., ©2010 302 p. $24.95 (pa)Bringing a range of insights from cultural studies, as well as recent the-ories of autobiography and narrative, to bear on subaltern voices withinItalian American literature, Bona (Italian American studies, State U. ofNew York at Stony Brook) explores how folkloric and postcolonial dis-courses work to create alternative meanings and spaces to dominant lit-erary and historical expression. Over the course of six chapters, shediscusses voices of justice in response to failures of the law to supportimmigrant Italians, voices of women’s faith in resistance to institution-alized Catholicism and in sympathy with Italian folk religious beliefs, thevoice of the village ancestor in the novels of Guido D’Agostino, the biog-raphical voice of Rosa Cassettari and the transmission of oral culture,and the folkloric voices of female ancestors in cross-cultural conversationin novels by Italian Americans and African Americans.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–275–

PS153 978-90-420-2783-1CChheewwiinngg oovveerr tthhee WWeesstt;; oocccciiddeennttaall nnaarrrraattiivveess iinn nnoonn--WWeesstteerrnn rreeaaddiinnggss..Title main entry. Ed. by Doris Jedamski. (Cross cultures; no.119)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 406 p. $123.00The idea within postcolonial studies of “writing back,” while certainlyvaluable, has been limited in its general focus of former colonial subjectswriting back to the former colonial power, usually in the latter’s lan-guage, argues Jedamski (U. of Leiden, the Netherlands), who instead sees“writing back” as more than mere counter-action aimed at the “Center,”but rather as a multi-layered process of self-articulation that redefinesSelf and Other, questions cultural and political demarcation lines, ofteninvolves more than two parties, and does not necessarily target thecolonial culture. One part of this complex process of “writing back”—theways in which postcolonial Asian, African, and Arab writers selected,appropriated, and utilized Western literary or linguistic elements for theirown purposes—provides the thematic unifier for the 14 essays shepresents here.

PS153 2009-015786 978-0-7546-6198-6TThhee ccoollllaaggee aaeesstthheettiicc iinn tthhee HHaarrlleemm RReennaaiissssaannccee..Farebrother, Rachel.Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2009 219 p. $99.95Farebrother (American studies, U. of Swansea, Wales) analyzes historical,aesthetic, and political aspects of juxtaposition and stylistic incongruitydeployed by Harlem Renaissance writers Alain Locke, Zora NealeHurston, and Jean Toomer. Other scholars have noted this collage aes-thetic in the journal The New Negro, where pages combined text andvisual art, but she finds the same pattern within pure text as well.Among her topics are Boasian anthropology and the HarlemRenaissance, culture citizenship in The New Negro, Toomer’s Cane,Hurston’s cross-cultural aesthetic, and her textual synthesis in Jonah’sGourd Vine and Moses, Man of the Mountain.

PS153 2008-048064 978-0-8135-4572-1HHoommeeccoommiinngg qquueeeerrss;; ddeessiirree aanndd ddiiffffeerreennccee iinn CChhiiccaannaaLLaattiinnaa ccuullttuurraall pprroodduuccttiioonn..Danielson, Marivel T. (Latinadad; transnational cultures in the UnitedStates)Rutgers U. Press, ©2009 219 p. $23.95 (pa)Danielson (Literature and Cultural Studies, Arizona State University)examines strategies that queer Latina authors and artists use to fashionhome spaces, and to challenge their invisibility in mainstream media,theater, and literature. Through analysis of the works of Marga Gomez,Achy Obejas, Carla Trujillo, and others, the book reveals how identityhas affected their creative expression. Given the importance and time-liness of the topic, it’s unfortunate that Danielson’s heavy reliance onacademese will limit the readership of her book to a specialist audience.

PS153 2009-036728 978-1-4331-0875-4MMooddeerrnn aanndd ppoossttmmooddeerrnn nnaarrrraattiivveess ooff rraaccee,, ggeennddeerr,, aannddiiddeennttiittyy;; tthhee ddeesscceennddaannttss ooff TThhoommaass JJeeffffeerrssoonn aanndd SSaallllyyHHeemmiinnggss..Ishida, Yoriko. (Modern American literature: new approaches; v.53)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 269 p. $78.95Pivoting on the widespread belief that there are living descendants of adaughter that the Founding Father fathered on his slave Hemings, Ishida(English, Oshima National College of Maritime Technology, Japan)explores literary and historical narratives about race and gender in theUS. Her topics include race relations and gender conventions in BarbaraChase-Riboud’s Sally Hemings, the tradition of the tragic mulatta in theantebellum South, the body and soul of Harriet Hemings as a Hemingswoman, and the pride and identity of the Woodson family in MinnieShumate Woodson’s The Sable Curtain.

PS153 2009-014698 978-0-87013-841-6SSttoorriieess tthhrroouugghh tthheeoorriieess//tthheeoorriieess tthhrroouugghh ssttoorriieess;; NNoorrtthhAAmmeerriiccaann IInnddiiaann wwrriittiinngg,, ssttoorryytteelllliinngg,, aanndd ccrriittiiqquuee..Title main entry. Ed. by Gordon D. Henry, Jr. et al. (American Indianstudies series)Michigan State U. Press, ©2009 327 p. $34.95 (pa)The essays in this collection examine the uneasy relationship betweenAmerican Indian literature and literary theory. Contributors take avariety of approaches, some subjecting American Indian narratives totheoretical critique based on “western depth models,” while others findcritique in storytelling and processes of narrative production, therebyexposing dimensions of literary theory that grow from the indigenousground of Native stories themselves. This book will appeal mainly toscholars of Native literature.

PS153 978-1-55753-562-7SSttuuddiieess iinn AAmmeerriiccaann JJeewwiisshh lliitteerraattuurree;; vv..2288 22000099:: TThhee eeddggeeooff tthhee cceenntteerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Daniel Walden. (SAJL; v.28)Purdue University Press, ©2010 117 p. $22.00 (pa)Excerpts from an interview of Chaim Potok by Walden (PennsylvaniaState U.) introduce the concept of American Jewish culture as being in-between Jewish tradition and Western humanism. Nine articles focus onhow this theme of the off- centeredness of choices, current events (e.g.,9/11), and God is treated in the writings and lives of authors includingCynthia Ozick’s Heir to the Glimmering World, Lynn Sharon Schwartz’sThe Writing on the Wall, Arthur A Cohen’s In the Days of Simon Stern, andElie Wiesel’s an other Holocaust literature. The issue also features reviewsand notes on new books.

PS153 2009-023626 978-0-8139-2883-8TTrraauummaattiicc ppoosssseessssiioonnss;; tthhee bbooddyy aanndd mmeemmoorryy iinn AAffrriiccaannAAmmeerriiccaann wwoommeenn’’ss wwrriittiinngg aanndd ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee..Griffiths, Jennifer L.U. of Virginia Press, ©2009 134 p. $19.50 (pa)Griffiths (English, New York Institute of Technology, Manhattan) looks athow African American writers and playwrights have explored rupturesin memory after a traumatic experience and attempted to develop cre-ative strategies for understanding the inscription of trauma on the bodyin a racialized cultural context. By examining several literary and per-formance texts, the author shows how the self is reconstituted throughtestimony—the putting into language and public statement the struggle ofsurvivors to negotiate the limits placed on their bodies and speak con-troversial truths. By focusing on the relation of trauma to race and onthe influence of racism on the creation and reception of narrative tes-timony, Griffiths’ book distinguishes itself from other studies of the lit-eratures of trauma.

PS153 2009-012627 978-0-8166-6508-2UUnnffaasstteenneedd;; gglloobbaalliittyy aanndd AAssiiaann NNoorrtthh AAmmeerriiccaannnnaarrrraattiivveess..Ty, Eleanor.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 175 p. $22.50 (pa)Ty (English and film studies, Wilfrid Laurier U., Ontario) looks at howrecent novels, plays, and films by Asian North Americans engage criti-cally with globalization. She shows how their works reveal an acuteawareness of the inequalities that have resulted from the globalization ofmarkets, of the overuse and misuse of the environment and naturalresources, and of the consequences of the breakdown in national geo-graphical or spatial limit. Her topics include Asian sex workers and theunderside of nation building, feminist subversions in comedy and thecarnivalesque, shape-shifters and disciplined bodies, and desire andregeneration in Japanese North American literature.

PS153 2009-023999 978-1-84310-913-6WWrriitteerrss oonn tthhee ssppeeccttrruumm;; hhooww aauuttiissmm aanndd AAssppeerrggeerrSSyynnddrroommee hhaavvee iinnfflluueenncceedd lliitteerraarryy wwrriittiinngg..Brown, Julie.Jessica Kingsley Pub., ©2010 236 p. $54.95 (pa)Brown serves as an academic advisor for autistic individuals at ClatsopCommunity College in Astoria, Oregon, and teaches a course shedeveloped on autism in literature. Here, she identifies well-knownauthors whose work and lives display characteristics of autistic spectrumdisorder (ASD), including Hans Christian Andersen, Emily Dickinson,Lewis Carroll, and Sherwood Anderson. She also provides an overview ofASD, and an introduction on how ASD affects writers in general, andcollege writing students in particular. The book’s readership includesgeneral readers and professionals with an interest in literature or theautistic mind.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –276–

PS169 2009-020830 978-0-8387-5754-3SSoonnss aanndd ddaauugghhtteerrss ooff sseellff--mmaaddee mmeenn;; iimmpprroovviissiinnggggeennddeerr,, ppllaaccee,, nnaattiioonn iinn AAmmeerriiccaann lliitteerraattuurree..Carden, Mary Paniccia.Bucknell University Pr., ©2010 255 p. $56.50Standing at the beginning and center of American national identity is themythologized figure of the self-made man, says Carden (English,Edinboro U., Pennsylvania), which she noticed at an early age excludesher, but not just her, and not just women. She argues that though the dis-course of self-making proclaims itself available to all, it posits an impos-sible standard of Americanness, a standard that cannot be met byanyone, and so withholds its rewards even from those subjects who seempositioned as its heirs and beneficiaries. She discusses self-making andself-improvisation; paternal erotics of place in Faulkner, Welty, andMorrison; un-make children in Petry, Ellison, and Boyle; alternativeplaces in Cather, Smiley, and Faulkner; and self-improvisation inCisneros, Wideman, and Morrison.

PS217 2008-055818 978-0-8047-6083-6BBoohheemmiiaa iinn AAmmeerriiccaa,, 11885588--11992200..Levin, Joanna.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 469 p. $65.00Literary historians have minimized the role of “Bohemia” in the U.S.during the 19th century, considering Bohemianism to be important onlyafter it exploded in Greenwich Village in the 1910s. Levin (English andComparative Literature, Chapman College) takes a contrary stance, sug-gesting that the popularity and geographic spread of Bohemianismmakes it more than just a weak American imitation of the Frenchoriginal. Looking at its various manifestations in popular culture, theauthor follows Bohemianism from its first appearance in the U.S. untilits full flowering in Greenwich Village, examining the ways in whichBohemians situated themselves both within and without America.

PS228 2009-022561 978-1-57233-686-5AAnnddrrooggyynnoouuss ddeemmooccrraaccyy;; mmooddeerrnn AAmmeerriiccaann lliitteerraattuurree aannddtthhee dduuaall--sseexxeedd bbooddyy ppoolliittiicc..Shaheen, Aaron.U. of Tennessee Press, ©2010 182 p. $45.95Shaheen (English, U. of Tennessee-Chattanooga) begins by uncovering theearly 19th-century Romantic roots of androgyny in the US, then looks atits appearance in various writers and contexts. He discusses race, sex-ology, and the modern women in Henry James’ postbellum America;reformulating the modern liberal subject in Frank Norris and CharlottePerkins Gilman; Southerner conservative poet-critic John Crowe Ransomand Southern proletarian novelist Grace Lumpkin assess the Depression-era body politic; and race, gender, and democratic space in W. E. B. DuBois and Marita Bonner. The study originated as his doctoral dissertationfor the University of Florida, for which no date is cited.

PS228 978-90-420-2930-9DDoo yyoouu ffeeeell iitt ttoooo??;; tthhee ppoosstt--ppoossttmmooddeerrnn ssyynnddrroommee iinnAAmmeerriiccaann ffiiccttiioonn aatt tthhee ttuurrnn ooff tthhee mmiilllleennnniiuumm..Timmer, Nicoline. (Postmodern studies; 44)Editions Rodopi, ©2010 388 p. $110.60 (pa)As a cluster of ideas and assumptions, contends Dutch critic Timmer,postmodern thinking and writings functions as a background, or cul-tural setting in many texts of the current generation of fiction writers,and that against this background a new sense of self is becoming man-ifest. She closely analyzes David Foster Wallace’s 1996 Infinite Jest, DaveEggers’ 2000 A Heartbreaking Work of Staggering Genius, and MarkDanielewski’s 2000 House of Leaves, pointing out how they deal with aperceived lack of decision-making tools, difficulty locating and appropri-ating emotions, and the need for connection and society.

PS323 2009-015686 978-0-415-80122-5EEtthhiiccss aanndd ppoolliittiiccss iinn mmooddeerrnn AAmmeerriiccaann ppooeettrryy..Wrighton, John. (Literary criticism and cultural theory)Routledge, ©2010 222 p. $103.00Conducting readings of works by American poets Charles Olson, GarySnyder, Allen Ginsberg, Jerome Rothenberg, and Bruce Andrews (part ofa strand of 20th century works dubbed here as the “poethical tra-jectory”), the author explores the political ethics of poetry through a lensenabled by the moral philosophy of Emannuel Levinas as presented inTotality and Infinity. The discussion proceeds thematically, addressing inturn the political concerns of capitalist de-humanization, environmentalconsciousness, ethnic minorities, and (perhaps most importantly) lan-guage. The readings are conducted in reference to the “traumatised semi-otics” that are phenomenologically implied by Levinas, wherein iflanguage is employed as constructive of self-identity, it is a violation ofour being, because our being is only realized in the presence of theOther.

PS374 2009-008566 978-0-415-99630-3CChhiillddrreenn’’ss ffiiccttiioonn aabboouutt 99//1111;; eetthhnniicc,, hheerrooiicc aanndd nnaattiioonnaalliiddeennttiittiieess..Lampert, Jo. (Children’s literature and culture; 65)Routledge, ©2010 204 p. $118.00Lampert (cultural and language studies, Queensland U. of Technology,Australia) explores some of the shifts in the performance of ethnic,national, and related heroic identities in children’s literature since theattacks on US corporate and military targets in September 2001, asevinced by books for young people about the events themselves.Historical events generally take a generation to appear in children’s liter-ature, she says, until people who were children at the time grow up andwrite books for children. However books about 9/11 began almost imme-diately. Though she does consider books from Canada, Australia, andBritain, most of the literature is American, and so also her focus.

PS374 2009-010590 978-1-57233-681-0MMeellaanncchhoolliiaa aanndd mmaattuurraattiioonn;; tthhee uussee ooff ttrraauummaa iinnAAmmeerriiccaann cchhiillddrreenn’’ss lliitteerraattuurree..Tribunella, Eric L.U. of Tennessee Press, ©2010 161 p. $42.00Tribunella (English, U. of Southern Mississippi) argues that within 20thcentury American literature for youth a strikingly recurrent themeinvolves the child-protagonist’s irrevocable loss of a loved object (a friend,a dog named Old Yeller, an ideal, etc.) and subsequent maturationthrough the traumatic experience of love and loss. He addresses the cul-tural significance of this theme, applying insights from queer theory con-cerning normativity and normative development, as well as culturallysanctioned and prescribed subjectivities, particularly of gender and sex-uality. He also employs concepts from trauma theory (from within thehumanities), which offer a framework for understanding trauma as cul-tural discourse and mechanism for constructing and disciplining socialsubjects.

PS374 2009-007380 978-1-4384-2903-8PPoolliicciinngg nnaarrrraattiivveess aanndd tthhee ssttaattee ooff tteerrrroorr..Goodman, Robin Truth.State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 211 p. $70.00Goodman (English, Florida State U.) offers an exploration of how the lit-erature of domestic policing influences international politics with a par-ticular focus on the connection established by the police between thestate, capital, and legitimate violence and between the police and racialinequalities. To illustrate the book’s context, the author notes that sincethe terror attacks of 9/11, “...world politics increasingly takes the form ofa detective novel.” It is a wide-ranging examination, taking on U.S. mil-itary and contractor conduct in the Iraq War, feminism, a general loss ofconfidence in police agencies, and a variety of philosophical explorationsof related issues.

PS509 2009-017241 978-0-8165-2793-9FFiirree aanndd iinnkk;; aann aanntthhoollooggyy ooff ssoocciiaall aaccttiioonn wwrriittiinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Frances Payne Adler et al.U. of Arizona Press, ©2009 460 p. $32.95 (pa)This is an anthology of “social action writing,” which is defined by theeditors as “a form of critical inquiry and an act of social responsibility”that “speaks out against social injustice and refuses to acquiesce to thetyranny of silence.” The anthology includes short stories, poems, andessays by, and interviews with, such figures as Martín Espada, AdrienneRich, June Jordan, Gloria Anzadúa, Alice Walker, Dennis Brutus, andCarolyn Forché, among many others. The writings address the politics ofvoice and language; issues of self-identity; issues of race, class, andgender; labor rights; the environment, illness, and health; prisons andprison rights; war and other forms of violence; peace and non-violence;and the role of writing in social change.

PS648 978-0-907871-59-0HHoonneeyymmoooonnss;; jjoouurrnneeyyss ffrroomm tthhee aallttaarr..Title main entry. Ed. by Roger Hudson and Rose Baring.Eland Publishing, ©2009 2009 p. $33.95From honeymoon bliss and journeys to wedding-night confessions anddisasters, publishers Hudson (who honeymooned in Italy long ago) andBaring (who spent part of her honeymoon with her in- laws) compile ananthology of a wide range of annotated fictional, poetical, and autobio-graphical views of this experience that often entails so much baggage—literally and figuratively. Works by classic authors include those ofCollette, Charles Dickens, Mary Shelley, and Leo Tolstoy. Among the con-temporary authors featured are Graham Greene, Earnest Hemingway,Ted Hughes, and Carol Shields. Distributed by Dufour.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–277–

PS668 978-0-8242-1093-9RReepprreesseennttaattiivvee AAmmeerriiccaann ssppeeeecchheess,, 22000088--22000099..Title main entry. Ed. by Brian Boucher. (The reference shelf; v.81, no.6)H.W. Wilson Company, ©2009 215 p. $50.00 (pa)The latest issue in a long running series, this volume collects the full textof 22 American political speeches delivered over the past year, each pre-ceded by a brief editor’s introduction. Categories in this issue are: a newpresidential administration, the future of journalism and the media, theenergy crisis, the auto industry, and the American city. The speechesinclude President Obama’s inaugural address; Secretary of State HillaryClinton’s address on foreign policy at the Council on Foreign Relations;David Simon’s testimony on the future of journalism before the U.S.Senate; and Joan Claybrook’s testimony on energy independence andglobal warming. This volume lacks a subject index, but contains a cumu-lative speaker index from 2000-2009, and an index of the names of indi-viduals mentioned in the speeches.

PS752 2009-026435 978-1-58765-640-8BBeennjjaammiinn FFrraannkklliinn..Title main entry. Ed. by Jack Lynch. (Critical insights)Salem Press, ©2010 320 p. $85.00Lynch (English, Rutgers U.) assembles 14 critical essays on BenjaminFranklin by a group of American and European scholars of English,writing, literature, medicine, and psychology. Along with essays onFranklin’s biography, a chronology, and list of works, the volume looksat his life, work, and legacy from a variety of perspectives. Essays discusshis early career as a printer; his career in comparison to novelistLaurence Sterne; his principles concerning freedom of the press; the intel-lectual, social and cultural context of his life; critical reception of hisworks; the place of fatherhood in his autobiography; the reactions ofFitzgerald, Hemingway, and Wright to his legacy; his work in medicalelectricity as a precursor to electroshock therapy; his short work “TheElysian Fields”; his memoir; and other topics.

PS1097 2009-010600 978-1-57233-680-3AAmmbbrroossee BBiieerrccee aanndd tthhee ddaannccee ooff ddeeaatthh..Talley, Sharon.U. of Tennessee Press, ©2009 160 p. $42.00Though Bierce (1842-1914?) rarely invoked the venerable allusion of thedance of death directly, Talley (English, Texas A&M U.-Corpus Christi)finds his writings so replete with themes and images of violent deaththat by themselves they comprise a dance in which death is the leadingparticipant. A specialist in 19th-century American literature, she arguesthat though the Civil War was the pivotal event in his life, it cannot byitself account for the pervasive and complex motif throughout his work.Her exploration of the question leads through such topics as tales ofterror from In the Midst of Life, facing death in his early Civil Warwritings, tales of suicidal war heroes, and “Phantoms of a Blood-StainedPeriod” and post-traumatic stress disorder. The final irony, of course isthat there is no evidence that he himself ever died.

PS1418 2009-043175 978-0-404-64466-6TThhee wwaatteerr--wwiittcchh;; oorr,, TThhee sskkiimmmmeerr ooff tthhee sseeaass..Cooper, James Fenimore. Ed. by Thomas Philbrick and MariannePhilbrick.AMS Press, ©2010 645 p. $197.50American Romantic writer Cooper (1780-1851) was living in Florence in1829 when he embarked on this nautical tale, set in New York harborsome half century before US independence. Having collaborated on a2004 two-volume edition of Cooper’s Afloat and Ashore, Thomas andMarianne Philbrick here present a historical introduction and supportingmaterials as well as the text based on the extant holography at the Yalelibrary and the amanuensis text at the University of Virginia library.Among the material are prefaces from 1830, 1834, and 1851; explanatorynotes; textual notes and commentary; a note on the manuscripts; emen-dations; rejected readings; and word-division.

PS1449 2009-024133 978-0-89263-016-5TThhee bbllaacckk rriiddeerrss aanndd ootthheerr lliinneess.. FFaaccssiimmiillee eedd..Crane, Stephen. (Literature by design: British and American books1889-1930)Rice University Press, ©2009 113 p. $34.34This volume consists of a facsimile of the original 1895 edition of StephenCrane’s collection of poems, The Black Riders and other lines, the firstAmerican book to be printed with a Modernist design that the publisherCopeland and Day devised to echo the sense of the text. It includes anafterword by literature scholar Jerome McGann (U. of Virginia) on thepoetry, its presentation, and the state of the publishing industry in the1890s.

PS3505 2009-025765 978-0-8263-4760-2TThhee lliiffee aanndd wwrriittiinngg ooff FFrraayy AAnnggéélliiccoo CChháávveezz;; aa NNeewwMMeexxiiccoo RReennaaiissssaannccee mmaann..McCracken, Ellen. (Paso por aqui series on the Nuevomexicano literaryheritage)U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 460 p. $42.95McCracken (Spanish and comparative Latino/a literature, U. of California-Santa Barbara) draws from the full biography of Chávez (1910-96) tosample the vast intellectual production of his nearly seven-decade career.He was a historian, painter, creative writer, and preservationist, she says,as well as the first native New Mexican ordained a Franciscan priestduring the centuries the order has been present in the area. She tracesthe interplay of his endeavors and beliefs through major stages of his life,among them hybrid identity in the early cultural production, art in theface of death in World War II and beyond, revisionist history, the his-torian’s return to art and literature, and vindicating Hispano clergy.

PS3509 2009-027644 978-0-8047-5090-5TThhee ccoolllleecctteedd ppooeemmss ooff LLaarrrryy EEiiggnneerr;; 44vv..Eigner, Larry. Ed. by Curtis Faville and Robert Grenier.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 1836 p. $150.00Four volumes preserve a lifetime of work by American poet Larry Eigner(1927-1996), scrupulously, lovingly presented in facsimile so as to losenone of the poet’s mastery of the way words appear on pages producedwith a manual typewriter. Over the course of a lifetime, Eigner experi-mented with and exquisitely mastered a combination of the visual andaural dimensions of letters, words, groups of words—bringing themtogether to perfectly convey experiences, ideas, and meaning. Readerspreviously unaware of Eigner, whose work appeared in numerous mag-azines and books beginning in the 1950s, will delight in making hisacquaintance; those familiar with his work will know without intro-duction the value of this collection. A longtime friend who workedclosely with Eigner in the preparation of his oeuvre, editor Grenier(himself a poet and teacher) and his family were also intimately involvedfor almost 10 years with Eigner’s caretaking (Eigner was severely physi-cally limited by cerebral palsy, and they shared a house in Berkeley,California). Grenier combined efforts with editor Faville—among otheractivities, a publisher who also had a long-time affiliation with Eigner.

PS3511 2009-042753 978-1-4128-1071-5CCoonnvveerrssaattiioonnss wwiitthh RRoobbeerrtt FFrroosstt;; tthhee BBrreeaadd LLooaaffppeerriioodd..((rreepprriinntt,, 11997788))Stanlis, Peter J.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 128 p. $24.95 (pa)Stanlis (emeritus humanities, Rockford College, Illinois) engagedAmerican poet Frost (1874-1963) in conversation many times in manyplaces during their 23-year friendship, and leading eventually to his 2007biography. The ones summarized here took place at the Broad LoafGraduate School of English in Vermont during the summers of 1939,1940, and 1941. An introductory chapter recounts how he got there andmet Frost. Originally published in Frost: Centennial Essays III by theUniversity of Mississippi Press. No index is provided.

PS3511 2009-026346 978-1-58765-608-8TThhee ggrreeaatt GGaattssbbyy,, bbyy FF.. SSccootttt FFiittzzggeerraalldd..Title main entry. Ed. by Morris Dickstein. (Critical insights)Salem Press, ©2010 291 p. $85.00Dickstein (English, City U. of New York) presents a collection of essayson The Great Gatsby, which begins with pieces which place the novel inthe context of the Jazz Age and discuss its favorable critical reception bywriters such as Gertrude Stein and Ernest Hemingway, as well as the lackof interest among the general public when the novel was first published.Other essays include a critical overview of the book, and several whichfocus on specific aspects of criticism, such as an analysis of Fitzgerald’snarration, the influence of photography on characters in the novel, andthe use of color symbolism.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –278–

PS3515 2009-017185 978-0-8386-4254-2HHoommoo aammeerriiccaannuuss;; EErrnneesstt HHeemmiinnggwwaayy,, TTeennnneesssseeeeWWiilllliiaammss,, aanndd qquueeeerr mmaassccuulliinniittiieess..Bak, John S.Fairleigh Dickinson U.P., ©2010 306 p. $65.00Bak (American literature, Nancy-U., France) explores the notion that het-eromasculine novelist Hemingway (1899-1961) and homoeffeminate play-wright Williams (1911-83) might actually have influenced each other’swork, engaging literarily in a conversation that never took place in theflesh. His topics include queer masculinities in Williams’ Cat andHemingway’s Sun, the signifying phallus and Williams’ “Three Players ofa Summer Game,” Cold War masculinity and homosexual existentialism,and Scott and Hemingway’s gender trouble in Williams’ Clothes for aSummer Hotel. Distributed in the US by Associated University Presses.

PS3521 2009-048977 978-0-8156-0948-3MMiissssiinngg aa bbeeaatt;; tthhee rraannttss aanndd rreeggrreettss ooff SSeeyymmoouurr KKrriimm..Krim, Seymour. Ed. by Mark Cohen. (Judaic traditions in literature,music, and art)Syracuse U. Press, ©2010 236 p. $29.95Despite the revival of interest in Beat Generation writers of the pastdecade or so, the innovative work of Seymour Krim has, until now, beenlargely forgotten. This book corrects that situation, collecting eighteen ofessays worth of Krim’s “Jewish New Journalism,” blending fact, fiction,and jazzy prose with a distinctively Jewish sensibility. Originallyappearing in the Village Voice, New York magazine, the New York Timesand elsewhere between the late 1950s and late 1980s, these essays will bea revelation to those familiar with Beat writings, and likely to manyreaders who are not. Brief introductions by editor Mark Cohen set eachessay into historical and biographical context.

PS3523 2009044022 978-0-7864-3336-0LLoouuiiss LL’’AAmmoouurr oonn ffiillmm aanndd tteelleevviissiioonn..Andreychuk, Ed.McFarland & Co., ©2010 196 p. $49.95 (pa)Andreychuk surveys the many movies and television programs andseries based on novels and short stories by the US western writer. Heexplains that L’Amour (1908-88) actually lived in the places he wrote, anddid the kind of work his characters did, so his writing has an authen-ticity that other fiction does not. Entries include date, producer, dis-tributor, running time, credits, synopsis, original source, plotline, andcommentary. Black and white stills and publicity photographsaccompany most of the entries.

PS3551 2009-047269 978-0-7864-3401-5EEddwwaarrdd AAllbbeeee;; aa lliitteerraarryy ccoommppaanniioonn..Dircks, Phyllis T. (McFarland literary companions; 7)McFarland & Co., ©2010 173 p. $39.95 (pa)Dircks (English, Long Island U.) provides a companion to the works ofplaywright Edward Albee (b. 1928) for students, teachers, librarians,researchers, and playgoers that contains about 100 analytical and inter-pretive entries on each of his plays and major characters, as well as achronology of his life and works, suggested research topics, and in theappendix, excerpts from interviews on his views on playwriting. Playsdiscussed include All Over, The American Dream, The Lady from Dubuque,Me, Myself and I, and Who’s Afraid of Virginia Woolf?.

PS3552 2008-050121 978-0-8061-4059-9WWhheenn II ccaammee WWeesstt..Buyer, Laurie Wagner.U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 185 p. $14.95 (pa)Buyer, a novelist and poet of the West, offers a memoir account of herinitiation into traditional backcountry ways in an isolated Montanahomestead with a Vietnam veteran survivalist in the 1970s-80s. Theromantic city girl with dreams of going back to the land learns to breakhorses, chop wood, track and hunt, butcher animals, and tan hides. Herday to day life, her isolation, and her physical and emotional dependenceon a hard and sometimes cruel man recall the lives of countless frontierwomen of the previous century. Her journey from girl to woman, herstruggle to become independent while holding on to her dream of livingclose to the land, will inspire all readers. B&w personal photos areincluded. There is no subject index.

PS3554 2009-036722 978-1-4331-0841-9TTeecchhnnoollooggyy aanndd ppoossttmmooddeerrnn ssuubbjjeeccttiivviittyy iinn DDoonn DDeeLLiilllloo’’ssnnoovveellss..Laist, Randy. (Modern American literature; new approaches; v.52)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 212 p. $73.95Laist (Gateway Community College, Connecticut) has selected four novelsboth as representative of DeLillo’s four decades of writing, and as evi-dence to bolster his argument that the author’s most conspicuous andconsistent theme is the existential interpenetration of the human subjectand the technological object. The characters are transcendental poets, hesays, who respond to things of the world as participants in deepermeanings rather than as rational automatons. He pairs Americana andinventing the primitive, White Noise and technology with a human face,Underworld and American misshapens, and Cosmopolis and the conceptof disappearance.

PS3558 2009-038536 978-0-313-35624-7MMaakkiinngg mmuurrddeerr;; tthhee ffiiccttiioonn ooff TThhoommaass HHaarrrriiss..Simpson, Philip L.Praeger, ©2010 358 p. $54.95The author Tomas Harris has made people all over the world look at themeat on their dinner plates with suspicion. Simpson, provost at BrevardCommunity College, Cocoa Beach, FL, goes beyond our horrid fascinationwith Hannibal Lector to analyze the structure, style and underlyingmeaning in Harris’s novels. He gives a biographical sketch of Harris,noting the lengths he has gone to in order to research his books,including taking several classes with the FBI on profiling. The followingchapters treat each book in turn, from his first thriller Black Sundaythrough the four serial killer novels each of which blurs the linesbetween good and evil, sanity and madness. For those intrigued byHarris’s writing and those who might wish to emulate it, Simpson’sstudy will be of interest.

PS3563 2010-001951 978-0-7864-4310-9CCoorrmmaacc MMccCCaarrtthhyy;; aa lliitteerraarryy ccoommppaanniioonn..Hage, Erik. (McFarland literary companions; 9)McFarland & Co., ©2010 192 p. $39.95 (pa)Author, critic, and cultural reporter Hage (journalism, State U. of NewYork-Cobleskill) offers readers an alphabetical reference to the work ofliving American writer McCarthy. Among the entries are novels, stories,plays, characters, motifs, allusions, and themes. He comments on corre-sponding events, places, and people, and in many entries provides aselected bibliography for further reading. A sampling of topics turns upthe American southwest, the borderlands, the Dueña Alfonsa, LeeMcCarthy nee Holleman, and style.

PS3563 2009-030036 978-0-8061-4054-4NN.. SSccootttt MMoommaaddaayy;; rreemmeemmbbeerriinngg aanncceessttoorrss,, eeaarrtthh,, aannddttrraaddiittiioonnss;; aann aannnnoottaatteedd bbiioo--bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy..Morgan, Phyllis S. (American Indian literature and critical studies; 55)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 396 p. $60.00Retired from a career as a reference and research librarian and now anindependent researcher and writer, Morgan sketches the life of NativeAmerican writer Momaday (b. 1934) and provides extensive primary andsecondary bibliographies. Among his works are published books andprivate printings, anthologies and literary collections containing hiswriting, his reviews of other people’s work, poems and prose about Billythe Kid, paintings and drawings, interviews and conversations, and non-print media including musical scores. Works cited about him includereviews of books in journals and periodicals, reviews of his play TheIndolent Boys, magazine articles, newspaper articles and press releases,Internet and online resources, and teaching his writings.

PS3563 2009-012063 978-0-8108-6729-1NNoo ccoouunnttrryy ffoorr oolldd mmeenn;; ffrroomm nnoovveell ttoo ffiillmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Lynnea Chapman King et al.Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 238 p. $35.00 (pa)This collection of essays takes a variety of approaches to the CormacMcCarthy novel and the Coen Brothers’ film based on that novel.Contributors look at the dialog between the two mediums, examining theplace of the novel within the body of McCarthy’s works; the adaptationof the book to the screen; and the place of the film within the CoenBrothers canon. The book will interest students of film and literature, aswell as the more obsessive fans of McCarthy’s and the Coen’s works.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–279–

PS3563 2009-022157 978-0-415-80611-4TThhee wweesstteerrnn llaannddssccaappee iinn CCoorrmmaacc MMccCCaarrtthhyy aanndd WWaallllaacceeSStteeggnneerr;; mmyytthhss ooff tthhee ffrroonnttiieerr..McGilchrist, Megan Riley. (Routledge transnational perspectives onAmerican literature; no.12)Routledge, ©2010 251 p. $95.00McGilchrist examines works by Stegner (1909-93) and western works byMcCarthy (b. 1933) in terms of how the two American novelists approachthe western US landscape and nature. Though very different, she argues,they display similar concerns regarding the landscape and the social,political, and human ramifications of the myth of the frontier. She findsin both a subtext deeply questioning widely accepted western mythicimagery, and a hinge between ways of thinking about land and womenbefore and after the cultural watershed of the 1960s and early 1970s.

PS3565 2009-042202 978-1-57003-910-2FFllaannnneerryy OO’’CCoonnnnoorr,, hheerrmmiitt nnoovveelliisstt.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000000))Giannone, Richard.U. of South Carolina Press, ©2010 287 p. $29.95 (pa)A specialist in 20th-century American literature, Giannone (English,Fordham U.) shows how the novels and short stories of O’Flannery (1925-64) were influenced by the isolation forced on her by her lupus disease.His topics include the hermit novelist, Hazel Motes and the desert tra-dition, sporting with demons, entering a strange country, the prophetand the word in the desert, Acedia and Penthosm vision and vice, and thepower of exile. He offers a new preface, placing the study in the contextof subsequent scholarship.

PS3568 2009-032866 978-0-87413-094-2PPllaayyffuull aanndd sseerriioouuss;; PPhhiilliipp RRootthh aass aa ccoommiicc wwrriitteerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Ben Siegel and Jay L. Halio.Univ. of Delaware Press, ©2010 276 p. $56.00Siegel (English, California State U., Pomona) and Halio (English, U. ofDelaware) bring together 14 essays by Roth scholars and critics from theUS, UK, and India who examine the comic aspects of the work of PhilipRoth. They examine his work from his early stories to his recent novels—with a focus on his major works of fiction—including “Novotny’s Pain,”“On the Air,” “Conversation of the Jews,” Goodbye, Columbus, OperationShylock, Sabbath’s Theater, Exit Ghost, Indignation, Portnoy’s Complaint,Our Gang, The Great American Novel, The Human Stain, and others, andinstances of humor, irony, satire, comedy, black comedy, and their vari-ations. Some essays are reprints. Distributed by Associated UniversityPresses.

PS3568 2009-035384 978-0-313-36293-4RReeaaddiinngg NNoorraa RRoobbeerrttss..Snodgrass, Mary Ellen. (The pop lit book club)Greenwood Press, ©2010 155 p. $35.00Snodgrass (Latin and English, Lenoir Rhyne U.) presents a reader’s guideto the novels of Nora Roberts, including her early works, critical suc-cesses, trilogies and quartets, short stories and novellas, futuristic mys-teries written as J.D. Robb, and titles under other pseudonyms. Sheexplores Roberts’ life, gives plot summaries of her landmark works inromance and other genres from the 1980s to the 2000s, and discussescurrent social and economic issues, feminism, character psychology, andpop culture in her recent fiction like Angels Fall, Bed of Roses, Black Hills,Promises in Death, Tribute, and Vision in White. Internet sources and sug-gestions on what to read next are given.

PS3569 2009-034336 978-1-57003-858-7UUnnddeerrssttaannddiinngg JJaannee SSmmiilleeyy,, rreevv.. eedd..Nakadate, Neil. (Understanding contemporary American literature)U. of South Carolina Press, ©2010 274 p. $24.95 (pa)Nakadate (English, Iowa State University) surveys ongoing themes in thework of author Jane Smiley. The study is organized around closereadings of Smiley’s major fiction, but also looks at some of her essaysand nonfiction. This revised edition features updated biographicalmaterial drawing on an unpublished interview with Smiley in 2008.

PS8089 978-90-420-2686-5MMuullttiimmooddaalliittyy iinn CCaannaaddiiaann bbllaacckk ffeemmiinniisstt wwrriittiinngg;; oorraalliittyyaanndd tthhee bbooddyy iinn tthhee wwoorrkk ooff HHaarrrriiss,, PPhhiilliipp,, AAlllleenn,, aannddBBrraanndd..Casas, Maria Caridad. (Cross cultures; readings in the post/colonial lit-eratures in English; 112)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 213 p. $70.00Casas (English, York U., Canada) offers a multimodal theory based onthe poetry of Canadians Lillian Allen, Claire Harris, Dionne Brand, andMarlene Nourbese Philip. The author explores the difficulty faced andthe creativity required for Caribbean English Creole-speaking writersattempting to successfully bend or blend the relatively conservativeEnglish print language to adequately express their thoughts. She alsoexamines the mechanics the authors employ: sometimes switching backand forth from standard written English to an English Creole, dialectwriting, and the often non-standard spelling choices used to achieve astronger sense of meaning and, frequently, music in their poetry.

PS8089 978-1-55458-181-8TTrroouubblliinngg ttrriicckksstteerrss;; rreevviissiioonniinngg ccrriittiiccaall ccoonnvveerrssaattiioonnss..Title main entry. Ed. by Deanna Reder and Linda M. Morra.(Indigenous studies)Wilfrid Laurier U. Press, ©2010 335 p. $34.95 (pa)This collection of essays, interviews, poems, and stories investigatestrends and themes in trickster studies within the context of the study ofindigenous literature and narrative traditions. Much of the bookaddresses the recent backlash against trickster studies, responding tocomplaints and critiques by Indigenous writers and Indigenous nation-alists. Influenced by nationalist’s calls for cultural and historical speci-ficity, contributors propose new approaches to trickster studies that aremindful of the critic’s responsibility to communities. A few b&w photosand illustrations are included. Reder teaches in the First Nations StudiesProgram at Simon Fraser University. Morra teaches Canadian studies andliterature at Bishop University.

GGEERRMMAANNIICC LLIITTEERRAATTUURREESS

PT345 2009-021013 978-1-57113-417-2LLiitteerraattuurree aanndd cceennssoorrsshhiipp iinn RReessttoorraattiioonn GGeerrmmaannyy;;rreepprreessssiioonn aanndd rrhheettoorriicc..Heady, Katy. (Studies in German literature, linguistics, and culture)Camden House, ©2009 221 p. $75.00Censorship has always been a method of maintaining control over thethoughts and actions of individuals. However, as Heady points out, thesource of censorship and the subjects deemed dangerous have variedthrough time. In this study of censorship in 1820’s Germany and Austria,Heady (PhD in German, Sheffield University) uses the work of two play-wrights, Christian Dietrich Crabbe and Franz Grillparzer, and proseworks by the poet, Heinrich Heine. As a playwright to the AustrianBurgtheater Grillparzer had to submit his works to the censor before theycould be produced, while the other two were not permitted to publishtheir books in Germany if salacious or seditious material could be foundin them. Heady examines two works by each man. When material hasbeen cut, she suggests reasons why. She also notes how the authorsdevised ways of getting their messages to the audience without incurringcensorship. Her introduction reviews the history of censorship inGermany from the fifteenth century to the present. Unfortunately, sincethe many quotations are not translated, non-German speakers will not beable to understand the rationale behind the censorship nor the subtletyof the authors in subverting it.

PT1971 2009-006910 978-0-8387-5719-2AAfftteerr JJeennaa;; GGooeetthhee’’ss eelleeccttiivvee aaffffiinniittiieess aanndd tthhee eenndd ooff tthheeoolldd rreeggiimmee..Schwartz, Peter J. (New studies in the age of Goethe)Bucknell University Pr., ©2010 358 p. $75.00Most critics have seen Goethe’s novel Elective Affinities as somethingremoved from the events of the time in which it was written, the earlyNapoleonic era. Swartz (German, Boston University) reverses that notion,believing that the book “does represent a historically specific sociopo-litical constellation”. (p.17) He sees much of the underlying message ofthe story as being influenced by the 1804 battle of Jena, won byNapoleon’s army. This was the beginning, he states, of a breakdown insocial order and the German class system. This included legal changesthat Swartz notes affect the course of the Goethe’s plot. He also feels thatthe unresolved ending is emblematic of the uncertainty of the times.Goethe scholars will find much in this to ponder. Distributed byAssociated University Presses.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –280–

PT2354 2008-055469 978-1-57113-395-3AA ccoommppaanniioonn ttoo tthhee wwoorrkkss ooff JJoohhaannnn GGoottttffrriieedd HHeerrddeerr..Title main entry. Ed. by Hans Adler and Wulf Koepke. (Studies inGerman literature, linguistics, and culture. Camden House companionvolumes)Camden House, ©2009 489 p. $90.00Written by leading specialists on the philosopher and humanist, the 17chapters of this volume describe all aspects of his life and work, makingthis an outstanding reference both for those who are new to his work (allthe German quotes are presented with side-by-side English translation)and those who know him well. The chapters can be read as stand-alonearticles. Each is filled with quotes from Herder’s work as well as awealth of information and references to the thought and writings of hiscontemporaries. Particularly evident is Herder’s wide scope and prolifichistory of publication, with works spanning literature, religion, phi-losophy, folklore, education, poetry, mythology, and aesthetics, publishedfrom 1766 to 1803. His impact has been underestimated as he’s been out-shadowed by his contemporaries Kant and Goethe, and due to a historyof critical reception, but readers will find his openness to all cultures andhis aversion to nationalism and close-mindedness remarkable and con-temporary. This fine work is an excellent start to re-establishing Herder’simportance in 18th-century thought, not just in Germany, but throughoutEurope.

PT2605 2009-017984 978-0-8387-5746-8PPooeettrryy aass iinnddiivviidduuaalliittyy;; tthhee ddiissccoouurrssee ooff oobbsseerrvvaattiioonn iinnPPaauull CCeellaann..Hilliard, Derek.Bucknell University Pr., ©2010 181 p. $47.00Hillard (German, Kansas State U.) explores the central metaphors forobservation and their discourses in contemporary German writer Celan’spoetry and prose. They are Schein, semblance and illusion; Wahn,delusion, madness; and Wunde, wound, he says, and are derived pri-marily from phenomenology, epistemology, and the psyche. He considersthe phenomenology of illusion, hallucinations, slivers of the self, originaltranslations, and mind matters. Distributed in the US by AssociatedUniversity Presses.

PT2607 2009-038765 978-3-11-021769-8AAllffrreedd DDööbblliinn;; ppaarraaddiiggmmss ooff mmooddeerrnniissmm..Title main entry. Ed. by Steffan Davies and Ernest Schonfield.(Publications of the Institute of Germanic studies; v.95)De Gruyter, ©2009 420 p. $155.00German writer Döblin (1878-1957) is said here to have been concernedprimarily with the literary portrayal of sensory experience. Scholars ofGerman literature explore such aspects of his work as the connectionsbetween his philosophical writings and his major fiction before BerlinAlexanderplatz, why Ferdinand der Andere is called Wallenstein, ways ofseeing in his Reise in Polen, the poetry of fact in Berge Meere und Giganten,his Berlin topographies, November 1918 from perspectives of transcen-dence and the historical novel, and war and exile in Hamlet oder Dielange Nacht. The 19 essays, 10 of them in German, are from the 2007international conference Alfred Döblin (1878-1957)—Beyond theAlexanderplatz, held at the University of London.

PT9813 2009-036581 978-1-4331-0783-2BBllaacckk bbaannnneerrss;; ggeennrree sscceenneess ffrroomm tthhee ttuurrnn ooff tthhee cceennttuurryy..Strindberg, August. Trans. by Donald K. Weaver. (Studies on themesand motifs in literature; v.101)Peter Lang Publishing Inc, ©2010 201 p. $72.95Svarta fanor was the last major satirical novel by Swedish playwright andnovelist Strindberg (1849-1912), and though completed by 1904, couldfind no publisher until 1907. An American scholar of Scandinavian lit-erature and languages, Weaver explains in his 15-page introduction thatthe humility and sense of resignation Strindberg acquired during the1890s had transmuted into rage and indignation by then and, having pre-viously confessed his own sins, he set out to confess those of his con-temporaries. The novel is also one of his most controversial.

SSCCIIEENNCCEE,, TTEECCHHNNOOLLOOGGYY,, MMEEDDIICCIINNEE

QA11 2009-034175 978-0-205-62758-5TThhee SSIIOOPP mmooddeell ffoorr tteeaacchhiinngg mmaatthheemmaattiiccss ttoo EEnngglliisshhlleeaarrnneerrss..Echevarría, Jana.Pearson Education, ©2010 202 p. $34.99 (pa)Echevarría, Vogt (both California State U, Long Beach), and Short (Centerfor Applied Linguistics, Washington, DC) offer a practical text for K-12teachers of mathematics—classroom teachers, coaches, and interventionspecialists—who have familiarity with the Sheltered InstructionObservation Protocol (SIOP) Model for teaching English language learners(ELLs). Written in response to numerous requests from mathematics edu-cators for specific application of the (SIOP) Model to their subject, the textcovers the academic language that students need to be successful inschool in general, and in mathematics in particular; lesson planning andunit design; effective activities and instructional techniques; sample SIOPmathematics lessons and units for grade clusters K-2, 3-5, 6-8, and 9-12;and a concluding summarization of lesson and unit planning, includinginsights from the authors’ own experiences working with the SIOP Modelover the years.

QA11 2009-045333 978-1-4129-2763-5SSuucccceeeeddiinngg aatt tteeaacchhiinngg sseeccoonnddaarryy mmaatthheemmaattiiccss;; yyoouurr ffiirrssttyyeeaarr..Title main entry. Ed. by Cheryl D. Roddick and Julie Sliva Spitzer.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 124 p. $25.95 (pa)For first-year teachers, Roddick and Spitzer (mathematics and mathe-matics education, San Jose State U.) explain how to teach math in middleand high school classrooms. They aim to supplement what new teachershave already learned about teaching math and focus on the key elementsof successful teaching, drawing from research, their experiences, andobservations. They address standards-based teaching; ways to engage stu-dents in affective, behavioral, and cognitive terms; working with specialneeds students, gifted learners, and English language learners; andassessment.

QA76.59 2009-034629 978-0-470-19555-0MMoobbiillee iinntteelllliiggeennccee..Yang, Laurence Tianruo et al. (Wiley series on parallel and distributedcomputing)John Wiley & Sons, ©2010 695 p. $140.00Mobile intelligence, or the application of computational intelligenceapproaches to the mobile computing paradigm, holds the promise of ben-efiting a wide variety of applications including database query pro-cessing, multimedia, network security, information retrieval, commercesystems, and search engines, according to Yang (St. Francis Xavier U.,Canada), Waluyo (Monash U., Australia), Ma (Hosei U., Japan), Tan(Australian Council for Educational Research, Australia), and Srinivasan(Monash U., Australia), who present the state-of-the-art of this combinedfield in a range of applications within the research domains of mobiledata and intelligence, location-based mobile information services, mobilemining, mobile context-aware and applications, mobile intelligencesecurity, mobile multimedia, and intelligent network.

QA135 2009-038921 978-1-4129-6584-2MMoommeennttss iinn mmaatthheemmaattiiccss ccooaacchhiinngg;; iimmpprroovviinngg KK--55iinnssttrruuccttiioonn..Woleck, Kristine Reed.Corwin Press Inc., ©2010 162 p. $31.95 (pa)Mathematics coach Woleck uses moments from her experiences to high-light elements of mathematics teaching, learning, and coaching in thisresource for math coaches, math specialists, curriculum coordinators,and staff developers working with teachers of grades K-5. Early chaptersoverview the coach’s role in elementary math classes and describe thecoaching cycle. Chapters devoted to tools for coaching present subjectssuch as curriculum resources, questioning as a tool for coaching, andusing data as a tool for coaching. Coaching dilemmas, such as how toaddress teachers’ classroom errors, are considered. The book’s finalsection calls attention to the need to provide professional developmentopportunities for the coach. A list of web sites, books, journals, seminarsand conferences, and online learning resources is included. The bookalso includes reflection questions and sample logs and data worksheets.Woleck is K-5 mathematics coordinator for the public schools in NewCanaan, Connecticut.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–281–

QC903 2009-933413 978-1-84844-836-0CChhaannggiinngg cclliimmaattee,, cchhaannggiinngg eeccoonnoommyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Jean-Philippe Touffut. (The Cournot Centre forEconomic Studies series)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 171 p. $100.00Presented by Touffut (director, Cournot Center for Economic Studies,France), eight chapters examine how the discipline of economics hasengaged with the issue of climate change. Topics include uncertainty inthe modeling of the costs of climate change, the relative benefits of dif-ferent analytic tools for understanding the costs of and responses toclimate change, the role of discounting in economic analysis of climatechange policy, and the relative benefits of taxes versus quotas in emis-sions reduction policy.

QP301 2009-014994 978-1-933102-88-7AAmmeerriiccaann iiddllee;; aa jjoouurrnneeyy tthhrroouugghh oouurr sseeddeennttaarryy ccuullttuurree..Collins, Mary. (Capital ideas series)Capital Books, ©2009 195 p. $16.95 (pa)After a bicycle accident forced her think differently about her body andthe role of movement in her life, Collins (creative writing, CentralConnecticut State U.), an athlete, was inspired to explore the sedentarylifestyle of the majority of Americans, and the forces that create it,including historical factors like farming and the Industrial Revolution.She discusses other species, the walking trails of prehistoric people,factory workers, Olympic athletes, government efforts to get people toexercise, church-sponsored exercise, effects on the brain, how small shiftscan bring physical movement back into people’s lives, and the two mostimmobile populations: Hispanics and African Americans. There is noindex. Distributed in the US by International Publishers Marketing.

R154 2009-000781 978-0-8135-4611-7DDrr.. MMaarryy WWaallkkeerr;; aann AAmmeerriiccaann rraaddiiccaall,, 11883311--11991199..Harris, Sharon M.Rutgers U. Press, ©2009 308 p. $49.95The name Mary Walker is probably unfamiliar to most people, even ifthey are scholars of 19th century U.S. feminism. In this book, Harris(English, University of Connecticut) goes far to bring Walker out of theshadows, presenting a well-rounded account of her life that includesWalker’s career as the first female Army surgeon (winning the Medal ofHonor during the Civil War) and as a tireless activist for abolition, tem-perance, woman suffrage, and gender equality. Accessibly written andwell-documented, this book will appeal to scholars of feminism and U.S.history, as well as to many general readers.

R644 2009-035475 978-0-924304-57-6PPrreessccrriibbiinngg ccoolloonniizzaattiioonn;; tthhee rroollee ooff mmeeddiiccaall pprraaccttiicceess aannddppoolliicciieess iinn JJaappaann--rruulleedd TTaaiiwwaann,, 11889955--11994455..Liu, Michael Shiyung. (Asia past & present; new research from AAS;no.3)Assoc. for Asian Studies, ©2009 286 p. $25.00 (pa)Liu draws on his background in economics, the history of medicine, andmodern public health to describe how the imposition of Japan’sWesternized medical practices of Japan during the half century of occu-pation altered medicine in Taiwan, particularly noting the tensionbetween the brutality of imperialism and the mercy of modernization.He discusses Japanized staatsmedizin as the prototype of colonial med-icine in Taiwan, the chaotic beginning, revising staatsmedizin for thecolony during the 1920s, and from prewar legacy to postwar legendduring the 1930s and since.

R726 978-1-906716-08-0DDeeaatthh,, ddyyiinngg aanndd bbeerreeaavveemmeenntt;; iissssuueess ffoorr pprraaccttiiccee..Watts, Jacqueline. (Policy and practice in health and social care; 11)Dunedin Academic Press, ©2010 112 p. $24.65 (pa)For students, health and social care workers, managers, policy makers,and other practitioners, Watts (health and social care, Open U., UK)examines the social context of death and dying in the UK and factors thatinfluence how and where people die, how they and their families arecared for, and how death and dying have become the business of a rangeof services. She addresses the theory and practice of palliative care,hospice development in Scotland, and grief models that can informbereavement care, and the key issues of diversity, communication, andpalliative care philosophy and practice. Also discussed are spiritualityand support for bereaved people, against the background of health andsocial care policy and the 2008 review of palliative care services inScotland. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

R853 2009-042418 978-1-4200-6117-8DDeessiiggnn aanndd aannaallyyssiiss ooff qquuaalliittyy ooff lliiffee ssttuuddiieess iinn cclliinniiccaallttrriiaallss,, 22dd eedd..Fairclough, Diane L. (Interdisciplinary statistics series)Chapman & Hall/CRC, ©2010 404 p. $89.95This work for researchers focuses on the design and analysis of longitu-dinal studies of health-related quality of life (HRQoL) in clinical trials.The first edition used SAS only to illustrate implementation of methods,but this edition uses SPSS and R as well. Because it was not designed asa course textbook, the book does not include problem sets, but it can beused when teaching courses on the analysis of longitudinal data. Thissecond edition offers more examples of implementation of basic models,and provides data sets on a companion web site. There is new materialon testing models that rely on moderation and mediation, and new dis-cussion integrating HRQoL outcomes with other outcomes. Readers areassumed to have some graduate training in statistical methods. The bookis for researchers involved in the design and analysis of HRQoL studies,as well as those who evaluate the design and interpret the results of suchstudies, including epidemiologists, sociologists, and other healthresearchers. Fairclough is affiliated with the University of ColoradoHealth Sciences Center.

RA448 2009-047444 978-0-313-36490-7HHeeaalltthh ccaarree..Title main entry. Ed. by Ilan Stavans. (The Ilan Stavans library ofLatino civilization)Greenwood Press, ©2010 152 p. $55.00Edited by Stavans (Latin American and Latino culture, Amherst C.) thisvolume is made up of seven academic studies that previously appearedin scholarly journals. Examining the intersection of Latino culture andthe medical system, the contributors examine issues ranging from psy-chiatric disorders to sexual socialization. One chapter explores whyLatinos living in the United States report poor health and question therole of “Americanization.” Another chapter provides a comprehensivereport on field work in New York City on the use of botanical medicineby Latinos. Overall, though, the book makes the point throughout thatone cannot reach general conclusions about Hispanics in the UnitedStates. They vary, for instance, through class, origin (such as whetherthey come from Mexico or Puerto Rico), or even whether they live in theNortheast or Southwest.

RA564 978-1-906716-05-9LLGGBBTT IIssssuueess;; llooookkiinngg bbeeyyoonndd ccaatteeggoorriieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Rebecca L Jones and Richard Ward. (Policyand practice in health and social care, no.10)Dunedin Academic Press, ©2010 107 p. $24.65 (pa)In this slim but thoughtful book, editors Jones (Health and Social Care,The Open University) and Ward (Nursing, Midwifery & Social Work,University of Manchester) have assembled articles that look beyond theconvenient terms used to describe sexuality and gender identity toexplore how categories such as “lesbian”, “bisexual”, and “trans” shapethe provision of health care and social services. Contributors examinetensions between the different ways in which sexuality is understood andexperienced, and look at the circumstances in which people choose toaccept or reject with these identity labels. This book will interest healthcare practitioners and social service professionals, as well as academicsstudying sexuality, gender identity, and health care. Distributed in theU.S. by ISBS.

RA567 2009-050493 978-81-321-0305-9SSqquuaattttiinngg wwiitthh ddiiggnniittyy;; lleessssoonnss ffrroomm IInnddiiaa..Kumar Alok.Sage Publications, ©2010 379 p. $49.95Alok, having been involved with the formulation of sanitation policywhile in government, reviews the progress and challenges of the ruralsanitation movement in India, which is seeking to reduce the practice ofopen defecation among rural Indians. He discusses the formation andimplementation of the Total Sanitation Campaign, assesses its geo-graphical spread and achievements, and offers recommendations for fur-thering its success.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –282–

RA645 978-0-7656-2134-4IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn ssyysstteemmss ffoorr eemmeerrggeennccyy mmaannaaggeemmeenntt..((IInncclluuddeess oonnlliinnee aacccceessss))Title main entry. Ed. by Bartel Van De Walle et al. (Advances in man-agement information systems)M.E. Sharpe, Inc., ©2010 410 p. $199.95Citing the most significant value of the volume as being reflected in thenumber of included analytical field studies, Van de Walle (Tilburg U., theNetherlands), Turoff (emeritus, information systems, New Jersey Instituteof Technology, US), and Hiltz (emerita, information systems, New JerseyInstitute of Technology, US) present 16 research papers dealing with thefoundation, development, and design of computer-based emergency man-agement information systems (EMIS). The papers are presented in sec-tions dealing with foundations related to user interface design and ethicalissues, individual and organizational contexts, case studies related to (forexample) an information management system for mine action in Iraqand user perspectives on the Minnesota Interorganizational MaydayInformation System, and issues of EMIS design and technology such asoperational applications of space technologies in international humani-tarian emergency response and standards-based resource managementsystems for emergency management.

RA776 2009-033026 978-0-7637-5609-3TThhee ddiimmeennssiioonnss ooff hheeaalltthh;; ccoonncceeppttuuaall mmooddeellss..Hjelm, John R.Jones & Bartlett, ©2010 98 p. $39.95 (pa)Written in accessible language for beginning undergraduates, this briefintroductory text examines five dimensions of personal health: physical,social, emotional, intellectual, and spiritual. Each chapter provides defi-nitions, presents at least two conceptual models developed by scholarsand professionals, describes characteristics of healthy people, andpresents a new model assimilating the previous models. Discussion ques-tions are included. A concluding chapter emphasizes the overlappingnature of each of the dimensions to form a multidimensional model ofhealth, and demonstrates the role the dimensions play in survivingcollege life and adverse experiences such as break-ups. B&w photos areincluded. Hjelm is affiliated with North Park University.

RA778 2009-042485 978-0-8047-6309-7OOuurr bbooddiieess,, oouurrsseellvveess aanndd tthhee wwoorrkk ooff wwrriittiinngg..Wells, Susan.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 261 p. $21.95 (pa)Wells (English, Temple U.) has written an engaging study of the womenand process behind the groundbreaking work, Our bodies ourselves, bothits first 1973 edition and the 1984 revision. Produced by the BostonWomen’s Health Book Collective, Our bodies, ourselves was a revolu-tionary work, one which was written collectively. Wells presents adetailed chronological account of the conferences and meetings that ledto the assignment of topics, the tussles with the publisher to maintaintheir voice, and later, their focus on the issue of the medicalization ofwomen, in part as this was formulated by Brandeis sociologist KennethZola. This is a superb, in-depth case study of an important organizationof American feminism and its influential voice.

RA782 2009-005311 978-1-4384-2876-5TThhee rreevveellaattiioonn ooff tthhee bbrreeaatthh;; aa ttrriibbuuttee ttoo iittss wwiissddoomm,,ppoowweerr,, aanndd bbeeaauuttyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Sharon G. Mijares. (SUNY series in transper-sonal and humanistic psychology)State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 283 p. $24.95 (pa)In many traditions, the breath, soul, and cosmology are linked. Westerninstructor-cum-Sufi minister Mijares (psychology, National U., BrandmanU.; comparative religions, California Institute for Human Science) intro-duces this collection of 17 essays on Eastern, Western, and Middle Easternbreathing practices, and the breath’s personal and universal healingpower. The book includes instructions for some practices and poetic odesto the breath.

RC377 2009-031081 978-0-19-536888-8TThhee ssttrreessss aanndd mmoooodd mmaannaaggeemmeenntt pprrooggrraamm ffoorr ppaattiieennttsswwiitthh mmuullttiippllee sscclleerroossiiss;; tthheerraappiisstt gguuiiddee..Mohr, David C. (Treatments that work)Oxford U. Press, ©2010 241 p. $35.00 (pa)Mohr (preventive medicine, Northwestern U.), a clinical psychologist, pro-vides a therapist’s guide to accompany a workbook for individuals withmultiple sclerosis who are experiencing stress and depressed mood. Theguide provides instruction for assessment and delivering evidence-basedtreatment to these individuals using cognitive-behavioral therapy, andaddresses standard behavioral activation and cognitive restructuringtechniques for problem solving and goal setting, engaging in positiveactivities, identifying and challenging unhelpful thoughts, and findingsocial support, and modules to address specific problems common to MSpatients, like fatigue, pain, self-injection anxiety, relaxation, cognitiveimpairment, planning and organization, communication andassertiveness skills, and ending treatment and maintaining gains. Sampledialogues, materials lists, and at-home assignments are included. Thebook lacks an index.

RC451 2009-019487 978-0-7360-6168-1AAnnggeerr mmaannaaggeemmeenntt iinn ssppoorrtt;; uunnddeerrssttaannddiinngg aannddccoonnttrroolllliinngg vviioolleennccee iinn aatthhlleetteess..Abrams, Mitch.Human Kinetics Pub., ©2010 282 p. $49.00Abrams (UMDNJ/Robert Wood Johnson Medical School) is a clinicaladministrator responsible for the delivery of mental health services forsix of New Jersey’s 13 state prisons. Based on working with athletes overthe past 13 years, he argues that athletes are not convincingly moreviolent than non-athletes, but they do represent an at-risk population thatcan benefit from learning specific anger management skills. Coverageincludes major theories on anger and aggression in sport; the history ofviolence in sport; the athlete culture; how anger management skills areperformance enhancing in sport and in life; “how-to” specifics of ananger management program for athletes; mental illness and violence insport; drugs, violence, and sport; individual vs. group interventions; andprevention of sexual violence. For academics, researchers, and practi-tioners at all levels of sport who work with athletes and anger.

RC480 2009-032816 978-1-55620-303-9CClliinniiccaall ssuuppeerrvviissiioonn iinn tthhee hheellppiinngg pprrooffeessssiioonnss;; aa pprraaccttiiccaallgguuiiddee,, 22dd eedd..Corey, Gerald et al.American Counseling Assn., ©2010 290 p. $62.95 (pa)In this reader-friendly guide for new and experienced supervisors, Corey(professor emeritus, human services and counseling, California StateUniversity-Fullerton) offers a practical emphasis, integrating details onmodels and methods of supervision with material on ethics, culturalcompetency, and professional codes, and the voices of real-life practicingsupervisors. The book does not present a single best approach to super-vision, but instead encourages reflective practice. Learning featuresinclude case examples, sample forms, chapter-opening focus questions,and chapter-ending group activities. The book can be used as profes-sional reference or as a primary or supplementary text for doctoral andmaster’s level courses in disciplines including counseling, psychology,counselor education, marriage and family therapy, social work, andschool counseling. It will also be useful as a resource for internships andfieldwork.

RC480 2009-040976 978-1-4338-0757-2OOnn bbeeccoommiinngg aa bbeetttteerr tthheerraappiisstt..Duncan, Barry L.American Psychological Assn., ©2010 211 p. $49.95Drawing on many years of clinical experience and research on evidence-based practice, Duncan (PsyD, director, Heart and Soul of Change Project)argues with conviction and humor that systematically monitoring clientoutcomes is advantageous to therapists as well as to clients. He offerslessons learned about clients being the best teachers and guidelines forwhat works in therapy. The guide includes a foreword by Michael J.Lambert (psychology, Brigham Young University), other pearls ofwisdom, findings of the Norway Feedback Project, excerpts of therapysessions, and information on career development tracking software(ASIST, MyOutcomes).

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–283–

RC537 978-1-84619-372-9KKeeeeppiinngg tthhee bblluueess aawwaayy;; tthhee tteenn--sstteepp gguuiiddee ttoo rreedduucciinnggtthhee rreellaappssee ooff ddeepprreessssiioonn..Howell, Cate.Radcliffe Publishing, ©2010 154 p. $42.00 (pa)Keeping the Blues Away is a treatment program developed in Australiaduring 2004 to help general medical practitioners reduce the severity andrelapse of depression in their patients. The 12-month, ten-step programis based on clinical experience and research, includes psychological andsocial elements, and was tested on 100 people. The treatment guide andrelaxation tracks are now available online and are in the process of beingpublished. Meanwhile, here is a guide for clinicians. Among the steps arelearning about depression, helpful thinking or cognitive strategies, thebenefits of activity, and developing a plan to manage early relapsesymptoms. Published by Radcliffe Publishing, Britain, and distributed inthe US by BookMasters.

RC564 978-1-55130-368-0RReessppoonnddiinngg ttoo tthhee oopppprreessssiioonn ooff aaddddiiccttiioonn;; CCaannaaddiiaannssoocciiaall wwoorrkk ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess,, 22dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Rick Csiernik and William Rowe.Canadian Scholars’ Press, ©2010 403 p. $49.95 (pa)This collection of 25 papers is guided by two principal themes. The firstis that the social work approach to addiction should view it from “aholistic, anti-oppressive orientation, considering the client in relation tohis or her environment along with the structural factors that contributeto the use, misuse, and abuse of psychoactive drugs.” The second is thatCanadian social workers should have a uniquely Canadian perspective onthe issue, just as Canadians in general have different perspectives onother global problems. In order to explore the Canadian, anti-oppressiveapproach to social work and addiction, Rowe (social work, U. of SouthFlorida, US) and Csiernik (social work, U. of Western Ontario, Canada)have gathered the voices of Canadian scholars and practitioners in 25chapters (nine new to the second edition, six revised, and seven updated)addressing prevention initiatives, program descriptions, the special needsof different populations, and policy perspectives.

RC968 2009-042471 978-1-4200-9244-8WWoorrkkppllaaccee cclliinniiccss aanndd eemmppllooyyeerr mmaannaaggeedd hheeaalltthhccaarree;; aaccaattaallyysstt ffoorr ccoosstt ssaavviinnggss aanndd iimmpprroovveedd pprroodduuccttiivviittyy..LaPenna, A. Michael.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 262 p. $54.95 (pa)LaPenna (healthcare consultant, speaker, former hospital administrator)describes the experiences of self-funded employers who have chosen tobring their healthcare programs in-house and manage their ownhealthcare delivery system. In straightforward style, the authoraddresses: company planning for healthcare and involving employees inthe planning, the myth of the company doctor, cost savings and costavoidance, assumptions and drivers for a dependable return oninvestment, medical records, political and functional barriers, and thefuture of on-site services and the on-site industry.

RJ399 2009-044336 978-0-309-13927-4LLooccaall ggoovveerrnnmmeenntt aaccttiioonnss ttoo pprreevveenntt cchhiillddhhoooodd oobbeessiittyy..Committee on Childhood Obesity Prevention Actions for LocalGovernments.National Academies Press, ©2009 125 p. $29.00 (pa)This report from the National Research Council’s Committee onChildhood Obesity Prevention Actions for Local Governments details therole local governments can play in preventing childhood obesity andimproving food and physical activity environments for children, with afocus on nonschool issues. It presents action steps local government offi-cials can make and explains the value of understanding the local contextin which decisions are made for childhood obesity efforts, the impor-tance of attention to community conditions that result in unequal accessand health disparities, and the need for evaluation of prevention actions.They recommend nine healthy eating and six physical activity strategiesrelating to access to food and water, availability of healthful foods inrestaurants, public programs, government nutrition programs, breast-feeding, raising awareness, encouraging walking and bicycling, anddecreasing screen time. There is no index.

RJ506 2009-033627 978-1-60623-631-4EEaarrllyy ssttaarrtt DDeennvveerr mmooddeell ffoorr yyoouunngg cchhiillddrreenn wwiitthh aauuttiissmm;;pprroommoottiinngg llaanngguuaaggee,, lleeaarrnniinngg,, aanndd eennggaaggeemmeenntt..Rogers, Sally J. and Geraldine Dawson.Guilford Pr., ©2010 297 p. $48.00 (pa)Rogers (psychiatry, U. of California) and Dawson (psychiatry, U. of NorthCarolina at Chapel Hill) describe a treatment model for very youngchildren with autism spectrum disorders (ASD). It includes both con-structionist and transactional approaches that encourage the natural ten-dency of children to interact and engage with others. Topics includecurrent understanding of infant learning and autism, using the EarlyStart Denver Model, developing short-term learning objectives, developingplans and frames for teaching, developing imitation and play, and devel-oping verbal and non-verbal communication.

RS67 2009-029997 978-90-04-17606-5TThhee wwoorrlldd ooff pphhaarrmmaaccyy aanndd pphhaarrmmaacciissttss iinn MMaammlluukkCCaaiirroo..Chipman, Leigh. (Sir Henry Wellcome Asian series; v.8)BRILL, ©2010 318 p. $154.00Chipman whose degree is in Middle Eastern Studies from the HebrewUniversity of Jerusalem, specializes in Arabic pharmacology. Here sheexamines a work written in Arabic around 657/1260 by a Jewish phar-macist in Cairo. The work, based on Greek, Roman, earlier Arabic worksand practical experience, remained in use until the 1960s. Chipman dis-cusses the sources of the book, its organization and the context in whichit was compiled. She also looks at sections in which the author states theethics of the profession. The subject of uniform measurements and safesubstitutions for unavailable ingredients is treated, emphasizing that thistreatise was a tool for a working pharmacist. Chipman then looks at thestatus of the pharmacist in Mamluk society and his role in the trans-mission and creation of scientific information. The final chapter investi-gates how the pharmacist was seen in legal treatises and in popularliterature. The latter, a source rarely considered, gives an indication ofthe place of the pharmacist is the community. An appendix gives a trans-lation of many of the medical recipes. This will be of great use to thosestudying medieval medicine as well as to modern pharmacists, curiousabout the history of their profession.

PPLLAANNTT CCUULLTTUURREE,, AANNIIMMAALL CCUULLTTUURREE

SB466 978-1-84868-702-8TThhee CCoottsswwoollddss’’ ffiinneesstt ggaarrddeennss..Russel, Tony.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 160 p. $29.95With lovely images and evocative descriptions, Russel (a commentator onBBC radio and TV gardening shows; formerly with the WestonbirtArboretum) takes readers on a tour of 50 gardens of diverse character inthe lushly-endowed Cotswolds’ region of the UK. The volume includes amap of the gardens, from Abbey House Gardens to Westonbirt SchoolGarden. Some references would have been a welcome addition.Distributed by Casemate.

SB469 2009-006813 978-0-470-33845-2BBeeccoommiinngg aa llaannddssccaappee aarrcchhiitteecctt;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo ccaarreeeerrss iinnddeessiiggnn..Foster, Kelleann. (Guide to careers)John Wiley & Sons, ©2009 353 p. $39.95 (pa)Foster (landscape architect and landscape architecture, Pennsylvania StateU.) offers insights into the landscape architecture profession and what ittakes to succeed in this growing field. The book includes interviews andcomments from leading landscape architects, employment opportunities,licensing requirements, and an abundance of practical additional infor-mation. The book will interest readers interested in entering the pro-fession, but is non-technical enough for general readers to appreciate.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –284–

SB469 2009-014404 978-1-56898-851-1PPaaoolloo BBüürrggii;; llaannddssccaappee aarrcchhiitteecctt:: DDiissccoovveerriinngg tthhee ((SSwwiissss))hhoorriizzoonn;; mmoouunnttaaiinn,, llaakkee,, aanndd ffoorreesstt..Title main entry. Ed. by Raffaella Fabiani Giannetto. (Source books inlandscape architecture; 5)Princeton Architectural Press, ©2009 142 p. $29.95 (pa)Three projects by the designer are profiled in this lovely volume, whichfeatures lengthy interviews with him on each project. The volume is filledwith full-page color photos of the projects of Cardada mountain,Kreuzlingen plaza on Lake Constance, and a private terrace on a forestedproperty in the canton of Ticino. Sensitive to the elements of landscapeand history that make each place unique, Bürgi’s projects arise fromdetailed study, working closely with local geologists, historians, and cit-izens. These preparations and their role in the resulting design aredescribed in the interviews and in the concluding essay by John DixonHunt. The volume is not indexed.

SB470 2009-278507 978-1-84383-446-5DDeessiiggnnss uuppoonn tthhee llaanndd;; eelliittee llaannddssccaappeess ooff tthhee MMiiddddlleeAAggeess..Creighton, O.H. (Garden and landscape history)The Boydell Press, ©2009 256 p. $80.00Most histories of British landscape design begin in the sixteenth century,assuming nothing came before. Creighton (archaeology, University ofExeter) rectifies this misapprehension; his study ends in 1550. Drawingupon archeology, medieval literature and chronicles, art and theology hedemonstrates convincingly that the medieval elite built gardens, waterfeatures, deer parks and dovecotes intentionally for esthetic and socialreasons. While chapters are arranged by type of design for the most part,Creighton continually shows the features to be part of an overall design.Parks and gardens were constructed to be seen from castle windows byinhabitants. Landscaping was also a factor in impressing visitors as theyapproached the manor. Creighton also tackles the difficult subject of howmedieval people saw nature. He reminds the reader that symbolism wasa part of their world view and does not neglect this aspect of the purposeof landscaping. The book has many diagrams and photos includingseveral color plates that exemplify his argument.

SB472 978-0-86571-653-7EEnneerrggyy--wwiissee llaannddssccaappee ddeessiiggnn;; aa nneeww aapppprrooaacchh ffoorr yyoouurrhhoommee aanndd ggaarrddeenn..Reed, Sue.New Society Publishers Ltd., ©2010 293 p. $29.95 (pa)For those interested in having a more environmentally-friendly home andgarden, a landscape architect who specializes in sustainable landscapedesign emphasizes small, doable changes. Reed, who gardens inMassachusetts, provides green design, construction, and action tips forminimizing the use of resources, e.g., collecting rainwater and solarenergy passively. The guide includes illustrations, instructions for makinglandscape planning calculations, plant lists, and resources. Distributed byConsortium Books Sales and Distribution.

SF194 2009-018529 978-0-8263-4824-1GGiillaa ccoouunnttrryy lleeggeenndd;; tthhee lliiffee aanndd ttiimmeess ooff QQuueennttiinn HHuullssee..Coggeshall, Nancy.U. of New Mexico Press, ©2009 280 p. $29.95Coggeshall presents a biography of rural western rancher Quentin Hulse(1926-2002), who lived in the Gila River country of southwestern NewMexico. Hulse met Butch Cassidy as a child after Cassidy’s supposeddeath in 1908, witnessed a point-blank shooting at the age of ten, servedin the navy during World War II and at the Battle of Okinawa, and wasshot in 1948 in New Mexico. Coggeshall, a freelance writer, draws frominterviews with Hulse, friends, family, and former clients; school, ForestService, court, and other records; newspapers and magazines; and otherdocuments. She tells of his life using a series of stories that reveal thecowboy culture, as well as her own life’s intersection with his.

SF309 2009-015056 978-0-8061-4091-9LLuuiiss OOrrtteeggaa’’ss rraawwhhiiddee aarrttiissttrryy;; bbrraaiiddiinngg iinn tthhee CCaalliiffoorrnniiaattrraaddiittiioonn..Stormes, Chuck and Don Reeves. (Western legacies series; 7)U. of Oklahoma Press, ©2010 138 p. $29.95 (pa)Authors Stormes (award-winning saddle maker) and Reeves (chair,cowboy culture, National Cowboy & Western Heritage Museum) offer alook at the life and art of Luis B. Ortega, acclaimed rawhide braider ofhorse gear. Ortega’s talent raised the status of his braiding from workinggear to collectible art and influenced a generation of gear makers.Essentially, the book is both biography of a singular artist but it is moreso a pictorial illustration of Ortega’s art. Roughly 100 photographs andillustrations are included. Oversize: 9x11″.

SF422 2009-045348 978-1-60163-093-3HHeeaalliinngg ccoommppaanniioonnss;; oorrddiinnaarryy ddooggss aanndd tthheeiirreexxttrraaoorrddiinnaarryy ppoowweerr ttoo ttrraannssffoorrmm lliivveess..Miller, Jane.New Page Books, ©2010 256 p. $16.99 (pa)A licensed clinical social worker/psychotherapist explains how psychi-atric service dogs can help those living with chronic mental illness, e.g.,veterans with posttraumatic stress disorder. The book includes sampleservice dog cards, U.S. laws protecting the rights of people with disabil-ities who have trained service animals, compatibility profiles of breeds,an article about Miller’s work, glossary, resources, and photos.

SF446 978-1-84468-033-7FFaammoouuss ffeelliinneess;; ccaattss’’ lliivveess iinn ffaacctt aanndd ffiiccttiioonn..Alderton, David.Remember When, ©2009 224 p. $39.95A well-known expert on cats and other animals, Alderton introducesreaders to a host of famous cats, both real and imagined. This lively booklooks at cats in art, literature, and entertainment and in history andlegend, as well as heroic cats, historical cats, and royal and political cats.Readers can also peruse an extensive A to Z section of famous felines, aswell as 16 pages of full-color illustrations of cat art and memorabilia.(Distributed by Casemate.)

TTEECCHHNNOOLLOOGGYY,, CCOONNSSTTRRUUCCTTIIOONN

T175 2009-936222 978-1-84720-948-1EEvvaalluuaattiioonn aanndd ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee mmeeaassuurreemmeenntt ooff rreesseeaarrcchhaanndd ddeevveellooppmmeenntt;; tteecchhnniiqquueess aanndd ppeerrssppeeccttiivveess ffoorr mmuullttii--lleevveell aannaallyyssiiss..Chiesa, Vittorio and Federico Frattini.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 301 p. $135.00This volume focuses on three levels of measuring the performance ofresearch and development activities—evaluation of specific projects andpeople at the level of the firm, evaluating R&D efforts through the lensof finance and investments, and assessing how innovation results fromthe interactions of multiple firms and governmental efforts to stimulateresearch, as well as broader policy issues. Although internationally appli-cable, the volume does result from a research project carried out in Italyand contains contributions mostly by professors in the R&D strategy andorganization field at Politecnico di Milano.

TA551 978-1-84802-038-2MMeettrriicc ssuurrvveeyy ssppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss ffoorr ccuullttuurraall hheerriittaaggee..Bryan, Paul et al. Ed. by David Andrews.English Heritage, ©2009 —- p. $80.00 (pa)This document presents specifications for services and standardsrequired for the supply of various types of metric surveys employed forthe purposes of heritage management that follows the standard for spec-ification of the Royal Institute of Chartered Surveyors (UK). Right-handpages contain the clauses of the specifications and left-hand pagescontain guidance pertinent to those clauses. The document first coversgeneral terms, performance, and presentation requirements common toall services and then addresses standards specific to image-based survey,measured building survey, topographic survey, and laser scanning.Distributed in North America by The David Brown Book Co.

TA1634 2009-047277 978-1-60566-900-7MMaacchhiinnee lleeaarrnniinngg ffoorr hhuummaann mmoottiioonn aannaallyyssiiss;; tthheeoorryy aannddpprraaccttiiccee..Wang, Liang et al.Medical Information Science Reference, ©2010 299 p. $245.00This work gathers recent international research on vision-based systemsfor analyzing and interpreting motion from video footage. Chapter topicsinclude graphical models for representation and recognition of humanactions, common spatial patterns for real-time classification of humanactions, real-time recognition of basic human activities, and a super-res-olution approach for the selective analysis of noisy and unconstrainedvideo sequences. The book’s audience includes professionals workingwith vision applications in areas such as surveillance, sport eventanalysis, healthcare, video conferencing, and motion video indexing andretrieval. Wang is affiliated with the University of Melbourne-Australia.Medical Information Science Reference is an imprint of IGI Global.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–285–

TD140 2009-016161 978-0-87422-301-9SShhaappeerr ooff SSeeaattttllee;; RReeggiinnaalldd HHeebbeerr TThhoommssoonn aanndd tthheePPaacciiffiicc NNoorrtthhwweesstt..Wilson, William H.Washington State U. Press, ©2009 231 p. $29.95 (pa)When Reginald Heber Thomson first arrived in Seattle, Washington, in1881, he wasn’t happy with what he saw. In fact, he saw a city with itsalmost complete lack of infrastructure or utilities and muddy streets asif it was in a pit. In just over 10 years, Thomson could claim responsi-bility for giving the city a clean reliable water supply and a workingsewage system and much more. A supremely intelligent workaholic witha knack for picking capable supporting staff, Thomson was also was acivic leader despite weathering controversy. Seattle resident and authorWilson provides a well-documented biography of the man who gave acity so much.

TD388 2009936743 978-1-84720-629-9TThhee llaaww aanndd ggoovveerrnnaannccee ooff wwaatteerr rreessoouurrcceess;; tthhee cchhaalllleennggeeooff ssuussttaaiinnaabbiilliittyy..Fisher, Douglas. (New horizions in environmental and energy law)Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 385 p. $170.00For international and national water resources policy analysts, waterresource managers and lawyers, and students, Fisher (law, QueenslandU. of Technology, Australia) examines the law and legal doctrine withinthe policy context of sustainable water resources management at theinternational, regional, and national levels. He focuses on legal instru-ments, their text and structure, and effects, and how legal doctrines andtheir structure have evolved, how they address the management of waterresources, the nature and function of sustainable development in relationto it, and how legal arrangements incorporate or may be structured toachieve sustainable development.

TD885 978-1-84844-412-6CCaacchhiinngg tthhee ccaarrbboonn;; tthhee ppoolliittiiccss aanndd ppoolliiccyy ooff ccaarrbboonnccaappttuurree aanndd ssttoorraaggee..Title main entry. Ed. by James Meadowcroft and Oluf Langhelle.Edward Elgar Publishing, ©2009 300 p. $135.00This work investigates policy challenges related to carbon capture andstorage (CCS), an option for managing carbon dioxide emissions.Australian, European, Canadian, and US contributors consider the placeof CCS in greenhouse gas mitigation strategies, and examine the contro-versies CCS has generated in the political and policy domains in thedeveloped world. The book includes case studies of the reception of CCSin seven OECD countries and the EU. Each case study looks at the struc-tural characteristics of the nation’s economy and energy systems, itspolicy stance on climate change, the policy framework around CCS, andthe link between national developments and international processes. Asynthesis chapter highlights similarities and differences across the cases,and a final chapter examines implications. The book is for students,scholars, and researchers interested in climate change, energy policy, andpolitics and policy of the environment. Meadowcroft teaches politicalscience at Carleton University, Canada. Langhelle teaches social science atthe University of Stavanger, Norway.

TF705 978-0-8213-8085-7PPrriivvaattee sseeccttoorr ppaarrttiicciippaattiioonn iinn lliigghhtt rraaiill——lliigghhtt mmeettrroottrraannssiitt iinniittiiaattiivveess..Mandri-Perrott, Cledan.The World Bank, ©2010 289 p. $35.00 (pa)Featuring an eye-friendly layout with color photos, this 10x10″ report isintended as a practical guide for planners and policymakers in devel-oping and developed countries. The report discusses options and prac-tical issues related to public-private participation (PPP) arrangements forestablishing light rail-light metro transit (LRMT) systems. The process isbroken down into four steps, from policy issues through procurement ofa sustainable arrangement. The first part of the book offers an overviewof urban transport and LRMT schemes and a review of technical issues.The rest of the report describes various types of PPP structures, and looksat issues related to implementing agreements, such as funding andfinance, contractual arrangements, and procurement. An appendix pro-vides case studies from seven countries in five different global regions,presented in the form of comparison tables and project profiles. Alsoincluded are proposal checklists, a glossary, and a list of acronyms. Thereport lacks a subject index.

TH4811 2010-001971 978-1-60427-022-8RReessiiddeennttiiaall ccoonnssttrruuccttiioonn mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; mmaannaaggiinnggaaccccoorrddiinngg ttoo tthhee pprroojjeecctt lliiffeeccyyccllee..Griffin, Joseph A.J. Ross Publishing, ©2010 272 p. $49.95 (pa)This guide for residential contractors presents tools for managing resi-dential construction projects in the context of the project lifecycle familiarto all residential contractors. Chapters on initiating, planning, executing,controlling, and closing the project include step-by-step instructions,project management templates, and real world case studies. A web siteoffers downloadable forms, sample budgets and schedules, and a guideto working with bankers for spec home loans. Griffin is a certifiedProject Management Professional.

TH4816 2008-941325 978-1-58011-434-9MMaannaaggee yyoouurr rreemmooddeell aanndd ssaavvee mmoonneeyy!!Likes, Victoria.Creative Homeowner Pr., ©2009 191 p. $16.95 (pa)For those of us unlikely to get help from the This Old House or ExtremeMakeover crew, Likes shares tips learned from her experience in remod-eling her Seattle-area home. She explains how to cost-effectively managethe process from selecting construction professionals (sexism was anissue) and making a wish list to managing finishing work. The guideincludes color photos, floor plans drawings, a sample contract, resources,and a glossary.

TH9505 2007-938713 978-0-7385-5748-9BBuurrlliinnggttoonn ffiirreeffiigghhttiinngg..Faria, Toni and the Burlington Historical Commission. (Images ofAmerica)Arcadia Publishing, ©2008 127 p. $19.99 (pa)This work presents b&w historical and contemporary photos anddetailed captions chronicling the history of the fire department ofBurlington, Massachusetts, from the early 20th century to the present.Each chronological chapter opens with a page of background on the townand the department. Faria is the widow of a member of the BurlingtonFire Department.

TJ163 2009-039127 978-1-4398-2996-7MMaannaaggiinngg eenneerrggyy ffrroomm tthhee ttoopp ddoowwnn;; ccoonnnneeccttiinnggiinndduussttrriiaall eenneerrggyy eeffffiicciieennccyy ttoo bbuussiinneessss ppeerrffoorrmmaannccee..Russell, Christopher.CRC Press, ©2010 177 p. $92.00A US consultant on designing and implementing corporate energy costcontrol, Russell here discusses the management dimension of the project,in order to augment the many technical volumes on engineering dimen-sions. He covers the business implications of energy use and waste, thepotential for energy management to control energy costs and build share-holder wealth, misperceptions about energy efficiency and its outcomes,and how to develop and justify energy management as an integral partof business strategy. Among details are the promise and challenge of life-cycle cost, why corporate energy policies are needed, amnesty for yes-terday’s energy waste, in-house versus outsource, the cost of doingnothing, and the hunters and farmers of energy savings.

TL725 2009-926709 978-1-84564-143-6DDeevveellooppmmeenntt ooff rreeggiioonnaall aaiirrppoorrttss;; tthheeoorreettiiccaall aannaallyysseess aannddccaassee ssttuuddiieess..Title main entry. Ed. by M.N. Postorino.WIT Press, ©2010 176 p. $146.00The growth in congestion at main airport hubs throughout the world hasled planners to consider building new regional airports or find ways todevelop underutilized ones. With economic concerns of key importance,this volume contains chapters focused on the forecasting of air demandand the modeling of air travel choice behavior. The picture is complicatedby the growth of low-cost companies and the resulting changes in con-sumer preferences. Containing case studies from the European Union,Asia, Australia and the United States, this volume is designed for use byairport managers and planners, experts in air traffic modeling, publicagencies, consultants and academic researchers. Also published as anebook: ISBN 9781845643850.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –286–

TN315 2009-026061 978-0-7627-5427-4FFiirree uunnddeerrggrroouunndd;; tthhee oonnggooiinngg ttrraaggeeddyy ooff tthhee CCeennttrraalliiaammiinnee ffiirree..DeKok, David.Globe Pequot Press, ©2010 284 p. $18.95 (pa)In 1962, a fire began burning in a coal mine beneath the town ofCentralia, Pennsylvania. Today, the town lies abandoned and the fire stillburns. Using newly available archival materials, journalist DeKok tellsthe story of the bureaucratic battles that, in the fire’s early years, sawone government agency after another fail to control or extinguish the fire.He shows how, amid government infighting over whether Centralia wasreally in any danger, the residents of the town had to fight to be relo-cated. Illustrated with 16 pages of photos, this compelling account of ahuman-caused disaster will interest many readers.

TP248 2009-007283 978-1-4384-2894-9AAcccceeppttaabbllee ggeenneess??;; rreelliiggiioouuss ttrraaddiittiioonnss aanndd ggeenneettiiccaallllyymmooddiiffiieedd ffooooddss..Title main entry. Ed. by Conrad G. Brunk and Harold Coward. (SUNYseries on religion and the environment)State U. of New York Pr., ©2009 272 p. $24.95 (pa)Surveys that focus on national populations and general questions aboutattitudes towards food biotechnology are likely missing the views of sub-populations whose traditions and beliefs raise for them unique questionsabout food and dietary practice. For example, generic questions aboutwhether genetically modified foods should be labeled may elicit a dif-ferent response than one that premised the question with regards toIslamic identity and halal dietary rules. Brunk (philosophy, U. of Victoria,Canada) and Coward (emeritus, history, U. of Victoria, Canada) present11 papers investigating the moral and religious attitudes of these signif-icant subpopulations within pluralistic societies. They primarily focus onChristians, Jews, Muslims, Hindus, Buddhists, Chinese religionists, andethical vegetarians in North American society and limit their inquiry toconsumption issues as opposed to environmental or ecological concerns.The investigations were conducted through the use of focus groupswhose members were recruited from local religious communities inWestern Canada, combining both “expert interpreters” of the religioustraditions alongside “nonexpert” lay adherents, in which groups werepresented with a presentation on the nature of genetically modified foodtechnology and asked about their reactions to the technology in light oftheir dietary philosophies and commitments. The authors of the papersalso include their own views of GM foods and highlight differencesbetween their views and those that emerged out of the focus groups.

TP371 978-0-86571-652-0IInnddeeppeennddeennccee ddaayyss;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo ssuussttaaiinnaabbllee ffoooodd ssttoorraaggeeaanndd pprreesseerrvvaattiioonn..Astyk, Sharon.New Society Publishers Ltd., ©2009 349 p. $19.95 (pa)In a “book for wiser living” recommended by Mother Earth News, aformer academic who lives a sustainable lifestyle on a small farm inupstate New York shares her philosophy and the challenges andpleasures of living sustainably. Astyk explains how to stock a ‘welcomepantry’ for a ‘welcome table’ with cuisine for hard economic times. Thebook includes recipes and resources. Distributed by Consortium BooksSales and Distribution.

PPHHOOTTOOGGRRAAPPHHYY

TR119 2008-042954 978-0-917046-89-6DDaarrkkrroooomm;; pphhoottooggrraapphhyy aanndd nneeww mmeeddiiaa iinn SSoouutthh AAffrriiccaassiinnccee 11995500..Grantham, Tosha.Virginia Museum of Fine Arts, ©2010 150 p. $35.00 (pa)The exhibition for which this serves as a catalogue sits at the VirginiaMuseum of Fine Arts August 20 to October 31 2010, then moves toAlabama to show at the Birmingham Museum of Art January 23 to April16 2011. Essays set the artistic and historical context, then the photo-graphs are presented in chronological sections of acts of faith and actsof resistance, across the culture line, separate living as a legacy ofapartheid, a day in the life, ambiguous truth and uneasy reconciliation,sacred space and city space, contemplate, and flash. Artist biographiesare appended. Distributed in the US by University of Virginia Press.

TR140 2009-019639 978-0-393-05730-0DDoorrootthheeaa LLaannggee;; aa lliiffee bbeeyyoonndd lliimmiittss..Gordon, Linda.W.W. Norton, ©2009 536 p. $35.00There is little argument that Dorothea Lange was the most important U.S.documentary photographer of the 1930s—her Migrant Mother photographhas become a 20th century icon. In this meticulously researched biog-raphy, Gordon (History, New York University) details the life of a womanknown to most people only through her photographs, paying specialattention to the years before Lange took her famous Depression photo-graphs and to Lange’s lesser known later work. Deftly written and illus-trated with over 100 photographs (mainly by Lange), this book willappeal to a wide audience.

TR146 2009-933303 978-1-4354-5436-1110011 qquuiicckk aanndd eeaassyy iiddeeaass ttaakkeenn ffrroomm tthhee mmaasstteerrpphhoottooggrraapphheerrss ooff tthhee ttwweennttiieetthh cceennttuurryy..Bamberg, Matthew.Course Technology PTR, ©2010 232 p. $29.99 (pa)For those who wonder how to emulate photographs by masters, theauthor of other books in this series focuses on photographic principlesthat they apply in their works. Bamberg introduces the lives and prin-ciples represented in the works of 37 notable 20th century photographersincluding Bernice Abbott (the power of negative space), Ansel Adams(perspective), Helen Levitt (find animals in configurations of three),Aaron Siskind (find abstract art in architecture), and Alfred Stieglitz(zoom in close when photographing a celebrity).

TR146 978-1-933952-47-5PPhhoottooggrraapphhyy uunnpplluuggggeedd..Mante, Harald.Rocky Nook, ©2009 201 p. $49.95German photographer Mante influenced color photography in the 20thcentury with his use of bold fields of color, the juxtaposition of disparateobjects, and the abstract blended with the whimsical. This large hard-bound volume is both a retrospective of Mante’s striking work and aview into the pure form of original images as seen by the artist throughthe viewfinder, without cropping, editing or alterations. The book hasalmost no text other than a foreword and a brief timeline biography atthe back, though each photo does have a location and date given.Oversize: 12x10″

TR267 2009-011946 978-0-452-28955-0TThhee bbaassiicc bbooookk ooff ddiiggiittaall pphhoottooggrraapphhyy;; hhooww ttoo sshhoooott,,eennhhaannccee,, aanndd sshhaarree yyoouurr ddiiggiittaall ppiiccttuurreess..Grimm, Tom and Michele Grimm.Plume, ©2009 511 p. $24.00 (pa)The Grimms are a husband and wife photo-journalism team who haveshot in 130 countries. Writing in plain language, they offer practicaladvice on choosing and using digital cameras and composing photos.The 5.5x8.5″ guide explains principles and techniques of imaging editingsoftware, shows how to transfer and organize images on the computer,gives instructions for making prints at home and through local andonline services, and reviews the array of formats and methods forsharing photos electronically. There are also chapters on camera care,lenses and other accessories, settings, and special shooting techniqueswith digital cameras, as well as a chapter on scanning photos, shootingvideo clips, and using camera phones. The book includes numerous b&wand color photos of equipment and examples of shooting techniques, plusan extensive list of photography web sites and a glossary of digital pho-tography terms.

TR267 2009-003798 978-1-60059-577-6CCaappttuurriinngg mmoooodd,, aammbbiieennccee && ddrraammaattiicc eeffffeeccttss;; tthheeddyynnaammiicc llaanngguuaaggee ooff ddiiggiittaall pphhoottooggrraapphhyy..Meehan, Joseph.Lark Books/Sterling, ©2009 191 p. $29.95 (pa)While photographers working with chemicals and enlargers in dark-rooms certainly came up with a variety of techniques for manipulatingimages, digital photography opened up a larger and much more diversebag of tricks. Meehan (professional photographer, writer, teacher) sharesthe possibilities for photographic interpretation digital photographyoffers and combines those with enough technical background (lenses,filters, and composition, for example) to allow enthusiasts who are notprofessionals to get professional results.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–287–

TR267 2009-924533 978-1-59863-993-3DDaavviidd BBuusscchh’’ss ddiiggiittaall pphhoottooggrraapphhyy bbuucckkeett lliisstt;; 110000 ggrreeaattddiiggiittaall pphhoottooss yyoouu mmuusstt ttaakkee bbeeffoorree yyoouu ddiiee..Busch, David D.Course Technology PTR, ©2009 256 p. $29.99 (pa)In this 9x7.5″ guide for professional and amateur digital photographers,100 color photos by 44 professional and amateur members of theCleveland Photographic Society offer inspiration for shooting in differentgenres: portraits, special events, photojournalism, nature, animals, finearts, urban life, and special techniques. Each image is laid out in a two-page spread with information on how the picture was taken and adviceon how to shoot in a similar situation or setting. Photographer Busch haswritten numerous photography guides.

TR581 2009-903888 978-1-58428-260-0CCoommmmeerrcciiaall pphhoottooggrraapphhyy hhaannddbbooookk;; bbuussiinneessss tteecchhnniiqquueessffoorr pprrooffeessssiioonnaall ddiiggiittaall pphhoottooggrraapphheerrss..Tuck, Kirk.Amherst Media, ©2009 127 p. $34.95 (pa)Following a brief history of commercial photography, a freelance pho-tographer who has lectured at the University of Texas focuses on topicsincluding the role of the client, finding a niche, keeping up and savingmoney by renting equipment, marketing strategies, ethics and standards,becoming a business entity, and pricing one’s work. The guide includesnumerous color images (shots of food are prominent), and resources; acompanion blog is available.

TR680 2009-021901 978-1-57003-851-8TTrruuee ppllaacceess;; aa lloowwccoouunnttrryy pprreeaacchheerr,, hhiiss cchhuurrcchh,, aanndd hhiissppeeooppllee..Lanzano, Stanley F.U. of South Carolina Press, ©2009 117 p. $39.95A self-taught photographer (although you’d never know it from hiswork), Lanzano has spent well over a decade photographing AfricanAmerican church services and revivals in two rural counties of coastalSouth Carolina. His images of baptisms, testimony, singing, andredemption give readers a window into the lives of evangelical pastorFloyd Knowlin and his parishioners, clearly showing the respect and lovethat the author has for these people of strong faith and, often, hard lives.This is a photography book that makes you look at each and everypicture. It will have strong appeal for many readers.

TR690 2009-903891 978-1-58428-266-2FFrreeeellaannccee pphhoottooggrraapphheerr’’ss hhaannddbbooookk;; ssuucccceessss iinnpprrooffeessssiioonnaall ddiiggiittaall pphhoottooggrraapphhyy,, 22dd eedd..Hollenbeck, Cliff and Nancy Hollenbeck.Amherst Media, ©2010 125 p. $34.95 (pa)In this update of the 1999 edition, the Hollenbacks (travel photographersand a film-making team) discuss all aspects of the freelance digital pho-tography business from getting started and deciding on a specialty areato the rules governing the profession and selling work from one’s port-folio. The handbook includes representative photos, sample contracts, anextensive annotated list of resources, and a glossary. A companion blogis available.

TR790 2009-075155 978-0-8118-6903-4TThhee ggrraapphhiicc eeyyee;; pphhoottooss ffrroomm ggrraapphhiicc ddeessiiggnneerrss aarroouunnddtthhee gglloobbee..Bucher, Stefan G.Chronicle Books, ©2009 230 p. $35.00While many graphic designers take lots of photographs, they rarely con-sider them part of their professional portfolio. As this collection shows,photos shot by graphic designers tend to be unconventional, and rarelyshow the same concerns as those taken by professional photographers.This beautifully produced and extensive collection includes all types ofphotographic images, and features contributions from graphic designersincluding Armin Vit, Ellen Lupton, Sean Adams, Bryony Gomez-Palacio,Ann Willoughby, James Victore, Ed Fella, and Marian Bantjes.

TR790 2009-279376 978-1-4262-0526-2TThhrroouugghh tthhee lleennss;; NNaattiioonnaall GGeeooggrraapphhiicc ggrreeaatteessttpphhoottooggrraapphhss.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000033))Title main entry.National Geographic Society, ©2009 503 p. $16.95In this reprise of the 2003 collection, the National Geographic Societydraws on its vast archives of photographs of the landscapes, fauna andflora, and cultures of Europe, Asia, Africa and the Middle East, theAmericas, and oceans and islands. Stunning photos of wonders beyondthe Earth are also featured. The compact volume includes brief intro-ductory notes on each section, and on the authors and photographers.

MMAANNUUFFAACCTTUURREESS,, AARRTTSS && CCRRAAFFTTSS

TS1317 2009-032983 978-1-84217-381-7TThhee mmeeddiieevvaall bbrrooaaddccllootthh;; cchhaannggiinngg ttrreennddss iinn ffaasshhiioonnss,,mmaannuuffaaccttuurriinngg,, aanndd ccoonnssuummppttiioonn..Title main entry. Ed. by Kathrine Vestergård Pedersen and Marie-LouiseB. Nosch. (Ancient textiles series; v.6)Oxbow Books, ©2009 159 p. $50.00 (pa)Medieval broadcloth is defined as any cloth made mainly for export. Thecounty of Flanders was known for this and the first essay in this book,by John Munro, covers the industry there from roughly 1200-1500. Hispoint of view is as an economist. The second essay is also about trade,in this case, in the Baltic. Another essay shows how the Hanseatic Leaguewas involved in cloth exports. Pederson (textile research, University ofCopenhagen) and Nosch, director of the Institute for Textile Research atthe University of Copenhagen, are interested in the material as well as itsdistribution and the remaining essays are based in art and archaeology,with color images of material and clothing. This not only gives infor-mation on Scandinavia and northeaster Europe, it helps to dispel thecommon belief that striped and multi-colored cloth wasn’t worn in theMiddle Ages. They also depict changes in fashion and taste. Distributedin North America by The David Brown Book Co.

TT504 2009-035071 978-1-84788-252-3JJaappaanneessee ffaasshhiioonn;; aa ccuullttuurraall hhiissttoorryy..Slade, Toby.Berg Publishers, ©2009 220 p. $29.95 (pa)Intended for students of fashion and design, this work traces the historyof the Japanese clothing industry over the past 200 years, looking atwhere Asian fashion fits in fashion theory and examining the role ofAsian fashion in global fashion. The Japanese example is examinedbecause it runs contrary to traditional fashion theory explanations of thesequence and causality of sartorial modernity. Most of the book isdevoted to establishing the sartorial history of Japan; analysis of thathistory is then attempted within the framework of conventional fashiontheory. Separate chapters devoted to menswear and womenswear.Unfortunately, there are no illustrations. Slade holds a PhD in art historyand teaches at the Keio University in Tokyo. Distributed in the US byPalgrave Macmillan.

TT507 2009-033056 978-1-84520-764-9TThhee aannaattoommyy ooff ffaasshhiioonn;; ddrreessssiinngg tthhee bbooddyy ffrroomm tthheeRReennaaiissssaannccee ttoo ttooddaayy..Vincent, Susan J.Berg Publishers, ©2009 234 p. $34.95 (pa)In this valuable contribution to the history of fashion, Vincent (U. ofYork; author, Dressing the Elite: Clothes in Early Modern England, Berg,2003) traces trends in clothing the body from the 16th to 21st centuries.Focusing on the various areas of the body, she examines aspects of dressthat reflect cultural mores and gender ideals in particular eras, and sit-uates contemporary dress and cosmetic alteration in this historicalcontext. The book features numerous period illustrations—includingsatirical prints of fashion trends—, and extensive reference material.Distributed in the US by Palgrave Macmillan.

TT769 2009-022901 978-0-89672-648-2EEmmbbrrooiiddeerreerrss ooff NNiinnhhuuee;; ssttiittcchhiinngg CChhiilleeaann rruurraall lliiffee..Benavente, Carmen.Texas Tech U. Press, ©2010 225 p. $45.00The women in the town of Ninhue, in the foothills above Santiago, Chile,were taught embroidery by Benavente in the 1970s and with herguidance they developed the craft into a narrative art with which theydepicted scenes from their lives, history, and imagination. This volumesurveys the women artists and their work, with discussion of the contentof the embroideries, their style, and technique. The volume is well illus-trated with excellent color plates and includes an account (contributed byJean L. Druesedow, director, Kent State U. Museum) of Benavente’straining in embroidery and her work in Ninhue.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –288–

FFOOOODD CCUULLTTUURREE,, HHOOSSPPIITTAALLIITTYY IINNDDUUSSTTRRYY

TX705 978-1-903018-67-5OOvveerr aa rreedd--hhoott ssttoovvee;; eessssaayyss iinn eeaarrllyy ccooookkiinngg tteecchhnnoollggyy..Title main entry. Ed. by Ivan Day. (Leeds symposium on food history‘food and society’ series)Prospect Books, ©2009 165 p. $60.00Long before radios or televisions appeared in the average home, thehearth was the center of the home and of family life. This engaging bookof essays by five food historians looks at how food was prepared andcooked during the hearth’s reign. Topics include the evolution of the cast-iron range; the roasting of oxen over outdoor fires; the royal roastingranges in the kitchens of Windsor Palace; the clockwork devices used foropen-fire roasting; the history of barms and leavens; and cooking tech-niques for beehive ovens. The text is augmented by numerous illustra-tions (although not one of a beehive oven, sadly). Distributed in NorthAmerica by The David Brown Book Co.

TX714 2009-049894 978-1-59158-898-6SSttoorryy ttiimmeess ggoooodd eennoouugghh ttoo eeaatt!!;; tthheemmaattiicc pprrooggrraammss wwiitthheeddiibbllee ssttoorryy ccrraaffttss..Folini, Melissa Rossetti.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 163 p. $32.00 (pa)What’s better than storytime? Storytime with sugary treats! These simplerecipes for edible crafts make liberal use of store-bought cookies, frosting,gummy worms, pretzels, and licorice. Each recipe is illustrated with ab&w photo, and comes with several suggestions for real-aloud titles toaccompany the edible project. Projects are grouped by themes such asseasons, holidays, animals and insects, and magic. An introduction givesgeneral guidelines for a storytime program ending in an edible craftproject. The book is for teachers, librarians, and child care providersworking with children ages 3 to 8. Folini is a retired library director.Libraries Unlimited is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

TX715 2009-006033 978-0-8018-9323-0DDiinniinngg oonn tthhee BB&&OO;; rreecciippeess aanndd ssiiddeelliigghhttss ffrroomm aa bbyyggoonneeaaggee..Greco, Thomas J. and Karl D. Spence.Johns Hopkins U. Press, ©2009 170 p. $34.95In association with the B&O Railroad Museum, railroad buffs affiliatedwith the B&O Railroad Historical Society treat a facet of train travel onthe Baltimore & Ohio Railroad rarely written about: its dining service asa reflection of its business ethic. The tribute includes period photographswith black servers, recipes with the chef’s comments, and menus (steakwith French fried potatoes cost $1.50 circa 1940).

TX909 2009-001819 978-1-57233-655-1AAmmeerriiccaa’’ss mmaaiinn ssttrreeeett hhootteellss;; ttrraannssiieennccyy aanndd ccoommmmuunniittyyiinn tthhee eeaarrllyy aauuttoo aaggee..Jakle, John A. and Keith A. Sculle.U. of Tennessee Press, ©2009 217 p. $29.95 (pa)Jakle (geography, U. of Illinois) and Sculle (Illinois Historic PreservationAgency) explore the main street hotels that arose in small cities andtowns at the beginning of the auto age and held sway until motels onthe edge of town slowly replaced them. Besides providing lodging forpeople passing through, they also functioned as community centers andas symbols of civic pride. The volume is generous in its inclusion of avariety of illustrations, from photographs to charts and graphs, postersand cartoons. The epilogue explores how eleven historic hotels have beenrevived (sometimes with subsequent failure) or put to use for otherpurposes.

MMIILLIITTAARRYY && NNAAVVAALL SSCCIIEENNCCEE

U21 2009-031985 978-0-87013-877-5BBaattttlliinngg ttoo tthhee eenndd;; ccoonnvveerrssaattiioonnss wwiitthh BBeennooiitt CChhaannttrree..Girard, René. Trans. by Mary Baker. (Studies in violence, mimesis, andculture)Michigan State U. Press, ©2010 237 p. $24.95 (pa)Girard (French Academy and emeritus Stanford U.) warns that hisinterview with fellow mimetist Chantre (l’Association RecherchesMimétiques) seems to be about Germany and French-German relationsover the past two centuries, it is in fact exploring the possibility of anend to Europe, the Western World, and the world as a whole. That pos-sibility is near, he says, and the book is apocalyptic. His main hypothesisis that because humans imitate one another more than animals, theyhave had to find a means of dealing with contagious similarity, whichcould lead to the pure and simple disappearance of their society. Thismechanism, he says, is sacrifice. The conversation weaves throughmatters such as Clausewitz and Hegel, the duel and the sacred,Hölderllin’s sorrow, Clausewitz and Napoleon, and the pope and theemperor. Achever Clausewitz was published in 2007 by Editions CarnetsNord.

U22 2009-029040 978-90-04-17129-9TThhee mmoorraall ddiimmeennssiioonn ooff aassyymmmmeettrriiccaall wwaarrffaarree;; ccoouunntteerr--tteerrrroorriissmm,, ddeemmooccrraattiicc vvaalluueess,, aanndd mmiilliittaarryy eetthhiiccss..Title main entry. Ed. by Th. A. van Baarda and D.E.M. Verweij.Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, ©2009 529 p. $216.00This book is the result of an eponymous international conference con-ducted in October 2006 by the Ministry for Defence of The Netherlandsand the Netherlands Defence Academy. The conference brought togethermilitary officers and academics, mainly from member states of theNorth Atlantic Treaty Organization, to discuss issues of morality andasymmetrical warfare. The 23 included papers discuss such topics as theethical implications of superiority of US airpower, a proposal to add thecategory of jus potentia ad bellum (the principle of just military pre-paredness) to the just war tradition in light of the military hegemony ofthe US, the Kantian impermissibility of causing innocent deaths evenwhen the enemy is hiding among the people, the application of just warcriteria to UN interventions, reasons why regular soldiers should adhereto the laws of war even if insurgents do not, leadership failures and suc-cesses in the British history of asymmetrical conflict, legal double stan-dards in the American “War on Terror,” the ethics of a rank-and-fileIsraeli soldier movement that offers testimony regarding the realities ofoccupying the Palestinian territories, ethics education in the military, psy-chological aspects of ethical decision-making, trauma as a contributor tomorally deficient decision-making, and the impact of the “War onTerror” on democratic values and legal safeguards. Martinus Nijhoff isan imprint of Brill.

U42 978-90-420-2521-9MMeemmoorriieess aanndd rreepprreesseennttaattiioonnss ooff wwaarr;; tthhee ccaassee ooff WWoorrllddWWaarr II aanndd WWoorrlldd WWaarr IIII..Title main entry. Ed. by Elena Lamberti and Vita Fortunati. (Textxet:studies in comparative literature; v.58)Editions Rodopi, ©2009 343 p. $98.00 (pa)The editors (professors of literature at the U. of Bologna, Italy) present aninterdisciplinary collection of 19 papers exploring the historical, cultural,and social impacts of cultural memories of World Wars I and II asrevealed in cinema, literature, art, and monuments. The papers exploresuch topics as European war novels as a medium of collective memory,public and disputed memories of war in Italy, the line between fact andfiction in Günter Grass’s My Century, the experience of war and thesearch for identity in US narratives of the wars, the wars as agents andmarkers of change in women’s writing, trauma and desire in the writingof novelist Mary Borden, memories of Nazi Germany in AgustíVillaronga’s film Tras el Cristal, cultural memory of World War II inHollywood, Poland and the Second World War in the films of AndrzejWajda, and the air war against Germany in German literature from areunification perspective. Price converted from Euros.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–289–

U102 2009-029803 978-0-313-36286-6CCllaauusseewwiittzz rreeccoonnssiiddeerreedd..Willmott, H. P. and Michael B. Barrett.Praeger Security International, ©2010 236 p. $22.95 (pa)Carl von Clausewitz’s On War, published posthumously in 1832, isperhaps the most widely quoted and revered works on the topic everwritten, but military historians Willmott and Barrett complain that thework has been granted the uncritical status of holy writ and note thatafter over a century and half much of its material must be seen as dated.They thus seek to place Clausewitz’s writings within proper historicalcontext and examine what developments since, particularly the devel-opment of absolute war and assymetrical warfare, suggest about the rel-ative relevance and applicability of Clausewitz’s ideas.

U163 2009-011799 978-0-674-03519-5TThhee ggrraanndd ssttrraatteeggyy ooff tthhee BByyzzaannttiinnee EEmmppiirree..Luttwak, Edward N.Belknap Press, ©2009 493 p. $35.00Impressive in scope and engagingly written, this volume presents acoherent, knowledgeable account of Byzantine military organization,history, arts of war, naval warfare, and its varied enemies over time.Rather than a chronological history, the material is divided into accountsof specific topics, events, and enemies, giving the reader a feel for thecontext of the time, whether in terms of the Bulgarians, dynastic mar-riages, the relationship of religion and rule, or the methods used byJustinian to establish the empire. Throughout, Luttwak zeroes in onByzantine strategy in military matters, describing how they thought ofthemselves and others, and how their reactions to various situationsshowed a long view and a willingness to negotiate rather than confront.The chapters on military manuals expand these concepts, which are thendemonstrated in action in the chapter on the 7th-century battles ofHeraklios against the Persians. Belknap Press is an imprint of HarvardU. Press.

U760 2009938713 978-0-7546-5996-9EEssssaayyss oonn mmeeddiieevvaall mmiilliittaarryy hhiissttoorryy;; ssttrraatteeggyy,, mmiilliittaarryyrreevvoolluuttiioonnss aanndd tthhee HHuunnddrreedd YYeeaarrss WWaarr..Rogers, Clifford J. (Variorum collected studies series; 940)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 —— p. $139.95The events of the (misnamed) Hundred Years War are a source of debateamong military historians. Rogers (history, United States MilitaryAcademy, West Point) presents several of his articles, published over anumber of years, that address several of the major points of discussion.He feels that Edward III had a definite strategy that was intentionally bel-ligerent, for instance. In two articles, he considers the place of thelongbow in English victories. He also points out that the war was not justbetween England and France, but that England had a northern front atthe Scottish border. The articles on how European warfare itself waschanged through an increased use of infantry and, eventually, strongsiege engines, are particularly interesting. A facing-page edition andtranslation of three unpublished accounts of the Neville’s Cross campaignwill be of use to students and scholars alike.

U793 2007-017239 978-0-7146-8499-4CCoouunntteerriinngg tthhee pprroolliiffeerraattiioonn ooff wweeaappoonnss ooff mmaassssddeessttrruuccttiioonn;; NNAATTOO aanndd EEUU ooppttiioonnss iinn tthhee MMeeddiitteerrrraanneeaannaanndd tthhee MMiiddddllee EEaasstt.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 22000088))Dokos, Thanos P.Routledge, ©2009 230 p. $39.95 (pa)Conducting a review of the existing literature, Dokos (director-general,Hellenic Foundation for European & Foreign Policy, Greece) seeks toassess the nature and seriousness of the threat to Western security fromthe proliferation of weapons of mass destruction and to evaluate the pos-sible options for dealing with the problem. The discussion is based onthe assumption that NATO is the only multinational organization thathas the military capabilities to deal with the threat, but that it may bepossible to minimize the threat through diplomatic and political initia-tives. The threat is assessed in relation to states of the Mediterranean andMiddle East and in relation to non-state terrorist groups. Nuclearweapons and their delivery systems comprise the main threat assessed,but discussion of chemical and biological weapons are discussed as well.

UA11 2009-031577 978-1-4128-1162-0OOnn eessccaallaattiioonn;; mmeettaapphhoorrss aanndd sscceennaarriiooss.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11996655))Kahn, Herman.Transaction Publishers, ©2010 308 p. $34.95 (pa)Widely considered the founder of “futurology,” political scientist andeconomist Kahn (1922-83) analyzes nuclear war from the perspective ofthe rationale and rhetoric, the stages and shapes of conflict both beforeand after the nukes come out. His account is still cogent, though the US-USSR scenario he had in mind is gone. Among his topics are the rungsof the escalation ladder, traditional and intense crises, the nuclearthreshold, military and civilian central wars, defects of the escalation-ladder metaphor, and de-escalation and its aftermath. The 1965 editionwas published by Praeger in New York.

UA650 2010-290481 978-1-84725-249-4RReedd ccooaatt,, ggrreeeenn mmaacchhiinnee;; ccoonnttiinnuuiittyy iinn cchhaannggee iinn tthheeBBrriittiisshh AArrmmyy 11770000 ttoo 22000000..Kirke, Charles. (Birmingham war studies series)Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 240 p. $140.00Kirke (military anthropology and human factors, Cranfield U., UK), whodraws from fieldwork and interviews he conducted over the 29 years heserved as an officer in the army, details the daily lives of soldiers in thecombat arms of the British Army from 1700 to 2000. Using techniquesfrom social science and social anthropology, he considers the soldiers’aspirations, attitudes, behaviors, and expectations, and aspects of organi-zational culture, agency, and social structure within different historicalcontexts: the eighteenth century, the early and mid-nineteenth century,and the twentieth century. Examples include aspects of soldiers’ lives likedress regulations, chain of command, friendship, loyalty, and tasks ofbeing a soldier. He excludes discussion of female soldiers.

UA703 978-1-84884-085-0FFiigghhttiinngg ffoorr tthhee FFrreenncchh ffoorreeiiggnn lleeggiioonn..Lochrie, Alex.Pen and Sword, ©2009 170 p. $39.99At age 38, close to the age limit, author Lochrie joined the French ForeignLegion in the early 1990s. In this narrative, one of the few modernaccounts of life in the Legion, he describes his experiences over thecourse of 11 years. Lochrie became a member of the elite LegionParachute Regiment and saw active service in Central Africa, Iraq, andBosnia. He describes the rigorous training and his fellow Legionnaires,and offers a unique perspective on the manipulations of politicians andjournalists and the suffering that war brings to innocent people. A fewb&w historical photos are included. The author now runs a marketingcompany in Scotland. There is no subject index. The book is distributedin the US by Casemate.

UA770 2009-021452 978-0-8047-6952-5TThhee ccuullttuurree ooff mmiilliittaarryy iinnnnoovvaattiioonn;; tthhee iimmppaacctt ooff ccuullttuurraallffaaccttoorrss oonn tthhee RReevvoolluuttiioonn iinn MMiilliittaarryy AAffffaaiirrss iinn tthhee UUSSSSRR,,tthhee UUSS,, aanndd IIssrraaeell..Adamsky, Dima.Stanford U. Press, ©2010 231 p. $25.98 (pa)The so-called “Revolution in Military Affairs,” based on the use of infor-mation technology to integrate long-range, precision-guided munitions;C4I (command, control, communications, computers, and information);and RSTA (reconnaissance, surveillance, and targeting acquisition) andassociated changes in thinking about the combat environment followedremarkably different paths in the United States, Russia, and Israel, withthe US developing the technology before making major conceptualchanges, Russia developing the conceptual and theoretical ideas prior topossessing much of the technology, and Israel arriving very late at con-ceptual change despite its access to the technology. Adamsky (nationalsecurity studies, Harvard U.) seeks to explain these disparities with con-structivist theories about the imprint of cultural attributes on strategicbehavior.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –290–

UA770 2009-034582 978-0-7546-7408-5TThhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff sseeccuurriittyy iinn mmooddeerrnn RRuussssiiaa..Galeotti, Mark. (Post-soviet politics)Ashgate Publishing Co., ©2010 233 p. $99.95Researchers in political and military fields from Western Europe and theUS explore relations between the two spheres in post-Soviet Russia.Among their topics are sovereign democracy and great power aspira-tions, civil-military relations and the security apparatus, the armed forcesunder and after Putin’s command, Chechnya and regional security,nuclear arms control after a time of troubles, security forces dealing withterrorism and crime, the security economy, and Russia’s unending questfor security. They conclude that Russia’s security policies will be shapedby how much money is available to the state, and the psychological andcultural instincts of the rulers and the ruled regarding potential threats.

UA832 2009-043411 978-0-230-22017-1MMiilliittaarryy eexxppeennddiittuurree aanndd eeccoonnoommiicc ggrroowwtthh iinn tthhee MMiiddddlleeEEaasstt..Wahid, Latif.Palgrave Macmillan, ©2009 172 p. $85.00Arguing that military institutions of the Middle East “have fundamen-tally retarded its social and economic development and are largelyresponsible for the suffering of its people,” Wahid (economics, U. ofWestminster, UK) analyzes the origins of conflicts and the role of armedforces in the political and economic development of the region from apolitical economy perspective. He also addresses military’s role in thenational economies of Iran, Turkey, Iraq, Syria, Egypt, and Israel from1970 through 2006 and discusses trends in military expenditure.

UA853 2009-025782 978-1-84519-378-2TThhee nnaattuurree ooff wwaarr;; ccoonnfflliiccttiinngg ppaarraaddiiggmmss aanndd IIssrraaeelliimmiilliittaarryy eeffffeeccttiivveenneessss..Tira, Ron.Sussex Academic Press, ©2010 146 p. $65.00Tira (a veteran of Israel Air Force intelligence and special operations)draws on Israel’s recent experiences with war-making, as well as thebroader history of 20th century warfare, in order to develop ideas thatgo beyond the classical Clausewitz doctrine of war towards a new theoryof asymmetrical warfare that aims towards breaking the “enemy’s par-adigm” or the basic assumptions that the enemy’s plans rest on. He testshis theories against the cases of the 2006 Israel-Lebanon war and“Operation Cast Lead,” the 2009 assault on besieged Gaza. An exampleof what he means by breaking the enemy’s paradigm is found in thislatter case, wherein he argues that “attacking the enemy’s combatantsand weapons wherever they were, even in the basements of mosques,public buildings, and residential quarters”—all within the limits of inter-national law, he insists, contrary to the judgment of the Goldstone Reportand large swathes of international opinion that saw the assault as an actof collective punishment aimed primarily at Gaza’s civilians—”representsa measure of breaking the enemy’s paradigm.” Such a judgment appearsto discount the moral level of war, emphasized by such fourth generationwar theorists as William Lind, who commented during the assault thatthe enemy, Hamas, “will not only survive,” (the only criteria needed toclaim victory against an advanced state military, according to Israeli mil-itary theorist and historian Martin van Creveld), “but be strengthened bya worldwide flood of sympathy, which will translate in part into newrecruits and more money.” Distributed in North America by ISBS.

UA927 2009-021581 978-1-4200-9527-2CCrriittiiccaall iinnffrraassttrruuccttuurree;; hhoommeellaanndd sseeccuurriittyy aanndd eemmeerrggeennccyypprreeppaarreeddnneessss,, 22dd eedd..Radvanovsky, Robert & Allan McDougall.CRC / Taylor & Francis, ©2010 318 p. $99.95Radvonovsky and McDougall run a private research enterprise investi-gating concepts surrounding critical infrastructures, how they areimpacted, and how they may be preserved. Here they describe what theycall significant strides in understanding the fundamentals behindsecuring, protecting, and safekeeping US infrastructure. Among theirtopics are critical infrastructure assurance, the national incident man-agement system, emergency preparedness and readiness, assessingsecurity vulnerability, information sharing and analysis centers, andsupervisory control and data acquisition. The first edition is said to havebeen published nearly four years ago.

UB251 2009-011126 978-0-8108-5543-4HHiissttoorriiccaall ddiiccttiioonnaarryy ooff GGeerrmmaann iinntteelllliiggeennccee..Adams, Jefferson. (Historical dictionaries of intelligence and counterin-telligence; no.11)Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 543 p. $120.00Adams (history and international relations, Sarah Lawrence College,Bronxville, New York) combines his interests in intelligence and counter-intelligence and in Germany to produce a reference for scholars in eitherfield. He includes Austrian, Baltic, and Sudenten German officials andinstitutions, but Swiss Germans only when they interact with non-SwissGermans. He does not include resistance to Nazi rule unless it is con-nected in some way with intelligence services. Chronologically, he beginswith the first Habsburg police force in 1782, and proceeds to 2009 andthe exposure of West Berlin policeman Karl-Heinz Kurras as a formerStasi agent. The entries encompass German and foreign figures, opera-tions, agencies, documents, and other elements of the skulduggery. Thereis no index.

UB270 2009-517430 978-1-929631-75-9EEnnccyyccllooppeeddiiaa ooff CCoolldd WWaarr eessppiioonnaaggee,, ssppiieess,, aanndd sseeccrreettooppeerraattiioonnss..Trahair, Richard C. S. and Robert L. Miller.Enigma Books, ©2009 572 p. $29.00 (pa)This encyclopedia for history buffs and researchers contains 330 cross-referenced, alphabetical entries on organizations, intelligence operations,and individual spies and secret agents on all sides of the Iron Curtain.An introduction overviews the secondary literature on Cold War espi-onage and offers a list of secondary sources. Entries cover Soviet Bloc,Communist China, and Western espionage during the period 1945-1991,focusing on human interactions and societal forces rather than technicalaspects. The encyclopedia includes a glossary and a list of heads of intel-ligence. This revised paperback edition contains 75 new entries. It incor-porates new data available since the opening of various archives,especially in the former Soviet satellite countries. The book’s detailedchronology, beginning in 1917, is updated to the end of 2008.

UB271 2008-301337 978-1-84383-422-9TThhee ssppyy wwhhoo ccaammee iinn ffrroomm tthhee CCoo--oopp;; MMeelliittaa NNoorrwwooooddaanndd tthhee eennddiinngg ooff CCoolldd WWaarr eessppiioonnaaggee..Burke, David. (History of British intelligence)The Boydell Press, ©2008 209 p. $34.95Burke (history, Cambridge U., UK) had already been involved in con-ducting weekly interviews with Melita Norwood while researching herfather, a Latvian disciple of the Russian novelist Leo Tolstoy, when he wasshocked to learn from the headlines of the newspapers that Norwoodhad just been publicly outed as a KGB intelligence source spying onBritain for a period of about 40 years following her recruitment in 1937.Norwood gave the Soviets materials from her job at the British Non-Ferrous Metals Research Association, which was a cover for nuclearresearch, and has been credited helping the Soviets develop nuclearweapons much earlier than otherwise was feasible. He narratesNorwood’s story here, placing her activities within the context of thewider Cold War espionage milieu.

UB365 978-0-7748-1855-1VVeetteerraannss wwiitthh aa vviissiioonn;; CCaannaaddaa’’ss wwaarr bblliinnddeedd iinn ppeeaacceeaanndd wwaarr..Durflinger, Serge Marc. (Studies in Canadian military history)U. of British Columbia Press, ©2010 428 p. $85.00Durflinger (history, the University of Ottawa, Canada) chroniclesadvocacy by Canadian servicemen blinded in war, highlighting theirefforts to help Canadian veterans and all blind citizens. The book beginswith the establishment of the Canadian National Institute for the Blindin 1918 by 200 Canadian servicemen blinded in WWI, then continueswith the formation of the Sir Arthur Pearson Association of War Blinded,which advocated for government benefits, job retraining, and other socialprograms. Key figures are profiled, and issues such as physical and psy-chological rehabilitation are discussed. The book is based on archivalmaterial from both organizations, and offers large type and b&w his-torical photos. The book is published in association with the CanadianWar Museum and the Sir Arthur Pearson Association of War Blinded,and distributed in the US by UTP Distribution.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–291–

UB393 2009-044640 978-0-7864-4023-8AAmmeerriiccaann mmiilliittaarryy cceemmeetteerriieess,, 22dd eedd..Holt, Dean W.McFarland & Co., ©2010 397 p. $95.00This reference offers 1-5 page entries on Department of Veterans Affairsnational cemeteries and related sites, and on other cemeteries and mon-uments operated by the Department of the Army, the National ParkService, the American Battle Monuments Commission, and individualstates. Entries explain how and why the cemeteries were created andoffer notes on those buried there. Appendices provide information onsites by state and by year, and information on headstones, markers, andthe Medal of Honor. A 10-page introduction reviews the history and oper-ations of the National Cemetery System/Administration from the CivilWar to the present, and describes several cemetery support organizations.B&w photos and cemetery maps are included. This second edition isupdated to include new cemeteries and facilities. Holt is retired fromfederal service.

UC20 2009045784 978-0-313-35455-7UUnniitteedd SSttaatteess AArrmmyy llooggiissttiiccss;; ffrroomm tthhee AAmmeerriiccaannRReevvoolluuttiioonn ttoo 99//1111..Waddell, Steve R. (PSI reports)Praeger Security International, ©2010 232 p. $49.95Waddell (military history, US Military Academy) surveys the developmentof US Army logistics from the Revolutionary period to 2001, looking atobstacles, successes, and failures. The book is illustrated with b&w his-torical charts and maps.

UC753 2009-031957 978-0-8262-1867-4CChheewwiinngg gguumm,, ccaannddyy bbaarrss,, aanndd bbeeeerr;; tthhee AArrmmyy PPXX iinnWWoorrlldd WWaarr IIII..Cooke, James J.U. of Missouri Press, ©2009 186 p. $39.95This is a history of the American military’s PX (post-exchange) system or,more formally, Army Exchange System during World War II. Cooke(emeritus, history, U. of Mississippi) first examines the First World Warantecedents of the system and then turns to a chronological and generallylaudatory account of the development of the World War II PX system andits ability to provide the products of a consumerist society to thoseserving in the military overseas.

UG446 978-1-84868-580-2JJaakkee WWaarrddrroopp’’ss ddiiaarryy;; aa ttaannkk rreeggiimmeennttss sseerrggeeaanntt’’ss ssttoorryy..Forty, George.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 248 p. $27.95 (pa)George Forty, himself a veteran of the Korean War, uses British TankSergeant Jake Wardrop’s war diary as the basis for this account ofWardrop’s war experiences from 1940 through 1945, when he was killedin action at the end of the war. The detailed diary offers a first-personrecord of battles in France, Italy, and Germany, and abundant b&w his-torical photos. The book is distributed in the US by Casemate.

UG1242 2009-024080 978-1-58007-127-7CCoolldd WWaarr ppeeaacceemmaakkeerr;; tthhee ssttoorryy ooff CCoowwttoowwnn aanndd tthheeCCoonnvvaaiirr BB--3366..Pyeatt, Don and Dennis R. Jenkins.Specialty Press, ©2010 240 p. $32.95This history chronicles the development of the Convair B-36 very-long-range nuclear bomber from its beginnings during WWII through con-struction in Fort Worth and its deployment mainly as a propaganda ruseduring the Cold War. By the time the Convair B-36 became operational,it was made obsolete by guided missiles. In addition to material on tech-nology, there is background on life in Fort Worth during the period andthe project’s impact on the town. A brief epilogue looks at political ide-ology and economic realities of the time. The book includes b&w andcolor photos and illustrations on every page, plus about 60 pages ofappendices detailing design, manufacture, and testing of specific partsand other aircraft. Pyeatt has served as the historian for the B-36Peacemaker Museum and for the 7th Bomb Wing B-36 Association.Jenkins is a consulting engineer in Cape Canaveral, Florida. He haswritten other book on aerospace history.

UG1242 2009-032855 978-1-58007-151-2LLoocckkhheeeedd BBllaacckkbbiirrdd ffaammiillyy;; AA--1122,, YYFF--1122,, DD--2211//MM--2211 aannddSSRR--7711;; pphhoottoo ssccrraappbbooookk..Title main entry. Ed. by Tony Landis.Specialty Press, ©2010 127 p. $19.95 (pa)Landis, an aviation photographer affiliated with NASA’s Dryden FlightResearch Center, presents a color photo history of the Lockheed Blackbirdfamily of military airplanes, from 1964 through the final flight in 1999.The book collects about 100 color photos, including rare images that havenever been published before and images recently declassified by the CIA,as well as design drawings and plans, illustrating the design,manufacture, and flight of the planes. Photos are accompanied bydetailed captions.

UG1530 2009-051219 978-0-313-35680-3MMiilliittaarryy ssppaaccee ppoowweerr;; aa gguuiiddee ttoo tthhee iissssuueess..Wong, Wilson W.S. and James Fergusson. (Contemporary military,strategic, and security issues)Praeger, ©2010 158 p. $34.95Wong (a research fellow at the Centre for Defense and Security Studies,Canada) and Fergusson (director, Centre for Defense and Security Studies,Canada) conduct an analysis of military uses of space now and in thefuture. They describe the general science and technology of outer spaceexploration and utilization and then discuss the development of spacesystems that have the purpose of enhancing the application of territorialmilitary force. Finally they present a survey of military thinking con-cerning space surveillance and other passive measures of space warfare,as well as issues of active force application. An appendix contains theOuter Space Treaty, which governs the military use of space.

V435 978-1-84868-696-0NNaauuttiiccaall ttrraaiinniinngg sshhiippss;; aann iilllluussttrraatteedd hhiissttoorryy..Carradice, Phil.Amberley Publishing, ©2009 189 p. $29.95 (pa)This history looks at Britain’s nautical training ships and floating refor-matory schools for boys and young men. Boys as young as age ten weretrained as sailors and deck hands and housed on old, wooden warshipsmoored around the coast of Britain. While most of the boys werechildren of the needy poor and delinquents sent by the courts, there werealso officer training ships holding more privileged boys. The practicepeaked during WWI, and scandals arose due to poor conditions on theships, abuse, disease, mutiny, and the risk of fire, although some shipswere still in business up until the 1950s. The book includes numerousb&w historical photos. There is no index and no information given onthe author.

VA55 2009-027768 978-1-59114-024-5NNaavvyy ssttrraatteeggiicc ccuullttuurree;; wwhhyy tthhee NNaavvyy tthhiinnkkss ddiiffffeerreennttllyy..Barnett, Roger W.Naval Institute Press, ©2009 223 p. $28.95It is the contention of this book that US Navy-trained officers have better,broader military strategic skills than their counterparts in the Army andAir Force. Why this is, and what implications it has for the defense ofthe country are explored in detail. To what extent the differences are cul-tural, or are a result of the fluid nature, literally, of the environment inwhich the Navy operates, makes the discussion an interesting one.

VA400 00-265963 978-0-8020-9604-3CCaannaaddaa’’ss nnaavvyy;; tthhee ffiirrsstt cceennttuurryy,, 22dd eedd..Milner, Marc.U. of Toronto Press, ©2010 391 p. $35.00 (pa)The service was established in 1910, so the 1999 first edition was a littlepremature, and Milner (history, U. of New Brunswick) has added a newchapter covering 1995 to 2006 called Global Reach. The chronologicalchapters are periodized into the orphan service to 1939, finding a role to1950, and securing a place. Among specific topics are nobody’s baby, thenon-so-great-war 1914-18, the politics of ambition in 1943, forging a tra-dition and a postwar fleet 1943-45, the halcyon days 1950-58, and thelocust years 1968-80.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –292–

VA593 2009-032790 978-90-04-17916-5SSwweeddiisshh nnaavvaall aaddmmiinniissttrraattiioonn,, 11552211--11772211;; rreessoouurrccee fflloowwssaanndd oorrggaanniissaattiioonnaall ccaappaabbiilliittiieess..Glete, Jan. (The northern world; v.46)BRILL, ©2010 816 p. $293.00Glete (history, Stockholm U., Sweden) places the development of theSwedish navy between 1521 and 1721 within the context of the histori-ography of early modern European state formation, which has often leftnavies out of their examinations despite the complexity of navies andwhat states’ ability to manage naval competencies and resources canreveal about the development of states as complex organizations. Thus,his history is primarily about the development of organizational capa-bilities for managing external resources such as manpower, socialauthority, food, timber, metals, sailcloth, hemp, etc. and transformingthem into naval power. The chapters are organized around the resourceflows that went into producing Swedish naval power, focusing particu-larly on the organizational capabilities for managing materials, althoughdiscussion of men and leaders is included by bringing together resultsform other studies and interpreting them in long-term perspective.

VB231 2009-032126 978-0-8108-6793-2AA wwoommaann’’ss wwaarr;; tthhee pprrooffeessssiioonnaall aanndd ppeerrssoonnaall jjoouurrnneeyy oofftthhee NNaavvyy’’ss ffiirrsstt AAffrriiccaann AAmmeerriiccaann ffeemmaallee iinntteelllliiggeenncceeooffffiicceerr..Harris, Gail. (Scarecrow professional intelligence education series; no.10)Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 270 p. $34.95 (pa)Harris, a Gulf War veteran, went from the ghettoes of Newark to a 28-year career in the Navy as an intelligence officer. At her retirement in2001, she was the highest ranking African American female in the Navy.In this hybrid of memoir and self-help, she shares the techniques sheused to battle racial and gender prejudice in her career and to deal withpersonal issues such as being overweight and single, and shows readershow they can use the same techniques to overcome their own personaland professional obstacles. She writes of the role of religious faith andfamily support in her life, and gives insight into the challenges andrewards of the military lifestyle. Her humorous stories of dating and rela-tionships in the military are a highlight of the book. There is no subjectindex.

PPUUBBLLIISSHHIINNGG,, LLIIBBRRAARRYY SSCCIIEENNCCEE,, BBIIBBLLIIOOGGRRAAPPHHYY

Z4 978-0-8389-1038-2SSccrriibbeess,, ssccrriipptt aanndd bbooookkss;; tthhee bbooookk aarrttss ffrroomm aannttiiqquuiittyy ttootthhee RReennaaiissssaannccee.. ((rreepprriinntt,, 11999911))Avrin, Leila. (ALA classics)Am. Library Association, ©2010 356 p. $50.00 (pa)In this reprint of a 1991 survey of the handmade book in Western civi-lization, Avrin (library and archive studies, Hebrew U. of Jerusalem)admits to chutzpah in compiling the scattered information on writingand the handmade book into a continuous history. From ancient papyrusscrolls to the printed Gutenburg Bible, she examines the material onwhich a book was written, its script, manufacture, illustrations, andbriefly, literature and cultural context. The 308 illustrations could be ofbetter quality. The volume includes maps of the ancient Near East,Middle East, Hellenistic, Roman, and Islamic worlds.

Z110 978-87-635-3099-6CCaarree aanndd ccoonnsseerrvvaattiioonn ooff mmaannuussccrriippttss 1111;; pprroocceeeeddiinnggss..International Seminar on the Care and Conservation of Manuscripts(11th: 2008: Copenhagen, Denmark).Museum Tusculanum Press, ©2009 313 p. $43.00 (pa)This volume collects 21 papers from the 11th international seminar onthe care and conservation of manuscripts, held at the U. of Copenhagen,Denmark, in April of 2008. Papers on conservation techniques andrelated matters are of course included, but presentations are alsoincluded for curatorial, codicological, philological, book historical, andeven digitization subjects. Among the specific topics addressed are: theuse of Boracol in the conservation of wax seals, 10th century Georgianbook-bindings in the St. Catherine’s Monastery in Sinai, the conservationof the First Minute Book of the Commission of Sewers in Surrey andKent, the construction of a database of early hand-made Finnish paper,and the history of repairs and rebinding of 15th century block books inthe Bodleian Library in Oxford. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Z110 2009-053967 1-931666-32-6PPrreesseerrvviinngg aarrcchhiivveess aanndd mmaannuussccrriippttss,, 22dd eedd..Ritzenthaler, Mary Lynn. (Archival fundamentals series; II)Society of American Archivists, ©2010 521 p. $63.00 (pa)This is one of six volumes of the Archival Fundamentals Series II, whichcollectively seeks to “provide the foundation for modern archival practiceand theory.” Ritzenthaler (director of the Document ConservationDivision of the National Archives and Records Administration) addressesthe preservation of archival materials, updating this second edition so asto account for the significant changes to the field arising from digitaltechnology. She defines core elements in an archives preservationprogram and discusses the care of archival materials and the factors thataffect their long-term keeping. Chapters address implementation of apreservation program, archival materials as physical objects, causes ofdeterioration and damage, creating a preservation environment, handlingarchival materials, storing and housing archival materials, integratingpreservation and archival management, copying and reformatting, andconservation treatment. Appendices provide a glossary, a select bibliog-raphy, information on basic preservation procedures, and guides tofurther resources.

Z285 95-41375 978-1-58985-101-6TThhee eeccoonnoommiiccaall gguuiiddee ttoo sseellff--ppuubblliisshhiinngg;; hhooww ttoo pprroodduucceeaanndd mmaarrkkeett yyoouurr bbooookk oonn aa bbuuddggeett,, 22dd eedd..Radke, Linda Foster.Five Star Publications, Inc, ©2010 170 p. $19.95 (pa)Radke, a publishing consultant and small press publisher, offers asecond edition of her guidebook for authors who want to self-publish.The author fills in the gaps in writers’ knowledge of what it takes topublish one’s own work. The variety of topics includes obtaining a copy-right and ISBN number, equipment, printing, payment and shipping,promotion and marketing, and media and mailing lists. The appendixincludes a collection of useful publications and associations. There is noindex.

Z665 978-1-58841-215-7HHooww ttoo ppaayy ffoorr yyoouurr ddeeggrreeee iinn lliibbrraarryy && iinnffoorrmmaattiioonnssttuuddiieess 22001100--22001122..Schlachter, Gail Ann and R. David Weber.Reference Service Press, ©2010 266 p. $30.00For undergraduate and graduate students in library and informationstudies, this detailed and informative guide identifies different types offunding that can help them pay for their degree in the US and Canada.Organized by degree and activity, the guide lists 833 scholarships, fel-lowships, grants, loans, and awards for study, research, and conferenceattendance, which are not limited to one school and range from $100 to$20,000. Program details include purpose, eligibility, financial data,duration, special features, limitations, number awarded, contact infor-mation, and application date. The many indexes allow searching byprogram title, sponsoring organization, residency, where the money canbe spent, specialty, applicant diversity characteristics, and month ofapplication. Schlachter has served as a library educator, manager, andadministrator of library-related publishing companies, and Weberteaches history at Los Angeles Harbor College.

Z665 2009-039410 978-1-936117-17-8HHuummaanniissmm aanndd lliibbrraarriieess;; aann eessssaayy oonn tthhee pphhiilloossoopphhyy oofflliibbrraarriiaannsshhiipp..Cossette, André. Ed. and trans. by Rory Litwin.Library Juice Press, ©2009 79 p. $15.00 (pa)It was as part of a graduate program in library science at the Universityof Montreal that Cossette, now deceased, wrote this treatise on the intel-lectual foundation of the library profession, which was published byL’Association pour l’avancement des sciences et des techniques de la doc-umentation (ASTED) in 1976 as Humanisme et bibliothéques: Essay su laphilosophie de la bibliothéconomie Litwin (U. of Minnesota-Duluth)includes a preface making urging librarians today to ponder the con-cerns Cossette addressed, and questions for reflection and discussion.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–293–

Z665 2009-028901 978-0-7864-4191-4LLiibbrraarriiaannsshhiipp iinn GGiillddeedd AAggee AAmmeerriiccaa;; aann aanntthhoollooggyy ooffwwrriittiinnggss,, 11886688--11990011..Title main entry. Ed. by Leonard Schlup and Stephen H. Paschen.McFarland & Co., ©2009 340 p. $55.00 (pa)Schlup (history instructor and reference librarian, Mesa CommunityCollege) and Paschen (university archivist, Kent State U.) present acollection of early articles (mostly from Library Journal), letters fromprominent individuals in the field of librarianship, and historicallyimportant reports. Their sources include Melvil Dewey, Charles AmmiCutter, Andrew Carnegie, Richard Rogers Bowker and even TheodoreRoosevelt. Important developments during gilded age America includethe development of the Dewey decimal system, the founding of theAmerican Library Association, and the establishment of a library schoolat Columbia University. It includes a timeline, two appendices, a sectionon suggested further reading, and a somewhat limited index mostlydevoted to names. While useful for historical research, this collection willalso be enjoyed by readers generally interested in the history oflibrarianship.

Z668 2009-037388 978-1-936117-04-8TThhee ppoolliittiiccss ooff pprrooffeessssiioonnaalliissmm;; aa rreettrroo--pprrooggrreessssiivveepprrooppoossaall ffoorr lliibbrraarriiaannsshhiipp..Dilevko, Juris.Library Juice Press, ©2009 231 p. $32.00 (pa)In recent decades, says Dilevko (information, U. of Toronto), universitieshave become increasingly corporatized, internalizing market-based con-cepts such as performance metrics and audit culture to the extent thatideologically they are indistinguishable from corporations. In short, heargues, they are not fit places to educate respectable librarians. He pro-poses simply eliminating the professional degree, so librarians would nolonger be obsessed with being professionals and with protecting theirstatus as such. His perspectives include fateful choices, achievement andthe quantified university, the ideology of professionalism, the socio-cul-tural premises of education for librarianship, and the professionalizationof eating.

Z669 978-1-84334-528-2MMeeaassuurriinngg aaccaaddeemmiicc rreesseeaarrcchh;; hhooww ttoo uunnddeerrttaakkee aabbiibblliioommeettrriicc ssttuuddyy..Andrés, Ana.Chandos Publishing, ©2009 169 p. $95.00 (pa)The object of bibliometrics, explains Andrés (methodology for the behav-ioral sciences, U. of Barcelona), is to assess scientific literature in a givenfield, and so is applicable to a wide range of disciplines. She describeshere the main analytic methods used in bibliometric studies. She coversdescriptive analyses, author production, journal productivity, scientificcollaborations, and author and journal citation analysis. Final sectionsdiscuss miscellaneous considerations, among them impact factor andother impact indices, the Hirsch index, Scopus and Google Scholar, andthe current position of multidisciplinary databases. Distributed in NorthAmerica by Neal-Schuman.

Z674 2009-027036 978-1-59158-349-3LLiibbrraarryy pprrooggrraammss oonnlliinnee;; ppoossssiibbiilliittiieess aanndd pprraaccttiiccaalliittiieess ooffWWeebb ccoonnffeerreenncciinngg..Peters, Thomas A.Libraries Unlimited, ©2009 159 p. $40.00 (pa)This volume primarily concentrates on the use of Web conferencingsoftware by libraries and library-related groups. Peters (the founder andCEO of TAP Information Services), draws from his experience in man-aging OPAL (Online Programming for All), a collaborative Web confer-encing and online public programming service. It is many wayspreferable to telephone conference calls since it not only offers voice-over-IP, but also text-chatting, co-browsing, video-over-IP and documentsharing. Beyond facilitating real-time meetings, the software can be usedfor online public programming and also for recordings, ranging from apodcast to a full archival record. This practical discussion is primarilyaimed at people in public libraries, although it could have broaderappeal and also function as a textbook in library science programs.

Z675 2009-035526 978-0-924304-56-9CCoolllleeccttiinngg AAssiiaa;; EEaasstt AAssiiaann lliibbrraarriieess iinn NNoorrtthh AAmmeerriiccaa,,11886688--22000088..Title main entry. Ed. by Peter X. Zhou. (Asia past & present; no.4)Assoc. for Asian Studies, ©2010 342 p. $70.00This beautiful volume offers 25 chapters, each of them providing thehistory of a North American East Asian library at institutions thatinclude the Newberry Library in Chicago and the Library of Congress,as well as every notable university. The histories describe the lives andactivities of the collectors and scholars who originally formed the collec-tions, the work to create libraries around these collections, and theongoing development of the library collections. Details of the contents ofthe collections are provided, with many collections containing a widevariety of materials, including art. These graceful accounts of East Asianlibraries have been written so as to include the stories of the institutions,departments, and universities that house them, making this a valuablework for a wide readership interested in the history of Canada andAmerica’s study of East Asian languages, literature, history, and art. Theprinting and binding of the volume is of an unusually high quality.

Z675 2009-039374 978-1-59158-768-2LLiibbrraarryy lliiffeessaavveerrss;; aa ssuurrvviivvaall gguuiiddee ffoorr ssttrreesssseedd oouuttlliibbrraarriiaannss..Bacon, Pamela S. and Tamora K. Bacon.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 124 p. $35.00 (pa)Pamela Bacon, a reading coordinator, media specialist, and freelancewriter, and Tamora Bacon, a literacy coordinator and former school prin-cipal, provide strategies for library media specialists and teachers whoare struggling to juggle the needs of students, parents, and adminis-trators in the classroom and media center. Each section begins with aquestion relating to the job, followed by advice and activities to help themreduce stress, be more productive, manage time, choose books, haveenergy and enthusiasm, discover a personal vision, and exercise themind and body. Advice for school counselors is also given. LibrariesUnlimited is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

Z675 2009-016939 978-0-8108-6744-4MMiissttaakkeess iinn aaccaaddeemmiicc lliibbrraarryy mmaannaaggeemmeenntt;; ggrriieevvoouusseerrrroorrss aanndd hhooww ttoo aavvooiidd tthheemm..Title main entry. Ed. by Jack E. Fritts, Jr.Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 132 p. $50.00 (pa)Edited by Fritts (director, library services, Benedictine U.), this volumecovers common academic library management issues and offers sugges-tions on how to best handle or avoid them. There is variance in the styleof the authors—some offering concise lists with bulleted points, andothers dense text, with plenty of footnotes. But they usually presentexamples of typical errors in areas such as project management, staffing,program planning and evaluation, or the failure to reach out and learnabout users before implementing changes in services. Other chaptersfocus on more general subjects such as communication, leadership, orcampus politics. Most of the contributors hold management positions inacademic libraries, but the volume is also rounded out by a piece froma vice president for academic affairs.

Z675 2009-015685 978-0-8108-5403-1TThhee pprriissoonn lliibbrraarryy pprriimmeerr;; aa pprrooggrraamm ffoorr tthhee ttwweennttyy--ffiirrssttcceennttuurryy..Vogel, Brenda.Scarecrow Pr., ©2009 272 p. $60.00A practical guide to running a prison library, this is a completely re-written update of her 1995 book titled Down for the Count: a PrisonLibrary Handbook. It begins with an historical summary, then follows upwith chapters on space planning and furnishing, collection development,and some aspects unique to prison libraries, such as lack of Internetaccess, use of hardback books for smuggling contraband, and howlibraries can assist in reentry efforts). The book also features twochapters on law libraries in prisons, and contains extensive bibliographicnotes and five useful appendices.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –294–

Z675 2009-035177 978-1-55570-621-0TThhee sscchhooooll lliibbrraarryy mmeeddiiaa ssppeecciiaalliisstt’’ss ppoolliiccyy aanndd pprroocceedduurreewwrriitteerr.. ((CCDD--RROOMM iinncclluuddeedd))Downs, Elizabeth.Neal-Schuman, ©2010 195 p. $75.00 (pa)This book/CD-ROM walks school library media specialists through theprocess of generating a policy manual, drawing on best practices from45 school library media centers around the country. The guide beginswith an overview of policy development and mission statements, thenlooks at administrative aspects, and provides sample forms and policiesfor budgets, inventory, and annual reports. Other chapters cover policiesfor teachers, staff, and students, collection policies, and policies foracceptable use of technology and materials. Both traditional topics, suchas collection development, and emerging issues, such as blogging, arediscussed. The CD-ROM contains 80 sample policies, procedures, tem-plates, and forms that can be adapted for local and district needs. Downsteaches in the Instructional Technology Program at Georgia SouthernUniversity.

Z675 2009-051922 978-1-59158-900-6TTeecchhnnoollooggyy ffoorr tthhee sscchhooooll lliibbrraarriiaann;; tthheeoorryy aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Scheeren, William O.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 223 p. $50.00 (pa)This text for students and in-service school librarians introduces theo-retical and practical aspects of technology in the school library. The bookbegins with an introduction to the broad scope of technology in theschool library and a detailed examination of the technology skills thatschool librarians need. It then presents chapters on topics such as net-works, hardware, and software, copyright and plagiarism, Internet fil-tering and security, and library information systems. Digital libraries,creation of online materials, and social networking are some other areasdiscussed. Each chapter includes questions for research and discussion.Scheeren lectures in education at St. Vincent College. Libraries Unlimitedis an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LCC.

Z678 2009-051166 978-1-59158-939-6MMoorree tteecchhnnoollooggyy ffoorr tthhee rreesstt ooff uuss;; aa sseeccoonndd pprriimmeerr oonnccoommppuuttiinngg ffoorr tthhee nnoonn--IITT lliibbrraarriiaann..Title main entry. Ed. by Nancy Courtney.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 172 p. $50.00 (pa)Courtney (coordinator of outreach and engagement at The Ohio StateUniversity Libraries) reviews recent advances in information technologythat impact librarians and their patrons, in this plain-language overviewfor librarians, library school students, and library staff. IT experts coverinnovations including web services, digital data preservation andcuration, and cloud computing, as well as learning management systems,data visualization, free and open source software, and metadata repur-posing using XSLT. A final chapter gives advice on communicationbetween librarians and IT professionals. Computer jargon is defined ina glossary. Libraries Unlimited is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

Z679 2009-027571 978-0-8389-8524-3EEmmeerrggeennccyy rreessppoonnssee ppllaannnniinngg iinn ccoolllleeggee lliibbrraarriieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Marcia Thomas and Anke Voss. Ed. by MarciaThomas. (CLIP note; #40)Am. Library Association, ©2009 152 p. $45.00 (pa)The College Library Information Packet Notes (CLIP Notes) publishingprogram, under the auspices of the College Libraries Section of theAssociation of College and Research Libraries, provides college and smalluniversity libraries with current documentation on library practices andprocedures. This CLIP Note provides information on emergency responseplanning and management. Included are the results of a survey admin-istered to college and university libraries that participate in the CLIP Noteprogram, and sample documents submitted by about 13 libraries, in cat-egories of communication, responses to emergencies, prevention, internaland external resources, recovery, insurance, and business resumption. Anannotated bibliography lists selected print and online publications thatprovide library and archives professionals with resources for planningfor and responding to disasters in the library. Thomas is director of tech-nical services with Illinois Wesleyan University. Voss is director of specialcollections at Urbana Free Library.

Z682 2009047658 978-0-8389-8512-0LLiibbrraarriiaannss sseerrvviinngg ddiivveerrssee ppooppuullaattiioonnss;; cchhaalllleennggeess &&ooppppoorrttuunniittiieess..Mestre, Lori. (ACRL Publications in Librarianship; no.62)Am. Library Association, ©2010 211 p. $54.00 (pa)Using surveys, interviews, and analysis of library web documents, Mestreexplores issues and challenges related to the duties and responsibilitiesof multicultural librarians. She describes the training, hiring, support,and work experiences of these librarians, and suggestions for improvingcurriculum and training at library schools, seeking a librarian to fillsuch as position, and follow-up training and support once a librarian ishired, as well as topics such as overcoming barriers, work satisfaction,organizing and managing multicultural services, and creating a moreinclusive work environment.

Z682 2009-046648 978-1-59158-832-0TTaalleess oouutt ooff tthhee sscchhooooll lliibbrraarryy;; ddeevveellooppiinngg pprrooffeessssiioonnaallddiissppoossiittiioonnss..Bush, Gail and James Biles Jones.Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 135 p. $40.00 (pa)Bush (reading and language, National-Louis U.) and Jones (libraryscience, East Carolina U.) outline core professional dispositions of ele-mentary, middle, and high school librarians. Dispositions relate to thelibrarian’s role in instruction, information literacy, assessment, literacyand reading, diversity, intellectual freedom, communication, advocacy,collaboration, resiliency, leadership, and ethics. Libraries Unlimited is animprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

Z692 978-1-85604-680-0DDiiggiittaall iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn;; oorrddeerr oorr aannaarrcchhyy??Title main entry. Ed. by Hazel Woodward and Lorraine Estelle.Facet Publishing, ©2010 208 p. $95.00Seven chapters, presented by Woodward (university librarian anddirector of the university press at Cranfield U., UK) and Estelle (chiefexecutive officer, JISC Collections, “which manages national negotiationfor access to a broad array of intellectual property on behalf of the UKacademic community”), explore the possible impact of information tech-nology on scholarly communication. General discussions of the changingnature of scholarly communications are presented from the perspectivesof librarian and publisher; the impact of e-books on the future ofscholarly communication is examined; the promises and dangers of thedigitization of archival collections are considered; issues of intellectualproperty are explored; and issues of digital resource discovery areassessed. Distributed in the US by Neal-Schuman.

Z692 978-81-7000-580-3LLiibbrraarryy && iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn sscciieennccee iinn ddiiggiittaall aaggee;; eessssaayyss iinnhhoonnoouurr ooff PPrrooff.. MM..PP.. SSaattiijjaa..;; 22vv..Title main entry. Ed. by Jagtar Singh et al.Ess Ess Publications, ©2009 935 p. $138.00The three editors are all based in India as are most of the contributors,who are joined by a smaller number from Europe, North America, andother countries of Asia. This two-volume festschrift honors the work ofProfessor M.P. Satija (emeritus, Central U. of Punjab), whose longstandinglove of knowledge organization motivated his teaching and researchregarding various classification schemes and indexing languages. Initialchapters address Satija’s achievements as an international “classificationguru” and his contributions to scientometrics. Following are contribu-tions (a total of 74) on various aspects of information needs, readinghabits, information literacy; knowledge management and organization,and networking; topics pertaining to library and information services,digital preservation, LIS education, and change management. A sectionof case studies specifically deals with the Asian experience. The contentsare very lightly indexed. Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Z693 978-81-7000-584-1AAccaaddeemmiicc lliibbrraarryy ssyysstteemm,, 22dd eedd..Sahai, Shri Nath.Ess Ess Publications, ©2009 344 p. $21.00 (pa)For librarians, graduate students, education planners, university and gov-ernment administrators, and faculty members in India, Sahai presents aguide to the academic library system. He covers such aspects as thefunction of the library in the context of the university, governance,finance, facilities and furniture, the collection, organization and admin-istration, staff, and services, with international examples. Some problemswith English grammar are present. There is no index. Distributed in theUS by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–295–

Z699 2009-655072 978-3-598-24284-7UUNNIIMMAARRCC mmaannuuaall;; bbiibblliiooggrraapphhiicc ffoorrmmaatt,, 33dd eedd..Title main entry. Ed. by Alan Hopkinson. (IFLA series on bibliographiccontrol; v.36)K.G. Saur, ©2008 760 p. $201.00This new edition provides the definitive guide to tags, indicators, andsubfield codes to be used in the UNIMARC format. Developed by theInternational Federation of Library Associations and Institutions,UNIMARC is primarily used to facilitate the international exchange ofbibliographic data for monographs, cartographic materials, music, soundrecordings, graphics, projected and video materials, rare books, archivalmaterials, and electronic resources. It is not the same format as MARC21,currently in use in the U.S., Canada, and Britain but has been adoptedfor use by several European countries. This edition uses 13-digit ISBNsand incorporates new and revised international standards.

Z710 978-1-85604-685-5SSuuppppoorrttiinngg rreesseeaarrcchh ssttuuddeennttss..Allan, Barbara.Facet Publishing, ©2010 192 p. $105.00 (pa)Allan (student learning and management learning, Hull U. BusinessSchool, UK) explains how academic library and information profes-sionals can support doctoral students in their research. Drawing from theliterature and discussions with doctoral students, graduates, library andinformation professionals, and colleagues, she provides an overview ofdifferent research degrees; addresses terminology, the research process,different styles and methods, and common approaches and strategies;and outlines the academic supervisor’s role, the experiences of thestudent, ways to support students in libraries and information services,and research and employability skills they need. She also discusses thevirtual graduate school, research communities, and professional devel-opment for library and information professionals. Distributed in the USby Neal-Schuman.

Z711 978-1-85604-672-5HHooww ttoo ggiivvee yyoouurr uusseerrss tthhee LLIISS sseerrvviicceess tthheeyy wwaanntt..Pantry, Sheila and Peter Griffiths.Facet Publishing, ©2009 192 p. $85.00 (pa)This guide to library information services (LIS) focuses on understandingever-changing user needs and expectations and then giving them whatthey want. With the advent of Twitter, Facebook, MySpace, new servicesfrom Yahoo! and Google and the gradual move to a semantic web, theenvironment in which library services must be delivered is constantlychanging. This book provides some methods for strategic planning, userresearch and training, and budgeting for and marketing the newservices. Pantry and Griffiths (both independent information specialists)provide examples from the UK, but much of the information will beuseful for public, academic, or special librarians in any location. The textdoes not cite journals or books, but there is a substantial appendix thatcontains references and a reading list for each chapter.

Z711 978-1-84334-507-7IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn lliitteerraaccyy llaannddssccaappeess;; iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn lliitteerraaccyy iinneedduuccaattiioonn,, wwoorrkkppllaaccee aanndd eevveerryyddaayy ccoonntteexxttss..Lloyd, Annemaree. (Chandos information professional series)Chandos Publishing, ©2010 192 p. $99.95 (pa)For information literacy researchers, librarians, and educators, Lloyd(information studies, Charles Sturt U., Australia) considers the definitionof information literacy in education and workplace contexts from a soci-ocultural perspective. She draws on research to understand how infor-mation literacy occurs and describes its structure as a situated practice,examining how and why information skills manifest in specific ways aspart of information practice. She first discusses the theory behind herstudy, then the different ways of thinking about information literacy ineducation, the workplace, and public library settings, and the concept ofan information landscape. Distributed in North American by Neal-Schuman.

Z711 2010-000229 978-1-55570-680-7RReeffeerreennccee rreennaaiissssaannccee;; ccuurrrreenntt aanndd ffuuttuurree ttrreennddss..Title main entry. Ed. by Marie L. Radford and R. David Lankes.Neal-Schuman, ©2010 312 p. $75.00 (pa)Radford (library and information science, Rutgers U., NJ) and Lankes(information sciences, Syracuse U., NY) present a collection of papersupdated from original presentations at a conference held in Colorado inAugust 2008, capturing the latest innovations in reference work andexploring possible future trends. Twenty-two contributions are organizedinto eight sections: an overview of the state of reference services; virtualreference; approaches, values, and philosophy of reference services; inno-vative service models; search engines and virtual tools; innovative servicemodels and marketing; and staff development and training. A samplingof topics: improving communication and accuracy in virtual reference,unconscious cognition in the genesis of reference queries, meeting users’needs through new reference service models, California’s AskNow lawlibrarian service, benefits and burdens of Google 2.0, and referencetraining through a co-mentoring program. For practitioners, students,and researchers.

Z712 2009-025124 978-0-8389-1001-6MMoovviinngg mmaatteerriiaallss;; pphhyyssiiccaall ddeelliivveerryy iinn lliibbrraarriieess..Title main entry. Ed. by Valerie Horton and Bruce Smith.Am. Library Association, ©2010 202 p. $70.00 (pa)Primarily written by Horton (director, Colorado Library Consortium) andSmith (delivery services, South Central Library System) this book alsoincludes selected articles from other contributors. Despite the growth inelectronic publishing, most of the material in libraries still has to bemoved from one branch to another, sent on interlibrary loan, or evendelivered to patrons at their homes. Distance education programs of col-leges often deliver materials to students as well. This volume exploresissues related to outsourcing of delivery functions and materials man-agement strategies. It also focuses on ways that delivery needs could bereduced, such as floating items that stay at the library branch to whichthey are returned and cooperative collection development where itemsare bought by the university where it is most likely to be used. Containsa useful glossary, bibliography and index.

Z715 978-1-84334-503-9WWeebb pprroojjeecctt mmaannaaggeemmeenntt ffoorr aaccaaddeemmiicc lliibbrraarriieess..Fagan, Jody Condit and Jennifer A. Keach. (Chandos internet series)Chandos Publishing, ©2010 285 p. $85.00 (pa)For library project managers, web teams, administrators, web con-sultants working with libraries, and library school faculty and students,Fagan and Keach (content interfaces and digital services, James MadisonU.) outline best practices for managing successful projects related to aca-demic library websites. They provide advice to help web project man-agers plan, engage stakeholders, and lead organizations though change,discussing the definition and responsibilities of a web project manager,roles of the project team, team dynamics, effective communication,designing project workflow, gathering input, executing the project, tech-nical and content specifications, and usability testing and quality control.Distributed in North America by Neal-Schuman.

Z718 2009-049594 978-1-55570-691-3EEaarrllyy lliitteerraaccyy pprrooggrraammmmiinngg eenn eessppaaññooll;; MMootthheerr GGoooossee oonntthhee LLoooossee pprrooggrraammss ffoorr bbiilliinngguuaall lleeaarrnneerrss.. ((CCDD--RROOMMiinncclluuddeedd))Diamant-Cohen, Betsy.Neal-Schuman, ©2010 177 p. $65.00 (pa)Diamant-Cohen is the executive director of Mother Goose on the Loose,LLC, which is an early literacy program for librarians. Here, she adaptsthe program to meet the needs of Spanish-speaking bilingual learners.After addressing general issues of bilingual learning, early literacy devel-opment, and the needs of the Latino community, she presents steps forplanning and running a Mother Goose on the Loose en Español programalong with suggestions for materials; describes ways for librarians to cus-tomize their program; presents a list of suggested songs, lyrics, and stagedirections for use in the program; and describes ways to combine theprogram with other bilingual programming and resources. The accom-panying CD-ROM includes one complete program to use as an instruc-tional tool, together with a range of planning materials.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –296–

Z718 2009-025147 978-0-8389-1015-3UUrrbbaann tteeeennss iinn tthhee lliibbrraarryy;; rreesseeaarrcchh aanndd pprraaccttiiccee..Title main entry. Ed. by Denise E. Agosto and Sandra Hughes-Hassell.Am. Library Association, ©2010 208 p. $60.00 (pa)Agosto (information science and technology, Drexel U.) and Hughes-Hassell (school library media, U. of North Carolina at Chapel Hill) bringtogether 13 chapters that explain how librarians can build better schooland public library programs for urban teens. Library and informationscience and teen specialists from the US detail model library programsand describe how to use current research about urban teens, their infor-mation habits and preferences, and their use of libraries to improveservices. They emphasize collaboration with other agencies; under-standing youth development; inclusion of culturally relevant resources,street lit or urban fiction, and teens’ voices and opinions in design anddelivery; advocacy; community outreach; understanding how social inter-action and entertainment outlets advance mental and physical devel-opment; exploring new media; and providing health information, basicinformation, and literacy services.

Z721 2009-464882 978-3-598-22042-5GGlloobbaall lliibbrraarryy aanndd iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn sscciieennccee;; aa tteexxttbbooookk ffoorrssttuuddeennttss aanndd eedduuccaattoorrss;; wwiitthh ccoonnttrriibbuuttiioonnss ffrroomm AAffrriiccaa,,AAssiiaa,, AAuussttrraalliiaa,, NNeeww ZZeeaallaanndd,, EEuurrooppee,, LLaattiinn AAmmeerriiccaa aannddtthhee CCaarriibbbbeeaann,, tthhee MMiiddddllee EEaasstt,, aanndd NNoorrtthh AAmmeerriiccaa..Title main entry. Ed. by Ismail Abdullahi. (IFLA publications; 136-137)K.G. Saur, ©2009 592 p. $155.00Specialists in five regions of the world, and in kinds of libraries, profilethe development of libraries there, for anyone interested in that par-ticular region or in libraries worldwide. For each, contributors coverpublic libraries, academic libraries, special libraries, school libraries, andlibrary and information science education. The uniform format providesa geographically comprehensive and thematically systematic overviewthat allows scholars to compare either across regions or across types oflibrary within a single region. Each section also includes an introductionthat explains features special to the region that might influence howlibraries are thought about and run.

Z721 978-0-8264-2990-2TThhee ssttoorryy ooff lliibbrraarriieess;; ffrroomm tthhee iinnvveennttiioonn ooff wwrriittiinngg ttoo tthheeccoommppuutteerr aaggee;; 22dd eedd..Lerner, Fred.Continuum Publishing Group, ©2009 249 p. $27.95 (pa)For general readers, Lerner, who has degrees in history and libraryscience from Columbia U., provides a brief and selective history oflibraries and how people have collected and organized records of thehuman experience. He traces the evolution of libraries, the role theyplayed in society from the invention of writing to today, and how theywere an aspect of the culture in which they operated. He describeslibraries in ancient Egypt, Han-dynasty China, the ancient WesternClassical world, the Baghdad of Harun-al-Rashid, and medieval andRenaissance Europe, as well as colonial America, the Library ofCongress, university libraries, today’s large public library systems, librar-ianship, and information management. This edition has been updated toincorporate new technology.

Z733 2009-017734 978-1-55849-713-9CCuullttuurree cclluubb;; tthhee ccuurriioouuss hhiissttoorryy ooff tthhee BBoossttoonnAAtthheennaaeeuumm..Wolff, Katherine.U. of Massachusetts Press, ©2009 204 p. $80.00Founded in 1807 by Boston elites connected to the Anthology Society, theBoston Athenaeum is an independent, membership library that serveshere as a window into the tensions involved in the forging of Americanhigh culture in the early republic. The author addresses three key themesconcerning the founding and evolution of the Athenaeum: “the tensionbetween inherited European and emerging American aesthetic models;the relationship between a city and its artificial cultural center; and thepersistence of narrative as a means of establishing personal and institu-tional identity.”

Z736 2009-482285 978-1-55195-245-1TThhee UUnniivveerrssiittyy ooff AAllbbeerrttaa LLiibbrraarryy;; tthhee ffiirrsstt hhuunnddrreedd yyeeaarrss,,11990088--22000088..Distad, Merrill.University of Alberta Library, ©2009 265 p. $19.95 (pa)The University of Alberta Library is now the second largest library inCanada and one of the top twenty academic research libraries in NorthAmerica. Over the past one hundred years it has gone through recon-struction and moves, additions of new wings and branch libraries, reg-ularly expanding collections, and at times, tight budgetaryconsiderations. The author, Merrill Distad (research & special collectionsservices, University of Alberta Library) comprehensively covers thechanges. Includes end notes and a bibliography, but only a name index.

Z987 978-0-692-00481-4SShhoottgguunn oonn mmyy cchheesstt;; mmeemmooiirrss ooff aa LLeewwiiss aanndd CCllaarrkkbbooookk ccoolllleeccttoorr..Wendlick, Roger.12-Gauge Press, ©2009 209 p. $28.00 (pa)This fascinating and well-written autobiography tells the story of a mandetermined to assemble the most complete collection of materials relatedto the Lewis & Clark expedition. Wendlick worked most of his life in theconstruction industry but spent nearly twenty years hunting down mate-rials through book stores, antiquarian book dealers, and auctions. Hemanaged to pay off his colossal debt in 1998 through an arrangementwith Lewis and Clark College and currently maintains a desk there.Contains sixteen photographs in the center of the book, along with twoappendices listing the 1905 World’s Fair memorabilia he acquired andhis printed materials collected from 1980-1998. There is no index.

Z1001 2009-029981 978-1-4051-2412-6AA gguuiiddee ttoo eeaarrllyy pprriinntteedd bbooookkss aanndd mmaannuussccrriippttss..Bland, Mark.Wiley-Blackwell, ©2010 236 p. $99.95Bland (English and creative writing, De Montfort U., the UK) draws onclose familiarity with early manuscripts and printed books in librariesin the UK and the US for this clearly presented, detailed guide.Descriptions of the characteristics, quirks, and construction of individualmanuscripts and incunabulae are used throughout to illustrate the fea-tures of these early books and their study, with chapters on paper, thestructure of documents, producing texts, making variants, and the com-mercial book trade from the 15th-17th centuries. Both new and seasonedresearchers will find this an invaluable resource.

Z1037 2009-049873 978-1-59158-575-6BBeesstt bbooookkss ffoorr cchhiillddrreenn;; pprreesscchhooooll tthhrroouugghh ggrraaddee 66,, 99tthheedd..Barr, Catherine and John T. Gillespie. (Children’s and young adult liter-ature reference)Libraries Unlimited, ©2010 1901 p. $95.00Offering thousands of new reviews, the 9th edition follows the easy-to-use format of earlier versions, grouping the nearly 25,000 titles into cat-egories beginning with young readers, fiction for older readers, thenmoving into topics such as biography, arts, history, and social institu-tions. Entries include indication of age level, essential bibliographiccitation, a short description of the content, and note of review source orsources, including starred review sources. Carefully compiled andexhaustive in scope, this reference is essential for the children’s librarian.Concludes with full author and illustrator, title, and subject/grade levelindexes. Libraries Unlimited is an imprint of ABC-CLIO, LLC.

Z1039 2009-026841 978-0-8389-1022-1SSeerrvviinngg bbooyyss tthhrroouugghh rreeaaddeerrss’’ aaddvviissoorryy..Sullivan, Michael. (ALA readers’ advisory series)Am. Library Association, ©2010 152 p. $48.00 (pa)Sullivan (Simmons College Graduate School of Library and InformationScience), a librarian, storyteller, program director, and author of otherguides on books for boys, provides a readers’ advisory guide that focuseson boy-friendly categories of nonfiction and genre fiction. He outlines dif-ferences between boy and girl readers, types of literature that appeal toboys, how to conduct a readers’ advisory interview, and booktalks forboys of all ages, and provides book lists for many titles of nonfiction,humor, fantasy, science fiction, gothic horror, action, adventure, mystery,sports, picture books, comics, graphic novels, and historical and realisticfiction.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010–297–

Z2015 2009-035075 978-0-8166-6772-7AA bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy ooff EEnngglliisshh eettyymmoollooggyy..Liberman, Anatoly.U. of Minnesota Press, ©2010 949 p. $200.00This volume foreshadows a larger forthcoming project, which will be anew multi-volume etymological dictionary of English, a project, theauthor explains in his introduction, which is rooted in his late-1980sobsession with the word heifer. Liberman (department of German,Scandinavian, and Dutch, U. of Minnesota) describes his endeavors andthe contributions, over many years, of undergraduates working at lowpay as well as those of the broad community of both short-term andlong-term volunteer word-lovers he managed to attract. This bibliographyconsists of two “volumes” (bound as one). The first identifies sources andincludes a journal abbreviation list that extends over 40 pages; a bibli-ography, about 250 pages; and supplementary materials occupyinganother 80 or so pages. The second “volume” is 500 pages in length andcomprises the word list, which features the history of some 13,000English words. For each, a bibliographic entry lists the word origin’sprimary sources— specifically where it was first found in use. There’s noscholar investigating word origins who will not need this reference.

Z5776 2008-928403 978-0-89689-669-7AAnnttiiqquuee ttrraaddeerr ccoolllleeccttiibbllee ccooookkbbooookkss pprriiccee gguuiiddee..Edwards, Patricia and Peter Peckham. (Antique trader series)Krause Publications, ©2008 303 p. $21.99 (pa)The creators of OldCookbooks.com include color cover illustrations, briefdescriptions, value estimates, definitions, author information, and tipsfor collecting general, charity, and product advertising recipe cookbooksfrom the late 19th century to the 1970s. Cookbooks featured include Mrs.Rorer’s Philadelphia Cook Book (1886), Keep Slim and Trim with DominoSugar Menus (1954), The Molly Goldberg Jewish Cookbook (1955-65), andSingers and Swingers in the Kitchen (1967).

Z7164 2009-027645 978-0-8108-7254-7AAnnaarrcchhiisstt ppeerriiooddiiccaallss iinn EEnngglliisshh ppuubblliisshheedd iinn tthhee UUnniitteeddSSttaatteess ((11883333--11995555));; aann aannnnoottaatteedd gguuiiddee..Longa, Ernesto A.Scarecrow Pr., ©2010 321 p. $80.00This is a descriptive bibliography of English-language anarchist period-icals published in the United States between 1833 and 1955, with thedates chosen to allow Longa (law librarianship, U. of New Mexico Schoolof Law) to show the heterogeneity displayed by the approximately 100publications discussed, which include examples of the individualist anar-chist, communist anarchist, pacifist anarchist, lifestyle anarchist, andother traditions. For each periodical, the following information is pro-vided: title, issues examined, subtitle, editor, publication informationincluding location and frequency of publication, contributors, featuresand subjects, preceding and succeeding titles, and an Online ComputerLibrary Center number to facilitate the identification of owning librariesvia a WorldCat search. Also included are excerpts of articles intended toconvey the ideological orientation and rhetorical style of the editors ofand contributors to the periodicals.

Z8520 2009-042755 978-1-59732-069-6HH..PP.. LLoovveeccrraafftt;; aa ccoommpprreehheennssiivvee bbiibblliiooggrraapphhyy..Joshi, S.T.University of Tampa Press, ©2009 682 p. $30.00 (pa)Joshi edited the standard corrected edition of American horror andfantasy writer Lovecraft’s (1890-1937) collected works and several otherprestigious collections, and has written an award-winning biography ofhim. Here he cites and describes in considerable detail works byLovecraft in English and in translation, and works about him. Theprimary bibliography covers books and pamphlets, contributions tobooks and periodicals, works he edited, and apocrypha and miscellanyincluding lost or destroyed works. The secondary bibliography containsnews items and encyclopedias, bibliographies and indexes, books andpamphlets all about him, criticism in books and periodicals, academicpapers, book reviews, periodicals and individual issues of periodicalsdevoted to him, and miscellany.

ZA3075 2009-045950 978-1-55570-693-7CCoollllaabboorraattiivvee iinnffoorrmmaattiioonn lliitteerraaccyy aasssseessssmmeennttss;; ssttrraatteeggiieessffoorr eevvaalluuaattiinngg tteeaacchhiinngg aanndd lleeaarrnniinngg..Title main entry. Ed. by Thomas P. Mackey and Trudi E. Jacobson.Neal-Schuman, ©2010 242 p. $85.00 (pa)Mackey (Center for Distance Learning, Empire State College, SUNY,Saratoga Springs) and Jacobson (user education, U. at Albany, SUNY)bring together eight chapters that explain how faculty and librarians cancollaborate to develop strategies for assessing information literacy inhigher education in the areas of business, social science, education, andthe humanities. Eight faculty-librarian teams from the US, UK, and NewZealand describe qualitative and/or quantitative assessment approachesto information literacy in business and finance, writing courses, and inthe core curriculum, as well as an integrated library component inpolitical science, collaborative curriculum interventions for psychologyand nursing courses, and online assessment. They discuss courses thatincorporated these approaches, challenges, suggestions for overcominginstitutional barriers, and what they learned. Section introductions rec-ommend applications of the assessments in different arenas.

ZA3157 978-81-7000-575-9KKnnoowwlleeddggee mmaannaaggeemmeenntt ffoorr lliibbrraarriiaannss..Dhiman, Anil Kumar and Hemant Sharma.Ess Ess Publications, ©2009 633 p. $93.00For librarians, Dhiman, who works in information science at GurukulKangri U. in India, and Sharma (library and information science, JiwajiU., India) describe knowledge management principles and their use inacademic, public, and special libraries. They introduce the concept, itsorigins, and history, and discuss knowledge creation and its dissemi-nation; knowledge capturing, codification, transfer, and sharing;knowledge management tools, including artificial intelligence and net-works, and data and web mining; leadership roles; implementation;ethical and legal issues; and the role of knowledge management inlibraries. The book contains awkward and incorrect English usagethroughout, showing that it is not the native language of the authors.Distributed in the US by ISBS.

Reference & Research Book News May 2010 –298–